Removed unnecessary and/or TDE-unrelated code.r14.0.7

Signed-off-by: Michele Calgaro <michele.calgaro@yahoo.it>
Signed-off-by: Slávek Banko <slavek.banko@axis.cz>

122 files changed, 0 insertions, 88370 deletions

diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/qt_widgets.pri b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/qt_widgets.pri
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f614fd..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/qt_widgets.pri
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-# Qt widgets module
-
-widgets {
-	WIDGETS_P	= widgets
-
-	HEADERS += $$WIDGETS_H/tqbuttongroup.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqbutton.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_P/tqdialogbuttons_p.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqcheckbox.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqcombobox.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_P/tqwidgetresizehandler_p.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqdial.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqdockarea.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqdockwindow.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqframe.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqgrid.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqgridview.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqgroupbox.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqhbuttongroup.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqheader.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqhgroupbox.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqhbox.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqlabel.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqlcdnumber.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqlineedit.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqlistbox.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqlistview.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqmainwindow.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqmenubar.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqmenudata.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqmultilineedit.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqpopupmenu.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqprogressbar.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqpushbutton.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqradiobutton.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqrangecontrol.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqscrollbar.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqscrollview.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqslider.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqsplashscreen.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqspinbox.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqsplitter.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqstatusbar.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqtabbar.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqsyntaxhighlighter.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_P/tqsyntaxhighlighter_p.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqtabwidget.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_P/tqtitlebar_p.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqtoolbar.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqtoolbox.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqtoolbutton.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqtooltip.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqvalidator.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqvbox.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqvbuttongroup.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqvgroupbox.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqwhatsthis.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqwidgetstack.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqaction.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqdatetimeedit.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqtextview.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqtextbrowser.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqtextedit.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_P/tqwidgetinterface_p.h \
-		  $$WIDGETS_H/tqwidgetplugin.h
-
-	SOURCES += $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqbuttongroup.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqbutton.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqdialogbuttons.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqcheckbox.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqcombobox.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqwidgetresizehandler.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqdial.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqdockarea.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqdockwindow.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqframe.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqgrid.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqgridview.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqgroupbox.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqhbuttongroup.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqheader.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqhgroupbox.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqhbox.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqlabel.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqlcdnumber.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqlineedit.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqlistbox.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqlistview.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqmainwindow.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqmenubar.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqmenudata.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqmultilineedit.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqpopupmenu.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqprogressbar.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqpushbutton.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqradiobutton.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqrangecontrol.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqscrollbar.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqscrollview.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqslider.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqsplashscreen.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqspinbox.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqspinwidget.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqsplitter.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqstatusbar.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqsyntaxhighlighter.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqtabbar.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqtabwidget.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqtitlebar.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqtoolbar.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqtoolbox.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqtoolbutton.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqtooltip.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqvalidator.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqvbox.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqvbuttongroup.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqvgroupbox.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqwhatsthis.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqwidgetstack.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqaction.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqdatetimeedit.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqeffects.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqtextview.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqtextbrowser.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqtextedit.cpp \
-		  $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqwidgetplugin.cpp
-   !embedded:mac:SOURCES += $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqmenubar_mac.cpp
-}
-
-wince-* {
-	SOURCES += $$WIDGETS_CPP/ce/tqcemainwindow.cpp
-	HEADERS += $$WIDGETS_H/ce/tqcemainwindow.h
-
-	SOURCES -= $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqsyntaxhighlighter.cpp \
-		   $$WIDGETS_CPP/tqsplashscreen.cpp
-
-	HEADERS -= $$WIDGETS_H/tqsyntaxhighlighter.h \
-		   $$WIDGETS_H/tqsplashscreen.h
-}
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 6857dda..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2145 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQAction class
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2000-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqaction.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACTION
-
-#include "tqtoolbar.h"
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqaccel.h"
-#include "tqtoolbutton.h"
-#include "tqcombobox.h"
-#include "tqtooltip.h"
-#include "tqwhatsthis.h"
-#include "tqstatusbar.h"
-#include "tqobjectlist.h"
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQAction tqaction.h
-    \brief The TQAction class provides an abstract user interface
-    action that can appear both in menus and tool bars.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \ingroup application
-    \mainclass
-
-    In GUI applications many commands can be invoked via a menu
-    option, a toolbar button and a keyboard accelerator. Since the
-    same action must be performed regardless of how the action was
-    invoked, and since the menu and toolbar should be kept in sync, it
-    is useful to represent a command as an \e action. An action can be
-    added to a menu and a toolbar and will automatically keep them in
-    sync. For example, if the user presses a Bold toolbar button the
-    Bold menu item will automatically be checked.
-
-    A TQAction may contain an icon, a menu text, an accelerator, a
-    status text, a whats this text and a tool tip. Most of these can
-    be set in the constructor. They can also be set independently with
-    setIconSet(), setText(), setMenuText(), setToolTip(),
-    setStatusTip(), setWhatsThis() and setAccel().
-
-    An action may be a toggle action e.g. a Bold toolbar button, or a
-    command action, e.g. 'Open File' to invoke an open file dialog.
-    Toggle actions emit the toggled() signal when their state changes.
-    Both command and toggle actions emit the activated() signal when
-    they are invoked. Use setToggleAction() to set an action's toggled
-    status. To see if an action is a toggle action use
-    isToggleAction(). A toggle action may be "on", isOn() returns
-    TRUE, or "off", isOn() returns FALSE.
-
-    Actions are added to widgets (menus or toolbars) using addTo(),
-    and removed using removeFrom().
-
-    Once a TQAction has been created it should be added to the relevant
-    menu and toolbar and then connected to the slot which will perform
-    the action. For example:
-
-    \quotefile action/application.cpp
-    \skipto TQPixmap( fileopen
-    \printuntil connect
-
-    We create a "File Save" action with a menu text of "&Save" and
-    \e{Ctrl+S} as the keyboard accelerator. We connect the
-    fileSaveAction's activated() signal to our own save() slot. Note
-    that at this point there is no menu or toolbar action, we'll add
-    them next:
-
-    \skipto new TQToolBar
-    \printline
-    \skipto fileSaveAction->addTo
-    \printline
-    \skipto new TQPopupMenu
-    \printuntil insertItem
-    \skipto fileSaveAction->addTo
-    \printline
-
-    We create a toolbar and add our fileSaveAction to it. Similarly we
-    create a menu, add a top-level menu item, and add our
-    fileSaveAction.
-
-    We recommend that actions are created as tqchildren of the window
-    that they are used in. In most cases actions will be tqchildren of
-    the application's main window.
-
-    To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child of a
-    widget that the action is later added to.
-*/
-
-class TQActionPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQActionPrivate(TQAction *act);
-    ~TQActionPrivate();
-    TQIconSet *iconset;
-    TQString text;
-    TQString menutext;
-    TQString tooltip;
-    TQString statustip;
-    TQString whatsthis;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQKeySequence key;
-    TQAccel* accel;
-    int accelid;
-#endif
-    uint enabled : 1;
-    uint visible : 1;
-    uint toggleaction : 1;
-    uint on : 1;
-    uint forceDisabled : 1;
-    uint forceInvisible : 1;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    TQToolTipGroup tipGroup;
-#endif
-    TQActionGroupPrivate* d_group;
-    TQAction *action;
-
-    struct MenuItem {
-	MenuItem():popup(0),id(0){}
-	TQPopupMenu* popup;
-	int id;
-    };
-    // ComboItem is only necessary for actions that are
-    // in dropdown/exclusive actiongroups. The actiongroup
-    // will clean this up
-    struct ComboItem {
-	ComboItem():combo(0), id(0) {}
-	TQComboBox *combo;
-	int id;
-    };
-    TQPtrList<MenuItem> menuitems;
-    TQPtrList<TQToolButton> toolbuttons;
-    TQPtrList<ComboItem> comboitems;
-
-    enum Update { Icons = 1, Visibility = 2, State = 4, EverythingElse = 8 };
-    void update( uint upd = EverythingElse );
-
-    TQString menuText() const;
-    TQString toolTip() const;
-    TQString statusTip() const;
-};
-
-TQActionPrivate::TQActionPrivate(TQAction *act)
-    : iconset( 0 ),
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-      key( 0 ), accel( 0 ), accelid( 0 ),
-#endif
-      enabled( TRUE ), visible( TRUE ), toggleaction( FALSE ), on( FALSE ),
-      forceDisabled( FALSE ), forceInvisible( FALSE ),
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-      tipGroup( 0 ),
-#endif
-      d_group( 0 ), action(act)
-{
-    menuitems.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    comboitems.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    tipGroup.setDelay( FALSE );
-#endif
-}
-
-TQActionPrivate::~TQActionPrivate()
-{
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQToolButton> ittb( toolbuttons );
-    TQToolButton *tb;
-
-    while ( ( tb = ittb.current() ) ) {
-	++ittb;
-	delete tb;
-    }
-
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQActionPrivate::MenuItem> itmi( menuitems);
-    TQActionPrivate::MenuItem* mi;
-    while ( ( mi = itmi.current() ) ) {
-	++itmi;
-	TQPopupMenu* menu = mi->popup;
-	if ( menu->findItem( mi->id ) )
-	    menu->removeItem( mi->id );
-    }
-
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQActionPrivate::ComboItem> itci(comboitems);
-    TQActionPrivate::ComboItem* ci;
-    while ( ( ci = itci.current() ) ) {
-	++itci;
-	TQComboBox* combo = ci->combo;
-	combo->clear();
-	TQActionGroup *group = ::tqqt_cast<TQActionGroup*>(action->parent());
-	TQObjectList *siblings = group ? group->queryList("TQAction") : 0;
-	if (siblings) {
-	    TQObjectListIt it(*siblings);
-	    while (it.current()) {
-		TQAction *sib = ::tqqt_cast<TQAction*>(it.current());
-		++it;
-		sib->removeFrom(combo);
-	    }
-	    it = TQObjectListIt(*siblings);
-	    while (it.current()) {
-		TQAction *sib = ::tqqt_cast<TQAction*>(it.current());
-		++it;
-		if (sib == action)
-		    continue;
-		sib->addTo(combo);
-	    }
-	}
-	delete siblings;
-    }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    delete accel;
-#endif
-    delete iconset;
-}
-
-class TQActionGroupPrivate
-{
-public:
-    uint exclusive: 1;
-    uint dropdown: 1;
-    TQPtrList<TQAction> actions;
-    TQAction* selected;
-    TQAction* separatorAction;
-
-    struct MenuItem {
-	MenuItem():popup(0),id(0){}
-	TQPopupMenu* popup;
-	int id;
-    };
-
-    TQPtrList<TQComboBox> comboboxes;
-    TQPtrList<TQToolButton> menubuttons;
-    TQPtrList<MenuItem> menuitems;
-    TQPtrList<TQPopupMenu> popupmenus;
-
-    void update( const TQActionGroup * );
-};
-
-void TQActionPrivate::update( uint upd )
-{
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<MenuItem> it( menuitems); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	MenuItem* mi = it.current();
-	TQString t = menuText();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-	if ( key )
-	    t += '\t' + TQAccel::keyToString( key );
-#endif
-	if ( upd & State ) {
-	    mi->popup->setItemEnabled( mi->id, enabled );
-	    if ( toggleaction )
-		mi->popup->setItemChecked( mi->id, on );
-	}
-	if ( upd & Visibility )
-	    mi->popup->setItemVisible( mi->id, visible );
-
-	if ( upd & Icons ) {
-	    if ( iconset )
-		mi->popup->changeItem( mi->id, *iconset, t );
-	    else
-		mi->popup->changeItem( mi->id, TQIconSet(), t );
-	}
-	if ( upd & EverythingElse ) {
-	    mi->popup->changeItem( mi->id, t );
-	    if ( !whatsthis.isEmpty() )
-		mi->popup->TQMenuData::setWhatsThis( mi->id, whatsthis );
-	    if ( toggleaction ) {
-		mi->popup->setCheckable( TRUE );
-		mi->popup->setItemChecked( mi->id, on );
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQToolButton> it2(toolbuttons); it2.current(); ++it2 ) {
-	TQToolButton* btn = it2.current();
-	if ( upd & State ) {
-	    btn->setEnabled( enabled );
-	    if ( toggleaction )
-		btn->setOn( on );
-	}
-	if ( upd & Visibility )
-	    visible ? btn->show() : btn->hide();
-	if ( upd & Icons ) {
-	    if ( iconset )
-		btn->setIconSet( *iconset );
-	    else
-		btn->setIconSet( TQIconSet() );
-	}
-	if ( upd & EverythingElse ) {
-	    btn->setToggleButton( toggleaction );
-	    if ( !text.isEmpty() )
-		btn->setTextLabel( text, FALSE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-	    TQToolTip::remove( btn );
-	    TQToolTip::add( btn, toolTip(), &tipGroup, statusTip() );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-	    TQWhatsThis::remove( btn );
-	    if ( !whatsthis.isEmpty() )
-		TQWhatsThis::add( btn, whatsthis );
-#endif
-	}
-    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    if ( accel ) {
-	accel->setEnabled( enabled && visible );
-	if ( !whatsthis.isEmpty() )
-	    accel->setWhatsThis( accelid, whatsthis );
-    }
-#endif
-    // Only used by actiongroup
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<ComboItem> it3( comboitems ); it3.current(); ++it3 ) {
-	ComboItem *ci = it3.current();
-	if ( !ci->combo )
-	    return;
-	if ( iconset )
-	    ci->combo->changeItem( iconset->pixmap(), text, ci->id );
-	else
-	    ci->combo->changeItem( text, ci->id );
-    }
-}
-
-TQString TQActionPrivate::menuText() const
-{
-    if ( menutext.isNull() ) {
-	TQString t(text);
-	t.replace('&', "&&");
-	return t;
-    }
-    return menutext;
-}
-
-TQString TQActionPrivate::toolTip() const
-{
-    if ( tooltip.isNull() ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-	if ( accel )
-	    return text + " (" + TQAccel::keyToString( accel->key( accelid )) + ")";
-#endif
-	return text;
-    }
-    return tooltip;
-}
-
-TQString TQActionPrivate::statusTip() const
-{
-    if ( statustip.isNull() )
-	return toolTip();
-    return statustip;
-}
-
-/*
-  internal: guesses a descriptive text from a menu text
- */
-static TQString qt_stripMenuText( TQString s )
-{
-    s.remove( TQString::tqfromLatin1("...") );
-    s.remove( TQChar('&' ) );
-    return s.stripWhiteSpace();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an action called \a name with parent \a parent.
-
-    If \a parent is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into
-    \a parent.
-
-    For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be
-    a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
-    \warning To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child
-    of a widget that the action is later added to.
-*/
-TQAction::TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name )
-    : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name )
-{
-    d = new TQActionPrivate(this);
-    init();
-}
-
-/*! \obsolete
-    Constructs an action called \a name with parent \a parent.
-
-    If \a toggle is TRUE the action will be a toggle action, otherwise
-    it will be a command action.
-
-    If \a parent is a TQActionGroup, the new action inserts itself into
-    \a parent.
-
-    For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be
-    a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-*/
-TQAction::TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name, bool toggle )
-    : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name )
-{
-    d = new TQActionPrivate(this);
-    d->toggleaction = toggle;
-    init();
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-
-/*!
-    This constructor creates an action with the following properties:
-    the icon or iconset \a icon, the menu text \a menuText and
-    keyboard accelerator \a accel. It is a child of \a parent and
-    called \a name.
-
-    If \a parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes
-    a member of it.
-
-    For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be
-    a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
-    The action uses a stripped version of \a menuText (e.g. "\&Menu
-    Option..." becomes "Menu Option") as descriptive text for
-    toolbuttons. You can override this by setting a specific
-    description with setText(). The same text and \a accel will be
-    used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide text for
-    these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
-
-    Call setToggleAction(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action.
-
-    \warning To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child
-    of a widget that the action is later added to.
-*/
-TQAction::TQAction( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel,
-		  TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name )
-    : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name )
-{
-    d = new TQActionPrivate(this);
-    if ( !icon.isNull() )
-	setIconSet( icon );
-    d->text = qt_stripMenuText( menuText );
-    d->menutext = menuText;
-    setAccel( accel );
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    This constructor results in an icon-less action with the the menu
-    text \a menuText and keyboard accelerator \a accel. It is a child
-    of \a parent and called \a name.
-
-    If  \a parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes
-    a member of it.
-
-    For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be
-    a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
-    The action uses a stripped version of \a menuText (e.g. "\&Menu
-    Option..." becomes "Menu Option") as descriptive text for
-    toolbuttons. You can override this by setting a specific
-    description with setText(). The same text and \a accel will be
-    used for tool tips and status tips unless you provide text for
-    these using setToolTip() and setStatusTip().
-
-    Call setToggleAction(TRUE) to make the action a toggle action.
-
-    \warning To prevent recursion, don't create an action as a child
-    of a widget that the action is later added to.
-*/
-TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel,
-		  TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name )
-    : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name )
-{
-    d = new TQActionPrivate(this);
-    d->text = qt_stripMenuText( menuText );
-    d->menutext = menuText;
-    setAccel( accel );
-    init();
-}
-
-/*! \obsolete
-    This constructor creates an action with the following properties:
-    the description \a text, the icon or iconset \a icon, the menu
-    text \a menuText and keyboard accelerator \a accel. It is a child
-    of \a parent and called \a name. If \a toggle is TRUE the action
-    will be a toggle action, otherwise it will be a command action.
-
-    If  \a parent is a TQActionGroup, the action automatically becomes
-    a member of it.
-
-    For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be
-    a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
-    The \a text and \a accel will be used for tool tips and status
-    tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip()
-    and setStatusTip().
-*/
-TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name, bool toggle )
-    : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name )
-{
-    d = new TQActionPrivate(this);
-    d->toggleaction = toggle;
-    if ( !icon.isNull() )
-	setIconSet( icon );
-
-    d->text = text;
-    d->menutext = menuText;
-    setAccel( accel );
-    init();
-}
-
-/*! \obsolete
-    This constructor results in an icon-less action with the
-    description \a text, the menu text \a menuText and the keyboard
-    accelerator \a accel. Its parent is \a parent and it is called \a
-    name. If \a toggle is TRUE the action will be a toggle action,
-    otherwise it will be a command action.
-
-    The action automatically becomes a member of \a parent if \a
-    parent is a TQActionGroup.
-
-    For accelerators and status tips to work, \a parent must either be
-    a widget, or an action group whose parent is a widget.
-
-    The \a text and \a accel will be used for tool tips and status
-    tips unless you provide specific text for these using setToolTip()
-    and setStatusTip().
-*/
-TQAction::TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name, bool toggle )
-    : TQObject( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name )
-{
-    d = new TQActionPrivate(this);
-    d->toggleaction = toggle;
-    d->text = text;
-    d->menutext = menuText;
-    setAccel( accel );
-    init();
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-void TQAction::init()
-{
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQActionGroup*>(parent()) )
-	((TQActionGroup*) parent())->add( this );		// insert into action group
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQAction::~TQAction()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::iconSet
-    \brief  the action's icon
-
-    The icon is used as the tool button icon and in the menu to the
-    left of the menu text. There is no default icon.
-
-    If a null icon (TQIconSet::isNull() is passed into this function,
-    the icon of the action is cleared.
-
-    (See the action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp example.)
-
-*/
-void TQAction::setIconSet( const TQIconSet& icon )
-{
-    register TQIconSet *i = d->iconset;
-    if ( !icon.isNull() )
-	d->iconset = new TQIconSet( icon );
-    else
-	d->iconset = 0;
-    delete i;
-    d->update( TQActionPrivate::Icons );
-}
-
-TQIconSet TQAction::iconSet() const
-{
-    if ( d->iconset )
-	return *d->iconset;
-    return TQIconSet();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::text
-    \brief the action's descriptive text
-
-    If \l TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel is TRUE, the text appears as a
-    label in the relevant tool button. It also serves as the default
-    text in menus and tool tips if these have not been specifically
-    defined. There is no default text.
-
-    \sa setMenuText() setToolTip() setStatusTip()
-*/
-void TQAction::setText( const TQString& text )
-{
-    d->text = text;
-    d->update();
-}
-
-TQString TQAction::text() const
-{
-    return d->text;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::menuText
-    \brief the action's menu text
-
-    If the action is added to a menu the menu option will consist of
-    the icon (if there is one), the menu text and the accelerator (if
-    there is one). If the menu text is not explicitly set in the
-    constructor or by using setMenuText() the action's description
-    text will be used as the menu text. There is no default menu text.
-
-    \sa text
-*/
-void TQAction::setMenuText( const TQString& text )
-{
-    if ( d->menutext == text )
-	return;
-
-    d->menutext = text;
-    d->update();
-}
-
-TQString TQAction::menuText() const
-{
-    return d->menuText();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::toolTip
-    \brief the action's tool tip
-
-    This text is used for the tool tip. If no status tip has been set
-    the tool tip will be used for the status tip.
-
-    If no tool tip is specified the action's text is used, and if that
-    hasn't been specified the description text is used as the tool tip
-    text.
-
-    There is no default tool tip text.
-
-    \sa setStatusTip() setAccel()
-*/
-void TQAction::setToolTip( const TQString& tip )
-{
-    if ( d->tooltip == tip )
-	return;
-
-    d->tooltip = tip;
-    d->update();
-}
-
-TQString TQAction::toolTip() const
-{
-    return d->toolTip();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::statusTip
-    \brief the action's status tip
-
-    The statusTip is displayed on all status bars that this action's
-    toplevel parent widget provides.
-
-    If no status tip is defined, the action uses the tool tip text.
-
-    There is no default statusTip text.
-
-    \sa setStatusTip() setToolTip()
-*/
-//#### Please reimp for TQActionGroup!
-//#### For consistency reasons even action groups should show
-//#### status tips (as they already do with tool tips)
-//#### Please change TQActionGroup class doc appropriately after
-//#### reimplementation.
-void TQAction::setStatusTip( const TQString& tip )
-{
-    if ( d->statustip == tip )
-	return;
-
-    d->statustip = tip;
-    d->update();
-}
-
-TQString TQAction::statusTip() const
-{
-    return d->statusTip();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::whatsThis
-    \brief the action's "What's This?" help text
-
-    The whats this text is used to provide a brief description of the
-    action. The text may contain rich text (HTML-like tags -- see
-    TQStyleSheet for the list of supported tags). There is no default
-    "What's This" text.
-
-    \sa TQWhatsThis
-*/
-void TQAction::setWhatsThis( const TQString& whatsThis )
-{
-    if ( d->whatsthis == whatsThis )
-	return;
-    d->whatsthis = whatsThis;
-    d->update();
-}
-
-TQString TQAction::whatsThis() const
-{
-    return d->whatsthis;
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::accel
-    \brief the action's accelerator key
-
-    The keycodes can be found in \l TQt::Key and \l TQt::Modifier. There
-    is no default accelerator key.
-*/
-//#### Please reimp for TQActionGroup!
-//#### For consistency reasons even TQActionGroups should respond to
-//#### their accelerators and e.g. open the relevant submenu.
-//#### Please change appropriate TQActionGroup class doc after
-//#### reimplementation.
-void TQAction::setAccel( const TQKeySequence& key )
-{
-    if ( d->key == key )
-	return;
-
-    d->key = key;
-    delete d->accel;
-    d->accel = 0;
-
-    if ( !(int)key ) {
-	d->update();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    TQObject* p = parent();
-    while ( p && !p->isWidgetType() ) {
-	p = p->parent();
-    }
-    if ( p ) {
-	d->accel = new TQAccel( (TQWidget*)p, this, "qt_action_accel" );
-	d->accelid = d->accel->insertItem( d->key );
-	d->accel->connectItem( d->accelid, this, TQT_SLOT( internalActivation() ) );
-    }
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_STATE)
-    else
-	qWarning( "TQAction::setAccel() (%s) requires widget in parent chain", name() );
-#endif
-    d->update();
-}
-
-
-TQKeySequence TQAction::accel() const
-{
-    return d->key;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::toggleAction
-    \brief whether the action is a toggle action
-
-    A toggle action is one which has an on/off state. For example a
-    Bold toolbar button is either on or off. An action which is not a
-    toggle action is a command action; a command action is simply
-    executed, e.g. file save. This property's default is FALSE.
-
-    In some situations, the state of one toggle action should depend
-    on the state of others. For example, "Left Align", "Center" and
-    "Right Align" toggle actions are mutually exclusive. To achieve
-    exclusive toggling, add the relevant toggle actions to a
-    TQActionGroup with the \l TQActionGroup::exclusive property set to
-    TRUE.
-*/
-void TQAction::setToggleAction( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( enable == (bool)d->toggleaction )
-	return;
-
-    if ( !enable )
-	d->on = FALSE;
-
-    d->toggleaction = enable;
-    d->update();
-}
-
-bool TQAction::isToggleAction() const
-{
-    return d->toggleaction;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Activates the action and executes all connected Q_SLOTS.
-    This only works for actions that are not toggle action.
-
-    \sa toggle()
-*/
-void TQAction::activate()
-{
-    if ( isToggleAction() ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_STATE)
-	qWarning( "TQAction::%s() (%s) Toggle actions "
-		  "can not be activated", "activate", name() );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-    emit activated();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Toggles the state of a toggle action.
-
-    \sa on, activate(), toggled(), isToggleAction()
-*/
-void TQAction::toggle()
-{
-    if ( !isToggleAction() ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_STATE)
-	qWarning( "TQAction::%s() (%s) Only toggle actions "
-		  "can be switched", "toggle", name() );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-    setOn( !isOn() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::on
-    \brief whether a toggle action is on
-
-    This property is always on (TRUE) for command actions and
-    \l{TQActionGroup}s; setOn() has no effect on them. For action's
-    where isToggleAction() is TRUE, this property's default value is
-    off (FALSE).
-
-    \sa toggleAction
-*/
-void TQAction::setOn( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( !isToggleAction() ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_STATE)
-	if ( enable )
-	    qWarning( "TQAction::%s() (%s) Only toggle actions "
-		      "can be switched", "setOn", name() );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( enable == (bool)d->on )
-	return;
-    d->on = enable;
-    d->update( TQActionPrivate::State );
-    emit toggled( enable );
-}
-
-bool TQAction::isOn() const
-{
-    return d->on;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::enabled
-    \brief whether the action is enabled
-
-    Disabled actions can't be chosen by the user. They don't disappear
-    from the menu/tool bar but are displayed in a way which indicates
-    that they are unavailable, e.g. they might be displayed grayed
-    out.
-
-    What's this? help on disabled actions is still available provided
-    the \l TQAction::whatsThis property is set.
-*/
-void TQAction::setEnabled( bool enable )
-{
-    d->forceDisabled = !enable;
-
-    if ( (bool)d->enabled == enable )
-	return;
-
-    d->enabled = enable;
-    d->update( TQActionPrivate::State );
-}
-
-bool TQAction::isEnabled() const
-{
-    return d->enabled;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Disables the action if \a disable is TRUE; otherwise
-    enables the action.
-
-    See the \l enabled documentation for more information.
-*/
-void TQAction::setDisabled( bool disable )
-{
-    setEnabled( !disable );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQAction::visible
-    \brief whether the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and toolbars)
-
-    If \e visible is TRUE the action can be seen (e.g. in menus and
-    toolbars) and chosen by the user; if \e visible is FALSE the
-    action cannot be seen or chosen by the user.
-
-    Actions which are not visible are \e not grayed out; they do not
-    appear at all.
-*/
-void TQAction::tqsetVisible( bool visible )
-{
-    d->forceInvisible = !visible;
-
-    if ( (bool)d->visible == visible )
-	return;
-    d->visible = visible;
-    d->update( TQActionPrivate::Visibility );
-#if (TQT_VERSION-0 >= 0x040000)
-#error "TQAction::tqsetVisible function wants to be virtual. Also add virtual change() function"
-#endif
-    if ( d->d_group ) //### this function wants to be virtual in 4.0
-	d->d_group->update( (TQActionGroup*) this );
-}
-
-/*
-    Returns TRUE if the action is visible (e.g. in menus and
-    toolbars); otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-bool TQAction::isVisible() const
-{
-    return d->visible;
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-*/
-void TQAction::internalActivation()
-{
-    if ( isToggleAction() )
-	setOn( !isOn() );
-    emit activated();
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-*/
-void TQAction::toolButtonToggled( bool on )
-{
-    if ( !isToggleAction() )
-	return;
-    setOn( on );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Adds this action to widget \a w.
-
-    Currently actions may be added to TQToolBar and TQPopupMenu widgets.
-
-    An action added to a tool bar is automatically displayed as a tool
-    button; an action added to a pop up menu appears as a menu option.
-
-    addTo() returns TRUE if the action was added successfully and
-    FALSE otherwise. (If \a w is not a TQToolBar or TQPopupMenu the
-    action will not be added and FALSE will be returned.)
-
-    \sa removeFrom()
-*/
-bool TQAction::addTo( TQWidget* w )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(w) ) {
-	if ( !qstrcmp( name(), "qt_separator_action" ) ) {
-	    ((TQToolBar*)w)->addSeparator();
-	} else {
-	    TQCString bname = name() + TQCString( "_action_button" );
-	    TQToolButton* btn = new TQToolButton( (TQToolBar*) w, bname );
-	    addedTo( btn, w );
-	    btn->setToggleButton( d->toggleaction );
-	    d->toolbuttons.append( btn );
-	    if ( d->iconset )
-		btn->setIconSet( *d->iconset );
-	    d->update( TQActionPrivate::State | TQActionPrivate::Visibility | TQActionPrivate::EverythingElse ) ;
-	    connect( btn, TQT_SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, TQT_SIGNAL( activated() ) );
-	    connect( btn, TQT_SIGNAL( toggled(bool) ), this, TQT_SLOT( toolButtonToggled(bool) ) );
-	    connect( btn, TQT_SIGNAL( destroyed() ), this, TQT_SLOT( objectDestroyed() ) );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-	    connect( &(d->tipGroup), TQT_SIGNAL(showTip(const TQString&)), this, TQT_SLOT(showtqStatusText(const TQString&)) );
-	    connect( &(d->tipGroup), TQT_SIGNAL(removeTip()), this, TQT_SLOT(cleartqStatusText()) );
-#endif
-	}
-    } else
-#endif
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(w) ) {
-	TQActionPrivate::MenuItem* mi = new TQActionPrivate::MenuItem;
-	mi->popup = (TQPopupMenu*) w;
-	TQIconSet* diconset = d->iconset;
-	if ( !qstrcmp( name(), "qt_separator_action" ) )
-	    mi->id = ((TQPopupMenu*)w)->insertSeparator();
-	else if ( diconset )
-	    mi->id = mi->popup->insertItem( *diconset, TQString::tqfromLatin1("") );
-	else
-	    mi->id = mi->popup->insertItem( TQString::tqfromLatin1("") );
-	addedTo( mi->popup->indexOf( mi->id ), mi->popup );
-	mi->popup->connectItem( mi->id, this, TQT_SLOT(internalActivation()) );
-	d->menuitems.append( mi );
-	d->update( TQActionPrivate::State | TQActionPrivate::Visibility | TQActionPrivate::EverythingElse ) ;
-	w->tqtopLevelWidget()->className();
-	connect( mi->popup, TQT_SIGNAL(highlighted(int)), this, TQT_SLOT(menutqStatusText(int)) );
-	connect( mi->popup, TQT_SIGNAL(aboutToHide()), this, TQT_SLOT(cleartqStatusText()) );
-	connect( mi->popup, TQT_SIGNAL( destroyed() ), this, TQT_SLOT( objectDestroyed() ) );
-    // Makes only sense when called by TQActionGroup::addTo
-    } else if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQComboBox*>(w) ) {
-	TQActionPrivate::ComboItem *ci = new TQActionPrivate::ComboItem;
-	ci->combo = (TQComboBox*)w;
-	connect( ci->combo, TQT_SIGNAL( destroyed() ), this, TQT_SLOT( objectDestroyed() ) );
-	ci->id = ci->combo->count();
-	if ( qstrcmp( name(), "qt_separator_action" ) ) {
-	    if ( d->iconset )
-		ci->combo->insertItem( d->iconset->pixmap(), text() );
-	    else
-		ci->combo->insertItem( text() );
-	} else {
-	    ci->id = -1;
-	}
-	d->comboitems.append( ci );
-
-	d->update( TQActionPrivate::State | TQActionPrivate::EverythingElse );
-    } else {
-	qWarning( "TQAction::addTo(), unknown object" );
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    This function is called from the addTo() function when it has
-    created a widget (\a actionWidget) for the action in the \a
-    container.
-*/
-
-void TQAction::addedTo( TQWidget *actionWidget, TQWidget *container )
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED( actionWidget );
-    TQ_UNUSED( container );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    This function is called from the addTo() function when it has
-    created a menu item at the index position \a index in the popup
-    menu \a menu.
-*/
-
-void TQAction::addedTo( int index, TQPopupMenu *menu )
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED( index );
-    TQ_UNUSED( menu );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the status message to \a text
-*/
-void TQAction::showtqStatusText( const TQString& text )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STATUSBAR
-    // find out whether we are clearing the status bar by the popup that actually set the text
-    static TQPopupMenu *lastmenu = 0;
-    TQObject *s = (TQObject*)sender();
-    if ( s ) {
-	TQPopupMenu *menu = (TQPopupMenu*)s->tqqt_cast( "TQPopupMenu" );
-	if ( menu && !!text )
-	    lastmenu = menu;
-	else if ( menu && text.isEmpty() ) {
-	    if ( lastmenu && menu != lastmenu )
-		return;
-	    lastmenu = 0;
-	}
-    }
-
-    TQObject* par = parent();
-    TQObject* lpar = 0;
-    TQStatusBar *bar = 0;
-    while ( par && !bar ) {
-	lpar = par;
-	bar = (TQStatusBar*)par->child( 0, "TQStatusBar", FALSE );
-	par = par->parent();
-    }
-    if ( !bar && lpar ) {
-	TQObjectList *l = lpar->queryList( "TQStatusBar" );
-	if ( !l )
-	    return;
-	// #### hopefully the last one is the one of the mainwindow...
-	bar = (TQStatusBar*)l->last();
-	delete l;
-    }
-    if ( bar ) {
-	if ( text.isEmpty() )
-	    bar->clear();
-	else
-	    bar->message( text );
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the status message to the menu item's status text, or to the
-    tooltip, if there is no status text.
-*/
-void TQAction::menutqStatusText( int id )
-{
-    static int lastId = 0;
-    TQString text;
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQActionPrivate::MenuItem> it( d->menuitems);
-    TQActionPrivate::MenuItem* mi;
-    while ( ( mi = it.current() ) ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( mi->id == id ) {
-	    text = statusTip();
-	    break;
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( !text.isEmpty() )
-	showtqStatusText( text );
-    else if ( id != lastId )
-	cleartqStatusText();
-    lastId = id;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Clears the status text.
-*/
-void TQAction::cleartqStatusText()
-{
-    if (!statusTip().isEmpty())
-	showtqStatusText( TQString::null );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the action from widget \a w.
-
-    Returns TRUE if the action was removed successfully; otherwise
-    returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa addTo()
-*/
-bool TQAction::removeFrom( TQWidget* w )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(w) ) {
-	TQPtrListIterator<TQToolButton> it( d->toolbuttons);
-	TQToolButton* btn;
-	while ( ( btn = it.current() ) ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    if ( btn->parentWidget() == w ) {
-		d->toolbuttons.removeRef( btn );
-		disconnect( btn, TQT_SIGNAL( destroyed() ), this, TQT_SLOT( objectDestroyed() ) );
-		delete btn;
-		// no need to disconnect from statusbar
-	    }
-	}
-    } else
-#endif
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(w) ) {
-	TQPtrListIterator<TQActionPrivate::MenuItem> it( d->menuitems);
-	TQActionPrivate::MenuItem* mi;
-	while ( ( mi = it.current() ) ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    if ( mi->popup == w ) {
-		disconnect( mi->popup, TQT_SIGNAL(highlighted(int)), this, TQT_SLOT(menutqStatusText(int)) );
-		disconnect( mi->popup, TQT_SIGNAL(aboutToHide()), this, TQT_SLOT(cleartqStatusText()) );
-		disconnect( mi->popup, TQT_SIGNAL( destroyed() ), this, TQT_SLOT( objectDestroyed() ) );
-		mi->popup->removeItem( mi->id );
-		d->menuitems.removeRef( mi );
-	    }
-	}
-    } else if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQComboBox*>(w) ) {
-	TQPtrListIterator<TQActionPrivate::ComboItem> it( d->comboitems );
-	TQActionPrivate::ComboItem *ci;
-	while ( ( ci = it.current() ) ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    if ( ci->combo == w ) {
-		disconnect( ci->combo, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(objectDestroyed()) );
-		d->comboitems.removeRef( ci );
-	    }
-	}
-    } else {
-	qWarning( "TQAction::removeFrom(), unknown object" );
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-void TQAction::objectDestroyed()
-{
-    const TQObject* obj = TQT_TQOBJECT(sender());
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQActionPrivate::MenuItem> it( d->menuitems );
-    TQActionPrivate::MenuItem* mi;
-    while ( ( mi = it.current() ) ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( TQT_TQOBJECT(mi->popup) == obj )
-	    d->menuitems.removeRef( mi );
-    }
-    TQActionPrivate::ComboItem *ci;
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQActionPrivate::ComboItem> it2( d->comboitems );
-    while ( ( ci = it2.current() ) ) {
-	++it2;
-	if ( TQT_TQOBJECT(ci->combo) == obj )
-	    d->comboitems.removeRef( ci );
-    }
-    d->toolbuttons.removeRef( (TQToolButton*) obj );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQAction::activated()
-
-    This signal is emitted when an action is activated by the user,
-    e.g. when the user clicks a menu option or a toolbar button or
-    presses an action's accelerator key combination.
-
-    Connect to this signal for command actions. Connect to the
-    toggled() signal for toggle actions.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQAction::toggled(bool on)
-
-    This signal is emitted when a toggle action changes state; command
-    actions and \l{TQActionGroup}s don't emit toggled().
-
-    The \a on argument denotes the new state: If \a on is TRUE the
-    toggle action is switched on, and if \a on is FALSE the toggle
-    action is switched off.
-
-    To trigger a user command depending on whether a toggle action has
-    been switched on or off connect it to a slot that takes a bool to
-    indicate the state, e.g.
-
-    \quotefile action/toggleaction/toggleaction.cpp
-    \skipto TQMainWindow * window
-    \printline TQMainWindow * window
-    \skipto labelonoffaction
-    \printline labelonoffaction
-    \skipto connect
-    \printuntil setUsesTextLabel
-
-    \sa activated() setToggleAction() setOn()
-*/
-
-void TQActionGroupPrivate::update( const TQActionGroup* that )
-{
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( actions ); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	if ( that->isEnabled() && !it.current()->d->forceDisabled ) {
-	    it.current()->setEnabled( TRUE );
-	} else if ( !that->isEnabled() && it.current()->isEnabled() ) {
-	    it.current()->setEnabled( FALSE );
-	    it.current()->d->forceDisabled = FALSE;
-	}
-	if ( that->isVisible() && !it.current()->d->forceInvisible ) {
-	    it.current()->tqsetVisible( TRUE );
-	} else if ( !that->isVisible() && it.current()->isVisible() ) {
-	    it.current()->tqsetVisible( FALSE );
-	    it.current()->d->forceInvisible = FALSE;
-	}
-    }
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQComboBox> cb( comboboxes ); cb.current(); ++cb ) {
-	TQComboBox *combobox = cb.current();
-	combobox->setEnabled( that->isEnabled() );
-	combobox->setShown( that->isVisible() );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-	TQToolTip::remove( combobox );
-	if ( !!that->toolTip() )
-	    TQToolTip::add( combobox, that->toolTip() );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-	TQWhatsThis::remove( combobox );
-	if ( !!that->whatsThis() )
-	    TQWhatsThis::add( combobox, that->whatsThis() );
-#endif
-
-    }
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQToolButton> mb( menubuttons ); mb.current(); ++mb ) {
-	TQToolButton *button = mb.current();
-	button->setEnabled( that->isEnabled() );
-	button->setShown( that->isVisible() );
-
-	if ( !that->text().isNull() )
-	    button->setTextLabel( that->text() );
-	if ( !that->iconSet().isNull() )
-	    button->setIconSet( that->iconSet() );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-	TQToolTip::remove( mb.current() );
-	if ( !!that->toolTip() )
-	    TQToolTip::add( button, that->toolTip() );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-	TQWhatsThis::remove( button );
-	if ( !!that->whatsThis() )
-	    TQWhatsThis::add( button, that->whatsThis() );
-#endif
-    }
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem> pu( menuitems ); pu.current(); ++pu ) {
-	TQWidget* parent = pu.current()->popup->parentWidget();
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(parent) ) {
-	    TQPopupMenu* ppopup = (TQPopupMenu*)parent;
-	    ppopup->setItemEnabled( pu.current()->id, that->isEnabled() );
-	    ppopup->setItemVisible( pu.current()->id, that->isVisible() );
-	} else {
-	    pu.current()->popup->setEnabled( that->isEnabled() );
-	}
-    }
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQPopupMenu> pm( popupmenus ); pm.current(); ++pm ) {
-	TQPopupMenu *popup = pm.current();
-	TQPopupMenu *parent = ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(popup->parentWidget());
-	if ( !parent )
-	    continue;
-
-	int index;
-	parent->findPopup( popup, &index );
-	int id = parent->idAt( index );
-	if ( !that->iconSet().isNull() )
-	    parent->changeItem( id, that->iconSet(), that->menuText() );
-	else
-	    parent->changeItem( id, that->menuText() );
-	parent->setItemEnabled( id, that->isEnabled() );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-	parent->setAccel( that->accel(), id );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQActionGroup tqaction.h
-    \brief The TQActionGroup class groups actions together.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \ingroup application
-
-    In some situations it is useful to group actions together. For
-    example, if you have a left justify action, a right justify action
-    and a center action, only one of these actions should be active at
-    any one time, and one simple way of achieving this is to group the
-    actions together in an action group.
-
-    An action group can also be added to a menu or a toolbar as a
-    single unit, with all the actions within the action group
-    appearing as separate menu options and toolbar buttons.
-
-    Here's an example from examples/textedit:
-    \quotefile textedit/textedit.cpp
-    \skipto TQActionGroup
-    \printuntil connect
-
-    Here we create a new action group. Since the action group is exclusive
-    by default, only one of the actions in the group is ever active at any
-    one time. We then connect the group's selected() signal to our
-    textAlign() slot.
-
-    \printuntil actionAlignLeft->setToggleAction
-
-    We create a left align action, add it to the toolbar and the menu
-    and make it a toggle action. We create center and right align
-    actions in exactly the same way.
-
-    \omit
-    A TQActionGroup emits an activated() signal when one of its actions
-    is activated.
-    \endomit
-    The actions in an action group emit their activated() (and for
-    toggle actions, toggled()) Q_SIGNALS as usual.
-
-    The setExclusive() function is used to ensure that only one action
-    is active at any one time: it should be used with actions which
-    have their \c toggleAction set to TRUE.
-
-    Action group actions appear as individual menu options and toolbar
-    buttons. For exclusive action groups use setUsesDropDown() to
-    display the actions in a subwidget of any widget the action group
-    is added to. For example, the actions would appear in a combobox
-    in a toolbar or as a submenu in a menu.
-
-    Actions can be added to an action group using add(), but normally
-    they are added by creating the action with the action group as
-    parent. Actions can have separators dividing them using
-    addSeparator(). Action groups are added to widgets with addTo().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an action group called \a name, with parent \a parent.
-
-    The action group is exclusive by default. Call setExclusive(FALSE) to make
-    the action group non-exclusive.
-*/
-TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name )
-    : TQAction( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name )
-{
-    d = new TQActionGroupPrivate;
-    d->exclusive = TRUE;
-    d->dropdown = FALSE;
-    d->selected = 0;
-    d->separatorAction = 0;
-    TQAction::d->d_group = d;
-
-    connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(selected(TQAction*)), TQT_SLOT(internalToggle(TQAction*)) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an action group called \a name, with parent \a parent.
-
-    If \a exclusive is TRUE only one toggle action in the group will
-    ever be active.
-
-    \sa exclusive
-*/
-TQActionGroup::TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name, bool exclusive )
-    : TQAction( TQT_TQOBJECT(parent), name )
-{
-    d = new TQActionGroupPrivate;
-    d->exclusive = exclusive;
-    d->dropdown = FALSE;
-    d->selected = 0;
-    d->separatorAction = 0;
-    TQAction::d->d_group = d;
-
-    connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(selected(TQAction*)), TQT_SLOT(internalToggle(TQAction*)) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQActionGroup::~TQActionGroup()
-{
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem> mit( d->menuitems );
-    while ( mit.current() ) {
-	TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem *mi = mit.current();
-	++mit;
-	if ( mi->popup )
-	    mi->popup->disconnect( TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(objectDestroyed()) );
-    }
-
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQComboBox> cbit( d->comboboxes );
-    while ( cbit.current() ) {
-	TQComboBox *cb = cbit.current();
-	++cbit;
-	cb->disconnect(  TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(objectDestroyed()) );
-    }
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQToolButton> mbit( d->menubuttons );
-    while ( mbit.current() ) {
-	TQToolButton *mb = mbit.current();
-	++mbit;
-	mb->disconnect(  TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(objectDestroyed()) );
-    }
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQPopupMenu> pmit( d->popupmenus );
-    while ( pmit.current() ) {
-	TQPopupMenu *pm = pmit.current();
-	++pmit;
-	pm->disconnect(  TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(objectDestroyed()) );
-    }
-
-    delete d->separatorAction;
-    d->menubuttons.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    d->comboboxes.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    d->menuitems.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    d->popupmenus.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    delete d;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQActionGroup::exclusive
-    \brief whether the action group does exclusive toggling
-
-    If exclusive is TRUE only one toggle action in the action group
-    can ever be active at any one time. If the user chooses another
-    toggle action in the group the one they chose becomes active and
-    the one that was active becomes inactive.
-
-    \sa TQAction::toggleAction
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::setExclusive( bool enable )
-{
-    d->exclusive = enable;
-}
-
-bool TQActionGroup::isExclusive() const
-{
-    return d->exclusive;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQActionGroup::usesDropDown
-    \brief whether the group's actions are displayed in a subwidget of
-    the widgets the action group is added to
-
-    Exclusive action groups added to a toolbar display their actions
-    in a combobox with the action's \l TQAction::text and \l
-    TQAction::iconSet properties shown. Non-exclusive groups are
-    represented by a tool button showing their \l TQAction::iconSet and
-    -- depending on \l TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel() -- text()
-    property.
-
-    In a popup menu the member actions are displayed in a submenu.
-
-    Changing usesDropDown only affects \e subsequent calls to addTo().
-
-    Note that setting this property for actions in a combobox causes
-    calls to their \link TQAction::tqsetVisible()\endlink,
-    \link TQAction::setEnabled()\endlink, and
-    \link TQAction::setDisabled()\endlink functions to have no effect.
-
-    This property's default is FALSE.
-
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::setUsesDropDown( bool enable )
-{
-    d->dropdown = enable;
-}
-
-bool TQActionGroup::usesDropDown() const
-{
-    return d->dropdown;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Adds action \a action to this group.
-
-    Normally an action is added to a group by creating it with the
-    group as parent, so this function is not usually used.
-
-    \sa addTo()
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::add( TQAction* action )
-{
-    if ( d->actions.containsRef( action ) )
-	return;
-
-    d->actions.append( action );
-
-    if ( action->whatsThis().isNull() )
-	action->setWhatsThis( whatsThis() );
-    if ( action->toolTip().isNull() )
-	action->setToolTip( toolTip() );
-
-    if (!action->d->forceDisabled)
-	action->d->enabled = isEnabled();
-    if (!action->d->forceInvisible)
-	action->d->visible = isVisible();
-
-    connect( action, TQT_SIGNAL( destroyed() ), this, TQT_SLOT( childDestroyed() ) );
-    connect( action, TQT_SIGNAL( activated() ), this, TQT_SIGNAL( activated() ) );
-    connect( action, TQT_SIGNAL( toggled(bool) ), this, TQT_SLOT( childToggled(bool) ) );
-
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQComboBox> cb( d->comboboxes ); cb.current(); ++cb ) {
-	action->addTo( cb.current() );
-    }
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQToolButton> mb( d->menubuttons ); mb.current(); ++mb ) {
-	TQPopupMenu* popup = mb.current()->popup();
-	if ( !popup )
-	    continue;
-	action->addTo( popup );
-    }
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem> mi( d->menuitems ); mi.current(); ++mi ) {
-	TQPopupMenu* popup = mi.current()->popup;
-	if ( !popup )
-	    continue;
-	action->addTo( popup );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Adds a separator to the group.
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::addSeparator()
-{
-    if ( !d->separatorAction )
-	d->separatorAction = new TQAction( 0, "qt_separator_action" );
-    d->actions.append( d->separatorAction );
-}
-
-
-/*! \fn void TQActionGroup::insert( TQAction* a )
-
-  \obsolete
-
-  Use add() instead, or better still create the action with the action
-  group as its parent.
- */
-
-/*!
-    Adds this action group to the widget \a w.
-
-    If isExclusive() is FALSE or usesDropDown() is FALSE, the actions within
-    the group are added to the widget individually. For example, if the widget
-    is a menu, the actions will appear as individual menu options, and
-    if the widget is a toolbar, the actions will appear as toolbar buttons.
-
-    If both isExclusive() and usesDropDown() are TRUE, the actions
-    are presented either in a combobox (if \a w is a toolbar) or in a
-    submenu (if \a w is a menu).
-
-    All actions should be added to the action group \e before the
-    action group is added to the widget. If actions are added to the
-    action group \e after the action group has been added to the
-    widget these later actions will \e not appear.
-
-    \sa setExclusive() setUsesDropDown() removeFrom()
-*/
-bool TQActionGroup::addTo( TQWidget* w )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(w) ) {
-	if ( d->dropdown ) {
-	    if ( !d->exclusive ) {
-		TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions);
-		if ( !it.current() )
-		    return TRUE;
-
-		TQAction *defAction = it.current();
-
-		TQToolButton* btn = new TQToolButton( (TQToolBar*) w, "qt_actiongroup_btn" );
-		addedTo( btn, w );
-		connect( btn, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), TQT_SLOT(objectDestroyed()) );
-		d->menubuttons.append( btn );
-
-		if ( !iconSet().isNull() )
-		    btn->setIconSet( iconSet() );
-		else if ( !defAction->iconSet().isNull() )
-		    btn->setIconSet( defAction->iconSet() );
-		if ( !!text() )
-		    btn->setTextLabel( text() );
-		else if ( !!defAction->text() )
-		    btn->setTextLabel( defAction->text() );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-		if ( !!toolTip() )
-		    TQToolTip::add( btn, toolTip() );
-		else if ( !!defAction->toolTip() )
-		    TQToolTip::add( btn, defAction->toolTip() );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-		if ( !!whatsThis() )
-		    TQWhatsThis::add( btn, whatsThis() );
-		else if ( !!defAction->whatsThis() )
-		    TQWhatsThis::add( btn, defAction->whatsThis() );
-#endif
-
-		connect( btn, TQT_SIGNAL( clicked() ), defAction, TQT_SIGNAL( activated() ) );
-		connect( btn, TQT_SIGNAL( toggled(bool) ), defAction, TQT_SLOT( toolButtonToggled(bool) ) );
-		connect( btn, TQT_SIGNAL( destroyed() ), defAction, TQT_SLOT( objectDestroyed() ) );
-
-		TQPopupMenu *menu = new TQPopupMenu( btn, "qt_actiongroup_menu" );
-		btn->setPopupDelay( 0 );
-		btn->setPopup( menu );
-
-		while( it.current() ) {
-		    it.current()->addTo( menu );
-		    ++it;
-		}
-		d->update( this );
-		return TRUE;
-	    } else {
-		TQComboBox *box = new TQComboBox( FALSE, w, "qt_actiongroup_combo" );
-		addedTo( box, w );
-		connect( box, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), TQT_SLOT(objectDestroyed()) );
-		d->comboboxes.append( box );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-		if ( !!toolTip() )
-		    TQToolTip::add( box, toolTip() );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-		if ( !!whatsThis() )
-		    TQWhatsThis::add( box, whatsThis() );
-#endif
-
-		int onIndex = 0;
-		bool foundOn = FALSE;
-		for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions); it.current(); ++it ) {
-		    TQAction *action = it.current();
-		    if ( !foundOn )
-			foundOn = action->isOn();
-		    if ( qstrcmp( action->name(), "qt_separator_action" ) && !foundOn )
-			onIndex++;
-		    action->addTo( box );
-		}
-		if ( foundOn )
-		    box->setCurrentItem( onIndex );
-		connect( box, TQT_SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, TQT_SLOT( internalComboBoxActivated(int)) );
-		connect( box, TQT_SIGNAL(highlighted(int)), this, TQT_SLOT( internalComboBoxHighlighted(int)) );
-		d->update( this );
-		return TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-    } else
-#endif
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(w) ) {
-	TQPopupMenu *popup;
-	if ( d->dropdown ) {
-	    TQPopupMenu *menu = (TQPopupMenu*)w;
-	    popup = new TQPopupMenu( w, "qt_actiongroup_menu" );
-	    d->popupmenus.append( popup );
-	    connect( popup, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), TQT_SLOT(objectDestroyed()) );
-
-	    int id;
-	    if ( !iconSet().isNull() ) {
-		if ( menuText().isEmpty() )
-		    id = menu->insertItem( iconSet(), text(), popup );
-		else
-		    id = menu->insertItem( iconSet(), menuText(), popup );
-	    } else {
-		if ( menuText().isEmpty() )
-		    id = menu->insertItem( text(), popup );
-		else
-		    id = menu->insertItem( menuText(), popup );
-	    }
-
-	    addedTo( menu->indexOf( id ), menu );
-
-	    TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem *item = new TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem;
-	    item->id = id;
-	    item->popup = popup;
-	    d->menuitems.append( item );
-	} else {
-	    popup = (TQPopupMenu*)w;
-	}
-	for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	    // #### do an addedTo( index, popup, action), need to find out index
-	    it.current()->addTo( popup );
-	}
-	return TRUE;
-    }
-
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	// #### do an addedTo( index, popup, action), need to find out index
-	it.current()->addTo( w );
-    }
-
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-bool TQActionGroup::removeFrom( TQWidget* w )
-{
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	it.current()->removeFrom( w );
-    }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(w) ) {
-	TQPtrListIterator<TQComboBox> cb( d->comboboxes );
-	while( cb.current() ) {
-	    TQComboBox *box = cb.current();
-	    ++cb;
-	    if ( box->parentWidget() == w )
-		delete box;
-	}
-	TQPtrListIterator<TQToolButton> mb( d->menubuttons );
-	while( mb.current() ) {
-	    TQToolButton *btn = mb.current();
-	    ++mb;
-	    if ( btn->parentWidget() == w )
-		delete btn;
-	}
-    } else
-#endif
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(w) ) {
-	TQPtrListIterator<TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem> pu( d->menuitems );
-	while ( pu.current() ) {
-	    TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem *mi = pu.current();
-	    ++pu;
-	    if ( d->dropdown && mi->popup )
-		( (TQPopupMenu*)w )->removeItem( mi->id );
-	    delete mi->popup;
-	}
-    }
-
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::childToggled( bool b )
-{
-    if ( !isExclusive() )
-	return;
-    TQAction* s = (TQAction*) sender();
-    if ( b ) {
-	if ( s != d->selected ) {
-	    d->selected = s;
-	    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions); it.current(); ++it ) {
-		if ( it.current()->isToggleAction() && it.current() != s )
-		    it.current()->setOn( FALSE );
-	    }
-	    emit activated();
-	    emit selected( s );
-	} else if ( !s->isToggleAction() ) {
-	    emit activated();
-	}
-    } else {
-	if ( s == d->selected ) {
-	    // at least one has to be selected
-	    s->setOn( TRUE );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::childDestroyed()
-{
-    d->actions.removeRef( (TQAction*) sender() );
-    if ( d->selected == sender() )
-	d->selected = 0;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::setEnabled( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( enable == isEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    TQAction::setEnabled( enable );
-    d->update( this );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::setToggleAction( bool toggle )
-{
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions); it.current(); ++it )
-	it.current()->setToggleAction( toggle );
-
-    TQAction::setToggleAction( TRUE );
-    d->update( this );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::setOn( bool on )
-{
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	TQAction *act = it.current();
-	if ( act->isToggleAction() )
-	    act->setOn( on );
-    }
-
-    TQAction::setOn( on );
-    d->update( this );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::setIconSet( const TQIconSet& icon )
-{
-    TQAction::setIconSet( icon );
-    d->update( this );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::setText( const TQString& txt )
-{
-    if ( txt == text() )
-	return;
-
-    TQAction::setText( txt );
-    d->update( this );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::setMenuText( const TQString& text )
-{
-    if ( text == menuText() )
-	return;
-
-    TQAction::setMenuText( text );
-    d->update( this );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::setToolTip( const TQString& text )
-{
-    if ( text == toolTip() )
-	return;
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	if ( it.current()->toolTip().isNull() )
-	    it.current()->setToolTip( text );
-    }
-    TQAction::setToolTip( text );
-    d->update( this );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::setWhatsThis( const TQString& text )
-{
-    if ( text == whatsThis() )
-	return;
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	if ( it.current()->whatsThis().isNull() )
-	    it.current()->setWhatsThis( text );
-    }
-    TQAction::setWhatsThis( text );
-    d->update( this );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::childEvent( TQChildEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !e->removed() )
-	return;
-
-    TQAction *action = ::tqqt_cast<TQAction*>(e->child());
-    if ( !action )
-	return;
-
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQComboBox> cb( d->comboboxes ); cb.current(); ++cb ) {
-	for ( int i = 0; i < cb.current()->count(); i++ ) {
-	    if ( cb.current()->text( i ) == action->text() ) {
-		cb.current()->removeItem( i );
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQToolButton> mb( d->menubuttons ); mb.current(); ++mb ) {
-	TQPopupMenu* popup = mb.current()->popup();
-	if ( !popup )
-	    continue;
-	action->removeFrom( popup );
-    }
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem> mi( d->menuitems ); mi.current(); ++mi ) {
-	TQPopupMenu* popup = mi.current()->popup;
-	if ( !popup )
-	    continue;
-	action->removeFrom( popup );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQActionGroup::selected( TQAction* )
-
-    This signal is emitted from exclusive groups when toggle actions
-    change state.
-
-    The argument is the action whose state changed to "on".
-
-    \sa setExclusive(), isOn() TQAction::toggled()
-*/
-
-/*! \internal
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::internalComboBoxActivated( int index )
-{
-    TQAction *a = 0;
-    for ( int i = 0; i <= index && i < (int)d->actions.count(); ++i ) {
-	a = d->actions.at( i );
-	if ( a && !qstrcmp( a->name(), "qt_separator_action" ) )
-	    index++;
-    }
-    a = d->actions.at( index );
-    if ( a ) {
-	if ( a != d->selected ) {
-	    d->selected = a;
-	    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQAction> it( d->actions); it.current(); ++it ) {
-		if ( it.current()->isToggleAction() && it.current() != a )
-		    it.current()->setOn( FALSE );
-	    }
-	    if ( a->isToggleAction() )
-		a->setOn( TRUE );
-
-	    emit activated();
-	    if ( a->isToggleAction() )
-		emit selected( d->selected );
-	    emit ((TQActionGroup*)a)->activated();
-	} else if ( !a->isToggleAction() ) {
-	    emit activated();
-	    emit ((TQActionGroup*)a)->activated();
-	}
-	a->cleartqStatusText();
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::internalComboBoxHighlighted( int index )
-{
-    TQAction *a = 0;
-    for ( int i = 0; i <= index && i < (int)d->actions.count(); ++i ) {
-	a = d->actions.at( i );
-	if ( a && !qstrcmp( a->name(), "qt_separator_action" ) )
-	    index++;
-    }
-    a = d->actions.at( index );
-    if ( a )
-	a->showtqStatusText(a->statusTip());
-    else
-	cleartqStatusText();
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::internalToggle( TQAction *a )
-{
-    int index = d->actions.find( a );
-    if ( index == -1 )
-	return;
-
-    int lastItem = index;
-    for ( int i = 0; i < lastItem; i++ ) {
-	TQAction *action = d->actions.at( i );
-	if ( !qstrcmp( action->name(), "qt_separator_action" ) )
-	    index--;
-    }
-
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQComboBox> it( d->comboboxes); it.current(); ++it )
-	    it.current()->setCurrentItem( index );
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-*/
-void TQActionGroup::objectDestroyed()
-{
-    const TQObject* obj = TQT_TQOBJECT(sender());
-    d->menubuttons.removeRef( (TQToolButton*)obj );
-    for ( TQPtrListIterator<TQActionGroupPrivate::MenuItem> mi( d->menuitems ); mi.current(); ++mi ) {
-	if ( TQT_TQOBJECT(mi.current()->popup) == obj ) {
-	    d->menuitems.removeRef( mi.current() );
-	    break;
-	}
-    }
-    d->popupmenus.removeRef( (TQPopupMenu*)obj );
-    d->comboboxes.removeRef( (TQComboBox*)obj );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-    This function is called from the addTo() function when it has
-    created a widget (\a actionWidget) for the child action \a a in
-    the \a container.
-*/
-
-void TQActionGroup::addedTo( TQWidget *actionWidget, TQWidget *container, TQAction *a )
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED( actionWidget );
-    TQ_UNUSED( container );
-    TQ_UNUSED( a );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-    \internal
-
-    This function is called from the addTo() function when it has
-    created a menu item for the child action at the index position \a
-    index in the popup menu \a menu.
-*/
-
-void TQActionGroup::addedTo( int index, TQPopupMenu *menu, TQAction *a )
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED( index );
-    TQ_UNUSED( menu );
-    TQ_UNUSED( a );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-    \overload
-
-    This function is called from the addTo() function when it has
-    created a widget (\a actionWidget) in the \a container.
-*/
-
-void TQActionGroup::addedTo( TQWidget *actionWidget, TQWidget *container )
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED( actionWidget );
-    TQ_UNUSED( container );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-    \overload
-
-    This function is called from the addTo() function when it has
-    created a menu item at the index position \a index in the popup
-    menu \a menu.
-*/
-
-void TQActionGroup::addedTo( int index, TQPopupMenu *menu )
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED( index );
-    TQ_UNUSED( menu );
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 08095e4..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqaction.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,220 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQAction class
-**
-** Created : 000000
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2005-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQACTION_H
-#define TQACTION_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqobject.h"
-#include "tqiconset.h"
-#include "tqstring.h"
-#include "tqkeysequence.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACTION
-
-class TQActionPrivate;
-class TQActionGroupPrivate;
-class TQStatusBar;
-class TQPopupMenu;
-class TQToolTipGroup;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQAction : public TQObject
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool toggleAction READ isToggleAction WRITE setToggleAction)
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool on READ isOn WRITE setOn )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool enabled READ isEnabled WRITE setEnabled )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQIconSet iconSet READ iconSet WRITE setIconSet )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString text READ text WRITE setText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString menuText READ menuText WRITE setMenuText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString toolTip READ toolTip WRITE setToolTip )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString statusTip READ statusTip WRITE setStatusTip )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString whatsThis READ whatsThis WRITE setWhatsThis )
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQKeySequence accel READ accel WRITE setAccel )
-#endif
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool visible READ isVisible WRITE tqsetVisible )
-
-public:
-    TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0 );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQAction( const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel,
-	     TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0 );
-    TQAction( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel,
-	     TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0 );
-
-    TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel,
-	     TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ); // obsolete
-    TQAction( const TQString& text, const TQString& menuText, TQKeySequence accel, TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent,
-	     const char* name = 0, bool toggle = FALSE ); // obsolete
-#endif
-    TQAction( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name , bool toggle ); // obsolete
-    ~TQAction();
-
-    virtual void setIconSet( const TQIconSet& );
-    TQIconSet iconSet() const;
-    virtual void setText( const TQString& );
-    TQString text() const;
-    virtual void setMenuText( const TQString& );
-    TQString menuText() const;
-    virtual void setToolTip( const TQString& );
-    TQString toolTip() const;
-    virtual void setStatusTip( const TQString& );
-    TQString statusTip() const;
-    virtual void setWhatsThis( const TQString& );
-    TQString whatsThis() const;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    virtual void setAccel( const TQKeySequence& key );
-    TQKeySequence accel() const;
-#endif
-    virtual void setToggleAction( bool );
-
-    bool isToggleAction() const;
-    bool isOn() const;
-    bool isEnabled() const;
-    bool isVisible() const;
-    virtual bool addTo( TQWidget* );
-    virtual bool removeFrom( TQWidget* );
-
-protected:
-    virtual void addedTo( TQWidget *actionWidget, TQWidget *container );
-    virtual void addedTo( int index, TQPopupMenu *menu );
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void activate();
-    void toggle();
-    virtual void setOn( bool );
-    virtual void setEnabled( bool );
-    void setDisabled( bool );
-    void tqsetVisible( bool );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void activated();
-    void toggled( bool );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void internalActivation();
-    void toolButtonToggled( bool );
-    void objectDestroyed();
-    void menutqStatusText( int id );
-    void showtqStatusText( const TQString& );
-    void cleartqStatusText();
-
-private:
-    void init();
-
-    friend class TQActionGroup;
-    friend class TQActionGroupPrivate;
-    TQActionPrivate* d;
-
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)  // Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-    TQAction( const TQAction & );
-    TQAction &operator=( const TQAction & );
-#endif
-};
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQActionGroup : public TQAction
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool exclusive READ isExclusive WRITE setExclusive )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool usesDropDown READ usesDropDown WRITE setUsesDropDown )
-
-public:
-    TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name = 0 );
-    TQActionGroup( TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME* parent, const char* name , bool exclusive  ); // obsolete
-    ~TQActionGroup();
-    void setExclusive( bool );
-    bool isExclusive() const;
-    void add( TQAction* a);
-    void addSeparator();
-    bool addTo( TQWidget* );
-    bool removeFrom( TQWidget* );
-    void setEnabled( bool );
-    void setToggleAction( bool toggle );
-    void setOn( bool on );
-
-    void setUsesDropDown( bool enable );
-    bool usesDropDown() const;
-
-    void setIconSet( const TQIconSet& );
-    void setText( const TQString& );
-    void setMenuText( const TQString& );
-    void setToolTip( const TQString& );
-    void setWhatsThis( const TQString& );
-
-protected:
-    void childEvent( TQChildEvent* );
-    virtual void addedTo( TQWidget *actionWidget, TQWidget *container, TQAction *a );
-    virtual void addedTo( int index, TQPopupMenu *menu, TQAction *a );
-    virtual void addedTo( TQWidget *actionWidget, TQWidget *container );
-    virtual void addedTo( int index, TQPopupMenu *menu );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void selected( TQAction* );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void childToggled( bool );
-    void childDestroyed();
-    void internalComboBoxActivated( int );
-    void internalComboBoxHighlighted( int );
-    void internalToggle( TQAction* );
-    void objectDestroyed();
-
-private:
-    TQActionGroupPrivate* d;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-public:
-    void insert( TQAction* a ) { add( a ); }
-#endif
-
-private:
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)  // Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-    TQActionGroup( const TQActionGroup & );
-    TQActionGroup &operator=( const TQActionGroup & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index a94d0cb..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1016 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQButton widget class
-**
-** Created : 940206
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#undef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-#include "tqbutton.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTON
-#include "tqbuttongroup.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqaccel.h"
-#include "tqpixmapcache.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqpushbutton.h"
-#include "tqradiobutton.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-#include "../kernel/tqinternal_p.h"
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-#define AUTO_REPEAT_DELAY  300
-#define AUTO_REPEAT_PERIOD 100
-
-class TQButtonData
-{
-public:
-    TQButtonData() {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-	group = 0;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-	a = 0;
-#endif
-    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-    TQButtonGroup *group;
-#endif
-    TQTimer timer;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQAccel *a;
-#endif
-};
-
-
-void TQButton::ensureData()
-{
-    if ( !d ) {
-	d = new TQButtonData;
-	TQ_CHECK_PTR( d );
-	connect(&d->timer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), this, TQT_SLOT(autoRepeatTimeout()));
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the group that this button belongs to.
-
-    If the button is not a member of any TQButtonGroup, this function
-    returns 0.
-
-    \sa TQButtonGroup
-*/
-
-TQButtonGroup *TQButton::group() const
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-    return d ? d->group : 0;
-#else
-    return 0;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-void TQButton::setGroup( TQButtonGroup* g )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-    ensureData();
-    d->group = g;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-TQTimer *TQButton::timer()
-{
-    ensureData();
-    return &d->timer;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQButton tqbutton.h
-    \brief The TQButton class is the abstract base class of button
-    widgets, providing functionality common to buttons.
-
-    \ingroup abstractwidgets
-
-    <b>If you want to create a button use TQPushButton.</b>
-
-    The TQButton class implements an \e abstract button, and lets
-    subclasses specify how to reply to user actions and how to draw
-    the button.
-
-    TQButton provides both push and toggle buttons. The TQRadioButton
-    and TQCheckBox classes provide only toggle buttons; TQPushButton and
-    TQToolButton provide both toggle and push buttons.
-
-    Any button can have either a text or pixmap label. setText() sets
-    the button to be a text button and setPixmap() sets it to be a
-    pixmap button. The text/pixmap is manipulated as necessary to
-    create the "disabled" appearance when the button is disabled.
-
-    TQButton provides most of the states used for buttons:
-    \list
-    \i isDown() indicates whether the button is \e pressed down.
-    \i isOn() indicates whether the button is \e on.
-       Only toggle buttons can be switched on and off  (see below).
-    \i isEnabled() indicates whether the button can be pressed by the
-       user.
-    \i setAutoRepeat() sets whether the button will auto-repeat
-       if the user holds it down.
-    \i setToggleButton() sets whether the button is a toggle
-       button or not.
-    \endlist
-
-    The difference between isDown() and isOn() is as follows: When the
-    user clicks a toggle button to toggle it on, the button is first
-    \e pressed and then released into the \e on state. When the user
-    clicks it again (to toggle it off), the button moves first to the
-    \e pressed state, then to the \e off state (isOn() and isDown()
-    are both FALSE).
-
-    Default buttons (as used in many dialogs) are provided by
-    TQPushButton::setDefault() and TQPushButton::setAutoDefault().
-
-    TQButton provides five Q_SIGNALS:
-    \list 1
-    \i pressed() is emitted when the button is pressed. E.g. with the mouse
-       or when animateClick() is called.
-    \i released() is emitted when the button is released. E.g. when the mouse
-       is released or the cursor is moved outside the widget.
-    \i clicked() is emitted when the button is first pressed and then
-       released when the accelerator key is typed, or when
-       animateClick() is called.
-    \i toggled(bool) is emitted when the state of a toggle button changes.
-    \i stateChanged(int) is emitted when the state of a tristate
-       toggle button changes.
-    \endlist
-
-    If the button is a text button with an ampersand (\&) in its text,
-    TQButton creates an automatic accelerator key. This code creates a
-    push button labelled "Ro<u>c</u>k \& Roll" (where the c is
-    underlined). The button gets an automatic accelerator key, Alt+C:
-
-    \code
-	TQPushButton *p = new TQPushButton( "Ro&ck && Roll", this );
-    \endcode
-
-    In this example, when the user presses Alt+C the button will call
-    animateClick().
-
-    You can also set a custom accelerator using the setAccel()
-    function. This is useful mostly for pixmap buttons because they
-    have no automatic accelerator.
-
-    \code
-	p->setPixmap( TQPixmap("print.png") );
-	p->setAccel( ALT+Key_F7 );
-    \endcode
-
-    All of the buttons provided by TQt (\l TQPushButton, \l TQToolButton,
-    \l TQCheckBox and \l TQRadioButton) can display both text and
-    pixmaps.
-
-    To subclass TQButton, you must reimplement at least drawButton()
-    (to draw the button's outline) and drawButtonLabel() (to draw its
-    text or pixmap). It is generally advisable to reimplement
-    tqsizeHint() as well, and sometimes hitButton() (to determine
-    whether a button press is within the button).
-
-    To reduce flickering, TQButton::paintEvent() sets up a pixmap that
-    the drawButton() function draws in. You should not reimplement
-    paintEvent() for a subclass of TQButton unless you want to take
-    over all drawing.
-
-    \sa TQButtonGroup
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQButton::ToggleType
-
-    This enum type defines what a button can do in response to a
-    mouse/keyboard press:
-
-    \value SingleShot  pressing the button causes an action, then the
-    button returns to the unpressed state.
-
-    \value Toggle  pressing the button toggles it between an \c On and
-    an \c Off state.
-
-    \value Tristate  pressing the button cycles between the three
-    states \c On, \c Off and \c NoChange
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQButton::ToggleState
-
-    This enum defines the state of a toggle button.
-
-    \value Off  the button is in the "off" state
-    \value NoChange  the button is in the default/unchanged state
-    \value On  the button is in the "on" state
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButton::accel
-    \brief the accelerator associated with the button
-
-    This property is 0 if there is no accelerator set. If you set this
-    property to 0 then any current accelerator is removed.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButton::autoRepeat
-    \brief whether autoRepeat is enabled
-
-    If autoRepeat is enabled then the clicked() signal is emitted at
-    regular intervals if the button is down. This property has no
-    effect on toggle buttons. autoRepeat is off by default.
-*/
-
-/*! \property TQButton::autoResize
-    \brief whether autoResize is enabled
-    \obsolete
-
-  If autoResize is enabled then the button will resize itself
-  whenever the contents are changed.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButton::down
-    \brief whether the button is pressed
-
-    If this property is TRUE, the button is pressed down. The Q_SIGNALS
-    pressed() and clicked() are not emitted if you set this property
-    to TRUE. The default is FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButton::exclusiveToggle
-    \brief whether the button is an exclusive toggle
-
-    If this property is TRUE and the button is in a TQButtonGroup, the
-    button can only be toggled off by another one being toggled on.
-    The default is FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButton::on
-    \brief whether the button is toggled
-
-    This property should only be set for toggle buttons.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQButton::setOn( bool on )
-
-    Sets the state of this button to On if \a on is TRUE; otherwise to
-    Off.
-
-    \sa toggleState
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButton::pixmap
-    \brief the pixmap shown on the button
-
-    If the pixmap is monochrome (i.e. it is a TQBitmap or its \link
-    TQPixmap::depth() depth\endlink is 1) and it does not have a mask,
-    this property will set the pixmap to be its own mask. The purpose
-    of this is to draw transparent bitmaps which are important for
-    toggle buttons, for example.
-
-    pixmap() returns 0 if no pixmap was set.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButton::text
-    \brief the text shown on the button
-
-    This property will return a TQString::null if the button has no
-    text. If the text has an ampersand (\&) in it, then an
-    accelerator is automatically created for it using the character
-    that follows the '\&' as the accelerator key. Any previous
-    accelerator will be overwritten, or cleared if no accelerator is
-    defined by the text.
-
-    There is no default text.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButton::toggleButton
-    \brief whether the button is a toggle button
-
-    The default value is FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQButton::setToggleButton( bool b )
-
-    If \a b is TRUE, this button becomes a toggle button; if \a b is
-    FALSE, this button becomes a command button.
-
-    \sa toggleButton
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButton::toggleState
-    \brief the state of the toggle button
-
-    If this property is changed then it does not cause the button
-    to be repainted.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButton::toggleType
-    \brief the type of toggle on the button
-
-    The default toggle type is \c SingleShot.
-
-    \sa TQButton::ToggleType
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a standard button called \a name with parent \a parent,
-    using the widget flags \a f.
-
-    If \a parent is a TQButtonGroup, this constructor calls
-    TQButtonGroup::insert().
-*/
-
-TQButton::TQButton( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, f )
-{
-    bpixmap    = 0;
-    toggleTyp  = SingleShot;			// button is simple
-    buttonDown = FALSE;				// button is up
-    stat       = Off;				// button is off
-    mlbDown    = FALSE;				// mouse left button up
-    autoresize = FALSE;				// not auto resizing
-    animation  = FALSE;				// no pending animateClick
-    repeat     = FALSE;				// not in autorepeat mode
-    d	       = 0;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQButtonGroup*>(parent) ) {
-	setGroup((TQButtonGroup*)parent);
-	group()->insert( this );		// insert into button group
-    }
-#endif
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::TabFocus );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the button.
- */
-TQButton::~TQButton()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-    if ( group() )
-	group()->remove( this );
-#endif
-    delete bpixmap;
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQButton::pressed()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the button is pressed down.
-
-    \sa released(), clicked()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQButton::released()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the button is released.
-
-    \sa pressed(), clicked(), toggled()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQButton::clicked()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the button is activated (i.e. first
-    pressed down and then released when the mouse cursor is inside the
-    button), when the accelerator key is typed or when animateClick()
-    is called. This signal is \e not emitted if you call setDown().
-
-    The TQButtonGroup::clicked() signal does the same job, if you want
-    to connect several buttons to the same slot.
-
-    \warning Don't launch a model dialog in response to this signal
-    for a button that has \c autoRepeat turned on.
-
-    \sa pressed(), released(), toggled() autoRepeat down
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQButton::toggled( bool on )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes status. \a
-    on is TRUE if the button is on, or FALSE if the button is off.
-
-    This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
-    or because setOn() was called.
-
-    \sa clicked()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQButton::stateChanged( int state )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever a toggle button changes state. \a
-    state is \c On if the button is on, \c NoChange if it is in the
-    \link TQCheckBox::setTristate() "no change" state\endlink or \c Off
-    if the button is off.
-
-    This may be the result of a user action, toggle() slot activation,
-    setState(), or because setOn() was called.
-
-    \sa clicked() TQButton::ToggleState
-*/
-
-void TQButton::setText( const TQString &text )
-{
-    if ( btext == text )
-	return;
-    btext = text;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    setAccel( TQAccel::shortcutKey( text ) );
-#endif
-
-    if ( bpixmap ) {
-	delete bpixmap;
-	bpixmap = 0;
-    }
-
-    if ( autoresize )
-	adjustSize();
-
-    update();
-    updateGeometry();
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::NameChanged );
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQButton::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap )
-{
-    if ( bpixmap && bpixmap->serialNumber() == pixmap.serialNumber() )
-	return;
-
-    bool newSize;
-    if ( bpixmap ) {
-	newSize = pixmap.width() != bpixmap->width() ||
-		  pixmap.height() != bpixmap->height();
-	*bpixmap = pixmap;
-    } else {
-	newSize = TRUE;
-	bpixmap = new TQPixmap( pixmap );
-	TQ_CHECK_PTR( bpixmap );
-    }
-    if ( bpixmap->depth() == 1 && !bpixmap->mask() )
-	bpixmap->setMask( *((TQBitmap *)bpixmap) );
-    if ( !btext.isNull() ) {
-	btext = TQString::null;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-	setAccel( TQKeySequence() );
-#endif
-    }
-    if ( autoresize && newSize )
-	adjustSize();
-    if ( autoMask() )
-	updateMask();
-    update();
-    if ( newSize )
-	updateGeometry();
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-TQKeySequence TQButton::accel() const
-{
-    if ( d && d->a )
-	return d->a->key( 0 );
-    return TQKeySequence();
-}
-
-void TQButton::setAccel( const TQKeySequence& key )
-{
-    if ( d && d->a )
-	d->a->clear();
-    if ( key.isEmpty() )
-	return;
-    ensureData();
-    if ( !d->a ) {
-	d->a = new TQAccel( this, "buttonAccel" );
-	connect( d->a, TQT_SIGNAL( activated(int) ), this, TQT_SLOT( animateClick() ) );
-	connect( d->a, TQT_SIGNAL( activatedAmbiguously(int) ), this, TQT_SLOT( setFocus() ) );
-    }
-    d->a->insertItem( key, 0 );
-}
-#endif
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-
-void TQButton::setAutoResize( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( (bool)autoresize != enable ) {
-	autoresize = enable;
-	if ( autoresize )
-	    adjustSize();			// calls resize which repaints
-    }
-}
-
-#endif
-
-void TQButton::setAutoRepeat( bool enable )
-{
-    repeat = (uint)enable;
-    if ( repeat && mlbDown )
-	timer()->start( AUTO_REPEAT_DELAY, TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Performs an animated click: the button is pressed and released a
-    short while later.
-
-    The pressed(), released(), clicked(), toggled(), and
-    stateChanged() Q_SIGNALS are emitted as appropriate.
-
-    This function does nothing if the button is \link setEnabled()
-    disabled. \endlink
-
-    \sa setAccel()
-*/
-
-void TQButton::animateClick()
-{
-    if ( !isEnabled() || animation )
-	return;
-    animation = TRUE;
-    buttonDown = TRUE;
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    emit pressed();
-    TQTimer::singleShot( 100, this, TQT_SLOT(animateTimeout()) );
-}
-
-void TQButton::emulateClick()
-{
-    if ( !isEnabled() || animation )
-	return;
-    animation = TRUE;
-    buttonDown = TRUE;
-    emit pressed();
-    animateTimeout();
-}
-
-void TQButton::setDown( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( d )
-	timer()->stop();
-    mlbDown = FALSE;				// the safe setting
-    if ( (bool)buttonDown != enable ) {
-	buttonDown = enable;
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  Sets the toggle state of the button to \a s. \a s can be \c Off, \c
-  NoChange or \c On.
-*/
-
-void TQButton::setState( ToggleState s )
-{
-    if ( !toggleTyp ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_STATE)
-	qWarning( "TQButton::setState() / setOn: (%s) Only toggle buttons "
-		 "may be switched", name( "unnamed" ) );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( (ToggleState)stat != s ) {		// changed state
-	bool was = stat != Off;
-	stat = s;
-	if ( autoMask() )
-	    updateMask();
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-	// ### toggled for tristate makes no sense. Don't emit the signal in 4.0
-	if ( was != (stat != Off) )
-	    emit toggled( stat != Off );
-	emit stateChanged( s );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if \a pos is inside the clickable button rectangle;
-    otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    By default, the clickable area is the entire widget. Subclasses
-    may reimplement it, though.
-*/
-bool TQButton::hitButton( const TQPoint &pos ) const
-{
-    return TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains( pos );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Draws the button. The default implementation does nothing.
-
-    This virtual function is reimplemented by subclasses to draw real
-    buttons. At some point, these reimplementations should call
-    drawButtonLabel().
-
-    \sa drawButtonLabel(), paintEvent()
-*/
-#if (TQT_VERSION-0 >= 0x040000)
-#error "TQButton. Make pure virtual"
-#endif
-void TQButton::drawButton( TQPainter * )
-{
-    return;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Draws the button text or pixmap.
-
-    This virtual function is reimplemented by subclasses to draw real
-    buttons. It is invoked by drawButton().
-
-    \sa drawButton(), paintEvent()
-*/
-
-void TQButton::drawButtonLabel( TQPainter * )
-{
-    return;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQButton::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    switch ( e->key() ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Enter:
-    case Qt::Key_Return:
-	{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PUSHBUTTON
-	    TQPushButton *pb = (TQPushButton*)tqqt_cast( "TQPushButton" );
-	    if ( pb && ( pb->autoDefault() || pb->isDefault() ) )
-		emit clicked();
-	    else
-#endif
-		e->ignore();
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Space:
-	if ( !e->isAutoRepeat() ) {
-	    setDown( TRUE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PUSHBUTTON
-	    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQPushButton*>(this) )
-		emit pressed();
-	    else
-#endif
-		e->ignore();
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Up:
-    case Qt::Key_Left:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-	if ( group() ) {
-	    group()->moveFocus( e->key() );
-	} else
-#endif
-	{
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-	    focusNextPrevChild( FALSE );
-#else // USE_QT4
-	    TQFocusEvent::setReason(TQFocusEvent::Backtab);
-	    focusNextPrevChild( FALSE );
-	    TQFocusEvent::resetReason();
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Right:
-    case Qt::Key_Down:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-	if ( group() ) {
-	    group()->moveFocus( e->key() );
-	} else
-#endif
-	{
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-	    focusNextPrevChild( TRUE );
-#else // USE_QT4
-	    TQFocusEvent::setReason(TQFocusEvent::Tab);
-	    focusNextPrevChild( TRUE );
-	    TQFocusEvent::resetReason();
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	}
-	break;
-    case Key_Escape:
-	if ( buttonDown ) {
-	    buttonDown = FALSE;
-	    update();
-	    break;
-	}
-	// fall through
-    default:
-	e->ignore();
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQButton::keyReleaseEvent( TQKeyEvent * e)
-{
-    switch ( e->key() ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Space:
-	if ( buttonDown && !e->isAutoRepeat() ) {
-	    buttonDown = FALSE;
-	    nextState();
-	    emit released();
-	    emit clicked();
-	}
-	break;
-    default:
-	e->ignore();
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQButton::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    bool hit = hitButton( e->pos() );
-    if ( hit ) {				// mouse press on button
-	mlbDown = TRUE;				// left mouse button down
-	buttonDown = TRUE;
-	if ( autoMask() )
-	    updateMask();
-
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-	TQGuardedPtr<TQTimer> t = timer();
-	emit pressed();
-	if ( t && repeat )
-	    t->start( AUTO_REPEAT_DELAY, TRUE );
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQButton::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e)
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton ) {
-
-	// clean up apperance if left button has been pressed
-	if (mlbDown || buttonDown) {
-	    mlbDown = FALSE;
-	    buttonDown = FALSE;
-
-	    if ( autoMask() )
-		updateMask();
-	    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-	}
-
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( !mlbDown )
-	return;
-    if ( d )
-	timer()->stop();
-
-    const bool oldButtonDown = buttonDown;
-    mlbDown = FALSE;				// left mouse button up
-    buttonDown = FALSE;
-    if ( hitButton( e->pos() ) ) {		// mouse release on button
-	nextState();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-	emit released();
-	emit clicked();
-    } else {
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-        if (oldButtonDown)
-            emit released();
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQButton::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !((e->state() & Qt::LeftButton) && mlbDown) ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;					// left mouse button is up
-    }
-    if ( hitButton(e->pos()) ) {		// mouse move in button
-	if ( !buttonDown ) {
-	    buttonDown = TRUE;
-	    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-	    emit pressed();
-	}
-    } else {					// mouse move outside button
-	if ( buttonDown ) {
-	    buttonDown = FALSE;
-	    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-	    emit released();
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Handles paint events for buttons. Small and typically complex
-    buttons are painted double-buffered to reduce flicker. The
-    actual drawing is done in the virtual functions drawButton() and
-    drawButtonLabel().
-
-    \sa drawButton(), drawButtonLabel()
-*/
-void TQButton::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *)
-{
-    TQSharedDoubleBuffer buffer( this );
-    drawButton( buffer.painter() );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQButton::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * e)
-{
-    TQWidget::focusInEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQButton::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * e )
-{
-    buttonDown = FALSE;
-    TQWidget::focusOutEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Internal slot used for auto repeat.
-*/
-void TQButton::autoRepeatTimeout()
-{
-    if ( mlbDown && isEnabled() && autoRepeat() ) {
-	TQGuardedPtr<TQTimer> t = timer();
-	if ( buttonDown ) {
-	    emit released();
-	    emit clicked();
-	    emit pressed();
-	}
-	if ( t )
-	    t->start( AUTO_REPEAT_PERIOD, TRUE );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Internal slot used for the second stage of animateClick().
-*/
-void TQButton::animateTimeout()
-{
-    if ( !animation )
-	return;
-    animation  = FALSE;
-    buttonDown = FALSE;
-    nextState();
-    emit released();
-    emit clicked();
-}
-
-
-void TQButton::nextState()
-{
-    bool t = isToggleButton() && !( isOn() && isExclusiveToggle() );
-    bool was = stat != Off;
-    if ( t ) {
-	if ( toggleTyp == Tristate )
-	    stat = ( stat + 1 ) % 3;
-	else
-	    stat = stat ? Off : On;
-    }
-    if ( autoMask() )
-        updateMask();
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    if ( t ) {
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-	if ( was != (stat != Off) )
-	    emit toggled( stat != Off );
-	emit stateChanged( stat );
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQButton::enabledChange( bool e )
-{
-    if ( !isEnabled() )
-	setDown( FALSE );
-    TQWidget::enabledChange( e );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Toggles the state of a toggle button.
-
-    \sa isOn(), setOn(), toggled(), isToggleButton()
-*/
-void TQButton::toggle()
-{
-    if ( isToggleButton() )
-	 setOn( !isOn() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the toggle type of the button to \a type.
-
-    \a type can be set to \c SingleShot, \c Toggle and \c Tristate.
-*/
-void TQButton::setToggleType( ToggleType type )
-{
-    toggleTyp = type;
-    if ( type != Tristate && stat == NoChange )
-	setState( On );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    else
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-}
-
-bool TQButton::isExclusiveToggle() const
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-    return group() && ( group()->isExclusive() ||
-			(group()->isRadioButtonExclusive() &&
-			::tqqt_cast<TQRadioButton*>(this)) );
-#else
-    return FALSE;
-#endif
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 70f3e75..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbutton.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,235 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQButton widget class
-**
-** Created : 940206
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQBUTTON_H
-#define TQBUTTON_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqkeysequence.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTON
-
-
-class TQButtonGroup;
-class TQToolBar;
-class TQButtonData;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQButton : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( ToggleType ToggleState )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString text READ text WRITE setText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQPixmap pixmap READ pixmap WRITE setPixmap )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQKeySequence accel READ accel WRITE setAccel )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool toggleButton READ isToggleButton )
-    Q_PROPERTY( ToggleType toggleType READ toggleType )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool down READ isDown WRITE setDown DESIGNABLE false  )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool on READ isOn )
-    Q_PROPERTY( ToggleState toggleState READ state )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool autoResize READ autoResize WRITE setAutoResize DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool autoRepeat READ autoRepeat WRITE setAutoRepeat )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool exclusiveToggle READ isExclusiveToggle )
-
-public:
-    TQButton( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 );
-    ~TQButton();
-
-    TQString text() const;
-    virtual void setText( const TQString &);
-    const TQPixmap *pixmap() const;
-    virtual void setPixmap( const TQPixmap & );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQKeySequence		accel()	const;
-    virtual void	setAccel( const TQKeySequence& );
-#endif
-
-    bool	isToggleButton() const;
-
-    enum ToggleType { SingleShot, Toggle, Tristate };
-    ToggleType	toggleType() const;
-
-    virtual void setDown( bool );
-    bool	isDown() const;
-
-    bool	isOn() const;
-
-    enum ToggleState { Off, NoChange, On };
-    ToggleState	state() const;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    bool	autoResize() const;
-    void	setAutoResize( bool );
-#endif
-
-    bool	autoRepeat() const;
-    virtual void setAutoRepeat( bool );
-    bool	isExclusiveToggle() const;
-
-    TQButtonGroup *group() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void	animateClick();
-    void	toggle();
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void	pressed();
-    void	released();
-    void	clicked();
-    void	toggled( bool );
-    void	stateChanged( int );
-
-protected:
-    void	setToggleButton( bool );
-    virtual void	setToggleType( ToggleType );
-    void	setOn( bool );
-    virtual void	setState( ToggleState );
-
-    virtual bool hitButton( const TQPoint &pos ) const;
-    virtual void drawButton( TQPainter * );
-    virtual void drawButtonLabel( TQPainter * );
-
-    void	keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *);
-    void	keyReleaseEvent( TQKeyEvent *);
-    void	mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void	focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void	focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-
-    void	enabledChange( bool );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void	animateTimeout();
-    void	autoRepeatTimeout();
-    void	emulateClick();
-
-private:
-    TQString	btext;
-    TQPixmap    *bpixmap;
-    uint	toggleTyp	: 2;
-    uint	buttonDown	: 1;
-    uint	stat		: 2;
-    uint	mlbDown		: 1;
-    uint	autoresize	: 1;
-    uint	animation	: 1;
-    uint	repeat		: 1;
-    TQButtonData *d;
-
-    friend class TQButtonGroup;
-    friend class TQToolBar;
-    void          ensureData();
-    virtual void setGroup( TQButtonGroup* );
-    TQTimer	 *timer();
-    void	nextState();
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQButton( const TQButton & );
-    TQButton &operator=( const TQButton & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-inline TQString TQButton::text() const
-{
-    return btext;
-}
-
-inline const TQPixmap *TQButton::pixmap() const
-{
-    return bpixmap;
-}
-
-inline bool TQButton::isToggleButton() const
-{
-    return ToggleType(toggleTyp) != SingleShot;
-}
-
-inline  bool TQButton::isDown() const
-{
-    return buttonDown;
-}
-
-inline bool TQButton::isOn() const
-{
-    return ToggleState(stat) != Off;
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-inline bool TQButton::autoResize() const
-{
-    return autoresize;
-}
-#endif
-
-inline bool TQButton::autoRepeat() const
-{
-    return repeat;
-}
-
-inline TQButton::ToggleState TQButton::state() const
-{
-    return ToggleState(stat);
-}
-
-inline void TQButton::setToggleButton( bool b )
-{
-    setToggleType( b ? Toggle : SingleShot );
-}
-
-inline void TQButton::setOn( bool y )
-{
-    setState( y ? On : Off );
-}
-
-inline TQButton::ToggleType TQButton::toggleType() const
-{
-    return ToggleType(toggleTyp);
-}
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_BUTTON
-
-#endif // TQBUTTON_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 31ff7a5..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,691 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQButtonGroup class
-**
-** Created : 950130
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqbuttongroup.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-#include "tqbutton.h"
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqradiobutton.h"
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQButtonGroup tqbuttongroup.h
-    \brief The TQButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a group.
-
-    \ingroup organizers
-    \ingroup geomanagement
-    \ingroup appearance
-    \mainclass
-
-    A button group widget makes it easier to deal with groups of
-    buttons. Each button in a button group has a unique identifier.
-    The button group emits a clicked() signal with this identifier
-    when a button in the group is clicked. This makes a button group
-    particularly useful when you have several similar buttons and want
-    to connect all their clicked() Q_SIGNALS to a single slot.
-
-    An \link setExclusive() exclusive\endlink button group switches
-    off all toggle buttons except the one that was clicked. A button
-    group is, by default, non-exclusive. Note that all radio buttons
-    that are inserted into a button group are mutually exclusive even
-    if the button group is non-exclusive. (See
-    setRadioButtonExclusive().)
-
-    There are two ways of using a button group:
-    \list
-    \i The button group is the parent widget of a number of buttons,
-    i.e. the button group is the parent argument in the button
-    constructor. The buttons are assigned identifiers 0, 1, 2, etc.,
-    in the order they are created. A TQButtonGroup can display a frame
-    and a title because it inherits TQGroupBox.
-    \i The button group is an invisible widget and the contained
-    buttons have some other parent widget. In this usage, each button
-    must be manually inserted, using insert(), into the button group
-    and given an identifier.
-    \endlist
-
-    A button can be removed from the group with remove(). A pointer to
-    a button with a given id can be obtained using find(). The id of a
-    button is available using id(). A button can be set \e on with
-    setButton(). The number of buttons in the group is returned by
-    count().
-
-    <img src=qbttngrp-m.png> <img src=qbttngrp-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQPushButton, TQCheckBox, TQRadioButton
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButtonGroup::exclusive
-    \brief whether the button group is exclusive
-
-    If this property is TRUE, then the buttons in the group are
-    toggled, and to untoggle a button you must click on another button
-    in the group. The default value is FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButtonGroup::radioButtonExclusive
-    \brief whether the radio buttons in the group are exclusive
-
-    If this property is TRUE (the default), the \link TQRadioButton
-    radiobuttons\endlink in the group are treated exclusively.
-*/
-
-struct TQButtonItem
-{
-    TQButton *button;
-    int	     id;
-};
-
-
-class TQButtonList: public TQPtrList<TQButtonItem>
-{
-public:
-    TQButtonList() {}
-   ~TQButtonList() {}
-};
-
-
-typedef TQPtrListIterator<TQButtonItem> TQButtonListIt;
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a button group with no title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQGroupBox( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a button group with the title \a title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent,
-			    const char *name )
-    : TQGroupBox( title, parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a button group with no title. Child widgets will be
-    arranged in \a strips rows or columns (depending on \a
-    orientation).
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( int strips, Qt::Orientation orientation,
-			    TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQGroupBox( strips, orientation, parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a button group with title \a title. Child widgets will
-    be arranged in \a strips rows or columns (depending on \a
-    orientation).
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQButtonGroup::TQButtonGroup( int strips, Qt::Orientation orientation,
-			    const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent,
-			    const char *name )
-    : TQGroupBox( strips, orientation, title, parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Initializes the button group.
-*/
-
-void TQButtonGroup::init()
-{
-    buttons = new TQButtonList;
-    TQ_CHECK_PTR( buttons );
-    buttons->setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    excl_grp = FALSE;
-    radio_excl = TRUE;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-TQButtonGroup::~TQButtonGroup()
-{
-    TQButtonList * tmp = buttons;
-    TQButtonItem *bi = tmp->first();
-    buttons = 0;
-    while( bi ) {
-	bi->button->setGroup(0);
-	bi = tmp->next();
-    }
-    delete tmp;
-}
-
-bool TQButtonGroup::isExclusive() const
-{
-    return excl_grp;
-}
-
-void TQButtonGroup::setExclusive( bool enable )
-{
-    excl_grp = enable;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Inserts the \a button with the identifier \a id into the button
-    group. Returns the button identifier.
-
-    Buttons are normally inserted into a button group automatically by
-    passing the button group as the parent when the button is
-    constructed. So it is not necessary to manually insert buttons
-    that have this button group as their parent widget. An exception
-    is when you want custom identifiers instead of the default 0, 1,
-    2, etc., or if you want the buttons to have some other parent.
-
-    The button is assigned the identifier \a id or an automatically
-    generated identifier. It works as follows: If \a id >= 0, this
-    identifier is assigned. If \a id == -1 (default), the identifier
-    is equal to the number of buttons in the group. If \a id is any
-    other negative integer, for instance -2, a unique identifier
-    (negative integer \<= -2) is generated. No button has an id of -1.
-
-    \sa find(), remove(), setExclusive()
-*/
-
-int TQButtonGroup::insert( TQButton *button, int id )
-{
-    if ( button->group() )
-	button->group()->remove( button );
-
-    static int seq_no = -2;
-    TQButtonItem *bi = new TQButtonItem;
-    TQ_CHECK_PTR( bi );
-
-    if ( id < -1 )
-	bi->id = seq_no--;
-    else if ( id == -1 )
-	bi->id = buttons->count();
-    else
-	bi->id = id;
-
-    bi->button = button;
-    button->setGroup(this);
-    buttons->append( bi );
-
-    connect( button, TQT_SIGNAL(pressed()) , TQT_SLOT(buttonPressed()) );
-    connect( button, TQT_SIGNAL(released()), TQT_SLOT(buttonReleased()) );
-    connect( button, TQT_SIGNAL(clicked()) , TQT_SLOT(buttonClicked()) );
-    connect( button, TQT_SIGNAL(toggled(bool)) , TQT_SLOT(buttonToggled(bool)) );
-
-    if ( button->isToggleButton() && !button->isOn() &&
-	 selected() && (selected()->focusPolicy() & Qt::TabFocus) != 0 )
-	button->setFocusPolicy( (Qt::FocusPolicy)(button->focusPolicy() &
-					      ~Qt::TabFocus) );
-
-    return bi->id;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the number of buttons in the group.
-*/
-int TQButtonGroup::count() const
-{
-    return buttons->count();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the \a button from the button group.
-
-    \sa insert()
-*/
-
-void TQButtonGroup::remove( TQButton *button )
-{
-    if ( !buttons )
-	return;
-
-    TQButtonListIt it( *buttons );
-    TQButtonItem *i;
-    while ( (i=it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( i->button == button ) {
-	    buttons->remove( i );
-	    button->setGroup(0);
-	    button->disconnect( this );
-	    return;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the button with the specified identifier \a id, or 0 if
-    the button was not found.
-*/
-
-TQButton *TQButtonGroup::find( int id ) const
-{
-    // introduce a TQButtonListIt if calling anything
-    for ( TQButtonItem *i=buttons->first(); i; i=buttons->next() )
-	if ( i->id == id )
-	    return i->button;
-    return 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQButtonGroup::pressed( int id )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a button in the group is \link
-    TQButton::pressed() pressed\endlink. The \a id argument is the
-    button's identifier.
-
-    \sa insert()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQButtonGroup::released( int id )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a button in the group is \link
-    TQButton::released() released\endlink. The \a id argument is the
-    button's identifier.
-
-    \sa insert()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQButtonGroup::clicked( int id )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a button in the group is \link
-    TQButton::clicked() clicked\endlink. The \a id argument is the
-    button's identifier.
-
-    \sa insert()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  This slot is activated when one of the buttons in the group emits the
-  TQButton::pressed() signal.
-*/
-
-void TQButtonGroup::buttonPressed()
-{
-    // introduce a TQButtonListIt if calling anything
-    int id = -1;
-    TQButton *bt = (TQButton *)sender();		// object that sent the signal
-    for ( register TQButtonItem *i=buttons->first(); i; i=buttons->next() )
-	if ( bt == i->button ) {		// button was clicked
-	    id = i->id;
-	    break;
-	}
-    if ( id != -1 )
-	emit pressed( id );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  This slot is activated when one of the buttons in the group emits the
-  TQButton::released() signal.
-*/
-
-void TQButtonGroup::buttonReleased()
-{
-    // introduce a TQButtonListIt if calling anything
-    int id = -1;
-    TQButton *bt = (TQButton *)sender();		// object that sent the signal
-    for ( register TQButtonItem *i=buttons->first(); i; i=buttons->next() )
-	if ( bt == i->button ) {		// button was clicked
-	    id = i->id;
-	    break;
-	}
-    if ( id != -1 )
-	emit released( id );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  This slot is activated when one of the buttons in the group emits the
-  TQButton::clicked() signal.
-*/
-
-void TQButtonGroup::buttonClicked()
-{
-    // introduce a TQButtonListIt if calling anything
-    int id = -1;
-    TQButton *bt = ::tqqt_cast<TQButton*>(sender());		// object that sent the signal
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL)
-    TQ_ASSERT( bt );
-#endif
-    for ( register TQButtonItem *i=buttons->first(); i; i=buttons->next() ) {
-	if ( bt == i->button ) {			// button was clicked
-	    id = i->id;
-	    break;
-	}
-    }
-    if ( id != -1 )
-	emit clicked( id );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  This slot is activated when one of the buttons in the group emits the
-  TQButton::toggled() signal.
-*/
-
-void TQButtonGroup::buttonToggled( bool on )
-{
-    // introduce a TQButtonListIt if calling anything
-    if ( !on || (!excl_grp && !radio_excl) )
-	return;
-    TQButton *bt = ::tqqt_cast<TQButton*>(sender());		// object that sent the signal
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL)
-    TQ_ASSERT( bt );
-    TQ_ASSERT( bt->isToggleButton() );
-#endif
-
-    if ( !excl_grp && !::tqqt_cast<TQRadioButton*>(bt) )
-	return;
-    TQButtonItem * i = buttons->first();
-    bool hasTabFocus = FALSE;
-
-    while( i != 0 && hasTabFocus == FALSE ) {
-	if ( ( excl_grp || ::tqqt_cast<TQRadioButton*>(i->button) ) &&
-	     (i->button->focusPolicy() & Qt::TabFocus) )
-	    hasTabFocus = TRUE;
-	i = buttons->next();
-    }
-
-    i = buttons->first();
-    while( i ) {
-	if ( bt != i->button &&
-	     i->button->isToggleButton() &&
-	     i->button->isOn() &&
-	     ( excl_grp || ::tqqt_cast<TQRadioButton*>(i->button) ) )
-	    i->button->setOn( FALSE );
-	if ( ( excl_grp || ::tqqt_cast<TQRadioButton*>(i->button) ) &&
-	     i->button->isToggleButton() &&
-	     hasTabFocus )
-	    i->button->setFocusPolicy( (Qt::FocusPolicy)(i->button->focusPolicy() &
-						     ~Qt::TabFocus) );
-	i = buttons->next();
-    }
-
-    if ( hasTabFocus )
-	bt->setFocusPolicy( (Qt::FocusPolicy)(bt->focusPolicy() | Qt::TabFocus) );
-}
-
-
-
-void TQButtonGroup::setButton( int id )
-{
-    TQButton * b = find( id );
-    if ( b )
-	b->setOn( TRUE );
-}
-
-void TQButtonGroup::setRadioButtonExclusive( bool on)
-{
-    radio_excl = on;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Moves the keyboard focus according to \a key, and if appropriate
-    checks the new focus item.
-
-    This function does nothing unless the keyboard focus points to one
-    of the button group members and \a key is one of \c Key_Up, \c
-    Key_Down, \c Key_Left and \c Key_Right.
-*/
-
-void TQButtonGroup::moveFocus( int key )
-{
-    TQWidget * f = tqApp->tqfocusWidget();
-
-    TQButtonItem * i;
-    i = buttons->first();
-    while( i && i->button != f )
-	i = buttons->next();
-
-    if ( !i || !i->button )
-	return;
-
-    TQWidget * candidate = 0;
-    int bestScore = -1;
-
-    TQPoint goal( f->mapToGlobal( f->tqgeometry().center() ) );
-
-    i = buttons->first();
-    while( i && i->button ) {
-	if ( i->button != f &&
-	     i->button->isEnabled() ) {
-	    TQPoint p(i->button->mapToGlobal(i->button->tqgeometry().center()));
-	    int score = (p.y() - goal.y())*(p.y() - goal.y()) +
-			(p.x() - goal.x())*(p.x() - goal.x());
-	    bool betterScore = score < bestScore || !candidate;
-	    switch( key ) {
-	    case Qt::Key_Up:
-		if ( p.y() < goal.y() && betterScore ) {
-		    if ( TQABS( p.x() - goal.x() ) < TQABS( p.y() - goal.y() ) ) {
-			candidate = i->button;
-			bestScore = score;
-		    } else if ( i->button->x() == f->x() ) {
-			candidate = i->button;
-			bestScore = score/2;
-		    }
-		}
-		break;
-	    case Qt::Key_Down:
-		if ( p.y() > goal.y() && betterScore ) {
-		    if ( TQABS( p.x() - goal.x() ) < TQABS( p.y() - goal.y() ) ) {
-			candidate = i->button;
-			bestScore = score;
-		    } else if ( i->button->x() == f->x() ) {
-			candidate = i->button;
-			bestScore = score/2;
-		    }
-		}
-		break;
-	    case Qt::Key_Left:
-		if ( p.x() < goal.x() && betterScore ) {
-		    if ( TQABS( p.y() - goal.y() ) < TQABS( p.x() - goal.x() ) ) {
-			candidate = i->button;
-			bestScore = score;
-		    } else if ( i->button->y() == f->y() ) {
-			candidate = i->button;
-			bestScore = score/2;
-		    }
-		}
-		break;
-	    case Qt::Key_Right:
-		if ( p.x() > goal.x() && betterScore ) {
-		    if ( TQABS( p.y() - goal.y() ) < TQABS( p.x() - goal.x() ) ) {
-			candidate = i->button;
-			bestScore = score;
-		    } else if ( i->button->y() == f->y() ) {
-			candidate = i->button;
-			bestScore = score/2;
-		    }
-		}
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-	i = buttons->next();
-    }
-
-    TQButton *buttoncand = ::tqqt_cast<TQButton*>(candidate);
-    if ( buttoncand && ::tqqt_cast<TQButton*>(f) &&
-	 ((TQButton*)f)->isOn() &&
-	 buttoncand->isToggleButton() &&
-	 ( isExclusive() || ( ::tqqt_cast<TQRadioButton*>(f) &&
-			      ::tqqt_cast<TQRadioButton*>(candidate)))) {
-	if ( f->focusPolicy() & Qt::TabFocus ) {
-	    f->setFocusPolicy( (Qt::FocusPolicy)(f->focusPolicy() & ~Qt::TabFocus) );
-	    candidate->setFocusPolicy( (Qt::FocusPolicy)(candidate->focusPolicy()|
-						     Qt::TabFocus) );
-	}
-	buttoncand->setOn( TRUE );
-	buttoncand->animateClick();
-	buttoncand->animateTimeout(); // ### crude l&f hack
-    }
-
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-    if ( candidate ) {
-	if (key == Qt::Key_Up || key == Qt::Key_Left)
-	    candidate->setFocus(TQFocusEvent::Backtab);
-	else
-	    candidate->setFocus(TQFocusEvent::Tab);
-    }
-#else // USE_QT4
-    if ( candidate ) {
-	if (key == Qt::Key_Up || key == Qt::Key_Left)
-	    TQFocusEvent::setReason(TQFocusEvent::Backtab);
-	else
-	    TQFocusEvent::setReason(TQFocusEvent::Tab);
-	candidate->setFocus();
-	TQFocusEvent::resetReason();
-    }
-#endif // USE_QT4
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the selected toggle button if exactly one is selected;
-    otherwise returns 0.
-
-    \sa selectedId()
-*/
-
-TQButton * TQButtonGroup::selected() const
-{
-    if ( !buttons )
-	return 0;
-    TQButtonListIt it( *buttons );
-    TQButtonItem *i;
-    TQButton *candidate = 0;
-
-    while ( (i = it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( i->button && i->button->isToggleButton() && i->button->isOn() ) {
-	    if ( candidate != 0 )
-		return 0;
-	    candidate = i->button;
-	}
-    }
-    return candidate;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQButtonGroup::selectedId
-    \brief the selected toggle button
-
-    The toggle button is specified as an ID.
-
-    If no toggle button is selected, this property holds -1.
-
-    If setButton() is called on an exclusive group, the button with
-    the given id will be set to on and all the others will be set to
-    off.
-
-    \sa selected()
-*/
-
-int TQButtonGroup::selectedId() const
-{
-    return id( selected() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the id of \a button, or -1 if \a button is not a member of
-    this group.
-
-    \sa selectedId();
-*/
-
-int TQButtonGroup::id( TQButton * button ) const
-{
-    TQButtonItem *i = buttons->first();
-    while ( i && i->button != button )
-	i = buttons->next();
-    return i ? i->id : -1;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-bool TQButtonGroup::event( TQEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ChildInserted ) {
-	TQChildEvent * ce = (TQChildEvent *) e;
-	if ( radio_excl && ::tqqt_cast<TQRadioButton*>(ce->child()) ) {
-	    TQButton * button = (TQButton *) ce->child();
-	    if ( button->isToggleButton() && !button->isOn() &&
-		 selected() && (selected()->focusPolicy() & Qt::TabFocus) != 0 )
-		button->setFocusPolicy( (Qt::FocusPolicy)(button->focusPolicy() &
-					      ~Qt::TabFocus) );
-	}
-    }
-    return TQGroupBox::event( e );
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 052f1ac..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqbuttongroup.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQButtonGroup class
-**
-** Created : 950130
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQBUTTONGROUP_H
-#define TQBUTTONGROUP_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqgroupbox.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-
-
-class TQButton;
-class TQButtonList;
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQButtonGroup : public TQGroupBox
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool exclusive READ isExclusive WRITE setExclusive )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool radioButtonExclusive READ isRadioButtonExclusive WRITE setRadioButtonExclusive )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int selectedId READ selectedId WRITE setButton )
-
-public:
-    TQButtonGroup( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQButtonGroup( const TQString &title,
-		  TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQButtonGroup( int columns, Qt::Orientation o,
-		  TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQButtonGroup( int columns, Qt::Orientation o, const TQString &title,
-		  TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQButtonGroup();
-
-    bool	isExclusive() const;
-    bool	isRadioButtonExclusive() const { return radio_excl; }
-    virtual void setExclusive( bool );
-    virtual void setRadioButtonExclusive( bool );
-
-public:
-    int		insert( TQButton *, int id=-1 );
-    void	remove( TQButton * );
-    TQButton    *find( int id ) const;
-    int		id( TQButton * ) const;
-    int		count() const;
-
-    virtual void setButton( int id );
-
-    virtual void moveFocus( int );
-
-    TQButton    *selected() const;
-    int    selectedId() const;
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void	pressed( int id );
-    void	released( int id );
-    void	clicked( int id );
-
-protected Q_SLOTS:
-    void	buttonPressed();
-    void	buttonReleased();
-    void	buttonClicked();
-    void	buttonToggled( bool on );
-
-protected:
-    bool 	event( TQEvent * e );
-
-private:
-    void	init();
-    bool	excl_grp;
-    bool	radio_excl;
-    TQButtonList *buttons;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQButtonGroup( const TQButtonGroup & );
-    TQButtonGroup &operator=( const TQButtonGroup & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-
-#endif // TQBUTTONGROUP_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index b295e4f..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,368 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQCheckBox class
-**
-** Created : 940222
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqcheckbox.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqpixmapcache.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqtextstream.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-
-/*!
-    \class TQCheckBox tqcheckbox.h
-    \brief The TQCheckBox widget provides a checkbox with a text label.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    TQCheckBox and TQRadioButton are both option buttons. That is, they
-    can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). The classes
-    differ in how the choices for the user are restricted. Radio
-    buttons define a "one of many" choice, whereas checkboxes provide
-    "many of many" choices.
-
-    A TQButtonGroup can be used to group check buttons visually.
-
-    Whenever a checkbox is checked or cleared it emits the signal
-    toggled(). Connect to this signal if you want to trigger an action
-    each time the checkbox changes state. You can use isChecked() to
-    query whether or not a checkbox is checked.
-
-    \warning The toggled() signal can not be trusted for tristate
-    checkboxes.
-
-    In addition to the usual checked and unchecked states, TQCheckBox
-    optionally provides a third state to indicate "no change". This
-    is useful whenever you need to give the user the option of neither
-    checking nor unchecking a checkbox. If you need this third state,
-    enable it with setTristate() and use state() to query the current
-    toggle state. When a tristate checkbox changes state, it emits the
-    stateChanged() signal.
-
-    Just like TQPushButton, a checkbox can display text or a pixmap.
-    The text can be set in the constructor or with setText(); the
-    pixmap is set with setPixmap().
-
-    \important text(), setText(), text(), pixmap(), setPixmap(),
-    accel(), setAccel(), isToggleButton(), setDown(), isDown(),
-    isOn(), state(), autoRepeat(), isExclusiveToggle(), group(),
-    setAutoRepeat(), toggle(), pressed(), released(), clicked(),
-    toggled(), state() stateChanged()
-
-    <img src=qchkbox-m.png> <img src=qchkbox-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQButton TQRadioButton
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler Fowler: Check Box \endlink
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQCheckBox::checked
-    \brief whether the checkbox is checked
-
-    The default is unchecked, i.e. FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQCheckBox::autoMask
-    \brief whether the checkbox is automatically masked
-
-    \sa TQWidget::setAutoMask()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQCheckBox::tristate
-    \brief whether the checkbox is a tri-state checkbox
-
-    The default is two-state, i.e. tri-state is FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a checkbox with no text.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-	: TQButton( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask )
-{
-    setToggleButton( TRUE );
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a checkbox with text \a text.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQCheckBox::TQCheckBox( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-	: TQButton( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask )
-{
-    setText( text );
-    setToggleButton( TRUE );
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the checkbox to the "no change" state.
-
-    \sa setTristate()
-*/
-void TQCheckBox::setNoChange()
-{
-    setTristate(TRUE);
-    setState( NoChange );
-}
-
-void TQCheckBox::setTristate(bool y)
-{
-    setToggleType( y ? Tristate : Toggle );
-}
-
-bool TQCheckBox::isTristate() const
-{
-    return toggleType() == Tristate;
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQCheckBox::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    // NB: TQRadioButton::tqsizeHint() is similar
-    constPolish();
-
-    TQPainter p(this);
-    TQSize sz = tqstyle().tqitemRect(&p, TQRect(0, 0, 1, 1), TQt::ShowPrefix, FALSE,
-				pixmap(), text()).size();
-
-    return (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_CheckBox, this, sz).
-	    expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut()));
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQCheckBox::drawButton( TQPainter *paint )
-{
-    TQPainter *p = paint;
-    TQRect irect = TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect(TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxIndicator, this), this );
-    const TQColorGroup &cg = tqcolorGroup();
-
-#if !defined( TQT_NO_TEXTSTREAM ) && !defined( TQ_WS_MACX )
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-printf("[WARNING] TQSharedDoubleBuffer double buffering has been disabled\n\r");	// Otherwise the widgets don't repaint properly in Qt4!
-#else // USE_QT4
-#   define  SAVE_CHECKBOX_PIXMAPS
-#endif // USE_QT4
-#endif
-#if defined(SAVE_CHECKBOX_PIXMAPS)
-    TQString pmkey;				// pixmap key
-    int kf = 0;
-    if ( isDown() )
-	kf |= 1;
-    if ( isEnabled() )
-	kf |= 2;
-    if ( hasFocus() )
-	kf |= 4;				// active vs. normal colorgroup
-    if( isActiveWindow() )
-	kf |= 8;
-    if ( hasMouse() )
-	kf |= 16;
-
-    kf |= state() << 5;
-    TQTextOStream os(&pmkey);
-    os << "$qt_check_" << tqstyle().className() << "_"
-       << palette().serialNumber() << "_" << irect.width() << "x" << irect.height() << "_" << kf;
-    TQPixmap *pm = TQPixmapCache::find( pmkey );
-    if ( pm ) {					// pixmap exists
-	p->drawPixmap( irect.topLeft(), *pm );
-	drawButtonLabel( p );
-	return;
-    }
-    bool use_pm = TRUE;
-    TQPainter pmpaint;
-    int wx = 0, wy = 0;
-    if ( use_pm ) {
-	pm = new TQPixmap( irect.size() );	// create new pixmap
-	TQ_CHECK_PTR( pm );
-	pm->fill( cg.background() );
-	TQPainter::redirect(this, pm);
-	pmpaint.begin(this);
-	p = &pmpaint;				// draw in pixmap
-	wx = irect.x();				// save x,y coords
-	wy = irect.y();
-	irect.moveTopLeft(TQPoint(0, 0));
-	p->setBackgroundColor( cg.background() );
-    }
-#endif
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if ( isEnabled() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if ( hasFocus() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if ( isDown() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-    if ( hasMouse() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_MouseOver;
-    if ( state() == TQButton::On )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_On;
-    else if ( state() == TQButton::Off )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Off;
-    else if ( state() == TQButton::NoChange )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_NoChange;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_CheckBox, p, this, irect, cg, flags);
-
-#if defined(SAVE_CHECKBOX_PIXMAPS)
-    if ( use_pm ) {
-	pmpaint.end();
-	TQPainter::redirect( this, 0 );
-	if ( backgroundPixmap() || backgroundMode() == TQt::X11ParentRelative ) {
-	    TQBitmap bm( pm->size() );
-	    bm.fill( Qt::color0 );
-	    pmpaint.begin( &bm );
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawControlMask(TQStyle::CE_CheckBox, &pmpaint, this, irect);
-	    pmpaint.end();
-	    pm->setMask( bm );
-	}
-	p = paint;				// draw in default tqdevice
-	p->drawPixmap( wx, wy, *pm );
-	if (!TQPixmapCache::insert(pmkey, pm) )	// save in cache
-	    delete pm;
-    }
-#endif
-
-    drawButtonLabel( paint );
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-void TQCheckBox::drawButtonLabel( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    TQRect r =
-	TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect(TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxContents, this), this );
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if (isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-    if (state() == TQButton::On)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_On;
-    else if (state() == TQButton::Off)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Off;
-    else if (state() == TQButton::NoChange)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_NoChange;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_CheckBoxLabel, p, this, r, tqcolorGroup(), flags);
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQCheckBox::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    TQButton::resizeEvent(e);
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	TQPainter p(this);
-	TQSize isz = tqstyle().tqitemRect(&p, TQRect(0, 0, 1, 1), TQt::ShowPrefix, FALSE,
-				     pixmap(), text()).size();
-	TQSize wsz = (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_CheckBox, this, isz).
-		     expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut()));
-
-	update(wsz.width(), isz.width(), 0, wsz.height());
-    }
-    if (autoMask())
-	updateMask();
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQCheckBox::updateMask()
-{
-    TQRect irect =
-	TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect(TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxIndicator, this), this );
-
-    TQBitmap bm(width(), height());
-    bm.fill(Qt::color0);
-
-    TQPainter p( &bm, this );
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControlMask(TQStyle::CE_CheckBox, &p, this, irect);
-    if ( ! text().isNull() || ( pixmap() && ! pixmap()->isNull() ) ) {
-	TQRect crect =
-	    TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect( TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxContents,
-						 this ), this );
-	TQRect frect =
-	    TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect( TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxFocusRect,
-						 this ), this );
-	TQRect label(crect.unite(frect));
-	p.fillRect(label, Qt::color1);
-    }
-    p.end();
-
-    setMask(bm);
-}
-
-/*!\reimp*/
-bool TQCheckBox::hitButton( const TQPoint &pos ) const
-{
-    TQRect r = TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect( TQStyle::SR_CheckBoxFocusRect, this ), this );
-    if ( tqApp->reverseLayout() ) {
-	r.setRight( width() );
-    } else {
-	r.setLeft( 0 );
-    }
-    return r.contains( pos );
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 66f0cbb..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcheckbox.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQCheckBox class
-**
-** Created : 940222
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQCHECKBOX_H
-#define TQCHECKBOX_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqbutton.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQCheckBox : public TQButton
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool checked READ isChecked WRITE setChecked )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool tristate READ isTristate WRITE setTristate )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true )
-
-public:
-    TQCheckBox( TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 );
-    TQCheckBox( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 );
-
-    bool    isChecked() const;
-
-    void    setNoChange();
-
-    void    setTristate(bool y=TRUE);
-    bool    isTristate() const;
-
-    TQSize   tqsizeHint() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void    setChecked( bool check );
-
-protected:
-    void    resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* );
-    void    drawButton( TQPainter * );
-    void    drawButtonLabel( TQPainter * );
-    void    updateMask();
-    bool    hitButton( const TQPoint &pos ) const;
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQCheckBox( const TQCheckBox & );
-    TQCheckBox &operator=( const TQCheckBox & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-inline bool TQCheckBox::isChecked() const
-{ return isOn(); }
-
-inline void TQCheckBox::setChecked( bool check )
-{ setOn( check ); }
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-
-#endif // TQCHECKBOX_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index f934485..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2338 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQComboBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 940426
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqcombobox.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMBOBOX
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqlistbox.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqstrlist.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqlineedit.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqeffects_p.h"
-#include "tqstringlist.h"
-#include "tqcombobox.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include <limits.h>
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \class TQComboBox tqcombobox.h
-    \brief The TQComboBox widget is a combined button and popup list.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    A combobox is a selection widget which displays the current item
-    and can pop up a list of items. A combobox may be editable in
-    which case the user can enter arbitrary strings.
-
-    Comboboxes provide a means of showing the user's current choice
-    out of a list of options in a way that takes up the minimum amount
-    of screen space.
-
-    TQComboBox supports three different display styles: Aqua/Motif 1.x,
-    Motif 2.0 and Windows. In Motif 1.x, a combobox was called
-    XmOptionMenu. In Motif 2.0, OSF introduced an improved combobox
-    and named that XmComboBox. TQComboBox provides both.
-
-    TQComboBox provides two different constructors. The simplest
-    constructor creates an "old-style" combobox in Motif (or Aqua)
-    style:
-    \code
-	TQComboBox *c = new TQComboBox( this, "read-only combobox" );
-    \endcode
-
-    The other constructor creates a new-style combobox in Motif style,
-    and can create both read-only and editable comboboxes:
-    \code
-	TQComboBox *c1 = new TQComboBox( FALSE, this, "read-only combobox" );
-	TQComboBox *c2 = new TQComboBox( TRUE, this, "editable combobox" );
-    \endcode
-
-    New-style comboboxes use a list box in both Motif and Windows
-    styles, and both the content size and the on-screen size of the
-    list box can be limited with sizeLimit() and setMaxCount()
-    respectively. Old-style comboboxes use a popup in Aqua and Motif
-    style, and that popup will happily grow larger than the desktop if
-    you put enough data into it.
-
-    The two constructors create identical-looking comboboxes in
-    Windows style.
-
-    Comboboxes can contain pixmaps as well as strings; the
-    insertItem() and changeItem() functions are suitably overloaded.
-    For editable comboboxes, the function clearEdit() is provided,
-    to clear the displayed string without changing the combobox's
-    contents.
-
-    A combobox emits two Q_SIGNALS, activated() and highlighted(), when
-    a new item has been activated (selected) or highlighted (made
-    current). Both Q_SIGNALS exist in two versions, one with a \c
-    TQString argument and one with an \c int argument. If the user
-    highlights or activates a pixmap, only the \c int Q_SIGNALS are
-    emitted. Whenever the text of an editable combobox is changed the
-    textChanged() signal is emitted.
-
-    When the user enters a new string in an editable combobox, the
-    widget may or may not insert it, and it can insert it in several
-    locations. The default policy is is \c AtBottom but you can change
-    this using setInsertionPolicy().
-
-    It is possible to constrain the input to an editable combobox
-    using TQValidator; see setValidator(). By default, any input is
-    accepted.
-
-    If the combobox is not editable then it has a default
-    focusPolicy() of \c TabFocus, i.e. it will not grab focus if
-    clicked. This differs from both Windows and Motif. If the combobox
-    is editable then it has a default focusPolicy() of \c StrongFocus,
-    i.e. it will grab focus if clicked.
-
-    A combobox can be populated using the insert functions,
-    insertStringList() and insertItem() for example. Items can be
-    changed with changeItem(). An item can be removed with
-    removeItem() and all items can be removed with clear(). The text
-    of the current item is returned by currentText(), and the text of
-    a numbered item is returned with text(). The current item can be
-    set with setCurrentItem() or setCurrentText(). The number of items
-    in the combobox is returned by count(); the maximum number of
-    items can be set with setMaxCount(). You can allow editing using
-    setEditable(). For editable comboboxes you can set auto-completion
-    using setAutoCompletion() and whether or not the user can add
-    duplicates is set with setDuplicatesEnabled().
-
-    <img src="qcombo1-m.png">(Motif 1, read-only)<br clear=all>
-    <img src="qcombo2-m.png">(Motif 2, editable)<br clear=all>
-    <img src="qcombo3-m.png">(Motif 2, read-only)<br clear=all>
-    <img src="qcombo1-w.png">(Windows style)
-
-    Depending on the style, TQComboBox will use a TQListBox or a
-    TQPopupMenu to display the list of items. See setListBox() for
-    more information.
-
-    \sa TQLineEdit TQListBox TQSpinBox TQRadioButton TQButtonGroup
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Combo Box,\endlink
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Drop-Down List Box.\endlink
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQComboBox::Policy
-
-    This enum specifies what the TQComboBox should do when a new string
-    is entered by the user.
-
-    \value NoInsertion the string will not be inserted into the
-    combobox.
-
-    \value AtTop insert the string as the first item in the combobox.
-
-    \value AtCurrent replace the previously selected item with the
-    string the user has entered.
-
-    \value AtBottom insert the string as the last item in the
-    combobox.
-
-    \value AfterCurrent insert the string after the previously
-    selected item.
-
-    \value BeforeCurrent insert the string before the previously
-    selected item.
-
-    activated() is always emitted when the string is entered.
-
-    If inserting the new string would cause the combobox to breach its
-    content size limit, the item at the other end of the list is
-    deleted. The definition of "other end" is
-    implementation-dependent.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQComboBox::activated( int index )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a new item has been activated
-    (selected). The \a index is the position of the item in the
-    combobox.
-
-    This signal is not emitted if the item is changed
-    programmatically, e.g. using setCurrentItem().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \overload void TQComboBox::activated( const TQString &string )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a new item has been activated
-    (selected). \a string is the selected string.
-
-    You can also use the activated(int) signal, but be aware that its
-    argument is meaningful only for selected strings, not for user
-    entered strings.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQComboBox::highlighted( int index )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a new item has been set to be the
-    current item. The \a index is the position of the item in the
-    combobox.
-
-    This signal is not emitted if the item is changed
-    programmatically, e.g. using setCurrentItem().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \overload void TQComboBox::highlighted( const TQString &string )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a new item has been set to be the
-    current item. \a string is the item's text.
-
-    You can also use the highlighted(int) signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQComboBox::textChanged( const TQString &string )
-
-    This signal is used for editable comboboxes. It is emitted
-    whenever the contents of the text entry field changes. \a string
-    contains the new text.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQComboBox::autoCompletion
-    \brief whether auto-completion is enabled
-
-    This property can only be set for editable comboboxes, for
-    non-editable comboboxes it has no effect. It is FALSE by default.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQComboBox::autoMask
-    \brief whether the combobox is automatically masked
-
-    \sa TQWidget::setAutoMask()
-*/
-
-/*! \property TQComboBox::autoResize
-    \brief whether auto resize is enabled
-    \obsolete
-
-  If this property is set to TRUE then the combobox will resize itself
-  whenever its contents change. The default is FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQComboBox::count
-    \brief the number of items in the combobox
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQComboBox::currentItem
-    \brief the index of the current item in the combobox
-
-    Note that the activated() and highlighted() Q_SIGNALS are only
-    emitted when the user changes the current item, not when it is
-    changed programmatically.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQComboBox::currentText
-    \brief the text of the combobox's current item
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQComboBox::duplicatesEnabled
-    \brief whether duplicates are allowed
-
-    If the combobox is editable and the user enters some text in the
-    combobox's lineedit and presses Enter (and the insertionPolicy()
-    is not \c NoInsertion), then what happens is this:
-    \list
-    \i If the text is not already in the list, the text is inserted.
-    \i If the text is in the list and this property is TRUE (the
-    default), the text is inserted.
-    \i If the text is in the list and this property is FALSE, the text
-    is \e not inserted; instead the item which has matching text becomes
-    the current item.
-    \endlist
-
-    This property only affects user-interaction. You can use
-    insertItem() to insert duplicates if you wish regardless of this
-    setting.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQComboBox::editable
-    \brief whether the combobox is editable
-
-    This property's default is FALSE. Note that the combobox will be
-    cleared if this property is set to TRUE for a 1.x Motif style
-    combobox. To avoid this, use setEditable() before inserting any
-    items. Also note that the 1.x version of Motif didn't have any
-    editable comboboxes, so the combobox will change it's appearance
-    to a 2.0 style Motif combobox is it is set to be editable.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQComboBox::insertionPolicy
-    \brief the position of the items inserted by the user
-
-    The default insertion policy is \c AtBottom. See \l Policy.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQComboBox::maxCount
-    \brief the maximum number of items allowed in the combobox
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQComboBox::sizeLimit
-    \brief the maximum on-screen size of the combobox.
-
-    This property is ignored for both Motif 1.x style and non-editable
-    comboboxes in Mac style. The default limit is ten
-    lines. If the number of items in the combobox is or grows larger
-    than lines, a scrollbar is added.
-*/
-
-class TQComboBoxPopup : public TQPopupMenu
-{
-public:
-    TQComboBoxPopup( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0 )
-	: TQPopupMenu( parent, name )
-    {
-    }
-
-    int itemHeight( int index )
-    {
-	return TQPopupMenu::itemHeight( index );
-    }
-};
-
-static inline TQString escapedComboString(const TQString &str)
-{
-    TQString stringToReturn = str;
-    return stringToReturn.replace('&', "&&");
-}
-
-class TQComboBoxPopupItem : public TQCustomMenuItem
-{
-    TQListBoxItem *li;
-    TQSize sc; // Size cache optimization
-public:
-    TQComboBoxPopupItem(TQListBoxItem *i) : TQCustomMenuItem(), li(i), sc(0, 0) {  }
-    virtual bool fullSpan() const { return TRUE; }
-    virtual void paint( TQPainter*, const TQColorGroup&, bool, bool, int, int, int, int);
-    virtual TQSize tqsizeHint() { if (sc.isNull()) sc = TQSize(li->width(li->listBox()), TQMAX(25, li->height(li->listBox()))); return sc; }
-};
-void TQComboBoxPopupItem::paint( TQPainter* p, const TQColorGroup&, bool,
-				bool, int x, int y, int, int)
-{
-    p->save();
-    p->translate(x, y + ((tqsizeHint().height() / 2) - (li->height(li->listBox()) / 2)));
-    li->paint(p);
-    p->restore();
-}
-
-
-class TQComboBoxData
-{
-public:
-    TQComboBoxData( TQComboBox *cb ): ed( 0 ), usingLBox( FALSE ), pop( 0 ), lBox( 0 ), combo( cb )
-    {
-	duplicatesEnabled = TRUE;
-	cb->tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-    }
-
-    inline bool usingListBox()  { return usingLBox; }
-    inline TQListBox * listBox() { return lBox; }
-    inline TQComboBoxPopup * popup() { return pop; }
-    void updateLinedGeometry();
-    void setListBox( TQListBox *l );
-    void setPopupMenu( TQComboBoxPopup * pm, bool isPopup=TRUE );
-
-    int		current;
-    int		maxCount;
-    int		sizeLimit;
-    TQComboBox::Policy p;
-    bool	autoresize;
-    bool	poppedUp;
-    bool	mouseWasInsidePopup;
-    bool	arrowPressed;
-    bool	arrowDown;
-    bool	discardNextMousePress;
-    bool	shortClick;
-    bool	useCompletion;
-    bool	completeNow;
-    int		completeAt;
-    bool duplicatesEnabled;
-    int fullHeight, currHeight;
-
-    TQLineEdit * ed;  // /bin/ed rules!
-    TQTimer *completionTimer;
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint;
-
-private:
-    bool	usingLBox;
-    TQComboBoxPopup *pop;
-    TQListBox   *lBox;
-    TQComboBox *combo;
-
-};
-
-void TQComboBoxData::updateLinedGeometry()
-{
-    if ( !ed || !combo )
-	return;
-    TQRect r = TQStyle::tqvisualRect( combo->tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ComboBox, combo,
-								       TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxEditField), combo );
-
-    const TQPixmap *pix = current < combo->count() ? combo->pixmap( current ) : 0;
-    if ( pix && pix->width() < r.width() )
-	r.setLeft( r.left() + pix->width() + 4 );
-    if ( r != ed->tqgeometry() )
-	ed->setGeometry( r );
-}
-
-void TQComboBoxData::setListBox( TQListBox *l )
-{
-    lBox = l;
-    usingLBox = TRUE;
-    l->setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-#ifdef TQ_WS_X11
-    l->x11SetWindowType( TQWidget::X11WindowTypeCombo );
-    l->x11SetWindowTransient( combo->tqtopLevelWidget());
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQComboBoxData::setPopupMenu( TQComboBoxPopup * pm, bool isPopup )
-{
-    pop = pm;
-    if(isPopup)
-        usingLBox = FALSE;
-#ifdef TQ_WS_X11
-    if( pm ) {
-        pm->x11SetWindowType( TQWidget::X11WindowTypeCombo );
-        pm->x11SetWindowTransient( combo->tqtopLevelWidget());
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-static inline bool checkInsertIndex( const char *method, const char * name,
-				     int count, int *index)
-{
-    bool range_err = (*index > count);
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_RANGE)
-    if ( range_err )
-	qWarning( "TQComboBox::%s: (%s) Index %d out of range",
-		 method, name ? name : "<no name>", *index );
-#else
-    TQ_UNUSED( method )
-    TQ_UNUSED( name )
-#endif
-    if ( *index < 0 )				// append
-	*index = count;
-    return !range_err;
-}
-
-
-static inline bool checkIndex( const char *method, const char * name,
-			       int count, int index )
-{
-    bool range_err = (index >= count);
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_RANGE)
-    if ( range_err )
-	qWarning( "TQComboBox::%s: (%s) Index %i out of range",
-		 method, name ? name : "<no name>", index );
-#else
-    TQ_UNUSED( method )
-    TQ_UNUSED( name )
-#endif
-    return !range_err;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a combobox widget with parent \a parent called \a name.
-
-    This constructor creates a popup list if the program uses Motif
-    (or Aqua) look and feel; this is compatible with Motif 1.x and
-    Aqua.
-
-    Note: If you use this constructor to create your TQComboBox, then
-    the pixmap() function will always return 0. To workaround this,
-    use the other constructor.
-
-*/
-
-
-
-TQComboBox::TQComboBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase )
-{
-    d = new TQComboBoxData( this );
-    if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this) ||
-	 tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle) == TQt::MotifStyle ) {
-	d->setPopupMenu( new TQComboBoxPopup( this, "in-combo" ) );
-	d->popup()->setFont( font() );
-	connect( d->popup(), TQT_SIGNAL(activated(int)),
-			     TQT_SLOT(internalActivate(int)) );
-	connect( d->popup(), TQT_SIGNAL(highlighted(int)),
-			     TQT_SLOT(internalHighlight(int)) );
-    } else {
-	setUpListBox();
-    }
-    d->ed                    = 0;
-    d->current               = 0;
-    d->maxCount              = INT_MAX;
-    d->sizeLimit	     = 10;
-    d->p                     = AtBottom;
-    d->autoresize            = FALSE;
-    d->poppedUp              = FALSE;
-    d->arrowDown             = FALSE;
-    d->arrowPressed          = FALSE;
-    d->discardNextMousePress = FALSE;
-    d->shortClick            = FALSE;
-    d->useCompletion         = FALSE;
-    d->completeAt            = 0;
-    d->completeNow           = FALSE;
-    d->completionTimer       = new TQTimer( this );
-
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::TabFocus );
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteButton );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a combobox with a maximum size and either Motif 2.0 or
-    Windows look and feel.
-
-    The input field can be edited if \a rw is TRUE, otherwise the user
-    may only choose one of the items in the combobox.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-
-TQComboBox::TQComboBox( bool rw, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase )
-{
-    d = new TQComboBoxData( this );
-    setUpListBox();
-
-    if(d->popup() && tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this))
-	d->popup()->setItemChecked(d->current, FALSE);
-    d->current = 0;
-    d->maxCount = INT_MAX;
-    setSizeLimit(10);
-    d->p = AtBottom;
-    d->autoresize = FALSE;
-    d->poppedUp = FALSE;
-    d->arrowDown = FALSE;
-    d->discardNextMousePress = FALSE;
-    d->shortClick = FALSE;
-    d->useCompletion = FALSE;
-    d->completeAt = 0;
-    d->completeNow = FALSE;
-    d->completionTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::StrongFocus );
-
-    d->ed = 0;
-    if ( rw )
-	setUpLineEdit();
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteButton, TQt::PaletteBase );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the combobox.
-*/
-
-TQComboBox::~TQComboBox()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-void TQComboBox::setDuplicatesEnabled( bool enable )
-{
-   d->duplicatesEnabled = enable;
-}
-
-bool TQComboBox::duplicatesEnabled() const
-{
-    return d->duplicatesEnabled;
-}
-
-int TQComboBox::count() const
-{
-    if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	return d->listBox()->count();
-    else
-	return d->popup()->count();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts the \a list of strings at position \a index in the
-    combobox.
-
-    This is only for compatibility since it does not support Unicode
-    strings. See insertStringList().
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::insertStrList( const TQStrList &list, int index )
-{
-    insertStrList( &list, index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts the \a list of strings at position \a index in the
-    combobox.
-
-    This is only for compatibility since it does not support Unicode
-    strings. See insertStringList().
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::insertStrList( const TQStrList *list, int index )
-{
-    if ( !list ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL)
-	TQ_ASSERT( list != 0 );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-    TQStrListIterator it( *list );
-    const char* tmp;
-    if ( index < 0 )
-	index = count();
-    while ( (tmp=it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	    d->listBox()->insertItem( TQString::tqfromLatin1(tmp), index );
-	else
-	    d->popup()->insertItem( escapedComboString(TQString::tqfromLatin1(tmp)), index, index );
-	if ( index++ == d->current && d->current < count() ) {
-	    if ( d->ed ) {
-		d->ed->setText( text( d->current ) );
-		d->updateLinedGeometry();
-	    } else
-		update();
-	    currentChanged();
-	}
-    }
-    if ( index != count() )
-	reIndex();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inserts the \a list of strings at position \a index in the
-    combobox.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::insertStringList( const TQStringList &list, int index )
-{
-    TQStringList::ConstIterator it = list.begin();
-    if ( index < 0 )
-	index = count();
-    while ( it != list.end() ) {
-	if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	    d->listBox()->insertItem( *it, index );
-	else
-	    d->popup()->insertItem( escapedComboString(*it), index, index );
-	if ( index++ == d->current && d->current < count() ) {
-	    if ( d->ed ) {
-		d->ed->setText( text( d->current ) );
-		d->updateLinedGeometry();
-	    } else
-		update();
-	    currentChanged();
-	}
-	++it;
-    }
-    if ( index != count() )
-	reIndex();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inserts the array of char * \a strings at position \a index in the
-    combobox.
-
-    The \a numStrings argument is the number of strings. If \a
-    numStrings is -1 (default), the \a strings array must be
-    terminated with 0.
-
-    Example:
-    \code
-	static const char* items[] = { "red", "green", "blue", 0 };
-	combo->insertStrList( items );
-    \endcode
-
-    \sa insertStringList()
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::insertStrList( const char **strings, int numStrings, int index)
-{
-    if ( !strings ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL)
-	TQ_ASSERT( strings != 0 );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( index < 0 )
-	index = count();
-    int i = 0;
-    while ( (numStrings<0 && strings[i]!=0) || i<numStrings ) {
-	if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	    d->listBox()->insertItem( TQString::tqfromLatin1(strings[i]), index );
-	else
-	    d->popup()->insertItem( escapedComboString(TQString::tqfromLatin1(strings[i])), index, index );
-	i++;
-	if ( index++ == d->current && d->current < count()  ) {
-	    if ( d->ed ) {
-		d->ed->setText( text( d->current ) );
-		d->updateLinedGeometry();
-	    } else
-		update();
-	    currentChanged();
-	}
-    }
-    if ( index != count() )
-	reIndex();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Inserts a text item with text \a t, at position \a index. The item
-    will be appended if \a index is negative.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::insertItem( const TQString &t, int index )
-{
-    int cnt = count();
-    if ( !checkInsertIndex( "insertItem", name(), cnt, &index ) )
-	return;
-    if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	d->listBox()->insertItem( t, index );
-    else
-	d->popup()->insertItem( escapedComboString(t), index, index );
-    if ( index != cnt )
-	reIndex();
-    if ( index == d->current && d->current < count()  ) {
-	if ( d->ed ) {
-	    d->ed->setText( text( d->current ) );
-	    d->updateLinedGeometry();
-	} else
-	    update();
-    }
-    if ( index == d->current )
-	currentChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a \a pixmap item at position \a index. The item will be
-    appended if \a index is negative.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::insertItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int index )
-{
-    int cnt = count();
-    if ( !checkInsertIndex( "insertItem", name(), cnt, &index ) )
-	return;
-    if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	d->listBox()->insertItem( pixmap, index );
-    else
-	d->popup()->insertItem( pixmap, index, index );
-    if ( index != cnt )
-	reIndex();
-    if ( index == d->current && d->current < count()  ) {
-	if ( d->ed ) {
-	    d->ed->setText( text( d->current ) );
-	    d->updateLinedGeometry();
-	} else
-	    update();
-    }
-    if ( index == d->current )
-	currentChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a \a pixmap item with additional text \a text at position
-    \a index. The item will be appended if \a index is negative.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::insertItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, const TQString& text, int index )
-{
-    int cnt = count();
-    if ( !checkInsertIndex( "insertItem", name(), cnt, &index ) )
-	return;
-    if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	d->listBox()->insertItem( pixmap, text, index );
-    else
-	d->popup()->insertItem( pixmap, escapedComboString(text), index, index );
-    if ( index != cnt )
-	reIndex();
-    if ( index == d->current && d->current < count()  ) {
-	if ( d->ed ) {
-	    d->ed->setText( this->text( d->current ) );
-	    d->updateLinedGeometry();
-	} else
-	    update();
-    }
-    if ( index == d->current )
-	currentChanged();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes the item at position \a index.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::removeItem( int index )
-{
-    int cnt = count();
-    if ( !checkIndex( "removeItem", name(), cnt, index ) )
-	return;
-    if ( d->usingListBox() ) {
-	if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this) && d->popup() )
-	    d->popup()->removeItemAt( index );
-	d->listBox()->removeItem( index );
-    } else {
-	d->popup()->removeItemAt( index );
-    }
-    if ( index != cnt-1 )
-	reIndex();
-    if ( index == d->current ) {
-	if ( d->ed ) {
-	    TQString s = TQString::tqfromLatin1("");
-	    if (d->current < cnt - 1)
-		s = text( d->current );
-	    d->ed->setText( s );
-	    d->updateLinedGeometry();
-	}
-	else {
-	    if ( d->usingListBox() ) {
-		d->current = d->listBox()->currentItem();
-	    } else {
-		if (d->current > count()-1 && d->current > 0)
-		    d->current--;
-	    }
-	    update();
-	}
-	currentChanged();
-    }
-    else {
-	if ( !d->ed ) {
-	    if (d->current < cnt - 1)
-		setCurrentItem( d->current );
-	    else
-		setCurrentItem( d->current - 1 );
-	}
-    }
-
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes all combobox items.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::clear()
-{
-    if ( d->usingListBox() ) {
-	if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this) && d->popup() )
-	    d->popup()->clear();
-	d->listBox()->resize( 0, 0 );
-	d->listBox()->clear();
-    } else {
-	d->popup()->clear();
-    }
-
-    if(d->popup() && tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this))
-	d->popup()->setItemChecked(d->current, FALSE);
-    d->current = 0;
-    if ( d->ed ) {
-	d->ed->setText( TQString::tqfromLatin1("") );
-	d->updateLinedGeometry();
-    }
-    currentChanged();
-}
-
-
-TQString TQComboBox::currentText() const
-{
-    if ( d->ed )
-	return d->ed->text();
-    else if ( d->current < count() )
-	return text( currentItem() );
-    else
-	return TQString::null;
-}
-
-void TQComboBox::setCurrentText( const TQString& txt )
-{
-    int i;
-    for ( i = 0; i < count(); i++)
-	if ( text( i ) == txt )
-	    break;
-    if ( i < count() )
-	setCurrentItem( i );
-    else if ( d->ed )
-	d->ed->setText( txt );
-    else
-	changeItem( txt, currentItem() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the text item at position \a index, or TQString::null if
-    the item is not a string.
-
-    \sa currentText()
-*/
-
-TQString TQComboBox::text( int index ) const
-{
-    if ( !checkIndex( "text", name(), count(), index ) )
-	return TQString::null;
-    if ( d->usingListBox() ) {
-	return d->listBox()->text( index );
-    } else {
-        TQString retText = d->popup()->text(index);
-        retText.replace("&&", "&");
-	return retText;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the pixmap item at position \a index, or 0 if the item is
-    not a pixmap.
-*/
-
-const TQPixmap *TQComboBox::pixmap( int index ) const
-{
-    if ( !checkIndex( "pixmap", name(), count(), index ) )
-	return 0;
-    if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	return d->listBox()->pixmap( index );
-    else
-	return d->popup()->pixmap( index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Replaces the item at position \a index with the text \a t.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::changeItem( const TQString &t, int index )
-{
-    if ( !checkIndex( "changeItem", name(), count(), index ) )
-	return;
-    if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	d->listBox()->changeItem( t, index );
-    else
-	d->popup()->changeItem( t, index );
-    if ( index == d->current ) {
-	if ( d->ed ) {
-	    d->ed->setText( text( d->current ) );
-	    d->updateLinedGeometry();
-	} else
-	    update();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Replaces the item at position \a index with the pixmap \a im,
-    unless the combobox is editable.
-
-    \sa insertItem()
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::changeItem( const TQPixmap &im, int index )
-{
-    if ( !checkIndex( "changeItem", name(), count(), index ) )
-	return;
-    if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	d->listBox()->changeItem( im, index );
-    else
-	d->popup()->changeItem( im, index );
-    if ( index == d->current )
-	update();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Replaces the item at position \a index with the pixmap \a im and
-    the text \a t.
-
-    \sa insertItem()
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::changeItem( const TQPixmap &im, const TQString &t, int index )
-{
-    if ( !checkIndex( "changeItem", name(), count(), index ) )
-	return;
-    if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	d->listBox()->changeItem( im, t, index );
-    else
-	d->popup()->changeItem( im, t, index );
-    if ( index == d->current )
-	update();
-}
-
-
-int TQComboBox::currentItem() const
-{
-    return d->current;
-}
-
-void TQComboBox::setCurrentItem( int index )
-{
-    if ( index == d->current && !d->ed ) {
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( !checkIndex( "setCurrentItem", name(), count(), index ) ) {
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( d->usingListBox() && !( listBox()->item(index) && listBox()->item(index)->isSelectable() ) )
-	return;
-
-    if(d->popup() && tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this))
-	d->popup()->setItemChecked(d->current, FALSE);
-    d->current = index;
-    d->completeAt = 0;
-    if ( d->ed ) {
-	d->ed->setText( text( index ) );
-	d->updateLinedGeometry();
-    }
-    // ### We want to keep ListBox's currentItem in sync, even if NOT popuped...
-    if ( d->usingListBox() && d->listBox() ) {
-	d->listBox()->setCurrentItem( index );
-    } else {
-	internalHighlight( index );
-	// internalActivate( index ); ### this leads to weird behavior, as in 3.0.1
-    }
-
-    currentChanged();
-}
-
-bool TQComboBox::autoResize() const
-{
-    return d->autoresize;
-}
-
-void TQComboBox::setAutoResize( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( (bool)d->autoresize != enable ) {
-	d->autoresize = enable;
-	if ( enable )
-	    adjustSize();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-
-    This implementation caches the size hint to avoid resizing when
-    the contents change dynamically. To tqinvalidate the cached value
-    call setFont().
-*/
-TQSize TQComboBox::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( isVisible() && d->tqsizeHint.isValid() )
-	return d->tqsizeHint;
-
-    constPolish();
-    int i, w;
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-
-    int maxW = count() ? 18 : 7 * fm.width(TQChar('x')) + 18;
-    int maxH = TQMAX( fm.lineSpacing(), 14 ) + 2;
-
-    if ( !d->usingListBox() ) {
-	w = d->popup()->tqsizeHint().width() - 2* d->popup()->frameWidth();
-	if ( w > maxW )
-	    maxW = w;
-    } else {
-	for( i = 0; i < count(); i++ ) {
-	    w = d->listBox()->item( i )->width( d->listBox() );
-	    if ( w > maxW )
-		maxW = w;
-	}
-    }
-
-    d->tqsizeHint = (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_ComboBox, this,
-					    TQSize(maxW, maxH)).
-		   expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut()));
-
-    return d->tqsizeHint;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Receives activated Q_SIGNALS from an internal popup list and emits
-  the activated() signal.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::internalActivate( int index )
-{
-    if ( d->current != index ) {
-	if ( !d->usingListBox() || listBox()->item( index )->isSelectable() ) {
-	    if(d->popup() && tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this))
-		d->popup()->setItemChecked(d->current, FALSE);
-	    d->current = index;
-	    currentChanged();
-	}
-    }
-    if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	popDownListBox();
-    else
-	d->popup()->removeEventFilter( this );
-    d->poppedUp = FALSE;
-
-    TQString t( text( index ) );
-    if ( d->ed ) {
-	d->ed->setText( t );
-	d->updateLinedGeometry();
-    }
-    emit activated( index );
-    emit activated( t );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Receives highlighted Q_SIGNALS from an internal popup list and emits
-  the highlighted() signal.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::internalHighlight( int index )
-{
-    emit highlighted( index );
-    TQString t = text( index );
-    if ( !t.isNull() )
-	emit highlighted( t );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Receives timeouts after a click. Used to decide if a Motif style
-  popup should stay up or not after a click.
-*/
-void TQComboBox::internalClickTimeout()
-{
-    d->shortClick = FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the palette for both the combobox button and the combobox
-    popup list to \a palette.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::setPalette( const TQPalette &palette )
-{
-    TQWidget::setPalette( palette );
-    if ( d->listBox() )
-	d->listBox()->setPalette( palette );
-    if ( d->popup() )
-	d->popup()->setPalette( palette );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the font for both the combobox button and the combobox popup
-    list to \a font.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::setFont( const TQFont &font )
-{
-    d->tqsizeHint = TQSize();		// tqinvalidate size hint
-    TQWidget::setFont( font );
-    if ( d->usingListBox() )
-	d->listBox()->setFont( font );
-    else
-	d->popup()->setFont( font );
-    if (d->ed)
-	d->ed->setFont( font );
-    if ( d->autoresize )
-	adjustSize();
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( d->ed )
-	d->updateLinedGeometry();
-    if ( d->listBox() )
-	d->listBox()->resize( width(), d->listBox()->height() );
-    TQWidget::resizeEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-{
-    TQPainter p( this );
-    const TQColorGroup & g = tqcolorGroup();
-    p.setPen(g.text());
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-
-    if ( width() < 5 || height() < 5 ) {
-	qDrawShadePanel( &p, rect(), g, FALSE, 2,
-			 &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    bool reverse = TQApplication::reverseLayout();
-    if ( !d->usingListBox() &&
-	 tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle) == TQt::MotifStyle) {			// motif 1.x style
-	int dist, buttonH, buttonW;
-	dist     = 8;
-	buttonH  = 7;
-	buttonW  = 11;
-	int xPos;
-	int x0;
-	int w = width() - dist - buttonW - 1;
-	if ( reverse ) {
-	    xPos = dist + 1;
-	    x0 = xPos + 4;
-	} else {
-	    xPos = w;
-	    x0 = 4;
-	}
-	qDrawShadePanel( &p, rect(), g, FALSE,
-			 tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth, this),
-			 &g.brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) );
-	qDrawShadePanel( &p, xPos, (height() - buttonH)/2,
-			 buttonW, buttonH, g, FALSE,
-			 tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth, this) );
-	TQRect clip( x0, 2, w - 2 - 4 - 5, height() - 4 );
-	TQString str = d->popup()->text( this->d->current );
-	if ( !str.isNull() ) {
-	    p.drawText( clip, TQt::AlignCenter | TQt::SingleLine, str );
-	}
-
-	TQPixmap *pix = d->popup()->pixmap( this->d->current );
-	TQIconSet *iconSet = d->popup()->iconSet( this->d->current );
-	if (pix || iconSet) {
-	    TQPixmap pm = ( pix ? *pix : iconSet->pixmap() );
-	    p.setClipRect( clip );
-	    p.drawPixmap( 4, (height()-pm.height())/2, pm );
-	    p.setClipping( FALSE );
-	}
-
-	if ( hasFocus() )
-	    p.drawRect( xPos - 5, 4, width() - xPos + 1 , height() - 8 );
-    } else if(!d->usingListBox()) {
-	tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl( TQStyle::CC_ComboBox, &p, this, rect(), g,
-				    flags, (uint)TQStyle::SC_All,
-				    (d->arrowDown ?
-				     TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxArrow :
-				     TQStyle::SC_None ));
-
-	TQRect re = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics( TQStyle::CC_ComboBox, this,
-						   TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxEditField );
-	re = TQStyle::tqvisualRect(re, this);
-	p.setClipRect( re );
-
-	TQString str = d->popup()->text( this->d->current );
-	TQPixmap *pix = d->popup()->pixmap( this->d->current );
-	if ( !str.isNull() ) {
-	    p.save();
-	    p.setFont(font());
-	    TQFontMetrics fm(font());
-	    int x = re.x(), y = re.y() + fm.ascent();
-	    if( pix )
-		x += pix->width() + 5;
-	    p.drawText( x, y, str );
-	    p.restore();
-	}
-	if ( pix ) {
-	    p.fillRect( re.x(), re.y(), pix->width() + 4, re.height(),
-			tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Base ) );
-	    p.drawPixmap( re.x() + 2, re.y() +
-			  ( re.height() - pix->height() ) / 2, *pix );
-	}
-    } else {
-	tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl( TQStyle::CC_ComboBox, &p, this, rect(), g,
-				    flags, (uint)TQStyle::SC_All,
-				    (d->arrowDown ?
-				     TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxArrow :
-				     TQStyle::SC_None ));
-
-	TQRect re = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics( TQStyle::CC_ComboBox, this,
-						   TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxEditField );
-	re = TQStyle::tqvisualRect(re, this);
-	p.setClipRect( re );
-
-	if ( !d->ed ) {
-	    TQListBoxItem * item = d->listBox()->item( d->current );
-	    if ( item ) {
-		int itemh = item->height( d->listBox() );
-		p.translate( re.x(), re.y() + (re.height() - itemh)/2  );
-		item->paint( &p );
-	    }
-	} else if ( d->listBox() && d->listBox()->item( d->current ) ) {
-	    TQListBoxItem * item = d->listBox()->item( d->current );
-	    const TQPixmap *pix = item->pixmap();
-	    if ( pix ) {
-		p.fillRect( re.x(), re.y(), pix->width() + 4, re.height(),
-			    tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Base ) );
-		p.drawPixmap( re.x() + 2, re.y() +
-			      ( re.height() - pix->height() ) / 2, *pix );
-	    }
-	}
-	p.setClipping( FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-    if ( d->discardNextMousePress ) {
-	d->discardNextMousePress = FALSE;
-	return;
-    }
-    TQRect arrowRect = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics( TQStyle::CC_ComboBox, this,
-						      TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxArrow);
-    arrowRect = TQStyle::tqvisualRect(arrowRect, this);
-
-    // Correction for motif style, where arrow is smaller
-    // and thus has a rect that doesn't fit the button.
-    arrowRect.setHeight( TQMAX(  height() - (2 * arrowRect.y()), arrowRect.height() ) );
-
-    if ( count() && ( !editable() || arrowRect.contains( e->pos() ) ) ) {
-	d->arrowPressed = FALSE;
-
-	if ( d->usingListBox() ) {
-	    listBox()->blockSignals( TRUE );
-	    tqApp->sendEvent( listBox(), e ); // trigger the listbox's autoscroll
-	    listBox()->setCurrentItem(d->current);
-	    listBox()->blockSignals( FALSE );
-	    popup();
-	    if ( arrowRect.contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-		d->arrowPressed = TRUE;
-		d->arrowDown    = TRUE;
-		tqrepaint( FALSE );
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    popup();
-	}
-	TQTimer::singleShot( 200, this, TQT_SLOT(internalClickTimeout()));
-	d->shortClick = TRUE;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
-{
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
-{
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    mousePressEvent( e );
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    int c = currentItem();
-    if ( ( e->key() == Qt::Key_F4 && e->state() == 0 ) ||
-	 ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Down && (e->state() & TQt::AltButton) ) ||
-	 ( !d->ed && e->key() == Qt::Key_Space ) ) {
-	if ( count() ) {
-	    if ( !d->usingListBox() )
-		d->popup()->setActiveItem( this->d->current );
-	    popup();
-	}
-	return;
-    } else if ( d->usingListBox() && e->key() == Qt::Key_Up ) {
-	if ( c > 0 )
-	    setCurrentItem( c-1 );
-    } else if ( d->usingListBox() && e->key() == Qt::Key_Down ) {
-	if ( ++c < count() )
-	    setCurrentItem( c );
-    } else if ( d->usingListBox() && e->key() == Qt::Key_Home && ( !d->ed || !d->ed->hasFocus() ) ) {
-	setCurrentItem( 0 );
-    } else if ( d->usingListBox() && e->key() == Qt::Key_End && ( !d->ed || !d->ed->hasFocus() ) ) {
-	setCurrentItem( count()-1 );
-    } else if ( !d->ed && e->ascii() >= 32 && !e->text().isEmpty() ) {
-	if ( !d->completionTimer->isActive() ) {
-	    d->completeAt = 0;
-	    c = completionIndex( e->text(), ++c );
-	    if ( c >= 0 ) {
-		setCurrentItem( c );
-		d->completeAt = e->text().length();
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    d->completionTimer->stop();
-	    TQString ct = currentText().left( d->completeAt ) + e->text();
-	    c = completionIndex( ct, c );
-	    if ( c < 0 && d->completeAt > 0 ) {
-		c = completionIndex( e->text(), 0 );
-		ct = e->text();
-	    }
-	    d->completeAt = 0;
-	    if ( c >= 0 ) {
-		setCurrentItem( c );
-		d->completeAt = ct.length();
-	    }
-	}
-	d->completionTimer->start( 400, TRUE );
-    } else {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    c = currentItem();
-    if ( count() && !text( c ).isNull() )
-	emit activated( text( c ) );
-    emit activated( c );
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * e )
-{
-    TQWidget::focusInEvent( e );
-    d->completeNow = FALSE;
-    d->completeAt = 0;
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * e )
-{
-    TQWidget::focusOutEvent( e );
-    d->completeNow = FALSE;
-    d->completeAt = 0;
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-void TQComboBox::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( d->poppedUp ) {
-	if ( d->usingListBox() ) {
-	    TQApplication::sendEvent( d->listBox(), e );
-	}
-    } else {
-	if ( e->delta() > 0 ) {
-	    int c = currentItem();
-	    if ( c > 0 ) {
-		setCurrentItem( c-1 );
-		emit activated( currentItem() );
-		emit activated( currentText() );
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    int c = currentItem();
-	    if ( ++c < count() ) {
-		setCurrentItem( c );
-		emit activated( currentItem() );
-		emit activated( currentText() );
-	    }
-	}
-	e->accept();
-    }
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-   Calculates the listbox height needed to contain all items, or as
-   many as the list box is supposed to contain.
-*/
-static int listHeight( TQListBox *l, int sl )
-{
-    if ( l->count() > 0 )
-	return TQMIN( l->count(), (uint)sl) * l->item( 0 )->height(l);
-    else
-	return l->tqsizeHint().height();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Pops up the combobox popup list.
-
-    If the list is empty, no items appear.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::popup()
-{
-    if ( !count() || d->poppedUp )
-	return;
-
-    if( !d->usingListBox() || tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this) ) {
-	if(d->usingListBox()) {
-	    if(!d->popup()) {
-		TQComboBoxPopup *p = new TQComboBoxPopup( this, "in-combo" );
-		d->setPopupMenu( p, FALSE );
-		p->setFont( font() );
-		connect( p, TQT_SIGNAL(activated(int)), TQT_SLOT(internalActivate(int)) );
-		connect( p, TQT_SIGNAL(highlighted(int)), TQT_SLOT(internalHighlight(int)) );
-	    }
-	    d->popup()->clear();
-	    for(unsigned int i = 0; i < d->listBox()->count(); i++) {
-		TQListBoxItem *item = d->listBox()->item(i);
-		if(item->rtti() == TQListBoxText::RTTI) {
-		    d->popup()->insertItem(escapedComboString(item->text()), i, i);
-		} else if(item->rtti() == TQListBoxPixmap::RTTI) {
-		    if(item->pixmap())
-			d->popup()->insertItem(TQIconSet(*item->pixmap()), escapedComboString(item->text()), i, i);
-		    else
-			d->popup()->insertItem(escapedComboString(item->text()), i, i);
-		} else {
-		    d->popup()->insertItem(new TQComboBoxPopupItem(item), i, i);
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-	d->popup()->installEventFilter( this );
-	if(d->popup() && tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this))
-	    d->popup()->setItemChecked(this->d->current, TRUE);
-	d->popup()->popup( mapToGlobal( TQPoint(0,0) ), this->d->current );
-	update();
-    } else {
-	// Send all listbox events to eventFilter():
-	TQListBox* lb = d->listBox();
-	lb->triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-	lb->installEventFilter( this );
-	d->mouseWasInsidePopup = FALSE;
-	int w = lb->variableWidth() ? lb->tqsizeHint().width() : width();
-	int h = listHeight( lb, d->sizeLimit ) + 2;
-	TQRect screen = TQApplication::desktop()->availableGeometry( this );
-
-	int sx = screen.x();				// screen pos
-	int sy = screen.y();
-	int sw = screen.width();			// screen width
-	int sh = screen.height();			// screen height
-	TQPoint pos = mapToGlobal( TQPoint(0,height()) );
-	// ## Similar code is in TQPopupMenu
-	int x = pos.x();
-	int y = pos.y();
-
-	// the complete widget must be visible
-	if ( x + w > sx + sw )
-	    x = sx+sw - w;
-	if ( x < sx )
-	    x = sx;
-	if (y + h > sy+sh && y - h - height() >= 0 )
-	    y = y - h - height();
-
-       	TQRect rect =
-	    tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics( TQStyle::CC_ComboBox, this,
-					    TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxListBoxPopup,
-					    TQStyleOption( x, y, w, h ) );
-	// work around older styles that don't implement the combobox
-	// listbox popup subcontrol
-	if ( rect.isNull() )
-	    rect.setRect( x, y, w, h );
-	lb->setGeometry( rect );
-
-	lb->raise();
-	bool block = TQT_TQOBJECT(lb)->tqsignalsBlocked();
-	lb->blockSignals( TRUE );
-	TQListBoxItem* currentLBItem = 0;
-	if ( editable() && currentText() != text( currentItem() ) )
-	    currentLBItem = lb->findItem( currentText() );
-
-	currentLBItem = currentLBItem ? currentLBItem : lb->item( d->current );
-
-	lb->setCurrentItem( currentLBItem );
-	lb->setContentsPos( lb->contentsX(),
-			    lb->viewportToContents( lb->tqitemRect( currentLBItem ).topLeft() ).y() );
-
-	// set the current item to also be the selected item if it isn't already
-	if ( currentLBItem && currentLBItem->isSelectable() && !currentLBItem->isSelected() )
-	    lb->setSelected( currentLBItem, TRUE );
-	lb->blockSignals( block );
-	lb->setVScrollBarMode(TQScrollView::Auto);
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_EFFECTS
-	if ( TQApplication::isEffectEnabled( Qt::UI_AnimateCombo ) ) {
-	    if ( lb->y() < mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0)).y() )
-		qScrollEffect( lb, TQEffects::UpScroll );
-	    else
-		qScrollEffect( lb );
-	} else
-#endif
-	    lb->show();
-    }
-    d->poppedUp = TRUE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQComboBox::updateMask()
-{
-    TQBitmap bm( size() );
-    bm.fill( Qt::color0 );
-
-    {
-	TQPainter p( &bm, this );
-	tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControlMask(TQStyle::CC_ComboBox, &p, this, rect());
-    }
-
-    setMask( bm );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Pops down (removes) the combobox popup list box.
-*/
-void TQComboBox::popDownListBox()
-{
-    TQ_ASSERT( d->usingListBox() );
-    d->listBox()->removeEventFilter( this );
-    d->listBox()->viewport()->removeEventFilter( this );
-    d->listBox()->hide();
-    d->listBox()->setCurrentItem( d->current );
-    if ( d->arrowDown ) {
-	d->arrowDown = FALSE;
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    }
-    d->poppedUp = FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Re-indexes the identifiers in the popup list.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::reIndex()
-{
-    if ( !d->usingListBox() ) {
-	int cnt = count();
-	while ( cnt-- )
-	    d->popup()->setId( cnt, cnt );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Repaints the combobox.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::currentChanged()
-{
-    if ( d->autoresize )
-	adjustSize();
-    update();
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-  \internal
-
-  The event filter steals events from the popup or listbox when they
-  are popped up. It makes the popup stay up after a short click in
-  motif style. In windows style it toggles the arrow button of the
-  combobox field, and activates an item and takes down the listbox
-  when the mouse button is released.
-*/
-
-bool TQComboBox::eventFilter( TQObject *object, TQEvent *event )
-{
-    if ( !event )
-	return TRUE;
-    else if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(object) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->ed) ) {
-	if ( event->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
-	    bool isAccepted = ( (TQKeyEvent*)event )->isAccepted();
-	    keyPressEvent( (TQKeyEvent *)event );
-	    if ( ((TQKeyEvent *)event)->isAccepted() ) {
-		d->completeNow = FALSE;
-		return TRUE;
-	    } else if ( ((TQKeyEvent *)event)->key() != Qt::Key_End ) {
-		d->completeNow = TRUE;
-		d->completeAt = d->ed->cursorPosition();
-	    }
-	    if ( isAccepted )
-		( (TQKeyEvent*)event )->accept();
-	    else
-		( (TQKeyEvent*)event )->ignore();
-	} else if ( event->type() == TQEvent::KeyRelease ) {
-	    keyReleaseEvent( (TQKeyEvent *)event );
-	    return ((TQKeyEvent *)event)->isAccepted();
-	} else if ( event->type() == TQEvent::FocusIn ) {
-	    focusInEvent( (TQFocusEvent *)event );
-	} else if ( event->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut ) {
-	    focusOutEvent( (TQFocusEvent *)event );
-	} else if ( d->useCompletion && d->completeNow ) {
-	    d->completeNow = FALSE;
-	    if ( !d->ed->text().isNull() &&
-		 d->ed->cursorPosition() > d->completeAt &&
-		 d->ed->cursorPosition() == (int)d->ed->text().length() ) {
-		TQString ct( d->ed->text() );
-		int i = completionIndex( ct, currentItem() );
-		if ( i > -1 ) {
-		    TQString it = text( i );
-		    d->ed->validateAndSet( it, ct.length(),
-					   ct.length(), it.length() );
-		    d->current = i;
-                    // ### sets current item without emitting Q_SIGNALS. This is to
-		    // make sure the right item is current if you change current with
-		    // wheel/up/down. While typing current is not valid anyway. Fix properly
-		    // in 4.0.
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    } else if ( d->usingListBox() && ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(object) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->listBox()) ||
-                                       TQT_BASE_OBJECT(object) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->listBox()->viewport()) )) {
-	TQMouseEvent *e = (TQMouseEvent*)event;
-	switch( event->type() ) {
-	case TQEvent::MouseMove:
-	    if ( !d->mouseWasInsidePopup  ) {
-		TQPoint pos = e->pos();
-		if ( TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(d->listBox()->rect()).contains( pos ) )
-		    d->mouseWasInsidePopup = TRUE;
-		// Check if arrow button should toggle
-		if ( d->arrowPressed ) {
-		    TQPoint comboPos;
-		    comboPos = mapFromGlobal( d->listBox()->mapToGlobal(pos) );
-		    TQRect arrowRect =
-			tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics( TQStyle::CC_ComboBox, this,
-							TQStyle::SC_ComboBoxArrow);
-		    arrowRect = TQStyle::tqvisualRect(arrowRect, this);
-		    if ( arrowRect.contains( comboPos ) ) {
-			if ( !d->arrowDown  ) {
-			    d->arrowDown = TRUE;
-			    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-			}
-		    } else {
-			if ( d->arrowDown  ) {
-			    d->arrowDown = FALSE;
-			    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-			}
-		    }
-		}
-	    } else if ((e->state() & ( Qt::RightButton | Qt::LeftButton | Qt::MidButton ) ) == 0 &&
-		       tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_ListMouseTracking, this)) {
-		TQWidget *mouseW = TQApplication::widgetAt( e->globalPos(), TRUE );
-		if ( mouseW == d->listBox()->viewport() ) { //###
-		    TQMouseEvent m( TQEvent::MouseMove, e->pos(), e->globalPos(),
-				   Qt::LeftButton, Qt::LeftButton );
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-		    #warning Not sending event to prevent infinite recursion.  Will this cause any problems?
-#else // USE_QT4
-		    TQApplication::sendEvent( object, &m ); //### Evil
-#endif // USE_QT4
-		    return TRUE;
-		}
-	    }
-
-	    break;
-	case TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease:
-	    if ( TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(d->listBox()->rect()).contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-		TQMouseEvent tmp( TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick,
-				 e->pos(), e->button(), e->state() ) ;
-		// will hide popup
-		TQApplication::sendEvent( object, &tmp );
-		return TRUE;
-	    } else {
-		if ( d->mouseWasInsidePopup ) {
-		    popDownListBox();
-		} else {
-		    d->arrowPressed = FALSE;
-		    if ( d->arrowDown  ) {
-			d->arrowDown = FALSE;
-			tqrepaint( FALSE );
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick:
-	case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress:
-	    if ( !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(d->listBox()->rect()).contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-		TQPoint globalPos = d->listBox()->mapToGlobal(e->pos());
-		if ( TQApplication::widgetAt( globalPos, TRUE ) == this ) {
-		    d->discardNextMousePress = TRUE;
-		    // avoid popping up again
-		}
-		popDownListBox();
-		return TRUE;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TQEvent::KeyPress:
-	    switch( ((TQKeyEvent *)event)->key() ) {
-	    case Qt::Key_Up:
-	    case Qt::Key_Down:
-		if ( !(((TQKeyEvent *)event)->state() & TQt::AltButton) )
-		    break;
-	    case Qt::Key_F4:
-	    case Key_Escape:
-		if ( d->poppedUp ) {
-		    popDownListBox();
-		    return TRUE;
-		}
-		break;
-	    case Qt::Key_Enter:
-	    case Qt::Key_Return:
-		// work around TQDialog's enter handling
-		return FALSE;
-	    default:
-		break;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TQEvent::Hide:
-	    popDownListBox();
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    break;
-	}
-    } else if ( (!d->usingListBox() || tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ComboBox_Popup, this)) &&
-		TQT_BASE_OBJECT(object) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->popup()) ) {
-	TQMouseEvent *e = (TQMouseEvent*)event;
-	switch ( event->type() ) {
-	case TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease:
-	    if ( d->shortClick ) {
-		TQMouseEvent tmp( TQEvent::MouseMove,
-				 e->pos(), e->button(), e->state() ) ;
-		// highlight item, but don't pop down:
-		TQApplication::sendEvent( object, &tmp );
-		return TRUE;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick:
-	case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress:
-	    if ( !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(d->popup()->rect()).contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-                d->poppedUp = FALSE;
-                d->arrowDown = FALSE;
-		// remove filter, event will take down popup:
-		d->popup()->removeEventFilter( this );
-		// ### uglehack!
-		// call internalHighlight so the highlighed signal
-		// will be emitted at least as often as necessary.
-		// it may be called more often than necessary
-		internalHighlight( d->current );
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TQEvent::Hide:
-	    d->poppedUp = FALSE;
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    break;
-	}
-    }
-    return TQWidget::eventFilter( object, event );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the index of the first item \e after \a startingAt of
-    which \a prefix is a case-insensitive prefix. Returns -1 if no
-    items start with \a prefix.
-*/
-
-int TQComboBox::completionIndex( const TQString & prefix,
-				int startingAt = 0 ) const
-{
-    int start = startingAt;
-    if ( start < 0 || start >= count() )
-	start = 0;
-    if ( start >= count() )
-	return -1;
-    TQString match = prefix.lower();
-    if ( match.length() < 1 )
-	return start;
-
-    TQString current;
-    int i = start;
-    do {
-	current = text( i ).lower();
-	if ( current.startsWith( match ) )
-	    return i;
-	i++;
-	if ( i == count() )
-	    i = 0;
-    } while ( i != start );
-    return -1;
-}
-
-
-int TQComboBox::sizeLimit() const
-{
-    return d ? d->sizeLimit : INT_MAX;
-}
-
-void TQComboBox::setSizeLimit( int lines )
-{
-    d->sizeLimit = lines;
-}
-
-
-int TQComboBox::maxCount() const
-{
-    return d ? d->maxCount : INT_MAX;
-}
-
-void TQComboBox::setMaxCount( int count )
-{
-    int l = this->count();
-    while( --l > count )
-	removeItem( l );
-    d->maxCount = count;
-}
-
-TQComboBox::Policy TQComboBox::insertionPolicy() const
-{
-    return d->p;
-}
-
-void TQComboBox::setInsertionPolicy( Policy policy )
-{
-    d->p = policy;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-  Internal slot to keep the line editor up to date.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::returnPressed()
-{
-    TQString s( d->ed->text() );
-
-    if ( s.isEmpty() )
-	return;
-
-    int c = 0;
-    bool doInsert = TRUE;
-    if ( !d->duplicatesEnabled ) {
-	for ( int i = 0; i < count(); ++i ) {
-	    if ( s == text( i ) ) {
-		doInsert = FALSE;
-		c = i;
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( doInsert ) {
-	if ( insertionPolicy() != NoInsertion ) {
-	    int cnt = count();
-	    while ( cnt >= d->maxCount ) {
-		removeItem( --cnt );
-	    }
-	}
-
-	switch ( insertionPolicy() ) {
-	case AtCurrent:
-	    if (count() == 0)
-		insertItem(s);
-	    else if ( s != text( currentItem() ) )
-		changeItem( s, currentItem() );
-	    emit activated( currentItem() );
-	    emit activated( s );
-	    return;
-	case NoInsertion:
-	    emit activated( s );
-	    return;
-	case AtTop:
-	    c = 0;
-	    break;
-	case AtBottom:
-	    c = count();
-	    break;
-	case BeforeCurrent:
-	    c = currentItem();
-	    break;
-	case AfterCurrent:
-	    c = count() == 0 ? 0 : currentItem() + 1;
-	    break;
-	}
-	insertItem( s, c );
-    }
-
-    setCurrentItem( c );
-    emit activated( c );
-    emit activated( s );
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::setEnabled( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( !enable ) {
-	if ( d->usingListBox() ) {
-	    popDownListBox();
-	} else {
-	    d->popup()->removeEventFilter( this );
-	    d->popup()->close();
-	    d->poppedUp = FALSE;
-	}
-    }
-    TQWidget::setEnabled( enable );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Applies the validator \a v to the combobox so that only text which
-    is valid according to \a v is accepted.
-
-    This function does nothing if the combobox is not editable.
-
-    \sa validator() clearValidator() TQValidator
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::setValidator( const TQValidator * v )
-{
-    if ( d && d->ed )
-	d->ed->setValidator( v );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the validator which constrains editing for this combobox
-    if there is one; otherwise returns 0.
-
-    \sa setValidator() clearValidator() TQValidator
-*/
-
-const TQValidator * TQComboBox::validator() const
-{
-    return d && d->ed ? d->ed->validator() : 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This slot is equivalent to setValidator( 0 ).
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::clearValidator()
-{
-    if ( d && d->ed )
-	d->ed->setValidator( 0 );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the combobox to use \a newListBox instead of the current list
-    box or popup. As a side effect, it clears the combobox of its
-    current contents.
-
-    \warning TQComboBox assumes that newListBox->text(n) returns
-    non-null for 0 \<= n \< newListbox->count(). This assumption is
-    necessary because of the line edit in TQComboBox.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::setListBox( TQListBox * newListBox )
-{
-    clear();
-
-    if ( d->usingListBox() ) {
-	delete d->listBox();
-    } else {
-	delete d->popup();
-        d->setPopupMenu(0, FALSE);
-    }
-
-    newListBox->reparent( this, (Qt::WindowFlags)WType_Popup, TQPoint(0,0), FALSE );
-    d->setListBox( newListBox );
-    d->listBox()->setFont( font() );
-    d->listBox()->setPalette( palette() );
-    d->listBox()->setVScrollBarMode(TQScrollView::AlwaysOff);
-    d->listBox()->setHScrollBarMode(TQScrollView::AlwaysOff);
-    d->listBox()->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Plain );
-    d->listBox()->setLineWidth( 1 );
-    d->listBox()->resize( 100, 10 );
-
-    connect( d->listBox(), TQT_SIGNAL(selected(int)),
-	     TQT_SLOT(internalActivate(int)) );
-    connect( d->listBox(), TQT_SIGNAL(highlighted(int)),
-	     TQT_SLOT(internalHighlight(int)));
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the current list box, or 0 if there is no list box.
-    (TQComboBox can use TQPopupMenu instead of TQListBox.) Provided to
-    match setListBox().
-
-    \sa setListBox()
-*/
-
-TQListBox * TQComboBox::listBox() const
-{
-    return d && d->usingListBox() ? d->listBox() : 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the line edit, or 0 if there is no line edit.
-
-    Only editable listboxes have a line editor.
-*/
-TQLineEdit* TQComboBox::lineEdit() const
-{
-    return d->ed;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Clears the line edit without changing the combobox's contents.
-    Does nothing if the combobox isn't editable.
-
-    This is particularly useful when using a combobox as a line edit
-    with history. For example you can connect the combobox's
-    activated() signal to clearEdit() in order to present the user
-    with a new, empty line as soon as Enter is pressed.
-
-    \sa setEditText()
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::clearEdit()
-{
-    if ( d && d->ed )
-	d->ed->clear();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the text in the line edit to \a newText without changing the
-    combobox's contents. Does nothing if the combobox isn't editable.
-
-    This is useful e.g. for providing a good starting point for the
-    user's editing and entering the change in the combobox only when
-    the user presses Enter.
-
-    \sa clearEdit() insertItem()
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::setEditText( const TQString &newText )
-{
-    if ( d && d->ed ) {
-	d->updateLinedGeometry();
-	d->ed->setText( newText );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQComboBox::setAutoCompletion( bool enable )
-{
-    d->useCompletion = enable;
-    d->completeNow = FALSE;
-}
-
-
-bool TQComboBox::autoCompletion() const
-{
-    return d->useCompletion;
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
- */
-void TQComboBox::styleChange( TQStyle& s )
-{
-    d->tqsizeHint = TQSize();		// tqinvalidate size hint...
-    if ( d->ed )
-	d->updateLinedGeometry();
-    TQWidget::styleChange( s );
-}
-
-bool TQComboBox::editable() const
-{
-    return d->ed != 0;
-}
-
-void TQComboBox::setEditable( bool y )
-{
-    if ( y == editable() )
-	return;
-    if ( y ) {
-	if ( !d->usingListBox() )
-	    setUpListBox();
-	setUpLineEdit();
-	d->ed->show();
-	if ( currentItem() )
-	    setEditText( currentText() );
-    } else {
-	delete d->ed;
-	d->ed = 0;
-    }
-
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::StrongFocus );
-    updateGeometry();
-    update();
-}
-
-
-void TQComboBox::setUpListBox()
-{
-    d->setListBox( new TQListBox( this, "in-combo", (Qt::WindowFlags)WType_Popup ) );
-    d->listBox()->setFont( font() );
-    d->listBox()->setPalette( palette() );
-    d->listBox()->setVScrollBarMode( TQListBox::AlwaysOff );
-    d->listBox()->setHScrollBarMode( TQListBox::AlwaysOff );
-    d->listBox()->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Plain );
-    d->listBox()->setLineWidth( 1 );
-    d->listBox()->resize( 100, 10 );
-
-    connect( d->listBox(), TQT_SIGNAL(selected(int)),
-	     TQT_SLOT(internalActivate(int)) );
-    connect( d->listBox(), TQT_SIGNAL(highlighted(int)),
-	     TQT_SLOT(internalHighlight(int)));
-}
-
-
-void TQComboBox::setUpLineEdit()
-{
-    if ( !d->ed )
-	setLineEdit( new TQLineEdit( this, "combo edit" ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the line edit to use \a edit instead of the current line edit.
-*/
-
-void TQComboBox::setLineEdit( TQLineEdit *edit )
-{
-    if ( !edit ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL)
-	TQ_ASSERT( edit != 0 );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-
-    edit->setText( currentText() );
-    delete d->ed;
-    d->ed = edit;
-
-    if ( edit->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) )
-	edit->reparent( this, TQPoint(0,0), FALSE );
-
-    connect (edit, TQT_SIGNAL( textChanged(const TQString&) ),
-	     this, TQT_SIGNAL( textChanged(const TQString&) ) );
-    connect( edit, TQT_SIGNAL(returnPressed()), TQT_SLOT(returnPressed()) );
-
-    edit->setFrame( FALSE );
-    d->updateLinedGeometry();
-    edit->installEventFilter( this );
-    setFocusProxy( edit );
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::StrongFocus );
-    setInputMethodEnabled( TRUE );
-
-    if ( !d->usingListBox() )
-	setUpListBox();
-
-    if ( isVisible() )
-	edit->show();
-
-    updateGeometry();
-    update();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQComboBox::hide()
-{
-    TQWidget::hide();
-
-    if (listBox())
-	listBox()->hide();
-    else if (d->popup())
-	d->popup()->hide();
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_COMBOBOX
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f67e7fd..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqcombobox.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQComboBox class
-**
-** Created : 950426
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQCOMBOBOX_H
-#define TQCOMBOBOX_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMBOBOX
-
-
-class TQStrList;
-class TQStringList;
-class TQLineEdit;
-class TQValidator;
-class TQListBox;
-class TQComboBoxData;
-class TQWheelEvent;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQComboBox : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( Policy )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool editable READ editable WRITE setEditable )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int count READ count )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString currentText READ currentText WRITE setCurrentText DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int currentItem READ currentItem WRITE setCurrentItem )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool autoResize READ autoResize WRITE setAutoResize DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int sizeLimit READ sizeLimit WRITE setSizeLimit )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int maxCount READ maxCount WRITE setMaxCount )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Policy insertionPolicy READ insertionPolicy WRITE setInsertionPolicy )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool autoCompletion READ autoCompletion WRITE setAutoCompletion )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool duplicatesEnabled READ duplicatesEnabled WRITE setDuplicatesEnabled )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true )
-
-public:
-    TQComboBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQComboBox( bool rw, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQComboBox();
-
-    int		count() const;
-
-    void	insertStringList( const TQStringList &, int index=-1 );
-    void	insertStrList( const TQStrList &, int index=-1 );
-    void	insertStrList( const TQStrList *, int index=-1 );
-    void	insertStrList( const char **, int numStrings=-1, int index=-1);
-
-    void	insertItem( const TQString &text, int index=-1 );
-    void	insertItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int index=-1 );
-    void	insertItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, const TQString &text, int index=-1 );
-
-    void	removeItem( int index );
-
-    int		currentItem() const;
-    virtual void setCurrentItem( int index );
-
-    TQString 	currentText() const;
-    virtual void setCurrentText( const TQString& );
-
-    TQString 	text( int index ) const;
-    const TQPixmap *pixmap( int index ) const;
-
-    void	changeItem( const TQString &text, int index );
-    void	changeItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int index );
-    void	changeItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, const TQString &text, int index );
-
-    bool	autoResize()	const;
-    virtual void setAutoResize( bool );
-    TQSize	tqsizeHint() const;
-
-    void	setPalette( const TQPalette & );
-    void	setFont( const TQFont & );
-    void	setEnabled( bool );
-
-    virtual void setSizeLimit( int );
-    int		sizeLimit() const;
-
-    virtual void setMaxCount( int );
-    int		maxCount() const;
-
-    enum Policy { NoInsertion, AtTop, AtCurrent, AtBottom,
-		  AfterCurrent, BeforeCurrent };
-
-    virtual void setInsertionPolicy( Policy policy );
-    Policy	insertionPolicy() const;
-
-    virtual void setValidator( const TQValidator * );
-    const TQValidator * validator() const;
-
-    virtual void setListBox( TQListBox * );
-    TQListBox *	listBox() const;
-
-    virtual void setLineEdit( TQLineEdit *edit );
-    TQLineEdit*	lineEdit() const;
-
-    virtual void setAutoCompletion( bool );
-    bool	autoCompletion() const;
-
-    bool	eventFilter( TQObject *object, TQEvent *event );
-
-    void	setDuplicatesEnabled( bool enable );
-    bool	duplicatesEnabled() const;
-
-    bool	editable() const;
-    void	setEditable( bool );
-
-    virtual void popup();
-
-    void	hide();
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void	clear();
-    void	clearValidator();
-    void	clearEdit();
-    virtual void setEditText( const TQString &);
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void	activated( int index );
-    void	highlighted( int index );
-    void	activated( const TQString &);
-    void	highlighted( const TQString &);
-    void	textChanged( const TQString &);
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void	internalActivate( int );
-    void	internalHighlight( int );
-    void	internalClickTimeout();
-    void	returnPressed();
-
-protected:
-    void	paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void	resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void	mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-    void	focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent *e );
-    void	focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent *e );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    void	wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e );
-#endif
-    void	styleChange( TQStyle& );
-
-    void	updateMask();
-
-private:
-    void	setUpListBox();
-    void	setUpLineEdit();
-    void	popDownListBox();
-    void	reIndex();
-    void	currentChanged();
-    int		completionIndex( const TQString &, int ) const;
-
-    TQComboBoxData	*d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQComboBox( const TQComboBox & );
-    TQComboBox &operator=( const TQComboBox & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_COMBOBOX
-
-#endif // TQCOMBOBOX_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index be63178..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2845 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of date and time edit classes
-**
-** Created : 001103
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2000-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqdatetimeedit.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DATETIMEEDIT
-
-#include "../kernel/tqinternal_p.h"
-#include "../kernel/tqrichtext_p.h"
-#include "tqrangecontrol.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqvaluelist.h"
-#include "tqstring.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_WIN)
-#include "tqt_windows.h"
-#endif
-
-#define TQDATETIMEEDIT_HIDDEN_CHAR '0'
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQNumberSection
-{
-public:
-    TQNumberSection( int selStart = 0, int selEnd = 0, bool separat = TRUE, int actual = -1 )
-	: selstart( selStart ), selend( selEnd ), act( actual ), sep( separat )
-    {}
-    int selectionStart() const { return selstart; }
-    void setSelectionStart( int s ) { selstart = s; }
-    int selectionEnd() const { return selend; }
-    void setSelectionEnd( int s ) { selend = s; }
-    int width() const { return selend - selstart; }
-    int index() const { return act; }
-    bool separator() const { return sep; }
-    TQ_DUMMY_COMPARISON_OPERATOR( TQNumberSection )
-private:
-    int selstart :12;
-    int selend	 :12;
-    int act	 :7;
-    bool sep	 :1;
-};
-
-static TQString	*lDateSep = 0;
-static TQString	*lTimeSep = 0;
-static bool	lAMPM	  = FALSE;
-static TQString	*lAM	  = 0;
-static TQString	*lPM	  = 0;
-static TQDateEdit::Order	lOrder = TQDateEdit::YMD;
-static int refcount = 0;
-
-static void cleanup()
-{
-    delete lDateSep;
-    lDateSep = 0;
-    delete lTimeSep;
-    lTimeSep = 0;
-    delete lAM;
-    lAM = 0;
-    delete lPM;
-    lPM = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-\internal
-try to get the order of DMY and the date/time separator from the locale settings
-*/
-static void readLocaleSettings()
-{
-    int dpos, mpos, ypos;
-    cleanup();
-
-    lDateSep = new TQString();
-    lTimeSep = new TQString();
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_WIN)
-    TQT_WA( {
-	TCHAR data[10];
-	GetLocaleInfo( LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_SDATE, data, 10 );
-	*lDateSep = TQString::fromUcs2( (ushort*)data );
-	GetLocaleInfo( LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_STIME, data, 10 );
-	*lTimeSep = TQString::fromUcs2( (ushort*)data );
-	GetLocaleInfo( LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_ITIME, data, 10 );
-	lAMPM = TQString::fromUcs2( (ushort*)data ).toInt()==0;
-	GetLocaleInfo( LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_S1159, data, 10 );
-	TQString am = TQString::fromUcs2( (ushort*)data );
-	if ( !am.isEmpty() )
-	    lAM = new TQString( am );
-	GetLocaleInfo( LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_S2359, data, 10 );
-	TQString pm = TQString::fromUcs2( (ushort*)data );
-	if ( !pm.isEmpty()  )
-	    lPM = new TQString( pm );
-    } , {
-	char data[10];
-	GetLocaleInfoA( LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_SDATE, (char*)&data, 10 );
-	*lDateSep = TQString::fromLocal8Bit( data );
-	GetLocaleInfoA( LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_STIME, (char*)&data, 10 );
-	*lTimeSep = TQString::fromLocal8Bit( data );
-	GetLocaleInfoA( LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_ITIME, (char*)&data, 10 );
-	lAMPM = TQString::fromLocal8Bit( data ).toInt()==0;
-	GetLocaleInfoA( LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_S1159, (char*)&data, 10 );
-	TQString am = TQString::fromLocal8Bit( data );
-	if ( !am.isEmpty() )
-	    lAM = new TQString( am );
-	GetLocaleInfoA( LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_S2359, (char*)&data, 10 );
-	TQString pm = TQString::fromLocal8Bit( data );
-	if ( !pm.isEmpty() )
-	    lPM = new TQString( pm );
-    } );
-#else
-    *lDateSep = "-";
-    *lTimeSep = ":";
-#endif
-    TQString d = TQDate( 1999, 11, 22 ).toString( Qt::LocalDate );
-    dpos = d.find( "22" );
-    mpos = d.find( "11" );
-    ypos = d.find( "99" );
-    if ( dpos > -1 && mpos > -1 && ypos > -1 ) {
-	// test for DMY, MDY, YMD, YDM
-	if ( dpos < mpos && mpos < ypos ) {
-	    lOrder = TQDateEdit::DMY;
-	} else if ( mpos < dpos && dpos < ypos ) {
-	    lOrder = TQDateEdit::MDY;
-	} else if ( ypos < mpos && mpos < dpos ) {
-	    lOrder = TQDateEdit::YMD;
-	} else if ( ypos < dpos && dpos < mpos ) {
-	    lOrder = TQDateEdit::YDM;
-	} else {
-	    // cannot determine the dateformat - use the default
-	    return;
-	}
-
-	// this code needs to change if new formats are added
-
-#ifndef TQ_WS_WIN
-	TQString sep = d.mid( TQMIN( dpos, mpos ) + 2, TQABS( dpos - mpos ) - 2 );
-	if ( d.contains( sep ) == 2 ) {
-	    *lDateSep = sep;
-	}
-#endif
-    }
-
-#ifndef TQ_WS_WIN
-    TQString t = TQTime( 11, 22, 33 ).toString( Qt::LocalDate );
-    dpos = t.find( "11" );
-    mpos = t.find( "22" );
-    ypos = t.find( "33" );
-    // We only allow hhmmss
-    if ( dpos > -1 && dpos < mpos && mpos < ypos ) {
-	TQString sep = t.mid( dpos + 2, mpos - dpos - 2 );
-	if ( sep == t.mid( mpos + 2, ypos - mpos - 2 ) ) {
-	    *lTimeSep = sep;
-	}
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-static TQDateEdit::Order localOrder() {
-    if ( !lDateSep ) {
-	readLocaleSettings();
-    }
-    return lOrder;
-}
-
-static TQString localDateSep() {
-    if ( !lDateSep ) {
-	readLocaleSettings();
-    }
-    return *lDateSep;
-}
-
-static TQString localTimeSep() {
-    if ( !lTimeSep ) {
-	readLocaleSettings();
-    }
-    return *lTimeSep;
-}
-
-class TQDateTimeEditorPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQDateTimeEditorPrivate()
-	: frm( TRUE ),
-	  parag( new TQTextParagraph( 0, 0, 0, FALSE ) ),
-	  focusSec(0)
-    {
-	parag->formatter()->setWrapEnabled( FALSE );
-	cursor = new TQTextCursor( 0 );
-	cursor->setParagraph( parag );
-	offset = 0;
-	sep = localDateSep();
-	refcount++;
-    }
-    ~TQDateTimeEditorPrivate()
-    {
-	delete parag;
-	delete cursor;
-	if ( !--refcount )
-	    cleanup();
-    }
-
-    void appendSection( const TQNumberSection& sec )
-    {
-	sections.append( sec );
-
-    }
-    void clearSections()
-    {
-	sections.clear();
-    }
-    void setSectionSelection( int sec, int selstart, int selend )
-    {
-	if ( sec < 0 || sec > (int)sections.count() )
-	    return;
-	sections[sec].setSelectionStart( selstart );
-	sections[sec].setSelectionEnd( selend );
-    }
-    uint sectionCount() const { return (uint)sections.count(); }
-    void setSeparator( const TQString& s ) { sep = s; }
-    TQString separator() const { return sep; }
-
-    void setFrame( bool f ) { frm = f; }
-    bool frame() const { return frm; }
-
-    int focusSection() const { return focusSec; }
-    int section( const TQPoint& p )
-    {
-	cursor->place( p + TQPoint( offset, 0 ), parag );
-	int idx = cursor->index();
-	for ( uint i = 0; i < sections.count(); ++i ) {
-	    if ( idx >= sections[i].selectionStart() &&
-		 idx <= sections[i].selectionEnd() )
-		return i;
-	}
-	return -1;
-    }
-    TQNumberSection section( int idx ) const
-    {
-	return sections[idx];
-    }
-    bool setFocusSection( int idx )
-    {
-	if ( idx > (int)sections.count()-1 || idx < 0 )
-	    return FALSE;
-	if ( idx != focusSec ) {
-	    focusSec = idx;
-	    applyFocusSelection();
-	    return TRUE;
-	}
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-
-    bool inSectionSelection( int idx )
-    {
-	for ( uint i = 0; i < sections.count(); ++i ) {
-	    if ( idx >= sections[i].selectionStart() &&
-		 idx <= sections[i].selectionEnd() )
-		return TRUE;
-	}
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-
-    void paint( const TQString& txt, bool focus, TQPainter& p,
-		const TQColorGroup& cg, const TQRect& rect, TQStyle& style )
-    {
-	int fw = 0;
-	if ( frm )
-	    fw = style.tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth);
-
-	parag->truncate( 0 );
-	parag->append( txt );
-	if ( !focus )
-	    parag->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	else {
-	    applyFocusSelection();
-	}
-
-	/* color all TQDATETIMEEDIT_HIDDEN_CHAR chars to background color */
-	TQTextFormat *fb = parag->formatCollection()->format( p.font(),
-							     cg.base() );
-	TQTextFormat *nf = parag->formatCollection()->format( p.font(),
-							     cg.text() );
-	for ( uint i = 0; i < txt.length(); ++i ) {
-	    parag->setFormat( i, 1, nf );
-	    if ( inSectionSelection( i ) )
-		continue;
-	    if ( txt.at(i) == TQDATETIMEEDIT_HIDDEN_CHAR )
-		parag->setFormat( i, 1, fb );
-	    else
-		parag->setFormat( i, 1, nf );
-	}
-	fb->removeRef();
-	nf->removeRef();
-
-	TQRect r( rect.x(), rect.y(), rect.width() - 2 * ( 2 + fw ), rect.height() );
-	parag->pseudoDocument()->docRect = r;
-	parag->tqinvalidate(0);
-	parag->format();
-
-	int xoff = 2 + fw - offset;
-	int yoff = ( rect.height() - parag->rect().height() + 1 ) / 2;
-	if ( yoff < 0 )
-	    yoff = 0;
-
-	p.translate( xoff, yoff );
-	parag->paint( p, cg, 0, TRUE );
-	if ( frm )
-	    p.translate( -xoff, -yoff );
-    }
-
-    void resize( const TQSize& size ) { sz = size; }
-
-    int mapSection( int sec )
-    {
-	return sections[sec].index();
-    }
-
-protected:
-    void applyFocusSelection()
-    {
-	if ( focusSec > -1 ) {
-	    int selstart = sections[ focusSec ].selectionStart();
-	    int selend = sections[ focusSec ].selectionEnd();
-	    parag->setSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, selstart, selend );
-	    parag->format();
-	    if ( parag->at( selstart )->x < offset ||
-		 parag->at( selend )->x + parag->string()->width( selend ) > offset + sz.width() ) {
-		offset = parag->at( selstart )->x;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-private:
-    bool frm;
-    TQTextParagraph *parag;
-    TQTextCursor *cursor;
-    TQSize sz;
-    int focusSec;
-    TQValueList< TQNumberSection > sections;
-    TQString sep;
-    int offset;
-};
-
-class TQDateTimeEditor : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQDateTimeEditor( TQDateTimeEditBase * widget, TQWidget *parent,
-		       const char * name=0 );
-    ~TQDateTimeEditor();
-
-    void setControlWidget( TQDateTimeEditBase * widget );
-    TQDateTimeEditBase * controlWidget() const;
-
-    void setSeparator( const TQString& s );
-    TQString separator() const;
-
-    int  focusSection() const;
-    bool setFocusSection( int s );
-    void appendSection( const TQNumberSection& sec );
-    void clearSections();
-    void setSectionSelection( int sec, int selstart, int selend );
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e );
-    int  sectionAt( const TQPoint &p );
-    int mapSection( int sec );
-
-protected:
-    void init();
-    bool event( TQEvent *e );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-
-private:
-    TQDateTimeEditBase* cw;
-    TQDateTimeEditorPrivate* d;
-};
-
-class TQDateTimeSpinWidget : public TQSpinWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQDateTimeSpinWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-	: TQSpinWidget( parent, name )
-    {
-    }
-
-    void enabledChange(bool notenabled)
-    {
-        TQDateEdit *de = ::tqqt_cast<TQDateEdit*>(parentWidget());
-        if (de && !notenabled) {
-	    setUpEnabled(de->date() < de->maxValue());
-	    setDownEnabled(de->date() > de->minValue());
-        } else {
-            setUpEnabled(!notenabled);
-            setDownEnabled(!notenabled);
-        }
-    }
-
-protected:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    void wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e )
-    {
-	TQDateTimeEditor *editor = (TQDateTimeEditor*)editWidget()->tqqt_cast( "TQDateTimeEditor" );
-	TQ_ASSERT( editor );
-	if ( !editor )
-	    return;
-
-	int section = editor->sectionAt( e->pos() );
-	editor->setFocusSection( section );
-
-	if ( section == -1 )
-	    return;
-	TQSpinWidget::wheelEvent( e );
-    }
-#endif
-};
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty datetime editor with parent \a parent and
-    called \a name.
-*/
-TQDateTimeEditor::TQDateTimeEditor( TQDateTimeEditBase * widget, TQWidget *parent,
-				  const char * name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase )
-{
-    d = new TQDateTimeEditorPrivate();
-    cw = widget;
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQDateTimeEditor::~TQDateTimeEditor()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEditor::init()
-{
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBase );
-    setFocusSection( -1 );
-    installEventFilter( this );
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::WheelFocus );
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-bool TQDateTimeEditor::event( TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::FocusIn || e->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut ) {
- 	if ( e->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut )
-  	    tqApp->sendEvent( cw, e );
-	update( rect() );
-    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::AccelOverride ) {
-	TQKeyEvent* ke = (TQKeyEvent*) e;
-	switch ( ke->key() ) {
-	case Qt::Key_Delete:
-	case Qt::Key_Backspace:
-	case Qt::Key_Up:
-	case Qt::Key_Down:
-	case Qt::Key_Left:
-	case Qt::Key_Right:
-	    ke->accept();
-	default:
-	    break;
-	}
-    }
-    return TQWidget::event( e );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEditor::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    d->resize( e->size() );
-    TQWidget::resizeEvent( e );
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEditor::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-{
-    TQString txt;
-    for ( uint i = 0; i < d->sectionCount(); ++i ) {
-	txt += cw->sectionFormattedText( i );
-	if ( i < d->sectionCount()-1 ) {
-	    if ( d->section( i+1 ).separator() )
-		txt += d->separator();
-	    else
-		txt += " ";
-	}
-    }
-
-    TQSharedDoubleBuffer buffer( this );
-    const TQBrush &bg =
-	tqcolorGroup().brush( isEnabled() ? TQColorGroup::Base : TQColorGroup::Background );
-    buffer.painter()->fillRect( 0, 0, width(), height(), bg );
-    d->paint( txt, hasFocus(), *buffer.painter(), tqcolorGroup(), rect(),
-	      tqstyle() );
-    buffer.end();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the section index at point \a p.
-*/
-int TQDateTimeEditor::sectionAt( const TQPoint &p )
-{
-    return d->section( p );
-}
-
-int TQDateTimeEditor::mapSection( int sec )
-{
-    return d->mapSection( sec );
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEditor::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    TQPoint p( e->pos().x(), 0 );
-    int sec = sectionAt( p );
-    if ( sec != -1 ) {
-	cw->setFocusSection( sec );
-	tqrepaint( rect(), FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-bool TQDateTimeEditor::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) ) {
-	if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
-	    TQKeyEvent *ke = (TQKeyEvent*)e;
-	    switch ( ke->key() ) {
-	    case Qt::Key_Right:
-		if ( d->focusSection() < (int)d->sectionCount()-1 ) {
-		    if ( cw->setFocusSection( focusSection()+1 ) )
-			tqrepaint( rect(), FALSE );
-		}
-		return TRUE;
-	    case Qt::Key_Left:
-		if ( d->focusSection() > 0 ) {
-		    if ( cw->setFocusSection( focusSection()-1 ) )
-			tqrepaint( rect(), FALSE );
-		}
-		return TRUE;
-	    case Qt::Key_Up:
-		cw->stepUp();
-		return TRUE;
-	    case Qt::Key_Down:
-		cw->stepDown();
-		return TRUE;
-	    case Qt::Key_Backspace:
-		if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQDateEdit*>(cw) )
-		    ((TQDateEdit*)cw)->removeFirstNumber( d->focusSection() );
-		else if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQTimeEdit*>(cw) )
-		    ((TQTimeEdit*)cw)->removeFirstNumber( d->focusSection() );
-		return TRUE;
-	    case Qt::Key_Delete:
-		cw->removeLastNumber( d->focusSection() );
-		return TRUE;
-	    case Qt::Key_Tab:
-	    case TQt::Key_BackTab: {
-		if ( ke->state() == ControlButton )
-		    return FALSE;
-
-		TQWidget *w = this;
-		bool hadDateEdit = FALSE;
-		while ( w ) {
-		    if ( (::tqqt_cast<TQDateTimeSpinWidget*>(w) && qstrcmp( w->name(), "qt_spin_widget" ) != 0) ||
-			 ::tqqt_cast<TQDateTimeEdit*>(w) )
-			break;
-		    hadDateEdit = hadDateEdit || ::tqqt_cast<TQDateEdit*>(w);
-		    w = w->parentWidget();
-		}
-
-		if ( w ) {
-		    if ( !::tqqt_cast<TQDateTimeEdit*>(w) ) {
-			w = w->parentWidget();
-		    } else {
-			TQDateTimeEdit *ed = (TQDateTimeEdit*)w;
-			if ( hadDateEdit && ke->key() == Qt::Key_Tab ) {
-			    ed->timeEdit()->setFocus();
-			    return TRUE;
-			} else if ( !hadDateEdit && ke->key() == TQt::Key_BackTab ) {
-			    ed->dateEdit()->setFocus();
-			    return TRUE;
-			} else {
-			    while ( w && !::tqqt_cast<TQDateTimeEdit*>(w) )
-				w = w->parentWidget();
-			}
-		    }
-
-		    tqApp->sendEvent( w, e );
-		    return TRUE;
-		}
-	    } break;
-	    default:
-		TQString txt = TQT_TQSTRING(ke->text()).lower();
-		if ( !txt.isEmpty() && !separator().isEmpty() && txt[0] == separator()[0] ) {
-		    // do the same thing as KEY_RIGHT when the user presses the separator key
-		    if ( d->focusSection() < 2 ) {
-			if ( cw->setFocusSection( focusSection()+1 ) )
-			    tqrepaint( rect(), FALSE );
-		    }
-		    return TRUE;
-		} else if ( !txt.isEmpty() && ::tqqt_cast<TQTimeEdit*>(cw) && focusSection() == (int) d->sectionCount()-1 ) {
-		    // the first character of the AM/PM indicator toggles if the section has focus
-		    TQTimeEdit *te = (TQTimeEdit*)cw;
-		    TQTime time = te->time();
-		    if ( lAMPM && lAM && lPM && (te->display()&TQTimeEdit::AMPM) ) {
-			if ( txt[0] == (*lAM).lower()[0] && time.hour() >= 12 ) {
-			    time.setHMS( time.hour()-12, time.minute(), time.second(), time.msec() );
-			    te->setTime( time );
-			} else if ( txt[0] == (*lPM).lower()[0] && time.hour() < 12 ) {
-			    time.setHMS( time.hour()+12, time.minute(), time.second(), time.msec() );
-			    te->setTime( time );
-			}
-		    }
-		}
-
-		int num = txt[0].digitValue();
-		if ( num != -1 ) {
-		    cw->addNumber( d->focusSection(), num );
-		    return TRUE;
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Appends the number section \a sec to the editor.
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEditor::appendSection( const TQNumberSection& sec )
-{
-    d->appendSection( sec );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes all sections from the editor.
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEditor::clearSections()
-{
-    d->clearSections();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the selection of \a sec to start at \a selstart and end at \a
-    selend.
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEditor::setSectionSelection( int sec, int selstart, int selend )
-{
-    d->setSectionSelection( sec, selstart, selend );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the separator for all numbered sections to \a s. Note that
-    currently, only the first character of \a s is used.
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEditor::setSeparator( const TQString& s )
-{
-    d->setSeparator( s );
-    update();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the editor's separator.
-*/
-
-TQString TQDateTimeEditor::separator() const
-{
-    return d->separator();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the number of the section that has focus.
-*/
-
-int TQDateTimeEditor::focusSection() const
-{
-    return d->focusSection();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the focus to section \a sec. If \a sec does not exist,
-    nothing happens.
-*/
-
-bool TQDateTimeEditor::setFocusSection( int sec )
-{
-    return d->setFocusSection( sec );
-}
-
-/*! \class TQDateTimeEditBase
-    \brief The TQDateTimeEditBase class provides an abstraction for date and edit editors.
-
-    Small abstract class that provides some functions that are common
-    for both TQDateEdit and TQTimeEdit. It is used internally by
-    TQDateTimeEditor.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQDateTimeEditBase::TQDateTimeEditBase(TQWidget *, const char*)
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQDateTimeEditBase::setFocusSection(int)
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*! \fn TQString TQDateTimeEditBase::sectionFormattedText( int sec )
-    \internal
-
-  Pure virtual function which returns the formatted text of section \a
-  sec.
-
-*/
-
-/*! \fn void TQDateTimeEditBase::stepUp()
-    \internal
-
-  Pure virtual slot which is called whenever the user increases the
-  number in a section by pressing the widget's arrow buttons or the
-  keyboard's arrow keys.
-*/
-
-/*! \fn void TQDateTimeEditBase::stepDown()
-    \internal
-
-  Pure virtual slot which is called whenever the user decreases the
-  number in a section by pressing the widget's arrow buttons or the
-  keyboard's arrow keys.
-
-*/
-
-/*! \fn void TQDateTimeEditBase::addNumber( int sec, int num )
-    \internal
-
-  Pure virtual function which is called whenever the user types a number.
-  \a sec indicates the section where the number should be added. \a
-  num is the number that was pressed.
-*/
-
-/*! \fn void TQDateTimeEditBase::removeLastNumber( int sec )
-    \internal
-
-  Pure virtual function which is called whenever the user tries to
-  remove the last number from \a sec by pressing the delete key.
-*/
-
-////////////////
-
-class TQDateEditPrivate
-{
-public:
-    int y;
-    int m;
-    int d;
-    // remebers the last entry for the day.
-    // if the day is 31 and you cycle through the months,
-    // the day will be 31 again if you reach a month with 31 days
-    // otherwise it will be the highest day in the month
-    int dayCache;
-    int yearSection;
-    int monthSection;
-    int daySection;
-    TQDateEdit::Order ord;
-    bool overwrite;
-    bool adv;
-    int timerId;
-    bool typing;
-    TQDate min;
-    TQDate max;
-    bool changed;
-    TQDateTimeEditor *ed;
-    TQSpinWidget *controls;
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQDateEdit tqdatetimeedit.h
-    \brief The TQDateEdit class provides a date editor.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-    \ingroup time
-    \mainclass
-
-    TQDateEdit allows the user to edit dates by using the keyboard or
-    the arrow keys to increase/decrease date values. The arrow keys
-    can be used to move from section to section within the TQDateEdit
-    box. Dates appear in accordance with the local date/time settings
-    or in year, month, day order if the system doesn't provide this
-    information. It is recommended that the TQDateEdit be initialised
-    with a date, e.g.
-
-    \code
-    TQDateEdit *dateEdit = new TQDateEdit( TQDate::tqcurrentDate(), this );
-    dateEdit->setRange( TQDate::tqcurrentDate().addDays( -365 ),
-			TQDate::tqcurrentDate().addDays(  365 ) );
-    dateEdit->setOrder( TQDateEdit::MDY );
-    dateEdit->setAutoAdvance( TRUE );
-    \endcode
-
-    Here we've created a new TQDateEdit object initialised with today's
-    date and restricted the valid date range to today plus or minus
-    365 days. We've set the order to month, day, year. If the auto
-    advance property is TRUE (as we've set it here) when the user
-    completes a section of the date, e.g. enters two digits for the
-    month, they are automatically taken to the next section.
-
-    The maximum and minimum values for a date value in the date editor
-    default to the maximum and minimum values for a TQDate. You can
-    change this by calling setMinValue(), setMaxValue() or setRange().
-
-    Terminology: A TQDateEdit widget comprises three 'sections', one
-    each for the year, month and day. You can change the separator
-    character using TQDateTimeEditor::setSeparator(), by default the
-    separator will be taken from the systems settings. If that is
-    not possible, it defaults to "-".
-
-    \img datetimewidgets.png Date Time Widgets
-
-    \sa TQDate TQTimeEdit TQDateTimeEdit
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQDateEdit::Order
-
-    This enum defines the order in which the sections that comprise a
-    date appear.
-    \value MDY month-day-year
-    \value DMY day-month-year
-    \value YMD year-month-day (the default)
-    \value YDM year-day-month (included for completeness; but should
-    not be used)
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTimeEdit::Display
-
-    This enum defines the sections that comprise a time
-
-    \value Hours The hours section
-    \value Minutes The minutes section
-    \value Seconds The seconds section
-    \value AMPM The AM/PM section
-
-    The values can be or'ed together to show any combination.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty date editor which is a child of \a parent and
-    called name \a name.
-*/
-
-TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit( TQWidget * parent, const char * name )
-    : TQDateTimeEditBase( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-    updateButtons();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Constructs a date editor with the initial value \a date, parent \a
-    parent and called \a name.
-
-    The date editor is initialized with \a date.
-*/
-
-TQDateEdit::TQDateEdit( const QDate& date, QWidget * parent, const char * name )
-    : TQDateTimeEditBase( TQT_TQWIDGET(parent), name )
-{
-    init();
-    setDate( TQT_TQDATE_OBJECT(date) );
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-*/
-void TQDateEdit::init()
-{
-    d = new TQDateEditPrivate();
-    d->controls = new TQDateTimeSpinWidget( this, qstrcmp( name(), "qt_datetime_dateedit" ) == 0 ? "qt_spin_widget" : "date edit controls" );
-    d->ed = new TQDateTimeEditor( this, d->controls, "date editor" );
-    d->controls->setEditWidget( d->ed );
-    setFocusProxy( d->ed );
-    connect( d->controls, TQT_SIGNAL( stepUpPressed() ), TQT_SLOT( stepUp() ) );
-    connect( d->controls, TQT_SIGNAL( stepDownPressed() ), TQT_SLOT( stepDown() ) );
-    connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL( valueChanged(const TQDate&) ),
-	     TQT_SLOT( updateButtons() ) );
-    d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 0,4 ) );
-    d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 5,7 ) );
-    d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 8,10 ) );
-
-    d->yearSection = -1;
-    d->monthSection = -1;
-    d->daySection = -1;
-
-    d->y = 0;
-    d->m = 0;
-    d->d = 0;
-    d->dayCache = 0;
-    setOrder( localOrder() );
-    setFocusSection( 0 );
-    d->overwrite = TRUE;
-    d->adv = FALSE;
-    d->timerId = 0;
-    d->typing = FALSE;
-    d->min = TQDate( 1752, 9, 14 );
-    d->max = TQDate( 8000, 12, 31 );
-    d->changed = FALSE;
-
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
-
-    refcount++;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQDateEdit::~TQDateEdit()
-{
-    delete d;
-    if ( !--refcount )
-	cleanup();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDateEdit::minValue
-
-    \brief the editor's minimum value
-
-    Setting the minimum date value is equivalent to calling
-    TQDateEdit::setRange( \e d, maxValue() ), where \e d is the minimum
-    date. The default minimum date is 1752-09-14.
-
-    \sa maxValue setRange()
-*/
-
-TQDate TQDateEdit::minValue() const
-{
-    return d->min;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDateEdit::maxValue
-
-    \brief the editor's maximum value
-
-    Setting the maximum date value for the editor is equivalent to
-    calling TQDateEdit::setRange( minValue(), \e d ), where \e d is the
-    maximum date. The default maximum date is 8000-12-31.
-
-    \sa minValue setRange()
-*/
-
-TQDate TQDateEdit::maxValue() const
-{
-    return d->max;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the valid input range for the editor to be from \a min to \a
-    max inclusive. If \a min is invalid no minimum date will be set.
-    Similarly, if \a max is invalid no maximum date will be set.
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::setRange( const TQDate& min, const TQDate& max )
-{
-    if ( min.isValid() )
-	d->min = min;
-    if ( max.isValid() )
-	d->max = max;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the separator to \a s. Note that currently only the first
-    character of \a s is used.
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::setSeparator( const TQString& s )
-{
-    d->ed->setSeparator( s );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the editor's separator.
-*/
-
-TQString TQDateEdit::separator() const
-{
-    return d->ed->separator();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Enables/disables the push buttons according to the min/max date
-    for this widget.
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::updateButtons()
-{
-    if ( !isEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    bool upEnabled = date() < maxValue();
-    bool downEnabled = date() > minValue();
-
-    d->controls->setUpEnabled( upEnabled );
-    d->controls->setDownEnabled( downEnabled );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-void TQDateEdit::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
-{
-    d->controls->resize( width(), height() );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-TQSize TQDateEdit::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    TQFontMetrics fm( font() );
-    int fw = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth, this );
-    int h = TQMAX( fm.lineSpacing(), 14 ) + 2;
-    int w = 2 + fm.width( '9' ) * 8 + fm.width( d->ed->separator() ) * 2 + d->controls->upRect().width() + fw * 4;
-
-    return TQSize( w, TQMAX(h + fw * 2,20) ).expandedTo( TQApplication::globalStrut() );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-TQSize TQDateEdit::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    return tqsizeHint();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the formatted number for section \a sec. This will
-    correspond to either the year, month or day section, depending on
-    the current display order.
-
-    \sa setOrder()
-*/
-
-TQString TQDateEdit::sectionFormattedText( int sec )
-{
-    TQString txt;
-    txt = sectionText( sec );
-    if ( d->typing && sec == d->ed->focusSection() )
-	d->ed->setSectionSelection( sec, sectionOffsetEnd( sec ) - txt.length(),
-			     sectionOffsetEnd( sec ) );
-    else
-	d->ed->setSectionSelection( sec, sectionOffsetEnd( sec ) - sectionLength( sec ),
-			     sectionOffsetEnd( sec ) );
-    txt = txt.rightJustify( sectionLength( sec ), TQDATETIMEEDIT_HIDDEN_CHAR );
-    return txt;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the desired length (number of digits) of section \a sec.
-    This will correspond to either the year, month or day section,
-    depending on the current display order.
-
-    \sa setOrder()
-*/
-
-int TQDateEdit::sectionLength( int sec ) const
-{
-    int val = 0;
-    if ( sec == d->yearSection ) {
-	val = 4;
-    } else if ( sec == d->monthSection ) {
-	val = 2;
-    } else if ( sec == d->daySection ) {
-	val = 2;
-    }
-    return val;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the text of section \a sec. This will correspond to either
-    the year, month or day section, depending on the current display
-    order.
-
-    \sa setOrder()
-*/
-
-TQString TQDateEdit::sectionText( int sec ) const
-{
-    int val = 0;
-    if ( sec == d->yearSection ) {
-	val = d->y;
-    } else if ( sec == d->monthSection ) {
-	val = d->m;
-    } else if ( sec == d->daySection ) {
-	val = d->d;
-    }
-    return TQString::number( val );
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  Returns the end of the section offset \a sec.
-
-*/
-
-int TQDateEdit::sectionOffsetEnd( int sec ) const
-{
-    if ( sec == d->yearSection ) {
-	switch( d->ord ) {
-	case DMY:
-	case MDY:
-	    return sectionOffsetEnd( sec-1) + separator().length() + sectionLength( sec );
-	case YMD:
-	case YDM:
-	    return sectionLength( sec );
-	}
-    } else if ( sec == d->monthSection ) {
-	switch( d->ord ) {
-	case DMY:
-	case YDM:
-	case YMD:
-	    return sectionOffsetEnd( sec-1) + separator().length() + sectionLength( sec );
-	case MDY:
-	    return sectionLength( sec );
-	}
-    } else if ( sec == d->daySection ) {
-	switch( d->ord ) {
-	case DMY:
-	    return sectionLength( sec );
-	case YMD:
-	case MDY:
-	case YDM:
-	    return sectionOffsetEnd( sec-1 ) + separator().length() + sectionLength( sec );
-	}
-    }
-    return 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDateEdit::order
-    \brief the order in which the year, month and day appear
-
-    The default order is locale dependent.
-
-    \sa Order
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::setOrder( TQDateEdit::Order order )
-{
-    d->ord = order;
-    switch( d->ord ) {
-    case DMY:
-	d->yearSection = 2;
-	d->monthSection = 1;
-	d->daySection = 0;
-	break;
-    case MDY:
-	d->yearSection = 2;
-	d->monthSection = 0;
-	d->daySection = 1;
-	break;
-    case YMD:
-	d->yearSection = 0;
-	d->monthSection = 1;
-	d->daySection = 2;
-	break;
-    case YDM:
-	d->yearSection = 0;
-	d->monthSection = 2;
-	d->daySection = 1;
-	break;
-    }
-    if ( isVisible() )
-	d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-
-TQDateEdit::Order TQDateEdit::order() const
-{
-    return d->ord;
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-void TQDateEdit::stepUp()
-{
-    int sec = d->ed->focusSection();
-    bool accepted = FALSE;
-    if ( sec == d->yearSection ) {
-	if ( !outOfRange( d->y+1, d->m, d->d ) ) {
-	    accepted = TRUE;
-	    setYear( d->y+1 );
-	}
-    } else if ( sec == d->monthSection ) {
-	if ( !outOfRange( d->y, d->m+1, d->d ) ) {
-	    accepted = TRUE;
-	    setMonth( d->m+1 );
-	}
-    } else if ( sec == d->daySection ) {
-	if ( !outOfRange( d->y, d->m, d->d+1 ) ) {
-	    accepted = TRUE;
-	    setDay( d->d+1 );
-	}
-    }
-    if ( accepted ) {
-	d->changed = FALSE;
-	emit valueChanged( date() );
-    }
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::stepDown()
-{
-    int sec = d->ed->focusSection();
-    bool accepted = FALSE;
-    if ( sec == d->yearSection ) {
-	if ( !outOfRange( d->y-1, d->m, d->d ) ) {
-	    accepted = TRUE;
-	    setYear( d->y-1 );
-	}
-    } else if ( sec == d->monthSection ) {
-	if ( !outOfRange( d->y, d->m-1, d->d ) ) {
-	    accepted = TRUE;
-	    setMonth( d->m-1 );
-	}
-    } else if ( sec == d->daySection ) {
-	if ( !outOfRange( d->y, d->m, d->d-1 ) ) {
-	    accepted = TRUE;
-	    setDay( d->d-1 );
-	}
-    }
-    if ( accepted ) {
-	d->changed = FALSE;
-	emit valueChanged( date() );
-    }
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the year to \a year, which must be a valid year. The range
-    currently supported is from 1752 to 8000.
-
-    \sa TQDate
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::setYear( int year )
-{
-    if ( year < 1752 )
-	year = 1752;
-    if ( year > 8000 )
-	year = 8000;
-    if ( !outOfRange( year, d->m, d->d ) ) {
-	d->y = year;
-	setMonth( d->m );
-	int tmp = d->dayCache;
-	setDay( d->dayCache );
-	d->dayCache = tmp;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the month to \a month, which must be a valid month, i.e.
-    between 1 and 12.
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::setMonth( int month )
-{
-    if ( month < 1 )
-	month = 1;
-    if ( month > 12 )
-	month = 12;
-    if ( !outOfRange( d->y, month, d->d ) ) {
-	d->m = month;
-	int tmp = d->dayCache;
-	setDay( d->dayCache );
-	d->dayCache = tmp;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the day to \a day, which must be a valid day. The function
-    will ensure that the \a day set is valid for the month and year.
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::setDay( int day )
-{
-    if ( day < 1 )
-	day = 1;
-    if ( day > 31 )
-	day = 31;
-    if ( d->m > 0 && d->y > 1752 ) {
-	while ( !TQDate::isValid( d->y, d->m, day ) )
-	    --day;
-	if ( !outOfRange( d->y, d->m, day ) )
-	    d->d = day;
-    } else if ( d->m > 0 ) {
-	if ( day > 0 && day < 32 ) {
-	    if ( !outOfRange( d->y, d->m, day ) )
-		d->d = day;
-	}
-    }
-    d->dayCache = d->d;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDateEdit::date
-    \brief the editor's date value.
-
-    If the date property is not valid, the editor displays all zeroes
-    and TQDateEdit::date() will return an invalid date. It is strongly
-    recommended that the editor is given a default date value (e.g.
-    currentDate()). That way, attempts to set the date property to an
-    invalid date will fail.
-
-    When changing the date property, if the date is less than
-    minValue(), or is greater than maxValue(), nothing happens.
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::setDate( const TQDate& date )
-{
-    if ( !date.isValid() ) {
-	d->y = 0;
-	d->m = 0;
-	d->d = 0;
-	d->dayCache = 0;
-    } else {
-	if ( date > maxValue() || date < minValue() )
-	    return;
-	d->y = date.year();
-	d->m = date.month();
-	d->d = date.day();
-	d->dayCache = d->d;
-	emit valueChanged( date );
-    }
-    d->changed = FALSE;
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-TQDate TQDateEdit::date() const
-{
-    if ( TQDate::isValid( d->y, d->m, d->d ) )
-	return TQDate( d->y, d->m, d->d );
-    return TQDate();
-}
-
-/*!  \internal
-
-  Returns TRUE if \a y, \a m, \a d is out of range, otherwise returns
-  FALSE.
-
-  \sa setRange()
-
-*/
-
-bool TQDateEdit::outOfRange( int y, int m, int d ) const
-{
-    if ( TQDate::isValid( y, m, d ) ) {
-	TQDate tqcurrentDate( y, m, d );
-	if ( tqcurrentDate > maxValue() ||
-	     tqcurrentDate < minValue() ) {
-	    //## outOfRange should set overwrite?
-	    return TRUE;
-	}
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-    return FALSE; /* assume ok */
-}
-
-/*!  \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::addNumber( int sec, int num )
-{
-    if ( sec == -1 )
-	return;
-    killTimer( d->timerId );
-    bool overwrite = FALSE;
-    bool accepted = FALSE;
-    d->typing = TRUE;
-    TQString txt;
-    if ( sec == d->yearSection ) {
-	txt = TQString::number( d->y );
-	if ( d->overwrite || txt.length() == 4 ) {
-	    accepted = TRUE;
-	    d->y = num;
-	} else {
-	    txt += TQString::number( num );
-	    if ( txt.length() == 4  ) {
-		int val = txt.toInt();
-		if ( val < 1792 )
-		    d->y = 1792;
-		else if ( val > 8000 )
-		    d->y = 8000;
-		else if ( outOfRange( val, d->m, d->d ) )
-		    txt = TQString::number( d->y );
-		else {
-		    accepted = TRUE;
-		    d->y = val;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		accepted = TRUE;
-		d->y = txt.toInt();
-	    }
-	    if ( d->adv && txt.length() == 4 ) {
-		d->ed->setFocusSection( d->ed->focusSection()+1 );
-		overwrite = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-    } else if ( sec == d->monthSection ) {
-	txt = TQString::number( d->m );
-	if ( d->overwrite || txt.length() == 2 ) {
-	    accepted = TRUE;
-	    d->m = num;
-	} else {
-	    txt += TQString::number( num );
-	    int temp = txt.toInt();
-	    if ( temp > 12 )
-		temp = num;
-	    if ( outOfRange( d->y, temp, d->d ) )
-		txt = TQString::number( d->m );
-	    else {
-		accepted = TRUE;
-		d->m = temp;
-	    }
-	    if ( d->adv && txt.length() == 2 ) {
-		d->ed->setFocusSection( d->ed->focusSection()+1 );
-		overwrite = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-    } else if ( sec == d->daySection ) {
-	txt = TQString::number( d->d );
-	if ( d->overwrite || txt.length() == 2 ) {
-	    accepted = TRUE;
-	    d->d = num;
-	    d->dayCache = d->d;
-	} else {
-	    txt += TQString::number( num );
-	    int temp = txt.toInt();
-	    if ( temp > 31 )
-		temp = num;
-	    if ( outOfRange( d->y, d->m, temp ) )
-		txt = TQString::number( d->d );
-	    else {
-		accepted = TRUE;
-		d->d = temp;
-		d->dayCache = d->d;
-	    }
-	    if ( d->adv && txt.length() == 2 ) {
-		d->ed->setFocusSection( d->ed->focusSection()+1 );
-		overwrite = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    if ( accepted ) {
-	d->changed = FALSE;
-	emit valueChanged( date() );
-    }
-    d->overwrite = overwrite;
-    d->timerId = startTimer( tqApp->doubleClickInterval()*4 );
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-bool TQDateEdit::setFocusSection( int s )
-{
-    if ( s != d->ed->focusSection() ) {
-	killTimer( d->timerId );
-	d->overwrite = TRUE;
-	d->typing = FALSE;
-	fix(); // will emit valueChanged if necessary
-    }
-    return d->ed->setFocusSection( s );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Attempts to fix any invalid date entries.
-
-    The rules applied are as follows:
-
-    \list
-    \i If the year has four digits it is left unchanged.
-    \i If the year has two digits, the year will be changed to four
-    digits in the range current year - 70 to current year + 29.
-    \i If the year has three digits in the range 100..999, the
-    current millennium, i.e. 2000, will be added giving a year
-    in the range 2100..2999.
-    \i If the day or month is 0 then it will be set to 1 or the
-    minimum valid day\month in the range.
-    \endlist
-
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::fix()
-{
-    bool changed = FALSE;
-    int currentYear = TQDate::currentDate().year();
-    int year = d->y;
-    if ( year < 100 ) {
-	int currentCentury = currentYear / 100;
-	year += currentCentury * 100;
-	if ( currentYear > year ) {
-	    if ( currentYear > year + 70 )
-		year += 100;
-	} else {
-	    if ( year >= currentYear + 30 )
-		year -= 100;
-	}
-	changed = TRUE;
-    } else if ( year < 1000 ) {
-	int currentMillennium = currentYear / 10;
-	year += currentMillennium * 10;
-	changed = TRUE;
-    } else if (d->d == 0) {
-	d->d = 1;
-	changed = TRUE;
-    } else if (d->m == 0) {
-	d->m = 1;
-	changed = TRUE;
-    }
-    if ( outOfRange( year, d->m, d->d ) ) {
-	if ( minValue().isValid() && date() < minValue() ) {
-	    d->d =  minValue().day();
-	    d->dayCache = d->d;
-	    d->m = minValue().month();
-	    d->y = minValue().year();
-	}
-	if ( date() > maxValue() ) {
-	    d->d =  maxValue().day();
-	    d->dayCache = d->d;
-	    d->m = maxValue().month();
-	    d->y = maxValue().year();
-	}
-	changed = TRUE;
-    } else if ( changed )
-	setYear( year );
-    if ( changed ) {
-	emit valueChanged( date() );
-	d->changed = FALSE;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-bool TQDateEdit::event( TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if( e->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut ) {
-	d->typing = FALSE;
-	fix();
-	// the following can't be done in fix() because fix() called
-	// from all over the place and it will break the old behaviour
-	if ( !TQDate::isValid( d->y, d->m, d->d ) ) {
-	    d->dayCache = d->d;
-	    int i = d->d;
-	    for ( ; i > 0; i-- ) {
-		d->d = i;
-		if ( TQDate::isValid( d->y, d->m, d->d ) )
-		    break;
-	    }
-	    d->changed = TRUE;
-	}
-	if ( d->changed ) {
-	    emit valueChanged( date() );
-	    d->changed = FALSE;
-	}
-    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LocaleChange ) {
-	readLocaleSettings();
-	d->ed->setSeparator( localDateSep() );
-	setOrder( localOrder() );
-    }
-    return TQDateTimeEditBase::event( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-
-  Function which is called whenever the user tries to
-  remove the first number from \a sec by pressing the backspace key.
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::removeFirstNumber( int sec )
-{
-    if ( sec == -1 )
-	return;
-    TQString txt;
-    if ( sec == d->yearSection ) {
-	txt = TQString::number( d->y );
-	txt = txt.mid( 1, txt.length() ) + "0";
-	d->y = txt.toInt();
-    } else if ( sec == d->monthSection ) {
-	txt = TQString::number( d->m );
-	txt = txt.mid( 1, txt.length() ) + "0";
-	d->m = txt.toInt();
-    } else if ( sec == d->daySection ) {
-	txt = TQString::number( d->d );
-	txt = txt.mid( 1, txt.length() ) + "0";
-	d->d = txt.toInt();
-	d->dayCache = d->d;
-    }
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::removeLastNumber( int sec )
-{
-    if ( sec == -1 )
-	return;
-    TQString txt;
-    if ( sec == d->yearSection ) {
-	txt = TQString::number( d->y );
-	txt = txt.mid( 0, txt.length()-1 );
-	d->y = txt.toInt();
-    } else if ( sec == d->monthSection ) {
-	txt = TQString::number( d->m );
-	txt = txt.mid( 0, txt.length()-1 );
-	d->m = txt.toInt();
-    } else if ( sec == d->daySection ) {
-	txt = TQString::number( d->d );
-	txt = txt.mid( 0, txt.length()-1 );
-	d->d = txt.toInt();
-	d->dayCache = d->d;
-    }
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDateEdit::autoAdvance
-    \brief whether the editor automatically advances to the next
-    section
-
-    If autoAdvance is TRUE, the editor will automatically advance
-    focus to the next date section if a user has completed a section.
-    The default is FALSE.
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::setAutoAdvance( bool advance )
-{
-    d->adv = advance;
-}
-
-
-bool TQDateEdit::autoAdvance() const
-{
-    return d->adv;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQDateEdit::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * )
-{
-    d->overwrite = TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDateEdit::valueChanged( const TQDate& date )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the editor's value changes. The \a
-    date parameter is the new value.
-*/
-
-///////////
-
-class TQTimeEditPrivate
-{
-public:
-    int h;
-    int m;
-    int s;
-    uint display;
-    bool adv;
-    bool overwrite;
-    int timerId;
-    bool typing;
-    TQTime min;
-    TQTime max;
-    bool changed;
-    TQDateTimeEditor *ed;
-    TQSpinWidget *controls;
-};
-
-/*!
-    \class TQTimeEdit tqdatetimeedit.h
-    \brief The TQTimeEdit class provides a time editor.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-    \ingroup time
-    \mainclass
-
-    TQTimeEdit allows the user to edit times by using the keyboard or
-    the arrow keys to increase/decrease time values. The arrow keys
-    can be used to move from section to section within the TQTimeEdit
-    box. The user can automatically be moved to the next section once
-    they complete a section using setAutoAdvance(). Times appear in
-    hour, minute, second order. It is recommended that the TQTimeEdit
-    is initialised with a time, e.g.
-    \code
-    TQTime timeNow = TQTime::currentTime();
-    TQTimeEdit *timeEdit = new TQTimeEdit( timeNow, this );
-    timeEdit->setRange( timeNow, timeNow.addSecs( 60 * 60 ) );
-    \endcode
-    Here we've created a TQTimeEdit widget set to the current time.
-    We've also set the minimum value to the current time and the
-    maximum time to one hour from now.
-
-    The maximum and minimum values for a time value in the time editor
-    default to the maximum and minimum values for a TQTime. You can
-    change this by calling setMinValue(), setMaxValue() or setRange().
-
-    Terminology: A TQTimeWidget consists of three sections, one each
-    for the hour, minute and second. You can change the separator
-    character using setSeparator(), by default the separator is read
-    from the system's settings.
-
-    \img datetimewidgets.png Date Time Widgets
-
-    \sa TQTime TQDateEdit TQDateTimeEdit
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty time edit with parent \a parent and called \a
-    name.
-*/
-
-TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit( TQWidget * parent, const char * name )
-    : TQDateTimeEditBase( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Constructs a time edit with the initial time value, \a time,
-    parent \a parent and called \a name.
-*/
-
-TQTimeEdit::TQTimeEdit( const QTime& time, QWidget * parent, const char * name )
-    : TQDateTimeEditBase( TQT_TQWIDGET(parent), name )
-{
-    init();
-    setTime( TQT_TQTIME_OBJECT(time) );
-}
-
-/*! \internal
- */
-
-void TQTimeEdit::init()
-{
-    d = new TQTimeEditPrivate();
-    d->controls = new TQDateTimeSpinWidget( this, qstrcmp( name(), "qt_datetime_timeedit" ) == 0 ? "qt_spin_widget" : "time edit controls" );
-    d->ed = new TQDateTimeEditor( this, d->controls, "time edit base" );
-    d->controls->setEditWidget( d->ed );
-    setFocusProxy( d->ed );
-    connect( d->controls, TQT_SIGNAL( stepUpPressed() ), TQT_SLOT( stepUp() ) );
-    connect( d->controls, TQT_SIGNAL( stepDownPressed() ), TQT_SLOT( stepDown() ) );
-
-    d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 0,0, TRUE, 0 ) );
-    d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 0,0, TRUE, 1 ) );
-    d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 0,0, TRUE, 2 ) );
-    d->ed->setSeparator( localTimeSep() );
-
-    d->h = 0;
-    d->m = 0;
-    d->s = 0;
-    d->display = Hours | Minutes | Seconds;
-    if ( lAMPM ) {
-	d->display |= AMPM;
-	d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 0,0, FALSE, 3 ) );
-    }
-    d->adv = FALSE;
-    d->overwrite = TRUE;
-    d->timerId = 0;
-    d->typing = FALSE;
-    d->min = TQTime( 0, 0, 0 );
-    d->max = TQTime( 23, 59, 59 );
-    d->changed = FALSE;
-
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
-
-    refcount++;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQTimeEdit::~TQTimeEdit()
-{
-    delete d;
-    if ( !--refcount )
-	cleanup();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTimeEdit::minValue
-    \brief the minimum time value
-
-    Setting the minimum time value is equivalent to calling
-    TQTimeEdit::setRange( \e t, maxValue() ), where \e t is the minimum
-    time. The default minimum time is 00:00:00.
-
-    \sa maxValue setRange()
-*/
-
-TQTime TQTimeEdit::minValue() const
-{
-    return d->min;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTimeEdit::maxValue
-    \brief the maximum time value
-
-    Setting the maximum time value is equivalent to calling
-    TQTimeEdit::setRange( minValue(), \e t ), where \e t is the maximum
-    time. The default maximum time is 23:59:59.
-
-    \sa minValue setRange()
-*/
-
-TQTime TQTimeEdit::maxValue() const
-{
-    return d->max;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the valid input range for the editor to be from \a min to \a
-    max inclusive. If \a min is invalid no minimum time is set.
-    Similarly, if \a max is invalid no maximum time is set.
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::setRange( const TQTime& min, const TQTime& max )
-{
-    if ( min.isValid() )
-	d->min = min;
-    if ( max.isValid() )
-	d->max = max;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \property TQTimeEdit::display
-  \brief the sections that are displayed in the time edit
-
-  The value can be any combination of the values in the Display enum.
-  By default, the widget displays hours, minutes and seconds.
-*/
-void TQTimeEdit::setDisplay( uint display )
-{
-    if ( d->display == display )
-	return;
-
-    d->ed->clearSections();
-    d->display = display;
-    if ( d->display & Hours )
-	d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 0,0, TRUE, 0 ) );
-    if ( d->display & Minutes )
-	d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 0,0, TRUE, 1 ) );
-    if ( d->display & Seconds )
-	d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 0,0, TRUE, 2 ) );
-    if ( d->display & AMPM )
-	d->ed->appendSection( TQNumberSection( 0,0, FALSE, 3 ) );
-
-    d->ed->setFocusSection( 0 );
-    d->ed->update();
-}
-
-uint TQTimeEdit::display() const
-{
-    return d->display;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTimeEdit::time
-    \brief the editor's time value.
-
-    When changing the time property, if the time is less than
-    minValue(), or is greater than maxValue(), nothing happens.
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::setTime( const TQTime& time )
-{
-    if ( !time.isValid() ) {
-	d->h = 0;
-	d->m = 0;
-	d->s = 0;
-    } else {
-	if ( time > maxValue() || time < minValue() )
-	    return;
-	d->h = time.hour();
-	d->m = time.minute();
-	d->s = time.second();
-	emit valueChanged( time );
-    }
-    d->changed = FALSE;
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-TQTime TQTimeEdit::time() const
-{
-    if ( TQTime::isValid( d->h, d->m, d->s ) )
-	return TQTime( d->h, d->m, d->s );
-    return TQTime();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTimeEdit::autoAdvance
-    \brief whether the editor automatically advances to the next
-    section
-
-    If autoAdvance is TRUE, the editor will automatically advance
-    focus to the next time section if a user has completed a section.
-    The default is FALSE.
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::setAutoAdvance( bool advance )
-{
-    d->adv = advance;
-}
-
-bool TQTimeEdit::autoAdvance() const
-{
-    return d->adv;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the separator to \a s. Note that currently only the first
-    character of \a s is used.
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::setSeparator( const TQString& s )
-{
-    d->ed->setSeparator( s );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the editor's separator.
-*/
-
-TQString TQTimeEdit::separator() const
-{
-    return d->ed->separator();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTimeEdit::valueChanged( const TQTime& time )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the editor's value changes. The \a
-    time parameter is the new value.
-*/
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-bool TQTimeEdit::event( TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut ) {
-	d->typing = FALSE;
-	if ( d->changed ) {
-	    emit valueChanged( time() );
-	    d->changed = FALSE;
-	}
-    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LocaleChange ) {
-	readLocaleSettings();
-	d->ed->setSeparator( localTimeSep() );
-    }
-    return TQDateTimeEditBase::event( e );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * )
-{
-    d->overwrite = TRUE;
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::stepUp()
-{
-    if (minValue() > maxValue()) {
-        return;
-    }
-    int sec = d->ed->mapSection( d->ed->focusSection() );
-    bool accepted = TRUE;
-    switch( sec ) {
-    case 0:
-        do {
-            d->h = (d->h + 1) % 24;
-        } while (outOfRange(d->h, d->m, d->s));
-	break;
-    case 1:
-        do {
-            d->m = (d->m + 1) % 60;
-        } while (outOfRange(d->h, d->m, d->s));
-	break;
-    case 2:
-        do {
-            d->s = (d->s + 1) % 60;
-        } while (outOfRange(d->h, d->m, d->s));
-	break;
-    case 3:
-	if ( d->h < 12 )
-	    setHour( d->h+12 );
-	else
-	    setHour( d->h-12 );
-	break;
-    default:
-	accepted = FALSE;
-#ifdef TQT_CHECK_RANGE
-	qWarning( "TQTimeEdit::stepUp: Focus section out of range!" );
-#endif
-	break;
-    }
-    if ( accepted ) {
-	d->changed = FALSE;
-	emit valueChanged( time() );
-    }
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::stepDown()
-{
-    if (minValue() > maxValue()) {
-        return;
-    }
-
-    int sec = d->ed->mapSection( d->ed->focusSection() );
-    bool accepted = TRUE;
-    switch( sec ) {
-    case 0:
-        do {
-            if (--d->h < 0)
-                d->h = 23;
-        } while (outOfRange(d->h, d->m, d->s));
-	break;
-    case 1:
-        do {
-            if (--d->m < 0)
-                d->m = 59;
-        } while (outOfRange(d->h, d->m, d->s));
-	break;
-    case 2:
-        do {
-            if (--d->s < 0)
-                d->s = 59;
-        } while (outOfRange(d->h, d->m, d->s));
-	break;
-    case 3:
-	if ( d->h > 11 )
-	    setHour( d->h-12 );
-	else
-	    setHour( d->h+12 );
-	break;
-    default:
-	accepted = FALSE;
-#ifdef TQT_CHECK_RANGE
-	qWarning( "TQTimeEdit::stepDown: Focus section out of range!" );
-#endif
-	break;
-    }
-    if ( accepted ) {
-	d->changed = FALSE;
-	emit valueChanged( time() );
-    }
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the formatted number for section \a sec. This will
-    correspond to either the hour, minute or second section, depending
-    on \a sec.
-*/
-
-TQString TQTimeEdit::sectionFormattedText( int sec )
-{
-    TQString txt;
-    txt = sectionText( sec );
-    txt = txt.rightJustify( 2, TQDATETIMEEDIT_HIDDEN_CHAR );
-    int offset = sec*2+sec*separator().length() + txt.length();
-    if ( d->typing && sec == d->ed->focusSection() )
-	d->ed->setSectionSelection( sec, offset - txt.length(), offset );
-    else
-	d->ed->setSectionSelection( sec, offset - txt.length(), offset );
-
-    return txt;
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-bool TQTimeEdit::setFocusSection( int sec )
-{
-    if ( sec != d->ed->focusSection() ) {
-	killTimer( d->timerId );
-	d->overwrite = TRUE;
-	d->typing = FALSE;
-	TQString txt = sectionText( sec );
-	txt = txt.rightJustify( 2, TQDATETIMEEDIT_HIDDEN_CHAR );
-	int offset = sec*2+sec*separator().length() + txt.length();
-	d->ed->setSectionSelection( sec, offset - txt.length(), offset );
-	if ( d->changed ) {
-	    emit valueChanged( time() );
-	    d->changed = FALSE;
-	}
-    }
-    return d->ed->setFocusSection( sec );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the hour to \a h, which must be a valid hour, i.e. in the
-    range 0..24.
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::setHour( int h )
-{
-    if ( h < 0 )
-	h = 0;
-    if ( h > 23 )
-	h = 23;
-    d->h = h;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the minute to \a m, which must be a valid minute, i.e. in the
-    range 0..59.
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::setMinute( int m )
-{
-    if ( m < 0 )
-	m = 0;
-    if ( m > 59 )
-	m = 59;
-    d->m = m;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the second to \a s, which must be a valid second, i.e. in the
-    range 0..59.
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::setSecond( int s )
-{
-    if ( s < 0 )
-	s = 0;
-    if ( s > 59 )
-	s = 59;
-    d->s = s;
-}
-
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  Returns the text of section \a sec.
-
-*/
-
-TQString TQTimeEdit::sectionText( int sec )
-{
-    sec = d->ed->mapSection( sec );
-
-    TQString txt;
-    switch( sec ) {
-    case 0:
-	if ( !(d->display & AMPM) || ( d->h < 13 && d->h ) ) {    // I wished the day stared at 0:00 for everybody
-	    txt = TQString::number( d->h );
-	} else {
-	    if ( d->h )
-		txt = TQString::number( d->h - 12 );
-	    else
-		txt = "12";
-	}
-	break;
-    case 1:
-	txt = TQString::number( d->m );
-	break;
-    case 2:
-	txt = TQString::number( d->s );
-	break;
-    case 3:
-	if ( d->h < 12 ) {
-	    if ( lAM )
-		txt = *lAM;
-	    else
-		txt = TQString::tqfromLatin1( "AM" );
-	} else {
-	    if ( lPM )
-		txt = *lPM;
-	    else
-		txt = TQString::tqfromLatin1( "PM" );
-	}
-	break;
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-    return txt;
-}
-
-
-/*! \internal
- Returns TRUE if \a h, \a m, and \a s are out of range.
- */
-
-bool TQTimeEdit::outOfRange( int h, int m, int s ) const
-{
-    if ( TQTime::isValid( h, m, s ) ) {
-	TQTime currentTime( h, m, s );
-	if ( currentTime > maxValue() ||
-	     currentTime < minValue() )
-	    return TRUE;
-	else
-	    return FALSE;
-    }
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::addNumber( int sec, int num )
-{
-    if ( sec == -1 )
-	return;
-    sec = d->ed->mapSection( sec );
-    killTimer( d->timerId );
-    bool overwrite = FALSE;
-    bool accepted = FALSE;
-    d->typing = TRUE;
-    TQString txt;
-
-    switch( sec ) {
-    case 0:
-	txt = ( d->display & AMPM && d->h > 12 ) ?
-	    TQString::number( d->h - 12 ) : TQString::number( d->h );
-
-	if ( d->overwrite || txt.length() == 2 ) {
-	    if ( d->display & AMPM && num == 0 )
-		break; // Don't process 0 in 12 hour clock mode
-	    if ( d->display & AMPM && d->h > 11 )
-		num += 12;
-	    if ( !outOfRange( num, d->m, d->s ) ) {
-		accepted = TRUE;
-		d->h = num;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    txt += TQString::number( num );
-	    int temp = txt.toInt();
-
-	    if ( d->display & AMPM ) {
-		if ( temp == 12 ) {
-		    if ( d->h < 12 ) {
-			temp = 0;
-		    }
-		    accepted = TRUE;
-		} else if ( outOfRange( temp + 12, d->m, d->s ) ) {
-		    txt = TQString::number( d->h );
-		} else {
-		    if ( d->h > 11 ) {
-			temp += 12;
-		    }
-		    accepted = TRUE;
-		}
-	    } else if ( !(d->display & AMPM) && outOfRange( temp, d->m, d->s ) ) {
-		txt = TQString::number( d->h );
-	    } else {
-		accepted = TRUE;
-	    }
-
-	    if ( accepted )
-		d->h = temp;
-
-	    if ( d->adv && txt.length() == 2 ) {
-		setFocusSection( d->ed->focusSection()+1 );
-		overwrite = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-	break;
-
-    case 1:
-	txt = TQString::number( d->m );
-	if ( d->overwrite || txt.length() == 2 ) {
-	    if ( !outOfRange( d->h, num, d->s ) ) {
-		accepted = TRUE;
-		d->m = num;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    txt += TQString::number( num );
-	    int temp = txt.toInt();
-	    if ( temp > 59 )
-		temp = num;
-	    if ( outOfRange( d->h, temp, d->s ) )
-		txt = TQString::number( d->m );
-	    else {
-		accepted = TRUE;
-		d->m = temp;
-	    }
-	    if ( d->adv && txt.length() == 2 ) {
-		setFocusSection( d->ed->focusSection()+1 );
-		overwrite = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-	break;
-
-    case 2:
-	txt = TQString::number( d->s );
-	if ( d->overwrite || txt.length() == 2 ) {
-	    if ( !outOfRange( d->h, d->m, num ) ) {
-		accepted = TRUE;
-		d->s = num;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    txt += TQString::number( num );
-	    int temp = txt.toInt();
-	    if ( temp > 59 )
-		temp = num;
-	    if ( outOfRange( d->h, d->m, temp ) )
-		txt = TQString::number( d->s );
-	    else {
-		accepted = TRUE;
-		d->s = temp;
-	    }
-	    if ( d->adv && txt.length() == 2 ) {
-		setFocusSection( d->ed->focusSection()+1 );
-		overwrite = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-	break;
-
-    case 3:
-	break;
-
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-    d->changed = !accepted;
-    if ( accepted )
-	emit valueChanged( time() );
-    d->overwrite = overwrite;
-    d->timerId = startTimer( tqApp->doubleClickInterval()*4 );
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-
-  Function which is called whenever the user tries to
-  remove the first number from \a sec by pressing the backspace key.
-*/
-
-void TQTimeEdit::removeFirstNumber( int sec )
-{
-    if ( sec == -1 )
-	return;
-    sec = d->ed->mapSection( sec );
-    TQString txt;
-    switch( sec ) {
-    case 0:
-	txt = TQString::number( d->h );
-	break;
-    case 1:
-	txt = TQString::number( d->m );
-	break;
-    case 2:
-	txt = TQString::number( d->s );
-	break;
-    }
-    txt = txt.mid( 1, txt.length() ) + "0";
-    switch( sec ) {
-    case 0:
-	d->h = txt.toInt();
-	break;
-    case 1:
-	d->m = txt.toInt();
-	break;
-    case 2:
-	d->s = txt.toInt();
-	break;
-    }
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-void TQTimeEdit::removeLastNumber( int sec )
-{
-    if ( sec == -1 )
-	return;
-    sec = d->ed->mapSection( sec );
-    TQString txt;
-    switch( sec ) {
-    case 0:
-	txt = TQString::number( d->h );
-	break;
-    case 1:
-	txt = TQString::number( d->m );
-	break;
-    case 2:
-	txt = TQString::number( d->s );
-	break;
-    }
-    txt = txt.mid( 0, txt.length()-1 );
-    switch( sec ) {
-    case 0:
-	d->h = txt.toInt();
-	break;
-    case 1:
-	d->m = txt.toInt();
-	break;
-    case 2:
-	d->s = txt.toInt();
-	break;
-    }
-    d->ed->tqrepaint( d->ed->rect(), FALSE );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-void TQTimeEdit::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
-{
-    d->controls->resize( width(), height() );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQTimeEdit::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    TQFontMetrics fm( font() );
-    int fw = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth, this );
-    int h = fm.lineSpacing() + 2;
-    int w = 2 + fm.width( '9' ) * 6 + fm.width( d->ed->separator() ) * 2 +
-	d->controls->upRect().width() + fw * 4;
-    if ( d->display & AMPM ) {
-	if ( lAM )
-	    w += fm.width( *lAM ) + 4;
-	else
-	    w += fm.width( TQString::tqfromLatin1( "AM" ) ) + 4;
-    }
-
-    return TQSize( w, TQMAX(h + fw * 2,20) ).expandedTo( TQApplication::globalStrut() );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQTimeEdit::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    return tqsizeHint();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-    Enables/disables the push buttons according to the min/max time
-    for this widget.
-*/
-
-// ### Remove in 4.0?
-
-void TQTimeEdit::updateButtons()
-{
-    if ( !isEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    bool upEnabled = time() < maxValue();
-    bool downEnabled = time() > minValue();
-
-    d->controls->setUpEnabled( upEnabled );
-    d->controls->setDownEnabled( downEnabled );
-}
-
-
-class TQDateTimeEditPrivate
-{
-public:
-    bool adv;
-};
-
-/*!
-    \class TQDateTimeEdit tqdatetimeedit.h
-    \brief The TQDateTimeEdit class combines a TQDateEdit and TQTimeEdit
-    widget into a single widget for editing datetimes.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-    \ingroup time
-    \mainclass
-
-    TQDateTimeEdit consists of a TQDateEdit and TQTimeEdit widget placed
-    side by side and offers the functionality of both. The user can
-    edit the date and time by using the keyboard or the arrow keys to
-    increase/decrease date or time values. The Tab key can be used to
-    move from section to section within the TQDateTimeEdit widget, and
-    the user can be moved automatically when they complete a section
-    using setAutoAdvance(). The datetime can be set with
-    setDateTime().
-
-    The date format is read from the system's locale settings. It is
-    set to year, month, day order if that is not possible. See
-    TQDateEdit::setOrder() to change this. Times appear in the order
-    hours, minutes, seconds using the 24 hour clock.
-
-    It is recommended that the TQDateTimeEdit is initialised with a
-    datetime, e.g.
-    \code
-    TQDateTimeEdit *dateTimeEdit = new TQDateTimeEdit( TQDateTime::tqcurrentDateTime(), this );
-    dateTimeEdit->dateEdit()->setRange( TQDateTime::tqcurrentDate(),
-					TQDateTime::tqcurrentDate().addDays( 7 ) );
-    \endcode
-    Here we've created a new TQDateTimeEdit set to the current date and
-    time, and set the date to have a minimum date of now and a maximum
-    date of a week from now.
-
-    Terminology: A TQDateEdit widget consists of three 'sections', one
-    each for the year, month and day. Similarly a TQTimeEdit consists
-    of three sections, one each for the hour, minute and second. The
-    character that separates each date section is specified with
-    setDateSeparator(); similarly setTimeSeparator() is used for the
-    time sections.
-
-    \img datetimewidgets.png Date Time Widgets
-
-    \sa TQDateEdit TQTimeEdit
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty datetime edit with parent \a parent and called
-    \a name.
-*/
-TQDateTimeEdit::TQDateTimeEdit( TQWidget * parent, const char * name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Constructs a datetime edit with the initial value \a datetime,
-    parent \a parent and called \a name.
-*/
-TQDateTimeEdit::TQDateTimeEdit( const TQDateTime& datetime,
-			      TQWidget * parent, const char * name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-    setDateTime( datetime );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQDateTimeEdit::~TQDateTimeEdit()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-
-    Intercepts and handles resize events which have special meaning
-    for the TQDateTimeEdit.
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEdit::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
-{
-    int dw = de->tqsizeHint().width();
-    int tw = te->tqsizeHint().width();
-    int w = width();
-    int h = height();
-    int extra = w - ( dw + tw );
-
-    if ( tw + extra < 0 ) {
-	dw = w;
-    } else {
-	dw += 9 * extra / 16;
-    }
-    tw = w - dw;
-
-    de->setGeometry( 0, 0, dw, h );
-    te->setGeometry( dw, 0, tw, h );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQDateTimeEdit::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    TQSize dsh = de->tqminimumSizeHint();
-    TQSize tsh = te->tqminimumSizeHint();
-    return TQSize( dsh.width() + tsh.width(),
-		  TQMAX( dsh.height(), tsh.height() ) );
-}
-
-/*!  \internal
- */
-
-void TQDateTimeEdit::init()
-{
-    d = new TQDateTimeEditPrivate();
-    de = new TQDateEdit( this, "qt_datetime_dateedit" );
-    te = new TQTimeEdit( this, "qt_datetime_timeedit" );
-    d->adv = FALSE;
-    connect( de, TQT_SIGNAL( valueChanged(const TQDate&) ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( newValue(const TQDate&) ) );
-    connect( te, TQT_SIGNAL( valueChanged(const TQTime&) ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( newValue(const TQTime&) ) );
-    setFocusProxy( de );
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-
-TQSize TQDateTimeEdit::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    TQSize dsh = de->tqsizeHint();
-    TQSize tsh = te->tqsizeHint();
-    return TQSize( dsh.width() + tsh.width(),
-		  TQMAX( dsh.height(), tsh.height() ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDateTimeEdit::dateTime
-    \brief the editor's datetime value
-
-    The datetime edit's datetime which may be an invalid datetime.
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEdit::setDateTime( const TQDateTime & dt )
-{
-    if ( dt.isValid() ) {
-	de->setDate( TQT_TQDATE_OBJECT(dt.date()) );
-	te->setTime( TQT_TQTIME_OBJECT(dt.time()) );
-	emit valueChanged( dt );
-    }
-}
-
-TQDateTime TQDateTimeEdit::dateTime() const
-{
-    return TQDateTime( de->date(), te->time() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDateTimeEdit::valueChanged( const TQDateTime& datetime )
-
-    This signal is emitted every time the date or time changes. The \a
-    datetime argument is the new datetime.
-*/
-
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  Re-emits the value \a d.
- */
-
-void TQDateTimeEdit::newValue( const TQDate& )
-{
-    TQDateTime dt = dateTime();
-    emit valueChanged( dt );
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-  \overload
-  Re-emits the value \a t.
- */
-
-void TQDateTimeEdit::newValue( const TQTime& )
-{
-    TQDateTime dt = dateTime();
-    emit valueChanged( dt );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the auto advance property of the editor to \a advance. If set
-    to TRUE, the editor will automatically advance focus to the next
-    date or time section if the user has completed a section.
-*/
-
-void TQDateTimeEdit::setAutoAdvance( bool advance )
-{
-    de->setAutoAdvance( advance );
-    te->setAutoAdvance( advance );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if auto-advance is enabled, otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setAutoAdvance()
-*/
-
-bool TQDateTimeEdit::autoAdvance() const
-{
-    return de->autoAdvance();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQDateEdit* TQDateTimeEdit::dateEdit()
-
-    Returns the internal widget used for editing the date part of the
-    datetime.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQTimeEdit* TQDateTimeEdit::timeEdit()
-
-    Returns the internal widget used for editing the time part of the
-    datetime.
-*/
-
-#include "tqdatetimeedit.tqmoc"
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 4c072f0..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdatetimeedit.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,299 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of date and time edit classes
-**
-** Created : 001103
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2005-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQDATETIMEEDIT_H
-#define TQDATETIMEEDIT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqstring.h"
-#include "tqdatetime.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DATETIMEEDIT
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQDateTimeEditBase : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQDateTimeEditBase( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 )
-	: TQWidget( parent, name ) {}
-
-    virtual bool setFocusSection( int sec ) = 0;
-    virtual TQString sectionFormattedText( int sec ) = 0;
-    virtual void addNumber( int sec, int num ) = 0;
-    virtual void removeLastNumber( int sec ) = 0;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void stepUp() = 0;
-    virtual void stepDown() = 0;
-
-private:
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY) // Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-    TQDateTimeEditBase( const TQDateTimeEditBase & );
-    TQDateTimeEditBase &operator=( const TQDateTimeEditBase & );
-#endif
-};
-
-class TQDateEditPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQDateEdit : public TQDateTimeEditBase
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_ENUMS( Order )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Order order READ order WRITE setOrder )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQDate date READ date WRITE setDate )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool autoAdvance READ autoAdvance WRITE setAutoAdvance )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQDate maxValue READ maxValue WRITE setMaxValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQDate minValue READ minValue WRITE setMinValue )
-
-public:
-    TQDateEdit( TQWidget* parent=0,  const char* name=0 );
-    TQDateEdit( const QDate& date, QWidget* parent=0,  const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQDateEdit();
-
-    enum Order { DMY, MDY, YMD, YDM };
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setDate( const TQDate& date );
-
-public:
-    TQDate date() const;
-    virtual void setOrder( Order order );
-    Order order() const;
-    virtual void setAutoAdvance( bool advance );
-    bool autoAdvance() const;
-
-    virtual void setMinValue( const TQDate& d ) { setRange( d, maxValue() ); }
-    TQDate minValue() const;
-    virtual void setMaxValue( const TQDate& d ) { setRange( minValue(), d ); }
-    TQDate maxValue() const;
-    virtual void setRange( const TQDate& min, const TQDate& max );
-    TQString separator() const;
-    virtual void setSeparator( const TQString& s );
-
-    // Make removeFirstNumber() virtual in TQDateTimeEditBase in 4.0
-    void removeFirstNumber( int sec );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void valueChanged( const TQDate& date );
-
-protected:
-    bool event( TQEvent *e );
-    void timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void stepUp();
-    void stepDown();
-    TQString sectionFormattedText( int sec );
-    void addNumber( int sec, int num );
-
-    void removeLastNumber( int sec );
-    bool setFocusSection( int s );
-
-    virtual void setYear( int year );
-    virtual void setMonth( int month );
-    virtual void setDay( int day );
-    virtual void fix();
-    virtual bool outOfRange( int y, int m, int d ) const;
-
-protected Q_SLOTS:
-    void updateButtons();
-
-private:
-    void init();
-    int sectionOffsetEnd( int sec ) const;
-    int sectionLength( int sec ) const;
-    TQString sectionText( int sec ) const;
-    TQDateEditPrivate* d;
-
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQDateEdit( const TQDateEdit & );
-    TQDateEdit &operator=( const TQDateEdit & );
-#endif
-};
-
-class TQTimeEditPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQTimeEdit : public TQDateTimeEditBase
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_ENUMS( Display )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQTime time READ time WRITE setTime )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool autoAdvance READ autoAdvance WRITE setAutoAdvance )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQTime maxValue READ maxValue WRITE setMaxValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQTime minValue READ minValue WRITE setMinValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Display display READ displayProp WRITE setDisplayProp )
-
-public:
-    enum Display {
-	Hours	= 0x01,
-	Minutes	= 0x02,
-	Seconds	= 0x04,
-	/*Reserved = 0x08,*/
-	AMPM	= 0x10
-    };
-
-    TQTimeEdit( TQWidget* parent=0,  const char* name=0 );
-    TQTimeEdit( const QTime& time, QWidget* parent=0,  const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQTimeEdit();
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setTime( const TQTime& time );
-
-public:
-    TQTime time() const;
-    virtual void setAutoAdvance( bool advance );
-    bool autoAdvance() const;
-
-    virtual void setMinValue( const TQTime& d ) { setRange( d, maxValue() ); }
-    TQTime minValue() const;
-    virtual void setMaxValue( const TQTime& d ) { setRange( minValue(), d ); }
-    TQTime maxValue() const;
-    virtual void setRange( const TQTime& min, const TQTime& max );
-    TQString separator() const;
-    virtual void setSeparator( const TQString& s );
-
-    uint display() const;
-    void setDisplay( uint disp );
-    inline Display displayProp() const { return (Display)display(); }
-    inline void setDisplayProp( Display disp ) { setDisplay((uint)disp); }
-
-    // Make removeFirstNumber() virtual in TQDateTimeEditBase in 4.0
-    void removeFirstNumber( int sec );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void valueChanged( const TQTime& time );
-
-protected:
-    bool event( TQEvent *e );
-    void timerEvent( TQTimerEvent *e );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void stepUp();
-    void stepDown();
-    TQString sectionFormattedText( int sec );
-    void addNumber( int sec, int num );
-    void removeLastNumber( int sec );
-    bool setFocusSection( int s );
-
-    virtual bool outOfRange( int h, int m, int s ) const;
-    virtual void setHour( int h );
-    virtual void setMinute( int m );
-    virtual void setSecond( int s );
-
-protected Q_SLOTS:
-    void updateButtons();
-
-private:
-    void init();
-    TQString sectionText( int sec );
-    TQTimeEditPrivate* d;
-
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQTimeEdit( const TQTimeEdit & );
-    TQTimeEdit &operator=( const TQTimeEdit & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-class TQDateTimeEditPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQDateTimeEdit : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQDateTime dateTime READ dateTime WRITE setDateTime )
-
-public:
-    TQDateTimeEdit( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQDateTimeEdit( const TQDateTime& datetime, TQWidget* parent=0,
-		   const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQDateTimeEdit();
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setDateTime( const TQDateTime & dt );
-
-public:
-    TQDateTime dateTime() const;
-
-    TQDateEdit* dateEdit() { return de; }
-    TQTimeEdit* timeEdit() { return te; }
-
-    virtual void setAutoAdvance( bool advance );
-    bool autoAdvance() const;
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void valueChanged( const TQDateTime& datetime );
-
-protected:
-    // ### make init() private in TQt 4.0
-    void init();
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-
-protected Q_SLOTS:
-    // ### make these two functions private in TQt 4.0,
-    //     and merge them into one with no parameter
-    void newValue( const TQDate& d );
-    void newValue( const TQTime& t );
-
-private:
-    TQDateEdit* de;
-    TQTimeEdit* te;
-    TQDateTimeEditPrivate* d;
-
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQDateTimeEdit( const TQDateTimeEdit & );
-    TQDateTimeEdit &operator=( const TQDateTimeEdit & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 8158d47..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,976 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of the dial widget
-**
-** Created : 979899
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqdial.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIAL
-
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqpointarray.h"
-#include "tqcolor.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqregion.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-#include <math.h> // sin(), cos(), atan()
-//### Forutsetter linking med math lib - Jfr kommentar i qpainter_x11.cpp!
-
-static const double m_pi = 3.14159265358979323846;
-static const double rad_factor = 180.0 / m_pi;
-
-
-class TQDialPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQDialPrivate()
-    {
-	wrapping = FALSE;
-	tracking = TRUE;
-	doNotEmit = FALSE;
-	target = 3.7;
-	mousePressed = FALSE;
-    }
-
-    bool wrapping;
-    bool tracking;
-    bool doNotEmit;
-    double target;
-    TQRect eraseArea;
-    bool eraseAreaValid;
-    bool showNotches;
-    bool onlyOutside;
-    bool mousePressed;
-
-    TQPointArray lines;
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQDial tqdial.h
-
-    \brief The TQDial class provides a rounded range control (like a speedometer or potentiometer).
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    TQDial is used when the user needs to control a value within a
-    program-definable range, and the range either wraps around
-    (typically, 0..359 degrees) or the dialog tqlayout needs a square
-    widget.
-
-    Both API- and UI-wise, the dial is very similar to a \link TQSlider
-    slider. \endlink Indeed, when wrapping() is FALSE (the default)
-    there is no real difference between a slider and a dial. They
-    have the same Q_SIGNALS, Q_SLOTS and member functions, all of which do
-    the same things. Which one you use depends only on your taste
-    and on the application.
-
-    The dial initially emits valueChanged() Q_SIGNALS continuously while
-    the slider is being moved; you can make it emit the signal less
-    often by calling setTracking(FALSE). dialMoved() is emitted
-    continuously even when tracking() is FALSE.
-
-    The slider also emits dialPressed() and dialReleased() Q_SIGNALS
-    when the mouse button is pressed and released. But note that the
-    dial's value can change without these Q_SIGNALS being emitted; the
-    keyboard and wheel can be used to change the value.
-
-    Unlike the slider, TQDial attempts to draw a "nice" number of
-    notches rather than one per lineStep(). If possible, the number
-    of notches drawn is one per lineStep(), but if there aren't enough
-    pixels to draw every one, TQDial will draw every second, third
-    etc., notch. notchSize() returns the number of units per notch,
-    hopefully a multiple of lineStep(); setNotchTarget() sets the
-    target distance between neighbouring notches in pixels. The
-    default is 3.75 pixels.
-
-    Like the slider, the dial makes the TQRangeControl functions
-    setValue(), addLine(), subtractLine(), addPage() and
-    subtractPage() available as Q_SLOTS.
-
-    The dial's keyboard interface is fairly simple: The left/up and
-    right/down arrow keys move by lineStep(), page up and page down by
-    pageStep() and Home and End to minValue() and maxValue().
-
-    <img src=qdial-m.png> <img src=qdial-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQScrollBar TQSpinBox
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Slider\endlink
-*/
-
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a dial called \a name with parent \a parent. \a f is
-    propagated to the TQWidget constructor. It has the default range of
-    a TQRangeControl.
-*/
-
-TQDial::TQDial( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, f | TQt::WNoAutoErase ), TQRangeControl()
-{
-    d = new TQDialPrivate;
-    d->eraseAreaValid = FALSE;
-    d->showNotches = FALSE;
-    d->onlyOutside = FALSE;
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::WheelFocus );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a dial called \a name with parent \a parent. The dial's
-    value can never be smaller than \a minValue or greater than \a
-    maxValue. Its page step size is \a pageStep, and its initial value
-    is \a value.
-
-    \a value is forced to be within the legal range.
-*/
-
-TQDial::TQDial( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value,
-	      TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ),
-      TQRangeControl( minValue, maxValue, 1, pageStep, value )
-{
-    d = new TQDialPrivate;
-    d->eraseAreaValid = FALSE;
-    d->showNotches = FALSE;
-    d->onlyOutside = FALSE;
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::WheelFocus );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the dial.
-*/
-TQDial::~TQDial()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-void TQDial::setTracking( bool enable )
-{
-    d->tracking = enable;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDial::tracking
-    \brief whether tracking is enabled
-
-    If TRUE (the default), tracking is enabled. This means that the
-    arrow can be moved using the mouse; otherwise the arrow cannot be
-    moved with the mouse.
-*/
-
-bool TQDial::tracking() const
-{
-    return d ? d->tracking : TRUE;
-}
-
-void TQDial::setValue( int newValue )
-{ // ### set doNotEmit?	 Matthias?
-    TQRangeControl::setValue( newValue );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Increments the dial's value() by one lineStep().
-*/
-
-void TQDial::addLine()
-{
-    TQRangeControl::addLine();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Decrements the dial's value() by one lineStep().
-*/
-
-void TQDial::subtractLine()
-{
-    TQRangeControl::subtractLine();
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQDial::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * e )
-{
-    d->lines.resize( 0 );
-    TQWidget::resizeEvent( e );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQDial::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * e )
-{
-    repaintScreen( &e->rect() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Paints the dial using clip region \a cr.
-*/
-
-void TQDial::repaintScreen( const TQRect *cr )
-{
-    TQPainter p;
-    p.begin( this );
-
-    bool resetClipping = FALSE;
-
-    // calculate clip-region for erasing background
-    if ( cr ) {
-	p.setClipRect( *cr );
-    } else if ( !d->onlyOutside && d->eraseAreaValid ) {
-	TQRegion reg = d->eraseArea;
-	double a;
-	reg = reg.subtract( calcArrow( a ) );
-	p.setClipRegion( reg );
-	resetClipping = TRUE;
-    }
-
-    TQRect br( calcDial() );
-    p.setPen( Qt::NoPen );
-    // if ( style() == MotifStyle )
-    // p.setBrush( tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Mid ) );
-    // else {
-    TQBrush b;
-    if ( TQT_TQBRUSH_OBJECT(tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Light )).pixmap() )
-	b = TQBrush( tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Light ) );
-    else
-	b = TQBrush( tqcolorGroup().light(), Qt::Dense4Pattern );
-    p.setBrush( b );
-    p.setBackgroundMode( Qt::OpaqueMode );
-    // }
-
-    TQRect te = br;
-    te.setWidth(te.width()+2);
-    te.setHeight(te.height()+2);
-    // erase background of dial
-    if ( !d->onlyOutside ) {
-	p.drawEllipse( te );
-    }
-
-    // erase remaining space around the dial
-    TQRegion remaining( 0, 0, width(), height() );
-    remaining = remaining.subtract( TQRegion( te, TQRegion::Ellipse ) );
-    if ( p.hasClipping() )
-	remaining = remaining.intersect( p.clipRegion() );
-    erase(remaining);
-
-    if ( resetClipping ) {
-	if ( cr )
-	    p.setClipRect( *cr );
-	else
-	    p.setClipRect( TQRect( 0, 0, width(), height() ) );
-    }
-
-    // draw notches
-    if ( d->showNotches ) {
-	calcLines();
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().foreground() );
-	p.drawLineSegments( d->lines );
-    }
-
-    // calculate and paint arrow
-    p.setPen( TQPen( tqcolorGroup().dark() ) );
-    p.drawArc( te, 60 * 16, 180 * 16 );
-    p.setPen( TQPen( tqcolorGroup().light() ) );
-    p.drawArc( te, 240 * 16, 180 * 16 );
-
-    double a;
-    TQPointArray arrow( calcArrow( a ) );
-    TQRect ea( arrow.boundingRect() );
-    d->eraseArea = ea;
-    d->eraseAreaValid = TRUE;
-
-    p.setPen( Qt::NoPen );
-    p.setBrush( tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Button ) );
-    if ( !d->onlyOutside )
-	p.drawPolygon( arrow );
-
-    a = angle( TQPoint( width() / 2, height() / 2 ), arrow[ 0 ] );
-    p.setBrush( TQt::NoBrush );
-
-    // that's still a hack...
-    if ( a <= 0 || a > 200 ) {
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().light() );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 2 ], arrow[ 0 ] );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 1 ], arrow[ 2 ] );
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().dark() );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 0 ], arrow[ 1 ] );
-    } else if ( a > 0 && a < 45 ) {
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().light() );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 2 ], arrow[ 0 ] );
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().dark() );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 1 ], arrow[ 2 ] );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 0 ], arrow[ 1 ] );
-    } else if ( a >= 45 && a < 135 ) {
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().dark() );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 2 ], arrow[ 0 ] );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 1 ], arrow[ 2 ] );
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().light() );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 0 ], arrow[ 1 ] );
-    } else if ( a >= 135 && a < 200 ) {
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().dark() );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 2 ], arrow[ 0 ] );
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().light() );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 0 ], arrow[ 1 ] );
-	p.drawLine( arrow[ 1 ], arrow[ 2 ] );
-    }
-
-    // draw focus rect around the dial
-    if ( hasFocus() ) {
-	p.setClipping( FALSE );
-	br.setWidth( br.width() + 2 );
-	br.setHeight( br.height() + 2 );
-	if ( d->showNotches ) {
-	    int r = TQMIN( width(), height() ) / 2;
-	    br.moveBy( -r / 6, - r / 6 );
-	    br.setWidth( br.width() + r / 3 );
-	    br.setHeight( br.height() + r / 3 );
-	}
-	// strange, but else we get redraw errors on Windows
-	p.end();
-	p.begin( this );
-	p.save();
-	p.setPen( TQPen( tqcolorGroup().background() ) );
-	p.setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
-	p.drawRect( br );
-	p.restore();
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_FocusRect, &p, br, tqcolorGroup());
-    }
-    p.end();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQDial::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * e )
-{
-    switch ( e->key() ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Left: case Qt::Key_Down:
-	subtractLine();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Right: case Qt::Key_Up:
-	addLine();
-	break;
-    case TQt::Key_Prior:
-	subtractPage();
-	break;
-    case TQt::Key_Next:
-	addPage();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Home:
-	setValue( minValue() );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_End:
-	setValue( maxValue() );
-	break;
-    default:
-	e->ignore();
-	break;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQDial::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    d->mousePressed = TRUE;
-    setValue( valueFromPoint( e->pos() ) );
-    emit dialPressed();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQDial::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    d->mousePressed = FALSE;
-    setValue( valueFromPoint( e->pos() ) );
-    emit dialReleased();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQDial::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( !d->mousePressed )
-	return;
-    if ( !d->tracking || (e->state() & Qt::LeftButton) == 0 )
-	return;
-    d->doNotEmit = TRUE;
-    setValue( valueFromPoint( e->pos() ) );
-    emit dialMoved( value() );
-    d->doNotEmit = FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-void TQDial::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e )
-{
-    setValue( value() - e->delta() / 120 );
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQDial::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * )
-{
-    d->onlyOutside = TRUE;
-    repaintScreen();
-    d->onlyOutside = FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQDial::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * )
-{
-    d->onlyOutside = TRUE;
-    repaintScreen();
-    d->onlyOutside = FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Reimplemented to ensure the display is correct and to emit the
-    valueChanged(int) signal when appropriate.
-*/
-
-void TQDial::valueChange()
-{
-    d->lines.resize( 0 );
-    repaintScreen();
-    if ( d->tracking || !d->doNotEmit ) {
-	emit valueChanged( value() );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Reimplemented to ensure tick-marks are consistent with the new range.
-*/
-
-void TQDial::rangeChange()
-{
-    d->lines.resize( 0 );
-    repaintScreen();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-int TQDial::valueFromPoint( const TQPoint & p ) const
-{
-    double yy = (double)height()/2.0 - p.y();
-    double xx = (double)p.x() - width()/2.0;
-    double a = (xx || yy) ? atan2(yy, xx) : 0;
-
-    if ( a < m_pi/-2 )
-	a = a + m_pi*2;
-
-    int dist = 0;
-    int minv = minValue(), maxv = maxValue();
-
-    if ( minValue() < 0 ) {
-	dist = -minValue();
-	minv = 0;
-	maxv = maxValue() + dist;
-    }
-
-    int r = maxv - minv;
-    int v;
-    if ( d->wrapping )
-	v =  (int)(0.5 + minv + r*(m_pi*3/2-a)/(2*m_pi));
-    else
-	v =  (int)(0.5 + minv + r*(m_pi*4/3-a)/(m_pi*10/6));
-
-    if ( dist > 0 )
-	v -= dist;
-
-    return bound( v );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-double TQDial::angle( const TQPoint &p1, const TQPoint &p2 ) const
-{
-    double _angle = 0.0;
-
-    if ( p1.x() == p2.x() ) {
-	if ( p1.y() < p2.y() )
-	    _angle = 270.0;
-	else
-	    _angle = 90.0;
-    } else  {
-	double x1, x2, y1, y2;
-
-	if ( p1.x() <= p2.x() ) {
-	    x1 = p1.x(); y1 = p1.y();
-	    x2 = p2.x(); y2 = p2.y();
-	} else {
-	    x2 = p1.x(); y2 = p1.y();
-	    x1 = p2.x(); y1 = p2.y();
-	}
-
-	double m = -( y2 - y1 ) / ( x2 - x1 );
-	_angle = atan( m ) *  rad_factor;
-
-	if ( p1.x() < p2.x() )
-	    _angle = 180.0 - _angle;
-	else
-	    _angle = -_angle;
-    }
-
-    return _angle;
-}
-
-void TQDial::setWrapping( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( d->wrapping == enable )
-	return;
-    d->lines.resize( 0 );
-    d->wrapping = enable;
-    d->eraseAreaValid = FALSE;
-    repaintScreen();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDial::wrapping
-    \brief whether wrapping is enabled
-
-    If TRUE, wrapping is enabled. This means that the arrow can be
-    turned around 360�. Otherwise there is some space at the bottom of
-    the dial which is skipped by the arrow.
-
-    This property's default is FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQDial::wrapping() const
-{
-    return d->wrapping;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDial::notchSize
-    \brief the current notch size
-
-    The notch size is in range control units, not pixels, and if
-    possible it is a multiple of lineStep() that results in an
-    on-screen notch size near notchTarget().
-
-    \sa notchTarget() lineStep()
-*/
-
-int TQDial::notchSize() const
-{
-    // radius of the arc
-    int r = TQMIN( width(), height() )/2;
-    // length of the whole arc
-    int l = (int)(r*(d->wrapping ? 6 : 5)*m_pi/6);
-    // length of the arc from minValue() to minValue()+pageStep()
-    if ( maxValue() > minValue()+pageStep() )
-	l = (int)(0.5 + l * pageStep() / (maxValue()-minValue()));
-    // length of a lineStep() arc
-    l = l * lineStep() / pageStep();
-    if ( l < 1 )
-	l = 1;
-    // how many times lineStep can be draw in d->target pixels
-    l = (int)(0.5 + d->target / l);
-    // we want notchSize() to be a non-zero multiple of lineStep()
-    if ( !l )
-	l = 1;
-    return lineStep() * l;
-}
-
-void TQDial::setNotchTarget( double target )
-{
-    d->lines.resize( 0 );
-    d->target = target;
-    d->eraseAreaValid = FALSE;
-    d->onlyOutside = TRUE;
-    repaintScreen();
-    d->onlyOutside = FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDial::notchTarget
-    \brief the target number of pixels between notches
-
-    The notch target is the number of pixels TQDial attempts to put
-    between each notch.
-
-    The actual size may differ from the target size.
-*/
-
-double TQDial::notchTarget() const
-{
-    return d->target;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Increments the dial's value() by one pageStep() of steps.
-*/
-
-void TQDial::addPage()
-{
-    TQRangeControl::addPage();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Decrements the dial's value() by one pageStep() of steps.
-*/
-
-void TQDial::subtractPage()
-{
-    TQRangeControl::subtractPage();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDial::valueChanged( int value )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the dial's \a value changes. The
-    frequency of this signal is influenced by setTracking().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDial::dialPressed()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user begins mouse interaction with
-    the dial.
-
-    \sa dialReleased()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDial::dialMoved( int value )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the dial \a value changes. The
-    frequency of this signal is \e not influenced by setTracking().
-
-    \sa valueChanged()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDial::dialReleased()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user ends mouse interaction with
-    the dial.
-
-    \sa dialPressed()
-*/
-
-void TQDial::setNotchesVisible( bool b )
-{
-    d->showNotches = b;
-    d->eraseAreaValid = FALSE;
-    d->onlyOutside = TRUE;
-    repaintScreen();
-    d->onlyOutside = FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDial::notchesVisible
-    \brief whether the notches are shown
-
-    If TRUE, the notches are shown. If FALSE (the default) notches are
-    not shown.
-*/
-bool TQDial::notchesVisible() const
-{
-    return d->showNotches;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQDial::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    return TQSize( 50, 50 );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQDial::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    return TQSize( 100, 100 ).expandedTo( TQApplication::globalStrut() );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-TQPointArray TQDial::calcArrow( double &a ) const
-{
-    int r = TQMIN( width(), height() ) / 2;
-    if ( maxValue() == minValue() )
-	a = m_pi / 2;
-    else if ( d->wrapping )
-	a = m_pi * 3 / 2 - ( value() - minValue() ) * 2 * m_pi / ( maxValue() - minValue() );
-    else
-	a = ( m_pi * 8 - ( value() - minValue() ) * 10 * m_pi / ( maxValue() - minValue() ) ) / 6;
-
-    int xc = width() / 2;
-    int yc = height() / 2;
-
-    int len = r - calcBigLineSize() - 5;
-    if ( len < 5 )
-	len = 5;
-    int back = len / 4;
-    if ( back < 1 )
-	back = 1;
-
-    TQPointArray arrow( 3 );
-    arrow[0] = TQPoint( (int)( 0.5 + xc + len * cos(a) ),
-		       (int)( 0.5 + yc -len * sin( a ) ) );
-    arrow[1] = TQPoint( (int)( 0.5 + xc + back * cos( a + m_pi * 5 / 6 ) ),
-		       (int)( 0.5 + yc - back * sin( a + m_pi * 5 / 6 ) ) );
-    arrow[2] = TQPoint( (int)( 0.5 + xc + back * cos( a - m_pi * 5 / 6 ) ),
-		       (int)( 0.5 + yc - back * sin( a - m_pi * 5 / 6 ) ) );
-    return arrow;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-TQRect TQDial::calcDial() const
-{
-    double r = TQMIN( width(), height() ) / 2.0;
-    double d_ = r / 6.0;
-    double dx = d_ + ( width() - 2 * r ) / 2.0 + 1;
-    double dy = d_ + ( height() - 2 * r ) / 2.0 + 1;
-    return TQRect( int(dx), int(dy),
-		int(r * 2 - 2 * d_ - 2), int(r * 2 - 2 * d_ - 2) );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-int TQDial::calcBigLineSize() const
-{
-    int r = TQMIN( width(), height() ) / 2;
-    int bigLineSize = r / 6;
-    if ( bigLineSize < 4 )
-	bigLineSize = 4;
-    if ( bigLineSize > r / 2 )
-	bigLineSize = r / 2;
-    return bigLineSize;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-void TQDial::calcLines()
-{
-    if ( !d->lines.size() ) {
-	double r = TQMIN( width(), height() ) / 2.0;
-	int bigLineSize = calcBigLineSize();
-	double xc = width() / 2.0;
-	double yc = height() / 2.0;
-	int ns = notchSize();
-	int notches = ( maxValue() + ns - 1 - minValue() ) / ns;
-	d->lines.resize( 2 + 2 * notches );
-	int smallLineSize = bigLineSize / 2;
-	int i;
-	for( i = 0; i <= notches; i++ ) {
-	    double angle = d->wrapping
-		? m_pi * 3 / 2 - i * 2 * m_pi / notches
-		: (m_pi * 8 - i * 10 * m_pi / notches) / 6;
-
-	    double s = sin( angle ); // sin/cos aren't defined as const...
-	    double c = cos( angle );
-	    if ( i == 0 || ( ((ns * i ) % pageStep() ) == 0 ) ) {
-		d->lines[2*i] = TQPoint( (int)( xc + ( r - bigLineSize ) * c ),
-					(int)( yc - ( r - bigLineSize ) * s ) );
-		d->lines[2*i+1] = TQPoint( (int)( xc + r * c ),
-					  (int)( yc - r * s ) );
-	    } else {
-		d->lines[2*i] = TQPoint( (int)( xc + ( r - 1 - smallLineSize ) * c ),
-					(int)( yc - ( r - 1 - smallLineSize ) * s ) );
-		d->lines[2*i+1] = TQPoint( (int)( xc + ( r - 1 ) * c ),
-					  (int)( yc -( r - 1 ) * s ) );
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDial::minValue
-    \brief the current minimum value
-
-    When setting this property, the \l TQDial::maxValue is adjusted if
-    necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-int TQDial::minValue() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::minValue();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDial::maxValue
-    \brief the current maximum value
-
-    When setting this property, the \l TQDial::minValue is adjusted if
-    necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-int TQDial::maxValue() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::maxValue();
-}
-
-void TQDial::setMinValue( int minVal )
-{
-    TQRangeControl::setMinValue( minVal );
-}
-
-void TQDial::setMaxValue( int maxVal )
-{
-    TQRangeControl::setMaxValue( maxVal );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDial::lineStep
-    \brief the current line step
-
-    setLineStep() calls the virtual stepChange() function if the new
-    line step is different from the previous setting.
-
-    \sa TQRangeControl::setSteps() pageStep setRange()
-*/
-
-int TQDial::lineStep() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::lineStep();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDial::pageStep
-    \brief the current page step
-
-    setPageStep() calls the virtual stepChange() function if the new
-    page step is different from the previous setting.
-
-    \sa stepChange()
-*/
-int TQDial::pageStep() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::pageStep();
-}
-
-void TQDial::setLineStep( int i )
-{
-    setSteps( i, pageStep() );
-}
-
-void TQDial::setPageStep( int i )
-{
-    setSteps( lineStep(), i );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDial::value
-    \brief the current dial value
-
-    This is guaranteed to be within the range
-    \l{TQDial::minValue}..\l{TQDial::maxValue}.
-
-    \sa minValue maxValue
-*/
-
-int TQDial::value() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::value();
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_FEATURE_DIAL
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 10ee437..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdial.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,154 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of the dial widget
-**
-** Created : 990104
-**
-** Copyright (C) 1999-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-
-#ifndef TQDIAL_H
-#define TQDIAL_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqrangecontrol.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIAL
-
-class TQDialPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQDial: public TQWidget, public TQRangeControl
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool tracking READ tracking WRITE setTracking )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool wrapping READ wrapping WRITE setWrapping )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int notchSize READ notchSize )
-    Q_PROPERTY( double notchTarget READ notchTarget WRITE setNotchTarget )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool notchesVisible READ notchesVisible WRITE setNotchesVisible )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int minValue READ minValue WRITE setMinValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int maxValue READ maxValue WRITE setMaxValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int lineStep READ lineStep WRITE setLineStep )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int pageStep READ pageStep WRITE setPageStep )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int value READ value WRITE setValue )
-
-public:
-    TQDial( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 );
-    TQDial( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value,
-	   TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQDial();
-
-    bool tracking() const;
-
-    bool wrapping() const;
-
-    int notchSize() const;
-
-    virtual void setNotchTarget( double );
-    double notchTarget() const;
-
-    bool notchesVisible() const;
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    int	 minValue() const;
-    int	 maxValue() const;
-    void setMinValue( int );
-    void setMaxValue( int );
-    int	 lineStep() const;
-    int	 pageStep() const;
-    void setLineStep( int );
-    void setPageStep( int );
-    int  value() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setValue( int );
-    void addLine();
-    void subtractLine();
-    void addPage();
-    void subtractPage();
-    virtual void setNotchesVisible( bool b );
-    virtual void setWrapping( bool on );
-    virtual void setTracking( bool enable );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void valueChanged( int value );
-    void dialPressed();
-    void dialMoved( int value );
-    void dialReleased();
-
-protected:
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-
-    void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * );
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    void wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * );
-#endif
-    void focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-
-    void valueChange();
-    void rangeChange();
-
-    virtual void repaintScreen( const TQRect *cr = 0 );
-
-private:
-    TQDialPrivate * d;
-
-    int valueFromPoint( const TQPoint & ) const;
-    double angle( const TQPoint &, const TQPoint & ) const;
-    TQPointArray calcArrow( double &a ) const;
-    TQRect calcDial() const;
-    int calcBigLineSize() const;
-    void calcLines();
-
-private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQDial( const TQDial & );
-    TQDial &operator=( const TQDial & );
-#endif
-
-};
-
-#endif  // TQT_NO_DIAL
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 18f5631..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,456 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQDialogButtons class
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2005-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqdialogbuttons_p.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOGBUTTONS
-
-#include <tqapplication.h>
-#include <tqpushbutton.h>
-#include <tqguardedptr.h>
-#include <tqmap.h>
-#include <tqvariant.h>
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOG
-#include <tqdialog.h>
-#endif // TQT_NO_DIALOG
-#include <tqlayout.h>
-#include <tqstyle.h>
-#include <tqmap.h>
-
-struct TQDialogButtonsPrivate
-{
-    TQMap<int, TQString> text;
-    TQMap<TQDialogButtons::Button, TQWidget *> buttons;
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQWidget> custom;
-    TQ_UINT32 enabled, visible;
-    TQDialogButtons::Button def;
-    Qt::Orientation orient;
-    bool questionMode;
-};
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOG
-TQDialogButtons::TQDialogButtons(TQDialog *parent, bool autoConnect, TQ_UINT32 buttons,
-			       Qt::Orientation orient, const char *name ) : TQWidget(parent, name)
-{
-    init(buttons, orient);
-    if(parent && autoConnect) {
-	TQObject::connect(this, TQT_SIGNAL(acceptClicked()), parent, TQT_SLOT(accept()));
-	TQObject::connect(this, TQT_SIGNAL(rejectClicked()), parent, TQT_SLOT(reject()));
-    }
-}
-#endif // TQT_NO_DIALOG
-
-TQDialogButtons::TQDialogButtons(TQWidget *parent, TQ_UINT32 buttons,
-			       Qt::Orientation orient, const char *name ) : TQWidget(parent, name)
-{
-    init(buttons, orient);
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::init(TQ_UINT32 buttons, Qt::Orientation orient)
-{
-    if(buttons == All) {
-	qWarning("TQDialogButtons: cannot specify All by itself!");
-	buttons = None;
-    }
-    d = new TQDialogButtonsPrivate;
-    d->questionMode = FALSE;
-    d->orient = orient;
-    d->def = (Button)tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_DialogButtons_DefaultButton, this);
-    d->enabled = d->visible = buttons;
-}
-
-TQDialogButtons::~TQDialogButtons()
-{
-    delete (TQWidget *)d->custom;
-    delete d;
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::setQuestionMode(bool b)
-{
-    d->questionMode = b;
-}
-
-bool
-TQDialogButtons::questionMode() const
-{
-    return d->questionMode;
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::setButtonEnabled(Button button, bool enabled)
-{
-    if(enabled)
-	d->enabled |= button;
-    else
-	d->enabled ^= button;
-    if(d->buttons.contains(button))
-	d->buttons[button]->setEnabled(enabled);
-}
-
-bool
-TQDialogButtons::isButtonEnabled(Button button) const
-{
-    return ((int)(d->enabled & button)) == button;
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::setButtonVisible(Button button, bool visible)
-{
-    if(visible) {
-	if(d->buttons.contains(button))
-	    d->buttons[button]->show();
-	d->visible |= button;
-    } else {
-	if(d->buttons.contains(button))
-	    d->buttons[button]->hide();
-	d->visible ^= button;
-    }
-    layoutButtons();
-}
-
-bool
-TQDialogButtons::isButtonVisible(Button button) const
-{
-    return ((int)(d->visible & button)) == button;
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::addWidget(TQWidget *w)
-{
-    TQBoxLayout *lay = NULL;
-    if(!d->custom) {
-	d->custom = new TQWidget(this, "dialog_custom_area");
-	if(orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
-	    lay = new TQHBoxLayout(d->custom);
-	else
-	    lay = new TQVBoxLayout(d->custom);
-	layoutButtons();
-    } else {
-	lay = (TQBoxLayout*)d->custom->tqlayout();
-    }
-    if(w->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(d->custom))
-	w->reparent(d->custom, 0, TQPoint(0, 0), TRUE);
-    lay->addWidget(w);
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::setDefaultButton(Button button)
-{
-    if(!((int)(d->visible & button) == button)) {
-	qWarning("TQDialogButtons: Button '%d' is not visible (so cannot be default)", button);
-	return;
-    }
-    if(d->def != button) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PROPERTIES
-	if(d->buttons.contains(d->def))
-	    d->buttons[d->def]->setProperty("default", TQVariant(FALSE,0));
-#endif
-	d->def = button;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PROPERTIES
-	if(d->buttons.contains(d->def))
-	    d->buttons[d->def]->setProperty("default", TQVariant(FALSE,0));
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-TQDialogButtons::Button
-TQDialogButtons::defaultButton() const
-{
-    return d->def;
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::setButtonText(Button button, const TQString &str)
-{
-    d->text[button] = str;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PROPERTIES
-    if(d->buttons.contains(button))
-	d->buttons[button]->setProperty("text", TQVariant(str));
-#endif
-    layoutButtons();
-}
-
-TQString
-TQDialogButtons::buttonText(Button b) const
-{
-    if(d->text.contains(b))
-	return d->text[b];
-    return TQString(); //null if it is default..
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::setOrientation(Qt::Orientation orient)
-{
-    if(d->orient != orient) {
-	d->orient = orient;
-	if(d->custom && d->custom->tqlayout())
-	    ((TQBoxLayout*)d->custom->tqlayout())->setDirection(orient == Qt::Horizontal ? TQBoxLayout::LeftToRight :
-							     TQBoxLayout::TopToBottom);
-	layoutButtons();
-    }
-}
-
-Qt::Orientation
-TQDialogButtons::orientation() const
-{
-    return d->orient;
-}
-
-TQWidget *
-TQDialogButtons::createButton(Button b)
-{
-    TQPushButton *ret = new TQPushButton(this, "qdialog_button");
-    TQObject::connect(ret, TQT_SIGNAL(clicked()), this, TQT_SLOT(handleClicked()));
-    if(d->text.contains(b)) {
-	ret->setText(d->text[b]);
-    } else {
-	switch(b) {
-	case All: {
-	    TQString txt = buttonText(defaultButton());
-	    if(txt.isNull()) {
-		if(defaultButton() == Accept) {
-		    if(questionMode())
-			txt = tr("Yes to All");
-		    else
-		        txt = tr("OK to All");
-		} else {
-		    if(questionMode())
-		        txt = tr("No to All");
-		    else
-			txt = tr("Cancel All");
-		}
-	    } else {
-		txt += tr(" to All"); //ick, I can't really do this!!
-	    }
-	    ret->setText(txt);
-	    break; }
-	case Accept:
-	    if(questionMode())
-		ret->setText(tr("Yes"));
-	    else
-		ret->setText(tr("OK"));
-	    break;
-	case Reject:
-	    if(questionMode())
-		ret->setText(tr("No"));
-	    else
-		ret->setText(tr("Cancel"));
-	    break;
-	case Apply:
-	    ret->setText(tr("Apply"));
-	    break;
-	case Ignore:
-	    ret->setText(tr("Ignore"));
-	    break;
-	case Retry:
-	    ret->setText(tr("Retry"));
-	    break;
-	case Abort:
-	    ret->setText(tr("Abort"));
-	    break;
-	case Help:
-	    ret->setText(tr("Help"));
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    break;
-	}
-    }
-    return ret;
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::handleClicked()
-{
-    const TQObject *s = TQT_TQOBJECT(sender());
-    if(!s)
-	return;
-
-    for(TQMapIterator<TQDialogButtons::Button, TQWidget *> it = d->buttons.begin(); it != d->buttons.end(); ++it) {
-	if(TQT_TQOBJECT(it.data()) == s) {
-	    emit clicked((TQDialogButtons::Button)it.key());
-	    switch(it.key()) {
-	    case Retry:
-		emit retryClicked();
-		break;
-	    case Ignore:
-		emit ignoreClicked();
-		break;
-	    case Abort:
-		emit abortClicked();
-		break;
-	    case All:
-		emit allClicked();
-		break;
-	    case Accept:
-		emit acceptClicked();
-		break;
-	    case Reject:
-		emit rejectClicked();
-		break;
-	    case Apply:
-		emit applyClicked();
-		break;
-	    case Help:
-		emit helpClicked();
-		break;
-	    default:
-		break;
-	    }
-	    return;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::resizeEvent(TQResizeEvent *)
-{
-    layoutButtons();
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::showEvent(TQShowEvent *)
-{
-    layoutButtons();
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::styleChanged(TQStyle &old)
-{
-    layoutButtons();
-    TQWidget::styleChange(old);
-}
-
-void
-TQDialogButtons::layoutButtons()
-{
-    if(!isVisible()) //nah..
-	return;
-
-    TQStyle::SubRect rects[] = {
-    	TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAccept, TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonReject,
-	TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonApply,  TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonHelp,
-	TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonCustom, TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAll,
-        TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonRetry,  TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonIgnore,
-        TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAbort };
-    for(unsigned int i = 0; i < (sizeof(rects) / sizeof(rects[0])); i++) {
-	TQWidget *w = NULL;
-	if(rects[i] == TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonCustom) {
-	    w = d->custom;
-	} else {
-	    Button b = None;
-	    if(rects[i] == TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonApply)
-		b = Apply;
-	    else if(rects[i] == TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAll)
-		b = All;
-	    else if(rects[i] == TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAccept)
-		b = Accept;
-	    else if(rects[i] == TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonReject)
-		b = Reject;
-	    else if(rects[i] == TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonHelp)
-		b = Help;
-	    else if(rects[i] == TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonRetry)
-		b = Retry;
-	    else if(rects[i] == TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonAbort)
-		b = Abort;
-	    else if(rects[i] == TQStyle::SR_DialogButtonIgnore)
-		b = Ignore;
-	    if(b != None) {
-		if(d->buttons.contains(b)) {
-		    w = d->buttons[b];
-		    if(!(d->visible & b)) {
-			w->hide();
-			continue;
-		    }
-		} else if(d->visible & b) {
-		    w = createButton(b);
-		    d->buttons.insert(b, w);
-		} else {
-		    continue;
-		}
-		if(w) {
-		    if(b == d->def) {
-			w->setFocus();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PROPERTIES
-			w->setProperty("default", TQVariant(TRUE,0));
-#endif
-		    }
-		    w->setEnabled(d->enabled & b);
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-	if(w) {
-	    w->show();
-	    w->setGeometry(tqstyle().subRect(rects[i], this));
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-TQSize
-TQDialogButtons::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    TQSize s;
-    if(d->custom)
-	s = d->custom->tqsizeHint();
-    return (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_DialogButtons, this, s.
-				     expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut())));
-}
-
-TQSize
-TQDialogButtons::tqsizeHint(TQDialogButtons::Button button) const
-{
-    TQWidget *w = NULL;
-    if(d->visible & button) {
-	if(!d->buttons.contains(button)) {
-	    TQDialogButtons *that = (TQDialogButtons*)this; //ick, constness..
-	    w = that->createButton(button);
-	    that->d->buttons.insert(button, w);
-	} else {
-	    w = d->buttons[button];
-	}
-    }
-    return w->tqsizeHint();
-}
-
-TQSize
-TQDialogButtons::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    return tqsizeHint();
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons_p.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 3c06733..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdialogbuttons_p.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,119 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQDialogButtons class.
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2005-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQDIALOGBUTTONS_P_H
-#define TQDIALOGBUTTONS_P_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-#endif
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOGBUTTONS
-struct TQDialogButtonsPrivate;
-
-class
-TQDialogButtons : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    enum Button { None=0, Accept=0x01, Reject=0x02, Help=0x04, Apply=0x08, All=0x10, Abort=0x20, Retry=0x40, Ignore=0x80 };
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOG
-    TQDialogButtons(TQDialog *parent, bool autoConnect = TRUE, TQ_UINT32 buttons = Accept | Reject,
-		   Qt::Orientation orient = Qt::Horizontal, const char *name = NULL);
-#endif // TQT_NO_DIALOG
-    TQDialogButtons(TQWidget *parent, TQ_UINT32 buttons = Accept | Reject,
-		   Qt::Orientation orient = Qt::Horizontal, const char *name = NULL);
-    ~TQDialogButtons();
-
-    void setQuestionMode(bool);
-    bool questionMode() const;
-
-    void setButtonEnabled(Button button, bool enabled);
-    bool isButtonEnabled(Button) const;
-
-    inline void showButton(Button b) { setButtonVisible(b, TRUE) ; }
-    inline void hideButton(Button b) { setButtonVisible(b, FALSE); }
-    virtual void setButtonVisible(Button, bool visible);
-    bool isButtonVisible(Button) const;
-
-    void addWidget(TQWidget *);
-
-    virtual void setDefaultButton(Button);
-    Button defaultButton() const;
-
-    virtual void setButtonText(Button, const TQString &);
-    TQString buttonText(Button) const;
-
-    void setOrientation(Qt::Orientation);
-    Qt::Orientation orientation() const;
-
-    virtual TQSize tqsizeHint(Button) const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-
-protected:
-    void layoutButtons();
-    virtual TQWidget *createButton(Button);
-
-    void showEvent(TQShowEvent *);
-    void resizeEvent(TQResizeEvent *);
-    void styleChanged(TQStyle &);
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void handleClicked();
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void clicked(Button);
-    void acceptClicked();
-    void rejectClicked();
-    void helpClicked();
-    void applyClicked();
-    void allClicked();
-    void retryClicked();
-    void ignoreClicked();
-    void abortClicked();
-
-private:
-    TQDialogButtonsPrivate *d;
-    void init(TQ_UINT32, Qt::Orientation);
-};
-#endif //TQT_NO_DIALOGBUTTONS
-#endif //TQDIALOGBUTTONS_P_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 3701355..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1340 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of the TQDockArea class
-**
-** Created : 001010
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the workspace module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqdockarea.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
-#include "tqsplitter.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqptrvector.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqwidgetlist.h"
-#include "tqmap.h"
-#include "tqmainwindow.h"
-
-//#define TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG
-
-struct TQ_EXPORT DockData
-{
-    DockData() : w( 0 ), rect() {}
-    DockData( TQDockWindow *dw, const TQRect &r ) : w( dw ), rect( r ) {}
-    TQDockWindow *w;
-    TQRect rect;
-
-    TQ_DUMMY_COMPARISON_OPERATOR( DockData )
-};
-
-static int fix_x( TQDockWindow* w, int width = -1 ) {
-    if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	if ( width < 0 )
-	    width = w->width();
-	return w->parentWidget()->width() - w->x() - width;
-    }
-    return w->x();
-}
-static int fix_x( TQDockWindow* w, int x, int width = -1 ) {
-    if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	if ( width < 0 )
-	    width = w->width();
-	return w->parentWidget()->width() - x - width;
-    }
-    return x;
-}
-
-static TQPoint fix_pos( TQDockWindow* w ) {
-    if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	TQPoint p = w->pos();
-	p.rx() = w->parentWidget()->width() - p.x() - w->width();
-	return p;
-    }
-    return w->pos();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-int TQDockAreaLayout::count() const {
-	return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQLayoutItem* TQDockAreaLayout::itemAt(int index) const {
-	return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQLayoutItem* TQDockAreaLayout::takeAt(int index) {
-	return 0;
-}
-
-void TQDockAreaLayout::setGeometry( const TQRect &r )
-{
-    TQLayout::setGeometry( r );
-    layoutItems( r );
-}
-
-TQLayoutIterator TQDockAreaLayout::iterator()
-{
-    return 0;
-}
-
-TQSize TQDockAreaLayout::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( !dockWindows || !dockWindows->first() )
-	return TQSize( 0, 0 );
-
-    if ( dirty ) {
-	TQDockAreaLayout *that = (TQDockAreaLayout *) this;
-	that->layoutItems( tqgeometry() );
-    }
-
-    int w = 0;
-    int h = 0;
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQDockWindow> it( *dockWindows );
-    TQDockWindow *dw = 0;
-    it.toFirst();
-    int y = -1;
-    int x = -1;
-    int ph = 0;
-    int pw = 0;
-    while ( ( dw = it.current() ) != 0 ) {
-	int plush = 0, plusw = 0;
-	++it;
-	if ( dw->isHidden() )
-	    continue;
-	if ( hasHeightForWidth() ) {
-	    if ( y != dw->y() )
-		plush = ph;
-	    y = dw->y();
-	    ph = dw->height();
-	} else {
-	    if ( x != dw->x() )
-		plusw = pw;
-	    x = dw->x();
-	    pw = dw->width();
-	}
-	h = TQMAX( h, dw->height() + plush );
-	w = TQMAX( w, dw->width() + plusw );
-    }
-
-    if ( hasHeightForWidth() )
-	return TQSize( 0, h );
-    return TQSize( w, 0 );
-}
-
-bool TQDockAreaLayout::hasHeightForWidth() const
-{
-    return orient == Qt::Horizontal;
-}
-
-void TQDockAreaLayout::init()
-{
-    dirty = TRUE;
-    cached_width = 0;
-    cached_height = 0;
-    cached_hfw = -1;
-    cached_wfh = -1;
-}
-
-void TQDockAreaLayout::tqinvalidate()
-{
-    dirty = TRUE;
-    cached_width = 0;
-    cached_height = 0;
-}
-
-static int start_pos( const TQRect &r, Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    if ( o == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	return TQMAX( 0, r.x() );
-    } else {
-	return TQMAX( 0, r.y() );
-    }
-}
-
-static void add_size( int s, int &pos, Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    if ( o == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	pos += s;
-    } else {
-	pos += s;
-    }
-}
-
-static int space_left( const TQRect &r, int pos, Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    if ( o == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	return ( r.x() + r.width() ) - pos;
-    } else {
-	return ( r.y() + r.height() ) - pos;
-    }
-}
-
-static int dock_extent( TQDockWindow *w, Qt::Orientation o, int maxsize )
-{
-    if ( o == Qt::Horizontal )
-	return TQMIN( maxsize, TQMAX( w->tqsizeHint().width(), w->fixedExtent().width() ) );
-    else
-	return TQMIN( maxsize, TQMAX( w->tqsizeHint().height(), w->fixedExtent().height() ) );
-}
-
-static int dock_strut( TQDockWindow *w, Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    if ( o != Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	int wid;
-	if ( ( wid = w->fixedExtent().width() ) != -1 )
-	    return TQMAX( wid, TQMAX( w->tqminimumSize().width(), w->tqminimumSizeHint().width() ) );
-	return TQMAX( w->tqsizeHint().width(), TQMAX( w->tqminimumSize().width(), w->tqminimumSizeHint().width() ) );
-    } else {
-	int hei;
-	if ( ( hei = w->fixedExtent().height() ) != -1 )
-	    return TQMAX( hei, TQMAX( w->tqminimumSizeHint().height(), w->tqminimumSize().height() ) );
-	return TQMAX( w->tqsizeHint().height(), TQMAX( w->tqminimumSizeHint().height(), w->tqminimumSize().height() ) );
-    }
-}
-
-static void set_tqgeometry( TQDockWindow *w, int pos, int sectionpos, int extent, int strut, Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    if ( o == Qt::Horizontal )
-	w->setGeometry( fix_x( w, pos, extent), sectionpos, extent, strut );
-    else
-	w->setGeometry( sectionpos, pos, strut, extent );
-}
-
-static int size_extent( const TQSize &s, Qt::Orientation o, bool swap = FALSE )
-{
-    return o == Qt::Horizontal ? ( swap ? s.height() : s.width() ) : ( swap ? s.width() :  s.height() );
-}
-
-static int point_pos( const TQPoint &p, Qt::Orientation o, bool swap = FALSE )
-{
-    return o == Qt::Horizontal ? ( swap ? p.y() : p.x() ) : ( swap ? p.x() : p.y() );
-}
-
-static void shrink_extend( TQDockWindow *dw, int &dockExtend, int /*spaceLeft*/, Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(dw);
-    if ( o == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	int mw = 0;
-	if ( !tb )
-	    mw = dw->minimumWidth();
-	else
-	    mw = dw->tqsizeHint().width();
-	dockExtend = mw;
-    } else {
-	int mh = 0;
-	if ( !tb )
-	    mh = dw->minimumHeight();
-	else
-	    mh = dw->tqsizeHint().height();
-	dockExtend = mh;
-    }
-}
-
-static void place_line( TQValueList<DockData> &lastLine, Qt::Orientation o, int linestrut, int fullextent, int tbstrut, int maxsize, TQDockAreaLayout * )
-{
-    TQDockWindow *last = 0;
-    TQRect lastRect;
-    for ( TQValueList<DockData>::Iterator it = lastLine.begin(); it != lastLine.end(); ++it ) {
-	if ( tbstrut != -1 && ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>((*it).w) )
-	    (*it).rect.setHeight( tbstrut );
-	if ( !last ) {
-	    last = (*it).w;
-	    lastRect = (*it).rect;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	if ( !last->isStretchable() ) {
-	    int w = TQMIN( lastRect.width(), maxsize );
-	    set_tqgeometry( last, lastRect.x(), lastRect.y(), w, lastRect.height(), o );
-	} else {
-	    int w = TQMIN( (*it).rect.x() - lastRect.x(), maxsize );
-	    set_tqgeometry( last, lastRect.x(), lastRect.y(), w,
-			  last->isResizeEnabled() ? linestrut : lastRect.height(), o );
-	}
-	last = (*it).w;
-	lastRect = (*it).rect;
-    }
-    if ( !last )
-	return;
-    if ( !last->isStretchable() ) {
-	int w = TQMIN( lastRect.width(), maxsize );
-	set_tqgeometry( last, lastRect.x(), lastRect.y(), w, lastRect.height(), o );
-    } else {
-	int w = TQMIN( fullextent - lastRect.x() - ( o == Qt::Vertical ? 1 : 0 ), maxsize );
-	set_tqgeometry( last, lastRect.x(), lastRect.y(), w,
-		      last->isResizeEnabled() ? linestrut : lastRect.height(), o );
-    }
-}
-
-
-TQSize TQDockAreaLayout::tqminimumSize() const
-{
-    if ( !dockWindows || !dockWindows->first() )
-	return TQSize( 0, 0 );
-
-    if ( dirty ) {
-	TQDockAreaLayout *that = (TQDockAreaLayout *) this;
-	that->layoutItems( tqgeometry() );
-    }
-
-    int s = 0;
-
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQDockWindow> it( *dockWindows );
-    TQDockWindow *dw = 0;
-    while ( ( dw = it.current() ) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( dw->isHidden() )
-	    continue;
-	s = TQMAX( s, dock_strut( dw, orientation() ) );
-    }
-
-    return orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? TQSize( 0, s ? s+2 : 0 ) :  TQSize( s, 0 );
-}
-
-
-
-int TQDockAreaLayout::layoutItems( const TQRect &rect, bool testonly )
-{
-    if ( !dockWindows || !dockWindows->first() )
-	return 0;
-
-    dirty = FALSE;
-
-    // some corrections
-    TQRect r = rect;
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
-	r.setHeight( r.height() - 3 );
-
-    // init
-    lines.clear();
-    ls.clear();
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQDockWindow> it( *dockWindows );
-    TQDockWindow *dw = 0;
-    int start = start_pos( r, orientation() );
-    int pos = start;
-    int sectionpos = 0;
-    int linestrut = 0;
-    TQValueList<DockData> lastLine;
-    int tbstrut = -1;
-    int maxsize = size_extent( rect.size(), orientation() );
-    int visibleWindows = 0;
-
-    // go through all widgets in the dock
-    while ( ( dw = it.current() ) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( dw->isHidden() )
-	    continue;
-	++visibleWindows;
-	// find position for the widget: This is the maximum of the
-	// end of the previous widget and the offset of the widget. If
-	// the position + the width of the widget dosn't fit into the
-	// dock, try moving it a bit back, if possible.
-	int op = pos;
-	int dockExtend = dock_extent( dw, orientation(), maxsize );
-	if ( !dw->isStretchable() ) {
-	    pos = TQMAX( pos, dw->offset() );
-	    if ( pos + dockExtend > size_extent( r.size(), orientation() ) - 1 )
-		pos = TQMAX( op, size_extent( r.size(), orientation() ) - 1 - dockExtend );
-	}
-	if ( !lastLine.isEmpty() && !dw->newLine() && space_left( rect, pos, orientation() ) < dockExtend )
-	    shrink_extend( dw, dockExtend, space_left( rect, pos, orientation() ), orientation() );
-	// if the current widget doesn't fit into the line anymore and it is not the first widget of the line
-	if ( !lastLine.isEmpty() &&
-	     ( space_left( rect, pos, orientation() ) < dockExtend || dw->newLine() ) ) {
-	    if ( !testonly ) // place the last line, if not in test mode
-		place_line( lastLine, orientation(), linestrut, size_extent( r.size(), orientation() ), tbstrut, maxsize, this );
-	    // remember the line coordinats of the last line
-	    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-		lines.append( TQRect( 0, sectionpos, r.width(), linestrut ) );
-	    else
-		lines.append( TQRect( sectionpos, 0, linestrut, r.height() ) );
-	    // do some clearing for the next line
-	    lastLine.clear();
-	    sectionpos += linestrut;
-	    linestrut = 0;
-	    pos = start;
-	    tbstrut = -1;
-	}
-
-	// remeber first widget of a line
-	if ( lastLine.isEmpty() ) {
-	    ls.append( dw );
-	    // try to make the best position
-	    int op = pos;
-	    if ( !dw->isStretchable() )
-		pos = TQMAX( pos, dw->offset() );
-	    if ( pos + dockExtend > size_extent( r.size(), orientation() ) - 1 )
-		pos = TQMAX( op, size_extent( r.size(), orientation() ) - 1 - dockExtend );
-	}
-	// do some calculations and add the remember the rect which the docking widget requires for the placing
-	TQRect dwRect(pos, sectionpos, dockExtend, dock_strut( dw, orientation()  ) );
-	lastLine.append( DockData( dw, dwRect ) );
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(dw) )
-	    tbstrut = TQMAX( tbstrut, dock_strut( dw, orientation() ) );
-	linestrut = TQMAX( dock_strut( dw, orientation() ), linestrut );
-	add_size( dockExtend, pos, orientation() );
-    }
-
-    // if some stuff was not placed/stored yet, do it now
-    if ( !testonly )
-	place_line( lastLine, orientation(), linestrut, size_extent( r.size(), orientation() ), tbstrut, maxsize, this );
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	lines.append( TQRect( 0, sectionpos, r.width(), linestrut ) );
-    else
-	lines.append( TQRect( sectionpos, 0, linestrut, r.height() ) );
-    if ( *(--lines.end()) == *(--(--lines.end())) )
-	lines.remove( lines.at( lines.count() - 1 ) );
-
-    it.toFirst();
-    bool hadResizable = FALSE;
-    while ( ( dw = it.current() ) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( !dw->isVisibleTo( parentWidget ) )
-	    continue;
-	hadResizable = hadResizable || dw->isResizeEnabled();
-	dw->updateSplitterVisibility( visibleWindows > 1 ); //!dw->area()->isLastDockWindow( dw ) );
-    }
-    return sectionpos + linestrut;
-}
-
-int TQDockAreaLayout::heightForWidth( int w ) const
-{
-    if ( dockWindows->isEmpty() && parentWidget )
-	return parentWidget->minimumHeight();
-
-    if ( cached_width != w ) {
-	TQDockAreaLayout * mthis = (TQDockAreaLayout*)this;
-	mthis->cached_width = w;
-	int h = mthis->layoutItems( TQRect( 0, 0, w, 0 ), TRUE );
-	mthis->cached_hfw = h;
-	return h;
-    }
-
-    return cached_hfw;
-}
-
-int TQDockAreaLayout::widthForHeight( int h ) const
-{
-    if ( cached_height != h ) {
-	TQDockAreaLayout * mthis = (TQDockAreaLayout*)this;
-	mthis->cached_height = h;
-	int w = mthis->layoutItems( TQRect( 0, 0, 0, h ), TRUE );
-	mthis->cached_wfh = w;
-	return w;
-    }
-    return cached_wfh;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQDockArea tqdockarea.h
-    \brief The TQDockArea class manages and lays out TQDockWindows.
-
-    \ingroup application
-
-    A TQDockArea is a container which manages a list of
-    \l{TQDockWindow}s which it lays out within its area. In cooperation
-    with the \l{TQDockWindow}s it is responsible for the docking and
-    undocking of \l{TQDockWindow}s and moving them inside the dock
-    area. TQDockAreas also handle the wrapping of \l{TQDockWindow}s to
-    fill the available space as compactly as possible. TQDockAreas can
-    contain TQToolBars since TQToolBar is a TQDockWindow subclass.
-
-    TQMainWindow contains four TQDockAreas which you can use for your
-    TQToolBars and TQDockWindows, so in most situations you do not need
-    to use the TQDockArea class directly. Although TQMainWindow contains
-    support for its own dock areas it isn't convenient for adding new
-    TQDockAreas. If you need to create your own dock areas we suggest
-    that you create a subclass of TQWidget and add your TQDockAreas to
-    your subclass.
-
-    \img qmainwindow-qdockareas.png TQMainWindow's TQDockAreas
-
-    \target lines
-    \e Lines. TQDockArea uses the concept of lines. A line is a
-    horizontal region which may contain dock windows side-by-side. A
-    dock area may have room for more than one line. When dock windows
-    are docked into a dock area they are usually added at the right
-    hand side of the top-most line that has room (unless manually
-    placed by the user). When users move dock windows they may leave
-    empty lines or gaps in non-empty lines. Dock windows can be lined
-    up to minimize wasted space using the lineUp() function.
-
-    The TQDockArea class maintains a position list of all its child
-    dock windows. Dock windows are added to a dock area from position
-    0 onwards. Dock windows are laid out sequentially in position
-    order from left to right, and in the case of multiple lines of
-    dock windows, from top to bottom. If a dock window is floated it
-    still retains its position since this is where the window will
-    return if the user double clicks its caption. A dock window's
-    position can be determined with hasDockWindow(). The position can
-    be changed with moveDockWindow().
-
-    To dock or undock a dock window use TQDockWindow::dock() and
-    TQDockWindow::undock() respectively. If you want to control which
-    dock windows can dock in a dock area use setAcceptDockWindow(). To
-    see if a dock area contains a particular dock window use
-    \l{hasDockWindow()}; to see how many dock windows a dock area
-    contains use count().
-
-    The streaming operators can write the positions of the dock
-    windows in the dock area to a TQTextStream. The positions can be
-    read back later to restore the saved positions.
-
-    Save the positions to a TQTextStream:
-    \code
-    ts << *myDockArea;
-    \endcode
-
-    Restore the positions from a TQTextStream:
-    \code
-    ts >> *myDockArea;
-    \endcode
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockArea::handlePosition
-    \brief where the dock window splitter handle is placed in the dock
-    area
-
-    The default position is \c Normal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockArea::orientation
-    \brief the dock area's orientation
-
-    There is no default value; the orientation is specified in the
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQDockArea::HandlePosition
-
-    A dock window has two kinds of handles, the dock window handle
-    used for dragging the dock window, and the splitter handle used to
-    resize the dock window in relation to other dock windows using a
-    splitter. (The splitter handle is only visible for docked
-    windows.)
-
-    This enum specifies where the dock window splitter handle is
-    placed in the dock area.
-
-    \value Normal The splitter handles of dock windows are placed at
-    the right or bottom.
-
-    \value Reverse The splitter handles of dock windows are placed at
-    the left or top.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a TQDockArea with orientation \a o, HandlePosition \a h,
-    parent \a parent and called \a name.
-*/
-
-TQDockArea::TQDockArea( Qt::Orientation o, HandlePosition h, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name ), orient( o ), tqlayout( 0 ), hPos( h )
-{
-    dockWindows = new TQPtrList<TQDockWindow>;
-    tqlayout = new TQDockAreaLayout( this, o, dockWindows, 0, 0, "tooltqlayout" );
-    installEventFilter( this );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the dock area and all the dock windows docked in the dock
-    area.
-
-    Does not affect any floating dock windows or dock windows in other
-    dock areas, even if they first appeared in this dock area.
-    Floating dock windows are effectively top level windows and are
-    not child windows of the dock area. When a floating dock window is
-    docked (dragged into a dock area) its parent becomes the dock
-    area.
-*/
-
-TQDockArea::~TQDockArea()
-{
-    dockWindows->setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    delete dockWindows;
-    dockWindows = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Moves the TQDockWindow \a w within the dock area. If \a w is not
-    already docked in this area, \a w is docked first. If \a index is
-    -1 or larger than the number of docked widgets, \a w is appended
-    at the end, otherwise it is inserted at the position \a index.
-*/
-
-void TQDockArea::moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, int index )
-{
-    invalidateFixedSizes();
-    TQDockWindow *dockWindow = 0;
-    int dockWindowIndex = findDockWindow( w );
-    if ( dockWindowIndex == -1 ) {
-	dockWindow = w;
-	dockWindow->reparent( this, TQPoint( 0, 0 ), TRUE );
-	w->installEventFilter( this );
-	updateLayout();
-	tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? TQSizePolicy::Expanding : TQSizePolicy::Minimum,
-				    orientation() == Qt::Vertical ? TQSizePolicy::Expanding : TQSizePolicy::Minimum ) );
-	dockWindows->append( w );
-    } else {
-        if ( w->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) )
-	    w->reparent( this, TQPoint( 0, 0 ), TRUE );
-        if ( index == - 1 ) {
-	    dockWindows->removeRef( w );
-	    dockWindows->append( w );
-        }
-    }
-
-    w->dockArea = this;
-    w->curPlace = TQDockWindow::InDock;
-    w->updateGui();
-
-    if ( index != -1 && index < (int)dockWindows->count() ) {
-	dockWindows->removeRef( w );
-	dockWindows->insert( index, w );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the dock area contains the dock window \a w;
-    otherwise returns FALSE. If \a index is not 0 it will be set as
-    follows: if the dock area contains the dock window \a *index is
-    set to \a w's index position; otherwise \a *index is set to -1.
-*/
-
-bool TQDockArea::hasDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, int *index )
-{
-    int i = dockWindows->findRef( w );
-    if ( index )
-	*index = i;
-    return i != -1;
-}
-
-int TQDockArea::lineOf( int index )
-{
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> lineStarts = tqlayout->lineStarts();
-    int i = 0;
-    for ( TQDockWindow *w = lineStarts.first(); w; w = lineStarts.next(), ++i ) {
-	if ( dockWindows->find( w ) >= index )
-	    return i;
-    }
-    return i;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Moves the dock window \a w inside the dock area where \a p is the
-    new position (in global screen coordinates), \a r is the suggested
-    rectangle of the dock window and \a swap specifies whether or not
-    the orientation of the docked widget needs to be changed.
-
-    This function is used internally by TQDockWindow. You shouldn't
-    need to call it yourself.
-*/
-
-void TQDockArea::moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, const TQPoint &p, const TQRect &r, bool swap )
-{
-    invalidateFixedSizes();
-    int mse = -10;
-    bool hasResizable = FALSE;
-    for ( TQDockWindow *dw = dockWindows->first(); dw; dw = dockWindows->next() ) {
-	if ( dw->isHidden() )
-	    continue;
-	if ( dw->isResizeEnabled() )
-	    hasResizable = TRUE;
-	if ( orientation() != Qt::Horizontal )
-	    mse = TQMAX( TQMAX( dw->fixedExtent().width(), dw->width() ), mse );
-	else
-	    mse = TQMAX( TQMAX( dw->fixedExtent().height(), dw->height() ), mse );
-    }
-    if ( !hasResizable && w->isResizeEnabled() ) {
-	if ( orientation() != Qt::Horizontal )
-	    mse = TQMAX( w->fixedExtent().width(), mse );
-	else
-	    mse = TQMAX( w->fixedExtent().height(), mse );
-    }
-
-    TQDockWindow *dockWindow = 0;
-    int dockWindowIndex = findDockWindow( w );
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> lineStarts = tqlayout->lineStarts();
-    TQValueList<TQRect> lines = tqlayout->lineList();
-    bool wasAloneInLine = FALSE;
-    TQPoint pos = mapFromGlobal( p );
-    TQRect lr = *lines.at( lineOf( dockWindowIndex ) );
-    if ( dockWindowIndex != -1 ) {
-	if ( lineStarts.find( w ) != -1 &&
-	     ( (dockWindowIndex < (int)dockWindows->count() - 1 && lineStarts.find( dockWindows->at( dockWindowIndex + 1 ) ) != -1) ||
-	       dockWindowIndex == (int)dockWindows->count() - 1 ) )
-	    wasAloneInLine = TRUE;
-	dockWindow = dockWindows->take( dockWindowIndex );
-	if ( !wasAloneInLine ) { // only do the pre-tqlayout if the widget isn't the only one in its line
-	    if ( lineStarts.findRef( dockWindow ) != -1 && dockWindowIndex < (int)dockWindows->count() )
-		dockWindows->at( dockWindowIndex )->setNewLine( TRUE );
-	    tqlayout->layoutItems( TQRect( 0, 0, width(), height() ), TRUE );
-	}
-    } else {
-	dockWindow = w;
-	dockWindow->reparent( this, TQPoint( 0, 0 ), TRUE );
-	if ( swap )
-	    dockWindow->resize( dockWindow->height(), dockWindow->width() );
-	w->installEventFilter( this );
-    }
-
-    lineStarts = tqlayout->lineStarts();
-    lines = tqlayout->lineList();
-
-    TQRect rect = TQRect( mapFromGlobal( r.topLeft() ), r.size() );
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	rect = TQRect( width() - rect.x() - rect.width(), rect.y(), rect.width(), rect.height() );
-	pos.rx() = width() - pos.x();
-    }
-    dockWindow->setOffset( point_pos( rect.topLeft(), orientation() ) );
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	int offs = dockWindow->offset();
-	if ( width() - offs < dockWindow->minimumWidth() )
-	    dockWindow->setOffset( width() - dockWindow->minimumWidth() );
-    } else {
-	int offs = dockWindow->offset();
-	if ( height() - offs < dockWindow->minimumHeight() )
-	    dockWindow->setOffset( height() - dockWindow->minimumHeight() );
-    }
-
-    if ( dockWindows->isEmpty() ) {
-	dockWindows->append( dockWindow );
-    } else {
-	int dockLine = -1;
-	bool insertLine = FALSE;
-	int i = 0;
-	TQRect lineRect;
-	// find the line which we touched with the mouse
-	for ( TQValueList<TQRect>::Iterator it = lines.begin(); it != lines.end(); ++it, ++i ) {
-	    if ( point_pos( pos, orientation(), TRUE ) >= point_pos( (*it).topLeft(), orientation(), TRUE ) &&
-		 point_pos( pos, orientation(), TRUE ) <= point_pos( (*it).topLeft(), orientation(), TRUE ) +
-		 size_extent( (*it).size(), orientation(), TRUE ) ) {
-		dockLine = i;
-		lineRect = *it;
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( dockLine == -1 ) { // outside the dock...
-	    insertLine = TRUE;
-	    if ( point_pos( pos, orientation(), TRUE ) < 0 ) // insert as first line
-		dockLine = 0;
-	    else
-		dockLine = (int)lines.count(); // insert after the last line ### size_t/int cast
-	} else { // inside the dock (we have found a dockLine)
-	    if ( point_pos( pos, orientation(), TRUE ) <
-		 point_pos( lineRect.topLeft(), orientation(), TRUE ) + 4 ) {	// mouse was at the very beginning of the line
-		insertLine = TRUE;					// insert a new line before that with the docking widget
-	    } else if ( point_pos( pos, orientation(), TRUE ) >
-			point_pos( lineRect.topLeft(), orientation(), TRUE ) +
-			size_extent( lineRect.size(), orientation(), TRUE ) - 4 ) {	// mouse was at the very and of the line
-		insertLine = TRUE;						// insert a line after that with the docking widget
-		dockLine++;
-	    }
-	}
-
-	if ( !insertLine && wasAloneInLine && lr.contains( pos ) ) // if we are alone in a line and just moved in there, re-insert it
-	    insertLine = TRUE;
-
-#if defined(TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG)
-	qDebug( "insert in line %d, and insert that line: %d", dockLine, insertLine );
-	qDebug( "     (btw, we have %d lines)", lines.count() );
-#endif
-	TQDockWindow *dw = 0;
-	if ( dockLine >= (int)lines.count() ) { // insert after last line
-	    dockWindows->append( dockWindow );
-	    dockWindow->setNewLine( TRUE );
-#if defined(TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG)
-	    qDebug( "insert at the end" );
-#endif
-	} else if ( dockLine == 0 && insertLine ) { // insert before first line
-	    dockWindows->insert( 0, dockWindow );
-	    dockWindows->at( 1 )->setNewLine( TRUE );
-#if defined(TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG)
-	    qDebug( "insert at the begin" );
-#endif
-	} else { // insert somewhere in between
-	    // make sure each line start has a new line
-	    for ( dw = lineStarts.first(); dw; dw = lineStarts.next() )
-		dw->setNewLine( TRUE );
-
-	    // find the index of the first widget in the search line
-	    int searchLine = dockLine;
-#if defined(TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG)
-	    qDebug( "search line start of %d", searchLine );
-#endif
-	    TQDockWindow *lsw = lineStarts.at( searchLine );
-	    int index = dockWindows->find( lsw );
-	    if ( index == -1 ) { // the linestart widget hasn't been found, try to find it harder
-		if ( lsw == w && dockWindowIndex <= (int)dockWindows->count())
-		    index = dockWindowIndex;
-		else
-		    index = 0;
-		if ( index < (int)dockWindows->count() )
-		    (void)dockWindows->at( index ); // move current to index
-	    }
-#if defined(TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG)
-	    qDebug( "     which starts at %d", index );
-#endif
-	    if ( !insertLine ) { // if we insert the docking widget in the existing line
-		// find the index for the widget
-		bool inc = TRUE;
-		bool firstTime = TRUE;
-		for ( dw = dockWindows->current(); dw; dw = dockWindows->next() ) {
-		    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-			dw->setFixedExtentWidth( -1 );
-		    else
-			dw->setFixedExtentHeight( -1 );
-		    if ( !firstTime && lineStarts.find( dw ) != -1 ) // we are in the next line, so break
-			break;
-		    if ( point_pos( pos, orientation() ) <
-			 point_pos( fix_pos( dw ), orientation() ) + size_extent( dw->size(), orientation() ) / 2 ) {
-			inc = FALSE;
-		    }
-		    if ( inc )
-			index++;
-		    firstTime = FALSE;
-		}
-#if defined(TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG)
-		qDebug( "insert at index: %d", index );
-#endif
-		// if we insert it just before a widget which has a new line, transfer the newline to the docking widget
-		// but not if we didn't only mave a widget in its line which was alone in the line before
-		if ( !( wasAloneInLine && lr.contains( pos ) )
-		     && index >= 0 && index < (int)dockWindows->count() &&
-		     dockWindows->at( index )->newLine() && lineOf( index ) == dockLine ) {
-#if defined(TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG)
-		    qDebug( "get rid of the old newline and get me one" );
-#endif
-		    dockWindows->at( index )->setNewLine( FALSE );
-		    dockWindow->setNewLine( TRUE );
-		} else if ( wasAloneInLine && lr.contains( pos ) ) {
-		    dockWindow->setNewLine( TRUE );
-		} else { // if we are somewhere in a line, get rid of the newline
-		    dockWindow->setNewLine( FALSE );
-		}
-	    } else { // insert in a new line, so make sure the dock widget and the widget which will be after it have a newline
-#if defined(TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG)
-		qDebug( "insert a new line" );
-#endif
-		if ( index < (int)dockWindows->count() ) {
-#if defined(TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG)
-		    qDebug( "give the widget at %d a newline", index );
-#endif
-		    TQDockWindow* nldw = dockWindows->at( index );
-		    if ( nldw )
-			nldw->setNewLine( TRUE );
-		}
-#if defined(TQDOCKAREA_DEBUG)
-		qDebug( "give me a newline" );
-#endif
-		dockWindow->setNewLine( TRUE );
-	    }
-	    // finally insert the widget
-	    dockWindows->insert( index, dockWindow );
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( mse != -10 && w->isResizeEnabled() ) {
-	if ( orientation() != Qt::Horizontal )
-	    w->setFixedExtentWidth( TQMIN( TQMAX( w->minimumWidth(), mse ), w->tqsizeHint().width() ) );
-	else
-	    w->setFixedExtentHeight( TQMIN( TQMAX( w->minimumHeight(), mse ), w->tqsizeHint().height() ) );
-    }
-
-    updateLayout();
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? TQSizePolicy::Expanding : TQSizePolicy::Minimum,
-				orientation() == Qt::Vertical ? TQSizePolicy::Expanding : TQSizePolicy::Minimum ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the dock window \a w from the dock area. If \a
-    makeFloating is TRUE, \a w gets floated, and if \a swap is TRUE,
-    the orientation of \a w gets swapped. If \a fixNewLines is TRUE
-    (the default) newlines in the area will be fixed.
-
-    You should never need to call this function yourself. Use
-    TQDockWindow::dock() and TQDockWindow::undock() instead.
-*/
-
-void TQDockArea::removeDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines )
-{
-    w->removeEventFilter( this );
-    TQDockWindow *dockWindow = 0;
-    int i = findDockWindow( w );
-    if ( i == -1 )
-	return;
-    dockWindow = dockWindows->at( i );
-    dockWindows->remove( i );
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> lineStarts = tqlayout->lineStarts();
-    if ( fixNewLines && lineStarts.findRef( dockWindow ) != -1 && i < (int)dockWindows->count() )
-	dockWindows->at( i )->setNewLine( TRUE );
-    if ( makeFloating ) {
-	TQWidget *p = parentWidget() ? parentWidget() : tqtopLevelWidget();
-	dockWindow->reparent( p, (Qt::WindowFlags)(TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder | TQt::WStyle_Tool), TQPoint( 0, 0 ), FALSE );
-    }
-    if ( swap )
-	dockWindow->resize( dockWindow->height(), dockWindow->width() );
-    updateLayout();
-    if ( dockWindows->isEmpty() )
-	tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Preferred, TQSizePolicy::Preferred ) );
-}
-
-int TQDockArea::findDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w )
-{
-    return dockWindows ? dockWindows->findRef( w ) : -1;
-}
-
-void TQDockArea::updateLayout()
-{
-    tqlayout->tqinvalidate();
-    tqlayout->activate();
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-
-bool TQDockArea::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::Close ) {
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(o) ) {
-	    o->removeEventFilter( this );
-	    TQApplication::sendEvent( o, e );
-	    if ( ( (TQCloseEvent*)e )->isAccepted() )
-		removeDockWindow( (TQDockWindow*)o, FALSE, FALSE );
-	    return TRUE;
-	}
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-
-    Invalidates the offset of the next dock window in the dock area.
- */
-
-void TQDockArea::invalidNextOffset( TQDockWindow *dw )
-{
-    int i = dockWindows->find( dw );
-    if ( i == -1 || i >= (int)dockWindows->count() - 1 )
-	return;
-    if ( ( dw = dockWindows->at( ++i ) ) )
-	dw->setOffset( 0 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockArea::count
-    \brief the number of dock windows in the dock area
-*/
-int TQDockArea::count() const
-{
-    return dockWindows->count();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockArea::empty
-    \brief whether the dock area is empty
-*/
-
-bool TQDockArea::isEmpty() const
-{
-    return dockWindows->isEmpty();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a list of the dock windows in the dock area.
-*/
-
-TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> TQDockArea::dockWindowList() const
-{
-    return *dockWindows;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Lines up the dock windows in this dock area to minimize wasted
-    space. If \a keepNewLines is TRUE, only space within lines is
-    cleaned up. If \a keepNewLines is FALSE the number of lines might
-    be changed.
-*/
-
-void TQDockArea::lineUp( bool keepNewLines )
-{
-    for ( TQDockWindow *dw = dockWindows->first(); dw; dw = dockWindows->next() ) {
-	dw->setOffset( 0 );
-	if ( !keepNewLines )
-	    dw->setNewLine( FALSE );
-    }
-    tqlayout->activate();
-}
-
-TQDockArea::DockWindowData *TQDockArea::dockWindowData( TQDockWindow *w )
-{
-    DockWindowData *data = new DockWindowData;
-    data->index = findDockWindow( w );
-    if ( data->index == -1 ) {
-	delete data;
-	return 0;
-    }
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> lineStarts = tqlayout->lineStarts();
-    int i = -1;
-    for ( TQDockWindow *dw = dockWindows->first(); dw; dw = dockWindows->next() ) {
-	if ( lineStarts.findRef( dw ) != -1 )
-	    ++i;
-	if ( dw == w )
-	    break;
-    }
-    data->line = i;
-    data->offset = point_pos( TQPoint( fix_x(w), w->y() ), orientation() );
-    data->area = this;
-    data->fixedExtent = w->fixedExtent();
-    return data;
-}
-
-void TQDockArea::dockWindow( TQDockWindow *dockWindow, DockWindowData *data )
-{
-    if ( !data )
-	return;
-
-    dockWindow->reparent( this, TQPoint( 0, 0 ), FALSE );
-    dockWindow->installEventFilter( this );
-    dockWindow->dockArea = this;
-    dockWindow->updateGui();
-
-    if ( dockWindows->isEmpty() ) {
-	dockWindows->append( dockWindow );
-    } else {
-	TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> lineStarts = tqlayout->lineStarts();
-	int index = 0;
-	if ( (int)lineStarts.count() > data->line )
-	    index = dockWindows->find( lineStarts.at( data->line ) );
-	if ( index == -1 ) {
-	    index = 0;
-	    (void)dockWindows->at( index );
-	}
-	bool firstTime = TRUE;
-	int offset = data->offset;
-	for ( TQDockWindow *dw = dockWindows->current(); dw; dw = dockWindows->next() ) {
-	    if ( !firstTime && lineStarts.find( dw ) != -1 )
-		break;
-	    if ( offset <
-		 point_pos( fix_pos( dw ), orientation() ) + size_extent( dw->size(), orientation() ) / 2 )
-		break;
-	    index++;
-	    firstTime = FALSE;
-	}
-	if ( index >= 0 && index < (int)dockWindows->count() &&
-	     dockWindows->at( index )->newLine() && lineOf( index ) == data->line ) {
-	    dockWindows->at( index )->setNewLine( FALSE );
-	    dockWindow->setNewLine( TRUE );
-	} else {
-	    dockWindow->setNewLine( FALSE );
-	}
-
-	dockWindows->insert( index, dockWindow );
-    }
-    dockWindow->show();
-
-    dockWindow->setFixedExtentWidth( data->fixedExtent.width() );
-    dockWindow->setFixedExtentHeight( data->fixedExtent.height() );
-
-    updateLayout();
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? TQSizePolicy::Expanding : TQSizePolicy::Minimum,
-				orientation() == Qt::Vertical ? TQSizePolicy::Expanding : TQSizePolicy::Minimum ) );
-
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if dock window \a dw could be docked into the dock
-    area; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setAcceptDockWindow()
-*/
-
-bool TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted( TQDockWindow *dw )
-{
-    if ( !dw )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( forbiddenWidgets.findRef( dw ) != -1 )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(parentWidget());
-    if ( !mw )
-	return TRUE;
-    if ( !mw->hasDockWindow( dw ) )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( !mw->isDockEnabled( this ) )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( !mw->isDockEnabled( dw, this ) )
-	return FALSE;
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a accept is TRUE, dock window \a dw can be docked in the dock
-    area. If \a accept is FALSE, dock window \a dw cannot be docked in
-    the dock area.
-
-    \sa isDockWindowAccepted()
-*/
-
-void TQDockArea::setAcceptDockWindow( TQDockWindow *dw, bool accept )
-{
-    if ( accept )
-	forbiddenWidgets.removeRef( dw );
-    else if ( forbiddenWidgets.findRef( dw ) == -1 )
-	forbiddenWidgets.append( dw );
-}
-
-void TQDockArea::invalidateFixedSizes()
-{
-    for ( TQDockWindow *dw = dockWindows->first(); dw; dw = dockWindows->next() ) {
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    dw->setFixedExtentWidth( -1 );
-	else
-	    dw->setFixedExtentHeight( -1 );
-    }
-}
-
-int TQDockArea::maxSpace( int hint, TQDockWindow *dw )
-{
-    int index = findDockWindow( dw );
-    if ( index == -1 || index + 1 >= (int)dockWindows->count() ) {
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    return dw->width();
-	return dw->height();
-    }
-
-    TQDockWindow *w = 0;
-    int i = 0;
-    do {
-	w = dockWindows->at( index + (++i) );
-    } while ( i + 1 < (int)dockWindows->count() && ( !w || w->isHidden() ) );
-    if ( !w || !w->isResizeEnabled() || i >= (int)dockWindows->count() ) {
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    return dw->width();
-	return dw->height();
-    }
-    int min = 0;
-    TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(w);
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	w->setFixedExtentWidth( -1 );
-	if ( !tb )
-	    min = TQMAX( w->tqminimumSize().width(), w->tqminimumSizeHint().width() );
-	else
-	    min = w->tqsizeHint().width();
-    } else {
-	w->setFixedExtentHeight( -1 );
-	if ( !tb )
-	    min = TQMAX( w->tqminimumSize().height(), w->tqminimumSizeHint().height() );
-	else
-	    min = w->tqsizeHint().height();
-    }
-
-    int diff = hint - ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? dw->width() : dw->height() );
-
-    if ( ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? w->width() : w->height() ) - diff < min )
-	hint = ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? dw->width() : dw->height() ) + ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? w->width() : w->height() ) - min;
-
-    diff = hint - ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? dw->width() : dw->height() );
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	w->setFixedExtentWidth( w->width() - diff );
-    else
-	w->setFixedExtentHeight( w->height() - diff );
-    return hint;
-}
-
-void TQDockArea::setFixedExtent( int d, TQDockWindow *dw )
-{
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> lst;
-    TQDockWindow *w;
-    for ( w = dockWindows->first(); w; w = dockWindows->next() ) {
-	if ( w->isHidden() )
-	    continue;
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	    if ( dw->y() != w->y() )
-		continue;
-	} else {
-	    if ( dw->x() != w->x() )
-		continue;
-	}
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    d = TQMAX( d, w->minimumHeight() );
-	else
-	    d = TQMAX( d, w->minimumWidth() );
-	if ( w->isResizeEnabled() )
-	    lst.append( w );
-    }
-    for ( w = lst.first(); w; w = lst.next() ) {
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    w->setFixedExtentHeight( d );
-	else
-	    w->setFixedExtentWidth( d );
-    }
-}
-
-bool TQDockArea::isLastDockWindow( TQDockWindow *dw )
-{
-    int i = dockWindows->find( dw );
-    if ( i == -1 || i >= (int)dockWindows->count() - 1 )
-	return TRUE;
-    TQDockWindow *w = 0;
-    if ( ( w = dockWindows->at( ++i ) ) ) {
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && dw->y() < w->y() )
-	    return TRUE;
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Vertical && dw->x() < w->x() )
-	    return TRUE;
-    } else {
-	return TRUE;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTSTREAM
-
-/*!
-    \relates TQDockArea
-
-    Writes the tqlayout of the dock windows in dock area \a dockArea to
-    the text stream \a ts.
-
-    \sa operator>>()
-*/
-
-TQTextStream &operator<<( TQTextStream &ts, const TQDockArea &dockArea )
-{
-    TQString str;
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> l = dockArea.dockWindowList();
-
-    for ( TQDockWindow *dw = l.first(); dw; dw = l.next() )
-	str += "[" + TQString( dw->caption() ) + "," + TQString::number( (int)dw->offset() ) +
-	       "," + TQString::number( (int)dw->newLine() ) + "," + TQString::number( dw->fixedExtent().width() ) +
-	       "," + TQString::number( dw->fixedExtent().height() ) + "," + TQString::number( (int)!dw->isHidden() ) + "]";
-    ts << str << endl;
-
-    return ts;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \relates TQDockArea
-
-    Reads the tqlayout description of the dock windows in dock area \a
-    dockArea from the text stream \a ts and restores it. The tqlayout
-    description must have been previously written by the operator<<()
-    function.
-
-    \sa operator<<()
-*/
-
-TQTextStream &operator>>( TQTextStream &ts, TQDockArea &dockArea )
-{
-    TQString s = ts.readLine();
-
-    TQString name, offset, newLine, width, height, visible;
-
-    enum State { Pre, Name, Offset, NewLine, Width, Height, Visible, Post };
-    int state = Pre;
-    TQChar c;
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> l = dockArea.dockWindowList();
-
-    for ( int i = 0; i < (int)s.length(); ++i ) {
-	c = s[ i ];
-	if ( state == Pre && c == '[' ) {
-	    state++;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	if ( c == ',' &&
-	     ( state == Name || state == Offset || state == NewLine || state == Width || state == Height ) ) {
-	    state++;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	if ( state == Visible && c == ']' ) {
-	    for ( TQDockWindow *dw = l.first(); dw; dw = l.next() ) {
-		if ( TQString( dw->caption() ) == name ) {
-		    dw->setNewLine( (bool)newLine.toInt() );
-		    dw->setOffset( offset.toInt() );
-		    dw->setFixedExtentWidth( width.toInt() );
-		    dw->setFixedExtentHeight( height.toInt() );
-		    if ( !(bool)visible.toInt() )
-			dw->hide();
-		    else
-			dw->show();
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
-
-	    name = offset = newLine = width = height = visible = "";
-
-	    state = Pre;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	if ( state == Name )
-	    name += c;
-	else if ( state == Offset )
-	    offset += c;
-	else if ( state == NewLine )
-	    newLine += c;
-	else if ( state == Width )
-	    width += c;
-	else if ( state == Height )
-	    height += c;
-	else if ( state == Visible )
-	    visible += c;
-    }
-
-    dockArea.TQWidget::tqlayout()->tqinvalidate();
-    dockArea.TQWidget::tqlayout()->activate();
-    return ts;
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 6cdd6e6..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockarea.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,199 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of the TQDockArea class
-**
-** Created : 001010
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the workspace module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQDOCKAREA_H
-#define TQDOCKAREA_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#include "tqdockwindow.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqvaluelist.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-#include "tqtextstream.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
-
-class TQSplitter;
-class TQBoxLayout;
-class TQDockAreaLayout;
-class TQMouseEvent;
-class TQDockWindowResizeHandle;
-class TQDockAreaPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQDockAreaLayout : public TQLayout
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    friend class TQDockArea;
-
-public:
-    TQDockAreaLayout( TQWidget* parent, Orientation o, TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> *wl, int space = -1, int margin = -1, const char *name = 0 )
-	: TQLayout( parent, space, margin, name ), orient( o ), dockWindows( wl ), parentWidget( parent ) { init(); }
-    ~TQDockAreaLayout() {}
-
-    void addItem( QLayoutItem * ) {}
-    bool hasHeightForWidth() const;
-    int heightForWidth( int ) const;
-    int widthForHeight( int ) const;
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSize() const;
-    TQLayoutIterator iterator();
-    TQ_SPExpandData expandingDirections() const { return (Qt::Orientations)TQSizePolicy::NoDirection; } // [FIXME] Is this redefinition cast to Qt::Orientations correct?
-    void tqinvalidate();
-    Orientation orientation() const { return orient; }
-    TQValueList<TQRect> lineList() const { return lines; }
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> lineStarts() const { return ls; }
-
-protected:
-    void setGeometry( const TQRect& );
-
-private:
-    void init();
-    int layoutItems( const TQRect&, bool testonly = FALSE );
-    Orientation orient;
-    bool dirty;
-    int cached_width, cached_height;
-    int cached_hfw, cached_wfh;
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> *dockWindows;
-    TQWidget *parentWidget;
-    TQValueList<TQRect> lines;
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> ls;
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY) // Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-    TQDockAreaLayout( const TQDockAreaLayout & );
-    TQDockAreaLayout &operator=( const TQDockAreaLayout & );
-#endif
-
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-
-    QLAYOUT_REQUIRED_METHOD_DECLARATIONS
-
-#endif // USE_QT4
-};
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQDockArea : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( HandlePosition )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Orientation orientation READ orientation )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int count READ count )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool empty READ isEmpty )
-    Q_PROPERTY( HandlePosition handlePosition READ handlePosition )
-
-    friend class TQDockWindow;
-    friend class TQDockWindowResizeHandle;
-    friend class TQDockAreaLayout;
-
-public:
-    enum HandlePosition { Normal, Reverse };
-
-    TQDockArea( Qt::Orientation o, HandlePosition h = Normal, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQDockArea();
-
-    void moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, const TQPoint &globalPos, const TQRect &rect, bool swap );
-    void removeDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, bool makeFloating, bool swap, bool fixNewLines = TRUE );
-    void moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, int index = -1 );
-    bool hasDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w, int *index = 0 );
-
-    void invalidNextOffset( TQDockWindow *dw );
-
-    Qt::Orientation orientation() const { return orient; }
-    HandlePosition handlePosition() const { return hPos; }
-
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *, TQEvent * );
-    bool isEmpty() const;
-    int count() const;
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockWindowList() const;
-
-    bool isDockWindowAccepted( TQDockWindow *dw );
-    void setAcceptDockWindow( TQDockWindow *dw, bool accept );
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void lineUp( bool keepNewLines );
-
-private:
-    struct DockWindowData
-    {
-	int index;
-	int offset;
-	int line;
-	TQSize fixedExtent;
-	TQGuardedPtr<TQDockArea> area;
-    };
-
-    int findDockWindow( TQDockWindow *w );
-    int lineOf( int index );
-    DockWindowData *dockWindowData( TQDockWindow *w );
-    void dockWindow( TQDockWindow *dockWindow, DockWindowData *data );
-    void updateLayout();
-    void invalidateFixedSizes();
-    int maxSpace( int hint, TQDockWindow *dw );
-    void setFixedExtent( int d, TQDockWindow *dw );
-    bool isLastDockWindow( TQDockWindow *dw );
-
-private:
-    Qt::Orientation orient;
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> *dockWindows;
-    TQDockAreaLayout *tqlayout;
-    HandlePosition hPos;
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> forbiddenWidgets;
-    TQDockAreaPrivate *d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQDockArea( const TQDockArea & );
-    TQDockArea& operator=( const TQDockArea & );
-#endif
-
-};
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTSTREAM
-TQ_EXPORT TQTextStream &operator<<( TQTextStream &, const TQDockArea & );
-TQ_EXPORT TQTextStream &operator>>( TQTextStream &, TQDockArea & );
-#endif
-
-#define TQ_DEFINED_TQDOCKAREA
-#include "tqwinexport.h"
-#endif
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a9796e..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2126 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of the TQDockWindow class
-**
-** Created : 001010
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the workspace module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqdockwindow.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
-#include "tqdesktopwidget.h"
-#include "tqdockarea.h"
-#include "tqwidgetresizehandler_p.h"
-#include "tqtitlebar_p.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqtoolbutton.h"
-#include "tqtoolbar.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqmainwindow.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqtooltip.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC9)
-#define MAC_DRAG_HACK
-#endif
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MACX
-static bool default_opaque = TRUE;
-#else
-static bool default_opaque = FALSE;
-#endif
-
-class TQDockWindowPrivate
-{
-};
-
-class TQDockWindowResizeHandle : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-
-public:
-    TQDockWindowResizeHandle( Orientation o, TQWidget *parent, TQDockWindow *w, const char* /*name*/=0 );
-    void setOrientation( Orientation o );
-    Orientation orientation() const { return orient; }
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-
-protected:
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-
-private:
-    void startLineDraw();
-    void endLineDraw();
-    void drawLine( const TQPoint &globalPos );
-
-private:
-    Orientation orient;
-    bool mousePressed;
-    TQPainter *unclippedPainter;
-    TQPoint lastPos, firstPos;
-    TQDockWindow *dockWindow;
-
-};
-
-TQDockWindowResizeHandle::TQDockWindowResizeHandle( Orientation o, TQWidget *parent,
-						  TQDockWindow *w, const char * )
-    : TQWidget( parent, "qt_dockwidget_internal" ), mousePressed( FALSE ), unclippedPainter( 0 ), dockWindow( w )
-{
-    setOrientation( o );
-}
-
-TQSize TQDockWindowResizeHandle::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    int sw = 2 * tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_SplitterWidth, this) / 3;
-    return (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_DockWindow, this, TQSize(sw, sw)).
-	    expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut()));
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowResizeHandle::setOrientation( Orientation o )
-{
-    orient = o;
-    if ( o == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	setCursor( Qt::SplitVCursor );
-#endif
-	tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-    } else {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	setCursor( Qt::SplitHCursor );
-#endif
-	tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Fixed, TQSizePolicy::Expanding ) );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowResizeHandle::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    e->ignore();
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-    e->accept();
-    mousePressed = TRUE;
-    if ( !dockWindow->opaqueMoving() )
-	startLineDraw();
-    lastPos = firstPos = e->globalPos();
-    if ( !dockWindow->opaqueMoving() )
-	drawLine( e->globalPos() );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowResizeHandle::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !mousePressed )
-	return;
-    if ( !dockWindow->opaqueMoving() ) {
-	if ( orientation() != dockWindow->area()->orientation() ) {
-	    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-		int minpos = dockWindow->area()->mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) ).y();
-		int maxpos = dockWindow->area()->mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) ).y() + dockWindow->area()->height();
-		if ( e->globalPos().y() < minpos || e->globalPos().y() > maxpos )
-		    return;
-	    } else {
-		int minpos = dockWindow->area()->mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) ).x();
-		int maxpos = dockWindow->area()->mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) ).x() + dockWindow->area()->width();
-		if ( e->globalPos().x() < minpos || e->globalPos().x() > maxpos )
-		    return;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    TQWidget *w = dockWindow->area()->tqtopLevelWidget();
-	    if ( w ) {
-		if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-		    int minpos = w->mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) ).y();
-		    int maxpos = w->mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) ).y() + w->height();
-		    if ( e->globalPos().y() < minpos || e->globalPos().y() > maxpos )
-			return;
-		} else {
-		    int minpos = w->mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) ).x();
-		    int maxpos = w->mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) ).x() + w->width();
-		    if ( e->globalPos().x() < minpos || e->globalPos().x() > maxpos )
-			return;
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( !dockWindow->opaqueMoving() )
-	drawLine( lastPos );
-    lastPos = e->globalPos();
-    if ( dockWindow->opaqueMoving() ) {
-	mouseReleaseEvent( e );
-	mousePressed = TRUE;
-	firstPos = e->globalPos();
-    }
-    if ( !dockWindow->opaqueMoving() )
-	drawLine( e->globalPos() );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowResizeHandle::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( mousePressed ) {
-	if ( !dockWindow->opaqueMoving() ) {
-	    drawLine( lastPos );
-	    endLineDraw();
-	}
-	if ( orientation() != dockWindow->area()->orientation() )
-	    dockWindow->area()->invalidNextOffset( dockWindow );
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	    int dy;
-	    if ( dockWindow->area()->handlePosition() == TQDockArea::Normal || orientation() != dockWindow->area()->orientation() )
-		dy = e->globalPos().y() - firstPos.y();
-	    else
-		dy =  firstPos.y() - e->globalPos().y();
-	    int d = dockWindow->height() + dy;
-	    if ( orientation() != dockWindow->area()->orientation() ) {
-		dockWindow->setFixedExtentHeight( -1 );
-		d = TQMAX( d, dockWindow->minimumHeight() );
-		int ms = dockWindow->area()->maxSpace( d, dockWindow );
-		d = TQMIN( d, ms );
-		dockWindow->setFixedExtentHeight( d );
-	    } else {
-		dockWindow->area()->setFixedExtent( d, dockWindow );
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    int dx;
-	    if ( dockWindow->area()->handlePosition() == TQDockArea::Normal || orientation() != dockWindow->area()->orientation() )
-		dx = e->globalPos().x() - firstPos.x();
-	    else
-		dx = firstPos.x() - e->globalPos().x();
-	    int d = dockWindow->width() + dx;
-	    if ( orientation() != dockWindow->area()->orientation() ) {
-		dockWindow->setFixedExtentWidth( -1 );
-		d = TQMAX( d, dockWindow->minimumWidth() );
-		int ms = dockWindow->area()->maxSpace( d, dockWindow );
-		d = TQMIN( d, ms );
-		dockWindow->setFixedExtentWidth( d );
-	    } else {
-		dockWindow->area()->setFixedExtent( d, dockWindow );
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    TQApplication::postEvent( dockWindow->area(), new TQEvent( TQEvent::LayoutHint ) );
-    mousePressed = FALSE;
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowResizeHandle::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-{
-    TQPainter p( this );
-    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive(TQStyle::PE_DockWindowResizeHandle, &p, rect(), tqcolorGroup(),
-			  (isEnabled() ?
-			   TQStyle::Style_Enabled : TQStyle::Style_Default) |
-			  (orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ?
-			   TQStyle::Style_Horizontal : TQStyle::Style_Default ));
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowResizeHandle::startLineDraw()
-{
-    if ( unclippedPainter )
-	endLineDraw();
-#ifdef MAC_DRAG_HACK
-    TQWidget *paint_on = tqtopLevelWidget();
-#else
-    int scr = TQApplication::desktop()->screenNumber( this );
-    TQWidget *paint_on = TQT_TQWIDGET(TQApplication::desktop()->screen( scr ));
-#endif
-    unclippedPainter = new TQPainter( paint_on, TRUE );
-    unclippedPainter->setPen( TQPen( Qt::gray, orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? height() : width() ) );
-    unclippedPainter->setRasterOp( TQt::XorROP );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowResizeHandle::endLineDraw()
-{
-    if ( !unclippedPainter )
-	return;
-    delete unclippedPainter;
-    unclippedPainter = 0;
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowResizeHandle::drawLine( const TQPoint &globalPos )
-{
-#ifdef MAC_DRAG_HACK
-    TQPoint start = mapTo(tqtopLevelWidget(), TQPoint(0, 0));
-    TQPoint starta = dockWindow->area()->mapTo(tqtopLevelWidget(), TQPoint(0, 0));
-    TQPoint end = globalPos - tqtopLevelWidget()->pos();
-#else
-    TQPoint start = mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) );
-    TQPoint starta = dockWindow->area()->mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) );
-    TQPoint end = globalPos;
-#endif
-
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	if ( orientation() == dockWindow->orientation() )
-	    unclippedPainter->drawLine( starta.x() , end.y(), starta.x() + dockWindow->area()->width(), end.y() );
-	else
-	    unclippedPainter->drawLine( start.x(), end.y(), start.x() + width(), end.y() );
-    } else {
-	if ( orientation() == dockWindow->orientation() )
-	    unclippedPainter->drawLine( end.x(), starta.y(), end.x(), starta.y() + dockWindow->area()->height() );
-	else
-	    unclippedPainter->drawLine( end.x(), start.y(), end.x(), start.y() + height() );
-    }
-}
-
-static TQPoint realWidgetPos( TQDockWindow *w )
-{
-    if ( !w->parentWidget() || w->place() == TQDockWindow::OutsideDock )
-	return w->pos();
-    return w->parentWidget()->mapToGlobal( w->tqgeometry().topLeft() );
-}
-
-class TQDockWindowHandle : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString caption READ caption )
-    friend class TQDockWindow;
-    friend class TQDockWindowTitleBar;
-
-public:
-    TQDockWindowHandle( TQDockWindow *dw );
-    void updateGui();
-
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSize() const { return tqminimumSizeHint(); }
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const { return tqminimumSize(); }
-    TQSizePolicy sizePolicy() const;
-    void setOpaqueMoving( bool b ) { opaque = b; }
-
-    TQString caption() const { return dockWindow->caption(); }
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void doubleClicked();
-
-protected:
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e );
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-    void keyReleaseEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STYLE
-    void styleChange( TQStyle& );
-#endif
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void minimize();
-
-private:
-    TQDockWindow *dockWindow;
-    TQPoint offset;
-    TQToolButton *closeButton;
-    TQTimer *timer;
-    uint opaque		: 1;
-    uint mousePressed	: 1;
-    uint hadDblClick	: 1;
-    uint ctrlDown : 1;
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQWidget> oldFocus;
-};
-
-class TQDockWindowTitleBar : public TQTitleBar
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    friend class TQDockWindow;
-    friend class TQDockWindowHandle;
-
-public:
-    TQDockWindowTitleBar( TQDockWindow *dw );
-    void updateGui();
-    void setOpaqueMoving( bool b ) { opaque = b; }
-
-protected:
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e );
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-    void keyReleaseEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-
-private:
-    TQDockWindow *dockWindow;
-    TQPoint offset;
-    uint mousePressed : 1;
-    uint hadDblClick : 1;
-    uint opaque : 1;
-    uint ctrlDown : 1;
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQWidget> oldFocus;
-
-};
-
-TQDockWindowHandle::TQDockWindowHandle( TQDockWindow *dw )
-    : TQWidget( dw, "qt_dockwidget_internal", TQt::WNoAutoErase ), dockWindow( dw ),
-      closeButton( 0 ), opaque( default_opaque ), mousePressed( FALSE )
-{
-    ctrlDown = FALSE;
-    timer = new TQTimer( this );
-    connect( timer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQT_SLOT( minimize() ) );
-#ifdef TQ_WS_WIN
-    setCursor( SizeAllCursor );
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowHandle::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( (!dockWindow->dockArea || mousePressed) && !opaque )
-	return;
-    erase();
-    TQPainter p( this );
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if ( isEnabled() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if ( !dockWindow->area() || dockWindow->area()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Horizontal;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_DockWindowHandle, &p,
-			   TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect( TQStyle::SR_DockWindowHandleRect,
-								this ), this ),
-			   tqcolorGroup(), flags );
-    TQWidget::paintEvent( e );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowHandle::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !mousePressed )
-	return;
-    if ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Control ) {
-	ctrlDown = TRUE;
-	dockWindow->handleMove( mapFromGlobal(TQCursor::pos()) - offset, TQCursor::pos(), !opaque );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowHandle::keyReleaseEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !mousePressed )
-	return;
-    if ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Control ) {
-	ctrlDown = FALSE;
-	dockWindow->handleMove( mapFromGlobal(TQCursor::pos()) - offset, TQCursor::pos(), !opaque );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowHandle::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !dockWindow->dockArea )
-	return;
-    ctrlDown = ( e->state() & ControlButton ) == ControlButton;
-    oldFocus = tqApp->tqfocusWidget();
-    setFocus();
-    e->ignore();
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-    e->accept();
-    hadDblClick = FALSE;
-    mousePressed = TRUE;
-    offset = e->pos();
-    dockWindow->startRectDraw( mapToGlobal( e->pos() ), !opaque );
-    if ( !opaque )
-	tqApp->installEventFilter( dockWindow );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowHandle::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !mousePressed || e->pos() == offset )
-	return;
-    ctrlDown = ( e->state() & ControlButton ) == ControlButton;
-    dockWindow->handleMove( e->pos() - offset, e->globalPos(), !opaque );
-    if ( opaque )
-	dockWindow->updatePosition( e->globalPos() );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowHandle::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    ctrlDown = FALSE;
-    tqApp->removeEventFilter( dockWindow );
-    if ( oldFocus )
-	oldFocus->setFocus();
-    if ( !mousePressed )
-	return;
-    dockWindow->endRectDraw( !opaque );
-    mousePressed = FALSE;
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MAC
-    releaseMouse();
-#endif
-    if ( !hadDblClick && offset == e->pos() ) {
-	timer->start( TQApplication::doubleClickInterval(), TRUE );
-    } else if ( !hadDblClick ) {
-	dockWindow->updatePosition( e->globalPos() );
-    }
-    if ( opaque )
-	dockWindow->titleBar->mousePressed = FALSE;
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowHandle::minimize()
-{
-    if ( !dockWindow->area() )
-	return;
-
-    TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(dockWindow->area()->parentWidget());
-    if ( mw && mw->isDockEnabled( dockWindow, TQt::DockMinimized ) )
-	mw->moveDockWindow( dockWindow, TQt::DockMinimized );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowHandle::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
-{
-    updateGui();
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowHandle::updateGui()
-{
-    if ( !closeButton ) {
-	closeButton = new TQToolButton( this, "qt_close_button1" );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	closeButton->setCursor( Qt::ArrowCursor );
-#endif
-	closeButton->setPixmap( tqstyle().stylePixmap( TQStyle::SP_DockWindowCloseButton, closeButton ) );
-	closeButton->setFixedSize( 12, 12 );
-	connect( closeButton, TQT_SIGNAL( clicked() ),
-		 dockWindow, TQT_SLOT( hide() ) );
-    }
-
-    if ( dockWindow->isCloseEnabled() && dockWindow->area() )
-	closeButton->show();
-    else
-	closeButton->hide();
-
-    if ( !dockWindow->area() )
-	return;
-
-    if ( dockWindow->area()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	int off = ( width() - closeButton->width() - 1 ) / 2;
-	closeButton->move( off, 2 );
-    } else {
-	int off = ( height() - closeButton->height() - 1 ) / 2;
-	int x = TQApplication::reverseLayout() ? 2 : width() - closeButton->width() - 2;
-	closeButton->move( x, off );
-    }
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STYLE
-void TQDockWindowHandle::styleChange( TQStyle& )
-{
-    if ( closeButton )
-	closeButton->setPixmap( tqstyle().stylePixmap( TQStyle::SP_DockWindowCloseButton, closeButton ) );
-}
-#endif
-
-TQSize TQDockWindowHandle::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( !dockWindow->dockArea )
-	return TQSize( 0, 0 );
-    int wh = dockWindow->isCloseEnabled() ? 17 : tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DockWindowHandleExtent, this );
-    if ( dockWindow->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	return TQSize( wh, 0 );
-    return TQSize( 0, wh );
-}
-
-TQSizePolicy TQDockWindowHandle::sizePolicy() const
-{
-    if ( dockWindow->orientation() != Qt::Horizontal )
-	return TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Preferred, TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
-    return TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Fixed, TQSizePolicy::Preferred );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowHandle::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    e->ignore();
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-    e->accept();
-    timer->stop();
-    emit doubleClicked();
-    hadDblClick = TRUE;
-}
-
-TQDockWindowTitleBar::TQDockWindowTitleBar( TQDockWindow *dw )
-    : TQTitleBar( 0, dw, "qt_dockwidget_internal" ), dockWindow( dw ),
-      mousePressed( FALSE ), hadDblClick( FALSE ), opaque( default_opaque )
-{
-    setWFlags( getWFlags() | TQt::WStyle_Tool );
-    ctrlDown = FALSE;
-    setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-    setFixedHeight( tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_TitleBarHeight, this ) );
-    connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(doClose()), dockWindow, TQT_SLOT(hide()) );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowTitleBar::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !mousePressed )
-	return;
-    if ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Control ) {
-	ctrlDown = TRUE;
-	dockWindow->handleMove( mapFromGlobal( TQCursor::pos() ) - offset, TQCursor::pos(), !opaque );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowTitleBar::keyReleaseEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !mousePressed )
-	return;
-    if ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Control ) {
-	ctrlDown = FALSE;
-	dockWindow->handleMove( mapFromGlobal( TQCursor::pos() ) - offset, TQCursor::pos(), !opaque );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowTitleBar::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    TQStyle::SubControl tbctrl = tqstyle().querySubControl( TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, this, e->pos() );
-    if ( tbctrl > TQStyle::SC_TitleBarLabel ) {
-	TQTitleBar::mousePressEvent( e );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    ctrlDown = ( e->state() & ControlButton ) == ControlButton;
-    oldFocus = tqApp->tqfocusWidget();
-// setFocus activates the window, which deactivates the main window
-// not what we want, and not required anyway on Windows
-#ifndef TQ_WS_WIN
-    setFocus();
-#endif
-
-    e->ignore();
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-    if ( e->y() < 3 && dockWindow->isResizeEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    e->accept();
-    bool oldPressed = mousePressed;
-    mousePressed = TRUE;
-    hadDblClick = FALSE;
-    offset = e->pos();
-    dockWindow->startRectDraw( mapToGlobal( e->pos() ), !opaque );
-// grabMouse resets the Windows mouse press count, so we never receive a double click on Windows
-// not required on Windows, and did work on X11, too, but no problem there in the first place
-#ifndef TQ_WS_WIN
-    if(!oldPressed && dockWindow->opaqueMoving())
-	grabMouse();
-#else
-    TQ_UNUSED( oldPressed );
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowTitleBar::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !mousePressed ) {
-	TQTitleBar::mouseMoveEvent( e );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    ctrlDown = ( e->state() & ControlButton ) == ControlButton;
-    e->accept();
-    dockWindow->handleMove( e->pos() - offset, e->globalPos(), !opaque );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowTitleBar::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !mousePressed ) {
-	TQTitleBar::mouseReleaseEvent( e );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    ctrlDown = FALSE;
-    tqApp->removeEventFilter( dockWindow );
-    if ( oldFocus )
-	oldFocus->setFocus();
-
-    if ( dockWindow->place() == TQDockWindow::OutsideDock )
-	dockWindow->raise();
-
-    if(dockWindow->opaqueMoving())
-	releaseMouse();
-    if ( !mousePressed )
-	return;
-    dockWindow->endRectDraw( !opaque );
-    mousePressed = FALSE;
-    if ( !hadDblClick )
-	dockWindow->updatePosition( e->globalPos() );
-    if ( opaque ) {
-	dockWindow->horHandle->mousePressed = FALSE;
-	dockWindow->verHandle->mousePressed = FALSE;
-    }
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowTitleBar::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    updateGui();
-    TQTitleBar::resizeEvent( e );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowTitleBar::updateGui()
-{
-    if ( dockWindow->isCloseEnabled() ) {
-	setWFlags( getWFlags() | TQt::WStyle_SysMenu );
-    } else {
-	setWFlags( getWFlags() & ~TQt::WStyle_SysMenu );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQDockWindowTitleBar::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
-{
-    emit doubleClicked();
-    hadDblClick = TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQDockWindow tqdockwindow.h
-    \brief The TQDockWindow class provides a widget which can be docked
-    inside a TQDockArea or floated as a top level window on the
-    desktop.
-
-    \ingroup application
-    \mainclass
-
-    This class handles moving, resizing, docking and undocking dock
-    windows. TQToolBar is a subclass of TQDockWindow so the
-    functionality provided for dock windows is available with the same
-    API for toolbars.
-
-    \img qmainwindow-qdockareas.png TQDockWindows in a TQDockArea
-    \caption Two TQDockWindows (\l{TQToolBar}s) in a \l TQDockArea
-
-    \img qdockwindow.png A TQDockWindow
-    \caption A Floating TQDockWindow
-
-    If the user drags the dock window into the dock area the dock
-    window will be docked. If the user drags the dock area outside any
-    dock areas the dock window will be undocked (floated) and will
-    become a top level window. Double clicking a floating dock
-    window's titlebar will dock the dock window to the last dock area
-    it was docked in. Double clicking a docked dock window's handle
-    will undock (float) the dock window.
-    \omit
-    Single clicking a docked dock window's handle will minimize the
-    dock window (only its handle will appear, below the menu bar).
-    Single clicking the minimized handle will restore the dock window
-    to the last dock area that it was docked in.
-    \endomit
-    If the user clicks the close button (which does not appear on
-    dock windows by default - see \l closeMode) the dock window will
-    disappear. You can control whether or not a dock window has a
-    close button with setCloseMode().
-
-    TQMainWindow provides four dock areas (top, left, right and bottom)
-    which can be used by dock windows. For many applications using the
-    dock areas provided by TQMainWindow is sufficient. (See the \l
-    TQDockArea documentation if you want to create your own dock
-    areas.) In TQMainWindow a right-click popup menu (the dock window
-    menu) is available which lists dock windows and can be used to
-    show or hide them. (The popup menu only lists dock windows that
-    have a \link setCaption() caption\endlink.)
-
-    When you construct a dock window you \e must pass it a TQDockArea
-    or a TQMainWindow as its parent if you want it docked. Pass 0 for
-    the parent if you want it floated.
-
-    \code
-    TQToolBar *fileTools = new TQToolBar( this, "File Actions" );
-    moveDockWindow( fileTools, Left );
-    \endcode
-
-    In the example above we create a new TQToolBar in the constructor
-    of a TQMainWindow subclass (so that the \e this pointer points to
-    the TQMainWindow). By default the toolbar will be added to the \c
-    Top dock area, but we've moved it to the \c Left dock area.
-
-    A dock window is often used to contain a single widget. In these
-    cases the widget can be set by calling setWidget(). If you're
-    constructing a dock window that contains multiple widgets, e.g. a
-    toolbar, arrange the widgets within a box tqlayout inside the dock
-    window. To do this use the boxLayout() function to get a pointer
-    to the dock window's box tqlayout, then add widgets to the tqlayout
-    using the box tqlayout's TQBoxLayout::addWidget() function. The dock
-    window will dynamically set the orientation of the tqlayout to be
-    vertical or horizontal as necessary, although you can control this
-    yourself with setOrientation().
-
-    Although a common use of dock windows is for toolbars, they can be
-    used with any widgets. (See the \link designer-manual.book TQt
-    Designer\endlink and \link linguist-manual.book TQt
-    Linguist\endlink applications, for example.) When using larger
-    widgets it may make sense for the dock window to be resizable by
-    calling setResizeEnabled(). Resizable dock windows are given
-    splitter-like handles to allow the user to resize them within
-    their dock area. When resizable dock windows are undocked they
-    become top level windows and can be resized like any other top
-    level windows, e.g. by dragging a corner or edge.
-
-    Dock windows can be docked and undocked using dock() and undock().
-    A dock window's orientation can be set with setOrientation(). You
-    can also use TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(). If you're using a
-    TQMainWindow, TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow() and
-    TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow() are available.
-
-    A dock window can have some preferred settings, for example, you
-    can set a preferred offset from the left edge (or top edge for
-    vertical dock areas) of the dock area using setOffset(). If you'd
-    prefer a dock window to start on a new \link tqdockarea.html#lines
-    line\endlink when it is docked use setNewLine(). The
-    setFixedExtentWidth() and setFixedExtentHeight() functions can be
-    used to define the dock window's preferred size, and the
-    setHorizontallyStretchable() and setVerticallyStretchable()
-    functions set whether the dock window can be stretched or not.
-    Dock windows can be moved by default, but this can be changed with
-    setMovingEnabled(). When a dock window is moved it is shown as a
-    rectangular outline, but it can be shown normally using
-    setOpaqueMoving().
-
-    When a dock window's visibility changes, i.e. it is shown or
-    hidden, the visibilityChanged() signal is emitted. When a dock
-    window is docked, undocked or moved inside the dock area the
-    placeChanged() signal is emitted.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQDockWindow::Place
-
-    This enum specifies the possible locations for a TQDockWindow:
-
-    \value InDock  Inside a TQDockArea.
-    \value OutsideDock  Floating as a top level window on the desktop.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQDockWindow::CloseMode
-
-    This enum type specifies when (if ever) a dock window has a close
-    button.
-
-    \value Never  The dock window never has a close button and cannot
-    be closed by the user.
-    \value Docked  The dock window has a close button only when
-    docked.
-    \value Undocked  The dock window has a close button only when
-    floating.
-    \value Always The dock window always has a close button.
-    \omit
-    Note that dock windows can always be minimized if the user clicks
-    their dock window handle when they are docked.
-    \endomit
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDockWindow::setHorizontalStretchable( bool b )
-    \obsolete
-*/
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable( bool b )
-    \obsolete
-*/
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQDockWindow::isHorizontalStretchable() const
-    \obsolete
-*/
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQDockWindow::isVerticalStretchable() const
-    \obsolete
-*/
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDockWindow::orientationChanged( Orientation o )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the orientation of the dock window is
-    changed. The new orientation is \a o.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDockWindow::placeChanged( TQDockWindow::Place p )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the dock window is docked (\a p is \c
-    InDock), undocked (\a p is \c OutsideDock) or moved inside the
-    the dock area.
-
-    \sa TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(),
-    TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDockWindow::visibilityChanged( bool visible )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the visibility of the dock window
-    relatively to its dock area is changed. If \a visible is TRUE, the
-    TQDockWindow is now visible to the dock area, otherwise it has been
-    hidden.
-
-    A dock window can be hidden if it has a close button which the
-    user has clicked. In the case of a TQMainWindow a dock window can
-    have its visibility changed (hidden or shown) by clicking its name
-    in the dock window menu that lists the TQMainWindow's dock windows.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQDockArea *TQDockWindow::area() const
-
-    Returns the dock area in which this dock window is docked, or 0 if
-    the dock window is floating.
-*/
-
-// DOC: Can't use \property 'cos it thinks the thing returns a bool.
-/*!
-    \fn Place TQDockWindow::place() const
-
-    This function returns where the dock window is placed. This is
-    either \c InDock or \c OutsideDock.
-
-    \sa TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(), TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(),
-    TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a TQDockWindow with parent \a parent, called \a name and
-    with widget flags \a f.
-*/
-
-TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( TQWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) )
-{
-    curPlace = InDock;
-    isToolbar = FALSE;
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a TQDockWindow with parent \a parent, called \a name and
-    with widget flags \a f.
-
-    If \a p is \c InDock, the dock window is docked into a dock area
-    and \a parent \e must be a TQDockArea or a TQMainWindow. If the \a
-    parent is a TQMainWindow the dock window will be docked in the main
-    window's \c Top dock area.
-
-    If \a p is \c OutsideDock, the dock window is created as a floating
-    window.
-
-    We recommend creating the dock area \c InDock with a TQMainWindow
-    as parent then calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow() to move the
-    dock window where you want it.
-*/
-
-TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) )
-{
-    curPlace = p;
-    isToolbar = FALSE;
-    init();
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-*/
-
-TQDockWindow::TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f, bool toolbar )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) )
-{
-    curPlace = p;
-    isToolbar = toolbar;
-    init();
-}
-
-class TQDockWindowGridLayout : public TQGridLayout
-{
-public:
-    TQDockWindowGridLayout( TQWidget *parent, int nRows, int nCols )
-	: TQGridLayout( parent, nRows, nCols ) {};
-
-    TQ_SPExpandData expandingDirections() const
-    {
-	return (Qt::Orientations)TQSizePolicy::NoDirection;
-    }
-};
-
-void TQDockWindow::init()
-{
-    wid = 0;
-    unclippedPainter = 0;
-    dockArea = 0;
-    tmpDockArea = 0;
-    resizeEnabled = FALSE;
-    moveEnabled = TRUE;
-    nl = FALSE;
-    opaque = default_opaque;
-    cMode = Never;
-    offs = 0;
-    fExtent = TQSize( -1, -1 );
-    dockWindowData = 0;
-    lastPos = TQPoint( -1, -1 );
-    lastSize = TQSize( -1, -1 );
-
-    widgetResizeHandler = new TQWidgetResizeHandler( this );
-    widgetResizeHandler->setMovingEnabled( FALSE );
-
-    titleBar      = new TQDockWindowTitleBar( this );
-    verHandle     = new TQDockWindowHandle( this );
-    horHandle     = new TQDockWindowHandle( this );
-
-    vHandleLeft   = new TQDockWindowResizeHandle( Qt::Vertical, this, this, "vert. handle" );
-    vHandleRight  = new TQDockWindowResizeHandle( Qt::Vertical, this, this, "vert. handle" );
-    hHandleTop    = new TQDockWindowResizeHandle( Qt::Horizontal, this, this, "horz. handle" );
-    hHandleBottom = new TQDockWindowResizeHandle( Qt::Horizontal, this, this, "horz. handle" );
-
-    // Creating inner tqlayout
-    hbox	  = new TQVBoxLayout();
-    vbox	  = new TQHBoxLayout();
-    childBox	  = new TQBoxLayout(TQBoxLayout::LeftToRight);
-    vbox->addWidget( verHandle );
-    vbox->addLayout( childBox );
-
-    hbox->setResizeMode( TQLayout::FreeResize );
-    hbox->setMargin( isResizeEnabled() || curPlace == OutsideDock ? 2 : 0 );
-    hbox->setSpacing( 1 );
-    hbox->addWidget( titleBar );
-    hbox->addWidget( horHandle );
-    hbox->addLayout( vbox );
-
-    // Set up the initial handle tqlayout for Qt::Vertical
-    // Handle tqlayout will change on calls to setOrienation()
-    TQGridLayout *gtqlayout = new TQDockWindowGridLayout( this, 3, 3 );
-    gtqlayout->setResizeMode( TQLayout::Minimum );
-    gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( hHandleTop,    0, 0, 1, 1 );
-    gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( hHandleBottom, 2, 2, 1, 1 );
-    gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( vHandleLeft,   0, 2, 0, 0 );
-    gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( vHandleRight,  0, 2, 2, 2 );
-    gtqlayout->addLayout( hbox, 1, 1 );
-    gtqlayout->setRowStretch( 1, 1 );
-    gtqlayout->setColStretch( 1, 1 );
-
-    hHandleBottom->hide();
-    vHandleRight->hide();
-    hHandleTop->hide();
-    vHandleLeft->hide();
-    setFrameStyle( TQFrame::StyledPanel | TQFrame::Raised );
-    setLineWidth( 2 );
-
-    if ( parentWidget() )
-	parentWidget()->installEventFilter( this );
-    TQWidget *mw = parentWidget();
-    TQDockArea *da = ::tqqt_cast<TQDockArea*>(parentWidget());
-    if ( da ) {
-	if ( curPlace == InDock )
-	    da->moveDockWindow( this );
-	mw = da->parentWidget();
-    }
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(mw) ) {
-	if ( place() == InDock ) {
-	    TQt::Dock myDock = TQt::DockTop;
-	    // make sure we put the window in the correct dock.
-	    if ( dockArea ) {
-		TQMainWindow *mainw = (TQMainWindow*)mw;
-		// I'm not checking if it matches the top because I've
-		// done the assignment to it above.
-		if ( dockArea == mainw->leftDock() )
-		    myDock = TQt::DockLeft;
-		else if ( dockArea == mainw->rightDock() )
-		    myDock = TQt::DockRight;
-		else if ( dockArea == mainw->bottomDock() )
-		    myDock = TQt::DockBottom;
-	    }
-	    ( (TQMainWindow*)mw )->addDockWindow( this, myDock );
-	}
-	moveEnabled = ((TQMainWindow*)mw)->dockWindowsMovable();
-	opaque = ((TQMainWindow*)mw)->opaqueMoving();
-    }
-
-    updateGui();
-    stretchable[ Qt::Horizontal ] = FALSE;
-    stretchable[ Qt::Vertical ] = FALSE;
-
-    connect( titleBar, TQT_SIGNAL( doubleClicked() ), this, TQT_SLOT( dock() ) );
-    connect( verHandle, TQT_SIGNAL( doubleClicked() ), this, TQT_SLOT( undock() ) );
-    connect( horHandle, TQT_SIGNAL( doubleClicked() ), this, TQT_SLOT( undock() ) );
-    connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL( orientationChanged(Orientation) ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( setOrientation(Orientation) ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the orientation of the dock window to \a o. The orientation
-    is propagated to the tqlayout boxLayout().
-
-    \warning All undocked TQToolBars will always have a horizontal orientation.
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setOrientation( Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    TQGridLayout *gtqlayout = (TQGridLayout*)tqlayout();
-    gtqlayout->remove( hHandleTop );
-    gtqlayout->remove( hHandleBottom );
-    gtqlayout->remove( vHandleLeft );
-    gtqlayout->remove( vHandleRight );
-
-    if ( o == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	// Set up the new tqlayout as
-	//   3 3 3      1 = vHandleLeft   4 = hHandleBottom
-	//   1 X 2      2 = vHandleRight  X = Inner Layout
-	//   4 4 4      3 = hHandleTop
-	gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( hHandleTop,    0, 0, 0, 2 );
-	gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( hHandleBottom, 2, 2, 0, 2 );
-	gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( vHandleLeft,   1, 1, 0, 0 );
-	gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( vHandleRight,  1, 1, 2, 2 );
-    } else {
-	// Set up the new tqlayout as
-	//   1 3 2      1 = vHandleLeft   4 = hHandleBottom
-	//   1 X 2      2 = vHandleRight  X = Inner Layout
-	//   1 4 2      3 = hHandleTop
-	gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( hHandleTop,    0, 0, 1, 1 );
-	gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( hHandleBottom, 2, 2, 1, 1 );
-	gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( vHandleLeft,   0, 2, 0, 0 );
-	gtqlayout->addMultiCellWidget( vHandleRight,  0, 2, 2, 2 );
-    }
-    boxLayout()->setDirection( o == Qt::Horizontal ? TQBoxLayout::LeftToRight : TQBoxLayout::TopToBottom );
-    TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( this, TQEvent::LayoutHint );
-    TQEvent *e = new TQEvent( TQEvent::LayoutHint );
-    TQApplication::postEvent( this, e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-
-    Destroys the dock window and its child widgets.
-*/
-
-TQDockWindow::~TQDockWindow()
-{
-    tqApp->removeEventFilter( this );
-    if ( area() )
-	area()->removeDockWindow( this, FALSE, FALSE );
-    TQDockArea *a = area();
-    if ( !a && dockWindowData )
-	a = ( (TQDockArea::DockWindowData*)dockWindowData )->area;
-    TQMainWindow *mw = a ? ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(a->parentWidget()) : 0;
-    if ( mw )
-	mw->removeDockWindow( this );
-
-    delete (TQDockArea::DockWindowData*)dockWindowData;
-}
-
-/*!  \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    TQFrame::resizeEvent( e );
-    updateGui();
-}
-
-
-void TQDockWindow::swapRect( TQRect &r, Orientation o, const TQPoint &offset, TQDockArea * )
-{
-    TQBoxLayout *bl = boxLayout()->createTmpCopy();
-    bl->setDirection( o == Qt::Horizontal ? TQBoxLayout::LeftToRight : TQBoxLayout::TopToBottom );
-    bl->activate();
-    r.setSize( bl->tqsizeHint() );
-    bl->data = 0;
-    delete bl;
-    bool reverse = TQApplication::reverseLayout();
-    if ( o == Qt::Horizontal )
-	r.moveBy( -r.width()/2, 0 );
-    else
-	r.moveBy( reverse ? - r.width() : 0, -r.height() / 2  );
-    r.moveBy( offset.x(), offset.y() );
-}
-
-TQWidget *TQDockWindow::areaAt( const TQPoint &gp )
-{
-    TQWidget *w = tqApp->widgetAt( gp, TRUE );
-
-    if ( w && ( w == this || w == titleBar ) && parentWidget() )
-	w = parentWidget()->tqchildAt( parentWidget()->mapFromGlobal( gp ) );
-
-    while ( w ) {
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQDockArea*>(w) ) {
-	    TQDockArea *a = (TQDockArea*)w;
-	    if ( a->isDockWindowAccepted( this ) )
-		return w;
-	}
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(w) ) {
-	    TQMainWindow *mw = (TQMainWindow*)w;
-	    TQDockArea *a = mw->dockingArea( mw->mapFromGlobal( gp ) );
-	    if ( a && a->isDockWindowAccepted( this ) )
-		return a;
-	}
-	w = w->parentWidget( TRUE );
-    }
-    return 0;
-}
-
-void TQDockWindow::handleMove( const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &gp, bool drawRect )
-{
-    if ( !unclippedPainter )
-	return;
-
-    if ( drawRect ) {
-	TQRect dr(currRect);
-#ifdef MAC_DRAG_HACK
-	dr.moveBy(-tqtopLevelWidget()->tqgeometry().x(), -tqtopLevelWidget()->tqgeometry().y());
-#endif
-	unclippedPainter->drawRect( dr );
-    }
-    currRect = TQRect( realWidgetPos( this ), size() );
-    TQWidget *w = areaAt( gp );
-    if ( titleBar->ctrlDown || horHandle->ctrlDown || verHandle->ctrlDown )
-	w = 0;
-    currRect.moveBy( pos.x(), pos.y() );
-    if ( !::tqqt_cast<TQDockArea*>(w) ) {
-        if ( startOrientation != Qt::Horizontal && ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(this) )
-	    swapRect( currRect, Qt::Horizontal, startOffset, (TQDockArea*)w );
-	if ( drawRect ) {
-	    unclippedPainter->setPen( TQPen( Qt::gray, 3 ) );
-	    TQRect dr(currRect);
-#ifdef MAC_DRAG_HACK
-	    dr.moveBy(-tqtopLevelWidget()->tqgeometry().x(), -tqtopLevelWidget()->tqgeometry().y());
-#endif
-	    unclippedPainter->drawRect( dr );
-	} else {
-	    TQPoint mp( mapToGlobal( pos ));
-	    if(place() == InDock) {
-		undock();
-		if(titleBar) {
-		    mp = TQPoint(titleBar->width() / 2, titleBar->height() / 2);
-		    TQMouseEvent me(TQEvent::MouseButtonPress, mp, Qt::LeftButton, 0);
-		    TQApplication::sendEvent(titleBar, &me);
-		    mp = titleBar->mapToGlobal( mp );
-		}
-	    }
-	    move( mp );
-	}
-	state = OutsideDock;
-        return;
-    }
-
-    TQDockArea *area = (TQDockArea*)w;
-    if( area->isVisible() ) {
-        state = InDock;
-	Qt::Orientation o = ( area ? area->orientation() :
-			  ( boxLayout()->direction() == TQBoxLayout::LeftToRight ||
-			    boxLayout()->direction() == TQBoxLayout::RightToLeft ?
-			    Qt::Horizontal : Qt::Vertical ) );
-	if ( startOrientation != o )
-	    swapRect( currRect, o, startOffset, area );
-	if ( drawRect ) {
-	    unclippedPainter->setPen( TQPen( Qt::gray, 1 ) );
-	    TQRect dr(currRect);
-#ifdef MAC_DRAG_HACK
-	    dr.moveBy(-tqtopLevelWidget()->tqgeometry().x(), -tqtopLevelWidget()->tqgeometry().y());
-#endif
-	    unclippedPainter->drawRect( dr );
-	}
-	tmpDockArea = area;
-    }
-}
-
-void TQDockWindow::updateGui()
-{
-    if ( curPlace == OutsideDock ) {
-	hbox->setMargin( 2 );
-	horHandle->hide();
-	verHandle->hide();
-	if ( moveEnabled )
-	    titleBar->show();
-	else
-	    titleBar->hide();
-	titleBar->updateGui();
-	hHandleTop->hide();
-	vHandleLeft->hide();
-	hHandleBottom->hide();
-	vHandleRight->hide();
-	setLineWidth( 2 );
-	widgetResizeHandler->setActive( isResizeEnabled() );
-    } else {
-	hbox->setMargin( isResizeEnabled() ? 0 : 2 );
-	titleBar->hide();
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	    horHandle->hide();
-	    if ( moveEnabled )
-		verHandle->show();
-	    else
-		verHandle->hide();
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MAC
-	    if(horHandle->mousePressed) {
-		horHandle->mousePressed = FALSE;
-		verHandle->mousePressed = TRUE;
-		verHandle->grabMouse();
-	    }
-#endif
-	    verHandle->updateGui();
-	} else {
-	    if ( moveEnabled )
-		horHandle->show();
-	    else
-		horHandle->hide();
-	    horHandle->updateGui();
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MAC
-	    if(verHandle->mousePressed) {
-		verHandle->mousePressed = FALSE;
-		horHandle->mousePressed = TRUE;
-		horHandle->grabMouse();
-	    }
-#endif
-	    verHandle->hide();
-	}
-	if ( isResizeEnabled() ) {
-	    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-		hHandleBottom->raise();
-		hHandleTop->raise();
-	    } else {
-		vHandleRight->raise();
-		vHandleLeft->raise();
-	    }
-
-	    if ( area() ) {
-		if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-		    if ( area()->handlePosition() == TQDockArea::Normal ) {
-			hHandleBottom->show();
-			hHandleTop->hide();
-		    } else {
-			hHandleTop->show();
-			hHandleBottom->hide();
-		    }
-		    if ( !area()->isLastDockWindow( this ) )
-			vHandleRight->show();
-		    else
-			vHandleRight->hide();
-		    vHandleLeft->hide();
-		} else {
-		    if ( (area()->handlePosition() == TQDockArea::Normal) != TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-			vHandleRight->show();
-			vHandleLeft->hide();
-		    } else {
-			vHandleLeft->show();
-			vHandleRight->hide();
-		    }
-		    if ( !area()->isLastDockWindow( this ) )
-			hHandleBottom->show();
-		    else
-			hHandleBottom->hide();
-		    hHandleTop->hide();
-		}
-	    }
-	} else if ( area() ) { // hide resize handles if resizing is disabled
-            if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-                hHandleTop->hide();
-                hHandleBottom->hide();
-            } else {
-                vHandleLeft->hide();
-                vHandleRight->hide();
-            }
-        }
-#ifndef TQ_OS_TEMP
-	if ( moveEnabled )
-	    setLineWidth( 1 );
-	else
-	    setLineWidth( 0 );
-	hbox->setMargin( lineWidth() );
-#else
-	hbox->setMargin( 2 );
-#endif
-	widgetResizeHandler->setActive( FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQDockWindow::updatePosition( const TQPoint &globalPos )
-{
-    if ( curPlace == OutsideDock && state == InDock )
-	lastSize = size();
-
-    bool doAdjustSize = curPlace != state && state == OutsideDock;
-    bool doUpdate = TRUE;
-    bool doOrientationChange = TRUE;
-    if ( state != curPlace && state == InDock ) {
-        doUpdate = FALSE;
-        curPlace = state;
-	updateGui();
-	TQApplication::sendPostedEvents();
-    }
-    Qt::Orientation oo = orientation();
-
-    if ( state == InDock ) {
-	if ( tmpDockArea ) {
-	    bool differentDocks = FALSE;
-	    if ( dockArea && dockArea != tmpDockArea ) {
-		differentDocks = TRUE;
-		delete (TQDockArea::DockWindowData*)dockWindowData;
-		dockWindowData = dockArea->dockWindowData( this );
-		dockArea->removeDockWindow( this, FALSE, FALSE );
-	    }
-	    dockArea = tmpDockArea;
-	    if ( differentDocks ) {
-		if ( doUpdate ) {
-		    doUpdate = FALSE;
-                    curPlace = state;
-		    updateGui();
-		}
-		emit orientationChanged( tmpDockArea->orientation() );
-		doOrientationChange = FALSE;
-	    } else {
-		updateGui();
-	    }
-	    dockArea->moveDockWindow( this, globalPos, currRect, startOrientation != oo );
-	}
-    } else {
-	if ( dockArea ) {
-	    TQMainWindow *mw = (TQMainWindow*)dockArea->parentWidget();
-	    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(mw) &&
-		 ( !mw->isDockEnabled( TQt::DockTornOff ) ||
-		   !mw->isDockEnabled( this, TQt::DockTornOff ) ) )
-		return;
-	    delete (TQDockArea::DockWindowData*)dockWindowData;
-	    dockWindowData = dockArea->dockWindowData( this );
-	    dockArea->removeDockWindow( this, TRUE,
-                                        startOrientation != Qt::Horizontal && ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(this) );
-	}
-	dockArea = 0;
-	TQPoint topLeft = currRect.topLeft();
-	TQRect screen = tqApp->desktop()->availableGeometry( topLeft );
-	if ( !screen.contains( topLeft ) ) {
-	    topLeft.setY(TQMAX(topLeft.y(), screen.top()));
-	    topLeft.setY(TQMIN(topLeft.y(), screen.bottom()-height()));
-	    topLeft.setX(TQMAX(topLeft.x(), screen.left()));
-	    topLeft.setX(TQMIN(topLeft.x(), screen.right()-width()));
-	}
-	move( topLeft );
-    }
-
-    if ( curPlace == InDock && state == OutsideDock && !::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(this) ) {
-	if ( lastSize != TQSize( -1, -1 ) )
-	    resize( lastSize );
-    }
-
-    if ( doUpdate ) {
-        curPlace = state;
-	updateGui();
-    }
-    if ( doOrientationChange )
-	emit orientationChanged( orientation() );
-    tmpDockArea = 0;
-    if ( doAdjustSize ) {
-	TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( this, TQEvent::LayoutHint );
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(this) )
-	    adjustSize();
-        if (lastSize == TQSize(-1, -1))
-            clearWState(TQt::WState_Resized); // Ensures size is recalculated (non-opaque).
-	show();
-	if ( parentWidget() && isTopLevel() )
-	    parentWidget()->setActiveWindow();
-
-    }
-
-    emit placeChanged( curPlace );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the dock window's main widget to \a w.
-
-    \sa boxLayout()
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setWidget( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    wid = w;
-    boxLayout()->addWidget( w );
-    updateGui();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the dock window's main widget.
-
-    \sa setWidget()
-*/
-
-TQWidget *TQDockWindow::widget() const
-{
-    return wid;
-}
-
-void TQDockWindow::startRectDraw( const TQPoint &so, bool drawRect )
-{
-    state = place();
-    if ( unclippedPainter )
-	endRectDraw( !opaque );
-#ifdef MAC_DRAG_HACK
-    TQWidget *paint_on = tqtopLevelWidget();
-#else
-    int scr = TQApplication::desktop()->screenNumber( this );
-    TQWidget *paint_on = TQT_TQWIDGET(TQApplication::desktop()->screen( scr ));
-#endif
-    unclippedPainter = new TQPainter( paint_on, TRUE );
-    unclippedPainter->setPen( TQPen( Qt::gray, curPlace == OutsideDock ? 3 : 1 ) );
-    unclippedPainter->setRasterOp( TQt::XorROP );
-    currRect = TQRect( realWidgetPos( this ), size() );
-    if ( drawRect ) {
-	TQRect dr(currRect);
-#ifdef MAC_DRAG_HACK
-	dr.moveBy(-tqtopLevelWidget()->tqgeometry().x(), -tqtopLevelWidget()->tqgeometry().y());
-#endif
-	unclippedPainter->drawRect( dr );
-    }
-    startOrientation = orientation();
-    startOffset = mapFromGlobal( so );
-}
-
-void TQDockWindow::endRectDraw( bool drawRect )
-{
-    if ( !unclippedPainter )
-	return;
-    if ( drawRect ) {
-	TQRect dr(currRect);
-#ifdef MAC_DRAG_HACK
-	dr.moveBy(-tqtopLevelWidget()->tqgeometry().x(), -tqtopLevelWidget()->tqgeometry().y());
-#endif
-	unclippedPainter->drawRect( dr );
-    }
-    delete unclippedPainter;
-    unclippedPainter = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQDockWindow::drawFrame( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    if ( place() == InDock ) {
-	TQFrame::drawFrame( p );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    TQStyleOption opt(lineWidth(),midLineWidth());
-
-    if ( titleBar->isActive() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Active;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_WindowFrame, p, rect(), tqcolorGroup(), flags, opt );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQDockWindow::drawContents( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if ( titleBar->isActive() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Active;
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl( TQStyle::CE_DockWindowEmptyArea, p, this,
-			 rect(), tqcolorGroup(), flags );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockWindow::resizeEnabled
-    \brief whether the dock window is resizeable
-
-    A resizeable dock window can be resized using splitter-like
-    handles inside a dock area and like every other top level window
-    when floating.
-
-    A dock window is both horizontally and vertically stretchable if
-    you call setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
-
-    This property is FALSE by default.
-
-    \sa setVerticallyStretchable() setHorizontallyStretchable()
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setResizeEnabled( bool b )
-{
-    resizeEnabled = b;
-    hbox->setMargin( b ? 0 : 2 );
-    updateGui();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockWindow::movingEnabled
-    \brief whether the user can move the dock window within the dock
-    area, move the dock window to another dock area, or float the dock
-    window.
-
-    This property is TRUE by default.
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setMovingEnabled( bool b )
-{
-    moveEnabled = b;
-    updateGui();
-}
-
-bool TQDockWindow::isResizeEnabled() const
-{
-    return resizeEnabled;
-}
-
-bool TQDockWindow::isMovingEnabled() const
-{
-    return moveEnabled;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockWindow::closeMode
-    \brief the close mode of a dock window
-
-    Defines when (if ever) the dock window has a close button. The
-    choices are \c Never, \c Docked (i.e. only when docked), \c
-    Undocked (only when undocked, i.e. floated) or \c Always.
-
-    The default is \c Never.
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setCloseMode( int m )
-{
-    cMode = m;
-    if ( place() == InDock ) {
-	horHandle->updateGui();
-	verHandle->updateGui();
-    } else {
-	titleBar->updateGui();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the dock window has a close button; otherwise
-    returns FALSE. The result depends on the dock window's \l Place
-    and its \l CloseMode.
-
-    \sa setCloseMode()
-*/
-
-bool TQDockWindow::isCloseEnabled() const
-{
-    return  ( (( cMode & Docked ) == Docked && place() == InDock) ||
-	      (( cMode & Undocked ) == Undocked && place() == OutsideDock) );
-}
-
-int TQDockWindow::closeMode() const
-{
-    return cMode;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockWindow::horizontallyStretchable
-    \brief whether the dock window is horizontally stretchable.
-
-    A dock window is horizontally stretchable if you call
-    setHorizontallyStretchable(TRUE) or setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
-
-    \sa setResizeEnabled()
-
-    \bug Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
-    proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setHorizontallyStretchable( bool b )
-{
-    stretchable[ Qt::Horizontal ] = b;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockWindow::verticallyStretchable
-    \brief whether the dock window is vertically stretchable.
-
-    A dock window is vertically stretchable if you call
-    setVerticallyStretchable(TRUE) or setResizeEnabled(TRUE).
-
-    \sa setResizeEnabled()
-
-    \bug Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
-    proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setVerticallyStretchable( bool b )
-{
-    stretchable[ Qt::Vertical ] = b;
-}
-
-bool TQDockWindow::isHorizontallyStretchable() const
-{
-    return isResizeEnabled() || stretchable[ Qt::Horizontal ];
-}
-
-bool TQDockWindow::isVerticallyStretchable() const
-{
-    return isResizeEnabled() || stretchable[ Qt::Vertical ];
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockWindow::stretchable
-    \brief whether the dock window is stretchable in the current
-    orientation()
-
-    This property can be set using setHorizontallyStretchable() and
-    setVerticallyStretchable(), or with setResizeEnabled().
-
-    \sa setResizeEnabled()
-
-    \bug Strecthability is broken. You must call setResizeEnabled(TRUE) to get
-    proper behavior and even then TQDockWindow does not limit stretchablilty.
-*/
-
-bool TQDockWindow::isStretchable() const
-{
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	return isHorizontallyStretchable();
-    return isVerticallyStretchable();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the orientation of the dock window.
-
-    \sa orientationChanged()
-*/
-
-TQt::Orientation TQDockWindow::orientation() const
-{
-    if ( dockArea )
-	return dockArea->orientation();
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(this) )
-	return Qt::Horizontal;
-    return ( ((TQDockWindow*)this)->boxLayout()->direction() == TQBoxLayout::LeftToRight ||
-	     ((TQDockWindow*)this)->boxLayout()->direction() == TQBoxLayout::RightToLeft ?
-	     Qt::Horizontal : Qt::Vertical );
-}
-
-int TQDockWindow::offset() const
-{
-    return offs;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockWindow::offset
-    \brief the dock window's preferred offset from the dock area's
-    left edge (top edge for vertical dock areas)
-
-    The default is 0.
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setOffset( int o )
-{
-    offs = o;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the dock window's preferred size (fixed extent).
-
-    \sa setFixedExtentWidth() setFixedExtentHeight()
-*/
-
-TQSize TQDockWindow::fixedExtent() const
-{
-    return fExtent;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the dock window's preferred width for its fixed extent (size)
-    to \a w.
-
-    \sa setFixedExtentHeight()
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setFixedExtentWidth( int w )
-{
-    fExtent.setWidth( w );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the dock window's preferred height for its fixed extent
-    (size) to \a h.
-
-    \sa setFixedExtentWidth()
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setFixedExtentHeight( int h )
-{
-    fExtent.setHeight( h );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockWindow::newLine
-    \brief whether the dock window prefers to start a new line in the
-    dock area.
-
-    The default is FALSE, i.e. the dock window doesn't require a new
-    line in the dock area.
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setNewLine( bool b )
-{
-    nl = b;
-}
-
-bool TQDockWindow::newLine() const
-{
-    return nl;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tqlayout which is used for adding widgets to the dock
-    window. The tqlayout's orientation is set automatically to match the
-    orientation of the dock window. You can add widgets to the tqlayout
-    using the box tqlayout's TQBoxLayout::addWidget() function.
-
-    If the dock window only needs to contain a single widget use
-    setWidget() instead.
-
-    \sa setWidget() setOrientation()
-*/
-
-TQBoxLayout *TQDockWindow::boxLayout()
-{
-    return childBox;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-
-TQSize TQDockWindow::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    TQSize sh( TQFrame::tqsizeHint() );
-    if ( place() == InDock )
-	sh = sh.expandedTo( fixedExtent() );
-    sh = sh.expandedTo( TQSize( 16, 16 ) );
-    if ( area() ) {
-	if ( area()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && !vHandleRight->isVisible() )
-	    sh.setWidth( sh.width() + 2 * tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_SplitterWidth, this) / 3 );
-	else if ( area()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical && !hHandleBottom->isVisible() )
-	    sh.setHeight( sh.height() + 2 * tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_SplitterWidth, this) / 3 );
-    }
-    return sh;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-
-TQSize TQDockWindow::tqminimumSize() const
-{
-    TQSize ms( TQFrame::tqminimumSize() );
-    if ( place() == InDock )
-	ms = ms.expandedTo( fixedExtent() );
-    ms = ms.expandedTo( TQSize( 16, 16 ) );
-    if ( area() ) {
-	if ( area()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && !vHandleRight->isVisible() )
-	    ms.setWidth( ms.width() + 2 * tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_SplitterWidth, this) / 3 );
-	else if ( area()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical && !hHandleBottom->isVisible() )
-	    ms.setHeight( ms.height() + 2 * tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_SplitterWidth, this) / 3 );
-    }
-    return ms;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-
-TQSize TQDockWindow::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    TQSize msh( TQFrame::tqminimumSize() );
-    if ( place() == InDock )
-	msh = msh.expandedTo( fixedExtent() );
-    msh = msh.expandedTo( TQSize( 16, 16 ) );
-    if ( area() ) {
-	if ( area()->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && !vHandleRight->isVisible() )
-	    msh.setWidth( msh.width() + 2 * tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_SplitterWidth, this) / 3 );
-	else if ( area()->orientation() == Qt::Vertical && !hHandleBottom->isVisible() )
-	    msh.setHeight( msh.height() + 2 * tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_SplitterWidth, this) / 3 );
-    }
-    return msh;
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQDockWindow::undock( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    TQMainWindow *mw = 0;
-    if ( area() )
-	mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(area()->parentWidget());
-    if ( mw && !mw->isDockEnabled( this, TQt::DockTornOff ) )
-	return;
-    if ( (place() == OutsideDock && !w) )
-	return;
-
-    TQPoint p( 50, 50 );
-    if ( tqtopLevelWidget() )
-	p = tqtopLevelWidget()->pos() + TQPoint( 20, 20 );
-    if ( dockArea ) {
-	delete (TQDockArea::DockWindowData*)dockWindowData;
-	dockWindowData = dockArea->dockWindowData( this );
-	dockArea->removeDockWindow( this, TRUE, orientation() != Qt::Horizontal && ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(this) );
-    }
-    dockArea = 0;
-    if ( lastPos != TQPoint( -1, -1 ) && lastPos.x() > 0 && lastPos.y() > 0 )
-	move( lastPos );
-    else
-	move( p );
-    if ( lastSize != TQSize( -1, -1 ) )
-	resize( lastSize );
-    curPlace = OutsideDock;
-    updateGui();
-    emit orientationChanged( orientation() );
-    TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( this, TQEvent::LayoutHint );
-    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(this) )
-	adjustSize();
-    if ( !w ) {
-	if ( !parentWidget() || parentWidget()->isVisible() ) {
-            if (lastSize == TQSize(-1, -1))
-                clearWState(TQt::WState_Resized); // Ensures size is recalculated (opaque).
-	    show();
-	}
-    } else {
-	reparent( w, 0, TQPoint( 0, 0 ), FALSE );
-	move( -width() - 5, -height() - 5 );
-	resize( 1, 1 );
-	show();
-    }
-    if ( parentWidget() && isTopLevel() )
-	parentWidget()->setActiveWindow();
-    emit placeChanged( place() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQDockWindow::undock()
-
-    Undocks the TQDockWindow from its current dock area if it is
-    docked; otherwise does nothing.
-
-    \sa dock() TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(),
-    TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(),
-    TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow()
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::removeFromDock( bool fixNewLines )
-{
-    if ( dockArea )
-	dockArea->removeDockWindow( this, FALSE, FALSE, fixNewLines );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Docks the dock window into the last dock area in which it was
-    docked.
-
-    If the dock window has no last dock area (e.g. it was created as a
-    floating window and has never been docked), or if the last dock
-    area it was docked in does not exist (e.g. the dock area has been
-    deleted), nothing happens.
-
-    The dock window will dock with the dock area regardless of the return value
-    of TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted().
-
-    \sa undock() TQDockArea::moveDockWindow(),
-    TQDockArea::removeDockWindow(), TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(),
-    TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow(), TQDockArea::isDockWindowAccepted()
-
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::dock()
-{
-    if ( !(TQDockArea::DockWindowData*)dockWindowData ||
-	 !( (TQDockArea::DockWindowData*)dockWindowData )->area )
-	return;
-    curPlace = InDock;
-    lastPos = pos();
-    lastSize = size();
-    ( (TQDockArea::DockWindowData*)dockWindowData )->
-	area->dockWindow( this, (TQDockArea::DockWindowData*)dockWindowData );
-    emit orientationChanged( orientation() );
-    emit placeChanged( place() );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-
-void TQDockWindow::hideEvent( TQHideEvent *e )
-{
-    TQFrame::hideEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-
-void TQDockWindow::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e )
-{
-    if (curPlace == OutsideDock && (parent() && strcmp(parent()->name(), "qt_hide_dock") != 0)) {
-	TQRect sr = tqApp->desktop()->availableGeometry( this );
-	if ( !sr.contains( pos() ) ) {
-	    int nx = TQMIN( TQMAX( x(), sr.x() ), sr.right()-width() );
-	    int ny = TQMIN( TQMAX( y(), sr.y() ), sr.bottom()-height() );
-	    move( nx, ny );
-	}
-    }
-
-    TQFrame::showEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDockWindow::opaqueMoving
-    \brief whether the dock window will be shown normally whilst it is
-    being moved.
-
-    If this property is FALSE, (the default), the dock window will be
-    represented by an outline rectangle whilst it is being moved.
-
-    \warning Currently opaque moving has some problems and we do not
-    recommend using it at this time. We expect to fix these problems
-    in a future release.
-*/
-
-void TQDockWindow::setOpaqueMoving( bool b )
-{
-    opaque = b;
-    horHandle->setOpaqueMoving( b );
-    verHandle->setOpaqueMoving( b );
-    titleBar->setOpaqueMoving( b );
-}
-
-bool TQDockWindow::opaqueMoving() const
-{
-    return opaque;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQDockWindow::setCaption( const TQString &s )
-{
-    titleBar->setCaption( s );
-    verHandle->update();
-    horHandle->update();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-    TQFrame::setCaption( s );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    TQToolTip::remove( horHandle );
-    TQToolTip::remove( verHandle );
-    if ( !s.isEmpty() ) {
-	TQToolTip::add( horHandle, s );
-	TQToolTip::add( verHandle, s );
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQDockWindow::updateSplitterVisibility( bool visible )
-{
-    if ( area() && isResizeEnabled() ) {
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	    if ( visible )
-		vHandleRight->show();
-	    else
-		vHandleRight->hide();
-	    vHandleLeft->hide();
-	} else {
-	    if ( visible )
-		hHandleBottom->show();
-	    else
-		hHandleBottom->hide();
-	    hHandleTop->hide();
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-bool TQDockWindow::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !o->isWidgetType() )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress &&
-	( horHandle->mousePressed ||
-	  verHandle->mousePressed ||
-	  titleBar->mousePressed ) ) {
-	TQKeyEvent *ke = (TQKeyEvent*)e;
-	if ( ke->key() == Key_Escape ) {
-	    horHandle->mousePressed =
-		verHandle->mousePressed =
-		    titleBar->mousePressed = FALSE;
-	    endRectDraw( !opaque );
-	    tqApp->removeEventFilter( this );
-	    return TRUE;
-	}
-    } else if ( ((TQWidget*)o)->tqtopLevelWidget() != this && place() == OutsideDock && isTopLevel() ) {
-	if ( (e->type() == TQEvent::WindowDeactivate ||
-	    e->type() == TQEvent::WindowActivate ) )
-	    event( e );
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-bool TQDockWindow::event( TQEvent *e )
-{
-    switch ( e->type() ) {
-    case TQEvent::WindowDeactivate:
-	if ( place() == OutsideDock && isTopLevel() && parentWidget()
-	     && parentWidget()->isActiveWindow() )
-	    return TRUE;
-    case TQEvent::Hide:
-	if ( !isHidden() )
-	    break;
-	// fall through
-    case TQEvent::HideToParent:
-	emit visibilityChanged( FALSE );
-	break;
-    case TQEvent::Show:
-	if ( e->spontaneous() )
-	    break;
-    case TQEvent::ShowToParent:
-	emit visibilityChanged( TRUE );
-	break;
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-    return TQFrame::event( e );
-}
-
-#ifdef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-TQString TQDockWindow::caption() const
-{
-    return titleBar->caption();
-}
-#endif
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQDockWindow::contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e )
-{
-    TQObject *o = TQT_TQOBJECT(this);
-    while ( o ) {
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(o) )
-	    break;
-	o = o->parent();
-    }
-    if ( !o || ! ( (TQMainWindow*)o )->showDockMenu( e->globalPos() ) )
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-#include "tqdockwindow.tqmoc"
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 99858eb..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqdockwindow.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,238 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of the TQDockWindow class
-**
-** Created : 001010
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the workspace module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQDOCKWINDOW_H
-#define TQDOCKWINDOW_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
-
-class TQDockWindowHandle;
-class TQDockWindowTitleBar;
-class TQPainter;
-class TQDockWindowResizeHandle;
-class TQBoxLayout;
-class TQHBoxLayout;
-class TQVBoxLayout;
-class TQDockArea;
-class TQWidgetResizeHandler;
-class TQMainWindow;
-class TQDockAreaLayout;
-class TQDockWindowPrivate;
-class TQToolBar;
-class TQWindowsXPStyle;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQDockWindow : public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( CloseMode Place )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int closeMode READ closeMode  WRITE setCloseMode ) //### this shouldn't be of type int?!
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool resizeEnabled READ isResizeEnabled  WRITE setResizeEnabled )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool movingEnabled READ isMovingEnabled  WRITE setMovingEnabled )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool horizontallyStretchable READ isHorizontallyStretchable  WRITE setHorizontallyStretchable )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool verticallyStretchable READ isVerticallyStretchable  WRITE setVerticallyStretchable )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool stretchable READ isStretchable )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool newLine READ newLine  WRITE setNewLine )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool opaqueMoving READ opaqueMoving  WRITE setOpaqueMoving )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int offset READ offset  WRITE setOffset )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Place place READ place )
-
-    friend class TQDockWindowHandle;
-    friend class TQDockWindowTitleBar;
-    friend class TQDockArea;
-    friend class TQDockAreaLayout;
-    friend class TQMainWindow;
-    friend class TQCEMainWindow;
-    friend class TQToolBar;
-    friend class TQWindowsXPStyle;
-
-public:
-    enum Place { InDock, OutsideDock };
-    enum CloseMode { Never = 0, Docked = 1, Undocked = 2, Always = Docked | Undocked };
-
-    TQDockWindow( Place p = InDock, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 );
-    TQDockWindow( TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 );
-    ~TQDockWindow();
-
-    virtual void setWidget( TQWidget *w );
-    TQWidget *widget() const;
-
-    Place place() const { return curPlace; }
-
-    TQDockArea *area() const;
-
-    virtual void setCloseMode( int m );
-    bool isCloseEnabled() const;
-    int closeMode() const;
-
-    virtual void setResizeEnabled( bool b );
-    virtual void setMovingEnabled( bool b );
-    bool isResizeEnabled() const;
-    bool isMovingEnabled() const;
-
-    virtual void setHorizontallyStretchable( bool b );
-    virtual void setVerticallyStretchable( bool b );
-    bool isHorizontallyStretchable() const;
-    bool isVerticallyStretchable() const;
-    void setHorizontalStretchable( bool b ) { setHorizontallyStretchable( b ); }
-    void setVerticalStretchable( bool b ) { setVerticallyStretchable( b ); }
-    bool isHorizontalStretchable() const { return isHorizontallyStretchable(); }
-    bool isVerticalStretchable() const { return isVerticallyStretchable(); }
-    bool isStretchable() const;
-
-    virtual void setOffset( int o );
-    int offset() const;
-
-    virtual void setFixedExtentWidth( int w );
-    virtual void setFixedExtentHeight( int h );
-    TQSize fixedExtent() const;
-
-    virtual void setNewLine( bool b );
-    bool newLine() const;
-
-    Orientation orientation() const;
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSize() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    TQBoxLayout *boxLayout();
-
-    virtual void setOpaqueMoving( bool b );
-    bool opaqueMoving() const;
-
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e );
-
-#ifdef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-    TQString caption() const;
-#endif
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void orientationChanged( Orientation o );
-    void placeChanged( TQDockWindow::Place p );
-    void visibilityChanged( bool );
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void undock( TQWidget *w );
-    virtual void undock() { undock( 0 ); }
-    virtual void dock();
-    virtual void setOrientation( Orientation o );
-    void setCaption( const TQString &s );
-
-protected:
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e );
-    void showEvent( TQShowEvent *e );
-    void hideEvent( TQHideEvent *e );
-    void contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e );
-
-    void drawFrame( TQPainter * );
-    void drawContents( TQPainter * );
-
-    bool event( TQEvent *e );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void toggleVisible() { if ( !isVisible() ) show(); else hide(); }
-
-private:
-    TQDockWindow( Place p, TQWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f, bool toolbar );
-
-    void handleMove( const TQPoint &pos, const TQPoint &gp, bool drawRect );
-    void updateGui();
-    void updateSplitterVisibility( bool visible );
-
-    void startRectDraw( const TQPoint &so, bool drawRect );
-    void endRectDraw( bool drawRect );
-    void updatePosition( const TQPoint &globalPos  );
-    TQWidget *areaAt( const TQPoint &gp );
-    void removeFromDock( bool fixNewLines = TRUE );
-    void swapRect( TQRect &r, Orientation o, const TQPoint &offset, TQDockArea *area );
-    void init();
-
-private:
-    TQDockWindowHandle *horHandle, *verHandle;
-    TQDockWindowTitleBar *titleBar;
-    TQWidget *wid;
-    TQPainter *unclippedPainter;
-    TQDockArea *dockArea, *tmpDockArea;
-    TQRect currRect;
-    Place curPlace;
-    Place state;
-    bool resizeEnabled : 1;
-    bool moveEnabled : 1;
-    bool nl : 1;
-    bool opaque : 1;
-    bool isToolbar : 1;
-    bool stretchable[ 3 ];
-    Orientation startOrientation;
-    int cMode;
-    TQPoint startOffset;
-    int offs;
-    TQSize fExtent;
-    TQDockWindowResizeHandle *hHandleTop, *hHandleBottom, *vHandleLeft, *vHandleRight;
-    TQVBoxLayout *hbox;
-    TQHBoxLayout *vbox;
-    TQBoxLayout *childBox;
-    void *dockWindowData;
-    TQPoint lastPos;
-    TQSize lastSize;
-    TQWidgetResizeHandler *widgetResizeHandler;
-    TQDockWindowPrivate *d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQDockWindow( const TQDockWindow & );
-    TQDockWindow& operator=( const TQDockWindow & );
-#endif
-};
-
-inline TQDockArea *TQDockWindow::area() const
-{
-    return dockArea;
-}
-
-#define TQ_DEFINED_TQDOCKWINDOW
-#include "tqwinexport.h"
-#endif
-
-#endif // TQDOCKWINDOW_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqeffects.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqeffects.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index c98a8ee..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqeffects.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,677 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQEffects functions
-**
-** Created : 000621
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2005-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_EFFECTS
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqeffects_p.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqimage.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqdatetime.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-#include "tqscrollview.h"
-
-/*
-  Internal class to get access to protected TQWidget-members
-*/
-
-class TQAccessWidget : public TQWidget
-{
-    friend class TQAlphaWidget;
-    friend class TQRollEffect;
-public:
-    TQAccessWidget( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 )
-	: TQWidget( parent, name, f ) {}
-};
-
-/*
-  Internal class TQAlphaWidget.
-
-  The TQAlphaWidget is shown while the animation lasts
-  and displays the pixmap resulting from the alpha blending.
-*/
-
-class TQAlphaWidget: public TQWidget, private TQEffects
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQAlphaWidget( TQWidget* w, WFlags f = 0 );
-
-    void run( int time );
-
-protected:
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent* e );
-    void closeEvent( TQCloseEvent* );
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject* o, TQEvent* e );
-    void alphaBlend();
-
-protected Q_SLOTS:
-    void render();
-
-private:
-    TQPixmap pm;
-    double alpha;
-    TQImage back;
-    TQImage front;
-    TQImage mixed;
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQAccessWidget> widget;
-    int duration;
-    int elapsed;
-    bool showWidget;
-    TQTimer anim;
-    TQTime checkTime;
-};
-
-static TQAlphaWidget* q_blend = 0;
-
-/*
-  Constructs a TQAlphaWidget.
-*/
-TQAlphaWidget::TQAlphaWidget( TQWidget* w, WFlags f )
-    : TQWidget( TQApplication::desktop()->screen(TQApplication::desktop()->screenNumber(w)),
-               "qt internal alpha effect widget", f )
-{
-#if 1 //ndef TQ_WS_WIN
-    setEnabled( FALSE );
-#endif
-
-    pm.setOptimization( TQPixmap::BestOptim );
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::NoBackground );
-    widget = (TQAccessWidget*)w;
-    alpha = 0;
-}
-
-/*
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQAlphaWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent* )
-{
-    bitBlt( this, TQPoint(0,0), &pm );
-}
-
-/*
-  Starts the alphablending animation.
-  The animation will take about \a time ms
-*/
-void TQAlphaWidget::run( int time )
-{
-    duration = time;
-
-    if ( duration < 0 )
-	duration = 150;
-
-    if ( !widget )
-	return;
-
-    elapsed = 0;
-    checkTime.start();
-
-    showWidget = TRUE;
-    tqApp->installEventFilter( this );
-
-    widget->setWState( TQt::WState_Visible );
-
-    move( widget->tqgeometry().x(),widget->tqgeometry().y() );
-    resize( widget->size().width(), widget->size().height() );
-
-    front = TQImage( widget->size(), 32 );
-    front = TQPixmap::grabWidget( widget ).toImage();
-
-    back = TQImage( widget->size(), 32 );
-    back = TQPixmap::grabWindow( TQApplication::desktop()->winId(),
-				widget->tqgeometry().x(), widget->tqgeometry().y(),
-				widget->tqgeometry().width(), widget->tqgeometry().height() ).toImage();
-
-    if ( !back.isNull() && checkTime.elapsed() < duration / 2 ) {
-        mixed = back.copy();
-	pm = mixed;
-	show();
-        setEnabled(FALSE);
-
-	connect( &anim, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), this, TQT_SLOT(render()));
-	anim.start( 1 );
-    } else {
-	duration = 0;
-	render();
-    }
-}
-
-/*
-  \reimp
-*/
-bool TQAlphaWidget::eventFilter( TQObject* o, TQEvent* e )
-{
-    switch ( e->type() ) {
-    case TQEvent::Move:
-	if ( o != TQT_TQOBJECT(widget) )
-	    break;
-	move( widget->tqgeometry().x(),widget->tqgeometry().y() );
-	update();
-	break;
-    case TQEvent::Hide:
-    case TQEvent::Close:
-	if ( o != TQT_TQOBJECT(widget) )
-	    break;
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SCROLLVIEW
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQScrollView*>(o) )
-	    break;
-#endif
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick:
-	setEnabled(TRUE);
-	showWidget = FALSE;
-	render();
-	break;
-    case TQEvent::KeyPress:
-	{
-	    TQKeyEvent *ke = (TQKeyEvent*)e;
-	    if ( ke->key() == Key_Escape )
-		showWidget = FALSE;
-	    else
-		duration = 0;
-	    render();
-	    break;
-	}
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-    return TQWidget::eventFilter( o, e );
-}
-
-/*
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQAlphaWidget::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e )
-{
-    e->accept();
-    if ( !q_blend )
-	return;
-
-    showWidget = FALSE;
-    render();
-
-    TQWidget::closeEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*
-  Render alphablending for the time elapsed.
-
-  Show the blended widget and free all allocated source
-  if the blending is finished.
-*/
-void TQAlphaWidget::render()
-{
-    int tempel = checkTime.elapsed();
-    if ( elapsed >= tempel )
-        elapsed++;
-    else
-        elapsed = tempel;
-
-    if ( duration != 0 )
-	alpha = tempel / double(duration);
-    else
-	alpha = 1;
-    if ( alpha >= 1 || !showWidget) {
-	anim.stop();
-	tqApp->removeEventFilter( this );
-
-	if ( widget ) {
-	    if ( !showWidget ) {
-#ifdef TQ_WS_WIN
-                setEnabled(TRUE);
-                setFocus();
-#endif
-		widget->hide();
-		widget->setWState( TQt::WState_ForceHide );
-		widget->clearWState( TQt::WState_Visible );
-	    } else if ( duration ) {
-		TQt::BackgroundMode bgm = widget->backgroundMode();
-		TQColor erc = widget->eraseColor();
-		const TQPixmap *erp = widget->erasePixmap();
-
-		widget->clearWState( TQt::WState_Visible );
-		widget->setBackgroundMode( TQt::NoBackground );
-		widget->show();
-		if ( bgm != TQt::FixedColor && bgm != TQt::FixedPixmap ) {
-		    widget->clearWState( TQt::WState_Visible ); // prevent update in setBackgroundMode
-		    widget->setBackgroundMode( bgm );
-		    widget->setWState( TQt::WState_Visible );
-		}
-		if ( erc.isValid() ) {
-		    widget->setEraseColor( erc );
-		} else if ( erp ) {
-		    widget->setErasePixmap( *erp );
-		}
-	    } else {
-		widget->clearWState( TQt::WState_Visible );
-		widget->show();
-	    }
-	}
-	q_blend = 0;
-	deleteLater();
-    } else {
-	if (widget)
-	    widget->clearWState( TQt::WState_ForceHide );
-	alphaBlend();
-	pm = mixed;
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-/*
-  Calculate an alphablended image.
-*/
-void TQAlphaWidget::alphaBlend()
-{
-    const double ia = 1-alpha;
-    const int sw = front.width();
-    const int sh = front.height();
-    switch( front.depth() ) {
-    case 32:
-	{
-	    TQ_UINT32** md = (TQ_UINT32**)mixed.jumpTable();
-	    TQ_UINT32** bd = (TQ_UINT32**)back.jumpTable();
-	    TQ_UINT32** fd = (TQ_UINT32**)front.jumpTable();
-
-	    for (int sy = 0; sy < sh; sy++ ) {
-		TQ_UINT32* bl = ((TQ_UINT32*)bd[sy]);
-		TQ_UINT32* fl = ((TQ_UINT32*)fd[sy]);
-		for (int sx = 0; sx < sw; sx++ ) {
-		    TQ_UINT32 bp = bl[sx];
-		    TQ_UINT32 fp = fl[sx];
-
-		    ((TQ_UINT32*)(md[sy]))[sx] =  tqRgb(int (tqRed(bp)*ia + tqRed(fp)*alpha),
-						    int (tqGreen(bp)*ia + tqGreen(fp)*alpha),
-						    int (tqBlue(bp)*ia + tqBlue(fp)*alpha) );
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-}
-
-/*
-  Internal class TQRollEffect
-
-  The TQRollEffect widget is shown while the animation lasts
-  and displays a scrolling pixmap.
-*/
-
-class TQRollEffect : public TQWidget, private TQEffects
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQRollEffect( TQWidget* w, WFlags f, DirFlags orient );
-
-    void run( int time );
-
-protected:
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent* );
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject*, TQEvent* );
-    void closeEvent( TQCloseEvent* );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void scroll();
-
-private:
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQAccessWidget> widget;
-
-    int currentHeight;
-    int currentWidth;
-    int totalHeight;
-    int totalWidth;
-
-    int duration;
-    int elapsed;
-    bool done;
-    bool showWidget;
-    int orientation;
-
-    TQTimer anim;
-    TQTime checkTime;
-
-    TQPixmap pm;
-};
-
-static TQRollEffect* q_roll = 0;
-
-/*
-  Construct a TQRollEffect widget.
-*/
-TQRollEffect::TQRollEffect( TQWidget* w, WFlags f, DirFlags orient )
-    : TQWidget( TQApplication::desktop()->screen(TQApplication::desktop()->screenNumber(w)),
-               "qt internal roll effect widget", f ), orientation(orient)
-{
-#if 1 //ndef TQ_WS_WIN
-    setEnabled( FALSE );
-#endif
-    widget = (TQAccessWidget*) w;
-    TQ_ASSERT( widget );
-
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::NoBackground );
-
-    if ( widget->testWState( TQt::WState_Resized ) ) {
-	totalWidth = widget->width();
-	totalHeight = widget->height();
-    } else {
-	totalWidth = widget->tqsizeHint().width();
-	totalHeight = widget->tqsizeHint().height();
-    }
-
-    currentHeight = totalHeight;
-    currentWidth = totalWidth;
-
-    if ( orientation & (RightScroll|LeftScroll) )
-	currentWidth = 0;
-    if ( orientation & (DownScroll|UpScroll) )
-	currentHeight = 0;
-
-    pm.setOptimization( TQPixmap::BestOptim );
-    pm = TQPixmap::grabWidget( widget );
-}
-
-/*
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQRollEffect::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent* )
-{
-    int x = orientation & RightScroll ? TQMIN(0, currentWidth - totalWidth) : 0;
-    int y = orientation & DownScroll ? TQMIN(0, currentHeight - totalHeight) : 0;
-
-    bitBlt( TQT_TQPAINTDEVICE(this), x, y, &TQT_TQPAINTDEVICE_OBJECT(pm),
-		  0, 0, pm.width(), pm.height(), TQt::CopyROP, TRUE );
-}
-
-/*
-  \reimp
-*/
-bool TQRollEffect::eventFilter( TQObject* o, TQEvent* e )
-{
-    switch ( e->type() ) {
-    case TQEvent::Move:
-	if ( o != TQT_TQOBJECT(widget) )
-	    break;
-	move( widget->tqgeometry().x(),widget->tqgeometry().y() );
-	update();
-	break;
-    case TQEvent::Hide:
-    case TQEvent::Close:
-	if ( o != TQT_TQOBJECT(widget) || done )
-	    break;
-	setEnabled(TRUE);
-	showWidget = FALSE;
-	done = TRUE;
-	scroll();
-	break;
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SCROLLVIEW
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQScrollView*>(o) )
-	    break;
-#endif
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick:
-	if ( done )
-	    break;
-	setEnabled(TRUE);
-	showWidget = FALSE;
-	done = TRUE;
-	scroll();
-	break;
-    case TQEvent::KeyPress:
-	{
-	    TQKeyEvent *ke = (TQKeyEvent*)e;
-	    if ( ke->key() == Key_Escape )
-		showWidget = FALSE;
-	    done = TRUE;
-	    scroll();
-	    break;
-	}
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-    return TQWidget::eventFilter( o, e );
-}
-
-/*
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQRollEffect::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e )
-{
-    e->accept();
-    if ( done )
-	return;
-
-    showWidget = FALSE;
-    done = TRUE;
-    scroll();
-
-    TQWidget::closeEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*
-  Start the animation.
-
-  The animation will take about \a time ms, or is
-  calculated if \a time is negative
-*/
-void TQRollEffect::run( int time )
-{
-    if ( !widget )
-	return;
-
-    duration  = time;
-    elapsed = 0;
-
-    if ( duration < 0 ) {
-	int dist = 0;
-	if ( orientation & (RightScroll|LeftScroll) )
-	    dist += totalWidth - currentWidth;
-	if ( orientation & (DownScroll|UpScroll) )
-	    dist += totalHeight - currentHeight;
-	duration = TQMIN( TQMAX( dist/3, 50 ), 120 );
-    }
-
-    connect( &anim, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), this, TQT_SLOT(scroll()));
-
-    widget->setWState( TQt::WState_Visible );
-
-    move( widget->tqgeometry().x(),widget->tqgeometry().y() );
-    resize( TQMIN( currentWidth, totalWidth ), TQMIN( currentHeight, totalHeight ) );
-
-    show();
-    setEnabled(FALSE);
-
-    tqApp->installEventFilter( this );
-
-    showWidget = TRUE;
-    done = FALSE;
-    anim.start( 1 );
-    checkTime.start();
-}
-
-/*
-  Roll according to the time elapsed.
-*/
-void TQRollEffect::scroll()
-{
-    if ( !done && widget) {
-	widget->clearWState( TQt::WState_ForceHide );
-	int tempel = checkTime.elapsed();
-	if ( elapsed >= tempel )
-	    elapsed++;
-	else
-	    elapsed = tempel;
-
-	if ( currentWidth != totalWidth ) {
-	    currentWidth = totalWidth * (elapsed/duration)
-		+ ( 2 * totalWidth * (elapsed%duration) + duration )
-		/ ( 2 * duration );
-	    // equiv. to int( (totalWidth*elapsed) / duration + 0.5 )
-	    done = (currentWidth >= totalWidth);
-	}
-	if ( currentHeight != totalHeight ) {
-	    currentHeight = totalHeight * (elapsed/duration)
-		+ ( 2 * totalHeight * (elapsed%duration) + duration )
-		/ ( 2 * duration );
-	    // equiv. to int( (totalHeight*elapsed) / duration + 0.5 )
-	    done = (currentHeight >= totalHeight);
-	}
-	done = ( currentHeight >= totalHeight ) &&
-	       ( currentWidth >= totalWidth );
-
-        int w = totalWidth;
-	int h = totalHeight;
-	int x = widget->tqgeometry().x();
-	int y = widget->tqgeometry().y();
-
-	if ( orientation & RightScroll || orientation & LeftScroll )
-	    w = TQMIN( currentWidth, totalWidth );
-	if ( orientation & DownScroll || orientation & UpScroll )
-	    h = TQMIN( currentHeight, totalHeight );
-
-	setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE );
-	if ( orientation & UpScroll )
-	    y = widget->tqgeometry().y() + TQMAX( 0, totalHeight - currentHeight );
-	if ( orientation & LeftScroll )
-	    x = widget->tqgeometry().x() + TQMAX( 0, totalWidth - currentWidth );
-	if ( orientation & UpScroll || orientation & LeftScroll )
-	    move( x, y );
-
-	resize( w, h );
-        setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE );
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    }
-    if ( done ) {
-	anim.stop();
-	tqApp->removeEventFilter( this );
-	if ( widget ) {
-	    if ( !showWidget ) {
-#ifdef TQ_WS_WIN
-                setEnabled(TRUE);
-                setFocus();
-#endif
-		widget->hide();
-		widget->setWState( TQt::WState_ForceHide );
-		widget->clearWState( TQt::WState_Visible );
-	    } else {
-		TQt::BackgroundMode bgm = widget->backgroundMode();
-		TQColor erc = widget->eraseColor();
-		const TQPixmap *erp = widget->erasePixmap();
-
-		widget->clearWState( TQt::WState_Visible );
-		widget->setBackgroundMode( TQt::NoBackground );
-		widget->show();
-		if ( bgm != TQt::FixedColor && bgm != TQt::FixedPixmap ) {
-		    widget->clearWState( TQt::WState_Visible ); // prevent update in setBackgroundMode
-		    widget->setBackgroundMode( bgm );
-		    widget->setWState( TQt::WState_Visible );
-		}
-		if ( erc.isValid() ) {
-		    widget->setEraseColor( erc );
-		} else if ( erp ) {
-		    widget->setErasePixmap( *erp );
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-	q_roll = 0;
-	deleteLater();
-    }
-}
-
-/*
-  Delete this after timeout
-*/
-
-#include "tqeffects.tqmoc"
-
-/*!
-    Scroll widget \a w in \a time ms. \a orient may be 1 (vertical), 2
-    (horizontal) or 3 (diagonal).
-*/
-void qScrollEffect( TQWidget* w, TQEffects::DirFlags orient, int time )
-{
-    if ( q_roll ) {
-	delete q_roll;
-	q_roll = 0;
-    }
-
-    tqApp->sendPostedEvents( w, TQEvent::Move );
-    tqApp->sendPostedEvents( w, TQEvent::Resize );
-#ifdef TQ_WS_X11
-    WFlags flags = TQt::WStyle_Customize | TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WStyle_StaysOnTop
-	| (w->isPopup() ? TQt::WType_Popup : (TQt::WX11BypassWM | (Qt::WindowType)TQt::WStyle_Tool));
-#else
-    WFlags flags = TQt::WStyle_Customize | TQt::WType_Popup | TQt::WX11BypassWM | TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WStyle_StaysOnTop;
-#endif
-
-    // those can popups - they would steal the focus, but are disabled
-    q_roll = new TQRollEffect( w, (WFlags)flags, orient );
-    q_roll->run( time );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Fade in widget \a w in \a time ms.
-*/
-void qFadeEffect( TQWidget* w, int time )
-{
-    if ( q_blend ) {
-	delete q_blend;
-	q_blend = 0;
-    }
-
-    tqApp->sendPostedEvents( w, TQEvent::Move );
-    tqApp->sendPostedEvents( w, TQEvent::Resize );
-
-#ifdef TQ_WS_X11
-    WFlags flags = TQt::WStyle_Customize | TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WStyle_StaysOnTop
-	| (w->isPopup() ? TQt::WType_Popup : (TQt::WX11BypassWM | (Qt::WindowType)TQt::WStyle_Tool));
-#else
-    WFlags flags = TQt::WStyle_Customize | TQt::WType_Popup | TQt::WX11BypassWM | TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WStyle_StaysOnTop;
-#endif
-
-    // those can popups - they would steal the focus, but are disabled
-    q_blend = new TQAlphaWidget( w, (WFlags)flags );
-
-    q_blend->run( time );
-}
-#endif //TQT_NO_EFFECTS
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqeffects_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqeffects_p.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b14c474..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqeffects_p.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQEffects functions
-**
-** Created : 000621
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2005-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQEFFECTS_P_H
-#define TQEFFECTS_P_H
-
-
-//
-//  W A R N I N G
-//  -------------
-//
-// This file is not part of the TQt API.  It exists for the convenience
-// of qeffects.cpp, qcombobox.cpp, qpopupmenu.cpp and qtooltip.cpp.
-// This header file may change from version to version without notice,
-// or even be removed.
-//
-// We mean it.
-//
-//
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqnamespace.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_EFFECTS
-class TQWidget;
-
-struct TQEffects
-{
-    enum Direction {
-	LeftScroll	= 0x0001,
-	RightScroll	= 0x0002,
-	UpScroll	= 0x0004,
-	DownScroll	= 0x0008
-    };
-
-    typedef uint DirFlags;
-};
-
-extern void TQ_EXPORT qScrollEffect( TQWidget*, TQEffects::DirFlags dir = TQEffects::DownScroll, int time = -1 );
-extern void TQ_EXPORT qFadeEffect( TQWidget*, int time = -1 );
-#endif // TQT_NO_EFFECTS
-
-#endif // TQEFFECTS_P_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c6f6d8..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,754 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQFrame widget class
-**
-** Created : 950201
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_FRAME
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-
-/*!
-    \class TQFrame
-    \brief The TQFrame class is the base class of widgets that can have a frame.
-
-    \ingroup abstractwidgets
-
-    It draws a frame and calls a virtual function, drawContents(), to
-    fill in the frame. This function is reimplemented by subclasses.
-    There are also two other less useful functions: drawFrame() and
-    frameChanged().
-
-    TQPopupMenu uses this to "raise" the menu above the surrounding
-    screen. TQProgressBar has a "sunken" look. TQLabel has a flat look.
-    The frames of widgets like these can be changed.
-
-    \code
-    TQLabel label(...);
-    label.setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Raised );
-    label.setLineWidth( 2 );
-
-    TQProgressBar pbar(...);
-    label.setFrameStyle( TQFrame::NoFrame );
-    \endcode
-
-    The TQFrame class can also be used directly for creating simple
-    frames without any contents, although usually you would use a
-    TQHBox or TQVBox because they automatically lay out the widgets you
-    put inside the frame.
-
-    A frame widget has four attributes: frameStyle(), lineWidth(),
-    midLineWidth(), and margin().
-
-    The frame style is specified by a \link TQFrame::Shape frame
-    tqshape\endlink and a \link TQFrame::Shadow shadow style\endlink. The
-    frame tqshapes are \c NoFrame, \c Box, \c Panel, \c StyledPanel, \c
-    PopupPanel, \c WinPanel, \c ToolBarPanel, \c MenuBarPanel, \c
-    HLine and \c VLine; the shadow styles are \c Plain, \c Raised and
-    \c Sunken.
-
-    The line width is the width of the frame border.
-
-    The mid-line width specifies the width of an extra line in the
-    middle of the frame, which uses a third color to obtain a special
-    3D effect. Notice that a mid-line is only drawn for \c Box, \c
-    HLine and \c VLine frames that are raised or sunken.
-
-    The margin is the gap between the frame and the contents of the
-    frame.
-
-    \target picture
-    This table shows the most useful combinations of styles and widths
-    (and some rather useless ones):
-
-    \img frames.png Table of frame styles
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQFrame::Shape
-
-    This enum type defines the tqshapes of a TQFrame's frame.
-
-    \value NoFrame  TQFrame draws nothing
-    \value Box  TQFrame draws a box around its contents
-    \value Panel  TQFrame draws a panel to make the contents appear
-    raised or sunken
-    \value StyledPanel  draws a rectangular panel with a look that
-    depends on the current GUI style. It can be raised or sunken.
-    \value HLine  TQFrame draws a horizontal line that frames nothing
-    (useful as separator)
-    \value VLine  TQFrame draws a vertical line that frames nothing
-    (useful as separator)
-    \value GroupBoxPanel draws a rectangular panel
-    \value WinPanel draws a rectangular panel that can be raised or
-    sunken like those in Windows 95. Specifying this tqshape sets
-    the line width to 2 pixels. WinPanel is provided for compatibility.
-    For GUI style independence we recommend using StyledPanel instead.
-    \value ToolBarPanel
-    \value MenuBarPanel
-    \value PopupPanel
-    \value LineEditPanel is used to draw a frame suitable for line edits. The
-    look depends upon the current GUI style.
-    \value TabWidgetPanel is used to draw a frame suitable for tab widgets. The
-    look depends upon the current GUI style.
-    \value MShape internal mask
-
-    When it does not call TQStyle, Shape interacts with TQFrame::Shadow,
-    the lineWidth() and the midLineWidth() to create the total result.
-    See the \link #picture picture of the frames\endlink in the class
-    description.
-
-    \sa TQFrame::Shadow TQFrame::style() TQStyle::tqdrawPrimitive()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQFrame::Shadow
-
-    This enum type defines the 3D effect used for TQFrame's frame.
-
-    \value Plain  the frame and contents appear level with the
-    surroundings; draws using the palette foreground color (without
-    any 3D effect)
-    \value Raised the frame and contents appear raised; draws a 3D
-    raised line using the light and dark colors of the current color
-    group
-    \value Sunken the frame and contents appear sunken; draws a 3D
-    sunken line using the light and dark colors of the current color
-    group
-    \value MShadow internal; mask for the shadow
-
-    Shadow interacts with TQFrame::Shape, the lineWidth() and the
-    midLineWidth(). See the \link #picture picture of the frames\endlink
-    in the class description.
-
-    \sa TQFrame::Shape lineWidth() midLineWidth()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a frame widget with frame style \c NoFrame and a
-    1-pixel frame width.
-
-    The \a parent, \a name and \a f arguments are passed to the
-    TQWidget constructor.
-*/
-
-TQFrame::TQFrame( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, f )
-{
-    frect  = TQRect( 0, 0, 0, 0 );
-    fstyle = NoFrame | Plain;
-    lwidth = 1;
-    mwidth = 0;
-    mlwidth = 0;
-    updateFrameWidth();
-}
-
-static const int wpwidth = 2; // WinPanel lwidth
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQFrame::frameStyle() const
-
-    Returns the frame style.
-
-    The default value is TQFrame::NoFrame.
-
-    \sa setFrameStyle(), frameShape(), frameShadow()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQFrame::frameShape
-    \brief the frame tqshape value from the frame style
-
-    \sa frameStyle(), frameShadow()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQFrame::frameShadow
-    \brief the frame shadow value from the frame style
-
-    \sa frameStyle(), frameShape()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Sets the frame style to \a style.
-
-    The \a style is the bitwise OR between a frame tqshape and a frame
-    shadow style. See the \link #picture illustration\endlink in the
-    class documentation.
-
-    The frame tqshapes are given in \l{TQFrame::Shape} and the shadow
-    styles in \l{TQFrame::Shadow}.
-
-    If a mid-line width greater than 0 is specified, an additional
-    line is drawn for \c Raised or \c Sunken \c Box, \c HLine, and \c
-    VLine frames. The mid-color of the current color group is used for
-    drawing middle lines.
-
-    \sa \link #picture Illustration\endlink, frameStyle(),
-    tqcolorGroup(), TQColorGroup
-*/
-
-void TQFrame::setFrameStyle( int style )
-{
-    if ( !testWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy ) ) {
-	switch ( style & MShape ) {
-	case HLine:
-	    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
-	    break;
-	case VLine:
-	    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Fixed, TQSizePolicy::Minimum );
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    if ( (fstyle & MShape) == HLine || (fstyle & MShape) == VLine)
-		tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Preferred, TQSizePolicy::Preferred );
-	}
-	clearWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy );
-    }
-    fstyle = (short)style;
-    updateFrameWidth( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQFrame::lineWidth
-    \brief the line width
-
-    Note that the \e total line width for \c HLine and \c VLine is
-    given by frameWidth(), not lineWidth().
-
-    The default value is 1.
-
-    \sa midLineWidth(), frameWidth()
-*/
-
-void TQFrame::setLineWidth( int w )
-{
-    lwidth = (short)w;
-    updateFrameWidth();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQFrame::midLineWidth
-    \brief the width of the mid-line
-
-    The default value is 0.
-
-    \sa lineWidth(), frameWidth()
-*/
-
-void TQFrame::setMidLineWidth( int w )
-{
-    mlwidth = (short)w;
-    updateFrameWidth();
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQFrame::margin
-    \brief the width of the margin
-
-    The margin is the distance between the innermost pixel of the
-    frame and the outermost pixel of contentsRect(). It is included in
-    frameWidth().
-
-    The margin is filled according to backgroundMode().
-
-    The default value is 0.
-
-    \sa setMargin(), lineWidth(), frameWidth()
-*/
-
-void TQFrame::setMargin( int w )
-{
-    mwidth = (short)w;
-    updateFrameWidth();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Updated the fwidth parameter.
-*/
-
-void TQFrame::updateFrameWidth( bool resetLineMetrics )
-{
-    int frameType  = fstyle & MShape;
-    int frameStyle = fstyle & MShadow;
-
-    if ( resetLineMetrics ) {
-	switch ( frameType ) {
-	case MenuBarPanel:
-	    mwidth = 0;
-	    lwidth = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_MenuBarFrameWidth, this );
-	    break;
-	case ToolBarPanel:
-	    mwidth = 0;
-	    lwidth = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DockWindowFrameWidth, this );
-	    break;
-	case LineEditPanel:
-	case TabWidgetPanel:
-	case PopupPanel:
-	    mwidth = 0;
-	    lwidth = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth, this );
-	    break;
-	}
-    }
-
-    fwidth = -1;
-
-    switch ( frameType ) {
-
-    case NoFrame:
-	fwidth = 0;
-	break;
-
-    case Box:
-	switch ( frameStyle ) {
-	case Plain:
-	    fwidth = lwidth;
-	    break;
-	case Raised:
-	case Sunken:
-	    fwidth = (short)(lwidth*2 + midLineWidth() );
-	    break;
-	}
-	break;
-
-
-    case LineEditPanel:
-    case TabWidgetPanel:
-    case PopupPanel:
-    case GroupBoxPanel:
-    case Panel:
-    case StyledPanel:
-	switch ( frameStyle ) {
-	case Plain:
-	case Raised:
-	case Sunken:
-	    fwidth = lwidth;
-	    break;
-	}
-	break;
-
-    case WinPanel:
-	switch ( frameStyle ) {
-	case Plain:
-	case Raised:
-	case Sunken:
-	    fwidth =  wpwidth; //WinPanel does not use lwidth!
-	    break;
-	}
-	break;
-    case MenuBarPanel:
-	fwidth = lwidth;
-	break;
-    case ToolBarPanel:
-	fwidth = lwidth;
-	break;
-    case HLine:
-    case VLine:
-	switch ( frameStyle ) {
-	case Plain:
-	    fwidth = lwidth;
-	    break;
-	case Raised:
-	case Sunken:
-	    fwidth = (short)(lwidth*2 + midLineWidth());
-	    break;
-	}
-	break;
-    }
-
-    if ( fwidth == -1 )				// invalid style
-	fwidth = 0;
-
-    fwidth += margin();
-
-    frameChanged();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQFrame::frameWidth
-    \brief the width of the frame that is drawn.
-
-    Note that the frame width depends on the \link
-    TQFrame::setFrameStyle() frame style \endlink, not only the line
-    width and the mid-line width. For example, the style \c NoFrame
-    always has a frame width of 0, whereas the style \c Panel has a
-    frame width equivalent to the line width. The frame width also
-    includes the margin.
-
-    \sa lineWidth(), midLineWidth(), frameStyle(), margin()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQFrame::frameRect
-    \brief the frame rectangle
-
-    The frame rectangle is the rectangle the frame is drawn in. By
-    default, this is the entire widget. Setting this property does \e
-    not cause a widget update.
-
-    If this property is set to a null rectangle (for example
-    \c{TQRect(0, 0, 0, 0)}), then the frame rectangle is equivalent to
-    the \link TQWidget::rect() widget rectangle\endlink.
-
-    \sa contentsRect()
-*/
-
-TQRect TQFrame::frameRect() const
-{
-    if ( frect.isNull() )
-        return rect();
-    else
-        return frect;
-}
-
-void TQFrame::setFrameRect( const TQRect &r )
-{
-    frect = r.isValid() ? r : TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect());
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQFrame::contentsRect
-    \brief the rectangle inside the frame
-
-    \sa frameRect(), drawContents()
-*/
-
-TQRect TQFrame::contentsRect() const
-{
-    TQRect r = frameRect();
-    int   w = frameWidth();                     // total width
-    int frameType  = fstyle & MShape;
-    if (frameType == PopupPanel) {
-	int vExtra = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra, this);
-	int hExtra = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameHorizontalExtra, this);
-	r.setRect( r.x()+w+hExtra, r.y()+w+vExtra, r.width()-w*2-hExtra*2, r.height()-w*2-vExtra*2 );
-    } else {
-	r.setRect( r.x()+w, r.y()+w, r.width()-w*2, r.height()-w*2 );
-    }
-    return r;
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQFrame::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    //   Returns a size hint for the frame - for HLine and VLine
-    //   tqshapes, this is stretchable one way and 3 pixels wide the
-    //   other.  For other tqshapes, TQWidget::tqsizeHint() is used.
-    switch (fstyle & MShape) {
-    case HLine:
-        return TQSize(-1,3);
-    case VLine:
-        return TQSize(3,-1);
-    default:
-        return TQWidget::tqsizeHint();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Processes the paint event \a event.
-
-    Paints the frame and the contents.
-
-    Opens the painter on the frame and calls drawFrame(), then
-    drawContents().
-*/
-
-void TQFrame::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *event )
-{
-    const int m = margin();
-    if ( m && testWFlags( TQt::WNoAutoErase ) ) {
-	TQRect r = contentsRect();
-	r.addCoords( -m, -m, m, m );
-	erase( event->region().intersect( TQRegion( r ) - contentsRect() ) );
-    }
-
-    TQPainter paint( this );
-
-    if ( !contentsRect().contains( event->rect() ) ) {
-        paint.save();
-	paint.setClipRegion( event->region().intersect(frameRect()) );
-        drawFrame( &paint );
-        paint.restore();
-    }
-    if ( event->rect().intersects( contentsRect() ) &&
-         (fstyle & MShape) != HLine && (fstyle & MShape) != VLine ) {
-        paint.setClipRegion( event->region().intersect( contentsRect() ) );
-        drawContents( &paint );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Processes the resize event \a e.
-
-    Adjusts the frame rectangle for the resized widget. The frame
-    rectangle is elastic, and the surrounding area is static.
-
-    The resulting frame rectangle may be null or invalid. You can use
-    setMinimumSize() to avoid those possibilities.
-
-    Nothing is done if the frame rectangle is a \link TQRect::isNull()
-    null rectangle\endlink already.
-*/
-
-void TQFrame::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !frect.isNull() ) {
-        TQRect r( frect.x(), frect.y(),
-                 width()  - (e->oldSize().width()  - frect.width()),
-                 height() - (e->oldSize().height() - frect.height()) );
-        setFrameRect( r );
-    }
-    TQWidget::resizeEvent( e );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Draws the frame using the painter \a p and the current frame
-    attributes and color group. The rectangle inside the frame is not
-    affected.
-
-    This function is virtual, but in general you do not need to
-    reimplement it. If you do, note that the TQPainter is already open
-    and must remain open.
-
-    \sa frameRect(), contentsRect(), drawContents(), frameStyle(), setPalette()
-*/
-
-void TQFrame::drawFrame( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    TQPoint      p1, p2;
-    TQRect       r     = frameRect();
-    int         type  = fstyle & MShape;
-    int         cstyle = fstyle & MShadow;
-#ifdef TQT_NO_DRAWUTIL
-    p->setPen( black ); // ####
-    p->drawRect( r ); //### a bit too simple
-#else
-    const TQColorGroup & g = tqcolorGroup();
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STYLE
-    TQStyleOption opt(lineWidth(),midLineWidth());
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (cstyle == Sunken)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Sunken;
-    else if (cstyle == Raised)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Raised;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if (hasMouse())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_MouseOver;
-#endif // TQT_NO_STYLE
-
-    switch ( type ) {
-
-    case Box:
-        if ( cstyle == Plain )
-            qDrawPlainRect( p, r, g.foreground(), lwidth );
-        else
-            qDrawShadeRect( p, r, g, cstyle == Sunken, lwidth,
-                            midLineWidth() );
-        break;
-
-    case LineEditPanel:
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_PanelLineEdit, p, r, g, flags, opt );
-	break;
-
-    case GroupBoxPanel:
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_PanelGroupBox, p, r, g, flags, opt );
-	break;
-
-    case TabWidgetPanel:
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_PanelTabWidget, p, r, g, flags, opt );
-	break;
-
-    case MenuBarPanel:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STYLE
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive(TQStyle::PE_PanelMenuBar, p, r, g, flags, opt);
-	break;
-#endif // fall through to Panel if TQT_NO_STYLE
-
-    case ToolBarPanel:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STYLE
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_PanelDockWindow, p, rect(), g, flags, opt);
-        break;
-#endif // fall through to Panel if TQT_NO_STYLE
-
-    case StyledPanel:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STYLE
-        if ( cstyle == Plain )
-            qDrawPlainRect( p, r, g.foreground(), lwidth );
-        else
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive(TQStyle::PE_Panel, p, r, g, flags, opt);
-        break;
-#endif // fall through to Panel if TQT_NO_STYLE
-
-    case PopupPanel:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STYLE
-    {
-	int vextra = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra, this),
-	    hextra = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameHorizontalExtra, this);
-	if(vextra > 0 || hextra > 0) {
-	    TQRect fr = frameRect();
-	    int   fw = frameWidth();
-	    if(vextra > 0) {
-		tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuVerticalExtra, p, this,
-				    TQRect(fr.x() + fw, fr.y() + fw, fr.width() - (fw*2), vextra),
-				    g, flags, opt);
-		tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuVerticalExtra, p, this,
-				    TQRect(fr.x() + fw, fr.bottom() - fw - vextra, fr.width() - (fw*2), vextra),
-				    g, flags, opt);
-	    }
-	    if(hextra > 0) {
-		tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuHorizontalExtra, p, this,
-				    TQRect(fr.x() + fw, fr.y() + fw + vextra, hextra, fr.height() - (fw*2) - vextra),
-				    g, flags, opt);
-		tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuHorizontalExtra, p, this,
-				    TQRect(fr.right() - fw - hextra, fr.y() + fw + vextra, hextra, fr.height() - (fw*2) - vextra),
-				    g, flags, opt);
-	    }
-	}
-
-        if ( cstyle == Plain )
-            qDrawPlainRect( p, r, g.foreground(), lwidth );
-        else
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive(TQStyle::PE_PanelPopup, p, r, g, flags, opt);
-        break;
-    }
-#endif // fall through to Panel if TQT_NO_STYLE
-
-    case Panel:
-        if ( cstyle == Plain )
-            qDrawPlainRect( p, r, g.foreground(), lwidth );
-        else
-            qDrawShadePanel( p, r, g, cstyle == Sunken, lwidth );
-        break;
-
-    case WinPanel:
-        if ( cstyle == Plain )
-            qDrawPlainRect( p, r, g.foreground(), wpwidth );
-        else
-            qDrawWinPanel( p, r, g, cstyle == Sunken );
-        break;
-    case HLine:
-    case VLine:
-        if ( type == HLine ) {
-            p1 = TQPoint( r.x(), r.height()/2 );
-            p2 = TQPoint( r.x()+r.width(), p1.y() );
-        }
-        else {
-            p1 = TQPoint( r.x()+r.width()/2, 0 );
-            p2 = TQPoint( p1.x(), r.height() );
-        }
-        if ( cstyle == Plain ) {
-            TQPen oldPen = p->pen();
-            p->setPen( TQPen(g.foreground(),lwidth) );
-            p->drawLine( p1, p2 );
-            p->setPen( oldPen );
-        }
-        else
-            qDrawShadeLine( p, p1, p2, g, cstyle == Sunken,
-                            lwidth, midLineWidth() );
-        break;
-    }
-#endif // TQT_NO_DRAWUTIL
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Virtual function that draws the contents of the frame.
-
-    The TQPainter is already open when you get it, and you must leave
-    it open. Painter \link TQPainter::setWorldMatrix()
-    transformations\endlink are switched off on entry. If you
-    transform the painter, remember to take the frame into account and
-    \link TQPainter::resetXForm() reset transformation\endlink before
-    returning.
-
-    This function is reimplemented by subclasses that draw something
-    inside the frame. It should only draw inside contentsRect(). The
-    default function does nothing.
-
-    \sa contentsRect(), TQPainter::setClipRect()
-*/
-
-void TQFrame::drawContents( TQPainter * )
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Virtual function that is called when the frame style, line width
-    or mid-line width changes.
-
-    This function can be reimplemented by subclasses that need to know
-    when the frame attributes change.
-
-    The default implementation calls update().
-*/
-
-void TQFrame::frameChanged()
-{
-    update();
-    updateGeometry();
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
- */
-void  TQFrame::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    updateFrameWidth( TRUE );
-    TQWidget::styleChange( old );
-}
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_FRAME
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d8ae55c..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqframe.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,172 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQFrame widget class
-**
-** Created : 950201
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQFRAME_H
-#define TQFRAME_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_FRAME
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQFrame : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( Shape Shadow )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int frameWidth READ frameWidth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQRect contentsRect READ contentsRect )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Shape frameShape READ frameShape WRITE setFrameShape )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Shadow frameShadow READ frameShadow WRITE setFrameShadow )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int lineWidth READ lineWidth WRITE setLineWidth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int margin READ margin WRITE setMargin )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int midLineWidth READ midLineWidth WRITE setMidLineWidth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQRect frameRect READ frameRect WRITE setFrameRect DESIGNABLE false )
-
-public:
-    TQFrame( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 );
-
-    int         frameStyle()    const;
-    virtual void setFrameStyle( int );
-
-    int         frameWidth()    const;
-    TQRect       contentsRect()  const;
-
-#ifndef TQ_TQDOC
-    bool        lineShapesOk()  const { return TRUE; }
-#endif
-
-    virtual TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-
-    enum Shape { NoFrame  = 0,                  // no frame
-                 Box      = 0x0001,             // rectangular box
-                 Panel    = 0x0002,             // rectangular panel
-                 WinPanel = 0x0003,             // rectangular panel (Windows)
-                 HLine    = 0x0004,             // horizontal line
-                 VLine    = 0x0005,             // vertical line
-                 StyledPanel = 0x0006,          // rectangular panel depending on the GUI style
-                 PopupPanel = 0x0007,           // rectangular panel depending on the GUI style
-                 MenuBarPanel = 0x0008,
-                 ToolBarPanel = 0x0009,
-		 LineEditPanel = 0x000a,
-		 TabWidgetPanel = 0x000b,
-		 GroupBoxPanel = 0x000c,
-                 MShape   = 0x000f              // mask for the tqshape
-    };
-    enum Shadow { Plain    = 0x0010,            // plain line
-                  Raised   = 0x0020,            // raised shadow effect
-                  Sunken   = 0x0030,            // sunken shadow effect
-                  MShadow  = 0x00f0 };          // mask for the shadow
-
-    Shape       frameShape()    const;
-    void        setFrameShape( Shape );
-    Shadow      frameShadow()   const;
-    void        setFrameShadow( Shadow );
-
-    int         lineWidth()     const;
-    virtual void setLineWidth( int );
-
-    int         margin()        const;
-    virtual void setMargin( int );
-
-    int         midLineWidth()  const;
-    virtual void setMidLineWidth( int );
-
-    TQRect       frameRect()     const;
-    virtual void setFrameRect( const TQRect & );
-
-protected:
-    virtual void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    virtual void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    virtual void drawFrame( TQPainter * );
-    virtual void drawContents( TQPainter * );
-    virtual void frameChanged();
-    virtual void styleChange( TQStyle& );
-
-private:
-    void        updateFrameWidth(bool=FALSE);
-    TQRect       frect;
-    int         fstyle;
-    short       lwidth;
-    short       mwidth;
-    short       mlwidth;
-    short       fwidth;
-
-    void * d;
-private:        // Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQFrame( const TQFrame & );
-    TQFrame &operator=( const TQFrame & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-inline int TQFrame::frameStyle() const
-{ return fstyle; }
-
-inline TQFrame::Shape TQFrame::frameShape() const
-{ return (Shape) ( fstyle & MShape ); }
-
-inline TQFrame::Shadow TQFrame::frameShadow() const
-{ return (Shadow) ( fstyle & MShadow ); }
-
-inline void TQFrame::setFrameShape( TQFrame::Shape s )
-{ setFrameStyle( ( fstyle & MShadow ) | s ); }
-
-inline void TQFrame::setFrameShadow( TQFrame::Shadow s )
-{ setFrameStyle( ( fstyle & MShape ) | s ); }
-
-inline int TQFrame::lineWidth() const
-{ return lwidth; }
-
-inline int TQFrame::midLineWidth() const
-{ return mlwidth; }
-
-inline int TQFrame::margin() const
-{ return mwidth; }
-
-inline int TQFrame::frameWidth() const
-{ return fwidth; }
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_FRAME
-
-#endif // TQFRAME_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index bd66cc2..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,137 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-
-#include "tqgrid.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_GRID
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-
-/*!
-    \class TQGrid tqgrid.h
-    \brief The TQGrid widget provides simple tqgeometry management of its tqchildren.
-
-    \ingroup geomanagement
-    \ingroup appearance
-
-    The grid places its widgets either in columns or in rows depending
-    on its orientation.
-
-    The number of rows \e or columns is defined in the constructor.
-    All the grid's tqchildren will be placed and sized in accordance
-    with their tqsizeHint() and sizePolicy().
-
-    Use setMargin() to add space around the grid itself, and
-    setSpacing() to add space between the widgets.
-
-    \img qgrid-m.png TQGrid
-
-    \sa TQVBox TQHBox TQGridLayout
-*/
-
-/*! \enum TQGrid::Direction
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a grid widget with parent \a parent, called \a name.
-    If \a orient is \c Horizontal, \a n specifies the number of
-    columns. If \a orient is \c Vertical, \a n specifies the number of
-    rows. The widget flags \a f are passed to the TQFrame constructor.
-*/
-TQGrid::TQGrid( int n, Qt::Orientation orient, TQWidget *parent, const char *name,
-	      WFlags f )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, f )
-{
-    int nCols, nRows;
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	nCols = n;
-	nRows = -1;
-    } else {
-	nCols = -1;
-	nRows = n;
-    }
-    lay = new TQGridLayout( this, nRows, nCols, 0, 0, name );
-    lay->setAutoAdd( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a grid widget with parent \a parent, called \a name.
-    \a n specifies the number of columns. The widget flags \a f are
-    passed to the TQFrame constructor.
- */
-TQGrid::TQGrid( int n, TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, f )
-{
-    lay = new TQGridLayout( this, -1, n, 0, 0, name );
-    lay->setAutoAdd( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the spacing between the child widgets to \a space.
-*/
-
-void TQGrid::setSpacing( int space )
-{
-    if ( tqlayout() )
-	tqlayout()->setSpacing( space );
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
- */
-void TQGrid::frameChanged()
-{
-    if ( !tqlayout() )
-	return;
-    tqlayout()->setMargin( frameWidth() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQGrid::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    TQWidget *mThis = (TQWidget*)this;
-    TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( mThis, TQEvent::ChildInserted );
-    return TQFrame::tqsizeHint();
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 787dbd5..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgrid.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQGRID_H
-#define TQGRID_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_GRID
-
-class TQGridLayout;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQGrid : public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQGrid( int n, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 );
-    TQGrid( int n, Qt::Orientation orient, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0,
-	   WFlags f = 0 );
-
-    void setSpacing( int );
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    typedef Qt::Orientation Direction;
-#endif
-
-protected:
-    void frameChanged();
-
-private:
-    TQGridLayout *lay;
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQGrid( const TQGrid & );
-    TQGrid& operator=( const TQGrid & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_GRID
-
-#endif // TQGRID_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index d4c1638..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,374 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQGridView class
-**
-** Created : 010523
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-
-#include "tqgridview.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_GRIDVIEW
-
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-
-/*!
-    \class TQGridView tqgridview.h
-    \brief The TQGridView class provides an abstract base for
-    fixed-size grids.
-
-    \ingroup abstractwidgets
-
-    A grid view consists of a number of abstract cells organized in
-    rows and columns. The cells have a fixed size and are identified
-    with a row index and a column index. The top-left cell is in row
-    0, column 0. The bottom-right cell is in row numRows()-1, column
-    numCols()-1.
-
-    You can define \l numRows, \l numCols, \l cellWidth and \l
-    cellHeight. Reimplement the pure virtual function paintCell() to
-    draw the contents of a cell.
-
-    With ensureCellVisible(), you can ensure a certain cell is
-    visible. With rowAt() and columnAt() you can find a cell based on
-    the given x- and y-coordinates.
-
-    If you need to monitor changes to the grid's dimensions (i.e. when
-    numRows or numCols is changed), reimplement the dimensionChange()
-    change handler.
-
-    Note: the row and column indices are always given in the order,
-    row (vertical offset) then column (horizontal offset). This order
-    is the opposite of all pixel operations, which are given in the
-    order x (horizontal offset), y (vertical offset).
-
-    TQGridView is a very simple abstract class based on TQScrollView. It
-    is designed to simplify the task of drawing many cells of the same
-    size in a potentially scrollable canvas. If you need rows and
-    columns with different sizes, use a TQTable instead. If you need a
-    simple list of items, use a TQListBox. If you need to present
-    hierachical data use a TQListView, and if you need random objects
-    at random positions, consider using either a TQIconView or a
-    TQCanvas.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a grid view.
-
-    The \a parent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed
-    to the TQScrollView constructor.
-*/
-TQGridView::TQGridView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    :TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WStaticContents) ),
-     nrows( 5 ), ncols( 5 ), cellw( 12 ), cellh( 12 )
-{
-    viewport()->setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBase );
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBackground, TQt::PaletteBase );
-    viewport()->setFocusProxy( this );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the grid view.
-*/
-TQGridView::~TQGridView()
-{
-}
-
-void TQGridView::updateGrid()
-{
-    resizeContents( ncols * cellw, nrows * cellh );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGridView::numRows
-    \brief The number of rows in the grid
-
-    \sa numCols
-*/
-void TQGridView::setNumRows( int numRows )
-{
-    int oldnrows = nrows;
-    nrows = numRows;
-    dimensionChange( oldnrows, ncols );
-    updateGrid();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGridView::numCols
-    \brief The number of columns in the grid
-
-    \sa numRows
-*/
-void TQGridView::setNumCols( int numCols )
-{
-    int oldncols = ncols;
-    ncols = numCols;
-    dimensionChange( nrows, oldncols );
-    updateGrid();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGridView::cellWidth
-    \brief The width of a grid column
-
-    All columns in a grid view have the same width.
-
-    \sa cellHeight
-*/
-void TQGridView::setCellWidth( int cellWidth )
-{
-    cellw = cellWidth;
-    updateGrid();
-    updateContents();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGridView::cellHeight
-    \brief The height of a grid row
-
-    All rows in a grid view have the same height.
-
-    \sa cellWidth
-*/
-void TQGridView::setCellHeight( int cellHeight )
-{
-    cellh = cellHeight;
-    updateGrid();
-    updateContents();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tqgeometry of cell (\a row, \a column) in the content
-    coordinate system.
-
-    \sa cellRect()
- */
-TQRect TQGridView::cellGeometry( int row, int column )
-{
-    TQRect r;
-    if ( row >= 0 && row < nrows && column >= 0 && column < ncols )
-	r.setRect( cellw * column, cellh * row, cellw, cellh );
-    return r;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Repaints cell (\a row, \a column).
-
-    If \a erase is TRUE, TQt erases the area of the cell before the
-    paintCell() call; otherwise no erasing takes place.
-
-    \sa TQWidget::tqrepaint()
-*/
-void TQGridView::repaintCell( int row, int column, bool erase )
-{
-    repaintContents( cellGeometry( row, column ), erase );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Updates cell (\a row, \a column).
-
-    \sa TQWidget::update()
-*/
-void TQGridView::updateCell( int row, int column )
-{
-    updateContents( cellGeometry( row, column ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Ensures cell (\a row, \a column) is visible, scrolling the grid
-    view if necessary.
-*/
-void TQGridView::ensureCellVisible( int row, int column )
-{
-    TQRect r = cellGeometry( row, column );
-    ensureVisible( r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    This function fills the \a cw pixels wide and \a ch pixels high
-    rectangle starting at position (\a cx, \a cy) with the background
-    color using the painter \a p.
-
-    paintEmptyArea() is invoked by drawContents() to erase or fill
-    unused areas.
-*/
-
-void TQGridView::paintEmptyArea( TQPainter *p, int cx ,int cy, int cw, int ch)
-{
-    if ( gridSize().width() >= contentsWidth() && gridSize().height() >= contentsHeight() )
-	return;
-    // Region of the rect we should draw
-    contentsToViewport( cx, cy, cx, cy );
-    TQRegion reg( TQRect( cx, cy, cw, ch ) );
-    // Subtract the table from it
-    reg = reg.subtract( TQRect( contentsToViewport( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) ), gridSize() ) );
-
-    // And draw the rectangles (transformed as needed)
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-    QVector<QRect> r;
-#else // USE_QT4
-    TQMemArray<TQRect> r;
-#endif // USE_QT4
-    r = reg.rects();
-    const TQBrush &brush = backgroundBrush();
-    for ( int i = 0; i < (int)r.count(); ++i)
-	p->fillRect( r[ i ], brush );
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
- */
-void TQGridView::drawContents( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch )
-{
-    int colfirst = columnAt( cx );
-    int collast = columnAt( cx + cw );
-    int rowfirst = rowAt( cy );
-    int rowlast = rowAt( cy + ch );
-
-    if ( rowfirst == -1 || colfirst == -1 ) {
-	paintEmptyArea( p, cx, cy, cw, ch );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( collast < 0 || collast >= ncols )
-	collast = ncols-1;
-    if ( rowlast < 0 || rowlast >= nrows )
-	rowlast = nrows-1;
-
-    // Go through the rows
-    for ( int r = rowfirst; r <= rowlast; ++r ) {
-	// get row position and height
-	int rowp = r * cellh;
-
-	// Go through the columns in the row r
-	// if we know from where to where, go through [colfirst, collast],
-	// else go through all of them
-	for ( int c = colfirst; c <= collast; ++c ) {
-	    // get position and width of column c
-	    int colp = c * cellw;
-	    // Translate painter and draw the cell
-	    p->translate( colp, rowp );
-	    paintCell( p, r, c );
-	    p->translate( -colp, -rowp );
-	}
-    }
-
-    // Paint empty rects
-    paintEmptyArea( p, cx, cy, cw, ch );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-
-    (Implemented to get rid of a compiler warning.)
-*/
-void TQGridView::drawContents( TQPainter * )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQGridView::dimensionChange( int oldNumRows, int oldNumCols )
-
-    This change handler is called whenever any of the grid's
-    dimensions change. \a oldNumRows and \a oldNumCols contain the
-    old dimensions, numRows() and numCols() contain the new
-    dimensions.
-*/
-void TQGridView::dimensionChange( int, int ) {}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQGridView::rowAt( int y ) const
-
-    Returns the number of the row at position \a y. \a y must be given
-    in content coordinates.
-
-    \sa columnAt()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQGridView::columnAt( int x ) const
-
-    Returns the number of the column at position \a x. \a x must be
-    given in content coordinates.
-
-    \sa rowAt()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQGridView::paintCell( TQPainter *p, int row, int col )
-
-    This pure virtual function is called to paint the single cell at
-    (\a row, \a col) using painter \a p. The painter must be open when
-    paintCell() is called and must remain open.
-
-    The coordinate system is \link TQPainter::translate() translated
-    \endlink so that the origin is at the top-left corner of the cell
-    to be painted, i.e. \e cell coordinates. Do not scale or shear
-    the coordinate system (or if you do, restore the transformation
-    matrix before you return).
-
-    The painter is not clipped by default in order to get maximum
-    efficiency. If you want clipping, use
-
-    \code
-    p->setClipRect( cellRect(), TQPainter::CoordPainter );
-    //... your drawing code
-    p->setClipping( FALSE );
-
-    \endcode
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn  TQRect TQGridView::cellRect() const
-
-    Returns the tqgeometry of a cell in a cell's coordinate system. This
-    is a convenience function useful in paintCell(). It is equivalent
-    to TQRect( 0, 0, cellWidth(), cellHeight() ).
-
-    \sa cellGeometry()
-
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn  TQSize TQGridView::gridSize() const
-
-    Returns the size of the grid in pixels.
-
-*/
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_GRIDVIEW
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d458432..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgridview.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQGridView class
-**
-** Created : 010523
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQGRIDVIEW_H
-#define TQGRIDVIEW_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqscrollview.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_GRIDVIEW
-
-class TQGridViewPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQGridView : public TQScrollView
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( int numRows READ numRows WRITE setNumRows )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int numCols READ numCols WRITE setNumCols )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int cellWidth READ cellWidth WRITE setCellWidth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int cellHeight READ cellHeight WRITE setCellHeight )
-public:
-
-    TQGridView( TQWidget *parent=0, const char *name=0, WFlags f=0 );
-   ~TQGridView();
-
-    int numRows() const;
-    virtual void setNumRows( int );
-    int numCols() const;
-    virtual void setNumCols( int );
-
-    int cellWidth() const;
-    virtual void setCellWidth( int );
-    int cellHeight() const;
-    virtual void setCellHeight( int );
-
-    TQRect cellRect() const;
-    TQRect cellGeometry( int row, int column );
-    TQSize gridSize() const;
-
-    int rowAt( int y ) const;
-    int columnAt( int x ) const;
-
-    void repaintCell( int row, int column, bool erase=TRUE );
-    void updateCell( int row, int column );
-    void ensureCellVisible( int row, int column );
-
-protected:
-    virtual void paintCell( TQPainter *, int row, int col ) = 0;
-    virtual void paintEmptyArea( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch );
-
-    void drawContents( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch );
-
-    virtual void dimensionChange( int, int );
-
-private:
-    void drawContents( TQPainter* );
-    void updateGrid();
-
-    int nrows;
-    int ncols;
-    int cellw;
-    int cellh;
-    TQGridViewPrivate* d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQGridView( const TQGridView & );
-    TQGridView &operator=( const TQGridView & );
-#endif
-};
-
-inline int TQGridView::cellWidth() const
-{ return cellw; }
-
-inline int TQGridView::cellHeight() const
-{ return cellh; }
-
-inline int TQGridView::rowAt( int y ) const
-{ return y / cellh; }
-
-inline int TQGridView::columnAt( int x ) const
-{ return x / cellw; }
-
-inline int TQGridView::numRows() const
-{ return nrows; }
-
-inline int TQGridView::numCols() const
-{return ncols; }
-
-inline TQRect TQGridView::cellRect() const
-{ return TQRect( 0, 0, cellw, cellh ); }
-
-inline TQSize TQGridView::gridSize() const
-{ return TQSize( ncols * cellw, nrows * cellh ); }
-
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_GRIDVIEW
-
-
-#endif // TQTABLEVIEW_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index ef877e7..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,989 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQGroupBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 950203
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqgroupbox.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_GROUPBOX
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqaccel.h"
-#include "tqradiobutton.h"
-#include "tqfocusdata.h"
-#include "tqobjectlist.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqcheckbox.h"
-#include "tqbuttongroup.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \class TQGroupBox tqgroupbox.h
-    \brief The TQGroupBox widget provides a group box frame with a title.
-
-    \ingroup organizers
-    \ingroup geomanagement
-    \ingroup appearance
-    \mainclass
-
-    A group box provides a frame, a title and a keyboard shortcut, and
-    displays various other widgets inside itself. The title is on top,
-    the keyboard shortcut moves keyboard focus to one of the group
-    box's child widgets, and the child widgets are usually laid out
-    horizontally (or vertically) inside the frame.
-
-    The simplest way to use it is to create a group box with the
-    desired number of columns (or rows) and orientation, and then just
-    create widgets with the group box as parent.
-
-    It is also possible to change the orientation() and number of
-    columns() after construction, or to ignore all the automatic
-    tqlayout support and manage the tqlayout yourself. You can add 'empty'
-    spaces to the group box with addSpace().
-
-    TQGroupBox also lets you set the title() (normally set in the
-    constructor) and the title's tqalignment().
-
-    You can change the spacing used by the group box with
-    setInsideMargin() and setInsideSpacing(). To minimize space
-    consumption, you can remove the right, left and bottom edges of
-    the frame with setFlat().
-
-    <img src=qgrpbox-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQButtonGroup
-*/
-
-class TQCheckBox;
-
-class TQGroupBoxPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQGroupBoxPrivate():
-	spacer( 0 ),
-	checkbox( 0 ) {}
-
-    TQSpacerItem *spacer;
-    TQCheckBox *checkbox;
-};
-
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a group box widget with no title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-
-    This constructor does not do automatic tqlayout.
-*/
-
-TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a group box with the title \a title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-
-    This constructor does not do automatic tqlayout.
-*/
-
-TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-    setTitle( title );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a group box with no title. Child widgets will be
-    arranged in \a strips rows or columns (depending on \a
-    orientation).
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( int strips, Qt::Orientation orientation,
-		    TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-    setColumnLayout( strips, orientation );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a group box titled \a title. Child widgets will be
-    arranged in \a strips rows or columns (depending on \a
-    orientation).
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQGroupBox::TQGroupBox( int strips, Qt::Orientation orientation,
-		    const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent,
-		    const char *name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-    setTitle( title );
-    setColumnLayout( strips, orientation );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the group box.
-*/
-TQGroupBox::~TQGroupBox()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-void TQGroupBox::init()
-{
-    align = TQt::AlignAuto;
-    setFrameStyle( TQFrame::GroupBoxPanel | TQFrame::Sunken );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    accel = 0;
-#endif
-    vbox = 0;
-    grid = 0;
-    d = new TQGroupBoxPrivate();
-    lenvisible = 0;
-    nCols = nRows = 0;
-    dir = Qt::Horizontal;
-    marg = 11;
-    spac = 5;
-    bFlat = FALSE;
-}
-
-void TQGroupBox::setTextSpacer()
-{
-    if ( !d->spacer )
-	return;
-    int h = 0;
-    int w = 0;
-    if ( isCheckable() || lenvisible ) {
-	TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-	int fh = fm.height();
-	if ( isCheckable() ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-	    fh = d->checkbox->tqsizeHint().height() + 2;
-	    w = d->checkbox->tqsizeHint().width() + 2*fm.width( "xx" );
-#endif
-	} else {
-	    fh = fm.height();
-	    w = fm.width( str, lenvisible ) + 2*fm.width( "xx" );
-	}
-	h = frameRect().y();
-	if ( tqlayout() ) {
-	    int m = tqlayout()->margin();
-	    int sp = tqlayout()->spacing();
-	    // do we have a child tqlayout?
-	    for ( TQLayoutIterator it = tqlayout()->iterator(); it.current(); ++it ) {
-		if ( it.current()->tqlayout() ) {
-		    m += it.current()->tqlayout()->margin();
-		    sp = TQMAX( sp, it.current()->tqlayout()->spacing() );
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
-	    h = TQMAX( fh-m, h );
-	    h += TQMAX( sp - (h+m - fh), 0 );
-	}
-    }
-    d->spacer->changeSize( w, h, TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
-}
-
-
-void TQGroupBox::setTitle( const TQString &title )
-{
-    if ( str == title )				// no change
-	return;
-    str = title;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    if ( accel )
-	delete accel;
-    accel = 0;
-    int s = TQAccel::shortcutKey( title );
-    if ( s ) {
-	accel = new TQAccel( this, "automatic focus-change accelerator" );
-	accel->connectItem( accel->insertItem( s, 0 ),
-			    TQT_TQOBJECT(this), TQT_SLOT(fixFocus()) );
-    }
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    if ( d->checkbox ) {
-	d->checkbox->setText( str );
-	updateCheckBoxGeometry();
-    }
-#endif
-    calculateFrame();
-    setTextSpacer();
-
-    update();
-    updateGeometry();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::NameChanged );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGroupBox::title
-    \brief the group box title text.
-
-    The group box title text will have a focus-change keyboard
-    accelerator if the title contains \&, followed by a letter.
-
-    \code
-	g->setTitle( "&User information" );
-    \endcode
-    This produces "<u>U</u>ser information"; Alt+U moves the keyboard
-    focus to the group box.
-
-    There is no default title text.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGroupBox::tqalignment
-    \brief the tqalignment of the group box title.
-
-    The title is always placed on the upper frame line. The horizontal
-    tqalignment can be specified by the tqalignment parameter.
-
-    The tqalignment is one of the following flags:
-    \list
-    \i \c AlignAuto aligns the title according to the language,
-    usually to the left.
-    \i \c AlignLeft aligns the title text to the left.
-    \i \c AlignRight aligns the title text to the right.
-    \i \c AlignHCenter aligns the title text centered.
-    \endlist
-
-    The default tqalignment is \c AlignAuto.
-
-    \sa TQt::AlignmentFlags
-*/
-
-void TQGroupBox::tqsetAlignment( int tqalignment )
-{
-    align = tqalignment;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    updateCheckBoxGeometry();
-#endif
-    update();
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQGroupBox::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    TQFrame::resizeEvent(e);
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    if ( align & TQt::AlignRight || align & TQt::AlignCenter ||
-	 ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() && !(align & TQt::AlignLeft) ) )
-	updateCheckBoxGeometry();
-#endif
-    calculateFrame();
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-  \internal
-  overrides TQFrame::paintEvent
-*/
-
-void TQGroupBox::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *event )
-{
-    TQPainter paint( this );
-
-    if ( lenvisible && !isCheckable() ) {	// draw title
-	TQFontMetrics fm = paint.fontMetrics();
-	int h = fm.height();
-	int tw = fm.width( str, lenvisible ) + fm.width(TQChar(' '));
-	int x;
-	int marg = bFlat ? 0 : 8;
-	if ( align & TQt::AlignHCenter )		// center tqalignment
-	    x = frameRect().width()/2 - tw/2;
-	else if ( align & TQt::AlignRight )	// right tqalignment
-	    x = frameRect().width() - tw - marg;
-	else if ( align & TQt::AlignLeft )		 // left tqalignment
-	    x = marg;
-	else { // auto align
-	    if( TQApplication::reverseLayout() )
-		x = frameRect().width() - tw - marg;
-	    else
-		x = marg;
-	}
-	TQRect r( x, 0, tw, h );
-	int va = tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment, this);
-	if(va & TQt::AlignTop)
-	    r.moveBy(0, fm.descent());
-	TQColor pen( (TQRgb) tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GroupBox_TextLabelColor, this )  );
-	if (!tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_UnderlineAccelerator, this))
-	    va |= TQt::NoAccel;
-	tqstyle().drawItem( &paint, r, TQt::ShowPrefix | TQt::AlignHCenter | va, tqcolorGroup(),
-			  isEnabled(), 0, str, -1, ownPalette() ? 0 : &pen );
-	paint.setClipRegion( event->region().subtract( r ) ); // clip everything but title
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    } else if ( d->checkbox ) {
-	TQRect cbClip = d->checkbox->tqgeometry();
-	TQFontMetrics fm = paint.fontMetrics();
-	cbClip.setX( cbClip.x() - fm.width(TQChar(' ')) );
-	cbClip.setWidth( cbClip.width() + fm.width(TQChar(' ')) );
-	paint.setClipRegion( event->region().subtract( cbClip ) );
-#endif
-    }
-    if ( bFlat ) {
-	    TQRect fr = frameRect();
-	    TQPoint p1( fr.x(), fr.y() + 1 );
-            TQPoint p2( fr.x() + fr.width(), p1.y() );
-	    // ### This should probably be a style primitive.
-            qDrawShadeLine( &paint, p1, p2, tqcolorGroup(), TRUE,
-                            lineWidth(), midLineWidth() );
-    } else {
-	drawFrame(&paint);
-    }
-    drawContents( &paint );			// draw the contents
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Adds an empty cell at the next free position. If \a size is
-    greater than 0, the empty cell takes \a size to be its fixed width
-    (if orientation() is \c Qt::Horizontal) or height (if orientation() is
-    \c Qt::Vertical).
-
-    Use this method to separate the widgets in the group box or to
-    skip the next free cell. For performance reasons, call this method
-    after calling setColumnLayout() or by changing the \l
-    TQGroupBox::columns or \l TQGroupBox::orientation properties. It is
-    generally a good idea to call these methods first (if needed at
-    all), and insert the widgets and spaces afterwards.
-*/
-void TQGroupBox::addSpace( int size )
-{
-    TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( this, TQEvent::ChildInserted );
-
-    if ( nCols <= 0 || nRows <= 0 )
-	return;
-
-    if ( row >= nRows || col >= nCols )
-	grid->expand( row+1, col+1 );
-
-    if ( size > 0 ) {
-	TQSpacerItem *spacer
-	    = new TQSpacerItem( ( dir == Qt::Horizontal ) ? 0 : size,
-			       ( dir == Qt::Vertical ) ? 0 : size,
-			       TQSizePolicy::Fixed, TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
-	grid->addItem( spacer, row, col );
-    }
-
-    skip();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGroupBox::columns
-    \brief the number of columns or rows (depending on \l TQGroupBox::orientation) in the group box
-
-    Usually it is not a good idea to set this property because it is
-    slow (it does a complete tqlayout). It is best to set the number
-    of columns directly in the constructor.
-*/
-int TQGroupBox::columns() const
-{
-    if ( dir == Qt::Horizontal )
-	return nCols;
-    return nRows;
-}
-
-void TQGroupBox::setColumns( int c )
-{
-    setColumnLayout( c, dir );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the width of the empty space between the items in the
-    group and the frame of the group.
-
-    Only applies if the group box has a defined orientation.
-
-    The default is usually 11, by may vary depending on the platform
-    and style.
-
-    \sa setInsideMargin(), orientation
-*/
-int TQGroupBox::insideMargin() const
-{
-    return marg;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the width of the empty space between each of the items
-    in the group.
-
-    Only applies if the group box has a defined orientation.
-
-    The default is usually 5, by may vary depending on the platform
-    and style.
-
-    \sa setInsideSpacing(), orientation
-*/
-int TQGroupBox::insideSpacing() const
-{
-    return spac;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the the width of the inside margin to \a m pixels.
-
-    \sa insideMargin()
-*/
-void TQGroupBox::setInsideMargin( int m )
-{
-    marg = m;
-    setColumnLayout( columns(), dir );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the width of the empty space between each of the items in
-    the group to \a s pixels.
-
-    \sa insideSpacing()
-*/
-void TQGroupBox::setInsideSpacing( int s )
-{
-    spac = s;
-    setColumnLayout( columns(), dir );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGroupBox::orientation
-    \brief the group box's orientation
-
-    A horizontal group box arranges it's tqchildren in columns, while a
-    vertical group box arranges them in rows.
-
-    Usually it is not a good idea to set this property because it is
-    slow (it does a complete tqlayout). It is better to set the
-    orientation directly in the constructor.
-*/
-void TQGroupBox::setOrientation( Orientation o )
-{
-    setColumnLayout( columns(), o );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Changes the tqlayout of the group box. This function is only useful
-    in combination with the default constructor that does not take any
-    tqlayout information. This function will put all existing tqchildren
-    in the new tqlayout. It is not good TQt programming style to call
-    this function after tqchildren have been inserted. Sets the number
-    of columns or rows to be \a strips, depending on \a direction.
-
-    \sa orientation columns
-*/
-void TQGroupBox::setColumnLayout(int strips, Qt::Orientation direction)
-{
-    if ( tqlayout() )
-	delete tqlayout();
-
-    vbox = 0;
-    grid = 0;
-
-    if ( strips < 0 ) // if 0, we create the vbox but not the grid. See below.
-	return;
-
-    vbox = new TQVBoxLayout( this, marg, 0 );
-
-    d->spacer = new TQSpacerItem( 0, 0, TQSizePolicy::Minimum,
-				 TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
-
-    setTextSpacer();
-    vbox->addItem( TQT_TQLAYOUTITEM(d->spacer) );
-
-    nCols = 0;
-    nRows = 0;
-    dir = direction;
-
-    // Send all child events and ignore them. Otherwise we will end up
-    // with doubled insertion. This won't do anything because nCols ==
-    // nRows == 0.
-    TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( this, TQEvent::ChildInserted );
-
-    // if 0 or smaller , create a vbox-tqlayout but no grid. This allows
-    // the designer to handle its own grid tqlayout in a group box.
-    if ( strips <= 0 )
-	return;
-
-    dir = direction;
-    if ( dir == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	nCols = strips;
-	nRows = 1;
-    } else {
-	nCols = 1;
-	nRows = strips;
-    }
-    grid = new TQGridLayout( nRows, nCols, spac );
-    row = col = 0;
-    grid->tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignTop );
-    vbox->addLayout( TQT_TQLAYOUT(grid) );
-
-    // Add all tqchildren
-    if ( !childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) {
-	TQObjectListIt it( childrenListObject() );
-	TQWidget *w;
-	while( (w=(TQWidget *)it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    if ( w->isWidgetType()
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-		 && w != d->checkbox
-#endif
-		 )
-		insertWid( w );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp  */
-bool TQGroupBox::event( TQEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutHint && tqlayout() )
-	setTextSpacer();
-    return TQFrame::event( e );
-}
-
-/*!\reimp */
-void TQGroupBox::childEvent( TQChildEvent *c )
-{
-    if ( !c->inserted() || !c->child()->isWidgetType() )
-	return;
-    TQWidget *w = (TQWidget*)c->child();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    if ( d->checkbox ) {
-	if ( w == d->checkbox )
-	    return;
-	if ( d->checkbox->isChecked() ) {
-	    if ( !w->testWState( TQt::WState_ForceDisabled ) )
-		w->setEnabled( TRUE );
-	} else {
-	    if ( w->isEnabled() ) {
-		w->setEnabled( FALSE );
-		((TQGroupBox*)w)->clearWState( TQt::WState_ForceDisabled );
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-#endif
-    if ( !grid )
-	return;
-    insertWid( w );
-}
-
-void TQGroupBox::insertWid( TQWidget* w )
-{
-    if ( row >= nRows || col >= nCols )
-	grid->expand( row+1, col+1 );
-    grid->addWidget( w, row, col );
-    skip();
-    TQApplication::postEvent( this, new TQEvent( TQEvent::LayoutHint ) );
-}
-
-
-void TQGroupBox::skip()
-{
-    // Same as TQGrid::skip()
-    if ( dir == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	if ( col+1 < nCols ) {
-	    col++;
-	} else {
-	    col = 0;
-	    row++;
-	}
-    } else { //Vertical
-	if ( row+1 < nRows ) {
-	    row++;
-	} else {
-	    row = 0;
-	    col++;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-    This private slot finds a widget in this group box that can accept
-    focus, and gives the focus to that widget.
-*/
-
-void TQGroupBox::fixFocus()
-{
-    TQFocusData * fd = focusData();
-    TQWidget * orig = fd->home();
-    TQWidget * best = 0;
-    TQWidget * candidate = 0;
-    TQWidget * w = orig;
-    do {
-	TQWidget * p = w;
-	while( p && p != this && !p->isTopLevel() )
-	    p = p->parentWidget();
-	if ( p == this && ( w->focusPolicy() & Qt::TabFocus ) == Qt::TabFocus
-	     && w->isVisibleTo(this) ) {
-	    if ( w->hasFocus()
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RADIOBUTTON
-		 || ( !best && ::tqqt_cast<TQRadioButton*>(w)
-		 && ((TQRadioButton*)w)->isChecked() )
-#endif
-		    )
-		// we prefer a checked radio button or a widget that
-		// already has focus, if there is one
-		best = w;
-	    else if ( !candidate )
-		// but we'll accept anything that takes focus
-		candidate = w;
-	}
-	w = fd->next();
-    } while( w != orig );
-    if ( best )
-	best->setFocus();
-    else if ( candidate )
-	candidate->setFocus();
-}
-
-
-/*
-    Sets the right frame rect depending on the title. Also calculates
-    the visible part of the title.
-*/
-void TQGroupBox::calculateFrame()
-{
-    lenvisible = str.length();
-
-    if ( lenvisible && !isCheckable() ) { // do we have a label?
-	TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-	while ( lenvisible ) {
-	    int tw = fm.width( str, lenvisible ) + 4*fm.width(TQChar(' '));
-	    if ( tw < width() )
-		break;
-	    lenvisible--;
-	}
-	if ( lenvisible ) { // but do we also have a visible label?
-	    TQRect r = rect();
-	    int va = tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment, this);
-	    if(va & TQt::AlignVCenter)
-		r.setTop( fm.height()/2 );				// frame rect should be
-	    else if(va & TQt::AlignTop)
-		r.setTop(fm.ascent());
-	    setFrameRect( r );			//   smaller than client rect
-	    return;
-	}
-    } else if ( isCheckable() ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-	TQRect r = rect();
-	int va = tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GroupBox_TextLabelVerticalAlignment, this);
-	if( va & TQt::AlignVCenter )
-	    r.setTop( d->checkbox->rect().height()/2 );
-	else if( va & TQt::AlignTop )
-	    r.setTop( fontMetrics().ascent() );
-	setFrameRect( r );
-	return;
-#endif
-    }
-
-    // no visible label
-    setFrameRect( TQRect(0,0,0,0) );		//  then use client rect
-}
-
-
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-void TQGroupBox::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * )
-{ // note no call to super
-    fixFocus();
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
- */
-void TQGroupBox::fontChange( const TQFont & oldFont )
-{
-    TQWidget::fontChange( oldFont );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    updateCheckBoxGeometry();
-#endif
-    calculateFrame();
-    setTextSpacer();
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQGroupBox::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    TQFontMetrics fm( font() );
-    int tw, th;
-    if ( isCheckable() ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-	tw = d->checkbox->tqsizeHint().width() + 2*fm.width( "xx" );
-	th = d->checkbox->tqsizeHint().height() + fm.width( TQChar(' ') );
-#endif
-    } else {
-	tw = fm.width( title() ) + 2 * fm.width( "xx" );
-	th = fm.height() + fm.width( TQChar(' ') );
-    }
-
-    TQSize s;
-    if ( tqlayout() ) {
-	s = TQFrame::tqsizeHint();
-	return s.expandedTo( TQSize( tw, 0 ) );
-    } else {
-	TQRect r = tqchildrenRect();
-	TQSize s( 100, 50 );
-	s = s.expandedTo( TQSize( tw, th ) );
-	if ( r.isNull() )
-	    return s;
-
-	return s.expandedTo( TQSize( r.width() + 2 * r.x(), r.height()+ 2 * r.y() ) );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGroupBox::flat
-    \brief whether the group box is painted flat or has a frame
-
-    By default a group box has a surrounding frame, with the title
-    being placed on the upper frame line. In flat mode the right, left
-    and bottom frame lines are omitted, and only the thin line at the
-    top is drawn.
-
-    \sa title
-*/
-bool TQGroupBox::isFlat() const
-{
-    return bFlat;
-}
-
-void TQGroupBox::setFlat( bool b )
-{
-    if ( (bool)bFlat == b )
-	return;
-    bFlat = b;
-    update();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGroupBox::checkable
-    \brief Whether the group box has a checkbox in its title.
-
-    If this property is TRUE, the group box has a checkbox. If the
-    checkbox is checked (which is the default), the group box's
-    tqchildren are enabled.
-
-    setCheckable() controls whether or not the group box has a
-    checkbox, and isCheckable() controls whether the checkbox is
-    checked or not.
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-void TQGroupBox::setCheckable( bool b )
-{
-    if ( (d->checkbox != 0) == b )
-	return;
-
-    if ( b ) {
-	if ( !d->checkbox ) {
-	    d->checkbox = new TQCheckBox( title(), this, "qt_groupbox_checkbox" );
-            if (TQButtonGroup *meAsButtonGroup = ::tqqt_cast<TQButtonGroup*>(this))
-                meAsButtonGroup->remove(d->checkbox);
-	    setChecked( TRUE );
-	    setChildrenEnabled( TRUE );
-	    connect( d->checkbox, TQT_SIGNAL( toggled(bool) ),
-		     this, TQT_SLOT( setChildrenEnabled(bool) ) );
-	    connect( d->checkbox, TQT_SIGNAL( toggled(bool) ),
-		     this, TQT_SIGNAL( toggled(bool) ) );
-	    updateCheckBoxGeometry();
-	}
-	d->checkbox->show();
-    } else {
-	setChildrenEnabled( TRUE );
-	delete d->checkbox;
-	d->checkbox = 0;
-    }
-    calculateFrame();
-    setTextSpacer();
-    update();
-}
-#endif //TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-
-bool TQGroupBox::isCheckable() const
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    return ( d->checkbox != 0 );
-#else
-    return FALSE;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-bool TQGroupBox::isChecked() const
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    return d->checkbox && d->checkbox->isChecked();
-#else
-    return FALSE;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQGroupBox::toggled( bool on )
-
-    If the group box has a check box (see \l isCheckable()) this signal
-    is emitted when the check box is toggled. \a on is TRUE if the check
-    box is checked; otherwise it is FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQGroupBox::checked
-    \brief Whether the group box's checkbox is checked.
-
-    If the group box has a check box (see \l isCheckable()), and the
-    check box is checked (see \l isChecked()), the group box's tqchildren
-    are enabled. If the checkbox is unchecked the tqchildren are
-    disabled.
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-void TQGroupBox::setChecked( bool b )
-{
-    if ( d->checkbox )
-	d->checkbox->setChecked( b );
-}
-#endif
-
-/*
-  sets all tqchildren of the group box except the qt_groupbox_checkbox
-  to either disabled/enabled
-*/
-void TQGroupBox::setChildrenEnabled( bool b )
-{
-    if ( childrenListObject().isEmpty() )
-	return;
-    TQObjectListIt it( childrenListObject() );
-    TQObject *o;
-    while( (o = it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( o->isWidgetType()
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-	     && o != TQT_TQOBJECT(d->checkbox)
-#endif
-	     ) {
-	    TQWidget *w = (TQWidget*)o;
-	    if ( b ) {
-		if ( !w->testWState( TQt::WState_ForceDisabled ) )
-		    w->setEnabled( TRUE );
-	    } else {
-		if ( w->isEnabled() ) {
-		    w->setEnabled( FALSE );
-		    ((TQGroupBox*)w)->clearWState( TQt::WState_ForceDisabled );
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQGroupBox::setEnabled(bool on)
-{
-    TQFrame::setEnabled(on);
-    if ( !d->checkbox || !on )
-	return;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    // we are being enabled - disable tqchildren
-    if ( !d->checkbox->isChecked() )
-	setChildrenEnabled( FALSE );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*
-  recalculates and sets the checkbox setGeometry
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-void TQGroupBox::updateCheckBoxGeometry()
-{
-    if ( d->checkbox ) {
-	TQSize cbSize = d->checkbox->tqsizeHint();
-	TQRect cbRect( 0, 0, cbSize.width(), cbSize.height() );
-
-	int marg = bFlat ? 2 : 8;
-	marg += fontMetrics().width( TQChar(' ') );
-
-	if ( align & TQt::AlignHCenter ) {
-	    cbRect.moveCenter( frameRect().center() );
-	    cbRect.moveTop( 0 );
-	} else if ( align & TQt::AlignRight ) {
-	    cbRect.moveRight( frameRect().right() - marg );
-	} else if ( align & TQt::AlignLeft ) {
-	    cbRect.moveLeft( frameRect().left() + marg );
-	} else { // auto align
-	    if( TQApplication::reverseLayout() )
-		cbRect.moveRight( frameRect().right() - marg );
-	    else
-		cbRect.moveLeft( frameRect().left() + marg );
-	}
-
-	d->checkbox->setGeometry( cbRect );
-    }
-}
-#endif //TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_GROUPBOX
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ce77add..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqgroupbox.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,168 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQGroupBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 950203
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQGROUPBOX_H
-#define TQGROUPBOX_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_GROUPBOX
-
-
-class TQAccel;
-class TQGroupBoxPrivate;
-class TQVBoxLayout;
-class TQGridLayout;
-class TQSpacerItem;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQGroupBox : public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString title READ title WRITE setTitle )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Qt::Alignment tqalignment READ alignmentProp WRITE tqsetAlignmentProp )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Qt::Orientation orientation READ orientation WRITE setOrientation DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int columns READ columns WRITE setColumns DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool flat READ isFlat WRITE setFlat )
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool checkable READ isCheckable WRITE setCheckable )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool checked READ isChecked WRITE setChecked )
-#endif
-public:
-    TQGroupBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQGroupBox( const TQString &title,
-	       TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQGroupBox( int strips, Qt::Orientation o,
-	       TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQGroupBox( int strips, Qt::Orientation o, const TQString &title,
-	       TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQGroupBox();
-
-    virtual void setColumnLayout(int strips, Qt::Orientation o);
-
-    TQString title() const { return str; }
-    virtual void setTitle( const TQString &);
-
-    int tqalignment() const { return align; }
-    virtual void tqsetAlignment( int );
-    inline Qt::Alignment alignmentProp() const { return (Qt::Alignment)tqalignment(); }
-    inline virtual void tqsetAlignmentProp( Qt::Alignment al ) { tqsetAlignment((int)al); }
-
-    int columns() const;
-    void setColumns( int );
-
-    Qt::Orientation orientation() const { return dir; }
-    void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation );
-
-    int insideMargin() const;
-    int insideSpacing() const;
-    void setInsideMargin( int m );
-    void setInsideSpacing( int s );
-
-    void addSpace( int );
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-
-    bool isFlat() const;
-    void setFlat( bool b );
-    bool isCheckable() const;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    void setCheckable( bool b );
-#endif
-    bool isChecked() const;
-    void setEnabled(bool on);
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void setChecked( bool b );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void toggled( bool );
-#endif
-protected:
-    bool event( TQEvent * );
-    void childEvent( TQChildEvent * );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void fontChange( const TQFont & );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void fixFocus();
-    void setChildrenEnabled( bool b );
-
-private:
-    void skip();
-    void init();
-    void calculateFrame();
-    void insertWid( TQWidget* );
-    void setTextSpacer();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CHECKBOX
-    void updateCheckBoxGeometry();
-#endif
-    TQString str;
-    int align;
-    int lenvisible;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQAccel * accel;
-#endif
-    TQGroupBoxPrivate * d;
-
-    TQVBoxLayout *vbox;
-    TQGridLayout *grid;
-    int row;
-    int col : 30;
-    uint bFlat : 1;
-    int nRows, nCols;
-    Qt::Orientation dir;
-    int spac, marg;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQGroupBox( const TQGroupBox & );
-    TQGroupBox &operator=( const TQGroupBox & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_GROUPBOX
-
-#endif // TQGROUPBOX_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index bbd3dfd..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqhbox.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_HBOX
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqobjectlist.h"
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQHBox tqhbox.h
-    \brief The TQHBox widget provides horizontal tqgeometry management
-    for its child widgets.
-
-    \ingroup organizers
-    \ingroup geomanagement
-    \ingroup appearance
-
-    All the horizontal box's child widgets will be placed alongside
-    each other and sized according to their tqsizeHint()s.
-
-    Use setMargin() to add space around the edges, and use
-    setSpacing() to add space between the widgets. Use
-    setStretchFactor() if you want the widgets to be different sizes
-    in proportion to one another. (See \link tqlayout.html
-    Layouts\endlink for more information on stretch factors.)
-
-    \img qhbox-m.png TQHBox
-
-    \sa TQHBoxLayout TQVBox TQGrid
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an hbox widget with parent \a parent, called \a name.
-    The parent, name and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the TQFrame
-    constructor.
-*/
-TQHBox::TQHBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    :TQFrame( parent, name, f )
-{
-    lay = new TQHBoxLayout( this, frameWidth(), frameWidth(), name );
-    lay->setAutoAdd( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a horizontal hbox if \a horizontal is TRUE, otherwise
-    constructs a vertical hbox (also known as a vbox).
-
-    This constructor is provided for the TQVBox class. You should never
-    need to use it directly.
-
-    The \a parent, \a name and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the
-    TQFrame constructor.
-*/
-
-TQHBox::TQHBox( bool horizontal, TQWidget *parent , const char *name, WFlags f )
-    :TQFrame( parent, name, f )
-{
-    lay = new TQBoxLayout( this,
-		       horizontal ? TQBoxLayout::LeftToRight : TQBoxLayout::Down,
-			  frameWidth(), frameWidth(), name );
-    lay->setAutoAdd( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
- */
-void TQHBox::frameChanged()
-{
-    if ( !tqlayout() )
-	return;
-    tqlayout()->setMargin( frameWidth() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the spacing between the child widgets to \a space.
-*/
-
-void TQHBox::setSpacing( int space )
-{
-    if ( tqlayout() ) // ### why not use this->lay?
-	tqlayout()->setSpacing( space );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQHBox::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    TQWidget *mThis = (TQWidget*)this;
-    TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( mThis, TQEvent::ChildInserted );
-    return TQFrame::tqsizeHint();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the stretch factor of widget \a w to \a stretch. Returns TRUE if
-    \a w is found. Otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa TQBoxLayout::setStretchFactor() \link tqlayout.html Layouts\endlink
-*/
-bool TQHBox::setStretchFactor( TQWidget* w, int stretch )
-{
-    TQWidget *mThis = (TQWidget*)this;
-    TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( mThis, TQEvent::ChildInserted );
-    return lay->setStretchFactor( w, stretch );
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b6a524d..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbox.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-
-#ifndef TQHBOX_H
-#define TQHBOX_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_HBOX
-
-#include "tqframe.h"
-
-class TQBoxLayout;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQHBox : public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQHBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 );
-
-    void setSpacing( int );
-    bool setStretchFactor( TQWidget*, int stretch );
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-
-protected:
-    TQHBox( bool horizontal, TQWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f = 0 );
-    void frameChanged();
-
-private:
-    TQBoxLayout *lay;
-
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQHBox( const TQHBox & );
-    TQHBox &operator=( const TQHBox & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_HBOX
-
-#endif // TQHBOX_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f02794..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQHButtonGroup class
-**
-** Created : 990602
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqhbuttongroup.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_HBUTTONGROUP
-
-/*!
-    \class TQHButtonGroup tqhbuttongroup.h
-    \brief The TQHButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a
-    group with one horizontal row.
-
-    \ingroup organizers
-    \ingroup geomanagement
-    \ingroup appearance
-
-    TQHButtonGroup is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on
-    top of TQButtonGroup. From a tqlayout point of view it is effectively
-    a TQHBox that offers a frame with a title and is specifically
-    designed for buttons. From a functionality point of view it is a
-    TQButtonGroup.
-
-    \img qbuttongroup-h.png TQButtonGroup
-
-    \sa TQVButtonGroup
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a horizontal button group with no title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-TQHButtonGroup::TQHButtonGroup( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, parent, name )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a horizontal button group with the title \a title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQHButtonGroup::TQHButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent,
-			    const char *name )
-    : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, title, parent, name )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the horizontal button group, deleting its child widgets.
-*/
-TQHButtonGroup::~TQHButtonGroup()
-{
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a45e25c..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhbuttongroup.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQHButtonGroup class
-**
-** Created : 990602
-**
-** Copyright (C) 1999-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQHBUTTONGROUP_H
-#define TQHBUTTONGROUP_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqbuttongroup.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_HBUTTONGROUP
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQHButtonGroup : public TQButtonGroup
-{
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQHButtonGroup( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQHButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQHButtonGroup();
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQHButtonGroup( const TQHButtonGroup & );
-    TQHButtonGroup &operator=( const TQHButtonGroup & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_HBUTTONGROUP
-
-#endif // TQHBUTTONGROUP_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 28be091..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2049 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQHeader widget class (table header)
-**
-** Created : 961105
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqheader.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_HEADER
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqbitarray.h"
-#include "tqptrvector.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-
-class TQHeaderData
-{
-public:
-    TQHeaderData(int n)
-    {
-	count = n;
-	labels.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-	iconsets.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-	sizes.resize(n);
-	positions.resize(n);
-	labels.resize(n);
-	if ( int( iconsets.size() ) < n )
-	    iconsets.resize( n );
-	i2s.resize(n);
-	s2i.resize(n);
-	clicks.resize(n);
-	resize.resize(n);
-	int p =0;
-	for ( int i = 0; i < n; i ++ ) {
-	    sizes[i] = 88;
-	    i2s[i] = i;
-	    s2i[i] = i;
-	    positions[i] = p;
-	    p += sizes[i];
-	}
-	clicks_default = TRUE;
-	resize_default = TRUE;
-	clicks.fill( clicks_default );
-	resize.fill( resize_default );
-	move = TRUE;
-	sortSection = -1;
-	sortDirection = TRUE;
-	positionsDirty = TRUE;
-	lastPos = 0;
-	fullSize = -2;
-	pos_dirty = FALSE;
-	is_a_table_header = FALSE;
-	focusIdx = 0;
-    }
-
-
-    TQMemArray<TQCOORD>	sizes;
-    int height; // we abuse the heights as widths for vertical tqlayout
-    bool heightDirty;
-    TQMemArray<TQCOORD>	positions; // sorted by index
-    TQPtrVector<TQString>	labels;
-    TQPtrVector<TQIconSet> iconsets;
-    TQMemArray<int>	        i2s;
-    TQMemArray<int>	        s2i;
-
-    TQBitArray           clicks;
-    TQBitArray           resize;
-    uint move : 1;
-    uint clicks_default : 1; // default value for new clicks bits
-    uint resize_default : 1; // default value for new resize bits
-    uint pos_dirty : 1;
-    uint is_a_table_header : 1;
-    bool sortDirection;
-    bool positionsDirty;
-    int sortSection;
-    int count;
-    int lastPos;
-    int fullSize;
-    int focusIdx;
-    int pressDelta;
-
-    int sectionAt( int pos ) {
-	// positions is sorted by index, not by section
-	if ( !count )
-	    return -1;
-	int l = 0;
-	int r = count - 1;
-	int i = ( (l+r+1) / 2 );
-	while ( r - l ) {
-	    if ( positions[i] > pos )
-		r = i -1;
-	    else
-		l = i;
-	    i = ( (l+r+1) / 2 );
-	}
-	if ( positions[i] <= pos && pos <= positions[i] + sizes[ i2s[i] ] )
-	    return i2s[i];
-	return -1;
-    }
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQHeader tqheader.h
-    \brief The TQHeader class provides a header row or column, e.g. for
-    tables and listviews.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-
-    This class provides a header, e.g. a vertical header to display
-    row labels, or a horizontal header to display column labels. It is
-    used by TQTable and TQListView for example.
-
-    A header is composed of one or more \e sections, each of which can
-    display a text label and an \link TQIconSet iconset\endlink. A sort
-    indicator (an arrow) can also be displayed using
-    setSortIndicator().
-
-    Sections are added with addLabel() and removed with removeLabel().
-    The label and iconset are set in addLabel() and can be changed
-    later with setLabel(). Use count() to retrieve the number of
-    sections in the header.
-
-    The orientation of the header is set with setOrientation(). If
-    setStretchEnabled() is TRUE, the sections will expand to take up
-    the full width (height for vertical headers) of the header. The
-    user can resize the sections manually if setResizeEnabled() is
-    TRUE. Call adjustHeaderSize() to have the sections resize to
-    occupy the full width (or height).
-
-    A section can be moved with moveSection(). If setMovingEnabled()
-    is TRUE (the default)the user may drag a section from one position
-    to another. If a section is moved, the index positions at which
-    sections were added (with addLabel()), may not be the same after the
-    move. You don't have to worry about this in practice because the
-    TQHeader API works in terms of section numbers, so it doesn't matter
-    where a particular section has been moved to.
-
-    If you want the current index position of a section call
-    mapToIndex() giving it the section number. (This is the number
-    returned by the addLabel() call which created the section.) If you
-    want to get the section number of a section at a particular index
-    position call mapToSection() giving it the index number.
-
-    Here's an example to clarify mapToSection() and mapToIndex():
-
-    \table
-    \header \i41 Index positions
-    \row \i 0 \i 1 \i 2 \i 3
-    \header \i41 Original section ordering
-    \row \i Sect 0 \i Sect 1 \i Sect 2 \i Sect 3
-    \header \i41 Ordering after the user moves a section
-    \row \i Sect 0 \i Sect 2 \i Sect 3 \i Sect 1
-    \endtable
-
-    \table
-    \header \i \e k \i mapToSection(\e k) \i mapToIndex(\e k)
-    \row \i 0 \i 0 \i 0
-    \row \i 1 \i 2 \i 3
-    \row \i 2 \i 3 \i 1
-    \row \i 3 \i 1 \i 2
-    \endtable
-
-    In the example above, if we wanted to find out which section is at
-    index position 3 we'd call mapToSection(3) and get a section
-    number of 1 since section 1 was moved. Similarly, if we wanted to
-    know which index position section 2 occupied we'd call
-    mapToIndex(2) and get an index of 1.
-
-    TQHeader provides the clicked(), pressed() and released() Q_SIGNALS.
-    If the user changes the size of a section, the sizeChange() signal
-    is emitted. If you want to have a sizeChange() signal emitted
-    continuously whilst the user is resizing (rather than just after
-    the resizing is finished), use setTracking(). If the user moves a
-    section the indexChange() signal is emitted.
-
-    <img src=qheader-m.png> <img src=qheader-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQListView TQTable
-*/
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a horizontal header called \a name, with parent \a
-    parent.
-*/
-
-TQHeader::TQHeader( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WStaticContents )
-{
-    orient = Qt::Horizontal;
-    init( 0 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a horizontal header called \a name, with \a n sections
-    and parent \a parent.
-*/
-
-TQHeader::TQHeader( int n,  TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WStaticContents )
-{
-    orient = Qt::Horizontal;
-    init( n );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the header and all its sections.
-*/
-
-TQHeader::~TQHeader()
-{
-    delete d;
-    d = 0;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-
-void TQHeader::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e )
-{
-    calculatePositions();
-    TQWidget::showEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQHeader::sizeChange( int section, int oldSize, int newSize )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user has changed the size of a \a
-    section from \a oldSize to \a newSize. This signal is typically
-    connected to a slot that repaints the table or list that contains
-    the header.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQHeader::clicked( int section )
-
-    If isClickEnabled() is TRUE, this signal is emitted when the user
-    clicks section \a section.
-
-    \sa pressed(), released()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQHeader::pressed( int section )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user presses section \a section
-    down.
-
-    \sa released()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQHeader::released( int section )
-
-    This signal is emitted when section \a section is released.
-
-    \sa pressed()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQHeader::indexChange( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user moves section \a section from
-    index position \a fromIndex, to index position \a toIndex.
-*/
-
-/*!
-  \fn void TQHeader::moved( int fromIndex, int toIndex )
-  \obsolete
-
-  Use indexChange() instead.
-
-  This signal is emitted when the user has moved the section which
-  is displayed at the index \a fromIndex to the index \a toIndex.
-*/
-
-/*!
-  \fn void TQHeader::sectionClicked( int index )
-  \obsolete
-
-  Use clicked() instead.
-
-  This signal is emitted when a part of the header is clicked. \a
-  index is the index at which the section is displayed.
-
-  In a list view this signal would typically be connected to a slot
-  that sorts the specified column (or row).
-*/
-
-/*! \fn int TQHeader::cellSize( int ) const
-  \obsolete
-
-  Use sectionSize() instead.
-
-  Returns the size in pixels of the section that is displayed at
-  the index \a i.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQHeader::sectionHandleDoubleClicked( int section )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user doubleclicks on the edge
-    (handle) of section \a section.
-*/
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-
-  Use sectionPos() instead.
-
-  Returns the position in pixels of the section that is displayed at the
-  index \a i. The  position is measured from the start of the header.
-*/
-
-int TQHeader::cellPos( int i ) const
-{
-    if ( i == count() && i > 0 )
-	return  d->positions[i-1] + d->sizes[d->i2s[i-1]]; // compatibility
-    return sectionPos( mapToSection(i) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQHeader::count
-    \brief the number of sections in the header
-*/
-
-int TQHeader::count() const
-{
-    return d->count;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQHeader::tracking
-    \brief whether the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously
-
-    If tracking is on, the sizeChange() signal is emitted continuously
-    while the mouse is moved (i.e. when the header is resized),
-    otherwise it is only emitted when the mouse button is released at
-    the end of resizing.
-
-    Tracking defaults to FALSE.
-*/
-
-
-/*
-    Initializes with \a n columns.
-*/
-void TQHeader::init( int n )
-{
-    state = Idle;
-    cachedPos = 0; // unused
-    d = new TQHeaderData( n );
-    d->height = 0;
-    d->heightDirty = TRUE;
-    offs = 0;
-    if( reverse() )
-	offs = d->lastPos - width();
-    oldHandleIdx = oldHIdxSize = handleIdx = 0;
-
-    setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-    trackingIsOn = FALSE;
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteButton );
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Preferred, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQHeader::orientation
-    \brief the header's orientation
-
-    The orientation is either \c Qt::Vertical or \c Qt::Horizontal (the
-    default).
-
-    Call setOrientation() before adding labels if you don't provide a
-    size parameter otherwise the sizes will be incorrect.
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::setOrientation( Qt::Orientation orientation )
-{
-    if ( orient == orientation )
-	return;
-    orient = orientation;
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Preferred, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-    else
-	tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Fixed, TQSizePolicy::Preferred ) );
-    update();
-    updateGeometry();
-}
-
-
-/*
-    Paints a rectangle starting at \a p, with length \s.
-*/
-void TQHeader::paintRect( int p, int s )
-{
-    TQPainter paint( this );
-    paint.setPen( TQPen( Qt::black, 1, Qt::DotLine ) );
-    if ( reverse() )
-	paint.drawRect( p - s, 3, s, height() - 5 );
-    else if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	paint.drawRect( p, 3, s, height() - 5 );
-    else
-	paint.drawRect( 3, p, height() - 5, s );
-}
-
-/*
-  Marks the division line at \a idx.
-*/
-void TQHeader::markLine( int idx )
-{
-    TQPainter paint( this );
-    paint.setPen( TQPen( Qt::black, 1, Qt::DotLine ) );
-    int MARKSIZE = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_HeaderMarkSize );
-    int p = pPos( idx );
-    int x = p - MARKSIZE/2;
-    int y = 2;
-    int x2 = p + MARKSIZE/2;
-    int y2 = height() - 3;
-    if ( orient == Qt::Vertical ) {
-	int t = x; x = y; y = t;
-	t = x2; x2 = y2; y2 = t;
-    }
-
-    paint.drawLine( x, y, x2, y );
-    paint.drawLine( x, y+1, x2, y+1 );
-
-    paint.drawLine( x, y2, x2, y2 );
-    paint.drawLine( x, y2-1, x2, y2-1 );
-
-    paint.drawLine( x, y, x, y2 );
-    paint.drawLine( x+1, y, x+1, y2 );
-
-    paint.drawLine( x2, y, x2, y2 );
-    paint.drawLine( x2-1, y, x2-1, y2 );
-}
-
-/*
-  Removes the mark at the division line at \a idx.
-*/
-void TQHeader::unMarkLine( int idx )
-{
-    if ( idx < 0 )
-	return;
-    int MARKSIZE = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_HeaderMarkSize );
-    int p = pPos( idx );
-    int x = p - MARKSIZE/2;
-    int y = 2;
-    int x2 = p + MARKSIZE/2;
-    int y2 = height() - 3;
-    if ( orient == Qt::Vertical ) {
-	int t = x; x = y; y = t;
-	t = x2; x2 = y2; y2 = t;
-    }
-    tqrepaint( x, y, x2-x+1, y2-y+1 );
-}
-
-/*! \fn int TQHeader::cellAt( int ) const
-  \obsolete
-
-  Use sectionAt() instead.
-
-  Returns the index at which the section is displayed, which contains
-  \a pos in widget coordinates, or -1 if \a pos is outside the header
-  sections.
-*/
-
-/*
-  Tries to find a line that is not a neighbor of  \c handleIdx.
-*/
-int TQHeader::findLine( int c )
-{
-    int i = 0;
-    if ( c > d->lastPos || (reverse() && c < 0 )) {
-	return d->count;
-    } else {
-	int section = sectionAt( c );
-	if ( section < 0 )
-	    return handleIdx;
-	i = d->s2i[section];
-    }
-    int MARKSIZE = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_HeaderMarkSize );
-    if ( i == handleIdx )
-	return i;
-    if ( i == handleIdx - 1 &&  pPos( handleIdx ) - c > MARKSIZE/2 )
-	return i;
-    if ( i == handleIdx + 1 && c - pPos( i ) > MARKSIZE/2 )
-	return i + 1;
-    if ( c - pPos( i ) > pSize( i ) / 2 )
-	return i + 1;
-    else
-	return i;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the handle at position \a p, or -1 if there is no handle at \a p.
-*/
-int TQHeader::handleAt(int p)
-{
-    int section = d->sectionAt( p );
-    if ( section >= 0 ) {
-	int GripMargin = (bool)d->resize[ section ] ?
-	    tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_HeaderGripMargin ) : 0;
-	int index = d->s2i[section];
-	if ( (index > 0 && p < d->positions[index] + GripMargin) ||
-	    (p > d->positions[index] + d->sizes[section] - GripMargin) ) {
-	    if ( index > 0 && p < d->positions[index]  + GripMargin )
-		section = d->i2s[--index];
-	    // dont show icon if streaching is enabled it is at the end of the last section
-	    if ( d->resize.testBit(section) && (d->fullSize == -2 || index != count() - 1)) {
-		return section;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    return -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-
-  Use moveSection() instead.
-
-  Moves the section that is currently displayed at index \a fromIdx
-  to index \a toIdx.
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::moveCell( int fromIdx, int toIdx )
-{
-    moveSection( mapToSection(fromIdx), toIdx );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-  Move and signal and tqrepaint.
- */
-
-void TQHeader::handleColumnMove( int fromIdx, int toIdx )
-{
-    int s = d->i2s[fromIdx];
-    if ( fromIdx < toIdx )
-	toIdx++; //Convert to
-    TQRect r = sRect( fromIdx );
-    r |= sRect( toIdx );
-    moveSection( s, toIdx );
-    update( r );
-    emit moved( fromIdx, toIdx );
-    emit indexChange( s, fromIdx, toIdx );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQHeader::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    int i = d->focusIdx;
-    if ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Space ) {
-	//don't do it if we're doing something with the mouse
-	if ( state == Idle && d->clicks[ d->i2s[d->focusIdx]  ] ) {
-	    handleIdx = i;
-	    state = Pressed;
-	    tqrepaint( sRect( handleIdx ) );
-	    emit pressed( d->i2s[i] );
-	}
-    } else if ( (orientation() == Qt::Horizontal &&
-		(e->key() == Qt::Key_Right || e->key() == Qt::Key_Left))
-		|| (orientation() == Qt::Vertical &&
-		(e->key() == Qt::Key_Up || e->key() == Qt::Key_Down)) ) {
-	int dir = e->key() == Qt::Key_Right || e->key() == Qt::Key_Down ? 1 : -1;
-	int s = d->i2s[i];
-	if ( e->state() & ControlButton  && d->resize[s] ) {
-	    //resize
-	    int step = e->state() & ShiftButton ? dir : 10*dir;
-	    int c = d->positions[i] + d->sizes[s] +  step;
-	    handleColumnResize( i, c, TRUE );
-	} else 	if ( e->state() & (TQt::AltButton|TQt::MetaButton) && d->move ) {
-	    //move section
-	    int i2 = ( i + count() + dir ) % count();
-	    d->focusIdx = i2;
-	    handleColumnMove( i, i2 );
-	} else {
-	    //focus on different section
-	    TQRect r = sRect( d->focusIdx );
-	    d->focusIdx = (d->focusIdx + count() + dir) % count();
-	    r |= sRect( d->focusIdx );
-	    update( r );
-	}
-    } else {
-	e->ignore();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQHeader::keyReleaseEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    switch ( e->key() ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Space:
-	//double check that this wasn't started with the mouse
-	if ( state == Pressed && handleIdx == d->focusIdx ) {
-	    tqrepaint(sRect( handleIdx ), FALSE);
-	    int section = d->i2s[d->focusIdx];
-	    emit released( section );
-	    emit sectionClicked( handleIdx );
-	    emit clicked( section );
-	    state = Idle;
-	    handleIdx = -1;
-	}
-	break;
-    default:
-	e->ignore();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQHeader::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton || state != Idle )
-	return;
-    oldHIdxSize = handleIdx;
-    handleIdx = 0;
-    int c = orient == Qt::Horizontal ? e->pos().x() : e->pos().y();
-    c += offset();
-    if ( reverse() )
-	c = d->lastPos - c;
-
-    int section = d->sectionAt( c );
-    if ( section < 0 )
-	return;
-    int GripMargin = (bool)d->resize[ section ] ?
-	tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_HeaderGripMargin ) : 0;
-    int index = d->s2i[section];
-
-    if ( (index > 0 && c < d->positions[index] + GripMargin) ||
-	 (c > d->positions[index] + d->sizes[section] - GripMargin) ) {
-	if ( c < d->positions[index] + GripMargin )
-	    handleIdx = index-1;
-	else
-	    handleIdx = index;
-	if ( d->lastPos <= ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ? width() :
-			     height() ) && d->fullSize != -2 && handleIdx == count() - 1 ) {
-	    handleIdx = -1;
-	    return;
-	}
-	oldHIdxSize = d->sizes[ d->i2s[handleIdx] ];
-	state = d->resize[ d->i2s[handleIdx]  ] ? Sliding : Blocked;
-    } else if ( index >= 0 ) {
-	oldHandleIdx = handleIdx = index;
-	moveToIdx = -1;
-	state = d->clicks[ d->i2s[handleIdx]  ] ? Pressed : Blocked;
-	clickPos = c;
-	tqrepaint( sRect( handleIdx ) );
-	if(oldHandleIdx != handleIdx)
-	    tqrepaint( sRect( oldHandleIdx ) );
-	emit pressed( section );
-    }
-
-    d->pressDelta = c - ( d->positions[handleIdx] + d->sizes[ d->i2s[handleIdx] ] );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQHeader::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-    int oldOldHandleIdx = oldHandleIdx;
-    State oldState = state;
-    state = Idle;
-    switch ( oldState ) {
-    case Pressed: {
-	int section = d->i2s[handleIdx];
-	emit released( section );
-	if ( sRect( handleIdx ).contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-	    oldHandleIdx = handleIdx;
-	    emit sectionClicked( handleIdx );
-	    emit clicked( section );
-	} else {
-	    handleIdx = oldHandleIdx;
-	}
-	tqrepaint(sRect( handleIdx ), FALSE);
-	if ( oldOldHandleIdx != handleIdx )
-	    tqrepaint(sRect(oldOldHandleIdx ), FALSE );
-	} break;
-    case Sliding: {
-	int c = orient == Qt::Horizontal ? e->pos().x() : e->pos().y();
-	c += offset();
-	if ( reverse() )
-	    c = d->lastPos - c;
-	handleColumnResize( handleIdx, c - d->pressDelta, TRUE );
-    } break;
-    case Moving: {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	unsetCursor();
-#endif
-	int section = d->i2s[handleIdx];
-	if ( handleIdx != moveToIdx && moveToIdx != -1 ) {
-	    moveSection( section, moveToIdx );
-	    handleIdx = oldHandleIdx;
-	    emit moved( handleIdx, moveToIdx );
-	    emit indexChange( section, handleIdx, moveToIdx );
-	    emit released( section );
-	    tqrepaint(); // a bit overkill, but removes the handle as well
-	} else {
-	    if ( sRect( handleIdx).contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-		oldHandleIdx = handleIdx;
-		emit released( section );
-		emit sectionClicked( handleIdx );
-		emit clicked( section );
-	    } else {
-		handleIdx = oldHandleIdx;
-	    }
-	    tqrepaint(sRect( handleIdx ), FALSE );
-	    if(oldOldHandleIdx != handleIdx)
-		tqrepaint(sRect(oldOldHandleIdx ), FALSE );
-	}
-	break;
-    }
-    case Blocked:
-	//nothing
-	break;
-    default:
-	// empty, probably.  Idle, at any rate.
-	break;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQHeader::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    int c = orient == Qt::Horizontal ? e->pos().x() : e->pos().y();
-    c += offset();
-
-    int pos = c;
-    if( reverse() )
-	c = d->lastPos - c;
-
-    switch( state ) {
-    case Idle:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	if ( handleAt(c) < 0 )
-	    unsetCursor();
-	else if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    setCursor( Qt::SplitHCursor );
-	else
-	    setCursor( Qt::SplitVCursor );
-#endif
-	break;
-    case Blocked:
-	break;
-    case Pressed:
-	if ( TQABS( c - clickPos ) > 4 && d->move ) {
-	    state = Moving;
-	    moveToIdx = -1;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-		setCursor( Qt::SizeHorCursor );
-	    else
-		setCursor( Qt::SizeVerCursor );
-#endif
-	}
-	break;
-    case Sliding:
-	handleColumnResize( handleIdx, c, FALSE, FALSE );
-	break;
-    case Moving: {
-	int newPos = findLine( pos );
-	if ( newPos != moveToIdx ) {
-	    if ( moveToIdx == handleIdx || moveToIdx == handleIdx + 1 )
-		tqrepaint( sRect(handleIdx) );
-	    else
-		unMarkLine( moveToIdx );
-	    moveToIdx = newPos;
-	    if ( moveToIdx == handleIdx || moveToIdx == handleIdx + 1 )
-		paintRect( pPos( handleIdx ), pSize( handleIdx ) );
-	    else
-		markLine( moveToIdx );
-	}
-	break;
-    }
-    default:
-	qWarning( "TQHeader::mouseMoveEvent: (%s) unknown state", name() );
-	break;
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQHeader::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    int p = orient == Qt::Horizontal ? e->pos().x() : e->pos().y();
-    p += offset();
-    if( reverse() )
-	p = d->lastPos - p;
-
-    int header = handleAt(p);
-    if (header >= 0)
-	emit sectionHandleDoubleClicked( header );
-}
-
-/*
-  Handles resizing of sections. This means it redraws the relevant parts
-  of the header.
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::handleColumnResize( int index, int c, bool final, bool recalcAll )
-{
-    int section = d->i2s[index];
-    int GripMargin = (bool)d->resize[ section ] ?
-	tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_HeaderGripMargin ) : 0;
-    int lim = d->positions[index] + 2*GripMargin;
-    if ( c == lim )
-	return;
-    if ( c < lim )
-	c = lim;
-    int oldSize = d->sizes[section];
-    int newSize = c - d->positions[index];
-    d->sizes[section] = newSize;
-
-    calculatePositions( !recalcAll, !recalcAll ? section : 0 );
-
-    int pos = d->positions[index]-offset();
-    if( reverse() ) // tqrepaint the whole thing. Could be optimized (lars)
-	tqrepaint( 0, 0, width(), height() );
-    else if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	tqrepaint( pos, 0, width() - pos, height() );
-    else
-	tqrepaint( 0, pos, width(), height() - pos );
-
-    int os = 0, ns = 0;
-    if ( tracking() && oldSize != newSize ) {
-	os = oldSize;
-	ns = newSize;
-	emit sizeChange( section, oldSize, newSize );
-    } else if ( !tracking() && final && oldHIdxSize != newSize ) {
-	os = oldHIdxSize;
-	ns = newSize;
-	emit sizeChange( section, oldHIdxSize, newSize );
-    }
-
-    if ( os != ns ) {
-	if ( d->fullSize == -1 ) {
-	    d->fullSize = count() - 1;
-	    adjustHeaderSize();
-	    d->fullSize = -1;
-	} else if ( d->fullSize >= 0 ) {
-	    int old = d->fullSize;
-	    d->fullSize = count() - 1;
-	    adjustHeaderSize();
-	    d->fullSize = old;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the rectangle covered by the section at index \a index.
-*/
-
-TQRect TQHeader::sRect( int index )
-{
-
-    int section = mapToSection( index );
-    if ( count() > 0 && index >= count() ) {
-	int s = d->positions[count() - 1] - offset() +
-		d->sizes[mapToSection(count() - 1)];
-	if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    return TQRect( s, 0, width() - s + 10, height() );
-	else
-	    return TQRect( 0, s, width(), height() - s + 10 );
-    }
-    if ( section < 0 )
-	return rect(); // ### eeeeevil
-
-    if ( reverse() )
-	return TQRect(  d->lastPos - d->positions[index] - d->sizes[section] -offset(),
-		       0, d->sizes[section], height() );
-    else if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	return TQRect(  d->positions[index]-offset(), 0, d->sizes[section], height() );
-    else
-	return TQRect( 0, d->positions[index]-offset(), width(), d->sizes[section] );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the rectangle covered by section \a section.
-*/
-
-TQRect TQHeader::sectionRect( int section ) const
-{
-    int index = mapToIndex( section );
-    if ( section < 0 )
-	return rect(); // ### eeeeevil
-
-    if ( reverse() )
-	return TQRect(  d->lastPos - d->positions[index] - d->sizes[section] -offset(),
-		       0, d->sizes[section], height() );
-    else if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	return TQRect(  d->positions[index]-offset(), 0, d->sizes[section], height() );
-    else
-	return TQRect( 0, d->positions[index]-offset(), width(), d->sizes[section] );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Sets the icon for section \a section to \a iconset and the text to
-    \a s. The section's width is set to \a size if \a size \>= 0;
-    otherwise it is left unchanged.
-
-    If the section does not exist, nothing happens.
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::setLabel( int section, const TQIconSet& iconset,
-			const TQString &s, int size )
-{
-    if ( section < 0 || section >= count() )
-	return;
-    d->iconsets.insert( section, new TQIconSet( iconset ) );
-    setLabel( section, s, size );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the text of section \a section to \a s. The section's width
-    is set to \a size if \a size \>= 0; otherwise it is left
-    unchanged. Any icon set that has been set for this section remains
-    unchanged.
-
-    If the section does not exist, nothing happens.
-*/
-void TQHeader::setLabel( int section, const TQString &s, int size )
-{
-    if ( section < 0 || section >= count() )
-	return;
-    if ( s.isNull() )
-	d->labels.remove( section );
-    else
-	d->labels.insert( section, new TQString( s ) );
-
-    setSectionSizeAndHeight( section, size );
-
-    if ( isUpdatesEnabled() ) {
-	updateGeometry();
-	calculatePositions();
-	update();
-    }
-}
-
-
-bool qt_qheader_label_return_null_strings = FALSE;
-/*!
-    Returns the text for section \a section. If the section does not
-    exist, a TQString::null is returned.
-*/
-TQString TQHeader::label( int section ) const
-{
-    if ( section < 0 || section >= count() )
-	return TQString::null;
-    if ( d->labels[ section ] )
-	return *( d->labels[ section ] );
-    else if ( qt_qheader_label_return_null_strings )
-	return TQString::null;
-    else
-	return TQString::number( section + 1 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the icon set for section \a section. If the section does
-    not exist, 0 is returned.
-*/
-
-TQIconSet *TQHeader::iconSet( int section ) const
-{
-    if ( section < 0 || section >= count() )
-	return 0;
-    return d->iconsets[ section ];
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Adds a new section with iconset \a iconset and label text \a s.
-    Returns the index position where the section was added (at the
-    right for horizontal headers, at the bottom for vertical headers).
-    The section's width is set to \a size, unless size is negative in
-    which case the size is calculated taking account of the size of
-    the text.
-*/
-int TQHeader::addLabel( const TQIconSet& iconset, const TQString &s, int size )
-{
-    int n = count() + 1;
-    d->iconsets.resize( n + 1 );
-    d->iconsets.insert( n - 1, new TQIconSet( iconset ) );
-    return addLabel( s, size );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes section \a section. If the section does not exist, nothing
-    happens.
-*/
-void TQHeader::removeLabel( int section )
-{
-    if ( section < 0 || section > count() - 1 )
-	return;
-
-    int index = d->s2i[section];
-    int n = --d->count;
-    int i;
-    for ( i = section; i < n; ++i ) {
-	d->sizes[i] = d->sizes[i+1];
-	d->labels.insert( i, d->labels.take( i + 1 ) );
-	d->iconsets.insert( i, d->iconsets.take( i + 1 ) );
-    }
-
-    d->sizes.resize( n );
-    d->positions.resize( n );
-    d->labels.resize( n );
-    d->iconsets.resize( n );
-
-    for ( i = section; i < n; ++i )
-	d->s2i[i] = d->s2i[i+1];
-    d->s2i.resize( n );
-
-    if ( isUpdatesEnabled() ) {
-	for ( i = 0; i < n; ++i )
-	    if ( d->s2i[i] > index )
-		--d->s2i[i];
-    }
-
-    for ( i = index; i < n; ++i )
-	d->i2s[i] = d->i2s[i+1];
-    d->i2s.resize( n );
-
-    if ( isUpdatesEnabled() ) {
-	for ( i = 0; i < n; ++i )
-	    if ( d->i2s[i] > section )
-		--d->i2s[i];
-    }
-
-    if ( isUpdatesEnabled() ) {
-	updateGeometry();
-	calculatePositions();
-	update();
-    }
-}
-
-TQSize TQHeader::sectionSizeHint( int section, const TQFontMetrics& fm ) const
-{
-    int iw = 0;
-    int ih = 0;
-    if ( d->iconsets[section] != 0 ) {
-	TQSize isize = d->iconsets[section]->pixmap( TQIconSet::Small,
-						    TQIconSet::Normal ).size();
-	iw = isize.width() + 2;
-	ih = isize.height();
-    }
-
-    TQRect bound;
-    TQString *label = d->labels[section];
-    if ( label ) {
-	int lines = label->contains( '\n' ) + 1;
-	int w = 0;
-        if (lines > 1) {
-            bound.setHeight(fm.height() + fm.lineSpacing() * (lines - 1));
-            TQStringList list = TQStringList::split('\n', *label);
-            for (int i=0; i <(int)list.count(); ++i) {
-                int tmpw = fm.width(*(list.at(i)));
-                w = TQMAX(w, tmpw);
-            }
-        } else {
-            bound.setHeight(fm.height());
-            w = fm.width(*label);
-        }
-	bound.setWidth( w );
-    }
-    int arrowWidth = 0;
-    if ( d->sortSection == section )
-	arrowWidth = ( ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ? height() : width() ) / 2 ) + 8;
-    int height = TQMAX( bound.height() + 2, ih ) + 4;
-    int width = bound.width() + tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_HeaderMargin ) * 4
-	+ iw + arrowWidth;
-    return TQSize( width, height );
-}
-
-/*
-    Sets d->sizes[\a section] to a bounding rect based on its size
-    hint and font metrics, but constrained by \a size. It also updates
-    d->height.
-*/
-void TQHeader::setSectionSizeAndHeight( int section, int size )
-{
-    TQSize sz = sectionSizeHint( section, fontMetrics() );
-
-    if ( size < 0 ) {
-	if ( d->sizes[section] < 0 )
-	    d->sizes[section] = ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) ? sz.width()
-							 : sz.height();
-    } else {
-	d->sizes[section] = size;
-    }
-
-    int newHeight = ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) ? sz.height() : sz.width();
-    if ( newHeight > d->height ) {
-	d->height = newHeight;
-    } else if ( newHeight < d->height ) {
-	/*
-	  We could be smarter, but we aren't. This makes a difference
-	  only for users with many columns and '\n's in their headers
-	  at the same time.
-	*/
-	d->heightDirty = TRUE;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Adds a new section with label text \a s. Returns the index
-    position where the section was added (at the right for horizontal
-    headers, at the bottom for vertical headers). The section's width
-    is set to \a size. If \a size \< 0, an appropriate size for the
-    text \a s is chosen.
-*/
-int TQHeader::addLabel( const TQString &s, int size )
-{
-    int n = ++d->count;
-    if ( (int)d->iconsets.size() < n  )
-	d->iconsets.resize( n );
-    if ( (int)d->sizes.size() < n  ) {
-	d->labels.resize( n );
-	d->sizes.resize( n );
-	d->positions.resize( n );
-	d->i2s.resize( n );
-	d->s2i.resize( n );
-	d->clicks.resize( n );
-	d->resize.resize( n );
-    }
-    int section = d->count - 1;
-    if ( !d->is_a_table_header || !s.isNull() )
-	d->labels.insert( section, new TQString( s ) );
-
-    if ( size >= 0 && s.isNull() && d->is_a_table_header ) {
-	d->sizes[section] = size;
-    } else {
-	d->sizes[section] = -1;
-	setSectionSizeAndHeight( section, size );
-    }
-
-    int index = section;
-    d->positions[index] = d->lastPos;
-
-    d->s2i[section] = index;
-    d->i2s[index] = section;
-    d->clicks.setBit( section, d->clicks_default );
-    d->resize.setBit( section, d->resize_default );
-
-    if ( isUpdatesEnabled() ) {
-	updateGeometry();
-	calculatePositions();
-	update();
-    }
-    return index;
-}
-
-void TQHeader::resizeArrays( int size )
-{
-    d->iconsets.resize( size );
-    d->labels.resize( size );
-    d->sizes.resize( size );
-    d->positions.resize( size );
-    d->i2s.resize( size );
-    d->s2i.resize( size );
-    d->clicks.resize( size );
-    d->resize.resize( size );
-}
-
-void TQHeader::setIsATableHeader( bool b )
-{
-    d->is_a_table_header = b;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-TQSize TQHeader::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    int width;
-    int height;
-
-    constPolish();
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-
-    if ( d->heightDirty ) {
-	d->height = fm.lineSpacing() + 6;
-	for ( int i = 0; i < count(); i++ ) {
-	    int h = orient == Qt::Horizontal ?
-		    sectionSizeHint( i, fm ).height() : sectionSizeHint( i, fm ).width();
-	    d->height = TQMAX( d->height, h );
-	}
-	d->heightDirty = FALSE;
-    }
-
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	height = fm.lineSpacing() + 6;
-	width = 0;
-	height = TQMAX( height, d->height );
-	for ( int i = 0; i < count(); i++ )
-	    width += d->sizes[i];
-    } else {
-	width = fm.width( ' ' );
-	height = 0;
-	width = TQMAX( width, d->height );
-	for ( int i = 0; i < count(); i++ )
-	    height += d->sizes[i];
-    }
-    return (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_Header, this,
-				     TQSize(width, height)).expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut()));
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQHeader::offset
-    \brief the header's left-most (or top-most) visible pixel
-
-    Setting this property will scroll the header so that \e offset
-    becomes the left-most (or top-most for vertical headers) visible
-    pixel.
-*/
-int TQHeader::offset() const
-{
-    if ( reverse() )
-	return d->lastPos - width() - offs;
-    return offs;
-}
-
-void TQHeader::setOffset( int x )
-{
-    int oldOff = offset();
-    offs = x;
-    if( d->lastPos < ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ? width() : height() ) )
-	offs = 0;
-    else if ( reverse() )
-	offs = d->lastPos - width() - x;
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	scroll( oldOff-offset(), 0 );
-    else
-	scroll( 0, oldOff-offset());
-}
-
-
-
-/*
-  Returns the position of actual division line \a i in widget
-  coordinates. May return a position outside the widget.
-
-  Note that the last division line is numbered count(). (There is one
-  more line than the number of sections).
-*/
-int TQHeader::pPos( int i ) const
-{
-    int pos;
-    if ( i == count() )
-	pos = d->lastPos;
-    else
-	pos = d->positions[i];
-    if ( reverse() )
-	pos = d->lastPos - pos;
-    return pos - offset();
-}
-
-
-/*
-  Returns the size of the section at index position \a i.
-*/
-int TQHeader::pSize( int i ) const
-{
-    return d->sizes[ d->i2s[i] ];
-}
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-
-  Use mapToSection() instead.
-
-  Translates from actual index \a a (index at which the section is displayed)  to
-  logical index of the section.  Returns -1 if \a a is outside the legal range.
-
-  \sa mapToActual()
-*/
-
-int TQHeader::mapToLogical( int a ) const
-{
-    return mapToSection( a );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-
-  Use mapToIndex() instead.
-
-  Translates from logical index \a l to actual index (index at which the section \a l is displayed) .
-  Returns -1 if \a l is outside the legal range.
-
-  \sa mapToLogical()
-*/
-
-int TQHeader::mapToActual( int l ) const
-{
-    return mapToIndex( l );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-
-  Use resizeSection() instead.
-
-  Sets the size of the section \a section to \a s pixels.
-
-  \warning does not tqrepaint or send out Q_SIGNALS
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::setCellSize( int section, int s )
-{
-    if ( section < 0 || section >= count() )
-	return;
-    d->sizes[ section ] = s;
-    if ( isUpdatesEnabled() )
-	calculatePositions();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    If \a enable is TRUE the user may resize section \a section;
-    otherwise the section may not be manually resized.
-
-    If \a section is negative (the default) then the \a enable value
-    is set for all existing sections and will be applied to any new
-    sections that are added.
-    Example:
-    \code
-    // Allow resizing of all current and future sections
-    header->setResizeEnabled(TRUE);
-    // Disable resizing of section 3, (the fourth section added)
-    header->setResizeEnabled(FALSE, 3);
-    \endcode
-
-    If the user resizes a section, a sizeChange() signal is emitted.
-
-    \sa setMovingEnabled() setClickEnabled() setTracking()
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::setResizeEnabled( bool enable, int section )
-{
-    if ( section < 0 ) {
-	d->resize.fill( enable );
-	// and future ones...
-	d->resize_default = enable;
-    } else if ( section < count() ) {
-	d->resize[ section ] = enable;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQHeader::moving
-    \brief whether the header sections can be moved
-
-    If this property is TRUE (the default) the user can move sections.
-    If the user moves a section the indexChange() signal is emitted.
-
-    \sa setClickEnabled(), setResizeEnabled()
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::setMovingEnabled( bool enable )
-{
-    d->move = enable;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    If \a enable is TRUE, any clicks on section \a section will result
-    in clicked() Q_SIGNALS being emitted; otherwise the section will
-    ignore clicks.
-
-    If \a section is -1 (the default) then the \a enable value is set
-    for all existing sections and will be applied to any new sections
-    that are added.
-
-    \sa setMovingEnabled(), setResizeEnabled()
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::setClickEnabled( bool enable, int section )
-{
-    if ( section < 0 ) {
-	d->clicks.fill( enable );
-	// and future ones...
-	d->clicks_default = enable;
-    } else if ( section < count() ) {
-	d->clicks[ section ] = enable;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Paints the section at position \a index, inside rectangle \a fr
-    (which uses widget coordinates) using painter \a p.
-
-    Calls paintSectionLabel().
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::paintSection( TQPainter *p, int index, const TQRect& fr )
-{
-    int section = mapToSection( index );
-
-    if ( section < 0 ) {
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_HeaderSection, p, fr,
-			       tqcolorGroup(), (TQStyle::SFlags)(TQStyle::Style_Raised |
-			       (isEnabled() ? TQStyle::Style_Enabled : 0) |
-			       ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ? TQStyle::Style_Horizontal : 0 )),
-			       TQStyleOption( this ) );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( sectionSize( section ) <= 0 )
-	return;
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = (orient == Qt::Horizontal ? TQStyle::Style_Horizontal : TQStyle::Style_Default);
-    //pass in some hint about the sort indicator if it is used
-    if(d->sortSection != section)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Off;
-    else if(!d->sortDirection)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Up;
-    if(isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if(isClickEnabled(section)) {
-	if(section == d->sortSection)
-	    flags |= TQStyle::Style_Sunken; //currently selected
-	if((state == Pressed || state == Moving) && index == handleIdx)
-	    flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down; //currently pressed
-
-    }
-    if(!(flags & TQStyle::Style_Down))
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Raised;
-    p->setBrushOrigin( fr.topLeft() );
-    if ( d->clicks[section] ) {
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_HeaderSection, p, fr,
-			       tqcolorGroup(), flags,
-			       TQStyleOption( this ) );
-    } else {
-	p->save();
-	p->setClipRect( fr ); // hack to keep styles working
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_HeaderSection, p,
-				   TQRect(fr.x() - 2, fr.y() - 2, fr.width() + 4, fr.height() + 4),
-				   tqcolorGroup(), flags,
-				   TQStyleOption( this ) );
-
-	    p->setPen( tqcolorGroup().color( TQColorGroup::Mid ) );
-	    p->drawLine( fr.x(), fr.y() + fr.height() - 1,
-			 fr.x() + fr.width() - 1, fr.y() + fr.height() - 1 );
-	    p->drawLine( fr.x() + fr.width() - 1, fr.y(),
-			 fr.x() + fr.width() - 1, fr.y() + fr.height() - 1 );
-	    p->setPen( tqcolorGroup().color( TQColorGroup::Light ) );
-	    if ( index > 0 )
-		p->drawLine( fr.x(), fr.y(), fr.x(), fr.y() + fr.height() - 1 );
-	    if ( index == count() - 1 ) {
-		p->drawLine( fr.x() + fr.width() - 1, fr.y(),
-			     fr.x() + fr.width() - 1, fr.y() + fr.height() - 1 );
-		p->setPen( tqcolorGroup().color( TQColorGroup::Mid ) );
-		p->drawLine( fr.x() + fr.width() - 2, fr.y(),
-			     fr.x() + fr.width() - 2, fr.y() + fr.height() - 1 );
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_HeaderSection, p,
-				   TQRect(fr.x() - 2, fr.y() - 2, fr.width() + 4, fr.height() + 4),
-				   tqcolorGroup(), flags,
-				   TQStyleOption( this ) );
-
-	    p->setPen( tqcolorGroup().color( TQColorGroup::Mid ) );
-	    p->drawLine( fr.x() + width() - 1, fr.y(),
-			 fr.x() + fr.width() - 1, fr.y() + fr.height() - 1 );
-	    p->drawLine( fr.x(), fr.y() + fr.height() - 1,
-			 fr.x() + fr.width() - 1, fr.y() + fr.height() - 1 );
-	    p->setPen( tqcolorGroup().color( TQColorGroup::Light ) );
-	    if ( index > 0 )
-		p->drawLine( fr.x(), fr.y(), fr.x() + fr.width() - 1, fr.y() );
-	    if ( index == count() - 1 ) {
-		p->drawLine( fr.x(), fr.y() + fr.height() - 1,
-			     fr.x() + fr.width() - 1, fr.y() + fr.height() - 1 );
-		p->setPen( tqcolorGroup().color( TQColorGroup::Mid ) );
-		p->drawLine( fr.x(), fr.y() + fr.height() - 2,
-			     fr.x() + fr.width() - 1, fr.y() + fr.height() - 2 );
-	    }
-	}
-	p->restore();
-    }
-
-    paintSectionLabel( p, index, fr );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Paints the label of the section at position \a index, inside
-    rectangle \a fr (which uses widget coordinates) using painter \a
-    p.
-
-    Called by paintSection()
-*/
-void TQHeader::paintSectionLabel( TQPainter *p, int index, const TQRect& fr )
-{
-    int section = mapToSection( index );
-    if ( section < 0 )
-	return;
-
-    int dx = 0, dy = 0;
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if ( index == handleIdx && ( state == Pressed || state == Moving ) ) {
-	dx = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_ButtonShiftHorizontal, this );
-	dy = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_ButtonShiftVertical, this );
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Sunken;
-    }
-    if ( isEnabled() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-
-
-    TQRect r( fr.x() + tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_HeaderMargin ) + dx, fr.y() + 2 + dy,
-	     fr.width() - 6, fr.height() - 4 );
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl( TQStyle::CE_HeaderLabel, p, this, r, tqcolorGroup(), flags,
-			 TQStyleOption( section ) );
-
-    int arrowWidth = ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ? height() : width() ) / 2;
-    int arrowHeight = fr.height() - 6;
-    TQSize ssh = sectionSizeHint( section, p->fontMetrics() );
-    int tw = ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ? ssh.width() : ssh.height() );
-    int ew = 0;
-
-    if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_Header_ArrowAlignment, this ) & Qt::AlignRight )
-	ew = fr.width() - tw - 8;
-    if ( d->sortSection == section && tw <= fr.width() ) {
-	if ( reverse() ) {
-	    tw = fr.width() - tw;
-	    ew = fr.width() - ew - tw;
-	}
-	TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-	if ( isEnabled() )
-	    flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-	if ( d->sortDirection )
-	    flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-	else
-	    flags |= TQStyle::Style_Up;
-        TQRect ar(fr.x() + tw - arrowWidth - 6 + ew, 4, arrowWidth, arrowHeight);
-        if (label(section).isRightToLeft())
-            ar.moveBy( 2*(fr.right() - ar.right()) + ar.width() - fr.width(), 0 );
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_HeaderArrow, p,
-			       ar, tqcolorGroup(), flags, TQStyleOption( this ) );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQHeader::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e )
-{
-    TQPainter p( this );
-    p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().buttonText() );
-    int pos = orient == Qt::Horizontal ? e->rect().left() : e->rect().top();
-    int id = mapToIndex( sectionAt( pos + offset() ) );
-    if ( id < 0 ) {
-	if ( pos > 0 )
-	    id = d->count;
-	else if ( reverse() )
-	    id = d->count - 1;
-	else
-	    id = 0;
-    }
-    if ( reverse() ) {
-	for ( int i = id; i >= 0; i-- ) {
-	    TQRect r = sRect( i );
-	    paintSection( &p, i, r );
-	    if ( r.right() >= e->rect().right() )
-		return;
-	}
-    } else {
-	if ( count() > 0 ) {
-	    for ( int i = id; i <= count(); i++ ) {
-		TQRect r = sRect( i );
-		/*
-		  If the last section is clickable (and thus is
-		  painted raised), draw the virtual section count()
-		  as well. Otherwise it looks ugly.
-		*/
-		if ( i < count() || d->clicks[ mapToSection( count() - 1 ) ] )
-		    paintSection( &p, i, r );
-		if ( hasFocus() && d->focusIdx == i ) {
-		    TQRect fr( r.x()+2, r.y()+2, r.width()-4, r.height()-4 );
-		    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_FocusRect, &p, fr,
-					   tqcolorGroup() );
-		}
-		if ( (orient == Qt::Horizontal && r. right() >= e->rect().right()) ||
-		     (orient == Qt::Vertical && r. bottom() >= e->rect().bottom()) )
-		    return;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \overload
-  \obsolete
-  Use the other overload instead.
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::setSortIndicator( int section, bool ascending )
-{
-    d->sortSection = section;
-    if ( section != -1 )
- 	oldHandleIdx = section;
-    d->sortDirection = ascending;
-    update();
-    updateGeometry();
-}
-
-/*!
-  \fn void TQHeader::setSortIndicator(int section, SortOrder order)
-
-  Sets a sort indicator onto the specified \a section. The indicator's
-  \a order is either Ascending or Descending.
-
-  Only one section can show a sort indicator at any one time. If you
-  don't want any section to show a sort indicator pass a \a section
-  number of -1.
-
-  \sa sortIndicatorSection(), sortIndicatorOrder()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Returns the section showing the sort indicator or -1 if there is no sort indicator.
-
-    \sa setSortIndicator(), sortIndicatorOrder()
-*/
-
-int TQHeader::sortIndicatorSection() const
-{
-    return d->sortSection;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the implied sort order of the TQHeaders sort indicator.
-
-    \sa setSortIndicator(), sortIndicatorSection()
-*/
-
-TQt::SortOrder TQHeader::sortIndicatorOrder() const
-{
-    return d->sortDirection ? TQt::Ascending : TQt::Descending;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Resizes section \a section to \a s pixels wide (or high).
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::resizeSection( int section, int s )
-{
-    setCellSize( section, s );
-    update();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the width (or height) of the \a section in pixels.
-*/
-
-int TQHeader::sectionSize( int section ) const
-{
-    if ( section < 0 || section >= count() )
-	return 0;
-    return d->sizes[section];
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the position (in pixels) at which the \a section starts.
-
-    \sa offset()
-*/
-
-int TQHeader::sectionPos( int section ) const
-{
-    if ( d->positionsDirty )
-	((TQHeader *)this)->calculatePositions();
-    if ( section < 0 || section >= count()  )
-	return 0;
-    return d->positions[ d->s2i[section] ];
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the index of the section which contains the position \a
-    pos given in pixels from the left (or top).
-
-    \sa offset()
-*/
-
-int TQHeader::sectionAt( int pos ) const
-{
-    if ( reverse() )
-	pos = d->lastPos - pos;
-    return d->sectionAt( pos );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the number of the section that corresponds to the specified \a index.
-
-    \warning If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
-    interaction, the mapping exposed by this function will not reflect the
-    order of the headers in the table; i.e., TQTable does not call moveSection()
-    to move sections but handles move operations internally.
-
-    \sa mapToIndex()
-*/
-
-int TQHeader::mapToSection( int index ) const
-{
-    return ( index >= 0 && index < count() ) ? d->i2s[ index ] : -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the index position corresponding to the specified \a section number.
-
-    \warning If TQTable is used to move header sections as a result of user
-    interaction, the mapping exposed by this function will not reflect the
-    order of the headers in the table; i.e., TQTable does not call moveSection()
-    to move sections but handles move operations internally.
-
-    \sa mapToSection()
-*/
-
-int TQHeader::mapToIndex( int section ) const
-{
-    return ( section >= 0 && section < count() ) ? d->s2i[ section ] : -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Moves section \a section to index position \a toIndex.
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::moveSection( int section, int toIndex )
-{
-    int fromIndex = mapToIndex( section );
-    if ( fromIndex == toIndex ||
-	 fromIndex < 0 || fromIndex > count() ||
-	 toIndex < 0 || toIndex > count() )
-	return;
-    int i;
-    int idx = d->i2s[fromIndex];
-    if ( fromIndex < toIndex ) {
-	for ( i = fromIndex; i < toIndex - 1; i++ ) {
-	    int t;
-	    d->i2s[i] = t = d->i2s[i+1];
-	    d->s2i[t] = i;
-	}
-	d->i2s[toIndex-1] = idx;
-	d->s2i[idx] = toIndex-1;
-    } else {
-	for ( i = fromIndex; i > toIndex; i-- ) {
-	    int t;
-	    d->i2s[i] = t = d->i2s[i-1];
-	    d->s2i[t] = i;
-	}
-	d->i2s[toIndex] = idx;
-	d->s2i[idx] = toIndex;
-    }
-    calculatePositions();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if section \a section is clickable; otherwise returns
-    FALSE.
-
-    If \a section is out of range (negative or larger than count() -
-    1): returns TRUE if all sections are clickable; otherwise returns
-    FALSE.
-
-    \sa setClickEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQHeader::isClickEnabled( int section ) const
-{
-    if ( section >= 0 && section < count() ) {
-	return (bool)d->clicks[ section ];
-    }
-
-    for ( int i = 0; i < count(); ++i ) {
-	if ( !d->clicks[ i ] )
-	    return FALSE;
-    }
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if section \a section is resizeable; otherwise
-    returns FALSE.
-
-    If \a section is -1 then this function applies to all sections,
-    i.e. returns TRUE if all sections are resizeable; otherwise
-    returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setResizeEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQHeader::isResizeEnabled( int section ) const
-{
-    if ( section >= 0 && section < count() ) {
-	return (bool)d->resize[ section ];
-    }
-
-    for ( int i = 0; i < count();++i ) {
-	if ( !d->resize[ i ] )
-	    return FALSE;
-    }
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-bool TQHeader::isMovingEnabled() const
-{
-    return d->move;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQHeader::setUpdatesEnabled( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( enable )
-	calculatePositions();
-    TQWidget::setUpdatesEnabled( enable );
-}
-
-
-bool TQHeader::reverse () const
-{
-#if 0
-    return ( orient == Qt::Horizontal && TQApplication::reverseLayout() );
-#else
-    return FALSE;
-#endif
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQHeader::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e )
-	TQWidget::resizeEvent( e );
-
-    if( d->lastPos < width() ) {
-	    offs = 0;
-    }
-
-    if ( e ) {
-	adjustHeaderSize( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ?
-			  width() - e->oldSize().width() : height() - e->oldSize().height() );
-	if ( (orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && height() != e->oldSize().height())
-	     || (orientation() == Qt::Vertical && width() != e->oldSize().width()) )
-	    update();
-    } else
-	adjustHeaderSize();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQHeader::adjustHeaderSize()
-
-    Adjusts the size of the sections to fit the size of the header as
-    completely as possible. Only sections for which isStretchEnabled()
-    is TRUE will be resized.
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::adjustHeaderSize( int diff )
-{
-    if ( !count() )
-	return;
-
-    // we skip the adjustHeaderSize when trying to resize the last column which is set to stretchable
-    if ( d->fullSize == (count() -1) &&
-	 (d->lastPos - d->sizes[count() -1]) > ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ? width() : height() ) )
-  	return;
-
-    if ( d->fullSize >= 0 ) {
-	int sec = mapToSection( d->fullSize );
-	int lsec = mapToSection( count() - 1 );
-	int ns = sectionSize( sec ) +
-		 ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ?
-		   width() : height() ) - ( sectionPos( lsec ) + sectionSize( lsec ) );
-	int os = sectionSize( sec );
-	if ( ns < 20 )
-	    ns = 20;
-	setCellSize( sec, ns );
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-	emit sizeChange( sec, os, ns );
-    } else if ( d->fullSize == -1 ) {
-	int df = diff / count();
-	int part = orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? width() / count() : height() / count();
-	for ( int i = 0; i < count() - 1; ++i ) {
-	    int sec = mapToIndex( i );
-	    int os = sectionSize( sec );
-	    int ns = diff != -1 ? os + df : part;
-	    if ( ns < 20 )
-		ns = 20;
-	    setCellSize( sec, ns );
-	    emit sizeChange( sec, os, ns );
-	}
-	int sec = mapToIndex( count() - 1 );
-	int ns = ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? width() : height() ) - sectionPos( sec );
-	int os = sectionSize( sec );
-	if ( ns < 20 )
-	    ns = 20;
-	setCellSize( sec, ns );
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-	emit sizeChange( sec, os, ns );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the total width of all the header columns.
-*/
-int TQHeader::headerWidth() const
-{
-    if ( d->pos_dirty ) {
-	( (TQHeader*)this )->calculatePositions();
-	d->pos_dirty = FALSE;
-    }
-    return d->lastPos;
-}
-
-void TQHeader::calculatePositions( bool onlyVisible, int start )
-{
-    d->positionsDirty = FALSE;
-    d->lastPos = count() > 0 ? d->positions[start] : 0;
-    for ( int i = start; i < count(); i++ ) {
-  	d->positions[i] = d->lastPos;
-	d->lastPos += d->sizes[d->i2s[i]];
- 	if ( onlyVisible && d->lastPos > offset() +
-	     ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? width() : height() ) )
- 	    break;
-    }
-    d->pos_dirty = onlyVisible;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQHeader::stretching
-    \brief whether the header sections always take up the full width
-    (or height) of the header
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    If \a b is TRUE, section \a section will be resized when the
-    header is resized, so that the sections take up the full width (or
-    height for vertical headers) of the header; otherwise section \a
-    section will be set to be unstretchable and will not resize when
-    the header is resized.
-
-    If \a section is -1, and if \a b is TRUE, then all sections will
-    be resized equally when the header is resized so that they take up
-    the full width (or height for vertical headers) of the header;
-    otherwise all the sections will be set to be unstretchable and
-    will not resize when the header is resized.
-
-    \sa adjustHeaderSize()
-*/
-
-void TQHeader::setStretchEnabled( bool b, int section )
-{
-    if ( b )
-	d->fullSize = section;
-    else
-	d->fullSize = -2;
-    adjustHeaderSize();
-}
-
-bool TQHeader::isStretchEnabled() const
-{
-    return d->fullSize == -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns TRUE if section \a section will resize to take up the full
-    width (or height) of the header; otherwise returns FALSE. If at
-    least one section has stretch enabled the sections will always
-    take up the full width of the header.
-
-    \sa setStretchEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQHeader::isStretchEnabled( int section ) const
-{
-    return d->fullSize == section;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQHeader::fontChange( const TQFont &oldFont )
-{
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    d->height = ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) ? fm.lineSpacing() + 6 : fm.width( ' ' );
-    TQWidget::fontChange( oldFont );
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_HEADER
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.h
deleted file mode 100644
index cfd5491..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqheader.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,220 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQHeader widget class (table header)
-**
-** Created : 961105
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQHEADER_H
-#define TQHEADER_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqstring.h"
-#include "tqiconset.h" // conversion TQPixmap->TQIconset
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_HEADER
-
-class TQShowEvent;
-class TQHeaderData;
-class TQTable;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQHeader : public TQWidget
-{
-    friend class TQTable;
-    friend class TQTableHeader;
-    friend class TQListView;
-
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( Qt::Orientation orientation READ orientation WRITE setOrientation )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool tracking READ tracking WRITE setTracking )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int count READ count )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int offset READ offset WRITE setOffset )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool moving READ isMovingEnabled WRITE setMovingEnabled )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool stretching READ isStretchEnabled WRITE setStretchEnabled )
-
-public:
-    TQHeader( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQHeader( int, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQHeader();
-
-    int		addLabel( const TQString &, int size = -1 );
-    int		addLabel( const TQIconSet&, const TQString &, int size = -1 );
-    void 	removeLabel( int section );
-    virtual void setLabel( int, const TQString &, int size = -1 );
-    virtual void setLabel( int, const TQIconSet&, const TQString &, int size = -1 );
-    TQString 	label( int section ) const;
-    TQIconSet* 	iconSet( int section ) const;
-
-    virtual void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation );
-    Qt::Orientation orientation() const;
-    virtual void setTracking( bool enable );
-    bool	tracking() const;
-
-    virtual void setClickEnabled( bool, int section = -1 );
-    virtual void setResizeEnabled( bool, int section = -1 );
-    virtual void setMovingEnabled( bool );
-    virtual void setStretchEnabled( bool b, int section );
-    void 	setStretchEnabled( bool b ) { setStretchEnabled( b, -1 ); }
-    bool 	isClickEnabled( int section = -1 ) const;
-    bool 	isResizeEnabled( int section = -1 ) const;
-    bool 	isMovingEnabled() const;
-    bool 	isStretchEnabled() const;
-    bool 	isStretchEnabled( int section ) const;
-
-    void 	resizeSection( int section, int s );
-    int		sectionSize( int section ) const;
-    int		sectionPos( int section ) const;
-    int		sectionAt( int pos ) const;
-    int		count() const;
-    int 	headerWidth() const;
-    TQRect	sectionRect( int section ) const;
-
-    virtual void setCellSize( int , int ); // obsolete, do not use
-    int		cellSize( int i ) const { return sectionSize( mapToSection(i) ); } // obsolete, do not use
-    int		cellPos( int ) const; // obsolete, do not use
-    int		cellAt( int pos ) const { return mapToIndex( sectionAt(pos + offset()) ); } // obsolete, do not use
-
-    int 	offset() const;
-
-    TQSize	tqsizeHint() const;
-
-    int		mapToSection( int index ) const;
-    int		mapToIndex( int section ) const;
-    int		mapToLogical( int ) const; // obsolete, do not use
-    int		mapToActual( int ) const; // obsolete, do not use
-
-    void 	moveSection( int section, int toIndex );
-    virtual void moveCell( int, int); // obsolete, do not use
-
-    void 	setSortIndicator( int section, bool ascending = TRUE ); // obsolete, do not use
-    inline void setSortIndicator( int section, TQt::SortOrder order )
-	{ setSortIndicator( section, (order == TQt::Ascending) ); }
-    int		sortIndicatorSection() const;
-    TQt::SortOrder	sortIndicatorOrder() const;
-
-    void        adjustHeaderSize() { adjustHeaderSize( -1 ); }
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void 	setUpdatesEnabled( bool enable );
-    virtual void setOffset( int pos );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void	clicked( int section );
-    void	pressed( int section );
-    void	released( int section );
-    void	sizeChange( int section, int oldSize, int newSize );
-    void	indexChange( int section, int fromIndex, int toIndex );
-    void	sectionClicked( int ); // obsolete, do not use
-    void	moved( int, int ); // obsolete, do not use
-    void	sectionHandleDoubleClicked( int section );
-
-protected:
-    void	paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void	showEvent( TQShowEvent *e );
-    void 	resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e );
-    TQRect	sRect( int index );
-
-    virtual void paintSection( TQPainter *p, int index, const TQRect& fr);
-    virtual void paintSectionLabel( TQPainter* p, int index, const TQRect& fr );
-
-    void 	fontChange( const TQFont & );
-
-    void	mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-
-    void	keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * );
-    void	keyReleaseEvent( TQKeyEvent * );
-
-private:
-    void	handleColumnMove( int fromIdx, int toIdx );
-    void 	adjustHeaderSize( int diff );
-    void	init( int );
-
-    void	paintRect( int p, int s );
-    void	markLine( int idx );
-    void	unMarkLine( int idx );
-    int		pPos( int i ) const;
-    int		pSize( int i ) const;
-    int 	findLine( int );
-    int		handleAt( int p );
-    bool 	reverse() const;
-    void 	calculatePositions( bool onlyVisible = FALSE, int start = 0 );
-    void	handleColumnResize(int, int, bool, bool = TRUE );
-    TQSize	sectionSizeHint( int section, const TQFontMetrics& fm ) const;
-    void	setSectionSizeAndHeight( int section, int size );
-
-    void 	resizeArrays( int size );
-    void 	setIsATableHeader( bool b );
-    int		offs;
-    int		handleIdx;
-    int		oldHIdxSize;
-    int		moveToIdx;
-    enum State { Idle, Sliding, Pressed, Moving, Blocked };
-    State	state;
-    TQCOORD	clickPos;
-    bool	trackingIsOn;
-    int oldHandleIdx;
-    int	cachedPos; // not used
-    Qt::Orientation orient;
-
-    TQHeaderData *d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQHeader( const TQHeader & );
-    TQHeader &operator=( const TQHeader & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-inline Qt::Orientation TQHeader::orientation() const
-{
-    return orient;
-}
-
-inline void TQHeader::setTracking( bool enable ) { trackingIsOn = enable; }
-inline bool TQHeader::tracking() const { return trackingIsOn; }
-
-extern TQ_EXPORT bool qt_qheader_label_return_null_strings; // needed for professional edition
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_HEADER
-
-#endif // TQHEADER_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 37765df..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQHGroupBox class
-**
-** Created : 990602
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqhgroupbox.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_HGROUPBOX
-
-/*!
-    \class TQHGroupBox tqhgroupbox.h
-
-    \brief The TQHGroupBox widget organizes widgets in a group with one
-    horizontal row.
-
-    \ingroup organizers
-    \ingroup geomanagement
-    \ingroup appearance
-
-    TQHGroupBox is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on top
-    of TQGroupBox. Think of it as a TQHBox that offers a frame with a
-    title.
-
-    \img qgroupboxes.png Group Boxes
-
-    \sa TQVGroupBox
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a horizontal group box with no title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-TQHGroupBox::TQHGroupBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, parent, name )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a horizontal group box with the title \a title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQHGroupBox::TQHGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent,
-			    const char *name )
-    : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Vertical /* sic! */, title, parent, name )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the horizontal group box, deleting its child widgets.
-*/
-TQHGroupBox::~TQHGroupBox()
-{
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.h
deleted file mode 100644
index bff396c..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqhgroupbox.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,68 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQHGroupBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 990602
-**
-** Copyright (C) 1999-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQHGROUPBOX_H
-#define TQHGROUPBOX_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqgroupbox.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_HGROUPBOX
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQHGroupBox : public TQGroupBox
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQHGroupBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQHGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQHGroupBox();
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQHGroupBox( const TQHGroupBox & );
-    TQHGroupBox &operator=( const TQHGroupBox & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_HGROUPBOX
-
-#endif // TQHGROUPBOX_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 206a7cd..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1194 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQLabel widget class
-**
-** Created : 941215
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqlabel.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LABEL
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqaccel.h"
-#include "tqmovie.h"
-#include "tqimage.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqpicture.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqsimplerichtext.h"
-#include "tqstylesheet.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-
-class TQLabelPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQLabelPrivate()
-	:img(0), pix(0), valid_hints( -1 )
-    {}
-    TQImage* img; // for scaled contents
-    TQPixmap* pix; // for scaled contents
-    TQSize sh;
-    TQSize msh;
-    int valid_hints; // stores the frameWidth() for the stored size hint, -1 otherwise
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQLabel tqlabel.h
-    \brief The TQLabel widget provides a text or image display.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \ingroup text
-    \mainclass
-
-    TQLabel is used for displaying text or an image. No user
-    interaction functionality is provided. The visual appearance of
-    the label can be configured in various ways, and it can be used
-    for specifying a focus accelerator key for another widget.
-
-    A TQLabel can contain any of the following content types:
-    \table
-    \header \i Content \i Setting
-    \row \i Plain text
-	 \i Pass a TQString to setText().
-    \row \i Rich text
-	 \i Pass a TQString that contains rich text to setText().
-    \row \i A pixmap
-	 \i Pass a TQPixmap to setPixmap().
-    \row \i A movie
-	 \i Pass a TQMovie to setMovie().
-    \row \i A number
-	 \i Pass an \e int or a \e double to setNum(), which converts
-	    the number to plain text.
-    \row \i Nothing
-	 \i The same as an empty plain text. This is the default. Set
-	    by clear().
-    \endtable
-
-    When the content is changed using any of these functions, any
-    previous content is cleared.
-
-    The look of a TQLabel can be tuned in several ways. All the
-    settings of TQFrame are available for specifying a widget frame.
-    The positioning of the content within the TQLabel widget area can
-    be tuned with tqsetAlignment() and setIndent(). For example, this
-    code sets up a sunken panel with a two-line text in the bottom
-    right corner (both lines being flush with the right side of the
-    label):
-    \code
-    TQLabel *label = new TQLabel( this );
-    label->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Panel | TQFrame::Sunken );
-    label->setText( "first line\nsecond line" );
-    label->tqsetAlignment( AlignBottom | AlignRight );
-    \endcode
-
-    A TQLabel is often used as a label for an interactive widget. For
-    this use TQLabel provides a useful mechanism for adding an
-    accelerator key (see TQAccel) that will set the keyboard focus to
-    the other widget (called the TQLabel's "buddy"). For example:
-    \code
-    TQLineEdit* phoneEdit = new TQLineEdit( this, "phoneEdit" );
-    TQLabel* phoneLabel = new TQLabel( phoneEdit, "&Phone:", this, "phoneLabel" );
-    \endcode
-
-    In this example, keyboard focus is transferred to the label's
-    buddy (the TQLineEdit) when the user presses Alt+P. You can
-    also use the setBuddy() function to accomplish the same thing.
-
-    <img src=qlabel-m.png> <img src=qlabel-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQLineEdit, TQTextEdit, TQPixmap, TQMovie,
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Label\endlink
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQPicture * TQLabel::picture() const
-
-    Returns the label's picture or 0 if the label doesn't have a
-    picture.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty label.
-
-    The \a parent, \a name and widget flag \a f, arguments are passed
-    to the TQFrame constructor.
-
-    \sa tqsetAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), setIndent()
-*/
-
-TQLabel::TQLabel( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, f | TQt::WMouseNoMask  )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a label that displays the text, \a text.
-
-    The \a parent, \a name and widget flag \a f, arguments are passed
-    to the TQFrame constructor.
-
-    \sa setText(), tqsetAlignment(), setFrameStyle(), setIndent()
-*/
-
-TQLabel::TQLabel( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char *name,
-		WFlags f )
-	: TQFrame( parent, name, f | TQt::WMouseNoMask  )
-{
-    init();
-    setText( text );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a label that displays the text \a text. The label has a
-    buddy widget, \a buddy.
-
-    If the \a text contains an underlined letter (a letter preceded by
-    an ampersand, \&), and the text is in plain text format, when the
-    user presses Alt+ the underlined letter, focus is passed to the
-    buddy widget.
-
-    The \a parent, \a name and widget flag, \a f, arguments are passed
-    to the TQFrame constructor.
-
-    \sa setText(), setBuddy(), tqsetAlignment(), setFrameStyle(),
-    setIndent()
-*/
-TQLabel::TQLabel( TQWidget *buddy,  const TQString &text,
-		TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, f | TQt::WMouseNoMask )
-{
-    init();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    setBuddy( buddy );
-#endif
-    setText( text );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the label.
-*/
-
-TQLabel::~TQLabel()
-{
-    clearContents();
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-void TQLabel::init()
-{
-    lpixmap = 0;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-    lmovie = 0;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    lbuddy = 0;
-    accel = 0;
-#endif
-    lpixmap = 0;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE
-    lpicture = 0;
-#endif
-    align = TQt::AlignAuto | TQt::AlignVCenter | TQt::ExpandTabs;
-    extraMargin = -1;
-    autoresize = FALSE;
-    scaledcontents = FALSE;
-    textformat = TQt::AutoText;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    doc = 0;
-#endif
-
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Preferred, TQSizePolicy::Preferred ) );
-    d = new TQLabelPrivate;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLabel::text
-    \brief the label's text
-
-    If no text has been set this will return an empty string. Setting
-    the text clears any previous content, unless they are the same.
-
-    The text will be interpreted either as a plain text or as a rich
-    text, depending on the text format setting; see setTextFormat().
-    The default setting is \c AutoText, i.e. TQLabel will try to
-    auto-detect the format of the text set.
-
-    If the text is interpreted as a plain text and a buddy has been
-    set, the buddy accelerator key is updated from the new text.
-
-    The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
-
-    Note that Qlabel is well-suited to display small rich text
-    documents, i.e. those small documents that get their document
-    specific settings (font, text color, link color) from the label's
-    palette and font properties. For large documents, use TQTextEdit
-    in read-only mode instead. TQTextEdit will flicker less on resize
-    and can also provide a scrollbar when necessary.
-
-    \sa text, setTextFormat(), setBuddy(), tqalignment
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::setText( const TQString &text )
-{
-    if ( ltext == text )
-	return;
-    TQSize osh = tqsizeHint();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    bool hadRichtext = doc != 0;
-#endif
-    clearContents();
-    ltext = text;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    bool useRichText = (textformat == TQt::RichText ||
-      ( ( textformat == TQt::AutoText ) && TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText(ltext) ) );
-#else
-    bool useRichText = TRUE;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    // ### Setting accelerators for rich text labels will not work.
-    // Eg. <b>&gt;Hello</b> will return ALT+G which is clearly
-    // not intended.
-    if ( !useRichText ) {
-	int p = TQAccel::shortcutKey( ltext );
-	if ( p ) {
-	    if ( !accel )
-		accel = new TQAccel( this, "accel label accel" );
-	    accel->connectItem( accel->insertItem( p ),
-				this, TQT_SLOT(acceleratorSlot()) );
-	}
-    }
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    if ( useRichText ) {
-	if ( !hadRichtext )
-	    align |= TQt::WordBreak;
-	TQString t = ltext;
-	if ( align & Qt::AlignRight )
-	    t.prepend( "<div align=\"right\">");
-	else if ( align & Qt::AlignHCenter )
-	    t.prepend( "<div align=\"center\">");
-	if ( (align & TQt::WordBreak) == 0  )
-	    t.prepend( "<nobr>" );
-	doc = new TQSimpleRichText( t, font() );
-    }
-#endif
-
-    updateLabel( osh );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Clears any label contents. Equivalent to setText( "" ).
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::clear()
-{
-    setText( TQString::tqfromLatin1("") );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLabel::pixmap
-    \brief the label's pixmap
-
-    If no pixmap has been set this will return an invalid pixmap.
-
-    Setting the pixmap clears any previous content, and resizes the
-    label if \l TQLabel::autoResize() is TRUE. The buddy accelerator,
-    if any, is disabled.
-*/
-void TQLabel::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap )
-{
-    TQSize osh = tqsizeHint();
-
-    if ( !lpixmap || lpixmap->serialNumber() != pixmap.serialNumber() ) {
-	clearContents();
-	lpixmap = new TQPixmap( pixmap );
-    }
-
-    if ( lpixmap->depth() == 1 && !lpixmap->mask() )
-	lpixmap->setMask( *((TQBitmap *)lpixmap) );
-
-    updateLabel( osh );
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE
-/*!
-    Sets the label contents to \a picture. Any previous content is
-    cleared.
-
-    The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
-
-    \sa picture(), setBuddy()
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::setPicture( const TQPicture &picture )
-{
-    TQSize osh = tqsizeHint();
-    clearContents();
-    lpicture = new TQPicture( picture );
-
-    updateLabel( osh );
-}
-#endif // TQT_NO_PICTURE
-
-/*!
-    Sets the label contents to plain text containing the textual
-    representation of integer \a num. Any previous content is cleared.
-    Does nothing if the integer's string representation is the same as
-    the current contents of the label.
-
-    The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
-
-    The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
-
-    \sa setText(), TQString::setNum(), setBuddy()
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::setNum( int num )
-{
-    TQString str;
-    str.setNum( num );
-	setText( str );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Sets the label contents to plain text containing the textual
-    representation of double \a num. Any previous content is cleared.
-    Does nothing if the double's string representation is the same as
-    the current contents of the label.
-
-    The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
-
-    The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
-
-    \sa setText(), TQString::setNum(), setBuddy()
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::setNum( double num )
-{
-    TQString str;
-    str.setNum( num );
-	setText( str );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLabel::tqalignment
-    \brief the tqalignment of the label's contents
-
-    The tqalignment is a bitwise OR of \c TQt::AlignmentFlags and \c
-    TQt::TextFlags values. The \c ExpandTabs, \c SingleLine and \c
-    ShowPrefix flags apply only if the label contains plain text;
-    otherwise they are ignored. The \c DontClip flag is always
-    ignored. \c WordBreak applies to both rich text and plain text
-    labels. The \c BreakAnywhere flag is not supported in TQLabel.
-
-    If the label has a buddy, the \c ShowPrefix flag is forced to
-    TRUE.
-
-    The default tqalignment is \c{AlignAuto | AlignVCenter | ExpandTabs}
-    if the label doesn't have a buddy and \c{AlignAuto | AlignVCenter
-    | ExpandTabs | ShowPrefix} if the label has a buddy. If the label
-    contains rich text, additionally \c WordBreak is turned on.
-
-    \sa TQt::AlignmentFlags, tqalignment, setBuddy(), text
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::tqsetAlignment( int tqalignment )
-{
-    if ( tqalignment == align )
-	return;
-    TQSize osh = tqsizeHint();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    if ( lbuddy )
-	align = tqalignment | TQt::ShowPrefix;
-    else
-#endif
-	align = tqalignment;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    TQString t = ltext;
-    if ( !t.isNull() ) {
-	ltext = TQString::null;
-	setText( t );
-    }
-#endif
-
-    updateLabel( osh );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLabel::indent
-    \brief the label's text indent in pixels
-
-    If a label displays text, the indent applies to the left edge if
-    tqalignment() is \c AlignLeft, to the right edge if tqalignment() is
-    \c AlignRight, to the top edge if tqalignment() is \c AlignTop, and
-    to to the bottom edge if tqalignment() is \c AlignBottom.
-
-    If indent is negative, or if no indent has been set, the label
-    computes the effective indent as follows: If frameWidth() is 0,
-    the effective indent becomes 0. If frameWidth() is greater than 0,
-    the effective indent becomes half the width of the "x" character
-    of the widget's current font().
-
-    \sa tqalignment, frameWidth(), font()
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::setIndent( int indent )
-{
-    extraMargin = indent;
-    updateLabel( TQSize( -1, -1 ) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \fn bool TQLabel::autoResize() const
-
-  \obsolete
-
-  Returns TRUE if auto-resizing is enabled, or FALSE if auto-resizing
-  is disabled.
-
-  Auto-resizing is disabled by default.
-
-  \sa setAutoResize()
-*/
-
-/*! \obsolete
-  Enables auto-resizing if \a enable is TRUE, or disables it if \a
-  enable is FALSE.
-
-  When auto-resizing is enabled the label will resize itself to fit
-  the contents whenever the contents change. The top-left corner is
-  not moved. This is useful for TQLabel widgets that are not managed by
-  a TQLayout (e.g., top-level widgets).
-
-  Auto-resizing is disabled by default.
-
-  \sa autoResize(), adjustSize(), tqsizeHint()
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::setAutoResize( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( (bool)autoresize != enable ) {
-	autoresize = enable;
-	if ( autoresize )
-	    adjustSize();			// calls resize which repaints
-    }
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the size that will be used if the width of the label is \a
-    w. If \a w is -1, the tqsizeHint() is returned.
-*/
-
-TQSize TQLabel::sizeForWidth( int w ) const
-{
-    TQRect br;
-    TQPixmap *pix = pixmap();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE
-    TQPicture *pic = picture();
-#else
-    const int pic = 0;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-    TQMovie *mov = movie();
-#else
-    const int mov = 0;
-#endif
-    int hextra = 2 * frameWidth();
-    int vextra = hextra;
-    TQFontMetrics fm( fontMetrics() );
-    int xw = fm.width( 'x' );
-    if ( !mov && !pix && !pic ) {
-	int m = indent();
-	if ( m < 0 && hextra ) // no indent, but we do have a frame
-	    m = xw / 2 - margin();
-	if ( m >= 0 ) {
-	    int horizAlign = TQApplication::horizontalAlignment( align );
-	    if ( (horizAlign & Qt::AlignLeft) || (horizAlign & Qt::AlignRight ) )
-		hextra += m;
-	    if ( (align & Qt::AlignTop) || (align & Qt::AlignBottom ) )
-		vextra += m;
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( pix )
-	br = pix->rect();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE
-    else if ( pic )
-	br = pic->boundingRect();
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-    else if ( mov )
-	br = mov->framePixmap().rect();
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    else if ( doc ) {
-	int oldW = doc->width();
-	if ( align & TQt::WordBreak ) {
-	    if ( w < 0 )
-		doc->adjustSize();
-	    else
-		doc->setWidth( w-hextra );
-	}
-	br = TQRect( 0, 0, doc->widthUsed(), doc->height() );
-	doc->setWidth( oldW );
-    }
-#endif
-    else {
-	bool tryWidth = (w < 0) && (align & TQt::WordBreak);
-	if ( tryWidth )
-	    w = xw * 80;
-	else if ( w < 0 )
-	    w = 2000;
-	w -= hextra;
-	br = fm.boundingRect( 0, 0, w ,2000, tqalignment(), text() );
-	if ( tryWidth && br.height() < 4*fm.lineSpacing() && br.width() > w/2 )
-		br = fm.boundingRect( 0, 0, w/2, 2000, tqalignment(), text() );
-	if ( tryWidth && br.height() < 2*fm.lineSpacing() && br.width() > w/4 )
-	    br = fm.boundingRect( 0, 0, w/4, 2000, tqalignment(), text() );
-    }
-    int wid = br.width() + hextra;
-    int hei = br.height() + vextra;
-
-    return TQSize( wid, hei );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-int TQLabel::heightForWidth( int w ) const
-{
-    if (
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-	doc ||
-#endif
-	(align & TQt::WordBreak) )
-	return sizeForWidth( w ).height();
-    return TQWidget::heightForWidth( w );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQLabel::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( d->valid_hints != frameWidth() )
-	(void) TQLabel::tqminimumSizeHint();
-    return d->sh;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQLabel::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( d->valid_hints == frameWidth() )
-	return d->msh;
-
-    constPolish();
-    d->valid_hints = frameWidth();
-    d->sh = sizeForWidth( -1 );
-    TQSize sz( -1, -1 );
-
-    if (
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-	 !doc &&
-#endif
-	 (align & TQt::WordBreak) == 0 ) {
-	sz = d->sh;
-    } else {
-	// think about caching these for performance
-	sz.rwidth() = sizeForWidth( 0 ).width();
-	sz.rheight() = sizeForWidth(TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX).height();
-	if ( d->sh.height() < sz.height() )
-	    sz.rheight() = d->sh.height();
-    }
-    if ( tqsizePolicy().horData() == TQSizePolicy::Ignored )
-	sz.rwidth() = -1;
-    if ( tqsizePolicy().verData() == TQSizePolicy::Ignored )
-	sz.rheight() = -1;
-    d->msh = sz;
-    return sz;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-void TQLabel::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* e )
-{
-    TQFrame::resizeEvent( e );
-
-#ifdef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    static const bool doc = FALSE;
-#endif
-
-    // optimize for standard labels
-    if ( frameShape() == NoFrame && (align & TQt::WordBreak) == 0 && !doc &&
-	 ( e->oldSize().width() >= e->size().width() && (align & Qt::AlignLeft ) == Qt::AlignLeft )
-	 && ( e->oldSize().height() >= e->size().height() && (align & Qt::AlignTop ) == Qt::AlignTop ) ) {
-	setWFlags( TQt::WResizeNoErase );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    clearWFlags( TQt::WResizeNoErase );
-    TQRect cr = contentsRect();
-    if ( !lpixmap ||  !cr.isValid() ||
-	 // masked pixmaps can only reduce flicker when being top/left
-	 // aligned and when we do not perform scaled contents
-	 ( lpixmap->hasAlpha() && ( scaledcontents || ( ( align & (Qt::AlignLeft|Qt::AlignTop) ) != (Qt::AlignLeft|Qt::AlignTop) ) ) ) )
-	return;
-
-    setWFlags( TQt::WResizeNoErase );
-
-    if ( !scaledcontents ) {
-	// don't we all love TQFrame? Reduce pixmap flicker
-	TQRegion reg = TQRect( TQPoint(0, 0), e->size() );
-	reg = reg.subtract( cr );
-	int x = cr.x();
-	int y = cr.y();
-	int w = lpixmap->width();
-	int h = lpixmap->height();
-	if ( (align & TQt::AlignVCenter) == TQt::AlignVCenter )
-	    y += cr.height()/2 - h/2;
-	else if ( (align & TQt::AlignBottom) == TQt::AlignBottom)
-	    y += cr.height() - h;
-	if ( (align & TQt::AlignRight) == TQt::AlignRight )
-	    x += cr.width() - w;
-	else if ( (align & TQt::AlignHCenter) == TQt::AlignHCenter )
-	    x += cr.width()/2 - w/2;
-	if ( x > cr.x() )
-	    reg = reg.unite( TQRect( cr.x(), cr.y(), x - cr.x(), cr.height() ) );
-	if ( y > cr.y() )
-	    reg = reg.unite( TQRect( cr.x(), cr.y(), cr.width(), y - cr.y() ) );
-
-	if ( x + w < cr.right() )
-	    reg = reg.unite( TQRect( x + w, cr.y(),  cr.right() - x - w, cr.height() ) );
-	if ( y + h < cr.bottom() )
-	    reg = reg.unite( TQRect( cr.x(), y +  h, cr.width(), cr.bottom() - y - h ) );
-
-	erase( reg );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Draws the label contents using the painter \a p.
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::drawContents( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    TQRect cr = contentsRect();
-
-    TQPixmap *pix = pixmap();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE
-    TQPicture *pic = picture();
-#else
-    const int pic = 0;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-    TQMovie *mov = movie();
-#else
-    const int mov = 0;
-#endif
-
-    if ( !mov && !pix && !pic ) {
-	int m = indent();
-	if ( m < 0 && frameWidth() ) // no indent, but we do have a frame
-	    m = fontMetrics().width('x') / 2 - margin();
-	if ( m > 0 ) {
-	    int hAlign = TQApplication::horizontalAlignment( align );
-	    if ( hAlign & Qt::AlignLeft )
-		cr.setLeft( cr.left() + m );
-	    if ( hAlign & Qt::AlignRight )
-		cr.setRight( cr.right() - m );
-	    if ( align & Qt::AlignTop )
-		cr.setTop( cr.top() + m );
-	    if ( align & Qt::AlignBottom )
-		cr.setBottom( cr.bottom() - m );
-	}
-    }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-    if ( mov ) {
-	// ### should add movie to qDrawItem
-	TQRect r = tqstyle().tqitemRect( p, cr, align, isEnabled(), &(mov->framePixmap()),
-				    TQString() );
-	// ### could resize movie frame at this point
-	p->drawPixmap(r.x(), r.y(), mov->framePixmap() );
-    }
-    else
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    if ( doc ) {
-	doc->setWidth(p, cr.width() );
-	int rh = doc->height();
-	int yo = 0;
-	if ( align & Qt::AlignVCenter )
-	    yo = (cr.height()-rh)/2;
-	else if ( align & Qt::AlignBottom )
-	    yo = cr.height()-rh;
-	if (! isEnabled() &&
-	    tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_EtchDisabledText, this)) {
-	    TQColorGroup cg = tqcolorGroup();
-	    cg.setColor( TQColorGroup::Text, cg.light() );
-	    doc->draw(p, cr.x()+1, cr.y()+yo+1, cr, cg, 0);
-	}
-
-	// TQSimpleRichText always draws with TQColorGroup::Text as with
-	// background mode PaletteBase. TQLabel typically has
-	// background mode PaletteBackground, so we create a temporary
-	// color group with the text color adjusted.
-	TQColorGroup cg = tqcolorGroup();
-	if ( backgroundMode() != TQt::PaletteBase && isEnabled() )
-	    cg.setColor( TQColorGroup::Text, paletteForegroundColor() );
-
-	doc->draw(p, cr.x(), cr.y()+yo, cr, cg, 0);
-    } else
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE
-    if ( pic ) {
-	TQRect br = pic->boundingRect();
-	int rw = br.width();
-	int rh = br.height();
-	if ( scaledcontents ) {
-	    p->save();
-	    p->translate( cr.x(), cr.y() );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TRANSFORMATIONS
-	    p->scale( (double)cr.width()/rw, (double)cr.height()/rh );
-#endif
-	    p->drawPicture( -br.x(), -br.y(), *pic );
-	    p->restore();
-	} else {
-	    int xo = 0;
-	    int yo = 0;
-	    if ( align & Qt::AlignVCenter )
-		yo = (cr.height()-rh)/2;
-	    else if ( align & Qt::AlignBottom )
-		yo = cr.height()-rh;
-	    if ( align & Qt::AlignRight )
-		xo = cr.width()-rw;
-	    else if ( align & Qt::AlignHCenter )
-		xo = (cr.width()-rw)/2;
-	    p->drawPicture( cr.x()+xo-br.x(), cr.y()+yo-br.y(), *pic );
-	}
-    } else
-#endif
-    {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_SMOOTHSCALE
-	if ( scaledcontents && pix ) {
-	    if ( !d->img )
-		d->img = new TQImage( lpixmap->convertToImage() );
-
-	    if ( !d->pix )
-		d->pix = new TQPixmap;
-	    if ( d->pix->size() != cr.size() )
-		d->pix->convertFromImage( d->img->smoothScale( cr.width(), cr.height() ) );
-	    pix = d->pix;
-	}
-#endif
-	int tqalignment = align;
-	if ((align & TQt::ShowPrefix) && !tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_UnderlineAccelerator, this))
-	    tqalignment |= TQt::NoAccel;
-	// ordinary text or pixmap label
-	tqstyle().drawItem( p, cr, tqalignment, tqcolorGroup(), isEnabled(),
-			  pix, ltext );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Updates the label, but not the frame.
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::updateLabel( TQSize oldSizeHint )
-{
-    d->valid_hints = -1;
-    TQSizePolicy policy = tqsizePolicy();
-    bool wordBreak = align & TQt::WordBreak;
-    policy.setHeightForWidth( wordBreak );
-    if ( policy != tqsizePolicy() )
-	tqsetSizePolicy( policy );
-    if ( tqsizeHint() != oldSizeHint )
-	updateGeometry();
-    if ( autoresize ) {
-	adjustSize();
-	update( contentsRect() );
-    } else {
-	update( contentsRect() );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-
-  Internal slot, used to set focus for accelerator labels.
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-void TQLabel::acceleratorSlot()
-{
-    if ( !lbuddy )
-	return;
-    TQWidget * w = lbuddy;
-    while ( w->focusProxy() )
-	w = TQT_TQWIDGET(w->focusProxy());
-    if ( !w->hasFocus() &&
-	 w->isEnabled() &&
-	 w->isVisible() &&
-	 w->focusPolicy() != Qt::NoFocus ) {
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-	w->setFocus( TQFocusEvent::Shortcut );
-#else // USE_QT4
-	TQFocusEvent::setReason( TQFocusEvent::Shortcut );
-	w->setFocus();
-	TQFocusEvent::resetReason();
-#endif // USE_QT4
-    }
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-
-  Internal slot, used to clean up if the buddy widget dies.
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-void TQLabel::buddyDied() // I can't remember if I cried.
-{
-    lbuddy = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets this label's buddy to \a buddy.
-
-    When the user presses the accelerator key indicated by this label,
-    the keyboard focus is transferred to the label's buddy widget.
-
-    The buddy mechanism is only available for TQLabels that contain
-    plain text in which one letter is prefixed with an ampersand, \&.
-    This letter is set as the accelerator key. The letter is displayed
-    underlined, and the '\&' is not displayed (i.e. the \c ShowPrefix
-    tqalignment flag is turned on; see tqsetAlignment()).
-
-    In a dialog, you might create two data entry widgets and a label
-    for each, and set up the tqgeometry tqlayout so each label is just to
-    the left of its data entry widget (its "buddy"), for example:
-    \code
-    TQLineEdit *nameEd  = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    TQLabel    *nameLb  = new TQLabel( "&Name:", this );
-    nameLb->setBuddy( nameEd );
-    TQLineEdit *phoneEd = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    TQLabel    *phoneLb = new TQLabel( "&Phone:", this );
-    phoneLb->setBuddy( phoneEd );
-    // ( tqlayout setup not shown )
-    \endcode
-
-    With the code above, the focus jumps to the Name field when the
-    user presses Alt+N, and to the Phone field when the user presses
-    Alt+P.
-
-    To unset a previously set buddy, call this function with \a buddy
-    set to 0.
-
-    \sa buddy(), setText(), TQAccel, tqsetAlignment()
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::setBuddy( TQWidget *buddy )
-{
-    if ( buddy )
-	tqsetAlignment( tqalignment() | TQt::ShowPrefix );
-    else
-	tqsetAlignment( tqalignment() & ~TQt::ShowPrefix );
-
-    if ( lbuddy )
-	disconnect( lbuddy, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(buddyDied()) );
-
-    lbuddy = buddy;
-
-    if ( !lbuddy )
-	return;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    if ( !( textformat == TQt::RichText || (textformat == TQt::AutoText &&
-				       TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText(ltext) ) ) )
-#endif
-    {
-	int p = TQAccel::shortcutKey( ltext );
-	if ( p ) {
-	    if ( !accel )
-		accel = new TQAccel( this, "accel label accel" );
-	    accel->connectItem( accel->insertItem( p ),
-				this, TQT_SLOT(acceleratorSlot()) );
-	}
-    }
-
-    connect( lbuddy, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(buddyDied()) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns this label's buddy, or 0 if no buddy is currently set.
-
-    \sa setBuddy()
-*/
-
-TQWidget * TQLabel::buddy() const
-{
-    return lbuddy;
-}
-#endif //TQT_NO_ACCEL
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-void TQLabel::movieUpdated(const TQRect& rect)
-{
-    TQMovie *mov = movie();
-    if ( mov && !mov->isNull() ) {
-	TQRect r = contentsRect();
-	r = tqstyle().tqitemRect( 0, r, align, isEnabled(), &(mov->framePixmap()),
-			      TQString() );
-	r.moveBy(rect.x(), rect.y());
-	r.setWidth(TQMIN(r.width(), rect.width()));
-	r.setHeight(TQMIN(r.height(), rect.height()));
-	tqrepaint( r, mov->framePixmap().mask() != 0 );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQLabel::movieResized( const TQSize& size )
-{
-    d->valid_hints = -1;
-    if ( autoresize )
-	adjustSize();
-    movieUpdated( TQRect( TQPoint(0,0), size ) );
-    updateGeometry();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the label contents to \a movie. Any previous content is
-    cleared.
-
-    The buddy accelerator, if any, is disabled.
-
-    The label resizes itself if auto-resizing is enabled.
-
-    \sa movie(), setBuddy()
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::setMovie( const TQMovie& movie )
-{
-    TQSize osh = tqsizeHint();
-    clearContents();
-
-    lmovie = new TQMovie( movie );
-	lmovie->connectResize(this, TQT_SLOT(movieResized(const TQSize&)));
-	lmovie->connectUpdate(this, TQT_SLOT(movieUpdated(const TQRect&)));
-
-    if ( !lmovie->running() )	// Assume that if the movie is running,
-	updateLabel( osh );	// resize/update Q_SIGNALS will come soon enough
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_MOVIE
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-
-  Clears any contents, without updating/repainting the label.
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::clearContents()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    delete doc;
-    doc = 0;
-#endif
-
-    delete lpixmap;
-    lpixmap = 0;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE
-    delete lpicture;
-    lpicture = 0;
-#endif
-    delete d->img;
-    d->img = 0;
-    delete d->pix;
-    d->pix = 0;
-
-    ltext = TQString::null;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    if ( accel )
-	accel->clear();
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-    if ( lmovie ) {
-	lmovie->disconnectResize(this, TQT_SLOT(movieResized(const TQSize&)));
-	lmovie->disconnectUpdate(this, TQT_SLOT(movieUpdated(const TQRect&)));
-	delete lmovie;
-	lmovie = 0;
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the label's movie, or 0 if no movie has been
-    set.
-
-    \sa setMovie()
-*/
-
-TQMovie* TQLabel::movie() const
-{
-    return lmovie;
-}
-
-#endif  // TQT_NO_MOVIE
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLabel::backgroundMode
-    \brief the label's background mode
-
-    Get this property with backgroundMode().
-
-    \sa TQWidget::setBackgroundMode()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLabel::textFormat
-    \brief the label's text format
-
-    See the \c TQt::TextFormat enum for an explanation of the possible
-    options.
-
-    The default format is \c AutoText.
-
-    \sa text
-*/
-
-TQt::TextFormat TQLabel::textFormat() const
-{
-    return textformat;
-}
-
-void TQLabel::setTextFormat( TQt::TextFormat format )
-{
-    if ( format != textformat ) {
-	textformat = format;
-	TQString t = ltext;
-	if ( !t.isNull() ) {
-	    ltext = TQString::null;
-	    setText( t );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::fontChange( const TQFont & )
-{
-    if ( !ltext.isEmpty() ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-	if ( doc )
-	    doc->setDefaultFont( font() );
-#endif
-	updateLabel( TQSize( -1, -1 ) );
-    }
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_SMOOTHSCALE
-/*!
-    \property TQLabel::scaledContents
-    \brief whether the label will scale its contents to fill all
-    available space.
-
-    When enabled and the label shows a pixmap, it will scale the
-    pixmap to fill the available space.
-
-    This property's default is FALSE.
-
-    \sa setScaledContents()
-*/
-bool TQLabel::hasScaledContents() const
-{
-    return scaledcontents;
-}
-
-void TQLabel::setScaledContents( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( (bool)scaledcontents == enable )
-	return;
-    scaledcontents = enable;
-    if ( !enable ) {
-	delete d->img;
-	d->img = 0;
-	delete d->pix;
-	d->pix = 0;
-    }
-    update( contentsRect() );
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_IMAGE_SMOOTHSCALE
-
-/*!
-    Sets the font used on the TQLabel to font \a f.
-*/
-
-void TQLabel::setFont( const TQFont &f )
-{
-    TQFrame::setFont( f );
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_LABEL
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 266b5c5..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlabel.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,177 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQLabel widget class
-**
-** Created : 941215
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQLABEL_H
-#define TQLABEL_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LABEL
-
-class TQSimpleRichText;
-class TQLabelPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQLabel : public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString text READ text WRITE setText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TextFormat textFormat READ textFormat WRITE setTextFormat )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQPixmap pixmap READ pixmap WRITE setPixmap )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool scaledContents READ hasScaledContents WRITE setScaledContents )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Qt::Alignment tqalignment READ alignmentProp WRITE tqsetAlignmentProp )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int indent READ indent WRITE setIndent )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( BackgroundMode backgroundMode DESIGNABLE true)
-
-public:
-    TQLabel( TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 );
-    TQLabel( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0,
-	    WFlags f=0 );
-    TQLabel( TQWidget *buddy, const TQString &,
-	    TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 );
-    ~TQLabel();
-
-    TQString	 text()		const	{ return ltext; }
-    TQPixmap     *pixmap()	const	{ return lpixmap; }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE
-    TQPicture    *picture()	const	{ return lpicture; }
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-    TQMovie      *movie()		const;
-#endif
-
-    TQt::TextFormat textFormat() const;
-    void 	 setTextFormat( TQt::TextFormat );
-
-    int		 tqalignment() const	{ return align; }
-    virtual void tqsetAlignment( int );
-    inline Qt::Alignment alignmentProp() const { return (Qt::Alignment)tqalignment(); }
-    inline virtual void tqsetAlignmentProp( Qt::Alignment al ) { tqsetAlignment((int)al); }
-    int		 indent() const		{ return extraMargin; }
-    void 	 setIndent( int );
-
-    bool 	 autoResize() const	{ return autoresize; }
-    virtual void setAutoResize( bool );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_SMOOTHSCALE
-    bool 	hasScaledContents() const;
-    void 	setScaledContents( bool );
-#endif
-    TQSize	 tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize	 tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    virtual void setBuddy( TQWidget * );
-    TQWidget     *buddy() const;
-#endif
-    int		 heightForWidth(int) const;
-
-    void setFont( const TQFont &f );
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setText( const TQString &);
-    virtual void setPixmap( const TQPixmap & );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE
-    virtual void setPicture( const TQPicture & );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-    virtual void setMovie( const TQMovie & );
-#endif
-    virtual void setNum( int );
-    virtual void setNum( double );
-    void	 clear();
-
-protected:
-    void	 drawContents( TQPainter * );
-    void	 fontChange( const TQFont & );
-    void	 resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    void	 acceleratorSlot();
-    void	 buddyDied();
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-    void	 movieUpdated(const TQRect&);
-    void	 movieResized(const TQSize&);
-#endif
-
-private:
-    void	init();
-    void	clearContents();
-    void	updateLabel( TQSize oldSizeHint );
-    TQSize	sizeForWidth( int w ) const;
-    TQString	ltext;
-    TQPixmap    *lpixmap;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PICTURE
-    TQPicture   *lpicture;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MOVIE
-    TQMovie *	lmovie;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQWidget *	lbuddy;
-#endif
-    ushort	align;
-    short	extraMargin;
-    uint	autoresize:1;
-    uint	scaledcontents :1;
-    TQt::TextFormat textformat;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    TQSimpleRichText* doc;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQAccel *	accel;
-#endif
-    TQLabelPrivate* d;
-
-    friend class TQTipLabel;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQLabel( const TQLabel & );
-    TQLabel &operator=( const TQLabel & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_LABEL
-
-#endif // TQLABEL_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 56d69b0..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1170 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQLCDNumber class
-**
-** Created : 940518
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqlcdnumber.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LCDNUMBER
-#include "tqbitarray.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQLCDNumber tqlcdnumber.h
-
-    \brief The TQLCDNumber widget displays a number with LCD-like digits.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    It can display a number in just about any size. It can display
-    decimal, hexadecimal, octal or binary numbers. It is easy to
-    connect to data sources using the display() slot, which is
-    overloaded to take any of five argument types.
-
-    There are also Q_SLOTS to change the base with setMode() and the
-    decimal point with setSmallDecimalPoint().
-
-    TQLCDNumber emits the overflow() signal when it is asked to display
-    something beyond its range. The range is set by setNumDigits(),
-    but setSmallDecimalPoint() also influences it. If the display is
-    set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer equivalent of the
-    value is displayed.
-
-    These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S,
-    6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o,
-    P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single
-    quote in the string) and space. TQLCDNumber substitutes spaces for
-    illegal characters.
-
-    It is not possible to retrieve the contents of a TQLCDNumber
-    object, although you can retrieve the numeric value with value().
-    If you really need the text, we recommend that you connect the
-    Q_SIGNALS that feed the display() slot to another slot as well and
-    store the value there.
-
-    Incidentally, TQLCDNumber is the very oldest part of TQt, tracing
-    back to a BASIC program on the \link
-    http://www.nvg.ntnu.no/sinclair/computers/zxspectrum/zxspectrum.htm
-    Sinclair Spectrum\endlink.
-
-    <img src=qlcdnum-m.png> <img src=qlcdnum-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQLabel, TQFrame
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQLCDNumber::Mode
-
-    This type determines how numbers are shown.
-
-    \value Hex  Hexadecimal
-    \value Dec  Decimal
-    \value Oct  Octal
-    \value Bin  Binary
-
-    If the display is set to hexadecimal, octal or binary, the integer
-    equivalent of the value is displayed.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQLCDNumber::SegmentStyle
-
-    This type determines the visual appearance of the TQLCDNumber
-    widget.
-
-    \value Outline gives raised segments filled with the background brush.
-    \value Filled gives raised segments filled with the foreground brush.
-    \value Flat gives flat segments filled with the foreground brush.
-*/
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQLCDNumber::overflow()
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the TQLCDNumber is asked to display
-    a too-large number or a too-long string.
-
-    It is never emitted by setNumDigits().
-*/
-
-
-static TQString int2string( int num, int base, int ndigits, bool *oflow )
-{
-    TQString s;
-    bool negative;
-    if ( num < 0 ) {
-        negative = TRUE;
-        num      = -num;
-    } else {
-        negative = FALSE;
-    }
-    switch( base ) {
-        case TQLCDNumber::HEX:
-            s.sprintf( "%*x", ndigits, num );
-            break;
-        case TQLCDNumber::DEC:
-            s.sprintf( "%*i", ndigits, num );
-            break;
-        case TQLCDNumber::OCT:
-            s.sprintf( "%*o", ndigits, num );
-            break;
-        case TQLCDNumber::BIN:
-            {
-                char buf[42];
-                char *p = &buf[41];
-                uint n = num;
-                int len = 0;
-                *p = '\0';
-                do {
-                    *--p = (char)((n&1)+'0');
-                    n >>= 1;
-                    len++;
-                } while ( n != 0 );
-                len = ndigits - len;
-                if ( len > 0 )
-                s.fill( ' ', len );
-                s += TQString::tqfromLatin1(p);
-            }
-            break;
-    }
-    if ( negative ) {
-        for ( int i=0; i<(int)s.length(); i++ ) {
-            if ( s[i] != ' ' ) {
-                if ( i != 0 ) {
-                    s[i-1] = '-';
-                } else {
-                    s.insert( 0, '-' );
-                }
-                break;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    if ( oflow )
-        *oflow = (int)s.length() > ndigits;
-    return s;
-}
-
-
-static TQString double2string( double num, int base, int ndigits, bool *oflow )
-{
-    TQString s;
-    if ( base != TQLCDNumber::DEC ) {
-        bool of = num >= 2147483648.0 || num < -2147483648.0;
-        if ( of ) {                             // oops, integer overflow
-            if ( oflow )
-                *oflow = TRUE;
-            return s;
-        }
-        s = int2string( (int)num, base, ndigits, 0 );
-    } else {                                    // decimal base
-        int nd = ndigits;
-        do {
-            s.sprintf( "%*.*g", ndigits, nd, num );
-            int i = s.find('e');
-            if ( i > 0 && s[i+1]=='+' ) {
-                s[i] = ' ';
-                s[i+1] = 'e';
-            }
-        } while (nd-- && (int)s.length() > ndigits);
-    }
-    if ( oflow )
-        *oflow = (int)s.length() > ndigits;
-    return s;
-}
-
-
-static const char *getSegments( char ch )               // gets list of segments for ch
-{
-    static const char segments[30][8] =
-       { { 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6,99, 0},             // 0    0 / O
-         { 2, 5,99, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0},             // 1    1
-         { 0, 2, 3, 4, 6,99, 0, 0},             // 2    2
-         { 0, 2, 3, 5, 6,99, 0, 0},             // 3    3
-         { 1, 2, 3, 5,99, 0, 0, 0},             // 4    4
-         { 0, 1, 3, 5, 6,99, 0, 0},             // 5    5 / S
-         { 0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6,99, 0},             // 6    6
-         { 0, 2, 5,99, 0, 0, 0, 0},             // 7    7
-         { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,99},             // 8    8
-         { 0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6,99, 0},             // 9    9 / g
-         { 3,99, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0},             // 10   -
-         { 7,99, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0},             // 11   .
-         { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,99, 0},             // 12   A
-         { 1, 3, 4, 5, 6,99, 0, 0},             // 13   B
-         { 0, 1, 4, 6,99, 0, 0, 0},             // 14   C
-         { 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,99, 0, 0},             // 15   D
-         { 0, 1, 3, 4, 6,99, 0, 0},             // 16   E
-         { 0, 1, 3, 4,99, 0, 0, 0},             // 17   F
-         { 1, 3, 4, 5,99, 0, 0, 0},             // 18   h
-         { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,99, 0, 0},             // 19   H
-         { 1, 4, 6,99, 0, 0, 0, 0},             // 20   L
-         { 3, 4, 5, 6,99, 0, 0, 0},             // 21   o
-         { 0, 1, 2, 3, 4,99, 0, 0},             // 22   P
-         { 3, 4,99, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0},             // 23   r
-         { 4, 5, 6,99, 0, 0, 0, 0},             // 24   u
-         { 1, 2, 4, 5, 6,99, 0, 0},             // 25   U
-         { 1, 2, 3, 5, 6,99, 0, 0},             // 26   Y
-         { 8, 9,99, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0},             // 27   :
-         { 0, 1, 2, 3,99, 0, 0, 0},             // 28   '
-         {99, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0} };           // 29   empty
-
-    if (ch >= '0' && ch <= '9')
-        return segments[ch - '0'];
-    if (ch >= 'A' && ch <= 'F')
-        return segments[ch - 'A' + 12];
-    if (ch >= 'a' && ch <= 'f')
-        return segments[ch - 'a' + 12];
-
-    int n;
-    switch ( ch ) {
-        case '-':
-            n = 10;  break;
-        case 'O':
-            n = 0;   break;
-        case 'g':
-            n = 9;   break;
-        case '.':
-            n = 11;  break;
-        case 'h':
-            n = 18;  break;
-        case 'H':
-            n = 19;  break;
-        case 'l':
-        case 'L':
-            n = 20;  break;
-        case 'o':
-            n = 21;  break;
-        case 'p':
-        case 'P':
-            n = 22;  break;
-        case 'r':
-        case 'R':
-            n = 23;  break;
-        case 's':
-        case 'S':
-            n = 5;   break;
-        case 'u':
-            n = 24;  break;
-        case 'U':
-            n = 25;  break;
-        case 'y':
-        case 'Y':
-            n = 26;  break;
-        case ':':
-            n = 27;  break;
-        case '\'':
-            n = 28;  break;
-        default:
-            n = 29;  break;
-    }
-    return segments[n];
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to 5, the base
-    to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small' and the frame style
-    to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to \c Outline.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQFrame
-    constructor.
-
-    \sa setNumDigits(), setSmallDecimalPoint()
-*/
-
-TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-        : TQFrame( parent, name )
-{
-    ndigits = 5;
-    init();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an LCD number, sets the number of digits to \a
-    numDigits, the base to decimal, the decimal point mode to 'small'
-    and the frame style to a raised box. The segmentStyle() is set to
-    \c Outline.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQFrame
-    constructor.
-
-    \sa setNumDigits(), setSmallDecimalPoint()
-*/
-
-TQLCDNumber::TQLCDNumber( uint numDigits, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-        : TQFrame( parent, name )
-{
-    ndigits = numDigits;
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::init()
-{
-    setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Raised );
-    val        = 0;
-    base       = DEC;
-    smallPoint = FALSE;
-    setNumDigits( ndigits );
-    setSegmentStyle( Outline );
-    d = 0;
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Minimum ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the LCD number.
-*/
-
-TQLCDNumber::~TQLCDNumber()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLCDNumber::numDigits
-    \brief the current number of digits displayed
-
-    Corresponds to the current number of digits. If \l
-    TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint is FALSE, the decimal point occupies
-    one digit position.
-
-    \sa numDigits, smallDecimalPoint
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::setNumDigits( int numDigits )
-{
-    if ( numDigits > 99 ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_RANGE)
-        qWarning( "TQLCDNumber::setNumDigits: (%s) Max 99 digits allowed",
-                 name( "unnamed" ) );
-#endif
-        numDigits = 99;
-    }
-    if (numDigits < 0 ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_RANGE)
-        qWarning( "TQLCDNumber::setNumDigits: (%s) Min 0 digits allowed",
-                 name( "unnamed" ) );
-#endif
-        numDigits = 0;
-    }
-    if ( digitStr.isNull() ) {                  // from constructor
-        ndigits = numDigits;
-        digitStr.fill( ' ', ndigits );
-        points.fill( 0, ndigits );
-        digitStr[ndigits - 1] = '0';            // "0" is the default number
-    } else {
-        bool doDisplay = ndigits == 0;
-        if ( numDigits == ndigits )             // no change
-            return;
-        register int i;
-        int dif;
-        if ( numDigits > ndigits ) {            // expand
-            dif = numDigits - ndigits;
-            TQString buf;
-            buf.fill( ' ', dif );
-            digitStr.insert( 0, buf );
-            points.resize( numDigits );
-            for ( i=numDigits-1; i>=dif; i-- )
-                points.setBit( i, points.testBit(i-dif) );
-            for ( i=0; i<dif; i++ )
-                points.clearBit( i );
-        } else {                                        // shrink
-            dif = ndigits - numDigits;
-            digitStr = digitStr.right( numDigits );
-            TQBitArray tmpPoints = points.copy();
-            points.resize( numDigits );
-            for ( i=0; i<(int)numDigits; i++ )
-                points.setBit( i, tmpPoints.testBit(i+dif) );
-        }
-        ndigits = numDigits;
-        if ( doDisplay )
-            display( value() );
-        update();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns TRUE if \a num is too big to be displayed in its entirety;
-    otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa display(), numDigits(), smallDecimalPoint()
-*/
-
-bool TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow( int num ) const
-{
-    bool of;
-    int2string( num, base, ndigits, &of );
-    return of;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if \a num is too big to be displayed in its entirety;
-    otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa display(), numDigits(), smallDecimalPoint()
-*/
-
-bool TQLCDNumber::checkOverflow( double num ) const
-{
-    bool of;
-    double2string( num, base, ndigits, &of );
-    return of;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLCDNumber::mode
-    \brief the current display mode (number base)
-
-    Corresponds to the current display mode, which is one of \c BIN,
-    \c OCT, \c DEC (the default) and \c HEX. \c DEC mode can display
-    floating point values, the other modes display the integer
-    equivalent.
-
-    \sa smallDecimalPoint(), setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode()
-*/
-
-TQLCDNumber::Mode TQLCDNumber::mode() const
-{
-    return (TQLCDNumber::Mode) base;
-}
-
-void TQLCDNumber::setMode( Mode m )
-{
-    base = m;
-
-    display( val );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLCDNumber::value
-    \brief the displayed value
-
-    This property corresponds to the current value displayed by the
-    LCDNumber.
-
-    If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value
-    of 0.
-*/
-
-double TQLCDNumber::value() const
-{
-    return val;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Displays the number \a num.
-*/
-void TQLCDNumber::display( double num )
-{
-    val = num;
-    bool of;
-    TQString s = double2string( num, base, ndigits, &of );
-    if ( of )
-        emit overflow();
-    else
-        internalSetString( s );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLCDNumber::intValue
-    \brief the displayed value rounded to the nearest integer
-
-    This property corresponds to the nearest integer to the current
-    value displayed by the LCDNumber. This is the value used for
-    hexadecimal, octal and binary modes.
-
-    If the displayed value is not a number, the property has a value
-    of 0.
-*/
-int TQLCDNumber::intValue() const
-{
-    return (int)(val < 0 ? val - 0.5 : val + 0.5);
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Displays the number \a num.
-*/
-void TQLCDNumber::display( int num )
-{
-    val = (double)num;
-    bool of;
-    TQString s = int2string( num, base, ndigits, &of );
-    if ( of )
-        emit overflow();
-    else
-        internalSetString( s );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Displays the number represented by the string \a s.
-
-    This version of the function disregards mode() and
-    smallDecimalPoint().
-
-    These digits and other symbols can be shown: 0/O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5/S,
-    6, 7, 8, 9/g, minus, decimal point, A, B, C, D, E, F, h, H, L, o,
-    P, r, u, U, Y, colon, degree sign (which is specified as single
-    quote in the string) and space. TQLCDNumber substitutes spaces for
-    illegal characters.
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::display( const TQString &s )
-{
-    val = 0;
-    bool ok = FALSE;
-    double v = s.toDouble( &ok );
-    if ( ok )
-        val = v;
-    internalSetString( s );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Calls setMode( HEX ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
-    connecting buttons to it).
-
-    \sa setMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), mode()
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::setHexMode()
-{
-    setMode( HEX );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Calls setMode( DEC ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
-    connecting buttons to it).
-
-    \sa setMode(), setHexMode(), setOctMode(), setBinMode(), mode()
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::setDecMode()
-{
-    setMode( DEC );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Calls setMode( OCT ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
-    connecting buttons to it).
-
-    \sa setMode(), setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setBinMode(), mode()
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::setOctMode()
-{
-    setMode( OCT );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Calls setMode( BIN ). Provided for convenience (e.g. for
-    connecting buttons to it).
-
-    \sa setMode(), setHexMode(), setDecMode(), setOctMode(), mode()
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::setBinMode()
-{
-    setMode( BIN );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint
-    \brief the style of the decimal point
-
-    If TRUE the decimal point is drawn between two digit positions.
-    Otherwise it occupies a digit position of its own, i.e. is drawn
-    in a digit position. The default is FALSE.
-
-    The inter-digit space is made slightly wider when the decimal
-    point is drawn between the digits.
-
-    \sa mode
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::setSmallDecimalPoint( bool b )
-{
-    smallPoint = b;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Draws the LCD number using painter \a p. This function is called
-    from TQFrame::paintEvent().
-*/
-
-
-void TQLCDNumber::drawContents( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    if ( smallPoint )
-        drawString( digitStr, *p, &points, FALSE );
-    else
-        drawString( digitStr, *p, 0, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::internalDisplay( const TQString & )
-{
-    // Not used anymore
-}
-
-void TQLCDNumber::internalSetString( const TQString& s )
-{
-    TQString buffer;
-    int i;
-    int len = s.length();
-    TQBitArray newPoints(ndigits);
-
-    if ( !smallPoint ) {
-        if ( len == ndigits )
-            buffer = s;
-        else
-            buffer = TQT_TQSTRING(s.right( ndigits )).rightJustify( ndigits, ' ' );
-    } else {
-        int  index = -1;
-        bool lastWasPoint = TRUE;
-        newPoints.clearBit(0);
-        for ( i=0; i<len; i++ ) {
-            if ( s[i] == '.' ) {
-                if ( lastWasPoint ) {           // point already set for digit?
-                    if ( index == ndigits - 1 ) // no more digits
-                        break;
-                    index++;
-                    buffer[index] = ' ';        // 2 points in a row, add space
-                }
-                newPoints.setBit(index);        // set decimal point
-                lastWasPoint = TRUE;
-            } else {
-                if ( index == ndigits - 1 )
-                    break;
-                index++;
-                buffer[index] = s[i];
-                newPoints.clearBit(index);      // decimal point default off
-                lastWasPoint = FALSE;
-            }
-        }
-        if ( index < ((int) ndigits) - 1 ) {
-            for( i=index; i>=0; i-- ) {
-                buffer[ndigits - 1 - index + i] = buffer[i];
-                newPoints.setBit( ndigits - 1 - index + i,
-                                   newPoints.testBit(i) );
-            }
-            for( i=0; i<ndigits-index-1; i++ ) {
-                buffer[i] = ' ';
-                newPoints.clearBit(i);
-            }
-        }
-    }
-
-    if ( buffer == digitStr )
-        return;
-
-    if ( backgroundMode() == TQt::FixedPixmap
-         || TQT_TQBRUSH_OBJECT(tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Background )).pixmap() ) {
-        digitStr = buffer;
-        if ( smallPoint )
-            points = newPoints;
-        tqrepaint( contentsRect() );
-    } else {
-        TQPainter p( this );
-        if ( !smallPoint )
-            drawString( buffer, p );
-        else
-            drawString( buffer, p, &newPoints );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::drawString( const TQString &s, TQPainter &p,
-                             TQBitArray *newPoints, bool newString )
-{
-    TQPoint  pos;
-
-    int digitSpace = smallPoint ? 2 : 1;
-    int xSegLen    = width()*5/(ndigits*(5 + digitSpace) + digitSpace);
-    int ySegLen    = height()*5/12;
-    int segLen     = ySegLen > xSegLen ? xSegLen : ySegLen;
-    int xAdvance   = segLen*( 5 + digitSpace )/5;
-    int xOffset    = ( width() - ndigits*xAdvance + segLen/5 )/2;
-    int yOffset    = ( height() - segLen*2 )/2;
-
-    for ( int i=0;  i<ndigits; i++ ) {
-        pos = TQPoint( xOffset + xAdvance*i, yOffset );
-        if ( newString )
-            drawDigit( pos, p, segLen, s[i], digitStr[i].latin1() );
-        else
-            drawDigit( pos, p, segLen, s[i]);
-        if ( newPoints ) {
-            char newPoint = newPoints->testBit(i) ? '.' : ' ';
-            if ( newString ) {
-                char oldPoint = points.testBit(i) ? '.' : ' ';
-                drawDigit( pos, p, segLen, newPoint, oldPoint );
-            } else {
-                drawDigit( pos, p, segLen, newPoint );
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    if ( newString ) {
-        digitStr = s;
-        if ( (int)digitStr.length() > ndigits )
-            digitStr.truncate( ndigits );
-        if ( newPoints )
-            points = *newPoints;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::drawDigit( const TQPoint &pos, TQPainter &p, int segLen,
-                            char newCh, char oldCh )
-{
-// Draws and/or erases segments to change display of a single digit
-// from oldCh to newCh
-
-    char updates[18][2];        // can hold 2 times number of segments, only
-                                // first 9 used if segment table is correct
-    int  nErases;
-    int  nUpdates;
-    const char *segs;
-    int  i,j;
-
-    const char erase      = 0;
-    const char draw       = 1;
-    const char leaveAlone = 2;
-
-    segs = getSegments(oldCh);
-    for ( nErases=0; segs[nErases] != 99; nErases++ ) {
-        updates[nErases][0] = erase;            // get segments to erase to
-        updates[nErases][1] = segs[nErases];    // remove old char
-    }
-    nUpdates = nErases;
-    segs = getSegments(newCh);
-    for(i = 0 ; segs[i] != 99 ; i++) {
-        for ( j=0;  j<nErases; j++ )
-            if ( segs[i] == updates[j][1] ) {   // same segment ?
-                updates[j][0] = leaveAlone;     // yes, already on screen
-                break;
-            }
-        if ( j == nErases ) {                   // if not already on screen
-            updates[nUpdates][0] = draw;
-            updates[nUpdates][1] = segs[i];
-            nUpdates++;
-        }
-    }
-    for ( i=0; i<nUpdates; i++ ) {
-        if ( updates[i][0] == draw )
-            drawSegment( pos, updates[i][1], p, segLen );
-        if (updates[i][0] == erase)
-            drawSegment( pos, updates[i][1], p, segLen, TRUE );
-    }
-}
-
-
-static void addPoint( TQPointArray &a, const TQPoint &p )
-{
-    uint n = a.size();
-    a.resize( n + 1 );
-    a.setPoint( n, p );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-void TQLCDNumber::drawSegment( const TQPoint &pos, char segmentNo, TQPainter &p,
-                              int segLen, bool erase )
-{
-    TQPoint pt = pos;
-    int width = segLen/5;
-
-    const TQColorGroup & g = tqcolorGroup();
-    TQColor lightColor,darkColor,fgColor;
-    if ( erase ){
-        lightColor = backgroundColor();
-        darkColor  = lightColor;
-        fgColor    = lightColor;
-    } else {
-        lightColor = g.light();
-        darkColor  = g.dark();
-        fgColor    = g.foreground();
-    }
-
-#define LINETO(X,Y) addPoint( a, TQPoint(pt.x() + (X),pt.y() + (Y)))
-#define LIGHT
-#define DARK
-
-    if ( fill ) {
-        TQPointArray a(0);
-
-        //The following is an exact copy of the switch below.
-        //don't make any changes here
-        switch ( segmentNo ) {
-        case 0 :
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(segLen - 1,0);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(segLen - width - 1,width);
-            LINETO(width,width);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 1 :
-            pt += TQPoint(0 , 1);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(width,width);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(width,segLen - width/2 - 2);
-            LINETO(0,segLen - 2);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 2 :
-            pt += TQPoint(segLen - 1 , 1);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(0,segLen - 2);
-            LINETO(-width,segLen - width/2 - 2);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(-width,width);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 3 :
-            pt += TQPoint(0 , segLen);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(width,-width/2);
-            LINETO(segLen - width - 1,-width/2);
-            LINETO(segLen - 1,0);
-            DARK;
-            if (width & 1) {            // adjust for integer division error
-                LINETO(segLen - width - 3,width/2 + 1);
-                LINETO(width + 2,width/2 + 1);
-            } else {
-                LINETO(segLen - width - 1,width/2);
-                LINETO(width,width/2);
-            }
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 4 :
-            pt += TQPoint(0 , segLen + 1);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(width,width/2);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(width,segLen - width - 2);
-            LINETO(0,segLen - 2);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 5 :
-            pt += TQPoint(segLen - 1 , segLen + 1);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(0,segLen - 2);
-            LINETO(-width,segLen - width - 2);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(-width,width/2);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 6 :
-            pt += TQPoint(0 , segLen*2);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(width,-width);
-            LINETO(segLen - width - 1,-width);
-            LINETO(segLen - 1,0);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 7 :
-            if ( smallPoint )   // if smallpoint place'.' between other digits
-                pt += TQPoint(segLen + width/2 , segLen*2);
-            else
-                pt += TQPoint(segLen/2 , segLen*2);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(width,0);
-            LINETO(width,-width);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(0,-width);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 8 :
-            pt += TQPoint(segLen/2 - width/2 + 1 , segLen/2 + width);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(width,0);
-            LINETO(width,-width);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(0,-width);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 9 :
-            pt += TQPoint(segLen/2 - width/2 + 1 , 3*segLen/2 + width);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(width,0);
-            LINETO(width,-width);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(0,-width);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_RANGE)
-        default :
-            qWarning( "TQLCDNumber::drawSegment: (%s) Internal error."
-                     "  Illegal segment id: %d\n",
-                     name( "unnamed" ), segmentNo );
-#endif
-        }
-        // End exact copy
-        p.setPen( fgColor );
-        p.setBrush( fgColor );
-        p.drawPolygon( a );
-        p.setBrush( Qt::NoBrush );
-
-        pt = pos;
-    }
-#undef LINETO
-#undef LIGHT
-#undef DARK
-
-#define LINETO(X,Y) p.lineTo(TQPoint(pt.x() + (X),pt.y() + (Y)))
-#define LIGHT p.setPen(lightColor)
-#define DARK  p.setPen(darkColor)
-    if ( shadow )
-        switch ( segmentNo ) {
-        case 0 :
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(segLen - 1,0);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(segLen - width - 1,width);
-            LINETO(width,width);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 1 :
-            pt += TQPoint(0,1);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(width,width);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(width,segLen - width/2 - 2);
-            LINETO(0,segLen - 2);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 2 :
-            pt += TQPoint(segLen - 1 , 1);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(0,segLen - 2);
-            LINETO(-width,segLen - width/2 - 2);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(-width,width);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 3 :
-            pt += TQPoint(0 , segLen);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(width,-width/2);
-            LINETO(segLen - width - 1,-width/2);
-            LINETO(segLen - 1,0);
-            DARK;
-            if (width & 1) {            // adjust for integer division error
-                LINETO(segLen - width - 3,width/2 + 1);
-                LINETO(width + 2,width/2 + 1);
-            } else {
-                LINETO(segLen - width - 1,width/2);
-                LINETO(width,width/2);
-            }
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 4 :
-            pt += TQPoint(0 , segLen + 1);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(width,width/2);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(width,segLen - width - 2);
-            LINETO(0,segLen - 2);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 5 :
-            pt += TQPoint(segLen - 1 , segLen + 1);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(0,segLen - 2);
-            LINETO(-width,segLen - width - 2);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(-width,width/2);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 6 :
-            pt += TQPoint(0 , segLen*2);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(width,-width);
-            LINETO(segLen - width - 1,-width);
-            LINETO(segLen - 1,0);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 7 :
-            if ( smallPoint )   // if smallpoint place'.' between other digits
-                pt += TQPoint(segLen + width/2 , segLen*2);
-            else
-                pt += TQPoint(segLen/2 , segLen*2);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(width,0);
-            LINETO(width,-width);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(0,-width);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 8 :
-            pt += TQPoint(segLen/2 - width/2 + 1 , segLen/2 + width);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(width,0);
-            LINETO(width,-width);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(0,-width);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-        case 9 :
-            pt += TQPoint(segLen/2 - width/2 + 1 , 3*segLen/2 + width);
-            p.moveTo(pt);
-            DARK;
-            LINETO(width,0);
-            LINETO(width,-width);
-            LIGHT;
-            LINETO(0,-width);
-            LINETO(0,0);
-            break;
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_RANGE)
-        default :
-            qWarning( "TQLCDNumber::drawSegment: (%s) Internal error."
-                     "  Illegal segment id: %d\n",
-                     name( "unnamed" ), segmentNo );
-#endif
-        }
-
-#undef LINETO
-#undef LIGHT
-#undef DARK
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLCDNumber::segmentStyle
-    \brief the style of the LCDNumber
-
-    \table
-    \header \i Style \i Result
-    \row \i \c Outline
-	 \i Produces raised segments filled with the background color
-	    (this is the default).
-    \row \i \c Filled
-	 \i Produces raised segments filled with the foreground color.
-    \row \i \c Flat
-	 \i Produces flat segments filled with the foreground color.
-    \endtable
-
-    \c Outline and \c Filled will additionally use
-    TQColorGroup::light() and TQColorGroup::dark() for shadow effects.
-*/
-void TQLCDNumber::setSegmentStyle( SegmentStyle s )
-{
-    fill = ( s == Flat || s == Filled );
-    shadow = ( s == Outline || s == Filled );
-    update();
-}
-
-TQLCDNumber::SegmentStyle TQLCDNumber::segmentStyle() const
-{
-    TQ_ASSERT( fill || shadow );
-    if ( !fill && shadow )
-        return Outline;
-    if ( fill && shadow )
-        return Filled;
-    return Flat;
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQLCDNumber::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    return TQSize( 10 + 9 * (numDigits() + (smallDecimalPoint() ? 0 : 1)), 23 );
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_LCDNUMBER
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d9fd5a..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlcdnumber.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQLCDNumber class
-**
-** Created : 940518
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQLCDNUMBER_H
-#define TQLCDNUMBER_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#include "tqbitarray.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LCDNUMBER
-
-
-class TQLCDNumberPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQLCDNumber : public TQFrame		// LCD number widget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( Mode SegmentStyle )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool smallDecimalPoint READ smallDecimalPoint WRITE setSmallDecimalPoint )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int numDigits READ numDigits WRITE setNumDigits )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Mode mode READ mode WRITE setMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( SegmentStyle segmentStyle READ segmentStyle WRITE setSegmentStyle )
-    Q_PROPERTY( double value READ value WRITE display )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int intValue READ intValue WRITE display )
-
-public:
-    TQLCDNumber( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQLCDNumber( uint numDigits, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQLCDNumber();
-
-    enum Mode { Hex, Dec, Oct, Bin, HEX = Hex, DEC = Dec, OCT = Oct,
-		BIN = Bin };
-    enum SegmentStyle { Outline, Filled, Flat };
-
-    bool    smallDecimalPoint() const;
-
-    int	    numDigits() const;
-    virtual void setNumDigits( int nDigits );
-
-    bool    checkOverflow( double num ) const;
-    bool    checkOverflow( int	  num ) const;
-
-    Mode mode() const;
-    virtual void setMode( Mode );
-
-    SegmentStyle segmentStyle() const;
-    virtual void setSegmentStyle( SegmentStyle );
-
-    double  value() const;
-    int	    intValue() const;
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void    display( const TQString &str );
-    void    display( int num );
-    void    display( double num );
-    virtual void setHexMode();
-    virtual void setDecMode();
-    virtual void setOctMode();
-    virtual void setBinMode();
-    virtual void setSmallDecimalPoint( bool );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void    overflow();
-
-protected:
-    void    drawContents( TQPainter * );
-
-private:
-    void    init();
-    void    internalDisplay( const TQString &);
-    void    internalSetString( const TQString& s );
-    void    drawString( const TQString& s, TQPainter &, TQBitArray * = 0,
-			bool = TRUE );
-    //void    drawString( const TQString &, TQPainter &, TQBitArray * = 0 ) const;
-    void    drawDigit( const TQPoint &, TQPainter &, int, char,
-		       char = ' ' );
-    void    drawSegment( const TQPoint &, char, TQPainter &, int, bool = FALSE );
-
-    int	    ndigits;
-    double  val;
-    uint    base	: 2;
-    uint    smallPoint	: 1;
-    uint    fill	: 1;
-    uint    shadow	: 1;
-    TQString digitStr;
-    TQBitArray points;
-    TQLCDNumberPrivate * d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQLCDNumber( const TQLCDNumber & );
-    TQLCDNumber &operator=( const TQLCDNumber & );
-#endif
-};
-
-inline bool TQLCDNumber::smallDecimalPoint() const
-{ return (bool)smallPoint; }
-
-inline int TQLCDNumber::numDigits() const
-{ return ndigits; }
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_LCDNUMBER
-
-#endif // TQLCDNUMBER_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 645c646..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2940 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQLineEdit widget class
-**
-** Created : 941011
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqlineedit.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LINEEDIT
-
-// Keep this position to avoid patch rejection
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IM
-#include "tqinputcontext.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqfontmetrics.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqclipboard.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqvalidator.h"
-#include "tqdragobject.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqstringlist.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqwhatsthis.h"
-#include "../kernel/tqinternal_p.h"
-#include "private/tqtextlayout_p.h"
-#include "tqvaluevector.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-#include "tqkeysequence.h"
-#define ACCEL_KEY(k) "\t" + TQString(TQKeySequence( TQt::CTRL | TQt::Key_ ## k ))
-#else
-#define ACCEL_KEY(k) "\t" + TQString("Ctrl+" #k)
-#endif
-
-#define innerMargin 1
-
-struct TQLineEditPrivate : public TQt
-{
-    TQLineEditPrivate( TQLineEdit *q )
-	: q(q), cursor(0), cursorTimer(0), tripleClickTimer(0), frame(1),
-	  cursorVisible(0), separator(0), readOnly(0), modified(0),
-	  direction(TQChar::DirON), dragEnabled(1), tqalignment(0),
-	  echoMode(0), textDirty(0), selDirty(0), validInput(1),
-	  ascent(0), maxLength(32767), menuId(0),
-	  hscroll(0), validator(0), maskData(0),
-	  undoState(0), selstart(0), selend(0),
-	  imstart(0), imend(0), imselstart(0), imselend(0)
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-	,dndTimer(0)
-#endif
-	{}
-    void init( const TQString&);
-
-    TQLineEdit *q;
-    TQString text;
-    int cursor;
-    int cursorTimer;
-    TQPoint tripleClick;
-    int tripleClickTimer;
-    uint frame : 1;
-    uint cursorVisible : 1;
-    uint separator : 1;
-    uint readOnly : 1;
-    uint modified : 1;
-    uint direction : 5;
-    uint dragEnabled : 1;
-    uint tqalignment : 3;
-    uint echoMode : 2;
-    uint textDirty : 1;
-    uint selDirty : 1;
-    uint validInput : 1;
-    int ascent;
-    int maxLength;
-    int menuId;
-    int hscroll;
-    TQChar passwordChar; // obsolete
-
-    void finishChange( int validateFromState = -1, bool setModified = TRUE );
-
-    const TQValidator* validator;
-    struct MaskInputData {
-	enum Casemode { NoCaseMode, Upper, Lower };
-	TQChar maskChar; // either the separator char or the inputmask
-	bool separator;
-	Casemode caseMode;
-    };
-    TQString inputMask;
-    TQChar blank;
-    MaskInputData *maskData;
-    inline int nextMaskBlank( int pos ) {
-	int c = findInMask( pos, TRUE, FALSE );
-	separator |= ( c != pos );
-	return ( c != -1 ?  c : maxLength );
-    }
-    inline int prevMaskBlank( int pos ) {
-	int c = findInMask( pos, FALSE, FALSE );
-	separator |= ( c != pos );
-	return ( c != -1 ? c : 0 );
-    }
-
-    void setCursorVisible( bool visible );
-
-
-    // undo/redo handling
-    enum CommandType { Separator, Insert, Remove, Delete, RemoveSelection, DeleteSelection };
-    struct Command {
-	inline Command(){}
-	inline Command( CommandType type, int pos, TQChar c )
-	    :type(type),c(c),pos(pos){}
-	uint type : 4;
-	TQChar c;
-	int pos;
-    };
-    int undoState;
-    TQValueVector<Command> history;
-    void addCommand( const Command& cmd );
-    void insert( const TQString& s );
-    void del( bool wasBackspace = FALSE );
-    void remove( int pos );
-
-    inline void separate() { separator = TRUE; }
-    inline void undo( int until = -1 ) {
-	if ( !isUndoAvailable() )
-	    return;
-	deselect();
-	while ( undoState && undoState > until ) {
-	    Command& cmd = history[--undoState];
-	    switch ( cmd.type ) {
-	    case Insert:
-		text.remove( cmd.pos, 1);
-		cursor = cmd.pos;
-		break;
-	    case Remove:
-	    case RemoveSelection:
-		text.insert( cmd.pos, cmd.c );
-		cursor = cmd.pos + 1;
-		break;
-	    case Delete:
-	    case DeleteSelection:
-		text.insert( cmd.pos, cmd.c );
-		cursor = cmd.pos;
-		break;
-	    case Separator:
-		continue;
-	    }
-	    if ( until < 0 && undoState ) {
-		Command& next = history[undoState-1];
-		if ( next.type != cmd.type && next.type < RemoveSelection
-		     && !( cmd.type >= RemoveSelection && next.type != Separator ) )
-		    break;
-	    }
-	}
-	modified = ( undoState != 0 );
-	textDirty = TRUE;
-    }
-    inline void redo() {
-	if ( !isRedoAvailable() )
-	    return;
-	deselect();
-	while ( undoState < (int)history.size() ) {
-	    Command& cmd = history[undoState++];
-	    switch ( cmd.type ) {
-	    case Insert:
-		text.insert( cmd.pos, cmd.c );
-		cursor = cmd.pos + 1;
-		break;
-	    case Remove:
-	    case Delete:
-	    case RemoveSelection:
-	    case DeleteSelection:
-		text.remove( cmd.pos, 1 );
-		cursor = cmd.pos;
-		break;
-	    case Separator:
-		continue;
-	    }
-	    if ( undoState < (int)history.size() ) {
-		Command& next = history[undoState];
-		if ( next.type != cmd.type && cmd.type < RemoveSelection
-		     && !( next.type >= RemoveSelection && cmd.type != Separator ) )
-		    break;
-	    }
-	}
-	textDirty = TRUE;
-    }
-    inline bool isUndoAvailable() const { return !readOnly && undoState; }
-    inline bool isRedoAvailable() const { return !readOnly && undoState < (int)history.size(); }
-
-    // bidi
-    inline bool isRightToLeft() const { return direction==TQChar::DirON?text.isRightToLeft():(direction==TQChar::DirR); }
-
-    // selection
-    int selstart, selend;
-    inline bool allSelected() const { return !text.isEmpty() && selstart == 0 && selend == (int)text.length(); }
-    inline bool hasSelectedText() const { return !text.isEmpty() && selend > selstart; }
-    inline void deselect() { selDirty |= (selend > selstart); selstart = selend = 0; }
-    void removeSelectedText();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    void copy( bool clipboard = TRUE ) const;
-#endif
-    inline bool inSelection( int x ) const
-    { if ( selstart >= selend ) return FALSE;
-    int pos = xToPos( x, TQTextItem::OnCharacters );  return pos >= selstart && pos < selend; }
-
-    // masking
-    void parseInputMask( const TQString &maskFields );
-    bool isValidInput( TQChar key, TQChar mask ) const;
-    TQString maskString( uint pos, const TQString &str, bool clear = FALSE ) const;
-    TQString clearString( uint pos, uint len ) const;
-    TQString stripString( const TQString &str ) const;
-    int findInMask( int pos, bool forward, bool findSeparator, TQChar searchChar = TQChar() ) const;
-
-    // input methods
-    int imstart, imend, imselstart, imselend;
-    bool composeMode() const { return preeditLength(); }
-    bool hasIMSelection() const { return imSelectionLength(); }
-    int preeditLength() const { return ( imend - imstart ); }
-    int imSelectionLength() const { return ( imselend - imselstart ); }
-
-    // complex text tqlayout
-    TQTextLayout textLayout;
-    void updateTextLayout();
-    void moveCursor( int pos, bool mark = FALSE );
-    void setText( const TQString& txt );
-    int xToPosInternal( int x, TQTextItem::CursorPosition ) const;
-    int xToPos( int x, TQTextItem::CursorPosition = TQTextItem::BetweenCharacters ) const;
-    inline int visualAlignment() const { return tqalignment ? tqalignment : int( isRightToLeft() ? TQt::AlignRight : TQt::AlignLeft ); }
-    TQRect cursorRect() const;
-    void updateMicroFocusHint();
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    // drag and drop
-    TQPoint dndPos;
-    int dndTimer;
-    bool drag();
-#endif
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQLineEdit
-    \brief The TQLineEdit widget is a one-line text editor.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    A line edit allows the user to enter and edit a single line of
-    plain text with a useful collection of editing functions,
-    including undo and redo, cut and paste, and drag and drop.
-
-    By changing the echoMode() of a line edit, it can also be used as
-    a "write-only" field, for inputs such as passwords.
-
-    The length of the text can be constrained to maxLength(). The text
-    can be arbitrarily constrained using a validator() or an
-    inputMask(), or both.
-
-    A related class is TQTextEdit which allows multi-line, rich-text
-    editing.
-
-    You can change the text with setText() or insert(). The text is
-    retrieved with text(); the displayed text (which may be different,
-    see \l{EchoMode}) is retrieved with displayText(). Text can be
-    selected with setSelection() or selectAll(), and the selection can
-    be cut(), copy()ied and paste()d. The text can be aligned with
-    tqsetAlignment().
-
-    When the text changes the textChanged() signal is emitted; when
-    the Return or Enter key is pressed the returnPressed() signal is
-    emitted. Note that if there is a validator set on the line edit,
-    the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the validator
-    returns \c Acceptable.
-
-    By default, TQLineEdits have a frame as specified by the Windows
-    and Motif style guides; you can turn it off by calling
-    setFrame(FALSE).
-
-    The default key bindings are described below. The line edit also
-    provides a context menu (usually invoked by a right mouse click)
-    that presents some of these editing options.
-    \target desc
-    \table
-    \header \i Keypress \i Action
-    \row \i Left Arrow \i Moves the cursor one character to the left.
-    \row \i Shift+Left Arrow \i Moves and selects text one character to the left.
-    \row \i Right Arrow \i Moves the cursor one character to the right.
-    \row \i Shift+Right Arrow \i Moves and selects text one character to the right.
-    \row \i Home \i Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
-    \row \i End \i Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
-    \row \i Backspace \i Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
-    \row \i Ctrl+Backspace \i Deletes the word to the left of the cursor.
-    \row \i Delete \i Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
-    \row \i Ctrl+Delete \i Deletes the word to the right of the cursor.
-    \row \i Ctrl+A \i Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
-    \row \i Ctrl+B \i Moves the cursor one character to the left.
-    \row \i Ctrl+C \i Copies the selected text to the clipboard.
-		      (Windows also supports Ctrl+Insert for this operation.)
-    \row \i Ctrl+D \i Deletes the character to the right of the cursor.
-    \row \i Ctrl+E \i Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
-    \row \i Ctrl+F \i Moves the cursor one character to the right.
-    \row \i Ctrl+H \i Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
-    \row \i Ctrl+K \i Deletes to the end of the line.
-    \row \i Ctrl+V \i Pastes the clipboard text into line edit.
-		      (Windows also supports Shift+Insert for this operation.)
-    \row \i Ctrl+X \i Deletes the selected text and copies it to the clipboard.
-		      (Windows also supports Shift+Delete for this operation.)
-    \row \i Ctrl+Z \i Undoes the last operation.
-    \row \i Ctrl+Y \i Redoes the last undone operation.
-    \endtable
-
-    Any other key sequence that represents a valid character, will
-    cause the character to be inserted into the line edit.
-
-    <img src=qlined-m.png> <img src=qlined-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQTextEdit TQLabel TQComboBox
-	\link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Field, Entry\endlink
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQLineEdit::textChanged( const TQString& )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the text changes. The argument is
-    the new text.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQLineEdit::selectionChanged()
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.
-
-    \sa hasSelectedText(), selectedText()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQLineEdit::lostFocus()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the line edit has lost focus.
-
-    \sa hasFocus(), TQWidget::focusInEvent(), TQWidget::focusOutEvent()
-*/
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a line edit with no text.
-
-    The maximum text length is set to 32767 characters.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget constructor.
-
-    \sa setText(), setMaxLength()
-*/
-
-TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), d(new TQLineEditPrivate( this ))
-{
-    d->init( TQString::null );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a line edit containing the text \a contents.
-
-    The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum
-    text length to 32767 characters.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-
-    \sa text(), setMaxLength()
-*/
-
-TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( const TQString& contents, TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), d(new TQLineEditPrivate( this ))
-{
-    d->init( contents );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a line edit with an input \a inputMask and the text \a
-    contents.
-
-    The cursor position is set to the end of the line and the maximum
-    text length is set to the length of the mask (the number of mask
-    characters and separators).
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-
-    \sa setMask() text()
-*/
-TQLineEdit::TQLineEdit( const TQString& contents, const TQString &inputMask, TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ), d(new TQLineEditPrivate( this ))
-{
-    d->parseInputMask( inputMask );
-    if ( d->maskData ) {
-	TQString ms = d->maskString( 0, contents );
-	d->init( ms + d->clearString( ms.length(), d->maxLength - ms.length() ) );
-	d->cursor = d->nextMaskBlank( ms.length() );
-    } else {
-	d->init( contents );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the line edit.
-*/
-
-TQLineEdit::~TQLineEdit()
-{
-    delete [] d->maskData;
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::text
-    \brief the line edit's text
-
-    Note that setting this property clears the selection, clears the
-    undo/redo history, moves the cursor to the end of the line and
-    resets the \c modified property to FALSE. The text is not
-    validated when inserted with setText().
-
-    The text is truncated to maxLength() length.
-
-    \sa insert()
-*/
-TQString TQLineEdit::text() const
-{
-    TQString res = d->text;
-    if ( d->maskData )
-	res = d->stripString( d->text );
-    return ( res.isNull() ? TQString::tqfromLatin1("") : res );
-}
-
-void TQLineEdit::setText( const TQString& text)
-{
-    resetInputContext();
-    d->setText( text );
-    d->modified = FALSE;
-    d->finishChange( -1, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::displayText
-    \brief the displayed text
-
-    If \c EchoMode is \c Normal this returns the same as text(); if
-    \c EchoMode is \c Password it returns a string of asterisks
-    text().length() characters long, e.g. "******"; if \c EchoMode is
-    \c NoEcho returns an empty string, "".
-
-    \sa setEchoMode() text() EchoMode
-*/
-
-TQString TQLineEdit::displayText() const
-{
-    if ( d->echoMode == NoEcho )
-	return TQString::tqfromLatin1("");
-    TQString res = d->text;
-    if ( d->echoMode == Password )
-	res.fill( passwordChar() );
-    return ( res.isNull() ? TQString::tqfromLatin1("") : res );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::maxLength
-    \brief the maximum permitted length of the text
-
-    If the text is too long, it is truncated at the limit.
-
-    If truncation occurs any selected text will be unselected, the
-    cursor position is set to 0 and the first part of the string is
-    shown.
-
-    If the line edit has an input mask, the mask defines the maximum
-    string length.
-
-    \sa inputMask
-*/
-
-int TQLineEdit::maxLength() const
-{
-    return d->maxLength;
-}
-
-void TQLineEdit::setMaxLength( int maxLength )
-{
-    if ( d->maskData )
-	return;
-    d->maxLength = maxLength;
-    setText( d->text );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::frame
-    \brief whether the line edit draws itself with a frame
-
-    If enabled (the default) the line edit draws itself inside a
-    two-pixel frame, otherwise the line edit draws itself without any
-    frame.
-*/
-bool TQLineEdit::frame() const
-{
-    return frameShape() != NoFrame;
-}
-
-
-void TQLineEdit::setFrame( bool enable )
-{
-    setFrameStyle( enable ? ( LineEditPanel | Sunken ) : NoFrame  );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQLineEdit::EchoMode
-
-    This enum type describes how a line edit should display its
-    contents.
-
-    \value Normal   Display characters as they are entered. This is the
-		    default.
-    \value NoEcho   Do not display anything. This may be appropriate
-		    for passwords where even the length of the
-		    password should be kept secret.
-    \value Password  Display asterisks instead of the characters
-		    actually entered.
-
-    \sa setEchoMode() echoMode()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::echoMode
-    \brief the line edit's echo mode
-
-    The initial setting is \c Normal, but TQLineEdit also supports \c
-    NoEcho and \c Password modes.
-
-    The widget's display and the ability to copy or drag the text is
-    affected by this setting.
-
-    \sa EchoMode displayText()
-*/
-
-TQLineEdit::EchoMode TQLineEdit::echoMode() const
-{
-    return (EchoMode) d->echoMode;
-}
-
-void TQLineEdit::setEchoMode( EchoMode mode )
-{
-    if (mode == (EchoMode)d->echoMode)
-	return;
-    d->echoMode = mode;
-    d->updateTextLayout();
-    setInputMethodEnabled( mode == Normal );
-    update();
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the current input validator, or 0 if no
-    validator has been set.
-
-    \sa setValidator()
-*/
-
-const TQValidator * TQLineEdit::validator() const
-{
-    return d->validator;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets this line edit to only accept input that the validator, \a v,
-    will accept. This allows you to place any arbitrary constraints on
-    the text which may be entered.
-
-    If \a v == 0, setValidator() removes the current input validator.
-    The initial setting is to have no input validator (i.e. any input
-    is accepted up to maxLength()).
-
-    \sa validator() TQIntValidator TQDoubleValidator TQRegExpValidator
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::setValidator( const TQValidator *v )
-{
-    if ( d->validator )
-	disconnect( (TQObject*)d->validator, TQT_SIGNAL( destroyed() ),
-		    this, TQT_SLOT( clearValidator() ) );
-    d->validator = v;
-    if ( d->validator )
-	connect( (TQObject*)d->validator, TQT_SIGNAL( destroyed() ),
-	         this, TQT_SLOT( clearValidator() ) );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a recommended size for the widget.
-
-    The width returned, in pixels, is usually enough for about 15 to
-    20 characters.
-*/
-
-TQSize TQLineEdit::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    TQFontMetrics fm( font() );
-    int h = TQMAX(fm.lineSpacing(), 14) + 2*innerMargin;
-    int w = fm.width( 'x' ) * 17; // "some"
-    int m = frameWidth() * 2;
-    return (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_LineEdit, this,
-				     TQSize( w + m, h + m ).
-				     expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut())));
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a minimum size for the line edit.
-
-    The width returned is enough for at least one character.
-*/
-
-TQSize TQLineEdit::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    int h = fm.height() + TQMAX( 2*innerMargin, fm.leading() );
-    int w = fm.maxWidth();
-    int m = frameWidth() * 2;
-    return TQSize( w + m, h + m );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::cursorPosition
-    \brief the current cursor position for this line edit
-
-    Setting the cursor position causes a tqrepaint when appropriate.
-*/
-
-int TQLineEdit::cursorPosition() const
-{
-    return d->cursor;
-}
-
-
-void TQLineEdit::setCursorPosition( int pos )
-{
-    if (pos < 0)
-        pos = 0;
-
-    if ( pos <= (int) d->text.length() )
-	d->moveCursor( pos );
-}
-
-
-/*! \obsolete Use setText(), setCursorPosition() and setSelection() instead.
-*/
-
-bool TQLineEdit::validateAndSet( const TQString &newText, int newPos,
-				 int newMarkAnchor, int newMarkDrag )
-{
-    int priorState = d->undoState;
-    d->selstart = 0;
-    d->selend = d->text.length();
-    d->removeSelectedText();
-    d->insert( newText );
-    d->finishChange( priorState );
-    if ( d->undoState > priorState ) {
-	d->cursor = newPos;
-	d->selstart = TQMIN( newMarkAnchor, newMarkDrag );
-	d->selend = TQMAX( newMarkAnchor, newMarkDrag );
-	d->updateMicroFocusHint();
-	update();
-	return TRUE;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::tqalignment
-    \brief the tqalignment of the line edit
-
-    Possible Values are \c TQt::AlignAuto, \c TQt::AlignLeft, \c
-    TQt::AlignRight and \c TQt::AlignHCenter.
-
-    Attempting to set the tqalignment to an illegal flag combination
-    does nothing.
-
-    \sa TQt::AlignmentFlags
-*/
-
-int TQLineEdit::tqalignment() const
-{
-    return d->tqalignment;
-}
-
-void TQLineEdit::tqsetAlignment( int flag )
-{
-    d->tqalignment = flag & 0x7;
-    update();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-  \fn void TQLineEdit::cursorRight( bool, int )
-
-  Use cursorForward() instead.
-
-  \sa cursorForward()
-*/
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-  \fn void TQLineEdit::cursorLeft( bool, int )
-  For compatibilty with older applications only. Use cursorBackward()
-  instead.
-  \sa cursorBackward()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Moves the cursor forward \a steps characters. If \a mark is TRUE
-    each character moved over is added to the selection; if \a mark is
-    FALSE the selection is cleared.
-
-    \sa cursorBackward()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::cursorForward( bool mark, int steps )
-{
-    int cursor = d->cursor;
-    if ( steps > 0 ) {
-	while( steps-- )
-	    cursor = d->textLayout.nextCursorPosition( cursor );
-    } else if ( steps < 0 ) {
-	while ( steps++ )
-	    cursor = d->textLayout.previousCursorPosition( cursor );
-    }
-    d->moveCursor( cursor, mark );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Moves the cursor back \a steps characters. If \a mark is TRUE each
-    character moved over is added to the selection; if \a mark is
-    FALSE the selection is cleared.
-
-    \sa cursorForward()
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::cursorBackward( bool mark, int steps )
-{
-    cursorForward( mark, -steps );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Moves the cursor one word forward. If \a mark is TRUE, the word is
-    also selected.
-
-    \sa cursorWordBackward()
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::cursorWordForward( bool mark )
-{
-    d->moveCursor( d->textLayout.nextCursorPosition(d->cursor, TQTextLayout::SkipWords), mark );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Moves the cursor one word backward. If \a mark is TRUE, the word
-    is also selected.
-
-    \sa cursorWordForward()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::cursorWordBackward( bool mark )
-{
-    d->moveCursor( d->textLayout.previousCursorPosition(d->cursor, TQTextLayout::SkipWords), mark );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    If no text is selected, deletes the character to the left of the
-    text cursor and moves the cursor one position to the left. If any
-    text is selected, the cursor is moved to the beginning of the
-    selected text and the selected text is deleted.
-
-    \sa del()
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::backspace()
-{
-    int priorState = d->undoState;
-    if ( d->hasSelectedText() ) {
-	d->removeSelectedText();
-    } else if ( d->cursor ) {
-	    --d->cursor;
-	    if ( d->maskData )
-		d->cursor = d->prevMaskBlank( d->cursor );
-	    d->del( TRUE );
-    }
-    d->finishChange( priorState );
-}
-
-/*!
-    If no text is selected, deletes the character to the right of the
-    text cursor. If any text is selected, the cursor is moved to the
-    beginning of the selected text and the selected text is deleted.
-
-    \sa backspace()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::del()
-{
-    int priorState = d->undoState;
-    if ( d->hasSelectedText() ) {
-	d->removeSelectedText();
-    } else {
-	int n = d->textLayout.nextCursorPosition( d->cursor ) - d->cursor;
-	while ( n-- )
-	    d->del();
-    }
-    d->finishChange( priorState );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Moves the text cursor to the beginning of the line unless it is
-    already there. If \a mark is TRUE, text is selected towards the
-    first position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the
-    cursor is moved.
-
-    \sa end()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::home( bool mark )
-{
-    d->moveCursor( 0, mark );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Moves the text cursor to the end of the line unless it is already
-    there. If \a mark is TRUE, text is selected towards the last
-    position; otherwise, any selected text is unselected if the cursor
-    is moved.
-
-    \sa home()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::end( bool mark )
-{
-    d->moveCursor( d->text.length(), mark );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::modified
-    \brief whether the line edit's contents has been modified by the user
-
-    The modified flag is never read by TQLineEdit; it has a default value
-    of FALSE and is changed to TRUE whenever the user changes the line
-    edit's contents.
-
-    This is useful for things that need to provide a default value but
-    do not start out knowing what the default should be (perhaps it
-    depends on other fields on the form). Start the line edit without
-    the best default, and when the default is known, if modified()
-    returns FALSE (the user hasn't entered any text), insert the
-    default value.
-
-    Calling clearModified() or setText() resets the modified flag to
-    FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQLineEdit::isModified() const
-{
-    return d->modified;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Resets the modified flag to FALSE.
-
-    \sa isModified()
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::clearModified()
-{
-    d->modified = FALSE;
-    d->history.clear();
-    d->undoState = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-  \property TQLineEdit::edited
-  \brief whether the line edit has been edited. Use modified instead.
-*/
-bool TQLineEdit::edited() const { return d->modified; }
-void TQLineEdit::setEdited( bool on ) { d->modified = on; }
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \property TQLineEdit::hasMarkedText
-    \brief whether part of the text has been selected by the user. Use hasSelectedText instead.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::hasSelectedText
-    \brief whether there is any text selected
-
-    hasSelectedText() returns TRUE if some or all of the text has been
-    selected by the user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa selectedText()
-*/
-
-
-bool TQLineEdit::hasSelectedText() const
-{
-    return d->hasSelectedText();
-}
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-  \property TQLineEdit::markedText
-  \brief the text selected by the user. Use selectedText instead.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::selectedText
-    \brief the selected text
-
-    If there is no selected text this property's value is
-    TQString::null.
-
-    \sa hasSelectedText()
-*/
-
-TQString TQLineEdit::selectedText() const
-{
-    if ( d->hasSelectedText() )
-	return d->text.mid( d->selstart, d->selend - d->selstart );
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    selectionStart() returns the index of the first selected character in the
-    line edit or -1 if no text is selected.
-
-    \sa selectedText()
-*/
-
-int TQLineEdit::selectionStart() const
-{
-    return d->hasSelectedText() ? d->selstart : -1;
-}
-
-/*! \obsolete use selectedText(), selectionStart() */
-bool TQLineEdit::getSelection( int *start, int *end )
-{
-    if ( d->hasSelectedText() && start && end ) {
-	*start = d->selstart;
-	*end = d->selend;
-	return TRUE;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Selects text from position \a start and for \a length characters.
-
-    Note that this function sets the cursor's position to the end of
-    the selection regardless of its current position.
-
-    \sa deselect() selectAll() getSelection() cursorForward() cursorBackward()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::setSelection( int start, int length )
-{
-    if ( start < 0 || start > (int)d->text.length() || length < 0 ) {
-	d->selstart = d->selend = 0;
-    } else {
-	d->selstart = start;
-	d->selend = TQMIN( start + length, (int)d->text.length() );
-	d->cursor = d->selend;
-    }
-    update();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::undoAvailable
-    \brief whether undo is available
-*/
-
-bool TQLineEdit::isUndoAvailable() const
-{
-    return d->isUndoAvailable();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::redoAvailable
-    \brief whether redo is available
-*/
-
-bool TQLineEdit::isRedoAvailable() const
-{
-    return d->isRedoAvailable();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::dragEnabled
-    \brief whether the lineedit starts a drag if the user presses and
-    moves the mouse on some selected text
-*/
-
-bool TQLineEdit::dragEnabled() const
-{
-    return d->dragEnabled;
-}
-
-void TQLineEdit::setDragEnabled( bool b )
-{
-    d->dragEnabled = b;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::acceptableInput
-    \brief whether the input satisfies the inputMask and the
-    validator.
-
-    \sa setInputMask(), setValidator()
-*/
-bool TQLineEdit::hasAcceptableInput() const
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VALIDATOR
-    TQString text = d->text;
-    int cursor = d->cursor;
-    if ( d->validator && d->validator->validate( text, cursor ) != TQValidator::Acceptable )
-	return FALSE;
-#endif
-
-    if ( !d->maskData )
-	return TRUE;
-
-    if ( d->text.length() != (uint)d->maxLength )
- 	return FALSE;
-
-    for ( uint i=0; i < (uint)d->maxLength; i++) {
-	if ( d->maskData[i].separator ) {
-	    if ( d->text[(int)i] != d->maskData[i].maskChar )
-		return FALSE;
-	} else {
-	    if ( !d->isValidInput( d->text[(int)i], d->maskData[i].maskChar ) )
-		return FALSE;
-	}
-    }
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::inputMask
-    \brief The validation input mask
-
-    If no mask is set, inputMask() returns TQString::null.
-
-    Sets the TQLineEdit's validation mask. Validators can be used
-    instead of, or in conjunction with masks; see setValidator().
-
-    Unset the mask and return to normal TQLineEdit operation by passing
-    an empty string ("") or just calling setInputMask() with no
-    arguments.
-
-    The mask format understands these mask characters:
-    \table
-    \header \i Character \i Meaning
-    \row \i \c A \i ASCII alphabetic character required. A-Z, a-z.
-    \row \i \c a \i ASCII alphabetic character permitted but not required.
-    \row \i \c N \i ASCII alphanumeric character required. A-Z, a-z, 0-9.
-    \row \i \c n \i ASCII alphanumeric character permitted but not required.
-    \row \i \c X \i Any character required.
-    \row \i \c x \i Any character permitted but not required.
-    \row \i \c 9 \i ASCII digit required. 0-9.
-    \row \i \c 0 \i ASCII digit permitted but not required.
-    \row \i \c D \i ASCII digit required. 1-9.
-    \row \i \c d \i ASCII digit permitted but not required (1-9).
-    \row \i \c # \i ASCII digit or plus/minus sign permitted but not required.
-    \row \i \c > \i All following alphabetic characters are uppercased.
-    \row \i \c < \i All following alphabetic characters are lowercased.
-    \row \i \c ! \i Switch off case conversion.
-    \row \i <tt>\\</tt> \i Use <tt>\\</tt> to escape the special
-			   characters listed above to use them as
-			   separators.
-    \endtable
-
-    The mask consists of a string of mask characters and separators,
-    optionally followed by a semi-colon and the character used for
-    blanks: the blank characters are always removed from the text
-    after editing. The default blank character is space.
-
-    Examples:
-    \table
-    \header \i Mask \i Notes
-    \row \i \c 000.000.000.000;_ \i IP address; blanks are \c{_}.
-    \row \i \c 0000-00-00 \i ISO Date; blanks are \c space
-    \row \i \c >AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA-AAAAA;# \i License number;
-    blanks are \c - and all (alphabetic) characters are converted to
-    uppercase.
-    \endtable
-
-    To get range control (e.g. for an IP address) use masks together
-    with \link setValidator() validators\endlink.
-
-    \sa maxLength
-*/
-TQString TQLineEdit::inputMask() const
-{
-    return ( d->maskData ? d->inputMask + ';' + d->blank : TQString() );
-}
-
-void TQLineEdit::setInputMask( const TQString &inputMask )
-{
-    d->parseInputMask( inputMask );
-    if ( d->maskData )
-	d->moveCursor( d->nextMaskBlank( 0 ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Selects all the text (i.e. highlights it) and moves the cursor to
-    the end. This is useful when a default value has been inserted
-    because if the user types before clicking on the widget, the
-    selected text will be deleted.
-
-    \sa setSelection() deselect()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::selectAll()
-{
-    d->selstart = d->selend = d->cursor = 0;
-    d->moveCursor( d->text.length(), TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Deselects any selected text.
-
-    \sa setSelection() selectAll()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::deselect()
-{
-    d->deselect();
-    d->finishChange();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This slot is equivalent to setValidator(0).
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::clearValidator()
-{
-    setValidator( 0 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Deletes any selected text, inserts \a newText, and validates the
-    result. If it is valid, it sets it as the new contents of the line
-    edit.
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::insert( const TQString &newText )
-{
-//     q->resetInputContext(); //#### FIX ME IN QT
-    int priorState = d->undoState;
-    d->removeSelectedText();
-    d->insert( newText );
-    d->finishChange( priorState );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Clears the contents of the line edit.
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::clear()
-{
-    int priorState = d->undoState;
-    resetInputContext();
-    d->selstart = 0;
-    d->selend = d->text.length();
-    d->removeSelectedText();
-    d->separate();
-    d->finishChange( priorState );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Undoes the last operation if undo is \link
-    TQLineEdit::undoAvailable available\endlink. Deselects any current
-    selection, and updates the selection start to the current cursor
-    position.
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::undo()
-{
-    resetInputContext();
-    d->undo();
-    d->finishChange( -1, FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Redoes the last operation if redo is \link
-    TQLineEdit::redoAvailable available\endlink.
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::redo()
-{
-    resetInputContext();
-    d->redo();
-    d->finishChange();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQLineEdit::readOnly
-    \brief whether the line edit is read only.
-
-    In read-only mode, the user can still copy the text to the
-    clipboard or drag-and-drop the text (if echoMode() is \c Normal),
-    but cannot edit it.
-
-    TQLineEdit does not show a cursor in read-only mode.
-
-    \sa setEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQLineEdit::isReadOnly() const
-{
-    return d->readOnly;
-}
-
-void TQLineEdit::setReadOnly( bool enable )
-{
-    d->readOnly = enable;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    setCursor( enable ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-    update();
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-/*!
-    Copies the selected text to the clipboard and deletes it, if there
-    is any, and if echoMode() is \c Normal.
-
-    If the current validator disallows deleting the selected text,
-    cut() will copy without deleting.
-
-    \sa copy() paste() setValidator()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::cut()
-{
-    if ( hasSelectedText() ) {
-	copy();
-	del();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Copies the selected text to the clipboard, if there is any, and if
-    echoMode() is \c Normal.
-
-    \sa cut() paste()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::copy() const
-{
-    d->copy();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inserts the clipboard's text at the cursor position, deleting any
-    selected text, providing the line edit is not \link
-    TQLineEdit::readOnly read-only\endlink.
-
-    If the end result would not be acceptable to the current
-    \link setValidator() validator\endlink, nothing happens.
-
-    \sa copy() cut()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::paste()
-{
-    insert( TQApplication::tqclipboard()->text( TQClipboard::Clipboard ) );
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::copy( bool clipboard ) const
-{
-    TQString t = q->selectedText();
-    if ( !t.isEmpty() && echoMode == TQLineEdit::Normal ) {
-	q->disconnect( TQApplication::tqclipboard(), TQT_SIGNAL(selectionChanged()), q, 0);
-	TQApplication::tqclipboard()->setText( t, clipboard ? TQClipboard::Clipboard : TQClipboard::Selection );
-	q->connect( TQApplication::tqclipboard(), TQT_SIGNAL(selectionChanged()),
-		 q, TQT_SLOT(clipboardChanged()) );
-    }
-}
-
-#endif // !TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    TQFrame::resizeEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-bool TQLineEdit::event( TQEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::AccelOverride && !d->readOnly ) {
-	TQKeyEvent* ke = (TQKeyEvent*) e;
-	if ( ke->state() == Qt::NoButton || ke->state() == ShiftButton
-	     || ke->state() == TQt::Keypad ) {
-	    if ( ke->key() < Key_Escape ) {
-		ke->accept();
-	    } else {
-		switch ( ke->key() ) {
-  		case Qt::Key_Delete:
-  		case Qt::Key_Home:
-  		case Qt::Key_End:
-  		case Qt::Key_Backspace:
- 		case Qt::Key_Left:
-		case Qt::Key_Right:
- 		    ke->accept();
- 		default:
-  		    break;
-  		}
-	    }
-	} else if ( ke->state() & ControlButton ) {
-	    switch ( ke->key() ) {
-// Those are too frequently used for application functionality
-/*	    case Qt::Key_A:
-	    case Qt::Key_B:
-	    case Qt::Key_D:
-	    case Qt::Key_E:
-	    case Qt::Key_F:
-	    case Qt::Key_H:
-	    case Qt::Key_K:
-*/
-	    case Qt::Key_C:
-	    case Qt::Key_V:
-	    case Qt::Key_X:
-	    case Qt::Key_Y:
-	    case Qt::Key_Z:
-	    case Qt::Key_Left:
-	    case Qt::Key_Right:
-#if defined (TQ_WS_WIN)
-	    case Qt::Key_Insert:
-	    case Qt::Key_Delete:
-#endif
-		ke->accept();
-	    default:
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::Timer ) {
-	// should be timerEvent, is here for binary compatibility
-	int timerId = ((TQTimerEvent*)e)->timerId();
-	if ( timerId == d->cursorTimer ) {
-	    if(!hasSelectedText() || tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected ))
-		d->setCursorVisible( !d->cursorVisible );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-	} else if ( timerId == d->dndTimer ) {
-	    if( !d->drag() )
-                return TRUE;
-#endif
-	} else if ( timerId == d->tripleClickTimer ) {
-	    killTimer( d->tripleClickTimer );
-	    d->tripleClickTimer = 0;
-	}
-    }
-    return TQWidget::event( e );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    if ( sendMouseEventToInputContext( e ) )
-	return;
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::RightButton )
-	return;
-    if ( d->tripleClickTimer && ( e->pos() - d->tripleClick ).manhattanLength() <
-	 TQApplication::startDragDistance() ) {
-	selectAll();
-	return;
-    }
-    bool mark = e->state() & ShiftButton;
-    int cursor = d->xToPos( e->pos().x() );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    if ( !mark && d->dragEnabled && d->echoMode == Normal &&
-	 e->button() == Qt::LeftButton && d->inSelection( e->pos().x() ) ) {
-	d->cursor = cursor;
-	d->updateMicroFocusHint();
-	update();
-	d->dndPos = e->pos();
-	if ( !d->dndTimer )
-	    d->dndTimer = startTimer( TQApplication::startDragTime() );
-    } else
-#endif
-    {
-	d->moveCursor( cursor, mark );
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( sendMouseEventToInputContext( e ) )
-	return;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    if ( ( e->state() & Qt::MouseButtonMask ) == 0 ) {
-	if ( !d->readOnly && d->dragEnabled
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-	     && !TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode()
-#endif
-	    )
-	    setCursor( ( d->inSelection( e->pos().x() ) ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor ) );
-    }
-#endif
-
-    if ( e->state() & Qt::LeftButton ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-	if ( d->dndTimer ) {
-	    if ( ( d->dndPos - e->pos() ).manhattanLength() > TQApplication::startDragDistance() )
-		d->drag();
-	} else
-#endif
-	{
-	    d->moveCursor( d->xToPos( e->pos().x() ), TRUE );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    if ( sendMouseEventToInputContext( e ) )
-	return;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	if ( d->dndTimer ) {
-	    killTimer( d->dndTimer );
-	    d->dndTimer = 0;
-	    deselect();
-	    return;
-	}
-    }
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    if (TQApplication::tqclipboard()->supportsSelection() ) {
-	if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	    d->copy( FALSE );
-	} else if ( !d->readOnly && e->button() == Qt::MidButton ) {
-	    d->deselect();
-	    insert( TQApplication::tqclipboard()->text( TQClipboard::Selection ) );
-	}
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    if ( sendMouseEventToInputContext( e ) )
-	return;
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	deselect();
-	d->cursor = d->xToPos( e->pos().x() );
-	d->cursor = d->textLayout.previousCursorPosition( d->cursor, TQTextLayout::SkipWords );
-	// ## text tqlayout should support end of words.
-	int end = d->textLayout.nextCursorPosition( d->cursor, TQTextLayout::SkipWords );
-	while ( end > d->cursor && d->text[end-1].isSpace() )
-	    --end;
-	d->moveCursor( end, TRUE );
-	d->tripleClickTimer = startTimer( TQApplication::doubleClickInterval() );
-	d->tripleClick = e->pos();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void  TQLineEdit::returnPressed()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the Return or Enter key is pressed.
-    Note that if there is a validator() or inputMask() set on the line
-    edit, the returnPressed() signal will only be emitted if the input
-    follows the inputMask() and the validator() returns \c Acceptable.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Converts key press event \a e into a line edit action.
-
-    If Return or Enter is pressed and the current text is valid (or
-    can be \link TQValidator::fixup() made valid\endlink by the
-    validator), the signal returnPressed() is emitted.
-
-    The default key bindings are listed in the \link #desc detailed
-    description.\endlink
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * e )
-{
-    d->setCursorVisible( TRUE );
-    if ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Enter || e->key() == Qt::Key_Return ) {
-	const TQValidator * v = d->validator;
-	if ( hasAcceptableInput() ) {
-	    emit returnPressed();
-	}
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VALIDATOR
-	else if ( v && v->validate( d->text, d->cursor ) != TQValidator::Acceptable ) {
-	    TQString vstr = d->text;
-	    v->fixup( vstr );
-	    if ( vstr != d->text ) {
-		setText( vstr );
-		if ( hasAcceptableInput() )
-		    emit returnPressed();
-	    }
-	}
-#endif
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( !d->readOnly ) {
-	TQString t = e->text();
-	if ( !t.isEmpty() && (!e->ascii() || e->ascii()>=32) &&
-	     e->key() != Qt::Key_Delete &&
-	     e->key() != Qt::Key_Backspace ) {
-#ifdef TQ_WS_X11
-	    extern bool qt_hebrew_keyboard_hack;
-	    if ( qt_hebrew_keyboard_hack ) {
-		// the X11 keyboard tqlayout is broken and does not reverse
-		// braces correctly. This is a hack to get halfway correct
-		// behaviour
-		if ( d->isRightToLeft() ) {
-		    TQChar *c = (TQChar *)t.tqunicode();
-		    int l = t.length();
-		    while( l-- ) {
-			if ( c->mirrored() )
-			    *c = c->mirroredChar();
-			c++;
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-#endif
-	    insert( t );
-	    return;
-	}
-    }
-    bool unknown = FALSE;
-    if ( e->state() & ControlButton ) {
-	switch ( e->key() ) {
-	case Qt::Key_A:
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-	    home( e->state() & ShiftButton );
-#else
-	    selectAll();
-#endif
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_B:
-	    cursorForward( e->state() & ShiftButton, -1 );
-	    break;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-	case Qt::Key_C:
-	    copy();
-	    break;
-#endif
-	case Qt::Key_D:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly ) {
-		del();
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_E:
-	    end( e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_F:
-	    cursorForward( e->state() & ShiftButton, 1 );
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_H:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly ) {
-		backspace();
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_K:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly ) {
-		int priorState = d->undoState;
-		d->deselect();
-		while ( d->cursor < (int) d->text.length() )
-		    d->del();
-		d->finishChange( priorState );
-	    }
-	    break;
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-        case Qt::Key_U:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly )
-		clear();
-	    break;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-	case Qt::Key_V:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly )
-		paste();
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_X:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly && d->hasSelectedText() && echoMode() == Normal ) {
-		copy();
-		del();
-	    }
-	    break;
-#if defined (TQ_WS_WIN)
-	case Qt::Key_Insert:
-	    copy();
-	    break;
-#endif
-#endif
-	case Qt::Key_Delete:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly ) {
-		cursorWordForward( TRUE );
-		del();
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Backspace:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly ) {
-		cursorWordBackward( TRUE );
-		del();
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Right:
-	case Qt::Key_Left:
-	    if ( d->isRightToLeft() == (e->key() == Qt::Key_Right) ) {
-	        if ( echoMode() == Normal )
-		    cursorWordBackward( e->state() & ShiftButton );
-		else
-		    home( e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	    } else {
-		if ( echoMode() == Normal )
-		    cursorWordForward( e->state() & ShiftButton );
-		else
-		    end( e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Z:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly ) {
-		if(e->state() & ShiftButton)
-		    redo();
-		else
-		    undo();
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Y:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly )
-		redo();
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    unknown = TRUE;
-	}
-    } else { // ### check for *no* modifier
-	switch ( e->key() ) {
-	case Qt::Key_Shift:
-	    // ### TODO
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Left:
-	case Qt::Key_Right: {
-	    int step =  (d->isRightToLeft() == (e->key() == Qt::Key_Right)) ? -1 : 1;
-	    cursorForward( e->state() & ShiftButton, step );
-	}
-	break;
-	case Qt::Key_Backspace:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly ) {
-		backspace();
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Home:
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MACX
-	case Qt::Key_Up:
-#endif
-	    home( e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_End:
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MACX
-	case Qt::Key_Down:
-#endif
-	    end( e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Delete:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly ) {
-#if defined (TQ_WS_WIN)
-		if ( e->state() & ShiftButton ) {
-		    cut();
-		    break;
-		}
-#endif
-		del();
-	    }
-	    break;
-#if defined (TQ_WS_WIN)
-	case Qt::Key_Insert:
-	    if ( !d->readOnly && e->state() & ShiftButton )
-		paste();
-	    else
-		unknown = TRUE;
-	    break;
-#endif
-	case Qt::Key_F14: // Undo key on Sun keyboards
-	    if ( !d->readOnly )
-		undo();
-	    break;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-	case Qt::Key_F16: // Copy key on Sun keyboards
-	    copy();
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_F18: // Paste key on Sun keyboards
-	    if ( !d->readOnly )
-		paste();
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_F20: // Cut key on Sun keyboards
-	    if ( !d->readOnly && hasSelectedText() && echoMode() == Normal ) {
-		copy();
-		del();
-	    }
-	    break;
-#endif
-	default:
-	    unknown = TRUE;
-	}
-    }
-    if ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Direction_L || e->key() == Qt::Key_Direction_R ) {
-	d->direction = (e->key() == Qt::Key_Direction_L) ? TQChar::DirL : TQChar::DirR;
-        d->updateTextLayout();
-	update();
-    }
-
-    if ( unknown )
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  This function is not intended as polymorphic usage. Just a shared code
-  fragment that calls TQWidget::sendMouseEventToInputContext() easily for this
-  class.
- */
-bool TQLineEdit::sendMouseEventToInputContext( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IM
-    if ( d->composeMode() ) {
-	int cursor = d->xToPosInternal( e->pos().x(), TQTextItem::OnCharacters );
-	int mousePos = cursor - d->imstart;
-	if ( mousePos >= 0 && mousePos < d->preeditLength() ) {
-	    TQWidget::sendMouseEventToInputContext( mousePos, e->type(),
-						   e->button(), e->state() );
-	} else if ( e->type() != TQEvent::MouseMove ) {
-	    // send button events on out of preedit
-	    TQWidget::sendMouseEventToInputContext( -1, e->type(),
-						   e->button(), e->state() );
-	}
-	return TRUE;
-    }
-#endif
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-void TQLineEdit::imStartEvent( TQIMEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( d->readOnly ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    d->removeSelectedText();
-    d->updateMicroFocusHint();
-    d->imstart = d->imend = d->imselstart = d->imselend = d->cursor;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-void TQLineEdit::imComposeEvent( TQIMEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( d->readOnly ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    d->text.replace( d->imstart, d->imend - d->imstart, e->text() );
-    d->imend = d->imstart + e->text().length();
-    d->imselstart = d->imstart + e->cursorPos();
-    d->imselend = d->imselstart + e->selectionLength();
-    d->cursor = d->imstart + e->cursorPos();
-    d->updateTextLayout();
-    d->updateMicroFocusHint();
-    update();
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-void TQLineEdit::imEndEvent( TQIMEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( d->readOnly) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    d->text.remove( d->imstart, d->imend - d->imstart );
-    d->cursor = d->imselstart = d->imselend = d->imend = d->imstart;
-    d->textDirty = TRUE;
-    insert( e->text() );
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent* tqfe )
-{
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-    if ( tqfe->reason() == TQFocusEvent::Tab ||
-	 tqfe->reason() == TQFocusEvent::Backtab  ||
-	 tqfe->reason() == TQFocusEvent::Shortcut )
-#else // USE_QT4
-    if ( tqfereason() == TQFocusEvent::Tab ||
-	 TQFocusEvent::reason() == TQFocusEvent::Backtab  ||
-	 TQFocusEvent::reason() == TQFocusEvent::Shortcut )
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	d->maskData ? d->moveCursor( d->nextMaskBlank( 0 ) ) : selectAll();
-    if ( !d->cursorTimer ) {
-	int cft = TQApplication::cursorFlashTime();
-	d->cursorTimer = cft ? startTimer( cft/2 ) : -1;
-    }
-    if( !hasSelectedText() || tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected ) )
-	d->setCursorVisible( TRUE );
-    if ( d->hasIMSelection() )
-	d->cursor = d->imselstart;
-    d->updateMicroFocusHint();
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent* tqfe )
-{
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-    if ( tqfe->reason() != TQFocusEvent::ActiveWindow &&
-	 tqfe->reason() != TQFocusEvent::Popup )
-#else // USE_QT4
-    if ( TQFocusEvent::reason() != TQFocusEvent::ActiveWindow &&
-	 TQFocusEvent::reason() != TQFocusEvent::Popup )
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	deselect();
-    d->setCursorVisible( FALSE );
-    if ( d->cursorTimer > 0 )
-	killTimer( d->cursorTimer );
-    d->cursorTimer = 0;
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-    if (tqfe->reason() != TQFocusEvent::Popup)
-#else // USE_QT4
-    if (TQFocusEvent::reason() != TQFocusEvent::Popup)
-#endif // USE_QT4
-        emit lostFocus();
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::drawContents( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    const TQColorGroup& cg = tqcolorGroup();
-    TQRect cr = contentsRect();
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    TQRect lineRect( cr.x() + innerMargin, cr.y() + (cr.height() - fm.height() + 1) / 2,
-		    cr.width() - 2*innerMargin, fm.height() );
-    TQBrush bg = TQBrush( paletteBackgroundColor() );
-    if ( paletteBackgroundPixmap() )
-	bg = TQBrush( cg.background(), *paletteBackgroundPixmap() );
-    else if ( !isEnabled() )
-	bg = cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Background );
-    TQPoint brushOrigin = p->brushOrigin();
-    p->save();
-    p->setClipRegion( TQRegion(cr) - lineRect );
-    p->setBrushOrigin(brushOrigin - backgroundOffset());
-    p->fillRect( cr, bg );
-    p->restore();
-    TQSharedDoubleBuffer buffer( p, lineRect.x(), lineRect.y(),
- 				lineRect.width(), lineRect.height(),
- 				hasFocus() ? TQSharedDoubleBuffer::Force : 0 );
-    p = buffer.painter();
-    brushOrigin = p->brushOrigin();
-    p->setBrushOrigin(brushOrigin - backgroundOffset());
-    p->fillRect( lineRect, bg );
-    p->setBrushOrigin(brushOrigin);
-
-    // locate cursor position
-    int cix = 0;
-    TQTextItem ci = d->textLayout.findItem( d->cursor );
-    if ( ci.isValid() ) {
-	if ( d->cursor != (int)d->text.length() && d->cursor == ci.from() + ci.length()
-	     && ci.isRightToLeft() != d->isRightToLeft() )
-	    ci = d->textLayout.findItem( d->cursor + 1 );
-	cix = ci.x() + ci.cursorToX( d->cursor - ci.from() );
-    }
-
-    // horizontal scrolling
-    int minLB = TQMAX( 0, -fm.minLeftBearing() );
-    int minRB = TQMAX( 0, -fm.minRightBearing() );
-    int widthUsed = d->textLayout.widthUsed() + 1 + minRB;
-    if ( (minLB + widthUsed) <=  lineRect.width() ) {
-	switch ( d->visualAlignment() ) {
-	case TQt::AlignRight:
-	    d->hscroll = widthUsed - lineRect.width() + 1;
-	    break;
-	case TQt::AlignHCenter:
-	    d->hscroll = ( widthUsed - lineRect.width() ) / 2;
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    d->hscroll = 0;
-	    break;
-	}
-	d->hscroll -= minLB;
-    } else if ( cix - d->hscroll >= lineRect.width() ) {
-	d->hscroll = cix - lineRect.width() + 1;
-    } else if ( cix - d->hscroll < 0 ) {
-	d->hscroll = cix;
-    } else if ( widthUsed - d->hscroll < lineRect.width() ) {
-	d->hscroll = widthUsed - lineRect.width() + 1;
-    } else if (d->hscroll < 0) {
-        d->hscroll = 0;
-    }
-    // This updateMicroFocusHint() is corresponding to update() at
-    // IMCompose event. Although the function is invoked from various
-    // other points, some situations such as "candidate selection on
-    // AlignHCenter'ed text" need this invocation because
-    // updateMicroFocusHint() requires updated contentsRect(), and
-    // there are no other chances in such situation that invoke the
-    // function.
-    d->updateMicroFocusHint();
-    // the y offset is there to keep the baseline constant in case we have script changes in the text.
-    TQPoint topLeft = lineRect.topLeft() - TQPoint(d->hscroll, d->ascent-fm.ascent());
-
-    // draw text, selections and cursors
-    p->setPen( cg.text() );
-    bool supressCursor = d->readOnly, hasRightToLeft = d->isRightToLeft();
-    int textflags = 0;
-    if ( font().underline() )
-	textflags |= TQt::Underline;
-    if ( font().strikeOut() )
-	textflags |= TQt::StrikeOut;
-    if ( font().overline() )
-	textflags |= TQt::Overline;
-
-    for ( int i = 0; i < d->textLayout.numItems(); i++ ) {
-	TQTextItem ti = d->textLayout.itemAt( i );
-	hasRightToLeft |= ti.isRightToLeft();
-	int tix = topLeft.x() + ti.x();
-	int first = ti.from();
-	int last = ti.from() + ti.length() - 1;
-
-	// text and selection
-	if ( d->selstart < d->selend && (last >= d->selstart && first < d->selend ) ) {
-	    TQRect highlight = TQRect( TQPoint( tix + ti.cursorToX( TQMAX( d->selstart - first, 0 ) ),
-					     lineRect.top() ),
-				     TQPoint( tix + ti.cursorToX( TQMIN( d->selend - first, last - first + 1 ) ) - 1,
-					     lineRect.bottom() ) ).normalize();
-	    p->save();
-  	    p->setClipRegion( TQRegion( lineRect ) - highlight, TQPainter::CoordPainter );
- 	    p->tqdrawTextItem( topLeft, ti, textflags );
- 	    p->setClipRect( lineRect & highlight, TQPainter::CoordPainter );
-	    p->fillRect( highlight, cg.highlight() );
- 	    p->setPen( cg.highlightedText() );
-	    p->tqdrawTextItem( topLeft, ti, textflags );
-	    p->restore();
-	} else {
-	    p->tqdrawTextItem( topLeft, ti, textflags );
-	}
-
-	// input method edit area
-	if ( d->composeMode() && (last >= d->imstart && first < d->imend ) ) {
-	    TQRect highlight = TQRect( TQPoint( tix + ti.cursorToX( TQMAX( d->imstart - first, 0 ) ), lineRect.top() ),
-			      TQPoint( tix + ti.cursorToX( TQMIN( d->imend - first, last - first + 1 ) )-1, lineRect.bottom() ) ).normalize();
-	    p->save();
- 	    p->setClipRect( lineRect & highlight, TQPainter::CoordPainter );
-
-	    int h1, s1, v1, h2, s2, v2;
-	    TQT_TQCOLOR_OBJECT(cg.color( TQColorGroup::Base )).hsv( &h1, &s1, &v1 );
-	    TQT_TQCOLOR_OBJECT(cg.color( TQColorGroup::Background )).hsv( &h2, &s2, &v2 );
-	    TQColor imCol;
-	    imCol.setHsv( h1, s1, ( v1 + v2 ) / 2 );
-	    p->fillRect( highlight, imCol );
-	    p->tqdrawTextItem( topLeft, ti, textflags );
-            // draw preedit's underline
-            if (d->imend - d->imstart > 0) {
-                p->setPen( cg.text() );
-                p->drawLine( highlight.bottomLeft(), highlight.bottomRight() );
-            }
-	    p->restore();
-	}
-
-	// input method selection
-	if ( d->hasIMSelection() && (last >= d->imselstart && first < d->imselend ) ) {
-	    TQRect highlight = TQRect( TQPoint( tix + ti.cursorToX( TQMAX( d->imselstart - first, 0 ) ), lineRect.top() ),
-			      TQPoint( tix + ti.cursorToX( TQMIN( d->imselend - first, last - first + 1 ) )-1, lineRect.bottom() ) ).normalize();
-	    p->save();
-	    p->setClipRect( lineRect & highlight, TQPainter::CoordPainter );
-	    p->fillRect( highlight, cg.text() );
-	    p->setPen( paletteBackgroundColor() );
-	    p->tqdrawTextItem( topLeft, ti, textflags );
-	    p->restore();
-            supressCursor = TRUE;
-	}
-
-	// overwrite cursor
-	if ( d->cursorVisible && d->maskData &&
-	     d->selend <= d->selstart && (last >= d->cursor && first <= d->cursor ) ) {
-	    TQRect highlight = TQRect( TQPoint( tix + ti.cursorToX( TQMAX( d->cursor - first, 0 ) ), lineRect.top() ),
-				     TQPoint( tix + ti.cursorToX( TQMIN( d->cursor + 1 - first, last - first + 1 ) )-1, lineRect.bottom() ) ).normalize();
-	    p->save();
-	    p->setClipRect( lineRect & highlight, TQPainter::CoordPainter );
-	    p->fillRect( highlight, cg.text() );
-	    p->setPen( paletteBackgroundColor() );
-	    p->tqdrawTextItem( topLeft, ti, textflags );
-	    p->restore();
-	    supressCursor = TRUE;
-	}
-    }
-
-    // draw cursor
-    // 
-    // Asian users regard IM selection text as cursor on candidate
-    // selection phase of input method, so ordinary cursor should be
-    // invisible if IM selection text exists.
-    if ( d->cursorVisible && !supressCursor && !d->hasIMSelection() ) {
-	TQPoint from( topLeft.x() + cix, lineRect.top() );
-	TQPoint to = from + TQPoint( 0, lineRect.height() );
-	p->drawLine( from, to );
-	if ( hasRightToLeft ) {
-	    bool rtl = ci.isValid() ? ci.isRightToLeft() : TRUE;
-	    to = from + TQPoint( (rtl ? -2 : 2), 2 );
-	    p->drawLine( from, to );
-	    from.ry() += 4;
-	    p->drawLine( from, to );
-	}
-    }
-    buffer.end();
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::dragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !d->readOnly && TQTextDrag::canDecode(e) ) {
-	e->acceptAction();
-	d->cursor = d->xToPos( e->pos().x() );
-	d->cursorVisible = TRUE;
-	update();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!\reimp */
-void TQLineEdit::dragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent * e )
-{
-    TQLineEdit::dragMoveEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!\reimp */
-void TQLineEdit::dragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent *)
-{
-    if ( d->cursorVisible ) {
-	d->cursorVisible = FALSE;
-	update();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!\reimp */
-void TQLineEdit::dropEvent( TQDropEvent* e )
-{
-    TQString str;
-    // try text/plain
-    TQCString plain = "plain";
-    bool decoded = TQTextDrag::decode(e, str, plain);
-    // otherwise we'll accept any kind of text (like text/uri-list)
-    if (! decoded)
-	decoded = TQTextDrag::decode(e, str);
-
-    if ( decoded && !d->readOnly ) {
-	if ( e->source() == this && e->action() == TQDropEvent::Copy )
- 	    deselect();
-	d->cursor =d->xToPos( e->pos().x() );
-	int selStart = d->cursor;
-	int oldSelStart = d->selstart;
-	int oldSelEnd = d->selend;
-	d->cursorVisible = FALSE;
-	e->acceptAction();
-	insert( str );
-	if ( e->source() == this ) {
-	    if ( e->action() == TQDropEvent::Move ) {
-		if ( selStart > oldSelStart && selStart <= oldSelEnd )
-		    setSelection( oldSelStart, str.length() );
-		else if ( selStart > oldSelEnd )
-		    setSelection( selStart - str.length(), str.length() );
-		else
-		    setSelection( selStart, str.length() );
-	    } else {
-		setSelection( selStart, str.length() );
-	    }
-	}
-    } else {
-	e->ignore();
-	update();
-    }
-}
-
-bool TQLineEditPrivate::drag()
-{
-    q->killTimer( dndTimer );
-    dndTimer = 0;
-    TQTextDrag *tdo = new TQTextDrag( q->selectedText(), q );
-
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQLineEdit> gptr = q;
-    bool r = tdo->drag();
-    if ( !gptr )
-        return FALSE;
-
-    // ### fix the check TQDragObject::target() != q in TQt4 (should not be needed)
-    if ( r && !readOnly && TQDragObject::target() != q ) {
-	int priorState = undoState;
-	removeSelectedText();
-	finishChange( priorState );
-    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    q->setCursor( readOnly ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-enum { IdUndo, IdRedo, IdSep1, IdCut, IdCopy, IdPaste, IdClear, IdSep2, IdSelectAll };
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-void TQLineEdit::contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * e )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IM
-    if ( d->composeMode() )
-	return;
-#endif
-    d->separate();
-    TQPopupMenu *menu = createPopupMenu();
-    if (!menu)
-        return;
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQPopupMenu> popup = menu;
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQLineEdit> that = this;
-    TQPoint pos = e->reason() == TQContextMenuEvent::Mouse ? e->globalPos() :
-		 mapToGlobal( TQPoint(e->pos().x(), 0) ) + TQPoint( width() / 2, height() / 2 );
-    int r = popup->exec( pos );
-    delete (TQPopupMenu*)popup;
-    if ( that && d->menuId ) {
-	switch ( d->menuId - r ) {
-	case IdClear: clear(); break;
-	case IdSelectAll: selectAll(); break;
-	case IdUndo: undo(); break;
-	case IdRedo: redo(); break;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-	case IdCut: cut(); break;
-	case IdCopy: copy(); break;
-	case IdPaste: paste(); break;
-#endif
-	default:
-	    ; // nothing selected or lineedit destroyed. Be careful.
-	}
-    }
-#endif //TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-}
-
-/*!
-    This function is called to create the popup menu which is shown
-    when the user clicks on the line edit with the right mouse button.
-    If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this
-    function and return the popup menu you create. The popup menu's
-    ownership is transferred to the caller.
-*/
-
-TQPopupMenu *TQLineEdit::createPopupMenu()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    TQPopupMenu *popup = new TQPopupMenu( this, "qt_edit_menu" );
-    int id = d->menuId = popup->insertItem( tr( "&Undo" ) + ACCEL_KEY( Z ) );
-    popup->insertItem( tr( "&Redo" ) + ACCEL_KEY( Y ) );
-    popup->insertSeparator();
-    popup->insertItem( tr( "Cu&t" ) + ACCEL_KEY( X ) );
-    popup->insertItem( tr( "&Copy" ) + ACCEL_KEY( C ) );
-    popup->insertItem( tr( "&Paste" ) + ACCEL_KEY( V ) );
-    popup->insertItem( tr( "Clear" ) );
-    popup->insertSeparator();
-    popup->insertItem( tr( "Select All" )
-#ifndef TQ_WS_X11
-    + ACCEL_KEY( A )
-#endif
-	);
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IM
-    TQInputContext *qic = getInputContext();
-    if ( qic )
-	qic->addMenusTo( popup );
-#endif
-    
-    popup->setItemEnabled( id - IdUndo, d->isUndoAvailable() );
-    popup->setItemEnabled( id - IdRedo, d->isRedoAvailable() );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    popup->setItemEnabled( id - IdCut, !d->readOnly && d->hasSelectedText() );
-    popup->setItemEnabled( id - IdCopy, d->hasSelectedText() );
-    popup->setItemEnabled( id - IdPaste, !d->readOnly && !TQApplication::tqclipboard()->text().isEmpty() );
-#else
-    popup->setItemVisible( id - IdCut, FALSE );
-    popup->setItemVisible( id - IdCopy, FALSE );
-    popup->setItemVisible( id - IdPaste, FALSE );
-#endif
-    popup->setItemEnabled( id - IdClear, !d->readOnly && !d->text.isEmpty() );
-    popup->setItemEnabled( id - IdSelectAll, !d->text.isEmpty() && !d->allSelected() );
-    return popup;
-#else
-    return 0;
-#endif
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQLineEdit::windowActivationChange( bool b )
-{
-    //### remove me with WHighlightSelection attribute
-    if ( tqpalette().active() != tqpalette().inactive() )
-	update();
-    TQWidget::windowActivationChange( b );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQLineEdit::setPalette( const TQPalette & p )
-{
-    //### remove me with WHighlightSelection attribute
-    TQWidget::setPalette( p );
-    update();
-}
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-  \fn void TQLineEdit::repaintArea( int from, int to )
-  Repaints all characters from \a from to \a to. If cursorPos is
-  between from and to, ensures that cursorPos is visible.
-*/
-
-/*! \reimp
- */
-void TQLineEdit::setFont( const TQFont & f )
-{
-    TQWidget::setFont( f );
-    d->updateTextLayout();
-}
-
-/*! \obsolete
-*/
-int TQLineEdit::characterAt( int xpos, TQChar *chr ) const
-{
-    int pos = d->xToPos( xpos + contentsRect().x() - d->hscroll + innerMargin );
-    if ( chr && pos < (int) d->text.length() )
-	*chr = d->text.at( pos );
-    return pos;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-    Sets the password character to \a c.
-
-    \sa passwordChar()
-*/
-
-void TQLineEdit::setPasswordChar( TQChar c )
-{
-    d->passwordChar = c;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-    Returns the password character.
-
-    \sa setPasswordChar()
-*/
-TQChar TQLineEdit::passwordChar() const
-{
-    return ( d->passwordChar.isNull() ? TQChar( tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_LineEdit_PasswordCharacter, this ) ) : d->passwordChar );
-}
-
-void TQLineEdit::clipboardChanged()
-{
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::init( const TQString& txt )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    q->setCursor( readOnly ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-    q->setFocusPolicy( Qt::StrongFocus );
-    q->setInputMethodEnabled( TRUE );
-    //   Specifies that this widget can use more, but is able to survive on
-    //   less, horizontal space; and is fixed vertically.
-    q->tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-    q->setBackgroundMode( PaletteBase );
-    q->setKeyCompression( TRUE );
-    q->setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-    q->setAcceptDrops( TRUE );
-    q->setFrame( TRUE );
-    text = txt;
-    updateTextLayout();
-    cursor = text.length();
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::updateTextLayout()
-{
-    // replace all non-printable characters with spaces (to avoid
-    // drawing boxes when using fonts that don't have glyphs for such
-    // characters)
-    const TQString &displayText = q->displayText();
-    TQString str(displayText.tqunicode(), displayText.length());
-    TQChar* uc = (TQChar*)str.tqunicode();
-    for (int i = 0; i < (int)str.length(); ++i) {
-	if (! uc[i].isPrint())
-	    uc[i] = TQChar(0x0020);
-    }
-    textLayout.setText( str, q->font() );
-    textLayout.setDirection((TQChar::Direction)direction);
-    textLayout.beginLayout(TQTextLayout::SingleLine);
-    textLayout.beginLine( INT_MAX );
-    while ( !textLayout.atEnd() )
-	textLayout.addCurrentItem();
-    ascent = 0;
-    textLayout.endLine(0, 0, TQt::AlignLeft|TQt::SingleLine, &ascent);
-}
-
-int TQLineEditPrivate::xToPosInternal( int x, TQTextItem::CursorPosition betweenOrOn ) const
-{
-    x-= q->contentsRect().x() - hscroll + innerMargin;
-    for ( int i = 0; i < textLayout.numItems(); ++i ) {
-	TQTextItem ti = textLayout.itemAt( i );
-	TQRect tir = ti.tqrect();
-	if ( x >= tir.left() && x <= tir.right() )
-	    return ti.xToCursor( x - tir.x(), betweenOrOn ) + ti.from();
-    }
-    return x < 0 ? -1 : text.length();
-}
-
-int TQLineEditPrivate::xToPos( int x, TQTextItem::CursorPosition betweenOrOn ) const
-{
-    int pos = xToPosInternal( x, betweenOrOn );
-    return ( pos < 0 ) ? 0 : pos;
-}
-
-
-TQRect TQLineEditPrivate::cursorRect() const
-{
-    TQRect cr = q->contentsRect();
-    int cix = cr.x() - hscroll + innerMargin;
-    TQTextItem ci = textLayout.findItem( cursor );
-    if ( ci.isValid() ) {
-	if ( cursor != (int)text.length() && cursor == ci.from() + ci.length()
-	     && ci.isRightToLeft() != isRightToLeft() )
-	    ci = textLayout.findItem( cursor + 1 );
-	cix += ci.x() + ci.cursorToX( cursor - ci.from() );
-    }
-    int ch = q->fontMetrics().height();
-    return TQRect( cix-4, cr.y() + ( cr.height() -  ch + 1) / 2, 8, ch + 1 );
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::updateMicroFocusHint()
-{
-    // To reduce redundant microfocus update notification, we remember
-    // the old rect and update the microfocus if actual update is
-    // required. The rect o is intentionally static because some
-    // notifyee requires the microfocus information as global update
-    // rather than per notifyee update to place shared widget around
-    // microfocus.
-    static TQRect o;
-    if ( q->hasFocus() ) {
-        TQRect r = cursorRect();
-        if ( o != r ) {
-	    o = r;
-	    q->setMicroFocusHint( r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height() );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::moveCursor( int pos, bool mark )
-{
-    if ( pos != cursor )
-	separate();
-    if ( maskData && pos > cursor )
-	pos = nextMaskBlank( pos );
-    else if ( maskData && pos < cursor )
-	pos = prevMaskBlank( pos );
-    bool fullUpdate = mark || hasSelectedText();
-    if ( mark ) {
-	int anchor;
-	if ( selend > selstart && cursor == selstart )
-	    anchor = selend;
-	else if ( selend > selstart && cursor == selend )
-	    anchor = selstart;
-	else
-	    anchor = cursor;
-	selstart = TQMIN( anchor, pos );
-	selend = TQMAX( anchor, pos );
-    } else {
-	deselect();
-    }
-    if ( fullUpdate ) {
-	cursor = pos;
-	q->update();
-    } else {
-	setCursorVisible( FALSE );
-	cursor = pos;
-	setCursorVisible( TRUE );
-    }
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-    if ( mark && !q->tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected ) )
-	setCursorVisible( FALSE );
-    if ( mark || selDirty ) {
-	selDirty = FALSE;
-	emit q->selectionChanged();
-    }
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::finishChange( int validateFromState, bool setModified )
-{
-    bool lineDirty = selDirty;
-    if ( textDirty ) {
-	// do validation
-	bool wasValidInput = validInput;
-	validInput = TRUE;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VALIDATOR
-	if ( validator && validateFromState >= 0 ) {
-	    TQString textCopy = text;
-	    int cursorCopy = cursor;
-	    validInput = ( validator->validate( textCopy, cursorCopy ) != TQValidator::Invalid );
-	    if ( validInput ) {
-		if ( text != textCopy ) {
-		    q->setText( textCopy );
-		    cursor = cursorCopy;
-		    return;
-		}
-		cursor = cursorCopy;
-	    }
-	}
-#endif
-	if ( validateFromState >= 0 && wasValidInput && !validInput ) {
-	    undo( validateFromState );
-	    history.resize( undoState );
-	    validInput = TRUE;
-	    textDirty = setModified = FALSE;
-	}
-	updateTextLayout();
-	updateMicroFocusHint();
-	lineDirty |= textDirty;
-	if ( setModified )
-	    modified = TRUE;
-	if ( textDirty ) {
-	    textDirty = FALSE;
-	    emit q->textChanged( maskData ? stripString(text) : text );
-	}
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( q, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-    }
-    if ( selDirty ) {
-	selDirty = FALSE;
-	emit q->selectionChanged();
-    }
-    if ( lineDirty || !setModified )
-	q->update();
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::setText( const TQString& txt )
-{
-    deselect();
-    TQString oldText = text;
-    if ( maskData ) {
-	text = maskString( 0, txt, TRUE );
-	text += clearString( text.length(), maxLength - text.length() );
-    } else {
- 	text = txt.isEmpty() ? txt : TQT_TQSTRING(txt.left( maxLength ));
-    }
-    history.clear();
-    undoState = 0;
-    cursor = text.length();
-    textDirty = ( oldText != text );
-}
-
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::setCursorVisible( bool visible )
-{
-    if ( (bool)cursorVisible == visible )
-	return;
-    if ( cursorTimer )
-	cursorVisible = visible;
-    TQRect r = cursorRect();
-    if ( maskData || !q->contentsRect().contains( r ) )
-	q->update();
-    else
-	q->update( r );
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::addCommand( const Command& cmd )
-{
-    if ( separator && undoState && history[undoState-1].type != Separator ) {
-	history.resize( undoState + 2 );
-	history[undoState++] = Command( Separator, 0, 0 );
-    } else {
-	history.resize( undoState + 1);
-    }
-    separator = FALSE;
-    history[ undoState++ ] = cmd;
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::insert( const TQString& s )
-{
-    if ( maskData ) {
-	TQString ms = maskString( cursor, s );
-	for ( int i = 0; i < (int) ms.length(); ++i ) {
-	    addCommand ( Command( DeleteSelection, cursor+i, text.at(cursor+i) ) );
-	    addCommand( Command( Insert, cursor+i, ms.at(i) ) );
-	}
-	text.replace( cursor, ms.length(), ms );
-	cursor += ms.length();
-	cursor = nextMaskBlank( cursor );
-    } else {
-	int remaining = maxLength - text.length();
-	text.insert( cursor, s.left(remaining) );
-	for ( int i = 0; i < (int) s.left(remaining).length(); ++i )
-	    addCommand( Command( Insert, cursor++, s.at(i) ) );
-    }
-    textDirty = TRUE;
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::del( bool wasBackspace )
-{
-    if ( cursor < (int) text.length() ) {
-	addCommand ( Command( (CommandType)((maskData?2:0)+(wasBackspace?Remove:Delete)), cursor, text.at(cursor) ) );
-	if ( maskData ) {
-	    text.replace( cursor, 1, clearString( cursor, 1 ) );
-	    addCommand( Command( Insert, cursor, text.at( cursor ) ) );
-	} else {
-	    text.remove( cursor, 1 );
-	}
-	textDirty = TRUE;
-    }
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::removeSelectedText()
-{
-    if ( selstart < selend && selend <= (int) text.length() ) {
-	separate();
-	int i ;
-	if ( selstart <= cursor && cursor < selend ) {
-	    // cursor is within the selection. Split up the commands
-	    // to be able to restore the correct cursor position
-	    for ( i = cursor; i >= selstart; --i )
-		addCommand ( Command( DeleteSelection, i, text.at(i) ) );
-	    for ( i = selend - 1; i > cursor; --i )
-		addCommand ( Command( DeleteSelection, i - cursor + selstart - 1, text.at(i) ) );
-	} else {
-	    for ( i = selend-1; i >= selstart; --i )
-		addCommand ( Command( RemoveSelection, i, text.at(i) ) );
-	}
-	if ( maskData ) {
-	    text.replace( selstart, selend - selstart,  clearString( selstart, selend - selstart ) );
-	    for ( int i = 0; i < selend - selstart; ++i )
-		addCommand( Command( Insert, selstart + i, text.at( selstart + i ) ) );
-	} else {
-	    text.remove( selstart, selend - selstart );
-	}
-	if ( cursor > selstart )
-	    cursor -= TQMIN( cursor, selend ) - selstart;
-	deselect();
-	textDirty = TRUE;
-    }
-}
-
-void TQLineEditPrivate::parseInputMask( const TQString &maskFields )
-{
-    if ( maskFields.isEmpty() || maskFields.section( ';', 0, 0 ).isEmpty() ) {
-	if ( maskData ) {
-	    delete [] maskData;
-	    maskData = 0;
-	    maxLength = 32767;
-	    q->setText( TQString::null );
-	}
-	return;
-    }
-
-    inputMask =  maskFields.section( ';', 0, 0 );
-    blank = maskFields.section( ';', 1, 1 ).at(0);
-    if ( blank.isNull() )
-	blank = ' ';
-
-    // calculate maxLength / maskData length
-    maxLength = 0;
-    TQChar c = 0;
-    uint i;
-    for ( i=0; i<inputMask.length(); i++ ) {
-	c = inputMask.at(i);
-	if ( i > 0 && inputMask.at( i-1 ) == '\\' ) {
-	    maxLength++;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	if ( c != '\\' && c != '!' &&
-	     c != '<' && c != '>' &&
-	     c != '{' && c != '}' &&
-	     c != '[' && c != ']' )
-	    maxLength++;
-    }
-
-    delete [] maskData;
-    maskData = new MaskInputData[ maxLength ];
-
-    MaskInputData::Casemode m = MaskInputData::NoCaseMode;
-    c = 0;
-    bool s;
-    bool escape = FALSE;
-    int index = 0;
-    for ( i = 0; i < inputMask.length(); i++ ) {
-	c = inputMask.at(i);
-	if ( escape ) {
-	    s = TRUE;
-	    maskData[ index ].maskChar = c;
-	    maskData[ index ].separator = s;
-	    maskData[ index ].caseMode = m;
-	    index++;
-	    escape = FALSE;
-	} else if ( c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '!') {
-	    switch ( c ) {
-	    case '<':
-		m = MaskInputData::Lower;
-		break;
-	    case '>':
-		m = MaskInputData::Upper;
-		break;
-	    case '!':
-		m = MaskInputData::NoCaseMode;
-		break;
-	    }
-	} else if ( c != '{' && c != '}' && c != '[' && c != ']' ) {
-	    switch ( c ) {
-	    case 'A':
-	    case 'a':
-	    case 'N':
-	    case 'n':
-	    case 'X':
-	    case 'x':
-	    case '9':
-	    case '0':
-	    case 'D':
-	    case 'd':
-	    case '#':
-		s = FALSE;
-		break;
-	    case '\\':
-		escape = TRUE;
-	    default:
-		s = TRUE;
-		break;
-	    }
-
-	    if ( !escape ) {
-		maskData[ index ].maskChar = c;
-		maskData[ index ].separator = s;
-		maskData[ index ].caseMode = m;
-		index++;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    q->setText( TQString::null );
-}
-
-
-/* checks if the key is valid compared to the inputMask */
-bool TQLineEditPrivate::isValidInput( TQChar key, TQChar mask ) const
-{
-    switch ( mask ) {
-    case 'A':
-	if ( key.isLetter() && key != blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    case 'a':
-	if ( key.isLetter() || key == blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    case 'N':
-	if ( key.isLetterOrNumber() && key != blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    case 'n':
-	if ( key.isLetterOrNumber() || key == blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    case 'X':
-	if ( key.isPrint() && key != blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    case 'x':
-	if ( key.isPrint() || key == blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    case '9':
-	if ( key.isNumber() && key != blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    case '0':
-	if ( key.isNumber() || key == blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    case 'D':
-	if ( key.isNumber() && key.digitValue() > 0 && key != blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    case 'd':
-	if ( (key.isNumber() && key.digitValue() > 0) || key == blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    case '#':
-	if ( key.isNumber() || key == '+' || key == '-' || key == blank )
-	    return TRUE;
-	break;
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*
-  Applies the inputMask on \a str starting from position \a pos in the mask. \a clear
-  specifies from where characters should be gotten when a separator is met in \a str - TRUE means
-  that blanks will be used, FALSE that previous input is used.
-  Calling this when no inputMask is set is undefined.
-*/
-TQString TQLineEditPrivate::maskString( uint pos, const TQString &str, bool clear) const
-{
-    if ( pos >= (uint)maxLength )
-	return TQString::tqfromLatin1("");
-
-    TQString fill;
-    fill = clear ? clearString( 0, maxLength ) : text;
-
-    uint strIndex = 0;
-    TQString s = TQString::tqfromLatin1("");
-    int i = pos;
-    while ( i < maxLength ) {
-	if ( strIndex < str.length() ) {
-	    if ( maskData[ i ].separator ) {
-		s += maskData[ i ].maskChar;
-		if ( str[(int)strIndex] == maskData[ i ].maskChar )
-		    strIndex++;
-		++i;
-	    } else {
-		if ( isValidInput( str[(int)strIndex], maskData[ i ].maskChar ) ) {
-		    switch ( maskData[ i ].caseMode ) {
-		    case MaskInputData::Upper:
-			s += str[(int)strIndex].upper();
-			break;
-		    case MaskInputData::Lower:
-			s += str[(int)strIndex].lower();
-			break;
-		    default:
-			s += str[(int)strIndex];
-		    }
-		    ++i;
-		} else {
-		    // search for separator first
-		    int n = findInMask( i, TRUE, TRUE, str[(int)strIndex] );
-		    if ( n != -1 ) {
-			if ( str.length() != 1 || i == 0 || (i > 0 && (!maskData[i-1].separator || maskData[i-1].maskChar != str[(int)strIndex])) ) {
-			    s += fill.mid( i, n-i+1 );
-			    i = n + 1; // update i to find + 1
-			}
-		    } else {
-			// search for valid blank if not
-			n = findInMask( i, TRUE, FALSE, str[(int)strIndex] );
-			if ( n != -1 ) {
-			    s += fill.mid( i, n-i );
-			    switch ( maskData[ n ].caseMode ) {
-			    case MaskInputData::Upper:
-				s += str[(int)strIndex].upper();
-				break;
-			    case MaskInputData::Lower:
-				s += str[(int)strIndex].lower();
-				break;
-			    default:
-				s += str[(int)strIndex];
-			    }
-			    i = n + 1; // updates i to find + 1
-			}
-		    }
-		}
-		strIndex++;
-	    }
-	} else
-	    break;
-    }
-
-    return s;
-}
-
-
-
-/*
-  Returns a "cleared" string with only separators and blank chars.
-  Calling this when no inputMask is set is undefined.
-*/
-TQString TQLineEditPrivate::clearString( uint pos, uint len ) const
-{
-    if ( pos >= (uint)maxLength )
-	return TQString::null;
-
-    TQString s;
-    int end = TQMIN( (uint)maxLength, pos + len );
-    for ( int i=pos; i<end; i++ )
-	if ( maskData[ i ].separator )
-	    s += maskData[ i ].maskChar;
-	else
-	    s += blank;
-
-    return s;
-}
-
-/*
-  Strips blank parts of the input in a TQLineEdit when an inputMask is set,
-  separators are still included. Typically "127.0__.0__.1__" becomes "127.0.0.1".
-*/
-TQString TQLineEditPrivate::stripString( const TQString &str ) const
-{
-    if ( !maskData )
-	return str;
-
-    TQString s;
-    int end = TQMIN( maxLength, (int)str.length() );
-    for (int i=0; i < end; i++ )
-	if ( maskData[ i ].separator )
-	    s += maskData[ i ].maskChar;
-	else
-	    if ( str[i] != blank )
-		s += str[i];
-
-    return s;
-}
-
-/* searches forward/backward in maskData for either a separator or a blank */
-int TQLineEditPrivate::findInMask( int pos, bool forward, bool findSeparator, TQChar searchChar ) const
-{
-    if ( pos >= maxLength || pos < 0 )
-	return -1;
-
-    int end = forward ? maxLength : -1;
-    int step = forward ? 1 : -1;
-    int i = pos;
-
-    while ( i != end ) {
-	if ( findSeparator ) {
-	    if ( maskData[ i ].separator && maskData[ i ].maskChar == searchChar )
-		return i;
-	} else {
-	    if ( !maskData[ i ].separator ) {
- 		if ( searchChar.isNull() )
-		    return i;
- 		else if ( isValidInput( searchChar, maskData[ i ].maskChar ) )
- 		    return i;
-	    }
-	}
-	i += step;
-    }
-    return -1;
-}
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_LINEEDIT
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 62232d9..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlineedit.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,235 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQLineEdit widget class
-**
-** Created : 941011
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQLINEEDIT_H
-#define TQLINEEDIT_H
-
-struct TQLineEditPrivate;
-
-class TQValidator;
-class TQPopupMenu;
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#include "tqstring.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LINEEDIT
-
-class TQTextParagraph;
-class TQTextCursor;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQLineEdit : public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( EchoMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString text READ text WRITE setText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int maxLength READ maxLength WRITE setMaxLength )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool frame READ frame WRITE setFrame )
-    Q_PROPERTY( EchoMode echoMode READ echoMode WRITE setEchoMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString displayText READ displayText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int cursorPosition READ cursorPosition WRITE setCursorPosition )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Qt::Alignment tqalignment READ alignmentProp WRITE tqsetAlignmentProp )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool edited READ edited WRITE setEdited DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool modified READ isModified )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool hasMarkedText READ hasMarkedText DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool hasSelectedText READ hasSelectedText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString markedText READ markedText DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString selectedText READ selectedText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool dragEnabled READ dragEnabled WRITE setDragEnabled )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool readOnly READ isReadOnly WRITE setReadOnly )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool undoAvailable READ isUndoAvailable )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool redoAvailable READ isRedoAvailable )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString inputMask READ inputMask WRITE setInputMask )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool acceptableInput READ hasAcceptableInput )
-
-public:
-    TQLineEdit( TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0 );
-    TQLineEdit( const TQString &, TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0 );
-    TQLineEdit( const TQString &, const TQString &, TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQLineEdit();
-
-    TQString text() const;
-
-    TQString displayText() const;
-
-    int maxLength() const;
-
-    bool frame() const;
-
-    enum EchoMode { Normal, NoEcho, Password };
-    EchoMode echoMode() const;
-
-    bool isReadOnly() const;
-
-    const TQValidator * validator() const;
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    int cursorPosition() const;
-    bool validateAndSet( const TQString &, int, int, int ); // obsolete
-
-    int tqalignment() const;
-    inline Qt::Alignment alignmentProp() const { return (Qt::Alignment)tqalignment(); }
-    inline virtual void tqsetAlignmentProp( Qt::Alignment al ) { tqsetAlignment((int)al); }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    void cursorLeft( bool mark, int steps = 1 ) { cursorForward( mark, -steps ); }
-    void cursorRight( bool mark, int steps = 1 ) { cursorForward( mark, steps ); }
-#endif
-    void cursorForward( bool mark, int steps = 1 );
-    void cursorBackward( bool mark, int steps = 1 );
-    void cursorWordForward( bool mark );
-    void cursorWordBackward( bool mark );
-    void backspace();
-    void del();
-    void home( bool mark );
-    void end( bool mark );
-
-    bool isModified() const;
-    void clearModified();
-
-    bool edited() const; // obsolete, use isModified()
-    void setEdited( bool ); // obsolete, use clearModified()
-
-    bool hasSelectedText() const;
-    TQString selectedText() const;
-    int selectionStart() const;
-
-    bool isUndoAvailable() const;
-    bool isRedoAvailable() const;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    bool hasMarkedText() const { return hasSelectedText(); }
-    TQString markedText() const { return selectedText(); }
-#endif
-
-    bool dragEnabled() const;
-
-    TQString inputMask() const;
-    void setInputMask( const TQString &inputMask );
-    bool hasAcceptableInput() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setText( const TQString &);
-    virtual void selectAll();
-    virtual void deselect();
-    virtual void clearValidator();
-    virtual void insert( const TQString &);
-    virtual void clear();
-    virtual void undo();
-    virtual void redo();
-    virtual void setMaxLength( int );
-    virtual void setFrame( bool );
-    virtual void setEchoMode( EchoMode );
-    virtual void setReadOnly( bool );
-    virtual void setValidator( const TQValidator * );
-    virtual void setFont( const TQFont & );
-    virtual void setPalette( const TQPalette & );
-    virtual void setSelection( int, int );
-    virtual void setCursorPosition( int );
-    virtual void tqsetAlignment( int flag );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    virtual void cut();
-    virtual void copy() const;
-    virtual void paste();
-#endif
-    virtual void setDragEnabled( bool b );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void textChanged( const TQString &);
-    void returnPressed();
-    void lostFocus();
-    void selectionChanged();
-
-protected:
-    bool event( TQEvent * );
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * );
-    void imStartEvent( TQIMEvent * );
-    void imComposeEvent( TQIMEvent * );
-    void imEndEvent( TQIMEvent * );
-    void focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void drawContents( TQPainter * );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    void dragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent * );
-    void dragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent *e );
-    void dragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent *e );
-    void dropEvent( TQDropEvent * );
-#endif
-    void contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * );
-    bool sendMouseEventToInputContext( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    virtual TQPopupMenu *createPopupMenu();
-    void windowActivationChange( bool );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    void repaintArea( int, int ) { update(); }
-#endif
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void clipboardChanged();
-
-public:
-    void setPasswordChar( TQChar c ); // internal obsolete
-    TQChar passwordChar() const; // obsolete internal
-    int characterAt( int, TQChar* ) const; // obsolete
-    bool getSelection( int *, int * ); // obsolete
-
-private:
-    friend struct TQLineEditPrivate;
-    TQLineEditPrivate * d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQLineEdit( const TQLineEdit & );
-    TQLineEdit &operator=( const TQLineEdit & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_LINEEDIT
-
-#endif // TQLINEEDIT_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 331bf26..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4701 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQListBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 941121
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqglobal.h"
-#if defined(TQ_CC_BOR)
-// needed for qsort() because of a std namespace problem on Borland
-#include "tqplatformdefs.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "tqlistbox.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LISTBOX
-#include "tqmemarray.h"
-#include "tqfontmetrics.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqstrlist.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqptrdict.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqstringlist.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-#include <stdlib.h>
-
-class TQListBoxPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQListBoxPrivate( TQListBox *lb ):
-	head( 0 ), last( 0 ), cache( 0 ), cacheIndex( -1 ), current( 0 ),
-	highlighted( 0 ), tmpCurrent( 0 ), columnPos( 1 ), rowPos( 1 ), rowPosCache( 0 ),
-	columnPosOne( 0 ), rowMode( TQListBox::FixedNumber ),
-	columnMode( TQListBox::FixedNumber ), numRows( 1 ), numColumns( 1 ),
-	currentRow( 0 ), currentColumn( 0 ),
-	mousePressRow( -1 ), mousePressColumn( -1 ),
-	mouseMoveRow( -1 ), mouseMoveColumn( -1 ), mouseInternalPress( FALSE ),
-	scrollTimer( 0 ), updateTimer( 0 ), visibleTimer( 0 ),
-	selectionMode( TQListBox::Single ),
-	count( 0 ),
-	listBox( lb ), currInputString( TQString::null ),
-	rowModeWins( FALSE ),
-	ignoreMoves( FALSE ),
-	layoutDirty( TRUE ),
-	mustPaintAll( TRUE ),
-	dragging( FALSE ),
-	dirtyDrag ( FALSE ),
-	variableHeight( TRUE /* !!! ### FALSE */ ),
-	variableWidth( FALSE ),
-	inMenuMode( FALSE )
-    {}
-    int findItemByName( int item, const TQString &text );
-    ~TQListBoxPrivate();
-
-    TQListBoxItem * head, *last, *cache;
-    int cacheIndex;
-    TQListBoxItem * current, *highlighted, *tmpCurrent;
-
-    TQMemArray<int> columnPos;
-    TQMemArray<int> rowPos;
-    int rowPosCache;
-    int columnPosOne;
-
-    TQListBox::LayoutMode rowMode;
-    TQListBox::LayoutMode columnMode;
-    int numRows;
-    int numColumns;
-
-    int currentRow;
-    int currentColumn;
-    int mousePressRow;
-    int mousePressColumn;
-    int mouseMoveRow;
-    int mouseMoveColumn;
-    bool mouseInternalPress;
-
-    TQTimer * scrollTimer;
-    TQTimer * updateTimer;
-    TQTimer * visibleTimer;
-    TQTimer * resizeTimer;
-
-    TQPoint scrollPos;
-
-    TQListBox::SelectionMode selectionMode;
-
-    int count;
-
-
-    TQListBox *listBox;
-    TQString currInputString;
-    TQTimer *inputTimer;
-
-    TQListBoxItem *pressedItem, *selectAnchor;
-
-    uint select :1;
-    uint pressedSelected :1;
-    uint rowModeWins :1;
-    uint ignoreMoves :1;
-    uint clearing :1;
-    uint layoutDirty :1;
-    uint mustPaintAll :1;
-    uint dragging :1;
-    uint dirtyDrag :1;
-    uint variableHeight :1;
-    uint variableWidth :1;
-    uint inMenuMode :1;
-
-    TQRect *rubber;
-    TQPtrDict<bool> selectable;
-
-    struct SortableItem {
-	TQListBoxItem *item;
-    };
-};
-
-
-TQListBoxPrivate::~TQListBoxPrivate()
-{
-    TQ_ASSERT( !head );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQListBoxItem tqlistbox.h
-    \brief The TQListBoxItem class is the base class of all list box items.
-
-    This class is an abstract base class used for all list box items.
-    If you need to insert customized items into a TQListBox you must
-    inherit this class and reimplement paint(), height() and width().
-
-    \sa TQListBox
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListBox::dragSelect() const
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::setDragSelect( bool )
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListBox::autoScroll() const
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::setAutoScroll( bool )
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListBox::autoScrollBar() const
-
-    \obsolete
-
-    Returns TRUE if vScrollBarMode() is \c Auto; otherwise returns
-    FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::setAutoScrollBar( bool enable )
-
-    \obsolete
-
-    If \a enable is TRUE sets setVScrollBarMode() to \c AlwaysOn;
-    otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to \c AlwaysOff.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListBox::scrollBar() const
-
-    \obsolete
-
-    Returns FALSE if vScrollBarMode() is \c AlwaysOff; otherwise
-    returns TRUE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::setScrollBar( bool enable )
-
-    \obsolete
-
-    If \a enable is TRUE sets setVScrollBarMode() to \c AlwaysOn;
-    otherwise sets setVScrollBarMode() to \c AlwaysOff.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListBox::autoBottomScrollBar() const
-
-    \obsolete
-
-    Returns TRUE if hScrollBarMode() is \c Auto; otherwise returns
-    FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::setAutoBottomScrollBar( bool enable )
-
-    \obsolete
-
-    If \a enable is TRUE sets setHScrollBarMode() to \c AlwaysOn;
-    otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to \c AlwaysOff.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListBox::bottomScrollBar() const
-
-    \obsolete
-
-    Returns FALSE if vScrollBarMode() is \c AlwaysOff; otherwise
-    returns TRUE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::setBottomScrollBar( bool enable )
-
-    \obsolete
-
-    If \a enable is TRUE sets setHScrollBarMode() to \c AlwaysOn;
-    otherwise sets setHScrollBarMode() to \c AlwaysOff.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListBox::smoothScrolling() const
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::setSmoothScrolling( bool )
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListBox::autoUpdate() const
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::setAutoUpdate( bool )
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::setFixedVisibleLines( int lines )
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn int TQListBox::cellHeight( int i ) const
-    Returns the item height of item \a i.
-    \sa itemHeight()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \overload int TQListBox::cellHeight() const
-    Returns the item height of the first item, item 0.
-    \sa itemHeight()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn int TQListBox::cellWidth() const
-    Returns the maximum item width.
-    \sa maxItemWidth()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \overload int TQListBox::cellWidth(int i) const
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn int TQListBox::numCols() const
-    Returns the number of columns.
-    \sa numColumns()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::updateCellWidth()
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn int TQListBox::totalWidth() const
-    Returns contentsWidth().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn int TQListBox::totalHeight() const
-    Returns contentsHeight().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn int TQListBox::findItem( int yPos ) const
-    Returns the index of the item a point (0, \a yPos).
-    \sa index() itemAt()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty list box item in the list box \a listbox.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxItem::TQListBoxItem( TQListBox* listbox )
-{
-    lbox = listbox;
-    s = FALSE;
-    dirty = TRUE;
-    custom_highlight = FALSE;
-    p = n = 0;
-
-    // just something that'll look noticeable in the debugger
-    x = y = 42;
-
-    if (listbox)
-	listbox->insertItem( this );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty list box item in the list box \a listbox and
-    inserts it after the item \a after or at the beginning if \a after
-    is 0.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxItem::TQListBoxItem( TQListBox* listbox, TQListBoxItem *after )
-{
-    lbox = listbox;
-    s = FALSE;
-    dirty = TRUE;
-    custom_highlight = FALSE;
-    p = n = 0;
-
-    // just something that'll be noticeable in the debugger
-    x = y = 42;
-
-    if (listbox)
-	listbox->insertItem( this, after );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the list box item.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxItem::~TQListBoxItem()
-{
-    if ( lbox )
-	lbox->takeItem( this );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Defines whether the list box item is responsible for drawing
-    itself in a highlighted state when being selected.
-
-    If \a b is FALSE (the default), the list box will draw some
-    default highlight indicator before calling paint().
-
-    \sa selected(), paint()
-*/
-void TQListBoxItem::setCustomHighlighting( bool b )
-{
-    custom_highlight = b;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBoxItem::paint( TQPainter *p )
-
-    Implement this function to draw your item. The painter, \a p, is
-    already open for painting.
-
-    \sa height(), width()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQListBoxItem::width( const TQListBox* lb ) const
-
-    Reimplement this function to return the width of your item. The \a
-    lb parameter is the same as listBox() and is provided for
-    convenience and compatibility.
-
-    The default implementation returns
-    \l{TQApplication::globalStrut()}'s width.
-
-    \sa paint(), height()
-*/
-int TQListBoxItem::width(const TQListBox*)  const
-{
-    return TQApplication::globalStrut().width();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQListBoxItem::height( const TQListBox* lb ) const
-
-    Implement this function to return the height of your item. The \a
-    lb parameter is the same as listBox() and is provided for
-    convenience and compatibility.
-
-    The default implementation returns
-    \l{TQApplication::globalStrut()}'s height.
-
-    \sa paint(), width()
-*/
-int TQListBoxItem::height(const TQListBox*)  const
-{
-    return TQApplication::globalStrut().height();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the text of the item. This text is also used for sorting.
-
-    \sa setText()
-*/
-TQString TQListBoxItem::text() const
-{
-    return txt;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the pixmap associated with the item, or 0 if there isn't
-    one.
-
-    The default implementation returns 0.
-*/
-const TQPixmap *TQListBoxItem::pixmap() const
-{
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a b is TRUE (the default) then this item can be selected by
-    the user; otherwise this item cannot be selected by the user.
-
-    \sa isSelectable()
-*/
-
-void TQListBoxItem::setSelectable( bool b )
-{
-    if ( !listBox() )
-	return;
-    bool *sel = listBox()->d->selectable.find( this );
-    if ( !sel )
-	listBox()->d->selectable.insert( this, new bool( b ) );
-    else
-	listBox()->d->selectable.replace( this, new bool( b ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if this item is selectable (the default); otherwise
-    returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setSelectable()
-*/
-
-bool TQListBoxItem::isSelectable() const
-{
-    if ( !listBox() )
-	return TRUE;
-    bool *sel = listBox()->d->selectable.find( ( (TQListBoxItem*)this ) );
-    if ( !sel )
-	return TRUE;
-    else
-	return *sel;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBoxItem::setText( const TQString &text )
-
-    Sets the text of the TQListBoxItem to \a text. This \a text is also
-    used for sorting. The text is not shown unless explicitly drawn in
-    paint().
-
-    \sa text()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQListBoxText tqlistbox.h
-    \brief The TQListBoxText class provides list box items that display text.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-
-    The text is drawn in the widget's current font. If you need
-    several different fonts, you must implement your own subclass of
-    TQListBoxItem.
-
-    \sa TQListBox, TQListBoxItem
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a list box item in list box \a listbox showing the text
-    \a text.
-*/
-TQListBoxText::TQListBoxText( TQListBox *listbox, const TQString &text )
-    :TQListBoxItem( listbox )
-{
-    setText( text );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a list box item showing the text \a text.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxText::TQListBoxText( const TQString &text )
-    :TQListBoxItem()
-{
-    setText( text );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a list box item in list box \a listbox showing the text
-    \a text. The item is inserted after the item \a after, or at the
-    beginning if \a after is 0.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxText::TQListBoxText( TQListBox* listbox, const TQString &text, TQListBoxItem *after )
-    : TQListBoxItem( listbox, after )
-{
-    setText( text );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the item.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxText::~TQListBoxText()
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Draws the text using \a painter.
-*/
-
-void TQListBoxText::paint( TQPainter *painter )
-{
-    int itemHeight = height( listBox() );
-    TQFontMetrics fm = painter->fontMetrics();
-    int yPos = ( ( itemHeight - fm.height() ) / 2 ) + fm.ascent();
-    painter->drawText( 3, yPos, text() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the height of a line of text in list box \a lb.
-
-    \sa paint(), width()
-*/
-
-int TQListBoxText::height( const TQListBox* lb ) const
-{
-    int h = lb ? lb->fontMetrics().lineSpacing() + 2 : 0;
-    return TQMAX( h, TQApplication::globalStrut().height() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the width of this line in list box \a lb.
-
-    \sa paint(), height()
-*/
-
-int TQListBoxText::width( const TQListBox* lb ) const
-{
-    int w = lb ? lb->fontMetrics().width( text() ) + 6 : 0;
-    return TQMAX( w, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() );
-}
-
-int TQListBoxText::RTTI = 1;
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQListBoxText::rtti() const
-
-    \reimp
-
-    Returns 1.
-
-    Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), and
-    you can distinguish between listbox items. You should use values
-    greater than 1000 preferably a large random number, to allow for
-    extensions to this class.
-*/
-
-int TQListBoxText::rtti() const
-{
-    return RTTI;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQListBoxPixmap tqlistbox.h
-    \brief The TQListBoxPixmap class provides list box items with a
-    pixmap and optional text.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-
-    Items of this class are drawn with the pixmap on the left with the
-    optional text to the right of the pixmap.
-
-    \sa TQListBox, TQListBoxItem
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new list box item in list box \a listbox showing the
-    pixmap \a pixmap.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap( TQListBox* listbox, const TQPixmap &pixmap )
-    : TQListBoxItem( listbox )
-{
-    pm = pixmap;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new list box item showing the pixmap \a pixmap.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap )
-    : TQListBoxItem()
-{
-    pm = pixmap;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new list box item in list box \a listbox showing the
-    pixmap \a pixmap. The item gets inserted after the item \a after,
-    or at the beginning if \a after is 0.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap( TQListBox* listbox, const TQPixmap &pixmap, TQListBoxItem *after )
-    : TQListBoxItem( listbox, after )
-{
-    pm = pixmap;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the item.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxPixmap::~TQListBoxPixmap()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new list box item in list box \a listbox showing the
-    pixmap \a pix and the text \a text.
-*/
-TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap( TQListBox* listbox, const TQPixmap &pix, const TQString& text)
-    : TQListBoxItem( listbox )
-{
-    pm = pix;
-    setText( text );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new list box item showing the pixmap \a pix and the
-    text to \a text.
-*/
-TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap( const TQPixmap & pix, const TQString& text)
-    : TQListBoxItem()
-{
-    pm = pix;
-    setText( text );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new list box item in list box \a listbox showing the
-    pixmap \a pix and the string \a text. The item gets inserted after
-    the item \a after, or at the beginning if \a after is 0.
-*/
-TQListBoxPixmap::TQListBoxPixmap( TQListBox* listbox, const TQPixmap & pix, const TQString& text,
-				TQListBoxItem *after )
-    : TQListBoxItem( listbox, after )
-{
-    pm = pix;
-    setText( text );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn const TQPixmap *TQListBoxPixmap::pixmap() const
-
-    Returns the pixmap associated with the item.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Draws the pixmap using \a painter.
-*/
-
-void TQListBoxPixmap::paint( TQPainter *painter )
-{
-    int itemHeight = height( listBox() );
-    int yPos;
-
-    const TQPixmap *pm = pixmap();
-    if ( pm && ! pm->isNull() ) {
-	yPos = ( itemHeight - pm->height() ) / 2;
-	painter->drawPixmap( 3, yPos, *pm);
-    }
-
-    if ( !text().isEmpty() ) {
-	TQFontMetrics fm = painter->fontMetrics();
-	yPos = ( ( itemHeight - fm.height() ) / 2 ) + fm.ascent();
-	painter->drawText( pm->width() + 5, yPos, text() );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the height of the pixmap in list box \a lb.
-
-    \sa paint(), width()
-*/
-
-int TQListBoxPixmap::height( const TQListBox* lb ) const
-{
-    int h;
-    if ( text().isEmpty() )
-	h = pm.height();
-    else
-	h = TQMAX( pm.height(), lb->fontMetrics().lineSpacing() + 2 );
-    return TQMAX( h, TQApplication::globalStrut().height() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the width of the pixmap plus some margin in list box \a lb.
-
-    \sa paint(), height()
-*/
-
-int TQListBoxPixmap::width( const TQListBox* lb ) const
-{
-    if ( text().isEmpty() )
-	return TQMAX( pm.width() + 6, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() );
-    return TQMAX( pm.width() + lb->fontMetrics().width( text() ) + 6,
-	    TQApplication::globalStrut().width() );
-}
-
-int TQListBoxPixmap::RTTI = 2;
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQListBoxPixmap::rtti() const
-
-    \reimp
-
-    Returns 2.
-
-    Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), and
-    you can distinguish between listbox items. You should use values
-    greater than 1000 preferably a large random number, to allow for
-    extensions to this class.
-*/
-
-int TQListBoxPixmap::rtti() const
-{
-    return RTTI;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQListBox tqlistbox.h
-    \brief The TQListBox widget provides a list of selectable, read-only items.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-    \mainclass
-
-    This is typically a single-column list in which either no item or
-    one item is selected, but it can also be used in many other ways.
-
-    TQListBox will add scroll bars as necessary, but it isn't intended
-    for \e really big lists. If you want more than a few thousand
-    items, it's probably better to use a different widget mainly
-    because the scroll bars won't provide very good navigation, but
-    also because TQListBox may become slow with huge lists. (See
-    TQListView and TQTable for possible alternatives.)
-
-    There are a variety of selection modes described in the
-    TQListBox::SelectionMode documentation. The default is \c Single
-    selection mode, but you can change it using setSelectionMode().
-    (setMultiSelection() is still provided for compatibility with TQt
-    1.x. We recommend using setSelectionMode() in all code.)
-
-    Because TQListBox offers multiple selection it must display
-    keyboard focus and selection state separately. Therefore there are
-    functions both to set the selection state of an item, i.e.
-    setSelected(), and to set which item displays keyboard focus, i.e.
-    setCurrentItem().
-
-    The list box normally arranges its items in a single column and
-    adds a vertical scroll bar if required. It is possible to have a
-    different fixed number of columns (setColumnMode()), or as many
-    columns as will fit in the list box's assigned screen space
-    (setColumnMode(FitToWidth)), or to have a fixed number of rows
-    (setRowMode()) or as many rows as will fit in the list box's
-    assigned screen space (setRowMode(FitToHeight)). In all these
-    cases TQListBox will add scroll bars, as appropriate, in at least
-    one direction.
-
-    If multiple rows are used, each row can be as high as necessary
-    (the normal setting), or you can request that all items will have
-    the same height by calling setVariableHeight(FALSE). The same
-    applies to a column's width, see setVariableWidth().
-
-    The TQListBox's items are TQListBoxItem objects. TQListBox provides
-    methods to insert new items as strings, as pixmaps, and as
-    TQListBoxItem * (insertItem() with various arguments), and to
-    replace an existing item with a new string, pixmap or TQListBoxItem
-    (changeItem() with various arguments). You can also remove items
-    singly with removeItem() or clear() the entire list box. Note that
-    if you create a TQListBoxItem yourself and insert it, TQListBox
-    takes ownership of the item.
-
-    You can also create a TQListBoxItem, such as TQListBoxText or
-    TQListBoxPixmap, with the list box as first parameter. The item
-    will then append itself. When you delete an item it is
-    automatically removed from the list box.
-
-    The list of items can be arbitrarily large; TQListBox will add
-    scroll bars if necessary. TQListBox can display a single-column
-    (the common case) or multiple-columns, and offers both single and
-    multiple selection. TQListBox does not support multiple-column
-    items (but TQListView and TQTable do), or tree hierarchies (but
-    TQListView does).
-
-    The list box items can be accessed both as TQListBoxItem objects
-    (recommended) and using integer indexes (the original TQListBox
-    implementation used an array of strings internally, and the API
-    still supports this mode of operation). Everything can be done
-    using the new objects, and most things can be done using indexes.
-
-    Each item in a TQListBox contains a TQListBoxItem. One of the items
-    can be the current item. The currentChanged() signal and the
-    highlighted() signal are emitted when a new item becomes current,
-    e.g. because the user clicks on it or TQListBox::setCurrentItem()
-    is called. The selected() signal is emitted when the user
-    double-clicks on an item or presses Enter on the current item.
-
-    If the user does not select anything, no Q_SIGNALS are emitted and
-    currentItem() returns -1.
-
-    A list box has \c WheelFocus as a default focusPolicy(), i.e. it
-    can get keyboard focus by tabbing, clicking and through the use of
-    the mouse wheel.
-
-    New items can be inserted using insertItem(), insertStrList() or
-    insertStringList(). inSort() is obsolete because this method is
-    quite inefficient. It's preferable to insert the items normally
-    and call sort() afterwards, or to insert a sorted TQStringList().
-
-    By default, vertical and horizontal scroll bars are added and
-    removed as necessary. setHScrollBarMode() and setVScrollBarMode()
-    can be used to change this policy.
-
-    If you need to insert types other than strings and pixmaps, you
-    must define new classes which inherit TQListBoxItem.
-
-    \warning The list box assumes ownership of all list box items and
-    will delete them when it does not need them any more.
-
-    <img src=qlistbox-m.png> <img src=qlistbox-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQListView TQComboBox TQButtonGroup
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: List Box (two
-    sections)\endlink
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQListBox::SelectionMode
-
-    This enumerated type is used by TQListBox to indicate how it reacts
-    to selection by the user.
-
-    \value Single  When the user selects an item, any already-selected
-    item becomes unselected and the user cannot unselect the selected
-    item. This means that the user can never clear the selection, even
-    though the selection may be cleared by the application programmer
-    using TQListBox::clearSelection().
-
-    \value Multi  When the user selects an item the selection status
-    of that item is toggled and the other items are left alone. Also,
-    multiple items can be selected by dragging the mouse while the
-    left mouse button is kept pressed.
-
-    \value Extended When the user selects an item the selection is
-    cleared and the new item selected. However, if the user presses
-    the Ctrl key when clicking on an item, the clicked item gets
-    toggled and all other items are left untouched. And if the user
-    presses the Shift key while clicking on an item, all items between
-    the current item and the clicked item get selected or unselected,
-    depending on the state of the clicked item. Also, multiple items
-    can be selected by dragging the mouse while the left mouse button
-    is kept pressed.
-
-    \value NoSelection  Items cannot be selected.
-
-    In other words, \c Single is a real single-selection list box, \c
-    Multi is a real multi-selection list box, \c Extended is a list
-    box in which users can select multiple items but usually want to
-    select either just one or a range of contiguous items, and \c
-    NoSelection is for a list box where the user can look but not
-    touch.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQListBox::LayoutMode
-
-    This enum type is used to specify how TQListBox lays out its rows
-    and columns.
-
-    \value FixedNumber  There is a fixed number of rows (or columns).
-
-    \value FitToWidth   There are as many columns as will fit
-    on-screen.
-
-    \value FitToHeight  There are as many rows as will fit on-screen.
-
-    \value Variable  There are as many rows as are required by the
-    column mode. (Or as many columns as required by the row mode.)
-
-    Example: When you call setRowMode( FitToHeight ), columnMode()
-    automatically becomes \c Variable to accommodate the row mode
-    you've set.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void  TQListBox::onItem( TQListBoxItem *i )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor onto
-    an item, similar to the TQWidget::enterEvent() function. \a i is
-    the TQListBoxItem that the mouse has moved on.
-*/
-
-// ### bug here too? enter/leave event may noit considered. move the
-// mouse out of the window and back in, to the same item - does it
-// work?
-
-/*!
-    \fn void  TQListBox::onViewport()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor from
-    an item to an empty part of the list box.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new empty list box called \a name and with parent \a
-    parent.
-
-    Performance is boosted by modifying the widget flags \a f so that
-    only part of the TQListBoxItem tqchildren is redrawn. This may be
-    unsuitable for custom TQListBoxItem classes, in which case \c
-    WStaticContents and \c WNoAutoErase should be cleared
-    immediately after construction.
-
-    \sa TQWidget::clearWFlags() TQt::WidgetFlags
-*/
-
-TQListBox::TQListBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) )
-{
-    d = new TQListBoxPrivate( this );
-    d->updateTimer = new TQTimer( this, "listbox update timer" );
-    d->visibleTimer = new TQTimer( this, "listbox visible timer" );
-    d->inputTimer = new TQTimer( this, "listbox input timer" );
-    d->resizeTimer = new TQTimer( this, "listbox resize timer" );
-    d->clearing = FALSE;
-    d->pressedItem = 0;
-    d->selectAnchor = 0;
-    d->select = FALSE;
-    d->rubber = 0;
-    d->selectable.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-
-    setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-    viewport()->setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-
-    connect( d->updateTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(refreshSlot()) );
-    connect( d->visibleTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(ensureCurrentVisible()) );
-    connect( d->resizeTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( adjustItems() ) );
-    viewport()->setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBase );
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBackground, TQt::PaletteBase );
-    viewport()->setFocusProxy( this );
-    viewport()->setFocusPolicy( Qt::WheelFocus );
-}
-
-
-TQListBox * TQListBox::changedListBox = 0;
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the list box. Deletes all list box items.
-*/
-
-TQListBox::~TQListBox()
-{
-    if ( changedListBox == this )
-	changedListBox = 0;
-    clear();
-    delete d;
-    d = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::pressed( TQListBoxItem *item )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user presses any mouse button. If
-    \a item is not 0, the cursor is on \a item. If \a item is 0, the
-    mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
-    Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \overload void TQListBox::pressed( TQListBoxItem *item, const TQPoint &pnt )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user presses any mouse button. If
-    \a item is not 0, the cursor is on \a item. If \a item is 0, the
-    mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
-    \a pnt is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-    coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
-
-    Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-
-    \sa mouseButtonPressed() rightButtonPressed() clicked()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::clicked( TQListBoxItem *item )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user clicks any mouse button. If
-    \a item is not 0, the cursor is on \a item. If \a item is 0, the
-    mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
-    Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \overload void TQListBox::clicked( TQListBoxItem *item, const TQPoint &pnt )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user clicks any mouse button. If
-    \a item is not 0, the cursor is on \a item. If \a item is 0, the
-    mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
-    \a pnt is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-    coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
-    press and release differs by a pixel or two, \a pnt is the
-    position at release time.)
-
-    Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::mouseButtonClicked (int button, TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pos)
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user clicks mouse button \a
-    button. If \a item is not 0, the cursor is on \a item. If \a item
-    is 0, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
-    \a pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-    coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()). (If the click's
-    press and release differs by a pixel or two, \a pos is the
-    position at release time.)
-
-    Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::mouseButtonPressed (int button, TQListBoxItem * item, const TQPoint & pos)
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user presses mouse button \a
-    button. If \a item is not 0, the cursor is on \a item. If \a item
-    is 0, the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-
-    \a pos is the position of the mouse cursor in the global
-    coordinate system (TQMouseEvent::globalPos()).
-
-    Note that you must not delete any TQListBoxItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::doubleClicked( TQListBoxItem *item )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever an item is double-clicked. It's
-    emitted on the second button press, not the second button release.
-    If \a item is not 0, the cursor is on \a item. If \a item is 0,
-    the mouse cursor isn't on any item.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::returnPressed( TQListBoxItem * )
-
-    This signal is emitted when Enter or Return is pressed. The
-    argument is currentItem().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::rightButtonClicked( TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint& )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the right button is clicked (i.e. when
-    it's released at the same point where it was pressed). The
-    arguments are the relevant TQListBoxItem (may be 0) and the point
-    in global coordinates.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::rightButtonPressed (TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint & )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the right button is pressed. The
-    arguments are the relevant TQListBoxItem (may be 0) and the point
-    in global coordinates.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::contextMenuRequested( TQListBoxItem *item, const TQPoint & pos )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with
-    the right mouse button or with special system keys, with \a item
-    being the item under the mouse cursor or the current item,
-    respectively.
-
-    \a pos is the position for the context menu in the global
-    coordinate system.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::selectionChanged()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the selection set of a list box
-    changes. This signal is emitted in each selection mode. If the
-    user selects five items by drag-selecting, TQListBox tries to emit
-    just one selectionChanged() signal so the signal can be connected
-    to computationally expensive Q_SLOTS.
-
-    \sa selected() currentItem()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \overload void TQListBox::selectionChanged( TQListBoxItem *item )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the selection in a \c Single selection
-    list box changes. \a item is the newly selected list box item.
-
-    \sa selected() currentItem()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::currentChanged( TQListBoxItem *item )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
-    item. \a item is the new current list box item.
-
-    \sa setCurrentItem() currentItem()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::highlighted( int index )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
-    item. \a index is the index of the new current item.
-
-    \sa currentChanged() selected() currentItem() selectionChanged()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \overload void TQListBox::highlighted( TQListBoxItem * )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
-    item. The argument is a pointer to the new current item.
-
-    \sa currentChanged() selected() currentItem() selectionChanged()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \overload void TQListBox::highlighted( const TQString & )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user makes a new item the current
-    item and the item is (or has) a string. The argument is the text
-    of the new current item.
-
-    \sa currentChanged() selected() currentItem() selectionChanged()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::selected( int index )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on an item or
-    presses Enter on the current item. \a index is the index of the
-    selected item.
-
-    \sa currentChanged() highlighted() selectionChanged()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \overload void TQListBox::selected( TQListBoxItem * )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on an item or
-    presses Enter on the current item. The argument is a pointer to
-    the new selected item.
-
-    \sa currentChanged() highlighted() selectionChanged()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \overload void TQListBox::selected( const TQString &)
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user double-clicks on an item or
-    presses Enter on the current item, and the item is (or has) a
-    string. The argument is the text of the selected item.
-
-    \sa currentChanged() highlighted() selectionChanged()
-*/
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListBox::setFont( const TQFont &font )
-{
-    TQScrollView::setFont( font );
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::count
-    \brief the number of items in the list box
-*/
-
-uint TQListBox::count() const
-{
-    return d->count;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Inserts the string list \a list into the list at position \a
-    index.
-
-    If \a index is negative, \a list is inserted at the end of the
-    list. If \a index is too large, the operation is ignored.
-
-    \warning This function uses \c{const char *} rather than TQString,
-    so we recommend against using it. It is provided so that legacy
-    code will continue to work, and so that programs that certainly
-    will not need to handle code outside a single 8-bit locale can use
-    it. See insertStringList() which uses real TQStrings.
-
-    \warning This function is never significantly faster than a loop
-    around insertItem().
-
-    \sa insertItem(), insertStringList()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::insertStrList( const TQStrList *list, int index )
-{
-    if ( !list ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL)
-	TQ_ASSERT( list != 0 );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-    insertStrList( *list, index );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Inserts the string list \a list into the list at position \a
-    index.
-
-    If \a index is negative, \a list is inserted at the end of the
-    list. If \a index is too large, the operation is ignored.
-
-    \warning This function is never significantly faster than a loop
-    around insertItem().
-
-    \sa insertItem(), insertStrList()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::insertStringList( const TQStringList & list, int index )
-{
-    if ( index < 0 )
-	index = count();
-    for ( TQStringList::ConstIterator it = list.begin(); it != list.end(); ++it )
-	insertItem( new TQListBoxText(*it), index++ );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts the string list \a list into the list at position \a
-    index.
-
-    If \a index is negative, \a list is inserted at the end of the
-    list. If \a index is too large, the operation is ignored.
-
-    \warning This function uses \c{const char *} rather than TQString,
-    so we recommend against using it. It is provided so that legacy
-    code will continue to work, and so that programs that certainly
-    will not need to handle code outside a single 8-bit locale can use
-    it. See insertStringList() which uses real TQStrings.
-
-    \warning This function is never significantly faster than a loop
-    around insertItem().
-
-    \sa insertItem(), insertStringList()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::insertStrList( const TQStrList & list, int index )
-{
-    TQStrListIterator it( list );
-    const char* txt;
-    if ( index < 0 )
-	index = count();
-    while ( (txt=it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	insertItem( new TQListBoxText(TQString::tqfromLatin1(txt)),
-		    index++ );
-    }
-    if ( hasFocus() && !d->current )
-	setCurrentItem( d->head );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts the \a numStrings strings of the array \a strings into the
-    list at position \a index.
-
-    If \a index is negative, insertStrList() inserts \a strings at the
-    end of the list. If \a index is too large, the operation is
-    ignored.
-
-    \warning This function uses \c{const char *} rather than TQString,
-    so we recommend against using it. It is provided so that legacy
-    code will continue to work, and so that programs that certainly
-    will not need to handle code outside a single 8-bit locale can use
-    it. See insertStringList() which uses real TQStrings.
-
-    \warning This function is never significantly faster than a loop
-    around insertItem().
-
-    \sa insertItem(), insertStringList()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::insertStrList( const char **strings, int numStrings, int index )
-{
-    if ( !strings ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL)
-	TQ_ASSERT( strings != 0 );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( index < 0 )
-	index = count();
-    int i = 0;
-    while ( (numStrings<0 && strings[i]!=0) || i<numStrings ) {
-	insertItem( new TQListBoxText( TQString::tqfromLatin1(strings[i])),
-		    index + i );
-	i++;
-    }
-    if ( hasFocus() && !d->current )
-	setCurrentItem( d->head );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inserts the item \a lbi into the list at position \a index.
-
-    If \a index is negative or larger than the number of items in the
-    list box, \a lbi is inserted at the end of the list.
-
-    \sa insertStrList()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::insertItem( const TQListBoxItem *lbi, int index )
-{
-#if defined ( TQT_CHECK_NULL )
-    TQ_ASSERT( lbi != 0 );
-#else
-    if ( !lbi )
-	return;
-#endif
-
-    if ( index < 0 )
-	index = d->count;
-
-    if ( index >= d->count ) {
-	insertItem( lbi, d->last );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    TQListBoxItem * item = (TQListBoxItem *)lbi;
-    d->count++;
-    d->cache = 0;
-
-    item->lbox = this;
-    if ( !d->head || index == 0 ) {
-	item->n = d->head;
-	item->p = 0;
-	d->head = item;
-	item->dirty = TRUE;
-	if ( item->n )
-	    item->n->p = item;
-    } else {
-	TQListBoxItem * i = d->head;
-	while ( i->n && index > 1 ) {
-	    i = i->n;
-	    index--;
-	}
-	if ( i->n ) {
-	    item->n = i->n;
-	    item->p = i;
-	    item->n->p = item;
-	    item->p->n = item;
-	} else {
-	    i->n = item;
-	    item->p = i;
-	    item->n = 0;
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( hasFocus() && !d->current ) {
-	d->current = d->head;
-	updateItem( d->current );
-	emit highlighted( d->current );
-	emit highlighted( d->current->text() );
-	emit highlighted( index );
-    }
-
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts the item \a lbi into the list after the item \a after, or
-    at the beginning if \a after is 0.
-
-    \sa insertStrList()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::insertItem( const TQListBoxItem *lbi, const TQListBoxItem *after )
-{
-#if defined ( TQT_CHECK_NULL )
-    TQ_ASSERT( lbi != 0 );
-#else
-    if ( !lbi )
-	return;
-#endif
-
-    TQListBoxItem * item = (TQListBoxItem*)lbi;
-    d->count++;
-    d->cache = 0;
-
-    item->lbox = this;
-    if ( !d->head || !after ) {
-	item->n = d->head;
-	item->p = 0;
-	d->head = item;
-	item->dirty = TRUE;
-	if ( item->n )
-	    item->n->p = item;
-    } else {
-	TQListBoxItem * i = (TQListBoxItem*) after;
-	if ( i ) {
-	    item->n = i->n;
-	    item->p = i;
-	    if ( item->n )
-		item->n->p = item;
-	    if ( item->p )
-		item->p->n = item;
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( after == d->last )
-	d->last = (TQListBoxItem*) lbi;
-
-    if ( hasFocus() && !d->current ) {
-	d->current = d->head;
-	updateItem( d->current );
-	emit highlighted( d->current );
-	emit highlighted( d->current->text() );
-	emit highlighted( index( d->current ) );
-    }
-
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a new list box text item with the text \a text into the
-    list at position \a index.
-
-    If \a index is negative, \a text is inserted at the end of the
-    list.
-
-    \sa insertStrList()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::insertItem( const TQString &text, int index )
-{
-    insertItem( new TQListBoxText(text), index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a new list box pixmap item with the pixmap \a pixmap into
-    the list at position \a index.
-
-    If \a index is negative, \a pixmap is inserted at the end of the
-    list.
-
-    \sa insertStrList()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::insertItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int index )
-{
-    insertItem( new TQListBoxPixmap(pixmap), index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a new list box pixmap item with the pixmap \a pixmap and
-    the text \a text into the list at position \a index.
-
-    If \a index is negative, \a pixmap is inserted at the end of the
-    list.
-
-    \sa insertStrList()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::insertItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, const TQString &text, int index )
-{
-    insertItem( new TQListBoxPixmap(pixmap, text), index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes and deletes the item at position \a index. If \a index is
-    equal to currentItem(), a new item becomes current and the
-    currentChanged() and highlighted() Q_SIGNALS are emitted.
-
-    \sa insertItem(), clear()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::removeItem( int index )
-{
-    bool wasVisible = itemVisible( currentItem() );
-    delete item( index );
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-    if ( wasVisible )
-	ensureCurrentVisible();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Deletes all the items in the list.
-
-    \sa removeItem()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::clear()
-{
-    setContentsPos( 0, 0 );
-    bool blocked = tqsignalsBlocked();
-    blockSignals( TRUE );
-    d->clearing = TRUE;
-    d->current = 0;
-    d->tmpCurrent = 0;
-    TQListBoxItem * i = d->head;
-    d->head = 0;
-    while ( i ) {
-	TQListBoxItem * n = i->n;
-	i->n = i->p = 0;
-	delete i;
-	i = n;
-    }
-    d->count = 0;
-    d->numRows = 1;
-    d->numColumns = 1;
-    d->currentRow = 0;
-    d->currentColumn = 0;
-    d->mousePressRow = -1;
-    d->mousePressColumn = -1;
-    d->mouseMoveRow = -1;
-    d->mouseMoveColumn = -1;
-    d->selectable.clear();
-    clearSelection();
-    blockSignals( blocked );
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-    d->last = 0;
-    d->clearing = FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the text at position \a index, or TQString::null if there
-    is no text at that position.
-
-    \sa pixmap()
-*/
-
-TQString TQListBox::text( int index ) const
-{
-    TQListBoxItem * i = item( index );
-    if ( i )
-	return i->text();
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the pixmap at position \a index, or 0 if
-    there is no pixmap there.
-
-    \sa text()
-*/
-
-const TQPixmap *TQListBox::pixmap( int index ) const
-{
-    TQListBoxItem * i = item( index );
-    if ( i )
-	return i->pixmap();
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Replaces the item at position \a index with a new list box text
-    item with text \a text.
-
-    The operation is ignored if \a index is out of range.
-
-    \sa insertItem(), removeItem()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::changeItem( const TQString &text, int index )
-{
-    if( index >= 0 && index < (int)count() )
-	changeItem( new TQListBoxText(text), index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Replaces the item at position \a index with a new list box pixmap
-    item with pixmap \a pixmap.
-
-    The operation is ignored if \a index is out of range.
-
-    \sa insertItem(), removeItem()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::changeItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int index )
-{
-    if( index >= 0 && index < (int)count() )
-	changeItem( new TQListBoxPixmap(pixmap), index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Replaces the item at position \a index with a new list box pixmap
-    item with pixmap \a pixmap and text \a text.
-
-    The operation is ignored if \a index is out of range.
-
-    \sa insertItem(), removeItem()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::changeItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, const TQString &text, int index )
-{
-    if( index >= 0 && index < (int)count() )
-	changeItem( new TQListBoxPixmap(pixmap, text), index );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Replaces the item at position \a index with \a lbi.	If \a index is
-    negative or too large, changeItem() does nothing.
-
-    The item that has been changed will become selected.
-
-    \sa insertItem(), removeItem()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::changeItem( const TQListBoxItem *lbi, int index )
-{
-    if ( !lbi || index < 0 || index >= (int)count() )
-	return;
-
-    removeItem( index );
-    insertItem( lbi, index );
-    setCurrentItem( index );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::numItemsVisible
-    \brief the number of visible items.
-
-    Both partially and entirely visible items are counted.
-*/
-
-int TQListBox::numItemsVisible() const
-{
-    doLayout();
-
-    int columns = 0;
-
-    int x = contentsX();
-    int i=0;
-    while ( i < (int)d->columnPos.size()-1 &&
-	   d->columnPos[i] < x )
-	i++;
-    if ( i < (int)d->columnPos.size()-1 &&
-	 d->columnPos[i] > x )
-	columns++;
-    x += visibleWidth();
-    while ( i < (int)d->columnPos.size()-1 &&
-	   d->columnPos[i] < x ) {
-	i++;
-	columns++;
-    }
-
-    int y = contentsY();
-    int rows = 0;
-    while ( i < (int)d->rowPos.size()-1 &&
-	   d->rowPos[i] < y )
-	i++;
-    if ( i < (int)d->rowPos.size()-1 &&
-	 d->rowPos[i] > y )
-	rows++;
-    y += visibleHeight();
-    while ( i < (int)d->rowPos.size()-1 &&
-	   d->rowPos[i] < y ) {
-	i++;
-	rows++;
-    }
-
-    return rows*columns;
-}
-
-int TQListBox::currentItem() const
-{
-    if ( !d->current || !d->head )
-	return -1;
-
-    return index( d->current );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::currentText
-    \brief the text of the current item.
-
-    This is equivalent to text(currentItem()).
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::currentItem
-    \brief the current highlighted item
-
-    When setting this property, the highlighting is moved to the item
-    and the list box scrolled as necessary.
-
-    If no item is current, currentItem() returns -1.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::setCurrentItem( int index )
-{
-    setCurrentItem( item( index ) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Sets the current item to the TQListBoxItem \a i.
-*/
-void TQListBox::setCurrentItem( TQListBoxItem * i )
-{
-    if ( !i || d->current == i || numRows() == 0 )
-	return;
-
-    TQRect mfrect = tqitemRect( i );
-    if ( mfrect.isValid() )
-	setMicroFocusHint( mfrect.x(), mfrect.y(), mfrect.width(), mfrect.height(), FALSE );
-
-    TQListBoxItem * o = d->current;
-    d->current = i;
-    int ind = index( i );
-
-    if ( i && selectionMode() == Single ) {
-	bool changed = FALSE;
-	if ( o && o->s ) {
-	    changed = TRUE;
-	    o->s = FALSE;
-	}
-	if ( i && !i->s && d->selectionMode != NoSelection && i->isSelectable() ) {
-	    i->s = TRUE;
-	    changed = TRUE;
-	    emit selectionChanged( i );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-	}
-	if ( changed ) {
-	    emit selectionChanged();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::Selection );
-#endif
-	}
-    }
-
-    d->currentColumn = ind / numRows();
-    d->currentRow = ind % numRows();
-    if ( o )
-	updateItem( o );
-    if ( i )
-	updateItem( i );
-    // scroll after the items are redrawn
-    d->visibleTimer->start( 1, TRUE );
-
-    TQString tmp;
-    if ( i )
-	tmp = i->text();
-    emit highlighted( i );
-    if ( !tmp.isNull() )
-	emit highlighted( tmp );
-    emit highlighted( ind );
-    emit currentChanged( i );
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, TQAccessible::Focus );
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the item at position \a index, or 0 if \a
-    index is out of bounds.
-
-    \sa index()
-*/
-
-TQListBoxItem *TQListBox::item( int index ) const
-{
-    if ( index < 0 || index > d->count -1 )
-	return 0;
-
-    TQListBoxItem * i = d->head;
-
-    if ( d->cache && index > 0 ) {
-	i = d->cache;
-	int idx = d->cacheIndex;
-	while ( i && idx < index ) {
-	    idx++;
-	    i = i->n;
-	}
-	while ( i && idx > index ) {
-	    idx--;
-	    i = i->p;
-	}
-    } else {
-	int idx = index;
-	while ( i && idx > 0 ) {
-	    idx--;
-	    i = i->n;
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( index > 0 ) {
-	d->cache = i;
-	d->cacheIndex = index;
-    }
-
-    return i;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the index of \a lbi, or -1 if the item is not in this list
-    box or \a lbi is 0.
-
-    \sa item()
-*/
-
-int TQListBox::index( const TQListBoxItem * lbi ) const
-{
-    if ( !lbi )
-	return -1;
-    TQListBoxItem * i_n = d->head;
-    int c_n = 0;
-    if ( d->cache ) {
-	i_n = d->cache;
-	c_n = d->cacheIndex;
-    }
-    TQListBoxItem* i_p = i_n;
-    int c_p = c_n;
-    while ( ( i_n != 0 || i_p != 0 ) && i_n != lbi && i_p != lbi ) {
-	if ( i_n ) {
-	    c_n++;
-	    i_n = i_n->n;
-	}
-	if ( i_p ) {
-	    c_p--;
-	    i_p = i_p->p;
-	}
-    }
-    if ( i_p == lbi )
-	return c_p;
-    if ( i_n == lbi )
-	return c_n;
-    return -1;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the item at position \a index is at least partly
-    visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQListBox::itemVisible( int index )
-{
-    TQListBoxItem * i = item( index );
-    return i ? itemVisible( i ) : FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns TRUE if \a item is at least partly visible; otherwise
-    returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQListBox::itemVisible( const TQListBoxItem * item )
-{
-    if ( d->layoutDirty )
-	doLayout();
-
-    int i = index( item );
-    int col = i / numRows();
-    int row = i % numRows();
-    return ( d->columnPos[col] < contentsX()+visibleWidth() &&
-	     d->rowPos[row] < contentsY()+visibleHeight() &&
-	     d->columnPos[col+1] > contentsX() &&
-	     d->rowPos[row+1] > contentsY() );
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListBox::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    mousePressEventEx( e );
-}
-
-void TQListBox::mousePressEventEx( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    d->mouseInternalPress = TRUE;
-    TQListBoxItem * i = itemAt( e->pos() );
-
-    if ( !i && !d->current && d->head ) {
-	d->current = d->head;
-	updateItem( d->head );
-    }
-
-    if ( !i && ( d->selectionMode != Single || e->button() == Qt::RightButton )
-	 && !( e->state() & ControlButton ) )
-	clearSelection();
-
-    d->select = d->selectionMode == Multi ? ( i ? !i->isSelected() : FALSE ) : TRUE;
-    d->pressedSelected = i && i->s;
-
-    if ( i )
-	d->selectAnchor = i;
-    if ( i ) {
-	switch( selectionMode() ) {
-	default:
-	case Single:
-	    if ( !i->s || i != d->current ) {
-		if ( i->isSelectable() )
-		    setSelected( i, TRUE );
-		else
-		    setCurrentItem( i );
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Extended:
-	    if ( i ) {
-		if ( !(e->state() & ShiftButton) &&
-		     !(e->state() & ControlButton) ) {
-		    if ( !i->isSelected() ) {
-			bool b = tqsignalsBlocked();
-			blockSignals( TRUE );
-			clearSelection();
-			blockSignals( b );
-		    }
-		    setSelected( i, TRUE );
-		    d->dragging = TRUE; // always assume dragging
-		} else if ( e->state() & ShiftButton ) {
-		    d->pressedSelected = FALSE;
-		    TQListBoxItem *oldCurrent = item( currentItem() );
-		    bool down = index( oldCurrent ) < index( i );
-
-		    TQListBoxItem *lit = down ? oldCurrent : i;
-		    bool select = d->select;
-		    bool blocked = tqsignalsBlocked();
-		    blockSignals( TRUE );
-		    for ( ;; lit = lit->n ) {
-			if ( !lit ) {
-			    triggerUpdate( FALSE );
-			    break;
-			}
-			if ( down && lit == i ) {
-			    setSelected( i, select );
-			    triggerUpdate( FALSE );
-			    break;
-			}
-			if ( !down && lit == oldCurrent ) {
-			    setSelected( oldCurrent, select );
-			    triggerUpdate( FALSE );
-			    break;
-			}
-			setSelected( lit, select );
-		    }
-		    blockSignals( blocked );
-		    emit selectionChanged();
-		} else if ( e->state() & ControlButton ) {
-		    setSelected( i, !i->isSelected() );
-		    d->pressedSelected = FALSE;
-		}
-		setCurrentItem( i );
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Multi:
-	    //d->current = i;
-	    setSelected( i, !i->s );
-	    setCurrentItem( i );
-	    break;
-	case NoSelection:
-	    setCurrentItem( i );
-	    break;
-	}
-    } else {
-	bool unselect = TRUE;
-	if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	    if ( d->selectionMode == Multi ||
-		 d->selectionMode == Extended ) {
-		d->tmpCurrent = d->current;
-		d->current = 0;
-		updateItem( d->tmpCurrent );
-		if ( d->rubber )
-		    delete d->rubber;
-		d->rubber = 0;
-		d->rubber = new TQRect( e->x(), e->y(), 0, 0 );
-
-		if ( d->selectionMode == Extended && !( e->state() & ControlButton ) )
-		    selectAll( FALSE );
-		unselect = FALSE;
-	    }
-	    if ( unselect && ( e->button() == Qt::RightButton ||
-			       ( selectionMode() == Multi || selectionMode() == Extended ) ) )
-		clearSelection();
-	}
-    }
-
-    // for sanity, in case people are event-filtering or whatnot
-    delete d->scrollTimer;
-    d->scrollTimer = 0;
-    if ( i ) {
-	d->mousePressColumn = d->currentColumn;
-	d->mousePressRow = d->currentRow;
-    } else {
-	d->mousePressColumn = -1;
-	d->mousePressRow = -1;
-    }
-    d->ignoreMoves = FALSE;
-
-    d->pressedItem = i;
-
-    emit pressed( i );
-    emit pressed( i, e->globalPos() );
-    emit mouseButtonPressed( e->button(), i, e->globalPos() );
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::RightButton )
-	emit rightButtonPressed( i, e->globalPos() );
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListBox::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( d->selectionMode == Extended &&
-	d->dragging ) {
-	d->dragging = FALSE;
-	if (d->current != d->pressedItem) {
-	    updateSelection(); // when we drag, we get an update after we release
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( d->rubber ) {
-	drawRubber();
-	delete d->rubber;
-	d->rubber = 0;
-	d->current = d->tmpCurrent;
-	updateItem( d->current );
-    }
-    if ( d->scrollTimer )
-	mouseMoveEvent( e );
-    delete d->scrollTimer;
-    d->scrollTimer = 0;
-    d->ignoreMoves = FALSE;
-
-    if ( d->selectionMode == Extended &&
-	 d->current == d->pressedItem &&
-	 d->pressedSelected && d->current ) {
-	bool block = tqsignalsBlocked();
-	blockSignals( TRUE );
-	clearSelection();
-	blockSignals( block );
-	d->current->s = TRUE;
-	emit selectionChanged();
-    }
-
-    TQListBoxItem * i = itemAt( e->pos() );
-    bool emitClicked = (d->mousePressColumn != -1 && d->mousePressRow != -1) || !d->pressedItem;
-    emitClicked = emitClicked && d->pressedItem == i;
-    d->pressedItem = 0;
-    d->mousePressRow = -1;
-    d->mousePressColumn = -1;
-    d->mouseInternalPress = FALSE;
-    if ( emitClicked ) {
-	emit clicked( i );
-	emit clicked( i, e->globalPos() );
-	emit mouseButtonClicked( e->button(), i, e->globalPos() );
-	if ( e->button() == Qt::RightButton )
-	    emit rightButtonClicked( i, e->globalPos() );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListBox::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    bool ok = TRUE;
-    TQListBoxItem *i = itemAt( e->pos() );
-    if ( !i || selectionMode() == NoSelection )
-	ok = FALSE;
-
-    d->ignoreMoves = TRUE;
-
-    if ( d->current && ok ) {
-	TQListBoxItem * i = d->current;
-	TQString tmp = d->current->text();
-	emit selected( currentItem() );
-	emit selected( i );
-	if ( !tmp.isNull() )
-	    emit selected( tmp );
-	emit doubleClicked( i );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListBox::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    TQListBoxItem * i = itemAt( e->pos() );
-    if ( i != d->highlighted ) {
-	if ( i ) {
-	    emit onItem( i );
-	} else {
-	    emit onViewport();
-	}
-	d->highlighted = i;
-    }
-
-    if ( d->rubber ) {
-	TQRect r = d->rubber->normalize();
-	drawRubber();
-	d->rubber->setCoords( d->rubber->x(), d->rubber->y(), e->x(), e->y() );
-	doRubberSelection( r, d->rubber->normalize() );
-	drawRubber();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( ( (e->state() & ( Qt::RightButton | Qt::LeftButton | Qt::MidButton ) ) == 0 ) ||
-	 d->ignoreMoves )
-	return;
-
-    // hack to keep the combo (and what else?) working: if we get a
-    // move outside the listbox without having seen a press, discard
-    // it.
-    if ( !TQRect( 0, 0, visibleWidth(), visibleHeight() ).contains( e->pos() ) &&
-	 ( (d->mousePressColumn < 0 && d->mousePressRow < 0) ||
-	   (e->state() == Qt::NoButton && !d->pressedItem) ) )
-	return;
-
-    // figure out in what direction to drag-select and perhaps scroll
-    int dx = 0;
-    int x = e->x();
-    if ( x >= visibleWidth() ) {
-	x = visibleWidth()-1;
-	dx = 1;
-    } else if ( x < 0 ) {
-	x = 0;
-	dx = -1;
-    }
-    d->mouseMoveColumn = columnAt( x + contentsX() );
-
-    // sanitize mousePressColumn, if we got here without a mouse press event
-    if ( d->mousePressColumn < 0 && d->mouseMoveColumn >= 0 )
-	d->mousePressColumn = d->mouseMoveColumn;
-    if ( d->mousePressColumn < 0 && d->currentColumn >= 0 )
-	d->mousePressColumn = d->currentColumn;
-
-    // if it's beyond the last column, use the last one
-    if ( d->mouseMoveColumn < 0 )
-	d->mouseMoveColumn = dx >= 0 ? numColumns()-1 : 0;
-
-    // repeat for y
-    int dy = 0;
-    int y = e->y();
-    if ( y >= visibleHeight() ) {
-	y = visibleHeight()-1;
-	dy = 1;
-    } else if ( y < 0 ) {
-	y = 0;
-	dy = -1;
-    }
-    d->mouseMoveRow = rowAt( y + contentsY() );
-
-    if ( d->mousePressRow < 0 && d->mouseMoveRow >= 0 )
-	d->mousePressRow = d->mouseMoveRow;
-    if ( d->mousePressRow < 0 && d->currentRow >= 0 )
-	d->mousePressRow = d->currentRow;
-
-    if ( d->mousePressRow < 0 )
-	d->mousePressRow = rowAt( x + contentsX() );
-
-    d->scrollPos = TQPoint( dx, dy );
-
-    if ( ( dx || dy ) && !d->scrollTimer && e->state() == Qt::LeftButton && e->button() != Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	// start autoscrolling if necessary
-	d->scrollTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-	connect( d->scrollTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-		 this, TQT_SLOT(doAutoScroll()) );
-	d->scrollTimer->start( 100, FALSE );
-	doAutoScroll();
-    } else if ( !d->scrollTimer ) {
-	// or just select the required bits
-	updateSelection();
-    }
-}
-
-
-
-void TQListBox::updateSelection()
-{
-    if ( d->mouseMoveColumn >= 0 && d->mouseMoveRow >= 0 &&
-	 d->mousePressColumn >= 0 && d->mousePressRow >= 0 ) {
-	TQListBoxItem * i = item( d->mouseMoveColumn * numRows() +
-				 d->mouseMoveRow );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	int ind = index(i);
-#endif
-	if ( selectionMode() == Single || selectionMode() == NoSelection ) {
-	    if ( i && ( d->mouseInternalPress || testWFlags(WType_Popup) ) )
-		setCurrentItem( i );
-	} else {
-	    if ( d->selectionMode == Extended && (
-		 ( d->current == d->pressedItem && d->pressedSelected ) ||
-		(d->dirtyDrag && !d->dragging) ) ) {
-		if (d->dirtyDrag && !d->dragging) // emit after dragging stops
-		    d->dirtyDrag = FALSE;
-		else
-		    clearSelection(); // dont reset drag-selected items
-		d->pressedItem = 0;
-		if ( i && i->isSelectable() ) {
-		    bool block = tqsignalsBlocked();
-		    blockSignals( TRUE );
-		    i->s = TRUE;
-		    blockSignals( block );
-		    emit selectionChanged();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-		    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-		    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::Selection );
-		    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, TQAccessible::SelectionAdd );
-#endif
-		}
-		triggerUpdate( FALSE );
-	    } else {
-		int c = TQMIN( d->mouseMoveColumn, d->mousePressColumn );
-		int r = TQMIN( d->mouseMoveRow, d->mousePressRow );
-		int c2 = TQMAX( d->mouseMoveColumn, d->mousePressColumn );
-		int r2 = TQMAX( d->mouseMoveRow, d->mousePressRow );
-		bool changed = FALSE;
-		while( c <= c2 ) {
-		    TQListBoxItem * i = item( c*numRows()+r );
-		    int rtmp = r;
-		    while( i && rtmp <= r2 ) {
-			if ( (bool)i->s != (bool)d->select && i->isSelectable() ) {
-			    i->s = d->select;
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-			    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-			    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, d->select ? TQAccessible::SelectionAdd : TQAccessible::SelectionRemove );
-#endif
-			    i->dirty = TRUE;
-			    d->dirtyDrag = changed = TRUE;
-			}
-			i = i->n;
-			rtmp++;
-		    }
-		    c++;
-		}
-		if ( changed ) {
-		    if (!d->dragging) // emit after dragging stops instead
-			emit selectionChanged();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-		    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::Selection );
-#endif
-		    triggerUpdate( FALSE );
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ( i )
-		setCurrentItem( i );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-void TQListBox::repaintSelection()
-{
-    if ( d->numColumns == 1 ) {
-	for ( uint i = topItem(); itemVisible( i ) && i < count(); ++i ) {
-	    TQListBoxItem *it = item(i);
-	    if ( !it )
-		break;
-	    if ( it->isSelected() )
-		updateItem( it );
-	}
-    } else {
-	for ( uint i = 0; i < count(); ++i ) {
-	    TQListBoxItem *it = item(i);
-	    if ( !it )
-		break;
-	    if ( it->isSelected() )
-		updateItem( it );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::contentsContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !tqreceivers( TQT_SIGNAL(contextMenuRequested(TQListBoxItem*,const TQPoint&)) ) ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( e->reason() == TQContextMenuEvent::Keyboard ) {
-	TQListBoxItem *i = item( currentItem() );
-	if ( i ) {
-	    TQRect r = tqitemRect( i );
-	    emit contextMenuRequested( i, mapToGlobal( r.topLeft() + TQPoint( width() / 2, r.height() / 2 ) ) );
-	}
-    } else {
-	TQListBoxItem * i = itemAt( contentsToViewport( e->pos() ) );
-	emit contextMenuRequested( i, e->globalPos() );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-void TQListBox::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Tab || e->key() == Qt::Key_Backtab )
-	 && e->state() & ControlButton )
-	e->ignore();
-
-    if ( count() == 0 ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQListBox> selfCheck = this;
-
-    TQListBoxItem *old = d->current;
-    if ( !old ) {
-	setCurrentItem( d->head );
-	if ( d->selectionMode == Single )
-	    setSelected( d->head, TRUE );
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    bool selectCurrent = FALSE;
-    switch ( e->key() ) {
-	case Qt::Key_Up:
-	    {
-		d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		if ( currentItem() > 0 ) {
-		    setCurrentItem( currentItem() - 1 );
-		    handleItemChange( old, e->state() & ShiftButton, e->state() & ControlButton );
-		}
-		if ( !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor )
-		    d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Down:
-	    {
-		d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		if ( currentItem() < (int)count() - 1 ) {
-		    setCurrentItem( currentItem() + 1 );
-		    handleItemChange( old, e->state() & ShiftButton, e->state() & ControlButton );
-		}
-		if ( !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor )
-		    d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Left:
-	    {
-		d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		if ( currentColumn() > 0 ) {
-		    setCurrentItem( currentItem() - numRows() );
-		    handleItemChange( old, e->state() & ShiftButton, e->state() & ControlButton );
-		} else if ( numColumns() > 1 && currentItem() > 0 ) {
-		    int row = currentRow();
-		    setCurrentItem( currentRow() - 1 + ( numColumns() - 1 ) * numRows() );
-
-		    if ( currentItem() == -1 )
-			setCurrentItem( row - 1 + ( numColumns() - 2 ) * numRows() );
-
-		    handleItemChange( old, e->state() & ShiftButton, e->state() & ControlButton );
-		} else {
-		    TQApplication::sendEvent( horizontalScrollBar(), e );
-		}
-		if ( !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor )
-		    d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Right:
-	    {
-		d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		if ( currentColumn() < numColumns()-1 ) {
-		    int row = currentRow();
-		    int i = currentItem();
-		    TQListBoxItem *it = item( i + numRows() );
-		    if ( !it )
-			it = item( count()-1 );
-		    setCurrentItem( it );
-
-		    if ( currentItem() == -1 ) {
-			if ( row < numRows() - 1 )
-			    setCurrentItem( row + 1 );
-			else
-			    setCurrentItem( i );
-		    }
-
-		    handleItemChange( old, e->state() & ShiftButton, e->state() & ControlButton );
-		} else if ( numColumns() > 1 && currentRow() < numRows() ) {
-		    if ( currentRow() + 1 < numRows() ) {
-			setCurrentItem( currentRow() + 1 );
-			handleItemChange( old, e->state() & ShiftButton, e->state() & ControlButton );
-		    }
-		} else {
-		    TQApplication::sendEvent( horizontalScrollBar(), e );
-		}
-		if ( !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor )
-		    d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TQt::Key_Next:
-	    {
-		d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		int i = 0;
-		if ( numColumns() == 1 ) {
-		    i = currentItem() + numItemsVisible();
-		    i = i > (int)count() - 1 ? (int)count() - 1 : i;
-		    setCurrentItem( i );
-		    setBottomItem( i );
-		} else {
-		    // I'm not sure about this behavior...
-		    if ( currentRow() == numRows() - 1 )
-			i = currentItem() + numRows();
-		    else
-			i = currentItem() + numRows() - currentRow() - 1;
-		    i = i > (int)count() - 1 ? (int)count() - 1 : i;
-		    setCurrentItem( i );
-		}
-		handleItemChange( old, e->state() & ShiftButton, e->state() & ControlButton );
-		if ( !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor )
-		    d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case TQt::Key_Prior:
-	    {
-		selectCurrent = TRUE;
-		d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		int i;
-		if ( numColumns() == 1 ) {
-		    i = currentItem() - numItemsVisible();
-		    i = i < 0 ? 0 : i;
-		    setCurrentItem( i );
-		    setTopItem( i );
-		} else {
-		    // I'm not sure about this behavior...
-		    if ( currentRow() == 0 )
-			i = currentItem() - numRows();
-		    else
-			i = currentItem() - currentRow();
-		    i = i < 0 ? 0 : i;
-		    setCurrentItem( i );
-		}
-		handleItemChange( old, e->state() & ShiftButton, e->state() & ControlButton );
-		if ( !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor )
-		    d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Space:
-	    {
-		selectCurrent = TRUE;
-		d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		toggleCurrentItem();
-		if ( selectionMode() == Extended && d->current->isSelected() )
-		    emit highlighted( currentItem() );
-		if (selfCheck && (!( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor))
-		    d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Return:
-	case Qt::Key_Enter:
-	    {
-		selectCurrent = TRUE;
-		d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		if ( currentItem() >= 0 && selectionMode() != NoSelection ) {
-		    TQString tmp = item( currentItem() )->text();
-		    emit selected( currentItem());
-		    emit selected( item( currentItem() ) );
-		    if ( !tmp.isEmpty() )
-			emit selected( tmp );
-		    emit returnPressed( item( currentItem() ) );
-		}
-		if (selfCheck && (!( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor))
-		    d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_Home:
-	    {
-		selectCurrent = TRUE;
-		d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		setCurrentItem( 0 );
-		handleItemChange( old, e->state() & ShiftButton, e->state() & ControlButton );
-		if ( !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor )
-		    d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case Qt::Key_End:
-	    {
-		selectCurrent = TRUE;
-		d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		int i = (int)count() - 1;
-		setCurrentItem( i );
-		handleItemChange( old, e->state() & ShiftButton, e->state() & ControlButton );
-		if ( !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor )
-		    d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    {
-		if ( !e->text().isEmpty() && e->text()[ 0 ].isPrint() && count() ) {
-		    int curItem = currentItem();
-		    if ( curItem == -1 )
-			curItem = 0;
-		    if ( !d->inputTimer->isActive() ) {
-			d->currInputString = e->text();
-			curItem = d->findItemByName( ++curItem, d->currInputString );
-		    } else {
-			d->inputTimer->stop();
-			d->currInputString += e->text();
-			int oldCurItem = curItem;
-			curItem = d->findItemByName( curItem, d->currInputString );
-			if ( curItem < 0 ) {
-			    curItem = d->findItemByName( ++oldCurItem, e->text() );
-			    d->currInputString = e->text();
-			}
-		    }
-		    if ( curItem >= 0 )
-			setCurrentItem( curItem );
-		    if ( curItem >= 0 && selectionMode() == TQListBox::Extended ) {
-			bool changed = FALSE;
-			bool block = tqsignalsBlocked();
-			blockSignals( TRUE );
-			selectAll( FALSE );
-			blockSignals( block );
-			TQListBoxItem *i = item( curItem );
-			if ( !i->s && i->isSelectable() ) {
-			    changed = TRUE;
-			    i->s = TRUE;
-			    updateItem( i );
-			}
-			if ( changed )
-			    emit selectionChanged();
-		    }
-		    d->inputTimer->start( 400, TRUE );
-		} else {
-		    d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-		    if ( e->state() & ControlButton ) {
-			switch ( e->key() ) {
-			    case Qt::Key_A:
-				selectAll( TRUE );
-				break;
-			}
-		    } else {
-			e->ignore();
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-    }
-
-    if (selfCheck && selectCurrent && selectionMode() == Single &&
-	d->current && !d->current->s ) {
-	    updateItem( d->current );
-	    setSelected( d->current, TRUE );
-	}
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-void TQListBox::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent* tqfe )
-{
-    d->mousePressRow = -1;
-    d->mousePressColumn = -1;
-    d->inMenuMode = FALSE;
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-    if ( tqfe->reason() != TQFocusEvent::Mouse && !d->current && d->head ) {
-#else // USE_QT4
-    if ( TQFocusEvent::reason() != TQFocusEvent::Mouse && !d->current && d->head ) {
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	d->current = d->head;
-	TQListBoxItem *i = d->current;
-	TQString tmp;
-	if ( i )
-	    tmp = i->text();
-	int tmp2 = index( i );
-	emit highlighted( i );
-	if ( !tmp.isNull() )
-	    emit highlighted( tmp );
-	emit highlighted( tmp2 );
-	emit currentChanged( i );
-    }
-    if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus, this ) )
-	repaintSelection();
-
-    if ( d->current ) {
-	updateItem( currentItem() );
-	TQRect mfrect = tqitemRect( d->current );
-	if ( mfrect.isValid() )
-	    setMicroFocusHint( mfrect.x(), mfrect.y(), mfrect.width(), mfrect.height(), FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-void TQListBox::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent* tqfe)
-{
-    if (tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus, this )) {
-	d->inMenuMode =
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-	    tqfe->reason() == TQFocusEvent::Popup ||
-#else // USE_QT4
-	    TQFocusEvent::reason() == TQFocusEvent::Popup ||
-#endif // USE_QT4
- 	    (tqApp->tqfocusWidget() && tqApp->tqfocusWidget()->inherits("TQMenuBar"));
- 	if ( !d->inMenuMode )
-	    repaintSelection();
-    }
-
-    if ( d->current )
-	updateItem( currentItem() );
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
-*/
-bool TQListBox::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e )
-{
-    //### remove in 4.0
-    return TQScrollView::eventFilter( o, e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Repaints the item at position \a index in the list.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::updateItem( int index )
-{
-    if ( index >= 0 )
-	updateItem( item( index ) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Repaints the TQListBoxItem \a i.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::updateItem( TQListBoxItem * i )
-{
-    if ( !i )
-	return;
-    i->dirty = TRUE;
-    d->updateTimer->start( 0, TRUE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::selectionMode
-    \brief the selection mode of the list box
-
-    Sets the list box's selection mode, which may be one of \c Single
-    (the default), \c Extended, \c Multi or \c NoSelection.
-
-    \sa SelectionMode
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::setSelectionMode( SelectionMode mode )
-{
-    if ( d->selectionMode == mode )
-	return;
-
-    if ( ( selectionMode() == Multi || selectionMode() == Extended )
-	 && ( mode == TQListBox::Single || mode == TQListBox::NoSelection ) ){
-	clearSelection();
-	if ( ( mode == TQListBox::Single ) && currentItem() )
-	    setSelected( currentItem(), TRUE );
-    }
-
-    d->selectionMode = mode;
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-TQListBox::SelectionMode TQListBox::selectionMode() const
-{
-    return d->selectionMode;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-  \property TQListBox::multiSelection
-  \brief whether or not the list box is in Multi selection mode
-
-  Consider using the \l TQListBox::selectionMode property instead of
-  this property.
-
-  When setting this property, Multi selection mode is used if set to TRUE and
-  to Single selection mode if set to FALSE.
-
-  When getting this property, TRUE is returned if the list box is in
-  Multi selection mode or Extended selection mode, and FALSE if it is
-  in Single selection mode or NoSelection mode.
-
-  \sa selectionMode
-*/
-
-bool TQListBox::isMultiSelection() const
-{
-    return selectionMode() == Multi || selectionMode() == Extended;
-}
-
-void TQListBox::setMultiSelection( bool enable )
-{
-    setSelectionMode( enable ? Multi : Single );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Toggles the selection status of currentItem() and repaints if the
-    list box is a \c Multi selection list box.
-
-    \sa setMultiSelection()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::toggleCurrentItem()
-{
-    if ( selectionMode() == Single ||
-	 selectionMode() == NoSelection ||
-	 !d->current )
-	return;
-
-    if ( d->current->s || d->current->isSelectable() ) {
-	d->current->s = !d->current->s;
-	emit selectionChanged();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	int ind = index( d->current );
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::Selection );
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, d->current->s ? TQAccessible::SelectionAdd : TQAccessible::SelectionRemove );
-#endif
-    }
-    updateItem( d->current );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    If \a select is TRUE the item at position \a index is selected;
-    otherwise the item is deselected.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::setSelected( int index, bool select )
-{
-    setSelected( item( index ), select );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Selects \a item if \a select is TRUE or unselects it if \a select
-    is FALSE, and repaints the item appropriately.
-
-    If the list box is a \c Single selection list box and \a select is
-    TRUE, setSelected() calls setCurrentItem().
-
-    If the list box is a \c Single selection list box, \a select is
-    FALSE, setSelected() calls clearSelection().
-
-    \sa setMultiSelection(), setCurrentItem(), clearSelection(), currentItem()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::setSelected( TQListBoxItem * item, bool select )
-{
-    if ( !item || !item->isSelectable() ||
-	(bool)item->s == select || d->selectionMode == NoSelection )
-	return;
-
-    int ind = index( item );
-    bool emitHighlighted = (d->current != item) ||
-			   ( item->s != (uint) select && select );
-    if ( selectionMode() == Single ) {
-	if ( d->current != item ) {
-	    TQListBoxItem *o = d->current;
-	    if ( d->current && d->current->s )
-		d->current->s = FALSE;
-	    d->current = item;
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, TQAccessible::Focus );
-#endif
-	    d->currentColumn = ind / numRows();
-	    d->currentRow = ind % numRows();
-
-	    if ( o )
-		updateItem( o );
-	}
-    }
-
-    item->s = (uint)select;
-    updateItem( item );
-
-    if ( d->selectionMode == Single && select ) {
-	emit selectionChanged( item );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-    }
-    emit selectionChanged();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::Selection );
-    if ( d->selectionMode != Single )
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), ind+1, select ? TQAccessible::SelectionAdd : TQAccessible::SelectionRemove );
-#endif
-
-    if ( emitHighlighted ) {
-	TQString tmp;
-	if ( d->current )
-	    tmp = d->current->text();
-	int tmp2 = index( d->current );
-	emit highlighted( d->current );
-	if ( !tmp.isNull() )
-	    emit highlighted( tmp );
-	emit highlighted( tmp2 );
-	emit currentChanged( d->current );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if item \a i is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQListBox::isSelected( int i ) const
-{
-    if ( selectionMode() == Single && i != currentItem() )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    TQListBoxItem * lbi = item( i );
-    if ( !lbi )
-	return FALSE; // should not happen
-    return lbi->s;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns TRUE if item \a i is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQListBox::isSelected( const TQListBoxItem * i ) const
-{
-    if ( !i )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    return i->s;
-}
-
-/*!  Returns the selected item if the list box is in
-single-selection mode and an item is selected.
-
-If no items are selected or the list box is in another selection mode
-this function returns 0.
-
-\sa setSelected() setMultiSelection()
-*/
-
-TQListBoxItem* TQListBox::selectedItem() const
-{
-    if ( d->selectionMode != Single )
-	return 0;
-    if ( isSelected( currentItem() ) )
-	return  d->current;
-    return 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Deselects all items, if possible.
-
-    Note that a \c Single selection list box will automatically select
-    an item if it has keyboard focus.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::clearSelection()
-{
-    selectAll( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    In \c Multi and \c Extended modes, this function sets all items to
-    be selected if \a select is TRUE, and to be unselected if \a
-    select is FALSE.
-
-    In \c Single and \c NoSelection modes, this function only changes
-    the selection status of currentItem().
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::selectAll( bool select )
-{
-    if ( selectionMode() == Multi || selectionMode() == Extended ) {
-	bool b = tqsignalsBlocked();
-	blockSignals( TRUE );
-	for ( int i = 0; i < (int)count(); i++ )
-	    setSelected( i, select );
-	blockSignals( b );
-	emit selectionChanged();
-    } else if ( d->current ) {
-	TQListBoxItem * i = d->current;
-	setSelected( i, select );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inverts the selection. Only works in \c Multi and \c Extended
-    selection mode.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::invertSelection()
-{
-    if ( d->selectionMode == Single ||
-	 d->selectionMode == NoSelection )
-	return;
-
-    bool b = tqsignalsBlocked();
-    blockSignals( TRUE );
-    for ( int i = 0; i < (int)count(); i++ )
-	setSelected( i, !item( i )->isSelected() );
-    blockSignals( b );
-    emit selectionChanged();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-  Not used anymore; provided for binary compatibility
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::emitChangedSignal( bool )
-{
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-TQSize TQListBox::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( cachedSizeHint().isValid() )
-	return cachedSizeHint();
-
-    constPolish();
-    doLayout();
-
-    int i=0;
-    while( i < 10 &&
-	   i < (int)d->columnPos.size()-1 &&
-	   d->columnPos[i] < 200 )
-	i++;
-    int x;
-    x = TQMIN( 200, d->columnPos[i] +
-	      2 * tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth ) );
-    x = TQMAX( 40, x );
-
-    i = 0;
-    while( i < 10 &&
-	   i < (int)d->rowPos.size()-1 &&
-	   d->rowPos[i] < 200 )
-	i++;
-    int y;
-    y = TQMIN( 200, d->rowPos[i] +
-	      2 * tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth ) );
-    y = TQMAX( 40, y );
-
-    TQSize s( x, y );
-    setCachedSizeHint( s );
-    return s;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQListBox::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    return TQScrollView::tqminimumSizeHint();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Ensures that a single paint event will occur at the end of the
-    current event loop iteration. If \a doLayout is TRUE, the tqlayout
-    is also redone.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::triggerUpdate( bool doLayout )
-{
-    if ( doLayout )
-	d->layoutDirty = d->mustPaintAll = TRUE;
-    d->updateTimer->start( 0, TRUE );
-}
-
-
-void TQListBox::setColumnMode( LayoutMode mode )
-{
-    if ( mode == Variable )
-	return;
-    d->rowModeWins = FALSE;
-    d->columnMode = mode;
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-void TQListBox::setColumnMode( int columns )
-{
-    if ( columns < 1 )
-	columns = 1;
-    d->columnMode = FixedNumber;
-    d->numColumns = columns;
-    d->rowModeWins = FALSE;
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-void TQListBox::setRowMode( LayoutMode mode )
-{
-    if ( mode == Variable )
-	return;
-    d->rowModeWins = TRUE;
-    d->rowMode = mode;
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-void TQListBox::setRowMode( int rows )
-{
-    if ( rows < 1 )
-	rows = 1;
-    d->rowMode = FixedNumber;
-    d->numRows = rows;
-    d->rowModeWins = TRUE;
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::columnMode
-    \brief the column tqlayout mode for this list box.
-
-    setColumnMode() sets the tqlayout mode and adjusts the number of
-    displayed columns. The row tqlayout mode automatically becomes \c
-    Variable, unless the column mode is \c Variable.
-
-    \sa setRowMode() columnMode() rowMode numColumns
-*/
-
-
-TQListBox::LayoutMode TQListBox::columnMode() const
-{
-    if ( d->rowModeWins )
-	return Variable;
-    else
-	return d->columnMode;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::rowMode
-    \brief the row tqlayout mode for this list box
-
-    This property is normally \c Variable.
-
-    setRowMode() sets the tqlayout mode and adjusts the number of
-    displayed rows. The column tqlayout mode automatically becomes \c
-    Variable, unless the row mode is \c Variable.
-
-    \sa columnMode rowMode
-*/
-
-
-TQListBox::LayoutMode TQListBox::rowMode() const
-{
-    if ( d->rowModeWins )
-	return d->rowMode;
-    else
-	return Variable;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::numColumns
-    \brief the number of columns in the list box
-
-    This is normally 1, but can be different if \l
-    TQListBox::columnMode or \l TQListBox::rowMode has been set.
-
-    \sa columnMode rowMode numRows
-*/
-
-int TQListBox::numColumns() const
-{
-    if ( count() == 0 )
-	return 0;
-    if ( !d->rowModeWins && d->columnMode == FixedNumber )
-	return d->numColumns;
-    doLayout();
-    return d->columnPos.size()-1;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::numRows
-    \brief the number of rows in the list box.
-
-    This is equal to the number of items in the default single-column
-    tqlayout, but can be different.
-
-    \sa columnMode rowMode numColumns
-*/
-
-int TQListBox::numRows() const
-{
-    if ( count() == 0 )
-	return 0;
-    if ( d->rowModeWins && d->rowMode == FixedNumber )
-	return d->numRows;
-    doLayout();
-    return d->rowPos.size()-1;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This function does the hard tqlayout work. You should never need to
-    call it.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::doLayout() const
-{
-    if ( !d->layoutDirty || d->resizeTimer->isActive() )
-	return;
-    constPolish();
-    int c = count();
-    switch( rowMode() ) {
-    case FixedNumber:
-	// columnMode() is known to be Variable
-	tryGeometry( d->numRows, (c+d->numRows-1)/d->numRows );
-	break;
-    case FitToHeight:
-	// columnMode() is known to be Variable
-	if ( d->head ) {
-	    // this is basically the FitToWidth code, but edited to use rows.
-	    int maxh = 0;
-	    TQListBoxItem * i = d->head;
-	    while ( i ) {
-		int h = i->height(this);
-		if ( maxh < h )
-		    maxh = h;
-		i = i->n;
-	    }
-	    int vh = viewportSize( 1, 1 ).height();
-	    do {
-		int rows = vh / maxh;
-		if ( rows > c )
-		    rows = c;
-		if ( rows < 1 )
-		    rows = 1;
-		if ( variableHeight() && rows < c ) {
-		    do {
-			++rows;
-			tryGeometry( rows, (c+rows-1)/rows );
-		    } while ( rows <= c &&
-			      d->rowPos[(int)d->rowPos.size()-1] <= vh );
-		    --rows;
-		}
-		tryGeometry( rows, (c+rows-1)/rows );
-		int nvh = viewportSize( d->columnPos[(int)d->columnPos.size()-1],
-					d->rowPos[(int)d->rowPos.size()-1] ).height();
-		if ( nvh < vh )
-		    vh = nvh;
-	    } while ( d->rowPos.size() > 2 &&
-		      vh < d->rowPos[(int)d->rowPos.size()-1] );
-	} else {
-	    tryGeometry( 1, 1 );
-	}
-	break;
-    case Variable:
-	if ( columnMode() == FixedNumber ) {
-	    tryGeometry( (count()+d->numColumns-1)/d->numColumns,
-			 d->numColumns );
-	} else if ( d->head ) { // FitToWidth, at least one item
-	    int maxw = 0;
-	    TQListBoxItem * i = d->head;
-	    while ( i ) {
-		int w = i->width(this);
-		if ( maxw < w )
-		    maxw = w;
-		i = i->n;
-	    }
-	    int vw = viewportSize( 1, 1 ).width();
-	    do {
-		int cols = vw / maxw;
-		if ( cols > c )
-		    cols = c;
-		if ( cols < 1 )
-		    cols = 1;
-		if ( variableWidth() && cols < c ) {
-		    do {
-			++cols;
-			tryGeometry( (c+cols-1)/cols, cols );
-		    } while ( cols <= c &&
-			      d->columnPos[(int)d->columnPos.size()-1] <= vw );
-		    --cols;
-		}
-		tryGeometry( (c+cols-1)/cols, cols );
-		int nvw = viewportSize( d->columnPos[(int)d->columnPos.size()-1],
-					d->rowPos[(int)d->rowPos.size()-1] ).width();
-		if ( nvw < vw )
-		    vw = nvw;
-	    } while ( d->columnPos.size() > 2 &&
-		      vw < d->columnPos[(int)d->columnPos.size()-1] );
-	} else {
-	    tryGeometry( 1, 1 );
-	}
-	break;
-    }
-
-    d->layoutDirty = FALSE;
-    int w = d->columnPos[(int)d->columnPos.size()-1];
-    int h = d->rowPos[(int)d->rowPos.size()-1];
-    TQSize s( viewportSize( w, h ) );
-    w = TQMAX( w, s.width() );
-
-    d->columnPosOne = d->columnPos[1];
-    // extend the column for simple single-column listboxes
-    if ( columnMode() == FixedNumber && d->numColumns == 1 &&
-	 d->columnPos[1] < w )
-	d->columnPos[1] = w;
-    ((TQListBox *)this)->resizeContents( w, h );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Lay the items out in a \a columns by \a rows array. The array may
-    be too big: doLayout() is expected to call this with the right
-    values.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::tryGeometry( int rows, int columns ) const
-{
-    if ( columns < 1 )
-	columns = 1;
-    d->columnPos.resize( columns+1 );
-
-    if ( rows < 1 )
-	rows = 1;
-    d->rowPos.resize( rows+1 );
-
-    // funky hack I: dump the height/width of each column/row in
-    // {column,row}Pos for later conversion to positions.
-    int c;
-    for( c=0; c<=columns; c++ )
-	d->columnPos[c] = 0;
-    int r;
-    for( r=0; r<=rows; r++ )
-	d->rowPos[r] = 0;
-    r = c = 0;
-    TQListBoxItem * i = d->head;
-    while ( i && c < columns ) {
-	if ( i == d->current ) {
-	    d->currentRow = r;
-	    d->currentColumn = c;
-	}
-
-	int w = i->width(this);
-	if ( d->columnPos[c] < w )
-	    d->columnPos[c] = w;
-	int h = i->height(this);
-	if ( d->rowPos[r] < h )
-	    d->rowPos[r] = h;
-	i = i->n;
-	r++;
-	if ( r == rows ) {
-	    r = 0;
-	    c++;
-	}
-    }
-    // funky hack II: if not variable {width,height}, unvariablify it.
-    if ( !variableWidth() ) {
-	int w = 0;
-	for( c=0; c<columns; c++ )
-	    if ( w < d->columnPos[c] )
-		w = d->columnPos[c];
-	for( c=0; c<columns; c++ )
-	    d->columnPos[c] = w;
-    }
-    if ( !variableHeight() ) {
-	int h = 0;
-	for( r=0; r<rows; r++ )
-	    if ( h < d->rowPos[r] )
-		h = d->rowPos[r];
-	for( r=0; r<rows; r++ )
-	    d->rowPos[r] = h;
-    }
-    // repair the hacking.
-    int x = 0;
-    for( c=0; c<=columns; c++ ) {
-	int w = d->columnPos[c];
-	d->columnPos[c] = x;
-	x += w;
-    }
-    int y = 0;
-    for( r=0; r<=rows; r++ ) {
-	int h = d->rowPos[r];
-	d->rowPos[r] = y;
-	y += h;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the row index of the current item, or -1 if no item is the
-    current item.
-*/
-
-int TQListBox::currentRow() const
-{
-    if ( !d->current )
-	return -1;
-    if ( d->currentRow < 0 )
-	d->layoutDirty = TRUE;
-    if ( d->layoutDirty )
-	doLayout();
-    return d->currentRow;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the column index of the current item, or -1 if no item is
-    the current item.
-*/
-
-int TQListBox::currentColumn() const
-{
-    if ( !d->current )
-	return -1;
-    if ( d->currentColumn < 0 )
-	d->layoutDirty = TRUE;
-    if ( d->layoutDirty )
-	doLayout();
-    return d->currentColumn;
-}
-
-
-void TQListBox::setTopItem( int index )
-{
-    if ( index >= (int)count() || count() == 0 )
-	return;
-    int col = index / numRows();
-    int y = d->rowPos[index-col*numRows()];
-    if ( d->columnPos[col] >= contentsX() &&
-	 d->columnPos[col+1] <= contentsX() + visibleWidth() )
-	setContentsPos( contentsX(), y );
-    else
-	setContentsPos( d->columnPos[col], y );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Scrolls the list box so the item at position \a index in the list
-    is displayed in the bottom row of the list box.
-
-    \sa setTopItem()
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::setBottomItem( int index )
-{
-    if ( index >= (int)count() || count() == 0 )
-	return;
-    int col = index / numRows();
-    int y = d->rowPos[1+index-col*numRows()] - visibleHeight();
-    if ( y < 0 )
-	y = 0;
-    if ( d->columnPos[col] >= contentsX() &&
-	 d->columnPos[col+1] <= contentsX() + visibleWidth() )
-	setContentsPos( contentsX(), y );
-    else
-	setContentsPos( d->columnPos[col], y );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the item at point \a p, specified in viewport coordinates,
-    or a 0 if there is no item at \a p.
-
-    Use contentsToViewport() to convert between widget coordinates and
-    viewport coordinates.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxItem * TQListBox::itemAt( const TQPoint& p ) const
-{
-    if ( d->layoutDirty )
-	doLayout();
-    TQPoint np = p;
-
-    // take into acount frame margin to get to viewport
-    np -= viewport()->pos();
-    if (!TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(viewport()->rect()).contains(np))
-	return 0;
-
-    // take into account contents position
-    np = viewportToContents( np );
-
-    int x = np.x();
-    int y = np.y();
-
-    // return 0 when y is below the last row
-    if ( y > d->rowPos[ numRows() ] )
-	return 0;
-
-    int col = columnAt( x );
-    int row = rowAt( y );
-
-    TQListBoxItem *i = item( col * numRows()  + row );
-    if ( i && numColumns() > 1 ) {
-	if ( d->columnPos[ col ] + i->width( this ) >= x )
-	    return i;
-    } else {
-	if ( d->columnPos[ col + 1 ] >= x )
-	    return i;
-    }
-    return 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Ensures that the current item is visible.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::ensureCurrentVisible()
-{
-    if ( !d->current )
-	return;
-
-    doLayout();
-
-    int row = currentRow();
-    int column = currentColumn();
-    int w = ( d->columnPos[column+1] - d->columnPos[column] ) / 2;
-    int h = ( d->rowPos[row+1] - d->rowPos[row] ) / 2;
-    // next four lines are Bad.  they mean that for pure left-to-right
-    // languages, textual list box items are displayed better than
-    // before when there is little space.  for non-textual items, or
-    // other languages, it means... that you really should have enough
-    // space in the first place :)
-    if ( numColumns() == 1 )
-	w = 0;
-    if ( w*2 > viewport()->width() )
-	w = viewport()->width()/2;
-
-    ensureVisible( d->columnPos[column] + w, d->rowPos[row] + h, w, h);
-}
-
-
-/*! \internal */
-
-void TQListBox::doAutoScroll()
-{
-    if ( d->scrollPos.x() < 0 ) {
-	// scroll left
-	int x = contentsX() - horizontalScrollBar()->lineStep();
-	if ( x < 0 )
-	    x = 0;
-	if ( x != contentsX() ) {
-	    d->mouseMoveColumn = columnAt( x );
-	    updateSelection();
-	    if ( x < contentsX() )
-		setContentsPos( x, contentsY() );
-	}
-    } else if ( d->scrollPos.x() > 0 ) {
-	// scroll right
-	int x = contentsX() + horizontalScrollBar()->lineStep();
-	if ( x + visibleWidth() > contentsWidth() )
-	    x = contentsWidth() - visibleWidth();
-	if ( x != contentsX() ) {
-	    d->mouseMoveColumn = columnAt( x + visibleWidth() - 1 );
-	    updateSelection();
-	    if ( x > contentsX() )
-		setContentsPos( x, contentsY() );
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( d->scrollPos.y() < 0 ) {
-	// scroll up
-	int y = contentsY() - verticalScrollBar()->lineStep();
-	if ( y < 0 )
-	    y = 0;
-	if ( y != contentsY() ) {
-	    y = contentsY() - verticalScrollBar()->lineStep();
-	    d->mouseMoveRow = rowAt( y );
-	    updateSelection();
-	}
-    } else if ( d->scrollPos.y() > 0 ) {
-	// scroll down
-	int y = contentsY() + verticalScrollBar()->lineStep();
-	if ( y + visibleHeight() > contentsHeight() )
-	    y = contentsHeight() - visibleHeight();
-	if ( y != contentsY() ) {
-	    y = contentsY() + verticalScrollBar()->lineStep();
-	    d->mouseMoveRow = rowAt(y + visibleHeight() - 1 );
-	    updateSelection();
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( d->scrollPos == TQPoint( 0, 0 ) ) {
-	delete d->scrollTimer;
-	d->scrollTimer = 0;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::topItem
-    \brief the index of an item at the top of the screen.
-
-    When getting this property and the listbox has multiple columns,
-    an arbitrary item is selected and returned.
-
-    When setting this property, the list box is scrolled so the item
-    at position \e index in the list is displayed in the top row of
-    the list box.
-*/
-
-int TQListBox::topItem() const
-{
-    doLayout();
-
-    // move rightwards to the best column
-    int col = columnAt( contentsX() );
-    int row = rowAt( contentsY() );
-    return col * numRows() + row;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::variableHeight
-    \brief whether this list box has variable-height rows
-
-    When the list box has variable-height rows (the default), each row
-    is as high as the highest item in that row. When it has same-sized
-    rows, all rows are as high as the highest item in the list box.
-
-    \sa variableWidth
-*/
-
-bool TQListBox::variableHeight() const
-{
-    return d->variableHeight;
-}
-
-
-void TQListBox::setVariableHeight( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( (bool)d->variableHeight == enable )
-	return;
-
-    d->variableHeight = enable;
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListBox::variableWidth
-    \brief whether this list box has variable-width columns
-
-    When the list box has variable-width columns, each column is as
-    wide as the widest item in that column. When it has same-sized
-    columns (the default), all columns are as wide as the widest item
-    in the list box.
-
-    \sa variableHeight
-*/
-
-bool TQListBox::variableWidth() const
-{
-    return d->variableWidth;
-}
-
-
-void TQListBox::setVariableWidth( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( (bool)d->variableWidth == enable )
-	return;
-
-    d->variableWidth = enable;
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Repaints only what really needs to be repainted.
-*/
-void TQListBox::refreshSlot()
-{
-    if ( d->mustPaintAll ||
-	 d->layoutDirty ) {
-	d->mustPaintAll = FALSE;
-	bool currentItemVisible = itemVisible( currentItem() );
-	doLayout();
-	if ( hasFocus() &&
-	     currentItemVisible &&
-	     d->currentColumn >= 0 &&
-	     d->currentRow >= 0 &&
-	     ( d->columnPos[d->currentColumn] < contentsX() ||
-	       d->columnPos[d->currentColumn+1]>contentsX()+visibleWidth() ||
-	       d->rowPos[d->currentRow] < contentsY() ||
-	       d->rowPos[d->currentRow+1] > contentsY()+visibleHeight() ) )
-	    ensureCurrentVisible();
-	viewport()->tqrepaint( FALSE );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    TQRegion r;
-    int x = contentsX();
-    int y = contentsY();
-    int col = columnAt( x );
-    int row = rowAt( y );
-    int top = row;
-    while( col < (int)d->columnPos.size()-1 && d->columnPos[col+1] < x )
-	col++;
-    while( top < (int)d->rowPos.size()-1 && d->rowPos[top+1] < y )
-	top++;
-    TQListBoxItem * i = item( col * numRows() + row );
-
-    while ( i && (int)col < numColumns() &&
-	    d->columnPos[col] < x + visibleWidth()  ) {
-	int cw = d->columnPos[col+1] - d->columnPos[col];
-	while ( i && row < numRows() && d->rowPos[row] <
-		y + visibleHeight() ) {
-	    if ( i->dirty )
-		r = r.unite( TQRect( d->columnPos[col] - x, d->rowPos[row] - y,
-				    cw, d->rowPos[row+1] - d->rowPos[row] ) );
-	    row++;
-	    i = i->n;
-	}
-	col++;
-	if ( numColumns() > 1 ) {
-	    row = top;
-	    i = item( col *  numRows() + row );
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( r.isEmpty() )
-	viewport()->tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    else
-	viewport()->tqrepaint( r, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListBox::viewportPaintEvent( TQPaintEvent * e )
-{
-    doLayout();
-    TQWidget* vp = viewport();
-    TQPainter p( vp );
-    TQRegion r = e->region();
-
-#if 0
-    {
-	// this stuff has been useful enough times that from now I'm
-	//  leaving it in the source.
-	uint i = 0;
-	qDebug( "%s/%s: %i rects", className(), name(), r.rects().size() );
-	while( i < r.rects().size() ) {
-	    qDebug( "rect %d: %d, %d, %d, %d", i,
-		   r.rects()[i].left(), r.rects()[i].top(),
-		   r.rects()[i].width(), r.rects()[i].height() );
-	    i++;
-	}
-	qDebug( "" );
-    }
-#endif
-
-    int x = contentsX();
-    int y = contentsY();
-    int w = vp->width();
-    int h = vp->height();
-
-    int col = columnAt( x );
-    int top = rowAt( y );
-    int row = top;
-
-    TQListBoxItem * i = item( col*numRows() + row );
-
-    const TQColorGroup & g = tqcolorGroup();
-    p.setPen( g.text() );
-    p.setBackgroundColor( backgroundBrush().color() );
-    while ( i && (int)col < numColumns() && d->columnPos[col] < x + w ) {
-	int cw = d->columnPos[col+1] - d->columnPos[col];
-	while ( i && (int)row < numRows() && d->rowPos[row] < y + h ) {
-	    int ch = d->rowPos[row+1] - d->rowPos[row];
-	    TQRect tqitemRect( d->columnPos[col]-x,  d->rowPos[row]-y, cw, ch );
-	    TQRegion tempRegion( tqitemRect );
-	    TQRegion itemPaintRegion( tempRegion.intersect( r  ) );
-	    if ( !itemPaintRegion.isEmpty() ) {
-		p.save();
-		p.setClipRegion( itemPaintRegion );
-		p.translate( d->columnPos[col]-x, d->rowPos[row]-y );
-		paintCell( &p, row, col );
-		p.restore();
-		r = r.subtract( itemPaintRegion );
-	    }
-	    row++;
-	    if ( i->dirty ) {
-		// reset dirty flag only if the entire item was painted
-		if ( itemPaintRegion == TQRegion( tqitemRect ) )
-		    i->dirty = FALSE;
-	    }
-	    i = i->n;
-	}
-	col++;
-	if ( numColumns() > 1 ) {
-	    row = top;
-	    i = item( col *  numRows() + row );
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( r.isEmpty() )
-	return;
-    p.setClipRegion( r );
-    p.fillRect( 0, 0, w, h, viewport()->backgroundBrush() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the height in pixels of the item with index \a index. \a
-    index defaults to 0.
-
-    If \a index is too large, this function returns 0.
-*/
-
-int TQListBox::itemHeight( int index ) const
-{
-    if ( index >= (int)count() || index < 0 )
-	return 0;
-    int r = index % numRows();
-    return d->rowPos[r+1] - d->rowPos[r];
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the index of the column at \a x, which is in the listbox's
-    coordinates, not in on-screen coordinates.
-
-    If there is no column that spans \a x, columnAt() returns -1.
-*/
-
-int TQListBox::columnAt( int x ) const
-{
-    if ( x < 0 )
-	return -1;
-    if ( !d->columnPos.size() )
-	return -1;
-    if ( x >= d->columnPos[(int)d->columnPos.size()-1 ] )
-	return numColumns() - 1;
-
-    int col = 0;
-    while( col < (int)d->columnPos.size()-1 && d->columnPos[col+1] < x )
-	col++;
-    return col;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the index of the row at \a y, which is in the listbox's
-    coordinates, not in on-screen coordinates.
-
-    If there is no row that spans \a y, rowAt() returns -1.
-*/
-
-int TQListBox::rowAt( int y ) const
-{
-    if ( y < 0 )
-	return -1;
-
-    // find the top item, use bsearch for speed
-    int l = 0;
-    int r = d->rowPos.size() - 2;
-    if ( r < 0 )
-	return -1;
-    if ( l <= d->rowPosCache && d->rowPosCache <= r ) {
-	if ( d->rowPos[ TQMAX( l, d->rowPosCache - 10 ) ] <= y
-	     && y <= d->rowPos[ TQMIN( r, d->rowPosCache + 10 ) ] ) {
-	    l = TQMAX( l, d->rowPosCache - 10 );
-	    r = TQMIN( r, d->rowPosCache + 10 );
-	}
-    }
-    int i = ( (l+r+1) / 2 );
-    while ( r - l ) {
-	if ( d->rowPos[i] > y )
-	    r = i -1;
-	else
-	    l = i;
-	i = ( (l+r+1) / 2 );
-    }
-    d->rowPosCache = i;
-    if ( d->rowPos[i] <= y && y <= d->rowPos[i+1]  )
-	return  i;
-
-    return d->count - 1;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the rectangle on the screen that \a item occupies in
-    viewport()'s coordinates, or an invalid rectangle if \a item is 0
-    or is not currently visible.
-*/
-
-TQRect TQListBox::tqitemRect( TQListBoxItem *item ) const
-{
-    if ( d->resizeTimer->isActive() )
-	return TQRect( 0, 0, -1, -1 );
-    if ( !item )
-	return TQRect( 0, 0, -1, -1 );
-
-    int i = index( item );
-    int col = i / numRows();
-    int row = i % numRows();
-
-    int x = d->columnPos[ col ] - contentsX();
-    int y = d->rowPos[ row ] - contentsY();
-
-    TQRect r( x, y, d->columnPos[ col + 1 ] - d->columnPos[ col ],
-		  d->rowPos[ row + 1 ] - d->rowPos[ row ] );
-    if ( r.intersects( TQRect( 0, 0, visibleWidth(), visibleHeight() ) ) )
-	return r;
-    return TQRect( 0, 0, -1, -1 );
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-
-  Using this method is quite inefficient. We suggest to use insertItem()
-  for inserting and sort() afterwards.
-
-  Inserts \a lbi at its sorted position in the list box and returns the
-  position.
-
-  All items must be inserted with inSort() to maintain the sorting
-  order. inSort() treats any pixmap (or user-defined type) as
-  lexicographically less than any string.
-
-  \sa insertItem(), sort()
-*/
-int TQListBox::inSort( const TQListBoxItem * lbi )
-{
-    qObsolete( "TQListBox", "inSort", "insertItem" );
-    if ( !lbi )
-	return -1;
-
-    TQListBoxItem * i = d->head;
-    int c = 0;
-
-    while( i && i->text() < lbi->text() ) {
-	i = i->n;
-	c++;
-    }
-    insertItem( lbi, c );
-    return c;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-  \overload
-  Using this method is quite inefficient. We suggest to use insertItem()
-  for inserting and sort() afterwards.
-
-  Inserts a new item of \a text at its sorted position in the list box and
-  returns the position.
-
-  All items must be inserted with inSort() to maintain the sorting
-  order. inSort() treats any pixmap (or user-defined type) as
-  lexicographically less than any string.
-
-  \sa insertItem(), sort()
-*/
-int TQListBox::inSort( const TQString& text )
-{
-    qObsolete( "TQListBox", "inSort", "insertItem" );
-    return inSort( new TQListBoxText(text) );
-}
-
-#endif
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListBox::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    d->layoutDirty = ( d->layoutDirty ||
-		       rowMode() == FitToHeight ||
-		       columnMode() == FitToWidth );
-
-    if ( !d->layoutDirty && columnMode() == FixedNumber &&
-	 d->numColumns == 1) {
-	int w = d->columnPosOne;
-	TQSize s( viewportSize( w, contentsHeight() ) );
-	w = TQMAX( w, s.width() );
-	d->columnPos[1] = TQMAX( w, d->columnPosOne );
-	resizeContents( d->columnPos[1], contentsHeight() );
-    }
-
-    if ( d->resizeTimer->isActive() )
-	d->resizeTimer->stop();
-    if ( d->rowMode == FixedNumber && d->columnMode == FixedNumber ) {
-	bool currentItemVisible = itemVisible( currentItem() );
-	doLayout();
-	TQScrollView::resizeEvent( e );
-	if ( currentItemVisible )
-	    ensureCurrentVisible();
-	if ( d->current )
-	    viewport()->tqrepaint( tqitemRect( d->current ), FALSE );
-    } else if ( ( d->columnMode == FitToWidth || d->rowMode == FitToHeight ) && !(isVisible()) ) {
-	TQScrollView::resizeEvent( e );
-    } else if ( d->layoutDirty ) {
-	d->resizeTimer->start( 100, TRUE );
-	resizeContents( contentsWidth() - ( e->oldSize().width() - e->size().width() ),
-			contentsHeight() - ( e->oldSize().height() - e->size().height() ) );
-	TQScrollView::resizeEvent( e );
-    } else {
-	TQScrollView::resizeEvent( e );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::adjustItems()
-{
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-    ensureCurrentVisible();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Provided for compatibility with the old TQListBox. We recommend
-    using TQListBoxItem::paint() instead.
-
-    Repaints the cell at \a row, \a col using painter \a p.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::paintCell( TQPainter * p, int row, int col )
-{
-    bool drawActiveSelection = hasFocus() || d->inMenuMode ||
-	!tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus, this );
-    const TQColorGroup &g = ( drawActiveSelection ? tqcolorGroup() : tqpalette().inactive() );
-
-    int cw = d->columnPos[col+1] - d->columnPos[col];
-    int ch = d->rowPos[row+1] - d->rowPos[row];
-    TQListBoxItem * i = item( col*numRows()+row );
-    p->save();
-    if ( i->s ) {
-	if ( i->custom_highlight ) {
-	    p->fillRect( 0, 0, cw, ch,
-			 g.brush( TQPalette::backgroundRoleFromMode( viewport()->backgroundMode() ) ) );
-	    p->setPen( g.highlightedText() );
-	    p->setBackgroundColor( g.highlight() );
-	}
-	else if ( numColumns()  == 1 ) {
-	    p->fillRect( 0, 0, cw, ch, g.brush( TQColorGroup::Highlight ) );
-	    p->setPen( g.highlightedText() );
-	    p->setBackgroundColor( g.highlight() );
-	} else {
-	    int iw = i->width( this );
-	    p->fillRect( 0, 0, iw, ch, g.brush( TQColorGroup::Highlight ) );
-	    p->fillRect( iw, 0, cw - iw + 1, ch,
-			 g.brush( TQPalette::backgroundRoleFromMode( viewport()->backgroundMode() ) ) );
-	    p->setPen( g.highlightedText() );
-	    p->setBackgroundColor( g.highlight() );
-	}
-    } else {
-	p->fillRect( 0, 0, cw, ch,
-		     g.brush( TQPalette::backgroundRoleFromMode( viewport()->backgroundMode() ) ) );
-    }
-
-    i->paint( p );
-
-    if ( d->current == i && hasFocus() && !i->custom_highlight ) {
-	if ( numColumns() > 1 )
-	    cw = i->width( this );
-
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_FocusRect, p, TQRect( 0, 0, cw, ch ), g,
-			       TQStyle::Style_FocusAtBorder,
-			       TQStyleOption(i->isSelected() ? g.highlight() : g.base() ) );
-    }
-
-    p->restore();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the width of the widest item in the list box.
-*/
-
-long TQListBox::maxItemWidth() const
-{
-    if ( d->layoutDirty )
-	doLayout();
-    long m = 0;
-    int i = d->columnPos.size();
-    while( i-- )
-	if ( m < d->columnPos[i] )
-	    m = d->columnPos[i];
-    return m;
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListBox::showEvent( TQShowEvent * )
-{
-    d->ignoreMoves = FALSE;
-    d->mousePressRow = -1;
-    d->mousePressColumn = -1;
-    d->mustPaintAll = FALSE;
-    ensureCurrentVisible();
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-
-  Returns the vertical pixel-coordinate in \a *yPos, of the list box
-  item at position \a index in the list. Returns FALSE if the item is
-  outside the visible area.
-*/
-bool TQListBox::itemYPos( int index, int *yPos ) const
-{
-    qObsolete( "TQListBox", "itemYPos" );
-    TQListBoxItem* i = item(index);
-    if ( !i )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( yPos )
-	*yPos = i->y;
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListBoxItem::isSelected() const
-
-    Returns TRUE if the item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa TQListBox::isSelected(), isCurrent()
-*/
-
-/*!
-  \fn bool TQListBoxItem::selected() const
-  \obsolete
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the item is the current item; otherwise returns
-    FALSE.
-
-    \sa TQListBox::currentItem(), TQListBox::item(), isSelected()
-*/
-bool TQListBoxItem::isCurrent() const
-{
-    return listBox() && listBox()->hasFocus() &&
-	listBox()->item( listBox()->currentItem() ) == this;
-}
-/*!
-  \fn bool TQListBoxItem::current() const
-  \obsolete
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListBox::centerCurrentItem()
-    \obsolete
-
-    This function does exactly the same as ensureCurrentVisible()
-
-    \sa TQListBox::ensureCurrentVisible()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the list box containing this item.
-*/
-
-TQListBox * TQListBoxItem::listBox() const
-{
-    return lbox;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes \a item from the list box and causes an update of the
-    screen display. The item is not deleted. You should normally not
-    need to call this function because TQListBoxItem::~TQListBoxItem()
-    calls it. The normal way to delete an item is with \c delete.
-
-    \sa TQListBox::insertItem()
-*/
-void TQListBox::takeItem( const TQListBoxItem * item )
-{
-    if ( !item || d->clearing )
-	return;
-    d->cache = 0;
-    d->count--;
-    if ( item == d->last )
-	d->last = d->last->p;
-    if ( item->p && item->p->n == item )
-	item->p->n = item->n;
-    if ( item->n && item->n->p == item )
-	item->n->p = item->p;
-    if ( d->head == item ) {
-	d->head = item->n;
-	d->currentColumn = d->currentRow = -1;
-    }
-
-    if ( d->current == item ) {
-	d->current = item->n ? item->n : item->p;
-	TQListBoxItem *i = d->current;
-	TQString tmp;
-	if ( i )
-	    tmp = i->text();
-	int tmp2 = index( i );
-	emit highlighted( i );
-	if ( !tmp.isNull() )
-	    emit highlighted( tmp );
-	emit highlighted( tmp2 );
-	emit currentChanged( i );
-    }
-    if ( d->tmpCurrent == item )
-        d->tmpCurrent = d->current;
-    if ( d->selectAnchor == item )
-	d->selectAnchor = d->current;
-
-    if ( item->s )
-	emit selectionChanged();
-    ((TQListBoxItem *)item)->lbox = 0;
-    triggerUpdate( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Finds the next item after start beginning with \a text.
-*/
-
-int TQListBoxPrivate::findItemByName( int start, const TQString &text )
-{
-    if ( start < 0 || (uint)start >= listBox->count() )
-	start = 0;
-    TQString match = text.lower();
-    if ( match.length() < 1 )
-	return start;
-    TQString curText;
-    int item = start;
-    do {
-	curText = listBox->text( item ).lower();
-	if ( curText.startsWith( match ) )
-	    return item;
-	item++;
-	if ( (uint)item == listBox->count() )
-	    item = 0;
-    } while ( item != start );
-    return -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal --- obsolete!
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::clearInputString()
-{
-    d->currInputString = TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Finds the first list box item that has the text \a text and
-    returns it, or returns 0 of no such item could be found.
-    The search starts from the current item if the current item exists,
-    otherwise it starts from the first list box item.
-    If \c ComparisonFlags are specified in \a compare then these flags
-    are used, otherwise the default is a case-insensitive, "begins
-    with" search.
-
-    \sa TQt::StringComparisonMode
-*/
-
-TQListBoxItem *TQListBox::findItem( const TQString &text, TQt::ComparisonFlags compare ) const
-{
-    if ( text.isEmpty() )
-	return 0;
-
-    if ( compare == TQt::CaseSensitive || compare == 0 )
-	compare |= TQt::ExactMatch;
-
-    TQString itmtxt;
-    TQString comtxt = text;
-    if ( ! (compare & TQt::CaseSensitive ) )
-	comtxt = text.lower();
-
-    TQListBoxItem *item;
-    if ( d->current )
-	item = d->current;
-    else
-	item = d->head;
-
-    TQListBoxItem *beginsWithItem = 0;
-    TQListBoxItem *endsWithItem = 0;
-    TQListBoxItem *containsItem = 0;
-
-    if ( item ) {
-	for ( ; item; item = item->n ) {
-	    if ( ! (compare & TQt::CaseSensitive) )
-		itmtxt = item->text().lower();
-	    else
-		itmtxt = item->text();
-
-	    if ( compare & TQt::ExactMatch && itmtxt == comtxt )
-		return item;
-	    if ( compare & TQt::BeginsWith && !beginsWithItem && itmtxt.startsWith( comtxt ) )
-		beginsWithItem = containsItem = item;
-	    if ( compare & TQt::EndsWith && !endsWithItem && itmtxt.endsWith( comtxt ) )
-		endsWithItem = containsItem = item;
-	    if ( compare & TQt::Contains && !containsItem && itmtxt.contains( comtxt ) )
-		containsItem = item;
-	}
-
-	if ( d->current && d->head ) {
-	    item = d->head;
-	    for ( ; item && item != d->current; item = item->n ) {
-		if ( ! (compare & TQt::CaseSensitive) )
-		    itmtxt = item->text().lower();
-		else
-		    itmtxt = item->text();
-
-		if ( compare & TQt::ExactMatch && itmtxt == comtxt )
-		    return item;
-		if ( compare & TQt::BeginsWith && !beginsWithItem && itmtxt.startsWith( comtxt ) )
-		    beginsWithItem = containsItem = item;
-		if ( compare & TQt::EndsWith && !endsWithItem && itmtxt.endsWith( comtxt ) )
-		    endsWithItem = containsItem = item;
-		if ( compare & TQt::Contains && !containsItem && itmtxt.contains( comtxt ) )
-		    containsItem = item;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    // Obey the priorities
-    if ( beginsWithItem )
-	return beginsWithItem;
-    else if ( endsWithItem )
-	return endsWithItem;
-    else if ( containsItem )
-	return containsItem;
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::drawRubber()
-{
-    if ( !d->rubber )
-	return;
-    if ( !d->rubber->width() && !d->rubber->height() )
-	return;
-    TQPainter p( viewport() );
-    p.setRasterOp( TQt::NotROP );
-    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_RubberBand, &p, d->rubber->normalize(),
-			   tqcolorGroup() );
-    p.end();
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::doRubberSelection( const TQRect &old, const TQRect &rubber )
-{
-    TQListBoxItem *i = d->head;
-    TQRect ir, pr;
-    bool changed = FALSE;
-    for ( ; i; i = i->n ) {
-	ir = tqitemRect( i );
-	if ( ir == TQRect( 0, 0, -1, -1 ) )
-	    continue;
-	if ( i->isSelected() && !ir.intersects( rubber ) && ir.intersects( old ) ) {
-	    i->s = FALSE;
-	    pr = pr.unite( ir );
-	    changed = TRUE;
-	} else if ( !i->isSelected() && ir.intersects( rubber ) ) {
-	    if ( i->isSelectable() ) {
-		i->s = TRUE;
-		pr = pr.unite( ir );
-		changed = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    if ( changed ) {
-	emit selectionChanged();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::Selection );
-#endif
-    }
-    viewport()->tqrepaint( pr, TRUE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the user is selecting items using a rubber band
-    rectangle; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQListBox::isRubberSelecting() const
-{
-    return d->rubber != 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the item that comes after this in the list box. If this is
-    the last item, 0 is returned.
-
-    \sa prev()
-*/
-
-TQListBoxItem *TQListBoxItem::next() const
-{
-    return n;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the item which comes before this in the list box. If this
-    is the first item, 0 is returned.
-
-    \sa next()
-*/
-
-TQListBoxItem *TQListBoxItem::prev() const
-{
-    return p;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the first item in this list box. If the list box is empty,
-    returns 0.
-*/
-
-TQListBoxItem *TQListBox::firstItem() const
-{
-    return d->head;
-}
-
-#if defined(TQ_C_CALLBACKS)
-extern "C" {
-#endif
-
-#ifdef TQ_OS_TEMP
-static int _cdecl cmpListBoxItems( const void *n1, const void *n2 )
-#else
-static int cmpListBoxItems( const void *n1, const void *n2 )
-#endif
-{
-    if ( !n1 || !n2 )
-	return 0;
-
-    TQListBoxPrivate::SortableItem *i1 = (TQListBoxPrivate::SortableItem *)n1;
-    TQListBoxPrivate::SortableItem *i2 = (TQListBoxPrivate::SortableItem *)n2;
-
-    return i1->item->text().localeAwareCompare( i2->item->text() );
-}
-
-#if defined(TQ_C_CALLBACKS)
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    If \a ascending is TRUE sorts the items in ascending order;
-    otherwise sorts in descending order.
-
-    To compare the items, the text (TQListBoxItem::text()) of the items
-    is used.
-*/
-
-void TQListBox::sort( bool ascending )
-{
-    if ( count() == 0 )
-	return;
-
-    d->cache = 0;
-
-    TQListBoxPrivate::SortableItem *items = new TQListBoxPrivate::SortableItem[ count() ];
-
-    TQListBoxItem *item = d->head;
-    int i = 0;
-    for ( ; item; item = item->n )
-	items[ i++ ].item = item;
-
-    qsort( items, count(), sizeof( TQListBoxPrivate::SortableItem ), cmpListBoxItems );
-
-    TQListBoxItem *prev = 0;
-    item = 0;
-    if ( ascending ) {
-	for ( i = 0; i < (int)count(); ++i ) {
-	    item = items[ i ].item;
-	    if ( item ) {
-		item->p = prev;
-		item->dirty = TRUE;
-		if ( item->p )
-		    item->p->n = item;
-		item->n = 0;
-	    }
-	    if ( i == 0 )
-		d->head = item;
-	    prev = item;
-	}
-    } else {
-	for ( i = (int)count() - 1; i >= 0 ; --i ) {
-	    item = items[ i ].item;
-	    if ( item ) {
-		item->p = prev;
-		item->dirty = TRUE;
-		if ( item->p )
-		    item->p->n = item;
-		item->n = 0;
-	    }
-	    if ( i == (int)count() - 1 )
-		d->head = item;
-	    prev = item;
-	}
-    }
-    d->last = item;
-
-    delete [] items;
-
-    // We have to update explicitly in case the current "vieport" overlaps the
-    // new viewport we set (starting at (0,0)).
-    bool haveToUpdate = contentsX() < visibleWidth() || contentsY() < visibleHeight();
-    setContentsPos( 0, 0 );
-    if ( haveToUpdate )
-	updateContents( 0, 0, visibleWidth(), visibleHeight() );
-}
-
-void TQListBox::handleItemChange( TQListBoxItem *old, bool shift, bool control )
-{
-    if ( d->selectionMode == Single ) {
-	// nothing
-    } else if ( d->selectionMode == Extended ) {
-	if ( shift ) {
-	    selectRange( d->selectAnchor ? d->selectAnchor : old,
-			 d->current, FALSE, TRUE, (d->selectAnchor && !control) ? TRUE : FALSE );
-	} else if ( !control ) {
-	    bool block = tqsignalsBlocked();
-	    blockSignals( TRUE );
-	    selectAll( FALSE );
-	    blockSignals( block );
-	    setSelected( d->current, TRUE );
-	}
-    } else if ( d->selectionMode == Multi ) {
-	if ( shift )
-	    selectRange( old, d->current, TRUE, FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQListBox::selectRange( TQListBoxItem *from, TQListBoxItem *to, bool invert, bool includeFirst, bool clearSel )
-{
-    if ( !from || !to )
-	return;
-    if ( from == to && !includeFirst )
-	return;
-    TQListBoxItem *i = 0;
-    int index =0;
-    int f_idx = -1, t_idx = -1;
-    for ( i = d->head; i; i = i->n, index++ ) {
-	if ( i == from )
-	    f_idx = index;
-	if ( i == to )
-	    t_idx = index;
-	if ( f_idx != -1 && t_idx != -1 )
-	    break;
-    }
-    if ( f_idx > t_idx ) {
-	i = from;
-	from = to;
-	to = i;
-	if ( !includeFirst )
-	    to = to->prev();
-    } else {
-	if ( !includeFirst )
-	    from = from->next();
-    }
-
-    bool changed = FALSE;
-    if ( clearSel ) {
-	for ( i = d->head; i && i != from; i = i->n ) {
-	    if ( i->s ) {
-		i->s = FALSE;
-		changed = TRUE;
-		updateItem( i );
-	    }
-	}
-	for ( i = to->n; i; i = i->n ) {
-	    if ( i->s ) {
-		i->s = FALSE;
-		changed = TRUE;
-		updateItem( i );
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    for ( i = from; i; i = i->next() ) {
-	if ( !invert ) {
-	    if ( !i->s && i->isSelectable() ) {
-		i->s = TRUE;
-		changed = TRUE;
-		updateItem( i );
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    bool sel = !i->s;
-	    if ( ((bool)i->s != sel && sel && i->isSelectable()) || !sel ) {
-		i->s = sel;
-		changed = TRUE;
-		updateItem( i );
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( i == to )
-	    break;
-    }
-    if ( changed ) {
-	emit selectionChanged();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::Selection );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQListBox::windowActivationChange( bool oldActive )
-{
-    if ( oldActive && d->scrollTimer )
-	d->scrollTimer->stop();
-    if ( tqpalette().active() != tqpalette().inactive() )
-	viewport()->update();
-    TQScrollView::windowActivationChange( oldActive );
-}
-
-int TQListBoxItem::RTTI = 0;
-
-/*!
-    Returns 0.
-
-    Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), and
-    you can distinguish between listbox items. You should use values
-    greater than 1000 preferably a large random number, to allow for
-    extensions to this class.
-*/
-
-int TQListBoxItem::rtti() const
-{
-    return RTTI;
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_LISTBOX
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 0a5763b..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistbox.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,436 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQListBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 941121
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQLISTBOX_H
-#define TQLISTBOX_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqscrollview.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LISTBOX
-
-
-class TQListBoxPrivate;
-class TQListBoxItem;
-class TQString;
-class TQStrList;
-class TQStringList;
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQListBox : public TQScrollView
-{
-    friend class TQListBoxItem;
-    friend class TQListBoxPrivate;
-
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( SelectionMode LayoutMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( uint count READ count )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int numItemsVisible READ numItemsVisible )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int currentItem READ currentItem WRITE setCurrentItem )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString currentText READ currentText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int topItem READ topItem WRITE setTopItem DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( SelectionMode selectionMode READ selectionMode WRITE setSelectionMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool multiSelection READ isMultiSelection WRITE setMultiSelection DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( LayoutMode columnMode READ columnMode WRITE setColumnMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( LayoutMode rowMode READ rowMode WRITE setRowMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int numColumns READ numColumns )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int numRows READ numRows )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool variableWidth READ variableWidth WRITE setVariableWidth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool variableHeight READ variableHeight WRITE setVariableHeight )
-
-public:
-    TQListBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0  );
-    ~TQListBox();
-
-    virtual void setFont( const TQFont & );
-
-    uint count() const;
-
-    void insertStringList( const TQStringList&, int index=-1 );
-    void insertStrList( const TQStrList *, int index=-1 );
-    void insertStrList( const TQStrList &, int index=-1 );
-    void insertStrList( const char **,
-			int numStrings=-1, int index=-1 );
-
-    void insertItem( const TQListBoxItem *, int index=-1 );
-    void insertItem( const TQListBoxItem *, const TQListBoxItem *after );
-    void insertItem( const TQString &text, int index=-1 );
-    void insertItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int index=-1 );
-    void insertItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, const TQString &text, int index=-1 );
-
-    void removeItem( int index );
-
-    TQString text( int index )	const;
-    const TQPixmap *pixmap( int index )	const;
-
-    void changeItem( const TQListBoxItem *, int index );
-    void changeItem( const TQString &text, int index );
-    void changeItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int index );
-    void changeItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, const TQString &text, int index );
-
-    void takeItem( const TQListBoxItem * );
-
-    int numItemsVisible() const;
-
-    int currentItem() const;
-    TQString currentText() const { return text(currentItem()); }
-    virtual void setCurrentItem( int index );
-    virtual void setCurrentItem( TQListBoxItem * );
-    void centerCurrentItem() { ensureCurrentVisible(); }
-    int topItem() const;
-    virtual void setTopItem( int index );
-    virtual void setBottomItem( int index );
-
-    long maxItemWidth() const;
-
-    enum SelectionMode { Single, Multi, Extended, NoSelection };
-    virtual void setSelectionMode( SelectionMode );
-    SelectionMode selectionMode() const;
-
-    void setMultiSelection( bool multi );
-    bool isMultiSelection() const;
-
-    virtual void setSelected( TQListBoxItem *, bool );
-    void setSelected( int, bool );
-    bool isSelected( int ) const;
-    bool isSelected( const TQListBoxItem * ) const;
-    TQListBoxItem* selectedItem() const;
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize	tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    TQListBoxItem *item( int index ) const;
-    int index( const TQListBoxItem * ) const;
-    TQListBoxItem *findItem( const TQString &text, TQt::ComparisonFlags compare = TQt::BeginsWith ) const;
-
-    void triggerUpdate( bool doLayout );
-
-    bool itemVisible( int index );
-    bool itemVisible( const TQListBoxItem * );
-
-    enum LayoutMode { FixedNumber,
-		      FitToWidth, FitToHeight = FitToWidth,
-		      Variable };
-    virtual void setColumnMode( LayoutMode );
-    virtual void setColumnMode( int );
-    virtual void setRowMode( LayoutMode );
-    virtual void setRowMode( int );
-
-    LayoutMode columnMode() const;
-    LayoutMode rowMode() const;
-
-    int numColumns() const;
-    int numRows() const;
-
-    bool variableWidth() const;
-    virtual void setVariableWidth( bool );
-
-    bool variableHeight() const;
-    virtual void setVariableHeight( bool );
-
-    void viewportPaintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    bool dragSelect() const { return TRUE; }
-    void setDragSelect( bool ) {}
-    bool autoScroll() const { return TRUE; }
-    void setAutoScroll( bool ) {}
-    bool autoScrollBar() const { return vScrollBarMode() == Auto; }
-    void setAutoScrollBar( bool enable ) { setVScrollBarMode( enable ? Auto : AlwaysOff ); }
-    bool scrollBar() const { return vScrollBarMode() != AlwaysOff; }
-    void setScrollBar( bool enable ) { setVScrollBarMode( enable ? AlwaysOn : AlwaysOff ); }
-    bool autoBottomScrollBar() const { return hScrollBarMode() == Auto; }
-    void setAutoBottomScrollBar( bool enable ) { setHScrollBarMode( enable ? Auto : AlwaysOff ); }
-    bool bottomScrollBar() const { return hScrollBarMode() != AlwaysOff; }
-    void setBottomScrollBar( bool enable ) { setHScrollBarMode( enable ? AlwaysOn : AlwaysOff ); }
-    bool smoothScrolling() const { return FALSE; }
-    void setSmoothScrolling( bool ) {}
-    bool autoUpdate() const { return TRUE; }
-    void setAutoUpdate( bool ) {}
-    void setFixedVisibleLines( int lines ) { setRowMode( lines ); }
-    int inSort( const TQListBoxItem * );
-    int inSort( const TQString& text );
-    int cellHeight( int i ) const { return itemHeight(i); }
-    int cellHeight() const { return itemHeight(); }
-    int cellWidth() const { return maxItemWidth(); }
-    int cellWidth(int i) const { TQ_ASSERT(i==0); TQ_UNUSED(i) return maxItemWidth(); }
-    int	numCols() const { return numColumns(); }
-#endif
-
-    int itemHeight( int index = 0 ) const;
-    TQListBoxItem * itemAt( const TQPoint & ) const;
-
-    TQRect tqitemRect( TQListBoxItem *item ) const;
-
-    TQListBoxItem *firstItem() const;
-
-    void sort( bool ascending = TRUE );
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void clear();
-    virtual void ensureCurrentVisible();
-    virtual void clearSelection();
-    virtual void selectAll( bool select );
-    virtual void invertSelection();
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void highlighted( int index );
-    void selected( int index );
-    void highlighted( const TQString &);
-    void selected( const TQString &);
-    void highlighted( TQListBoxItem * );
-    void selected( TQListBoxItem * );
-
-    void selectionChanged();
-    void selectionChanged( TQListBoxItem * );
-    void currentChanged( TQListBoxItem * );
-    void clicked( TQListBoxItem * );
-    void clicked( TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint & );
-    void pressed( TQListBoxItem * );
-    void pressed( TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint & );
-
-    void doubleClicked( TQListBoxItem * );
-    void returnPressed( TQListBoxItem * );
-    void rightButtonClicked( TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint & );
-    void rightButtonPressed( TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint & );
-    void mouseButtonPressed( int, TQListBoxItem*, const TQPoint& );
-    void mouseButtonClicked( int, TQListBoxItem*, const TQPoint& );
-
-    void contextMenuRequested( TQListBoxItem *, const TQPoint & );
-
-    void onItem( TQListBoxItem *item );
-    void onViewport();
-
-protected:
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void contentsContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * );
-
-    void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-    void focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent *e );
-    void focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent *e );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void showEvent( TQShowEvent * );
-
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e );
-
-    void updateItem( int index );
-    void updateItem( TQListBoxItem * );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    void updateCellWidth() { }
-    int totalWidth() const { return contentsWidth(); }
-    int totalHeight() const { return contentsHeight(); }
-#endif
-
-    virtual void paintCell( TQPainter *, int row, int col );
-
-    void toggleCurrentItem();
-    bool isRubberSelecting() const;
-
-    void doLayout() const;
-
-    void windowActivationChange( bool );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    bool itemYPos( int index, int *yPos ) const;
-    int findItem( int yPos ) const { return index(itemAt(TQPoint(0,yPos)) ); }
-#endif
-
-protected Q_SLOTS:
-    void clearInputString();
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void refreshSlot();
-    void doAutoScroll();
-    void adjustItems();
-
-private:
-    void mousePressEventEx( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void tryGeometry( int, int ) const;
-    int currentRow() const;
-    int currentColumn() const;
-    void updateSelection();
-    void repaintSelection();
-    void drawRubber();
-    void doRubberSelection( const TQRect &old, const TQRect &rubber );
-    void handleItemChange( TQListBoxItem *old, bool shift, bool control );
-    void selectRange( TQListBoxItem *from, TQListBoxItem *to, bool invert, bool includeFirst, bool clearSel = FALSE );
-
-    void emitChangedSignal( bool );
-
-    int columnAt( int ) const;
-    int rowAt( int ) const;
-
-    TQListBoxPrivate * d;
-
-    static TQListBox * changedListBox;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQListBox( const TQListBox & );
-    TQListBox &operator=( const TQListBox & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQListBoxItem
-{
-public:
-    TQListBoxItem( TQListBox* listbox = 0 );
-    TQListBoxItem( TQListBox* listbox, TQListBoxItem *after );
-    virtual ~TQListBoxItem();
-
-    virtual TQString text() const;
-    virtual const TQPixmap *pixmap() const;
-
-    virtual int	 height( const TQListBox * ) const;
-    virtual int	 width( const TQListBox * )  const;
-
-    bool isSelected() const { return s; }
-    bool isCurrent() const;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    bool selected() const { return isSelected(); }
-    bool current() const { return isCurrent(); }
-#endif
-
-    TQListBox *listBox() const;
-
-    void setSelectable( bool b );
-    bool isSelectable() const;
-
-    TQListBoxItem *next() const;
-    TQListBoxItem *prev() const;
-
-    virtual int rtti() const;
-    static int RTTI;
-
-protected:
-    virtual void paint( TQPainter * ) = 0;
-    virtual void setText( const TQString &text ) { txt = text; }
-    void setCustomHighlighting( bool );
-
-private:
-    TQString txt;
-    uint s:1;
-    uint dirty:1;
-    uint custom_highlight : 1;
-    int x, y;
-    TQListBoxItem * p, * n;
-    TQListBox* lbox;
-    friend class TQListBox;
-    friend class TQListBoxPrivate;
-    friend class TQComboBox;
-    friend class TQComboBoxPopupItem;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQListBoxItem( const TQListBoxItem & );
-    TQListBoxItem &operator=( const TQListBoxItem & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQListBoxText : public TQListBoxItem
-{
-public:
-    TQListBoxText( TQListBox* listbox, const TQString & text=TQString::null );
-    TQListBoxText( const TQString & text=TQString::null );
-    TQListBoxText( TQListBox* listbox, const TQString & text, TQListBoxItem *after );
-   ~TQListBoxText();
-
-    int	 height( const TQListBox * ) const;
-    int	 width( const TQListBox * )  const;
-
-    int rtti() const;
-    static int RTTI;
-
-protected:
-    void  paint( TQPainter * );
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQListBoxText( const TQListBoxText & );
-    TQListBoxText &operator=( const TQListBoxText & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQListBoxPixmap : public TQListBoxItem
-{
-public:
-    TQListBoxPixmap( TQListBox* listbox, const TQPixmap & );
-    TQListBoxPixmap( const TQPixmap & );
-    TQListBoxPixmap( TQListBox* listbox, const TQPixmap & pix, TQListBoxItem *after );
-    TQListBoxPixmap( TQListBox* listbox, const TQPixmap &, const TQString& );
-    TQListBoxPixmap( const TQPixmap &, const TQString& );
-    TQListBoxPixmap( TQListBox* listbox, const TQPixmap & pix, const TQString&, TQListBoxItem *after );
-   ~TQListBoxPixmap();
-
-    const TQPixmap *pixmap() const { return &pm; }
-
-    int	 height( const TQListBox * ) const;
-    int	 width( const TQListBox * )  const;
-
-    int rtti() const;
-    static int RTTI;
-
-protected:
-    void paint( TQPainter * );
-
-private:
-    TQPixmap pm;
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQListBoxPixmap( const TQListBoxPixmap & );
-    TQListBoxPixmap &operator=( const TQListBoxPixmap & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_LISTBOX
-
-#endif // TQLISTBOX_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b032b0..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8195 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQListView widget class
-**
-** Created : 970809
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqlistview.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LISTVIEW
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqheader.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqptrstack.h"
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#include "tqstrlist.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqdatetime.h"
-#include "tqptrdict.h"
-#include "tqptrvector.h"
-#include "tqiconset.h"
-#include "tqcleanuphandler.h"
-#include "tqpixmapcache.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqtl.h"
-#include "tqdragobject.h"
-#include "tqlineedit.h"
-#include "tqvbox.h"
-#include "tqtooltip.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqstylesheet.h"
-#include "../kernel/tqinternal_p.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-const int Unsorted = 16383;
-
-static TQCleanupHandler<TQBitmap> qlv_cleanup_bitmap;
-
-struct TQListViewItemIteratorPrivate
-{
-    TQListViewItemIteratorPrivate( uint f ) : flags( f )
-	{
-	    // nothing yet
-	}
-
-    uint flags;
-};
-
-static TQPtrDict<TQListViewItemIteratorPrivate> *qt_iteratorprivate_dict = 0;
-
-struct TQListViewPrivate
-{
-    // classes that are here to avoid polluting the global name space
-
-    // the magical hidden mother of all items
-    class Root: public TQListViewItem {
-    public:
-	Root( TQListView * parent );
-
-	void setHeight( int );
-	void invalidateHeight();
-	void setup();
-	TQListView * theListView() const;
-
-	TQListView * lv;
-    };
-
-    // for the stack used in drawContentsOffset()
-    class Pending {
-    public:
-	Pending( int level, int ypos, TQListViewItem * item)
-	    : l(level), y(ypos), i(item) {};
-
-	int l; // level of this item; root is -1 or 0
-	int y; // level of this item in the tree
-	TQListViewItem * i; // the item itself
-    };
-
-    // to remember what's on screen
-    class DrawableItem {
-    public:
-	DrawableItem( Pending * pi ) { y = pi->y; l = pi->l; i = pi->i; };
-	int y;
-	int l;
-	TQListViewItem * i;
-    };
-
-    // for sorting
-    class SortableItem {
-    public:
-	/*
-	  We could be smarter and keep a pointer to the TQListView
-	  item instead of numCols, col and asc. This would then allow
-	  us to use the physical ordering of columns rather than the
-	  logical. Microsoft uses the logical ordering, so there is
-	  some virtue in doing so, although it prevents the user from
-	  chosing the secondary key.
-	*/
-	TQListViewItem * item;
-	int numCols;
-	int col;
-	bool asc;
-
-	int cmp( const SortableItem& i ) const {
-	    int diff = item->compare( i.item, col, asc );
-	    if ( diff == 0 && numCols != 1 ) {
-		for ( int j = 0; j < numCols; j++ ) {
-		    if ( j != col ) {
-			diff = item->compare( i.item, j, asc );
-			if ( diff != 0 )
-			    break;
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-	    return diff;
-	}
-	bool operator<( const SortableItem& i ) const { return cmp( i ) < 0; }
-	bool operator<=( const SortableItem& i ) const { return cmp( i ) <= 0; }
-	bool operator>( const SortableItem& i ) const { return cmp( i ) > 0; }
-    };
-
-    class ItemColumnInfo {
-    public:
-	ItemColumnInfo(): pm( 0 ), next( 0 ), truncated( FALSE ), dirty( FALSE ), allow_rename( FALSE ), width( 0 ) {}
-	~ItemColumnInfo() { delete pm; delete next; }
-	TQString text, tmpText;
-	TQPixmap * pm;
-	ItemColumnInfo * next;
-	uint truncated : 1;
-	uint dirty : 1;
-	uint allow_rename : 1;
-	int width;
-    };
-
-    class ViewColumnInfo {
-    public:
-	ViewColumnInfo(): align(TQt::AlignAuto), sortable(TRUE), next( 0 ) {}
-	~ViewColumnInfo() { delete next; }
-	int align;
-	bool sortable;
-	ViewColumnInfo * next;
-    };
-
-    // private variables used in TQListView
-    ViewColumnInfo * vci;
-    TQHeader * h;
-    Root * r;
-    uint rootIsExpandable : 1;
-    int margin;
-
-    TQListViewItem * focusItem, *highlighted, *oldFocusItem;
-
-    TQTimer * timer;
-    TQTimer * dirtyItemTimer;
-    TQTimer * visibleTimer;
-    int levelWidth;
-
-    // the list of drawables, and the range drawables covers entirely
-    // (it may also include a few items above topPixel)
-    TQPtrList<DrawableItem> * drawables;
-    int topPixel;
-    int bottomPixel;
-
-    TQPtrDict<void> * dirtyItems;
-
-    TQListView::SelectionMode selectionMode;
-
-    // Per-column structure for information not in the TQHeader
-    struct Column {
-	TQListView::WidthMode wmode;
-    };
-    TQPtrVector<Column> column;
-
-    // suggested height for the items
-    int fontMetricsHeight;
-    int minLeftBearing, minRightBearing;
-    int ellipsisWidth;
-
-    // currently typed prefix for the keyboard interface, and the time
-    // of the last key-press
-    TQString currentPrefix;
-    TQTime currentPrefixTime;
-
-    // holds a list of iterators
-    TQPtrList<TQListViewItemIterator> *iterators;
-    TQListViewItem *pressedItem, *selectAnchor;
-
-    TQTimer *scrollTimer;
-    TQTimer *renameTimer;
-    TQTimer *autoopenTimer;
-
-    // sort column and order   #### may need to move to TQHeader [subclass]
-    int sortcolumn;
-    bool ascending		:1;
-    bool sortIndicator		:1;
-    // whether to select or deselect during this mouse press.
-    bool allColumnsShowFocus	:1;
-    bool select			:1;
-
-    // TRUE if the widget should take notice of mouseReleaseEvent
-    bool buttonDown		:1;
-    // TRUE if the widget should ignore a double-click
-    bool ignoreDoubleClick	:1;
-
-    bool clearing		:1;
-    bool pressedSelected	:1;
-    bool pressedEmptyArea 	:1;
-
-    bool useDoubleBuffer	:1;
-    bool toolTips		:1;
-    bool fullRepaintOnComlumnChange:1;
-    bool updateHeader		:1;
-
-    bool startEdit : 1;
-    bool ignoreEditAfterFocus : 1;
-    bool inMenuMode :1;
-
-    TQListView::RenameAction defRenameAction;
-
-    TQListViewItem *startDragItem;
-    TQPoint dragStartPos;
-    TQListViewToolTip *toolTip;
-    int pressedColumn;
-    TQListView::ResizeMode resizeMode;
-};
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-class TQListViewToolTip : public TQToolTip
-{
-public:
-    TQListViewToolTip( TQWidget *parent, TQListView *lv );
-
-    void maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos );
-
-private:
-    TQListView *view;
-
-};
-
-TQListViewToolTip::TQListViewToolTip( TQWidget *parent, TQListView *lv )
-    : TQToolTip( parent ), view( lv )
-{
-}
-
-void TQListViewToolTip::maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos )
-{
-    if ( !parentWidget() || !view || !view->showToolTips() )
-	return;
-
-    TQListViewItem *item = view->itemAt( pos );
-    TQPoint contentsPos = view->viewportToContents( pos );
-    if ( !item || !item->columns )
-	return;
-    int col = view->header()->sectionAt( contentsPos.x() );
-    TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo *ci = (TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo*)item->columns;
-    for ( int i = 0; ci && ( i < col ); ++i )
-	ci = ci->next;
-
-    if ( !ci || !ci->truncated )
-	return;
-
-    TQRect r = view->tqitemRect( item );
-    int headerPos = view->header()->sectionPos( col );
-    r.setLeft( headerPos );
-    r.setRight( headerPos + view->header()->sectionSize( col ) );
-    tip( r, TQStyleSheet::escape(item->text( col ) ) );
-}
-#endif
-
-// these should probably be in TQListViewPrivate, for future thread safety
-static bool activatedByClick;
-
-// Holds the position of activation. The position is relative to the top left corner in the row minus the root decoration and its branches/depth.
-// Used to track the point clicked for CheckBoxes and RadioButtons.
-static TQPoint activatedP;
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-static int indexOfItem( TQListViewItem *item )
-{
-    if ( !TQAccessible::isActive() )
-	return 0;
-
-    static TQListViewItem *lastItem = 0;
-    static int lastIndex = 0;
-
-    if ( !item || !item->listView() )
-	return 0;
-
-    if ( item == lastItem )
-	return lastIndex;
-
-    lastItem = item;
-    int index = 1;
-
-    TQListViewItemIterator it( item->listView() );
-    while ( it.current() ) {
-	if ( it.current() == item ) {
-	    lastIndex = index;
-	    return index;
-	}
-	++it;
-	++index;
-    }
-    lastIndex = 0;
-    return 0;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Creates a string with ... like "Trollte..." or "...olltech" depending on the tqalignment
-*/
-
-static TQString qEllipsisText( const TQString &org, const TQFontMetrics &fm, int width, int align )
-{
-    int ellWidth = fm.width( "..." );
-    TQString text = TQString::tqfromLatin1("");
-    int i = 0;
-    int len = org.length();
-    int offset = (align & TQt::AlignRight) ? (len-1) - i : i;
-    while ( i < len && fm.width( text + org[ offset ] ) + ellWidth < width ) {
-	if ( align & TQt::AlignRight )
-	    text.prepend( org[ offset ] );
-	else
-	    text += org[ offset ];
-	offset = (align & TQt::AlignRight) ? (len-1) - ++i : ++i;
-    }
-    if ( text.isEmpty() )
-	text = ( align & TQt::AlignRight ) ? org.right( 1 ) : text = org.left( 1 );
-    if ( align & TQt::AlignRight )
-	text.prepend( "..." );
-    else
-	text += "...";
-    return text;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQListViewItem
-    \brief The TQListViewItem class implements a list view item.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-
-    A list view item is a multi-column object capable of displaying
-    itself in a TQListView.
-
-    The easiest way to use TQListViewItem is to construct one with a
-    few constant strings, and either a TQListView or another
-    TQListViewItem as parent.
-    \code
-	(void) new TQListViewItem( listView, "Column 1", "Column 2" );
-	(void) new TQListViewItem( listView->firstChild(), "A", "B", "C" );
-    \endcode
-    We've discarded the pointers to the items since we can still access
-    them via their parent \e listView. By default, TQListView sorts its
-    items; this can be switched off with TQListView::setSorting(-1).
-
-    The parent must be another TQListViewItem or a TQListView. If the
-    parent is a TQListView, the item becomes a top-level item within
-    that TQListView. If the parent is another TQListViewItem, the item
-    becomes a child of that list view item.
-
-    If you keep the pointer, you can set or change the texts using
-    setText(), add pixmaps using setPixmap(), change its mode using
-    setSelectable(), setSelected(), setOpen() and setExpandable().
-    You'll also be able to change its height using setHeight(), and
-    traverse its sub-items. You don't have to keep the pointer since
-    you can get a pointer to any TQListViewItem in a TQListView using
-    TQListView::selectedItem(), TQListView::currentItem(),
-    TQListView::firstChild(), TQListView::lastItem() and
-    TQListView::findItem().
-
-    If you call \c delete on a list view item, it will be deleted as
-    expected, and as usual for \l{TQObject}s, if it has any child items
-    (to any depth), all these will be deleted too.
-
-    \l{TQCheckListItem}s are list view items that have a checkbox or
-    radio button and can be used in place of plain TQListViewItems.
-
-    You can traverse the tree as if it were a doubly-linked list using
-    itemAbove() and itemBelow(); they return pointers to the items
-    directly above and below this item on the screen (even if none of
-    them are actually visible at the moment).
-
-    Here's how to traverse all of an item's tqchildren (but not its
-    tqchildren's tqchildren, etc.):
-    Example:
-    \code
-	TQListViewItem * myChild = myItem->firstChild();
-	while( myChild ) {
-	    doSomething( myChild );
-	    myChild = myChild->nextSibling();
-	}
-    \endcode
-
-    If you want to iterate over every item, to any level of depth use
-    an iterator. To iterate over the entire tree, initialize the
-    iterator with the list view itself; to iterate starting from a
-    particular item, initialize the iterator with the item:
-
-    \code
-	TQListViewItemIterator it( listview );
-	while ( it.current() ) {
-	    TQListViewItem *item = it.current();
-	    doSomething( item );
-	    ++it;
-	}
-    \endcode
-
-    Note that the order of the tqchildren will change when the sorting
-    order changes and is undefined if the items are not visible. You
-    can, however, call enforceSortOrder() at any time; TQListView will
-    always call it before it needs to show an item.
-
-    Many programs will need to reimplement TQListViewItem. The most
-    commonly reimplemented functions are:
-    \table
-    \header \i Function \i Description
-    \row \i \l text()
-	 \i Returns the text in a column. Many subclasses will compute
-	    this on the fly.
-    \row \i \l key()
-	 \i Used for sorting. The default key() simply calls
-	    text(), but judicious use of key() can give you fine
-	    control over sorting; for example, TQFileDialog
-	    reimplements key() to sort by date.
-    \row \i \l setup()
-	 \i Called before showing the item and whenever the list
-	    view's font changes, for example.
-    \row \i \l activate()
-	 \i Called whenever the user clicks on the item or presses
-	    Space when the item is the current item.
-    \endtable
-
-    Some subclasses call setExpandable(TRUE) even when they have no
-    tqchildren, and populate themselves when setup() or setOpen(TRUE) is
-    called. The \c dirview/dirview.cpp example program uses this
-    technique to start up quickly: The files and subdirectories in a
-    directory aren't inserted into the tree until they're actually
-    needed.
-
-    \img qlistviewitems.png List View Items
-
-    \sa TQCheckListItem TQListView
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQCheckListItem::rtti() const
-
-    Returns 1.
-
-    Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), and
-    you can distinguish between list view items. You should use values
-    greater than 1000, to allow for extensions to this class.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new top-level list view item in the TQListView \a
-    parent.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent )
-{
-    init();
-    parent->insertItem( this );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new list view item that is a child of \a parent and
-    first in the parent's list of tqchildren.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent )
-{
-    init();
-    parent->insertItem( this );
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty list view item that is a child of \a parent
-    and is after item \a after in the parent's list of tqchildren. Since
-    \a parent is a TQListView the item will be a top-level item.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after )
-{
-    init();
-    parent->insertItem( this );
-    moveToJustAfter( after );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty list view item that is a child of \a parent
-    and is after item \a after in the parent's list of tqchildren.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after )
-{
-    init();
-    parent->insertItem( this );
-    moveToJustAfter( after );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new top-level list view item in the TQListView \a
-    parent, with up to eight constant strings, \a label1, \a label2, \a
-    label3, \a label4, \a label5, \a label6, \a label7 and \a label8
-    defining its columns' contents.
-
-    \sa setText()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent,
-			      TQString label1,
-			      TQString label2,
-			      TQString label3,
-			      TQString label4,
-			      TQString label5,
-			      TQString label6,
-			      TQString label7,
-			      TQString label8 )
-{
-    init();
-    parent->insertItem( this );
-
-    setText( 0, label1 );
-    setText( 1, label2 );
-    setText( 2, label3 );
-    setText( 3, label4 );
-    setText( 4, label5 );
-    setText( 5, label6 );
-    setText( 6, label7 );
-    setText( 7, label8 );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new list view item as a child of the TQListViewItem \a
-    parent with up to eight constant strings, \a label1, \a label2, \a
-    label3, \a label4, \a label5, \a label6, \a label7 and \a label8
-    as columns' contents.
-
-    \sa setText()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent,
-			      TQString label1,
-			      TQString label2,
-			      TQString label3,
-			      TQString label4,
-			      TQString label5,
-			      TQString label6,
-			      TQString label7,
-			      TQString label8 )
-{
-    init();
-    parent->insertItem( this );
-
-    setText( 0, label1 );
-    setText( 1, label2 );
-    setText( 2, label3 );
-    setText( 3, label4 );
-    setText( 4, label5 );
-    setText( 5, label6 );
-    setText( 6, label7 );
-    setText( 7, label8 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new list view item in the TQListView \a parent that is
-    included after item \a after and that has up to eight column
-    texts, \a label1, \a label2, \a label3, \a label4, \a label5, \a
-    label6, \a label7 and\a label8.
-
-    Note that the order is changed according to TQListViewItem::key()
-    unless the list view's sorting is disabled using
-    TQListView::setSorting(-1).
-
-    \sa setText()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after,
-			      TQString label1,
-			      TQString label2,
-			      TQString label3,
-			      TQString label4,
-			      TQString label5,
-			      TQString label6,
-			      TQString label7,
-			      TQString label8 )
-{
-    init();
-    parent->insertItem( this );
-    moveToJustAfter( after );
-
-    setText( 0, label1 );
-    setText( 1, label2 );
-    setText( 2, label3 );
-    setText( 3, label4 );
-    setText( 4, label5 );
-    setText( 5, label6 );
-    setText( 6, label7 );
-    setText( 7, label8 );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new list view item as a child of the TQListViewItem \a
-    parent. It is inserted after item \a after and may contain up to
-    eight strings, \a label1, \a label2, \a label3, \a label4, \a
-    label5, \a label6, \a label7 and \a label8 as column entries.
-
-    Note that the order is changed according to TQListViewItem::key()
-    unless the list view's sorting is disabled using
-    TQListView::setSorting(-1).
-
-    \sa setText()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem::TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after,
-			      TQString label1,
-			      TQString label2,
-			      TQString label3,
-			      TQString label4,
-			      TQString label5,
-			      TQString label6,
-			      TQString label7,
-			      TQString label8 )
-{
-    init();
-    parent->insertItem( this );
-    moveToJustAfter( after );
-
-    setText( 0, label1 );
-    setText( 1, label2 );
-    setText( 2, label3 );
-    setText( 3, label4 );
-    setText( 4, label5 );
-    setText( 5, label6 );
-    setText( 6, label7 );
-    setText( 7, label8 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sorts all this item's child items using the current sorting
-    configuration (sort column and direction).
-
-    \sa enforceSortOrder()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::sort()
-{
-    if ( !listView() )
-	 return;
-    lsc = Unsorted;
-    enforceSortOrder();
-    listView()->triggerUpdate();
-}
-
-int TQListViewItem::RTTI = 0;
-
-/*!
-    Returns 0.
-
-    Make your derived classes return their own values for rtti(), so
-    that you can distinguish between different kinds of list view
-    items. You should use values greater than 1000 to allow for
-    extensions to this class.
-*/
-
-int TQListViewItem::rtti() const
-{
-    return RTTI;
-}
-
-/*
-    Performs the initializations that's common to the constructors.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::init()
-{
-    ownHeight = 0;
-    maybeTotalHeight = -1;
-    open = FALSE;
-
-    nChildren = 0;
-    parentItem = 0;
-    siblingItem = childItem = 0;
-
-    columns = 0;
-
-    selected = 0;
-
-    lsc = Unsorted;
-    lso = TRUE; // unsorted in ascending order :)
-    configured = FALSE;
-    expandable = FALSE;
-    selectable = TRUE;
-    is_root = FALSE;
-    allow_drag = FALSE;
-    allow_drop = FALSE;
-    visible = TRUE;
-    renameBox = 0;
-    enabled = TRUE;
-    mlenabled = FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a b is TRUE, the item is made visible; otherwise it is hidden.
-
-    If the item is not visible, itemAbove() and itemBelow() will never
-    return this item, although you still can reach it by using e.g.
-    TQListViewItemIterator.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::tqsetVisible( bool b )
-{
-    if ( b == (bool)visible )
-	return;
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( !lv )
-	return;
-    if ( b && parent() && !parent()->isVisible() )
-	return;
-    visible = b;
-    configured = FALSE;
-    setHeight( 0 );
-    invalidateHeight();
-    if ( parent() )
-	parent()->invalidateHeight();
-    else
-	lv->d->r->invalidateHeight();
-    for ( TQListViewItem *i = childItem; i; i = i->siblingItem )
-	i->tqsetVisible( b );
-    if ( lv )
-	lv->triggerUpdate();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the item is visible; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa tqsetVisible()
-*/
-
-bool TQListViewItem::isVisible() const
-{
-    return (bool)visible;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a b is TRUE, this item can be in-place renamed in the column
-    \a col by the user; otherwise it cannot be renamed in-place.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setRenameEnabled( int col, bool b )
-{
-    TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo * l = (TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo*)columns;
-    if ( !l ) {
-	l = new TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo;
-	columns = (void*)l;
-    }
-    for( int c = 0; c < col; c++ ) {
-	if ( !l->next )
-	    l->next = new TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo;
-	l = l->next;
-    }
-
-    if ( !l )
-	return;
-    l->allow_rename = b;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if this item can be in-place renamed in column \a
-    col; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQListViewItem::renameEnabled( int col ) const
-{
-    TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo * l = (TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo*)columns;
-    if ( !l )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    while( col && l ) {
-	l = l->next;
-	col--;
-    }
-
-    if ( !l )
-	return FALSE;
-    return (bool)l->allow_rename;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a b is TRUE the item is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.
-    Disabled items are drawn differently (e.g. grayed-out) and are not
-    accessible by the user.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setEnabled( bool b )
-{
-    if ( (bool)enabled == b )
-	return;
-    enabled = b;
-    if ( !enabled )
-	selected = FALSE;
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv ) {
-	lv->triggerUpdate();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( lv->viewport(), indexOfItem( this ), TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if this item is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQListViewItem::isEnabled() const
-{
-    return (bool)enabled;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If in-place renaming of this item is enabled (see
-    renameEnabled()), this function starts renaming the item in column
-    \a col, by creating and initializing an edit box.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::startRename( int col )
-{
-    if ( !renameEnabled( col ) )
-	return;
-    if ( renameBox )
-	cancelRename( col );
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( !lv )
-	return;
-
-    if ( lv->d->renameTimer )
-	lv->d->renameTimer->stop();
-
-    lv->ensureItemVisible( this );
-
-    if ( lv->d->timer->isActive() ) {
-	// make sure that pending calculations get finished
-	lv->d->timer->stop();
-	lv->updateContents();
-    }
-
-    if ( lv->currentItem() && lv->currentItem()->renameBox ) {
-	if ( lv->d->defRenameAction == TQListView::Reject )
-	    lv->currentItem()->cancelRename( lv->currentItem()->renameCol );
-	else
-	    lv->currentItem()->okRename( lv->currentItem()->renameCol );
-    }
-
-    if ( this != lv->currentItem() )
-	lv->setCurrentItem( this );
-
-    TQRect r = lv->tqitemRect( this );
-    r = TQRect( lv->viewportToContents( r.topLeft() ), r.size() );
-    r.setLeft( lv->header()->sectionPos( col ) );
-    r.setWidth(TQMIN(lv->header()->sectionSize(col) - 1,
-                    lv->contentsX() + lv->visibleWidth() - r.left()));
-    if ( col == 0 )
-	r.setLeft( r.left() + lv->itemMargin() + ( depth() + ( lv->rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0 ) ) * lv->treeStepSize() - 1 );
-    if ( pixmap( col ) )
-	r.setLeft( r.left() + pixmap( col )->width() );
-    if ( r.x() - lv->contentsX() < 0 ) {
-	lv->scrollBy( r.x() - lv->contentsX(), 0 );
-	r.setX( lv->contentsX() );
-    } else if ( ( lv->contentsX() + lv->visibleWidth() ) < ( r.x() + r.width() ) ) {
-	lv->scrollBy( ( r.x() + r.width() ) - ( lv->contentsX() + lv->visibleWidth() ), 0 );
-    }
-    if ( r.width() > lv->visibleWidth() )
-	r.setWidth( lv->visibleWidth() );
-    renameBox = new TQLineEdit( lv->viewport(), "qt_renamebox" );
-    renameBox->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Box | TQFrame::Plain );
-    renameBox->setLineWidth( 1 );
-    renameBox->setText( text( col ) );
-    renameBox->selectAll();
-    renameBox->installEventFilter( lv );
-    lv->addChild( renameBox, r.x(), r.y() );
-    renameBox->resize( r.size() );
-    lv->viewport()->setFocusProxy( renameBox );
-    renameBox->setFocus();
-    renameBox->show();
-    renameCol = col;
-}
-
-/*!
-    This function removes the rename box.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::removeRenameBox()
-{
-    // Sanity, it should be checked by the functions calling this first anyway
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( !lv || !renameBox )
-	return;
-    const bool resetFocus = lv->viewport()->focusProxy() == renameBox;
-    const bool renameBoxHadFocus = renameBox->hasFocus();
-    delete renameBox;
-    renameBox = 0;
-    if ( resetFocus )
-	lv->viewport()->setFocusProxy( lv );
-    if (renameBoxHadFocus)
-	lv->setFocus();
-}
-
-/*!
-    This function is called if the user presses Enter during in-place
-    renaming of the item in column \a col.
-
-    \sa cancelRename()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::okRename( int col )
-{
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( !lv || !renameBox )
-	return;
-    setText( col, renameBox->text() );
-    removeRenameBox();
-
-    // we set the parent lsc to Unsorted if that column is the sorted one
-    if ( parent() && (int)parent()->lsc == col )
-	parent()->lsc = Unsorted;
-
-    emit lv->itemRenamed( this, col );
-    emit lv->itemRenamed( this, col, text( col ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    This function is called if the user cancels in-place renaming of
-    this item in column \a col (e.g. by pressing Esc).
-
-    \sa okRename()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::cancelRename( int )
-{
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( !lv || !renameBox )
-	return;
-    removeRenameBox();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the item, deleting all its tqchildren and freeing up all
-    allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem::~TQListViewItem()
-{
-    if ( renameBox ) {
-	delete renameBox;
-	renameBox = 0;
-    }
-
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-
-    if ( lv ) {
-	if ( lv->d->oldFocusItem == this )
-	    lv->d->oldFocusItem = 0;
-	if ( lv->d->iterators ) {
-	    TQListViewItemIterator *i = lv->d->iterators->first();
-	    while ( i ) {
-		if ( i->current() == this )
-		    i->currentRemoved();
-		i = lv->d->iterators->next();
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( parentItem )
-	parentItem->takeItem( this );
-    TQListViewItem * i = childItem;
-    childItem = 0;
-    while ( i ) {
-	i->parentItem = 0;
-	TQListViewItem * n = i->siblingItem;
-	delete i;
-	i = n;
-    }
-    delete (TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo *)columns;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    If \a b is TRUE each of the item's columns may contain multiple
-    lines of text; otherwise each of them may only contain a single
-    line.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setMultiLinesEnabled( bool b )
-{
-    mlenabled = b;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the item can display multiple lines of text in its
-    columns; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQListViewItem::multiLinesEnabled() const
-{
-    return mlenabled;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a allow is TRUE, the list view starts a drag (see
-    TQListView::dragObject()) when the user presses and moves the mouse
-    on this item.
-*/
-
-
-void TQListViewItem::setDragEnabled( bool allow )
-{
-    allow_drag = (uint)allow;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a allow is TRUE, the list view accepts drops onto the item;
-    otherwise drops are not allowed.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setDropEnabled( bool allow )
-{
-    allow_drop = (uint)allow;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if this item can be dragged; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setDragEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQListViewItem::dragEnabled() const
-{
-    return (bool)allow_drag;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if this item accepts drops; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setDropEnabled(), acceptDrop()
-*/
-
-bool TQListViewItem::dropEnabled() const
-{
-    return (bool)allow_drop;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the item can accept drops of type TQMimeSource \a
-    mime; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    The default implementation does nothing and returns FALSE. A
-    subclass must reimplement this to accept drops.
-*/
-
-bool TQListViewItem::acceptDrop( const TQMimeSource * ) const
-{
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-/*!
-    This function is called when something was dropped on the item. \a e
-    contains all the information about the drop.
-
-    The default implementation does nothing, subclasses may need to
-    reimplement this function.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::dropped( TQDropEvent *e )
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED( e );
-}
-
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    This function is called when a drag enters the item's bounding
-    rectangle.
-
-    The default implementation does nothing, subclasses may need to
-    reimplement this function.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::dragEntered()
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    This function is called when a drag leaves the item's bounding
-    rectangle.
-
-    The default implementation does nothing, subclasses may need to
-    reimplement this function.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::dragLeft()
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inserts \a newChild into this list view item's list of tqchildren.
-    You should not need to call this function; it is called
-    automatically by the constructor of \a newChild.
-
-    \warning If you are using \c Single selection mode, then you
-    should only insert unselected items.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::insertItem( TQListViewItem * newChild )
-{
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv && lv->currentItem() && lv->currentItem()->renameBox ) {
-	if ( lv->d->defRenameAction == TQListView::Reject )
-	    lv->currentItem()->cancelRename( lv->currentItem()->renameCol );
-	else
-	    lv->currentItem()->okRename( lv->currentItem()->renameCol );
-    }
-
-    if ( !newChild || newChild->parentItem == this )
-	return;
-    if ( newChild->parentItem )
-	newChild->parentItem->takeItem( newChild );
-    if ( open )
-	invalidateHeight();
-    newChild->siblingItem = childItem;
-    childItem = newChild;
-    nChildren++;
-    newChild->parentItem = this;
-    lsc = Unsorted;
-    newChild->ownHeight = 0;
-    newChild->configured = FALSE;
-
-    if ( lv && !lv->d->focusItem ) {
-	lv->d->focusItem = lv->firstChild();
-	lv->d->selectAnchor = lv->d->focusItem;
-	lv->repaintItem( lv->d->focusItem );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \fn void TQListViewItem::removeItem( TQListViewItem * )
-  \obsolete
-
-  This function has been renamed takeItem().
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes \a item from this object's list of tqchildren and causes an
-    update of the screen display. The item is not deleted. You should
-    not normally need to call this function because
-    TQListViewItem::~TQListViewItem() calls it.
-
-    The normal way to delete an item is to use \c delete.
-
-    If you need to move an item from one place in the hierarchy to
-    another you can use takeItem() to remove the item from the list
-    view and then insertItem() to put the item back in its new
-    position.
-
-    If a taken item is part of a selection in \c Single selection
-    mode, it is unselected and selectionChanged() is emitted. If a
-    taken item is part of a selection in \c Multi or \c Extended
-    selection mode, it remains selected.
-
-    \warning This function leaves \a item and its tqchildren in a state
-    where most member functions are unsafe. Only a few functions work
-    correctly on an item in this state, most notably insertItem(). The
-    functions that work on taken items are explicitly documented as
-    such.
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem::insertItem()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::takeItem( TQListViewItem * item )
-{
-    if ( !item )
-	return;
-
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv && lv->currentItem() && lv->currentItem()->renameBox ) {
-	if ( lv->d->defRenameAction == TQListView::Reject )
-	    lv->currentItem()->cancelRename( lv->currentItem()->renameCol );
-	else
-	    lv->currentItem()->okRename( lv->currentItem()->renameCol );
-    }
-    bool emit_changed = FALSE;
-    if ( lv && !lv->d->clearing ) {
-	if ( lv->d->oldFocusItem == this )
-	    lv->d->oldFocusItem = 0;
-
-	if ( lv->d->iterators ) {
-	    TQListViewItemIterator *i = lv->d->iterators->first();
-	    while ( i ) {
-		if ( i->current() == item )
-		    i->currentRemoved();
-		i = lv->d->iterators->next();
-	    }
-	}
-
-	invalidateHeight();
-
-	if ( lv->d && lv->d->drawables ) {
-	    delete lv->d->drawables;
-	    lv->d->drawables = 0;
-	}
-
-	if ( lv->d->dirtyItems ) {
-	    if ( item->childItem ) {
-		delete lv->d->dirtyItems;
-		lv->d->dirtyItems = 0;
-		lv->d->dirtyItemTimer->stop();
-		lv->triggerUpdate();
-	    } else {
-		lv->d->dirtyItems->take( (void *)item );
-	    }
-	}
-
-	if ( lv->d->focusItem ) {
-	    const TQListViewItem * c = lv->d->focusItem;
-	    while( c && c != item )
-		c = c->parentItem;
-	    if ( c == item ) {
-		if ( lv->selectedItem() ) {
-		    // for Single, setSelected( FALSE ) when selectedItem() is taken
-		    lv->selectedItem()->setSelected( FALSE );
-		    // we don't emit selectionChanged( 0 )
-		    emit lv->selectionChanged();
-		}
-		if ( item->nextSibling() )
-		    lv->d->focusItem = item->nextSibling();
-		else if ( item->itemAbove() )
-		    lv->d->focusItem = item->itemAbove();
-		else
-		    lv->d->focusItem = 0;
-		emit_changed = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-
-        // reset anchors etc. if they are set to this or any child
-        // items
-        const TQListViewItem *ptr = lv->d->selectAnchor;
-        while (ptr && ptr != item)
-            ptr = ptr->parentItem;
-	if (ptr == item)
-	    lv->d->selectAnchor = lv->d->focusItem;
-
-        ptr = lv->d->startDragItem;
-        while (ptr && ptr != item)
-            ptr = ptr->parentItem;
-	if (ptr == item)
-	    lv->d->startDragItem = 0;
-
-        ptr = lv->d->pressedItem;
-        while (ptr && ptr != item)
-            ptr = ptr->parentItem;
-	if (ptr == item)
-	    lv->d->pressedItem = 0;
-
-        ptr = lv->d->highlighted;
-        while (ptr && ptr != item)
-            ptr = ptr->parentItem;
-	if (ptr == item)
-	    lv->d->highlighted = 0;
-    }
-
-    nChildren--;
-
-    TQListViewItem ** nextChild = &childItem;
-    while( nextChild && *nextChild && item != *nextChild )
-	nextChild = &((*nextChild)->siblingItem);
-
-    if ( nextChild && item == *nextChild )
-	*nextChild = (*nextChild)->siblingItem;
-    item->parentItem = 0;
-    item->siblingItem = 0;
-    item->ownHeight = 0;
-    item->maybeTotalHeight = -1;
-    item->configured = FALSE;
-
-    if ( emit_changed ) {
-	emit lv->currentChanged( lv->d->focusItem );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( lv->viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::Focus );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQString TQListViewItem::key( int column, bool ascending ) const
-
-    Returns a key that can be used for sorting by column \a column.
-    The default implementation returns text(). Derived classes may
-    also incorporate the order indicated by \a ascending into this
-    key, although this is not recommended.
-
-    If you want to sort on non-alphabetical data, e.g. dates, numbers,
-    etc., it is more efficient to reimplement compare().
-
-    \sa compare(), sortChildItems()
-*/
-
-TQString TQListViewItem::key( int column, bool ) const
-{
-    return text( column );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Compares this list view item to \a i using the column \a col in \a
-    ascending order. Returns \< 0 if this item is less than \a i, 0 if
-    they are equal and \> 0 if this item is greater than \a i.
-
-    This function is used for sorting.
-
-    The default implementation compares the item keys (key()) using
-    TQString::localeAwareCompare(). A reimplementation can use
-    different values and a different comparison function. Here is a
-    reimplementation that uses plain Unicode comparison:
-
-    \code
-    int MyListViewItem::compare( TQListViewItem *i, int col,
-				 bool ascending ) const
-    {
-	return key( col, ascending ).compare( i->key( col, ascending) );
-    }
-    \endcode
-    We don't recommend using \a ascending so your code can safely
-    ignore it.
-
-    \sa key() TQString::localeAwareCompare() TQString::compare()
-*/
-
-int TQListViewItem::compare( TQListViewItem *i, int col, bool ascending ) const
-{
-    return key( col, ascending ).localeAwareCompare( i->key( col, ascending ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sorts this item's tqchildren using column \a column. This is done in
-    ascending order if \a ascending is TRUE and in descending order if
-    \a ascending is FALSE.
-
-    Asks some of the tqchildren to sort their tqchildren. (TQListView and
-    TQListViewItem ensure that all on-screen objects are properly
-    sorted but may avoid or defer sorting other objects in order to be
-    more responsive.)
-
-    \sa key() compare()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::sortChildItems( int column, bool ascending )
-{
-    // we try HARD not to sort.  if we're already sorted, don't.
-    if ( column == (int)lsc && ascending == (bool)lso )
-	return;
-
-    if ( column < 0 )
-	return;
-
-    lsc = column;
-    lso = ascending;
-
-    const int nColumns = ( listView() ? listView()->columns() : 0 );
-
-    // only sort if the item have more than one child.
-    if ( column > nColumns || childItem == 0 || (childItem->siblingItem == 0 && childItem->childItem == 0))
-	return;
-
-    // make an array for qHeapSort()
-    TQListViewPrivate::SortableItem * siblings
-	= new TQListViewPrivate::SortableItem[nChildren];
-    TQListViewItem * s = childItem;
-    int i = 0;
-    while ( s && i < nChildren ) {
-	siblings[i].numCols = nColumns;
-	siblings[i].col = column;
-	siblings[i].asc = ascending;
-	siblings[i].item = s;
-	s = s->siblingItem;
-	i++;
-    }
-
-    // and sort it.
-    qHeapSort( siblings, siblings + nChildren );
-
-    // build the linked list of siblings, in the appropriate
-    // direction, and finally set this->childItem to the new top
-    // child.
-    if ( ascending ) {
-	for( i = 0; i < nChildren - 1; i++ )
-	    siblings[i].item->siblingItem = siblings[i+1].item;
-	siblings[nChildren-1].item->siblingItem = 0;
-	childItem = siblings[0].item;
-    } else {
-	for( i = nChildren - 1; i > 0; i-- )
-	    siblings[i].item->siblingItem = siblings[i-1].item;
-	siblings[0].item->siblingItem = 0;
-	childItem = siblings[nChildren-1].item;
-    }
-    for ( i = 0; i < nChildren; i++ ) {
-	if ( siblings[i].item->isOpen() )
-	    siblings[i].item->sort();
-    }
-    delete[] siblings;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets this item's height to \a height pixels. This implicitly
-    changes totalHeight(), too.
-
-    Note that a font change causes this height to be overwritten
-    unless you reimplement setup().
-
-    For best results in Windows style we suggest using an even number
-    of pixels.
-
-    \sa height() totalHeight() isOpen();
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setHeight( int height )
-{
-    if ( ownHeight != height ) {
-	if ( visible )
-	    ownHeight = height;
-	else
-	    ownHeight = 0;
-	invalidateHeight();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Invalidates the cached total height of this item, including all
-    open tqchildren.
-
-    \sa setHeight() height() totalHeight()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::invalidateHeight()
-{
-    if ( maybeTotalHeight < 0 )
-	return;
-    maybeTotalHeight = -1;
-    if ( parentItem && parentItem->isOpen() )
-	parentItem->invalidateHeight();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Opens or closes an item, i.e. shows or hides an item's tqchildren.
-
-    If \a o is TRUE all child items are shown initially. The user can
-    hide them by clicking the <b>-</b> icon to the left of the item.
-    If \a o is FALSE, the tqchildren of this item are initially hidden.
-    The user can show them by clicking the <b>+</b> icon to the left
-    of the item.
-
-    \sa height() totalHeight() isOpen()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setOpen( bool o )
-{
-    if ( o == (bool)open || !enabled )
-	return;
-    open = o;
-
-    // If no tqchildren to show simply emit Q_SIGNALS and return
-    if ( !nChildren ) {
-        TQListView *lv = listView();
-	if ( lv && this != lv->d->r ) {
-	    if ( o )
-		emit lv->expanded( this );
-	    else
-		emit lv->collapsed( this );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( lv->viewport(), indexOfItem( this ), TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-	}
-	return;
-    }
-    invalidateHeight();
-
-    if ( !configured ) {
-	TQListViewItem * l = this;
-	TQPtrStack<TQListViewItem> s;
-	while( l ) {
-	    if ( l->open && l->childItem ) {
-		s.push( l->childItem );
-	    } else if ( l->childItem ) {
-		// first invisible child is unconfigured
-		TQListViewItem * c = l->childItem;
-		while( c ) {
-		    c->configured = FALSE;
-		    c = c->siblingItem;
-		}
-	    }
-	    l->configured = TRUE;
-	    l->setup();
-	    l = (l == this) ? 0 : l->siblingItem;
-	    if ( !l && !s.isEmpty() )
-		l = s.pop();
-	}
-    }
-
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-
-    if ( open && lv)
-	enforceSortOrder();
-
-    if ( isVisible() && lv && lv->d && lv->d->drawables ) {
-	lv->d->drawables->clear();
-	lv->buildDrawableList();
-    }
-
-    if ( lv && this != lv->d->r ) {
-	if ( o )
-	    emit lv->expanded( this );
-	else
-	    emit lv->collapsed( this );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( lv->viewport(), indexOfItem( this ), TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is called before the first time TQListView
-    needs to know the height or any other graphical attribute of this
-    object, and whenever the font, GUI style, or colors of the list
-    view change.
-
-    The default calls widthChanged() and sets the item's height to the
-    height of a single line of text in the list view's font. (If you
-    use icons, multi-line text, etc., you will probably need to call
-    setHeight() yourself or reimplement it.)
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setup()
-{
-    widthChanged();
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-
-    int ph = 0;
-    int h = 0;
-    if ( lv ) {
-	for ( uint i = 0; i < lv->d->column.size(); ++i ) {
-	    if ( pixmap( i ) )
-		ph = TQMAX( ph, pixmap( i )->height() );
-	}
-
-	if ( mlenabled ) {
-	    h = ph;
-	    for ( int c = 0; c < lv->columns(); ++c ) {
-		int lines = text( c ).contains( TQChar('\n') ) + 1;
-		int tmph = lv->d->fontMetricsHeight
-			   + lv->fontMetrics().lineSpacing() * ( lines - 1 );
-		h = TQMAX( h, tmph );
-	    }
-	    h += 2*lv->itemMargin();
-	} else {
-	    h = TQMAX( lv->d->fontMetricsHeight, ph ) + 2*lv->itemMargin();
-	}
-    }
-
-    h = TQMAX( h, TQApplication::globalStrut().height());
-
-    if ( h % 2 > 0 )
-	h++;
-    setHeight( h );
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is called whenever the user presses the mouse
-    on this item or presses Space on it.
-
-    \sa activatedPos()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::activate()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    When called from a reimplementation of activate(), this function
-    gives information on how the item was activated. Otherwise the
-    behavior is undefined.
-
-    If activate() was caused by a mouse press, the function sets \a
-    pos to where the user clicked and returns TRUE; otherwise it
-    returns FALSE and does not change \a pos.
-
-    \a pos is relative to the top-left corner of this item.
-
-    \warning We recommend that you ignore this function; it is
-    scheduled to become obsolete.
-
-    \sa activate()
-*/
-
-bool TQListViewItem::activatedPos( TQPoint &pos )
-{
-    if ( activatedByClick )
-	pos = activatedP;
-    return activatedByClick;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListViewItem::isSelectable() const
-
-    Returns TRUE if the item is selectable (as it is by default);
-    otherwise returns FALSE
-
-    \sa setSelectable()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets this item to be selectable if \a enable is TRUE (the
-    default) or not to be selectable if \a enable is FALSE.
-
-    The user is not able to select a non-selectable item using either
-    the keyboard or the mouse. This also applies for the application
-    programmer (e.g. setSelected() respects this value).
-
-    \sa isSelectable()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setSelectable( bool enable )
-{
-    selectable = enable;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListViewItem::isExpandable() const
-
-    Returns TRUE if this item is expandable even when it has no
-    tqchildren; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Sets this item to be expandable even if it has no tqchildren if \a
-    enable is TRUE, and to be expandable only if it has tqchildren if \a
-    enable is FALSE (the default).
-
-    The dirview example uses this in the canonical fashion. It checks
-    whether the directory is empty in setup() and calls
-    setExpandable(TRUE) if not; in setOpen() it reads the contents of
-    the directory and inserts items accordingly. This strategy means
-    that dirview can display the entire file system without reading
-    very much at startup.
-
-    Note that root items are not expandable by the user unless
-    TQListView::setRootIsDecorated() is set to TRUE.
-
-    \sa setSelectable()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setExpandable( bool enable )
-{
-    expandable = enable;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Makes sure that this object's tqchildren are sorted appropriately.
-
-    This only works if every item from the root item down to this item
-    is already sorted.
-
-    \sa sortChildItems()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::enforceSortOrder() const
-{
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( !lv || (lv && (lv->d->clearing || lv->d->sortcolumn == Unsorted)) )
-	return;
-    if ( parentItem &&
-	 (parentItem->lsc != lsc || parentItem->lso != lso) )
-	((TQListViewItem *)this)->sortChildItems( (int)parentItem->lsc,
-						 (bool)parentItem->lso );
-    else if ( !parentItem &&
-	      ( (int)lsc != lv->d->sortcolumn || (bool)lso != lv->d->ascending ) )
-	((TQListViewItem *)this)->sortChildItems( lv->d->sortcolumn, lv->d->ascending );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListViewItem::isSelected() const
-
-    Returns TRUE if this item is selected; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setSelected() TQListView::setSelected() TQListView::selectionChanged()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    If \a s is TRUE this item is selected; otherwise it is deselected.
-
-    This function does not maintain any invariants or tqrepaint anything
-    -- TQListView::setSelected() does that.
-
-    \sa height() totalHeight()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setSelected( bool s )
-{
-    bool old = selected;
-
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv && lv->selectionMode() != TQListView::NoSelection) {
-	if ( s && isSelectable() )
-	    selected = TRUE;
-	else
-	    selected = FALSE;
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	if ( old != (bool)selected ) {
-	    int ind = indexOfItem( this );
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( lv->viewport(), ind, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( lv->viewport(), ind, selected ? TQAccessible::SelectionAdd : TQAccessible::SelectionRemove );
-	}
-#else
-	TQ_UNUSED( old );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the total height of this object, including any visible
-    tqchildren. This height is recomputed lazily and cached for as long
-    as possible.
-
-    Functions which can affect the total height are, setHeight() which
-    is used to set an item's height, setOpen() to show or hide an
-    item's tqchildren, and invalidateHeight() to tqinvalidate the cached
-    height.
-
-    \sa height()
-*/
-
-int TQListViewItem::totalHeight() const
-{
-    if ( !visible )
-	return 0;
-    if ( maybeTotalHeight >= 0 )
-	return maybeTotalHeight;
-    TQListViewItem * that = (TQListViewItem *)this;
-    if ( !that->configured ) {
-	that->configured = TRUE;
-	that->setup(); // ### virtual non-const function called in const
-    }
-    that->maybeTotalHeight = that->ownHeight;
-
-    if ( !that->isOpen() || !that->childCount() )
-	return that->ownHeight;
-
-    TQListViewItem * child = that->childItem;
-    while ( child != 0 ) {
-	that->maybeTotalHeight += child->totalHeight();
-	child = child->siblingItem;
-    }
-    return that->maybeTotalHeight;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the text in column \a column, or TQString::null if there is
-    no text in that column.
-
-    \sa key() paintCell()
-*/
-
-TQString TQListViewItem::text( int column ) const
-{
-    TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo * l
-	= (TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo*) columns;
-
-    while( column && l ) {
-	l = l->next;
-	column--;
-    }
-
-    return l ? l->text : TQString::null;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the text in column \a column to \a text, if \a column is a
-    valid column number and \a text is different from the existing
-    text.
-
-    If \a text() has been reimplemented, this function may be a no-op.
-
-    \sa text() key()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setText( int column, const TQString &text )
-{
-    if ( column < 0 )
-	return;
-
-    TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo * l
-	= (TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo*) columns;
-    if ( !l ) {
-	l = new TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo;
-	columns = (void*)l;
-    }
-    for( int c = 0; c < column; c++ ) {
-	if ( !l->next )
-	    l->next = new TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo;
-	l = l->next;
-    }
-    if ( l->text == text )
-	return;
-
-    int oldLc = 0;
-    int newLc = 0;
-    if ( mlenabled ) {
-	if ( !l->text.isEmpty() )
-	    oldLc = l->text.contains( TQChar( '\n' ) ) + 1;
-	if ( !text.isEmpty() )
-	    newLc = text.contains( TQChar( '\n' ) ) + 1;
-    }
-
-    l->dirty = TRUE;
-    l->text = text;
-    if ( column == (int)lsc )
-	lsc = Unsorted;
-
-    if ( mlenabled && oldLc != newLc )
-	setup();
-    else
-	widthChanged( column );
-
-    TQListView * lv = listView();
-    if ( lv ) {
-	lv->d->useDoubleBuffer = TRUE;
-	lv->triggerUpdate();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	if ( lv->isVisible() )
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( lv->viewport(), indexOfItem(this), TQAccessible::NameChanged );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the pixmap in column \a column to \a pm, if \a pm is non-null
-    and different from the current pixmap, and if \a column is
-    non-negative.
-
-    \sa pixmap() setText()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::setPixmap( int column, const TQPixmap & pm )
-{
-    if ( column < 0 )
-	return;
-
-    int oldW = 0;
-    int oldH = 0;
-    if ( pixmap( column ) ) {
-	oldW = pixmap( column )->width();
-	oldH = pixmap( column )->height();
-    }
-
-    TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo * l
-	= (TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo*) columns;
-    if ( !l ) {
-	l = new TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo;
-	columns = (void*)l;
-    }
-
-    for( int c = 0; c < column; c++ ) {
-	if ( !l->next )
-	    l->next = new TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo;
-	l = l->next;
-    }
-
-    if ( ( pm.isNull() && ( !l->pm || l->pm->isNull() ) ) ||
-	 ( l->pm && pm.serialNumber() == l->pm->serialNumber() ) )
-	return;
-
-    if ( pm.isNull() ) {
-	delete l->pm;
-	l->pm = 0;
-    } else {
-	if ( l->pm )
-	    *(l->pm) = pm;
-	else
-	    l->pm = new TQPixmap( pm );
-    }
-
-    int newW = 0;
-    int newH = 0;
-    if ( pixmap( column ) ) {
-	newW = pixmap( column )->width();
-	newH = pixmap( column )->height();
-    }
-
-    if ( oldW != newW || oldH != newH ) {
-	setup();
-	widthChanged( column );
-	invalidateHeight();
-    }
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv ) {
-	lv->d->useDoubleBuffer = TRUE;
-	lv->triggerUpdate();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the pixmap for \a column, or 0 if there is no pixmap for
-    \a column.
-
-    \sa setText() setPixmap()
-*/
-
-const TQPixmap * TQListViewItem::pixmap( int column ) const
-{
-    TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo * l
-    = (TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo*) columns;
-
-    while( column && l ) {
-	l = l->next;
-	column--;
-    }
-
-    return (l && l->pm) ? l->pm : 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function paints the contents of one column of an item
-    and aligns it as described by \a align.
-
-    \a p is a TQPainter open on the relevant paint tqdevice. \a p is
-    translated so (0, 0) is the top-left pixel in the cell and \a
-    width-1, height()-1 is the bottom-right pixel \e in the cell. The
-    other properties of \a p (pen, brush, etc) are undefined. \a cg is
-    the color group to use. \a column is the logical column number
-    within the item that is to be painted; 0 is the column which may
-    contain a tree.
-
-    This function may use TQListView::itemMargin() for readability
-    spacing on the left and right sides of data such as text, and
-    should honor isSelected() and TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus().
-
-    If you reimplement this function, you should also reimplement
-    width().
-
-    The rectangle to be painted is in an undefined state when this
-    function is called, so you \e must draw on all the pixels. The
-    painter \a p has the right font on entry.
-
-    \sa paintBranches(), TQListView::drawContentsOffset()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::paintCell( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg,
-			       int column, int width, int align )
-{
-    // Change width() if you change this.
-
-    if ( !p )
-	return;
-
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( !lv )
-	return;
-    TQFontMetrics fm( p->fontMetrics() );
-
-    // had, but we _need_ the column info for the ellipsis thingy!!!
-    if ( !columns ) {
-	for ( uint i = 0; i < lv->d->column.size(); ++i ) {
-	    setText( i, text( i ) );
-	}
-    }
-
-    TQString t = text( column );
-
-    if ( columns ) {
-	TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo *ci = 0;
-	// try until we have a column info....
-	while ( !ci ) {
-	    ci = (TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo*)columns;
-	    for ( int i = 0; ci && (i < column); ++i )
-		ci = ci->next;
-
-	    if ( !ci ) {
-		setText( column, t );
-		ci = 0;
-	    }
-	}
-
-	// if the column width changed and this item was not painted since this change
-	if ( ci && ( ci->width != width || ci->text != t || ci->dirty ) ) {
-	    ci->text = t;
-	    ci->dirty = FALSE;
-	    ci->width = width;
-	    ci->truncated = FALSE;
-	    // if we have to do the ellipsis thingy calc the truncated text
-	    int pw = lv->itemMargin()*2 - lv->d->minLeftBearing - lv->d->minRightBearing;
-	    pw += pixmap( column ) ? pixmap( column )->width() + lv->itemMargin() : 0;
-	    if ( !mlenabled && fm.width( t ) + pw > width ) {
-		// take care of arabic shaping in width calculation (lars)
-		ci->truncated = TRUE;
-		ci->tmpText = qEllipsisText( t, fm, width - pw, align );
-	    } else if ( mlenabled && fm.width( t ) + pw > width ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STRINGLIST
-		TQStringList list = TQStringList::split( TQChar('\n'), t, TRUE );
-		for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = list.begin(); it != list.end(); ++it ) {
-		    TQString z = *it;
-		    if ( fm.width( z ) + pw > width ) {
-			ci->truncated = TRUE;
-			*it = qEllipsisText( z, fm, width - pw, align );
-		    }
-		}
-
-		if ( ci->truncated )
-		    ci->tmpText = list.join( TQString("\n") );
-#endif
-	    }
-	}
-
-	// if we have to draw the ellipsis thingy, use the truncated text
-	if ( ci && ci->truncated )
-	    t = ci->tmpText;
-    }
-
-    int marg = lv->itemMargin();
-    int r = marg;
-    const TQPixmap * icon = pixmap( column );
-
-    const BackgroundMode bgmode = lv->viewport()->backgroundMode();
-    const TQColorGroup::ColorRole crole = TQPalette::backgroundRoleFromMode( bgmode );
-    if ( cg.brush( crole ) != lv->tqcolorGroup().brush( crole ) )
-	p->fillRect( 0, 0, width, height(), cg.brush( crole ) );
-    else
-	lv->paintEmptyArea( p, TQRect( 0, 0, width, height() ) );
-
-
-    // (lars) what does this do???
-#if 0 // RS: ####
-    if ( align != AlignLeft )
-	marg -= lv->d->minRightBearing;
-#endif
-    if ( isSelected() &&
-	 (column == 0 || lv->allColumnsShowFocus()) ) {
-	p->fillRect( r - marg, 0, width - r + marg, height(),
-		     cg.brush( TQColorGroup::Highlight ) );
-	if ( enabled || !lv )
-	    p->setPen( cg.highlightedText() );
-	else if ( !enabled && lv)
-	    p->setPen( lv->tqpalette().disabled().highlightedText() );
-    } else {
-	if ( enabled || !lv )
-	    p->setPen( cg.text() );
-	else if ( !enabled && lv)
-	    p->setPen( lv->tqpalette().disabled().text() );
-    }
-
-
-#if 0
-    bool reverse = TQApplication::reverseLayout();
-#else
-    bool reverse = FALSE;
-#endif
-    int iconWidth = 0;
-
-    if ( icon ) {
-        iconWidth = icon->width() + lv->itemMargin();
-	int xo = r;
-	// we default to AlignVCenter.
-	int yo = ( height() - icon->height() ) / 2;
-
-	// I guess we may as well always respect vertical tqalignment.
-        if ( align & TQt::AlignBottom )
-    	    yo = height() - icon->height();
-	else if ( align & TQt::AlignTop )
-	    yo = 0;
-
-	// respect horizontal tqalignment when there is no text for an item.
-	if ( text(column).isEmpty() ) {
-	    if ( align & TQt::AlignRight )
-		xo = width - 2 * marg - iconWidth;
-	    else if ( align & TQt::AlignHCenter )
-		xo = ( width - iconWidth ) / 2;
-	}
-	if ( reverse )
-		xo = width - 2 * marg - iconWidth;
-	p->drawPixmap( xo, yo, *icon );
-    }
-
-    if ( !t.isEmpty() ) {
-	if ( !mlenabled ) {
-	    if ( !(align & TQt::AlignTop || align & TQt::AlignBottom) )
-		align |= TQt::AlignVCenter;
-	} else {
-	    if ( !(align & TQt::AlignVCenter || align & TQt::AlignBottom) )
-		align |= TQt::AlignTop;
-	}
-	if ( !reverse )
-	    r += iconWidth;
-
-	if ( !mlenabled ) {
-	    p->drawText( r, 0, width-marg-r, height(), align, t );
-	} else {
-	    p->drawText( r, marg, width-marg-r, height(), align, t );
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( mlenabled && column == 0 && isOpen() && childCount() ) {
-	int textheight = fm.size( align, t ).height() + 2 * lv->itemMargin();
-	textheight = TQMAX( textheight, TQApplication::globalStrut().height() );
-	if ( textheight % 2 > 0 )
-	    textheight++;
-	if ( textheight < height() ) {
-	    int w = lv->treeStepSize() / 2;
-	    lv->tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl( TQStyle::CC_ListView, p, lv,
-					    TQRect( 0, textheight, w + 1, height() - textheight + 1 ), cg,
-					    lv->isEnabled() ? TQStyle::Style_Enabled : TQStyle::Style_Default,
-					    TQStyle::SC_ListViewExpand,
-					    (uint)TQStyle::SC_All, TQStyleOption( this ) );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the number of pixels of width required to draw column \a c
-    of list view \a lv, using the metrics \a fm without cropping. The
-    list view containing this item may use this information depending
-    on the TQListView::WidthMode settings for the column.
-
-    The default implementation returns the width of the bounding
-    rectangle of the text of column \a c.
-
-    \sa listView() widthChanged() TQListView::setColumnWidthMode()
-    TQListView::itemMargin()
-*/
-int TQListViewItem::width( const TQFontMetrics& fm,
-			  const TQListView* lv, int c ) const
-{
-    int w;
-    if ( mlenabled )
-	w = fm.size( TQt::AlignVCenter, text( c ) ).width() + lv->itemMargin() * 2
-	    - lv->d->minLeftBearing - lv->d->minRightBearing;
-    else
-	w = fm.width( text( c ) ) + lv->itemMargin() * 2
-	    - lv->d->minLeftBearing - lv->d->minRightBearing;
-    const TQPixmap * pm = pixmap( c );
-    if ( pm )
-	w += pm->width() + lv->itemMargin(); // ### correct margin stuff?
-    return TQMAX( w, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Paints a focus indicator on the rectangle \a r using painter \a p
-    and colors \a cg.
-
-    \a p is already clipped.
-
-    \sa paintCell() paintBranches() TQListView::setAllColumnsShowFocus()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::paintFocus( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup &cg,
-				const TQRect & r )
-{
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv )
-	lv->tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_FocusRect, p, r, cg,
-				   (isSelected() ?
-				    TQStyle::Style_FocusAtBorder :
-				    TQStyle::Style_Default),
-				   TQStyleOption(isSelected() ? cg.highlight() : cg.base() ));
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Paints a set of branches from this item to (some of) its tqchildren.
-
-    Painter \a p is set up with clipping and translation so that you
-    can only draw in the rectangle that needs redrawing; \a cg is the
-    color group to use; the update rectangle is at (0, 0) and has size
-    width \a w by height \a h. The top of the rectangle you own is at
-    \a y (which is never greater than 0 but can be outside the window
-    system's allowed coordinate range).
-
-    The update rectangle is in an undefined state when this function
-    is called; this function must draw on \e all of the pixels.
-
-    \sa paintCell(), TQListView::drawContentsOffset()
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::paintBranches( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg,
-				   int w, int y, int h )
-{
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv )
-	lv->paintEmptyArea( p, TQRect( 0, 0, w, h ) );
-    if ( !visible || !lv )
-	return;
-    lv->tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl( TQStyle::CC_ListView, p, lv,
-				    TQRect( 0, y, w, h ),
-				    cg,
-				    lv->isEnabled() ? TQStyle::Style_Enabled :
-				    TQStyle::Style_Default,
-				    (TQStyle::SC_ListViewBranch |
-				     TQStyle::SC_ListViewExpand),
-				    TQStyle::SC_None, TQStyleOption(this) );
-}
-
-
-TQListViewPrivate::Root::Root( TQListView * parent )
-    : TQListViewItem( parent )
-{
-    lv = parent;
-    setHeight( 0 );
-    setOpen( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-void TQListViewPrivate::Root::setHeight( int )
-{
-    TQListViewItem::setHeight( 0 );
-}
-
-
-void TQListViewPrivate::Root::invalidateHeight()
-{
-    TQListViewItem::invalidateHeight();
-    lv->triggerUpdate();
-}
-
-
-TQListView * TQListViewPrivate::Root::theListView() const
-{
-    return lv;
-}
-
-
-void TQListViewPrivate::Root::setup()
-{
-    // explicitly nothing
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-\internal
-If called after a mouse click, tells the list view to ignore a
-following double click. This state is reset after the next mouse click.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::ignoreDoubleClick()
-{
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv )
-	lv->d->ignoreDoubleClick = TRUE;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void  TQListView::onItem( TQListViewItem *i )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor onto
-    item \a i, similar to the TQWidget::enterEvent() function.
-*/
-
-// ### bug here too? see qiconview.cppp onItem/onViewport
-
-/*!
-    \fn void  TQListView::onViewport()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user moves the mouse cursor from
-    an item to an empty part of the list view.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQListView::SelectionMode
-
-    This enumerated type is used by TQListView to indicate how it
-    reacts to selection by the user.
-
-    \value Single  When the user selects an item, any already-selected
-    item becomes unselected. The user can unselect the selected
-    item by clicking on some empty space within the view.
-
-    \value Multi  When the user selects an item in the usual way, the
-    selection status of that item is toggled and the other items are
-    left alone. Also, multiple items can be selected by dragging the
-    mouse while the left mouse button stays pressed.
-
-    \value Extended When the user selects an item in the usual way,
-    the selection is cleared and the new item selected. However, if
-    the user presses the Ctrl key when clicking on an item, the
-    clicked item gets toggled and all other items are left untouched.
-    And if the user presses the Shift key while clicking on an item,
-    all items between the current item and the clicked item get
-    selected or unselected, depending on the state of the clicked
-    item. Also, multiple items can be selected by dragging the mouse
-    over them.
-
-    \value NoSelection  Items cannot be selected.
-
-    In other words, \c Single is a real single-selection list view, \c
-    Multi a real multi-selection list view, \c Extended is a list view
-    where users can select multiple items but usually want to select
-    either just one or a range of contiguous items, and \c NoSelection
-    is a list view where the user can look but not touch.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQListView::ResizeMode
-
-    This enum describes how the list view's header adjusts to resize
-    events which affect the width of the list view.
-
-    \value NoColumn The columns do not get resized in resize events.
-
-    \value AllColumns All columns are resized equally to fit the width
-    of the list view.
-
-    \value LastColumn The last column is resized to fit the width of
-    the list view.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQListView::RenameAction
-
-    This enum describes whether a rename operation is accepted if the
-    rename editor loses focus without the user pressing Enter.
-
-    \value Accept Rename if Enter is pressed or focus is lost.
-
-    \value Reject Discard the rename operation if focus is lost (and
-    Enter has not been pressed).
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \class TQListView
-    \brief The TQListView class implements a list/tree view.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-    \mainclass
-
-    It can display and control a hierarchy of multi-column items, and
-    provides the ability to add new items at any time. The user may
-    select one or many items (depending on the \c SelectionMode) and
-    sort the list in increasing or decreasing order by any column.
-
-    The simplest pattern of use is to create a TQListView, add some
-    column headers using addColumn() and create one or more
-    TQListViewItem or TQCheckListItem objects with the TQListView as
-    parent:
-
-    \quotefile xml/tagreader-with-features/structureparser.h
-    \skipto TQListView * table
-    \printline
-    \quotefile xml/tagreader-with-features/structureparser.cpp
-    \skipto addColumn
-    \printline addColumn
-    \printline
-    \skipto new TQListViewItem( table
-    \printline
-
-    Further nodes can be added to the list view object (the root of the
-    tree) or as child nodes to TQListViewItems:
-
-    \skipto for ( int i = 0 ; i < attributes.length();
-    \printuntil }
-
-    (From \link xml/tagreader-with-features/structureparser.cpp
-    xml/tagreader-with-features/structureparser.cpp\endlink)
-
-    The main setup functions are:
-    \table
-    \header \i Function \i Action
-    \row \i \l addColumn()
-	 \i Adds a column with a text label and perhaps width. Columns
-	    are counted from the left starting with column 0.
-    \row \i \l setColumnWidthMode()
-	 \i Sets the column to be resized automatically or not.
-    \row \i \l setAllColumnsShowFocus()
-	 \i Sets whether items should show keyboard focus using all
-	    columns or just column 0. The default is to show focus
-	    just using column 0.
-    \row \i \l setRootIsDecorated()
-	 \i Sets whether root items should show open/close decoration to their left.
-	    The default is FALSE.
-    \row \i \l setTreeStepSize()
-	 \i Sets how many pixels an item's tqchildren are indented
-	    relative to their parent. The default is 20. This is
-	    mostly a matter of taste.
-    \row \i \l setSorting()
-	 \i Sets whether the items should be sorted, whether it should
-	    be in ascending or descending order, and by what column
-	    they should be sorted. By default the list view is sorted
-	    by the first column; to switch this off call setSorting(-1).
-    \endtable
-
-    To handle events such as mouse presses on the list view, derived
-    classes can reimplement the TQScrollView functions:
-    \link TQScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent() contentsMousePressEvent\endlink,
-    \link TQScrollView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent() contentsMouseReleaseEvent\endlink,
-    \link TQScrollView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent() contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent\endlink,
-    \link TQScrollView::contentsMouseMoveEvent() contentsMouseMoveEvent\endlink,
-    \link TQScrollView::contentsDragEnterEvent() contentsDragEnterEvent\endlink,
-    \link TQScrollView::contentsDragMoveEvent() contentsDragMoveEvent\endlink,
-    \link TQScrollView::contentsDragLeaveEvent() contentsDragLeaveEvent\endlink,
-    \link TQScrollView::contentsDropEvent() contentsDropEvent\endlink, and
-    \link TQScrollView::contentsWheelEvent() contentsWheelEvent\endlink.
-
-    There are also several functions for mapping between items and
-    coordinates. itemAt() returns the item at a position on-screen,
-    tqitemRect() returns the rectangle an item occupies on the screen,
-    and itemPos() returns the position of any item (whether it is
-    on-screen or not). firstChild() returns the list view's first item
-    (not necessarily visible on-screen).
-
-    You can iterate over visible items using
-    TQListViewItem::itemBelow(); over a list view's top-level items
-    using TQListViewItem::firstChild() and
-    TQListViewItem::nextSibling(); or every item using a
-    TQListViewItemIterator. See
-    the TQListViewItem documentation for examples of traversal.
-
-    An item can be moved amongst its siblings using
-    TQListViewItem::moveItem(). To move an item in the hierarchy use
-    takeItem() and insertItem(). Item's (and all their child items)
-    are deleted with \c delete; to delete all the list view's items
-    use clear().
-
-    There are a variety of selection modes described in the
-    TQListView::SelectionMode documentation. The default is \c Single
-    selection, which you can change using setSelectionMode().
-
-    Because TQListView offers multiple selection it must display
-    keyboard focus and selection state separately. Therefore there are
-    functions both to set the selection state of an item
-    (setSelected()) and to set which item displays keyboard focus
-    (setCurrentItem()).
-
-    TQListView emits two groups of Q_SIGNALS; one group Q_SIGNALS changes
-    in selection/focus state and one indicates selection. The first
-    group consists of selectionChanged() (applicable to all list
-    views), selectionChanged(TQListViewItem*) (applicable only to a
-    \c Single selection list view), and currentChanged(TQListViewItem*).
-    The second group consists of doubleClicked(TQListViewItem*),
-    returnPressed(TQListViewItem*),
-    rightButtonClicked(TQListViewItem*, const TQPoint&, int), etc.
-
-    Note that changing the state of the list view in a slot connected
-    to a list view signal may cause unexpected side effects. If you
-    need to change the list view's state in response to a signal, use
-    a \link TQTimer::singleShot() single shot timer\endlink with a
-    time out of 0, and connect this timer to a slot that modifies the
-    list view's state.
-
-    In Motif style, TQListView deviates fairly strongly from the look
-    and feel of the Motif hierarchical tree view. This is done mostly
-    to provide a usable keyboard interface and to make the list view
-    look better with a white background.
-
-    If selectionMode() is \c Single (the default) the user can select
-    one item at a time, e.g. by clicking an item with the mouse, see
-    \l TQListView::SelectionMode for details.
-
-    The list view can be navigated either using the mouse or the
-    keyboard. Clicking a <b>-</b> icon closes an item (hides its
-    tqchildren) and clicking a <b>+</b> icon opens an item (shows its
-    tqchildren). The keyboard controls are these:
-    \table
-    \header \i Keypress \i Action
-    \row \i Home
-	 \i Make the first item current and visible.
-    \row \i End
-	 \i Make the last item current and visible.
-    \row \i Page Up
-	 \i Make the item above the top visible item current and visible.
-    \row \i Page Down
-	 \i Make the item below the bottom visible item current and visible.
-    \row \i Up Arrow
-	 \i Make the item above the current item current and visible.
-    \row \i Down Arrow
-	 \i Make the item below the current item current and visible.
-    \row \i Left Arrow
-	 \i If the current item is closed (<b>+</b> icon) or has no
-	    tqchildren, make its parent item current and visible. If the
-	    current item is open (<b>-</b> icon) close it, i.e. hide its
-	    tqchildren. Exception: if the current item is the first item
-	    and is closed and the horizontal scrollbar is offset to
-	    the right the list view will be scrolled left.
-    \row \i Right Arrow
-	 \i If the current item is closed (<b>+</b> icon) and has
-	    tqchildren, the item is opened. If the current item is
-	    opened (<b>-</b> icon) and has tqchildren the item's first
-	    child is made current and visible. If the current item has
-	    no tqchildren the list view is scrolled right.
-    \endtable
-
-    If the user starts typing letters with the focus in the list view
-    an incremental search will occur. For example if the user types
-    'd' the current item will change to the first item that begins
-    with the letter 'd'; if they then type 'a', the current item will
-    change to the first item that begins with 'da', and so on. If no
-    item begins with the letters they type the current item doesn't
-    change.
-
-    \warning The list view assumes ownership of all list view items
-    and will delete them when it does not need them any more.
-
-    <img src=qlistview-m.png> <img src=qlistview-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem TQCheckListItem
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::itemRenamed( TQListViewItem * item, int col )
-
-    \overload
-
-    This signal is emitted when \a item has been renamed, e.g. by
-    in-place renaming, in column \a col.
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem::setRenameEnabled()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::itemRenamed( TQListViewItem * item, int col, const TQString &text)
-
-    This signal is emitted when \a item has been renamed to \a text,
-    e.g. by in in-place renaming, in column \a col.
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem::setRenameEnabled()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new empty list view called \a name with parent \a
-    parent.
-
-    Performance is boosted by modifying the widget flags \a f so that
-    only part of the TQListViewItem tqchildren is redrawn. This may be
-    unsuitable for custom TQListViewItem classes, in which case \c
-    WStaticContents and \c WNoAutoErase should be cleared.
-
-    \sa TQWidget::clearWFlags() TQt::WidgetFlags
-*/
-TQListView::TQListView( TQWidget * parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(f | TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-void TQListView::init()
-{
-    d = new TQListViewPrivate;
-    d->vci = 0;
-    d->timer = new TQTimer( this );
-    d->levelWidth = 20;
-    d->r = 0;
-    d->rootIsExpandable = 0;
-    d->h = new TQHeader( this, "list view header" );
-    d->h->installEventFilter( this );
-    d->focusItem = 0;
-    d->oldFocusItem = 0;
-    d->drawables = 0;
-    d->dirtyItems = 0;
-    d->dirtyItemTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-    d->visibleTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-    d->renameTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-    d->autoopenTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-    d->margin = 1;
-    d->selectionMode = TQListView::Single;
-    d->sortcolumn = 0;
-    d->ascending = TRUE;
-    d->allColumnsShowFocus = FALSE;
-    d->fontMetricsHeight = fontMetrics().height();
-    d->h->setTracking(TRUE);
-    d->buttonDown = FALSE;
-    d->ignoreDoubleClick = FALSE;
-    d->column.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    d->iterators = 0;
-    d->scrollTimer = 0;
-    d->sortIndicator = FALSE;
-    d->clearing = FALSE;
-    d->minLeftBearing = fontMetrics().minLeftBearing();
-    d->minRightBearing = fontMetrics().minRightBearing();
-    d->ellipsisWidth = fontMetrics().width( "..." ) * 2;
-    d->highlighted = 0;
-    d->pressedItem = 0;
-    d->selectAnchor = 0;
-    d->select = TRUE;
-    d->useDoubleBuffer = FALSE;
-    d->startDragItem = 0;
-    d->toolTips = TRUE;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    d->toolTip = new TQListViewToolTip( viewport(), this );
-#endif
-    d->updateHeader = FALSE;
-    d->fullRepaintOnComlumnChange = FALSE;
-    d->resizeMode = NoColumn;
-    d->defRenameAction = Reject;
-    d->pressedEmptyArea = FALSE;
-    d->startEdit = TRUE;
-    d->ignoreEditAfterFocus = FALSE;
-    d->inMenuMode = FALSE;
-    d->pressedSelected = FALSE;
-
-    setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-    viewport()->setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-
-    connect( d->timer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(updateContents()) );
-    connect( d->dirtyItemTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(updateDirtyItems()) );
-    connect( d->visibleTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(makeVisible()) );
-    connect( d->renameTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(startRename()) );
-    connect( d->autoopenTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(openFocusItem()) );
-
-    connect( d->h, TQT_SIGNAL(sizeChange(int,int,int)),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(handleSizeChange(int,int,int)) );
-    connect( d->h, TQT_SIGNAL(indexChange(int,int,int)),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(handleIndexChange()) );
-    connect( d->h, TQT_SIGNAL(sectionClicked(int)),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(changeSortColumn(int)) );
-    connect( d->h, TQT_SIGNAL(sectionHandleDoubleClicked(int)),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(adjustColumn(int)) );
-    connect( horizontalScrollBar(), TQT_SIGNAL(sliderMoved(int)),
-	     d->h, TQT_SLOT(setOffset(int)) );
-    connect( horizontalScrollBar(), TQT_SIGNAL(valueChanged(int)),
-	     d->h, TQT_SLOT(setOffset(int)) );
-
-    // will access d->r
-    TQListViewPrivate::Root * r = new TQListViewPrivate::Root( this );
-    r->is_root = TRUE;
-    d->r = r;
-    d->r->setSelectable( FALSE );
-
-    viewport()->setFocusProxy( this );
-    viewport()->setFocusPolicy( Qt::WheelFocus );
-    viewport()->setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBase );
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBackground, TQt::PaletteBase );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::showSortIndicator
-    \brief whether the list view header should display a sort indicator.
-
-    If this property is TRUE, an arrow is drawn in the header of the
-    list view to indicate the sort order of the list view contents.
-    The arrow will be drawn in the correct column and will point up or
-    down, depending on the current sort direction. The default is
-    FALSE (don't show an indicator).
-
-    \sa TQHeader::setSortIndicator()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setShowSortIndicator( bool show )
-{
-    if ( show == d->sortIndicator )
-	return;
-
-    d->sortIndicator = show;
-    if ( d->sortcolumn != Unsorted && d->sortIndicator )
-	d->h->setSortIndicator( d->sortcolumn, d->ascending );
-    else
-	d->h->setSortIndicator( -1 );
-}
-
-bool TQListView::showSortIndicator() const
-{
-    return d->sortIndicator;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::showToolTips
-    \brief whether this list view should show tooltips for truncated column texts
-
-    The default is TRUE.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setShowToolTips( bool b )
-{
-    d->toolTips = b;
-}
-
-bool TQListView::showToolTips() const
-{
-    return d->toolTips;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::resizeMode
-    \brief whether all, none or the only the last column should be resized
-
-    Specifies whether all, none or only the last column should be
-    resized to fit the full width of the list view. The values for this
-    property can be one of: \c NoColumn (the default), \c AllColumns
-    or \c LastColumn.
-
-    \warning Setting the resize mode should be done after all necessary
-    columns have been added to the list view, otherwise the behavior is
-    undefined.
-
-    \sa TQHeader, header()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setResizeMode( ResizeMode m )
-{
-    d->resizeMode = m;
-    if ( m == NoColumn )
-	header()->setStretchEnabled( FALSE );
-    else if ( m == AllColumns )
-	header()->setStretchEnabled( TRUE );
-    else
-	header()->setStretchEnabled( TRUE, header()->count() - 1 );
-}
-
-TQListView::ResizeMode TQListView::resizeMode() const
-{
-    return d->resizeMode;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the list view, deleting all its items, and frees up all
-    allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQListView::~TQListView()
-{
-    if ( d->iterators ) {
-	TQListViewItemIterator *i = d->iterators->first();
-	while ( i ) {
-	    i->listView = 0;
-	    i = d->iterators->next();
-	}
-	delete d->iterators;
-	d->iterators = 0;
-    }
-
-    d->focusItem = 0;
-    delete d->r;
-    d->r = 0;
-    delete d->dirtyItems;
-    d->dirtyItems = 0;
-    delete d->drawables;
-    d->drawables = 0;
-    delete d->vci;
-    d->vci = 0;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    delete d->toolTip;
-    d->toolTip = 0;
-#endif
-    delete d;
-    d = 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Calls TQListViewItem::paintCell() and
-    TQListViewItem::paintBranches() as necessary for all list view
-    items that require repainting in the \a cw pixels wide and \a ch
-    pixels high bounding rectangle starting at position \a cx, \a cy
-    with offset \a ox, \a oy. Uses the painter \a p.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::drawContentsOffset( TQPainter * p, int ox, int oy,
-				    int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch )
-{
-    if ( columns() == 0 ) {
-	paintEmptyArea( p, TQRect( cx, cy, cw, ch ) );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( !d->drawables ||
-	 d->drawables->isEmpty() ||
-	 d->topPixel > cy ||
-	 d->bottomPixel < cy + ch - 1 ||
-	 d->r->maybeTotalHeight < 0 )
-	buildDrawableList();
-
-    if ( d->dirtyItems ) {
-	TQRect br( cx - ox, cy - oy, cw, ch );
-	TQPtrDictIterator<void> it( *(d->dirtyItems) );
-	TQListViewItem * i;
-	while( (i = (TQListViewItem *)(it.currentKey())) != 0 ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    TQRect ir = tqitemRect( i ).intersect( viewport()->rect() );
-	    if ( ir.isEmpty() || br.contains( ir ) )
-		// we're painting this one, or it needs no painting: forget it
-		d->dirtyItems->remove( (void *)i );
-	}
-	if ( d->dirtyItems->count() ) {
-	    // there are still items left that need repainting
-	    d->dirtyItemTimer->start( 0, TRUE );
-	} else {
-	    // we're painting all items that need to be painted
-	    delete d->dirtyItems;
-	    d->dirtyItems = 0;
-	    d->dirtyItemTimer->stop();
-	}
-    }
-
-    p->setFont( font() );
-
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQListViewPrivate::DrawableItem> it( *(d->drawables) );
-
-    TQRect r;
-    int fx = -1, x, fc = 0, lc = 0;
-    int tx = -1;
-    TQListViewPrivate::DrawableItem * current;
-
-    while ( (current = it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( !current->i->isVisible() )
-	    continue;
-	int ih = current->i->height();
-	int ith = current->i->totalHeight();
-	int c;
-	int cs;
-
-	// need to paint current?
-	if ( ih > 0 && current->y < cy+ch && current->y+ih > cy ) {
-	    if ( fx < 0 ) {
-		// find first interesting column, once
-		x = 0;
-		c = 0;
-		cs = d->h->cellSize( 0 );
-		while ( x + cs <= cx && c < d->h->count() ) {
-		    x += cs;
-		    c++;
-		    if ( c < d->h->count() )
-			cs = d->h->cellSize( c );
-		}
-		fx = x;
-		fc = c;
-		while( x < cx + cw && c < d->h->count() ) {
-		    x += cs;
-		    c++;
-		    if ( c < d->h->count() )
-			cs = d->h->cellSize( c );
-		}
-		lc = c;
-	    }
-
-	    x = fx;
-	    c = fc;
-	    // draw to last interesting column
-
-	    bool drawActiveSelection = hasFocus() || d->inMenuMode ||
-			    !tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus, this ) ||
-			    ( currentItem() && currentItem()->renameBox && currentItem()->renameBox->hasFocus() );
-	    const TQColorGroup &cg = ( drawActiveSelection ? tqcolorGroup() : tqpalette().inactive() );
-
-	    while ( c < lc && d->drawables ) {
-		int i = d->h->mapToLogical( c );
-		cs = d->h->cellSize( c );
-		r.setRect( x - ox, current->y - oy, cs, ih );
-		if ( i == 0 && current->i->parentItem )
-		    r.setLeft( r.left() + current->l * treeStepSize() );
-
-		p->save();
-		// No need to paint if the cell isn't technically visible
-		if ( !( r.width() == 0 || r.height() == 0 ) ) {
-		    p->translate( r.left(), r.top() );
-		    int ac = d->h->mapToLogical( c );
-		    // map to Left currently. This should change once we
-		    // can really reverse the listview.
-		    int align = columnAlignment( ac );
-		    if ( align == TQt::AlignAuto ) align = TQt::AlignLeft;
-		    if ( d->useDoubleBuffer ) {
-			TQRect a( 0, 0, r.width(), current->i->height() );
-			TQSharedDoubleBuffer buffer( p, a, TQSharedDoubleBuffer::Force );
-			if ( buffer.isBuffered() )
-			    paintEmptyArea( buffer.painter(), a );
-			buffer.painter()->setFont( p->font() );
-			buffer.painter()->setPen( p->pen() );
-			buffer.painter()->setBrush( p->brush() );
-			buffer.painter()->setBrushOrigin( -r.left(), -r.top() );
-			current->i->paintCell( buffer.painter(), cg, ac, r.width(),
-			    align );
-		    } else {
-			current->i->paintCell( p, cg, ac, r.width(),
-			    align );
-		    }
-		}
-		p->restore();
-		x += cs;
-		c++;
-	    }
-
-	    if ( current->i == d->focusItem && hasFocus() &&
-		 !d->allColumnsShowFocus ) {
-		p->save();
-		int cell = d->h->mapToActual( 0 );
-		TQRect r( d->h->cellPos( cell ) - ox, current->y - oy, d->h->cellSize( cell ), ih );
-		if ( current->i->parentItem )
-		    r.setLeft( r.left() + current->l * treeStepSize() );
-		if ( r.left() < r.right() )
-		    current->i->paintFocus( p, tqcolorGroup(), r );
-		p->restore();
-	    }
-	}
-
-    	const int cell = d->h->mapToActual( 0 );
-
-	// does current need focus indication?
-	if ( current->i == d->focusItem && hasFocus() &&
-	     d->allColumnsShowFocus ) {
-	    p->save();
-	    int x = -contentsX();
-	    int w = header()->cellPos( header()->count() - 1 ) +
-		    header()->cellSize( header()->count() - 1 );
-
-	    r.setRect( x, current->y - oy, w, ih );
-	    if ( d->h->mapToActual( 0 ) == 0 || ( current->l == 0 && !rootIsDecorated() ) ) {
-		int offsetx = TQMIN( current->l * treeStepSize(), d->h->cellSize( cell ) );
-		r.setLeft( r.left() + offsetx );
-		current->i->paintFocus( p, tqcolorGroup(), r );
-	    } else {
-		int xdepth = TQMIN( treeStepSize() * ( current->i->depth() + ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0) )
-			     + itemMargin(), d->h->cellSize( cell ) );
-		xdepth += d->h->cellPos( cell );
-		TQRect r1( r );
-		r1.setRight( d->h->cellPos( cell ) - 1 );
-		TQRect r2( r );
-		r2.setLeft( xdepth - 1 );
-		current->i->paintFocus( p, tqcolorGroup(), r1 );
-		current->i->paintFocus( p, tqcolorGroup(), r2 );
-	    }
-	    p->restore();
-	}
-
-	if ( tx < 0 )
-	    tx = d->h->cellPos( cell );
-
-	// do any tqchildren of current need to be painted?
-	if ( ih != ith &&
-	     (current->i != d->r || d->rootIsExpandable) &&
-	     current->y + ith > cy &&
-	     current->y + ih < cy + ch &&
-	     tx + current->l * treeStepSize() < cx + cw &&
-	     tx + (current->l+1) * treeStepSize() > cx ) {
-	    // compute the clip rectangle the safe way
-
-	    int rtop = current->y + ih;
-	    int rbottom = current->y + ith;
-	    int rleft = tx + current->l*treeStepSize();
-	    int rright = rleft + treeStepSize();
-
-	    int crtop = TQMAX( rtop, cy );
-	    int crbottom = TQMIN( rbottom, cy+ch );
-	    int crleft = TQMAX( rleft, cx );
-	    int crright = TQMIN( rright, cx+cw );
-
-	    r.setRect( crleft-ox, crtop-oy,
-		       crright-crleft, crbottom-crtop );
-
-	    if ( r.isValid() ) {
-		p->save();
-		p->translate( rleft-ox, crtop-oy );
-		current->i->paintBranches( p, tqcolorGroup(), treeStepSize(),
-					   rtop - crtop, r.height() );
-		p->restore();
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( d->r->totalHeight() < cy + ch )
-	paintEmptyArea( p, TQRect( cx - ox, d->r->totalHeight() - oy,
-				  cw, cy + ch - d->r->totalHeight() ) );
-
-    int c = d->h->count()-1;
-    if ( c >= 0 &&
-	 d->h->cellPos( c ) + d->h->cellSize( c ) < cx + cw ) {
-	c = d->h->cellPos( c ) + d->h->cellSize( c );
-	paintEmptyArea( p, TQRect( c - ox, cy - oy, cx + cw - c, ch ) );
-    }
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Paints \a rect so that it looks like empty background using
-    painter \a p. \a rect is in widget coordinates, ready to be fed to
-    \a p.
-
-    The default function fills \a rect with the
-    viewport()->backgroundBrush().
-*/
-
-void TQListView::paintEmptyArea( TQPainter * p, const TQRect & rect )
-{
-    TQStyleOption opt( d->sortcolumn, 0 ); // ### hack; in 3.1, add a property in TQListView and TQHeader
-    TQStyle::SFlags how = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if ( isEnabled() )
-	how |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl( TQStyle::CC_ListView,
-				p, this, rect, tqcolorGroup(),
-				how, TQStyle::SC_ListView, TQStyle::SC_None,
-				opt );
-}
-
-
-/*
-    Rebuilds the list of drawable TQListViewItems. This function is
-    const so that const functions can call it without requiring
-    d->drawables to be mutable.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::buildDrawableList() const
-{
-    d->r->enforceSortOrder();
-
-    TQPtrStack<TQListViewPrivate::Pending> stack;
-    stack.push( new TQListViewPrivate::Pending( ((int)d->rootIsExpandable)-1,
-					       0, d->r ) );
-
-    // could mess with cy and ch in order to speed up vertical
-    // scrolling
-    int cy = contentsY();
-    int ch = ((TQListView *)this)->visibleHeight();
-    d->topPixel = cy + ch; // one below bottom
-    d->bottomPixel = cy - 1; // one above top
-
-    TQListViewPrivate::Pending * cur;
-
-    // used to work around lack of support for mutable
-    TQPtrList<TQListViewPrivate::DrawableItem> * dl;
-
-    dl = new TQPtrList<TQListViewPrivate::DrawableItem>;
-    dl->setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    if ( d->drawables )
-	delete ((TQListView *)this)->d->drawables;
-    ((TQListView *)this)->d->drawables = dl;
-
-    while ( !stack.isEmpty() ) {
-	cur = stack.pop();
-
-	int ih = cur->i->height();
-	int ith = cur->i->totalHeight();
-
-	// if this is not true, buildDrawableList has been called recursivly
-	TQ_ASSERT( dl == d->drawables );
-
-	// is this item, or its branch symbol, inside the viewport?
-	if ( cur->y + ith >= cy && cur->y < cy + ch ) {
-	    dl->append( new TQListViewPrivate::DrawableItem(cur));
-	    // perhaps adjust topPixel up to this item?  may be adjusted
-	    // down again if any tqchildren are not to be painted
-	    if ( cur->y < d->topPixel )
-		d->topPixel = cur->y;
-	    // bottompixel is easy: the bottom item drawn contains it
-	    d->bottomPixel = cur->y + ih - 1;
-	}
-
-	// push younger sibling of cur on the stack?
-	if ( cur->y + ith < cy+ch && cur->i->siblingItem )
-	    stack.push( new TQListViewPrivate::Pending(cur->l,
-						      cur->y + ith,
-						      cur->i->siblingItem));
-
-	// do any tqchildren of cur need to be painted?
-	if ( cur->i->isOpen() && cur->i->childCount() &&
-	     cur->y + ith > cy &&
-	     cur->y + ih < cy + ch ) {
-	    cur->i->enforceSortOrder();
-
-	    TQListViewItem * c = cur->i->childItem;
-	    int y = cur->y + ih;
-
-	    // if any of the tqchildren are not to be painted, skip them
-	    // and tqinvalidate topPixel
-	    while ( c && y + c->totalHeight() <= cy ) {
-		y += c->totalHeight();
-		c = c->siblingItem;
-		d->topPixel = cy + ch;
-	    }
-
-	    // push one child on the stack, if there is at least one
-	    // needing to be painted
-	    if ( c && y < cy+ch )
-		stack.push( new TQListViewPrivate::Pending( cur->l + 1,
-							   y, c ) );
-	}
-
-	delete cur;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::treeStepSize
-    \brief the number of pixels a child is offset from its parent
-
-    The default is 20 pixels.
-
-    Of course, this property is only meaningful for hierarchical list
-    views.
-*/
-
-int TQListView::treeStepSize() const
-{
-    return d->levelWidth;
-}
-
-void TQListView::setTreeStepSize( int size )
-{
-    if ( size != d->levelWidth ) {
-	d->levelWidth = size;
-	viewport()->tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inserts item \a i into the list view as a top-level item. You do
-    not need to call this unless you've called takeItem(\a i) or
-    TQListViewItem::takeItem(\a i) and need to reinsert \a i elsewhere.
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem::takeItem() takeItem()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::insertItem( TQListViewItem * i )
-{
-    if ( d->r ) // not for d->r itself
-	d->r->insertItem( i );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes and deletes all the items in this list view and triggers
-    an update.
-
-    Note that the currentChanged() signal is not emitted when this slot is invoked.
-    \sa triggerUpdate()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::clear()
-{
-    bool wasUpdatesEnabled = viewport()->isUpdatesEnabled();
-    viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE );
-    setContentsPos( 0, 0 );
-    viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( wasUpdatesEnabled );
-    bool block = tqsignalsBlocked();
-    blockSignals( TRUE );
-    d->clearing = TRUE;
-    clearSelection();
-    if ( d->iterators ) {
-	TQListViewItemIterator *i = d->iterators->first();
-	while ( i ) {
-	    i->curr = 0;
-	    i = d->iterators->next();
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( d->drawables )
-	d->drawables->clear();
-    delete d->dirtyItems;
-    d->dirtyItems = 0;
-    d->dirtyItemTimer->stop();
-
-    d->focusItem = 0;
-    d->selectAnchor = 0;
-    d->pressedItem = 0;
-    d->highlighted = 0;
-    d->startDragItem = 0;
-
-    // if it's down its downness makes no sense, so undown it
-    d->buttonDown = FALSE;
-
-    TQListViewItem *c = (TQListViewItem *)d->r->firstChild();
-    TQListViewItem *n;
-    while( c ) {
-	n = (TQListViewItem *)c->nextSibling();
-	delete c;
-	c = n;
-    }
-    resizeContents( d->h->tqsizeHint().width(), contentsHeight() );
-    delete d->r;
-    d->r = 0;
-    TQListViewPrivate::Root * r = new TQListViewPrivate::Root( this );
-    r->is_root = TRUE;
-    d->r = r;
-    d->r->setSelectable( FALSE );
-    blockSignals( block );
-    triggerUpdate();
-    d->clearing = FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setContentsPos( int x, int y )
-{
-    updateGeometries();
-    TQScrollView::setContentsPos( x, y );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Adds a \a width pixels wide column with the column header \a label
-    to the list view, and returns the index of the new column.
-
-    All columns apart from the first one are inserted to the right of
-    the existing ones.
-
-    If \a width is negative, the new column's \l WidthMode is set to
-    \c Maximum instead of \c Manual.
-
-    \sa setColumnText() setColumnWidth() setColumnWidthMode()
-*/
-int TQListView::addColumn( const TQString &label, int width )
-{
-    int c = d->h->addLabel( label, width );
-    d->column.resize( c+1 );
-    d->column.insert( c, new TQListViewPrivate::Column );
-    d->column[c]->wmode = width >=0 ? Manual : Maximum;
-    updateGeometries();
-    updateGeometry();
-    return c;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Adds a \a width pixels wide new column with the header \a label
-    and the \a iconset to the list view, and returns the index of the
-    column.
-
-    If \a width is negative, the new column's \l WidthMode is set to
-    \c Maximum, and to \c Manual otherwise.
-
-    \sa setColumnText() setColumnWidth() setColumnWidthMode()
-*/
-int TQListView::addColumn( const TQIconSet& iconset, const TQString &label, int width )
-{
-    int c = d->h->addLabel( iconset, label, width );
-    d->column.resize( c+1 );
-    d->column.insert( c, new TQListViewPrivate::Column );
-    d->column[c]->wmode = width >=0 ? Manual : Maximum;
-    updateGeometries();
-    updateGeometry();
-    return c;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::columns
-    \brief the number of columns in this list view
-
-    \sa addColumn(), removeColumn()
-*/
-
-int TQListView::columns() const
-{
-    return d->column.count();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the column at position \a index.
-
-    If no columns remain after the column is removed, the
-    list view will be cleared.
-
-    \sa clear()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::removeColumn( int index )
-{
-    if ( index < 0 || index > (int)d->column.count() - 1 )
-	return;
-
-    if ( d->vci ) {
-	TQListViewPrivate::ViewColumnInfo *vi = d->vci, *prev = 0, *next = 0;
-	for ( int i = 0; i < index; ++i ) {
-	    if ( vi ) {
-		prev = vi;
-		vi = vi->next;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( vi ) {
-	    next = vi->next;
-	    if ( prev )
-		prev->next = next;
-	    vi->next = 0;
-	    delete vi;
-	    if ( index == 0 )
-		d->vci = next;
-	}
-    }
-
-    TQListViewItemIterator it( this );
-    for ( ; it.current(); ++it ) {
-	TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo *ci = (TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo*)it.current()->columns;
-	if ( ci ) {
-	    TQListViewPrivate::ItemColumnInfo *prev = 0, *next = 0;
-	    for ( int i = 0; i < index; ++i ) {
-		if ( ci ) {
-		    prev = ci;
-		    ci = ci->next;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ( ci ) {
-		next = ci->next;
-		if ( prev )
-		    prev->next = next;
-		ci->next = 0;
-		delete ci;
-		if ( index == 0 )
-		    it.current()->columns = next;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    for ( int i = index; i < (int)d->column.size(); ++i ) {
-	TQListViewPrivate::Column *c = d->column.take( i );
-	if ( i == index )
-	    delete c;
-	if ( i < (int)d->column.size()-1 )
-	    d->column.insert( i, d->column[ i + 1 ] );
-    }
-    d->column.resize( d->column.size() - 1 );
-
-    d->h->removeLabel( index );
-    if (d->resizeMode == LastColumn)
-	d->h->setStretchEnabled( TRUE, d->h->count() - 1 );
-
-    updateGeometries();
-    if ( d->column.count() == 0 )
-	clear();
-    updateGeometry();
-    viewport()->update();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the heading of column \a column to \a label.
-
-    \sa columnText()
-*/
-void TQListView::setColumnText( int column, const TQString &label )
-{
-    if ( column < d->h->count() ) {
-	d->h->setLabel( column, label );
-	updateGeometries();
-	updateGeometry();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Sets the heading of column \a column to \a iconset and \a label.
-
-    \sa columnText()
-*/
-void TQListView::setColumnText( int column, const TQIconSet& iconset, const TQString &label )
-{
-    if ( column < d->h->count() ) {
-	d->h->setLabel( column, iconset, label );
-	updateGeometries();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the width of column \a column to \a w pixels. Note that if
-    the column has a \c WidthMode other than \c Manual, this width
-    setting may be subsequently overridden.
-
-    \sa columnWidth()
-*/
-void TQListView::setColumnWidth( int column, int w )
-{
-    int oldw = d->h->sectionSize( column );
-    if ( column < d->h->count() && oldw != w ) {
- 	d->h->resizeSection( column, w );
-	disconnect( d->h, TQT_SIGNAL(sizeChange(int,int,int)),
-		 this, TQT_SLOT(handleSizeChange(int,int,int)) );
-	emit d->h->sizeChange( column, oldw, w);
-	connect( d->h, TQT_SIGNAL(sizeChange(int,int,int)),
-		 this, TQT_SLOT(handleSizeChange(int,int,int)) );
-	updateGeometries();
-	viewport()->update();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the text of column \a c.
-
-    \sa setColumnText()
-*/
-
-TQString TQListView::columnText( int c ) const
-{
-    return d->h->label(c);
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the width of column \a c.
-
-    \sa setColumnWidth()
-*/
-
-int TQListView::columnWidth( int c ) const
-{
-    int actual = d->h->mapToActual( c );
-    return d->h->cellSize( actual );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQListView::WidthMode
-
-    This enum type describes how the width of a column in the view
-    changes.
-
-    \value Manual the column width does not change automatically.
-
-    \value Maximum  the column is automatically sized according to the
-    widths of all items in the column. (Note: The column never shrinks
-    in this case.) This means that the column is always resized to the
-    width of the item with the largest width in the column.
-
-    \sa setColumnWidth() setColumnWidthMode() columnWidth()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets column \a{c}'s width mode to \a mode. The default depends on
-    the original width argument to addColumn().
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem::width()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setColumnWidthMode( int c, WidthMode mode )
-{
-    if ( c < d->h->count() )
-	 d->column[c]->wmode = mode;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the \c WidthMode for column \a c.
-
-    \sa setColumnWidthMode()
-*/
-
-TQListView::WidthMode TQListView::columnWidthMode( int c ) const
-{
-    if ( c < d->h->count() )
-	return d->column[c]->wmode;
-    else
-	return Manual;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets column \a{column}'s tqalignment to \a align. The tqalignment is
-    ultimately passed to TQListViewItem::paintCell() for each item in
-    the list view. For horizontally aligned text with TQt::AlignLeft or
-    TQt::AlignHCenter the ellipsis (...) will be to the right, for
-    TQt::AlignRight the ellipsis will be to the left.
-
-    \sa TQt::AlignmentFlags
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setColumnAlignment( int column, int align )
-{
-    if ( column < 0 )
-	return;
-    if ( !d->vci )
-	d->vci = new TQListViewPrivate::ViewColumnInfo;
-    TQListViewPrivate::ViewColumnInfo * l = d->vci;
-    while( column ) {
-	if ( !l->next )
-	    l->next = new TQListViewPrivate::ViewColumnInfo;
-	l = l->next;
-	column--;
-    }
-    if ( l->align == align )
-	return;
-    l->align = align;
-    triggerUpdate();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tqalignment of column \a column. The default is \c
-    AlignAuto.
-
-    \sa TQt::AlignmentFlags
-*/
-
-int TQListView::columnAlignment( int column ) const
-{
-    if ( column < 0 || !d->vci )
-	return TQt::AlignAuto;
-    TQListViewPrivate::ViewColumnInfo * l = d->vci;
-    while( column ) {
-	if ( !l->next )
-	    l->next = new TQListViewPrivate::ViewColumnInfo;
-	l = l->next;
-	column--;
-    }
-    return l ? l->align : TQt::AlignAuto;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQListView::show()
-{
-    // Reimplemented to setx the correct background mode and viewed
-    // area size.
-    if ( !isVisible() ) {
-	reconfigureItems();
-	updateGeometries();
-    }
-    TQScrollView::show();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Updates the sizes of the viewport, header, scroll bars and so on.
-
-    \warning Don't call this directly; call triggerUpdate() instead.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::updateContents()
-{
-    if ( d->updateHeader )
-	header()->adjustHeaderSize();
-    d->updateHeader = FALSE;
-    if ( !isVisible() ) {
-	// Not in response to a setText/setPixmap any more.
-	d->useDoubleBuffer = FALSE;
-
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( d->drawables ) {
-	delete d->drawables;
-	d->drawables = 0;
-    }
-    viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE );
-    updateGeometries();
-    viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE );
-    viewport()->tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    d->useDoubleBuffer = FALSE;
-}
-
-
-void TQListView::updateGeometries()
-{
-    int th = d->r->totalHeight();
-    int tw = d->h->headerWidth();
-    if ( d->h->offset() &&
-	 tw < d->h->offset() + d->h->width() )
-	horizontalScrollBar()->setValue( tw - TQListView::d->h->width() );
-#if 0
-    if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() && d->h->offset() != horizontalScrollBar()->value() )
-	horizontalScrollBar()->setValue( d->h->offset() );
-#endif
-    verticalScrollBar()->raise();
-    resizeContents( tw, th );
-    if ( d->h->isHidden() ) {
-	setMargins( 0, 0, 0, 0 );
-    } else {
-	TQSize hs( d->h->tqsizeHint() );
-	setMargins( 0, hs.height(), 0, 0 );
-	d->h->setGeometry( viewport()->x(), viewport()->y()-hs.height(),
-			   visibleWidth(), hs.height() );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Updates the display when the section \a section has changed size
-    from the old size, \a os, to the new size, \a ns.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::handleSizeChange( int section, int os, int ns )
-{
-    bool upe = viewport()->isUpdatesEnabled();
-    viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE );
-    int sx = horizontalScrollBar()->value();
-    bool sv = horizontalScrollBar()->isVisible();
-    updateGeometries();
-    bool fullRepaint = d->fullRepaintOnComlumnChange || sx != horizontalScrollBar()->value()
-		       || sv != horizontalScrollBar()->isVisible();
-    d->fullRepaintOnComlumnChange = FALSE;
-    viewport()->setUpdatesEnabled( upe );
-
-    if ( fullRepaint ) {
-	viewport()->tqrepaint( FALSE );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    int actual = d->h->mapToActual( section );
-    int dx = ns - os;
-    int left = d->h->cellPos( actual ) - contentsX() + d->h->cellSize( actual );
-    if ( dx > 0 )
-	left -= dx;
-    if ( left < visibleWidth() )
-	viewport()->scroll( dx, 0, TQRect( left, 0, visibleWidth() - left, visibleHeight() ) );
-    viewport()->tqrepaint( left - 4 - d->ellipsisWidth, 0, 4 + d->ellipsisWidth,
-			 visibleHeight(), FALSE ); // border between the items and ellipses width
-
-    // map auto to left for now. Need to fix this once we support
-    // reverse tqlayout on the listview.
-    int align = columnAlignment( section );
-    if ( align == TQt::AlignAuto ) align = TQt::AlignLeft;
-    if ( align != TQt::AlignAuto && align != TQt::AlignLeft )
-	viewport()->tqrepaint( d->h->cellPos( actual ) - contentsX(), 0,
-			     d->h->cellSize( actual ), visibleHeight() );
-
-    if ( currentItem() && currentItem()->renameBox ) {
-	TQRect r = tqitemRect( currentItem() );
-	r = TQRect( viewportToContents( r.topLeft() ), r.size() );
-	r.setLeft( header()->sectionPos( currentItem()->renameCol ) );
-	r.setWidth( header()->sectionSize( currentItem()->renameCol ) - 1 );
-	if ( currentItem()->renameCol == 0 )
-	    r.setLeft( r.left() + itemMargin() + ( currentItem()->depth() +
-						   ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0 ) ) * treeStepSize() - 1 );
-	if ( currentItem()->pixmap( currentItem()->renameCol ) )
-	    r.setLeft( r.left() + currentItem()->pixmap( currentItem()->renameCol )->width() );
-	if ( r.x() - contentsX() < 0 )
-	    r.setX( contentsX() );
-	if ( r.width() > visibleWidth() )
-	    r.setWidth( visibleWidth() );
-	addChild( currentItem()->renameBox, r.x(), r.y() );
-	currentItem()->renameBox->resize( r.size() );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*
-    Very smart internal slot that repaints \e only the items that need
-    to be repainted. Don't use this directly; call repaintItem()
-    instead.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::updateDirtyItems()
-{
-    if ( d->timer->isActive() || !d->dirtyItems )
-	return;
-    TQRect ir;
-    TQPtrDictIterator<void> it( *(d->dirtyItems) );
-    TQListViewItem * i;
-    while( (i = (TQListViewItem *)(it.currentKey())) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	ir = ir.unite( tqitemRect(i) );
-    }
-    if ( !ir.isEmpty() )  {		      // rectangle to be repainted
-	if ( ir.x() < 0 )
-	    ir.moveBy( -ir.x(), 0 );
-	viewport()->tqrepaint( ir, FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-
-void TQListView::makeVisible()
-{
-    if ( d->focusItem )
-	ensureItemVisible( d->focusItem );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Ensures that the header is correctly sized and positioned when the
-    resize event \a e occurs.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    TQScrollView::resizeEvent( e );
-    d->fullRepaintOnComlumnChange = TRUE;
-    d->h->resize( visibleWidth(), d->h->height() );
-
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-    #warning [FIXME] Why do I have to force the resize event here under Qt4?
-    if (d->h->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created) == 0)
-        d->h->resizeEvent( e );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListView::viewportResizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    TQScrollView::viewportResizeEvent( e );
-    d->h->resize( visibleWidth(), d->h->height() );
-    if ( resizeMode() != NoColumn && currentItem() && currentItem()->renameBox ) {
-	TQRect r = tqitemRect( currentItem() );
-	r = TQRect( viewportToContents( r.topLeft() ), r.size() );
-	r.setLeft( header()->sectionPos( currentItem()->renameCol ) );
-	r.setWidth( header()->sectionSize( currentItem()->renameCol ) - 1 );
-	if ( currentItem()->renameCol == 0 )
-	    r.setLeft( r.left() + itemMargin() + ( currentItem()->depth() +
-						   ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0 ) ) * treeStepSize() - 1 );
-	if ( currentItem()->pixmap( currentItem()->renameCol ) )
-	    r.setLeft( r.left() + currentItem()->pixmap( currentItem()->renameCol )->width() );
-	if ( r.x() - contentsX() < 0 )
-	    r.setX( contentsX() );
-	if ( r.width() > visibleWidth() )
-	    r.setWidth( visibleWidth() );
-	addChild( currentItem()->renameBox, r.x(), r.y() );
-	currentItem()->renameBox->resize( r.size() );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Triggers a size, tqgeometry and content update during the next
-    iteration of the event loop. Ensures that there'll be just one
-    update to avoid flicker.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::triggerUpdate()
-{
-    if ( !isVisible() || !isUpdatesEnabled() ) {
-	// Not in response to a setText/setPixmap any more.
-	d->useDoubleBuffer = FALSE;
-
-	return; // it will update when shown, or something.
-    }
-
-    d->timer->start( 0, TRUE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Redirects the event \a e relating to object \a o, for the viewport
-    to mousePressEvent(), keyPressEvent() and friends.
-*/
-
-bool TQListView::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->h) &&
-	 e->type() >= TQEvent::MouseButtonPress &&
-	 e->type() <= TQEvent::MouseMove ) {
-	TQMouseEvent * me = (TQMouseEvent *)e;
-	TQMouseEvent me2( me->type(),
-			 TQPoint( me->pos().x(),
-				 me->pos().y() - d->h->height() ),
-			 me->button(), me->state() );
-	switch( me2.type() ) {
-	case TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick:
-	    if ( me2.button() == Qt::RightButton )
-		return TRUE;
-	    break;
-	case TQEvent::MouseMove:
-	    if ( me2.state() & Qt::RightButton ) {
-		viewportMouseMoveEvent( &me2 );
-		return TRUE;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    break;
-	}
-    } else if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(viewport()) ) {
-	TQFocusEvent * fe = (TQFocusEvent *)e;
-
-	switch( e->type() ) {
-	case TQEvent::FocusIn:
-	    focusInEvent( fe );
-	    return TRUE;
-	case TQEvent::FocusOut:
-	    focusOutEvent( fe );
-	    return TRUE;
-	default:
-	    // nothing
-	    break;
-	}
-    } else if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQLineEdit*>(o) ) {
-	if ( currentItem() && currentItem()->renameBox ) {
-	    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
-		TQKeyEvent *ke = (TQKeyEvent*)e;
-		if ( ke->key() == Qt::Key_Return ||
-		     ke->key() == Qt::Key_Enter ) {
-		    currentItem()->okRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-		    return TRUE;
-		} else if ( ke->key() == Key_Escape ) {
-		    currentItem()->cancelRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-		    return TRUE;
-		}
-	    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut ) {
-		if ( ( (TQFocusEvent*)e )->reason() != TQFocusEvent::Popup ) {
-		    TQCustomEvent *e = new TQCustomEvent( 9999 );
-		    TQApplication::postEvent( o, e );
-		    return TRUE;
-		}
-	    } else if ( e->type() == 9999 ) {
-		if ( d->defRenameAction == Reject )
-		    currentItem()->cancelRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-		else
-		    currentItem()->okRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-		return TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    return TQScrollView::eventFilter( o, e );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the list view containing this item.
-
-    Note that this function traverses the items to the root to find the
-    listview. This function will return 0 for taken items - see
-    TQListViewItem::takeItem()
-*/
-
-TQListView * TQListViewItem::listView() const
-{
-    const TQListViewItem* c = this;
-    while ( c && !c->is_root )
-	c = c->parentItem;
-    if ( !c )
-	return 0;
-    return ((TQListViewPrivate::Root*)c)->theListView();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the depth of this item.
-*/
-int TQListViewItem::depth() const
-{
-    return parentItem ? parentItem->depth()+1 : -1; // -1 == the hidden root
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the item immediately above this item on the
-    screen. This is usually the item's closest older sibling, but it
-    may also be its parent or its next older sibling's youngest child,
-    or something else if anyoftheabove->height() returns 0. Returns 0
-    if there is no item immediately above this item.
-
-    This function assumes that all parents of this item are open (i.e.
-    that this item is visible, or can be made visible by scrolling).
-
-    This function might be relatively slow because of the tree
-    traversions needed to find the correct item.
-
-    \sa itemBelow() TQListView::tqitemRect()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem * TQListViewItem::itemAbove()
-{
-    if ( !parentItem )
-	return 0;
-
-    TQListViewItem * c = parentItem;
-    if ( c->childItem != this ) {
-	c = c->childItem;
-	while( c && c->siblingItem != this )
-	    c = c->siblingItem;
-	if ( !c )
-	    return 0;
-	while( c->isOpen() && c->childItem ) {
-	    c = c->childItem;
-	    while( c->siblingItem )
-		c = c->siblingItem;		// assign c's sibling to c
-	}
-    }
-    if ( c && ( !c->height() || !c->isEnabled() ) )
-	return c->itemAbove();
-    return c;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the item immediately below this item on the
-    screen. This is usually the item's eldest child, but it may also
-    be its next younger sibling, its parent's next younger sibling,
-    grandparent's, etc., or something else if anyoftheabove->height()
-    returns 0. Returns 0 if there is no item immediately below this
-    item.
-
-    This function assumes that all parents of this item are open (i.e.
-    that this item is visible or can be made visible by scrolling).
-
-    \sa itemAbove() TQListView::tqitemRect()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem * TQListViewItem::itemBelow()
-{
-    TQListViewItem * c = 0;
-    if ( isOpen() && childItem ) {
-	c = childItem;
-    } else if ( siblingItem ) {
-	c = siblingItem;
-    } else if ( parentItem ) {
-	c = this;
-	do {
-	    c = c->parentItem;
-	} while( c->parentItem && !c->siblingItem );
-	if ( c )
-	    c = c->siblingItem;
-    }
-    if ( c && ( !c->height() || !c->isEnabled() ) )
-	return c->itemBelow();
-    return c;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQListViewItem::isOpen () const
-
-    Returns TRUE if this list view item has tqchildren \e and they are
-    not explicitly hidden; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setOpen()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Returns the first (top) child of this item, or 0 if this item has
-    no tqchildren.
-
-    Note that the tqchildren are not guaranteed to be sorted properly.
-    TQListView and TQListViewItem try to postpone or avoid sorting to
-    the greatest degree possible, in order to keep the user interface
-    snappy.
-
-    \sa nextSibling() sortChildItems()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem* TQListViewItem::firstChild() const
-{
-    enforceSortOrder();
-    return childItem;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the parent of this item, or 0 if this item has no parent.
-
-    \sa firstChild(), nextSibling()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem* TQListViewItem::parent() const
-{
-    if ( !parentItem || parentItem->is_root ) return 0;
-    return parentItem;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQListViewItem* TQListViewItem::nextSibling() const
-
-    Returns the sibling item below this item, or 0 if there is no
-    sibling item after this item.
-
-    Note that the siblings are not guaranteed to be sorted properly.
-    TQListView and TQListViewItem try to postpone or avoid sorting to
-    the greatest degree possible, in order to keep the user interface
-    snappy.
-
-    \sa firstChild() sortChildItems()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQListViewItem::childCount () const
-
-    Returns how many tqchildren this item has. The count only includes
-    the item's immediate tqchildren.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the height of this item in pixels. This does not include
-    the height of any tqchildren; totalHeight() returns that.
-*/
-int TQListViewItem::height() const
-{
-    TQListViewItem * that = (TQListViewItem *)this;
-    if ( !that->configured ) {
-	that->configured = TRUE;
-	that->setup(); // ### virtual non-const function called in const
-    }
-
-    return visible ? ownHeight : 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Call this function when the value of width() may have changed for
-    column \a c. Normally, you should call this if text(c) changes.
-    Passing -1 for \a c indicates that all columns may have changed.
-    It is more efficient to pass -1 if two or more columns have
-    changed than to call widthChanged() separately for each one.
-
-    \sa width()
-*/
-void TQListViewItem::widthChanged( int c ) const
-{
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv )
-	lv->widthChanged( this, c );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void  TQListView::dropped ( TQDropEvent * e )
-
-    This signal is emitted, when a drop event occurred on the
-    viewport (not onto an item).
-
-    \a e provides all the information about the drop.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::selectionChanged()
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the set of selected items has
-    changed (normally before the screen update). It is available in
-    \c Single, \c Multi, and \c Extended selection modes, but is most
-    useful in \c Multi selection mode.
-
-    \warning Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-
-    \sa setSelected() TQListViewItem::setSelected()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::pressed( TQListViewItem *item )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the mouse button
-    in a list view. \a item is the list view item on which the user
-    pressed the mouse button, or 0 if the user didn't press the mouse
-    on an item.
-
-    \warning Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::pressed( TQListViewItem *item, const TQPoint &pnt, int c )
-
-    \overload
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the mouse button
-    in a list view. \a item is the list view item on which the user
-    pressed the mouse button, or 0 if the user didn't press the mouse
-    on an item. \a pnt is the position of the mouse cursor in global
-    coordinates, and \a c is the column where the mouse cursor was
-    when the user pressed the mouse button.
-
-    \warning Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::clicked( TQListViewItem *item )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the user clicks (mouse pressed \e
-    and mouse released) in the list view. \a item is the clicked list
-    view item, or 0 if the user didn't click on an item.
-
-    \warning Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::mouseButtonClicked(int button, TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos, int c)
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the user clicks (mouse pressed \e
-    and mouse released) in the list view at position \a pos. \a button
-    is the mouse button that the user pressed, \a item is the clicked
-    list view item or 0 if the user didn't click on an item. If \a
-    item is not 0, \a c is the list view column into which the user
-    pressed; if \a item is 0 \a{c}'s value is undefined.
-
-    \warning Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::mouseButtonPressed(int button, TQListViewItem * item, const TQPoint & pos, int c)
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the user pressed the mouse button
-    in the list view at position \a pos. \a button is the mouse button
-    which the user pressed, \a item is the pressed list view item or 0
-    if the user didn't press on an item. If \a item is not 0, \a c is
-    the list view column into which the user pressed; if \a item is 0
-    \a{c}'s value is undefined.
-
-    \warning Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::clicked( TQListViewItem *item, const TQPoint &pnt, int c )
-
-    \overload
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the user clicks (mouse pressed \e
-    and mouse released) in the list view. \a item is the clicked list
-    view item, or 0 if the user didn't click on an item. \a pnt is the
-    position where the user has clicked in global coordinates. If \a
-    item is not 0, \a c is the list view column into which the user
-    pressed; if \a item is 0 \a{c}'s value is undefined.
-
-    \warning Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::selectionChanged( TQListViewItem * )
-
-    \overload
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the selected item has changed in
-    \c Single selection mode (normally after the screen update). The
-    argument is the newly selected item. If the selection is cleared
-    (when, for example, the user clicks in the unused area of the list
-    view) then this signal will not be emitted.
-
-    In \c Multi selection mode, use the no argument overload of this
-    signal.
-
-    \warning Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-
-    \sa setSelected() TQListViewItem::setSelected() currentChanged()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::currentChanged( TQListViewItem * )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the current item has changed
-    (normally after the screen update). The current item is the item
-    responsible for indicating keyboard focus.
-
-    The argument is the newly current item, or 0 if the change made no
-    item current. This can happen, for example, if all items in the
-    list view are deleted.
-
-    \warning Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-
-    \sa setCurrentItem() currentItem()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::expanded( TQListViewItem *item )
-
-    This signal is emitted when \a item has been expanded, i.e. when
-    the tqchildren of \a item are shown.
-
-    \sa setOpen() collapsed()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::collapsed( TQListViewItem *item )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the \a item has been collapsed, i.e.
-    when the tqchildren of \a item are hidden.
-
-    \sa setOpen() expanded()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Processes the mouse press event \a e on behalf of the viewed widget.
-*/
-void TQListView::contentsMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    contentsMousePressEventEx( e );
-}
-
-void TQListView::contentsMousePressEventEx( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( !e )
-	return;
-
-    if ( !d->ignoreEditAfterFocus )
-	d->startEdit = TRUE;
-    d->ignoreEditAfterFocus = FALSE;
-
-    if ( currentItem() && currentItem()->renameBox &&
-	 !tqitemRect( currentItem() ).contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-	d->startEdit = FALSE;
-	if ( d->defRenameAction == Reject )
-	    currentItem()->cancelRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-	else
-	    currentItem()->okRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-    }
-
-    d->startDragItem = 0;
-    d->dragStartPos = e->pos();
-    TQPoint vp = contentsToViewport( e->pos() );
-
-    d->ignoreDoubleClick = FALSE;
-    d->buttonDown = TRUE;
-
-    TQListViewItem * i = itemAt( vp );
-    d->pressedEmptyArea = e->y() > contentsHeight();
-    if ( i && !i->isEnabled() )
-	return;
-    if ( d->startEdit && ( i != currentItem() || (i && !i->isSelected()) ) )
-	d->startEdit = FALSE;
-    TQListViewItem *oldCurrent = currentItem();
-
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::RightButton && (e->state() & ControlButton ) )
-	goto emit_Q_SIGNALS;
-
-    if ( !i ) {
-	if ( !( e->state() & ControlButton ) )
-	    clearSelection();
-	goto emit_Q_SIGNALS;
-    } else {
-	// No new anchor when using shift
-	if ( !(e->state() & ShiftButton) )
- 	    d->selectAnchor = i;
-    }
-
-    if ( (i->isExpandable() || i->childCount()) &&
-	 d->h->mapToLogical( d->h->cellAt( vp.x() ) ) == 0 ) {
-	int x1 = vp.x() +
-		 d->h->offset() -
-		 d->h->cellPos( d->h->mapToActual( 0 ) );
-	TQPtrListIterator<TQListViewPrivate::DrawableItem> it( *(d->drawables) );
-	while( it.current() && it.current()->i != i )
-	    ++it;
-
-	if ( it.current() ) {
-            x1 -= treeStepSize() * (it.current()->l - 1);
-	    TQStyle::SubControl ctrl =
-		tqstyle().querySubControl( TQStyle::CC_ListView,
-					 this, TQPoint(x1, e->pos().y()),
-					 TQStyleOption(i) );
-	    if( ctrl == TQStyle::SC_ListViewExpand &&
-		e->type() == tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ListViewExpand_SelectMouseType, this)) {
-		d->buttonDown = FALSE;
-		if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-		    bool close = i->isOpen();
-		    setOpen( i, !close );
-		    // ### Looks dangerous, removed because of reentrance problems
-		    // tqApp->processEvents();
-		    if ( !d->focusItem ) {
-			d->focusItem = i;
-			repaintItem( d->focusItem );
-			emit currentChanged( d->focusItem );
-		    }
-		    if ( close ) {
-			bool newCurrent = FALSE;
-			TQListViewItem *ci = d->focusItem;
-			while ( ci ) {
-			    if ( ci->parent() && ci->parent() == i ) {
-				newCurrent = TRUE;
-				break;
-			    }
-			    ci = ci->parent();
-			}
-			if ( newCurrent ) {
-			    setCurrentItem( i );
-			}
-		    }
-		}
-		d->ignoreDoubleClick = TRUE;
-		d->buttonDown = FALSE;
-		goto emit_Q_SIGNALS;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    d->select = d->selectionMode == Multi ? !i->isSelected() : TRUE;
-
-    {// calculate activatedP
-	activatedByClick = TRUE;
-	TQPoint topLeft = tqitemRect( i ).topLeft(); //### inefficient?
-	activatedP = vp - topLeft;
-	int xdepth = treeStepSize() * (i->depth() + (rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0))
-		     + itemMargin();
-
-        // This returns the position of the first visual section?!? Shouldn't that always be 0? Keep it just in case we have missed something.
-	xdepth += d->h->sectionPos( d->h->mapToSection( 0 ) );
-	activatedP.rx() -= xdepth;
-    }
-    i->activate();
-    activatedByClick = FALSE;
-
-    if ( i != d->focusItem )
-	setCurrentItem( i );
-    else
-	repaintItem( i );
-
-    d->pressedSelected = i && i->isSelected();
-
-    if ( i->isSelectable() && selectionMode() != NoSelection ) {
-	if ( selectionMode() == Single )
-	    setSelected( i, TRUE );
-	else if ( selectionMode() == Multi )
-	    setSelected( i, d->select );
-	else if ( selectionMode() == Extended ) {
-	    bool changed = FALSE;
-	    if ( !(e->state() & (ControlButton | ShiftButton)) ) {
-		if ( !i->isSelected() ) {
-		    bool blocked = tqsignalsBlocked();
-		    blockSignals( TRUE );
-		    clearSelection();
-		    blockSignals( blocked );
-		    i->setSelected( TRUE );
-		    changed = TRUE;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		if ( e->state() & ShiftButton )
-		    d->pressedSelected = FALSE;
-		if ( (e->state() & ControlButton) && !(e->state() & ShiftButton) && i ) {
-		    i->setSelected( !i->isSelected() );
-		    changed = TRUE;
-		    d->pressedSelected = FALSE;
-		} else if ( !oldCurrent || !i || oldCurrent == i ) {
-		    if ( (bool)i->selected != d->select ) {
-			changed = TRUE;
-			i->setSelected( d->select );
-		    }
-		// Shift pressed in Extended mode ---
-		} else {
-		    changed = selectRange( i, oldCurrent, d->selectAnchor );
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ( changed ) {
-		d->useDoubleBuffer = TRUE;
-		triggerUpdate();
-		emit selectionChanged();
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-		TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::Selection );
-#endif
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
- emit_Q_SIGNALS:
-
-    if ( i && !d->buttonDown &&
-	 vp.x() + contentsX() < itemMargin() + ( i->depth() + ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0 ) ) * treeStepSize() )
-	i = 0;
-    d->pressedItem = i;
-
-    int c = i ? d->h->mapToLogical( d->h->cellAt( vp.x() ) ) : -1;
-    if ( !i || ( i && i->isEnabled() ) ) {
-	emit pressed( i );
-	emit pressed( i, viewport()->mapToGlobal( vp ), c );
-    }
-    emit mouseButtonPressed( e->button(), i, viewport()->mapToGlobal( vp ), c );
-
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::RightButton && i == d->pressedItem ) {
-	if ( !i && !(e->state() & ControlButton) )
-	    clearSelection();
-
-	emit rightButtonPressed( i, viewport()->mapToGlobal( vp ), c );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQListView::contentsContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !tqreceivers( TQT_SIGNAL(contextMenuRequested(TQListViewItem*,const TQPoint&,int)) ) ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( e->reason() == TQContextMenuEvent::Keyboard ) {
-	TQListViewItem *item = currentItem();
-	if ( item ) {
-	    TQRect r = tqitemRect( item );
-	    TQPoint p = r.topLeft();
-	    if ( allColumnsShowFocus() )
-		p += TQPoint( width() / 2, ( r.height() / 2 ) );
-	    else
-		p += TQPoint( columnWidth( 0 ) / 2, ( r.height() / 2 ) );
-	    p.rx() = TQMAX( 0, p.x() );
-	    p.rx() = TQMIN( visibleWidth(), p.x() );
-	    emit contextMenuRequested( item, viewport()->mapToGlobal( p ), -1 );
-	}
-    } else {
-	TQPoint vp = contentsToViewport( e->pos() );
-	TQListViewItem * i = itemAt( vp );
-	int c = i ? d->h->mapToLogical( d->h->cellAt( vp.x() ) ) : -1;
-	emit contextMenuRequested( i, viewport()->mapToGlobal( vp ), c );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Processes the mouse release event \a e on behalf of the viewed widget.
-*/
-void TQListView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    contentsMouseReleaseEventEx( e );
-}
-
-void TQListView::contentsMouseReleaseEventEx( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    d->startDragItem = 0;
-    bool emitClicked = !d->pressedItem || d->buttonDown;
-    d->buttonDown = FALSE;
-    // delete and disconnect autoscroll timer, if we have one
-    if ( d->scrollTimer ) {
-	disconnect( d->scrollTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-		    this, TQT_SLOT(doAutoScroll()) );
-	d->scrollTimer->stop();
-	delete d->scrollTimer;
-	d->scrollTimer = 0;
-    }
-
-    if ( !e )
-	return;
-
-    if ( d->selectionMode == Extended &&
-	 d->focusItem == d->pressedItem &&
-	 d->pressedSelected && d->focusItem &&
-	 e->button() == Qt::LeftButton) {
-	bool block = tqsignalsBlocked();
-	blockSignals( TRUE );
-	clearSelection();
-	blockSignals( block );
-	d->focusItem->setSelected( TRUE );
-	emit selectionChanged();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::Selection );
-#endif
-    }
-
-    TQPoint vp = contentsToViewport(e->pos());
-    TQListViewItem *i = itemAt( vp );
-    if ( i && !i->isEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    if ( i && i == d->pressedItem && (i->isExpandable() || i->childCount()) &&
-	 !d->h->mapToLogical( d->h->cellAt( vp.x() ) ) && e->button() == Qt::LeftButton &&
-	 e->type() == tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ListViewExpand_SelectMouseType, this)) {
-	TQPtrListIterator<TQListViewPrivate::DrawableItem> it( *(d->drawables) );
-	while( it.current() && it.current()->i != i )
-	    ++it;
-	if ( it.current() ) {
-	    int x1 = vp.x() + d->h->offset() - d->h->cellPos( d->h->mapToActual( 0 ) ) -
-		     (treeStepSize() * (it.current()->l - 1));
-	    TQStyle::SubControl ctrl = tqstyle().querySubControl( TQStyle::CC_ListView,
-							       this, TQPoint(x1, e->pos().y()),
-							       TQStyleOption(i) );
-	    if( ctrl == TQStyle::SC_ListViewExpand ) {
-		bool close = i->isOpen();
-		setOpen( i, !close );
-		// ### Looks dangerous, removed because of reentrance problems
-		// tqApp->processEvents();
-		if ( !d->focusItem ) {
-		    d->focusItem = i;
-		    repaintItem( d->focusItem );
-		    emit currentChanged( d->focusItem );
-		}
-		if ( close ) {
-		    bool newCurrent = FALSE;
-		    TQListViewItem *ci = d->focusItem;
-		    while ( ci ) {
-			if ( ci->parent() && ci->parent() == i ) {
-			    newCurrent = TRUE;
-			    break;
-			}
-			ci = ci->parent();
-		    }
-		    if ( newCurrent )
-			setCurrentItem( i );
-		    d->ignoreDoubleClick = TRUE;
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( i == d->pressedItem && i && i->isSelected() && e->button() == Qt::LeftButton && d->startEdit ) {
-	TQRect r = tqitemRect( currentItem() );
-	r = TQRect( viewportToContents( r.topLeft() ), r.size() );
-	d->pressedColumn = header()->sectionAt(  e->pos().x() );
-	r.setLeft( header()->sectionPos( d->pressedColumn ) );
-	r.setWidth( header()->sectionSize( d->pressedColumn ) - 1 );
-	if ( d->pressedColumn == 0 )
-	    r.setLeft( r.left() + itemMargin() + ( currentItem()->depth() +
-						   ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0 ) ) * treeStepSize() - 1 );
-	if ( r.contains( e->pos() ) &&
-	     !( e->state() & ( ShiftButton | ControlButton ) ) )
-	    d->renameTimer->start( TQApplication::doubleClickInterval(), TRUE );
-    }
-    // Check if we are clicking at the root decoration.
-    int rootColumnPos = d->h->sectionPos( 0 );
-    if ( i && vp.x() + contentsX() < rootColumnPos + itemMargin() + ( i->depth() + ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0 ) ) * treeStepSize()
-         && vp.x() + contentsX() > rootColumnPos ) {
-        i = 0;
-    }
-    emitClicked = emitClicked && d->pressedItem == i;
-    d->pressedItem = 0;
-    d->highlighted = 0;
-
-    if ( emitClicked ) {
-	if ( !i || ( i && i->isEnabled() ) ) {
-	    emit clicked( i );
-	    emit clicked( i, viewport()->mapToGlobal( vp ), d->h->mapToLogical( d->h->cellAt( vp.x() ) ) );
-	}
-	emit mouseButtonClicked( e->button(), i, viewport()->mapToGlobal( vp ),
-				 i ? d->h->mapToLogical( d->h->cellAt( vp.x() ) ) : -1 );
-
-	if ( e->button() == Qt::RightButton ) {
-	    if ( !i ) {
- 		if ( !(e->state() & ControlButton) )
-		    clearSelection();
-		emit rightButtonClicked( 0, viewport()->mapToGlobal( vp ), -1 );
-		return;
-	    }
-
-	    int c = d->h->mapToLogical( d->h->cellAt( vp.x() ) );
-	    emit rightButtonClicked( i, viewport()->mapToGlobal( vp ), c );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Processes the mouse double-click event \a e on behalf of the viewed widget.
-*/
-void TQListView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    d->renameTimer->stop();
-    d->startEdit = FALSE;
-    if ( !e || e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-
-    // ensure that the following mouse moves and eventual release is
-    // ignored.
-    d->buttonDown = FALSE;
-
-    if ( d->ignoreDoubleClick ) {
-	d->ignoreDoubleClick = FALSE;
-	return;
-    }
-
-    TQPoint vp = contentsToViewport(e->pos());
-
-    TQListViewItem * i = itemAt( vp );
-
-    // we emit doubleClicked when the item is null (or enabled) to be consistent with
-    // rightButtonClicked etc.
-    if ( !i || i->isEnabled() ) {
-	int c = d->h->mapToLogical( d->h->cellAt( vp.x() ) );
-	emit doubleClicked( i, viewport()->mapToGlobal( vp ), c );
-    }
-
-    if ( !i || !i->isEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    if ( !i->isOpen() ) {
-	if ( i->isExpandable() || i->childCount() )
-	    setOpen( i, TRUE );
-    } else {
-	setOpen( i, FALSE );
-    }
-
-    // we emit the 'old' obsolete doubleClicked only if the item is not null and enabled
-    emit doubleClicked( i );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Processes the mouse move event \a e on behalf of the viewed widget.
-*/
-void TQListView::contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( !e )
-	return;
-
-    bool needAutoScroll = FALSE;
-
-    TQPoint vp = contentsToViewport(e->pos());
-
-    TQListViewItem * i = itemAt( vp );
-    if ( i && !i->isEnabled() )
-	return;
-    if ( i != d->highlighted &&
-	 !(d->pressedItem &&
-	   ( d->pressedItem->isSelected() || d->selectionMode == NoSelection ) &&
-	   d->pressedItem->dragEnabled() )) {
-
-	if ( i ) {
-	    emit onItem( i );
-	} else {
-	    emit onViewport();
-	}
-	d->highlighted = i;
-    }
-
-    if ( d->startDragItem )
-	i = d->startDragItem;
-
-    if ( !d->buttonDown ||
-	 ( ( e->state() & Qt::LeftButton ) != Qt::LeftButton &&
-	   ( e->state() & Qt::MidButton ) != Qt::MidButton &&
-	   ( e->state() & Qt::RightButton ) != Qt::RightButton ) )
-	return;
-
-    if ( d->pressedItem &&
-	 ( d->pressedItem->isSelected() || d->selectionMode == NoSelection ) &&
-	 d->pressedItem->dragEnabled() ) {
-
-	if ( !d->startDragItem ) {
-	    setSelected( d->pressedItem, TRUE );
-	    d->startDragItem = d->pressedItem;
-	}
-	if ( ( d->dragStartPos - e->pos() ).manhattanLength() > TQApplication::startDragDistance() ) {
-	    d->buttonDown = FALSE;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-	    startDrag();
-#endif
-	}
-	return;
-    }
-
-    // check, if we need to scroll
-    if ( vp.y() > visibleHeight() || vp.y() < 0 )
-	needAutoScroll = TRUE;
-
-    // if we need to scroll and no autoscroll timer is started,
-    // connect the timer
-    if ( needAutoScroll && !d->scrollTimer ) {
-	d->scrollTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-	connect( d->scrollTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-		 this, TQT_SLOT(doAutoScroll()) );
-	d->scrollTimer->start( 100, FALSE );
-	// call it once manually
-	doAutoScroll( vp );
-    }
-
-    // if we don't need to autoscroll
-    if ( !needAutoScroll ) {
-	// if there is a autoscroll timer, delete it
-	if ( d->scrollTimer ) {
-	    disconnect( d->scrollTimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-			this, TQT_SLOT(doAutoScroll()) );
-	    d->scrollTimer->stop();
-	    delete d->scrollTimer;
-	    d->scrollTimer = 0;
-	}
-	// call this to select an item ( using the pos from the event )
-	doAutoScroll( vp );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This slot handles auto-scrolling when the mouse button is pressed
-    and the mouse is outside the widget.
-*/
-void TQListView::doAutoScroll()
-{
-    doAutoScroll( TQPoint() );
-}
-
-/*
-  Handles auto-scrolling when the mouse button is pressed
-  and the mouse is outside the widget.
-
-  If cursorPos is (0,0) (isNull == TRUE) it uses the current TQCursor::pos, otherwise it uses cursorPos
-*/
-void TQListView::doAutoScroll( const TQPoint &cursorPos )
-{
-    TQPoint pos = cursorPos.isNull() ? TQT_TQPOINT_OBJECT(viewport()->mapFromGlobal( TQCursor::pos() )) :  cursorPos;
-    if ( !d->focusItem || ( d->pressedEmptyArea && pos.y() > contentsHeight() ) )
-	return;
-
-    bool down = pos.y() > tqitemRect( d->focusItem ).y();
-
-    int g = pos.y() + contentsY();
-
-    if ( down && pos.y() > height()  )
-	g = height() + contentsY();
-    else if ( pos.y() < 0 )
-	g = contentsY();
-
-    TQListViewItem *c = d->focusItem, *old = 0;
-    TQListViewItem *oldCurrent = c;
-    if ( down ) {
-	int y = tqitemRect( d->focusItem ).y() + contentsY();
-	while( c && y + c->height() <= g ) {
-	    y += c->height();
-	    old = c;
-	    c = c->itemBelow();
-	}
-	if ( !c && old )
-	    c = old;
-    } else {
-	int y = tqitemRect( d->focusItem ).y() + contentsY();
-	while( c && y >= g ) {
-	    old = c;
-	    c = c->itemAbove();
-	    if ( c )
-		y -= c->height();
-	}
-	if ( !c && old )
-	    c = old;
-    }
-
-    if ( !c || c == d->focusItem )
-	return;
-
-    if ( d->focusItem ) {
-	if ( d->selectionMode == Multi ) {
-	    // also (de)select the ones in between
-	    TQListViewItem * b = d->focusItem;
-	    bool down = ( itemPos( c ) > itemPos( b ) );
-	    while( b && b != c ) {
-		if ( b->isSelectable() )
-		    setSelected( b, d->select );
-		b = down ? b->itemBelow() : b->itemAbove();
-	    }
-	    if ( c->isSelectable() )
-		setSelected( c, d->select );
-	} else if ( d->selectionMode == Extended ) {
-	    if ( selectRange( c, oldCurrent, d->selectAnchor ) ) {
-		d->useDoubleBuffer = TRUE;
-		triggerUpdate();
-		emit selectionChanged();
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    setCurrentItem( c );
-    d->visibleTimer->start( 1, TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQListView::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent* tqfe )
-{
-    d->inMenuMode = FALSE;
-    if ( d->focusItem ) {
-	repaintItem( d->focusItem );
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-    } else if ( firstChild() && tqfe->reason() != TQFocusEvent::Mouse ) {
-#else // USE_QT4
-    } else if ( firstChild() && TQFocusEvent::reason() != TQFocusEvent::Mouse ) {
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	d->focusItem = firstChild();
-	emit currentChanged( d->focusItem );
-	repaintItem( d->focusItem );
-    }
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-    if ( tqfe->reason() == TQFocusEvent::Mouse ) {
-#else // USE_QT4
-    if ( TQFocusEvent::reason() == TQFocusEvent::Mouse ) {
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	d->ignoreEditAfterFocus = TRUE;
-	d->startEdit = FALSE;
-    }
-    if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus, this ) ) {
-	bool db = d->useDoubleBuffer;
-	d->useDoubleBuffer = TRUE;
-	viewport()->tqrepaint( FALSE );
-	d->useDoubleBuffer = db;
-    }
-
-    TQRect mfrect = tqitemRect( d->focusItem );
-    if ( mfrect.isValid() ) {
-	if ( header() && header()->isVisible() )
-	    setMicroFocusHint( mfrect.x(), mfrect.y()+header()->height(), mfrect.width(), mfrect.height(), FALSE );
-	else
-	    setMicroFocusHint( mfrect.x(), mfrect.y(), mfrect.width(), mfrect.height(), FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQListView::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent* tqfe )
-{
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-    if ( tqfe->reason() == TQFocusEvent::Popup && d->buttonDown )
-#else // USE_QT4
-    if ( TQFocusEvent::reason() == TQFocusEvent::Popup && d->buttonDown )
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	d->buttonDown = FALSE;
-    if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_ItemView_ChangeHighlightOnFocus, this ) ) {
-	d->inMenuMode =
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-	    tqfe->reason() == TQFocusEvent::Popup
-#else // USE_QT4
-	    TQFocusEvent::reason() == TQFocusEvent::Popup
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	    || (tqApp->tqfocusWidget() && tqApp->tqfocusWidget()->inherits("TQMenuBar"));
-	if ( !d->inMenuMode ) {
-	    bool db = d->useDoubleBuffer;
-	    d->useDoubleBuffer = TRUE;
-	    viewport()->tqrepaint( FALSE );
-	    d->useDoubleBuffer = db;
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( d->focusItem )
-	repaintItem( d->focusItem );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQListView::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * e )
-{
-    if (currentItem() && currentItem()->renameBox)
-        return;
-    if (!firstChild()) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return; // subclass bug
-    }
-
-    TQListViewItem* oldCurrent = currentItem();
-    if ( !oldCurrent ) {
-	setCurrentItem( firstChild() );
-	if ( d->selectionMode == Single )
-	    setSelected( firstChild(), TRUE );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    TQListViewItem * i = currentItem();
-    TQListViewItem *old = i;
-
-    TQRect r( tqitemRect( i ) );
-    TQListViewItem * i2;
-
-    bool singleStep = FALSE;
-    bool selectCurrent = TRUE;
-    bool wasNavigation = TRUE;
-
-    switch( e->key() ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Backspace:
-    case Qt::Key_Delete:
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Enter:
-    case Qt::Key_Return:
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	if ( i && !i->isSelectable() && i->isEnabled() &&
-	     ( i->childCount() || i->isExpandable() || i->isOpen() ) ) {
-	    i->setOpen( !i->isOpen() );
-	    return;
-	}
-	e->ignore();
-	if ( currentItem() && !currentItem()->isEnabled() )
-	    break;
-	emit returnPressed( currentItem() );
-	// do NOT accept.  TQDialog.
-	return;
-    case Qt::Key_Down:
-	selectCurrent = FALSE;
-	i = i->itemBelow();
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	singleStep = TRUE;
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Up:
-	selectCurrent = FALSE;
-	i = i->itemAbove();
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	singleStep = TRUE;
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Home:
-	selectCurrent = FALSE;
-	i = firstChild();
-        if (!i->height() || !i->isEnabled())
-            i = i->itemBelow();
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_End:
-	selectCurrent = FALSE;
-	i = firstChild();
-        while (i->nextSibling() && i->nextSibling()->height() && i->nextSibling()->isEnabled())
-	    i = i->nextSibling();
-	while ( i->itemBelow() )
-	    i = i->itemBelow();
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	break;
-    case TQt::Key_Next:
-	selectCurrent = FALSE;
-	i2 = itemAt( TQPoint( 0, visibleHeight()-1 ) );
-	if ( i2 == i || !r.isValid() ||
-	     visibleHeight() <= tqitemRect( i ).bottom() ) {
-	    if ( i2 )
-		i = i2;
-	    int left = visibleHeight();
-	    while( (i2 = i->itemBelow()) != 0 && left > i2->height() ) {
-		left -= i2->height();
-		i = i2;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    if ( !i2 ) {
-		// list is shorter than the view, goto last item
-		while( (i2 = i->itemBelow()) != 0 )
-		    i = i2;
-	    } else {
-		i = i2;
-	    }
-	}
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	break;
-    case TQt::Key_Prior:
-	selectCurrent = FALSE;
-	i2 = itemAt( TQPoint( 0, 0 ) );
-	if ( i == i2 || !r.isValid() || r.top() <= 0 ) {
-	    if ( i2 )
-		i = i2;
-	    int left = visibleHeight();
-	    while( (i2 = i->itemAbove()) != 0 && left > i2->height() ) {
-		left -= i2->height();
-		i = i2;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    i = i2;
-	}
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Plus:
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	if (  !i->isOpen() && (i->isExpandable() || i->childCount()) )
-	    setOpen( i, TRUE );
-	else
-	    return;
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Right:
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	if ( i->isOpen() && i->childItem) {
-	    TQListViewItem *childItem = i->childItem;
-	    while (childItem && !childItem->isVisible())
-		childItem = childItem->nextSibling();
-	    if (childItem)
-		i = childItem;
-	} else if ( !i->isOpen() && (i->isExpandable() || i->childCount()) ) {
-	    setOpen( i, TRUE );
-	} else if ( contentsX() + visibleWidth() < contentsWidth() ) {
-	    horizontalScrollBar()->addLine();
-	    return;
-	} else {
-	    return;
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Minus:
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	if ( i->isOpen() )
-	    setOpen( i, FALSE );
-	else
-	    return;
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Left:
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	if ( i->isOpen() ) {
-	    setOpen( i, FALSE );
-	} else if ( i->parentItem && i->parentItem != d->r ) {
-	    i = i->parentItem;
-	} else if ( contentsX() ) {
-	    horizontalScrollBar()->subtractLine();
-	    return;
-	} else {
-	    return;
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Space:
-	activatedByClick = FALSE;
-	d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	if ( currentItem() && !currentItem()->isEnabled() )
-	    break;
-	i->activate();
-	if ( i->isSelectable() && ( d->selectionMode == Multi || d->selectionMode == Extended ) ) {
-	    setSelected( i, !i->isSelected() );
-	    d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	}
-	emit spacePressed( currentItem() );
-	break;
-    case Key_Escape:
-	e->ignore(); // For TQDialog
-	return;
-    case Qt::Key_F2:
-	if ( currentItem() && currentItem()->renameEnabled( 0 ) )
-	    currentItem()->startRename( 0 );
-    default:
-	if ( e->text().length() > 0 && e->text()[ 0 ].isPrint() ) {
-	    selectCurrent = FALSE;
-	    wasNavigation = FALSE;
-	    TQString input( d->currentPrefix );
-	    TQListViewItem * keyItem = i;
-	    TQTime now( TQTime::currentTime() );
-	    bool tryFirst = TRUE;
-	    while( keyItem ) {
-		// try twice, first with the previous string and this char
-		if ( d->currentPrefixTime.msecsTo( now ) <= 400 )
-		    input = input + TQT_TQSTRING(e->text()).lower();
-		else
-		    input = TQT_TQSTRING(e->text()).lower();
-		if ( input.length() == e->text().length() ) {
-		    if ( keyItem->itemBelow() ) {
-			keyItem = keyItem->itemBelow();
-			tryFirst = TRUE;
-		    } else {
-			keyItem = firstChild();
-			tryFirst = FALSE;
-		    }
-		}
-                TQString keyItemKey;
-		TQString prefix;
-		while( keyItem ) {
-                    keyItemKey = TQString::null;
-		    // Look first in the sort column, then left to right
-		    if (d->sortcolumn != Unsorted)
-			keyItemKey = keyItem->text(d->sortcolumn);
-		    for ( int col = 0; col < d->h->count() && keyItemKey.isNull(); ++col )
-			keyItemKey = keyItem->text( d->h->mapToSection(col) );
-		    if ( !keyItemKey.isEmpty() ) {
-			prefix = keyItemKey;
-			prefix.truncate( input.length() );
-			prefix = prefix.lower();
-			if ( prefix == input ) {
-			    d->currentPrefix = input;
-			    d->currentPrefixTime = now;
-			    i = keyItem;
-				// nonoptimal double-break...
-			    keyItem = 0;
-			    input.truncate( 0 );
-			    tryFirst = FALSE;
-			}
-		    }
-		    if ( keyItem )
-			keyItem = keyItem->itemBelow();
-		    if ( !keyItem && tryFirst ) {
-			keyItem = firstChild();
-			tryFirst = FALSE;
-		    }
-		}
-		// then, if appropriate, with just this character
-		if ( input.length() > e->text().length() ) {
-		    input.truncate(0);
-		    keyItem = i;
-		}
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    d->currentPrefix.truncate( 0 );
-	    if ( e->state() & ControlButton ) {
-		d->currentPrefix = TQString::null;
-		switch ( e->key() ) {
-		case Qt::Key_A:
-		    selectAll( TRUE );
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
-	    e->ignore();
-	    return;
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( !i )
-	return;
-
-    if ( !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) || !d->selectAnchor )
-	d->selectAnchor = i;
-
-    setCurrentItem( i );
-    if ( i->isSelectable() )
-	handleItemChange( old, wasNavigation && (e->state() & ShiftButton),
-			  wasNavigation && (e->state() & ControlButton) );
-
-    if ( d->focusItem && !d->focusItem->isSelected() && d->selectionMode == Single && selectCurrent )
-	setSelected( d->focusItem, TRUE );
-
-    if ( singleStep )
-	d->visibleTimer->start( 1, TRUE );
-    else
-	ensureItemVisible( i );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the list view item at \a viewPos. Note that \a viewPos is
-    in the viewport()'s coordinate system, not in the list view's own,
-    much larger, coordinate system.
-
-    itemAt() returns 0 if there is no such item.
-
-    Note that you also get the pointer to the item if \a viewPos
-    points to the root decoration (see setRootIsDecorated()) of the
-    item. To check whether or not \a viewPos is on the root decoration
-    of the item, you can do something like this:
-
-    \code
-    TQListViewItem *i = itemAt( p );
-    if ( i ) {
-	if ( p.x() > header()->sectionPos( header()->mapToIndex( 0 ) ) +
-		treeStepSize() * ( i->depth() + ( rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0) ) + itemMargin() ||
-		p.x() < header()->sectionPos( header()->mapToIndex( 0 ) ) ) {
-	    ; // p is not on root decoration
-	else
-	    ; // p is on the root decoration
-    }
-    \endcode
-
-    This might be interesting if you use this function to find out
-    where the user clicked and if you want to start a drag (which you
-    do not want to do if the user clicked onto the root decoration of
-    an item).
-
-    \sa itemPos() tqitemRect() viewportToContents()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem * TQListView::itemAt( const TQPoint & viewPos ) const
-{
-    if ( viewPos.x() > contentsWidth() - contentsX() )
-	return 0;
-
-    if ( !d->drawables || d->drawables->isEmpty() )
-	buildDrawableList();
-
-    TQListViewPrivate::DrawableItem * c = d->drawables->first();
-    int g = viewPos.y() + contentsY();
-
-    while( c && c->i && ( c->y + c->i->height() <= g ||
-			  !c->i->isVisible() ||
-			  (c->i->parent() && !c->i->parent()->isVisible()) ) )
-	c = d->drawables->next();
-
-    TQListViewItem *i = (c && c->y <= g) ? c->i : 0;
-    return i;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the y-coordinate of \a item in the list view's coordinate
-    system. This function is normally much slower than itemAt() but it
-    works for all items, whereas itemAt() normally works only for
-    items on the screen.
-
-    This is a thin wrapper around TQListViewItem::itemPos().
-
-    \sa itemAt() tqitemRect()
-*/
-
-int TQListView::itemPos( const TQListViewItem * item )
-{
-    return item ? item->itemPos() : 0;
-}
-
-
-/*! \obsolete
-    \property TQListView::multiSelection
-    \brief whether the list view is in multi-selection or extended-selection mode
-
-    If you enable multi-selection, \c Multi, mode, it is possible to
-    specify whether or not this mode should be extended. \c Extended
-    means that the user can select multiple items only when pressing
-    the Shift or Ctrl key at the same time.
-
-    The default selection mode is \c Single.
-
-    \sa selectionMode()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setMultiSelection( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( !enable )
-	d->selectionMode = TQListView::Single;
-    else if (  d->selectionMode != Multi && d->selectionMode != Extended )
-	d->selectionMode = TQListView::Multi;
-}
-
-bool TQListView::isMultiSelection() const
-{
-    return d->selectionMode == TQListView::Extended || d->selectionMode == TQListView::Multi;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::selectionMode
-    \brief the list view's selection mode
-
-    The mode can be \c Single (the default), \c Extended, \c Multi or
-    \c NoSelection.
-
-    \sa multiSelection
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setSelectionMode( SelectionMode mode )
-{
-    if ( d->selectionMode == mode )
-	return;
-
-    if ( ( d->selectionMode == Multi || d->selectionMode == Extended ) &&
-	 ( mode == TQListView::Single || mode == TQListView::NoSelection ) ){
-	clearSelection();
-	if ( ( mode == TQListView::Single ) && currentItem() )
-	    currentItem()->selected = TRUE;
-    }
-
-    d->selectionMode = mode;
-}
-
-TQListView::SelectionMode TQListView::selectionMode() const
-{
-    return d->selectionMode;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    If \a selected is TRUE the \a item is selected; otherwise it is
-    unselected.
-
-    If the list view is in \c Single selection mode and \a selected is
-    TRUE, the currently selected item is unselected and \a item is
-    made current. Unlike TQListViewItem::setSelected(), this function
-    updates the list view as necessary and emits the
-    selectionChanged() Q_SIGNALS.
-
-    \sa isSelected() setMultiSelection() isMultiSelection()
-    setCurrentItem(), setSelectionAnchor()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setSelected( TQListViewItem * item, bool selected )
-{
-    if ( !item || item->isSelected() == selected ||
-	 !item->isSelectable() || selectionMode() == NoSelection )
-	return;
-
-    bool emitHighlighted = FALSE;
-    if ( selectionMode() == Single && d->focusItem != item ) {
-	TQListViewItem *o = d->focusItem;
-	if ( d->focusItem && d->focusItem->selected )
-	    d->focusItem->setSelected( FALSE );
-	d->focusItem = item;
-	if ( o )
-	    repaintItem( o );
-	emitHighlighted = TRUE;
-    }
-
-    item->setSelected( selected );
-
-    repaintItem( item );
-
-    if ( d->selectionMode == Single && selected )
-	emit selectionChanged( item );
-    emit selectionChanged();
-
-    if ( emitHighlighted )
-	emit currentChanged( d->focusItem );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the selection anchor to \a item, if \a item is selectable.
-
-    The selection anchor is the item that remains selected when
-    Shift-selecting with either mouse or keyboard in \c Extended
-    selection mode.
-
-    \sa setSelected()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setSelectionAnchor( TQListViewItem *item )
-{
-    if ( item && item->isSelectable() )
-	d->selectAnchor = item;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets all the items to be not selected, updates the list view as
-    necessary, and emits the selectionChanged() Q_SIGNALS. Note that for
-    \c Multi selection list views this function needs to iterate over
-    \e all items.
-
-    \sa setSelected(), setMultiSelection()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::clearSelection()
-{
-    selectAll( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a select is TRUE, all the items get selected; otherwise all
-    the items get unselected. This only works in the selection modes \c
-    Multi and \c Extended. In \c Single and \c NoSelection mode the
-    selection of the current item is just set to \a select.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::selectAll( bool select )
-{
-    if ( d->selectionMode == Multi || d->selectionMode == Extended ) {
-	bool b = tqsignalsBlocked();
-	blockSignals( TRUE );
-	bool anything = FALSE;
-	TQListViewItemIterator it( this );
-	while ( it.current() ) {
-	    TQListViewItem *i = it.current();
-	    if ( (bool)i->selected != select ) {
-		i->setSelected( select );
-		anything = TRUE;
-	    }
-	    ++it;
-	}
-	blockSignals( b );
-	if ( anything ) {
-	    emit selectionChanged();
-	    d->useDoubleBuffer = TRUE;
-	    triggerUpdate();
-	}
-    } else if ( d->focusItem ) {
-	TQListViewItem * i = d->focusItem;
-	setSelected( i, select );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inverts the selection. Only works in \c Multi and \c Extended
-    selection modes.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::invertSelection()
-{
-    if ( d->selectionMode == Single ||
-	 d->selectionMode == NoSelection )
-	return;
-
-    bool b = tqsignalsBlocked();
-    blockSignals( TRUE );
-    TQListViewItemIterator it( this );
-    for ( ; it.current(); ++it )
-	it.current()->setSelected( !it.current()->isSelected() );
-    blockSignals( b );
-    emit selectionChanged();
-    triggerUpdate();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the list view item \a i is selected; otherwise
-    returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem::isSelected()
-*/
-
-bool TQListView::isSelected( const TQListViewItem * i ) const
-{
-    return i ? i->isSelected() : FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the selected item if the list view is in \c Single
-    selection mode and an item is selected.
-
-    If no items are selected or the list view is not in \c Single
-    selection mode this function returns 0.
-
-    \sa setSelected() setMultiSelection()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem * TQListView::selectedItem() const
-{
-    if ( d->selectionMode != Single )
-	return 0;
-    if ( d->focusItem && d->focusItem->isSelected() )
-	return d->focusItem;
-    return 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets item \a i to be the current item and repaints appropriately
-    (i.e. highlights the item). The current item is used for keyboard
-    navigation and focus indication; it is independent of any selected
-    items, although a selected item can also be the current item.
-
-    This function does not set the selection anchor. Use
-    setSelectionAnchor() instead.
-
-    \sa currentItem() setSelected()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setCurrentItem( TQListViewItem * i )
-{
-    if ( !i || d->focusItem == i || !i->isEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    if ( currentItem() && currentItem()->renameBox ) {
-	if ( d->defRenameAction == Reject )
-	    currentItem()->cancelRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-	else
-	    currentItem()->okRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-    }
-
-    TQListViewItem * prev = d->focusItem;
-    d->focusItem = i;
-
-    TQRect mfrect = tqitemRect( i );
-    if ( mfrect.isValid() ) {
-	if ( header() && header()->isVisible() )
-	    setMicroFocusHint( mfrect.x(), mfrect.y()+header()->height(), mfrect.width(), mfrect.height(), FALSE );
-	else
-	    setMicroFocusHint( mfrect.x(), mfrect.y(), mfrect.width(), mfrect.height(), FALSE );
-    }
-
-    if ( i != prev ) {
-	if ( i && d->selectionMode == Single ) {
-	    bool changed = FALSE;
-	    if ( prev && prev->selected ) {
-		changed = TRUE;
-		prev->setSelected( FALSE );
-	    }
-	    if ( i && !i->selected && d->selectionMode != NoSelection && i->isSelectable() ) {
-		i->setSelected( TRUE );
-		changed = TRUE;
-		emit selectionChanged( i );
-	    }
-	    if ( changed )
-		emit selectionChanged();
-	}
-
-	if ( i )
-	    repaintItem( i );
-	if ( prev )
-	    repaintItem( prev );
-	emit currentChanged( i );
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), indexOfItem( i ), TQAccessible::Focus );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the current item, or 0 if there isn't one.
-
-    \sa setCurrentItem()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem * TQListView::currentItem() const
-{
-    return d->focusItem;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the rectangle on the screen that item \a i occupies in
-    viewport()'s coordinates, or an invalid rectangle if \a i is 0 or
-    is not currently visible.
-
-    The rectangle returned does not include any tqchildren of the
-    rectangle (i.e. it uses TQListViewItem::height(), rather than
-    TQListViewItem::totalHeight()). If you want the rectangle to
-    include tqchildren you can use something like this:
-
-    \code
-    TQRect r( listView->tqitemRect( item ) );
-    r.setHeight( (TQCOORD)(TQMIN( item->totalHeight(),
-				listView->viewport->height() - r.y() ) ) )
-    \endcode
-
-    Note the way it avoids too-high rectangles. totalHeight() can be
-    much larger than the window system's coordinate system allows.
-
-    tqitemRect() is comparatively slow. It's best to call it only for
-    items that are probably on-screen.
-*/
-
-TQRect TQListView::tqitemRect( const TQListViewItem * i ) const
-{
-    if ( !d->drawables || d->drawables->isEmpty() )
-	buildDrawableList();
-
-    TQListViewPrivate::DrawableItem * c = d->drawables->first();
-
-    while( c && c->i && c->i != i )
-	c = d->drawables->next();
-
-    if ( c && c->i == i ) {
-	int y = c->y - contentsY();
-	if ( y + c->i->height() >= 0 &&
-	     y < ((TQListView *)this)->visibleHeight() ) {
-	    TQRect r( -contentsX(), y, d->h->width(), i->height() );
-	    return r;
-	}
-    }
-
-    return TQRect( 0, 0, -1, -1 );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::doubleClicked( TQListViewItem *item )
-
-    \obsolete (use doubleClicked( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint&, int ))
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever an item is double-clicked. It's
-    emitted on the second button press, not the second button release.
-    \a item is the list view item on which the user did the
-    double-click.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::doubleClicked( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint&, int  )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever an item is double-clicked. It's
-    emitted on the second button press, not the second button release.
-    The arguments are the relevant TQListViewItem (may be 0), the point
-    in global coordinates and the relevant column (or -1 if the click
-    was outside the list).
-
-    \warning Do not delete any TQListViewItem objects in Q_SLOTS
-    connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::returnPressed( TQListViewItem * )
-
-    This signal is emitted when Enter or Return is pressed. The
-    argument is the currentItem().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::spacePressed( TQListViewItem * )
-
-    This signal is emitted when Space is pressed. The argument is
-    the currentItem().
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the list view to be sorted by column \a column in ascending
-    order if \a ascending is TRUE or descending order if it is FALSE.
-
-    If \a column is -1, sorting is disabled and the user cannot sort
-    columns by clicking on the column headers. If \a column is larger
-    than the number of columns the user must click on a column
-    header to sort the list view.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setSorting( int column, bool ascending )
-{
-    if ( column == -1 )
-	column = Unsorted;
-
-    if ( d->sortcolumn == column && d->ascending == ascending )
-	return;
-
-    d->ascending = ascending;
-    d->sortcolumn = column;
-    if ( d->sortcolumn != Unsorted && d->sortIndicator )
-	d->h->setSortIndicator( d->sortcolumn, d->ascending );
-    else
-	d->h->setSortIndicator( -1 );
-
-    triggerUpdate();
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( viewport(), 0, TQAccessible::ObjectReorder );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQt::SortOrder
-
-    This enum describes how the items in a widget are sorted.
-
-    \value Ascending The items are sorted ascending e.g. starts with
-    'AAA' ends with 'ZZZ' in Latin-1 locales
-
-    \value Descending The items are sorted descending e.g. starts with
-    'ZZZ' ends with 'AAA' in Latin-1 locales
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Sets the \a column the list view is sorted by.
-
-    Sorting is triggered by choosing a header section.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::changeSortColumn( int column )
-{
-    if ( isRenaming() ) {
-	if ( d->defRenameAction == TQListView::Reject ) {
-	    currentItem()->cancelRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-	} else {
-	    currentItem()->okRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-	}
-    }
-    if ( d->sortcolumn != Unsorted ) {
-	int lcol = d->h->mapToLogical( column );
-	setSorting( lcol, d->sortcolumn == lcol ? !d->ascending : TRUE);
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Handles renaming when sections are being swapped by the user.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::handleIndexChange()
-{
-    if ( isRenaming() ) {
-        if ( d->defRenameAction == TQListView::Reject ) {
-            currentItem()->cancelRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-        } else {
-            currentItem()->okRename( currentItem()->renameCol );
-        }
-    }
-    triggerUpdate();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the column by which the list view is sorted, or -1 if
-    sorting is disabled.
-
-    \sa sortOrder()
-*/
-
-int TQListView::sortColumn() const
-{
-    return d->sortcolumn == Unsorted ? -1 : d->sortcolumn;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the sorting column for the list view.
-
-    If \a column is -1, sorting is disabled and the user cannot sort
-    columns by clicking on the column headers. If \a column is larger
-    than the number of columns the user must click on a column header
-    to sort the list view.
-
-    \sa setSorting()
-*/
-void TQListView::setSortColumn( int column )
-{
-    setSorting( column, d->ascending );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the sorting order of the list view items.
-
-    \sa sortColumn()
-*/
-TQt::SortOrder TQListView::sortOrder() const
-{
-    if ( d->ascending )
-	return TQt::Ascending;
-    return TQt::Descending;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the sort order for the items in the list view to \a order.
-
-    \sa setSorting()
-*/
-void TQListView::setSortOrder( TQt::SortOrder order )
-{
-    setSorting( d->sortcolumn, order == TQt::Ascending ? TRUE : FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sorts the list view using the last sorting configuration (sort
-    column and ascending/descending).
-*/
-
-void TQListView::sort()
-{
-    if ( d->r )
-	d->r->sort();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::itemMargin
-    \brief the advisory item margin that list items may use
-
-    The item margin defaults to one pixel and is the margin between
-    the item's edges and the area where it draws its contents.
-    TQListViewItem::paintFocus() draws in the margin.
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem::paintCell()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setItemMargin( int m )
-{
-    if ( d->margin == m )
-	return;
-    d->margin = m;
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	if ( d->drawables )
-	    d->drawables->clear();
-	triggerUpdate();
-    }
-}
-
-int TQListView::itemMargin() const
-{
-    return d->margin;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::rightButtonClicked( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint&, int )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the right button is clicked (i.e. when
-    it's released). The arguments are the relevant TQListViewItem (may
-    be 0), the point in global coordinates and the relevant column (or
-    -1 if the click was outside the list).
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::rightButtonPressed (TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int)
-
-    This signal is emitted when the right button is pressed. The
-    arguments are the relevant TQListViewItem (may be 0), the point in
-    global coordinates and the relevant column (or -1 if the click was
-    outside the list).
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQListView::contextMenuRequested( TQListViewItem *item, const TQPoint & pos, int col )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user invokes a context menu with
-    the right mouse button or with special system keys. If the
-    keyboard was used \a item is the current item; if the mouse was
-    used, \a item is the item under the mouse pointer or 0 if there is
-    no item under the mouse pointer. If no item is clicked, the column
-    index emitted is -1.
-
-    \a pos is the position for the context menu in the global
-    coordinate system.
-
-    \a col is the column on which the user pressed, or -1 if the
-    signal was triggered by a key event.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQListView::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    TQScrollView::styleChange( old );
-    reconfigureItems();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQListView::setFont( const TQFont & f )
-{
-    TQScrollView::setFont( f );
-    reconfigureItems();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQListView::setPalette( const TQPalette & p )
-{
-    TQScrollView::setPalette( p );
-    reconfigureItems();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Ensures that setup() is called for all currently visible items,
-    and that it will be called for currently invisible items as soon
-    as their parents are opened.
-
-    (A visible item, here, is an item whose parents are all open. The
-    item may happen to be off-screen.)
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem::setup()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::reconfigureItems()
-{
-    d->fontMetricsHeight = fontMetrics().height();
-    d->minLeftBearing = fontMetrics().minLeftBearing();
-    d->minRightBearing = fontMetrics().minRightBearing();
-    d->ellipsisWidth = fontMetrics().width( "..." ) * 2;
-    d->r->setOpen( FALSE );
-    d->r->configured = FALSE;
-    d->r->setOpen( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Ensures that the width mode of column \a c is updated according to
-    the width of \a item.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::widthChanged( const TQListViewItem* item, int c )
-{
-    if ( c >= d->h->count() )
-	return;
-
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    int col = c < 0 ? 0 : c;
-    while ( col == c || ( c < 0 && col < d->h->count() ) ) {
-	if ( d->column[col]->wmode == Maximum ) {
-	    int w = item->width( fm, this, col );
-	    if ( showSortIndicator() ) {
-            int tw = d->h->sectionSizeHint( col, fm ).width();
-            tw += 40; //add space for the sort indicator
-            w = TQMAX( w, tw );
-	    }
-	    if ( col == 0 ) {
-		int indent = treeStepSize() * item->depth();
-		if ( rootIsDecorated() )
-		    indent += treeStepSize();
-		w += indent;
-	    }
-	    if ( w > columnWidth( col ) && !d->h->isStretchEnabled() && !d->h->isStretchEnabled( col ) ) {
-		d->updateHeader = TRUE;
-		setColumnWidth( col, w );
-	    }
-	}
-	col++;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus
-    \brief whether items should show keyboard focus using all columns
-
-    If this property is TRUE all columns will show focus and selection
-    states, otherwise only column 0 will show focus.
-
-    The default is FALSE.
-
-    Setting this to TRUE if it's not necessary may cause noticeable
-    flicker.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setAllColumnsShowFocus( bool enable )
-{
-    d->allColumnsShowFocus = enable;
-}
-
-bool TQListView::allColumnsShowFocus() const
-{
-    return d->allColumnsShowFocus;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the first item in this TQListView. Returns 0 if there is no
-    first item.
-
-    A list view's items can be traversed using firstChild()
-    and nextSibling() or using a TQListViewItemIterator.
-
-    \sa itemAt() TQListViewItem::itemBelow() TQListViewItem::itemAbove()
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem * TQListView::firstChild() const
-{
-    if ( !d->r )
-	return 0;
-
-    d->r->enforceSortOrder();
-    return d->r->childItem;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the last item in the list view tree. Returns 0 if there
-    are no items in the TQListView.
-
-    This function is slow because it traverses the entire tree to find
-    the last item.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem* TQListView::lastItem() const
-{
-    TQListViewItem* item = firstChild();
-    if ( item ) {
-	while ( item->nextSibling() || item->firstChild() ) {
-	    if ( item->nextSibling() )
-		item = item->nextSibling();
-	    else
-		item = item->firstChild();
-	}
-    }
-    return item;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Repaints this item on the screen if it is currently visible.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::tqrepaint() const
-{
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv )
-	lv->repaintItem( this );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Repaints \a item on the screen if \a item is currently visible.
-    Takes care to avoid multiple repaints.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::repaintItem( const TQListViewItem * item ) const
-{
-    if ( !item )
-	return;
-    d->dirtyItemTimer->start( 0, TRUE );
-    if ( !d->dirtyItems )
-	d->dirtyItems = new TQPtrDict<void>();
-    d->dirtyItems->replace( (void *)item, (void *)item );
-}
-
-
-struct TQCheckListItemPrivate
-{
-    TQCheckListItemPrivate():
-	exclusive( 0 ),
-	currentState( TQCheckListItem::Off ),
-	statesDict( 0 ),
-	tristate( FALSE ) {}
-
-    TQCheckListItem *exclusive;
-    TQCheckListItem::ToggleState currentState;
-    TQPtrDict<TQCheckListItem::ToggleState> *statesDict;
-    bool tristate;
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQCheckListItem
-    \brief The TQCheckListItem class provides checkable list view items.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-
-    TQCheckListItems are used in \l{TQListView}s to provide
-    \l{TQListViewItem}s that are checkboxes, radio buttons or
-    controllers.
-
-    Checkbox and controller check list items may be inserted at any
-    level in a list view. Radio button check list items must be
-    tqchildren of a controller check list item.
-
-    The item can be checked or unchecked with setOn(). Its type can be
-    retrieved with type() and its text retrieved with text().
-
-    \img qlistviewitems.png List View Items
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem TQListView
-*/
-
-// ### obscenity is warranted.
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQCheckListItem::Type
-
-    This enum type specifies a TQCheckListItem's type:
-
-    \value RadioButton
-    \value CheckBox
-    \value Controller \e obsolete (use \c RadioButtonController instead)
-    \value RadioButtonController
-    \value CheckBoxController
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQCheckListItem::ToggleState
-
-    This enum specifies a TQCheckListItem's toggle state.
-
-    \value Off
-    \value NoChange
-    \value On
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, text \a text
-    and of type \a tt. Note that a \c RadioButton must be the child of a
-    \c RadioButtonController, otherwise it will not toggle.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *parent, const TQString &text,
-				Type tt )
-    : TQListViewItem( parent, text, TQString::null )
-{
-    myType = tt;
-    init();
-    if ( myType == RadioButton ) {
-	if ( parent->type() != RadioButtonController )
-	    qWarning( "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem(), radio button must be "
-		      "child of a controller" );
-	else
-	    d->exclusive = parent;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, which is after
-    \a after in the parent's list of tqchildren, and with text \a text
-    and of type \a tt. Note that a \c RadioButton must be the child of
-    a \c RadioButtonController, otherwise it will not toggle.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after,
- 				const TQString &text, Type tt )
-    : TQListViewItem( parent, after, text )
-{
-    myType = tt;
-    init();
-    if ( myType == RadioButton ) {
- 	if ( parent->type() != RadioButtonController )
- 	    qWarning( "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem(), radio button must be "
-		      "child of a controller" );
- 	else
- 	    d->exclusive = parent;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, text \a text
-    and of type \a tt. Note that this item must \e not be a \c
-    RadioButton. Radio buttons must be tqchildren of a \c
-    RadioButtonController.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, const TQString &text,
-				Type tt )
-    : TQListViewItem( parent, text, TQString::null )
-{
-    myType = tt;
-    if ( myType == RadioButton ) {
-      qWarning( "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem(), radio button must be "
-	       "child of a TQCheckListItem" );
-    }
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, which is after
-    \a after in the parent's list of tqchildren, with text \a text and
-    of type \a tt. Note that this item must \e not be a \c
-    RadioButton. Radio buttons must be tqchildren of a \c
-    RadioButtonController.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after,
- 				const TQString &text, Type tt )
-    : TQListViewItem( parent, after, text )
-{
-    myType = tt;
-    if ( myType == RadioButton ) {
- 	qWarning( "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem(), radio button must be "
- 		  "child of a TQCheckListItem" );
-    }
-    init();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, text \a text
-    and of type \a tt. Note that \a tt must \e not be \c RadioButton.
-    Radio buttons must be tqchildren of a \c RadioButtonController.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, const TQString &text,
-				Type tt )
-    : TQListViewItem( parent, text )
-{
-    myType = tt;
-    if ( tt == RadioButton )
-	qWarning( "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem(), radio button must be "
-		 "child of a TQCheckListItem" );
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a checkable item with parent \a parent, which is after
-    \a after in the parent's list of tqchildren, with text \a text and
-    of type \a tt. Note that \a tt must \e not be \c RadioButton.
-    Radio buttons must be tqchildren of a \c RadioButtonController.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after,
- 				const TQString &text, Type tt )
-    : TQListViewItem( parent, after, text )
-{
-    myType = tt;
-    if ( tt == RadioButton )
- 	qWarning( "TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem(), radio button must be "
- 		  "child of a TQCheckListItem" );
-    init();
-}
-
-
-int TQCheckListItem::RTTI = 1;
-
-/* \reimp */
-
-int TQCheckListItem::rtti() const
-{
-    return RTTI;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a \c RadioButtonController item with parent \a parent,
-    text \a text and pixmap \a p.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, const TQString &text,
-				const TQPixmap & p )
-    : TQListViewItem( parent, text )
-{
-    myType = RadioButtonController;
-    setPixmap( 0, p );
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a \c RadioButtonController item with parent \a parent,
-    text \a text and pixmap \a p.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, const TQString &text,
-				const TQPixmap & p )
-    : TQListViewItem( parent, text )
-{
-    myType = RadioButtonController;
-    setPixmap( 0, p );
-    init();
-}
-
-void TQCheckListItem::init()
-{
-    d = new TQCheckListItemPrivate();
-    on = FALSE; // ### remove on ver 4
-    if ( myType == CheckBoxController || myType == CheckBox ) {
-	d->statesDict = new TQPtrDict<ToggleState>(101);
-	d->statesDict->setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    }
-    // CheckBoxControllers by default have tristate set to TRUE
-    if ( myType == CheckBoxController )
-	setTristate( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the item, and all its tqchildren to any depth, freeing up
-    all allocated resources.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::~TQCheckListItem()
-{
-    if ( myType == RadioButton
-	 && d->exclusive && d->exclusive->d
-	 && d->exclusive->d->exclusive == this )
-	d->exclusive->turnOffChild();
-    d->exclusive = 0; // so the tqchildren won't try to access us.
-    if ( d->statesDict )
-	delete d->statesDict;
-    delete d;
-    d = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQCheckListItem::Type TQCheckListItem::type() const
-
-    Returns the type of this item.
-*/
-
-/*!
-   \fn  bool TQCheckListItem::isOn() const
-
-    Returns TRUE if the item is toggled on; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-   Sets tristate to \a b if the \c Type is either a \c CheckBoxController or
-   a \c CheckBox.
-
-   \c CheckBoxControllers are tristate by default.
-
-   \sa state() isTristate()
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::setTristate( bool b )
-{
-    if ( ( myType != CheckBoxController ) && ( myType != CheckBox ) ) {
-	qWarning( "TQCheckListItem::setTristate(), has no effect on RadioButton "
-		  "or RadioButtonController." );
-    	return;
-    }
-    d->tristate = b;
-}
-
-/*!
-   Returns TRUE if the item is tristate; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-   \sa setTristate()
-*/
-bool TQCheckListItem::isTristate() const
-{
-    return d->tristate;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the state of the item.
-
-    \sa TQCheckListItem::ToggleState
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::ToggleState TQCheckListItem::state() const
-{
-    if ( !isTristate() && internalState() == NoChange )
-	return Off;
-    else
-	return d->currentState;
-}
-
-/*
-  Same as the public state() except this one does not mask NoChange into Off
-  when tristate is disabled.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::ToggleState TQCheckListItem::internalState() const
-{
-    return d->currentState;
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the toggle state of the checklistitem to \a s. \a s can be
-    \c Off, \c NoChange or \c On.
-
-    Tristate can only be enabled for \c CheckBox or \c CheckBoxController,
-    therefore the \c NoChange only applies to them.
-
-    Setting the state to \c On or \c Off on a \c CheckBoxController
-    will recursivly set the states of its tqchildren to the same state.
-
-    Setting the state to \c NoChange on a \c CheckBoxController will
-    make it recursivly recall the previous stored state of its
-    tqchildren. If there was no previous stored state the tqchildren are
-    all set to \c On.
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::setState( ToggleState s )
-{
-    if ( myType == CheckBoxController && state() == NoChange )
-	updateStoredState( (void*) this );
-    setState( s, TRUE, TRUE );
-}
-
-/*
-  Sets the toggle state of the checklistitems. \a update tells if the
-  controller / parent controller should be aware of these changes, \a store
-  tells if the parent should store its tqchildren if certain conditions arise
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::setState( ToggleState s, bool update, bool store)
-{
-
-    if ( s == internalState() )
-	return;
-
-    if ( myType == CheckBox ) {
-	setCurrentState( s );
-	stateChange( state() );
-  	if ( update && parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1
-  	     && ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->type() == CheckBoxController )
-  	    ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->updateController( update, store );
-    } else if ( myType == CheckBoxController ) {
-	if ( s == NoChange && childCount()) {
-	    restoreState( (void*) this );
-	} else {
-	    TQListViewItem *item = firstChild();
-	    int childCount = 0;
-	    while( item ) {
-		if ( item->rtti() == 1 &&
-		     ( ((TQCheckListItem*)item)->type() == CheckBox ||
-		       ((TQCheckListItem*)item)->type() == CheckBoxController ) ) {
-		    TQCheckListItem *checkItem = (TQCheckListItem*)item;
-		    checkItem->setState( s, FALSE, FALSE );
-		    childCount++;
-		}
-		item = item->nextSibling();
-	    }
-	    if ( update ) {
-		if ( childCount > 0 ) {
-		    ToggleState oldState = internalState();
-		    updateController( FALSE, FALSE );
-		    if ( oldState != internalState() &&
-			 parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1 &&
-			 ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->type() == CheckBoxController )
-			((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->updateController( update, store );
-
-			updateController( update, store );
-		} else {
-		    // if there are no tqchildren we simply set the CheckBoxController and update its parent
-		    setCurrentState( s );
-		    stateChange( state() );
-		    if ( parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1
-			 && ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->type() == CheckBoxController )
-			((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->updateController( update, store );
-		}
-	    } else {
-		setCurrentState( s );
-		stateChange( state() );
-	    }
-
-	}
-    } else if ( myType == RadioButton ) {
-	if ( s == On ) {
-	    if ( d->exclusive && d->exclusive->d->exclusive != this )
-		d->exclusive->turnOffChild();
-	    setCurrentState( s );
-	    if ( d->exclusive )
-		d->exclusive->d->exclusive = this;
-	} else {
-	    if ( d->exclusive && d->exclusive->d->exclusive == this )
-		d->exclusive->d->exclusive = 0;
-	    setCurrentState( Off );
-	}
-	stateChange( state() );
-    }
-    tqrepaint();
-}
-
-/*
-  this function is needed becase we need to update "on" everytime
-  we update d->currentState. In order to retain binary compatibility
-  the inline function isOn() needs the "on" bool
-  ### should be changed in ver 4
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::setCurrentState( ToggleState s )
-{
-    ToggleState old = d->currentState;
-    d->currentState = s;
-    if (d->currentState == On)
-	on = TRUE;
-    else
-	on = FALSE;
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    if ( old != d->currentState && listView() )
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( listView()->viewport(), indexOfItem( this ), TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#else
-    TQ_UNUSED( old );
-#endif
-}
-
-
-
-/*
-  updates the internally stored state of this item for the parent (key)
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::setStoredState( ToggleState newState, void *key )
-{
-    if ( myType == CheckBox || myType == CheckBoxController )
-	d->statesDict->replace( key, new ToggleState(newState) );
-}
-
-/*
-  Returns the stored state for this item for the given key.
-  If the key is not found it returns Off.
-*/
-TQCheckListItem::ToggleState TQCheckListItem::storedState( void *key ) const
-{
-    if ( !d->statesDict )
-	return Off;
-
-    ToggleState *foundState = d->statesDict->find( key );
-    if ( foundState )
-	return ToggleState( *foundState );
-    else
-	return Off;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQString TQCheckListItem::text() const
-
-    Returns the item's text.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    If this is a \c RadioButtonController that has \c RadioButton
-    tqchildren, turn off the child that is on.
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::turnOffChild()
-{
-    if ( myType == RadioButtonController && d->exclusive )
-	d->exclusive->setOn( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Toggle check box or set radio button to on.
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::activate()
-{
-    TQListView * lv = listView();
-
-    if ( (lv && !lv->isEnabled()) || !isEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    TQPoint pos;
-    int boxsize = lv->tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_CheckListButtonSize, lv);
-    if ( activatedPos( pos ) ) {
-	bool parentControl = FALSE;
-	if ( parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1  &&
-	    ((TQCheckListItem*) parent())->type() == RadioButtonController )
-	    parentControl = TRUE;
-
-	int x = parentControl ? 0 : 3;
-	int align = lv->columnAlignment( 0 );
-	int marg = lv->itemMargin();
-	int y = 0;
-
-	if ( align & TQt::AlignVCenter )
-	    y = ( ( height() - boxsize ) / 2 ) + marg;
-	else
-	    y = (lv->fontMetrics().height() + 2 + marg - boxsize) / 2;
-
-	TQRect r( x, y, boxsize-3, boxsize-3 );
-	// columns might have been swapped
-	r.moveBy( lv->header()->sectionPos( 0 ), 0 );
-	if ( !r.contains( pos ) )
-	    return;
-    }
-    if ( ( myType == CheckBox ) || ( myType == CheckBoxController) )  {
-	switch ( internalState() ) {
-	case On:
-	    setState( Off );
-	    break;
-	case Off:
-	    if ( (!isTristate() && myType == CheckBox) ||
-                 (myType == CheckBoxController && !childCount()) ) {
-		setState( On );
-	    } else {
-		setState( NoChange );
-		if ( myType == CheckBoxController && internalState() != NoChange )
-		    setState( On );
-	    }
-	    break;
-	case NoChange:
-	    setState( On );
-	    break;
-	}
-	ignoreDoubleClick();
-    } else if ( myType == RadioButton ) {
-	setOn( TRUE );
-	ignoreDoubleClick();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the button on if \a b is TRUE, otherwise sets it off.
-    Maintains radio button exclusivity.
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::setOn( bool b  )
-{
-    if ( b )
-	setState( On , TRUE, TRUE );
-    else
-	setState( Off , TRUE, TRUE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is called when the item changes its state.
-    \c NoChange (if tristate is enabled and the type is either \c
-    CheckBox or \c CheckBoxController) reports the same as \c Off, so
-    use state() to determine if the state is actually \c Off or \c
-    NoChange.
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::stateChange( bool )
-{
-}
-
-/*
-  Calls the public virtual function if the state is changed to either On, NoChange or Off.
-  NoChange reports the same as Off - ### should be fixed in ver4
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::stateChange( ToggleState s )
-{
-    stateChange( s == On );
-}
-
-/*
-  sets the state of the CheckBox and CheckBoxController back to
-  previous stored state
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::restoreState( void *key, int depth )
-{
-    switch ( type() ) {
-    case CheckBox:
-	setCurrentState( storedState( key ) );
-	stateChange( state() );
-	tqrepaint();
-	break;
-    case CheckBoxController: {
-	TQListViewItem *item = firstChild();
-	int childCount = 0;
-	while ( item ) {
-	    // recursively calling restoreState for tqchildren of type CheckBox and CheckBoxController
-	    if ( item->rtti() == 1 &&
-		 ( ((TQCheckListItem*)item)->type() == CheckBox ||
-		   ((TQCheckListItem*)item)->type() == CheckBoxController ) ) {
-		((TQCheckListItem*)item)->restoreState( key , depth+1 );
-		childCount++;
-	    }
-	    item = item->nextSibling();
-	}
-	if ( childCount > 0 ) {
-	    if ( depth == 0 )
-		updateController( TRUE );
-	    else
-		updateController( FALSE );
-	} else {
-	    // if there are no tqchildren we retrieve the CheckBoxController state directly.
-	    setState( storedState( key ), TRUE, FALSE );
-	}
-    }
-	break;
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*
-  Checks the tqchildrens state and updates the controllers state
-  if necessary. If the controllers state change, then his parent again is
-  called to update itself.
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::updateController( bool update , bool store )
-{
-    if ( myType != CheckBoxController )
-	return;
-
-    TQCheckListItem *controller = 0;
-    // checks if this CheckBoxController has another CheckBoxController as parent
-    if ( parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1
-	 && ((TQCheckListItem*)parent())->type() == CheckBoxController )
-	controller = (TQCheckListItem*)parent();
-
-    ToggleState theState = Off;
-    bool first = TRUE;
-    TQListViewItem *item = firstChild();
-    while( item && theState != NoChange ) {
-	if ( item->rtti() == 1 &&
-	     ( ((TQCheckListItem*)item)->type() == CheckBox ||
-	       ((TQCheckListItem*)item)->type() == CheckBoxController ) ) {
-	    TQCheckListItem *checkItem = (TQCheckListItem*)item;
-	    if ( first ) {
-		theState = checkItem->internalState();
-		first = FALSE;
-	    } else {
-		if ( checkItem->internalState() == NoChange ||
-		     theState != checkItem->internalState() )
-		    theState = NoChange;
-		else
-		    theState = checkItem->internalState();
-	    }
-	}
-	item = item->nextSibling();
-    }
-    if ( internalState() != theState ) {
-	setCurrentState( theState );
-	if ( store && ( internalState() == On || internalState() == Off ) )
-	    updateStoredState( (void*) this );
-	stateChange( state() );
-	if ( update && controller ) {
-	    controller->updateController( update, store );
-	}
-	tqrepaint();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*
-  Makes all the tqchildren CheckBoxes update their storedState
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::updateStoredState( void *key )
-{
-    if ( myType != CheckBoxController )
-	return;
-
-    TQListViewItem *item = firstChild();
-    while( item ) {
-	if ( item->rtti() == 1 ) {
-	    TQCheckListItem *checkItem = (TQCheckListItem*)item;
-	    if ( checkItem->type() == CheckBox )
-		checkItem->setStoredState( checkItem->internalState(), key );
-	    else if (checkItem->type() == CheckBoxController )
-		checkItem->updateStoredState( key );
-	}
-	item = item->nextSibling();
-    }
-    // this state is only needed if the CheckBoxController has no CheckBox / CheckBoxController tqchildren.
-    setStoredState( internalState() , key );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::setup()
-{
-    TQListViewItem::setup();
-    int h = height();
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv )
-	h = TQMAX( lv->tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_CheckListButtonSize, lv),
-		  h );
-    h = TQMAX( h, TQApplication::globalStrut().height() );
-    setHeight( h );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-int TQCheckListItem::width( const TQFontMetrics& fm, const TQListView* lv, int column) const
-{
-    int r = TQListViewItem::width( fm, lv, column );
-    if ( column == 0 ) {
-	r += lv->itemMargin();
-	if ( myType == RadioButtonController && pixmap( 0 ) ) {
-	    //	     r += 0;
-	} else {
-	    r +=  lv->tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_CheckListButtonSize, lv) + 4;
-	}
-    }
-    return TQMAX( r, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Paints the item using the painter \a p and the color group \a cg.
-    The item is in column \a column, has width \a width and has
-    tqalignment \a align. (See TQt::AlignmentFlags for valid alignments.)
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::paintCell( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg,
-			       int column, int width, int align )
-{
-    if ( !p )
-	return;
-
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( !lv )
-	return;
-
-    const BackgroundMode bgmode = lv->viewport()->backgroundMode();
-    const TQColorGroup::ColorRole crole = TQPalette::backgroundRoleFromMode( bgmode );
-    if ( cg.brush( crole ) != lv->tqcolorGroup().brush( crole ) )
-	p->fillRect( 0, 0, width, height(), cg.brush( crole ) );
-    else
-	lv->paintEmptyArea( p, TQRect( 0, 0, width, height() ) );
-
-    if ( column != 0 ) {
-	// The rest is text, or for subclasses to change.
-	TQListViewItem::paintCell( p, cg, column, width, align );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    bool parentControl = FALSE;
-    if ( parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1  &&
-	 ((TQCheckListItem*) parent())->type() == RadioButtonController )
-	parentControl = TRUE;
-
-    TQFontMetrics fm( lv->fontMetrics() );
-    int boxsize = lv->tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( myType == RadioButtonController ? TQStyle::PM_CheckListControllerSize :
-					   TQStyle::PM_CheckListButtonSize, lv);
-    int marg = lv->itemMargin();
-    int r = marg;
-
-    // Draw controller / checkbox / radiobutton ---------------------
-    int styleflags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if ( internalState() == On ) {
-	styleflags |= TQStyle::Style_On;
-    } else if ( internalState() == NoChange ) {
-	if ( myType == CheckBoxController && !isTristate() )
-	    styleflags |= TQStyle::Style_Off;
-	else
-	    styleflags |= TQStyle::Style_NoChange;
-    } else {
-	styleflags |= TQStyle::Style_Off;
-    }
-    if ( isSelected() )
-	styleflags |= TQStyle::Style_Selected;
-    if ( isEnabled() && lv->isEnabled() )
-	styleflags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-
-    if ( myType == RadioButtonController ) {
-	int x = 0;
-	if(!parentControl)
-	    x += 3;
-	if ( !pixmap( 0 ) ) {
-	    lv->tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive(TQStyle::PE_CheckListController, p,
-				  TQRect(x, 0, boxsize,
-					fm.height() + 2 + marg),
-				  cg, (QStyle::StateFlag)styleflags, TQStyleOption(this));
-	    r += boxsize + 4;
-	}
-    } else {
-	TQ_ASSERT( lv ); //###
-	int x = 0;
-	int y = 0;
-	if ( !parentControl )
-	    x += 3;
-	if ( align & TQt::AlignVCenter )
-	    y = ( ( height() - boxsize ) / 2 ) + marg;
-	else
-	    y = (fm.height() + 2 + marg - boxsize) / 2;
-
-	if ( ( myType == CheckBox ) || ( myType == CheckBoxController ) ) {
-	    lv->tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive(TQStyle::PE_CheckListIndicator, p,
-				      TQRect(x, y, boxsize,
-					    fm.height() + 2 + marg),
-				      cg, (QStyle::StateFlag)styleflags, TQStyleOption(this));
-	} else { //radio button look
-	    lv->tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive(TQStyle::PE_CheckListExclusiveIndicator,
-					      p, TQRect(x, y, boxsize,
-						       fm.height() + 2 + marg),
-					      cg, (QStyle::StateFlag)styleflags, TQStyleOption(this));
-	}
-	r += boxsize + 4;
-    }
-
-    // Draw text ----------------------------------------------------
-    p->translate( r, 0 );
-    p->setPen( TQPen( cg.text() ) );
-    TQListViewItem::paintCell( p, cg, column, width - r, align );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Draws the focus rectangle \a r using the color group \a cg on the
-    painter \a p.
-*/
-void TQCheckListItem::paintFocus( TQPainter *p, const TQColorGroup & cg,
-				 const TQRect & r )
-{
-    bool intersect = TRUE;
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv && lv->header()->mapToActual( 0 ) != 0 ) {
-	int xdepth = lv->treeStepSize() * ( depth() + ( lv->rootIsDecorated() ? 1 : 0) ) + lv->itemMargin();
-	int p = lv->header()->cellPos( lv->header()->mapToActual( 0 ) );
-	xdepth += p;
-	intersect = r.intersects( TQRect( p, r.y(), xdepth - p + 1, r.height() ) );
-    }
-    bool parentControl = FALSE;
-    if ( parent() && parent()->rtti() == 1  &&
-	 ((TQCheckListItem*) parent())->type() == RadioButtonController )
-	parentControl = TRUE;
-    if ( myType != RadioButtonController && intersect &&
-	 (lv->rootIsDecorated() || myType == RadioButton ||
-	  (myType == CheckBox && parentControl) ) ) {
-	TQRect rect;
-	int boxsize = lv->tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_CheckListButtonSize, lv);
-	if ( lv->columnAlignment(0) == TQt::AlignCenter ) {
-	    TQFontMetrics fm( lv->font() );
-	    int bx = (lv->columnWidth(0) - (boxsize + fm.width(text())))/2 + boxsize;
-	    if ( bx < 0 ) bx = 0;
-	    rect.setRect( r.x() + bx + 5, r.y(), r.width() - bx - 5,
-			  r.height() );
-	} else
-	    rect.setRect( r.x() + boxsize + 5, r.y(), r.width() - boxsize - 5,
-			  r.height() );
-	TQListViewItem::paintFocus(p, cg, rect);
-    } else {
-	TQListViewItem::paintFocus(p, cg, r);
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQListView::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( cachedSizeHint().isValid() )
-	return cachedSizeHint();
-
-    constPolish();
-
-    if ( !isVisible() && (!d->drawables || d->drawables->isEmpty()) )
-	// force the column widths to sanity, if possible
-	buildDrawableList();
-
-    TQSize s( d->h->tqsizeHint() );
-    if ( verticalScrollBar()->isVisible() )
-	s.setWidth( s.width() + tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_ScrollBarExtent) );
-    s += TQSize(frameWidth()*2,frameWidth()*2);
-    TQListViewItem * l = d->r;
-    while( l && !l->height() )
-	l = l->childItem ? l->childItem : l->siblingItem;
-
-    if ( l && l->height() )
-	s.setHeight( s.height() + 10 * l->height() );
-    else
-	s.setHeight( s.height() + 140 );
-
-    if ( s.width() > s.height() * 3 )
-	s.setHeight( s.width() / 3 );
-    else if ( s.width() *3 < s.height() )
-	s.setHeight( s.width() * 3 );
-
-    setCachedSizeHint( s );
-
-    return s;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQListView::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    return TQScrollView::tqminimumSizeHint();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets \a item to be open if \a open is TRUE and \a item is
-    expandable, and to be closed if \a open is FALSE. Repaints
-    accordingly.
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem::setOpen() TQListViewItem::setExpandable()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setOpen( TQListViewItem * item, bool open )
-{
-    if ( !item ||
-	item->isOpen() == open ||
-	(open && !item->childCount() && !item->isExpandable()) )
-	return;
-
-    TQListViewItem* nextParent = 0;
-    if ( open )
-	nextParent = item->itemBelow();
-
-    item->setOpen( open );
-
-    if ( open ) {
-	TQListViewItem* lastChild = item;
-	TQListViewItem* tmp;
-	while ( TRUE ) {
-	    tmp = lastChild->itemBelow();
-	    if ( !tmp || tmp == nextParent )
-		break;
-	    lastChild = tmp;
-	}
-	ensureItemVisible( lastChild );
-	ensureItemVisible( item );
-    }
-    if ( d->drawables )
-	d->drawables->clear();
-    buildDrawableList();
-
-    TQListViewPrivate::DrawableItem * c = d->drawables->first();
-
-    while( c && c->i && c->i != item )
-	c = d->drawables->next();
-
-    if ( c && c->i == item ) {
-	d->dirtyItemTimer->start( 0, TRUE );
-	if ( !d->dirtyItems )
-	    d->dirtyItems = new TQPtrDict<void>();
-	while( c && c->i ) {
-	    d->dirtyItems->insert( (void *)(c->i), (void *)(c->i) );
-	    c = d->drawables->next();
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Identical to \a{item}->isOpen(). Provided for completeness.
-
-    \sa setOpen()
-*/
-
-bool TQListView::isOpen( const TQListViewItem * item ) const
-{
-    return item->isOpen();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::rootIsDecorated
-    \brief whether the list view shows open/close signs on root items
-
-    Open/close signs are small <b>+</b> or <b>-</b> symbols in windows
-    style, or arrows in Motif style. The default is FALSE.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setRootIsDecorated( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( enable != (bool)d->rootIsExpandable ) {
-	d->rootIsExpandable = enable;
-	if ( isVisible() )
-	    triggerUpdate();
-    }
-}
-
-bool TQListView::rootIsDecorated() const
-{
-    return d->rootIsExpandable;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Ensures that item \a i is visible, scrolling the list view
-    vertically if necessary and opening (expanding) any parent items
-    if this is required to show the item.
-
-    \sa tqitemRect() TQScrollView::ensureVisible()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::ensureItemVisible( const TQListViewItem * i )
-{
-    if ( !i || !i->isVisible() )
-	return;
-
-    TQListViewItem *parent = i->parent();
-    while ( parent ) {
-	if ( !parent->isOpen() )
-	    parent->setOpen( TRUE );
-	parent = parent->parent();
-    }
-
-    if ( d->r->maybeTotalHeight < 0 )
-	updateGeometries();
-    int y = itemPos( i );
-    int h = i->height();
-    if ( isVisible() && y + h > contentsY() + visibleHeight() )
-	setContentsPos( contentsX(), y - visibleHeight() + h );
-    else if ( !isVisible() || y < contentsY() )
-	setContentsPos( contentsX(), y );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQString TQCheckListItem::text( int n ) const
-
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Returns the TQHeader object that manages this list view's columns.
-    Please don't modify the header behind the list view's back.
-
-    You may safely call TQHeader::setClickEnabled(),
-    TQHeader::setResizeEnabled(), TQHeader::setMovingEnabled(),
-    TQHeader::hide() and all the const TQHeader functions.
-*/
-
-TQHeader * TQListView::header() const
-{
-    return d->h;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::childCount
-    \brief the number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem objects in this TQListView
-
-    Holds the current number of parentless (top-level) TQListViewItem
-    objects in this TQListView.
-
-    \sa TQListViewItem::childCount()
-*/
-
-int TQListView::childCount() const
-{
-    if ( d->r )
-	return d->r->childCount();
-    return 0;
-}
-
-
-/*
-    Moves this item to just after \a olderSibling. \a olderSibling and
-    this object must have the same parent.
-
-    If you need to move an item in the hierarchy use takeItem() and
-    insertItem().
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::moveToJustAfter( TQListViewItem * olderSibling )
-{
-    if ( parentItem && olderSibling &&
-	 olderSibling->parentItem == parentItem && olderSibling != this ) {
-	if ( parentItem->childItem == this ) {
-	    parentItem->childItem = siblingItem;
-	} else {
-	    TQListViewItem * i = parentItem->childItem;
-	    while( i && i->siblingItem != this )
-		i = i->siblingItem;
-	    if ( i )
-		i->siblingItem = siblingItem;
-	}
-	siblingItem = olderSibling->siblingItem;
-	olderSibling->siblingItem = this;
-	parentItem->lsc = Unsorted;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Move the item to be after item \a after, which must be one of the
-    item's siblings. To move an item in the hierarchy, use takeItem()
-    and insertItem().
-
-    Note that this function will have no effect if sorting is enabled
-    in the list view.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItem::moveItem( TQListViewItem *after )
-{
-    if ( !after || after == this )
-	return;
-    if ( parent() != after->parent() ) {
-	if ( parentItem )
-	    parentItem->takeItem( this );
-	if ( after->parentItem ) {
-	    int tmpLsc = after->parentItem->lsc;
-	    after->parentItem->insertItem( this );
-	    after->parentItem->lsc = tmpLsc;
-	}
-    }
-    moveToJustAfter( after );
-    TQListView *lv = listView();
-    if ( lv )
-	lv->triggerUpdate();
-}
-
-/*
-    Recursively sorts items, from the root to this item.
-    (enforceSortOrder() won't work the other way around, as
-    documented.)
-*/
-void TQListViewItem::enforceSortOrderBackToRoot()
-{
-    if ( parentItem ) {
-	parentItem->enforceSortOrderBackToRoot();
-	parentItem->enforceSortOrder();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQListView::showEvent( TQShowEvent * )
-{
-    if ( d->drawables )
-	d->drawables->clear();
-    delete d->dirtyItems;
-    d->dirtyItems = 0;
-    d->dirtyItemTimer->stop();
-    d->fullRepaintOnComlumnChange = TRUE;
-
-    updateGeometries();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the y coordinate of this item in the list view's
-    coordinate system. This function is normally much slower than
-    TQListView::itemAt(), but it works for all items whereas
-    TQListView::itemAt() normally only works for items on the screen.
-
-    \sa TQListView::itemAt() TQListView::tqitemRect() TQListView::itemPos()
-*/
-
-int TQListViewItem::itemPos() const
-{
-    TQPtrStack<TQListViewItem> s;
-    TQListViewItem * i = (TQListViewItem *)this;
-    while( i ) {
-	s.push( i );
-	i = i->parentItem;
-    }
-
-    int a = 0;
-    TQListViewItem * p = 0;
-    while( s.count() ) {
-	i = s.pop();
-	if ( p ) {
-	    if ( !p->configured ) {
-		p->configured = TRUE;
-		p->setup(); // ### virtual non-const function called in const
-	    }
-	    a += p->height();
-	    TQListViewItem * s = p->firstChild();
-	    while( s && s != i ) {
-		a += s->totalHeight();
-		s = s->nextSibling();
-	    }
-	}
-	p = i;
-    }
-    return a;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \fn void TQListView::removeItem( TQListViewItem * )
-  \obsolete
-
-  This function has been renamed takeItem().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Removes item \a i from the list view; \a i must be a top-level
-    item. The warnings regarding TQListViewItem::takeItem() apply to
-    this function, too.
-
-    \sa insertItem()
-*/
-void TQListView::takeItem( TQListViewItem * i )
-{
-    if ( d->r )
-	d->r->takeItem( i );
-}
-
-
-void TQListView::openFocusItem()
-{
-    d->autoopenTimer->stop();
-    if ( d->focusItem && !d->focusItem->isOpen() ) {
-	d->focusItem->setOpen( TRUE );
-	d->focusItem->tqrepaint();
-    }
-}
-
-static const int autoopenTime = 750;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListView::contentsDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent *e )
-{
-    d->oldFocusItem = d->focusItem;
-    TQListViewItem *i = d->focusItem;
-    d->focusItem = itemAt( contentsToViewport( e->pos() ) );
-    if ( i )
-	i->tqrepaint();
-    if ( d->focusItem ) {
-	d->autoopenTimer->start( autoopenTime );
-	d->focusItem->dragEntered();
-	d->focusItem->tqrepaint();
-    }
-    if ( (i && i->dropEnabled() && i->acceptDrop( e )) || acceptDrops() )
-	e->accept();
-    else
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListView::contentsDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent *e )
-{
-    TQListViewItem *i = d->focusItem;
-    d->focusItem = itemAt( contentsToViewport( e->pos() ) );
-    if ( i ) {
-	if ( i != d->focusItem )
-	    i->dragLeft();
-	i->tqrepaint();
-    }
-    if ( d->focusItem ) {
-	if ( i != d->focusItem ) {
-	    d->focusItem->dragEntered();
-	    d->autoopenTimer->stop();
-	    d->autoopenTimer->start( autoopenTime );
-	}
-	d->focusItem->tqrepaint();
-    } else {
-	d->autoopenTimer->stop();
-    }
-    if ( (i && i->dropEnabled() && i->acceptDrop( e )) || acceptDrops() )
-	e->accept();
-    else
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListView::contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent * )
-{
-    d->autoopenTimer->stop();
-
-    if ( d->focusItem )
-	d->focusItem->dragLeft();
-
-    setCurrentItem( d->oldFocusItem );
-    d->oldFocusItem = 0;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQListView::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
-{
-    d->autoopenTimer->stop();
-
-    setCurrentItem( d->oldFocusItem );
-    TQListViewItem *i = itemAt( contentsToViewport( e->pos() ) );
-    if ( i && i->dropEnabled() && i->acceptDrop( e ) ) {
-	i->dropped( e );
-	e->accept();
-    } else if ( acceptDrops() ) {
-	emit dropped( e );
-	e->accept();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    If the user presses the mouse on an item and starts moving the
-    mouse, and the item allow dragging (see
-    TQListViewItem::setDragEnabled()), this function is called to get a
-    drag object and a drag is started unless dragObject() returns 0.
-
-    By default this function returns 0. You should reimplement it and
-    create a TQDragObject depending on the selected items.
-*/
-
-TQDragObject *TQListView::dragObject()
-{
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Starts a drag.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::startDrag()
-{
-    if ( !d->startDragItem )
-	return;
-
-    d->startDragItem = 0;
-    d->buttonDown = FALSE;
-
-    TQDragObject *drag = dragObject();
-    if ( !drag )
-	return;
-
-    drag->drag();
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-/*!
-    \property TQListView::defaultRenameAction
-    \brief What action to perform when the editor loses focus during renaming
-
-    If this property is \c Accept, and the user renames an item and
-    the editor loses focus (without the user pressing Enter), the
-    item will still be renamed. If the property's value is \c Reject,
-    the item will not be renamed unless the user presses Enter. The
-    default is \c Reject.
-*/
-
-void TQListView::setDefaultRenameAction( RenameAction a )
-{
-    d->defRenameAction = a;
-}
-
-TQListView::RenameAction TQListView::defaultRenameAction() const
-{
-    return d->defRenameAction;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if an item is being renamed; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQListView::isRenaming() const
-{
-    return currentItem() && currentItem()->renameBox;
-}
-
-/**********************************************************************
- *
- * Class TQListViewItemIterator
- *
- **********************************************************************/
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQListViewItemIterator
-    \brief The TQListViewItemIterator class provides an iterator for collections of TQListViewItems.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-
-    Construct an instance of a TQListViewItemIterator, with either a
-    TQListView* or a TQListViewItem* as argument, to operate on the tree
-    of TQListViewItems, starting from the argument.
-
-    A TQListViewItemIterator iterates over all the items from its
-    starting point. This means that it always makes the first child of
-    the current item the new current item. If there is no child, the
-    next sibling becomes the new current item; and if there is no next
-    sibling, the next sibling of the parent becomes current.
-
-    The following example creates a list of all the items that have
-    been selected by the user, storing pointers to the items in a
-    TQPtrList:
-    \code
-    TQPtrList<TQListViewItem> lst;
-    TQListViewItemIterator it( myListView );
-    while ( it.current() ) {
-	if ( it.current()->isSelected() )
-	    lst.append( it.current() );
-	++it;
-    }
-    \endcode
-
-    An alternative approach is to use an \c IteratorFlag:
-    \code
-    TQPtrList<TQListViewItem> lst;
-    TQListViewItemIterator it( myListView, TQListViewItemIterator::Selected );
-    while ( it.current() ) {
-	lst.append( it.current() );
-	++it;
-    }
-    \endcode
-
-    A TQListViewItemIterator provides a convenient and easy way to
-    traverse a hierarchical TQListView.
-
-    Multiple TQListViewItemIterators can operate on the tree of
-    TQListViewItems. A TQListView knows about all iterators operating on
-    its TQListViewItems. So when a TQListViewItem gets removed all
-    iterators that point to this item are updated and point to the
-    following item if possible, otherwise to a valid item before the
-    current one or to 0. Note however that deleting the parent item of
-    an item that an iterator points to is not safe.
-
-    \sa TQListView, TQListViewItem
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQListViewItemIterator::IteratorFlag
-
-    These flags can be passed to a TQListViewItemIterator constructor
-    (OR-ed together if more than one is used), so that the iterator
-    will only iterate over items that match the given flags.
-
-    \value Visible
-    \value Invisible
-    \value Selected
-    \value Unselected
-    \value Selectable
-    \value NotSelectable
-    \value DragEnabled
-    \value DragDisabled
-    \value DropEnabled
-    \value DropDisabled
-    \value Expandable
-    \value NotExpandable
-    \value Checked
-    \value NotChecked
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty iterator.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator()
-    :  curr( 0 ), listView( 0 )
-{
-    init( 0 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an iterator for the TQListView that contains the \a
-    item. The current iterator item is set to point to the \a item.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator( TQListViewItem *item )
-    :  curr( item ), listView( 0 )
-{
-    init( 0 );
-
-    if ( item ) {
-	item->enforceSortOrderBackToRoot();
-	listView = item->listView();
-    }
-    addToListView();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an iterator for the TQListView that contains the \a item
-    using the flags \a iteratorFlags. The current iterator item is set
-    to point to \a item or the next matching item if \a item doesn't
-    match the flags.
-
-    \sa TQListViewItemIterator::IteratorFlag
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator( TQListViewItem *item, int iteratorFlags )
-    :  curr( item ), listView( 0 )
-{
-    init( iteratorFlags );
-
-    // go to next matching item if the current don't match
-    if ( curr && !matchesFlags( curr ) )
-	++( *this );
-
-    if ( curr ) {
-	curr->enforceSortOrderBackToRoot();
-	listView = curr->listView();
-    }
-    addToListView();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an iterator for the same TQListView as \a it. The
-    current iterator item is set to point on the current item of \a
-    it.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator( const TQListViewItemIterator& it )
-    : curr( it.curr ), listView( it.listView )
-{
-    init(it.d() ? it.d()->flags : 0);
-
-    addToListView();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an iterator for the TQListView \a lv. The current
-    iterator item is set to point on the first child (TQListViewItem)
-    of \a lv.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator( TQListView *lv )
-    : curr( lv->firstChild() ), listView( lv )
-{
-    init( 0 );
-
-    addToListView();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an iterator for the TQListView \a lv with the flags \a
-    iteratorFlags. The current iterator item is set to point on the
-    first child (TQListViewItem) of \a lv that matches the flags.
-
-    \sa TQListViewItemIterator::IteratorFlag
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator::TQListViewItemIterator( TQListView *lv, int iteratorFlags )
-    : curr ( lv->firstChild() ), listView( lv )
-{
-    init( iteratorFlags );
-
-    addToListView();
-    if ( !matchesFlags( curr ) )
-	++( *this );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Assignment. Makes a copy of \a it and returns a reference to its
-    iterator.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator=( const TQListViewItemIterator &it )
-{
-    if ( listView ) {
-	if ( listView->d->iterators->removeRef( this ) ) {
-	    if ( listView->d->iterators->count() == 0 ) {
-		delete listView->d->iterators;
-		listView->d->iterators = 0;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    listView = it.listView;
-    addToListView();
-    curr = it.curr;
-
-    // sets flags to be the same as the input iterators flags
-    if ( d() && it.d() )
-	d()->flags = it.d()->flags;
-
-    // go to next matching item if the current don't match
-    if ( curr && !matchesFlags( curr ) )
-	++( *this );
-
-    return *this;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the iterator.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator::~TQListViewItemIterator()
-{
-    if ( listView ) {
-	if ( listView->d->iterators->removeRef( this ) ) {
-	    if ( listView->d->iterators->count() == 0 ) {
-		delete listView->d->iterators;
-		listView->d->iterators = 0;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    // removs the d-ptr from the dict ( autodelete on), and deletes the
-    // ptrdict if it becomes empty
-    if ( qt_iteratorprivate_dict ) {
-	qt_iteratorprivate_dict->remove( this );
-	if ( qt_iteratorprivate_dict->isEmpty() ) {
-	    delete qt_iteratorprivate_dict;
-	    qt_iteratorprivate_dict = 0;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Prefix ++. Makes the next item the new current item and returns
-    it. Returns 0 if the current item is the last item or the
-    TQListView is 0.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator++()
-{
-    do {
-        if ( !curr )
-	    return *this;
-
-	TQListViewItem *item = curr->firstChild();
-	if ( !item ) {
-	    while ( (item = curr->nextSibling()) == 0  ) {
-		curr = curr->parent();
-		if ( curr == 0 )
-		    break;
-	    }
-	}
-	curr = item;
-	// if the next one doesn't match the flags we try one more ahead
-    } while  ( curr && !matchesFlags( curr ) );
-    return *this;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Postfix ++. Makes the next item the new current item and returns
-    the item that \e was the current item.
-*/
-
-const TQListViewItemIterator TQListViewItemIterator::operator++( int )
-{
-    TQListViewItemIterator oldValue = *this;
-    ++( *this );
-    return oldValue;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the current item to the item \a j positions after the current
-    item. If that item is beyond the last item, the current item is
-    set to 0. Returns the current item.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator+=( int j )
-{
-    while ( curr && j-- )
-	++( *this );
-
-    return *this;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Prefix --. Makes the previous item the new current item and
-    returns it. Returns 0 if the current item is the first item or the
-    TQListView is 0.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator--()
-{
-    if ( !curr )
-	return *this;
-
-    if ( !curr->parent() ) {
-	// we are in the first depth
-       if ( curr->listView() ) {
-	    if ( curr->listView()->firstChild() != curr ) {
-		// go the previous sibling
-		TQListViewItem *i = curr->listView()->firstChild();
-		while ( i && i->siblingItem != curr )
-		    i = i->siblingItem;
-
-		curr = i;
-
-		if ( i && i->firstChild() ) {
-		    // go to the last child of this item
-		    TQListViewItemIterator it( curr->firstChild() );
-		    for ( ; it.current() && it.current()->parent(); ++it )
-			curr = it.current();
-		}
-
-		if ( curr && !matchesFlags( curr ) )
-		    --( *this );
-
-		return *this;
-	    } else {
-		//we are already the first child of the list view, so it's over
-		curr = 0;
-		return *this;
-	    }
-	} else
-	    return *this;
-    } else {
-	TQListViewItem *parent = curr->parent();
-
-	if ( curr != parent->firstChild() ) {
-	    // go to the previous sibling
-	    TQListViewItem *i = parent->firstChild();
-	    while ( i && i->siblingItem != curr )
-		i = i->siblingItem;
-
-	    curr = i;
-
-	    if ( i && i->firstChild() ) {
-		// go to the last child of this item
-		TQListViewItemIterator it( curr->firstChild() );
-		for ( ; it.current() && it.current()->parent() != parent; ++it )
-		    curr = it.current();
-	    }
-
-	    if ( curr && !matchesFlags( curr ) )
-		--( *this );
-
-	    return *this;
-	} else {
-	    // make our parent the current item
-	    curr = parent;
-
-	    if ( curr && !matchesFlags( curr ) )
-		--( *this );
-
-	    return *this;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Postfix --. Makes the previous item the new current item and
-    returns the item that \e was the current item.
-*/
-
-const TQListViewItemIterator TQListViewItemIterator::operator--( int )
-{
-    TQListViewItemIterator oldValue = *this;
-    --( *this );
-    return oldValue;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the current item to the item \a j positions before the
-    current item. If that item is before the first item, the current
-    item is set to 0. Returns the current item.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItemIterator &TQListViewItemIterator::operator-=( int j )
-{
-    while ( curr && j-- )
-	--( *this );
-
-    return *this;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Dereference operator. Returns a reference to the current item. The
-    same as current().
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem* TQListViewItemIterator::operator*()
-{
-    if ( curr != 0 && !matchesFlags( curr ) )
-	qWarning( "TQListViewItemIterator::operator*() curr out of sync" );
-    return curr;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns iterator's current item.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem *TQListViewItemIterator::current() const
-{
-    if ( curr != 0 && !matchesFlags( curr ) )
-	qWarning( "TQListViewItemIterator::current() curr out of sync" );
-    return curr;
-}
-
-TQListViewItemIteratorPrivate* TQListViewItemIterator::d() const
-{
-    return qt_iteratorprivate_dict ?
-	qt_iteratorprivate_dict->find( (void *)this ) : 0;
-}
-
-void TQListViewItemIterator::init( int iteratorFlags )
-{
-    // makes new global ptrdict if it doesn't exist
-    if ( !qt_iteratorprivate_dict ) {
-	qt_iteratorprivate_dict = new TQPtrDict<TQListViewItemIteratorPrivate>;
-	qt_iteratorprivate_dict->setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    }
-
-    // sets flag, or inserts new TQListViewItemIteratorPrivate with flag
-    if ( d() )
-	d()->flags = iteratorFlags;
-    else
-	qt_iteratorprivate_dict->insert( this, new TQListViewItemIteratorPrivate( iteratorFlags ) );
-}
-
-
-/*
-    Adds this iterator to its TQListView's list of iterators.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItemIterator::addToListView()
-{
-    if ( listView ) {
-	if ( !listView->d->iterators ) {
-	    listView->d->iterators = new TQPtrList<TQListViewItemIterator>;
-	    TQ_CHECK_PTR( listView->d->iterators );
-	}
-	listView->d->iterators->append( this );
-    }
-}
-
-/*
-    This function is called to notify the iterator that the current
-    item has been deleted, and sets the current item point to another
-    (valid) item or 0.
-*/
-
-void TQListViewItemIterator::currentRemoved()
-{
-    if ( !curr ) return;
-
-    if ( curr->parent() )
-	curr = curr->parent();
-    else if ( curr->nextSibling() )
-	curr = curr->nextSibling();
-    else if ( listView && listView->firstChild() &&
-	      listView->firstChild() != curr )
-	curr = listView->firstChild();
-    else
-	curr = 0;
-}
-
-/*
-  returns TRUE if the item \a item matches all of the flags set for the iterator
-*/
-bool TQListViewItemIterator::matchesFlags( const TQListViewItem *item ) const
-{
-    if ( !item )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    int flags = d() ? d()->flags : 0;
-
-    if ( flags == 0 )
-  	return TRUE;
-
-    if ( flags & Visible && !item->isVisible() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & Invisible && item->isVisible() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & Selected && !item->isSelected() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & Unselected && item->isSelected() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & Selectable && !item->isSelectable() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & NotSelectable && item->isSelectable() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & DragEnabled && !item->dragEnabled() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & DragDisabled && item->dragEnabled() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & DropEnabled && !item->dropEnabled() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & DropDisabled && item->dropEnabled() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & Expandable && !item->isExpandable() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & NotExpandable && item->isExpandable() )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & Checked && !isChecked( item ) )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( flags & NotChecked && isChecked( item ) )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*
-  we want the iterator to check TQCheckListItems as well, so we provide this convenience function
-  that checks if the rtti() is 1 which means TQCheckListItem and if isOn is TRUE, returns FALSE otherwise.
-*/
-bool TQListViewItemIterator::isChecked( const TQListViewItem *item ) const
-{
-    if ( item->rtti() == 1 )
-	return ((const TQCheckListItem*)item)->isOn();
-    else return FALSE;
-}
-
-void TQListView::handleItemChange( TQListViewItem *old, bool shift, bool control )
-{
-    if ( d->selectionMode == Single ) {
-	// nothing
-    } else if ( d->selectionMode == Extended ) {
-	if ( shift ) {
-	    selectRange( d->selectAnchor ? d->selectAnchor : old,
-			 d->focusItem, FALSE, TRUE, (d->selectAnchor && !control) ? TRUE : FALSE );
-	} else if ( !control ) {
-	    bool block = tqsignalsBlocked();
-	    blockSignals( TRUE );
-	    selectAll( FALSE );
-	    blockSignals( block );
-	    setSelected( d->focusItem, TRUE );
-	}
-    } else if ( d->selectionMode == Multi ) {
-	if ( shift )
-	    selectRange( old, d->focusItem, TRUE, FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQListView::startRename()
-{
-    if ( !currentItem() )
-	return;
-    currentItem()->startRename( d->pressedColumn );
-    d->buttonDown = FALSE;
-}
-
-/* unselects items from to, including tqchildren, returns TRUE if any items were unselected */
-bool TQListView::clearRange( TQListViewItem *from, TQListViewItem *to, bool includeFirst )
-{
-    if ( !from || !to )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    // Swap
-    if ( from->itemPos() > to->itemPos() ) {
-	TQListViewItem *temp = from;
-	from = to;
-	to = temp;
-    }
-
-    // Start on second?
-    if ( !includeFirst ) {
-	TQListViewItem *below = (from == to) ? from : from->itemBelow();
-	if ( below )
-	    from = below;
-    }
-
-    // Clear items <from, to>
-    bool changed = FALSE;
-
-    TQListViewItemIterator it( from );
-    while ( it.current() ) {
-	if ( it.current()->isSelected() ) {
-	    it.current()->setSelected( FALSE );
-	    changed = TRUE;
-	}
-	if ( it.current() == to )
-	    break;
-	++it;
-    }
-
-    // NOTE! This function does _not_ emit
-    // any Q_SIGNALS about selection changed
-    return changed;
-}
-
-void TQListView::selectRange( TQListViewItem *from, TQListViewItem *to, bool invert, bool includeFirst, bool clearSel )
-{
-    if ( !from || !to )
-	return;
-    if ( from == to && !includeFirst )
-	return;
-    bool swap = FALSE;
-    if ( to == from->itemAbove() )
-	swap = TRUE;
-    if ( !swap && from != to && from != to->itemAbove() ) {
-	TQListViewItemIterator it( from );
-	bool found = FALSE;
-	for ( ; it.current(); ++it ) {
-	    if ( it.current() == to ) {
-		found = TRUE;
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( !found )
-	    swap = TRUE;
-    }
-    if ( swap ) {
-	TQListViewItem *i = from;
-	from = to;
-	to = i;
-	if ( !includeFirst )
-	    to = to->itemAbove();
-    } else {
-	if ( !includeFirst )
-	    from = from->itemBelow();
-    }
-
-    bool changed = FALSE;
-    if ( clearSel ) {
-	TQListViewItemIterator it( firstChild() );
-	for ( ; it.current(); ++it ) {
-	    if ( it.current()->selected ) {
-		it.current()->setSelected( FALSE );
-		changed = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-	it = TQListViewItemIterator( to );
-	for ( ; it.current(); ++it ) {
-	    if ( it.current()->selected ) {
-		it.current()->setSelected( FALSE );
-		changed = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    for ( TQListViewItem *i = from; i; i = i->itemBelow() ) {
-	if ( !invert ) {
-	    if ( !i->selected && i->isSelectable() ) {
-		i->setSelected( TRUE );
-		changed = TRUE;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    bool sel = !i->selected;
-	    if ( ((bool)i->selected != sel && sel && i->isSelectable()) || !sel ) {
-		i->setSelected( sel );
-		changed = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( i == to )
-	    break;
-    }
-    if ( changed ) {
-	d->useDoubleBuffer = TRUE;
-	triggerUpdate();
-	emit selectionChanged();
-    }
-}
-
-/* clears selection from anchor to old, selects from anchor to new, does not emit selectionChanged on change */
-bool TQListView::selectRange( TQListViewItem *newItem, TQListViewItem *oldItem, TQListViewItem *anchorItem )
-{
-    if ( !newItem || !oldItem || !anchorItem )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    int  anchorPos = anchorItem ? anchorItem->itemPos() : 0,
-	 oldPos    = oldItem ? oldItem->itemPos() : 0,
-	 newPos    = newItem->itemPos();
-    TQListViewItem *top=0, *bottom=0;
-    if ( anchorPos > newPos ) {
-	top = newItem;
-	bottom = anchorItem;
-    } else {
-	top = anchorItem;
-	bottom = newItem;
-    }
-
-    // removes the parts of the old selection that will no longer be selected
-    bool changed = FALSE;
-    int topPos    = top ? top->itemPos() : 0,
-	bottomPos = bottom ? bottom->itemPos() : 0;
-    if ( !(oldPos > topPos && oldPos < bottomPos) ) {
-	if ( oldPos < topPos )
-	    changed = clearRange( oldItem, top );
-	else
-	    changed = clearRange( bottom, oldItem );
-    }
-
-    // selects the new (not already selected) items
-    TQListViewItemIterator lit( top );
-    for ( ; lit.current(); ++lit ) {
-	if ( (bool)lit.current()->selected != d->select ) {
-	    lit.current()->setSelected( d->select );
-	    changed = TRUE;
-	}
-	// Include bottom, then break
-	if ( lit.current() == bottom )
-	    break;
-    }
-
-    return changed;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Finds the first list view item in column \a column, that matches
-    \a text and returns the item, or returns 0 of no such item could
-    be found.
-    The search starts from the current item if the current item exists,
-    otherwise it starts from the first list view item. After reaching
-    the last item the search continues from the first item.
-    Pass OR-ed together \l TQt::StringComparisonMode values
-    in the \a compare flag, to control how the matching is performed.
-    The default comparison mode is case-sensitive, exact match.
-*/
-
-TQListViewItem *TQListView::findItem( const TQString& text, int column,
-				    TQt::ComparisonFlags compare ) const
-{
-    if (text.isEmpty() && !(compare & TQt::ExactMatch))
-	return 0;
-
-    if ( compare == TQt::CaseSensitive || compare == 0 )
-	compare |= TQt::ExactMatch;
-
-    TQString itmtxt;
-    TQString comtxt = text;
-    if ( !(compare & TQt::CaseSensitive) )
-	comtxt = comtxt.lower();
-
-    TQListViewItemIterator it( d->focusItem ? d->focusItem : firstChild() );
-    TQListViewItem *sentinel = 0;
-    TQListViewItem *item;
-    TQListViewItem *beginsWithItem = 0;
-    TQListViewItem *endsWithItem = 0;
-    TQListViewItem *containsItem = 0;
-
-    for ( int pass = 0; pass < 2; pass++ ) {
-	while ( (item = it.current()) != sentinel ) {
-	    itmtxt = item->text( column );
-	    if ( !(compare & TQt::CaseSensitive) )
-		itmtxt = itmtxt.lower();
-
-	    if ( compare & TQt::ExactMatch && itmtxt == comtxt )
-		return item;
-	    if ( compare & TQt::BeginsWith && !beginsWithItem && itmtxt.startsWith( comtxt ) )
-		beginsWithItem = containsItem = item;
-	    if ( compare & TQt::EndsWith && !endsWithItem && itmtxt.endsWith( comtxt ) )
-		endsWithItem = containsItem = item;
-	    if ( compare & TQt::Contains && !containsItem && itmtxt.contains( comtxt ) )
-		containsItem = item;
-	    ++it;
-	}
-
-	it = TQListViewItemIterator( firstChild() );
-	sentinel = d->focusItem ? d->focusItem : firstChild();
-    }
-
-    // Obey the priorities
-    if ( beginsWithItem )
-	return beginsWithItem;
-    else if ( endsWithItem )
-	return endsWithItem;
-    else if ( containsItem )
-	return containsItem;
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQListView::windowActivationChange( bool oldActive )
-{
-    if ( oldActive && d->scrollTimer )
-	d->scrollTimer->stop();
-    if ( tqpalette().active() != tqpalette().inactive() )
-	viewport()->update();
-    TQScrollView::windowActivationChange( oldActive );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Hides the column specified at \a column. This is a convenience
-    function that calls setColumnWidth( \a column, 0 ).
-
-    Note: The user may still be able to resize the hidden column using
-    the header handles. To prevent this, call setResizeEnabled(FALSE,
-    \a column) on the list views header.
-
-    \sa setColumnWidth()
-*/
-
-void TQListView::hideColumn( int column )
-{
-    setColumnWidth( column, 0 );
-}
-
-/*! Adjusts the column \a col to its preferred width */
-
-void TQListView::adjustColumn( int col )
-{
-    if ( col < 0 || col > (int)d->column.count() - 1 || d->h->isStretchEnabled( col ) )
-	return;
-
-    int oldw = d->h->sectionSize( col );
-
-    int w = d->h->sectionSizeHint( col, fontMetrics() ).width();
-    if ( d->h->iconSet( col ) )
-	w += d->h->iconSet( col )->pixmap().width();
-    w = TQMAX( w, 20 );
-    TQFontMetrics fm( fontMetrics() );
-    TQListViewItem* item = firstChild();
-    int rootDepth = rootIsDecorated() ? treeStepSize() : 0;
-    while ( item ) {
-	int iw = item->width( fm, this, col );
-	if ( 0 == col )
-	    iw += itemMargin() + rootDepth + item->depth()*treeStepSize() - 1;
-	w = TQMAX( w, iw );
-	item = item->itemBelow();
-    }
-    w = TQMAX( w, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() );
-
-    d->h->adjustHeaderSize( oldw - w );
-    if (oldw != w) {
-        d->fullRepaintOnComlumnChange = TRUE;
-        d->h->resizeSection( col, w );
-	emit d->h->sizeChange( col, oldw, w);
-    }
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_LISTVIEW
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c3d68b..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqlistview.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,610 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQListView widget class
-**
-** Created : 970809
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQLISTVIEW_H
-#define TQLISTVIEW_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqscrollview.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LISTVIEW
-
-
-class TQPixmap;
-class TQFont;
-class TQHeader;
-class TQIconSet;
-
-class TQListView;
-struct TQListViewPrivate;
-struct TQCheckListItemPrivate;
-class TQListViewItemIterator;
-struct TQListViewItemIteratorPrivate;
-class TQDragObject;
-class TQMimeSource;
-class TQLineEdit;
-class TQListViewToolTip;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQListViewItem : public TQt
-{
-    friend class TQListViewItemIterator;
-    friend class TQListViewToolTip;
-
-public:
-    TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent );
-    TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent );
-    TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after );
-    TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after );
-
-    TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent,
-		   TQString,     TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null );
-    TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent,
-		   TQString,     TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null );
-
-    TQListViewItem( TQListView * parent, TQListViewItem * after,
-		   TQString,     TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null );
-    TQListViewItem( TQListViewItem * parent, TQListViewItem * after,
-		   TQString,     TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null,
-		   TQString = TQString::null, TQString = TQString::null );
-    virtual ~TQListViewItem();
-
-    virtual void insertItem( TQListViewItem * );
-    virtual void takeItem( TQListViewItem * );
-    virtual void removeItem( TQListViewItem *item ) { takeItem( item ); } //obsolete, use takeItem instead
-
-    int height() const;
-    virtual void invalidateHeight();
-    int totalHeight() const;
-    virtual int width( const TQFontMetrics&,
-		       const TQListView*, int column) const;
-    void widthChanged(int column=-1) const;
-    int depth() const;
-
-    virtual void setText( int, const TQString &);
-    virtual TQString text( int ) const;
-
-    virtual void setPixmap( int, const TQPixmap & );
-    virtual const TQPixmap * pixmap( int ) const;
-
-    virtual TQString key( int, bool ) const;
-    virtual int compare( TQListViewItem *i, int col, bool ) const;
-    virtual void sortChildItems( int, bool );
-
-    int childCount() const { return nChildren; }
-
-    bool isOpen() const { return open; }
-    virtual void setOpen( bool );
-    virtual void setup();
-
-    virtual void setSelected( bool );
-    bool isSelected() const { return selected; }
-
-    virtual void paintCell( TQPainter *, const TQColorGroup & cg,
-			    int column, int width, int tqalignment );
-    virtual void paintBranches( TQPainter * p, const TQColorGroup & cg,
-				int w, int y, int h );
-    virtual void paintFocus( TQPainter *, const TQColorGroup & cg,
-			     const TQRect & r );
-
-    TQListViewItem * firstChild() const;
-    TQListViewItem * nextSibling() const { return siblingItem; }
-    TQListViewItem * parent() const;
-
-    TQListViewItem * itemAbove();
-    TQListViewItem * itemBelow();
-
-    int itemPos() const;
-
-    TQListView *listView() const;
-
-    virtual void setSelectable( bool enable );
-    bool isSelectable() const { return selectable && enabled; }
-
-    virtual void setExpandable( bool );
-    bool isExpandable() const { return expandable; }
-
-    void tqrepaint() const;
-
-    virtual void sort();
-    void moveItem( TQListViewItem *after );
-
-    virtual void setDragEnabled( bool allow );
-    virtual void setDropEnabled( bool allow );
-    bool dragEnabled() const;
-    bool dropEnabled() const;
-    virtual bool acceptDrop( const TQMimeSource *mime ) const;
-
-    void tqsetVisible( bool b );
-    inline void setVisible( bool b ) { tqsetVisible(b); }
-    bool isVisible() const;
-
-    virtual void setRenameEnabled( int col, bool b );
-    bool renameEnabled( int col ) const;
-    virtual void startRename( int col );
-
-    virtual void setEnabled( bool b );
-    bool isEnabled() const;
-
-    virtual int rtti() const;
-    // ### TQt 4: make const or better use an enum
-    static int RTTI;
-
-    virtual void setMultiLinesEnabled( bool b );
-    bool multiLinesEnabled() const;
-
-protected:
-    virtual void enforceSortOrder() const;
-    virtual void setHeight( int );
-    virtual void activate();
-
-    bool activatedPos( TQPoint & );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    virtual void dropped( TQDropEvent *e );
-#endif
-    virtual void dragEntered();
-    virtual void dragLeft();
-    virtual void okRename( int col );
-    virtual void cancelRename( int col );
-
-    void ignoreDoubleClick();
-
-//private:
-public:
-    void init();
-    void moveToJustAfter( TQListViewItem * );
-    void enforceSortOrderBackToRoot();
-    void removeRenameBox();
-
-    int ownHeight;
-    int maybeTotalHeight;
-    int nChildren;
-
-    uint lsc: 14;
-    uint lso: 1;
-    uint open : 1;
-    uint selected : 1;
-    uint selectable: 1;
-    uint configured: 1;
-    uint expandable: 1;
-    uint is_root: 1;
-    uint allow_drag : 1;
-    uint allow_drop : 1;
-    uint visible : 1;
-    uint enabled : 1;
-    uint mlenabled : 1;
-
-    TQListViewItem * parentItem;
-    TQListViewItem * siblingItem;
-    TQListViewItem * childItem;
-    TQLineEdit *renameBox;
-    int renameCol;
-
-    void * columns;
-
-    friend class TQListView;
-};
-
-class TQCheckListItem;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQListView: public TQScrollView
-{
-    friend class TQListViewItemIterator;
-    friend class TQListViewItem;
-    friend class TQCheckListItem;
-    friend class TQListViewToolTip;
-
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( SelectionMode ResizeMode RenameAction )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int columns READ columns )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool multiSelection READ isMultiSelection WRITE setMultiSelection DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( SelectionMode selectionMode READ selectionMode WRITE setSelectionMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int childCount READ childCount )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool allColumnsShowFocus READ allColumnsShowFocus WRITE setAllColumnsShowFocus )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool showSortIndicator READ showSortIndicator WRITE setShowSortIndicator )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int itemMargin READ itemMargin WRITE setItemMargin )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool rootIsDecorated READ rootIsDecorated WRITE setRootIsDecorated )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool showToolTips READ showToolTips WRITE setShowToolTips )
-    Q_PROPERTY( ResizeMode resizeMode READ resizeMode WRITE setResizeMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int treeStepSize READ treeStepSize WRITE setTreeStepSize )
-    Q_PROPERTY( RenameAction defaultRenameAction READ defaultRenameAction WRITE setDefaultRenameAction )
-
-public:
-    TQListView( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 );
-    ~TQListView();
-
-    int treeStepSize() const;
-    virtual void setTreeStepSize( int );
-
-    virtual void insertItem( TQListViewItem * );
-    virtual void takeItem( TQListViewItem * );
-    virtual void removeItem( TQListViewItem *item ) { takeItem( item ); } // obsolete, use takeItem instead
-
-    TQHeader * header() const;
-
-    virtual int addColumn( const TQString &label, int size = -1);
-    virtual int addColumn( const TQIconSet& iconset, const TQString &label, int size = -1);
-    virtual void removeColumn( int index );
-    virtual void setColumnText( int column, const TQString &label );
-    virtual void setColumnText( int column, const TQIconSet& iconset, const TQString &label );
-    TQString columnText( int column ) const;
-    virtual void setColumnWidth( int column, int width );
-    int columnWidth( int column ) const;
-    enum WidthMode { Manual, Maximum };
-    virtual void setColumnWidthMode( int column, WidthMode );
-    WidthMode columnWidthMode( int column ) const;
-    int columns() const;
-
-    virtual void setColumnAlignment( int, int );
-    int columnAlignment( int ) const;
-
-    void show();
-
-    TQListViewItem * itemAt( const TQPoint & screenPos ) const;
-    TQRect tqitemRect( const TQListViewItem * ) const;
-    int itemPos( const TQListViewItem * );
-
-    void ensureItemVisible( const TQListViewItem * );
-
-    void repaintItem( const TQListViewItem * ) const;
-
-    virtual void setMultiSelection( bool enable );
-    bool isMultiSelection() const;
-
-    enum SelectionMode { Single, Multi, Extended, NoSelection  };
-    void setSelectionMode( SelectionMode mode );
-    SelectionMode selectionMode() const;
-
-    virtual void clearSelection();
-    virtual void setSelected( TQListViewItem *, bool );
-    void setSelectionAnchor( TQListViewItem * );
-    bool isSelected( const TQListViewItem * ) const;
-    TQListViewItem * selectedItem() const;
-    virtual void setOpen( TQListViewItem *, bool );
-    bool isOpen( const TQListViewItem * ) const;
-
-    virtual void setCurrentItem( TQListViewItem * );
-    TQListViewItem * currentItem() const;
-
-    TQListViewItem * firstChild() const;
-    TQListViewItem * lastItem() const;
-
-    int childCount() const;
-
-    virtual void setAllColumnsShowFocus( bool );
-    bool allColumnsShowFocus() const;
-
-    virtual void setItemMargin( int );
-    int itemMargin() const;
-
-    virtual void setRootIsDecorated( bool );
-    bool rootIsDecorated() const;
-
-    virtual void setSorting( int column, bool ascending = TRUE );
-    int sortColumn() const;
-    void setSortColumn( int column );
-    TQt::SortOrder sortOrder() const;
-    void setSortOrder( TQt::SortOrder order );
-    virtual void sort();
-
-    virtual void setFont( const TQFont & );
-    virtual void setPalette( const TQPalette & );
-
-    virtual bool eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * );
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    virtual void setShowSortIndicator( bool show );
-    bool showSortIndicator() const;
-    virtual void setShowToolTips( bool b );
-    bool showToolTips() const;
-
-    enum ResizeMode { NoColumn, AllColumns, LastColumn };
-    virtual void setResizeMode( ResizeMode m );
-    ResizeMode resizeMode() const;
-
-    TQListViewItem * findItem( const TQString& text, int column, TQt::ComparisonFlags compare = TQt::ExactMatch | TQt::CaseSensitive ) const;
-
-    enum RenameAction { Accept, Reject };
-    virtual void setDefaultRenameAction( RenameAction a );
-    RenameAction defaultRenameAction() const;
-    bool isRenaming() const;
-
-    void hideColumn( int column );
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void clear();
-    virtual void invertSelection();
-    virtual void selectAll( bool select );
-    void triggerUpdate();
-    void setContentsPos( int x, int y );
-    void adjustColumn( int col );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void selectionChanged();
-    void selectionChanged( TQListViewItem * );
-    void currentChanged( TQListViewItem * );
-    void clicked( TQListViewItem * );
-    void clicked( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int );
-    void pressed( TQListViewItem * );
-    void pressed( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int );
-
-    void doubleClicked( TQListViewItem * );
-    void doubleClicked( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint&, int );
-    void returnPressed( TQListViewItem * );
-    void spacePressed( TQListViewItem * );
-    void rightButtonClicked( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint&, int );
-    void rightButtonPressed( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint&, int );
-    void mouseButtonPressed( int, TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint& , int );
-    void mouseButtonClicked( int, TQListViewItem *,  const TQPoint&, int );
-
-    void contextMenuRequested( TQListViewItem *, const TQPoint &, int );
-
-    void onItem( TQListViewItem *item );
-    void onViewport();
-
-    void expanded( TQListViewItem *item );
-    void collapsed( TQListViewItem *item );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    void dropped( TQDropEvent *e );
-#endif
-
-public:
-    Q_SIGNAL void itemRenamed( TQListViewItem *item, int col, const TQString & );
-    Q_SIGNAL void itemRenamed( TQListViewItem *item, int col  );
-
-protected:
-    void contentsMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * e );
-    void contentsMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * e );
-    void contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * e );
-    void contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * e );
-    void contentsContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * e );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    void contentsDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent *e );
-    void contentsDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent *e );
-    void contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent *e );
-    void contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e );
-    virtual TQDragObject *dragObject();
-    virtual void startDrag();
-#endif
-
-    virtual void focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * e );
-    virtual void focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * e );
-
-    virtual void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-
-    virtual void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e );
-    virtual void viewportResizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e );
-
-    virtual void showEvent( TQShowEvent * );
-
-    void drawContentsOffset( TQPainter *, int ox, int oy,
-			     int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch );
-
-    virtual void paintEmptyArea( TQPainter *, const TQRect & );
-    void styleChange( TQStyle& );
-    void windowActivationChange( bool );
-
-protected Q_SLOTS:
-    void updateContents();
-    void doAutoScroll();
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void changeSortColumn( int );
-    void handleIndexChange();
-    void updateDirtyItems();
-    void makeVisible();
-    void handleSizeChange( int, int, int );
-    void startRename();
-    void openFocusItem();
-
-private:
-    void contentsMousePressEventEx( TQMouseEvent * e );
-    void contentsMouseReleaseEventEx( TQMouseEvent * e );
-    void init();
-    void updateGeometries();
-    void buildDrawableList() const;
-    void reconfigureItems();
-    void widthChanged(const TQListViewItem*, int c);
-    void handleItemChange( TQListViewItem *old, bool shift, bool control );
-    void selectRange( TQListViewItem *from, TQListViewItem *to, bool invert, bool includeFirst, bool clearSel = FALSE );
-    bool selectRange( TQListViewItem *newItem, TQListViewItem *oldItem, TQListViewItem *anchorItem );
-    bool clearRange( TQListViewItem *from, TQListViewItem *to, bool includeFirst = TRUE );
-    void doAutoScroll( const TQPoint &cursorPos );
-
-    TQListViewPrivate * d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQListView( const TQListView & );
-    TQListView &operator=( const TQListView & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQCheckListItem : public TQListViewItem
-{
-public:
-    enum Type { RadioButton,
-		CheckBox,
-		Controller,
-		RadioButtonController=Controller,
-		CheckBoxController };
-    // ### should be integrated with qbutton in ver4 perhaps
-    enum ToggleState { Off, NoChange, On };
-
-    TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *parent, const TQString &text,
-		    Type = RadioButtonController );
-    TQCheckListItem( TQCheckListItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after,
- 		    const TQString &text, Type = RadioButtonController );
-    TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, const TQString &text,
-		    Type = RadioButtonController );
-    TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, TQListViewItem *after,
- 		    const TQString &text, Type = RadioButtonController );
-    TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, const TQString &text,
-		    Type = RadioButtonController );
-    TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, TQListViewItem *after,
- 		    const TQString &text, Type = RadioButtonController );
-    TQCheckListItem( TQListViewItem *parent, const TQString &text,
-		    const TQPixmap & );
-    TQCheckListItem( TQListView *parent, const TQString &text,
-		    const TQPixmap & );
-    ~TQCheckListItem();
-
-    void paintCell( TQPainter *,  const TQColorGroup & cg,
-		    int column, int width, int tqalignment );
-    virtual void paintFocus( TQPainter *, const TQColorGroup & cg,
-			     const TQRect & r );
-    int width( const TQFontMetrics&, const TQListView*, int column) const;
-    void setup();
-
-    virtual void setOn( bool ); // ### should be replaced by setChecked in ver4
-    bool isOn() const { return on; }
-    Type type() const { return myType; }
-    TQString text() const { return TQListViewItem::text( 0 ); }
-    TQString text( int n ) const { return TQListViewItem::text( n ); }
-
-    void setTristate( bool );
-    bool isTristate() const;
-    ToggleState state() const;
-    void setState( ToggleState s);
-
-    int rtti() const;
-    static int RTTI;
-
-protected:
-    void activate();
-    void turnOffChild();
-    virtual void stateChange( bool );
-    Type myType;
-
-private:
-    void init();
-    ToggleState internalState() const;
-    void setStoredState( ToggleState newState, void *key );
-    ToggleState storedState( void *key ) const;
-    void stateChange( ToggleState s );
-    void restoreState( void *key, int depth = 0 );
-    void updateController( bool update = TRUE , bool store = FALSE );
-    void updateStoredState( void *key );
-    void setState( ToggleState s, bool update, bool store );
-    void setCurrentState( ToggleState s );
-
-    bool on; // ### remove in ver4
-    TQCheckListItemPrivate *d;
-};
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQListViewItemIterator
-{
-    friend struct TQListViewPrivate;
-    friend class TQListView;
-    friend class TQListViewItem;
-
-public:
-    enum IteratorFlag {
-	Visible = 		0x00000001,
-	Invisible = 		0x00000002,
-	Selected =		0x00000004,
-	Unselected = 		0x00000008,
-	Selectable =		0x00000010,
-	NotSelectable =		0x00000020,
-	DragEnabled =		0x00000040,
-	DragDisabled =		0x00000080,
-	DropEnabled =		0x00000100,
-	DropDisabled =		0x00000200,
-	Expandable =		0x00000400,
-	NotExpandable =		0x00000800,
-	Checked =		0x00001000,
-	NotChecked =		0x00002000
-    };
-
-    TQListViewItemIterator();
-    TQListViewItemIterator( TQListViewItem *item );
-    TQListViewItemIterator( TQListViewItem *item, int iteratorFlags );
-
-    TQListViewItemIterator( const TQListViewItemIterator &it );
-    TQListViewItemIterator( TQListView *lv );
-    TQListViewItemIterator( TQListView *lv, int iteratorFlags );
-
-    TQListViewItemIterator &operator=( const TQListViewItemIterator &it );
-
-    ~TQListViewItemIterator();
-
-    TQListViewItemIterator &operator++();
-    const TQListViewItemIterator operator++( int );
-    TQListViewItemIterator &operator+=( int j );
-
-    TQListViewItemIterator &operator--();
-    const TQListViewItemIterator operator--( int );
-    TQListViewItemIterator &operator-=( int j );
-
-    TQListViewItem* operator*();
-    TQListViewItem *current() const;
-
-protected:
-    TQListViewItem *curr;
-    TQListView *listView;
-
-private:
-    TQListViewItemIteratorPrivate* d() const;
-    void init( int flags );
-    void addToListView();
-    void currentRemoved();
-    bool matchesFlags( const TQListViewItem* ) const;
-    bool testPair( TQListViewItemIterator::IteratorFlag, TQListViewItemIterator::IteratorFlag, bool ) const;
-    bool isChecked( const TQListViewItem* ) const;
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_LISTVIEW
-
-#endif // TQLISTVIEW_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 446371c..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2644 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQMainWindow class
-**
-** Created : 980312
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqmainwindow.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
-
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqobjectlist.h"
-#include "tqintdict.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#include "tqmap.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqmenubar.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqtoolbar.h"
-#include "tqstatusbar.h"
-#include "tqscrollview.h"
-#include "tqtooltip.h"
-#include "tqdatetime.h"
-#include "tqwhatsthis.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqdockarea.h"
-#include "tqstringlist.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MACX
-#  include "tqt_mac.h"
-#endif
-
-class TQHideDock;
-class TQMainWindowLayout;
-
-class TQMainWindowPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQMainWindowPrivate()
-	:  mb(0), sb(0), ttg(0), mc(0), tll(0), mwl(0), ubp( FALSE ), utl( FALSE ),
-	   justify( FALSE ), movable( TRUE ), opaque( FALSE ), dockMenu( TRUE )
-    {
-	docks.insert( TQt::DockTop, TRUE );
-	docks.insert( TQt::DockBottom, TRUE );
-	docks.insert( TQt::DockLeft, TRUE );
-	docks.insert( TQt::DockRight, TRUE );
-	docks.insert( TQt::DockMinimized, FALSE );
-	docks.insert( TQt::DockTornOff, TRUE );
-    }
-
-    ~TQMainWindowPrivate()
-    {
-    }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    TQMenuBar * mb;
-#else
-    TQWidget * mb;
-#endif
-    TQStatusBar * sb;
-    TQToolTipGroup * ttg;
-
-    TQWidget * mc;
-
-    TQBoxLayout * tll;
-    TQMainWindowLayout * mwl;
-
-    uint ubp :1;
-    uint utl :1;
-    uint justify :1;
-    uint movable :1;
-    uint opaque :1;
-    uint dockMenu :1;
-
-    TQDockArea *topDock, *bottomDock, *leftDock, *rightDock;
-
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockWindows;
-    TQMap<TQt::Dock, bool> docks;
-    TQStringList disabledDocks;
-    TQHideDock *hideDock;
-
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQPopupMenu> rmbMenu, tbMenu, dwMenu;
-    TQMap<TQDockWindow*, bool> appropriate;
-    TQMap<TQPopupMenu*, TQMainWindow::DockWindows> dockWindowModes;
-
-};
-
-
-/* TQMainWindowLayout, respects widthForHeight layouts (like the left
-  and right docks are)
-*/
-
-class TQMainWindowLayout : public TQLayout
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-
-public:
-    TQMainWindowLayout( TQMainWindow *mw, TQLayout* parent = 0 );
-    ~TQMainWindowLayout() {}
-
-    void addItem( QLayoutItem * );
-    void setLeftDock( TQDockArea *l );
-    void setRightDock( TQDockArea *r );
-    void setCentralWidget( TQWidget *w );
-    bool hasHeightForWidth() const { return FALSE; }
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSize() const;
-    TQLayoutIterator iterator();
-    TQ_SPExpandData expandingDirections() const { return (Qt::Orientations)TQSizePolicy::BothDirections; }
-    void tqinvalidate() {}
-
-protected:
-    void setGeometry( const TQRect &r ) {
-	TQLayout::setGeometry( r );
-	layoutItems( r );
-    }
-
-private:
-    int layoutItems( const TQRect&, bool testonly = FALSE );
-    int extraPixels() const;
-
-    TQDockArea *left, *right;
-    TQWidget *central;
-    TQMainWindow *mainWindow;
-
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-
-    QLAYOUT_REQUIRED_METHOD_DECLARATIONS
-
-#endif // USE_QT4
-
-};
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-int TQMainWindowLayout::count() const {
-	return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQLayoutItem* TQMainWindowLayout::itemAt(int index) const {
-	return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQLayoutItem* TQMainWindowLayout::takeAt(int index) {
-	return 0;
-}
-
-TQSize TQMainWindowLayout::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    int w = 0;
-    int h = 0;
-
-    if ( left ) {
-	w += left->tqsizeHint().width();
-	h = TQMAX( h, left->tqsizeHint().height() );
-    }
-    if ( right ) {
-	w += right->tqsizeHint().width();
-	h = TQMAX( h, right->tqsizeHint().height() );
-    }
-    if ( central ) {
-	w += central->tqsizeHint().width();
-	int diff = extraPixels();
-	h = TQMAX( h, central->tqsizeHint().height() + diff );
-    }
-
-    return TQSize( w, h );
-}
-
-TQSize TQMainWindowLayout::tqminimumSize() const
-{
-    int w = 0;
-    int h = 0;
-
-    if ( left ) {
-	TQSize ms = left->tqminimumSizeHint().expandedTo( left->tqminimumSize() );
-	w += ms.width();
-	h = TQMAX( h, ms.height() );
-    }
-    if ( right ) {
-	TQSize ms = right->tqminimumSizeHint().expandedTo( right->tqminimumSize() );
-	w += ms.width();
-	h = TQMAX( h, ms.height() );
-    }
-    if ( central ) {
-	TQSize min = central->tqminimumSize().isNull() ?
-		    central->tqminimumSizeHint() : central->tqminimumSize();
-	w += min.width();
-	int diff = extraPixels();
-	h = TQMAX( h, min.height() + diff );
-    }
-    return TQSize( w, h );
-}
-
-TQMainWindowLayout::TQMainWindowLayout( TQMainWindow *mw, TQLayout* parent )
-    : TQLayout( parent ), left( 0 ), right( 0 ), central( 0 )
-{
-    mainWindow = mw;
-}
-
-void TQMainWindowLayout::setLeftDock( TQDockArea *l )
-{
-    left = l;
-}
-
-void TQMainWindowLayout::setRightDock( TQDockArea *r )
-{
-    right = r;
-}
-
-void TQMainWindowLayout::setCentralWidget( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    central = w;
-}
-
-int TQMainWindowLayout::layoutItems( const TQRect &r, bool testonly )
-{
-    if ( !left && !central && !right )
-	return 0;
-
-    int wl = 0, wr = 0;
-    if ( left )
-	wl = ( (TQDockAreaLayout*)left->TQWidget::tqlayout() )->widthForHeight( r.height() );
-    if ( right )
-	wr = ( (TQDockAreaLayout*)right->TQWidget::tqlayout() )->widthForHeight( r.height() );
-    int w = r.width() - wr - wl;
-    if ( w < 0 )
-	w = 0;
-
-    int diff = extraPixels();
-    if ( !testonly ) {
-	TQRect g( tqgeometry() );
-	if ( left )
-	    left->setGeometry( TQRect( g.x(), g.y() + diff, wl, r.height() - diff ) );
-	if ( right )
-	    right->setGeometry( TQRect( g.x() + g.width() - wr, g.y() + diff, wr, r.height() - diff ) );
-	if ( central )
-	    central->setGeometry( g.x() + wl, g.y() + diff, w, r.height() - diff );
-    }
-
-    w = wl + wr;
-    if ( central )
-	w += central->tqminimumSize().width();
-    return w;
-}
-
-int TQMainWindowLayout::extraPixels() const
-{
-    if ( mainWindow->d->topDock->isEmpty() &&
-	 !(mainWindow->d->leftDock->isEmpty() &&
-	   mainWindow->d->rightDock->isEmpty()) ) {
-	return 2;
-    } else {
-	return 0;
-    }
-}
-
-void TQMainWindowLayout::addItem( QLayoutItem * /* item */ )
-{
-}
-
-
-TQLayoutIterator TQMainWindowLayout::iterator()
-{
-    return 0;
-}
-
-
-/*
-  TQHideToolTip and TQHideDock - minimized dock
-*/
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-class TQHideToolTip : public TQToolTip
-{
-public:
-    TQHideToolTip( TQWidget *parent ) : TQToolTip( parent ) {}
-    ~TQHideToolTip() {}
-
-    virtual void maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos );
-};
-#endif
-
-
-class TQHideDock : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-
-public:
-    TQHideDock( TQMainWindow *parent ) : TQWidget( parent, "qt_hide_dock" ) {
-	hide();
-	setFixedHeight( tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DockWindowHandleExtent,
-					     this ) + 3 );
-	pressedHandle = -1;
-	pressed = FALSE;
-	setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-	win = parent;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-	tip = new TQHideToolTip( this );
-#endif
-    }
-    ~TQHideDock()
-    {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-	delete tip;
-#endif
-    }
-
-protected:
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e ) {
-
-	if ( childrenListObject().isEmpty() )
-	    return;
-
-	TQPainter p( this );
-	p.setClipRegion( e->rect() );
-	p.fillRect( e->rect(), tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Background ) );
-	int x = 0;
-	int i = -1;
-	TQObjectListIt it( childrenListObject() );
-	TQObject *o;
-	while ( ( o = it.current() ) ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    ++i;
-	    TQDockWindow *dw = ::tqqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(o);
-	    if ( !dw || !dw->isVisible() )
-		continue;
-
-	    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-	    if ( i == pressedHandle )
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_On;
-
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_DockWindowHandle, &p,
-				   TQRect( x, 0, 30, 10 ), tqcolorGroup(),
-				   flags );
-	    x += 30;
-	}
-    }
-
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) {
-	pressed = TRUE;
-	if ( childrenListObject().isEmpty() )
-	    return;
-	mouseMoveEvent( e );
-	pressedHandle = -1;
-
-	if ( e->button() == Qt::RightButton && win->isDockMenuEnabled() ) {
-	    // ### TODO: HideDock menu
-	} else {
-	    mouseMoveEvent( e );
-	}
-    }
-
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) {
-	if ( childrenListObject().isEmpty() )
-	    return;
-	if ( !pressed )
-	    return;
-	int x = 0;
-	int i = -1;
-	if ( e->y() >= 0 && e->y() <= height() ) {
-	    TQObjectListIt it( childrenListObject() );
-	    TQObject *o;
-	    while ( ( o = it.current() ) ) {
-		++it;
-		++i;
-		TQDockWindow *dw = ::tqqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(o);
-		if ( !dw || !dw->isVisible() )
-		    continue;
-
-		if ( e->x() >= x && e->x() <= x + 30 ) {
-		    int old = pressedHandle;
-		    pressedHandle = i;
-		    if ( pressedHandle != old )
-			tqrepaint( TRUE );
-		    return;
-		}
-		x += 30;
-	    }
-	}
-	int old = pressedHandle;
-	pressedHandle = -1;
-	if ( old != -1 )
-	    tqrepaint( TRUE );
-    }
-
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) {
-	pressed = FALSE;
-	if ( pressedHandle == -1 )
-	    return;
-	if ( childrenListObject().isEmpty() )
-	    return;
-	if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	    if ( e->y() >= 0 && e->y() <= height() ) {
-		TQObject *o = childrenListObject().at( pressedHandle );
-		TQDockWindow *dw = ::tqqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(o);
-		if ( dw ) {
-		    dw->show();
-		    dw->dock();
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-	pressedHandle = -1;
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    }
-
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e ) {
-	if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) || !o->isWidgetType() )
-	    return TQWidget::eventFilter( o, e );
-	if ( e->type() == TQEvent::Hide ||
-	     e->type() == TQEvent::Show ||
-	     e->type() == TQEvent::ShowToParent )
-	    updateState();
-	return TQWidget::eventFilter( o, e );
-    }
-
-protected slots:
-    void updateState() {
-	bool visible = TRUE;
-	if ( childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) {
-	    visible = FALSE;
-	} else {
-	    TQObjectListIt it( childrenListObject() );
-	    TQObject *o;
-	    while ( ( o = it.current() ) ) {
-		++it;
-		TQDockWindow *dw = ::tqqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(o);
-		if ( !dw )
-		    continue;
-		if ( dw->isHidden() ) {
-		    visible = FALSE;
-		    continue;
-		}
-		if ( !dw->isVisible() )
-		    continue;
-		visible = TRUE;
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-
-	if ( visible )
-	    show();
-	else
-	    hide();
-	win->triggerLayout( FALSE );
-	update();
-    }
-
-protected:
-    void childEvent( TQChildEvent *e ) {
-	TQWidget::childEvent( e );
-	if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ChildInserted )
-	    e->child()->installEventFilter( this );
-	else
-	    e->child()->removeEventFilter( this );
-	    TQTimer::singleShot( 50, this, SLOT(updateState()) );	// Prevent crash due to show() calling childEvent() in an infinite recursion loop under certain conditions
-    }
-
-private:
-    TQMainWindow *win;
-    int pressedHandle;
-    bool pressed;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    TQHideToolTip *tip;
-    friend class TQHideToolTip;
-#endif
-};
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-void TQHideToolTip::maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos )
-{
-    if ( !parentWidget() )
-	return;
-    TQHideDock *dock = (TQHideDock*)parentWidget();
-
-    if ( dock->childrenListObject().isEmpty() )
-	return;
-    TQObjectListIt it( dock->childrenListObject() );
-    TQObject *o;
-    int x = 0;
-    while ( ( o = it.current() ) ) {
-	++it;
-	TQDockWindow *dw = ::tqqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(o);
-	if ( !dw || !dw->isVisible() )
-	    continue;
-
-	if ( pos.x() >= x && pos.x() <= x + 30 ) {
-	    TQDockWindow *dw = (TQDockWindow*)o;
-	    if ( !dw->caption().isEmpty() )
-		tip( TQRect( x, 0, 30, dock->height() ), dw->caption() );
-	    return;
-	}
-	x += 30;
-    }
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \class TQMainWindow tqmainwindow.h
-    \brief The TQMainWindow class provides a main application window,
-    with a menu bar, dock windows (e.g. for toolbars), and a status
-    bar.
-
-    \ingroup application
-    \mainclass
-
-    Main windows are most often used to provide menus, toolbars and a
-    status bar around a large central widget, such as a text edit,
-    drawing canvas or TQWorkspace (for MDI applications). TQMainWindow
-    is usually subclassed since this makes it easier to encapsulate
-    the central widget, menus and toolbars as well as the window's
-    state. Subclassing makes it possible to create the Q_SLOTS that are
-    called when the user clicks menu items or toolbar buttons. You can
-    also create main windows using \link designer-manual.book TQt
-    Designer\endlink. We'll briefly review adding menu items and
-    toolbar buttons then describe the facilities of TQMainWindow
-    itself.
-
-    \code
-    TQMainWindow *mw = new TQMainWindow;
-    TQTextEdit *edit = new TQTextEdit( mw, "editor" );
-    edit->setFocus();
-    mw->setCaption( "Main Window" );
-    mw->setCentralWidget( edit );
-    mw->show();
-    \endcode
-
-    TQMainWindows may be created in their own right as shown above.
-    The central widget is set with setCentralWidget(). Popup menus can
-    be added to the default menu bar, widgets can be added to the
-    status bar, toolbars and dock windows can be added to any of the
-    dock areas.
-
-    \quotefile application/main.cpp
-    \skipto ApplicationWindow
-    \printuntil show
-
-    In the extract above ApplicationWindow is a subclass of
-    TQMainWindow that we must write for ourselves; this is the usual
-    approach to using TQMainWindow. (The source for the extracts in
-    this description are taken from \l application/main.cpp, \l
-    application/application.cpp, \l action/main.cpp, and \l
-    action/application.cpp )
-
-    When subclassing we add the menu items and toolbars in the
-    subclass's constructor. If we've created a TQMainWindow instance
-    directly we can add menu items and toolbars just as easily by
-    passing the TQMainWindow instance as the parent instead of the \e
-    this pointer.
-
-    \quotefile application/application.cpp
-    \skipto help = new
-    \printuntil about
-
-    Here we've added a new menu with one menu item. The menu has been
-    inserted into the menu bar that TQMainWindow provides by default
-    and which is accessible through the menuBar() function. The slot
-    will be called when the menu item is clicked.
-
-    \quotefile application/application.cpp
-    \skipto fileTools
-    \printuntil setLabel
-    \skipto TQToolButton
-    \printuntil open file
-
-    This extract shows the creation of a toolbar with one toolbar
-    button. TQMainWindow supplies four dock areas for toolbars. When a
-    toolbar is created as a child of a TQMainWindow (or derived class)
-    instance it will be placed in a dock area (the \c Top dock area by
-    default). The slot will be called when the toolbar button is
-    clicked. Any dock window can be added to a dock area either using
-    addDockWindow(), or by creating a dock window with the TQMainWindow
-    as the parent.
-
-    \quotefile application/application.cpp
-    \skipto editor
-    \printuntil statusBar
-
-    Having created the menus and toolbar we create an instance of the
-    large central widget, give it the focus and set it as the main
-    window's central widget. In the example we've also set the status
-    bar, accessed via the statusBar() function, to an initial message
-    which will be displayed for two seconds. Note that you can add
-    additional widgets to the status bar, for example labels, to show
-    further status information. See the TQStatusBar documentation for
-    details, particularly the addWidget() function.
-
-    Often we want to synchronize a toolbar button with a menu item.
-    For example, if the user clicks a 'bold' toolbar button we want
-    the 'bold' menu item to be checked. This synchronization can be
-    achieved automatically by creating actions and adding the actions
-    to the toolbar and menu.
-
-    \quotefile action/application.cpp
-    \skipto TQAction * fileOpen
-    \printline
-    \skipto fileOpenAction
-    \printuntil choose
-
-    Here we create an action with an icon which will be used in any
-    menu and toolbar that the action is added to. We've also given the
-    action a menu name, '\&Open', and a keyboard shortcut. The
-    connection that we have made will be used when the user clicks
-    either the menu item \e or the toolbar button.
-
-    \quotefile action/application.cpp
-    \skipto TQPopupMenu * file
-    \printuntil menuBar
-    \skipto fileOpen
-    \printline
-
-    The extract above shows the creation of a popup menu. We add the
-    menu to the TQMainWindow's menu bar and add our action.
-
-    \quotefile action/application.cpp
-    \skipto TQToolBar * fileTool
-    \printuntil OpenAction
-
-    Here we create a new toolbar as a child of the TQMainWindow and add
-    our action to the toolbar.
-
-    We'll now explore the functionality offered by TQMainWindow.
-
-    The main window will take care of the dock areas, and the tqgeometry
-    of the central widget, but all other aspects of the central widget
-    are left to you. TQMainWindow automatically detects the creation of
-    a menu bar or status bar if you specify the TQMainWindow as parent,
-    or you can use the provided menuBar() and statusBar() functions.
-    The functions menuBar() and statusBar() create a suitable widget
-    if one doesn't exist, and update the window's tqlayout to make
-    space.
-
-    TQMainWindow provides a TQToolTipGroup connected to the status bar.
-    The function toolTipGroup() provides access to the default
-    TQToolTipGroup. It isn't possible to set a different tool tip
-    group.
-
-    New dock windows and toolbars can be added to a TQMainWindow using
-    addDockWindow(). Dock windows can be moved using moveDockWindow()
-    and removed with removeDockWindow(). TQMainWindow allows default
-    dock window (toolbar) docking in all its dock areas (\c Top, \c
-    Left, \c Right, \c Bottom). You can use setDockEnabled() to
-    enable and disable docking areas for dock windows. When adding or
-    moving dock windows you can specify their 'edge' (dock area). The
-    currently available edges are: \c Top, \c Left, \c Right, \c
-    Bottom, \c Minimized (effectively a 'hidden' dock area) and \c
-    TornOff (floating). See \l TQt::Dock for an explanation of these
-    areas. Note that the *ToolBar functions are included for backward
-    compatibility; all new code should use the *DockWindow functions.
-    TQToolbar is a subclass of TQDockWindow so all functions that work
-    with dock windows work on toolbars in the same way.
-
-    \target dwm
-    If the user clicks the close button, then the dock window is
-    hidden. A dock window can be hidden or unhidden by the user by
-    right clicking a dock area and clicking the name of the relevant
-    dock window on the pop up dock window menu. This menu lists the
-    names of every dock window; visible dock windows have a tick
-    beside their names. The dock window menu is created automatically
-    as required by createDockWindowMenu(). Since it may not always be
-    appropriate for a dock window to appear on this menu the
-    setAppropriate() function is used to inform the main window
-    whether or not the dock window menu should include a particular
-    dock window. Double clicking a dock window handle (usually on the
-    left-hand side of the dock window) undocks (floats) the dock
-    window. Double clicking a floating dock window's titlebar will
-    dock the floating dock window. (See also
-    \l{TQMainWindow::DockWindows}.)
-
-    Some functions change the appearance of a TQMainWindow globally:
-    \list
-    \i TQDockWindow::setHorizontalStretchable() and
-    TQDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable() are used to make specific dock
-    windows or toolbars stretchable.
-    \i setUsesBigPixmaps() is used to set whether tool buttons should
-    draw small or large pixmaps (see TQIconSet for more information).
-    \i setUsesTextLabel() is used to set whether tool buttons
-    should display a textual label in addition to pixmaps
-    (see TQToolButton for more information).
-    \endlist
-
-    The user can drag dock windows into any enabled docking area. Dock
-    windows can also be dragged \e within a docking area, for example
-    to rearrange the order of some toolbars. Dock windows can also be
-    dragged outside any docking area (undocked or 'floated'). Being
-    able to drag dock windows can be enabled (the default) and
-    disabled using setDockWindowsMovable().
-
-    The \c Minimized edge is a hidden dock area. If this dock area is
-    enabled the user can hide (minimize) a dock window or show (restore)
-    a minimized dock window by clicking the dock window handle. If the
-    user hovers the mouse cursor over one of the handles, the caption of
-    the dock window is displayed in a tool tip (see
-    TQDockWindow::caption() or TQToolBar::label()), so if you enable the
-    \c Minimized dock area, it is best to specify a meaningful caption
-    or label for each dock window. To minimize a dock window
-    programmatically use moveDockWindow() with an edge of \c Minimized.
-
-    Dock windows are moved transparently by default, i.e. during the
-    drag an outline rectangle is drawn on the screen representing the
-    position of the dock window as it moves. If you want the dock
-    window to be shown normally whilst it is moved use
-    setOpaqueMoving().
-
-    The location of a dock window, i.e. its dock area and position
-    within the dock area, can be determined by calling getLocation().
-    Movable dock windows can be lined up to minimize wasted space with
-    lineUpDockWindows(). Pointers to the dock areas are available from
-    topDock(), leftDock(), rightDock() and bottomDock(). A customize
-    menu item is added to the pop up dock window menu if
-    isCustomizable() returns TRUE; it returns FALSE by default.
-    Reimplement isCustomizable() and customize() if you want to offer
-    this extra menu item, for example, to allow the user to change
-    settings relating to the main window and its toolbars and dock
-    windows.
-
-    The main window's menu bar is fixed (at the top) by default. If
-    you want a movable menu bar, create a TQMenuBar as a stretchable
-    widget inside its own movable dock window and restrict this dock
-    window to only live within the \c Top or \c Bottom dock:
-
-    \code
-    TQToolBar *tb = new TQToolBar( this );
-    addDockWindow( tb, tr( "Menubar" ), Top, FALSE );
-    TQMenuBar *mb = new TQMenuBar( tb );
-    mb->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::NoFrame );
-    tb->setStretchableWidget( mb );
-    setDockEnabled( tb, Left, FALSE );
-    setDockEnabled( tb, Right, FALSE );
-    \endcode
-
-    An application with multiple dock windows can choose to save the
-    current dock window tqlayout in order to restore it later, e.g. in
-    the next session. You can do this by using the streaming operators
-    for TQMainWindow.
-
-    To save the tqlayout and positions of all the dock windows do this:
-
-    \code
-    TQFile file( filename );
-    if ( file.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
-	TQTextStream stream( &file );
-	stream << *mainWindow;
-	file.close();
-    }
-    \endcode
-
-    To restore the dock window positions and sizes (normally when the
-    application is next started), do following:
-
-    \code
-    TQFile file( filename );
-    if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
-	TQTextStream stream( &file );
-	stream >> *mainWindow;
-	file.close();
-    }
-    \endcode
-
-    The TQSettings class can be used in conjunction with the streaming
-    operators to store the application's settings.
-
-    TQMainWindow's management of dock windows and toolbars is done
-    transparently behind-the-scenes by TQDockArea.
-
-    For multi-document interfaces (MDI), use a TQWorkspace as the
-    central widget.
-
-    Adding dock windows, e.g. toolbars, to TQMainWindow's dock areas is
-    straightforward. If the supplied dock areas are not sufficient for
-    your application we suggest that you create a TQWidget subclass and
-    add your own dock areas (see \l TQDockArea) to the subclass since
-    TQMainWindow provides functionality specific to the standard dock
-    areas it provides.
-
-    <img src=qmainwindow-m.png> <img src=qmainwindow-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQToolBar TQDockWindow TQStatusBar TQAction TQMenuBar TQPopupMenu TQToolTipGroup TQDialog
-*/
-
-/*! \enum TQt::ToolBarDock
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQt::Dock
-
-    Each dock window can be in one of the following positions:
-
-    \value DockTop  above the central widget, below the menu bar.
-
-    \value DockBottom  below the central widget, above the status bar.
-
-    \value DockLeft  to the left of the central widget.
-
-    \value DockRight to the right of the central widget.
-
-    \value DockMinimized the dock window is not shown (this is
-    effectively a 'hidden' dock area); the handles of all minimized
-    dock windows are drawn in one row below the menu bar.
-
-    \value DockTornOff the dock window floats as its own top level
-    window which always stays on top of the main window.
-
-    \value DockUnmanaged not managed by a TQMainWindow.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQMainWindow::DockWindows
-
-    Right-clicking a dock area will pop-up the dock window menu
-    (createDockWindowMenu() is called automatically). When called in
-    code you can specify what items should appear on the menu with
-    this enum.
-
-    \value OnlyToolBars The menu will list all the toolbars, but not
-    any other dock windows.
-
-    \value NoToolBars The menu will list dock windows but not
-    toolbars.
-
-    \value AllDockWindows The menu will list all toolbars and other
-    dock windows. (This is the default.)
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn void TQMainWindow::addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock = Top, bool newLine = FALSE );
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \overload void TQMainWindow::addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, const TQString &label, Dock = Top, bool newLine = FALSE );
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn void TQMainWindow::moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock = Top );
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \overload void TQMainWindow::moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *, Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 );
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn void TQMainWindow::removeToolBar( TQDockWindow * );
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn void TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars( bool keepNewLines = FALSE );
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn void TQMainWindow::toolBarPositionChanged( TQToolBar * );
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn bool TQMainWindow::toolBarsMovable() const
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn void TQMainWindow::setToolBarsMovable( bool )
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty main window. The \a parent, \a name and widget
-    flags \a f, are passed on to the TQWidget constructor.
-
-    By default, the widget flags are set to \c WType_TopLevel rather
-    than 0 as they are with TQWidget. If you don't want your
-    TQMainWindow to be a top level widget then you will need to set \a
-    f to 0.
-*/
-
-TQMainWindow::TQMainWindow( TQWidget * parent, const char * name, WFlags f )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, f )
-{
-    d = new TQMainWindowPrivate;
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MACX
-    d->opaque = TRUE;
-#else
-    d->opaque = FALSE;
-#endif
-    installEventFilter( this );
-    d->topDock = new TQDockArea( Qt::Horizontal, TQDockArea::Normal, this, "qt_top_dock" );
-    d->topDock->installEventFilter( this );
-    d->bottomDock = new TQDockArea( Qt::Horizontal, TQDockArea::Reverse, this, "qt_bottom_dock" );
-    d->bottomDock->installEventFilter( this );
-    d->leftDock = new TQDockArea( Qt::Vertical, TQDockArea::Normal, this, "qt_left_dock" );
-    d->leftDock->installEventFilter( this );
-    d->rightDock = new TQDockArea( Qt::Vertical, TQDockArea::Reverse, this, "qt_right_dock" );
-    d->rightDock->installEventFilter( this );
-    d->hideDock = new TQHideDock( this );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQMainWindow::~TQMainWindow()
-{
-    delete tqlayout();
-    delete d;
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-/*!
-    Sets this main window to use the menu bar \a newMenuBar.
-
-    The existing menu bar (if any) is deleted along with its contents.
-
-    \sa menuBar()
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::setMenuBar( TQMenuBar * newMenuBar )
-{
-    if ( !newMenuBar )
-	return;
-    if ( d->mb )
-	delete d->mb;
-    d->mb = newMenuBar;
-    d->mb->installEventFilter( this );
-    triggerLayout();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the menu bar for this window.
-
-    If there isn't one, then menuBar() creates an empty menu bar.
-
-    \sa statusBar()
-*/
-
-TQMenuBar * TQMainWindow::menuBar() const
-{
-    if ( d->mb )
-	return d->mb;
-
-    TQObjectList * l
-	= ((TQObject*)this)->queryList( "TQMenuBar", 0, FALSE, FALSE );
-    TQMenuBar * b;
-    if ( l && l->count() ) {
-	b = (TQMenuBar *)l->first();
-    } else {
-	b = new TQMenuBar( (TQMainWindow *)this, "automatic menu bar" );
-	b->show();
-    }
-    delete l;
-    d->mb = b;
-    d->mb->installEventFilter( const_cast<TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME*>(static_cast<const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME*>(this)) );
-    ((TQMainWindow *)this)->triggerLayout();
-    return b;
-}
-#endif // TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-
-/*!
-    Sets this main window to use the status bar \a newtqStatusBar.
-
-    The existing status bar (if any) is deleted along with its
-    contents.
-
-    Note that \a newtqStatusBar \e must be a child of this main window,
-    and that it is not automatically displayed. If you call this
-    function after show(), you will probably also need to call
-    newtqStatusBar->show().
-
-    \sa setMenuBar() statusBar()
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::setqStatusBar( TQStatusBar * newtqStatusBar )
-{
-    if ( !newtqStatusBar || newtqStatusBar == d->sb )
-	return;
-    if ( d->sb )
-	delete d->sb;
-    d->sb = newtqStatusBar;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    // ### this code can cause unnecessary creation of a tool tip group
-    connect( toolTipGroup(), TQT_SIGNAL(showTip(const TQString&)),
-	     d->sb, TQT_SLOT(message(const TQString&)) );
-    connect( toolTipGroup(), TQT_SIGNAL(removeTip()),
-	     d->sb, TQT_SLOT(clear()) );
-#endif
-    d->sb->installEventFilter( this );
-    triggerLayout();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns this main window's status bar. If there isn't one,
-    statusBar() creates an empty status bar, and if necessary a tool
-    tip group too.
-
-    \sa  menuBar() toolTipGroup()
-*/
-
-TQStatusBar * TQMainWindow::statusBar() const
-{
-    if ( d->sb )
-	return d->sb;
-
-    TQObjectList * l
-	= ((TQObject*)this)->queryList( "TQStatusBar", 0, FALSE, FALSE );
-    TQStatusBar * s;
-    if ( l && l->count() ) {
-	s = (TQStatusBar *)l->first();
-    } else {
-	s = new TQStatusBar( (TQMainWindow *)this, "automatic status bar" );
-	s->show();
-    }
-    delete l;
-    ((TQMainWindow *)this)->setqStatusBar( s );
-    ((TQMainWindow *)this)->triggerLayout( TRUE );
-    return s;
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-/*!
-    Sets this main window to use the tool tip group \a
-    newToolTipGroup.
-
-    The existing tool tip group (if any) is deleted along with its
-    contents. All the tool tips connected to it lose the ability to
-    display the group texts.
-
-    \sa menuBar() toolTipGroup()
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::setToolTipGroup( TQToolTipGroup * newToolTipGroup )
-{
-    if ( !newToolTipGroup || newToolTipGroup == d->ttg )
-	return;
-    if ( d->ttg )
-	delete d->ttg;
-    d->ttg = newToolTipGroup;
-
-    connect( toolTipGroup(), TQT_SIGNAL(showTip(const TQString&)),
-	     statusBar(), TQT_SLOT(message(const TQString&)) );
-    connect( toolTipGroup(), TQT_SIGNAL(removeTip()),
-	     statusBar(), TQT_SLOT(clear()) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns this main window's tool tip group. If there isn't one,
-    toolTipGroup() creates an empty tool tip group.
-
-    \sa menuBar() statusBar()
-*/
-
-TQToolTipGroup * TQMainWindow::toolTipGroup() const
-{
-    if ( d->ttg )
-	return d->ttg;
-
-    TQToolTipGroup * t = new TQToolTipGroup( TQT_TQOBJECT((TQMainWindow*)this),
-					   "automatic tool tip group" );
-    ((TQMainWindowPrivate*)d)->ttg = t;
-    return t;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-/*!
-    If \a enable is TRUE then users can dock windows in the \a dock
-    area. If \a enable is FALSE users cannot dock windows in the \a
-    dock dock area.
-
-    Users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled dock area.
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled( TQt::Dock dock, bool enable )
-{
-    d->docks.replace( dock, enable );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the \a dock dock area is enabled, i.e. it can
-    accept user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setDockEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled( TQt::Dock dock ) const
-{
-    return d->docks[ dock ];
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns TRUE if dock area \a area is enabled, i.e. it can accept
-    user dragged dock windows; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setDockEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled( TQDockArea *area ) const
-{
-
-    if ( area == d->leftDock )
-	return d->docks[ TQt::DockLeft ];
-    if ( area == d->rightDock )
-	return d->docks[ TQt::DockRight ];
-    if ( area == d->topDock )
-	return d->docks[ TQt::DockTop ];
-    if ( area == d->bottomDock )
-	return d->docks[ TQt::DockBottom ];
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    If \a enable is TRUE then users can dock the \a dw dock window in
-    the \a dock area. If \a enable is FALSE users cannot dock the \a
-    dw dock window in the \a dock area.
-
-    In general users can dock (drag) dock windows into any enabled
-    dock area. Using this function particular dock areas can be
-    enabled (or disabled) as docking points for particular dock
-    windows.
-*/
-
-
-void TQMainWindow::setDockEnabled( TQDockWindow *dw, TQt::Dock dock, bool enable )
-{
-    if ( d->dockWindows.find( dw ) == -1 ) {
-	d->dockWindows.append( dw );
-	connect( dw, TQT_SIGNAL( placeChanged(TQDockWindow::Place) ),
-		 this, TQT_SLOT( slotPlaceChanged() ) );
-    }
-    TQString s;
-    s.sprintf( "%p_%d", (void*)dw, (int)dock );
-    if ( enable )
-	d->disabledDocks.remove( s );
-    else if ( d->disabledDocks.find( s ) == d->disabledDocks.end() )
-	d->disabledDocks << s;
-    switch ( dock ) {
-	case TQt::DockTop:
-	    topDock()->setAcceptDockWindow( dw, enable );
-	    break;
-	case TQt::DockLeft:
-	    leftDock()->setAcceptDockWindow( dw, enable );
-	    break;
-	case TQt::DockRight:
-	    rightDock()->setAcceptDockWindow( dw, enable );
-	    break;
-	case TQt::DockBottom:
-	    bottomDock()->setAcceptDockWindow( dw, enable );
-	    break;
-	default:
-	    break;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns TRUE if dock area \a area is enabled for the dock window
-    \a dw; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setDockEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled( TQDockWindow *dw, TQDockArea *area ) const
-{
-    if ( !isDockEnabled( area ) )
-	return FALSE;
-    TQt::Dock dock;
-    if ( area == d->leftDock )
-	dock = TQt::DockLeft;
-    else if ( area == d->rightDock )
-	dock = TQt::DockRight;
-    else if ( area == d->topDock )
-	dock = TQt::DockTop;
-    else if ( area == d->bottomDock )
-	dock = TQt::DockBottom;
-    else
-	return FALSE;
-    return isDockEnabled( dw, dock );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns TRUE if dock area \a dock is enabled for the dock window
-    \a tb; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setDockEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::isDockEnabled( TQDockWindow *tb, TQt::Dock dock ) const
-{
-    if ( !isDockEnabled( dock ) )
-	return FALSE;
-    TQString s;
-    s.sprintf( "%p_%d", (void*)tb, (int)dock );
-    return d->disabledDocks.find( s ) == d->disabledDocks.end();
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Adds \a dockWindow to the \a edge dock area.
-
-    If \a newLine is FALSE (the default) then the \a dockWindow is
-    added at the end of the \a edge. For vertical edges the end is at
-    the bottom, for horizontal edges (including \c Minimized) the end
-    is at the right. If \a newLine is TRUE a new line of dock windows
-    is started with \a dockWindow as the first (left-most and
-    top-most) dock window.
-
-    If \a dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
-    removed from that window.
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow( TQDockWindow *dockWindow,
-			      TQt::Dock edge, bool newLine )
-{
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MAC
-    if(isTopLevel() && edge == DockTop)
-	ChangeWindowAttributes((WindowPtr)handle(), kWindowToolbarButtonAttribute, 0);
-#endif
-    moveDockWindow( dockWindow, edge );
-    dockWindow->setNewLine( newLine );
-    if ( d->dockWindows.find( dockWindow ) == -1 ) {
-	d->dockWindows.append( dockWindow );
-	connect( dockWindow, TQT_SIGNAL( placeChanged(TQDockWindow::Place) ),
-		 this, TQT_SLOT( slotPlaceChanged() ) );
-	dockWindow->installEventFilter( this );
-    }
-    dockWindow->setOpaqueMoving( d->opaque );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Adds \a dockWindow to the dock area with label \a label.
-
-    If \a newLine is FALSE (the default) the \a dockWindow is added at
-    the end of the \a edge. For vertical edges the end is at the
-    bottom, for horizontal edges (including \c Minimized) the end is
-    at the right. If \a newLine is TRUE a new line of dock windows is
-    started with \a dockWindow as the first (left-most and top-most)
-    dock window.
-
-    If \a dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
-    removed from that window.
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::addDockWindow( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, const TQString &label,
-			      TQt::Dock edge, bool newLine )
-{
-    addDockWindow( dockWindow, edge, newLine );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(dockWindow);
-    if ( tb )
-	tb->setLabel( label );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    Moves \a dockWindow to the end of the \a edge.
-
-    For vertical edges the end is at the bottom, for horizontal edges
-    (including \c Minimized) the end is at the right.
-
-    If \a dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
-    removed from that window.
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, TQt::Dock edge )
-{
-    Qt::Orientation oo = dockWindow->orientation();
-    switch ( edge ) {
-    case TQt::DockTop:
-	if ( dockWindow->area() != d->topDock )
-	    dockWindow->removeFromDock( FALSE );
-	d->topDock->moveDockWindow( dockWindow );
-	emit dockWindowPositionChanged( dockWindow );
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockBottom:
-	if ( dockWindow->area() != d->bottomDock )
-	    dockWindow->removeFromDock( FALSE );
-	d->bottomDock->moveDockWindow( dockWindow );
-	emit dockWindowPositionChanged( dockWindow );
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockRight:
-	if ( dockWindow->area() != d->rightDock )
-	    dockWindow->removeFromDock( FALSE );
-	d->rightDock->moveDockWindow( dockWindow );
-	emit dockWindowPositionChanged( dockWindow );
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockLeft:
-	if ( dockWindow->area() != d->leftDock )
-	    dockWindow->removeFromDock( FALSE );
-	d->leftDock->moveDockWindow( dockWindow );
-	emit dockWindowPositionChanged( dockWindow );
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockTornOff:
-	dockWindow->undock();
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockMinimized:
-	dockWindow->undock( d->hideDock );
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockUnmanaged:
-	break;
-    }
-
-    if ( oo != dockWindow->orientation() )
-	dockWindow->setOrientation( dockWindow->orientation() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Moves \a dockWindow to position \a index within the \a edge dock
-    area.
-
-    Any dock windows with positions \a index or higher have their
-    position number incremented and any of these on the same line are
-    moved right (down for vertical dock areas) to make room.
-
-    If \a nl is TRUE, a new dock window line is created below the line
-    in which the moved dock window appears and the moved dock window,
-    with any others with higher positions on the same line, is moved
-    to this new line.
-
-    The \a extraOffset is the space to put between the left side of
-    the dock area (top side for vertical dock areas) and the dock
-    window. (This is mostly used for restoring dock windows to the
-    positions the user has dragged them to.)
-
-    If \a dockWindow is managed by another main window, it is first
-    removed from that window.
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow * dockWindow, TQt::Dock edge, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset )
-{
-    Qt::Orientation oo = dockWindow->orientation();
-
-    dockWindow->setNewLine( nl );
-    dockWindow->setOffset( extraOffset );
-    switch ( edge ) {
-    case TQt::DockTop:
-	if ( dockWindow->area() != d->topDock )
-	    dockWindow->removeFromDock( FALSE );
-	d->topDock->moveDockWindow( dockWindow, index );
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockBottom:
-	if ( dockWindow->area() != d->bottomDock )
-	    dockWindow->removeFromDock( FALSE );
-	d->bottomDock->moveDockWindow( dockWindow, index );
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockRight:
-	if ( dockWindow->area() != d->rightDock )
-	    dockWindow->removeFromDock( FALSE );
-	d->rightDock->moveDockWindow( dockWindow, index );
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockLeft:
-	if ( dockWindow->area() != d->leftDock )
-	    dockWindow->removeFromDock( FALSE );
-	d->leftDock->moveDockWindow( dockWindow, index );
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockTornOff:
-	dockWindow->undock();
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockMinimized:
-	dockWindow->undock( d->hideDock );
-	break;
-    case TQt::DockUnmanaged:
-	break;
-    }
-
-    if ( oo != dockWindow->orientation() )
-	dockWindow->setOrientation( dockWindow->orientation() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes \a dockWindow from the main window's docking area,
-    provided \a dockWindow is non-null and managed by this main
-    window.
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::removeDockWindow( TQDockWindow * dockWindow )
-{
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MAC
-    if(isTopLevel() && dockWindow->area() == topDock() && !dockWindows( DockTop ).count())
-	ChangeWindowAttributes((WindowPtr)handle(), 0, kWindowToolbarButtonAttribute);
-#endif
-
-    dockWindow->hide();
-    d->dockWindows.removeRef( dockWindow );
-    disconnect( dockWindow, TQT_SIGNAL( placeChanged(TQDockWindow::Place) ),
-		this, TQT_SLOT( slotPlaceChanged() ) );
-    dockWindow->removeEventFilter( this );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets up the tqgeometry management of the window. It is called
-    automatically when needed, so you shouldn't need to call it.
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::setUpLayout()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    if ( !d->mb ) {
-	// slightly evil hack here.  reconsider this
-	TQObjectList * l
-	    = ((TQObject*)this)->queryList( "TQMenuBar", 0, FALSE, FALSE );
-	if ( l && l->count() )
-	    d->mb = menuBar();
-	delete l;
-    }
-#endif
-    if ( !d->sb ) {
-	// as above.
-	TQObjectList * l
-	    = ((TQObject*)this)->queryList( "TQStatusBar", 0, FALSE, FALSE );
-	if ( l && l->count() )
-	    d->sb = statusBar();
-	delete l;
-    }
-
-    if (!d->tll) {
-        d->tll = new TQBoxLayout( this, TQBoxLayout::Down );
-        d->tll->setResizeMode( tqminimumSize().isNull() ? TQLayout::Minimum : TQLayout::FreeResize );
-    } else {
-        d->tll->setMenuBar( 0 );
-        TQLayoutIterator it = d->tll->iterator();
-        TQLayoutItem *item;
-        while ( (item = it.takeCurrent()) )
-	    delete item;
-    }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    if ( d->mb && d->mb->isVisibleTo( this ) ) {
-	d->tll->setMenuBar( d->mb );
-	if (tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_MainWindow_SpaceBelowMenuBar, this))
-	    d->tll->addSpacing( d->movable ? 1 : 2 );
-    }
-#endif
-
-    d->tll->addWidget( d->hideDock );
-    if(d->topDock->parentWidget() == this)
-	d->tll->addWidget( d->topDock );
-
-    TQMainWindowLayout *mwl = new TQMainWindowLayout( this, d->tll );
-    d->tll->setStretchFactor( mwl, 1 );
-
-    if(d->leftDock->parentWidget() == this)
-	mwl->setLeftDock( d->leftDock );
-    if ( centralWidget() )
-	mwl->setCentralWidget( centralWidget() );
-    if(d->rightDock->parentWidget() == this)
-	mwl->setRightDock( d->rightDock );
-    d->mwl = mwl;
-
-    if(d->bottomDock->parentWidget() == this)
-	d->tll->addWidget( d->bottomDock );
-
-    if ( d->sb && d->sb->parentWidget() == this) {
-	d->tll->addWidget( d->sb, 0 );
-	// make the sb stay on top of tool bars if there isn't enough space
-	d->sb->raise();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!  \reimp */
-void TQMainWindow::show()
-{
-    if ( !d->tll )
-	setUpLayout();
-
-    // show all floating dock windows not explicitly hidden
-    if (!isVisible()) {
-	TQPtrListIterator<TQDockWindow> it(d->dockWindows);
-	while ( it.current() ) {
-	    TQDockWindow *dw = it.current();
-	    ++it;
-	    if ( dw->isTopLevel() && !dw->isVisible() && !dw->testWState(TQt::WState_ForceHide) )
-		dw->show();
-	}
-    }
-
-    // show us last so we get focus
-    TQWidget::show();
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-void TQMainWindow::hide()
-{
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	TQPtrListIterator<TQDockWindow> it(d->dockWindows);
-	while ( it.current() ) {
-	    TQDockWindow *dw = it.current();
-	    ++it;
-	    if ( dw->isTopLevel() && dw->isVisible() ) {
-		dw->hide(); // implicit hide, so clear forcehide
-		((TQMainWindow*)dw)->clearWState(TQt::WState_ForceHide);
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    TQWidget::hide();
-}
-
-
-/*!  \reimp */
-TQSize TQMainWindow::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    TQMainWindow* that = (TQMainWindow*) this;
-    // Workaround: because d->tll get's deleted in
-    // totalSizeHint->polish->sendPostedEvents->childEvent->triggerLayout
-    // [eg. canvas example on TQt/Embedded]
-    TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( that, TQEvent::ChildInserted );
-    if ( !that->d->tll )
-	that->setUpLayout();
-    return that->d->tll->totalSizeHint();
-}
-
-/*!  \reimp */
-TQSize TQMainWindow::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( !d->tll ) {
-	TQMainWindow* that = (TQMainWindow*) this;
-	that->setUpLayout();
-    }
-    return d->tll->totalMinimumSize();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the central widget for this main window to \a w.
-
-    The central widget is surrounded by the left, top, right and
-    bottom dock areas. The menu bar is above the top dock area.
-
-    \sa centralWidget()
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::setCentralWidget( TQWidget * w )
-{
-    if ( d->mc )
-	d->mc->removeEventFilter( this );
-    d->mc = w;
-    if ( d->mc )
-	d->mc->installEventFilter( this );
-    triggerLayout();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the main window's central widget.
-
-    The central widget is surrounded by the left, top, right and
-    bottom dock areas. The menu bar is above the top dock area.
-
-    \sa setCentralWidget()
-*/
-
-TQWidget * TQMainWindow::centralWidget() const
-{
-    return d->mc;
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQMainWindow::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-{
-    if (d->mb &&
-	tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_MainWindow_SpaceBelowMenuBar, this)) {
-
-	TQPainter p( this );
-	int y = d->mb->height() + 1;
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive(TQStyle::PE_Separator, &p, TQRect(0, y, width(), 1),
-			      tqcolorGroup(), TQStyle::Style_Sunken);
-    }
-}
-
-
-bool TQMainWindow::dockMainWindow( TQObject *dock )
-{
-    while ( dock ) {
-	if ( dock->parent() && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(dock->parent()) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) )
-	    return TRUE;
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(dock->parent()) )
-	    return FALSE;
-	dock = dock->parent();
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::eventFilter( TQObject* o, TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::Show && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) ) {
-	if ( !d->tll )
-	    setUpLayout();
-	d->tll->activate();
-    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ContextMenu && d->dockMenu &&
-	( ::tqqt_cast<TQDockArea*>(o) && dockMainWindow( o ) || TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->hideDock) || TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->mb) ) ) {
-	if ( showDockMenu( ( (TQMouseEvent*)e )->globalPos() ) ) {
-	    ( (TQContextMenuEvent*)e )->accept();
-	    return TRUE;
-	}
-    }
-
-    return TQWidget::eventFilter( o, e );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Monitors events, recieved in \a e, to ensure the tqlayout is updated.
-*/
-void TQMainWindow::childEvent( TQChildEvent* e)
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ChildRemoved ) {
-	if ( e->child() == 0 ||
-	     !e->child()->isWidgetType() ||
-	     ((TQWidget*)e->child())->testWFlags( TQt::WType_TopLevel ) ) {
-	    // nothing
-	} else if ( e->child() == d->sb ) {
-	    d->sb = 0;
-	    triggerLayout();
-	} else if ( e->child() == d->mb ) {
-	    d->mb = 0;
-	    triggerLayout();
-	} else if ( e->child() == d->mc ) {
-	    d->mc = 0;
-	    d->mwl->setCentralWidget( 0 );
-	    triggerLayout();
-	} else if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(e->child()) ) {
-	    removeDockWindow( (TQDockWindow *)(e->child()) );
-	    d->appropriate.remove( (TQDockWindow*)e->child() );
-	    triggerLayout();
-	}
-    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ChildInserted && !d->sb ) {
-	d->sb = ::tqqt_cast<TQStatusBar*>(e->child());
-	if ( d->sb ) {
-	    if ( d->tll ) {
-		if ( !d->tll->findWidget( d->sb ) )
-		    d->tll->addWidget( d->sb );
-	    } else {
-		triggerLayout();
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::event( TQEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ChildRemoved && ( (TQChildEvent*)e )->child() == d->mc ) {
-	d->mc->removeEventFilter( this );
-	d->mc = 0;
-	d->mwl->setCentralWidget( 0 );
-    }
-
-    return TQWidget::event( e );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps
-    \brief whether big pixmaps are enabled
-
-    If FALSE (the default), the tool buttons will use small pixmaps;
-    otherwise big pixmaps will be used.
-
-    Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this
-    setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup,
-    and for connecting to the main window's widget's
-    pixmapSizeChanged() signal.
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::usesBigPixmaps() const
-{
-    return d->ubp;
-}
-
-void TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( enable == (bool)d->ubp )
-	return;
-
-    d->ubp = enable;
-    emit pixmapSizeChanged( enable );
-
-    TQObjectList *l = queryList( "TQLayout" );
-    if ( !l || !l->first() ) {
-	delete l;
-	return;
-    }
-    for ( TQLayout *lay = (TQLayout*)l->first(); lay; lay = (TQLayout*)l->next() )
-	    lay->activate();
-    delete l;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel
-    \brief whether text labels for toolbar buttons are enabled
-
-    If disabled (the default), the tool buttons will not use text
-    labels. If enabled, text labels will be used.
-
-    Tool buttons and other widgets that wish to respond to this
-    setting are responsible for reading the correct state on startup,
-    and for connecting to the main window's widget's
-    usesTextLabelChanged() signal.
-
-    \sa TQToolButton::setUsesTextLabel()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::usesTextLabel() const
-{
-    return d->utl;
-}
-
-
-void TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( enable == (bool)d->utl )
-	return;
-
-    d->utl = enable;
-    emit usesTextLabelChanged( enable );
-
-    TQObjectList *l = queryList( "TQLayout" );
-    if ( !l || !l->first() ) {
-	delete l;
-	return;
-    }
-    for ( TQLayout *lay = (TQLayout*)l->first(); lay; lay = (TQLayout*)l->next() )
-	    lay->activate();
-    delete l;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQMainWindow::pixmapSizeChanged( bool )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the setUsesBigPixmaps() is called
-    with a value different to the current setting. All widgets that
-    should respond to such changes, e.g. toolbar buttons, must connect
-    to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQMainWindow::usesTextLabelChanged( bool )
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the setUsesTextLabel() is called
-    with a value different to the current setting. All widgets that
-    should respond to such changes, e.g. toolbar buttons, must connect
-    to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQMainWindow::dockWindowPositionChanged( TQDockWindow *dockWindow )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the \a dockWindow has changed its
-    position. A change in position occurs when a dock window is moved
-    within its dock area or moved to another dock area (including the
-    \c Minimized and \c TearOff dock areas).
-
-    \sa getLocation()
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::setRightJustification( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( enable == (bool)d->justify )
-	return;
-    d->justify = enable;
-    triggerLayout( TRUE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \property TQMainWindow::rightJustification
-    \brief whether the main window right-justifies its dock windows
-
-    If disabled (the default), stretchable dock windows are expanded,
-    and non-stretchable dock windows are given the minimum space they
-    need. Since most dock windows are not stretchable, this usually
-    results in an unjustified right edge (or unjustified bottom edge
-    for a vertical dock area). If enabled, the main window will
-    right-justify its dock windows.
-
-    \sa TQDockWindow::setVerticalStretchable(), TQDockWindow::setHorizontalStretchable()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::rightJustification() const
-{
-    return d->justify;
-}
-
-/*! \internal
- */
-
-void TQMainWindow::triggerLayout( bool deleteLayout )
-{
-    if ( deleteLayout || !d->tll )
-	setUpLayout();
-    TQApplication::postEvent( this, new TQEvent( TQEvent::LayoutHint ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Enters 'What's This?' mode and returns immediately.
-
-    This is the same as TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode(), but
-    implemented as a main window object's slot. This way it can easily
-    be used for popup menus, for example:
-
-    \code
-    TQPopupMenu * help = new TQPopupMenu( this );
-    help->insertItem( "What's &This", this , TQT_SLOT(whatsThis()), SHIFT+Key_F1);
-    \endcode
-
-    \sa TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode()
-*/
-void TQMainWindow::whatsThis()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-    TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode();
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    TQWidget::styleChange( old );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Finds the location of the dock window \a dw.
-
-    If the \a dw dock window is found in the main window the function
-    returns TRUE and populates the \a dock variable with the dw's dock
-    area and the \a index with the dw's position within the dock area.
-    It also sets \a nl to TRUE if the \a dw begins a new line
-    (otherwise FALSE), and \a extraOffset with the dock window's offset.
-
-    If the \a dw dock window is not found then the function returns
-    FALSE and the state of \a dock, \a index, \a nl and \a extraOffset
-    is undefined.
-
-    If you want to save and restore dock window positions then use
-    operator>>() and operator<<().
-
-    \sa operator>>() operator<<()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::getLocation( TQDockWindow *dw, TQt::Dock &dock, int &index, bool &nl, int &extraOffset ) const
-{
-    dock = TQt::DockTornOff;
-    if ( d->topDock->hasDockWindow( dw, &index ) )
-	dock = TQt::DockTop;
-    else if ( d->bottomDock->hasDockWindow( dw, &index ) )
-	dock = TQt::DockBottom;
-    else if ( d->leftDock->hasDockWindow( dw, &index ) )
-	dock = TQt::DockLeft;
-    else if ( d->rightDock->hasDockWindow( dw, &index ) )
-	dock = TQt::DockRight;
-    else if ( dw->parentWidget() == d->hideDock ) {
-	index = 0;
-	dock = TQt::DockMinimized;
-    } else {
-	index = 0;
-    }
-    nl = dw->newLine();
-    extraOffset = dw->offset();
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-/*!
-    Returns a list of all the toolbars which are in the \a dock dock
-    area, regardless of their state.
-
-    For example, the \c TornOff dock area may contain closed toolbars
-    but these are returned along with the visible toolbars.
-
-    \sa dockWindows()
-*/
-
-TQPtrList<TQToolBar> TQMainWindow::toolBars( TQt::Dock dock ) const
-{
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> lst = dockWindows( dock );
-    TQPtrList<TQToolBar> tbl;
-    for ( TQDockWindow *w = lst.first(); w; w = lst.next() ) {
-	TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(w);
-	if ( tb )
-	    tbl.append( tb );
-    }
-    return tbl;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    Returns a list of all the dock windows which are in the \a dock
-    dock area, regardless of their state.
-
-    For example, the \c DockTornOff dock area may contain closed dock
-    windows but these are returned along with the visible dock
-    windows.
-*/
-
-TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> TQMainWindow::dockWindows( TQt::Dock dock ) const
-{
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> lst;
-    switch ( dock ) {
-    case TQt::DockTop:
-	return d->topDock->dockWindowList();
-    case TQt::DockBottom:
-	return d->bottomDock->dockWindowList();
-    case TQt::DockLeft:
-	return d->leftDock->dockWindowList();
-    case TQt::DockRight:
-	return d->rightDock->dockWindowList();
-    case TQt::DockTornOff: {
-	for ( TQDockWindow *w = d->dockWindows.first(); w; w = d->dockWindows.next() ) {
-	    if ( !w->area() && w->place() == TQDockWindow::OutsideDock )
-		lst.append( w );
-	}
-    }
-    return lst;
-    case TQt::DockMinimized: {
-	if ( !d->hideDock->childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) {
-	    TQObjectListIt it( d->hideDock->childrenListObject() );
-	    TQObject *o;
-	    while ( ( o = it.current() ) ) {
-		++it;
-		TQDockWindow *dw = ::tqqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(o);
-		if ( !dw )
-		    continue;
-		lst.append( dw );
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    return lst;
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-    return lst;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns the list of dock windows which belong to this main window,
-    regardless of which dock area they are in or what their state is,
-    (e.g. irrespective of whether they are visible or not).
-*/
-
-TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> TQMainWindow::dockWindows() const
-{
-    return d->dockWindows;
-}
-
-void TQMainWindow::setDockWindowsMovable( bool enable )
-{
-    d->movable = enable;
-    TQObjectList *l = queryList( "TQDockWindow" );
-    if ( l ) {
-	for ( TQObject *o = l->first(); o; o = l->next() )
-	    ( (TQDockWindow*)o )->setMovingEnabled( enable );
-    }
-    delete l;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable
-    \brief whether the dock windows are movable
-
-    If TRUE (the default), the user will be able to move movable dock
-    windows from one TQMainWindow dock area to another, including the
-    \c TearOff area (i.e. where the dock window floats freely as a
-    window in its own right), and the \c Minimized area (where only
-    the dock window's handle is shown below the menu bar). Moveable
-    dock windows can also be moved within TQMainWindow dock areas, i.e.
-    to rearrange them within a dock area.
-
-    If FALSE the user will not be able to move any dock windows.
-
-    By default dock windows are moved transparently (i.e. only an
-    outline rectangle is shown during the drag), but this setting can
-    be changed with setOpaqueMoving().
-
-    \sa setDockEnabled(), setOpaqueMoving()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::dockWindowsMovable() const
-{
-    return d->movable;
-}
-
-void TQMainWindow::setOpaqueMoving( bool b )
-{
-    d->opaque = b;
-    TQObjectList *l = queryList( "TQDockWindow" );
-    if ( l ) {
-	for ( TQObject *o = l->first(); o; o = l->next() )
-	    ( (TQDockWindow*)o )->setOpaqueMoving( b );
-    }
-    delete l;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQMainWindow::opaqueMoving
-    \brief whether dock windows are moved opaquely
-
-    If TRUE the dock windows of the main window are shown opaquely
-    (i.e. it shows the toolbar as it looks when docked) whilst it is
-    being moved. If FALSE (the default) they are shown transparently,
-    (i.e. as an outline rectangle).
-
-    \warning Opaque moving of toolbars and dockwindows is known to
-    have several problems. We recommend avoiding the use of this
-    feature for the time being. We intend fixing the problems in a
-    future release.
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::opaqueMoving() const
-{
-    return d->opaque;
-}
-
-/*!
-    This function will line up dock windows within the visible dock
-    areas (\c Top, \c Left, \c Right and \c Bottom) as compactly as
-    possible.
-
-    If \a keepNewLines is TRUE, all dock windows stay on their
-    original lines. If \a keepNewLines is FALSE then newlines may be
-    removed to achieve the most compact tqlayout possible.
-
-    The method only works if dockWindowsMovable() returns TRUE.
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::lineUpDockWindows( bool keepNewLines )
-{
-    if ( !dockWindowsMovable() )
-	return;
-    d->topDock->lineUp( keepNewLines );
-    d->leftDock->lineUp( keepNewLines );
-    d->rightDock->lineUp( keepNewLines );
-    d->bottomDock->lineUp( keepNewLines );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE, if the dock window menu is enabled; otherwise
-    returns FALSE.
-
-    The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be
-    shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" menu item. It
-    will also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns
-    TRUE.
-
-    \sa setDockEnabled(), lineUpDockWindows() appropriate()
-    setAppropriate()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::isDockMenuEnabled() const
-{
-    return d->dockMenu;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a b is TRUE, then right clicking on a dock window or dock area
-    will pop up the dock window menu. If \a b is FALSE, right clicking
-    a dock window or dock area will not pop up the menu.
-
-    The menu lists the (appropriate()) dock windows (which may be
-    shown or hidden), and has a "Line Up Dock Windows" item. It will
-    also have a "Customize" menu item if isCustomizable() returns
-    TRUE.
-
-    \sa lineUpDockWindows(), isDockMenuEnabled()
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::setDockMenuEnabled( bool b )
-{
-    d->dockMenu = b;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Creates the dock window menu which contains all toolbars (if \a
-    dockWindows is \c OnlyToolBars ), all dock windows (if \a
-    dockWindows is \c NoToolBars) or all toolbars and dock windows (if
-    \a dockWindows is \c AllDockWindows - the default).
-
-    This function is called internally when necessary, e.g. when the
-    user right clicks a dock area (providing isDockMenuEnabled()
-    returns TRUE).
-\omit
-### TQt 4.0
-    You can reimplement this function if you wish to customize the
-    behaviour.
-\endomit
-
-    The menu items representing the toolbars and dock windows are
-    checkable. The visible dock windows are checked and the hidden
-    dock windows are unchecked. The user can click a menu item to
-    change its state (show or hide the dock window).
-
-    The list and the state are always kept up-to-date.
-
-    Toolbars and dock windows which are not appropriate in the current
-    context (see setAppropriate()) are not listed in the menu.
-
-    The menu also has a menu item for lining up the dock windows.
-
-    If isCustomizable() returns TRUE, a Customize menu item is added
-    to the menu, which if clicked will call customize(). The
-    isCustomizable() function we provide returns FALSE and customize()
-    does nothing, so they must be reimplemented in a subclass to be
-    useful.
-*/
-
-TQPopupMenu *TQMainWindow::createDockWindowMenu( DockWindows dockWindows ) const
-{
-    TQObjectList *l = queryList( "TQDockWindow" );
-
-    if ( !l || l->isEmpty() )
-	return 0;
-
-    delete l;
-
-    TQPopupMenu *menu = new TQPopupMenu( (TQMainWindow*)this, "qt_customize_menu" );
-    menu->setCheckable( TRUE );
-    d->dockWindowModes.replace( menu, dockWindows );
-    connect( menu, TQT_SIGNAL( aboutToShow() ), this, TQT_SLOT( menuAboutToShow() ) );
-    return menu;
-}
-
-/*!
-    This slot is called from the aboutToShow() signal of the default
-    dock menu of the mainwindow. The default implementation
-    initializes the menu with all dock windows and toolbars in this
-    slot.
-\omit
-### TQt 4.0
-    If you want to do small adjustments to the menu, you can do it in
-    this slot; or you can reimplement createDockWindowMenu().
-\endomit
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::menuAboutToShow()
-{
-    TQPopupMenu *menu = (TQPopupMenu*)sender();
-    TQMap<TQPopupMenu*, DockWindows>::Iterator it = d->dockWindowModes.find( menu );
-    if ( it == d->dockWindowModes.end() )
-	return;
-    menu->clear();
-
-    DockWindows dockWindows = *it;
-
-    TQObjectList *l = queryList( "TQDockWindow" );
-
-    bool empty = TRUE;
-    if ( l && !l->isEmpty() ) {
-
-	TQObject *o = 0;
-	if ( dockWindows == AllDockWindows || dockWindows == NoToolBars ) {
-	    for ( o = l->first(); o; o = l->next() ) {
-		TQDockWindow *dw = (TQDockWindow*)o;
-		if ( !appropriate( dw ) || ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(dw) || !dockMainWindow( TQT_TQOBJECT(dw) ) )
-		    continue;
-		TQString label = dw->caption();
-		if ( !label.isEmpty() ) {
-		    int id = menu->insertItem( label, TQT_TQOBJECT(dw), TQT_SLOT( toggleVisible() ) );
-		    menu->setItemChecked( id, dw->isVisible() );
-		    empty = FALSE;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ( !empty )
-		menu->insertSeparator();
-	}
-
-	empty = TRUE;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-	if ( dockWindows == AllDockWindows || dockWindows == OnlyToolBars ) {
-	    for ( o = l->first(); o; o = l->next() ) {
-		TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(o);
-		if ( !tb || !appropriate(tb) || !dockMainWindow(TQT_TQOBJECT(tb)) )
-		    continue;
-		TQString label = tb->label();
-		if ( !label.isEmpty() ) {
-		    int id = menu->insertItem( label, TQT_TQOBJECT(tb), TQT_SLOT( toggleVisible() ) );
-		    menu->setItemChecked( id, tb->isVisible() );
-		    empty = FALSE;
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-#endif
-
-    }
-
-    delete l;
-
-    if ( !empty )
-	menu->insertSeparator();
-
-    if ( dockWindowsMovable() )
-	menu->insertItem( tr( "Line up" ), TQT_TQOBJECT(this), TQT_SLOT( doLineUp() ) );
-    if ( isCustomizable() )
-	menu->insertItem( tr( "Customize..." ), TQT_TQOBJECT(this), TQT_SLOT( customize() ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Shows the dock menu at the position \a globalPos. The menu lists
-    the dock windows so that they can be shown (or hidden), lined up,
-    and possibly customized. Returns TRUE if the menu is shown;
-    otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    If you want a custom menu, reimplement this function. You can
-    create the menu from scratch or call createDockWindowMenu() and
-    modify the result.
-\omit
-### TQt 4.0
-    The default implementation uses the dock window menu which gets
-    created by createDockWindowMenu(). You can reimplement
-    createDockWindowMenu() if you want to use your own specialized
-    popup menu.
-\endomit
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::showDockMenu( const TQPoint &globalPos )
-{
-    if ( !d->dockMenu )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( !d->rmbMenu )
-	d->rmbMenu = createDockWindowMenu();
-    if ( !d->rmbMenu )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    d->rmbMenu->exec( globalPos );
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-void TQMainWindow::slotPlaceChanged()
-{
-    TQObject* obj = (TQObject*)sender();
-    TQDockWindow *dw = ::tqqt_cast<TQDockWindow*>(obj);
-    if ( dw )
-	emit dockWindowPositionChanged( dw );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(obj);
-    if ( tb )
-	emit toolBarPositionChanged( tb );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-    For internal use of TQDockWindow only.
- */
-
-TQDockArea *TQMainWindow::dockingArea( const TQPoint &p )
-{
-    int mh = d->mb ? d->mb->height() : 0;
-    int sh = d->sb ? d->sb->height() : 0;
-    if ( p.x() >= -5 && p.x() <= 100 && p.y() > mh && p.y() - height() - sh )
-	return d->leftDock;
-    if ( p.x() >= width() - 100 && p.x() <= width() + 5 && p.y() > mh && p.y() - height() - sh )
-	return d->rightDock;
-    if ( p.y() >= -5 && p.y() < mh + 100 && p.x() >= 0 && p.x() <= width() )
-	return d->topDock;
-    if ( p.y() >= height() - sh - 100 && p.y() <= height() + 5 && p.x() >= 0 && p.x() <= width() )
-	return d->bottomDock;
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if \a dw is a dock window known to the main window;
-    otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::hasDockWindow( TQDockWindow *dw )
-{
-    return d->dockWindows.findRef( dw ) != -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the \c Left dock area
-
-    \sa rightDock() topDock() bottomDock()
-*/
-
-TQDockArea *TQMainWindow::leftDock() const
-{
-    return d->leftDock;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the \c Right dock area
-
-    \sa leftDock() topDock() bottomDock()
-*/
-
-TQDockArea *TQMainWindow::rightDock() const
-{
-    return d->rightDock;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the \c Top dock area
-
-    \sa bottomDock() leftDock() rightDock()
-*/
-
-TQDockArea *TQMainWindow::topDock() const
-{
-    return d->topDock;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer the \c Bottom dock area
-
-    \sa topDock() leftDock() rightDock()
-*/
-
-TQDockArea *TQMainWindow::bottomDock() const
-{
-    return d->bottomDock;
-}
-
-/*!
-    This function is called when the user clicks the Customize menu
-    item on the dock window menu.
-
-    The customize menu item will only appear if isCustomizable()
-    returns TRUE (it returns FALSE by default).
-
-    The function is intended, for example, to provide the user with a
-    means of telling the application that they wish to customize the
-    main window, dock windows or dock areas.
-
-    The default implementation does nothing and the Customize menu
-    item is not shown on the right-click menu by default. If you want
-    the item to appear then reimplement isCustomizable() to return
-    TRUE, and reimplement this function to do whatever you want.
-
-    \sa isCustomizable()
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::customize()
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the dock area dock window menu includes the
-    Customize menu item (which calls customize() when clicked).
-    Returns FALSE by default, i.e. the popup menu will not contain a
-    Customize menu item. You will need to reimplement this function
-    and set it to return TRUE if you wish the user to be able to see
-    the dock window menu.
-
-    \sa customize()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::isCustomizable() const
-{
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if it is appropriate to include a menu item for the
-    \a dw dock window in the dock window menu; otherwise returns
-    FALSE.
-
-    The user is able to change the state (show or hide) a dock window
-    that has a menu item by clicking the item.
-
-    Call setAppropriate() to indicate whether or not a particular dock
-    window should appear on the popup menu.
-
-    \sa setAppropriate()
-*/
-
-bool TQMainWindow::appropriate( TQDockWindow *dw ) const
-{
-    TQMap<TQDockWindow*, bool>::ConstIterator it = d->appropriate.find( dw );
-    if ( it == d->appropriate.end() )
-	return TRUE;
-    return *it;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Use this function to control whether or not the \a dw dock
-    window's caption should appear as a menu item on the dock window
-    menu that lists the dock windows.
-
-    If \a a is TRUE then the \a dw will appear as a menu item on the
-    dock window menu. The user is able to change the state (show or
-    hide) a dock window that has a menu item by clicking the item;
-    depending on the state of your application, this may or may not be
-    appropriate. If \a a is FALSE the \a dw will not appear on the
-    popup menu.
-
-    \sa showDockMenu() isCustomizable() customize()
-*/
-
-void TQMainWindow::setAppropriate( TQDockWindow *dw, bool a )
-{
-    d->appropriate.replace( dw, a );
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTSTREAM
-static void saveDockArea( TQTextStream &ts, TQDockArea *a )
-{
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> l = a->dockWindowList();
-    for ( TQDockWindow *dw = l.first(); dw; dw = l.next() ) {
-	ts << TQString( dw->caption() );
-	ts << ",";
-    }
-    ts << endl;
-    ts << *a;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \relates TQMainWindow
-
-    Writes the tqlayout (sizes and positions) of the dock windows in the
-    dock areas of the TQMainWindow \a mainWindow, including \c
-    Minimized and \c TornOff dock windows, to the text stream \a ts.
-
-    This can be used, for example, in conjunction with TQSettings to
-    save the user's tqlayout when the \mainWindow receives a closeEvent.
-
-    \sa operator>>() closeEvent()
-*/
-
-TQTextStream &operator<<( TQTextStream &ts, const TQMainWindow &mainWindow )
-{
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> l = mainWindow.dockWindows( TQt::DockMinimized );
-    TQDockWindow *dw = 0;
-    for ( dw = l.first(); dw; dw = l.next() ) {
-	ts << dw->caption();
-	ts << ",";
-    }
-    ts << endl;
-
-    l = mainWindow.dockWindows( TQt::DockTornOff );
-    for ( dw = l.first(); dw; dw = l.next() ) {
-	ts << dw->caption();
-	ts << ",";
-    }
-    ts << endl;
-    for ( dw = l.first(); dw; dw = l.next() ) {
-	ts << "[" << dw->caption() << ","
-	   << (int)dw->tqgeometry().x() << ","
-	   << (int)dw->tqgeometry().y() << ","
-	   << (int)dw->tqgeometry().width() << ","
-	   << (int)dw->tqgeometry().height() << ","
-	   << (int)dw->isVisible() << "]";
-    }
-    ts << endl;
-
-    saveDockArea( ts, mainWindow.topDock() );
-    saveDockArea( ts, mainWindow.bottomDock() );
-    saveDockArea( ts, mainWindow.rightDock() );
-    saveDockArea( ts, mainWindow.leftDock() );
-    return ts;
-}
-
-static void loadDockArea( const TQStringList &names, TQDockArea *a, TQt::Dock d, TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> &l, TQMainWindow *mw, TQTextStream &ts )
-{
-    for ( TQStringList::ConstIterator it = names.begin(); it != names.end(); ++it ) {
-	for ( TQDockWindow *dw = l.first(); dw; dw = l.next() ) {
-	    if ( dw->caption() == *it ) {
-		mw->addDockWindow( dw, d );
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    if ( a ) {
-	ts >> *a;
-    } else if ( d == TQt::DockTornOff ) {
-	TQString s = ts.readLine();
-	enum State { Pre, Name, X, Y, Width, Height, Visible, Post };
-	int state = Pre;
-	TQString name, x, y, w, h, visible;
-	TQChar c;
-	for ( int i = 0; i < (int)s.length(); ++i ) {
-	    c = s[ i ];
-	    if ( state == Pre && c == '[' ) {
-		state++;
-		continue;
-	    }
-	    if ( c == ',' &&
-		 ( state == Name || state == X || state == Y || state == Width || state == Height ) ) {
-		state++;
-		continue;
-	    }
-	    if ( state == Visible && c == ']' ) {
-		for ( TQDockWindow *dw = l.first(); dw; dw = l.next() ) {
-		    if ( TQString( dw->caption() ) == name ) {
-			if ( !::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(dw) )
-			    dw->setGeometry( x.toInt(), y.toInt(), w.toInt(), h.toInt() );
-			else
-			    dw->setGeometry( x.toInt(), y.toInt(), dw->width(), dw->height() );
-			if ( !(bool)visible.toInt() )
-			    dw->hide();
-			else
-			    dw->show();
-			break;
-		    }
-		}
-
-		name = x = y = w = h = visible = "";
-
-		state = Pre;
-		continue;
-	    }
-	    if ( state == Name )
-		name += c;
-	    else if ( state == X )
-		x += c;
-	    else if ( state == Y )
-		y += c;
-	    else if ( state == Width )
-		w += c;
-	    else if ( state == Height )
-		h += c;
-	    else if ( state == Visible )
-		visible += c;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \relates TQMainWindow
-
-    Reads the tqlayout (sizes and positions) of the dock windows in the
-    dock areas of the TQMainWindow \a mainWindow from the text stream,
-    \a ts, including \c Minimized and \c TornOff dock windows.
-    Restores the dock windows and dock areas to these sizes and
-    positions. The tqlayout information must be in the format produced
-    by operator<<().
-
-    This can be used, for example, in conjunction with TQSettings to
-    restore the user's tqlayout.
-
-    \sa operator<<()
-*/
-
-TQTextStream &operator>>( TQTextStream &ts, TQMainWindow &mainWindow )
-{
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> l = mainWindow.dockWindows();
-
-    TQString s = ts.readLine();
-    TQStringList names = TQStringList::split( ',', s );
-    loadDockArea( names, 0, TQt::DockMinimized, l, &mainWindow, ts );
-
-    s = ts.readLine();
-    names = TQStringList::split( ',', s );
-    loadDockArea( names, 0, TQt::DockTornOff, l, &mainWindow, ts );
-
-    int i = 0;
-    TQDockArea *areas[] = { mainWindow.topDock(), mainWindow.bottomDock(), mainWindow.rightDock(), mainWindow.leftDock() };
-    for ( int d = (int)TQt::DockTop; d != (int)TQt::DockMinimized; ++d, ++i ) {
-	s = ts.readLine();
-	names = TQStringList::split( ',', s );
-	loadDockArea( names, areas[ i ], (TQt::Dock)d, l, &mainWindow, ts );
-    }
-    return ts;
-}
-#endif
-
-#include "tqmainwindow.tqmoc"
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b2e2734..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmainwindow.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,262 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQMainWindow class
-**
-** Created : 980316
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQMAINWINDOW_H
-#define TQMAINWINDOW_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqtoolbar.h"
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#include "tqtextstream.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
-
-class TQMenuBar;
-class TQStatusBar;
-class TQToolTipGroup;
-class TQMainWindowPrivate;
-class TQMainWindowLayout;
-class TQPopupMenu;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQMainWindow: public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool rightJustification READ rightJustification WRITE setRightJustification DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool usesBigPixmaps READ usesBigPixmaps WRITE setUsesBigPixmaps )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool usesTextLabel READ usesTextLabel WRITE setUsesTextLabel )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool dockWindowsMovable READ dockWindowsMovable WRITE setDockWindowsMovable )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool opaqueMoving READ opaqueMoving WRITE setOpaqueMoving )
-
-public:
-    TQMainWindow( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = (WFlags)TQt::WType_TopLevel );
-    ~TQMainWindow();
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    TQMenuBar * menuBar() const;
-#endif
-    TQStatusBar * statusBar() const;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    TQToolTipGroup * toolTipGroup() const;
-#endif
-
-    virtual void setCentralWidget( TQWidget * );
-    TQWidget * centralWidget() const;
-
-    virtual void setDockEnabled( TQt::Dock dock, bool enable );
-    bool isDockEnabled( TQt::Dock dock ) const;
-    bool isDockEnabled( TQDockArea *area ) const;
-    virtual void setDockEnabled( TQDockWindow *tb, TQt::Dock dock, bool enable );
-    bool isDockEnabled( TQDockWindow *tb, TQt::Dock dock ) const;
-    bool isDockEnabled( TQDockWindow *tb, TQDockArea *area ) const;
-
-    virtual void addDockWindow( TQDockWindow *, TQt::Dock = TQt::DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE );
-    virtual void addDockWindow( TQDockWindow *, const TQString &label,
-				TQt::Dock = TQt::DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE );
-    virtual void moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *, TQt::Dock = TQt::DockTop );
-    virtual void moveDockWindow( TQDockWindow *, TQt::Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 );
-    virtual void removeDockWindow( TQDockWindow * );
-
-    void show();
-    void hide();
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    bool rightJustification() const;
-    bool usesBigPixmaps() const;
-    bool usesTextLabel() const;
-    bool dockWindowsMovable() const;
-    bool opaqueMoving() const;
-
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject*, TQEvent* );
-
-    bool getLocation( TQDockWindow *tb, TQt::Dock &dock, int &index, bool &nl, int &extraOffset ) const;
-
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockWindows( TQt::Dock dock ) const;
-    TQPtrList<TQDockWindow> dockWindows() const;
-    void lineUpDockWindows( bool keepNewLines = FALSE );
-
-    bool isDockMenuEnabled() const;
-
-    // compatibility stuff
-    bool hasDockWindow( TQDockWindow *dw );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    void addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, TQt::Dock = TQt::DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE );
-    void addToolBar( TQDockWindow *, const TQString &label,
-		     TQt::Dock = TQt::DockTop, bool newLine = FALSE );
-    void moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *, TQt::Dock = TQt::DockTop );
-    void moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *, TQt::Dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset = -1 );
-    void removeToolBar( TQDockWindow * );
-
-    bool toolBarsMovable() const;
-    TQPtrList<TQToolBar> toolBars( TQt::Dock dock ) const;
-    void lineUpToolBars( bool keepNewLines = FALSE );
-#endif
-
-    virtual TQDockArea *dockingArea( const TQPoint &p );
-    TQDockArea *leftDock() const;
-    TQDockArea *rightDock() const;
-    TQDockArea *topDock() const;
-    TQDockArea *bottomDock() const;
-
-    virtual bool isCustomizable() const;
-
-    bool appropriate( TQDockWindow *dw ) const;
-
-    enum DockWindows { OnlyToolBars, NoToolBars, AllDockWindows };
-    TQPopupMenu *createDockWindowMenu( DockWindows dockWindows = AllDockWindows ) const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setRightJustification( bool );
-    virtual void setUsesBigPixmaps( bool );
-    virtual void setUsesTextLabel( bool );
-    virtual void setDockWindowsMovable( bool );
-    virtual void setOpaqueMoving( bool );
-    virtual void setDockMenuEnabled( bool );
-    virtual void whatsThis();
-    virtual void setAppropriate( TQDockWindow *dw, bool a );
-    virtual void customize();
-
-    // compatibility stuff
-    void setToolBarsMovable( bool );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void pixmapSizeChanged( bool );
-    void usesTextLabelChanged( bool );
-    void dockWindowPositionChanged( TQDockWindow * );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    // compatibility stuff
-    void toolBarPositionChanged( TQToolBar * );
-#endif
-
-protected Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setUpLayout();
-    virtual bool showDockMenu( const TQPoint &globalPos );
-    void menuAboutToShow();
-
-protected:
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void childEvent( TQChildEvent * );
-    bool event( TQEvent * );
-    void styleChange( TQStyle& );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void slotPlaceChanged();
-    void doLineUp() { lineUpDockWindows( TRUE ); }
-
-private:
-    TQMainWindowPrivate * d;
-    void triggerLayout( bool deleteLayout = TRUE);
-    bool dockMainWindow( TQObject *dock );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    virtual void setMenuBar( TQMenuBar * );
-#endif
-    virtual void setqStatusBar( TQStatusBar * );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    virtual void setToolTipGroup( TQToolTipGroup * );
-#endif
-
-    friend class TQDockWindow;
-    friend class TQMenuBar;
-    friend class TQHideDock;
-    friend class TQToolBar;
-    friend class TQMainWindowLayout;
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQMainWindow( const TQMainWindow & );
-    TQMainWindow& operator=( const TQMainWindow & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-inline void TQMainWindow::addToolBar( TQDockWindow *w, TQt::ToolBarDock dock, bool newLine )
-{
-    addDockWindow( w, dock, newLine );
-}
-
-inline void TQMainWindow::addToolBar( TQDockWindow *w, const TQString &label,
-			      TQt::ToolBarDock dock, bool newLine )
-{
-    addDockWindow( w, label, dock, newLine );
-}
-
-inline void TQMainWindow::moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *w, TQt::ToolBarDock dock )
-{
-    moveDockWindow( w, dock );
-}
-
-inline void TQMainWindow::moveToolBar( TQDockWindow *w, TQt::ToolBarDock dock, bool nl, int index, int extraOffset )
-{
-    moveDockWindow( w, dock, nl, index, extraOffset );
-}
-
-inline void TQMainWindow::removeToolBar( TQDockWindow *w )
-{
-    removeDockWindow( w );
-}
-
-inline bool TQMainWindow::toolBarsMovable() const
-{
-    return dockWindowsMovable();
-}
-
-inline void TQMainWindow::lineUpToolBars( bool keepNewLines )
-{
-    lineUpDockWindows( keepNewLines );
-}
-
-inline void TQMainWindow::setToolBarsMovable( bool b )
-{
-    setDockWindowsMovable( b );
-}
-#endif
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTSTREAM
-TQ_EXPORT TQTextStream &operator<<( TQTextStream &, const TQMainWindow & );
-TQ_EXPORT TQTextStream &operator>>( TQTextStream &, TQMainWindow & );
-#endif
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
-
-#endif // TQMAINWINDOW_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index eee9314..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1691 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQMenuBar class
-**
-** Created : 941209
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-// tqmainwindow.h before tqmenubar.h because of GCC-2.7.* compatibility
-// ### could be reorganised by discarding INCLUDE_MENUITEM_DEF and put
-// the relevant declarations in a private header?
-#include "tqmainwindow.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-#include "tqmenubar.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqaccel.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqcleanuphandler.h"
-#include "../kernel/tqinternal_p.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-class TQMenuDataData {
-    // attention: also defined in qmenudata.cpp
-public:
-    TQMenuDataData();
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQWidget> aWidget;
-    int aInt;
-};
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-static bool inMenu = FALSE;
-#endif
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-extern int qt_xfocusout_grab_counter; // defined in qapplication_x11.cpp
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \class TQMenuBar tqmenubar.h
-    \brief The TQMenuBar class provides a horizontal menu bar.
-
-    \ingroup application
-    \mainclass
-
-    A menu bar consists of a list of pull-down menu items. You add
-    menu items with \link TQMenuData::insertItem()
-    insertItem()\endlink. For example, asuming that \c menubar is a
-    pointer to a TQMenuBar and \c filemenu is a pointer to a
-    TQPopupMenu, the following statement inserts the menu into the menu
-    bar:
-    \code
-    menubar->insertItem( "&File", filemenu );
-    \endcode
-    The ampersand in the menu item's text sets Alt+F as a shortcut for
-    this menu. (You can use "\&\&" to get a real ampersand in the menu
-    bar.)
-
-    Items are either enabled or disabled. You toggle their state with
-    setItemEnabled().
-
-    There is no need to lay out a menu bar. It automatically sets its
-    own tqgeometry to the top of the parent widget and changes it
-    appropriately whenever the parent is resized.
-
-    \important insertItem removeItem clear insertSeparator setItemEnabled isItemEnabled setItemVisible isItemVisible
-
-    Example of creating a menu bar with menu items (from \l menu/menu.cpp):
-    \quotefile menu/menu.cpp
-    \skipto file = new TQPopupMenu
-    \printline
-    \skipto Qt::Key_O
-    \printline
-    \printline
-    \skipto new TQMenuBar
-    \printline
-    \skipto insertItem
-    \printline
-
-    In most main window style applications you would use the menuBar()
-    provided in TQMainWindow, adding \l{TQPopupMenu}s to the menu bar
-    and adding \l{TQAction}s to the popup menus.
-
-    Example (from \l action/application.cpp):
-    \quotefile action/application.cpp
-    \skipto file = new TQPopupMenu
-    \printuntil fileNewAction
-
-    Menu items can have text and pixmaps (or iconsets), see the
-    various \link TQMenuData::insertItem() insertItem()\endlink
-    overloads, as well as separators, see \link
-    TQMenuData::insertSeparator() insertSeparator()\endlink. You can
-    also add custom menu items that are derived from
-    \l{TQCustomMenuItem}.
-
-    Menu items may be removed with removeItem() and enabled or
-    disabled with \link TQMenuData::setItemEnabled()
-    setItemEnabled()\endlink.
-
-    <img src=qmenubar-m.png> <img src=qmenubar-w.png>
-
-    \section1 TQMenuBar on TQt/Mac
-
-    TQMenuBar on TQt/Mac is a wrapper for using the system-wide menubar.
-    If you have multiple menubars in one dialog the outermost menubar
-    (normally inside a widget with widget flag \c WType_TopLevel) will
-    be used for the system-wide menubar.
-
-    Note that arbitrary TQt widgets \e cannot be inserted into a
-    TQMenuBar on the Mac because TQt uses Mac's native menus which don't
-    support this functionality. This limitation does not apply to
-    stand-alone TQPopupMenus.
-
-    TQt/Mac also provides a menubar merging feature to make TQMenuBar
-    conform more closely to accepted Mac OS X menubar tqlayout. The
-    merging functionality is based on string matching the title of a
-    TQPopupMenu entry. These strings are translated (using
-    TQObject::tr()) in the "TQMenuBar" context. If an entry is moved its
-    Q_SLOTS will still fire as if it was in the original place. The
-    table below outlines the strings looked for and where the entry is
-    placed if matched:
-
-    \table
-    \header \i String matches \i Placement \i Notes
-    \row \i about.*
-	 \i Application Menu | About <application name>
-	 \i If this entry is not found no About item will appear in
-	    the Application Menu
-    \row \i config, options, setup, settings or preferences
-	 \i Application Menu | Preferences
-	 \i If this entry is not found the Settings item will be disabled
-    \row \i quit or exit
-	 \i Application Menu | Quit <application name>
-	 \i If this entry is not found a default Quit item will be
-	    created to call TQApplication::quit()
-    \endtable
-
-    \link menu-example.html menu/menu.cpp\endlink is an example of
-    TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu use.
-
-    \sa TQPopupMenu TQAccel TQAction \link http://developer.apple.com/techpubs/macosx/Carbon/HumanInterfaceToolbox/Aqua/aqua.html Aqua Style Guidelines \endlink \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Menu Bar \endlink
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQMenuBar::Separator
-
-    This enum type is used to decide whether TQMenuBar should draw a
-    separator line at its bottom.
-
-    \value Never In many applications there is already a separator,
-    and having two looks wrong.
-
-    \value InWindowsStyle In some other applications a separator looks
-    good in Windows style, but nowhere else.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQMenuBar::activated( int id )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a menu item is selected; \a id is the
-    id of the selected item.
-
-    Normally you will connect each menu item to a single slot using
-    TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect
-    several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects
-    from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
-
-    \sa highlighted(), TQMenuData::insertItem()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQMenuBar::highlighted( int id )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a menu item is highlighted; \a id is
-    the id of the highlighted item.
-
-    Normally, you will connect each menu item to a single slot using
-    TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect
-    several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects
-    from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
-
-    \sa activated(), TQMenuData::insertItem()
-*/
-
-
-// Motif style parameters
-
-static const int motifBarHMargin	= 2;	// menu bar hor margin to item
-static const int motifBarVMargin	= 1;	// menu bar ver margin to item
-static const int motifItemFrame		= 2;	// menu item frame width
-static const int motifItemHMargin	= 5;	// menu item hor text margin
-static const int motifItemVMargin	= 4;	// menu item ver text margin
-
-// The others are 0
-static const int gtkItemHMargin = 8;
-static const int gtkItemVMargin = 8;
-
-/*
-
-+-----------------------------
-|      BarFrame
-|   +-------------------------
-|   |	   V  BarMargin
-|   |	+---------------------
-|   | H |      ItemFrame
-|   |	|  +-----------------
-|   |	|  |			   \
-|   |	|  |  ^	 T E X T   ^	    | ItemVMargin
-|   |	|  |  |		   |	   /
-|   |	|      ItemHMargin
-|   |
-|
-
-*/
-
-
-/*****************************************************************************
-  TQMenuBar member functions
- *****************************************************************************/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a menu bar called \a name with parent \a parent.
-*/
-TQMenuBar::TQMenuBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase )
-{
-#if defined( TQ_WS_MAC ) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    mac_eaten_menubar = FALSE;
-    mac_d = 0;
-    macCreateNativeMenubar();
-#endif
-    isMenuBar = TRUE;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    autoaccel = 0;
-#endif
-    irects    = 0;
-    rightSide = 0; // Right of here is right-aligned content
-    mseparator = 0;
-    waitforalt = 0;
-    popupvisible = 0;
-    hasmouse = 0;
-    defaultup = 0;
-    toggleclose = 0;
-    pendingDelayedContentsChanges = 0;
-    pendingDelayedStateChanges = 0;
-    if ( parent ) {
-	// filter parent events for resizing
-	parent->installEventFilter( this );
-
-	// filter top-level-widget events for accelerators
-	TQWidget *tlw = tqtopLevelWidget();
-	if ( tlw != parent )
-	    tlw->installEventFilter( this );
-    }
-    installEventFilter( this );
-
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteButton );
-    setFrameStyle( TQFrame::MenuBarPanel | TQFrame::Raised );
-
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-
-    int h;
-    int gs = tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle);
-    if (gs == GtkStyle) {
-        h = fm.height() + gtkItemVMargin;
-    } else {
-        h = 2*motifBarVMargin + fm.height() + motifItemVMargin + 2*frameWidth() + 2*motifItemFrame;
-    }
-
-    setGeometry( 0, 0, width(), h );
-
-    setMouseTracking( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_MenuBar_MouseTracking) );
-}
-
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQMenuBar::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    setMouseTracking( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_MenuBar_MouseTracking) );
-    TQFrame::styleChange( old );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the menu bar.
-*/
-
-TQMenuBar::~TQMenuBar()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    delete autoaccel;
-#endif
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    macRemoveNativeMenubar();
-#endif
-    if ( irects )		// Avoid purify complaint.
-	delete [] irects;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-    Repaints the menu item with id \a id; does nothing if there is no
-    such menu item.
-*/
-void TQMenuBar::updateItem( int id )
-{
-    int i = indexOf( id );
-    if ( i >= 0 && irects )
-	tqrepaint( irects[i], FALSE );
-}
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-static bool fromFrameChange = FALSE;
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    Recomputes the menu bar's display data according to the new
-    contents.
-
-    You should never need to call this; it is called automatically by
-    TQMenuData whenever it needs to be called.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuBar::menuContentsChanged()
-{
-    // here the part that can't be delayed
-    TQMenuData::menuContentsChanged();
-    badSize = TRUE;				// might change the size
-    if( pendingDelayedContentsChanges )
-        return;
-    pendingDelayedContentsChanges = 1;
-    if( !pendingDelayedStateChanges )// if the timer hasn't been started yet
-        TQTimer::singleShot( 0, this, TQT_SLOT(performDelayedChanges()));
-}
-
-void TQMenuBar::performDelayedContentsChanged()
-{
-    pendingDelayedContentsChanges = 0;
-    // here the part the can be delayed
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    // if performDelayedStateChanged() will be called too,
-    // it will call setupAccelerators() too, no need to do it twice
-    if( !pendingDelayedStateChanges )
-        setupAccelerators();
-#endif
-    calculateRects();
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	update();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
-	TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(parent());
-	if ( mw ) {
-	    mw->triggerLayout();
-	    mw->update();
-	}
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LAYOUT
-	if ( parentWidget() && parentWidget()->tqlayout() )
-	    parentWidget()->tqlayout()->activate();
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Recomputes the menu bar's display data according to the new state.
-
-    You should never need to call this; it is called automatically by
-    TQMenuData whenever it needs to be called.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuBar::menuStateChanged()
-{
-    if( pendingDelayedStateChanges )
-        return;
-    pendingDelayedStateChanges = 1;
-    if( !pendingDelayedContentsChanges ) // if the timer hasn't been started yet
-	TQTimer::singleShot( 0, this, TQT_SLOT(performDelayedChanges()));
-}
-
-void TQMenuBar::performDelayedStateChanged()
-{
-    pendingDelayedStateChanges = 0;
-    // here the part that can be delayed
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    setupAccelerators(); // ### when we have a good solution for the accel vs. focus
-			 // widget problem, remove that. That is only a workaround
-                         // if you remove this, see performDelayedContentsChanged()
-#endif
-    update();
-}
-
-
-void TQMenuBar::performDelayedChanges()
-{
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_MENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    // I must do this here as the values change in the function below.
-    bool needMacUpdate = (pendingDelayedContentsChanges || pendingDelayedStateChanges);
-#endif
-    if( pendingDelayedContentsChanges )
-        performDelayedContentsChanged();
-    if( pendingDelayedStateChanges )
-        performDelayedStateChanged();
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    if(mac_eaten_menubar && needMacUpdate) {
-	macDirtyNativeMenubar();
-
-	bool all_hidden = TRUE;
-	if(irects) {
-	    for(int i = 0; all_hidden && i < (int)mitems->count(); i++)
-		all_hidden = irects[i].isEmpty();
-	}
-	if( all_hidden ) {
-	    if( !isHidden())
-		hide();
-	} else {
-	    if( !isShown() && !fromFrameChange )
-		show();
-	}
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-
-void TQMenuBar::menuInsPopup( TQPopupMenu *popup )
-{
-    connect( popup, TQT_SIGNAL(activatedRedirect(int)),
-	     TQT_SLOT(subActivated(int)) );
-    connect( popup, TQT_SIGNAL(highlightedRedirect(int)),
-	     TQT_SLOT(subHighlighted(int)) );
-    connect( popup, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed(TQObject*)),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(popupDestroyed(TQObject*)) );
-}
-
-void TQMenuBar::menuDelPopup( TQPopupMenu *popup )
-{
-    popup->disconnect( TQT_SIGNAL(activatedRedirect(int)) );
-    popup->disconnect( TQT_SIGNAL(highlightedRedirect(int)) );
-    disconnect( popup, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed(TQObject*)),
-		this, TQT_SLOT(popupDestroyed(TQObject*)) );
-}
-
-void TQMenuBar::frameChanged()
-{
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    fromFrameChange = TRUE;
-#endif
-    menuContentsChanged();
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    fromFrameChange = FALSE;
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQMenuBar::languageChange()
-{
-    menuContentsChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-    This function is used to adjust the menu bar's tqgeometry to the
-    parent widget's tqgeometry. Note that this is \e not part of the
-    public interface - the function is \c public only because
-    TQObject::eventFilter() is.
-
-    Resizes the menu bar to fit in the parent widget when the parent
-    receives a resize event.
-*/
-
-bool TQMenuBar::eventFilter( TQObject *object, TQEvent *event )
-{
-    if ( object == parent() && object
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-	 && !::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(object)
-#endif
-	 && event->type() == TQEvent::Resize ) {
-	TQResizeEvent *e = (TQResizeEvent *)event;
-	int w = e->size().width();
-	setGeometry( 0, y(), w, heightForWidth(w) );
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-
-    if ( !isVisible() || !object->isWidgetType() )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(object) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) && event->type() == TQEvent::LanguageChange ) {
-	badSize = TRUE;
-	calculateRects();
-	return FALSE;
-    } else if ( event->type() == TQEvent::MouseButtonPress ||
-		event->type() == TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease ) {
-	waitforalt = 0;
-	return FALSE;
-    } else if ( waitforalt && event->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut ) {
-	// some window systems/managers use alt/meta as accelerator keys
-	// for switching between windows/desktops/etc.  If the focus
-	// widget gets unfocused, then we need to stop waiting for alt
-	// NOTE: this event came from the real focus widget, so we don't
-	// need to touch the event filters
-	waitforalt = 0;
-	// although the comment above said not to remove the event filter, it is
-	// incorrect. We need to remove our self fom the focused widget as normally
-	// this happens in the key release but it does not happen in this case
-	TQWidget * f = ((TQWidget *)object)->tqfocusWidget();
-	if (f)
-	    f->removeEventFilter( this );
-	return FALSE;
-    } else if ( !( event->type() == TQEvent::Accel ||
-		event->type() == TQEvent::AccelOverride ||
-		event->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ||
-		event->type() == TQEvent::KeyRelease ) ||
-		!tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation, this) ) {
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-
-    TQKeyEvent * ke = (TQKeyEvent *) event;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    // look for Alt press and Alt-anything press
-    if ( event->type() == TQEvent::Accel ) {
-	TQWidget * f = ((TQWidget *)object)->tqfocusWidget();
-	// ### this thinks alt and meta are the same
-	if ( ke->key() == Qt::Key_Alt || ke->key() == Qt::Key_Meta ) {
-	    // A new Alt press and we wait for release, eat
-	    // this key and don't wait for Alt on this widget
-	    if ( waitforalt ) {
-		waitforalt = 0;
-		if ( object->parent() )
-		    object->removeEventFilter( this );
-		ke->accept();
-		return TRUE;
-	    // Menu has focus, send focus back
-	    } else if ( hasFocus() ) {
-		setAltMode( FALSE );
-		ke->accept();
-		return TRUE;
-	    // Start waiting for Alt release on focus widget
-	    } else if ( ke->stateAfter() == TQt::AltButton ) {
-		waitforalt = 1;
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-		TQMenuData::d->aInt = qt_xfocusout_grab_counter;
-#endif
-		if ( f && TQT_TQOBJECT(f) != object )
-		    f->installEventFilter( this );
-	    }
-	// Other modifiers kills focus on menubar
-	} else if ( ke->key() == Qt::Key_Control || ke->key() == Qt::Key_Shift) {
-	    setAltMode( FALSE );
-	// Got other key, no need to wait for Alt release
-	} else {
-	    waitforalt = 0;
-	}
-	// ### ! block all accelerator events when the menu bar is active
-	if ( tqApp && tqApp->tqfocusWidget() == this ) {
-	    return TRUE;
-	}
-
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-#endif
-    // look for Alt release
-    if ( TQT_TQOBJECT(((TQWidget*)object)->tqfocusWidget()) == object ||
-	 (object->parent() == 0 && ((TQWidget*)object)->tqfocusWidget() == 0) ) {
-	if ( waitforalt && event->type() == TQEvent::KeyRelease &&
-	    ( ke->key() == Qt::Key_Alt || ke->key() == Qt::Key_Meta )
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-		&& TQMenuData::d->aInt == qt_xfocusout_grab_counter
-#endif
-	    ) {
-	    setAltMode( TRUE );
-	    if ( object->parent() )
-		object->removeEventFilter( this );
-	    TQWidget * tlw = ((TQWidget *)object)->tqtopLevelWidget();
-	    if ( tlw ) {
-		// ### !
-		// make sure to be the first event filter, so we can kill
-		// accelerator events before the accelerators get to them.
-		tlw->removeEventFilter( this );
-		tlw->installEventFilter( this );
-	    }
-	    return TRUE;
-	// Cancel if next keypress is NOT Alt/Meta,
-	} else if ( !hasFocus() && (event->type() == TQEvent::AccelOverride ) &&
-		    !(((TQKeyEvent *)event)->key() == Qt::Key_Alt ||
-		      ((TQKeyEvent *)event)->key() == Qt::Key_Meta) ) {
-	    if ( object->parent() )
-		object->removeEventFilter( this );
-	    setAltMode( FALSE );
-	}
-    }
-
-    return FALSE;				// don't stop event
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Receives Q_SIGNALS from menu items.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuBar::subActivated( int id )
-{
-    emit activated( id );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Receives Q_SIGNALS from menu items.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuBar::subHighlighted( int id )
-{
-    emit highlighted( id );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Receives Q_SIGNALS from menu accelerator.
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-void TQMenuBar::accelActivated( int id )
-{
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    if(mac_eaten_menubar)
-	return;
-#endif
-    if ( !isEnabled() )				// the menu bar is disabled
-	return;
-    setAltMode( TRUE );
-    setActiveItem( indexOf( id ) );
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  This slot receives Q_SIGNALS from menu accelerator when it is about to be
-  destroyed.
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-void TQMenuBar::accelDestroyed()
-{
-    autoaccel = 0;				// don't delete it twice!
-}
-#endif
-
-void TQMenuBar::popupDestroyed( TQObject *o )
-{
-    removePopup( (TQPopupMenu*)o );
-}
-
-bool TQMenuBar::tryMouseEvent( TQPopupMenu *, TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    TQPoint pos = mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() );
-    if ( !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains( pos ) )		// outside
-	return FALSE;
-    int item = itemAtPos( pos );
-    if ( item == -1 && (e->type() == TQEvent::MouseButtonPress ||
-			e->type() == TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease) ) {
-	hidePopups();
-	goodbye();
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-    TQMouseEvent ee( e->type(), pos, e->globalPos(), e->button(), e->state() );
-    event( &ee );
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-void TQMenuBar::tryKeyEvent( TQPopupMenu *, TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    event( e );
-}
-
-
-void TQMenuBar::goodbye( bool cancelled )
-{
-    mouseBtDn = FALSE;
-    popupvisible = 0;
-    setAltMode( cancelled && tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation, this) );
-}
-
-
-void TQMenuBar::openActPopup()
-{
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    if ( !inMenu ) {
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::MenuStart );
-	inMenu = TRUE;
-    }
-#endif
-
-    if ( actItem < 0 )
-	return;
-    TQPopupMenu *popup = mitems->at(actItem)->popup();
-    if ( !popup || !popup->isEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    TQRect  r = tqitemRect( actItem );
-    bool reverse = TQApplication::reverseLayout();
-    const int yoffset = 1; //(tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle ) == TQStyle::WindowsStyle) ? 4 : 1; ### this breaks designer mainwindow editing
-    TQPoint pos = r.bottomLeft() + TQPoint(0,yoffset);
-    if( reverse ) {
-	pos = r.bottomRight() + TQPoint(0,yoffset);
-	pos.rx() -= popup->tqsizeHint().width();
-    }
-
-    int ph = popup->tqsizeHint().height();
-    pos = mapToGlobal(pos);
-    int sh = TQApplication::desktop()->height();
-    if ( defaultup || (pos.y() + ph > sh) ) {
-	TQPoint t = mapToGlobal( r.topLeft() );
-	if( reverse ) {
-	    t = mapToGlobal( r.topRight() );
-	    t.rx() -= popup->tqsizeHint().width();
-	}
-	t.ry() -= (TQCOORD)ph;
-	if ( !defaultup || t.y() >= 0 )
-	    pos = t;
-    }
-
-    //avoid circularity
-    if ( popup->isVisible() )
-	return;
-
-    TQ_ASSERT( popup->parentMenu == 0 );
-    popup->parentMenu = this;			// set parent menu
-
-    popup->snapToMouse = FALSE;
-    popup->popup( pos );
-    popup->snapToMouse = TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Hides all popup menu items.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuBar::hidePopups()
-{
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    bool anyVisible = FALSE;
-#endif
-    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-    register TQMenuItem *mi;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( mi->popup() && mi->popup()->isVisible() ) {
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	    anyVisible = TRUE;
-#endif
-	    mi->popup()->hide();
-	}
-    }
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    if ( !popupvisible && anyVisible && inMenu ) {
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::MenuEnd );
-	inMenu = FALSE;
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Reimplements TQWidget::show() in order to set up the correct
-    keyboard accelerators and to raise itself to the top of the widget
-    stack.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuBar::show()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    setupAccelerators();
-#endif
-
-    if ( parentWidget() )
-	resize( parentWidget()->width(), height() );
-
-    TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( this, TQEvent::Resize );
-    performDelayedChanges();
-    calculateRects();
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    if(mac_eaten_menubar) {
-	//If all elements are invisible no reason for me to be visible either
-	bool all_hidden = TRUE;
-	if(irects) {
-	    for(int i = 0; all_hidden && i < (int)mitems->count(); i++)
-		all_hidden = irects[i].isEmpty();
-	}
-	if(all_hidden)
-	    TQWidget::hide();
-	else
-	    TQWidget::show();
-    } else {
-	TQWidget::show();
-    }
-#else
-    TQWidget::show();
-#endif
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
-    TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(parent());
-    if ( mw ) //### ugly workaround
-	mw->triggerLayout();
-#endif
-    raise();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Reimplements TQWidget::hide() in order to deselect any selected
-    item, and calls setUpLayout() for the main window.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuBar::hide()
-{
-    TQWidget::hide();
-    setAltMode( FALSE );
-    hidePopups();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MAINWINDOW
-    TQMainWindow *mw = ::tqqt_cast<TQMainWindow*>(parent());
-    if ( mw ) //### ugly workaround
-	mw->triggerLayout();
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Needs to change the size of the menu bar when a new font is set.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuBar::fontChange( const TQFont & f )
-{
-    badSize = TRUE;
-    updateGeometry();
-    if ( isVisible() )
-	calculateRects();
-    TQWidget::fontChange( f );
-}
-
-
-/*****************************************************************************
-  Item tqgeometry functions
- *****************************************************************************/
-
-/*
-    This function serves two different purposes. If the parameter is
-    negative, it updates the irects member for the current width and
-    resizes. Otherwise, it does the same calculations for the GIVEN
-    width and returns the height to which it WOULD have resized. A bit
-    tricky, but both operations require almost identical steps.
-*/
-int TQMenuBar::calculateRects( int max_width )
-{
-    polish();
-    bool update = ( max_width < 0 );
-
-    if ( update ) {
-	rightSide = 0;
-	if ( !badSize )				// size was not changed
-	    return 0;
-	delete [] irects;
-	int i = mitems->count();
-	if ( i == 0 ) {
-	    irects = 0;
-	} else {
-	    irects = new TQRect[ i ];
-	    TQ_CHECK_PTR( irects );
-	}
-	max_width = width();
-    }
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    int max_height = 0;
-    int max_item_height = 0;
-    int nlitems = 0;				// number on items on cur line
-    int gs = tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle);
-    bool reverse = TQApplication::reverseLayout();
-    int x = frameWidth();
-    int y = frameWidth();
-    if ( gs == TQt::MotifStyle ) {
-	x += motifBarHMargin;
-	y += motifBarVMargin;
-    } else if ( tqstyle().inherits("TQWindowsXPStyle") && tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_TitleBar_NoBorder) ) {
-        ;
-    } else if ( gs == TQt::WindowsStyle ) {
-	x += 2;
-	y += 2;
-    }
-    if ( reverse )
-	x = max_width - x;
-
-    int i = 0;
-    int separator = -1;
-    const int itemSpacing = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_MenuBarItemSpacing);
-    const int lastItem = reverse ? 0 : mitems->count() - 1;
-
-    while ( i < (int)mitems->count() ) {	// for each menu item...
-	TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at(i);
-
-	int w=0, h=0;
-	if ( !mi->isVisible()
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-				  ||  (mac_eaten_menubar && !mi->custom() && !mi->widget() )
-#endif
-	     ) {
-	    ; // empty rectangle
-	} else if ( mi->widget() ) {
-	    if ( mi->widget()->parentWidget() != this ) {
-		mi->widget()->reparent( this, TQPoint(0,0) );
-	    }
-	    w = mi->widget()->tqsizeHint().expandedTo( TQApplication::globalStrut() ).width()+2;
-	    h = mi->widget()->tqsizeHint().expandedTo( TQApplication::globalStrut() ).height()+2;
-	    if ( i && separator < 0 )
-		separator = i;
-	} else if ( mi->pixmap() ) {			// pixmap item
-	    w = TQMAX( mi->pixmap()->width() + 4, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() );
-	    h = TQMAX( mi->pixmap()->height() + 4, TQApplication::globalStrut().height() );
-	} else if ( !mi->text().isNull() ) {	// text item
-	    TQString s = mi->text();
-        if ( gs == GtkStyle ) {
-            w = fm.boundingRect( s ).width() + 2*gtkItemHMargin;
-        } else {
-	        w = fm.boundingRect( s ).width() + 2*motifItemHMargin;
-        }
-	    w -= s.contains('&')*fm.width('&');
-	    w += s.contains("&&")*fm.width('&');
-	    w = TQMAX( w, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() );
-        if (gs == GtkStyle ) {
-            h = TQMAX( fm.height() + gtkItemVMargin, TQApplication::globalStrut().height() );
-        } else {
-	        h = TQMAX( fm.height() + motifItemVMargin, TQApplication::globalStrut().height() );
-        }
-	} else if ( mi->isSeparator() ) {	// separator item
-	    if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle) == TQt::MotifStyle )
-		separator = i; //### only motif?
-	}
-	if ( !mi->isSeparator() || mi->widget() ) {
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-	    if ( !mac_eaten_menubar ) {
-#endif
-		if ( gs == TQt::MotifStyle && mi->isVisible() ) {
-		    w += 2*motifItemFrame;
-		    h += 2*motifItemFrame;
-		}
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-	    }
-#endif
-
-	    if ( ( ( !reverse && x + w + frameWidth() - max_width > 0 ) ||
-		 ( reverse && x - w - itemSpacing - frameWidth() < 0 ) )
-		 && nlitems > 0 ) {
-		nlitems = 0;
-		x = frameWidth();
-		y += h;
-		if ( gs == TQt::MotifStyle ) {
-		    x += motifBarHMargin;
-		    y += motifBarVMargin;
-		}
-		if ( reverse )
-		    x = max_width - x + itemSpacing;
-		if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle) == TQt::MotifStyle )
-		    separator = -1;
-	    }
-	    if ( y + h + 2*frameWidth() > max_height )
-		max_height = y + h + 2*frameWidth();
-	    if ( h > max_item_height )
-		max_item_height = h;
-	}
-
-	const bool isLast = (i == lastItem);
-
-	if( reverse ) {
-	    x -= w;
-	    if (!isLast && !mi->isSeparator())
-		x -= itemSpacing;
-	}
-	if ( update ) {
-	    irects[i].setRect( x, y, w, h );
-	}
-	if ( !reverse ) {
-	    x += w;
-	    if (!isLast && !mi->isSeparator())
-		x += itemSpacing;
-	}
-	nlitems++;
-	i++;
-    }
-    if ( gs == TQt::WindowsStyle ) {
-	max_height += 2;
-	max_width += 2;
-    }
-
-    if ( update ) {
-	if ( separator >= 0 ) {
-	    int moveBy = reverse ? - x - frameWidth() : max_width - x - frameWidth();
-	    rightSide = x;
-	    while( --i >= separator ) {
-		irects[i].moveBy( moveBy, 0 );
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    rightSide = width()-frameWidth();
-	}
-	if ( max_height != height() )
-	    resize( width(), max_height );
-	for ( i = 0; i < (int)mitems->count(); i++ ) {
-	    irects[i].setHeight( max_item_height  );
-	    TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at(i);
-	    if ( mi->widget() ) {
-		TQRect r ( TQPoint(0,0), mi->widget()->tqsizeHint() );
-		r.moveCenter( irects[i].center() );
-		mi->widget()->setGeometry( r );
-		if( mi->widget()->isHidden() )
-		    mi->widget()->show();
-	    }
-	}
-	badSize = FALSE;
-    }
-
-    return max_height;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the height that the menu would resize itself to if its
-    parent (and hence itself) resized to the given \a max_width. This
-    can be useful for simple tqlayout tasks in which the height of the
-    menu bar is needed after items have been inserted. See \l
-    showimg/showimg.cpp for an example of the usage.
-*/
-int TQMenuBar::heightForWidth(int max_width) const
-{
-    // Okay to cast away const, as we are not updating.
-    if ( max_width < 0 ) max_width = 0;
-    return ((TQMenuBar*)this)->calculateRects( max_width );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Return the bounding rectangle for the menu item at position \a index.
-*/
-
-TQRect TQMenuBar::tqitemRect( int index )
-{
-    calculateRects();
-    return irects ? irects[index] : TQRect(0,0,0,0);
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Return the item at \a pos, or -1 if there is no item there or if
-  it is a separator item.
-*/
-
-int TQMenuBar::itemAtPos( const TQPoint &pos_ )
-{
-    calculateRects();
-    if ( !irects )
-	return -1;
-    int i = 0;
-    TQPoint pos = pos_;
-    // Fitts' Law for edges - compensate for the extra margin
-    // added in calculateRects()
-    const int margin = 2;
-    pos.setX( TQMAX( margin, TQMIN( width() - margin, pos.x())));
-    pos.setY( TQMAX( margin, TQMIN( height() - margin, pos.y())));
-    while ( i < (int)mitems->count() ) {
-	if ( !irects[i].isEmpty() && irects[i].contains( pos ) ) {
-	    TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at(i);
-	    return mi->isSeparator() ? -1 : i;
-	}
-	++i;
-    }
-    return -1;					// no match
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \property TQMenuBar::separator
-  \brief in which cases a menubar sparator is drawn
-
-  \obsolete
-*/
-void TQMenuBar::setSeparator( Separator when )
-{
-    mseparator = when;
-}
-
-TQMenuBar::Separator TQMenuBar::separator() const
-{
-    return mseparator ? InWindowsStyle : Never;
-}
-
-/*****************************************************************************
-  Event handlers
- *****************************************************************************/
-
-/*!
-    Called from TQFrame::paintEvent(). Draws the menu bar contents
-    using painter \a p.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuBar::drawContents( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    performDelayedChanges();
-    TQRegion reg( contentsRect() );
-    TQColorGroup g = tqcolorGroup();
-    bool e;
-
-    // this shouldn't happen
-    if ( !irects )
-	return;
-
-    for ( int i=0; i<(int)mitems->count(); i++ ) {
-	TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at( i );
-	if ( !mi->text().isNull() || mi->pixmap() ) {
-	    TQRect r = irects[i];
-	    if(r.isEmpty() || !mi->isVisible())
-		continue;
-	    e = mi->isEnabledAndVisible();
-	    if ( e )
-		g = isEnabled() ? ( isActiveWindow() ? tqpalette().active() :
-				    tqpalette().inactive() ) : tqpalette().disabled();
-	    else
-		g = tqpalette().disabled();
-	    reg = reg.subtract( r );
-	    TQSharedDoubleBuffer buffer( p, r );
-	    buffer.painter()->setFont( p->font() );
-	    buffer.painter()->setPen( p->pen() );
-	    buffer.painter()->setBrush( p->brush() );
-
-	    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-	    if (isEnabled() && e)
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-	    if ( i == actItem )
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_Active;
-	    if ( actItemDown )
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-	    if (hasFocus() || hasmouse || popupvisible)
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_MenuBarItem, buffer.painter(), this,
-				r, g, flags, TQStyleOption(mi));
-	}
-    }
-
-    p->save();
-    p->setClipRegion(reg);
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_MenuBarEmptyArea, p, this, contentsRect(), g);
-    p->restore();
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    if ( !mac_eaten_menubar )
-#endif
-    {
-	TQt::GUIStyle gs = (TQt::GUIStyle) tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle);
-	if ( mseparator == InWindowsStyle && gs == TQt::WindowsStyle ) {
-	    p->setPen( g.light() );
-	    p->drawLine( 0, height()-1, width()-1, height()-1 );
-	    p->setPen( g.dark() );
-	    p->drawLine( 0, height()-2, width()-1, height()-2 );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQMenuBar::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-    mouseBtDn = TRUE;				// mouse button down
-    int item = itemAtPos( e->pos() );
-    if ( item == actItem && popupvisible )
-	toggleclose = 1;
-    if ( item >= 0 ) {
-#ifndef USE_QT4
-	TQFocusEvent::Reason oldReason = TQFocusEvent::reason();
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( idAt( item ) );
-	// we know that a popup will open, so set the reason to avoid
-	// itemviews to redraw their selections
-	if ( mi && mi->popup() )
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-#warning [FIXME] How can TQFocusEvent::Popup be set as the reason for the setAltMode call?
-#else // USE_QT4
-	    TQFocusEvent::setReason( TQFocusEvent::Popup );
-#endif // USE_QT4
-	setAltMode( TRUE );
-#ifndef USE_QT4
-	TQFocusEvent::setReason( oldReason );
-#endif // USE_QT4
-    }
-    setActiveItem( item, TRUE, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQMenuBar::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-    if ( !mouseBtDn )
-	return;
-    mouseBtDn = FALSE;				// mouse button up
-    int item = itemAtPos( e->pos() );
-    if ( (item >= 0 && !mitems->at(item)->isEnabledAndVisible()) ||
-	 (actItem >= 0 && !mitems->at(actItem)->isEnabledAndVisible()) ) {
-	hidePopups();
-	setActiveItem( -1 );
-	return;
-    }
-    bool showMenu = TRUE;
-    if ( toggleclose &&
-	 // pressing an item twice closes in windows, but not in motif :/
-	 tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle) == TQt::WindowsStyle &&
-	 actItem == item ) {
-	showMenu = FALSE;
-	setAltMode( FALSE );
-    }
-    setActiveItem( item, showMenu, !hasMouseTracking() );
-    toggleclose = 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQMenuBar::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    int item = itemAtPos( e->pos() );
-    if ( !mouseBtDn && !popupvisible) {
-	if ( item >= 0 ) {
-	    if ( !hasmouse ) {
-		hasmouse = 1;
-		if ( actItem == item )
-		    actItem = -1; // trigger update
-	    }
-	}
-	setActiveItem( item, FALSE, FALSE );
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( item != actItem && item >= 0  && ( popupvisible || mouseBtDn ) )
-	setActiveItem( item, TRUE, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQMenuBar::leaveEvent( TQEvent * e )
-{
-    hasmouse = 0;
-    int actId = idAt( actItem );
-    if ( !hasFocus() && !popupvisible )
-	actItem = -1;
-    updateItem( actId );
-    TQFrame::leaveEvent( e );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQMenuBar::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( actItem < 0 )
-	return;
-
-    TQMenuItem  *mi = 0;
-    int dx = 0;
-
-    if ( e->state() & ControlButton &&
-	 ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Tab || e->key() == Qt::Key_Backtab ) )
-    {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    switch ( e->key() ) {
-     case Qt::Key_Left:
-	dx = TQApplication::reverseLayout() ? 1 : -1;
-	break;
-
-    case Qt::Key_Right:
-    case Qt::Key_Tab:
-	dx = TQApplication::reverseLayout() ? -1 : 1;
-	break;
-
-    case Qt::Key_Up:
-    case Qt::Key_Down:
-    case Qt::Key_Enter:
-    case Qt::Key_Return:
-	if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation) )
-	    setActiveItem( actItem );
-	break;
-
-    case Key_Escape:
-	setAltMode( FALSE );
-	break;
-    }
-
-    if ( dx ) {					// highlight next/prev
-	register int i = actItem;
-	int c = mitems->count();
-	int n = c;
-	while ( n-- ) {
-	    i = i + dx;
-	    if ( i == c )
-		i = 0;
-	    else if ( i < 0 )
-		i = c - 1;
-	    mi = mitems->at( i );
-	    // ### fix windows-style traversal - currently broken due to
-	    // TQMenuBar's reliance on TQPopupMenu
-	    if ( /* (tqstyle() == TQt::WindowsStyle || */ mi->isEnabledAndVisible() /* ) */
-		 && !mi->isSeparator() )
-		break;
-	}
-	setActiveItem( i, popupvisible	 );
-    } else if ( ( !e->state() || (e->state()&(TQt::MetaButton|TQt::AltButton)) ) && e->text().length()==1 && !popupvisible ) {
-	TQChar c = TQT_TQCHAR(e->text()[0]).upper();
-
-	TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-	TQMenuItem* first = 0;
-	TQMenuItem* currentSelected = 0;
-	TQMenuItem* firstAfterCurrent = 0;
-
-	register TQMenuItem *m;
-	int indx = 0;
-	int clashCount = 0;
-	while ( (m=it.current()) ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    TQString s = m->text();
-	    if ( !s.isEmpty() ) {
-		int i = s.find( '&' );
-		if ( i >= 0 )
-		{
-		    if ( s[i+1].upper() == c ) {
-			clashCount++;
-			if ( !first )
-			    first = m;
-			if ( indx == actItem )
-			    currentSelected = m;
-			else if ( !firstAfterCurrent && currentSelected )
-			    firstAfterCurrent = m;
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-	    indx++;
-	}
-	if ( 0 == clashCount ) {
-	    return;
-	} else if ( 1 == clashCount ) {
- 	    indx = indexOf( first->id() );
-	} else {
-	    // If there's clashes and no one is selected, use first one
-	    // or if there is no clashes _after_ current, use first one
-	    if ( !currentSelected || (currentSelected && !firstAfterCurrent))
-		indx = indexOf( first->id() );
-	    else
-		indx = indexOf( firstAfterCurrent->id() );
-	}
-
-	setActiveItem( indx );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQMenuBar::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    TQFrame::resizeEvent( e );
-    if ( badSize )
-	return;
-    badSize = TRUE;
-    calculateRects();
-}
-
-/*
-    Sets actItem to \a i and calls tqrepaint for the changed things.
-
-    Takes care to optimize the repainting. Assumes that
-    calculateRects() has been called as appropriate.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuBar::setActiveItem( int i, bool show, bool activate_first_item )
-{
-    if ( i == actItem && (uint)show == popupvisible )
-	return;
-
-    TQMenuItem* mi = 0;
-    if ( i >= 0 )
-	mi = mitems->at( i );
-    if ( mi && !mi->isEnabledAndVisible() )
-	return;
-
-    popupvisible = i >= 0 ? (show) : 0;
-    actItemDown = popupvisible;
-
-    if ( i < 0 || actItem < 0 ) {
-	// just one item needs repainting
-	int n = TQMAX( actItem, i );
-	actItem = i;
-	if ( irects && n >= 0 )
-	    tqrepaint( irects[n], FALSE );
-    } else if ( TQABS(i-actItem) == 1 ) {
-	// two neighbouring items need repainting
-	int o = actItem;
-	actItem = i;
-	if ( irects )
-	    tqrepaint( irects[i].unite( irects[o] ), FALSE );
-    } else {
-	// two non-neighbouring items need repainting
-	int o = actItem;
-	actItem = i;
-	if ( irects ) {
-	    tqrepaint( irects[o], FALSE );
-	    tqrepaint( irects[i], FALSE );
-	}
-    }
-
-    hidePopups();
-
-    if ( !popupvisible && actItem >= 0 && irects ) {
-	TQRect mfrect = irects[actItem];
-	setMicroFocusHint( mfrect.x(), mfrect.y(), mfrect.width(), mfrect.height(), FALSE );
-    }
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    if ( mi )
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, indexOf( mi->id() )+1, TQAccessible::Focus );
-#endif
-
-    if ( actItem < 0 || !popupvisible || !mi  )
-	return;
-
-    TQPopupMenu *popup = mi->popup();
-    if ( popup ) {
-	emit highlighted( mi->id() );
-	openActPopup();
-	if ( activate_first_item )
-	    popup->setFirstItemActive();
-    } else {				// not a popup
-	goodbye( FALSE );
-	if ( mi->signal() )			// activate signal
-	    mi->signal()->activate();
-	emit activated( mi->id() );
-    }
-}
-
-
-void TQMenuBar::setAltMode( bool enable )
-{
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    if ( inMenu && !enable ) {
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::MenuEnd );
-	inMenu = FALSE;
-    } else if ( !inMenu && enable ) {
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::MenuStart );
-	inMenu = TRUE;
-    }
-#endif
-
-    waitforalt = 0;
-    actItemDown = FALSE;
-    if ( enable ) {
-	if ( !TQMenuData::d->aWidget )
-	    TQMenuData::d->aWidget = tqApp->tqfocusWidget();
-	setFocus();
-	updateItem( idAt( actItem ) );
-    } else {
-	// set the focus back to the previous widget if
-	// we still have the focus.
-	if ( tqApp->tqfocusWidget() == this ) {
-	    if ( TQMenuData::d->aWidget )
-		TQMenuData::d->aWidget->setFocus();
-	    else
-		clearFocus();
-	}
-	int actId = idAt( actItem );
-	actItem = -1;
-	updateItem( actId );
-	TQMenuData::d->aWidget = 0;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets up keyboard accelerators for the menu bar.
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-
-void TQMenuBar::setupAccelerators()
-{
-    delete autoaccel;
-    autoaccel = 0;
-
-    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-    register TQMenuItem *mi;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( !mi->isEnabledAndVisible() ) // ### when we have a good solution for the accel vs. focus widget problem, remove that. That is only a workaround
-	    continue;
-	TQString s = mi->text();
-	if ( !s.isEmpty() ) {
-	    int i = TQAccel::shortcutKey( s );
-	    if ( i ) {
-		if ( !autoaccel ) {
-		    autoaccel = new TQAccel( this );
-		    TQ_CHECK_PTR( autoaccel );
-		    autoaccel->setIgnoreWhatsThis( TRUE );
-		    connect( autoaccel, TQT_SIGNAL(activated(int)),
-			     TQT_SLOT(accelActivated(int)) );
-		    connect( autoaccel, TQT_SIGNAL(activatedAmbiguously(int)),
-			     TQT_SLOT(accelActivated(int)) );
-		    connect( autoaccel, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()),
-			     TQT_SLOT(accelDestroyed()) );
-		}
-		autoaccel->insertItem( i, mi->id() );
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( mi->popup() ) {
-	    TQPopupMenu* popup = mi->popup();
-	    popup->updateAccel( this );
-	    if ( !popup->isEnabled() )
-		popup->enableAccel( FALSE );
-	}
-    }
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-bool TQMenuBar::customWhatsThis() const
-{
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQMenuBar::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * )
-{
-    if ( actItem < 0 ) {
-	int i = -1;
-	while ( actItem < 0 && ++i < (int) mitems->count() ) {
-	    TQMenuItem* mi = mitems->at( i );
-	    if ( mi && mi->isEnabledAndVisible() && !mi->isSeparator() )
-		setActiveItem( i, FALSE );
-	}
-    } else if ( !popupvisible ) {
-	updateItem( idAt( actItem ) );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQMenuBar::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * )
-{
-    updateItem( idAt( actItem ) );
-    if ( !popupvisible )
-	setAltMode( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQMenuBar::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    int h = height();
-    if ( badSize )
-	h = ( (TQMenuBar*)this )->calculateRects();
-    TQSize s( 2*frameWidth(),0);
-    if ( irects ) {
-	for ( int i = 0; i < (int)mitems->count(); ++i )
-	    s.setWidth( s.width() + irects[ i ].width() + 2 );
-    }
-    s.setHeight( h );
-    return (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_MenuBar, this, s.
-				     expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut())));
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQMenuBar::tqminimumSize() const
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(parent());
-    if ( tb )
-	return tqsizeHint();
-#endif
-    return TQFrame::tqminimumSize();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQMenuBar::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    return tqminimumSize();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQMenuBar::defaultUp
-    \brief the popup orientation
-
-    The default popup orientation. By default, menus pop "down" the
-    screen. By setting the property to TRUE, the menu will pop "up".
-    You might call this for menus that are \e below the document to
-    which they refer.
-
-    If the menu would not fit on the screen, the other direction is
-    used automatically.
-*/
-void TQMenuBar::setDefaultUp( bool on )
-{
-    defaultup = on;
-}
-
-bool TQMenuBar::isDefaultUp() const
-{
-    return defaultup;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQMenuBar::activateItemAt( int index )
-{
-    if ( index >= 0 && index < (int) mitems->count() )
-	setActiveItem( index );
-    else
-	goodbye( FALSE );
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_MENUBAR
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.h
deleted file mode 100644
index c5668a5..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenubar.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,206 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQMenuBar class
-**
-** Created : 941209
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQMENUBAR_H
-#define TQMENUBAR_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h" // ### remove or keep for users' convenience?
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#include "tqmenudata.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-
-class TQPopupMenu;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQMenuBar : public TQFrame, public TQMenuData
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( Separator )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Separator separator READ separator WRITE setSeparator DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool defaultUp READ isDefaultUp WRITE setDefaultUp )
-
-public:
-    TQMenuBar( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQMenuBar();
-
-    void	updateItem( int id );
-
-    void	show();				// reimplemented show
-    void	hide();				// reimplemented hide
-
-    bool	eventFilter( TQObject *, TQEvent * );
-
-    int		heightForWidth(int) const;
-
-    enum	Separator { Never=0, InWindowsStyle=1 };
-    Separator 	separator() const;
-    virtual void	setSeparator( Separator when );
-
-    void	setDefaultUp( bool );
-    bool	isDefaultUp() const;
-
-    bool customWhatsThis() const;
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSize() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    void activateItemAt( int index );
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    static void initialize();
-    static void cleanup();
-#endif
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void	activated( int itemId );
-    void	highlighted( int itemId );
-
-protected:
-    void	drawContents( TQPainter * );
-    void	fontChange( const TQFont & );
-    void	mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * );
-    void	focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void	focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void	resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void	leaveEvent( TQEvent * );
-    void	menuContentsChanged();
-    void	menuStateChanged();
-    void 	styleChange( TQStyle& );
-    int	itemAtPos( const TQPoint & );
-    void	hidePopups();
-    TQRect	tqitemRect( int item );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void	subActivated( int itemId );
-    void	subHighlighted( int itemId );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    void	accelActivated( int itemId );
-    void	accelDestroyed();
-#endif
-    void	popupDestroyed( TQObject* );
-    void 	performDelayedChanges();
-
-    void	languageChange();
-
-private:
-    void 	performDelayedContentsChanged();
-    void 	performDelayedStateChanged();
-    void	menuInsPopup( TQPopupMenu * );
-    void	menuDelPopup( TQPopupMenu * );
-    void	frameChanged();
-
-    bool	tryMouseEvent( TQPopupMenu *, TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	tryKeyEvent( TQPopupMenu *, TQKeyEvent * );
-    void	goodbye( bool cancelled = FALSE );
-    void	openActPopup();
-
-    void setActiveItem( int index, bool show = TRUE, bool activate_first_item = TRUE );
-    void setAltMode( bool );
-
-    int		calculateRects( int max_width = -1 );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    void	setupAccelerators();
-    TQAccel     *autoaccel;
-#endif
-    TQRect      *irects;
-    int		rightSide;
-
-    uint	mseparator : 1;
-    uint	waitforalt : 1;
-    uint	popupvisible  : 1;
-    uint	hasmouse : 1;
-    uint 	defaultup : 1;
-    uint 	toggleclose : 1;
-    uint        pendingDelayedContentsChanges : 1;
-    uint        pendingDelayedStateChanges : 1;
-
-    friend class TQPopupMenu;
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    friend class TQWidget;
-    friend class TQApplication;
-    friend void qt_mac_set_modal_state(bool, TQMenuBar *);
-
-    void macCreateNativeMenubar();
-    void macRemoveNativeMenubar();
-    void macDirtyNativeMenubar();
-
-#if !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_EVENT)
-    static void qt_mac_install_menubar_event(MenuRef);
-    static OStqStatus qt_mac_menubar_event(EventHandlerCallRef, EventRef, void *);
-#endif
-    virtual void macWidgetChangedWindow();
-    bool syncPopups(MenuRef ret, TQPopupMenu *d);
-    MenuRef createMacPopup(TQPopupMenu *d, int id, bool =FALSE);
-    bool updateMenuBar();
-#if !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_MERGE)
-    uint isCommand(TQMenuItem *, bool just_check=FALSE);
-#endif
-
-    uint mac_eaten_menubar : 1;
-    class MacPrivate;
-    MacPrivate *mac_d;
-    static bool activate(MenuRef, short, bool highlight=FALSE, bool by_accel=FALSE);
-    static bool activateCommand(uint cmd);
-    static bool macUpdateMenuBar();
-    static bool macUpdatePopupVisible(MenuRef, bool);
-    static bool macUpdatePopup(MenuRef);
-#endif
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQMenuBar( const TQMenuBar & );
-    TQMenuBar &operator=( const TQMenuBar & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-
-#endif // TQMENUBAR_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 925ed22..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1606 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQMenuData class
-**
-** Created : 941128
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqmenudata.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUDATA
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqmenubar.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-
-class TQMenuItemData {
-public:
-    TQCustomMenuItem    *custom_item;	// custom menu item
-};
-
-class TQMenuDataData {
-    // attention: also defined in qmenubar.cpp and qpopupmenu.cpp
-public:
-    TQMenuDataData();
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQWidget> aWidget;
-    int aInt;
-};
-TQMenuDataData::TQMenuDataData()
-    : aInt(-1)
-{}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQMenuData tqmenudata.h
-    \brief The TQMenuData class is a base class for TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu.
-
-    \ingroup misc
-
-    TQMenuData has an internal list of menu items. A menu item can have
-    a text(), an \link accel() accelerator\endlink, a pixmap(), an
-    iconSet(), a whatsThis() text and a popup menu (unless it is a
-    separator). Menu items may optionally be \link setItemChecked()
-    checked\endlink (except for separators).
-
-    The menu item sends out an \link TQMenuBar::activated()
-    activated()\endlink signal when it is chosen and a \link
-    TQMenuBar::highlighted() highlighted()\endlink signal when it
-    receives the user input focus.
-
-    \keyword menu identifier
-
-    Menu items are assigned the menu identifier \e id that is passed
-    in insertItem() or an automatically generated identifier if \e id
-    is < 0 (the default). The generated identifiers (negative
-    integers) are guaranteed to be unique within the entire
-    application. The identifier is used to access the menu item in
-    other functions.
-
-    Menu items can be removed with removeItem() and removeItemAt(), or
-    changed with changeItem(). All menu items can be removed with
-    clear(). Accelerators can be changed or set with setAccel().
-    Checkable items can be checked or unchecked with setItemChecked().
-    Items can be enabled or disabled using setItemEnabled() and
-    connected and disconnected with connectItem() and disconnectItem()
-    respectively. By default, newly created menu items are visible.
-    They can be hidden (and shown again) with setItemVisible().
-
-    Menu items are stored in a list. Use findItem() to find an item by
-    its list position or by its menu identifier. (See also indexOf()
-    and idAt().)
-
-    \sa TQAccel TQPopupMenu TQAction
-*/
-
-
-/*****************************************************************************
-  TQMenuItem member functions
- *****************************************************************************/
-
-TQMenuItem::TQMenuItem()
-    :ident( -1 ), iconset_data( 0 ), pixmap_data( 0 ), popup_menu( 0 ),
-     widget_item( 0 ), signal_data( 0 ), is_separator( FALSE ), is_enabled( TRUE ),
-     is_checked( FALSE ), is_dirty( TRUE ), is_visible( TRUE ), d( 0)
-{}
-
-TQMenuItem::~TQMenuItem()
-{
-    delete iconset_data;
-    delete pixmap_data;
-    delete signal_data;
-    delete widget_item;
-    if ( d )
-	delete d->custom_item;
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-/*****************************************************************************
-  TQMenuData member functions
- *****************************************************************************/
-
-TQMenuItemData* TQMenuItem::extra()
-{
-    if ( !d ) d = new TQMenuItemData;
-    return d;
-}
-
-TQCustomMenuItem *TQMenuItem::custom() const
-{
-    if ( !d ) return 0;
-    return d->custom_item;
-}
-
-
-static int get_seq_id()
-{
-    static int seq_no = -2;
-    return seq_no--;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty menu data list.
-*/
-
-TQMenuData::TQMenuData()
-{
-    actItem = -1;				// no active menu item
-    mitems = new TQMenuItemList;			// create list of menu items
-    TQ_CHECK_PTR( mitems );
-    mitems->setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    parentMenu = 0;				// assume top level
-    isPopupMenu = FALSE;
-    isMenuBar = FALSE;
-    mouseBtDn = FALSE;
-    badSize = TRUE;
-    avoid_circularity = 0;
-    actItemDown = FALSE;
-    d = new TQMenuDataData;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes all menu items and disconnects any Q_SIGNALS that have been
-    connected.
-*/
-
-TQMenuData::~TQMenuData()
-{
-    delete mitems;				// delete menu item list
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Virtual function; notifies subclasses about an item with \a id
-    that has been changed.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::updateItem( int /* id */ )	// reimplemented in subclass
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Virtual function; notifies subclasses that one or more items have
-    been inserted or removed.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::menuContentsChanged()		// reimplemented in subclass
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Virtual function; notifies subclasses that one or more items have
-    changed state (enabled/disabled or checked/unchecked).
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::menuStateChanged()		// reimplemented in subclass
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Virtual function; notifies subclasses that a popup menu item has
-    been inserted.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::menuInsPopup( TQPopupMenu * )	// reimplemented in subclass
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Virtual function; notifies subclasses that a popup menu item has
-    been removed.
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::menuDelPopup( TQPopupMenu * )	// reimplemented in subclass
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the number of items in the menu.
-*/
-
-uint TQMenuData::count() const
-{
-    return mitems->count();
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-
-  Internal function that insert a menu item. Called by all insert()
-  functions.
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertAny( const TQString *text, const TQPixmap *pixmap,
-			  TQPopupMenu *popup, const TQIconSet* iconset, int id, int index,
-			  TQWidget* widget, TQCustomMenuItem* custom )
-{
-    if ( index < 0 ) {	// append, but not if the rightmost item is an mdi separator in the menubar
-	index = mitems->count();
-	if ( isMenuBar && mitems->last() && mitems->last()->widget() && mitems->last()->isSeparator() )
-	    index--;
-    } else if ( index > (int) mitems->count() ) { // append
-	index = mitems->count();
-    }
-    if ( id < 0 )				// -2, -3 etc.
-	id = get_seq_id();
-
-    register TQMenuItem *mi = new TQMenuItem;
-    TQ_CHECK_PTR( mi );
-    mi->ident = id;
-    if ( widget != 0 ) {
-	mi->widget_item = widget;
-	mi->is_separator = !widget->isFocusEnabled();
-    } else if ( custom != 0 ) {
-	mi->extra()->custom_item = custom;
-	mi->is_separator = custom->isSeparator();
-	if ( iconset && !iconset->isNull() )
-	    mi->iconset_data = new TQIconSet( *iconset );
-    } else if ( text == 0 && pixmap == 0 && popup == 0 ) {
-	mi->is_separator = TRUE;		// separator
-    } else {
-#ifndef TQ_OS_TEMP
-	mi->text_data = text?*text:TQString();
-#else
-	TQString newText( *text );
-	newText.truncate( newText.findRev( '\t' ) );
-	mi->text_data = newText.isEmpty()?TQString():newText;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-	mi->accel_key = TQt::Key_unknown;
-#endif
-	if ( pixmap && !pixmap->isNull() )
-	    mi->pixmap_data = new TQPixmap( *pixmap );
-	if ( (mi->popup_menu = popup) )
-	    menuInsPopup( popup );
-	if ( iconset && !iconset->isNull() )
-	    mi->iconset_data = new TQIconSet( *iconset );
-    }
-
-    mitems->insert( index, mi );
-    TQPopupMenu* p = ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(TQMenuData::d->aWidget);
-    if (p && p->isVisible() && p->mitems) {
-	p->mitems->clear();
-	for ( TQMenuItemListIt it( *mitems ); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	    if ( it.current()->id() != TQMenuData::d->aInt && !it.current()->widget() )
-		p->mitems->append( it.current() );
-	}
-    }
-    menuContentsChanged();			// menu data changed
-    return mi->ident;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-  Internal function that finds the menu item where \a popup is located,
-  storing its index at \a index if \a index is not NULL.
-*/
-TQMenuItem *TQMenuData::findPopup( TQPopupMenu *popup, int *index )
-{
-    int i = 0;
-    TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->first();
-    while ( mi ) {
-	if ( mi->popup_menu == popup )		// found popup
-	    break;
-	i++;
-	mi = mitems->next();
-    }
-    if ( index && mi )
-	*index = i;
-    return mi;
-}
-
-void TQMenuData::removePopup( TQPopupMenu *popup )
-{
-    int index = 0;
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findPopup( popup, &index );
-    if ( mi ) {
-	mi->popup_menu = 0;
-	removeItemAt( index );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    The family of insertItem() functions inserts menu items into a
-    popup menu or a menu bar.
-
-    A menu item is usually either a text string or a pixmap, both with
-    an optional icon or keyboard accelerator. For special cases it is
-    also possible to insert custom items (see \l{TQCustomMenuItem}) or
-    even widgets into popup menus.
-
-    Some insertItem() members take a popup menu as an additional
-    argument. Use this to insert submenus into existing menus or
-    pulldown menus into a menu bar.
-
-    The number of insert functions may look confusing, but they are
-    actually quite simple to use.
-
-    This default version inserts a menu item with the text \a text,
-    the accelerator key \a accel, an id and an optional index and
-    connects it to the slot \a member in the object \a receiver.
-
-    Example:
-    \code
-	TQMenuBar   *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
-	TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;
-	fileMenu->insertItem( "New",  myView, TQT_SLOT(newFile()), CTRL+Key_N );
-	fileMenu->insertItem( "Open", myView, TQT_SLOT(open()),    CTRL+Key_O );
-	mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );
-    \endcode
-
-    Not all insert functions take an object/slot parameter or an
-    accelerator key. Use connectItem() and setAccel() on those items.
-
-    If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with the text and
-    accelerator. (For translations use a string \link TQKeySequence key
-    sequence\endlink.):
-    \code
-	fileMenu->insertItem( tr("Open"), myView, TQT_SLOT(open()),
-			      tr("Ctrl+O") );
-    \endcode
-
-    In the example above, pressing Ctrl+O or selecting "Open" from the
-    menu activates the myView->open() function.
-
-    Some insert functions take a TQIconSet parameter to specify the
-    little menu item icon. Note that you can always pass a TQPixmap
-    object instead.
-
-    The \a id specifies the identification number associated with the
-    menu item. Note that only positive values are valid, as a negative
-    value will make TQt select a unique id for the item.
-
-    The \a index specifies the position in the menu. The menu item is
-    appended at the end of the list if \a index is negative.
-
-    Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
-    instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
-    accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
-    associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
-    that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
-    installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
-    popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
-    chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
-    top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
-    object.
-
-    \warning Be careful when passing a literal 0 to insertItem()
-    because some C++ compilers choose the wrong overloaded function.
-    Cast the 0 to what you mean, e.g. \c{(TQObject*)0}.
-
-    \warning On Mac OS X, items that connect to a slot that are inserted into a
-    menubar will not function as we use the native menubar that knows nothing
-    about Q_SIGNALS or Q_SLOTS. Instead insert the items into a popup menu and
-    insert the popup menu into the menubar. This may be fixed in a future TQt
-    version.
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel,
-    tqnamespace.h
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const QString &text,
-			   const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char* member,
-			   const TQKeySequence& accel, int id, int index )
-{
-    TQString tqtext = TQString(text);
-    int actualID = insertAny( &tqtext, 0, 0, 0, id, index );
-    connectItem( actualID, receiver, member );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    if ( accel )
-	setAccel( accel, actualID );
-#endif
-    return actualID;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with icon \a icon, text \a text, accelerator
-    \a accel, optional id \a id, and optional \a index position. The
-    menu item is connected it to the \a receiver's \a member slot. The
-    icon will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel,
-    tqnamespace.h
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			   const TQString &text,
-			   const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char* member,
-			   const TQKeySequence& accel, int id, int index )
-{
-    int actualID = insertAny( &text, 0, 0, &icon, id, index );
-    connectItem( actualID, receiver, member );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    if ( accel )
-	setAccel( accel, actualID );
-#endif
-    return actualID;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with pixmap \a pixmap, accelerator \a accel,
-    optional id \a id, and optional \a index position. The menu item
-    is connected it to the \a receiver's \a member slot. The icon will
-    be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
-    To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-    should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const QPixmap &pixmap,
-			   const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char* member,
-			   const TQKeySequence& accel, int id, int index )
-{
-    int actualID = insertAny( 0, &TQT_TQPIXMAP_OBJECT(pixmap), 0, 0, id, index );
-    connectItem( actualID, receiver, member );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    if ( accel )
-	setAccel( accel, actualID );
-#endif
-    return actualID;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with icon \a icon, pixmap \a pixmap,
-    accelerator \a accel, optional id \a id, and optional \a index
-    position. The icon will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in
-    the item. The item is connected to the \a member slot in the \a
-    receiver object.
-
-    To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-    should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem(), TQAccel,
-    tqnamespace.h
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			   const TQPixmap &pixmap,
-			   const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char* member,
-			   const TQKeySequence& accel, int id, int index )
-{
-    int actualID = insertAny( 0, &pixmap, 0, &icon, id, index );
-    connectItem( actualID, receiver, member );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    if ( accel )
-	setAccel( accel, actualID );
-#endif
-    return actualID;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with text \a text, optional id \a id, and
-    optional \a index position.
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const QString &text, int id, int index )
-{
-    TQString tqtext = TQString(text);
-    return insertAny( &tqtext, 0, 0, 0, id, index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with icon \a icon, text \a text, optional id
-    \a id, and optional \a index position. The icon will be displayed
-    to the left of the text in the item.
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			   const TQString &text, int id, int index )
-{
-    return insertAny( &text, 0, 0, &icon, id, index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with text \a text, submenu \a popup, optional
-    id \a id, and optional \a index position.
-
-    The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-    widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-    the menu is deleted.
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const QString &text, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-			   int id, int index )
-{
-    TQString tqtext = TQString(text);
-    return insertAny( &tqtext, 0, popup, 0, id, index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with icon \a icon, text \a text, submenu \a
-    popup, optional id \a id, and optional \a index position. The icon
-    will be displayed to the left of the text in the item.
-
-    The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-    widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-    the menu is deleted.
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			   const TQString &text, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-			   int id, int index )
-{
-    return insertAny( &text, 0, popup, &icon, id, index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with pixmap \a pixmap, optional id \a id, and
-    optional \a index position.
-
-    To look best when being highlighted as a menu item, the pixmap
-    should provide a mask (see TQPixmap::mask()).
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const QPixmap &pixmap, int id, int index )
-{
-    return insertAny( 0, &TQT_TQPIXMAP_OBJECT(pixmap), 0, 0, id, index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with icon \a icon, pixmap \a pixmap, optional
-    id \a id, and optional \a index position. The icon will be
-    displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			   const TQPixmap &pixmap, int id, int index )
-{
-    return insertAny( 0, &pixmap, 0, &icon, id, index );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with pixmap \a pixmap, submenu \a popup,
-    optional id \a id, and optional \a index position.
-
-    The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-    widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-    the menu is deleted.
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const QPixmap &pixmap, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-			   int id, int index )
-{
-    return insertAny( 0, &TQT_TQPIXMAP_OBJECT(pixmap), popup, 0, id, index );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item with icon \a icon, pixmap \a pixmap submenu \a
-    popup, optional id \a id, and optional \a index position. The icon
-    will be displayed to the left of the pixmap in the item.
-
-    The \a popup must be deleted by the programmer or by its parent
-    widget. It is not deleted when this menu item is removed or when
-    the menu is deleted.
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem(), changeItem(), setAccel(), connectItem()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			   const TQPixmap &pixmap, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-			   int id, int index )
-{
-    return insertAny( 0, &pixmap, popup, &icon, id, index );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a menu item that consists of the widget \a widget with
-    optional id \a id, and optional \a index position.
-
-    Ownership of \a widget is transferred to the popup menu or to the
-    menu bar.
-
-    Theoretically, any widget can be inserted into a popup menu. In
-    practice, this only makes sense with certain widgets.
-
-    If a widget is not focus-enabled (see
-    \l{TQWidget::isFocusEnabled()}), the menu treats it as a separator;
-    this means that the item is not selectable and will never get
-    focus. In this way you can, for example, simply insert a TQLabel if
-    you need a popup menu with a title.
-
-    If the widget is focus-enabled it will get focus when the user
-    traverses the popup menu with the arrow keys. If the widget does
-    not accept \c ArrowUp and \c ArrowDown in its key event handler,
-    the focus will move back to the menu when the respective arrow key
-    is hit one more time. This works with a TQLineEdit, for example. If
-    the widget accepts the arrow key itself, it must also provide the
-    possibility to put the focus back on the menu again by calling
-    TQWidget::focusNextPrevChild(). Futhermore, if the embedded widget
-    closes the menu when the user made a selection, this can be done
-    safely by calling:
-    \code
-	if ( isVisible() &&
-	     parentWidget() &&
-	     parentWidget()->inherits("TQPopupMenu") )
-	    parentWidget()->close();
-    \endcode
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa removeItem()
-*/
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( QWidget* widget, int id, int index )
-{
-    return insertAny( 0, 0, 0, 0, id, index, TQT_TQWIDGET(widget) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a custom menu item \a custom with optional id \a id, and
-    optional \a index position.
-
-    This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
-    bars. Ownership of \a custom is transferred to the popup menu.
-
-    If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa connectItem(), removeItem(), TQCustomMenuItem
-*/
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( TQCustomMenuItem* custom, int id, int index )
-{
-    return insertAny( 0, 0, 0, 0, id, index, 0, custom );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts a custom menu item \a custom with an \a icon and with
-    optional id \a id, and optional \a index position.
-
-    This only works with popup menus. It is not supported for menu
-    bars. Ownership of \a custom is transferred to the popup menu.
-
-    If you want to connect a custom item to a slot, use connectItem().
-
-    Returns the allocated menu identifier number (\a id if \a id >= 0).
-
-    \sa connectItem(), removeItem(), TQCustomMenuItem
-*/
-int TQMenuData::insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon, TQCustomMenuItem* custom, int id, int index )
-{
-    return insertAny( 0, 0, 0, &icon, id, index, 0, custom );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Inserts a separator at position \a index, and returns the menu identifier
-    number allocated to it. The separator becomes the last menu item if
-    \a index is negative.
-
-    In a popup menu a separator is rendered as a horizontal line. In a
-    Motif menu bar a separator is spacing, so the rest of the items
-    (normally just "Help") are drawn right-justified. In a Windows
-    menu bar separators are ignored (to comply with the Windows style
-    guidelines).
-*/
-int TQMenuData::insertSeparator( int index )
-{
-    return insertAny( 0, 0, 0, 0, -1, index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQMenuData::removeItem( int id )
-
-    Removes the menu item that has the identifier \a id.
-
-    \sa removeItemAt(), clear()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::removeItem( int id )
-{
-    TQMenuData *parent;
-    if ( findItem( id, &parent ) )
-	parent->removeItemAt(parent->indexOf(id));
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the menu item at position \a index.
-
-    \sa removeItem(), clear()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::removeItemAt( int index )
-{
-    if ( index < 0 || index >= (int)mitems->count() ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_RANGE)
-	qWarning( "TQMenuData::removeItem: Index %d out of range", index );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-    TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at( index );
-    if ( mi->popup_menu )
-	menuDelPopup( mi->popup_menu );
-    mitems->remove();
-    TQPopupMenu* p = ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(TQMenuData::d->aWidget);
-    if (p && p->isVisible() && p->mitems) {
-	p->mitems->clear();
-	for ( TQMenuItemListIt it( *mitems ); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	    if ( it.current()->id() != TQMenuData::d->aInt && !it.current()->widget() )
-		p->mitems->append( it.current() );
-	}
-    }
-    if ( !TQApplication::closingDown() )		// avoid trouble
-	menuContentsChanged();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes all menu items.
-
-    \sa removeItem(), removeItemAt()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::clear()
-{
-    register TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->first();
-    while ( mi ) {
-	if ( mi->popup_menu )
-	    menuDelPopup( mi->popup_menu );
-	mitems->remove();
-	mi = mitems->current();
-    }
-    TQPopupMenu* p = ::tqqt_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(TQMenuData::d->aWidget);
-    if (p && p->isVisible() && p->mitems) {
-	p->mitems->clear();
-    }
-    if ( !TQApplication::closingDown() )		// avoid trouble
-	menuContentsChanged();
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-
-/*!
-    Returns the accelerator key that has been defined for the menu
-    item \a id, or 0 if it has no accelerator key or if there is no
-    such menu item.
-
-    \sa setAccel(), TQAccel, tqnamespace.h
-*/
-
-TQKeySequence TQMenuData::accel( int id ) const
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    if ( mi )
-	return mi->key();
-    return TQKeySequence();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the accelerator key for the menu item \a id to \a key.
-
-    An accelerator key consists of a key code and a combination of the
-    modifiers \c SHIFT, \c CTRL, \c ALT or \c UNICODE_ACCEL (OR'ed or
-    added). The header file \c tqnamespace.h contains a list of key
-    codes.
-
-    Defining an accelerator key produces a text that is added to the
-    menu item; for instance, \c CTRL + \c Key_O produces "Ctrl+O". The
-    text is formatted differently for different platforms.
-
-    Note that keyboard accelerators in TQt are not application-global,
-    instead they are bound to a certain top-level window. For example,
-    accelerators in TQPopupMenu items only work for menus that are
-    associated with a certain window. This is true for popup menus
-    that live in a menu bar since their accelerators will then be
-    installed in the menu bar itself. This also applies to stand-alone
-    popup menus that have a top-level widget in their parentWidget()
-    chain. The menu will then install its accelerator object on that
-    top-level widget. For all other cases use an independent TQAccel
-    object.
-
-    Example:
-    \code
-	TQMenuBar *mainMenu = new TQMenuBar;
-	TQPopupMenu *fileMenu = new TQPopupMenu;       // file sub menu
-	fileMenu->insertItem( "Open Document", 67 ); // add "Open" item
-	fileMenu->setAccel( CTRL + Key_O, 67 );      // Ctrl+O to open
-	fileMenu->insertItem( "Quit", 69 );          // add "Quit" item
-	fileMenu->setAccel( CTRL + ALT + Key_Delete, 69 ); // add Alt+Del to quit
-	mainMenu->insertItem( "File", fileMenu );    // add the file menu
-    \endcode
-
-    If you need to translate accelerators, use tr() with a string:
-    \code
-	fileMenu->setAccel( tr("Ctrl+O"), 67 );
-    \endcode
-
-    You can also specify the accelerator in the insertItem() function.
-    You may prefer to use TQAction to associate accelerators with menu
-    items.
-
-    \sa accel() insertItem() TQAccel TQAction
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::setAccel( const TQKeySequence& key, int id )
-{
-    TQMenuData *parent;
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent );
-    if ( mi ) {
-	mi->accel_key = key;
-	parent->menuContentsChanged();
-    }
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_ACCEL
-
-/*!
-    Returns the icon set that has been set for menu item \a id, or 0
-    if no icon set has been set.
-
-    \sa changeItem(), text(), pixmap()
-*/
-
-TQIconSet* TQMenuData::iconSet( int id ) const
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    return mi ? mi->iconSet() : 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the text that has been set for menu item \a id, or
-    TQString::null if no text has been set.
-
-    \sa changeItem(), pixmap(), iconSet()
-*/
-
-TQString TQMenuData::text( int id ) const
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    return mi ? mi->text() : TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the pixmap that has been set for menu item \a id, or 0 if
-    no pixmap has been set.
-
-    \sa changeItem(), text(), iconSet()
-*/
-
-TQPixmap *TQMenuData::pixmap( int id ) const
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    return mi ? mi->pixmap() : 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \fn void TQMenuData::changeItem( const TQString &, int )
-  \obsolete
-
-  Changes the text of the menu item \a id. If the item has an icon,
-  the icon remains unchanged.
-
-  \sa text()
-*/
-/*!
-  \fn void TQMenuData::changeItem( const TQPixmap &, int )
-  \obsolete
-
-  Changes the pixmap of the menu item \a id. If the item has an icon,
-  the icon remains unchanged.
-
-  \sa pixmap()
-*/
-
-/*!
-  \fn void TQMenuData::changeItem( const TQIconSet &, const TQString &, int )
-  \obsolete
-
-  Changes the icon and text of the menu item \a id.
-
-  \sa pixmap()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Changes the text of the menu item \a id to \a text. If the item
-    has an icon, the icon remains unchanged.
-
-    \sa text()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::changeItem( int id, const TQString &text )
-{
-    TQMenuData *parent;
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent );
-    if ( mi ) {					// item found
-	if ( mi->text_data == text )		// same string
-	    return;
-	if ( mi->pixmap_data ) {		// delete pixmap
-	    delete mi->pixmap_data;
-	    mi->pixmap_data = 0;
-	}
-	mi->text_data = text;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-	if ( !mi->accel_key && text.find( '\t' ) != -1 )
-	    mi->accel_key = TQt::Key_unknown;
-#endif
-	parent->menuContentsChanged();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Changes the pixmap of the menu item \a id to the pixmap \a pixmap.
-    If the item has an icon, the icon is unchanged.
-
-    \sa pixmap()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::changeItem( int id, const TQPixmap &pixmap )
-{
-    TQMenuData *parent;
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent );
-    if ( mi ) {					// item found
-	register TQPixmap *i = mi->pixmap_data;
-	bool fast_refresh = i != 0 &&
-	    i->width() == pixmap.width() &&
-	    i->height() == pixmap.height() &&
-	    !mi->text();
-	if ( !mi->text_data.isNull() )		// delete text
-	    mi->text_data = TQString::null;
-	if ( !pixmap.isNull() )
-	    mi->pixmap_data = new TQPixmap( pixmap );
-	else
-	    mi->pixmap_data = 0;
-	delete i; // old mi->pixmap_data, could be &pixmap
-	if ( fast_refresh )
-	    parent->updateItem( id );
-	else
-	    parent->menuContentsChanged();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Changes the iconset and text of the menu item \a id to the \a icon
-    and \a text respectively.
-
-    \sa pixmap()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::changeItem( int id, const TQIconSet &icon, const TQString &text )
-{
-    changeItem( id, text );
-    changeItemIconSet( id, icon );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Changes the iconset and pixmap of the menu item \a id to \a icon
-    and \a pixmap respectively.
-
-    \sa pixmap()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::changeItem( int id, const TQIconSet &icon, const TQPixmap &pixmap )
-{
-    changeItem( id, pixmap );
-    changeItemIconSet( id, icon );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Changes the icon of the menu item \a id to \a icon.
-
-    \sa pixmap()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::changeItemIconSet( int id, const TQIconSet &icon )
-{
-    TQMenuData *parent;
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent );
-    if ( mi ) {					// item found
-	register TQIconSet *i = mi->iconset_data;
-	bool fast_refresh = i != 0;
-	if ( !icon.isNull() )
-	    mi->iconset_data = new TQIconSet( icon );
-	else
-	    mi->iconset_data = 0;
-	delete i; // old mi->iconset_data, could be &icon
-	if ( fast_refresh )
-	    parent->updateItem( id );
-	else
-	    parent->menuContentsChanged();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the item with identifier \a id is enabled;
-    otherwise returns FALSE
-
-    \sa setItemEnabled(), isItemVisible()
-*/
-
-bool TQMenuData::isItemEnabled( int id ) const
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    return mi ? mi->isEnabled() : FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a enable is TRUE, enables the menu item with identifier \a id;
-    otherwise disables the menu item with identifier \a id.
-
-    \sa isItemEnabled()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::setItemEnabled( int id, bool enable )
-{
-    TQMenuData *parent;
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent );
-    if ( mi && (bool)mi->is_enabled != enable ) {
-	mi->is_enabled = enable;
-#if !defined(TQT_NO_ACCEL) && !defined(TQT_NO_POPUPMENU)
-	if ( mi->popup() )
-	    mi->popup()->enableAccel( enable );
-#endif
-	parent->menuStateChanged();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \a id is currently
-    active; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-bool TQMenuData::isItemActive( int id ) const
-{
-    if ( actItem == -1 )
-	return FALSE;
-    return indexOf( id ) == actItem;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \a id has been checked;
-    otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setItemChecked()
-*/
-
-bool TQMenuData::isItemChecked( int id ) const
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    return mi ? mi->isChecked() : FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a check is TRUE, checks the menu item with id \a id; otherwise
-    unchecks the menu item with id \a id. Calls
-    TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( TRUE ) if necessary.
-
-    \sa isItemChecked()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::setItemChecked( int id, bool check )
-{
-    TQMenuData *parent;
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent );
-    if ( mi && (bool)mi->is_checked != check ) {
-	mi->is_checked = check;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-	if ( parent->isPopupMenu && !((TQPopupMenu *)parent)->isCheckable() )
-	    ((TQPopupMenu *)parent)->setCheckable( TRUE );
-#endif
-	parent->menuStateChanged();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  Returns TRUE if the menu item with the id \a id is  visible;
-  otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-  \sa setItemVisible()
-*/
-
-bool TQMenuData::isItemVisible( int id ) const
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    return mi ? mi->isVisible() : FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-  If \a visible is TRUE, shows the menu item with id \a id; otherwise
-  hides the menu item with id \a id.
-
-  \sa isItemVisible(), isItemEnabled()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::setItemVisible( int id, bool visible )
-{
-    TQMenuData *parent;
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent );
-    if ( mi && (bool)mi->is_visible != visible ) {
-	mi->is_visible = visible;
-	parent->menuContentsChanged();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the menu item with identifier \a id, or 0 if there is no
-    item with this identifier.
-
-    Note that TQMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not
-    need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like
-    text(), pixmap() and changeItem() to get and modify menu item
-    attributes instead.
-
-    \sa indexOf()
-*/
-
-TQMenuItem *TQMenuData::findItem( int id ) const
-{
-    return findItem( id, 0 );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns the menu item with identifier \a id, or 0 if there is no
-    item with this identifier. Changes \a *parent to point to the
-    parent of the return value.
-
-    Note that TQMenuItem is an internal class, and that you should not
-    need to call this function. Use the higher level functions like
-    text(), pixmap() and changeItem() to get and modify menu item
-    attributes instead.
-
-    \sa indexOf()
-*/
-
-TQMenuItem * TQMenuData::findItem( int id, TQMenuData ** parent ) const
-{
-    if ( parent )
-	*parent = (TQMenuData *)this;		// ###
-
-    if ( id == -1 )				// bad identifier
-	return 0;
-    TQMenuItemListIt it( *mitems );
-    TQMenuItem *mi;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {		// search this menu
-	++it;
-	if ( mi->ident == id )			// found item
-	    return mi;
-    }
-    it.toFirst();
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {		// search submenus
-	++it;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-	if ( mi->popup_menu ) {
-	    TQPopupMenu *p = mi->popup_menu;
-	    if (!p->avoid_circularity) {
-		p->avoid_circularity = 1;
-		mi = mi->popup_menu->findItem( id, parent );
-		p->avoid_circularity = 0;
-		if ( mi )				// found item
-		    return mi;
-	    }
-	}
-#endif
-    }
-    return 0;					// not found
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the index of the menu item with identifier \a id, or -1 if
-    there is no item with this identifier.
-
-    \sa idAt(), findItem()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::indexOf( int id ) const
-{
-    if ( id == -1 )				// bad identifier
-	return -1;
-    TQMenuItemListIt it( *mitems );
-    TQMenuItem *mi;
-    int index = 0;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	if ( mi->ident == id )			// this one?
-	    return index;
-	++index;
-	++it;
-    }
-    return -1;					// not found
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the identifier of the menu item at position \a index in
-    the internal list, or -1 if \a index is out of range.
-
-    \sa setId(), indexOf()
-*/
-
-int TQMenuData::idAt( int index ) const
-{
-    return index < (int)mitems->count() && index >= 0 ?
-	   mitems->at(index)->id() : -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the menu identifier of the item at \a index to \a id.
-
-    If \a index is out of range, the operation is ignored.
-
-    \sa idAt()
-*/
-
-void TQMenuData::setId( int index, int id )
-{
-    if ( index < (int)mitems->count() )
-	mitems->at(index)->ident = id;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the parameter of the activation signal of item \a id to \a
-    param.
-
-    If any receiver takes an integer parameter, this value is passed.
-
-    \sa connectItem(), disconnectItem(), itemParameter()
-*/
-bool TQMenuData::setItemParameter( int id, int param ) {
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    if ( !mi )					// no such identifier
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( !mi->signal_data ) {			// create new signal
-	mi->signal_data = new TQSignal;
-	TQ_CHECK_PTR( mi->signal_data );
-    }
-    mi->signal_data->setValue( param );
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the parameter of the activation signal of item \a id.
-
-    If no parameter has been specified for this item with
-    setItemParameter(), the value defaults to \a id.
-
-    \sa connectItem(), disconnectItem(), setItemParameter()
-*/
-int TQMenuData::itemParameter( int id ) const
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    if ( !mi || !mi->signal_data )
-	return id;
-    return mi->signal_data->value().toInt();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Connects the menu item with identifier \a id to \a{receiver}'s \a
-    member slot or signal.
-
-    The receiver's slot (or signal) is activated when the menu item is
-    activated.
-
-    \sa disconnectItem(), setItemParameter()
-*/
-
-bool TQMenuData::connectItem( int id, const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver,
-			     const char* member )
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    if ( !mi )					// no such identifier
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( !mi->signal_data ) {			// create new signal
-	mi->signal_data = new TQSignal;
-	TQ_CHECK_PTR( mi->signal_data );
-	mi->signal_data->setValue( id );
-    }
-    return mi->signal_data->connect( receiver, member );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Disconnects the \a{receiver}'s \a member from the menu item with
-    identifier \a id.
-
-    All connections are removed when the menu data object is
-    destroyed.
-
-    \sa connectItem(), setItemParameter()
-*/
-
-bool TQMenuData::disconnectItem( int id, const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver,
-				const char* member )
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    if ( !mi || !mi->signal_data )		// no identifier or no signal
-	return FALSE;
-    return mi->signal_data->disconnect( receiver, member );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets \a text as What's This help for the menu item with identifier
-    \a id.
-
-    \sa whatsThis()
-*/
-void TQMenuData::setWhatsThis( int id, const TQString& text )
-{
-
-    TQMenuData *parent;
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id, &parent );
-    if ( mi ) {
-	mi->setWhatsThis( text );
-	parent->menuContentsChanged();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the What's This help text for the item with identifier \a
-    id or TQString::null if no text has yet been defined.
-
-    \sa setWhatsThis()
-*/
-TQString TQMenuData::whatsThis( int id ) const
-{
-
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    return mi? mi->whatsThis() : TQString::null;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQCustomMenuItem tqmenudata.h
-    \brief The TQCustomMenuItem class is an abstract base class for custom menu items in popup menus.
-
-    \ingroup misc
-
-    A custom menu item is a menu item that is defined by two pure
-    virtual functions, paint() and tqsizeHint(). The size hint tells the
-    menu how much space it needs to reserve for this item, and paint
-    is called whenever the item needs painting.
-
-    This simple mechanism allows you to create all kinds of
-    application specific menu items. Examples are items showing
-    different fonts in a word processor or menus that allow the
-    selection of drawing utilities in a vector drawing program.
-
-    A custom item is inserted into a popup menu with
-    TQPopupMenu::insertItem().
-
-    By default, a custom item can also have an icon and a keyboard
-    accelerator. You can reimplement fullSpan() to return TRUE if you
-    want the item to span the entire popup menu width. This is
-    particularly useful for labels.
-
-    If you want the custom item to be treated just as a separator,
-    reimplement isSeparator() to return TRUE.
-
-    Note that you can insert pixmaps or bitmaps as items into a popup
-    menu without needing to create a TQCustomMenuItem. However, custom
-    menu items offer more flexibility, and -- especially important
-    with Windows style -- provide the possibility of drawing the item
-    with a different color when it is highlighted.
-
-    \link menu-example.html menu/menu.cpp\endlink shows a simple
-    example how custom menu items can be used.
-
-    Note: the current implementation of TQCustomMenuItem will not
-    recognize shortcut keys that are from text with ampersands. Normal
-    accelerators work though.
-
-    <img src=qpopmenu-fancy.png>
-
-    \sa TQMenuData, TQPopupMenu
-*/
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a TQCustomMenuItem
-*/
-TQCustomMenuItem::TQCustomMenuItem()
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys a TQCustomMenuItem
-*/
-TQCustomMenuItem::~TQCustomMenuItem()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the font of the custom menu item to \a font.
-
-    This function is called whenever the font in the popup menu
-    changes. For menu items that show their own individual font entry,
-    you want to ignore this.
-*/
-void TQCustomMenuItem::setFont( const TQFont& /* font */ )
-{
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if this item wants to span the entire popup menu
-    width; otherwise returns FALSE. The default is FALSE, meaning that
-    the menu may show an icon and an accelerator key for this item as
-    well.
-*/
-bool TQCustomMenuItem::fullSpan() const
-{
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if this item is just a separator; otherwise returns
-    FALSE.
-*/
-bool TQCustomMenuItem::isSeparator() const
-{
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQCustomMenuItem::paint( TQPainter* p, const TQColorGroup& cg, bool act,  bool enabled, int x, int y, int w, int h );
-
-    Paints this item. When this function is invoked, the painter \a p
-    is set to a font and foreground color suitable for a menu item
-    text using color group \a cg. The item is active if \a act is TRUE
-    and enabled if \a enabled is TRUE. The tqgeometry values \a x, \a y,
-    \a w and \a h specify where to draw the item.
-
-    Do not draw any background, this has already been done by the
-    popup menu according to the current GUI style.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQSize TQCustomMenuItem::tqsizeHint();
-
-    Returns the item's size hint.
-*/
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Activates the menu item at position \a index.
-
-    If the index is invalid (for example, -1), the object itself is
-    deactivated.
-*/
-void TQMenuData::activateItemAt( int index )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    if ( isMenuBar )
-	( (TQMenuBar*)this )->activateItemAt( index );
-    else
-#endif
-    {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    if ( isPopupMenu )
-	( (TQPopupMenu*)this )->activateItemAt( index );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.h
deleted file mode 100644
index bc5095f..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmenudata.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,291 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQMenuData class
-**
-** Created : 941128
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQMENUDATA_H
-#define TQMENUDATA_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqglobal.h"
-#include "tqiconset.h" // conversion TQPixmap->TQIconset
-#include "tqkeysequence.h"
-#include "tqstring.h"
-#include "tqsignal.h"
-#include "tqfont.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUDATA
-
-class TQPopupMenu;
-class TQMenuDataData;
-class TQObject;
-
-class TQCustomMenuItem;
-class TQMenuItemData;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQMenuItem			// internal menu item class
-{
-friend class TQMenuData;
-public:
-    TQMenuItem();
-   ~TQMenuItem();
-
-    int		id()		const	{ return ident; }
-    TQIconSet   *iconSet()	const	{ return iconset_data; }
-    TQString	text()		const	{ return text_data; }
-    TQString	whatsThis()	const	{ return whatsthis_data; }
-    TQPixmap    *pixmap()	const	{ return pixmap_data; }
-    TQPopupMenu *popup()		const	{ return popup_menu; }
-    TQWidget *widget()		const	{ return widget_item; }
-    TQCustomMenuItem *custom()	const;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQKeySequence key()		const	{ return accel_key; }
-#endif
-    TQSignal    *signal()	const	{ return signal_data; }
-    bool	isSeparator()	const	{ return is_separator; }
-    bool	isEnabled()	const	{ return is_enabled; }
-    bool	isChecked()	const	{ return is_checked; }
-    bool	isDirty()	const	{ return is_dirty; }
-    bool	isVisible()	const	{ return is_visible; }
-    bool	isEnabledAndVisible() const { return is_enabled && is_visible; }
-
-    void	setText( const TQString &text ) { text_data = text; }
-    void	setDirty( bool dirty )	       { is_dirty = dirty; }
-    void	tqsetVisible( bool visible )	       { is_visible = visible; }
-    void	setWhatsThis( const TQString &text ) { whatsthis_data = text; }
-
-private:
-    int		ident;				// item identifier
-    TQIconSet   *iconset_data;			// icons
-    TQString	text_data;			// item text
-    TQString	whatsthis_data;			// item Whats This help text
-    TQPixmap    *pixmap_data;			// item pixmap
-    TQPopupMenu *popup_menu;			// item popup menu
-    TQWidget    *widget_item;			// widget menu item
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQKeySequence	accel_key;		// accelerator key (state|ascii)
-#endif
-    TQSignal    *signal_data;			// connection
-    uint	is_separator : 1;		// separator flag
-    uint	is_enabled   : 1;		// disabled flag
-    uint	is_checked   : 1;		// checked flag
-    uint	is_dirty     : 1;		// dirty (update) flag
-    uint	is_visible     : 1;		// visibility flag
-    TQMenuItemData* d;
-
-    TQMenuItemData* extra();
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQMenuItem( const TQMenuItem & );
-    TQMenuItem &operator=( const TQMenuItem & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-typedef TQPtrList<TQMenuItem>	 TQMenuItemList;
-typedef TQPtrListIterator<TQMenuItem> TQMenuItemListIt;
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQCustomMenuItem : public TQt
-{
-public:
-    TQCustomMenuItem();
-    virtual ~TQCustomMenuItem();
-    virtual bool fullSpan() const;
-    virtual bool isSeparator() const;
-    virtual void setFont( const TQFont& font );
-    virtual void paint( TQPainter* p, const TQColorGroup& cg, bool act,
-			bool enabled, int x, int y, int w, int h ) = 0;
-    virtual TQSize tqsizeHint() = 0;
-};
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQMenuData			// menu data class
-{
-friend class TQMenuBar;
-friend class TQPopupMenu;
-public:
-    TQMenuData();
-    virtual ~TQMenuData();
-
-    uint	count() const;
-
-
-    int		insertItem( const QString &text,
-			    const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char* member,
-			    const TQKeySequence& accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 );
-    int		insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			    const TQString &text,
-			    const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char* member,
-			    const TQKeySequence& accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 );
-    int		insertItem( const QPixmap &pixmap,
-			    const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char* member,
-			    const TQKeySequence& accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 );
-    int		insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			    const TQPixmap &pixmap,
-			    const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char* member,
-			    const TQKeySequence& accel = 0, int id = -1, int index = -1 );
-
-    int		insertItem( const QString &text, int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-    int		insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			    const TQString &text, int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-
-    int		insertItem( const QString &text, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-			    int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-    int		insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			    const TQString &text, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-			    int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-
-
-    int		insertItem( const QPixmap &pixmap, int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-    int		insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			    const TQPixmap &pixmap, int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-    int		insertItem( const QPixmap &pixmap, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-			    int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-    int		insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon,
-			    const TQPixmap &pixmap, TQPopupMenu *popup,
-			    int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-
-    int		insertItem( QWidget* widget, int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-
-    int		insertItem( const TQIconSet& icon, TQCustomMenuItem* custom, int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-    int		insertItem( TQCustomMenuItem* custom, int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-
-
-    int		insertSeparator( int index=-1 );
-
-    void	removeItem( int id );
-    void	removeItemAt( int index );
-    void	clear();
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQKeySequence accel( int id )	const;
-    void	setAccel( const TQKeySequence& key, int id );
-#endif
-
-    TQIconSet    *iconSet( int id )	const;
-    TQString text( int id )		const;
-    TQPixmap    *pixmap( int id )	const;
-
-    void setWhatsThis( int id, const TQString& );
-    TQString whatsThis( int id ) const;
-    inline void tqsetWhatsThis( int id, const TQString&str ) { return TQMenuData::setWhatsThis(id, str); }
-
-
-    void	changeItem( int id, const TQString &text );
-    void	changeItem( int id, const TQPixmap &pixmap );
-    void	changeItem( int id, const TQIconSet &icon, const TQString &text );
-    void	changeItem( int id, const TQIconSet &icon, const TQPixmap &pixmap );
-
-    void	changeItem( const TQString &text, int id ) { changeItem( id, text); } // obsolete
-    void	changeItem( const TQPixmap &pixmap, int id ) { changeItem( id, pixmap ); } // obsolete
-    void	changeItem( const TQIconSet &icon, const TQString &text, int id ) {	// obsolete
-	changeItem( id, icon, text );
-    }
-
-    bool	isItemActive( int id ) const;
-
-    bool	isItemEnabled( int id ) const;
-    void	setItemEnabled( int id, bool enable );
-
-    bool	isItemChecked( int id ) const;
-    void	setItemChecked( int id, bool check );
-
-    bool	isItemVisible( int id ) const;
-    void	setItemVisible( int id, bool visible );
-
-    virtual void updateItem( int id );
-
-    int		indexOf( int id )	const;
-    int		idAt( int index )	const;
-    virtual void	setId( int index, int id );
-
-    bool	connectItem( int id,
-			     const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char* member );
-    bool	disconnectItem( int id,
-				const TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME *receiver, const char* member );
-
-    bool	setItemParameter( int id, int param );
-    int	itemParameter( int id ) const;
-
-    TQMenuItem  *findItem( int id )	const;
-    TQMenuItem  *findItem( int id, TQMenuData ** parent )	const;
-    TQMenuItem * findPopup( TQPopupMenu *, int *index = 0 );
-
-    virtual void activateItemAt( int index );
-
-protected:
-    int		   actItem;
-    TQMenuItemList *mitems;
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-public:		// FIXME This is a nasty hack...
-#endif // USE_QT4
-    TQMenuData	  *parentMenu;
-    uint	   isPopupMenu	: 1;
-    uint	   isMenuBar	: 1;
-protected:
-    uint	   badSize	: 1;
-    uint	   mouseBtDn	: 1;
-    uint	avoid_circularity : 1;
-    uint	actItemDown : 1;
-    virtual void   menuContentsChanged();
-    virtual void   menuStateChanged();
-    virtual void   menuInsPopup( TQPopupMenu * );
-    virtual void   menuDelPopup( TQPopupMenu * );
-
-private:
-    int		insertAny( const TQString *, const TQPixmap *, TQPopupMenu *,
-			   const TQIconSet*, int, int, TQWidget* = 0, TQCustomMenuItem* = 0);
-    void	removePopup( TQPopupMenu * );
-    void	changeItemIconSet( int id, const TQIconSet &icon );
-
-    TQMenuDataData *d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQMenuData( const TQMenuData & );
-    TQMenuData &operator=( const TQMenuData & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_MENUDATA
-
-#endif // TQMENUDATA_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 4a928a8..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,541 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQMultiLineEdit widget class
-**
-** Created : 961005
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqmultilineedit.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MULTILINEEDIT
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqscrollbar.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqclipboard.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqregexp.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqdragobject.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqdict.h"
-#include "../kernel/tqrichtext_p.h"
-
-
-/*!
-  \class TQMultiLineEdit tqmultilineedit.h
-  \obsolete
-
-  \brief The TQMultiLineEdit widget is a simple editor for inputting text.
-
-  \ingroup advanced
-
-  The TQMultiLineEdit was a simple editor widget in former TQt versions.  TQt
-  3.0 includes a new richtext engine which obsoletes TQMultiLineEdit. It is
-  still included for compatibility reasons. It is now a subclass of
-  \l TQTextEdit, and provides enough of the old TQMultiLineEdit API to keep old
-  applications working.
-
-  If you implement something new with TQMultiLineEdit, we suggest using
-  \l TQTextEdit instead and call TQTextEdit::setTextFormat(TQt::PlainText).
-
-  Although most of the old TQMultiLineEdit API is still available, there is
-  a few difference. The old TQMultiLineEdit operated on lines, not on
-  paragraphs.  As lines change all the time during wordwrap, the new
-  richtext engine uses paragraphs as basic elements in the data structure.
-  All functions (numLines(), textLine(), etc.) that operated on lines, now
-  operate on paragraphs. Further, getString() has been removed completely.
-  It revealed too much of the internal data structure.
-
-  Applications which made normal and reasonable use of TQMultiLineEdit
-  should still work without problems. Some odd usage will require some
-  porting. In these cases, it may be better to use \l TQTextEdit now.
-
-  <img src=qmlined-m.png> <img src=qmlined-w.png>
-
-  \sa TQTextEdit
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQMultiLineEdit::autoUpdate() const
-    \obsolete
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn virtual void TQMultiLineEdit::setAutoUpdate( bool )
-    \obsolete
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQMultiLineEdit::totalWidth() const
-    \obsolete
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQMultiLineEdit::totalHeight() const
-    \obsolete
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQMultiLineEdit::maxLines() const
-    \obsolete
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQMultiLineEdit::setMaxLines( int )
-    \obsolete
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQMultiLineEdit::deselect()
-    \obsolete
-*/
-
-
-class TQMultiLineEditData
-{
-};
-
-
-/*!
-  Constructs a new, empty, TQMultiLineEdit with parent \a parent called
-  \a name.
-*/
-
-TQMultiLineEdit::TQMultiLineEdit( TQWidget *parent , const char *name )
-    : TQTextEdit( parent, name )
-{
-    d = new TQMultiLineEditData;
-    setTextFormat( TQt::PlainText );
-}
-
-/*! \property TQMultiLineEdit::numLines
-  \brief the number of paragraphs in the editor
-
-  The count includes any empty paragraph at top and bottom, so for an
-  empty editor this method returns 1.
-*/
-
-int TQMultiLineEdit::numLines() const
-{
-    return document()->lastParagraph()->paragId() + 1;
-}
-
-/*! \property TQMultiLineEdit::atEnd
-  \brief whether the cursor is placed at the end of the text
-
-  \sa atBeginning
-*/
-
-bool TQMultiLineEdit::atEnd() const
-{
-    return textCursor()->paragraph() == document()->lastParagraph() && textCursor()->atParagEnd();
-}
-
-
-/*! \property TQMultiLineEdit::atBeginning
-  \brief whether the cursor is placed at the beginning of the text
-
-  \sa atEnd
-*/
-
-bool TQMultiLineEdit::atBeginning() const
-{
-    return textCursor()->paragraph() == document()->firstParagraph() && textCursor()->atParagStart();
-}
-
-/*!  Returns the number of characters at paragraph number \a row. If
-  \a row is out of range, -1 is returned.
-*/
-
-int TQMultiLineEdit::lineLength( int row ) const
-{
-    if ( row < 0 || row > numLines() )
-	return -1;
-    return document()->paragAt( row )->length() - 1;
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-TQMultiLineEdit::~TQMultiLineEdit()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-/*!
-  If there is selected text, sets \a line1, \a col1, \a line2 and \a col2
-  to the start and end of the selected region and returns TRUE. Returns
-  FALSE if there is no selected text.
- */
-bool TQMultiLineEdit::getMarkedRegion( int *line1, int *col1,
-				      int *line2, int *col2 ) const
-{
-    int p1,c1, p2, c2;
-    getSelection( &p1, &c1, &p2, &c2 );
-    if ( p1 == -1 && c1 == -1 && p2 == -1 && c2 == -1 )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( line1 )
-	*line1 = p1;
-    if ( col1 )
-	*col1 = c1;
-    if ( line2 )
-	*line2 = p2;
-    if ( col2 )
-	*col2 = c2;
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  Returns TRUE if there is selected text.
-*/
-
-bool TQMultiLineEdit::hasMarkedText() const
-{
-    return hasSelectedText();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  Returns a copy of the selected text.
-*/
-
-TQString TQMultiLineEdit::markedText() const
-{
-    return selectedText();
-}
-
-/*!
-  Moves the cursor one page down.  If \a mark is TRUE, the text
-  is selected.
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::pageDown( bool mark )
-{
-    moveCursor( MoveDown, mark );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  Moves the cursor one page up.  If \a mark is TRUE, the text
-  is selected.
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::pageUp( bool mark )
-{
-    moveCursor( MovePgUp, mark );
-}
-
-
-/*!  Inserts \a txt at paragraph number \a line. If \a line is less
-  than zero, or larger than the number of paragraphs, the new text is
-  put at the end.  If \a txt contains newline characters, several
-  paragraphs are inserted.
-
-  The cursor position is not changed.
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::insertLine( const TQString &txt, int line )
-{
-    insertParagraph( txt, line );
-}
-
-/*!  Deletes the paragraph at paragraph number \a paragraph. If \a
-  paragraph is less than zero or larger than the number of paragraphs,
-  nothing is deleted.
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::removeLine( int paragraph )
-{
-    removeParagraph( paragraph );
-}
-
-/*!  Inserts \a str at the current cursor position and selects the
-  text if \a mark is TRUE.
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::insertAndMark( const TQString& str, bool mark )
-{
-    insert( str );
-    if ( mark )
-	document()->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Standard, *textCursor() );
-}
-
-/*!  Splits the paragraph at the current cursor position.
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::newLine()
-{
-    insert( "\n" );
-}
-
-
-/*!  Deletes the character on the left side of the text cursor and
-  moves the cursor one position to the left. If a text has been selected
-  by the user (e.g. by clicking and dragging) the cursor is put at the
-  beginning of the selected text and the selected text is removed.  \sa
-  del()
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::backspace()
-{
-    if ( document()->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-	removeSelectedText();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( !textCursor()->paragraph()->prev() &&
-	 textCursor()->atParagStart() )
-	return;
-
-    doKeyboardAction( ActionBackspace );
-}
-
-
-/*!  Moves the text cursor to the left end of the line. If \a mark is
-  TRUE, text is selected toward the first position. If it is FALSE and the
-  cursor is moved, all selected text is unselected.
-
-  \sa end()
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::home( bool mark )
-{
-    moveCursor( MoveLineStart, mark );
-}
-
-/*!  Moves the text cursor to the right end of the line. If \a mark is
-  TRUE, text is selected toward the last position.  If it is FALSE and the
-  cursor is moved, all selected text is unselected.
-
-  \sa home()
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::end( bool mark )
-{
-    moveCursor( MoveLineEnd, mark );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \fn void TQMultiLineEdit::setCursorPosition( int line, int col )
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-/*!  Sets the cursor position to character number \a col in paragraph
-  number \a line.  The parameters are adjusted to lie within the legal
-  range.
-
-  If \a mark is FALSE, the selection is cleared. otherwise it is extended.
-
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::setCursorPosition( int line, int col, bool mark )
-{
-    if ( !mark )
-	selectAll( FALSE );
-    TQTextEdit::setCursorPosition( line, col );
-    if ( mark )
-	document()->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Standard, *textCursor() );
-}
-
-/*!  Returns the top center point where the cursor is drawn.
-*/
-
-TQPoint TQMultiLineEdit::cursorPoint() const
-{
-    return TQPoint( textCursor()->x(), textCursor()->y() + textCursor()->paragraph()->rect().y() );
-}
-
-/*!  \property TQMultiLineEdit::tqalignment
-  \brief The editor's paragraph tqalignment
-
-  Sets the tqalignment to flag, which must be \c AlignLeft, \c
-  AlignHCenter or \c AlignRight.
-
-  If flag is an illegal flag nothing happens.
-
-  \sa TQt::AlignmentFlags
-*/
-void TQMultiLineEdit::tqsetAlignment( int flag )
-{
-    if ( flag == Qt::AlignCenter )
-	flag = Qt::AlignHCenter;
-    if ( flag != Qt::AlignLeft && flag != Qt::AlignRight && flag != Qt::AlignHCenter )
-	return;
-    TQTextParagraph *p = document()->firstParagraph();
-    while ( p ) {
-	p->tqsetAlignment( flag );
-	p = p->next();
-    }
-}
-
-int TQMultiLineEdit::tqalignment() const
-{
-    return document()->firstParagraph()->tqalignment();
-}
-
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::setEdited( bool e )
-{
-    setModified( e );
-}
-
-/*!  \property TQMultiLineEdit::edited
-  \brief whether the document has been edited by the user
-
-  This is the same as TQTextEdit's "modifed" property.
-
-  \sa TQTextEdit::modified
-*/
-bool TQMultiLineEdit::edited() const
-{
-    return isModified();
-}
-
-/*!  Moves the cursor one word to the right.  If \a mark is TRUE, the text
-  is selected.
-
-  \sa cursorWordBackward()
-*/
-void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorWordForward( bool mark )
-{
-    moveCursor( MoveWordForward, mark );
-}
-
-/*!  Moves the cursor one word to the left.  If \a mark is TRUE, the
-  text is selected.
-
-  \sa cursorWordForward()
-*/
-void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorWordBackward( bool mark )
-{
-    moveCursor( MoveWordBackward, mark );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \fn TQMultiLineEdit::insertAt( const TQString &s, int line, int col )
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-/*!  Inserts string \a s at paragraph number \a line, after character
-  number \a col in the paragraph.  If \a s contains newline
-  characters, new lines are inserted.
-  If \a mark is TRUE the inserted string will be selected.
-
-  The cursor position is adjusted.
- */
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::insertAt( const TQString &s, int line, int col, bool mark )
-{
-    TQTextEdit::insertAt( s, line, col );
-    if ( mark )
-	setSelection( line, col, line, col + s.length() );
-}
-
-// ### reggie - is this documentation correct?
-
-/*!  Deletes text from the current cursor position to the end of the
-  line. (Note that this function still operates on lines, not paragraphs.)
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::killLine()
-{
-    doKeyboardAction( ActionKill );
-}
-
-/*!  Moves the cursor one character to the left. If \a mark is TRUE,
-  the text is selected.
-  The \a wrap parameter is currently ignored.
-
-  \sa cursorRight() cursorUp() cursorDown()
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorLeft( bool mark, bool )
-{
-    moveCursor( MoveBackward, mark );
-}
-
-/*!  Moves the cursor one character to the right.  If \a mark is TRUE,
-  the text is selected.
-  The \a wrap parameter is currently ignored.
-
-  \sa cursorLeft() cursorUp() cursorDown()
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorRight( bool mark, bool )
-{
-    moveCursor( MoveForward, mark );
-}
-
-/*!  Moves the cursor up one line.  If \a mark is TRUE, the text is
-  selected.
-
-  \sa cursorDown() cursorLeft() cursorRight()
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorUp( bool mark )
-{
-    moveCursor( MoveUp, mark );
-}
-
-/*!
-  Moves the cursor one line down.  If \a mark is TRUE, the text
-  is selected.
-  \sa cursorUp() cursorLeft() cursorRight()
-*/
-
-void TQMultiLineEdit::cursorDown( bool mark )
-{
-    moveCursor( MoveDown, mark );
-}
-
-
-/*!  Returns the text at line number \a line (possibly the empty
-  string), or a \link TQString::operator!() null string\endlink if \a
-  line is invalid.
-*/
-
-TQString TQMultiLineEdit::textLine( int line ) const
-{
-    if ( line < 0 || line >= numLines() )
-	return TQString::null;
-    TQString str = document()->paragAt( line )->string()->toString();
-    str.truncate( str.length() - 1 );
-    return str;
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.h
deleted file mode 100644
index dc7a669..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqmultilineedit.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,144 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQMultiLineEdit widget class
-**
-** Created : 961005
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQMULTILINEEDIT_H
-#define TQMULTILINEEDIT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqtextedit.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MULTILINEEDIT
-
-class TQMultiLineEditCommand;
-class TQValidator;
-class TQMultiLineEditData;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQMultiLineEdit : public TQTextEdit
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( int numLines READ numLines )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool atBeginning READ atBeginning )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool atEnd READ atEnd )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Qt::Alignment tqalignment READ alignmentProp WRITE tqsetAlignmentProp )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool edited READ edited WRITE setEdited DESIGNABLE false )
-
-public:
-    TQMultiLineEdit( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQMultiLineEdit();
-
-    TQString textLine( int line ) const;
-    int numLines() const;
-
-    virtual void insertLine( const TQString &s, int line = -1 );
-    virtual void insertAt( const TQString &s, int line, int col ) {
-	insertAt( s, line, col, FALSE );
-    }
-    virtual void insertAt( const TQString &s, int line, int col, bool mark );
-    virtual void removeLine( int line );
-    virtual void setCursorPosition( int line, int col ) {
-	setCursorPosition( line, col, FALSE );
-    }
-    virtual void setCursorPosition( int line, int col, bool mark );
-    bool atBeginning() const;
-    bool atEnd() const;
-
-    void tqsetAlignment( int flags );
-    int tqalignment() const;
-    inline Qt::Alignment alignmentProp() const { return (Qt::Alignment)tqalignment(); }
-    inline virtual void tqsetAlignmentProp( Qt::Alignment al ) { tqsetAlignment((int)al); }
-
-    void setEdited( bool );
-    bool edited() const;
-
-    bool hasMarkedText() const;
-    TQString markedText() const;
-
-    void cursorWordForward( bool mark );
-    void cursorWordBackward( bool mark );
-
-    // noops
-    bool autoUpdate() const { return TRUE; }
-    virtual void setAutoUpdate( bool ) {}
-
-    int totalWidth() const { return contentsWidth(); }
-    int totalHeight() const { return contentsHeight(); }
-
-    int maxLines() const { return TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX; }
-    void setMaxLines( int ) {}
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void deselect() { selectAll( FALSE ); }
-
-protected:
-    TQPoint	cursorPoint() const;
-
-protected:
-    virtual void insertAndMark( const TQString&, bool mark );
-    virtual void newLine();
-    virtual void killLine();
-    virtual void pageUp( bool mark=FALSE );
-    virtual void pageDown( bool mark=FALSE );
-    virtual void cursorLeft( bool mark=FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE );
-    virtual void cursorRight( bool mark=FALSE, bool wrap = TRUE );
-    virtual void cursorUp( bool mark=FALSE );
-    virtual void cursorDown( bool mark=FALSE );
-    virtual void backspace();
-    virtual void home( bool mark=FALSE );
-    virtual void end( bool mark=FALSE );
-
-    bool getMarkedRegion( int *line1, int *col1,
-			  int *line2, int *col2 ) const;
-    int lineLength( int row ) const;
-
-private:
-    TQMultiLineEditData *d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQMultiLineEdit( const TQMultiLineEdit & );
-    TQMultiLineEdit &operator=( const TQMultiLineEdit & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_MULTILINEEDIT
-
-#endif // TQMULTILINED_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index b528c8b..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2922 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQPopupMenu class
-**
-** Created : 941128
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-#include "tqmenubar.h"
-#include "tqaccel.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqpixmapcache.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqwhatsthis.h"
-#include "tqobjectlist.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-#include "tqeffects_p.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqdatetime.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-//#define ANIMATED_POPUP
-//#define BLEND_POPUP
-
-// Motif style parameters
-
-static const int motifArrowHMargin	= 6;	// arrow horizontal margin
-static const int motifArrowVMargin	= 2;	// arrow vertical margin
-
-bool tqwidget_is_popup_menu(QWidget* w) {
-	return tqt_dynamic_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(w);
-}
-
-QWidget* tqwidget_parent_popup_menu(QWidget* w) {
-	TQPopupMenu* tqpm = dynamic_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(w);
-	if (tqpm) {
-		TQMenuData *top = tqpm;		// find top level
-		if ( top->parentMenu ) {
-			if (top->parentMenu->isPopupMenu == FALSE) return 0;
-			return (dynamic_cast<TQPopupMenu*>(top->parentMenu));
-		}
-		else return 0;
-	}
-	else return 0;
-}
-
-/*
-
-+-----------------------------
-|      PopupFrame
-|   +-------------------------
-|   |	   ItemFrame
-|   |	+---------------------
-|   |	|
-|   |	|			   \
-|   |	|   ^	T E X T	  ^	    | ItemVMargin
-|   |	|   |		  |	   /
-|   |	      ItemHMargin
-|
-
-*/
-
-#if 0
-# define DEBUG_SLOPPY_SUBMENU
-#endif
-
-// used for internal communication
-static TQPopupMenu * syncMenu = 0;
-static int syncMenuId = 0;
-
-// Used to detect motion prior to mouse-release
-static int motion;
-
-// used to provide ONE single-shot timer
-static TQTimer * singleSingleShot = 0;
-
-static bool supressAboutToShow = FALSE;
-
-static void cleanup()
-{
-    delete singleSingleShot;
-    singleSingleShot = 0;
-}
-
-static void popupSubMenuLater( int msec, TQPopupMenu * receiver ) {
-    if ( !singleSingleShot ) {
-	singleSingleShot = new TQTimer( tqApp, "popup submenu timer" );
-	qAddPostRoutine( cleanup );
-    }
-
-    singleSingleShot->disconnect( TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()) );
-    TQObject::connect( singleSingleShot, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-		      receiver, TQT_SLOT(subMenuTimer()) );
-    singleSingleShot->start( msec, TRUE );
-}
-
-static bool preventAnimation = FALSE;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-extern void qWhatsThisBDH();
-static TQMenuItem* whatsThisItem = 0;
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \class TQPopupMenu tqpopupmenu.h
-    \brief The TQPopupMenu class provides a popup menu widget.
-
-    \ingroup application
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    A popup menu widget is a selection menu. It can be either a
-    pull-down menu in a menu bar or a standalone context (popup) menu.
-    Pull-down menus are shown by the menu bar when the user clicks on
-    the respective item or presses the specified shortcut key. Use
-    TQMenuBar::insertItem() to insert a popup menu into a menu bar.
-    Show a context menu either asynchronously with popup() or
-    synchronously with exec().
-
-    Technically, a popup menu consists of a list of menu items. You
-    add items with insertItem(). An item is either a string, a pixmap
-    or a custom item that provides its own drawing function (see
-    TQCustomMenuItem). In addition, items can have an optional icon
-    drawn on the very left side and an accelerator key such as
-    "Ctrl+X".
-
-    There are three kinds of menu items: separators, menu items that
-    perform an action and menu items that show a submenu. Separators
-    are inserted with insertSeparator(). For submenus, you pass a
-    pointer to a TQPopupMenu in your call to insertItem(). All other
-    items are considered action items.
-
-    When inserting action items you usually specify a receiver and a
-    slot. The receiver will be notifed whenever the item is selected.
-    In addition, TQPopupMenu provides two Q_SIGNALS, activated() and
-    highlighted(), which signal the identifier of the respective menu
-    item. It is sometimes practical to connect several items to one
-    slot. To distinguish between them, specify a slot that takes an
-    integer argument and use setItemParameter() to associate a unique
-    value with each item.
-
-    You clear a popup menu with clear() and remove single items with
-    removeItem() or removeItemAt().
-
-    A popup menu can display check marks for certain items when
-    enabled with setCheckable(TRUE). You check or uncheck items with
-    setItemChecked().
-
-    Items are either enabled or disabled. You toggle their state with
-    setItemEnabled(). Just before a popup menu becomes visible, it
-    emits the aboutToShow() signal. You can use this signal to set the
-    correct enabled/disabled states of all menu items before the user
-    sees it. The corresponding aboutToHide() signal is emitted when
-    the menu hides again.
-
-    You can provide What's This? help for single menu items with
-    setWhatsThis(). See TQWhatsThis for general information about this
-    kind of lightweight online help.
-
-    For ultimate flexibility, you can also add entire widgets as items
-    into a popup menu (for example, a color selector).
-
-    A TQPopupMenu can also provide a tear-off menu. A tear-off menu is
-    a top-level window that contains a copy of the menu. This makes it
-    possible for the user to "tear off" frequently used menus and
-    position them in a convenient place on the screen. If you want
-    that functionality for a certain menu, insert a tear-off handle
-    with insertTearOffHandle(). When using tear-off menus, bear in
-    mind that the concept isn't typically used on Microsoft Windows so
-    users may not be familiar with it. Consider using a TQToolBar
-    instead. Tear-off menus cannot contain custom widgets; if the
-    original menu contains a custom widget item, this item is omitted.
-
-    \link menu-example.html menu/menu.cpp\endlink is an example of
-    TQMenuBar and TQPopupMenu use.
-
-    \important insertItem removeItem removeItemAt clear text pixmap iconSet insertSeparator changeItem whatsThis setWhatsThis accel setAccel setItemEnabled isItemEnabled setItemVisible isItemVisible setItemChecked isItemChecked connectItem disconnectItem setItemParameter itemParameter
-
-    <img src=qpopmenu-m.png> <img src=qpopmenu-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQMenuBar
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Menu, Drop-Down and
-    Pop-Up\endlink
-*/
-
-static const int gtkArrowHMargin	= 0;	// arrow horizontal margin
-static const int gtkArrowVMargin	= 0;	// arrow vertical margin
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQPopupMenu::aboutToShow()
-
-    This signal is emitted just before the popup menu is displayed.
-    You can connect it to any slot that sets up the menu contents
-    (e.g. to ensure that the right items are enabled).
-
-    \sa aboutToHide(), setItemEnabled(), setItemChecked(), insertItem(), removeItem()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQPopupMenu::aboutToHide()
-
-    This signal is emitted just before the popup menu is hidden after
-    it has been displayed.
-
-    \warning Do not open a widget in a slot connected to this signal.
-
-    \sa aboutToShow(), setItemEnabled(), setItemChecked(), insertItem(), removeItem()
-*/
-
-
-
-/*****************************************************************************
-  TQPopupMenu member functions
- *****************************************************************************/
-
-class TQMenuDataData {
-    // attention: also defined in qmenudata.cpp
-public:
-    TQMenuDataData();
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQWidget> aWidget;
-    int aInt;
-};
-
-class TQPopupMenuPrivate {
-public:
-    struct Scroll {
-	enum { ScrollNone=0, ScrollUp=0x01, ScrollDown=0x02 };
-	uint scrollable : 2;
-	uint direction : 1;
-	int topScrollableIndex, scrollableSize;
-	TQTime lastScroll;
-	TQTimer *scrolltimer;
-    } scroll;
-    TQSize calcSize;
-    TQRegion mouseMoveBuffer;
-    uint hasmouse : 1;
-    TQPoint ignoremousepos;
-};
-
-static TQPopupMenu* active_popup_menu = 0;
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a popup menu called \a name with parent \a parent.
-
-    Although a popup menu is always a top-level widget, if a parent is
-    passed the popup menu will be deleted when that parent is
-    destroyed (as with any other TQObject).
-*/
-
-TQPopupMenu::TQPopupMenu( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, (WFlags)WType_Popup  | TQt::WNoAutoErase )
-{
-    d = new TQPopupMenuPrivate;
-    d->scroll.scrollableSize = d->scroll.topScrollableIndex = 0;
-    d->scroll.scrollable = TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollNone;
-    d->scroll.scrolltimer = 0;
-    d->hasmouse = 0;
-    isPopupMenu	  = TRUE;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    autoaccel	  = 0;
-    accelDisabled = FALSE;
-#endif
-    popupActive	  = -1;
-    snapToMouse	  = TRUE;
-    tab = 0;
-    checkable = 0;
-    tornOff = 0;
-    pendingDelayedContentsChanges = 0;
-    pendingDelayedStateChanges = 0;
-    maxPMWidth = 0;
-
-    tab = 0;
-    ncols = 1;
-    setFrameStyle( TQFrame::PopupPanel | TQFrame::Raised );
-    setMouseTracking(tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_MouseTracking, this));
-    tqstyle().polishPopupMenu( this );
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteButton );
-    connectModalRecursionSafety = 0;
-
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::StrongFocus );
-#ifdef TQ_WS_X11
-    x11SetWindowType( X11WindowTypePopup );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the popup menu.
-*/
-
-TQPopupMenu::~TQPopupMenu()
-{
-    if ( syncMenu == this && tqApp ) {
-	tqApp->exit_loop();
-	syncMenu = 0;
-    }
-
-    if(d->scroll.scrolltimer)
-	delete d->scroll.scrolltimer;
-
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-        parentMenu = 0;
-        hidePopups();
-    }
-
-    delete (TQWidget*) TQMenuData::d->aWidget;  // tear-off menu
-
-    preventAnimation = FALSE;
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Updates the item with identity \a id.
-*/
-void TQPopupMenu::updateItem( int id )		// update popup menu item
-{
-    updateRow( indexOf(id) );
-}
-
-
-void TQPopupMenu::setCheckable( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( isCheckable() != enable ) {
-	checkable = enable;
-	badSize = TRUE;
-	if ( TQMenuData::d->aWidget )
-	    ( (TQPopupMenu*)(TQWidget*)TQMenuData::d->aWidget)->setCheckable( enable );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQPopupMenu::checkable
-    \brief whether the display of check marks on menu items is enabled
-
-    When TRUE, the display of check marks on menu items is enabled.
-    Checking is always enabled when in Windows-style.
-
-    \sa TQMenuData::setItemChecked()
-*/
-
-bool TQPopupMenu::isCheckable() const
-{
-    return checkable;
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::menuContentsChanged()
-{
-    // here the part that can't be delayed
-    TQMenuData::menuContentsChanged();
-    badSize = TRUE;				// might change the size
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    mac_dirty_popup = 1;
-#endif
-    if( pendingDelayedContentsChanges )
-        return;
-    pendingDelayedContentsChanges = 1;
-    if( !pendingDelayedStateChanges ) // if the timer hasn't been started yet
-	TQTimer::singleShot( 0, this, TQT_SLOT(performDelayedChanges()));
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::performDelayedContentsChanged()
-{
-    pendingDelayedContentsChanges = 0;
-    // here the part the can be delayed
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    // if performDelayedStateChanged() will be called too,
-    // it will call updateAccel() too, no need to do it twice
-    if( !pendingDelayedStateChanges )
-        updateAccel( 0 );
-#endif
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	if ( tornOff )
-	    return;
-	updateSize(TRUE);
-	update();
-    }
-    TQPopupMenu* p = (TQPopupMenu*)(TQWidget*)TQMenuData::d->aWidget;
-    if ( p && p->isVisible() ) {
-	p->updateSize(TRUE);
-	p->update();
-    }
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    mac_dirty_popup = 1;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-void TQPopupMenu::menuStateChanged()
-{
-    // here the part that can't be delayed
-    if( pendingDelayedStateChanges )
-	return;
-    pendingDelayedStateChanges = 1;
-    if( !pendingDelayedContentsChanges ) // if the timer hasn't been started yet
-	TQTimer::singleShot( 0, this, TQT_SLOT(performDelayedChanges()));
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::performDelayedStateChanged()
-{
-    pendingDelayedStateChanges = 0;
-    // here the part that can be delayed
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    updateAccel( 0 ); // ### when we have a good solution for the accel vs. focus widget problem, remove that. That is only a workaround
-    // if you remove this, see performDelayedContentsChanged()
-#endif
-    update();
-    if ( TQMenuData::d->aWidget )
-	TQMenuData::d->aWidget->update();
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::performDelayedChanges()
-{
-    if( pendingDelayedContentsChanges )
-	performDelayedContentsChanged();
-    if( pendingDelayedStateChanges )
-	performDelayedStateChanged();
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::menuInsPopup( TQPopupMenu *popup )
-{
-    connect( popup, TQT_SIGNAL(activatedRedirect(int)),
-	     TQT_SLOT(subActivated(int)) );
-    connect( popup, TQT_SIGNAL(highlightedRedirect(int)),
-	     TQT_SLOT(subHighlighted(int)) );
-    connect( popup, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed(TQObject*)),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(popupDestroyed(TQObject*)) );
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::menuDelPopup( TQPopupMenu *popup )
-{
-    popup->disconnect( TQT_SIGNAL(activatedRedirect(int)) );
-    popup->disconnect( TQT_SIGNAL(highlightedRedirect(int)) );
-    disconnect( popup, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed(TQObject*)),
-		this, TQT_SLOT(popupDestroyed(TQObject*)) );
-}
-
-
-void TQPopupMenu::frameChanged()
-{
-    menuContentsChanged();
-}
-
-TQRect TQPopupMenu::screenRect( const TQPoint& pos )
-{
-    int screen_num = TQApplication::desktop()->screenNumber( pos );
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MAC
-    return TQApplication::desktop()->availableGeometry( screen_num );
-#else
-    return TQApplication::desktop()->screenGeometry( screen_num );
-#endif
-}
-/*!
-    Displays the popup menu so that the item number \a indexAtPoint
-    will be at the specified \e global position \a pos. To translate a
-    widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use
-    TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
-
-    When positioning a popup with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that
-    you cannot rely on the popup menu's current size(). For
-    performance reasons, the popup adapts its size only when
-    necessary, so in many cases, the size before and after the show is
-    different. Instead, use tqsizeHint(). It calculates the proper size
-    depending on the menu's current contents.
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::popup( const TQPoint &pos, int indexAtPoint )
-{
-    if ( !isPopup() && isVisible() )
-	hide();
-
-    //avoid circularity
-    if ( isVisible() || !isEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    if( macPopupMenu(pos, indexAtPoint ))
-	return;
-#endif
-
-#if (TQT_VERSION-0 >= 0x040000)
-#error "Fix this now"
-    // #### should move to TQWidget - anything might need this functionality,
-    // #### since anything can have WType_Popup window flag.
-    // #### This includes stuff in TQPushButton and some stuff for setting
-    // #### the tqgeometry of TQDialog.
-    // TQPopupMenu
-    // ::exec()
-    // ::popup()
-    // TQPushButton (shouldn't require TQMenuPopup)
-    // ::popupPressed
-    // Some stuff in qwidget.cpp for dialogs... can't remember exactly.
-    // Also the code here indicatets the parameter should be a rect, not a
-    // point.
-#endif
-
-    TQRect screen = screenRect( tqgeometry().center());
-    TQRect screen2 = screenRect( TQApplication::reverseLayout()
-        ? pos+TQPoint(width(),0) : pos );
-    // if the widget is not in the screen given by the position, move it
-    // there, so that updateSize() uses the right size of the screen
-    if( screen != screen2 ) {
-        screen = screen2;
-        move( screen.x(), screen.y());
-    }
-    if(d->scroll.scrollable) {
-	d->scroll.scrollable = TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollNone;
-	d->scroll.topScrollableIndex = d->scroll.scrollableSize = 0;
-	badSize = TRUE;
-    }
-    updateSize();
-
-    TQPoint mouse = TQCursor::pos();
-    snapToMouse = pos == mouse;
-
-    // have to emit here as a menu might be setup in a slot connected
-    // to aboutToShow which will change the size of the menu
-    bool s = supressAboutToShow;
-    supressAboutToShow = TRUE;
-    if ( !s) {
-	emit aboutToShow();
-	updateSize(TRUE);
-    }
-
-    int sw = screen.width();			// screen width
-    int sh = screen.height();			// screen height
-    int sx = screen.x();			// screen pos
-    int sy = screen.y();
-    int x  = pos.x();
-    int y  = pos.y();
-    if ( indexAtPoint >= 0 )			// don't subtract when < 0
-	y -= itemGeometry( indexAtPoint ).y();		// (would subtract 2 pixels!)
-    int w  = width();
-    int h  = height();
-
-    if ( snapToMouse ) {
-	if ( tqApp->reverseLayout() )
-	    x -= w;
-	if ( x+w > sx+sw )
-	    x = mouse.x()-w;
-	if ( y+h > sy+sh )
-	    y = mouse.y()-h;
-	if ( x < sx )
-	    x = mouse.x();
-	if ( y < sy )
-	    y = sy;
-    }
-#ifdef TQ_WS_X11
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    TQMenuData *top = this;		// find top level
-    while ( top->parentMenu )
-	top = top->parentMenu;
-    if( top->isMenuBar )
-        x11SetWindowType( X11WindowTypeDropdown );
-    if( parentMenu && parentMenu->isMenuBar )
-        x11SetWindowTransient( static_cast< TQMenuBar* >( parentMenu )->tqtopLevelWidget());
-#endif
-    if( parentMenu && !parentMenu->isMenuBar )
-        x11SetWindowTransient( static_cast< TQPopupMenu* >( parentMenu ));
-    if( !parentMenu ) {
-        // hackish ... try to find the main window related to this popup
-        TQWidget* parent = parentWidget() ? parentWidget()->tqtopLevelWidget() : NULL;
-        if( parent == NULL )
-            parent = TQApplication::widgetAt( pos );
-        if( parent == NULL )
-            parent = TQT_TQWIDGET(tqApp->activeWindow());
-        if( parent != NULL )
-            x11SetWindowTransient( parent );
-    }
-#endif
-
-    if ( x+w > sx+sw )				// the complete widget must
-	x = sx+sw - w;				//   be visible
-    if ( y+h > sy+sh )
-	y = sy+sh - h;
-    if ( x < sx )
-	x = sx;
-    if ( y < sy )
-	y = sy;
-
-    if(tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_Scrollable, this)) {
-	int off_top = 0, off_bottom = 0;
-	if(y+h > sy+sh)
-	    off_bottom = (y+h) - (sy+sh);
-	if(y < sy)
-	    off_top = sy - y;
-	if(off_bottom || off_top) {
-	    int ch = updateSize().height(); //store the old height, before setting scrollable --Sam
-	    const int vextra = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra, this);
-	    d->scroll.scrollableSize = h - off_top - off_bottom - 2*vextra;
-	    if(off_top) {
-		move( x, y = sy );
-		d->scroll.scrollable = d->scroll.scrollable | TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp;
-	    }
-	    if( off_bottom )
-		d->scroll.scrollable = d->scroll.scrollable | TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown;
-	    if( off_top != off_bottom && indexAtPoint >= 0 ) {
-		ch -= (vextra * 2);
-		if(ch > sh) //no bigger than the screen!
-		    ch = sh;
-		if( ch > d->scroll.scrollableSize )
-		    d->scroll.scrollableSize = ch;
-	    }
-
-	    updateSize(TRUE); //now set the size using the scrollable/scrollableSize as above
-            w = width();
-            h = height();
-	    if(indexAtPoint >= 0) {
-		if(off_top) { //scroll to it
-		    register TQMenuItem *mi = NULL;
-		    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-		    for(int tmp_y = 0; tmp_y < off_top && (mi=it.current()); ) {
-			TQSize sz = tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem, this,
-							    TQSize(0, itemHeight( mi )),
-							    TQStyleOption(mi,maxPMWidth,0));
-			tmp_y += sz.height();
-			d->scroll.topScrollableIndex++;
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    move( x, y );
-    motion=0;
-    actItem = -1;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_EFFECTS
-    int hGuess = tqApp->reverseLayout() ? TQEffects::LeftScroll : TQEffects::RightScroll;
-    int vGuess = TQEffects::DownScroll;
-    if ( tqApp->reverseLayout() ) {
-	if ( (snapToMouse && ( x + w/2 > mouse.x() )) ||
-	    ( parentMenu && parentMenu->isPopupMenu &&
-	    ( x + w/2 > ((TQPopupMenu*)parentMenu)->x() ) ) )
-	    hGuess = TQEffects::RightScroll;
-    } else {
-	if ( (snapToMouse && ( x + w/2 < mouse.x() )) ||
-	    ( parentMenu && parentMenu->isPopupMenu &&
-	    ( x + w/2 < ((TQPopupMenu*)parentMenu)->x() ) ) )
-	    hGuess = TQEffects::LeftScroll;
-    }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    if ( (snapToMouse && ( y + h/2 < mouse.y() )) ||
-	( parentMenu && parentMenu->isMenuBar &&
-	( y + h/2 < ((TQMenuBar*)parentMenu)->mapToGlobal( ((TQMenuBar*)parentMenu)->pos() ).y() ) ) )
-	vGuess = TQEffects::UpScroll;
-#endif
-
-    if ( TQApplication::isEffectEnabled( Qt::UI_AnimateMenu ) &&
-	 preventAnimation == FALSE ) {
-	if ( TQApplication::isEffectEnabled( Qt::UI_FadeMenu ) )
-	    qFadeEffect( this );
-	else if ( parentMenu )
-	    qScrollEffect( this, parentMenu->isPopupMenu ? hGuess : vGuess );
-	else
-	    qScrollEffect( this, hGuess | vGuess );
-    } else
-#endif
-    {
-	show();
-    }
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::PopupMenuStart );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQPopupMenu::activated( int id )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a menu item is selected; \a id is the
-    id of the selected item.
-
-    Normally, you connect each menu item to a single slot using
-    TQMenuData::insertItem(), but sometimes you will want to connect
-    several items to a single slot (most often if the user selects
-    from an array). This signal is useful in such cases.
-
-    \sa highlighted(), TQMenuData::insertItem()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQPopupMenu::highlighted( int id )
-
-    This signal is emitted when a menu item is highlighted; \a id is
-    the id of the highlighted item.
-
-    \sa activated(), TQMenuData::insertItem()
-*/
-
-/*! \fn void TQPopupMenu::highlightedRedirect( int id )
-  \internal
-  Used internally to connect submenus to their parents.
-*/
-
-/*! \fn void TQPopupMenu::activatedRedirect( int id )
-  \internal
-  Used internally to connect submenus to their parents.
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::subActivated( int id )
-{
-    emit activatedRedirect( id );
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::subHighlighted( int id )
-{
-    emit highlightedRedirect( id );
-}
-
-static bool fromAccel = FALSE;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-void TQPopupMenu::accelActivated( int id )
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi = findItem( id );
-    if ( mi && mi->isEnabledAndVisible() ) {
-	TQGuardedPtr<TQSignal> signal = mi->signal();
-	fromAccel = TRUE;
-	actSig( mi->id() );
-	fromAccel = FALSE;
-	if ( signal )
-	    signal->activate();
-    }
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::accelDestroyed()		// accel about to be deleted
-{
-    autoaccel = 0;				// don't delete it twice!
-}
-#endif //TQT_NO_ACCEL
-
-void TQPopupMenu::popupDestroyed( TQObject *o )
-{
-    removePopup( (TQPopupMenu*)o );
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::actSig( int id, bool inwhatsthis )
-{
-    if ( !inwhatsthis ) {
-	emit activated( id );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	if ( !fromAccel )
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, indexOf(id)+1, TQAccessible::MenuCommand );
-#endif
-    } else {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-	TQRect r( itemGeometry( indexOf( id ) ) );
-	TQPoint p( r.center().x(), r.bottom() );
-	TQString whatsThis = findItem( id )->whatsThis();
-	if ( whatsThis.isNull() )
-	    whatsThis = TQWhatsThis::textFor( this, p );
-	TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode( whatsThis, mapToGlobal( p ), this );
-#endif
-    }
-
-    emit activatedRedirect( id );
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::hilitSig( int id )
-{
-    emit highlighted( id );
-    emit highlightedRedirect( id );
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, indexOf(id)+1, TQAccessible::Focus );
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, indexOf(id)+1, TQAccessible::Selection );
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::setFirstItemActive()
-{
-    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-    register TQMenuItem *mi;
-    int ai = 0;
-    if(d->scroll.scrollable)
-	ai = d->scroll.topScrollableIndex;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( !mi->isSeparator() && mi->id() != TQMenuData::d->aInt &&
-	     ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_AllowActiveAndDisabled, this ) || mi->isEnabledAndVisible() )) {
-	    setActiveItem( ai );
-	    return;
-	}
-	ai++;
-    }
-    actItem = -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Hides all popup menus (in this menu tree) that are currently open.
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::hideAllPopups()
-{
-    register TQMenuData *top = this;		// find top level popup
-    if ( !preventAnimation )
-	TQTimer::singleShot( 10, this, TQT_SLOT(allowAnimation()) );
-    preventAnimation = TRUE;
-
-    if ( !isPopup() )
-	return; // nothing to do
-
-    while ( top->parentMenu && top->parentMenu->isPopupMenu
-	    && ((TQPopupMenu*)top->parentMenu)->isPopup() )
-	top = top->parentMenu;
-    ((TQPopupMenu*)top)->hide();			// cascade from top level
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-    if (whatsThisItem) {
-	qWhatsThisBDH();
-	whatsThisItem = 0;
-    }
-#endif
-
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Hides all popup sub-menus.
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::hidePopups()
-{
-    if ( !preventAnimation )
-	TQTimer::singleShot( 10, this, TQT_SLOT(allowAnimation()) );
-    preventAnimation = TRUE;
-
-    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-    register TQMenuItem *mi;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( mi->popup() && mi->popup()->parentMenu == this ) //avoid circularity
-	    mi->popup()->hide();
-    }
-    popupActive = -1;				// no active sub menu
-    if(tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay, this))
-	d->mouseMoveBuffer = TQRegion();
-
-    TQRect mfrect = itemGeometry( actItem );
-    setMicroFocusHint( mfrect.x(), mfrect.y(), mfrect.width(), mfrect.height(), FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Sends the event to the menu bar.
-*/
-
-bool TQPopupMenu::tryMenuBar( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    register TQMenuData *top = this;		// find top level
-    while ( top->parentMenu )
-	top = top->parentMenu;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    return top->isMenuBar ?
-	((TQMenuBar *)top)->tryMouseEvent( this, e ) :
-			      ((TQPopupMenu*)top)->tryMouseEvent(this, e );
-#else
-    return ((TQPopupMenu*)top)->tryMouseEvent(this, e );
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-bool TQPopupMenu::tryMouseEvent( TQPopupMenu *p, TQMouseEvent * e)
-{
-    if ( p == this )
-	return FALSE;
-    TQPoint pos = mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() );
-    if ( !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains( pos ) )		// outside
-	return FALSE;
-    TQMouseEvent ee( e->type(), pos, e->globalPos(), e->button(), e->state() );
-    event( &ee );
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Tells the menu bar to go back to idle state.
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::byeMenuBar()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    register TQMenuData *top = this;		// find top level
-    while ( top->parentMenu )
-	top = top->parentMenu;
-#endif
-    hideAllPopups();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    if ( top->isMenuBar )
-	((TQMenuBar *)top)->goodbye();
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Return the item at \a pos, or -1 if there is no item there or if
-  it is a separator item.
-*/
-
-int TQPopupMenu::itemAtPos( const TQPoint &pos, bool ignoreSeparator ) const
-{
-    if ( !contentsRect().contains(pos) )
-	return -1;
-
-    int row = 0;
-    int x = contentsRect().x();
-    int y = contentsRect().y();
-    TQMenuItem *mi;
-    TQMenuItemListIt it( *mitems );
-    if(d->scroll.scrollable) {
-	if(d->scroll.topScrollableIndex) {
-	    for( ; (mi = it.current()) && row < d->scroll.topScrollableIndex; row++)
-		++it;
-	    if(!mi) {
-		row = 0;
-		it.toFirst();
-	    }
-	    y += tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-	}
-    }
-    int itemw = contentsRect().width() / ncols;
-    TQSize sz;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown &&
-	   y >= contentsRect().height() - tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this))
-	    return -1;
-	++it;
-	if ( !mi->isVisible() ) {
-	    ++row;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	int itemh = itemHeight( mi );
-
-	sz = tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem, this,
-				      TQSize(0, itemh),
-				      TQStyleOption(mi,maxPMWidth));
-	sz = sz.expandedTo(TQSize(itemw, sz.height()));
-	itemw = sz.width();
-	itemh = sz.height();
-
-	if ( ncols > 1 && y + itemh > contentsRect().bottom() ) {
-	    y = contentsRect().y();
-	    x +=itemw;
-	}
-	if ( TQRect( x, y, itemw, itemh ).contains( pos ) )
-	    break;
-	y += itemh;
-	++row;
-    }
-
-    if ( mi && ( !ignoreSeparator || !mi->isSeparator() ) )
-	return row;
-    return -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Returns the tqgeometry of item number \a index.
-*/
-
-TQRect TQPopupMenu::itemGeometry( int index )
-{
-    TQMenuItem *mi;
-    TQSize sz;
-    int row = 0, scrollh = 0;
-    int x = contentsRect().x();
-    int y = contentsRect().y();
-    TQMenuItemListIt it( *mitems );
-    if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp) {
-	scrollh = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-	y += scrollh;
-	if(d->scroll.topScrollableIndex) {
-	    for( ; (mi = it.current()) && row < d->scroll.topScrollableIndex; row++)
-		++it;
-	    if(!mi) {
-		row = 0;
-		it.toFirst();
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    int itemw = contentsRect().width() / ncols;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown &&
-	   y >= contentsRect().height() - scrollh)
-	    break;
-	++it;
-	if ( !mi->isVisible() ) {
-	    ++row;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	int itemh = itemHeight( mi );
-
-	sz = tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem, this,
-				      TQSize(0, itemh),
-				      TQStyleOption(mi,maxPMWidth));
-	sz = sz.expandedTo(TQSize(itemw, sz.height()));
-	itemw = sz.width();
-	itemh = sz.height();
-	if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown &&
-	   (y + itemh > contentsRect().height() - scrollh))
-	    itemh -= (y + itemh) - (contentsRect().height() - scrollh);
-	if ( ncols > 1 && y + itemh > contentsRect().bottom() ) {
-	    y = contentsRect().y();
-	    x +=itemw;
-	}
-	if ( row == index )
-	    return TQRect( x,y,itemw,itemh );
-	y += itemh;
-	++row;
-    }
-
-    return TQRect(0,0,0,0);
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Calculates and sets the size of the popup menu, based on the size
-  of the items.
-*/
-
-TQSize TQPopupMenu::updateSize(bool force_update, bool do_resize)
-{
-    polish();
-    if ( count() == 0 ) {
-	TQSize ret = TQSize( 50, 8 );
-	if(do_resize)
-	    setFixedSize( ret );
-	badSize = TRUE;
-	return ret;
-    }
-
-    int scrheight = 0;
-    if(d->scroll.scrollableSize) {
-	if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp)
-	    scrheight += tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-	if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown)
-	    scrheight += tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-    }
-
-    if(badSize || force_update) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-	updateAccel( 0 );
-#endif
-	int height = 0;
-	int max_width = 0, max_height = 0;
-	TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-	register TQMenuItem *mi;
-	maxPMWidth = 0;
-	int maxWidgetWidth = 0;
-	tab = 0;
-
-	for ( TQMenuItemListIt it( *mitems ); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	    mi = it.current();
-	    TQWidget *miw = mi->widget();
-	    if (miw) {
-		if ( miw->parentWidget() != this )
-		    miw->reparent( this, TQPoint(0,0), TRUE );
-		// widget items musn't propgate mouse events
-		((TQPopupMenu*)miw)->setWFlags(TQt::WNoMousePropagation);
-	    }
-	    if ( mi->custom() )
-		mi->custom()->setFont( font() );
-	    if ( mi->iconSet() != 0)
-		maxPMWidth = TQMAX( maxPMWidth,
-				   mi->iconSet()->pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, TQIconSet::Normal ).width() + 4 );
-	}
-
-	int dh = screenRect( tqgeometry().center()).height();
-	ncols = 1;
-
-	for ( TQMenuItemListIt it2( *mitems ); it2.current(); ++it2 ) {
-	    mi = it2.current();
-	    if ( !mi->isVisible() )
-		continue;
-	    int w = 0;
-	    int itemHeight = TQPopupMenu::itemHeight( mi );
-
-	    if ( mi->widget() ) {
-		TQSize s( mi->widget()->tqsizeHint() );
-		s = s.expandedTo( mi->widget()->tqminimumSize() );
-		mi->widget()->resize( s );
-		if ( s.width()  > maxWidgetWidth )
-		    maxWidgetWidth = s.width();
-		itemHeight = s.height();
-	    } else {
-		if( ! mi->isSeparator() ) {
-		    if ( mi->custom() ) {
-			if ( mi->custom()->fullSpan() ) {
-			    maxWidgetWidth = TQMAX( maxWidgetWidth,
-						   mi->custom()->tqsizeHint().width() );
-			} else {
-			    TQSize s ( mi->custom()->tqsizeHint() );
-			    w += s.width();
-			}
-		    }
-
-		    w += maxPMWidth;
-
-		    if (! mi->text().isNull()) {
-			TQString s = mi->text();
-			int t;
-			if ( (t = s.find('\t')) >= 0 ) { // string contains tab
-			    w += fm.width( s, t );
-			    w -= s.contains('&') * fm.width('&');
-			    w += s.contains("&&") * fm.width('&');
-			    int tw = fm.width( s.mid(t + 1) );
-			    if ( tw > tab)
-				tab = tw;
-			} else {
-			    w += fm.width( s );
-			    w -= s.contains('&') * fm.width('&');
-			    w += s.contains("&&") * fm.width('&');
-			}
-		    } else if (mi->pixmap())
-			w += mi->pixmap()->width();
-		} else {
-		    if ( mi->custom() ) {
-			TQSize s ( mi->custom()->tqsizeHint() );
-			w += s.width();
-		    } else {
-			w = itemHeight = 2;
-		    }
-		}
-
-		TQSize sz = tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem, this,
-						    TQSize(w, itemHeight),
-						    TQStyleOption(mi,maxPMWidth));
-
-		w = sz.width();
-		itemHeight = sz.height();
-
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL)
-		if ( mi->text().isNull() && !mi->pixmap() && !mi->iconSet() &&
-		     !mi->isSeparator() && !mi->widget() && !mi->custom() )
-		    qWarning( "TQPopupMenu: (%s) Popup has invalid menu item",
-			      name( "unnamed" ) );
-#endif
-	    }
-	    height += itemHeight;
-	    if(tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_Scrollable, this)) {
-		if(scrheight && height >= d->scroll.scrollableSize - scrheight) {
-                    height = d->scroll.scrollableSize - scrheight;
-		    break;
-                }
-	    } else if( height + 2*frameWidth() >= dh ) {
-		ncols++;
-		max_height = TQMAX(max_height, height - itemHeight);
-		height = itemHeight;
-	    }
-	    if ( w > max_width )
-		max_width = w;
-	}
-	if( ncols == 1 && !max_height )
-	    max_height = height;
-
-	if(tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_Scrollable, this)) {
-	    height += scrheight;
-	    setMouseTracking(TRUE);
-	}
-
-	if ( tab )
-	    tab -= fontMetrics().minRightBearing();
-	else
-	    max_width -= fontMetrics().minRightBearing();
-
-	if ( max_width + tab < maxWidgetWidth )
-	    max_width = maxWidgetWidth - tab;
-
-	const int fw = frameWidth();
-	int extra_width = (fw+tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameHorizontalExtra, this)) * 2,
-	   extra_height = (fw+tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuFrameVerticalExtra,   this)) * 2;
-	if ( ncols == 1 )
-	    d->calcSize = TQSize( TQMAX( minimumWidth(), max_width + tab + extra_width ),
-			      TQMAX( minimumHeight() , height + extra_height ) );
-	else
-	    d->calcSize = TQSize( TQMAX( minimumWidth(), (ncols*(max_width + tab)) + extra_width ),
-			      TQMAX( minimumHeight(), TQMIN( max_height + extra_height + 1, dh ) ) );
-	badSize = FALSE;
-    }
-
-    {
-	// Position the widget items. It could be done in drawContents
-	// but this way we get less flicker.
-	TQSize sz;
-	int x = contentsRect().x();
-	int y = contentsRect().y();
-	int itemw = contentsRect().width() / ncols;
-	for(TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems); it.current(); ++it) {
-	    TQMenuItem *mi = it.current();
-	    if ( !mi->isVisible() )
-		continue;
-
-	    int itemh = itemHeight( mi );
-
-	    sz = tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem, this,
-					  TQSize(0, itemh), TQStyleOption(mi,maxPMWidth));
-	    sz = sz.expandedTo(TQSize(itemw, sz.height()));
-	    itemw = sz.width();
-	    itemh = sz.height();
-
-	    if ( ncols > 1 && y + itemh > contentsRect().bottom() ) {
-		y = contentsRect().y();
-		x +=itemw;
-	    }
-	    if ( mi->widget() )
-		mi->widget()->setGeometry( x, y, itemw, mi->widget()->height() );
-	    y += itemh;
-	}
-    }
-
-    if( do_resize && size() != d->calcSize ) {
-	setMaximumSize( d->calcSize );
-        d->calcSize = tqmaximumSize(); //let the max size adjust it (virtual)
-	resize( d->calcSize );
-    }
-    return d->calcSize;
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-/*!
-  \internal
-  The \a parent is 0 when it is updated when a menu item has
-  changed a state, or it is something else if called from the menu bar.
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::updateAccel( TQWidget *parent )
-{
-    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-    register TQMenuItem *mi;
-
-    if ( parent ) {
-	delete autoaccel;
-	autoaccel = 0;
-    } else if ( !autoaccel ) {
-	// we have no parent. Rather than ignoring any accelerators we try to find this popup's main window
-	if ( tornOff ) {
-	    parent = this;
-	} else {
-	    TQWidget *w = (TQWidget *) this;
-	    parent = w->parentWidget();
-	    while ( (!w->testWFlags(TQt::WType_TopLevel) || !w->testWFlags(WType_Popup)) && parent ) {
-		w = parent;
-		parent = parent->parentWidget();
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( parent == 0 && autoaccel == 0 )
- 	return;
-
-    if ( autoaccel )				// build it from scratch
-	autoaccel->clear();
-    else {
-	// create an autoaccel in any case, even if we might not use
-	// it immediately. Maybe the user needs it later.
-	autoaccel = new TQAccel( parent, this );
-	connect( autoaccel, TQT_SIGNAL(activated(int)),
-		 TQT_SLOT(accelActivated(int)) );
-	connect( autoaccel, TQT_SIGNAL(activatedAmbiguously(int)),
-		 TQT_SLOT(accelActivated(int)) );
-	connect( autoaccel, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()),
-		 TQT_SLOT(accelDestroyed()) );
-	if ( accelDisabled )
-	    autoaccel->setEnabled( FALSE );
-    }
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	TQKeySequence k = mi->key();
-	if ( (int)k ) {
-	    int id = autoaccel->insertItem( k, mi->id() );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-	    autoaccel->setWhatsThis( id, mi->whatsThis() );
-#endif
-	}
-	if ( !mi->text().isNull() || mi->custom() ) {
-	    TQString s = mi->text();
-	    int i = s.find('\t');
-
-	    // Note: Only looking at the first key in the sequence!
-	    if ( (int)k && (int)k != TQt::Key_unknown ) {
-		TQString t = (TQString)mi->key();
-		if ( i >= 0 )
-		    s.replace( i+1, s.length()-i, t );
-		else {
-		    s += '\t';
-		    s += t;
-		}
-	    } else if ( !k ) {
- 		if ( i >= 0 )
- 		    s.truncate( i );
-	    }
-	    if ( s != mi->text() ) {
-		mi->setText( s );
-		badSize = TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( mi->popup() && parent ) {		// call recursively
-	    // reuse
-	    TQPopupMenu* popup = mi->popup();
-	    if (!popup->avoid_circularity) {
-		popup->avoid_circularity = 1;
-		popup->updateAccel( parent );
-		popup->avoid_circularity = 0;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  It would be better to check in the slot.
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::enableAccel( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( autoaccel )
-	autoaccel->setEnabled( enable );
-    accelDisabled = !enable;		// rememeber when updateAccel
-    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-    register TQMenuItem *mi;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {		// do the same for sub popups
-	++it;
-	if ( mi->popup() )			// call recursively
-	    mi->popup()->enableAccel( enable );
-    }
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPopupMenu::setFont( const TQFont &font )
-{
-    TQWidget::setFont( font );
-    badSize = TRUE;
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	updateSize();
-	update();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPopupMenu::show()
-{
-    if ( !isPopup() && isVisible() )
-	hide();
-
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	supressAboutToShow = FALSE;
-	TQWidget::show();
-	return;
-    }
-    if (!supressAboutToShow)
-	emit aboutToShow();
-    else
-	supressAboutToShow = FALSE;
-    performDelayedChanges();
-    updateSize(TRUE);
-
-// NOTE TO ANYONE WONDERING ABOUT TQT_TQWIDGET_FIX_BROKEN_POPUP_MOUSE_FOCUS
-// Menu problems are caused by the fact that the popup menu mouse focus is shifted to the new child widget (which then receives the mouseReleaseEvent) pretty much as soon as show() is called
-// This would seem to be a direct violation of the Qt4 documentation, which states:
-// "Qt automatically grabs the mouse when a mouse button is pressed inside a widget; the widget will continue to receive mouse events until the last mouse button is released."
-// Upon closer inspection, it is not:
-// "mouseReleaseEvent() - called when a mouse button is released. A widget receives mouse release events when it has received the corresponding mouse press event. This means that if the user presses the mouse inside your widget, then drags the mouse to somewhere else, then releases, your widget receives the release event. There is one exception: if a popup menu appears while the mouse button is held down, this popup immediately steals the mouse events."
-// 
-// Now for the real cause:
-// It's an undocumented change in the mouse event handler
-// qapplication_x11.cpp
-// if ((windowType() == Qt::Popup) && rect().contains(pos) && 0)
-// The "&& 0" is the problem
-// It shuts down a very important chunk of code...
-// ...the chunk that was responsible for mapping the mouse events to any popup menu which was actually *under* the cursor!
-
-    TQWidget::show();
-    popupActive = -1;
-    if(tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay, this))
-	d->mouseMoveBuffer = TQRegion();
-    d->ignoremousepos = TQCursor::pos();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::hide()
-{
-    if ( syncMenu == this && tqApp ) {
-	tqApp->exit_loop();
-	syncMenu = 0;
-    }
-
-    if ( !isVisible() ) {
-	TQWidget::hide();
-  	return;
-    }
-    emit aboutToHide();
-
-    actItem = popupActive = -1;
-    if(tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay, this))
-	d->mouseMoveBuffer = TQRegion();
-    mouseBtDn = FALSE;				// mouse button up
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::PopupMenuEnd );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    TQMenuData *top = this;		// find top level
-    while ( top->parentMenu )
-	top = top->parentMenu;
-    if( top->isMenuBar )
-        x11SetWindowType( X11WindowTypePopup ); // reset
-#endif
-    parentMenu = 0;
-    hidePopups();
-    TQWidget::hide();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Calculates the height in pixels of the item in row \a row.
-*/
-int TQPopupMenu::itemHeight( int row ) const
-{
-    return itemHeight( mitems->at( row ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Calculates the height in pixels of the menu item \a mi.
-*/
-int TQPopupMenu::itemHeight( TQMenuItem *mi ) const
-{
-    if  ( mi->widget() )
-	return mi->widget()->height();
-    if ( mi->custom() && mi->custom()->fullSpan() )
-	return mi->custom()->tqsizeHint().height();
-
-    TQFontMetrics fm(fontMetrics());
-    int h = 0;
-    if ( mi->isSeparator() ) // separator height
-        h = 2;
-    else if ( mi->pixmap() ) // pixmap height
-        h = mi->pixmap()->height();
-    else                     // text height
-        h = fm.height();
-
-    if ( !mi->isSeparator() && mi->iconSet() != 0 )
-        h = TQMAX(h, mi->iconSet()->pixmap( TQIconSet::Small,
-					   TQIconSet::Normal ).height());
-    if ( mi->custom() )
-        h = TQMAX(h, mi->custom()->tqsizeHint().height());
-
-    return h;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Draws menu item \a mi in the area \a x, \a y, \a w, \a h, using
-    painter \a p. The item is drawn active if \a act is TRUE or drawn
-    inactive if \a act is FALSE. The rightmost \a tab_ pixels are used
-    for accelerator text.
-
-    \sa TQStyle::tqdrawControl()
-*/
-void TQPopupMenu::drawItem( TQPainter* p, int tab_, TQMenuItem* mi,
-			   bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h)
-{
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled() && mi->isEnabledAndVisible() && (!mi->popup() || mi->popup()->isEnabled()) )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (act)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Active;
-    if (mouseBtDn)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-
-    const TQColorGroup &cg = ((flags&TQStyle::Style_Enabled) ? tqcolorGroup() : tqpalette().disabled() );
-
-    if ( mi->custom() && mi->custom()->fullSpan() ) {
-	TQMenuItem dummy;
-	tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuItem, p, this, TQRect(x, y, w, h), cg,
-			    flags, TQStyleOption(&dummy,maxPMWidth,tab_));
-	mi->custom()->paint( p, cg, act, flags&TQStyle::Style_Enabled, x, y, w, h );
-    } else
-	tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuItem, p, this, TQRect(x, y, w, h), cg,
-			    flags, TQStyleOption(mi,maxPMWidth,tab_));
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Draws all menu items using painter \a p.
-*/
-void TQPopupMenu::drawContents( TQPainter* p )
-{
-    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-    TQMenuItem *mi = 0;
-    int row = 0;
-    int x = contentsRect().x();
-    int y = contentsRect().y();
-    if(d->scroll.scrollable) {
-	if(d->scroll.topScrollableIndex) {
-	    for( ; (mi = it.current()) && row < d->scroll.topScrollableIndex; row++)
-		++it;
-	    if(!mi)
-		it.toFirst();
-	}
-	if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp) {
-	    TQRect rect(x, y, contentsRect().width(),
-		       tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this));
-	    if(!p->hasClipping() || TQT_TQREGION_OBJECT(p->clipRegion()).contains(rect)) {
-		TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Up;
-		if (isEnabled())
-		    flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-		tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuScroller, p, this, rect,
-				    tqcolorGroup(), flags, TQStyleOption(maxPMWidth));
-	    }
-	    y += rect.height();
-	}
-    }
-
-    int itemw = contentsRect().width() / ncols;
-    TQSize sz;
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown &&
-	   y >= contentsRect().height() - tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this))
-	    break;
-	++it;
-	if ( !mi->isVisible() ) {
-	    ++row;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	int itemh = itemHeight( mi );
-	sz = tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem, this,
-				      TQSize(0, itemh),
-				      TQStyleOption(mi,maxPMWidth,0)
-				);
-	sz = sz.expandedTo(TQSize(itemw, sz.height()));
-	itemw = sz.width();
-	itemh = sz.height();
-
-	if ( ncols > 1 && y + itemh > contentsRect().bottom() ) {
-	    if ( y < contentsRect().bottom() ) {
-		TQRect rect(x, y, itemw, contentsRect().bottom() - y);
-		if(!p->hasClipping() || TQT_TQREGION_OBJECT(p->clipRegion()).contains(rect)) {
-		    flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-		    if (isEnabled() && mi->isEnabledAndVisible())
-			flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-		    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuItem, p, this, rect,
-					tqcolorGroup(), flags, TQStyleOption((TQMenuItem*)0,maxPMWidth));
-		}
-	    }
-	    y = contentsRect().y();
-	    x +=itemw;
-	}
-	if (!mi->widget() && (!p->hasClipping() || TQT_TQREGION_OBJECT(p->clipRegion()).contains(TQRect(x, y, itemw, itemh))))
-	    drawItem( p, tab, mi, row == actItem, x, y, itemw, itemh );
-	y += itemh;
-	++row;
-    }
-    if ( y < contentsRect().bottom() ) {
-	TQRect rect(x, y, itemw, contentsRect().bottom() - y);
-	if(!p->hasClipping() || TQT_TQREGION_OBJECT(p->clipRegion()).contains(rect)) {
-	    flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-	    if ( isEnabled() )
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuItem, p, this, rect,
-				tqcolorGroup(), flags, TQStyleOption((TQMenuItem*)0,maxPMWidth));
-	}
-    }
-    if( d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown ) {
-	int sh = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-	TQRect rect(x, contentsRect().height() - sh, contentsRect().width(), sh);
-	if(!p->hasClipping() || TQT_TQREGION_OBJECT(p->clipRegion()).contains(rect)) {
-	    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Down;
-	    if (isEnabled())
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PopupMenuScroller, p, this, rect,
-				tqcolorGroup(), flags, TQStyleOption(maxPMWidth));
-	}
-    }
-#if defined( DEBUG_SLOPPY_SUBMENU )
-    if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SloppySubMenus, this )) {
-	p->setClipRegion( d->mouseMoveBuffer );
-	p->fillRect( d->mouseMoveBuffer.boundingRect(), tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Highlight ) );
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*****************************************************************************
-  Event handlers
- *****************************************************************************/
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *e )
-{
-    TQFrame::paintEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::closeEvent( TQCloseEvent * e) {
-    e->accept();
-    byeMenuBar();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    int sh = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-    if (TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains(e->pos()) &&
-	((d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp && e->pos().y() <= sh) || //up
-	 (d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown &&
-	     e->pos().y() >= contentsRect().height() - sh))) //down
-	return;
-
-    mouseBtDn = TRUE;				// mouse button down
-    int item = itemAtPos( e->pos() );
-    if ( item == -1 ) {
-	if ( !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains(e->pos()) && !tryMenuBar(e) ) {
-	    byeMenuBar();
-	}
-	return;
-    }
-    register TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at(item);
-    if ( item != actItem )			// new item activated
-	setActiveItem( item );
-
-    TQPopupMenu *popup = mi->popup();
-    if ( popup ) {
-	if ( popup->isVisible() ) {		// sub menu already open
-	    int pactItem = popup->actItem;
-	    popup->actItem = -1;
-	    popup->hidePopups();
-	    popup->updateRow( pactItem );
-	} else {				// open sub menu
-	    hidePopups();
-	    popupSubMenuLater( 20, this );
-	}
-    } else {
-	hidePopups();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    // do not hide a standalone context menu on press-release, unless
-    // the user moved the mouse significantly
-    if ( !parentMenu && !mouseBtDn && actItem < 0 && motion < 6 )
-	return;
-
-    mouseBtDn = FALSE;
-
-    // if the user released the mouse outside the menu, pass control
-    // to the menubar or our parent menu
-    int sh = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-
-    if ( !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains( e->pos() ) && tryMenuBar(e) ) {
-	return;
-    }
-    else if((d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp && e->pos().y() <= sh) || //up
-	    (d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown &&
-	     e->pos().y() >= contentsRect().height() - sh)) //down
-	return;
-
-    if ( actItem < 0 ) { // we do not have an active item
-	// if the release is inside without motion (happens with
-	// oversized popup menus on small screens), ignore it
-	if ( TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains( e->pos() ) && motion < 6 )
-	    return;
-	else
-	    byeMenuBar();
-    } else {	// selected menu item!
-	register TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at(actItem);
-	if ( mi ->widget() ) {
-	    TQWidget* widgetAt = TQApplication::widgetAt( e->globalPos(), TRUE );
-	    if ( widgetAt && widgetAt != this ) {
-		TQMouseEvent me( e->type(), widgetAt->mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() ),
-				e->globalPos(), e->button(), e->state() );
-		TQApplication::sendEvent( widgetAt, &me );
-	    }
-	}
-	TQPopupMenu *popup = mi->popup();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-	    bool b = TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode();
-#else
-	    const bool b = FALSE;
-#endif
-	if ( !mi->isEnabledAndVisible() ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-	    if ( b ) {
-		actItem = -1;
-		updateItem( mi->id() );
-		byeMenuBar();
-		actSig( mi->id(), b);
-	    }
-#endif
-	} else 	if ( popup ) {
-	    popup->setFirstItemActive();
-	} else {				// normal menu item
-	    byeMenuBar();			// deactivate menu bar
-	    if ( mi->isEnabledAndVisible() ) {
-		actItem = -1;
-		updateItem( mi->id() );
-		active_popup_menu = this;
-		TQGuardedPtr<TQSignal> signal = mi->signal();
-		actSig( mi->id(), b );
-		if ( signal && !b )
-		    signal->activate();
-		active_popup_menu = 0;
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if( e->globalPos() == d->ignoremousepos ) {
-        return;
-    }
-    d->ignoremousepos = TQPoint();
-
-    motion++;
-
-    if ( parentMenu && parentMenu->isPopupMenu ) {
-	TQPopupMenu* p = (TQPopupMenu*)parentMenu;
-	int myIndex;
-
-	p->findPopup( this, &myIndex );
-	TQPoint pPos = p->mapFromParent( e->globalPos() );
-	if ( p->actItem != myIndex && !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(p->rect()).contains( pPos ) )
-	    p->setActiveItem( myIndex );
-
-	if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SloppySubMenus, this )) {
-	    p->d->mouseMoveBuffer = TQRegion();
-#ifdef DEBUG_SLOPPY_SUBMENU
-	    p->tqrepaint();
-#endif
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( (e->state() & Qt::MouseButtonMask) == 0 &&
-	 !hasMouseTracking() )
-	return;
-
-    if(d->scroll.scrollable && e->pos().x() >= rect().x() && e->pos().x() <= rect().width()) {
-        int sh = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-        if((d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp && e->pos().y() <= sh) ||
-           (d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown && e->pos().y() >= height()-sh)) {
-            if(!d->scroll.scrolltimer) {
-                d->scroll.scrolltimer = new TQTimer(this, "popup scroll timer");
-                TQObject::connect( d->scroll.scrolltimer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-                                  this, TQT_SLOT(subScrollTimer()) );
-            }
-            if(!d->scroll.scrolltimer->isActive())
-                d->scroll.scrolltimer->start(40);
-            return;
-        }
-    }
-
-    int	 item = itemAtPos( e->pos() );
-    if ( item == -1 ) {				// no valid item
-        if( !d->hasmouse ) {
-            tryMenuBar( e );
-            return;
-        }
-        d->hasmouse = 0;
-	int lastActItem = actItem;
-	actItem = -1;
-	if ( lastActItem >= 0 )
-	    updateRow( lastActItem );
-        if ( lastActItem > 0 ||
-		    ( !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains( e->pos() ) && !tryMenuBar( e ) ) ) {
-	    popupSubMenuLater(tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay,
-						this), this);
-	}
-    } else {					// mouse on valid item
-	// but did not register mouse press
-        d->hasmouse = 1;
-	if ( (e->state() & Qt::MouseButtonMask) && !mouseBtDn )
-	    mouseBtDn = TRUE; // so mouseReleaseEvent will pop down
-
-	register TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at( item );
-
-	if ( mi->widget() ) {
-	    TQWidget* widgetAt = TQApplication::widgetAt( e->globalPos(), TRUE );
-	    if ( widgetAt && widgetAt != this ) {
-		TQMouseEvent me( e->type(), widgetAt->mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() ),
-				e->globalPos(), e->button(), e->state() );
-		TQApplication::sendEvent( widgetAt, &me );
-	    }
-	}
-
-	if ( actItem == item )
-	    return;
-
-	if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SloppySubMenus, this) &&
-	     d->mouseMoveBuffer.contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-	    actItem = item;
-	    popupSubMenuLater( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay, this) * 6,
-			       this );
-	    return;
-	}
-
-	if ( mi->popup() || ( popupActive >= 0 && popupActive != item )) {
-	    popupSubMenuLater( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SubMenuPopupDelay, this),
-			       this );
-	}
-	else if ( singleSingleShot ) {
-	    singleSingleShot->stop();
-	}
-
-	if ( item != actItem ) {
-	    setActiveItem( item );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    /*
-      I get nothing but complaints about this.  -Brad
-
-      - if (mouseBtDn && actItem >= 0) {
-      -	if (e->key() == Qt::Key_Shift ||
-      -	    e->key() == Qt::Key_Control ||
-      -	    e->key() == Qt::Key_Alt)
-      -	    return;
-      -
-      -	TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at(actItem);
-      -	int modifier = (((e->state() & ShiftButton) ? SHIFT : 0) |
-      -			((e->state() & ControlButton) ? CTRL : 0) |
-      -			((e->state() & AltButton) ? ALT : 0));
-      -
-      - #ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-      -	if (mi)
-      -	    setAccel(modifier + e->key(), mi->id());
-      - #endif
-      - return;
-      - }
-    */
-
-    TQMenuItem  *mi = 0;
-    TQPopupMenu *popup;
-    int dy = 0;
-    bool ok_key = TRUE;
-
-    int key = e->key();
-    if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	// in reverse mode opening and closing keys for submenues are reversed
-	if ( key == Qt::Key_Left )
-	    key = Qt::Key_Right;
-	else if ( key == Qt::Key_Right )
-	    key = Qt::Key_Left;
-    }
-
-    switch ( key ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Tab:
-	// ignore tab, otherwise it will be passed to the menubar
-	break;
-
-    case Qt::Key_Up:
-	dy = -1;
-	break;
-
-    case Qt::Key_Down:
-	dy = 1;
-	break;
-
-    case Qt::Key_Alt:
-	if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_MenuBar_AltKeyNavigation, this) )
-	    byeMenuBar();
-	break;
-
-    case Key_Escape:
-	if ( tornOff ) {
-	    close();
-	    return;
-	}
-	// just hide one
-	{
-	    TQMenuData* p = parentMenu;
-	    hide();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-	    if ( p && p->isMenuBar )
-		((TQMenuBar*) p)->goodbye( TRUE );
-#endif
-	}
-	break;
-
-    case Qt::Key_Left:
-	if ( ncols > 1 && actItem >= 0 ) {
-	    TQRect r( itemGeometry( actItem ) );
-	    int newActItem = itemAtPos( TQPoint( r.left() - 1, r.center().y() ) );
-	    if ( newActItem >= 0 ) {
-		setActiveItem( newActItem );
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( parentMenu && parentMenu->isPopupMenu ) {
-	    ((TQPopupMenu *)parentMenu)->hidePopups();
-	    if ( singleSingleShot )
-		singleSingleShot->stop();
-	    break;
-	}
-
-	ok_key = FALSE;
-    	break;
-
-    case Qt::Key_Right:
-	if ( actItem >= 0 && ( mi=mitems->at(actItem) )->isEnabledAndVisible() && (popup=mi->popup()) ) {
-	    hidePopups();
-	    if ( singleSingleShot )
-		singleSingleShot->stop();
-	    // ### The next two lines were switched to fix the problem with the first item of the
-	    // submenu not being highlighted...any reason why they should have been the other way??
-	    subMenuTimer();
-	    popup->setFirstItemActive();
-	    break;
-	} else if ( actItem == -1 && ( parentMenu && !parentMenu->isMenuBar )) {
-	    dy = 1;
-	    break;
-	}
-	if ( ncols > 1 && actItem >= 0 ) {
-	    TQRect r( itemGeometry( actItem ) );
-	    int newActItem = itemAtPos( TQPoint( r.right() + 1, r.center().y() ) );
-	    if ( newActItem >= 0 ) {
-		setActiveItem( newActItem );
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-	ok_key = FALSE;
-	break;
-
-    case Qt::Key_Space:
-	if (! tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SpaceActivatesItem, this))
-	    break;
-	// for motif, fall through
-
-    case Qt::Key_Return:
-    case Qt::Key_Enter:
-	{
-	    if ( actItem < 0 )
-		break;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-	    bool b = TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode();
-#else
-	    const bool b = FALSE;
-#endif
-	    mi = mitems->at( actItem );
-	    if ( !mi->isEnabled() && !b )
-		break;
-	    popup = mi->popup();
-	    if ( popup ) {
-		hidePopups();
-		popupSubMenuLater( 20, this );
-		popup->setFirstItemActive();
-	    } else {
-		actItem = -1;
-		updateItem( mi->id() );
-		byeMenuBar();
-		if ( mi->isEnabledAndVisible() || b ) {
-		    active_popup_menu = this;
-		    TQGuardedPtr<TQSignal> signal = mi->signal();
-		    actSig( mi->id(), b );
-		    if ( signal && !b )
-			signal->activate();
-		    active_popup_menu = 0;
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-	break;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-    case Qt::Key_F1:
-	if ( actItem < 0 || e->state() != ShiftButton)
-	    break;
-	mi = mitems->at( actItem );
-	if ( !mi->whatsThis().isNull() ){
-	    if ( !TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode() )
-		TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode();
-	    TQRect r( itemGeometry( actItem) );
-	    TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode( mi->whatsThis(), mapToGlobal( r.bottomLeft()) );
-	}
-	//fall-through!
-#endif
-    default:
-	ok_key = FALSE;
-
-    }
-    if ( !ok_key &&
-	 ( !e->state() || e->state() == TQt::AltButton || e->state() == ShiftButton ) &&
-	 e->text().length()==1 ) {
-	TQChar c = TQT_TQCHAR(e->text()[0]).upper();
-
-	TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-	TQMenuItem* first = 0;
-	TQMenuItem* currentSelected = 0;
-	TQMenuItem* firstAfterCurrent = 0;
-
-	register TQMenuItem *m;
-	mi = 0;
-	int indx = 0;
-	int clashCount = 0;
-	while ( (m=it.current()) ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    TQString s = m->text();
-	    if ( !s.isEmpty() ) {
-		int i = s.find( '&' );
-		while ( i >= 0 && i < (int)s.length() - 1 ) {
-		    if ( s[i+1].upper() == c ) {
-			ok_key = TRUE;
-			clashCount++;
-			if ( !first )
-			    first = m;
-			if ( indx == actItem )
-			    currentSelected = m;
-			else if ( !firstAfterCurrent && currentSelected )
-			    firstAfterCurrent = m;
-			break;
-		    } else if ( s[i+1] == '&' ) {
-			i = s.find( '&', i+2 );
-		    } else {
-			break;
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ( mi )
-		break;
-	    indx++;
-	}
-
-	if ( 1 == clashCount ) { // No clashes, continue with selection
-	    mi = first;
-	    popup = mi->popup();
-	    if ( popup ) {
-		setActiveItem( indexOf(mi->id()) );
-		hidePopups();
-		popupSubMenuLater( 20, this );
-		popup->setFirstItemActive();
-	    } else {
-		byeMenuBar();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-		bool b = TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode();
-#else
-		const bool b = FALSE;
-#endif
-		if ( mi->isEnabledAndVisible() || b ) {
-		    active_popup_menu = this;
-		    TQGuardedPtr<TQSignal> signal = mi->signal();
-		    actSig( mi->id(), b );
-		    if ( signal && !b  )
-			signal->activate();
-		    active_popup_menu = 0;
-		}
-	    }
-	} else if ( clashCount > 1 ) { // Clashes, highlight next...
-	    // If there's clashes and no one is selected, use first one
-	    // or if there is no clashes _after_ current, use first one
-	    if ( !currentSelected || (currentSelected && !firstAfterCurrent))
-		dy = indexOf( first->id() ) - actItem;
-	    else
-		dy = indexOf( firstAfterCurrent->id() ) - actItem;
-	}
-    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-    if ( !ok_key ) {				// send to menu bar
-	register TQMenuData *top = this;		// find top level
-	while ( top->parentMenu )
-	    top = top->parentMenu;
-	if ( top->isMenuBar ) {
-	    int beforeId = top->actItem;
-	    ((TQMenuBar*)top)->tryKeyEvent( this, e );
-	    if ( beforeId != top->actItem )
-		ok_key = TRUE;
-	}
-    }
-#endif
-    if ( actItem < 0 ) {
-	if ( dy > 0 ) {
-	    setFirstItemActive();
-	} else if ( dy < 0 ) {
-	    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-	    it.toLast();
-	    register TQMenuItem *mi;
-	    int ai = count() - 1;
-	    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-		--it;
-		if ( !mi->isSeparator() && mi->id() != TQMenuData::d->aInt ) {
-		    setActiveItem( ai );
-		    return;
-		}
-		ai--;
-	    }
-	    actItem = -1;
-	}
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( dy ) {				// highlight next/prev
-	register int i = actItem;
-	int c = mitems->count();
-	for(int n = c; n; n--) {
-	    i = i + dy;
-	    if(d->scroll.scrollable) {
-		if(d->scroll.scrolltimer)
-		    d->scroll.scrolltimer->stop();
-		if(i < 0)
-		    i = 0;
-		else if(i >= c)
-		    i  = c - 1;
-	    } else {
-		if ( i == c )
-		    i = 0;
-		else if ( i < 0 )
-		    i = c - 1;
-	    }
-	    mi = mitems->at( i );
-	    if ( !mi || !mi->isVisible() )
-		continue;
-
-	    if ( !mi->isSeparator() &&
-		 ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_AllowActiveAndDisabled, this)
-		   || mi->isEnabledAndVisible() ) )
-		break;
-	}
-	if ( i != actItem )
-	    setActiveItem( i );
-	if(d->scroll.scrollable) { //need to scroll to make it visible?
-	    TQRect r = itemGeometry(actItem);
-	    if(r.isNull() || r.height() < itemHeight(mitems->at(actItem))) {
-		bool refresh = FALSE;
-		if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp && dy == -1) { //up
-		    if(d->scroll.topScrollableIndex >= 0) {
-			d->scroll.topScrollableIndex--;
-			refresh = TRUE;
-		    }
-		} else if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown) { //down
-		    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-		    int sh = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-		    for(int i = 0, y = ((d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp) ? sh : 0); it.current(); i++, ++it) {
-			if(i >= d->scroll.topScrollableIndex) {
-			    int itemh = itemHeight(it.current());
-			    TQSize sz = tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem, this,
-								TQSize(0, itemh),
-								TQStyleOption(it.current(),maxPMWidth,0));
-			    y += sz.height();
-			    if(y > (contentsRect().height()-sh)) {
-				if(sz.height() > sh || !it.atLast())
-				    d->scroll.topScrollableIndex++;
-				refresh = TRUE;
-				break;
-			    }
-			}
-		    }
-		}
-		if(refresh) {
-		    updateScrollerState();
-		    update();
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-#ifdef TQ_OS_WIN32
-    if ( !ok_key &&
-	!( e->key() == Qt::Key_Control || e->key() == Qt::Key_Shift || e->key() == Qt::Key_Meta ) )
-	tqApp->beep();
-#endif // TQ_OS_WIN32
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::timerEvent( TQTimerEvent *e )
-{
-    TQFrame::timerEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPopupMenu::leaveEvent( TQEvent * )
-{
-    d->hasmouse = 0;
-    if ( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) && tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_MouseTracking, this) ) {
-	int lastActItem = actItem;
-	actItem = -1;
-	if ( lastActItem >= 0 )
-	    updateRow( lastActItem );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPopupMenu::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    TQFrame::styleChange( old );
-    setMouseTracking(tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_MouseTracking, this));
-    tqstyle().polishPopupMenu( this );
-    updateSize(TRUE);
-}
-
-/*!\reimp
- */
-void TQPopupMenu::enabledChange( bool )
-{
-    if ( TQMenuData::d->aWidget ) // torn-off menu
-	TQMenuData::d->aWidget->setEnabled( isEnabled() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    If a popup menu does not fit on the screen it lays itself out so
-    that it does fit. It is style dependent what tqlayout means (for
-    example, on Windows it will use multiple columns).
-
-    This functions returns the number of columns necessary.
-
-    \sa tqsizeHint()
-*/
-int TQPopupMenu::columns() const
-{
-    return ncols;
-}
-
-/* This private slot handles the scrolling popupmenu */
-void TQPopupMenu::subScrollTimer() {
-    TQPoint pos = TQCursor::pos();
-    if(!d->scroll.scrollable || !isVisible()) {
-	if(d->scroll.scrolltimer)
-	    d->scroll.scrolltimer->stop();
-	return;
-    } else if(pos.x() > x() + width() || pos.x() < x()) {
-	return;
-    }
-    int sh = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-    if(!d->scroll.lastScroll.isValid()) {
-	d->scroll.lastScroll = TQTime::currentTime();
-    } else {
-	int factor=0;
-	if(pos.y() < y())
-	    factor = y() - pos.y();
-	else if(pos.y() > y() + height())
-	    factor = pos.y() - (y() + height());
-	int msecs = 250 - ((factor / 10) * 40);
-	if(d->scroll.lastScroll.msecsTo(TQTime::currentTime()) < TQMAX(0, msecs))
-	    return;
-	d->scroll.lastScroll = TQTime::currentTime();
-    }
-    if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp && pos.y() <= y() + sh) { //up
-	if(d->scroll.topScrollableIndex > 0) {
-	    d->scroll.topScrollableIndex--;
-	    updateScrollerState();
-	    update(contentsRect());
-	}
-    } else if(d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown &&
-	      pos.y() >= (y() + contentsRect().height()) - sh) { //down
-	TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-	for(int i = 0, y = contentsRect().y() + sh; it.current(); i++, ++it) {
-	    if(i >= d->scroll.topScrollableIndex) {
-		int itemh = itemHeight(it.current());
-		TQSize sz = tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem, this, TQSize(0, itemh),
-						    TQStyleOption(it.current(),maxPMWidth,0));
-		y += sz.height();
-		if(y > contentsRect().height() - sh) {
-		    d->scroll.topScrollableIndex++;
-		    updateScrollerState();
-		    update(contentsRect());
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/* This private slot handles the delayed submenu effects */
-
-void TQPopupMenu::subMenuTimer() {
-    if ( !isVisible() || (actItem < 0 && popupActive < 0) || actItem == popupActive )
-	return;
-
-    if ( popupActive >= 0 ) {
-	hidePopups();
-	popupActive = -1;
-    }
-
-    // hidePopups() may change actItem etc.
-    if ( !isVisible() || actItem < 0 || actItem == popupActive )
-	return;
-
-    TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at(actItem);
-    if ( !mi || !mi->isEnabledAndVisible() )
-	return;
-
-    TQPopupMenu *popup = mi->popup();
-    if ( !popup || !popup->isEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    //avoid circularity
-    if ( popup->isVisible() )
-	return;
-
-    TQ_ASSERT( popup->parentMenu == 0 );
-    popup->parentMenu = this;			// set parent menu
-
-    emit popup->aboutToShow();
-    supressAboutToShow = TRUE;
-
-
-    TQRect r( itemGeometry( actItem ) );
-    TQPoint p;
-    TQSize ps = popup->tqsizeHint();
-    // GUI Style
-    int gs = tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_GUIStyle);
-    int arrowHMargin, arrowVMargin;
-    if (gs == GtkStyle) {
-        arrowHMargin = gtkArrowHMargin;
-        arrowVMargin = gtkArrowVMargin;
-    } else {
-        arrowHMargin = motifArrowHMargin;
-        arrowVMargin = motifArrowVMargin;
-    }
-    if( TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	p = TQPoint( r.left() + arrowHMargin - ps.width(), r.top() + arrowVMargin );
-	p = mapToGlobal( p );
-
-	bool right = FALSE;
-	if ( ( parentMenu && parentMenu->isPopupMenu &&
-	       ((TQPopupMenu*)parentMenu)->tqgeometry().x() < tqgeometry().x() ) ||
-	     p.x() < screenRect( p ).left())
-	    right = TRUE;
-	if ( right && (ps.width() > screenRect( p ).right() - mapToGlobal( r.topRight() ).x() ) )
-	    right = FALSE;
-	if ( right )
-	    p.setX( mapToGlobal( r.topRight() ).x() );
-    } else {
-	p = TQPoint( r.right() - arrowHMargin, r.top() + arrowVMargin );
-	p = mapToGlobal( p );
-
-	bool left = FALSE;
-	if ( ( parentMenu && parentMenu->isPopupMenu &&
-	       ((TQPopupMenu*)parentMenu)->tqgeometry().x() > tqgeometry().x() ) ||
-	     p.x() + ps.width() > screenRect( p ).right() )
-	    left = TRUE;
-	if ( left && (ps.width() > mapToGlobal( r.topLeft() ).x() ) )
-	    left = FALSE;
-	if ( left )
-	    p.setX( mapToGlobal( r.topLeft() ).x() - ps.width() );
-    }
-    TQRect pr = popup->itemGeometry(popup->count() - 1);
-    if (p.y() + ps.height() > screenRect( p ).bottom() &&
-	p.y() - ps.height() + (TQCOORD) pr.height() >= screenRect( p ).top())
-	p.setY( p.y() - ps.height() + (TQCOORD) pr.height());
-
-    if ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_SloppySubMenus, this )) {
-	 TQPoint cur = TQCursor::pos();
-	 if ( r.contains( mapFromGlobal( cur ) ) ) {
-	     TQPoint pts[4];
-	     pts[0] = TQPoint( cur.x(), cur.y() - 2 );
-	     pts[3] = TQPoint( cur.x(), cur.y() + 2 );
-	     if ( p.x() >= cur.x() )	{
-		 pts[1] = TQPoint( tqgeometry().right(), p.y() );
-		 pts[2] = TQPoint( tqgeometry().right(), p.y() + ps.height() );
-	     } else {
-		 pts[1] = TQPoint( p.x() + ps.width(), p.y() );
-		 pts[2] = TQPoint( p.x() + ps.width(), p.y() + ps.height() );
-	     }
-	     TQPointArray points( 4 );
-	     for( int i = 0; i < 4; i++ )
-		 points.setPoint( i, mapFromGlobal( pts[i] ) );
-	     d->mouseMoveBuffer = TQRegion( points );
-	     tqrepaint();
-	 }
-    }
-
-    popupActive = actItem;
-    popup->popup( p );
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::allowAnimation()
-{
-    preventAnimation = FALSE;
-}
-
-void TQPopupMenu::updateRow( int row )
-{
-    if ( !isVisible() )
-	return;
-
-    if ( badSize ) {
-	updateSize();
-	update();
-	return;
-    }
-    updateSize();
-    TQRect r = itemGeometry( row );
-    if ( !r.isNull() ) // can happen via the scroller
-	tqrepaint( r );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Executes this popup synchronously.
-
-    Opens the popup menu so that the item number \a indexAtPoint will
-    be at the specified \e global position \a pos. To translate a
-    widget's local coordinates into global coordinates, use
-    TQWidget::mapToGlobal().
-
-    The return code is the id of the selected item in either the popup
-    menu or one of its submenus, or -1 if no item is selected
-    (normally because the user pressed Esc).
-
-    Note that all Q_SIGNALS are emitted as usual. If you connect a menu
-    item to a slot and call the menu's exec(), you get the result both
-    via the signal-slot connection and in the return value of exec().
-
-    Common usage is to position the popup at the current mouse
-    position:
-    \code
-	exec( TQCursor::pos() );
-    \endcode
-    or aligned to a widget:
-    \code
-	exec( somewidget.mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0, 0)) );
-    \endcode
-
-    When positioning a popup with exec() or popup(), bear in mind that
-    you cannot rely on the popup menu's current size(). For
-    performance reasons, the popup adapts its size only when
-    necessary. So in many cases, the size before and after the show is
-    different. Instead, use tqsizeHint(). It calculates the proper size
-    depending on the menu's current contents.
-
-    \sa popup(), tqsizeHint()
-*/
-
-int TQPopupMenu::exec( const TQPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint )
-{
-    snapToMouse = TRUE;
-    if ( !tqApp )
-	return -1;
-
-    TQPopupMenu* priorSyncMenu = syncMenu;
-
-    syncMenu = this;
-    syncMenuId = -1;
-
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQPopupMenu> that = this;
-    connectModal( that, TRUE );
-    popup( pos, indexAtPoint );
-    tqApp->enter_loop();
-    connectModal( that, FALSE );
-
-    syncMenu = priorSyncMenu;
-    return syncMenuId;
-}
-
-
-
-/*
-  Connect the popup and all its submenus to modalActivation() if
-  \a doConnect is true, otherwise disconnect.
- */
-void TQPopupMenu::connectModal( TQPopupMenu* receiver, bool doConnect )
-{
-    if ( !receiver )
-	return;
-
-    connectModalRecursionSafety = doConnect;
-
-    if ( doConnect )
-	connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(activated(int)),
-		 receiver, TQT_SLOT(modalActivation(int)) );
-    else
-	disconnect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(activated(int)),
-		    receiver, TQT_SLOT(modalActivation(int)) );
-
-    TQMenuItemListIt it(*mitems);
-    register TQMenuItem *mi;
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( mi->popup() && mi->popup() != receiver
-	     && (bool)(mi->popup()->connectModalRecursionSafety) != doConnect )
-	    mi->popup()->connectModal( receiver, doConnect ); //avoid circular
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Executes this popup synchronously.
-
-    This is equivalent to \c{exec(mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0)))}. In most
-    situations you'll want to specify the position yourself, for
-    example at the current mouse position:
-    \code
-	exec(TQCursor::pos());
-    \endcode
-    or aligned to a widget:
-    \code
-	exec(somewidget.mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0)));
-    \endcode
-*/
-
-int TQPopupMenu::exec()
-{
-    return exec(mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0)));
-}
-
-
-/*  Internal slot used for exec(). */
-
-void TQPopupMenu::modalActivation( int id )
-{
-    syncMenuId = id;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the currently active item to index \a i and repaints as necessary.
-*/
-
-void TQPopupMenu::setActiveItem( int i )
-{
-    int lastActItem = actItem;
-    actItem = i;
-    if ( lastActItem >= 0 )
-	updateRow( lastActItem );
-    if ( i >= 0 && i != lastActItem )
-	updateRow( i );
-    TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at( actItem );
-    if ( !mi )
-	return;
-
-    if ( mi->widget() && mi->widget()->isFocusEnabled() ) {
-	mi->widget()->setFocus();
-    } else {
-	setFocus();
-	TQRect mfrect = itemGeometry( actItem );
-	setMicroFocusHint( mfrect.x(), mfrect.y(), mfrect.width(), mfrect.height(), FALSE );
-    }
-    if ( mi->id() != -1 )
-	hilitSig( mi->id() );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-    if (whatsThisItem && whatsThisItem != mi) {
-	qWhatsThisBDH();
-    }
-    whatsThisItem = mi;
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQPopupMenu::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    TQPopupMenu* that = (TQPopupMenu*) this;
-    //We do not need a resize here, just the tqsizeHint..
-    return that->updateSize(FALSE).expandedTo( TQApplication::globalStrut() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns the id of the item at \a pos, or -1 if there is no item
-    there or if it is a separator.
-*/
-int TQPopupMenu::idAt( const TQPoint& pos ) const
-{
-    return idAt( itemAtPos( pos ) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQPopupMenu::idAt( int index ) const
-
-    Returns the identifier of the menu item at position \a index in
-    the internal list, or -1 if \a index is out of range.
-
-    \sa TQMenuData::setId(), TQMenuData::indexOf()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-bool TQPopupMenu::customWhatsThis() const
-{
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-bool TQPopupMenu::focusNextPrevChild( bool next )
-{
-    register TQMenuItem *mi;
-    int dy = next? 1 : -1;
-    if ( dy && actItem < 0 ) {
-	setFirstItemActive();
-    } else if ( dy ) {				// highlight next/prev
-	register int i = actItem;
-	int c = mitems->count();
-	int n = c;
-	while ( n-- ) {
-	    i = i + dy;
-	    if ( i == c )
-		i = 0;
-	    else if ( i < 0 )
-		i = c - 1;
-	    mi = mitems->at( i );
-	    if ( mi && !mi->isSeparator() &&
-		 ( ( tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_AllowActiveAndDisabled, this)
-		     && mi->isVisible() )
-		   || mi->isEnabledAndVisible() ) )
-		break;
-	}
-	if ( i != actItem )
-	    setActiveItem( i );
-    }
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQPopupMenu::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQPopupMenu::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * )
-{
-}
-
-
-class TQTearOffMenuItem : public TQCustomMenuItem
-{
-public:
-    TQTearOffMenuItem()
-    {
-    }
-    ~TQTearOffMenuItem()
-    {
-    }
-    void paint( TQPainter* p, const TQColorGroup& cg, bool /* act*/,
-		bool /*enabled*/, int x, int y, int w, int h )
-    {
-	p->setPen( TQPen( cg.dark(), 1, DashLine ) );
-	p->drawLine( x+2, y+h/2-1, x+w-4, y+h/2-1 );
-	p->setPen( TQPen( cg.light(), 1, DashLine ) );
-	p->drawLine( x+2, y+h/2, x+w-4, y+h/2 );
-    }
-    bool fullSpan() const
-    {
-	return TRUE;
-    }
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint()
-    {
-	return TQSize( 20, 6 );
-    }
-};
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Inserts a tear-off handle into the menu. A tear-off handle is a
-    special menu item that creates a copy of the menu when the menu is
-    selected. This "torn-off" copy lives in a separate window. It
-    contains the same menu items as the original menu, with the
-    exception of the tear-off handle.
-
-    The handle item is assigned the identifier \a id or an
-    automatically generated identifier if \a id is < 0. The generated
-    identifiers (negative integers) are guaranteed to be unique within
-    the entire application.
-
-    The \a index specifies the position in the menu. The tear-off
-    handle is appended at the end of the list if \a index is negative.
-*/
-int TQPopupMenu::insertTearOffHandle( int id, int index )
-{
-    int myid = insertItem( new TQTearOffMenuItem, id, index );
-    connectItem( myid, TQT_TQOBJECT(this), TQT_SLOT( toggleTearOff() ) );
-    TQMenuData::d->aInt = myid;
-    return myid;
-}
-
-
-/*!\internal
-
-  implements tear-off menus
- */
-void TQPopupMenu::toggleTearOff()
-{
-    if ( active_popup_menu && active_popup_menu->tornOff ) {
-	active_popup_menu->close();
-    } else  if (TQMenuData::d->aWidget ) {
-	delete (TQWidget*) TQMenuData::d->aWidget; // delete the old one
-    } else {
-	// create a tear off menu
-	TQPopupMenu* p = new TQPopupMenu( parentWidget(), "tear off menu" );
-	connect( p, TQT_SIGNAL( activated(int) ), this, TQT_SIGNAL( activated(int) ) );
-        connect( p, TQT_SIGNAL( highlighted(int) ), this, TQT_SIGNAL( highlighted(int) ) );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-	p->setCaption( caption() );
-#endif
-	p->setCheckable( isCheckable() );
-	p->reparent( parentWidget(), (WFlags)(TQt::WType_TopLevel | TQt::WStyle_Tool |
-		     TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WDestructiveClose),
-		     tqgeometry().topLeft(), FALSE );
-	p->mitems->setAutoDelete( FALSE );
-	p->tornOff = TRUE;
-#ifdef TQ_WS_X11
-        p->x11SetWindowType( X11WindowTypeMenu );
-#endif
-	for ( TQMenuItemListIt it( *mitems ); it.current(); ++it ) {
-	    if ( it.current()->id() != TQMenuData::d->aInt && !it.current()->widget() )
-		p->mitems->append( it.current() );
-	}
-	p->show();
-	TQMenuData::d->aWidget = p;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQPopupMenu::activateItemAt( int index )
-{
-    if ( index >= 0 && index < (int) mitems->count() ) {
-	TQMenuItem *mi = mitems->at( index );
-	if ( index != actItem )			// new item activated
-	    setActiveItem( index );
-	TQPopupMenu *popup = mi->popup();
-	if ( popup ) {
-	    if ( popup->isVisible() ) {		// sub menu already open
-		int pactItem = popup->actItem;
-		popup->actItem = -1;
-		popup->hidePopups();
-		popup->updateRow( pactItem );
-	    } else {				// open sub menu
-		hidePopups();
-		actItem = index;
-		subMenuTimer();
-		popup->setFirstItemActive();
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    byeMenuBar();			// deactivate menu bar
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-	    bool b = TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode();
-#else
-	    const bool b = FALSE;
-#endif
-	    if ( !mi->isEnabledAndVisible() ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-		if ( b ) {
-		    actItem = -1;
-		    updateItem( mi->id() );
-		    byeMenuBar();
-		    actSig( mi->id(), b);
-		}
-#endif
-	    } else {
-		byeMenuBar();			// deactivate menu bar
-		if ( mi->isEnabledAndVisible() ) {
-		    actItem = -1;
-		    updateItem( mi->id() );
-		    active_popup_menu = this;
-		    TQGuardedPtr<TQSignal> signal = mi->signal();
-		    actSig( mi->id(), b );
-		    if ( signal && !b )
-			signal->activate();
-		    active_popup_menu = 0;
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    } else {
-	if ( tornOff ) {
-	    close();
-	} else {
-	    TQMenuData* p = parentMenu;
-	    hide();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MENUBAR
-	    if ( p && p->isMenuBar )
-		((TQMenuBar*) p)->goodbye( TRUE );
-#endif
-	}
-    }
-
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-  This private function is to update the scroll states in styles that support scrolling. */
-void
-TQPopupMenu::updateScrollerState()
-{
-    uint old_scrollable = d->scroll.scrollable;
-    d->scroll.scrollable = TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollNone;
-    if(!tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_PopupMenu_Scrollable, this))
-	return;
-
-    TQMenuItem *mi;
-    TQMenuItemListIt it( *mitems );
-    if(d->scroll.topScrollableIndex) {
-	for(int row = 0; (mi = it.current()) && row < d->scroll.topScrollableIndex; row++)
-	    ++it;
-	if(!mi)
-	    it.toFirst();
-    }
-    int y = 0, sh = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_PopupMenuScrollerHeight, this);
-    if(!it.atFirst()) {
-	// can't use |= because of a bug/feature in IBM xlC 5.0.2
-	d->scroll.scrollable = d->scroll.scrollable | TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp;
-	y += sh;
-    }
-    while ( (mi=it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	int myheight = contentsRect().height();
-	TQSize sz = tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_PopupMenuItem, this,
-					    TQSize(0, itemHeight( mi )),
-					    TQStyleOption(mi,maxPMWidth));
-	if(y + sz.height() >= myheight) {
-	    d->scroll.scrollable = d->scroll.scrollable | TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollDown;
-	    break;
-	}
-	y += sz.height();
-    }
-    if((d->scroll.scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp) &&
-       !(old_scrollable & TQPopupMenuPrivate::Scroll::ScrollUp))
-	d->scroll.topScrollableIndex++;
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d7290f4..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpopupmenu.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,202 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQPopupMenu class
-**
-** Created : 941128
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQPOPUPMENU_H
-#define TQPOPUPMENU_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#include "tqmenudata.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-class TQPopupMenuPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQPopupMenu : public TQFrame, public TQMenuData
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool checkable READ isCheckable WRITE setCheckable )
-public:
-    TQPopupMenu( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQPopupMenu();
-
-    void	popup( const TQPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = -1 ); // open
-    void	updateItem( int id );
-
-    virtual void	setCheckable( bool );
-    bool	isCheckable() const;
-
-    void	setFont( const TQFont & );
-    void	show();
-    void	hide();
-
-    int		exec();
-    int 	exec( const TQPoint & pos, int indexAtPoint = 0 ); // modal
-
-    virtual void	setActiveItem( int );
-    TQSize	tqsizeHint() const;
-
-    int 	idAt( int index ) const { return TQMenuData::idAt( index ); }
-    int 	idAt( const TQPoint& pos ) const;
-
-    bool 	customWhatsThis() const;
-
-    int		insertTearOffHandle( int id=-1, int index=-1 );
-
-    void	activateItemAt( int index );
-    TQRect	itemGeometry( int index );
-
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void	activated( int itemId );
-    void	highlighted( int itemId );
-    void	activatedRedirect( int itemId ); // to parent menu
-    void	highlightedRedirect( int itemId );
-    void	aboutToShow();
-    void	aboutToHide();
-
-protected:
-    int 	itemHeight( int ) const;
-    int 	itemHeight( TQMenuItem* mi ) const;
-    void 	drawItem( TQPainter* p, int tab, TQMenuItem* mi,
-		   bool act, int x, int y, int w, int h);
-
-    void 	drawContents( TQPainter * );
-
-    void 	closeEvent( TQCloseEvent *e );
-    void	paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void	mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * );
-    void	focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void	focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void	timerEvent( TQTimerEvent * );
-    void	leaveEvent( TQEvent * );
-    void 	styleChange( TQStyle& );
-    void	enabledChange( bool );
-    int 	columns() const;
-
-    bool	focusNextPrevChild( bool next );
-
-    int		itemAtPos( const TQPoint &, bool ignoreSeparator = TRUE ) const;
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void	subActivated( int itemId );
-    void	subHighlighted( int itemId );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    void	accelActivated( int itemId );
-    void	accelDestroyed();
-#endif
-    void	popupDestroyed( TQObject* );
-    void	modalActivation( int );
-
-    void	subMenuTimer();
-    void	subScrollTimer();
-    void	allowAnimation();
-    void     toggleTearOff();
-
-    void        performDelayedChanges();
-
-private:
-    void        updateScrollerState();
-    void	menuContentsChanged();
-    void	menuStateChanged();
-    void        performDelayedContentsChanged();
-    void        performDelayedStateChanged();
-    void	menuInsPopup( TQPopupMenu * );
-    void	menuDelPopup( TQPopupMenu * );
-    void	frameChanged();
-
-    void	actSig( int, bool = FALSE );
-    void	hilitSig( int );
-    virtual void setFirstItemActive();
-    void	hideAllPopups();
-    void	hidePopups();
-    bool	tryMenuBar( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	byeMenuBar();
-
-    TQSize	updateSize(bool force_recalc=FALSE, bool do_resize=TRUE);
-    void	updateRow( int row );
-    TQRect       screenRect(const TQPoint& pos);
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    void	updateAccel( TQWidget * );
-    void	enableAccel( bool );
-#endif
-    TQPopupMenuPrivate  *d;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQAccel     *autoaccel;
-#endif
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_MAC) && !defined(TQMAC_TQMENUBAR_NO_NATIVE)
-    bool macPopupMenu(const TQPoint &, int);
-    uint mac_dirty_popup : 1;
-#endif
-
-    int popupActive;
-    int tab;
-    uint accelDisabled : 1;
-    uint checkable : 1;
-    uint connectModalRecursionSafety : 1;
-    uint tornOff : 1;
-    uint pendingDelayedContentsChanges : 1;
-    uint pendingDelayedStateChanges : 1;
-    int maxPMWidth;
-    int ncols;
-    bool	snapToMouse;
-    bool	tryMouseEvent( TQPopupMenu *, TQMouseEvent * );
-
-    friend class TQMenuData;
-    friend class TQMenuBar;
-
-    void connectModal(TQPopupMenu* receiver, bool doConnect);
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQPopupMenu( const TQPopupMenu & );
-    TQPopupMenu &operator=( const TQPopupMenu & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-
-#endif // TQPOPUPMENU_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 007b2e8..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,408 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQProgressBar class
-**
-** Created : 970521
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqprogressbar.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PROGRESSBAR
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "../kernel/tqinternal_p.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-#include <limits.h>
-
-/*!
-    \class TQProgressBar tqprogressbar.h
-    \brief The TQProgressBar widget provides a horizontal progress bar.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-    \mainclass
-
-    A progress bar is used to give the user an indication of the
-    progress of an operation and to reassure them that the application
-    is still running.
-
-    The progress bar uses the concept of \e steps; you give it the
-    total number of steps and the number of steps completed so far and
-    it will display the percentage of steps that have been completed.
-    You can specify the total number of steps in the constructor or
-    later with setTotalSteps(). The current number of steps is set
-    with setProgress(). The progress bar can be rewound to the
-    beginning with reset().
-
-    If the total is given as 0 the progress bar shows a busy indicator
-    instead of a percentage of steps. This is useful, for example,
-    when using TQFtp or TQHttp to download items when they are unable to
-    determine the size of the item being downloaded.
-
-    \sa TQProgressDialog
-
-    <img src=qprogbar-m.png> <img src=qprogbar-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQProgressDialog
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Progress Indicator\endlink
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a progress bar.
-
-    The total number of steps is set to 100 by default.
-
-    The \a parent, \a name and widget flags, \a f, are passed on to
-    the TQFrame::TQFrame() constructor.
-
-    \sa setTotalSteps()
-*/
-
-TQProgressBar::TQProgressBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, f | TQt::WNoAutoErase ),
-      total_steps( 100 ),
-      progress_val( -1 ),
-      percentage( -1 ),
-      center_indicator( TRUE ),
-      auto_indicator( TRUE ),
-      percentage_visible( TRUE ),
-      d( 0 )
-{
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-    initFrame();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a progress bar.
-
-    The \a totalSteps is the total number of steps that need to be
-    completed for the operation which this progress bar represents.
-    For example, if the operation is to examine 50 files, this value
-    would be 50. Before examining the first file, call setProgress(0);
-    call setProgress(50) after examining the last file.
-
-    The \a parent, \a name and widget flags, \a f, are passed to the
-    TQFrame::TQFrame() constructor.
-
-    \sa setTotalSteps(), setProgress()
-*/
-
-TQProgressBar::TQProgressBar( int totalSteps,
-			    TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, f | TQt::WNoAutoErase ),
-      total_steps( totalSteps ),
-      progress_val( -1 ),
-      percentage( -1 ),
-      center_indicator( TRUE ),
-      auto_indicator( TRUE ),
-      percentage_visible( TRUE ),
-      d( 0 )
-{
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-    initFrame();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Reset the progress bar. The progress bar "rewinds" and shows no
-    progress.
-*/
-
-void TQProgressBar::reset()
-{
-    progress_val = -1;
-    percentage = -1;
-    setIndicator(progress_str, progress_val, total_steps);
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQProgressBar::totalSteps
-    \brief The total number of steps.
-
-    If totalSteps is 0, the progress bar will display a busy
-    indicator.
-
-    \sa totalSteps()
-*/
-
-void TQProgressBar::setTotalSteps( int totalSteps )
-{
-    total_steps = totalSteps;
-
-    // Current progress is invalid if larger than total
-    if ( total_steps < progress_val )
-	progress_val = -1;
-
-    if ( isVisible() &&
-	 ( setIndicator(progress_str, progress_val, total_steps) || !total_steps ) )
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQProgressBar::progress
-    \brief The current amount of progress
-
-    This property is -1 if progress counting has not started.
-*/
-
-void TQProgressBar::setProgress( int progress )
-{
-    if ( progress == progress_val ||
-	 progress < 0 || ( ( progress > total_steps ) && total_steps ) )
-	return;
-
-    progress_val = progress;
-
-    setIndicator( progress_str, progress_val, total_steps );
-
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Sets the amount of progress to \a progress and the total number of
-    steps to \a totalSteps.
-
-    \sa setTotalSteps()
-*/
-
-void TQProgressBar::setProgress( int progress, int totalSteps )
-{
-    if ( total_steps != totalSteps )
-	setTotalSteps( totalSteps );
-    setProgress( progress );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \property TQProgressBar::progressString
-  \brief the amount of progress as a string
-
-    This property is TQString::null if progress counting has not started.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQProgressBar::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    int cw = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_ProgressBarChunkWidth, this);
-    return tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_ProgressBar, this,
-				    TQSize( cw * 7 + fm.width( '0' ) * 4,
-					   fm.height() + 8));
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQProgressBar::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    return tqsizeHint();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQProgressBar::centerIndicator
-    \brief whether the indicator string should be centered
-
-    Changing this property sets \l TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle
-    to FALSE. The default is TRUE.
-*/
-
-void TQProgressBar::setCenterIndicator( bool on )
-{
-    if ( !auto_indicator && on == center_indicator )
-	return;
-    auto_indicator = FALSE;
-    center_indicator = on;
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle
-    \brief whether the display of the indicator string should follow the GUI style
-
-    The default is TRUE.
-
-    \sa centerIndicator
-*/
-
-void TQProgressBar::setIndicatorFollowsStyle( bool on )
-{
-    if ( on == auto_indicator )
-	return;
-    auto_indicator = on;
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQProgressBar::percentageVisible
-    \brief whether the current progress value is displayed
-
-    The default is TRUE.
-
-    \sa centerIndicator, indicatorFollowsStyle
-*/
-void TQProgressBar::setPercentageVisible( bool on )
-{
-    if ( on == percentage_visible )
-	return;
-    percentage_visible = on;
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQProgressBar::show()
-{
-    setIndicator( progress_str, progress_val, total_steps );
-    TQFrame::show();
-}
-
-void TQProgressBar::initFrame()
-{
-    setFrameStyle(TQFrame::NoFrame);
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQProgressBar::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    initFrame();
-    TQFrame::styleChange( old );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This method is called to generate the text displayed in the center
-    (or in some styles, to the left) of the progress bar.
-
-    The \a progress may be negative, indicating that the progress bar
-    is in the "reset" state before any progress is set.
-
-    The default implementation is the percentage of completion or
-    blank in the reset state. The percentage is calculated based on
-    the \a progress and \a totalSteps. You can set the \a indicator
-    text if you wish.
-
-    To allow efficient repainting of the progress bar, this method
-    should return FALSE if the string is unchanged from the last call
-    to this function.
-*/
-
-bool TQProgressBar::setIndicator( TQString & indicator, int progress,
-				 int totalSteps )
-{
-    if ( !totalSteps )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( progress < 0 ) {
-	indicator = TQString::tqfromLatin1("");
-	return TRUE;
-    } else {
-	// Get the values down to something usable.
-	if ( totalSteps > INT_MAX/1000 ) {
-	    progress /= 1000;
-	    totalSteps /= 1000;
-	}
-
-	int np = progress * 100 / totalSteps;
-	if ( np != percentage ) {
-	    percentage = np;
-	    indicator.sprintf( "%d%%", np );
-	    return TRUE;
-	} else {
-	    return FALSE;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQProgressBar::drawContents( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    const TQRect bar = contentsRect();
-
-    TQSharedDoubleBuffer buffer( p, bar.x(), bar.y(), bar.width(), bar.height() );
-
-    TQPoint pn = backgroundOffset();
-    buffer.painter()->setBrushOrigin( -pn.x(), -pn.y() );
-
-    const TQPixmap *bpm = TQT_TQPIXMAP_CONST(paletteBackgroundPixmap());
-    if ( bpm )
-	buffer.painter()->fillRect( bar, TQBrush( paletteBackgroundColor(), *bpm ) );
-    else
-	buffer.painter()->fillRect( bar, paletteBackgroundColor() );
-    buffer.painter()->setFont( p->font() );
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_ProgressBarGroove, buffer.painter(), this,
-			TQStyle::tqvisualRect(tqstyle().subRect(TQStyle::SR_ProgressBarGroove, this), this ),
-			tqcolorGroup(), flags);
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_ProgressBarContents, buffer.painter(), this,
-			TQStyle::tqvisualRect(tqstyle().subRect(TQStyle::SR_ProgressBarContents, this), this ),
-			tqcolorGroup(), flags);
-
-    if (percentageVisible())
-	tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_ProgressBarLabel, buffer.painter(), this,
-			    TQStyle::tqvisualRect(tqstyle().subRect(TQStyle::SR_ProgressBarLabel, this), this ),
-			    tqcolorGroup(), flags);
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a380bc0..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqprogressbar.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQProgressBar class
-**
-** Created : 970520
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQPROGRESSBAR_H
-#define TQPROGRESSBAR_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PROGRESSBAR
-
-
-class TQProgressBarPrivate;
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQProgressBar : public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( int totalSteps READ totalSteps WRITE setTotalSteps )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int progress READ progress WRITE setProgress )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString progressString READ progressString )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool centerIndicator READ centerIndicator WRITE setCenterIndicator )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool indicatorFollowsStyle READ indicatorFollowsStyle WRITE setIndicatorFollowsStyle )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool percentageVisible READ percentageVisible WRITE setPercentageVisible )
-
-public:
-    TQProgressBar( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 );
-    TQProgressBar( int totalSteps, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 );
-
-    int		totalSteps() const;
-    int		progress()   const;
-    const TQString &progressString() const;
-
-    TQSize	tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize	tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    void	setCenterIndicator( bool on );
-    bool	centerIndicator() const;
-
-    void        setIndicatorFollowsStyle( bool );
-    bool	indicatorFollowsStyle() const;
-
-    bool	percentageVisible() const;
-    void	setPercentageVisible( bool );
-
-    void	show();
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void	reset();
-    virtual void setTotalSteps( int totalSteps );
-    virtual void setProgress( int progress );
-    void	setProgress( int progress, int totalSteps );
-
-protected:
-    void	drawContents( TQPainter * );
-    virtual bool setIndicator( TQString & progress_str, int progress,
-			       int totalSteps );
-    void styleChange( TQStyle& );
-
-private:
-    int		total_steps;
-    int		progress_val;
-    int		percentage;
-    TQString	progress_str;
-    bool        center_indicator    : 1;
-    bool        auto_indicator	    : 1;
-    bool	percentage_visible  : 1;
-    TQProgressBarPrivate * d;
-    void         initFrame();
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQProgressBar( const TQProgressBar & );
-    TQProgressBar &operator=( const TQProgressBar & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-inline int TQProgressBar::totalSteps() const
-{
-    return total_steps;
-}
-
-inline int TQProgressBar::progress() const
-{
-    return progress_val;
-}
-
-inline const TQString &TQProgressBar::progressString() const
-{
-    return progress_str;
-}
-
-inline bool TQProgressBar::centerIndicator() const
-{
-    return center_indicator;
-}
-
-inline bool TQProgressBar::indicatorFollowsStyle() const
-{
-    return auto_indicator;
-}
-
-inline bool TQProgressBar::percentageVisible() const
-{
-    return percentage_visible;
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_PROGRESSBAR
-
-#endif // TQPROGRESSBAR_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index aecc6c7..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,760 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQPushButton class
-**
-** Created : 940221
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqpushbutton.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PUSHBUTTON
-#include "tqdialog.h"
-#include "tqfontmetrics.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqtoolbar.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \class TQPushButton tqpushbutton.h
-    \brief The TQPushButton widget provides a command button.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    The push button, or command button, is perhaps the most commonly
-    used widget in any graphical user interface. Push (click) a button
-    to command the computer to perform some action, or to answer a
-    question. Typical buttons are OK, Apply, Cancel, Close, Yes, No
-    and Help.
-
-    A command button is rectangular and typically displays a text
-    label describing its action. An underlined character in the label
-    (signified by preceding it with an ampersand in the text)
-    indicates an accelerator key, e.g.
-    \code
-	TQPushButton *pb = new TQPushButton( "&Download", this );
-    \endcode
-    In this example the accelerator is \e{Alt+D}, and the label text
-    will be displayed as <b><u>D</u>ownload</b>.
-
-    Push buttons can display a textual label or a pixmap, and
-    optionally a small icon. These can be set using the constructors
-    and changed later using setText(), setPixmap() and setIconSet().
-    If the button is disabled the appearance of the text or pixmap and
-    iconset will be manipulated with respect to the GUI style to make
-    the button look "disabled".
-
-    A push button emits the signal clicked() when it is activated by
-    the mouse, the Spacebar or by a keyboard accelerator. Connect to
-    this signal to perform the button's action. Push buttons also
-    provide less commonly used Q_SIGNALS, for example, pressed() and
-    released().
-
-    Command buttons in dialogs are by default auto-default buttons,
-    i.e. they become the default push button automatically when they
-    receive the keyboard input focus. A default button is a push
-    button that is activated when the user presses the Enter or Return
-    key in a dialog. You can change this with setAutoDefault(). Note
-    that auto-default buttons reserve a little extra space which is
-    necessary to draw a default-button indicator. If you do not want
-    this space around your buttons, call setAutoDefault(FALSE).
-
-    Being so central, the button widget has grown to accommodate a
-    great many variations in the past decade. The Microsoft style
-    guide now shows about ten different states of Windows push buttons
-    and the text implies that there are dozens more when all the
-    combinations of features are taken into consideration.
-
-    The most important modes or states are:
-    \list
-    \i Available or not (grayed out, disabled).
-    \i Standard push button, toggling push button or menu button.
-    \i On or off (only for toggling push buttons).
-    \i Default or normal. The default button in a dialog can generally
-       be "clicked" using the Enter or Return key.
-    \i Auto-repeat or not.
-    \i Pressed down or not.
-    \endlist
-
-    As a general rule, use a push button when the application or
-    dialog window performs an action when the user clicks on it (such
-    as Apply, Cancel, Close and Help) \e and when the widget is
-    supposed to have a wide, rectangular tqshape with a text label.
-    Small, typically square buttons that change the state of the
-    window rather than performing an action (such as the buttons in
-    the top-right corner of the TQFileDialog) are not command buttons,
-    but tool buttons. TQt provides a special class (TQToolButton) for
-    these buttons.
-
-    If you need toggle behavior (see setToggleButton()) or a button
-    that auto-repeats the activation signal when being pushed down
-    like the arrows in a scroll bar (see setAutoRepeat()), a command
-    button is probably not what you want. When in doubt, use a tool
-    button.
-
-    A variation of a command button is a menu button. These provide
-    not just one command, but several, since when they are clicked
-    they pop up a menu of options. Use the method setPopup() to
-    associate a popup menu with a push button.
-
-    Other classes of buttons are option buttons (see TQRadioButton) and
-    check boxes (see TQCheckBox).
-
-    <img src="qpushbt-m.png"> <img src="qpushbt-w.png">
-
-    In TQt, the TQButton abstract base class provides most of the modes
-    and other API, and TQPushButton provides GUI logic. See TQButton for
-    more information about the API.
-
-    \important text, setText, text, pixmap, setPixmap, accel, setAccel,
-    isToggleButton, setDown, isDown, isOn, state, autoRepeat,
-    isExclusiveToggle, group, setAutoRepeat, toggle, pressed, released,
-    clicked, toggled, state stateChanged
-
-    \sa TQToolButton, TQRadioButton TQCheckBox
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Push Button\endlink
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQPushButton::autoDefault
-    \brief whether the push button is the auto default button
-
-    If this property is set to TRUE then the push button is the auto
-    default button in a dialog.
-
-    In some GUI styles a default button is drawn with an extra frame
-    around it, up to 3 pixels or more. TQt automatically keeps this
-    space free around auto-default buttons, i.e. auto-default buttons
-    may have a slightly larger size hint.
-
-    This property's default is TRUE for buttons that have a TQDialog
-    parent; otherwise it defaults to FALSE.
-
-    See the \l default property for details of how \l default and
-    auto-default interact.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQPushButton::autoMask
-    \brief whether the button is automatically masked
-
-    \sa TQWidget::setAutoMask()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQPushButton::default
-    \brief whether the push button is the default button
-
-    If this property is set to TRUE then the push button will be
-    pressed if the user presses the Enter (or Return) key in a dialog.
-
-    Regardless of focus, if the user presses Enter: If there is a
-    default button the default button is pressed; otherwise, if
-    there are one or more \l autoDefault buttons the first \l autoDefault
-    button that is next in the tab order is pressed. If there are no
-    default or \l autoDefault buttons only pressing Space on a button
-    with focus, mouse clicking, or using an accelerator will press a
-    button.
-
-    In a dialog, only one push button at a time can be the default
-    button. This button is then displayed with an additional frame
-    (depending on the GUI style).
-
-    The default button behavior is provided only in dialogs. Buttons
-    can always be clicked from the keyboard by pressing Enter (or
-    Return) or the Spacebar when the button has focus.
-
-    This property's default is FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQPushButton::flat
-    \brief whether the border is disabled
-
-    This property's default is FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQPushButton::iconSet
-    \brief the icon set on the push button
-
-    This property will return 0 if the push button has no iconset.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQPushButton::on
-    \brief whether the push button is toggled
-
-    This property should only be set for toggle push buttons. The
-    default value is FALSE.
-
-    \sa isOn(), toggle(), toggled(), isToggleButton()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQPushButton::toggleButton
-    \brief whether the button is a toggle button
-
-    Toggle buttons have an on/off state similar to \link TQCheckBox
-    check boxes. \endlink A push button is initially not a toggle
-    button.
-
-    \sa setOn(), toggle(), isToggleButton() toggled()
-*/
-
-/*! \property TQPushButton::menuButton
-    \brief whether the push button has a menu button on it
-    \obsolete
-
-  If this property is set to TRUE, then a down arrow is drawn on the push
-  button to indicate that a menu will pop up if the user clicks on the
-  arrow.
-*/
-
-class TQPushButtonPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQPushButtonPrivate()
-	:iconset( 0 )
-    {}
-    ~TQPushButtonPrivate()
-    {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ICONSET
-	delete iconset;
-#endif
-    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQPopupMenu> popup;
-#endif
-    TQIconSet* iconset;
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a push button with no text.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQPushButton::TQPushButton( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-	: TQButton( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a push button called \a name with the parent \a parent
-    and the text \a text.
-*/
-
-TQPushButton::TQPushButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent,
-			  const char *name )
-	: TQButton( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-    setText( text );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a push button with an \a icon and a \a text.
-
-    Note that you can also pass a TQPixmap object as an icon (thanks to
-    the implicit type conversion provided by C++).
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ICONSET
-TQPushButton::TQPushButton( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString &text,
-			  TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-	: TQButton( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-    setText( text );
-    setIconSet( icon );
-}
-#endif
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the push button.
-*/
-TQPushButton::~TQPushButton()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-void TQPushButton::init()
-{
-    d = 0;
-    defButton = FALSE;
-    lastEnabled = FALSE;
-    hasMenuArrow = FALSE;
-    flt = FALSE;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOG
-    autoDefButton = ::tqqt_cast<TQDialog*>(tqtopLevelWidget()) != 0;
-#else
-    autoDefButton = FALSE;
-#endif
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteButton );
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-}
-
-
-/*
-  Makes the push button a toggle button if \a enable is TRUE or a normal
-  push button if \a enable is FALSE.
-
-  Toggle buttons have an on/off state similar to \link TQCheckBox check
-  boxes. \endlink A push button is initially not a toggle button.
-
-  \sa setOn(), toggle(), isToggleButton() toggled()
-*/
-
-void TQPushButton::setToggleButton( bool enable )
-{
-    TQButton::setToggleButton( enable );
-}
-
-
-/*
-  Switches a toggle button on if \a enable is TRUE or off if \a enable is
-  FALSE.
-  \sa isOn(), toggle(), toggled(), isToggleButton()
-*/
-
-void TQPushButton::setOn( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( !isToggleButton() )
-	return;
-    TQButton::setOn( enable );
-}
-
-void TQPushButton::setAutoDefault( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( (bool)autoDefButton == enable )
-	return;
-    autoDefButton = enable;
-    update();
-    updateGeometry();
-}
-
-
-void TQPushButton::setDefault( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( (bool)defButton == enable )
-	return;					// no change
-    defButton = enable;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOG
-    if ( defButton && ::tqqt_cast<TQDialog*>(tqtopLevelWidget()) )
- 	((TQDialog*)tqtopLevelWidget())->setMainDefault( this );
-#endif
-    update();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::StateChanged );
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQPushButton::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-
-    int w = 0, h = 0;
-
-    // calculate contents size...
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ICONSET
-    if ( iconSet() && !iconSet()->isNull() ) {
-	int iw = iconSet()->pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, TQIconSet::Normal ).width() + 4;
-	int ih = iconSet()->pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, TQIconSet::Normal ).height();
-	w += iw;
-	h = TQMAX( h, ih );
-    }
-#endif
-    if ( isMenuButton() )
-	w += tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_MenuButtonIndicator, this);
-
-    if ( pixmap() ) {
-	TQPixmap *pm = (TQPixmap *)pixmap();
-	w += pm->width();
-	h += pm->height();
-    } else {
-	TQString s( text() );
-	bool empty = s.isEmpty();
-	if ( empty )
-	    s = TQString::tqfromLatin1("XXXX");
-	TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-	TQSize sz = fm.size( TQt::ShowPrefix, s );
-	if(!empty || !w)
-	    w += sz.width();
-	if(!empty || !h)
-	    h = TQMAX(h, sz.height());
-    }
-
-    return (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_PushButton, this, TQSize(w, h)).
-	    expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut()));
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPushButton::move( int x, int y )
-{
-    TQWidget::move( x, y );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPushButton::move( const TQPoint &p )
-{
-    move( p.x(), p.y() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPushButton::resize( int w, int h )
-{
-    TQWidget::resize( w, h );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPushButton::resize( const TQSize &s )
-{
-    resize( s.width(), s.height() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPushButton::setGeometry( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-{
-    TQWidget::setGeometry( x, y, w, h );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPushButton::setGeometry( const TQRect &r )
-{
-    TQWidget::setGeometry( r );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQPushButton::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
-{
-    if ( autoMask() )
-	updateMask();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPushButton::drawButton( TQPainter *paint )
-{
-    int diw = 0;
-    if ( isDefault() || autoDefault() ) {
-	diw = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_ButtonDefaultIndicator, this);
-
-	if ( diw > 0 ) {
-	    if (backgroundMode() == TQt::X11ParentRelative) {
-		erase( 0, 0, width(), diw );
-		erase( 0, 0, diw, height() );
-		erase( 0, height() - diw, width(), diw );
-		erase( width() - diw, 0, diw, height() );
-	    } else if ( parentWidget() && parentWidget()->backgroundPixmap() ){
-		// pseudo tranparency
-		paint->drawTiledPixmap( 0, 0, width(), diw,
-					*parentWidget()->backgroundPixmap(),
-					x(), y() );
-		paint->drawTiledPixmap( 0, 0, diw, height(),
-					*parentWidget()->backgroundPixmap(),
-					x(), y() );
-		paint->drawTiledPixmap( 0, height()-diw, width(), diw,
-					*parentWidget()->backgroundPixmap(),
-					x(), y()+height() );
-		paint->drawTiledPixmap( width()-diw, 0, diw, height(),
-					*parentWidget()->backgroundPixmap(),
-					x()+width(), y() );
-	    } else {
-		paint->fillRect( 0, 0, width(), diw,
-				 tqcolorGroup().brush(TQColorGroup::Background) );
-		paint->fillRect( 0, 0, diw, height(),
-				 tqcolorGroup().brush(TQColorGroup::Background) );
-		paint->fillRect( 0, height()-diw, width(), diw,
-				 tqcolorGroup().brush(TQColorGroup::Background) );
-		paint->fillRect( width()-diw, 0, diw, height(),
-				 tqcolorGroup().brush(TQColorGroup::Background) );
-	    }
-
-	}
-    }
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if (isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-    if (isOn())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_On;
-    if (! isFlat() && ! isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Raised;
-    if (isDefault())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_ButtonDefault;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PushButton, paint, this, rect(), tqcolorGroup(), flags);
-    drawButtonLabel( paint );
-
-    lastEnabled = isEnabled();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPushButton::drawButtonLabel( TQPainter *paint )
-{
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if (isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-    if (isOn())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_On;
-    if (! isFlat() && ! isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Raised;
-    if (isDefault())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_ButtonDefault;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_PushButtonLabel, paint, this,
-			tqstyle().subRect(TQStyle::SR_PushButtonContents, this),
-			tqcolorGroup(), flags);
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQPushButton::updateMask()
-{
-    TQBitmap bm( size() );
-    bm.fill( Qt::color0 );
-
-    {
-	TQPainter p( &bm, this );
-	tqstyle().tqdrawControlMask(TQStyle::CE_PushButton, &p, this, rect());
-    }
-
-    setMask( bm );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPushButton::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent *e )
-{
-    if (autoDefButton && !defButton) {
-	defButton = TRUE;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOG
-	if ( defButton && ::tqqt_cast<TQDialog*>(tqtopLevelWidget()) )
- 	    ((TQDialog*)tqtopLevelWidget())->setDefault( this );
-#endif
-    }
-    TQButton::focusInEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQPushButton::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent *e )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DIALOG
-    if ( defButton && autoDefButton ) {
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQDialog*>(tqtopLevelWidget()) )
-	    ((TQDialog*)tqtopLevelWidget())->setDefault( 0 );
-    }
-#endif
-
-    TQButton::focusOutEvent( e );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    if ( popup() && popup()->isVisible() )	// restore pressed status
-	setDown( TRUE );
-#endif
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-/*!
-    Associates the popup menu \a popup with this push button. This
-    turns the button into a menu button.
-
-    Ownership of the popup menu is \e not transferred to the push
-    button.
-
-    \sa popup()
-*/
-void TQPushButton::setPopup( TQPopupMenu* popup )
-{
-    if ( !d )
-	d = new TQPushButtonPrivate;
-    if ( popup && !d->popup )
-	connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL( pressed() ), this, TQT_SLOT( popupPressed() ) );
-
-    d->popup = popup;
-    setIsMenuButton( popup != 0 );
-}
-#endif //TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ICONSET
-void TQPushButton::setIconSet( const TQIconSet& icon )
-{
-    if ( !d )
-	d = new TQPushButtonPrivate;
-    if ( !icon.isNull() ) {
-	if ( d->iconset )
-	    *d->iconset = icon;
-	else
-	    d->iconset = new TQIconSet( icon );
-    } else if ( d->iconset) {
-	delete d->iconset;
-	d->iconset = 0;
-    }
-
-    update();
-    updateGeometry();
-}
-
-
-TQIconSet* TQPushButton::iconSet() const
-{
-    return d ? d->iconset : 0;
-}
-#endif // TQT_NO_ICONSET
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-/*!
-    Returns the button's associated popup menu or 0 if no popup menu
-    has been set.
-
-    \sa setPopup()
-*/
-TQPopupMenu* TQPushButton::popup() const
-{
-    return d ? (TQPopupMenu*)d->popup : 0;
-}
-
-void TQPushButton::popupPressed()
-{
-    TQPopupMenu* popup = d ? (TQPopupMenu*) d->popup : 0;
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQPushButton> that = this;
-    if ( isDown() && popup ) {
-	bool horizontal = TRUE;
-	bool topLeft = TRUE;			// ### always TRUE
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-	TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(parentWidget());
-	if ( tb && tb->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
-	    horizontal = FALSE;
-#endif
-	if ( horizontal ) {
-	    if ( topLeft ) {
-		if ( mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, rect().bottom() ) ).y() + popup->tqsizeHint().height() <= tqApp->desktop()->height() )
-		    popup->exec( mapToGlobal( rect().bottomLeft() ) );
-		else
-		    popup->exec( mapToGlobal( rect().topLeft() - TQPoint( 0, popup->tqsizeHint().height() ) ) );
-	    } else {
-		TQSize sz( popup->tqsizeHint() );
-		TQPoint p = mapToGlobal( rect().topLeft() );
-		p.ry() -= sz.height();
-		popup->exec( p );
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    if ( topLeft ) {
-		if ( mapToGlobal( TQPoint( rect().right(), 0 ) ).x() + popup->tqsizeHint().width() <= tqApp->desktop()->width() )
-		    popup->exec( mapToGlobal( rect().topRight() ) );
-		else
-		    popup->exec( mapToGlobal( rect().topLeft() - TQPoint( popup->tqsizeHint().width(), 0 ) ) );
-	    } else {
-		TQSize sz( popup->tqsizeHint() );
-		TQPoint p = mapToGlobal( rect().topLeft() );
-		p.rx() -= sz.width();
-		popup->exec( p );
-	    }
-	}
-        if (that)
-            setDown( FALSE );
-    }
-}
-#endif
-
-void TQPushButton::setFlat( bool f )
-{
-    flt = f;
-    update();
-}
-
-bool TQPushButton::isFlat() const
-{
-    return flt;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-    \fn virtual void TQPushButton::setIsMenuButton( bool enable )
-*/
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 3af2d76..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqpushbutton.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQPushButton class
-**
-** Created : 940221
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQPUSHBUTTON_H
-#define TQPUSHBUTTON_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqbutton.h"
-#include "tqiconset.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PUSHBUTTON
-class TQPushButtonPrivate;
-class TQPopupMenu;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQPushButton : public TQButton
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool autoDefault READ autoDefault WRITE setAutoDefault )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool default READ isDefault WRITE setDefault )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool menuButton READ isMenuButton DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQIconSet iconSet READ iconSet WRITE setIconSet )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool toggleButton WRITE setToggleButton )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool on WRITE setOn )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool flat READ isFlat WRITE setFlat )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true )
-
-public:
-    TQPushButton( TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 );
-    TQPushButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ICONSET
-    TQPushButton( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 );
-#endif
-    ~TQPushButton();
-
-    TQSize	tqsizeHint() const;
-
-    void	move( int x, int y );
-    void	move( const TQPoint &p );
-    void	resize( int w, int h );
-    void	resize( const TQSize & );
-    void	setGeometry( int x, int y, int w, int h );
-
-    void	setGeometry( const TQRect & );
-
-    void setToggleButton( bool );
-
-    bool	autoDefault()	const	{ return autoDefButton; }
-    virtual void setAutoDefault( bool autoDef );
-    bool	isDefault()	const	{ return defButton; }
-    virtual void setDefault( bool def );
-
-    virtual void setIsMenuButton( bool enable ) {  // obsolete functions
-	if ( (bool)hasMenuArrow == enable )
-	    return;
-	hasMenuArrow = enable ? 1 : 0;
-	update();
-	updateGeometry();
-    }
-    bool	isMenuButton() const { return hasMenuArrow; }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    void setPopup( TQPopupMenu* popup );
-    TQPopupMenu* popup() const;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ICONSET
-    void setIconSet( const TQIconSet& );
-    TQIconSet* iconSet() const;
-#endif
-    void setFlat( bool );
-    bool isFlat() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setOn( bool );
-
-protected:
-    void	drawButton( TQPainter * );
-    void	drawButtonLabel( TQPainter * );
-    void	focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void	focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * );
-    void	resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void	updateMask();
-private Q_SLOTS:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    void popupPressed();
-#endif
-private:
-    void	init();
-
-    uint	autoDefButton	: 1;
-    uint	defButton	: 1;
-    uint	flt		: 1;
-    uint	reserved		: 1; // UNUSED
-    uint	lastEnabled	: 1; // UNUSED
-    uint	hasMenuArrow	: 1;
-
-    TQPushButtonPrivate* d;
-
-    friend class TQDialog;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQPushButton( const TQPushButton & );
-    TQPushButton &operator=( const TQPushButton & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_PUSHBUTTON
-
-#endif // TQPUSHBUTTON_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c24676..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,362 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQRadioButton class
-**
-** Created : 940222
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqradiobutton.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RADIOBUTTON
-#include "tqbuttongroup.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqpixmapcache.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqtextstream.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-
-/*!
-    \class TQRadioButton tqradiobutton.h
-    \brief The TQRadioButton widget provides a radio button with a text or pixmap label.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    TQRadioButton and TQCheckBox are both option buttons. That is, they
-    can be switched on (checked) or off (unchecked). The classes
-    differ in how the choices for the user are restricted. Check boxes
-    define "many of many" choices, whereas radio buttons provide a
-    "one of many" choice. In a group of radio buttons only one radio
-    button at a time can be checked; if the user selects another
-    button, the previously selected button is switched off.
-
-    The easiest way to implement a "one of many" choice is simply to
-    put the radio buttons into TQButtonGroup.
-
-    Whenever a button is switched on or off it emits the signal
-    toggled(). Connect to this signal if you want to trigger an action
-    each time the button changes state. Otherwise, use isChecked() to
-    see if a particular button is selected.
-
-    Just like TQPushButton, a radio button can display text or a
-    pixmap. The text can be set in the constructor or with setText();
-    the pixmap is set with setPixmap().
-
-    <img src=qradiobt-m.png> <img src=qradiobt-w.png>
-
-    \important text, setText, text, pixmap, setPixmap, accel, setAccel, isToggleButton, setDown, isDown, isOn, state, autoRepeat, isExclusiveToggle, group, setAutoRepeat, toggle, pressed, released, clicked, toggled, state stateChanged
-
-    \sa TQPushButton TQToolButton
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Radio Button\endlink
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQRadioButton::checked \brief Whether the radio button is
-    checked
-
-    This property will not effect any other radio buttons unless they
-    have been placed in the same TQButtonGroup. The default value is
-    FALSE (unchecked).
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQRadioButton::autoMask \brief whether the radio button
-    is automatically masked
-
-    \sa TQWidget::setAutoMask()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a radio button with no text.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-	: TQButton( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a radio button with the text \a text.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQRadioButton::TQRadioButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent,
-			    const char *name )
-	: TQButton( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WMouseNoMask )
-{
-    init();
-    setText( text );
-}
-
-
-/*
-    Initializes the radio button.
-*/
-
-void TQRadioButton::init()
-{
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-    setToggleButton( TRUE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_BUTTONGROUP
-    TQButtonGroup *bgrp = ::tqqt_cast<TQButtonGroup*>(parentWidget());
-    if ( bgrp )
-	bgrp->setRadioButtonExclusive( TRUE );
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQRadioButton::setChecked( bool check )
-{
-    setOn( check );
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQRadioButton::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    // Any more complex, and we will use tqstyle().tqitemRect()
-    // NB: TQCheckBox::tqsizeHint() is similar
-    constPolish();
-
-    TQPainter p(this);
-    TQSize sz = tqstyle().tqitemRect(&p, TQRect(0, 0, 1, 1), TQt::ShowPrefix, FALSE,
-				pixmap(), text()).size();
-
-    return (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_RadioButton, this, sz).
-	    expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut()));
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-bool TQRadioButton::hitButton( const TQPoint &pos ) const
-{
-    TQRect r =
-	TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect( TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonFocusRect,
-					     this ), this );
-    if ( tqApp->reverseLayout() ) {
-	r.setRight( width() );
-    } else {
-	r.setLeft( 0 );
-    }
-    return r.contains( pos );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQRadioButton::drawButton( TQPainter *paint )
-{
-    TQPainter *p = paint;
-    TQRect irect = TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect(TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonIndicator, this), this );
-    const TQColorGroup &cg = tqcolorGroup();
-
-#if !defined( TQT_NO_TEXTSTREAM ) && !defined( TQ_WS_MACX )
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-printf("[WARNING] TQSharedDoubleBuffer double buffering has been disabled\n\r");	// Otherwise the widgets don't repaint properly in Qt4!
-#else // USE_QT4
-#   define  SAVE_RADIOBUTTON_PIXMAPS
-#endif // USE_QT4
-#endif
-#if defined(SAVE_RADIOBUTTON_PIXMAPS)
-    TQString pmkey;				// pixmap key
-    int kf = 0;
-    if ( isDown() )
-	kf |= 1;
-    if ( isOn() )
-	kf |= 2;
-    if ( isEnabled() )
-	kf |= 4;
-    if( isActiveWindow() )
-	kf |= 8;
-    if ( hasMouse() )
-	kf |= 16;
-    if ( hasFocus() )
-	kf |= 32;
-
-    TQTextOStream os(&pmkey);
-    os << "$qt_radio_" << tqstyle().className() << "_"
-       << palette().serialNumber() << "_" << irect.width() << "x" << irect.height() << "_" << kf;
-    TQPixmap *pm = TQPixmapCache::find( pmkey );
-    if ( pm ) {					// pixmap exists
-	drawButtonLabel( p );
-	p->drawPixmap( irect.topLeft(), *pm );
-	return;
-    }
-    bool use_pm = TRUE;
-    TQPainter pmpaint;
-    int wx, wy;
-    if ( use_pm ) {
-	pm = new TQPixmap( irect.size() );	// create new pixmap
-	TQ_CHECK_PTR( pm );
-	pm->fill(paletteBackgroundColor());
-	TQPainter::redirect(this, pm);
-	pmpaint.begin(this);
-	p = &pmpaint;				// draw in pixmap
-	wx = irect.x();				// save x,y coords
-	wy = irect.y();
-	irect.moveTopLeft(TQPoint(0, 0));
-	p->setBackgroundColor(paletteBackgroundColor());
-    }
-#endif
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if ( isEnabled() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if ( hasFocus() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if ( isDown() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-    if ( hasMouse() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_MouseOver;
-    if ( state() == TQButton::On )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_On;
-    else if ( state() == TQButton::Off )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Off;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_RadioButton, p, this, irect, cg, flags);
-
-#if defined(SAVE_RADIOBUTTON_PIXMAPS)
-    if ( use_pm ) {
-	pmpaint.end();
-	TQPainter::redirect(this, NULL);
-	if ( backgroundPixmap() || backgroundMode() == TQt::X11ParentRelative ) {
-	    TQBitmap bm( pm->size() );
-	    bm.fill( Qt::color0 );
-	    pmpaint.begin( &bm );
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawControlMask(TQStyle::CE_RadioButton, &pmpaint, this, irect);
-	    pmpaint.end();
-	    pm->setMask( bm );
-	}
-	p = paint;				// draw in default tqdevice
-	p->drawPixmap( wx, wy, *pm );
-	if (!TQPixmapCache::insert(pmkey, pm) )	// save in cache
-	    delete pm;
-    }
-#endif
-
-    drawButtonLabel( p );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQRadioButton::drawButtonLabel( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    TQRect r =
-	TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect(TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonContents,
-					    this), this );
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if (isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-    if (state() == TQButton::On)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_On;
-    else if (state() == TQButton::Off)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Off;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_RadioButtonLabel, p, this, r, tqcolorGroup(), flags);
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQRadioButton::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* e )
-{
-    TQButton::resizeEvent(e);
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	TQPainter p(this);
-	TQSize isz = tqstyle().tqitemRect(&p, TQRect(0, 0, 1, 1), TQt::ShowPrefix, FALSE,
-				     pixmap(), text()).size();
-	TQSize wsz = (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_RadioButton, this, isz).
-		     expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut()));
-
-	update(wsz.width(), isz.width(), 0, wsz.height());
-    }
-    if (autoMask())
-	updateMask();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQRadioButton::updateMask()
-{
-    TQRect irect =
-	TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect( TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonIndicator,
-					     this ), this );
-
-    TQBitmap bm(width(), height());
-    bm.fill(Qt::color0);
-
-    TQPainter p( &bm, this );
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControlMask(TQStyle::CE_RadioButton, &p, this, irect);
-    if ( ! text().isNull() || ( pixmap() && ! pixmap()->isNull() ) ) {
-	TQRect crect =
-	    TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect( TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonContents,
-						 this ), this );
-	TQRect frect =
-	    TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().subRect( TQStyle::SR_RadioButtonFocusRect,
-						 this ), this );
-	TQRect label(crect.unite(frect));
-	p.fillRect(label, Qt::color1);
-    }
-    p.end();
-
-    setMask(bm);
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a27850..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqradiobutton.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQRadioButton class
-**
-** Created : 940222
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQRADIOBUTTON_H
-#define TQRADIOBUTTON_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqbutton.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RADIOBUTTON
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQRadioButton : public TQButton
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool checked READ isChecked WRITE setChecked )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true )
-
-public:
-    TQRadioButton( TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 );
-    TQRadioButton( const TQString &text, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 );
-
-    bool    isChecked() const;
-
-    TQSize    tqsizeHint() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void    setChecked( bool check );
-
-protected:
-    bool    hitButton( const TQPoint & ) const;
-    void    drawButton( TQPainter * );
-    void    drawButtonLabel( TQPainter * );
-    void    updateMask();
-
-    void    resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* );
-
-private:
-    void    init();
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQRadioButton( const TQRadioButton & );
-    TQRadioButton &operator=( const TQRadioButton & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-inline bool TQRadioButton::isChecked() const
-{ return isOn(); }
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_RADIOBUTTON
-
-#endif // TQRADIOBUTTON_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqrangecontrol.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqrangecontrol.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 65c53c5..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqrangecontrol.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,565 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQRangeControl class
-**
-** Created : 940427
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqrangecontrol.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RANGECONTROL
-#include "tqglobal.h"
-#include <limits.h>
-
-static bool sumOutOfRange(int current, int add);
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQRangeControl tqrangecontrol.h
-    \brief The TQRangeControl class provides an integer value within a range.
-
-    \ingroup misc
-
-    Although originally designed for the TQScrollBar widget, the
-    TQRangeControl can also be used in conjunction with other widgets
-    such as TQSlider and TQSpinBox. Here are the five main concepts in
-    the class:
-
-    \list 1
-
-    \i \e{Current value} The bounded integer that
-    TQRangeControl maintains. value() returns it, and several
-    functions, including setValue(), set it.
-
-    \i \e{Minimum} The lowest value that value() can ever
-    return. Returned by minValue() and set by setRange() or one of the
-    constructors.
-
-    \i \e{Maximum} The highest value that value() can ever
-    return. Returned by maxValue() and set by setRange() or one of the
-    constructors.
-
-    \i \e{Line step} The smaller of two natural steps that
-    TQRangeControl provides and typically corresponds to the user
-    pressing an arrow key. The line step is returned by lineStep()
-    and set using setSteps(). The functions addLine() and
-    subtractLine() respectively increment and decrement the current
-    value by lineStep().
-
-    \i \e{Page step} The larger of two natural steps that
-    TQRangeControl provides and typically corresponds to the user
-    pressing PageUp or PageDown. The page step is returned by
-    pageStep() and set using setSteps(). The functions addPage() and
-    substractPage() respectively increment and decrement the current
-    value by pageStep().
-
-    \endlist
-
-    Unity (1) may be viewed as a third step size. setValue() lets you
-    set the current value to any integer in the allowed range, not
-    just minValue() + \e n * lineStep() for integer values of \e n.
-    Some widgets may allow the user to set any value at all; others
-    may just provide multiples of lineStep() or pageStep().
-
-    TQRangeControl provides three virtual functions that are well
-    suited for updating the on-screen representation of range controls
-    and emitting Q_SIGNALS: valueChange(), rangeChange() and
-    stepChange().
-
-    TQRangeControl also provides a function called bound() which lets
-    you force arbitrary integers to be within the allowed range of the
-    range control.
-
-    We recommend that all widgets that inherit TQRangeControl provide
-    at least a signal called valueChanged(); many widgets will want to
-    provide addStep(), addPage(), substractStep() and substractPage()
-    as Q_SLOTS.
-
-    Note that you must use multiple inheritance if you plan to
-    implement a widget using TQRangeControl because TQRangeControl is
-    not derived from TQWidget.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a range control with a minimum value of 0, maximum
-    value of 99, line step of 1, page step of 10 and initial value 0.
-*/
-
-TQRangeControl::TQRangeControl()
-{
-    minVal  = 0;
-    maxVal  = 99;
-    line    = 1;
-    page    = 10;
-    val	    = 0;
-    prevVal = -1;
-    d	    = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a range control whose value can never be smaller than
-    \a minValue or greater than \a maxValue, whose line step size is
-    \a lineStep and page step size is \a pageStep and whose value is
-    initially \a value (which is guaranteed to be in range using
-    bound()).
-*/
-
-TQRangeControl::TQRangeControl( int minValue, int maxValue,
-			      int lineStep, int pageStep,
-			      int value )
-{
-    minVal  = minValue;
-    maxVal  = maxValue;
-    line    = TQABS( lineStep );
-    page    = TQABS( pageStep );
-    prevVal = minVal - 1;
-    val	    = bound( value );
-    d	    = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the range control
-*/
-
-TQRangeControl::~TQRangeControl()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQRangeControl::value() const
-
-    Returns the current range control value. This is guaranteed to be
-    within the range [minValue(), maxValue()].
-
-    \sa setValue() prevValue()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQRangeControl::prevValue() const
-
-    Returns the previous value of the range control. "Previous value"
-    means the value before the last change occurred. Setting a new
-    range may affect the value, too, because the value is forced to be
-    inside the specified range. When the range control is initially
-    created, this is the same as value().
-
-    prevValue() can be outside the current legal range if a call to
-    setRange() causes the current value to change. For example, if the
-    range was [0, 1000] and the current value is 500, setRange(0, 400)
-    makes value() return 400 and prevValue() return 500.
-
-    \sa value() setRange()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Sets the range control's value to \a value and forces it to be
-    within the legal range.
-
-    Calls the virtual valueChange() function if the new value is
-    different from the previous value. The old value can still be
-    retrieved using prevValue().
-
-    \sa value()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::setValue( int value )
-{
-    directSetValue( value );
-    if ( prevVal != val )
-	valueChange();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the range control \a value directly without calling
-    valueChange().
-
-    Forces the new \a value to be within the legal range.
-
-    You will rarely have to call this function. However, if you want
-    to change the range control's value inside the overloaded method
-    valueChange(), setValue() would call the function valueChange()
-    again. To avoid this recursion you must use directSetValue()
-    instead.
-
-    \sa setValue()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::directSetValue(int value)
-{
-    prevVal = val;
-    val = bound( value );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Equivalent to \c{setValue( value() + pageStep() )}.
-
-    If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
-
-    \sa subtractPage() addLine() setValue()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::addPage()
-{
-    if (!sumOutOfRange(value(), pageStep()))
-        setValue(value() + pageStep());
-}
-
-/*!
-    Equivalent to \c{setValue( value() - pageStep() )}.
-
-    If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
-
-    \sa addPage() subtractLine() setValue()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::subtractPage()
-{
-    if (!sumOutOfRange(value(), -pageStep()))
-        setValue(value() - pageStep());
-}
-
-/*!
-    Equivalent to \c{setValue( value() + lineStep() )}.
-
-    If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
-
-    \sa subtractLine() addPage() setValue()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::addLine()
-{
-    if (!sumOutOfRange(value(), lineStep()))
-        setValue(value() + lineStep());
-}
-
-/*!
-    Equivalent to \c{setValue( value() - lineStep() )}.
-
-    If the value is changed, then valueChange() is called.
-
-    \sa addLine() subtractPage() setValue()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::subtractLine()
-{
-    if (!sumOutOfRange(value(), -lineStep()))
-        setValue(value() - lineStep());
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQRangeControl::minValue() const
-
-    Returns the minimum value of the range.
-
-    \sa setMinValue() setRange() maxValue()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQRangeControl::maxValue() const
-
-    Returns the maximum value of the range.
-
-    \sa setMaxValue() setRange() minValue()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Sets the minimum value of the range to \a minVal.
-
-    If necessary, the maxValue() is adjusted so that the range remains
-    valid.
-
-    \sa minValue() setMaxValue()
-*/
-void TQRangeControl::setMinValue( int minVal )
-{
-    int maxVal = maxValue();
-    if ( maxVal < minVal )
-	maxVal = minVal;
-    setRange( minVal, maxVal );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the minimum value of the range to \a maxVal.
-
-    If necessary, the minValue() is adjusted so that the range remains
-    valid.
-
-    \sa maxValue() setMinValue()
-*/
-void TQRangeControl::setMaxValue( int maxVal )
-{
-    int minVal = minValue();
-    if ( minVal > maxVal )
-	minVal = maxVal;
-    setRange( minVal, maxVal );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the range control's minimum value to \a minValue and its
-    maximum value to \a maxValue.
-
-    Calls the virtual rangeChange() function if one or both of the new
-    minimum and maximum values are different from the previous
-    setting. Calls the virtual valueChange() function if the current
-    value is adjusted because it was outside the new range.
-
-    If \a maxValue is smaller than \a minValue, \a minValue becomes
-    the only legal value.
-
-    \sa minValue() maxValue()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::setRange( int minValue, int maxValue )
-{
-    if ( minValue > maxValue ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_RANGE)
-	qWarning( "TQRangeControl::setRange: minValue %d > maxValue %d",
-		  minValue, maxValue );
-#endif
-	maxValue = minValue;
-    }
-    if ( minValue == minVal && maxValue == maxVal )
-	return;
-    minVal = minValue;
-    maxVal = maxValue;
-    int tmp = bound( val );
-    rangeChange();
-    if ( tmp != val ) {
-	prevVal = val;
-	val = tmp;
-	valueChange();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQRangeControl::lineStep() const
-
-    Returns the line step.
-
-    \sa setSteps() pageStep()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQRangeControl::pageStep() const
-
-    Returns the page step.
-
-    \sa setSteps() lineStep()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Sets the range's line step to \a lineStep and page step to \a
-    pageStep.
-
-    Calls the virtual stepChange() function if the new line step
-    or page step are different from the previous settings.
-
-    \sa lineStep() pageStep() setRange()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::setSteps( int lineStep, int pageStep )
-{
-    if ( lineStep != line || pageStep != page ) {
-	line = TQABS( lineStep );
-	page = TQABS( pageStep );
-	stepChange();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is called whenever the range control value
-    changes. You can reimplement it if you want to be notified when
-    the value changes. The default implementation does nothing.
-
-    Note that this method is called after the value has changed. The
-    previous value can be retrieved using prevValue().
-
-    \sa setValue(), addPage(), subtractPage(), addLine(),
-    subtractLine() rangeChange(), stepChange()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::valueChange()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is called whenever the range control's range
-    changes. You can reimplement it if you want to be notified when
-    the range changes. The default implementation does nothing.
-
-    Note that this method is called after the range has changed.
-
-    \sa setRange(), valueChange(), stepChange()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::rangeChange()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is called whenever the range control's
-    line or page step settings change. You can reimplement it if you
-    want to be notified when the step changes. The default
-    implementation does nothing.
-
-    Note that this method is called after a step setting has changed.
-
-    \sa setSteps(), rangeChange(), valueChange()
-*/
-
-void TQRangeControl::stepChange()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Forces the value \a v to be within the range from minValue() to
-    maxValue() inclusive, and returns the result.
-
-    This function is provided so that you can easily force other
-    numbers than value() into the allowed range. You do not need to
-    call it in order to use TQRangeControl itself.
-
-    \sa setValue() value() minValue() maxValue()
-*/
-
-int TQRangeControl::bound( int v ) const
-{
-    if ( v < minVal )
-	return minVal;
-    if ( v > maxVal )
-	return maxVal;
-    return v;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Converts \a logical_val to a pixel position. minValue() maps to 0,
-    maxValue() maps to \a span and other values are distributed evenly
-    in-between.
-
-    This function can handle the entire integer range without
-    overflow, providing \a span is \<= 4096.
-
-    Calling this method is useful when actually drawing a range
-    control such as a TQScrollBar on-screen.
-
-    \sa valueFromPosition()
-*/
-
-int TQRangeControl::positionFromValue( int logical_val, int span ) const
-{
-    if ( span <= 0 || logical_val < minValue() || maxValue() <= minValue() )
-	return 0;
-    if ( logical_val > maxValue() )
-	return span;
-
-    uint range = maxValue() - minValue();
-    uint p = logical_val - minValue();
-
-    if ( range > (uint)INT_MAX/4096 ) {
-	const int scale = 4096*2;
-	return ( (p/scale) * span ) / (range/scale);
-	// ### the above line is probably not 100% correct
-	// ### but fixing it isn't worth the extreme pain...
-    } else if ( range > (uint)span ) {
-	return (2*p*span + range) / (2*range);
-    } else {
-	uint div = span / range;
-	uint mod = span % range;
-	return p*div + (2*p*mod + range) / (2*range);
-    }
-    //equiv. to (p*span)/range + 0.5
-    // no overflow because of this implicit assumption:
-    // span <= 4096
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Converts the pixel position \a pos to a value. 0 maps to
-    minValue(), \a span maps to maxValue() and other values are
-    distributed evenly in-between.
-
-    This function can handle the entire integer range without
-    overflow.
-
-    Calling this method is useful if you actually implemented a range
-    control widget such as TQScrollBar and want to handle mouse press
-    events. This function then maps screen coordinates to the logical
-    values.
-
-    \sa positionFromValue()
-*/
-
-int TQRangeControl::valueFromPosition( int pos, int span ) const
-{
-    if ( span <= 0 || pos <= 0 )
-	return minValue();
-    if ( pos >= span )
-	return maxValue();
-
-    uint range = maxValue() - minValue();
-
-    if ( (uint)span > range )
-	return  minValue() + (2*pos*range + span) / (2*span);
-    else {
-	uint div = range / span;
-	uint mod = range % span;
-	return  minValue() + pos*div + (2*pos*mod + span) / (2*span);
-    }
-    // equiv. to minValue() + (pos*range)/span + 0.5
-    // no overflow because of this implicit assumption:
-    // pos <= span < sqrt(INT_MAX+0.0625)+0.25 ~ sqrt(INT_MAX)
-}
-
-static bool sumOutOfRange(int current, int add)
-{
-    if (add > 0 && INT_MAX - add < current) {
-        return true;
-    }
-    if (add < 0 && INT_MIN - add > current) {
-        return true;
-    }
-    return false;
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqrangecontrol.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqrangecontrol.h
deleted file mode 100644
index d1fb4d4..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqrangecontrol.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,195 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQRangeControl class
-**
-** Created : 940427
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQRANGECONTROL_H
-#define TQRANGECONTROL_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqglobal.h"
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RANGECONTROL
-
-
-class TQRangeControlPrivate;
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQRangeControl
-{
-public:
-    TQRangeControl();
-    TQRangeControl( int minValue, int maxValue,
-		   int lineStep, int pageStep, int value );
-    virtual ~TQRangeControl();
-    int		value()		const;
-    void	setValue( int );
-    void	addPage();
-    void	subtractPage();
-    void	addLine();
-    void	subtractLine();
-
-    int		minValue()	const;
-    int		maxValue()	const;
-    void	setRange( int minValue, int maxValue );
-    void	setMinValue( int minVal );
-    void	setMaxValue( int minVal );
-
-    int		lineStep()	const;
-    int		pageStep()	const;
-    void	setSteps( int line, int page );
-
-    int		bound( int ) const;
-
-protected:
-    int		positionFromValue( int val, int space ) const;
-    int		valueFromPosition( int pos, int space ) const;
-    void	directSetValue( int val );
-    int		prevValue()	const;
-
-    virtual void valueChange();
-    virtual void rangeChange();
-    virtual void stepChange();
-
-private:
-    int		minVal, maxVal;
-    int		line, page;
-    int		val, prevVal;
-
-    TQRangeControlPrivate * d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQRangeControl( const TQRangeControl & );
-    TQRangeControl &operator=( const TQRangeControl & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-inline int TQRangeControl::value() const
-{ return val; }
-
-inline int TQRangeControl::prevValue() const
-{ return prevVal; }
-
-inline int TQRangeControl::minValue() const
-{ return minVal; }
-
-inline int TQRangeControl::maxValue() const
-{ return maxVal; }
-
-inline int TQRangeControl::lineStep() const
-{ return line; }
-
-inline int TQRangeControl::pageStep() const
-{ return page; }
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_RANGECONTROL
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SPINWIDGET
-
-class TQSpinWidgetPrivate;
-class TQ_EXPORT TQSpinWidget : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQSpinWidget( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQSpinWidget();
-
-    void 	setEditWidget( TQWidget * widget );
-    TQWidget * 	editWidget();
-
-    TQRect upRect() const;
-    TQRect downRect() const;
-
-    void setUpEnabled( bool on );
-    void setDownEnabled( bool on );
-
-    bool isUpEnabled() const;
-    bool isDownEnabled() const;
-
-    enum ButtonSymbols { UpDownArrows, PlusMinus };
-    virtual void	setButtonSymbols( ButtonSymbols bs );
-    ButtonSymbols	buttonSymbols() const;
-
-    void arrange();
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void stepUpPressed();
-    void stepDownPressed();
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void stepUp();
-    void stepDown();
-
-protected:
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* ev );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    void wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * );
-#endif
-    void styleChange( TQStyle& );
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void enableChanged( bool old );
-    void windowActivationChange( bool );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void timerDone();
-    void timerDoneEx();
-
-private:
-    TQSpinWidgetPrivate * d;
-
-    void updateDisplay();
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQSpinWidget( const TQSpinWidget& );
-    TQSpinWidget& operator=( const TQSpinWidget& );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_SPINWIDGET
-
-#endif // TQRANGECONTROL_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 959ed28..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1072 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQScrollBar class
-**
-** Created : 940427
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqscrollbar.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SCROLLBAR
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-#include <tqcursor.h>
-#endif
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-#include <limits.h>
-
-/*!
-    \class TQScrollBar
-    \brief The TQScrollBar widget provides a vertical or horizontal scroll bar.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-
-    A scroll bar allows the user to control a value within a
-    program-definable range and gives users a visible indication of
-    the current value of a \link TQRangeControl range control \endlink.
-
-    Scroll bars include four separate controls:
-
-    \list
-
-    \i The \e line-up and \e line-down controls are little buttons
-    which the user can use to move one "line" up or down. The meaning
-    of line is configurable. In editors and list boxes it means one
-    line of text; in an image viewer it might mean 20 pixels.
-
-    \i The \e slider is the handle that indicates the current value of
-    the scroll bar, which the user can drag to change the value. This
-    part of the scroll bar is sometimes called the "thumb".
-
-    \i The \e page-up/page-down control is the area on which the
-    slider slides (the scroll bar's background). Clicking here moves
-    the scroll bar towards the click. The meaning of "page" is also
-    configurable: in editors and list boxes it means as many lines as
-    there is space for in the widget.
-
-    \endlist
-
-    TQScrollBar has very few of its own functions; it mostly relies on
-    TQRangeControl. The most useful functions are setValue() to set the
-    scroll bar directly to some value; addPage(), addLine(),
-    subtractPage(), and subtractLine() to simulate the effects of
-    clicking (useful for accelerator keys); setSteps() to define the
-    values of pageStep() and lineStep(); and setRange() to set the
-    minValue() and maxValue() of the scroll bar. TQScrollBar has a
-    convenience constructor with which you can set most of these
-    properties.
-
-    Some GUI styles (for example, the Windows and Motif styles
-    provided with TQt), also use the pageStep() value to calculate the
-    size of the slider.
-
-    In addition to the access functions from TQRangeControl, TQScrollBar
-    provides a comprehensive set of Q_SIGNALS:
-    \table
-    \header \i Signal \i Emitted when
-    \row \i \l valueChanged()
-	 \i the scroll bar's value has changed. The tracking()
-	    determines whether this signal is emitted during user
-	    interaction.
-    \row \i \l sliderPressed()
-	 \i the user starts to drag the slider.
-    \row \i \l sliderMoved()
-	 \i the user drags the slider.
-    \row \i \l sliderReleased()
-	 \i the user releases the slider.
-    \row \i \l nextLine()
-	 \i the scroll bar has moved one line down or right. Line is
-	    defined in TQRangeControl.
-    \row \i \l prevLine()
-	 \i the scroll bar has moved one line up or left.
-    \row \i \l nextPage()
-	 \i the scroll bar has moved one page down or right.
-    \row \i \l prevPage()
-	 \i the scroll bar has moved one page up or left.
-    \endtable
-
-    TQScrollBar only provides integer ranges. Note that although
-    TQScrollBar handles very large numbers, scroll bars on current
-    screens cannot usefully control ranges above about 100,000 pixels.
-    Beyond that, it becomes difficult for the user to control the
-    scroll bar using either the keyboard or the mouse.
-
-    A scroll bar can be controlled by the keyboard, but it has a
-    default focusPolicy() of \c NoFocus. Use setFocusPolicy() to
-    enable keyboard focus. See keyPressEvent() for a list of key
-    bindings.
-
-    If you need to add scroll bars to an interface, consider using the
-    TQScrollView class, which encapsulates the common uses for scroll
-    bars.
-
-    <img src=qscrbar-m.png> <img src=qscrbar-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQSlider TQSpinBox TQScrollView
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Scroll Bar\endlink
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollBar::valueChanged( int value )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the scroll bar value has changed, with
-    the new scroll bar \a value as an argument.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollBar::sliderPressed()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the
-    mouse.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollBar::sliderMoved( int value )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the slider is dragged by the user, with
-    the new scroll bar \a value as an argument.
-
-    This signal is emitted even when tracking is turned off.
-
-    \sa tracking() valueChanged() nextLine() prevLine() nextPage()
-    prevPage()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollBar::sliderReleased()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the
-    mouse.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollBar::nextLine()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one line down
-    or right.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollBar::prevLine()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one line up or
-    left.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollBar::nextPage()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one page down
-    or right.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollBar::prevPage()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the scroll bar scrolls one page up or
-    left.
-*/
-
-
-
-static const int thresholdTime = 500;
-static const int repeatTime	= 50;
-
-#define HORIZONTAL	(orientation() == Qt::Horizontal)
-#define VERTICAL	!HORIZONTAL
-#define MOTIF_BORDER	2
-#define SLIDER_MIN	9
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a vertical scroll bar.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-
-    The \c minValue defaults to 0, the \c maxValue to 99, with a \c
-    lineStep size of 1 and a \c pageStep size of 10, and an initial
-    \c value of 0.
-*/
-
-TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name ), orient( Qt::Vertical )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a scroll bar.
-
-    The \a orientation must be \c Qt::Vertical or \c Qt::Horizontal.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-
-    The \c minValue defaults to 0, the \c maxValue to 99, with a \c
-    lineStep size of 1 and a \c pageStep size of 10, and an initial
-    \c value of 0.
-*/
-
-TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( Qt::Orientation orientation, TQWidget *parent,
-			const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name ), orient( orientation )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a scroll bar whose value can never be smaller than \a
-    minValue or greater than \a maxValue, whose line step size is \a
-    lineStep and page step size is \a pageStep and whose value is
-    initially \a value (which is guaranteed to be in range using
-    bound()).
-
-    If \a orientation is \c Vertical the scroll bar is vertical and if
-    it is \c Horizontal the scroll bar is horizontal.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQScrollBar::TQScrollBar( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep,
-			int value,  Qt::Orientation orientation,
-			TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name ),
-      TQRangeControl( minValue, maxValue, lineStep, pageStep, value ),
-      orient( orientation )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destructor.
-*/
-TQScrollBar::~TQScrollBar()
-{
-}
-
-void TQScrollBar::init()
-{
-    track = TRUE;
-    sliderPos = 0;
-    pressedControl = TQStyle::SC_None;
-    clickedAt = FALSE;
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::NoFocus );
-
-    repeater = 0;
-
-    setBackgroundMode((TQt::BackgroundMode)
-		      tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode));
-
-    TQSizePolicy sp( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
-    if ( orient == Qt::Vertical )
-	sp.transpose();
-    tqsetSizePolicy( sp );
-    clearWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollBar::orientation
-    \brief the orientation of the scroll bar
-
-    The orientation must be \l Qt::Vertical (the default) or \l
-    Qt::Horizontal.
-*/
-
-void TQScrollBar::setOrientation( Qt::Orientation orientation )
-{
-    if ( orientation == orient )
-	return;
-    if ( !testWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy ) ) {
-	TQSizePolicy sp = tqsizePolicy();
-	sp.transpose();
-	tqsetSizePolicy( sp );
-	clearWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy );
-    }
-
-    orient = orientation;
-
-    positionSliderFromValue();
-    update();
-    updateGeometry();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollBar::tracking
-    \brief whether scroll bar tracking is enabled
-
-    If tracking is enabled (the default), the scroll bar emits the
-    valueChanged() signal while the slider is being dragged. If
-    tracking is disabled, the scroll bar emits the valueChanged()
-    signal only when the user releases the mouse button after moving
-    the slider.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollBar::draggingSlider
-    \brief whether the user has clicked the mouse on the slider and is currently dragging it
-*/
-
-bool TQScrollBar::draggingSlider() const
-{
-    return pressedControl == TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Reimplements the virtual function TQWidget::setPalette().
-
-    Sets the background color to the mid color for Motif style scroll
-    bars using palette \a p.
-*/
-
-void TQScrollBar::setPalette( const TQPalette &p )
-{
-    TQWidget::setPalette( p );
-    setBackgroundMode((TQt::BackgroundMode)
-		      tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode));
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp */
-TQSize TQScrollBar::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    int sbextent = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_ScrollBarExtent, this);
-
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	return TQSize( 30, sbextent );
-    } else {
-	return TQSize( sbextent, 30 );
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \fn void TQScrollBar::tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType, TQSizePolicy::SizeType, bool )
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQScrollBar::tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy sp )
-{
-    //## remove 4.0
-    TQWidget::tqsetSizePolicy( sp );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Implements the virtual TQRangeControl function.
-*/
-
-void TQScrollBar::valueChange()
-{
-    int tmp = sliderPos;
-    positionSliderFromValue();
-    if ( tmp != sliderPos && isVisible() )
-	tqdrawControls(TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddPage |
-		     TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubPage |
-		     TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider,
-		     pressedControl );
-    emit valueChanged(value());
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Implements the virtual TQRangeControl function.
-*/
-
-void TQScrollBar::stepChange()
-{
-    rangeChange();
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-  Implements the virtual TQRangeControl function.
-*/
-
-void TQScrollBar::rangeChange()
-{
-    positionSliderFromValue();
-
-    if ( isVisible() )
-	tqdrawControls(TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddLine |
-		     TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubLine |
-		     TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddPage |
-		     TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubPage |
-		     TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarFirst   |
-		     TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarLast    |
-		     TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider,
-		     pressedControl );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Handles timer events for the scroll bar.
-*/
-
-void TQScrollBar::doAutoRepeat()
-{
-    bool sendRepeat = clickedAt;
-#if !defined( TQT_NO_CURSOR ) && !defined( TQT_NO_STYLE )
-    if(sendRepeat && (pressedControl == TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddPage ||
-                      pressedControl == TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubPage) &&
-       tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_StopMouseOverSlider, this) &&
-       tqstyle().querySubControl(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this,
-                               mapFromGlobal(TQCursor::pos()) ) == TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider)
-        sendRepeat = FALSE;
-#endif
-    if ( sendRepeat ){
-        if ( repeater )
-            repeater->changeInterval( repeatTime );
-        action( (TQStyle::SubControl) pressedControl );
-        TQApplication::syncX();
-    } else {
-        stopAutoRepeat();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Starts the auto-repeat logic. Some time after this function is
-    called, the auto-repeat starts taking effect and from then on
-    repeats until stopAutoRepeat() is called.
-*/
-
-void TQScrollBar::startAutoRepeat()
-{
-    if ( !repeater ) {
-	repeater = new TQTimer( this, "auto-repeat timer" );
-	connect( repeater, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()),
-		 this, TQT_SLOT(doAutoRepeat()) );
-    }
-    repeater->start( thresholdTime, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Stops the auto-repeat logic.
-*/
-
-void TQScrollBar::stopAutoRepeat()
-{
-    delete repeater;
-    repeater = 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-void TQScrollBar::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e )
-{
-    static float offset = 0;
-    static TQScrollBar* offset_owner = 0;
-    if (offset_owner != this){
-	offset_owner = this;
-	offset = 0;
-    }
-    if ( e->orientation() != orient && !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains(e->pos()) )
-	return;
-    e->accept();
-    int step = TQMIN( TQApplication::wheelScrollLines()*lineStep(),
-		     pageStep() );
-    if ( ( e->state() & ControlButton ) || ( e->state() & ShiftButton ) )
-	step = pageStep();
-    offset += -e->delta()*step/120;
-    if (TQABS(offset)<1)
-	return;
-    setValue( value() + int(offset) );
-    offset -= int(offset);
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollBar::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    //   \list
-    //     \i Left/Right move a horizontal scrollbar by one line.
-    //     \i Up/Down move a vertical scrollbar by one line.
-    //     \i PageUp moves up one page.
-    //     \i PageDown moves down one page.
-    //     \i Home moves to the start (minValue()).
-    //     \i End moves to the end (maxValue()).
-    //   \endlist
-
-    //   Note that unless you call setFocusPolicy(), the default NoFocus
-    //   will apply and the user will not be able to use the keyboard to
-    //   interact with the scrollbar.
-    switch ( e->key() ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Left:
-	if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    subtractLine();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Right:
-	if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    addLine();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Up:
-	if ( orient == Qt::Vertical )
-	    subtractLine();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Down:
-	if ( orient == Qt::Vertical )
-	    addLine();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_PageUp:
-	subtractPage();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_PageDown:
-	addPage();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Home:
-	setValue( minValue() );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_End:
-	setValue( maxValue() );
-	break;
-    default:
-	e->ignore();
-	break;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollBar::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
-{
-    positionSliderFromValue();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollBar::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-{
-    TQPainter p( this );
-    tqdrawControls(TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddLine |
-		 TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubLine |
-		 TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddPage |
-		 TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubPage |
-		 TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarFirst   |
-		 TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarLast    |
-		 TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider,
-		 pressedControl, &p );
-}
-
-static TQCOORD sliderStartPos = 0;
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQScrollBar::contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e )
-{
-    if(clickedAt)
-	e->consume();
-    else
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollBar::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    bool midButtonAbsPos =
-	tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition,
-			  this);
-
-    if ( !(e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ||
-	   (midButtonAbsPos && e->button() == Qt::MidButton) ) )
-	return;
-
-    if ( maxValue() == minValue() ) // nothing to be done
-	return;
-
-    if ( e->state() & Qt::MouseButtonMask ) // another button was already pressed
-	return;
-
-    clickedAt	   = TRUE;
-    pressedControl = tqstyle().querySubControl(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this, e->pos() );
-
-    if ( (pressedControl == TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddPage ||
-	  pressedControl == TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubPage ||
-	  pressedControl == TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider ) &&
-	 ((midButtonAbsPos && e->button() == Qt::MidButton) ||
-	  (tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_LeftClickAbsolutePosition) && e->button() == Qt::LeftButton))) {
-
-	TQRect sr = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this,
-						  TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider ),
-	      gr = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this,
-						  TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarGroove );
-	int sliderMin, sliderMax, sliderLength;
-	sliderMin = sliderMax = sliderLength = 0;
-	if (HORIZONTAL) {
-	    sliderMin = gr.x();
-	    sliderMax = sliderMin + gr.width();
-	    sliderLength = sr.width();
-	} else {
-	    sliderMin = gr.y();
-	    sliderMax = sliderMin + gr.height();
-	    sliderLength = sr.height();
-	}
-
-	int newSliderPos = (HORIZONTAL ? e->pos().x() : e->pos().y())
-			   - sliderLength/2;
-	newSliderPos = TQMIN( newSliderPos, sliderMax - sliderLength );
-	newSliderPos = TQMAX( newSliderPos, sliderMin );
-	setValue( sliderPosToRangeValue(newSliderPos) );
-	sliderPos = newSliderPos;
-	pressedControl = TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider;
-    }
-
-    if ( pressedControl == TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider ) {
-	clickOffset = (TQCOORD)( (HORIZONTAL ? e->pos().x() : e->pos().y())
-				- sliderPos );
-	slidePrevVal   = value();
-	sliderStartPos = sliderPos;
-	tqdrawControls( pressedControl, pressedControl );
-	emit sliderPressed();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ScrollingStart );
-#endif
-    } else if ( pressedControl != TQStyle::SC_None ) {
-	tqdrawControls( pressedControl, pressedControl );
-	action( (TQStyle::SubControl) pressedControl );
-	startAutoRepeat();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollBar::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !clickedAt )
-	return;
-
-    if ( e->stateAfter() & Qt::MouseButtonMask ) // some other button is still pressed
-	return;
-
-    TQStyle::SubControl tmp = (TQStyle::SubControl) pressedControl;
-    clickedAt = FALSE;
-    stopAutoRepeat();
-    mouseMoveEvent( e );  // Might have moved since last mouse move event.
-    pressedControl = TQStyle::SC_None;
-
-    if (tmp == TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider) {
-	directSetValue( calculateValueFromSlider() );
-	emit sliderReleased();
-	if ( value() != prevValue() ) {
-	    emit valueChanged( value() );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-	}
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ScrollingEnd );
-#endif
-    }
-    tqdrawControls( tmp, pressedControl );
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::MidButton )
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollBar::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !isVisible() ) {
-	clickedAt = FALSE;
-	return;
-    }
-
-    bool mcab = tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_MiddleClickAbsolutePosition,
-				  this);
-    if ( ! clickedAt || ! (e->state() & Qt::LeftButton ||
-			   ((e->state() & Qt::MidButton) && mcab)))
-	return;
-
-    int newSliderPos;
-    if ( pressedControl == TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider ) {
-	TQRect gr = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this,
-						  TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarGroove ),
-	      sr = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this,
-						  TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider );
-	int sliderMin, sliderMax, sliderLength;
-
-	if (HORIZONTAL) {
-	    sliderLength = sr.width();
-	    sliderMin = gr.x();
-	    sliderMax = gr.right() - sliderLength + 1;
-	} else {
-	    sliderLength = sr.height();
-	    sliderMin = gr.y();
-	    sliderMax = gr.bottom() - sliderLength + 1;
-	}
-
-	TQRect r = rect();
-	int m = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_MaximumDragDistance, this);
-	if ( m >= 0 ) {
-	    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-		r.setRect( r.x() - m, r.y() - 2*m, r.width() + 2*m, r.height() + 4*m );
-	    else
-		r.setRect( r.x() - 2*m, r.y() - m, r.width() + 4*m, r.height() + 2*m );
-	    if (! r.contains( e->pos()))
-		newSliderPos = sliderStartPos;
-	    else
-		newSliderPos = (HORIZONTAL ? e->pos().x() :
-				e->pos().y()) -clickOffset;
-	} else
-	    newSliderPos = (HORIZONTAL ? e->pos().x() :
-			    e->pos().y()) -clickOffset;
-
-	if ( newSliderPos < sliderMin )
-	    newSliderPos = sliderMin;
-	else if ( newSliderPos > sliderMax )
-	    newSliderPos = sliderMax;
-	int newVal = sliderPosToRangeValue(newSliderPos);
-	if ( newVal != slidePrevVal )
-	    emit sliderMoved( newVal );
-	if ( track && newVal != value() ) {
-	    directSetValue( newVal ); // Set directly, painting done below
-	    emit valueChanged( value() );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-	}
-	slidePrevVal = newVal;
-	sliderPos = (TQCOORD)newSliderPos;
-	tqdrawControls( TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddPage |
-		      TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider  |
-		      TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubPage,
-		      pressedControl );
-    } else if (! tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_ScrollWhenPointerLeavesControl)) {
-	// stop scrolling when the mouse pointer leaves a control
-	// similar to push buttons
-	if ( pressedControl != (uint)tqstyle().querySubControl(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this, e->pos() ) ) {
-	    tqdrawControls( pressedControl, TQStyle::SC_None );
-	    stopAutoRepeat();
-	} else if ( !repeater ) {
-	    tqdrawControls( pressedControl, pressedControl );
-	    action( (TQStyle::SubControl) pressedControl );
-	    startAutoRepeat();
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQScrollBar::sliderStart() const
-
-    Returns the pixel position where the scroll bar slider starts.
-
-    This is equivalent to sliderRect().y() for vertical scroll bars or
-    sliderRect().x() for horizontal scroll bars.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Returns the scroll bar slider rectangle.
-
-    \sa sliderStart()
-*/
-
-TQRect TQScrollBar::sliderRect() const
-{
-    return tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this,
-					  TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider );
-}
-
-void TQScrollBar::positionSliderFromValue()
-{
-    sliderPos = (TQCOORD)rangeValueToSliderPos( value() );
-}
-
-int TQScrollBar::calculateValueFromSlider() const
-{
-    return sliderPosToRangeValue( sliderPos );
-}
-
-int TQScrollBar::rangeValueToSliderPos( int v ) const
-{
-    TQRect gr = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this,
-					      TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarGroove );
-    TQRect sr = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this,
-					      TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider );
-    int sliderMin, sliderMax, sliderLength;
-
-    if (HORIZONTAL) {
-	sliderLength = sr.width();
-	sliderMin = gr.x();
-	sliderMax = gr.right() - sliderLength + 1;
-    } else {
-	sliderLength = sr.height();
-	sliderMin = gr.y();
-	sliderMax = gr.bottom() - sliderLength + 1;
-    }
-
-    return positionFromValue( v, sliderMax-sliderMin ) + sliderMin;
-}
-
-int TQScrollBar::sliderPosToRangeValue( int pos ) const
-{
-    TQRect gr = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this,
-					      TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarGroove );
-    TQRect sr = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, this,
-					      TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSlider );
-    int sliderMin, sliderMax, sliderLength;
-
-    if (HORIZONTAL) {
-	sliderLength = sr.width();
-	sliderMin = gr.x();
-	sliderMax = gr.right() - sliderLength + 1;
-    } else {
-	sliderLength = sr.height();
-	sliderMin = gr.y();
-	sliderMax = gr.bottom() - sliderLength + 1;
-    }
-
-    return  valueFromPosition( pos - sliderMin, sliderMax - sliderMin );
-}
-
-
-void TQScrollBar::action( int control )
-{
-    switch( control ) {
-    case TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddLine:
-	addLine();
-	emit nextLine();
-	break;
-    case TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubLine:
-	subtractLine();
-	emit prevLine();
-	break;
-    case TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarAddPage:
-	addPage();
-	emit nextPage();
-	break;
-    case TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarSubPage:
-	subtractPage();
-	emit prevPage();
-	break;
-    case TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarFirst:
-	setValue( minValue() );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-	emit valueChanged( minValue() );
-	break;
-    case TQStyle::SC_ScrollBarLast:
-	setValue( maxValue() );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-	emit valueChanged( maxValue() );
-	break;
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-}
-
-
-void TQScrollBar::tqdrawControls( uint controls, uint activeControl ) const
-{
-    TQPainter p ( this );
-    tqdrawControls( controls, activeControl, &p );
-}
-
-
-void TQScrollBar::tqdrawControls( uint controls, uint activeControl,
-			       TQPainter *p ) const
-{
-    if ( !isUpdatesEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Horizontal;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl(TQStyle::CC_ScrollBar, p, this, rect(), tqcolorGroup(),
-			       flags, (TQStyle::SubControl) controls,
-			       (TQStyle::SubControl) activeControl );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollBar::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    positionSliderFromValue();
-    setBackgroundMode((TQt::BackgroundMode)
-		      tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ScrollBar_BackgroundMode));
-    TQWidget::styleChange( old );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollBar::minValue
-    \brief the scroll bar's minimum value
-
-    When setting this property, the \l TQScrollBar::maxValue is
-    adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-int TQScrollBar::minValue() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::minValue();
-}
-
-void TQScrollBar::setMinValue( int minVal )
-{
-    TQRangeControl::setMinValue( minVal );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollBar::maxValue
-    \brief the scroll bar's maximum value
-
-    When setting this property, the \l TQScrollBar::minValue is
-    adjusted if necessary to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-int TQScrollBar::maxValue() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::maxValue();
-}
-
-void TQScrollBar::setMaxValue( int maxVal )
-{
-    TQRangeControl::setMaxValue( maxVal );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollBar::lineStep
-    \brief the line step
-
-    When setting lineStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
-    called if the new line step is different from the previous
-    setting.
-
-    \sa setSteps() TQRangeControl::pageStep() setRange()
-*/
-
-int TQScrollBar::lineStep() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::lineStep();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollBar::pageStep
-    \brief the page step
-
-    When setting pageStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
-    called if the new page step is different from the previous
-    setting.
-
-    \sa TQRangeControl::setSteps() setLineStep() setRange()
-*/
-
-int TQScrollBar::pageStep() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::pageStep();
-}
-
-void TQScrollBar::setLineStep( int i )
-{
-    setSteps( i, pageStep() );
-}
-
-void TQScrollBar::setPageStep( int i )
-{
-    setSteps( lineStep(), i );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollBar::value
-    \brief the scroll bar's value
-
-    \sa TQRangeControl::value() prevValue()
-*/
-
-int TQScrollBar::value() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::value();
-}
-
-void TQScrollBar::setValue( int i )
-{
-    TQRangeControl::setValue( i );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This function is called when the scrollbar is hidden.
-*/
-void TQScrollBar::hideEvent( TQHideEvent* )
-{
-    pressedControl = TQStyle::SC_None;
-    clickedAt = FALSE;
-}
-
-
-#undef ADD_LINE_ACTIVE
-#undef SUB_LINE_ACTIVE
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 2d634bd..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollbar.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,198 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQScrollBar class
-**
-** Created : 940427
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQSCROLLBAR_H
-#define TQSCROLLBAR_H
-
-class TQTimer;
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqrangecontrol.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SCROLLBAR
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQScrollBar : public TQWidget, public TQRangeControl
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( int minValue READ minValue WRITE setMinValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int maxValue READ maxValue WRITE setMaxValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int lineStep READ lineStep WRITE setLineStep )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int pageStep READ pageStep WRITE setPageStep )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int value READ value WRITE setValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool tracking READ tracking WRITE setTracking )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool draggingSlider READ draggingSlider )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Orientation orientation READ orientation WRITE setOrientation )
-
-public:
-    TQScrollBar( TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 );
-    TQScrollBar( Qt::Orientation, TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 );
-    TQScrollBar( int minValue, int maxValue, int lineStep, int pageStep,
-		int value, Qt::Orientation, TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 );
-    ~TQScrollBar();
-
-    virtual void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation );
-    Qt::Orientation orientation() const;
-    virtual void setTracking( bool enable );
-    bool	tracking() const;
-    bool	draggingSlider() const;
-
-    virtual void setPalette( const TQPalette & );
-    virtual TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    virtual void tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy sp );
-    void tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE );
-
-    int	 minValue() const;
-    int	 maxValue() const;
-    void setMinValue( int );
-    void setMaxValue( int );
-    int	 lineStep() const;
-    int	 pageStep() const;
-    void setLineStep( int );
-    void setPageStep( int );
-    int  value() const;
-
-    int		sliderStart() const;
-    TQRect	sliderRect() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void setValue( int );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void	valueChanged( int value );
-    void	sliderPressed();
-    void	sliderMoved( int value );
-    void	sliderReleased();
-    void	nextLine();
-    void	prevLine();
-    void	nextPage();
-    void	prevPage();
-
-protected:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    void 	wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * );
-#endif
-    void	keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * );
-    void	resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void	paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-
-    void	mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * );
-    void	hideEvent( TQHideEvent* );
-
-    void	valueChange();
-    void	stepChange();
-    void	rangeChange();
-
-    void	styleChange( TQStyle& );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void doAutoRepeat();
-
-private:
-    void init();
-    void positionSliderFromValue();
-    int calculateValueFromSlider() const;
-
-    void startAutoRepeat();
-    void stopAutoRepeat();
-
-    int rangeValueToSliderPos( int val ) const;
-    int sliderPosToRangeValue( int val ) const;
-
-    void action( int control );
-
-    void tqdrawControls( uint controls, uint activeControl ) const;
-    void tqdrawControls( uint controls, uint activeControl,
-		       TQPainter *p ) const;
-
-    uint pressedControl;
-    bool track;
-    bool clickedAt;
-    Qt::Orientation orient;
-
-    int slidePrevVal;
-    TQCOORD sliderPos;
-    TQCOORD clickOffset;
-
-    TQTimer * repeater;
-    void * d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQScrollBar( const TQScrollBar & );
-    TQScrollBar &operator=( const TQScrollBar & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-inline void TQScrollBar::setTracking( bool t )
-{
-    track = t;
-}
-
-inline bool TQScrollBar::tracking() const
-{
-    return track;
-}
-
-inline Qt::Orientation TQScrollBar::orientation() const
-{
-    return orient;
-}
-
-inline int TQScrollBar::sliderStart() const
-{
-    return sliderPos;
-}
-
-inline void TQScrollBar::tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw )
-{
-    TQWidget::tqsetSizePolicy( hor, ver, hfw );
-}
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_SCROLLBAR
-
-#endif // TQSCROLLBAR_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index f2dbfd6..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2854 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQScrollView class
-**
-** Created : 950524
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SCROLLVIEW
-#include "tqscrollbar.h"
-#include "tqobjectlist.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqfocusdata.h"
-#include "tqscrollview.h"
-#include "tqptrdict.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqlistview.h"
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MAC
-# include "tqt_mac.h"
-#endif
-
-static const int coord_limit = 4000;
-static const int autoscroll_margin = 16;
-static const int initialScrollTime = 30;
-static const int initialScrollAccel = 5;
-
-struct TQSVChildRec {
-    TQSVChildRec(TQWidget* c, int xx, int yy) :
-        child(c),
-        x(xx), y(yy)
-    {
-    }
-
-    void hideOrShow(TQScrollView* sv, TQWidget* clipped_viewport);
-    void moveTo(TQScrollView* sv, int xx, int yy, TQWidget* clipped_viewport)
-    {
-        if ( x != xx || y != yy ) {
-            x = xx;
-            y = yy;
-            hideOrShow(sv,clipped_viewport);
-        }
-    }
-    TQWidget* child;
-    int x, y;
-};
-
-void TQSVChildRec::hideOrShow(TQScrollView* sv, TQWidget* clipped_viewport)
-{
-    if ( clipped_viewport ) {
-	if ( x+child->width() < sv->contentsX()+clipped_viewport->x()
-	     || x > sv->contentsX()+clipped_viewport->width()
-	     || y+child->height() < sv->contentsY()+clipped_viewport->y()
-	     || y > sv->contentsY()+clipped_viewport->height() ) {
-	    child->move(clipped_viewport->width(),
-			clipped_viewport->height());
-	} else {
-	    child->move(x-sv->contentsX()-clipped_viewport->x(),
-			y-sv->contentsY()-clipped_viewport->y());
-	}
-    } else {
-	child->move(x-sv->contentsX(), y-sv->contentsY());
-    }
-}
-
-class TQViewportWidget : public TQWidget
-{
-    TQ_OBJECT
-
-public:
-    TQViewportWidget( TQScrollView* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 )
-	: TQWidget( parent, name, f ) {}
-};
-
-class TQClipperWidget : public TQWidget
-{
-    TQ_OBJECT
-
-public:
-    TQClipperWidget( TQWidget * parent=0, const char * name=0, WFlags f=0 )
-        : TQWidget ( parent,name,f) {}
-};
-
-#include "tqscrollview.tqmoc"
-
-class TQScrollViewData {
-public:
-    TQScrollViewData(TQScrollView* parent, int vpwflags) :
-        hbar( new TQScrollBar( Qt::Horizontal, parent, "qt_hbar" ) ),
-        vbar( new TQScrollBar( Qt::Vertical, parent, "qt_vbar" ) ),
-        viewport( new TQViewportWidget( parent, "qt_viewport", (WFlags)vpwflags ) ),
-        clipped_viewport( 0 ),
-        flags( vpwflags ),
-        vx( 0 ), vy( 0 ), vwidth( 1 ), vheight( 1 ),
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-        autoscroll_timer( parent, "scrollview autoscroll timer" ),
-	drag_autoscroll( TRUE ),
-#endif
-	scrollbar_timer( parent, "scrollview scrollbar timer" ),
-        inresize( FALSE ), use_cached_size_hint( TRUE )
-    {
-	l_marg = r_marg = t_marg = b_marg = 0;
-	viewport->polish();
-	viewport->setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteDark );
-	viewport->setBackgroundOrigin( TQWidget::WidgetOrigin );
-	vMode = TQScrollView::Auto;
-	hMode = TQScrollView::Auto;
-	corner = 0;
-	defaultCorner = new TQWidget( parent, "qt_default_corner" );
-	defaultCorner->hide();
-	vbar->setSteps( 20, 1/*set later*/ );
-	hbar->setSteps( 20, 1/*set later*/ );
-	policy = TQScrollView::Default;
-	signal_choke = FALSE;
-	static_bg = FALSE;
-	fake_scroll = FALSE;
-	hbarPressed = FALSE;
-	vbarPressed = FALSE;
-    }
-    ~TQScrollViewData();
-
-    TQSVChildRec* rec(TQWidget* w) { return childDict.find(w); }
-    TQSVChildRec* ancestorRec(TQWidget* w);
-    TQSVChildRec* addChildRec(TQWidget* w, int x, int y )
-    {
-        TQSVChildRec *r = new TQSVChildRec(w,x,y);
-        tqchildren.append(r);
-        childDict.insert(w, r);
-        return r;
-    }
-    void deleteChildRec(TQSVChildRec* r)
-    {
-        childDict.remove(r->child);
-        tqchildren.removeRef(r);
-        delete r;
-    }
-
-    void hideOrShowAll(TQScrollView* sv, bool isScroll = FALSE );
-    void moveAllBy(int dx, int dy);
-    bool anyVisibleChildren();
-    void autoMove(TQScrollView* sv);
-    void autoResize(TQScrollView* sv);
-    void autoRetqsizeHint(TQScrollView* sv);
-    void viewportResized( int w, int h );
-
-    TQScrollBar*  hbar;
-    TQScrollBar*  vbar;
-    bool hbarPressed;
-    bool vbarPressed;
-    TQViewportWidget*	viewport;
-    TQClipperWidget*	clipped_viewport;
-    int         flags;
-    TQPtrList<TQSVChildRec>       tqchildren;
-    TQPtrDict<TQSVChildRec>       childDict;
-    TQWidget*    corner, *defaultCorner;
-    int         vx, vy, vwidth, vheight; // for drawContents-style usage
-    int         l_marg, r_marg, t_marg, b_marg;
-    TQScrollView::ResizePolicy policy;
-    TQScrollView::ScrollBarMode  vMode;
-    TQScrollView::ScrollBarMode  hMode;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    TQPoint cpDragStart;
-    TQTimer autoscroll_timer;
-    int autoscroll_time;
-    int autoscroll_accel;
-    bool drag_autoscroll;
-#endif
-    TQTimer scrollbar_timer;
-
-    uint static_bg : 1;
-    uint fake_scroll : 1;
-
-    // This variable allows ensureVisible to move the contents then
-    // update both the sliders.  Otherwise, updating the sliders would
-    // cause two image scrolls, creating ugly flashing.
-    //
-    uint signal_choke : 1;
-
-    // This variables indicates in updateScrollBars() that we are
-    // in a resizeEvent() and thus don't want to flash scrollbars
-    uint inresize : 1;
-    uint use_cached_size_hint : 1;
-    TQSize cachedSizeHint;
-
-    inline int contentsX() const { return -vx; }
-    inline int contentsY() const { return -vy; }
-    inline int contentsWidth() const { return vwidth; }
-};
-
-inline TQScrollViewData::~TQScrollViewData()
-{
-    tqchildren.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-}
-
-TQSVChildRec* TQScrollViewData::ancestorRec(TQWidget* w)
-{
-    if ( clipped_viewport ) {
-	while (w->parentWidget() != clipped_viewport) {
-	    w = w->parentWidget();
-	    if (!w) return 0;
-	}
-    } else {
-	while (w->parentWidget() != viewport) {
-	    w = w->parentWidget();
-	    if (!w) return 0;
-	}
-    }
-    return rec(w);
-}
-
-void TQScrollViewData::hideOrShowAll(TQScrollView* sv, bool isScroll )
-{
-    if ( !clipped_viewport )
-	return;
-    if ( clipped_viewport->x() <= 0
-	 && clipped_viewport->y() <= 0
-	 && clipped_viewport->width()+clipped_viewport->x() >=
-	 viewport->width()
-	 && clipped_viewport->height()+clipped_viewport->y() >=
-	 viewport->height() ) {
-	// clipped_viewport still covers viewport
-	if( static_bg )
-	    clipped_viewport->tqrepaint( TRUE );
-	else if ( ( !isScroll && !clipped_viewport->testWFlags( TQt::WStaticContents) )
-		  || static_bg )
-	    TQApplication::postEvent( clipped_viewport,
-		     new TQPaintEvent( clipped_viewport->clipRegion(),
-			      !clipped_viewport->testWFlags(TQt::WResizeNoErase) ) );
-    } else {
-	// Re-center
-	int nx = ( viewport->width() - clipped_viewport->width() ) / 2;
-	int ny = ( viewport->height() - clipped_viewport->height() ) / 2;
-	clipped_viewport->move(nx,ny);
-        clipped_viewport->update();
-    }
-    for (TQSVChildRec *r = tqchildren.first(); r; r=tqchildren.next()) {
-	r->hideOrShow(sv, clipped_viewport);
-    }
-}
-
-void TQScrollViewData::moveAllBy(int dx, int dy)
-{
-    if ( clipped_viewport && !static_bg ) {
-	clipped_viewport->move( clipped_viewport->x()+dx,
-				clipped_viewport->y()+dy );
-    } else {
-	for (TQSVChildRec *r = tqchildren.first(); r; r=tqchildren.next()) {
-	    r->child->move(r->child->x()+dx,r->child->y()+dy);
-	}
-	if ( static_bg )
-	    viewport->tqrepaint( TRUE );
-    }
-}
-
-bool TQScrollViewData::anyVisibleChildren()
-{
-    for (TQSVChildRec *r = tqchildren.first(); r; r=tqchildren.next()) {
-	if (r->child->isVisible()) return TRUE;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-void TQScrollViewData::autoMove(TQScrollView* sv)
-{
-    if ( policy == TQScrollView::AutoOne ) {
-	TQSVChildRec* r = tqchildren.first();
-	if (r)
-	    sv->setContentsPos(-r->child->x(),-r->child->y());
-    }
-}
-
-void TQScrollViewData::autoResize(TQScrollView* sv)
-{
-    if ( policy == TQScrollView::AutoOne ) {
-	TQSVChildRec* r = tqchildren.first();
-	if (r)
-	    sv->resizeContents(r->child->width(),r->child->height());
-    }
-}
-
-void TQScrollViewData::autoRetqsizeHint(TQScrollView* sv)
-{
-    if ( policy == TQScrollView::AutoOne ) {
-	TQSVChildRec* r = tqchildren.first();
-	if (r) {
-	    TQSize s = r->child->tqsizeHint();
-	    if ( s.isValid() )
-		r->child->resize(s);
-	}
-    } else if ( policy == TQScrollView::AutoOneFit ) {
-	TQSVChildRec* r = tqchildren.first();
-	if (r) {
-	    TQSize sh = r->child->tqsizeHint();
-	    sh = sh.boundedTo( r->child->tqmaximumSize() );
-	    sv->resizeContents( sh.width(), sh.height() );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-void TQScrollViewData::viewportResized( int w, int h )
-{
-    if ( policy == TQScrollView::AutoOneFit ) {
-	TQSVChildRec* r = tqchildren.first();
-	if (r) {
-	    TQSize sh = r->child->tqsizeHint();
-	    sh = sh.boundedTo( r->child->tqmaximumSize() );
-	    r->child->resize( TQMAX(w,sh.width()), TQMAX(h,sh.height()) );
-	}
-
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQScrollView tqscrollview.h
-    \brief The TQScrollView widget provides a scrolling area with on-demand scroll bars.
-
-    \ingroup abstractwidgets
-    \mainclass
-
-    The TQScrollView is a large canvas - potentially larger than the
-    coordinate system normally supported by the underlying window
-    system. This is important because it is quite easy to go beyond
-    these limitations (e.g. many web pages are more than 32000 pixels
-    high). Additionally, the TQScrollView can have TQWidgets positioned
-    on it that scroll around with the drawn content. These sub-widgets
-    can also have positions outside the normal coordinate range (but
-    they are still limited in size).
-
-    To provide content for the widget, inherit from TQScrollView,
-    reimplement drawContents() and use resizeContents() to set the
-    size of the viewed area. Use addChild() and moveChild() to
-    position widgets on the view.
-
-    To use TQScrollView effectively it is important to understand its
-    widget structure in the three styles of use: a single large child
-    widget, a large panning area with some widgets and a large panning
-    area with many widgets.
-
-    \section1 Using One Big Widget
-
-    \img qscrollview-vp2.png
-
-    The first, simplest usage of TQScrollView (depicted above), is
-    appropriate for scrolling areas that are never more than about
-    4000 pixels in either dimension (this is about the maximum
-    reliable size on X11 servers). In this usage, you just make one
-    large child in the TQScrollView. The child should be a child of the
-    viewport() of the scrollview and be added with addChild():
-    \code
-	TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...);
-	TQVBox* big_box = new TQVBox(sv->viewport());
-	sv->addChild(big_box);
-    \endcode
-    You can go on to add arbitrary child widgets to the single child
-    in the scrollview as you would with any widget:
-    \code
-	TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", big_box);
-	TQLabel* child2 = new TQLabel("CHILD", big_box);
-	TQLabel* child3 = new TQLabel("CHILD", big_box);
-	...
-    \endcode
-
-    Here the TQScrollView has four tqchildren: the viewport(), the
-    verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small
-    cornerWidget(). The viewport() has one child: the big TQVBox. The
-    TQVBox has the three TQLabel objects as child widgets. When the view
-    is scrolled, the TQVBox is moved; its tqchildren move with it as
-    child widgets normally do.
-
-    \section1 Using a Very Big View with Some Widgets
-
-    \img qscrollview-vp.png
-
-    The second usage of TQScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate
-    when few, if any, widgets are on a very large scrolling area that
-    is potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In
-    this usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area
-    and reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You may also
-    add some widgets by making them tqchildren of the viewport() and
-    adding them with addChild() (this is the same as the process for
-    the single large widget in the previous example):
-    \code
-	TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...);
-	TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-	sv->addChild(child1);
-	TQLabel* child2 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-	sv->addChild(child2);
-	TQLabel* child3 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-	sv->addChild(child3);
-    \endcode
-    Here, the TQScrollView has the same four tqchildren: the viewport(),
-    the verticalScrollBar(), the horizontalScrollBar() and a small
-    cornerWidget(). The viewport() has the three TQLabel objects as
-    child widgets. When the view is scrolled, the scrollview moves the
-    child widgets individually.
-
-    \section1 Using a Very Big View with Many Widgets
-
-    \target enableclipper
-    \img qscrollview-cl.png
-
-    The final usage of TQScrollView (depicted above) is appropriate
-    when many widgets are on a very large scrolling area that is
-    potentially larger than 4000 pixels in either dimension. In this
-    usage you call resizeContents() to set the size of the area and
-    reimplement drawContents() to paint the contents. You then call
-    enableClipper(TRUE) and add widgets, again by making them tqchildren
-    of the viewport(), and adding them with addChild():
-    \code
-	TQScrollView* sv = new TQScrollView(...);
-	sv->enableClipper(TRUE);
-	TQLabel* child1 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-	sv->addChild(child1);
-	TQLabel* child2 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-	sv->addChild(child2);
-	TQLabel* child3 = new TQLabel("CHILD", sv->viewport());
-	sv->addChild(child3);
-    \endcode
-
-    Here, the TQScrollView has four tqchildren:  the clipper() (not the
-    viewport() this time), the verticalScrollBar(), the
-    horizontalScrollBar() and a small cornerWidget(). The clipper()
-    has one child: the viewport(). The viewport() has the same three
-    labels as child widgets. When the view is scrolled the viewport()
-    is moved; its tqchildren move with it as child widgets normally do.
-
-    \target allviews
-    \section1 Details Relevant for All Views
-
-    Normally you will use the first or third method if you want any
-    child widgets in the view.
-
-    Note that the widget you see in the scrolled area is the
-    viewport() widget, not the TQScrollView itself. So to turn mouse
-    tracking on, for example, use viewport()->setMouseTracking(TRUE).
-
-    To enable drag-and-drop, you would setAcceptDrops(TRUE) on the
-    TQScrollView (because drag-and-drop events propagate to the
-    parent). But to work out the logical position in the view, you
-    would need to map the drop co-ordinate from being relative to the
-    TQScrollView to being relative to the contents; use the function
-    viewportToContents() for this.
-
-    To handle mouse events on the scrolling area, subclass scrollview
-    as you would subclass other widgets, but rather than
-    reimplementing mousePressEvent(), reimplement
-    contentsMousePressEvent() instead. The contents specific event
-    handlers provide translated events in the coordinate system of the
-    scrollview. If you reimplement mousePressEvent(), you'll get
-    called only when part of the TQScrollView is clicked: and the only
-    such part is the "corner" (if you don't set a cornerWidget()) and
-    the frame; everything else is covered up by the viewport, clipper
-    or scroll bars.
-
-    When you construct a TQScrollView, some of the widget flags apply
-    to the viewport() instead of being sent to the TQWidget constructor
-    for the TQScrollView. This applies to \c WNoAutoErase, \c
-    WStaticContents, and \c WPaintClever. See \l TQt::WidgetFlags for
-    documentation about these flags. Here are some examples:
-
-    \list
-
-    \i An image-manipulation widget would use \c
-    WNoAutoErase|WStaticContents because the widget draws all pixels
-    itself, and when its size increases, it only needs a paint event
-    for the new part because the old part remains unchanged.
-
-    \i A scrolling game widget in which the background scrolls as the
-    characters move might use \c WNoAutoErase (in addition to \c
-    WStaticContents) so that the window system background does not
-    flash in and out during scrolling.
-
-    \i A word processing widget might use \c WNoAutoErase and tqrepaint
-    itself line by line to get a less-flickery resizing. If the widget
-    is in a mode in which no text justification can take place, it
-    might use \c WStaticContents too, so that it would only get a
-    tqrepaint for the newly visible parts.
-
-    \endlist
-
-    Child widgets may be moved using addChild() or moveChild(). Use
-    childX() and childY() to get the position of a child widget.
-
-    A widget may be placed in the corner between the vertical and
-    horizontal scrollbars with setCornerWidget(). You can get access
-    to the scrollbars using horizontalScrollBar() and
-    verticalScrollBar(), and to the viewport with viewport(). The
-    scroll view can be scrolled using scrollBy(), ensureVisible(),
-    setContentsPos() or center().
-
-    The visible area is given by visibleWidth() and visibleHeight(),
-    and the contents area by contentsWidth() and contentsHeight(). The
-    contents may be repainted using one of the repaintContents() or
-    updateContents() functions.
-
-    Coordinate conversion is provided by contentsToViewport() and
-    viewportToContents().
-
-    The contentsMoving() signal is emitted just before the contents
-    are moved to a new position.
-
-    \warning TQScrollView currently does not erase the background when
-    resized, i.e. you must always clear the background manually in
-    scrollview subclasses. This will change in a future version of TQt
-    and we recommend specifying the WNoAutoErase flag explicitly.
-
-    <img src=qscrollview-m.png> <img src=qscrollview-w.png>
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQScrollView::ResizePolicy
-
-    This enum type is used to control a TQScrollView's reaction to
-    resize events.
-
-    \value Default  the TQScrollView selects one of the other settings
-    automatically when it has to. In this version of TQt, TQScrollView
-    changes to \c Manual if you resize the contents with
-    resizeContents() and to \c AutoOne if a child is added.
-
-    \value Manual  the contents stays the size set by resizeContents().
-
-    \value AutoOne  if there is only one child widget the contents stays
-    the size of that widget. Otherwise the behavior is undefined.
-
-    \value AutoOneFit if there is only one child widget the contents stays
-    the size of that widget's tqsizeHint(). If the scrollview is resized
-    larger than the child's tqsizeHint(), the child will be resized to
-    fit. If there is more than one child, the behavior is undefined.
-
-*/
-//####  The widget will be resized to its tqsizeHint() when a LayoutHint event
-//#### is received
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a TQScrollView called \a name with parent \a parent and
-    widget flags \a f.
-
-    The widget flags \c WStaticContents, \c WNoAutoErase and \c
-    WPaintClever are propagated to the viewport() widget. The other
-    widget flags are propagated to the parent constructor as usual.
-*/
-
-TQScrollView::TQScrollView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f ) :
-    TQFrame( parent, name, f & (~TQt::WStaticContents) & (~TQt::WResizeNoErase) )
-{
-    WFlags flags = (WFlags)(TQt::WResizeNoErase | (f&TQt::WPaintClever) | (f&WRepaintNoErase) | (f&TQt::WStaticContents));
-    d = new TQScrollViewData( this, flags );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    connect( &d->autoscroll_timer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-             this, TQT_SLOT( doDragAutoScroll() ) );
-#endif
-
-    connect( d->hbar, TQT_SIGNAL( valueChanged(int) ),
-        this, TQT_SLOT( hslide(int) ) );
-    connect( d->vbar, TQT_SIGNAL( valueChanged(int) ),
-        this, TQT_SLOT( vslide(int) ) );
-
-    connect( d->hbar, TQT_SIGNAL(sliderPressed()), this, TQT_SLOT(hbarIsPressed()) );
-    connect( d->hbar, TQT_SIGNAL(sliderReleased()), this, TQT_SLOT(hbarIsReleased()) );
-    connect( d->vbar, TQT_SIGNAL(sliderPressed()), this, TQT_SLOT(vbarIsPressed()) );
-    connect( d->vbar, TQT_SIGNAL(sliderReleased()), this, TQT_SLOT(vbarIsReleased()) );
-
-
-    d->viewport->installEventFilter( this );
-
-    connect( &d->scrollbar_timer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-             this, TQT_SLOT( updateScrollBars() ) );
-
-    setFrameStyle( TQFrame::StyledPanel | TQFrame::Sunken );
-    setLineWidth( tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth, this) );
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Expanding ) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the TQScrollView. Any tqchildren added with addChild() will
-    be deleted.
-*/
-TQScrollView::~TQScrollView()
-{
-    // Be careful not to get all those useless events...
-    if ( d->clipped_viewport )
-        d->clipped_viewport->removeEventFilter( this );
-    else
-        d->viewport->removeEventFilter( this );
-
-    // order is important
-    // ~TQWidget may cause a WM_ERASEBKGND on Windows
-    delete d->vbar;
-    d->vbar = 0;
-    delete d->hbar;
-    d->hbar = 0;
-    delete d->viewport;
-    d->viewport = 0;
-    delete d;
-    d = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollView::horizontalSliderPressed()
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the horizontal slider.
-*/
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollView::horizontalSliderReleased()
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the user releases the horizontal slider.
-*/
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollView::verticalSliderPressed()
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the user presses the vertical slider.
-*/
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollView::verticalSliderReleased()
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the user releases the vertical slider.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::hbarIsPressed()
-{
-    d->hbarPressed = TRUE;
-    emit( horizontalSliderPressed() );
-}
-
-void TQScrollView::hbarIsReleased()
-{
-    d->hbarPressed = FALSE;
-    emit( horizontalSliderReleased() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if horizontal slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-bool TQScrollView::isHorizontalSliderPressed()
-{
-    return d->hbarPressed;
-}
-
-void TQScrollView::vbarIsPressed()
-{
-    d->vbarPressed = TRUE;
-    emit( verticalSliderPressed() );
-}
-
-void TQScrollView::vbarIsReleased()
-{
-    d->vbarPressed = FALSE;
-    emit( verticalSliderReleased() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if vertical slider is pressed by user; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-bool TQScrollView::isVerticalSliderPressed()
-{
-    return d->vbarPressed;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollView::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    TQWidget::styleChange( old );
-    updateScrollBars();
-    d->cachedSizeHint = TQSize();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollView::fontChange( const TQFont &old )
-{
-    TQWidget::fontChange( old );
-    updateScrollBars();
-    d->cachedSizeHint = TQSize();
-}
-
-void TQScrollView::hslide( int pos )
-{
-    if ( !d->signal_choke ) {
-        moveContents( -pos, -d->contentsY() );
-        TQApplication::syncX();
-    }
-}
-
-void TQScrollView::vslide( int pos )
-{
-    if ( !d->signal_choke ) {
-        moveContents( -d->contentsX(), -pos );
-        TQApplication::syncX();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Called when the horizontal scroll bar tqgeometry changes. This is
-    provided as a protected function so that subclasses can do
-    interesting things such as providing extra buttons in some of the
-    space normally used by the scroll bars.
-
-    The default implementation simply gives all the space to \a hbar.
-    The new tqgeometry is given by \a x, \a y, \a w and \a h.
-
-    \sa setVBarGeometry()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::setHBarGeometry(TQScrollBar& hbar,
-    int x, int y, int w, int h)
-{
-    hbar.setGeometry( x, y, w, h );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Called when the vertical scroll bar tqgeometry changes. This is
-    provided as a protected function so that subclasses can do
-    interesting things such as providing extra buttons in some of the
-    space normally used by the scroll bars.
-
-    The default implementation simply gives all the space to \a vbar.
-    The new tqgeometry is given by \a x, \a y, \a w and \a h.
-
-    \sa setHBarGeometry()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::setVBarGeometry( TQScrollBar& vbar,
-    int x, int y, int w, int h)
-{
-    vbar.setGeometry( x, y, w, h );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the viewport size for size (\a x, \a y).
-
-    The viewport size depends on \a (x, y) (the size of the contents),
-    the size of this widget and the modes of the horizontal and
-    vertical scroll bars.
-
-    This function permits widgets that can trade vertical and
-    horizontal space for each other to control scroll bar appearance
-    better. For example, a word processor or web browser can control
-    the width of the right margin accurately, whether or not there
-    needs to be a vertical scroll bar.
-*/
-
-TQSize TQScrollView::viewportSize( int x, int y ) const
-{
-    int fw = frameWidth();
-    int lmarg = fw+d->l_marg;
-    int rmarg = fw+d->r_marg;
-    int tmarg = fw+d->t_marg;
-    int bmarg = fw+d->b_marg;
-
-    int w = width();
-    int h = height();
-
-    bool needh, needv;
-    bool showh, showv;
-    int hsbExt = horizontalScrollBar()->tqsizeHint().height();
-    int vsbExt = verticalScrollBar()->tqsizeHint().width();
-
-    if ( d->policy != AutoOne || d->anyVisibleChildren() ) {
-        // Do we definitely need the scrollbar?
-        needh = w-lmarg-rmarg < x;
-        needv = h-tmarg-bmarg < y;
-
-        // Do we intend to show the scrollbar?
-        if (d->hMode == AlwaysOn)
-            showh = TRUE;
-        else if (d->hMode == AlwaysOff)
-            showh = FALSE;
-        else
-            showh = needh;
-
-        if (d->vMode == AlwaysOn)
-            showv = TRUE;
-        else if (d->vMode == AlwaysOff)
-            showv = FALSE;
-        else
-            showv = needv;
-
-        // Given other scrollbar will be shown, NOW do we need one?
-        if ( showh && h-vsbExt-tmarg-bmarg < y ) {
-            if (d->vMode == Auto)
-                showv=TRUE;
-        }
-        if ( showv && w-hsbExt-lmarg-rmarg < x ) {
-            if (d->hMode == Auto)
-                showh=TRUE;
-        }
-    } else {
-        // Scrollbars not needed, only show scrollbar that are always on.
-        showh = d->hMode == AlwaysOn;
-        showv = d->vMode == AlwaysOn;
-    }
-
-    return TQSize( w-lmarg-rmarg - (showv ? vsbExt : 0),
-                  h-tmarg-bmarg - (showh ? hsbExt : 0) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Updates scroll bars: all possibilities are considered. You should
-    never need to call this in your code.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::updateScrollBars()
-{
-    if(!horizontalScrollBar() && !verticalScrollBar())
-	return;
-
-    // I support this should use viewportSize()... but it needs
-    // so many of the temporary variables from viewportSize.  hm.
-    int fw = frameWidth();
-    int lmarg = fw+d->l_marg;
-    int rmarg = fw+d->r_marg;
-    int tmarg = fw+d->t_marg;
-    int bmarg = fw+d->b_marg;
-
-    int w = width();
-    int h = height();
-
-    int portw, porth;
-
-    bool needh;
-    bool needv;
-    bool showh;
-    bool showv;
-    bool showc = FALSE;
-
-    int hsbExt = horizontalScrollBar()->tqsizeHint().height();
-    int vsbExt = verticalScrollBar()->tqsizeHint().width();
-
-    TQSize oldVisibleSize( visibleWidth(), visibleHeight() );
-
-    if ( d->policy != AutoOne || d->anyVisibleChildren() ) {
-        // Do we definitely need the scrollbar?
-        needh = w-lmarg-rmarg < d->contentsWidth();
-        if ( d->inresize )
-            needh  = !horizontalScrollBar()->isHidden();
-        needv = h-tmarg-bmarg < contentsHeight();
-
-        // Do we intend to show the scrollbar?
-        if (d->hMode == AlwaysOn)
-            showh = TRUE;
-        else if (d->hMode == AlwaysOff)
-            showh = FALSE;
-        else
-            showh = needh;
-
-        if (d->vMode == AlwaysOn)
-            showv = TRUE;
-        else if (d->vMode == AlwaysOff)
-            showv = FALSE;
-        else
-            showv = needv;
-
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MAC
-	bool mac_need_scroll = FALSE;
-	if(!parentWidget()) {
-	    mac_need_scroll = TRUE;
-	} else {
-	    TQWidget *tlw = tqtopLevelWidget();
-	    TQPoint tlw_br = TQPoint(tlw->width(), tlw->height()),
-		    my_br = posInWindow(this) + TQPoint(w, h);
-	    if(my_br.x() >= tlw_br.x() - 3 && my_br.y() >= tlw_br.y() - 3)
-		mac_need_scroll = TRUE;
-	}
-	if(mac_need_scroll) {
-	    WindowAttributes attr;
-	    GetWindowAttributes((WindowPtr)handle(), &attr);
-	    mac_need_scroll = (attr & kWindowResizableAttribute);
-	}
-	if(mac_need_scroll) {
-	    showc = TRUE;
-	    if(d->vMode == Auto)
-		showv = TRUE;
-	    if(d->hMode == Auto)
-		showh = TRUE;
-	}
-#endif
-
-        // Given other scrollbar will be shown, NOW do we need one?
-        if ( showh && h-vsbExt-tmarg-bmarg < contentsHeight() ) {
-            needv=TRUE;
-            if (d->vMode == Auto)
-                showv=TRUE;
-        }
-        if ( showv && !d->inresize && w-hsbExt-lmarg-rmarg < d->contentsWidth() ) {
-            needh=TRUE;
-            if (d->hMode == Auto)
-                showh=TRUE;
-        }
-    } else {
-        // Scrollbars not needed, only show scrollbar that are always on.
-        needh = needv = FALSE;
-        showh = d->hMode == AlwaysOn;
-        showv = d->vMode == AlwaysOn;
-    }
-
-    bool sc = d->signal_choke;
-    d->signal_choke=TRUE;
-
-    // Hide unneeded scrollbar, calculate viewport size
-    if ( showh ) {
-        porth=h-hsbExt-tmarg-bmarg;
-    } else {
-        if (!needh)
-            d->hbar->setValue(0);
-        d->hbar->hide();
-        porth=h-tmarg-bmarg;
-    }
-    if ( showv ) {
-        portw=w-vsbExt-lmarg-rmarg;
-    } else {
-        if (!needv)
-            d->vbar->setValue(0);
-        d->vbar->hide();
-        portw=w-lmarg-rmarg;
-    }
-
-    // Configure scrollbars that we will show
-    if ( needv ) {
-	d->vbar->setRange( 0, contentsHeight()-porth );
-	d->vbar->setSteps( TQScrollView::d->vbar->lineStep(), porth );
-    } else {
-	d->vbar->setRange( 0, 0 );
-    }
-    if ( needh ) {
-	d->hbar->setRange( 0, TQMAX(0, d->contentsWidth()-portw) );
-	d->hbar->setSteps( TQScrollView::d->hbar->lineStep(), portw );
-    } else {
-	d->hbar->setRange( 0, 0 );
-    }
-
-    // Position the scrollbars, viewport and corner widget.
-    int bottom;
-    bool reverse = TQApplication::reverseLayout();
-    int xoffset = ( reverse && (showv || cornerWidget() )) ? vsbExt : 0;
-    int xpos = reverse ? 0 : w - vsbExt;
-    bool frameContentsOnly =
-	tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ScrollView_FrameOnlyAroundContents);
-
-    if( ! frameContentsOnly ) {
-	if ( reverse )
-            xpos += fw;
-        else
-            xpos -= fw;
-    }
-    if ( showh ) {
-        int right = ( showc || showv || cornerWidget() ) ? w-vsbExt : w;
-        if ( ! frameContentsOnly )
-            setHBarGeometry( *d->hbar, fw + xoffset, h-hsbExt-fw,
-			     right-fw-fw, hsbExt );
-        else
-            setHBarGeometry( *d->hbar, 0 + xoffset, h-hsbExt, right,
-			     hsbExt );
-        bottom=h-hsbExt;
-    } else {
-        bottom=h;
-    }
-    if ( showv ) {
-	clipper()->setGeometry( lmarg + xoffset, tmarg,
-				w-vsbExt-lmarg-rmarg,
-				bottom-tmarg-bmarg );
-	d->viewportResized( w-vsbExt-lmarg-rmarg, bottom-tmarg-bmarg );
-	if ( ! frameContentsOnly )
-	    changeFrameRect(TQRect(0, 0, w, h) );
-	else
-	    changeFrameRect(TQRect(xoffset, 0, w-vsbExt, bottom));
-	if (showc || cornerWidget()) {
-	    if ( ! frameContentsOnly )
-		setVBarGeometry( *d->vbar, xpos,
-				 fw, vsbExt,
-				 h-hsbExt-fw-fw );
-	    else
-		setVBarGeometry( *d->vbar, xpos, 0,
-				 vsbExt,
-				 h-hsbExt );
-	}
-	else {
-	    if ( ! frameContentsOnly )
-		setVBarGeometry( *d->vbar, xpos,
-				 fw, vsbExt,
-				 bottom-fw-fw );
-	    else
-		setVBarGeometry( *d->vbar, xpos, 0,
-				 vsbExt, bottom );
-	}
-    } else {
-        if ( ! frameContentsOnly )
-            changeFrameRect(TQRect(0, 0, w, h));
-        else
-            changeFrameRect(TQRect(0, 0, w, bottom));
-        clipper()->setGeometry( lmarg, tmarg,
-				w-lmarg-rmarg, bottom-tmarg-bmarg );
-        d->viewportResized( w-lmarg-rmarg, bottom-tmarg-bmarg );
-    }
-
-    TQWidget *corner = d->corner;
-    if ( !d->corner )
-	corner = d->defaultCorner;
-    if ( ! frameContentsOnly )
-	corner->setGeometry( xpos,
-			     h-hsbExt-fw,
-			     vsbExt,
-			     hsbExt );
-    else
-	corner->setGeometry( xpos,
-			     h-hsbExt,
-			     vsbExt,
-			     hsbExt );
-
-    d->signal_choke=sc;
-
-    if ( d->contentsX()+visibleWidth() > d->contentsWidth() ) {
-        int x;
-#if 0
-        if ( reverse )
-            x =TQMIN(0,d->contentsWidth()-visibleWidth());
-        else
-#endif
-            x =TQMAX(0,d->contentsWidth()-visibleWidth());
-        d->hbar->setValue(x);
-        // Do it even if it is recursive
-        moveContents( -x, -d->contentsY() );
-    }
-    if ( d->contentsY()+visibleHeight() > contentsHeight() ) {
-        int y=TQMAX(0,contentsHeight()-visibleHeight());
-        d->vbar->setValue(y);
-        // Do it even if it is recursive
-        moveContents( -d->contentsX(), -y );
-    }
-
-    // Finally, show the scroll bars
-    if ( showh && ( d->hbar->isHidden() || !d->hbar->isVisible() ) )
-        d->hbar->show();
-    if ( showv && ( d->vbar->isHidden() || !d->vbar->isVisible() ) )
-        d->vbar->show();
-
-    d->signal_choke=TRUE;
-    d->vbar->setValue( d->contentsY() );
-    d->hbar->setValue( d->contentsX() );
-    d->signal_choke=FALSE;
-
-    TQSize newVisibleSize( visibleWidth(), visibleHeight() );
-    if ( d->clipped_viewport && oldVisibleSize != newVisibleSize ) {
-	TQResizeEvent e( newVisibleSize, oldVisibleSize );
-	viewportResizeEvent( &e );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollView::show()
-{
-    if ( isVisible() )
-	return;
-    TQWidget::show();
-    updateScrollBars();
-    d->hideOrShowAll(this);
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQScrollView::resize( int w, int h )
-{
-    TQWidget::resize( w, h );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollView::resize( const TQSize& s )
-{
-    resize( s.width(), s.height() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollView::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* event )
-{
-    TQFrame::resizeEvent( event );
-
-#if 0
-    if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-        d->fake_scroll = TRUE;
-        scrollBy( -event->size().width() + event->oldSize().width(), 0 );
-        d->fake_scroll = FALSE;
-    }
-#endif
-
-    bool inresize = d->inresize;
-    d->inresize = TRUE;
-    updateScrollBars();
-    d->inresize = inresize;
-    d->scrollbar_timer.start( 0, TRUE );
-
-    d->hideOrShowAll(this);
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void  TQScrollView::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * e) //#### remove for 4.0
-{
-    e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void  TQScrollView::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) //#### remove for 4.0
-{
-    e->ignore();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void  TQScrollView::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) //#### remove for 4.0
-{
-    e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void  TQScrollView::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e ) //#### remove for 4.0
-{
-    e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-void TQScrollView::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e )
-{
-    TQWheelEvent ce( viewport()->mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() ),
-                    e->globalPos(), e->delta(), e->state(), e->orientation());
-    viewportWheelEvent(&ce);
-    if ( !ce.isAccepted() ) {
-	if ( e->orientation() == Qt::Horizontal && horizontalScrollBar() && horizontalScrollBar()->isEnabled() )
-	    TQApplication::sendEvent( horizontalScrollBar(), e);
-	else  if (e->orientation() == Qt::Vertical && verticalScrollBar() && verticalScrollBar()->isEnabled() )
-	    TQApplication::sendEvent( verticalScrollBar(), e);
-    } else {
-	e->accept();
-    }
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->reason() != TQContextMenuEvent::Keyboard ) {
-	e->ignore();
-        return;
-    }
-
-    TQContextMenuEvent ce( e->reason(), viewport()->mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() ),
-                          e->globalPos(), e->state() );
-    viewportContextMenuEvent( &ce );
-    if ( ce.isAccepted() )
-        e->accept();
-    else
-        e->ignore();
-}
-
-TQScrollView::ScrollBarMode TQScrollView::vScrollBarMode() const
-{
-    return d->vMode;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQScrollView::ScrollBarMode
-
-    This enum type describes the various modes of TQScrollView's scroll
-    bars.
-
-    \value Auto  TQScrollView shows a scroll bar when the content is
-    too large to fit and not otherwise. This is the default.
-
-    \value AlwaysOff  TQScrollView never shows a scroll bar.
-
-    \value AlwaysOn  TQScrollView always shows a scroll bar.
-
-    (The modes for the horizontal and vertical scroll bars are
-    independent.)
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollView::vScrollBarMode
-    \brief the mode for the vertical scroll bar
-
-    The default mode is \c TQScrollView::Auto.
-
-    \sa hScrollBarMode
-*/
-void  TQScrollView::setVScrollBarMode( ScrollBarMode mode )
-{
-    if (d->vMode != mode) {
-        d->vMode = mode;
-        updateScrollBars();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollView::hScrollBarMode
-    \brief the mode for the horizontal scroll bar
-
-    The default mode is \c TQScrollView::Auto.
-
-    \sa vScrollBarMode
-*/
-TQScrollView::ScrollBarMode TQScrollView::hScrollBarMode() const
-{
-    return d->hMode;
-}
-
-void TQScrollView::setHScrollBarMode( ScrollBarMode mode )
-{
-    if (d->hMode != mode) {
-        d->hMode = mode;
-        updateScrollBars();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the widget in the corner between the two scroll bars.
-
-    By default, no corner widget is present.
-*/
-TQWidget* TQScrollView::cornerWidget() const
-{
-    return d->corner;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the widget in the \a corner between the two scroll bars.
-
-    You will probably also want to set at least one of the scroll bar
-    modes to \c AlwaysOn.
-
-    Passing 0 shows no widget in the corner.
-
-    Any previous \a corner widget is hidden.
-
-    You may call setCornerWidget() with the same widget at different
-    times.
-
-    All widgets set here will be deleted by the TQScrollView when it is
-    destroyed unless you separately reparent the widget after setting
-    some other corner widget (or 0).
-
-    Any \e newly set widget should have no current parent.
-
-    By default, no corner widget is present.
-
-    \sa setVScrollBarMode(), setHScrollBarMode()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::setCornerWidget(TQWidget* corner)
-{
-    TQWidget* oldcorner = d->corner;
-    if (oldcorner != corner) {
-        if (oldcorner) oldcorner->hide();
-        d->corner = corner;
-
-        if ( corner && corner->parentWidget() != this ) {
-            // #### No clean way to get current WFlags
-            corner->reparent( this, (((TQScrollView*)corner))->getWFlags(),
-                              TQPoint(0,0), FALSE );
-        }
-
-        updateScrollBars();
-        if ( corner ) corner->show();
-    }
-}
-
-
-void TQScrollView::setResizePolicy( ResizePolicy r )
-{
-    d->policy = r;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollView::resizePolicy
-    \brief the resize policy
-
-    The default is \c Default.
-
-    \sa ResizePolicy
-*/
-TQScrollView::ResizePolicy TQScrollView::resizePolicy() const
-{
-    return d->policy;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollView::setEnabled( bool enable )
-{
-    TQFrame::setEnabled( enable );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the \a child widget from the scrolled area. Note that this
-    happens automatically if the \a child is deleted.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::removeChild(TQWidget* child)
-{
-    if ( !d || !child ) // First check in case we are destructing
-        return;
-
-    TQSVChildRec *r = d->rec(child);
-    if ( r ) d->deleteChildRec( r );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollView::removeChild(TQObject* child)
-{
-    TQFrame::removeChild(child);
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inserts the widget, \a child, into the scrolled area positioned at
-    (\a x, \a y). The position defaults to (0, 0). If the child is
-    already in the view, it is just moved.
-
-    You may want to call enableClipper(TRUE) if you add a large number
-    of widgets.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::addChild(TQWidget* child, int x, int y)
-{
-    if ( !child ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL)
-	qWarning( "TQScrollView::addChild(): Cannot add null child" );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-    child->polish();
-    child->setBackgroundOrigin(WidgetOrigin);
-
-    if ( child->parentWidget() == viewport() ) {
-        // May already be there
-        TQSVChildRec *r = d->rec(child);
-        if (r) {
-            r->moveTo(this,x,y,d->clipped_viewport);
-            if ( d->policy > Manual ) {
-                d->autoRetqsizeHint(this);
-                d->autoResize(this); // #### better to just deal with this one widget!
-            }
-            return;
-        }
-    }
-
-    if ( d->tqchildren.isEmpty() && d->policy != Manual ) {
-        if ( d->policy == Default )
-            setResizePolicy( AutoOne );
-        child->installEventFilter( this );
-    } else if ( d->policy == AutoOne ) {
-        child->removeEventFilter( this ); //#### ?????
-        setResizePolicy( Manual );
-    }
-    if ( child->parentWidget() != viewport() ) {
-            child->reparent( viewport(), 0, TQPoint(0,0), FALSE );
-    }
-    d->addChildRec(child,x,y)->hideOrShow(this, d->clipped_viewport);
-
-    if ( d->policy > Manual ) {
-        d->autoRetqsizeHint(this);
-        d->autoResize(this); // #### better to just deal with this one widget!
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Repositions the \a child widget to (\a x, \a y). This function is
-    the same as addChild().
-*/
-void TQScrollView::moveChild(TQWidget* child, int x, int y)
-{
-    addChild(child,x,y);
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the X position of the given \a child widget. Use this
-    rather than TQWidget::x() for widgets added to the view.
-
-    This function returns 0 if \a child has not been added to the view.
-*/
-int TQScrollView::childX(TQWidget* child)
-{
-    TQSVChildRec *r = d->rec(child);
-    return r ? r->x : 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the Y position of the given \a child widget. Use this
-    rather than TQWidget::y() for widgets added to the view.
-
-    This function returns 0 if \a child has not been added to the view.
-*/
-int TQScrollView::childY(TQWidget* child)
-{
-    TQSVChildRec *r = d->rec(child);
-    return r ? r->y : 0;
-}
-
-/*! \fn bool TQScrollView::childIsVisible(TQWidget*)
-  \obsolete
-
-  Returns TRUE if \a child is visible. This is equivalent
-  to child->isVisible().
-*/
-
-/*! \fn void TQScrollView::showChild(TQWidget* child, bool y)
-  \obsolete
-
-  Sets the visibility of \a child. Equivalent to
-  TQWidget::show() or TQWidget::hide().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    This event filter ensures the scroll bars are updated when a
-    single contents widget is resized, shown, hidden or destroyed; it
-    passes mouse events to the TQScrollView. The event is in \a e and
-    the object is in \a obj.
-*/
-
-bool TQScrollView::eventFilter( TQObject *obj, TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !d )
-	return FALSE; // we are destructing
-    if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(obj) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->viewport) || TQT_BASE_OBJECT(obj) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->clipped_viewport) ) {
-        switch ( e->type() ) {
-            /* Forward many events to viewport...() functions */
-        case TQEvent::Paint:
-            viewportPaintEvent( (TQPaintEvent*)e );
-            break;
-        case TQEvent::Resize:
-	    if ( !d->clipped_viewport )
-		viewportResizeEvent( (TQResizeEvent *)e );
-            break;
-        case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress:
-            viewportMousePressEvent( (TQMouseEvent*)e );
-	    if ( ((TQMouseEvent*)e)->isAccepted() )
-		return TRUE;
-            break;
-        case TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease:
-            viewportMouseReleaseEvent( (TQMouseEvent*)e );
-	    if ( ((TQMouseEvent*)e)->isAccepted() )
-		return TRUE;
-            break;
-        case TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick:
-            viewportMouseDoubleClickEvent( (TQMouseEvent*)e );
-	    if ( ((TQMouseEvent*)e)->isAccepted() )
-		return TRUE;
-            break;
-        case TQEvent::MouseMove:
-            viewportMouseMoveEvent( (TQMouseEvent*)e );
-	    if ( ((TQMouseEvent*)e)->isAccepted() )
-		return TRUE;
-            break;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-        case TQEvent::DragEnter:
-            viewportDragEnterEvent( (TQDragEnterEvent*)e );
-            break;
-        case TQEvent::DragMove: {
-            if ( d->drag_autoscroll ) {
-                TQPoint vp = ((TQDragMoveEvent*) e)->pos();
-                TQRect inside_margin( autoscroll_margin, autoscroll_margin,
-                                     visibleWidth() - autoscroll_margin * 2,
-                                     visibleHeight() - autoscroll_margin * 2 );
-                if ( !inside_margin.contains( vp ) ) {
-                    startDragAutoScroll();
-                    // Keep sending move events
-                    ( (TQDragMoveEvent*)e )->accept( TQRect(0,0,0,0) );
-                }
-            }
-            viewportDragMoveEvent( (TQDragMoveEvent*)e );
-        } break;
-        case TQEvent::DragLeave:
-            stopDragAutoScroll();
-            viewportDragLeaveEvent( (TQDragLeaveEvent*)e );
-            break;
-        case TQEvent::Drop:
-            stopDragAutoScroll();
-            viewportDropEvent( (TQDropEvent*)e );
-            break;
-#endif // TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-        case TQEvent::ContextMenu:
-            viewportContextMenuEvent( (TQContextMenuEvent*)e );
-	    if ( ((TQContextMenuEvent*)e)->isAccepted() )
-		return TRUE;
-            break;
-        case TQEvent::ChildRemoved:
-            removeChild((TQWidget*)((TQChildEvent*)e)->child());
-            break;
-        case TQEvent::LayoutHint:
-            d->autoRetqsizeHint(this);
-            break;
-        case TQEvent::WindowActivate:
-        case TQEvent::WindowDeactivate:
-            return TRUE;
-        default:
-            break;
-        }
-    } else if ( d && d->rec((TQWidget*)obj) ) {  // must be a child
-        if ( e->type() == TQEvent::Resize )
-            d->autoResize(this);
-        else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::Move )
-            d->autoMove(this);
-    }
-    return TQFrame::eventFilter( obj, e );  // always continue with standard event processing
-}
-
-/*!
-    This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-    mousePressEvent(): the press position in \a e is translated to be a point
-    on the contents.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contentsMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!
-    This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-    mouseReleaseEvent(): the release position in \a e is translated to be a
-    point on the contents.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contentsMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!
-    This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-    mouseDoubleClickEvent(): the click position in \a e is translated to be a
-    point on the contents.
-
-    The default implementation generates a normal mouse press event.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    contentsMousePressEvent(e);		    // try mouse press event
-}
-
-/*!
-    This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-    mouseMoveEvent(): the mouse position in \a e is translated to be a point
-    on the contents.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    e->ignore();
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-/*!
-    This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-    dragEnterEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point
-    on the contents.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contentsDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent * )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-    dragMoveEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point on
-    the contents.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contentsDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent * )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-    dragLeaveEvent(): the drag position is translated to be a point
-    on the contents.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent * )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-    dropEvent(): the drop position is translated to be a point on the
-    contents.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent * )
-{
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-/*!
-    This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-    wheelEvent() in \a{e}: the mouse position is translated to be a
-    point on the contents.
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-void TQScrollView::contentsWheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * e )
-{
-    e->ignore();
-}
-#endif
-/*!
-    This event handler is called whenever the TQScrollView receives a
-    contextMenuEvent() in \a{e}: the mouse position is translated to
-    be a point on the contents.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contentsContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e )
-{
-    e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!
-    This is a low-level painting routine that draws the viewport
-    contents. Reimplement this if drawContents() is too high-level
-    (for example, if you don't want to open a TQPainter on the
-    viewport). The paint event is passed in \a pe.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportPaintEvent( TQPaintEvent* pe )
-{
-    TQWidget* vp = viewport();
-
-    TQPainter p(vp);
-    TQRect r = pe->rect();
-
-    if ( d->clipped_viewport ) {
-	TQRect rr(
-	    -d->clipped_viewport->x(), -d->clipped_viewport->y(),
-	    d->viewport->width(), d->viewport->height()
-	    );
-	r &= rr;
-	if ( r.isValid() ) {
-	    int ex = r.x() + d->clipped_viewport->x() + d->contentsX();
-	    int ey = r.y() + d->clipped_viewport->y() + d->contentsY();
-	    int ew = r.width();
-	    int eh = r.height();
-	    drawContentsOffset(&p,
-		d->contentsX()+d->clipped_viewport->x(),
-		d->contentsY()+d->clipped_viewport->y(),
-		ex, ey, ew, eh);
-	}
-    } else {
-	r &= d->viewport->rect();
-	int ex = r.x() + d->contentsX();
-	int ey = r.y() + d->contentsY();
-	int ew = r.width();
-	int eh = r.height();
-	drawContentsOffset(&p, d->contentsX(), d->contentsY(), ex, ey, ew, eh);
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this
-    function receives all resize events sent to the viewport.
-
-    \sa TQWidget::resizeEvent()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportResizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* )
-{
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this
-  function receives all mouse press events sent to the viewport,
-  translates the event and calls contentsMousePressEvent().
-
-  \sa contentsMousePressEvent(), TQWidget::mousePressEvent()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    TQMouseEvent ce(e->type(), viewportToContents(e->pos()),
-        e->globalPos(), e->button(), e->state());
-    contentsMousePressEvent(&ce);
-    if ( !ce.isAccepted() )
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!\internal
-
-  To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function
-  receives all mouse release events sent to the viewport, translates
-  the event and calls contentsMouseReleaseEvent().
-
-  \sa TQWidget::mouseReleaseEvent()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    TQMouseEvent ce(e->type(), viewportToContents(e->pos()),
-        e->globalPos(), e->button(), e->state());
-    contentsMouseReleaseEvent(&ce);
-    if ( !ce.isAccepted() )
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!\internal
-
-  To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function
-  receives all mouse double click events sent to the viewport,
-  translates the event and calls contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent().
-
-  \sa TQWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    TQMouseEvent ce(e->type(), viewportToContents(e->pos()),
-        e->globalPos(), e->button(), e->state());
-    contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent(&ce);
-    if ( !ce.isAccepted() )
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!\internal
-
-  To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function
-  receives all mouse move events sent to the viewport, translates the
-  event and calls contentsMouseMoveEvent().
-
-  \sa TQWidget::mouseMoveEvent()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    TQMouseEvent ce(e->type(), viewportToContents(e->pos()),
-        e->globalPos(), e->button(), e->state());
-    contentsMouseMoveEvent(&ce);
-    if ( !ce.isAccepted() )
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-/*!\internal
-
-  To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function
-  receives all drag enter events sent to the viewport, translates the
-  event and calls contentsDragEnterEvent().
-
-  \sa TQWidget::dragEnterEvent()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent* e )
-{
-    e->setPoint(viewportToContents(e->pos()));
-    contentsDragEnterEvent(e);
-    e->setPoint(contentsToViewport(e->pos()));
-}
-
-/*!\internal
-
-  To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function
-  receives all drag move events sent to the viewport, translates the
-  event and calls contentsDragMoveEvent().
-
-  \sa TQWidget::dragMoveEvent()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent* e )
-{
-    e->setPoint(viewportToContents(e->pos()));
-    contentsDragMoveEvent(e);
-    e->setPoint(contentsToViewport(e->pos()));
-}
-
-/*!\internal
-
-  To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function
-  receives all drag leave events sent to the viewport and calls
-  contentsDragLeaveEvent().
-
-  \sa TQWidget::dragLeaveEvent()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent* e )
-{
-    contentsDragLeaveEvent(e);
-}
-
-/*!\internal
-
-  To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function
-  receives all drop events sent to the viewport, translates the event
-  and calls contentsDropEvent().
-
-  \sa TQWidget::dropEvent()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportDropEvent( TQDropEvent* e )
-{
-    e->setPoint(viewportToContents(e->pos()));
-    contentsDropEvent(e);
-    e->setPoint(contentsToViewport(e->pos()));
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-/*!\internal
-
-  To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function
-  receives all wheel events sent to the viewport, translates the
-  event and calls contentsWheelEvent().
-
-  \sa TQWidget::wheelEvent()
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-void TQScrollView::viewportWheelEvent( TQWheelEvent* e )
-{
-    /*
-       Different than standard mouse events, because wheel events might
-       be sent to the focus widget if the widget-under-mouse doesn't want
-       the event itself.
-    */
-    TQWheelEvent ce( viewportToContents(e->pos()),
-        e->globalPos(), e->delta(), e->state(), e->orientation());
-    contentsWheelEvent(&ce);
-    if ( ce.isAccepted() )
-        e->accept();
-    else
-        e->ignore();
-}
-#endif
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  To provide simple processing of events on the contents, this function
-  receives all context menu events sent to the viewport, translates the
-  event and calls contentsContextMenuEvent().
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e )
-{
-    TQContextMenuEvent ce(e->reason(), viewportToContents(e->pos()), e->globalPos(), e->state() );
-    contentsContextMenuEvent( &ce );
-    if ( ce.isAccepted() )
-        e->accept();
-    else
-        e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the component horizontal scroll bar. It is made available
-    to allow accelerators, autoscrolling, etc.
-
-    It should not be used for other purposes.
-
-    This function never returns 0.
-*/
-TQScrollBar* TQScrollView::horizontalScrollBar() const
-{
-    return d->hbar;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the component vertical scroll bar. It is made available to
-    allow accelerators, autoscrolling, etc.
-
-    It should not be used for other purposes.
-
-    This function never returns 0.
-*/
-TQScrollBar* TQScrollView::verticalScrollBar() const {
-    return d->vbar;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Scrolls the content so that the point \a (x, y) is visible with at
-    least 50-pixel margins (if possible, otherwise centered).
-*/
-void TQScrollView::ensureVisible( int x, int y )
-{
-    ensureVisible(x, y, 50, 50);
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Scrolls the content so that the point \a (x, y) is visible with at
-    least the \a xmargin and \a ymargin margins (if possible,
-    otherwise centered).
-*/
-void TQScrollView::ensureVisible( int x, int y, int xmargin, int ymargin )
-{
-    int pw=visibleWidth();
-    int ph=visibleHeight();
-
-    int cx=-d->contentsX();
-    int cy=-d->contentsY();
-    int cw=d->contentsWidth();
-    int ch=contentsHeight();
-
-    if ( pw < xmargin*2 )
-        xmargin=pw/2;
-    if ( ph < ymargin*2 )
-        ymargin=ph/2;
-
-    if ( cw <= pw ) {
-        xmargin=0;
-        cx=0;
-    }
-    if ( ch <= ph ) {
-        ymargin=0;
-        cy=0;
-    }
-
-    if ( x < -cx+xmargin )
-        cx = -x+xmargin;
-    else if ( x >= -cx+pw-xmargin )
-        cx = -x+pw-xmargin;
-
-    if ( y < -cy+ymargin )
-        cy = -y+ymargin;
-    else if ( y >= -cy+ph-ymargin )
-        cy = -y+ph-ymargin;
-
-    if ( cx > 0 )
-        cx=0;
-    else if ( cx < pw-cw && cw>pw )
-        cx=pw-cw;
-
-    if ( cy > 0 )
-        cy=0;
-    else if ( cy < ph-ch && ch>ph )
-        cy=ph-ch;
-
-    setContentsPos( -cx, -cy );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Scrolls the content so that the point \a (x, y) is in the top-left
-    corner.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::setContentsPos( int x, int y )
-{
-#if 0
-    // bounds checking...
-    if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() )
-        if ( x > d->contentsWidth() - visibleWidth() ) x = d->contentsWidth() - visibleWidth();
-    else
-#endif
-        if ( x < 0 ) x = 0;
-    if ( y < 0 ) y = 0;
-    // Choke signal handling while we update BOTH sliders.
-    d->signal_choke=TRUE;
-    moveContents( -x, -y );
-    d->vbar->setValue( y );
-    d->hbar->setValue( x );
-    d->signal_choke=FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Scrolls the content by \a dx to the left and \a dy upwards.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::scrollBy( int dx, int dy )
-{
-    setContentsPos( TQMAX( d->contentsX()+dx, 0 ), TQMAX( d->contentsY()+dy, 0 ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Scrolls the content so that the point \a (x, y) is in the center
-    of visible area.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::center( int x, int y )
-{
-    ensureVisible( x, y, 32000, 32000 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Scrolls the content so that the point \a (x, y) is visible with
-    the \a xmargin and \a ymargin margins (as fractions of visible
-    the area).
-
-    For example:
-    \list
-    \i Margin 0.0 allows (x, y) to be on the edge of the visible area.
-    \i Margin 0.5 ensures that (x, y) is in middle 50% of the visible area.
-    \i Margin 1.0 ensures that (x, y) is in the center of the the visible area.
-    \endlist
-*/
-void TQScrollView::center( int x, int y, float xmargin, float ymargin )
-{
-    int pw=visibleWidth();
-    int ph=visibleHeight();
-    ensureVisible( x, y, int( xmargin/2.0*pw+0.5 ), int( ymargin/2.0*ph+0.5 ) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollView::contentsMoving(int x, int y)
-
-    This signal is emitted just before the contents are moved to
-    position \a (x, y).
-
-    \sa contentsX(), contentsY()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Moves the contents by \a (x, y).
-*/
-void TQScrollView::moveContents(int x, int y)
-{
-    if ( -x+visibleWidth() > d->contentsWidth() )
-#if 0
-        if( TQApplication::reverseLayout() )
-            x=TQMAX(0,-d->contentsWidth()+visibleWidth());
-        else
-#endif
-            x=TQMIN(0,-d->contentsWidth()+visibleWidth());
-    if ( -y+visibleHeight() > contentsHeight() )
-        y=TQMIN(0,-contentsHeight()+visibleHeight());
-
-    int dx = x - d->vx;
-    int dy = y - d->vy;
-
-    if (!dx && !dy)
-        return; // Nothing to do
-
-    emit contentsMoving( -x, -y );
-
-    d->vx = x;
-    d->vy = y;
-
-    if ( d->clipped_viewport || d->static_bg ) {
-        // Cheap move (usually)
-        d->moveAllBy(dx,dy);
-    } else if ( /*dx && dy ||*/
-         ( TQABS(dy) * 5 > visibleHeight() * 4 ) ||
-         ( TQABS(dx) * 5 > visibleWidth() * 4 )
-        )
-    {
-        // Big move
-        if ( viewport()->isUpdatesEnabled() )
-            viewport()->update();
-        d->moveAllBy(dx,dy);
-    } else if ( !d->fake_scroll || d->contentsWidth() > visibleWidth() ) {
-        // Small move
-        clipper()->scroll(dx,dy);
-    }
-    d->hideOrShowAll(this, TRUE );
-}
-
-#if (TQT_VERSION-0 >= 0x040000)
-#if defined(TQ_CC_GNU)
-#warning "Should rename contents{X,Y,Width,Height} to viewport{...}"
-#endif
-// Because it's the viewport rectangle that is "moving", not the contents.
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollView::contentsX
-    \brief the X coordinate of the contents that are at the left edge of
-    the viewport.
-*/
-int TQScrollView::contentsX() const
-{
-    return d->contentsX();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollView::contentsY
-    \brief the Y coordinate of the contents that are at the top edge of
-    the viewport.
-*/
-int TQScrollView::contentsY() const
-{
-    return d->contentsY();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollView::contentsWidth
-    \brief the width of the contents area
-*/
-int TQScrollView::contentsWidth() const
-{
-    return d->contentsWidth();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollView::contentsHeight
-    \brief the height of the contents area
-*/
-int TQScrollView::contentsHeight() const
-{
-    return d->vheight;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the size of the contents area to \a w pixels wide and \a h
-    pixels high and updates the viewport accordingly.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::resizeContents( int w, int h )
-{
-    int ow = d->vwidth;
-    int oh = d->vheight;
-    d->vwidth = w;
-    d->vheight = h;
-
-    d->scrollbar_timer.start( 0, TRUE );
-
-    if ( d->tqchildren.isEmpty() && d->policy == Default )
-        setResizePolicy( Manual );
-
-    if ( ow > w ) {
-        // Swap
-        int t=w;
-        w=ow;
-        ow=t;
-    }
-    // Refresh area ow..w
-    if ( ow < visibleWidth() && w >= 0 ) {
-        if ( ow < 0 )
-            ow = 0;
-        if ( w > visibleWidth() )
-            w = visibleWidth();
-        clipper()->update( d->contentsX()+ow, 0, w-ow, visibleHeight() );
-    }
-
-    if ( oh > h ) {
-        // Swap
-        int t=h;
-        h=oh;
-        oh=t;
-    }
-    // Refresh area oh..h
-    if ( oh < visibleHeight() && h >= 0 ) {
-        if ( oh < 0 )
-            oh = 0;
-        if ( h > visibleHeight() )
-            h = visibleHeight();
-        clipper()->update( 0, d->contentsY()+oh, visibleWidth(), h-oh);
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Calls update() on a rectangle defined by \a x, \a y, \a w, \a h,
-    translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing
-    is repainted.
-
-    \sa repaintContents()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::updateContents( int x, int y, int w, int h )
-{
-    if ( testWState((TQt::WidgetState)(TQt::WState_Visible|TQt::WState_BlockUpdates)) != TQt::WState_Visible )
-	return;
-
-    TQWidget* vp = viewport();
-
-    // Translate
-    x -= d->contentsX();
-    y -= d->contentsY();
-
-    // Clip to TQCOORD space
-    if ( x < 0 ) {
-        w += x;
-        x = 0;
-    }
-    if ( y < 0 ) {
-        h += y;
-        y = 0;
-    }
-
-    if ( w < 0 || h < 0 )
-        return;
-    if ( x > visibleWidth() || y > visibleHeight() )
-	return;
-
-    if ( w > visibleWidth() )
-        w = visibleWidth();
-    if ( h > visibleHeight() )
-        h = visibleHeight();
-
-    if ( d->clipped_viewport ) {
-        // Translate clipper() to viewport()
-        x -= d->clipped_viewport->x();
-        y -= d->clipped_viewport->y();
-    }
-
-    vp->update( x, y, w, h );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Updates the contents in rectangle \a r
-*/
-void TQScrollView::updateContents( const TQRect& r )
-{
-    updateContents(r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height());
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-*/
-void TQScrollView::updateContents()
-{
-    updateContents( d->contentsX(), d->contentsY(), visibleWidth(), visibleHeight() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Repaints the contents of rectangle \a r. If \a erase is TRUE the
-    background is cleared using the background color.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::repaintContents( const TQRect& r, bool erase )
-{
-    repaintContents(r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height(), erase);
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Repaints the contents. If \a erase is TRUE the background is
-    cleared using the background color.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::repaintContents( bool erase )
-{
-    repaintContents( d->contentsX(), d->contentsY(), visibleWidth(), visibleHeight(), erase );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Calls tqrepaint() on a rectangle defined by \a x, \a y, \a w, \a h,
-    translated appropriately. If the rectangle is not visible, nothing
-    is repainted. If \a erase is TRUE the background is cleared using
-    the background color.
-
-    \sa updateContents()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::repaintContents( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase )
-{
-    if ( testWState((TQt::WidgetState)(TQt::WState_Visible|TQt::WState_BlockUpdates)) != TQt::WState_Visible )
-	return;
-
-    TQWidget* vp = viewport();
-
-    // Translate logical to clipper()
-    x -= d->contentsX();
-    y -= d->contentsY();
-
-    // Clip to TQCOORD space
-    if ( x < 0 ) {
-        w += x;
-        x = 0;
-    }
-    if ( y < 0 ) {
-        h += y;
-        y = 0;
-    }
-
-    if ( w < 0 || h < 0 )
-        return;
-    if ( w > visibleWidth() )
-        w = visibleWidth();
-    if ( h > visibleHeight() )
-        h = visibleHeight();
-
-    if ( d->clipped_viewport ) {
-        // Translate clipper() to viewport()
-        x -= d->clipped_viewport->x();
-        y -= d->clipped_viewport->y();
-    }
-
-    vp->tqrepaint( x, y, w, h, erase );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    For backward-compatibility only. It is easier to use
-    drawContents(TQPainter*,int,int,int,int).
-
-    The default implementation translates the painter appropriately
-    and calls drawContents(TQPainter*,int,int,int,int). See
-    drawContents() for an explanation of the parameters \a p, \a
-    offsetx, \a offsety, \a clipx, \a clipy, \a clipw and \a cliph.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::drawContentsOffset(TQPainter* p, int offsetx, int offsety, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph)
-{
-    p->translate(-offsetx,-offsety);
-    drawContents(p, clipx, clipy, clipw, cliph);
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQScrollView::drawContents(TQPainter* p, int clipx, int clipy, int clipw, int cliph)
-
-    Reimplement this function if you are viewing a drawing area rather
-    than a widget.
-
-    The function should draw the rectangle (\a clipx, \a clipy, \a
-    clipw, \a cliph) of the contents using painter \a p. The clip
-    rectangle is in the scrollview's coordinates.
-
-    For example:
-    \code
-    {
-	// Fill a 40000 by 50000 rectangle at (100000,150000)
-
-	// Calculate the coordinates...
-	int x1 = 100000, y1 = 150000;
-	int x2 = x1+40000-1, y2 = y1+50000-1;
-
-	// Clip the coordinates so X/Windows will not have problems...
-	if (x1 < clipx) x1=clipx;
-	if (y1 < clipy) y1=clipy;
-	if (x2 > clipx+clipw-1) x2=clipx+clipw-1;
-	if (y2 > clipy+cliph-1) y2=clipy+cliph-1;
-
-	// Paint using the small coordinates...
-	if ( x2 >= x1 && y2 >= y1 )
-	    p->fillRect(x1, y1, x2-x1+1, y2-y1+1, red);
-    }
-    \endcode
-
-    The clip rectangle and translation of the painter \a p is already
-    set appropriately.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::drawContents(TQPainter*, int, int, int, int)
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQScrollView::frameChanged()
-{
-    // slight ugle-hack - the listview header needs readjusting when
-    // changing the frame
-    if (TQListView *lv = ::tqqt_cast<TQListView *>(this))
-        lv->triggerUpdate();
-    TQFrame::frameChanged();
-    updateScrollBars();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the viewport widget of the scrollview. This is the widget
-    containing the contents widget or which is the drawing area.
-*/
-TQWidget* TQScrollView::viewport() const
-{
-    if ( d->clipped_viewport )
-	return  d->clipped_viewport;
-    return d->viewport;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the clipper widget. Contents in the scrollview are
-    ultimately clipped to be inside the clipper widget.
-
-    You should not need to use this function.
-
-    \sa visibleWidth(), visibleHeight()
-*/
-TQWidget* TQScrollView::clipper() const
-{
-    return d->viewport;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollView::visibleWidth
-    \brief the horizontal amount of the content that is visible
-*/
-int TQScrollView::visibleWidth() const
-{
-    return clipper()->width();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollView::visibleHeight
-    \brief the vertical amount of the content that is visible
-*/
-int TQScrollView::visibleHeight() const
-{
-    return clipper()->height();
-}
-
-
-void TQScrollView::changeFrameRect(const TQRect& r)
-{
-    TQRect oldr = frameRect();
-    if (oldr != r) {
-        TQRect cr = contentsRect();
-        TQRegion fr( frameRect() );
-        fr = fr.subtract( contentsRect() );
-        setFrameRect( r );
-        if ( isVisible() ) {
-            cr = cr.intersect( contentsRect() );
-            fr = fr.unite( frameRect() );
-            fr = fr.subtract( cr );
-            if ( !fr.isEmpty() )
-                TQApplication::postEvent( this, new TQPaintEvent( fr, FALSE ) );
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the margins around the scrolling area to \a left, \a top, \a
-    right and \a bottom. This is useful for applications such as
-    spreadsheets with "locked" rows and columns. The marginal space is
-    \e inside the frameRect() and is left blank; reimplement
-    drawFrame() or put widgets in the unused area.
-
-    By default all margins are zero.
-
-    \sa frameChanged()
-*/
-void TQScrollView::setMargins(int left, int top, int right, int bottom)
-{
-    if ( left == d->l_marg &&
-         top == d->t_marg &&
-         right == d->r_marg &&
-         bottom == d->b_marg )
-        return;
-
-    d->l_marg = left;
-    d->t_marg = top;
-    d->r_marg = right;
-    d->b_marg = bottom;
-    updateScrollBars();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the left margin.
-
-    \sa setMargins()
-*/
-int TQScrollView::leftMargin() const
-{
-    return d->l_marg;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the top margin.
-
-    \sa setMargins()
-*/
-int TQScrollView::topMargin() const
-{
-    return d->t_marg;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the right margin.
-
-    \sa setMargins()
-*/
-int TQScrollView::rightMargin() const
-{
-    return d->r_marg;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the bottom margin.
-
-    \sa setMargins()
-*/
-int TQScrollView::bottomMargin() const
-{
-    return d->b_marg;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-bool TQScrollView::focusNextPrevChild( bool next )
-{
-    //  Makes sure that the new focus widget is on-screen, if
-    //  necessary by scrolling the scroll view.
-
-    // first set things up for the scan
-    TQFocusData *f = focusData();
-    TQWidget *startingPoint = f->home();
-    TQWidget *candidate = 0;
-    TQWidget *w = next ? f->next() : f->prev();
-    TQSVChildRec *r;
-    extern bool qt_tab_all_widgets;
-    uint focus_flag = qt_tab_all_widgets ? Qt::TabFocus : Qt::StrongFocus;
-
-    // then scan for a possible focus widget candidate
-    while( !candidate && w != startingPoint ) {
-        if ( w != startingPoint &&
-             (w->focusPolicy() & focus_flag) == focus_flag
-             && w->isEnabled() &&!w->focusProxy() && w->isVisible() )
-            candidate = w;
-        w = next ? f->next() : f->prev();
-    }
-
-    // if we could not find one, maybe super or parentWidget() can?
-    if ( !candidate )
-        return TQFrame::focusNextPrevChild( next );
-
-    // we've found one.
-    r = d->ancestorRec( candidate );
-    if ( r && ( r->child == candidate ||
-                candidate->isVisibleTo( r->child ) ) ) {
-        TQPoint cp = r->child->mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0));
-        TQPoint cr = candidate->mapToGlobal(TQPoint(0,0)) - cp;
-        ensureVisible( r->x+cr.x()+candidate->width()/2,
-                       r->y+cr.y()+candidate->height()/2,
-                       candidate->width()/2,
-                       candidate->height()/2 );
-    }
-
-    candidate->setFocus();
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    When a large numbers of child widgets are in a scrollview,
-    especially if they are close together, the scrolling performance
-    can suffer greatly. If \a y is TRUE the scrollview will use an
-    extra widget to group child widgets.
-
-    Note that you may only call enableClipper() prior to adding
-    widgets.
-
-    For a full discussion, see this class's \link #enableclipper
-    detailed description\endlink.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::enableClipper(bool y)
-{
-    if ( !d->clipped_viewport == !y )
-	return;
-    if ( d->tqchildren.count() )
-	qFatal("May only call TQScrollView::enableClipper() before adding widgets");
-    if ( y ) {
-	d->clipped_viewport = new TQClipperWidget(clipper(), "qt_clipped_viewport", (WFlags)d->flags);
-	d->clipped_viewport->setGeometry(-coord_limit/2,-coord_limit/2,
-					 coord_limit,coord_limit);
-	d->clipped_viewport->setBackgroundMode( d->viewport->backgroundMode() );
-	d->viewport->setBackgroundMode(TQt::NoBackground); // no exposures for this
-	d->viewport->removeEventFilter( this );
-	d->clipped_viewport->installEventFilter( this );
-	d->clipped_viewport->show();
-    } else {
-	delete d->clipped_viewport;
-	d->clipped_viewport = 0;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the scrollview to have a static background if \a y is TRUE,
-    or a scrolling background if \a y is FALSE. By default, the
-    background is scrolling.
-
-    Be aware that this mode is quite slow, as a full tqrepaint of the
-    visible area has to be triggered on every contents move.
-
-    \sa hasStaticBackground()
-*/
-void  TQScrollView::setStaticBackground(bool y)
-{
-    d->static_bg = y;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if TQScrollView uses a static background; otherwise
-    returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setStaticBackground()
-*/
-bool TQScrollView::hasStaticBackground() const
-{
-    return d->static_bg;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns the point \a p translated to a point on the viewport()
-    widget.
-*/
-TQPoint TQScrollView::contentsToViewport( const TQPoint& p ) const
-{
-    if ( d->clipped_viewport ) {
-        return TQPoint( p.x() - d->contentsX() - d->clipped_viewport->x(),
-                       p.y() - d->contentsY() - d->clipped_viewport->y() );
-    } else {
-        return TQPoint( p.x() - d->contentsX(),
-                       p.y() - d->contentsY() );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns the point on the viewport \a vp translated to a point in
-    the contents.
-*/
-TQPoint TQScrollView::viewportToContents( const TQPoint& vp ) const
-{
-    if ( d->clipped_viewport ) {
-        return TQPoint( vp.x() + d->contentsX() + d->clipped_viewport->x(),
-                       vp.y() + d->contentsY() + d->clipped_viewport->y() );
-    } else {
-        return TQPoint( vp.x() + d->contentsX(),
-                       vp.y() + d->contentsY() );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Translates a point (\a x, \a y) in the contents to a point (\a vx,
-    \a vy) on the viewport() widget.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::contentsToViewport( int x, int y, int& vx, int& vy ) const
-{
-    const TQPoint v = contentsToViewport(TQPoint(x,y));
-    vx = v.x();
-    vy = v.y();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Translates a point (\a vx, \a vy) on the viewport() widget to a
-    point (\a x, \a y) in the contents.
-*/
-void TQScrollView::viewportToContents( int vx, int vy, int& x, int& y ) const
-{
-    const TQPoint c = viewportToContents(TQPoint(vx,vy));
-    x = c.x();
-    y = c.y();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQScrollView::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( d->use_cached_size_hint && d->cachedSizeHint.isValid() )
-	return d->cachedSizeHint;
-
-    constPolish();
-    int f = 2 * frameWidth();
-    int h = fontMetrics().height();
-    TQSize sz( f, f );
-    if ( d->policy > Manual ) {
-	TQSVChildRec *r = d->tqchildren.first();
-	if ( r ) {
-	    TQSize cs = r->child->tqsizeHint();
-	    if ( cs.isValid() )
-		sz += cs.boundedTo( r->child->tqmaximumSize() );
-	    else
-		sz += r->child->size();
-        }
-    } else {
-	sz += TQSize( d->contentsWidth(), contentsHeight() );
-    }
-    if (d->vMode == AlwaysOn)
-	sz.setWidth(sz.width() + d->vbar->tqsizeHint().width());
-    if (d->hMode == AlwaysOn)
-	sz.setHeight(sz.height() + d->hbar->tqsizeHint().height());
-    return sz.expandedTo( TQSize(12 * h, 8 * h) )
-	     .boundedTo( TQSize(36 * h, 24 * h) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQScrollView::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    int h = fontMetrics().height();
-    if ( h < 10 )
-	h = 10;
-    int f = 2 * frameWidth();
-    return TQSize( (6 * h) + f, (4 * h) + f );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-
-    (Implemented to get rid of a compiler warning.)
-*/
-void TQScrollView::drawContents( TQPainter * )
-{
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-void TQScrollView::startDragAutoScroll()
-{
-    if ( !d->autoscroll_timer.isActive() ) {
-        d->autoscroll_time = initialScrollTime;
-        d->autoscroll_accel = initialScrollAccel;
-        d->autoscroll_timer.start( d->autoscroll_time );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-void TQScrollView::stopDragAutoScroll()
-{
-    d->autoscroll_timer.stop();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-void TQScrollView::doDragAutoScroll()
-{
-    TQPoint p = d->viewport->mapFromGlobal( TQCursor::pos() );
-
-    if ( d->autoscroll_accel-- <= 0 && d->autoscroll_time ) {
-        d->autoscroll_accel = initialScrollAccel;
-        d->autoscroll_time--;
-        d->autoscroll_timer.start( d->autoscroll_time );
-    }
-    int l = TQMAX( 1, ( initialScrollTime- d->autoscroll_time ) );
-
-    int dx = 0, dy = 0;
-    if ( p.y() < autoscroll_margin ) {
-        dy = -l;
-    } else if ( p.y() > visibleHeight() - autoscroll_margin ) {
-        dy = +l;
-    }
-    if ( p.x() < autoscroll_margin ) {
-        dx = -l;
-    } else if ( p.x() > visibleWidth() - autoscroll_margin ) {
-        dx = +l;
-    }
-    if ( dx || dy ) {
-        scrollBy(dx,dy);
-    } else {
-        stopDragAutoScroll();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQScrollView::dragAutoScroll
-    \brief whether autoscrolling in drag move events is enabled
-
-    If this property is set to TRUE (the default), the TQScrollView
-    automatically scrolls the contents in drag move events if the user
-    moves the cursor close to a border of the view. Of course this
-    works only if the viewport accepts drops. Specifying FALSE
-    disables this autoscroll feature.
-
-    \warning Enabling this property might not be enough to
-    effectively turn on autoscrolling. If you put a custom widget in
-    the TQScrollView, you might need to call TQDragEvent::ignore() on
-    the event in the dragEnterEvent() and dragMoveEvent()
-    reimplementations.
-*/
-
-void TQScrollView::setDragAutoScroll( bool b )
-{
-    d->drag_autoscroll = b;
-}
-
-bool TQScrollView::dragAutoScroll() const
-{
-    return d->drag_autoscroll;
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-/*!\internal
- */
-void TQScrollView::setCachedSizeHint( const TQSize &sh ) const
-{
-    if ( isVisible() && !d->cachedSizeHint.isValid() )
-	d->cachedSizeHint = sh;
-}
-
-/*!\internal
- */
-void TQScrollView::disableSizeHintCaching()
-{
-    d->use_cached_size_hint = FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!\internal
- */
-TQSize TQScrollView::cachedSizeHint() const
-{
-    return d->use_cached_size_hint ? d->cachedSizeHint : TQSize();
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_SCROLLVIEW
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 3f65776..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqscrollview.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,270 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQScrollView class
-**
-** Created : 970523
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-#ifndef TQSCROLLVIEW_H
-#define TQSCROLLVIEW_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#include "tqscrollbar.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SCROLLVIEW
-
-class TQScrollViewData;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQScrollView : public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( ResizePolicy ScrollBarMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( ResizePolicy resizePolicy READ resizePolicy WRITE setResizePolicy )
-    Q_PROPERTY( ScrollBarMode vScrollBarMode READ vScrollBarMode WRITE setVScrollBarMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( ScrollBarMode hScrollBarMode READ hScrollBarMode WRITE setHScrollBarMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int visibleWidth READ visibleWidth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int visibleHeight READ visibleHeight )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int contentsWidth READ contentsWidth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int contentsHeight READ contentsHeight )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int contentsX READ contentsX )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int contentsY READ contentsY )
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool dragAutoScroll READ dragAutoScroll WRITE setDragAutoScroll )
-#endif
-
-public:
-    TQScrollView(TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0);
-    ~TQScrollView();
-
-    enum ResizePolicy { Default, Manual, AutoOne, AutoOneFit };
-    virtual void setResizePolicy( ResizePolicy );
-    ResizePolicy resizePolicy() const;
-
-    void styleChange( TQStyle & );
-    void removeChild(TQWidget* child);
-    virtual void addChild( TQWidget* child, int x=0, int y=0 );
-    virtual void moveChild( TQWidget* child, int x, int y );
-    int childX(TQWidget* child);
-    int childY(TQWidget* child);
-    bool childIsVisible(TQWidget* child) { return child->isVisible(); } // obsolete functions
-    void showChild(TQWidget* child, bool yes=TRUE) {
-	if ( yes )
-	    child->show();
-	else
-	    child->hide();
-    }
-
-    enum ScrollBarMode { Auto, AlwaysOff, AlwaysOn };
-
-    ScrollBarMode vScrollBarMode() const;
-    virtual void  setVScrollBarMode( ScrollBarMode );
-
-    ScrollBarMode hScrollBarMode() const;
-    virtual void  setHScrollBarMode( ScrollBarMode );
-
-    TQWidget*     cornerWidget() const;
-    virtual void setCornerWidget(TQWidget*);
-
-    // ### 4.0: Consider providing a factory function for scrollbars
-    //          (e.g. make the two following functions virtual)
-    TQScrollBar*  horizontalScrollBar() const;
-    TQScrollBar*  verticalScrollBar() const;
-    TQWidget*	 viewport() const;
-    TQWidget*	 clipper() const;
-
-    int		visibleWidth() const;
-    int		visibleHeight() const;
-
-    int		contentsWidth() const;
-    int		contentsHeight() const;
-    int		contentsX() const;
-    int		contentsY() const;
-
-    void	resize( int w, int h );
-    void	resize( const TQSize& );
-    void	show();
-
-    void	updateContents( int x, int y, int w, int h );
-    void	updateContents( const TQRect& r );
-    void 	updateContents();
-    void	repaintContents( int x, int y, int w, int h, bool erase=TRUE );
-    void	repaintContents( const TQRect& r, bool erase=TRUE );
-    void 	repaintContents( bool erase=TRUE );
-    void	contentsToViewport( int x, int y, int& vx, int& vy ) const;
-    void	viewportToContents( int vx, int vy, int& x, int& y ) const;
-    TQPoint	contentsToViewport( const TQPoint& ) const;
-    TQPoint	viewportToContents( const TQPoint& ) const;
-    void	enableClipper( bool y );
-
-    void	setStaticBackground( bool y );
-    bool	hasStaticBackground() const;
-
-    TQSize	viewportSize( int, int ) const;
-    TQSize	tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize	tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    void	removeChild(TQObject* child);
-
-    bool	isHorizontalSliderPressed();
-    bool	isVerticalSliderPressed();
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    virtual void setDragAutoScroll( bool b );
-    bool	 dragAutoScroll() const;
-#endif
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void	contentsMoving(int x, int y);
-    void	horizontalSliderPressed();
-    void	horizontalSliderReleased();
-    void	verticalSliderPressed();
-    void	verticalSliderReleased();
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void resizeContents( int w, int h );
-    void	scrollBy( int dx, int dy );
-    virtual void setContentsPos( int x, int y );
-    void	ensureVisible(int x, int y);
-    void	ensureVisible(int x, int y, int xmargin, int ymargin);
-    void	center(int x, int y);
-    void	center(int x, int y, float xmargin, float ymargin);
-
-    void	updateScrollBars(); // ### virtual in 4.0
-    void	setEnabled( bool enable );
-
-protected:
-    virtual void drawContents(TQPainter*, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch);
-    virtual void drawContentsOffset(TQPainter*, int ox, int oy,
-		    int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch);
-
-
-    virtual void contentsMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-    virtual void contentsMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-    virtual void contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-    virtual void contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    virtual void contentsDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent * );
-    virtual void contentsDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent * );
-    virtual void contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent * );
-    virtual void contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent * );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    virtual void contentsWheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * );
-#endif
-    virtual void contentsContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * );
-
-
-    virtual void viewportPaintEvent( TQPaintEvent* );
-    virtual void viewportResizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* );
-    virtual void viewportMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-    virtual void viewportMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-    virtual void viewportMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-    virtual void viewportMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    virtual void viewportDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent * );
-    virtual void viewportDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent * );
-    virtual void viewportDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent * );
-    virtual void viewportDropEvent( TQDropEvent * );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    virtual void viewportWheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * );
-#endif
-    virtual void viewportContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * );
-
-    void	frameChanged();
-
-    virtual void setMargins(int left, int top, int right, int bottom);
-    int leftMargin() const;
-    int topMargin() const;
-    int rightMargin() const;
-    int bottomMargin() const;
-
-    bool focusNextPrevChild( bool next );
-
-    virtual void setHBarGeometry(TQScrollBar& hbar, int x, int y, int w, int h);
-    virtual void setVBarGeometry(TQScrollBar& vbar, int x, int y, int w, int h);
-
-    virtual void  resizeEvent(TQResizeEvent*);
-    virtual void  mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    virtual void  mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    virtual void  mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    virtual void  mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    virtual void  wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * );
-#endif
-    virtual void contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * );
-    virtual bool eventFilter( TQObject *, TQEvent *e );
-
-    void setCachedSizeHint( const TQSize &sh ) const;
-    TQSize cachedSizeHint() const;
-    void fontChange( const TQFont & );
-
-private:
-    void drawContents( TQPainter* );
-    void moveContents(int x, int y);
-
-    TQScrollViewData* d;
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void hslide(int);
-    void vslide(int);
-    void hbarIsPressed();
-    void hbarIsReleased();
-    void vbarIsPressed();
-    void vbarIsReleased();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    void doDragAutoScroll();
-    void startDragAutoScroll();
-    void stopDragAutoScroll();
-#endif
-
-private: // Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQScrollView( const TQScrollView & );
-    TQScrollView &operator=( const TQScrollView & );
-#endif
-    void changeFrameRect(const TQRect&);
-
-public:
-    void disableSizeHintCaching();
-
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_SCROLLVIEW
-
-#endif // TQSCROLLVIEW_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 38dd7cc..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,921 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQSlider class
-**
-** Created : 961019
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqslider.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SLIDER
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-static const int thresholdTime = 300;
-static const int repeatTime = 100;
-
-struct TQSliderPrivate
-{
-    // ### move these to TQSlider in TQt 4.0
-    int sliderStartVal;
-    TQSliderPrivate() : sliderStartVal( 0 ) { }
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQSlider
-    \brief The TQSlider widget provides a vertical or horizontal slider.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    The slider is the classic widget for controlling a bounded value.
-    It lets the user move a slider along a horizontal or vertical
-    groove and translates the slider's position into an integer value
-    within the legal range.
-
-    TQSlider inherits TQRangeControl, which provides the "integer" side
-    of the slider. setRange() and value() are likely to be used by
-    practically all slider users; see the \l TQRangeControl
-    documentation for information about the many other functions that
-    class provides.
-
-    The main functions offered by the slider itself are tickmark and
-    orientation control; you can use setTickmarks() to indicate where
-    you want the tickmarks to be, setTickInterval() to indicate how
-    many of them you want and setOrientation() to indicate whether the
-    slider is to be horizontal or vertical.
-
-    A slider accepts focus on Tab and uses the mouse wheel and a
-    suitable keyboard interface.
-
-    <img src=qslider-m.png> <img src=qslider-w.png>
-
-    \important setRange
-
-    \sa TQScrollBar TQSpinBox
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Slider\endlink
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQSlider::TickSetting
-
-    This enum specifies where the tickmarks are to be drawn relative
-    to the slider's groove and the handle the user moves.
-
-    \value NoMarks do not draw any tickmarks.
-    \value Both draw tickmarks on both sides of the groove.
-    \value Above draw tickmarks above the (horizontal) slider
-    \value Below draw tickmarks below the (horizontal) slider
-    \value Left draw tickmarks to the left of the (vertical) slider
-    \value Right draw tickmarks to the right of the (vertical) slider
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a vertical slider.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQSlider::TQSlider( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name  )
-{
-    orient = Qt::Vertical;
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a slider.
-
-    The \a orientation must be \l Qt::Vertical or \l Qt::Horizontal.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQSlider::TQSlider( Qt::Orientation orientation, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name )
-{
-    orient = orientation;
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a slider whose value can never be smaller than \a
-    minValue or greater than \a maxValue, whose page step size is \a
-    pageStep and whose value is initially \a value (which is
-    guaranteed to be in range using bound()).
-
-    If \a orientation is \c Qt::Vertical the slider is vertical and if it
-    is \c Qt::Horizontal the slider is horizontal.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQSlider::TQSlider( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep,
-		  int value, Qt::Orientation orientation,
-		  TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name ),
-      TQRangeControl( minValue, maxValue, 1, pageStep, value )
-{
-    orient = orientation;
-    init();
-    sliderVal = value;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destructor.
-*/
-TQSlider::~TQSlider()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-void TQSlider::init()
-{
-    d = new TQSliderPrivate;
-    timer = 0;
-    sliderPos = 0;
-    sliderVal = 0;
-    clickOffset = 0;
-    state = Idle;
-    track = TRUE;
-    ticks = NoMarks;
-    tickInt = 0;
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::TabFocus  );
-    initTicks();
-
-    TQSizePolicy sp( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Fixed );
-    if ( orient == Qt::Vertical )
-	sp.transpose();
-    tqsetSizePolicy( sp );
-    clearWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy );
-}
-
-
-/*
-    Does what's needed when someone changes the tickmark status.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::initTicks()
-{
-    tickOffset = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_SliderTickmarkOffset, this );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSlider::tracking
-    \brief whether slider tracking is enabled
-
-    If tracking is enabled (the default), the slider emits the
-    valueChanged() signal whenever the slider is being dragged. If
-    tracking is disabled, the slider emits the valueChanged() signal
-    when the user releases the mouse button (unless the value happens
-    to be the same as before).
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::setTracking( bool enable )
-{
-    track = enable;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQSlider::valueChanged( int value )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the slider value is changed, with the
-    new slider \a value as its argument.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQSlider::sliderPressed()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user presses the slider with the
-    mouse.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQSlider::sliderMoved( int value )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the slider is dragged, with the new
-    slider \a value as its argument.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQSlider::sliderReleased()
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user releases the slider with the mouse.
-*/
-
-/*
-    Calculates slider position corresponding to value \a v.
-*/
-
-int TQSlider::positionFromValue( int v ) const
-{
-    int  a = available();
-    int x = TQRangeControl::positionFromValue( v, a );
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal && TQApplication::reverseLayout() )
-	x = a - x;
-    return x;
-}
-
-/*
-    Returns the available space in which the slider can move.
-*/
-
-int TQSlider::available() const
-{
-    return tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_SliderSpaceAvailable, this );
-}
-
-/*
-    Calculates a value corresponding to slider position \a p.
-*/
-
-int TQSlider::valueFromPosition( int p ) const
-{
-    int a = available();
-    int x = TQRangeControl::valueFromPosition( p, a );
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal && TQApplication::reverseLayout() )
-	x = maxValue() + minValue() - x;
-    return x;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Implements the virtual TQRangeControl function.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::rangeChange()
-{
-    int newPos = positionFromValue( value() );
-    if ( newPos != sliderPos ) {
-	reallyMoveSlider( newPos );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Implements the virtual TQRangeControl function.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::valueChange()
-{
-    if ( sliderVal != value() ) {
-	int newPos = positionFromValue( value() );
-	sliderVal = value();
-	reallyMoveSlider( newPos );
-    }
-    emit valueChanged(value());
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSlider::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
-{
-    rangeChange();
-    initTicks();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Reimplements the virtual function TQWidget::setPalette().
-
-    Sets the background color to the mid color for Motif style sliders
-    using palette \a p.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::setPalette( const TQPalette &p )
-{
-    TQWidget::setPalette( p );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSlider::orientation
-    \brief the slider's orientation
-
-    The orientation must be \l Qt::Vertical (the default) or \l
-    Qt::Horizontal.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::setOrientation( Qt::Orientation orientation )
-{
-    if ( orientation == orient )
-	return;
-
-    if ( !testWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy ) ) {
-	TQSizePolicy sp = sizePolicy();
-	sp.transpose();
-	tqsetSizePolicy( sp );
-	clearWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy );
-    }
-
-    orient = orientation;
-
-    rangeChange();
-    update();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQSlider::sliderStart() const
-
-    Returns the start position of the slider.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the slider handle rectangle. (This is the visual marker
-    that the user can move.)
-*/
-
-TQRect TQSlider::sliderRect() const
-{
-    return tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics( TQStyle::CC_Slider, this,
-					   TQStyle::SC_SliderHandle );
-}
-
-/*
-    Performs the actual moving of the slider.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::reallyMoveSlider( int newPos )
-{
-    TQRegion oldR(sliderRect());
-    sliderPos = newPos;
-    TQRegion newR(sliderRect());
-
-    /* just the one tqrepaint if no background */
-    if (backgroundMode() == TQt::NoBackground)
-	tqrepaint(newR | oldR, FALSE);
-    else {
-	tqrepaint(oldR.subtract(newR));
-	tqrepaint(newR, FALSE);
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSlider::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-{
-    TQPainter p( this );
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-
-    TQStyle::SCFlags sub = TQStyle::SC_SliderGroove | TQStyle::SC_SliderHandle;
-    if ( tickmarks() != NoMarks )
-	sub |= TQStyle::SC_SliderTickmarks;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl( TQStyle::CC_Slider, &p, this, rect(), tqcolorGroup(),
-				flags, sub, state == Dragging ? TQStyle::SC_SliderHandle : TQStyle::SC_None );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSlider::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    int slideLength = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_SliderLength, this );
-    resetState();
-    d->sliderStartVal = sliderVal;
-    TQRect r = sliderRect();
-
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::RightButton )
-	return;
-
-    if ( r.contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-	state = Dragging;
-	clickOffset = (TQCOORD)( goodPart( e->pos() ) - sliderPos );
-	emit sliderPressed();
-    } else if ( e->button() == Qt::MidButton ) {
-	int pos = goodPart( e->pos() );
-	moveSlider( pos - slideLength / 2 );
-	state = Dragging;
-	clickOffset = slideLength / 2;
-    } else if ( (orient == Qt::Horizontal && e->pos().x() < r.left()) //### goodPart
-		|| (orient == Qt::Vertical && e->pos().y() < r.top()) ) {
-	if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal && TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	    state = TimingUp;
-	    addPage();
-	} else {
-	    state = TimingDown;
-	    subtractPage();
-	}
-	if ( !timer )
-	    timer = new TQTimer( this );
-	connect( timer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), TQT_SLOT(repeatTimeout()) );
-	timer->start( thresholdTime, TRUE );
-    } else if ( (orient == Qt::Horizontal && e->pos().x() > r.right()) //### goodPart
-		|| (orient == Qt::Vertical && e->pos().y() > r.bottom()) ) {
-	if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal && TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	    state = TimingDown;
-	    subtractPage();
-	} else {
-	    state = TimingUp;
-	    addPage();
-	}
-	if ( !timer )
-	    timer = new TQTimer( this );
-	connect( timer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), TQT_SLOT(repeatTimeout()) );
-	timer->start( thresholdTime, TRUE );
-    }
-    update( sliderRect() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSlider::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( state != Dragging )
-	return;
-
-    TQRect r = rect();
-    int m = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_MaximumDragDistance,
-				 this );
-    if ( m >= 0 ) {
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    r.setRect( r.x() - m, r.y() - 2*m/3,
-		       r.width() + 2*m, r.height() + 3*m );
-	else
-	    r.setRect( r.x() - 2*m/3, r.y() - m,
-		       r.width() + 3*m, r.height() + 2*m );
-	if ( !r.contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-	    moveSlider( positionFromValue(d->sliderStartVal) );
-	    return;
-	}
-    }
-
-    int pos = goodPart( e->pos() );
-    moveSlider( pos - clickOffset );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-void TQSlider::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->orientation() != orientation() && !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains(e->pos()) )
-	return;
-
-    static float offset = 0;
-    static TQSlider* offset_owner = 0;
-    if (offset_owner != this){
-	offset_owner = this;
-	offset = 0;
-    }
-    offset += -e->delta()*TQMAX(pageStep(),lineStep())/120;
-    if (TQABS(offset)<1)
-	return;
-    setValue( value() + int(offset) );
-    offset -= int(offset);
-    e->accept();
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSlider::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
-{
-    resetState();
-    update( sliderRect() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSlider::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * e)
-{
-    TQWidget::focusInEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSlider::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * e )
-{
-    TQWidget::focusOutEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Moves the left (or top) edge of the slider to position \a pos. The
-    slider is actually moved to the step position nearest the given \a
-    pos.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::moveSlider( int pos )
-{
-    int  a = available();
-    int newPos = TQMIN( a, TQMAX( 0, pos ) );
-    int newVal = valueFromPosition( newPos );
-    if (tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_Slider_SnapToValue, this))
-	newPos = positionFromValue( newVal );
-    if ( sliderPos != newPos )
-	reallyMoveSlider( newPos );
-    if ( sliderVal != newVal ) {
-	sliderVal = newVal;
-	emit sliderMoved( sliderVal );
-    }
-    if ( tracking() && sliderVal != value() )
-	setValue( sliderVal );
-
-}
-
-
-/*
-    Resets all state information and stops the timer.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::resetState()
-{
-    if ( timer ) {
-	timer->stop();
-	timer->disconnect();
-    }
-    switch ( state ) {
-    case TimingUp:
-    case TimingDown:
-	break;
-    case Dragging: {
-	setValue( valueFromPosition( sliderPos ) );
-	emit sliderReleased();
-	break;
-    }
-    case Idle:
-	break;
-    default:
-	qWarning("TQSlider: (%s) in wrong state", name( "unnamed" ) );
-    }
-    state = Idle;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSlider::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    bool sloppy = bool(tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_Slider_SloppyKeyEvents, this));
-    switch ( e->key() ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Left:
-	if ( sloppy || orient == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	    if (TQApplication::reverseLayout())
-		addLine();
-	    else
-		subtractLine();
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Right:
-	if ( sloppy || orient == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	    if (TQApplication::reverseLayout())
-		subtractLine();
-	    else
-		addLine();
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Up:
-	if ( sloppy || orient == Qt::Vertical )
-	    subtractLine();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Down:
-	if ( sloppy || orient == Qt::Vertical )
-	    addLine();
-	break;
-    case TQt::Key_Prior:
-	subtractPage();
-	break;
-    case TQt::Key_Next:
-	addPage();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Home:
-	setValue( minValue() );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_End:
-	setValue( maxValue() );
-	break;
-    default:
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-}
-
-void TQSlider::setValue( int value )
-{
-    TQRangeControl::setValue( value );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::addLine()
-{
-    TQRangeControl::addLine();
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::subtractLine()
-{
-    TQRangeControl::subtractLine();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Moves the slider one pageStep() up or right.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::addStep()
-{
-    addPage();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Moves the slider one pageStep() down or left.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::subtractStep()
-{
-    subtractPage();
-}
-
-
-/*
-  Waits for autorepeat.
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::repeatTimeout()
-{
-    TQ_ASSERT( timer );
-    timer->disconnect();
-    if ( state == TimingDown )
-	connect( timer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), TQT_SLOT(subtractStep()) );
-    else if ( state == TimingUp )
-	connect( timer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), TQT_SLOT(addStep()) );
-    timer->start( repeatTime, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*
-  Returns the relevant dimension of \a p.
-*/
-
-int TQSlider::goodPart( const TQPoint &p ) const
-{
-    return (orient == Qt::Horizontal) ?  p.x() : p.y();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQSlider::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    const int length = 84, tickSpace = 5;
-    int thick = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_SliderThickness, this );
-    if ( ticks & Above )
-	thick += tickSpace;
-    if ( ticks & Below )
-	thick += tickSpace;
-    int w = thick, h = length;
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	w = length;
-	h = thick;
-    }
-    return (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_Slider, this,
-				     TQSize(w, h)).expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut()));
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQSlider::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    TQSize s = tqsizeHint();
-    int length = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_SliderLength, this);
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	s.setWidth( length );
-    else
-	s.setHeight( length );
-
-    return s;
-}
-
-/*! \fn void TQSlider::tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType, TQSizePolicy::SizeType, bool )
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQSlider::tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy sp )
-{
-    // ## remove 4.0
-    TQWidget::tqsetSizePolicy( sp );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-TQSizePolicy TQSlider::sizePolicy() const
-{
-    // ### 4.0 remove this reimplementation
-    return TQWidget::tqsizePolicy();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSlider::tickmarks
-    \brief the tickmark settings for this slider
-
-    The valid values are in \l{TQSlider::TickSetting}. The default is
-    \c NoMarks.
-
-    \sa tickInterval
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::setTickmarks( TickSetting s )
-{
-    ticks = s;
-    initTicks();
-    update();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSlider::tickInterval
-    \brief the interval between tickmarks
-
-    This is a value interval, not a pixel interval. If it is 0, the
-    slider will choose between lineStep() and pageStep(). The initial
-    value of tickInterval is 0.
-
-    \sa TQRangeControl::lineStep(), TQRangeControl::pageStep()
-*/
-
-void TQSlider::setTickInterval( int i )
-{
-    tickInt = TQMAX( 0, i );
-    update();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSlider::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    TQWidget::styleChange( old );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSlider::minValue
-    \brief the current minimum value of the slider
-
-    When setting this property, the \l TQSlider::maxValue is adjusted,
-    if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-int TQSlider::minValue() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::minValue();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSlider::maxValue
-    \brief the current maximum value of the slider
-
-    When setting this property, the \l TQSlider::minValue is adjusted,
-    if necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-int TQSlider::maxValue() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::maxValue();
-}
-
-void TQSlider::setMinValue( int minVal )
-{
-    TQRangeControl::setMinValue( minVal );
-}
-
-void TQSlider::setMaxValue( int maxVal )
-{
-    TQRangeControl::setMaxValue( maxVal );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSlider::lineStep
-    \brief the current line step
-
-    When setting lineStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
-    called if the new line step is different from the previous
-    setting.
-
-    \sa setSteps() TQRangeControl::pageStep() setRange()
-*/
-int TQSlider::lineStep() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::lineStep();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSlider::pageStep
-    \brief the current page step
-
-    When setting pageStep, the virtual stepChange() function will be
-    called if the new page step is different from the previous
-    setting.
-
-    \sa TQRangeControl::setSteps() setLineStep() setRange()
-*/
-
-int TQSlider::pageStep() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::pageStep();
-}
-
-void TQSlider::setLineStep( int i )
-{
-    setSteps( i, pageStep() );
-}
-
-void TQSlider::setPageStep( int i )
-{
-    setSteps( lineStep(), i );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSlider::value
-    \brief the current slider value
-
-    \sa TQRangeControl::value() prevValue()
-*/
-
-int TQSlider::value() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::value();
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 76191aa..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqslider.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQSlider class
-**
-** Created : 961019
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQSLIDER_H
-#define TQSLIDER_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqrangecontrol.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SLIDER
-
-struct TQSliderPrivate;
-
-class TQTimer;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQSlider : public TQWidget, public TQRangeControl
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( TickSetting )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int minValue READ minValue WRITE setMinValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int maxValue READ maxValue WRITE setMaxValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int lineStep READ lineStep WRITE setLineStep )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int pageStep READ pageStep WRITE setPageStep )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int value READ value WRITE setValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool tracking READ tracking WRITE setTracking )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Orientation orientation READ orientation WRITE setOrientation )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TickSetting tickmarks READ tickmarks WRITE setTickmarks )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int tickInterval READ tickInterval WRITE setTickInterval )
-
-public:
-    enum TickSetting { NoMarks = 0, Above = 1, Left = Above,
-		       Below = 2, Right = Below, Both = 3 };
-
-    TQSlider( TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 );
-    TQSlider( Qt::Orientation, TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 );
-    TQSlider( int minValue, int maxValue, int pageStep, int value, Qt::Orientation,
-	     TQWidget *parent, const char* name = 0 );
-    ~TQSlider();
-
-    virtual void	setOrientation( Qt::Orientation );
-    Qt::Orientation orientation() const;
-    virtual void	setTracking( bool enable );
-    bool	tracking() const;
-    virtual void 	setPalette( const TQPalette & );
-
-    int sliderStart() const;
-    TQRect sliderRect() const;
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    void tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy sp );
-    void tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw = FALSE );
-
-    TQSizePolicy sizePolicy() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    virtual void setTickmarks( TickSetting );
-    TickSetting tickmarks() const { return ticks; }
-
-    virtual void setTickInterval( int );
-    int 	tickInterval() const { return tickInt; }
-
-    int	 minValue() const;
-    int	 maxValue() const;
-    void setMinValue( int );
-    void setMaxValue( int );
-    int	 lineStep() const;
-    int	 pageStep() const;
-    void setLineStep( int );
-    void setPageStep( int );
-    int  value() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void	setValue( int );
-    void	addStep();
-    void	subtractStep();
-    void	addLine();
-    void	subtractLine();
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void	valueChanged( int value );
-    void	sliderPressed();
-    void	sliderMoved( int value );
-    void	sliderReleased();
-
-protected:
-    void	resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void	paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-
-    void	keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * );
-    void	mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void	mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    void	wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * );
-#endif
-    void	focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent *e );
-    void	focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent *e );
-
-    void	styleChange( TQStyle& );
-
-    void	valueChange();
-    void	rangeChange();
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void	repeatTimeout();
-
-private:
-    enum State { Idle, Dragging, TimingUp, TimingDown };
-
-    void	init();
-    int		positionFromValue( int ) const;
-    int		valueFromPosition( int ) const;
-    void	moveSlider( int );
-    void	reallyMoveSlider( int );
-    void	resetState();
-    int		available() const;
-    int		goodPart( const TQPoint& ) const;
-    void	initTicks();
-
-    TQSliderPrivate *d;
-    TQTimer	*timer;
-    TQCOORD	sliderPos;
-    int		sliderVal;
-    TQCOORD	clickOffset;
-    State	state;
-    bool	track;
-    TQCOORD	tickOffset;
-    TickSetting	ticks;
-    int		tickInt;
-    Qt::Orientation orient;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQSlider( const TQSlider & );
-    TQSlider &operator=( const TQSlider & );
-#endif
-};
-
-inline bool TQSlider::tracking() const
-{
-    return track;
-}
-
-inline Qt::Orientation TQSlider::orientation() const
-{
-    return orient;
-}
-
-inline int TQSlider::sliderStart() const
-{
-    return sliderPos;
-}
-
-inline void TQSlider::tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::SizeType hor, TQSizePolicy::SizeType ver, bool hfw )
-{
-    TQWidget::tqsetSizePolicy( hor, ver, hfw );
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_SLIDER
-
-#endif // TQSLIDER_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 51cf8ed..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1116 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQSpinBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 970101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqspinbox.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SPINBOX
-
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqpushbutton.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqlineedit.h"
-#include "tqvalidator.h"
-#include "tqpixmapcache.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-static bool sumOutOfRange(int current, int add)
-{
-    if (add > 0 && INT_MAX - add < current) {
-        return true;
-    }
-    if (add < 0 && INT_MIN - add > current) {
-        return true;
-    }
-    return false;
-}
-
-class TQSpinBoxPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQSpinBoxPrivate() {}
-    TQSpinWidget* controls;
-    uint selreq	: 1;
-};
-
-class TQSpinBoxValidator : public TQIntValidator
-{
-public:
-    TQSpinBoxValidator( TQSpinBox *sb, const char *name )
-	: TQIntValidator( TQT_TQOBJECT(sb), name ), spinBox( sb ) { }
-
-    virtual State validate( TQString& str, int& pos ) const;
-
-private:
-    TQSpinBox *spinBox;
-};
-
-TQValidator::State TQSpinBoxValidator::validate( TQString& str, int& pos ) const
-{
-    TQString pref = spinBox->prefix();
-    TQString suff = spinBox->suffix();
-    TQString suffStriped = suff.stripWhiteSpace();
-    uint overhead = pref.length() + suff.length();
-    State state = Invalid;
-
-    ((TQIntValidator *) this)->setRange( spinBox->minValue(),
-					spinBox->maxValue() );
-    if ( overhead == 0 ) {
-	state = TQIntValidator::validate( str, pos );
-    } else {
-	bool stripedVersion = FALSE;
-	if ( str.length() >= overhead && str.startsWith(pref)
-	     && (str.endsWith(suff)
-		 || (stripedVersion = str.endsWith(suffStriped))) ) {
-	    if ( stripedVersion )
-		overhead = pref.length() + suffStriped.length();
-	    TQString core = str.mid( pref.length(), str.length() - overhead );
-	    int corePos = pos - pref.length();
-	    state = TQIntValidator::validate( core, corePos );
-	    pos = corePos + pref.length();
-	    str.replace( pref.length(), str.length() - overhead, core );
-	} else {
-	    state = TQIntValidator::validate( str, pos );
-	    if ( state == Invalid ) {
-		// stripWhiteSpace(), cf. TQSpinBox::interpretText()
-		TQString special = spinBox->specialValueText().stripWhiteSpace();
-		TQString candidate = str.stripWhiteSpace();
-
-		if ( special.startsWith(candidate) ) {
-		    if ( candidate.length() == special.length() ) {
-			state = Acceptable;
-		    } else {
-			state = Intermediate;
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    return state;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQSpinBox
-    \brief The TQSpinBox class provides a spin box widget (spin button).
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    TQSpinBox allows the user to choose a value either by clicking the
-    up/down buttons to increase/decrease the value currently displayed
-    or by typing the value directly into the spin box. If the value is
-    entered directly into the spin box, Enter (or Return) must be
-    pressed to apply the new value. The value is usually an integer.
-
-    Every time the value changes TQSpinBox emits the valueChanged()
-    signal. The current value can be fetched with value() and set
-    with setValue().
-
-    The spin box keeps the value within a numeric range, and to
-    multiples of the lineStep() size (see TQRangeControl for details).
-    Clicking the up/down buttons or using the keyboard accelerator's
-    up and down arrows will increase or decrease the current value in
-    steps of size lineStep(). The minimum and maximum value and the
-    step size can be set using one of the constructors, and can be
-    changed later with setMinValue(), setMaxValue() and setLineStep().
-
-    Most spin boxes are directional, but TQSpinBox can also operate as
-    a circular spin box, i.e. if the range is 0-99 and the current
-    value is 99, clicking "up" will give 0. Use setWrapping() if you
-    want circular behavior.
-
-    The displayed value can be prepended and appended with arbitrary
-    strings indicating, for example, currency or the unit of
-    measurement. See setPrefix() and setSuffix(). The text in the spin
-    box is retrieved with text() (which includes any prefix() and
-    suffix()), or with cleanText() (which has no prefix(), no suffix()
-    and no leading or trailing whitespace). currentValueText() returns
-    the spin box's current value as text.
-
-    Normally the spin box displays up and down arrows in the buttons.
-    You can use setButtonSymbols() to change the display to show
-    <b>+</b> and <b>-</b> symbols if you prefer. In either case the up
-    and down arrow keys work as expected.
-
-    It is often desirable to give the user a special (often default)
-    choice in addition to the range of numeric values. See
-    setSpecialValueText() for how to do this with TQSpinBox.
-
-    The default \l TQWidget::focusPolicy() is StrongFocus.
-
-    If using prefix(), suffix() and specialValueText() don't provide
-    enough control, you can ignore them and subclass TQSpinBox instead.
-
-    TQSpinBox can easily be subclassed to allow the user to input
-    things other than an integer value as long as the allowed input
-    can be mapped to a range of integers. This can be done by
-    overriding the virtual functions mapValueToText() and
-    mapTextToValue(), and setting another suitable validator using
-    setValidator().
-
-    For example, these functions could be changed so that the user
-    provided values from 0.0 to 10.0, or -1 to signify 'Auto', while
-    the range of integers used inside the program would be -1 to 100:
-
-    \code
-	class MySpinBox : public TQSpinBox
-	{
-	    TQ_OBJECT
-	public:
-	    ...
-
-	    TQString mapValueToText( int value )
-	    {
-		if ( value == -1 ) // special case
-		    return TQString( "Auto" );
-
-		return TQString( "%1.%2" ) // 0.0 to 10.0
-		    .arg( value / 10 ).arg( value % 10 );
-	    }
-
-	    int mapTextToValue( bool *ok )
-	    {
-		if ( text() == "Auto" ) // special case
-		    return -1;
-
-		return (int) ( 10 * text().toFloat() ); // 0 to 100
-	    }
-	};
-    \endcode
-
-    <img src=qspinbox-m.png> <img src=qspinbox-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQScrollBar TQSlider
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Spin Box \endlink
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a spin box with the default TQRangeControl range and
-    step values. It is called \a name and has parent \a parent.
-
-    \sa minValue(), maxValue(), setRange(), lineStep(), setSteps()
-*/
-
-TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox( TQWidget * parent , const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ),
-      TQRangeControl()
-{
-    initSpinBox();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a spin box that allows values from \a minValue to \a
-    maxValue inclusive, with step amount \a step. The value is
-    initially set to \a minValue.
-
-    The spin box is called \a name and has parent \a parent.
-
-    \sa minValue(), maxValue(), setRange(), lineStep(), setSteps()
-*/
-
-TQSpinBox::TQSpinBox( int minValue, int maxValue, int step, TQWidget* parent,
-		    const char* name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, TQt::WNoAutoErase ),
-      TQRangeControl( minValue, maxValue, step, step, minValue )
-{
-    initSpinBox();
-}
-
-/*
-  \internal Initialization.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::initSpinBox()
-{
-    d = new TQSpinBoxPrivate;
-
-    d->controls = new TQSpinWidget( this, "controls" );
-    connect( d->controls, TQT_SIGNAL( stepUpPressed() ), TQT_SLOT( stepUp() ) );
-    connect( d->controls, TQT_SIGNAL( stepDownPressed() ), TQT_SLOT( stepDown() ) );
-
-    wrap = FALSE;
-    edited = FALSE;
-    d->selreq = FALSE;
-
-    validate = new TQSpinBoxValidator( this, "validator" );
-    vi = new TQLineEdit( this, "qt_spinbox_edit" );
-    d->controls->setEditWidget( vi );
-    vi->setValidator( validate );
-    vi->installEventFilter( this );
-    vi->setFrame( FALSE );
-    setFocusProxy( vi );
-
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBackground, TQt::PaletteBase );
-
-    updateDisplay();
-
-    connect( vi, TQT_SIGNAL(textChanged(const TQString&)), TQT_SLOT(textChanged()) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the spin box, freeing all memory and other resources.
-*/
-
-TQSpinBox::~TQSpinBox()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::text
-    \brief the spin box's text, including any prefix() and suffix()
-
-    There is no default text.
-
-    \sa value()
-*/
-
-TQString TQSpinBox::text() const
-{
-    return vi->text();
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::cleanText
-    \brief the spin box's text with no prefix(), suffix() or leading
-    or trailing whitespace.
-
-    \sa text, prefix, suffix
-*/
-
-TQString TQSpinBox::cleanText() const
-{
-    TQString s = TQString(text()).stripWhiteSpace();
-    if ( !prefix().isEmpty() ) {
-	TQString px = TQString(prefix()).stripWhiteSpace();
-	int len = px.length();
-	if ( len && s.left(len) == px )  // Remove _only_ if it is the prefix
-	    s.remove( (uint)0, len );
-    }
-    if ( !suffix().isEmpty() ) {
-	TQString sx = TQString(suffix()).stripWhiteSpace();
-	int len = sx.length();
-	if ( len && s.right(len) == sx )  // Remove _only_ if it is the suffix
-	    s.truncate( s.length() - len );
-    }
-    return s.stripWhiteSpace();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::specialValueText
-    \brief the special-value text
-
-    If set, the spin box will display this text instead of a numeric
-    value whenever the current value is equal to minVal(). Typical use
-    is to indicate that this choice has a special (default) meaning.
-
-    For example, if your spin box allows the user to choose the margin
-    width in a print dialog and your application is able to
-    automatically choose a good margin width, you can set up the spin
-    box like this:
-    \code
-	TQSpinBox marginBox( -1, 20, 1, parent, "marginBox" );
-	marginBox->setSuffix( " mm" );
-	marginBox->setSpecialValueText( "Auto" );
-    \endcode
-    The user will then be able to choose a margin width from 0-20
-    millimeters or select "Auto" to leave it to the application to
-    choose. Your code must then interpret the spin box value of -1 as
-    the user requesting automatic margin width.
-
-    All values are displayed with the prefix() and suffix() (if set),
-    \e except for the special value, which only shows the special
-    value text.
-
-    To turn off the special-value text display, call this function
-    with an empty string. The default is no special-value text, i.e.
-    the numeric value is shown as usual.
-
-    If no special-value text is set, specialValueText() returns
-    TQString::null.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::setSpecialValueText( const TQString &text )
-{
-    specText = text;
-    updateDisplay();
-}
-
-
-TQString TQSpinBox::specialValueText() const
-{
-    if ( specText.isEmpty() )
-	return TQString::null;
-    else
-	return specText;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::prefix
-    \brief the spin box's prefix
-
-    The prefix is prepended to the start of the displayed value.
-    Typical use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency
-    symbol. For example:
-
-    \code
-	sb->setPrefix( "$" );
-    \endcode
-
-    To turn off the prefix display, set this property to an empty
-    string. The default is no prefix. The prefix is not displayed for
-    the minValue() if specialValueText() is not empty.
-
-    If no prefix is set, prefix() returns TQString::null.
-
-    \sa suffix()
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::setPrefix( const TQString &text )
-{
-    pfix = text;
-    updateDisplay();
-}
-
-
-TQString TQSpinBox::prefix() const
-{
-    if ( pfix.isEmpty() )
-	return TQString::null;
-    else
-	return pfix;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::suffix
-    \brief the suffix of the spin box
-
-    The suffix is appended to the end of the displayed value. Typical
-    use is to display a unit of measurement or a currency symbol. For
-    example:
-
-    \code
-	sb->setSuffix( " km" );
-    \endcode
-
-    To turn off the suffix display, set this property to an empty
-    string. The default is no suffix. The suffix is not displayed for
-    the minValue() if specialValueText() is not empty.
-
-    If no suffix is set, suffix() returns a TQString::null.
-
-    \sa prefix()
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::setSuffix( const TQString &text )
-{
-    sfix = text;
-    updateDisplay();
-}
-
-TQString TQSpinBox::suffix() const
-{
-    if ( sfix.isEmpty() )
-	return TQString::null;
-    else
-	return sfix;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::wrapping
-    \brief whether it is possible to step the value from the highest
-    value to the lowest value and vice versa
-
-    By default, wrapping is turned off.
-
-    If you have a range of 0..100 and wrapping is off when the user
-    reaches 100 and presses the Up Arrow nothing will happen; but if
-    wrapping is on the value will change from 100 to 0, then to 1,
-    etc. When wrapping is on, navigating past the highest value takes
-    you to the lowest and vice versa.
-
-    \sa minValue, maxValue, setRange()
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::setWrapping( bool on )
-{
-    wrap = on;
-    updateDisplay();
-}
-
-bool TQSpinBox::wrapping() const
-{
-    return wrap;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQSpinBox::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    TQSize sz = vi->tqsizeHint();
-    int h = sz.height();
-    TQFontMetrics fm( font() );
-    int w = 35;
-    int wx = fm.width( ' ' )*2;
-    TQString s;
-    s = prefix() + ( (TQSpinBox*)this )->mapValueToText( minValue() ) + suffix();
-    w = TQMAX( w, fm.width( s ) + wx);
-    s = prefix() + ( (TQSpinBox*)this )->mapValueToText( maxValue() ) + suffix();
-    w = TQMAX(w, fm.width( s ) + wx );
-    if ( !specialValueText().isEmpty() ) {
-	s = specialValueText();
-	w = TQMAX( w, fm.width( s ) + wx );
-    }
-    return tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_SpinBox, this,
-				    TQSize( w + d->controls->downRect().width(),
-					   h + tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DefaultFrameWidth ) * 2).
-				    expandedTo( TQApplication::globalStrut() ));
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQSpinBox::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    int w = vi->tqminimumSizeHint().width() + d->controls->downRect().width();
-    int h = TQMAX( vi->tqminimumSizeHint().height(), d->controls->tqminimumSizeHint().height() );
-    return TQSize( w, h );
-}
-
-// Does the tqlayout of the lineedit and the buttons
-
-void TQSpinBox::arrangeWidgets()
-{
-    d->controls->arrange();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::value
-    \brief the value of the spin box
-
-    \sa TQRangeControl::setValue()
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::setValue( int value )
-{
-    edited = FALSE; // we ignore anything entered and not yet interpreted
-    TQRangeControl::setValue( value );
-    updateDisplay();
-}
-
-int TQSpinBox::value() const
-{
-    TQSpinBox * that = (TQSpinBox *) this;
-    if ( edited ) {
-	that->edited = FALSE;  // avoid recursion
-	that->interpretText();
-    }
-    return TQRangeControl::value();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Increases the spin box's value by one lineStep(), wrapping as
-    necessary if wrapping() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on
-    the pointing-up button and can be used for keyboard accelerators,
-    for example.
-
-    \sa stepDown(), addLine(), lineStep(), setSteps(), setValue(), value()
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::stepUp()
-{
-    if ( edited )
-	interpretText();
-    if ( wrapping() && ( value()+lineStep() > maxValue() || sumOutOfRange(value(), lineStep() ) ) ) {
-	setValue( minValue() );
-    } else {
-	addLine();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Decreases the spin box's value one lineStep(), wrapping as
-    necessary if wrapping() is TRUE. This is the same as clicking on
-    the pointing-down button and can be used for keyboard
-    accelerators, for example.
-
-    \sa stepUp(), subtractLine(), lineStep(), setSteps(), setValue(), value()
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::stepDown()
-{
-    if ( edited )
-	interpretText();
-    if ( wrapping() && ( value()-lineStep() < minValue() || sumOutOfRange(value(), -lineStep() ) ) ) {
-	setValue( maxValue() );
-    } else {
-	subtractLine();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQSpinBox::valueChanged( int value )
-
-    This signal is emitted every time the value of the spin box
-    changes; the new value is passed in \a value. This signal will be
-    emitted as a result of a call to setValue(), or because the user
-    changed the value by using a keyboard accelerator or mouse click,
-    etc.
-
-    Note that the valueChanged() signal is emitted \e every time, not
-    just for the "last" step; i.e. if the user clicks "up" three
-    times, this signal is emitted three times.
-
-    \sa value()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQSpinBox::valueChanged( const TQString& valueText )
-
-    \overload
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the valueChanged( int ) signal is
-    emitted, i.e. every time the value of the spin box changes
-    (whatever the cause, e.g. by setValue(), by a keyboard
-    accelerator, by mouse clicks, etc.).
-
-    The \a valueText parameter is the same string that is displayed in
-    the edit field of the spin box.
-
-    \sa value() prefix() suffix() specialValueText()
-*/
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Intercepts and handles the events coming to the embedded TQLineEdit
-    that have special meaning for the TQSpinBox. The object is passed
-    as \a o and the event is passed as \a ev.
-*/
-
-bool TQSpinBox::eventFilter( TQObject* o, TQEvent* ev )
-{
-    if (o != TQT_TQOBJECT(vi))
-	return TQWidget::eventFilter(o,ev);
-
-    if ( ev->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
-	TQKeyEvent* k = (TQKeyEvent*)ev;
-
-	bool retval = FALSE; // workaround for MSVC++ optimization bug
-	if( (k->key() == Qt::Key_Tab) || (k->key() == TQt::Key_BackTab) ){
-	    if ( k->state() & ControlButton )
-		return FALSE;
-	    if ( edited )
-		interpretText();
-	    tqApp->sendEvent( this, ev );
-	    retval = TRUE;
-	} if ( k->key() == Qt::Key_Up ) {
-	    stepUp();
-	    retval = TRUE;
-	} else if ( k->key() == Qt::Key_Down ) {
-	    stepDown();
-	    retval = TRUE;
-	} else if ( k->key() == Qt::Key_Enter || k->key() == Qt::Key_Return ) {
-	    interpretText();
-	    return FALSE;
-	}
-	if ( retval )
-	    return retval;
-    } else if ( ev->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut || ev->type() == TQEvent::Hide ) {
-	if ( edited ) {
-	    interpretText();
-	}
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQSpinBox::setEnabled( bool enabled )
-{
-    TQWidget::setEnabled( enabled );
-    updateDisplay();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSpinBox::leaveEvent( TQEvent* )
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSpinBox::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* )
-{
-    d->controls->resize( width(), height() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-void TQSpinBox::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * e )
-{
-    e->accept();
-    static float offset = 0;
-    static TQSpinBox* offset_owner = 0;
-    if (offset_owner != this) {
-	offset_owner = this;
-	offset = 0;
-    }
-    offset += -e->delta()/120;
-    if (TQABS(offset) < 1)
-	return;
-    int ioff = int(offset);
-    int i;
-    for (i=0; i<TQABS(ioff); i++)
-	offset > 0 ? stepDown() : stepUp();
-    offset -= ioff;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is called by TQRangeControl whenever the
-    value has changed. The TQSpinBox reimplementation updates the
-    display and emits the valueChanged() Q_SIGNALS; if you need
-    additional processing, either reimplement this or connect to one
-    of the valueChanged() Q_SIGNALS.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::valueChange()
-{
-    d->selreq = hasFocus();
-    updateDisplay();
-    d->selreq = FALSE;
-    emit valueChanged( value() );
-    emit valueChanged( currentValueText() );
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ValueChanged );
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is called by TQRangeControl whenever the
-    range has changed. It adjusts the default validator and updates
-    the display; if you need additional processing, you can
-    reimplement this function.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::rangeChange()
-{
-    updateDisplay();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the validator to \a v. The validator controls what keyboard
-    input is accepted when the user is editing in the value field. The
-    default is to use a suitable TQIntValidator.
-
-    Use setValidator(0) to turn off input validation (entered input
-    will still be kept within the spin box's range).
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::setValidator( const TQValidator* v )
-{
-    if ( vi )
-	vi->setValidator( v );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the validator that constrains editing for this spin box if
-    there is any; otherwise returns 0.
-
-    \sa setValidator() TQValidator
-*/
-
-const TQValidator * TQSpinBox::validator() const
-{
-    return vi ? vi->validator() : 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Updates the contents of the embedded TQLineEdit to reflect the
-    current value using mapValueToText(). Also enables/disables the
-    up/down push buttons accordingly.
-
-    \sa mapValueToText()
-*/
-void TQSpinBox::updateDisplay()
-{
-    vi->setUpdatesEnabled( FALSE );
-    vi->setText( currentValueText() );
-    if ( d->selreq && isVisible() && ( hasFocus() || vi->hasFocus() ) ) {
-	selectAll();
-    } else {
-	if ( !suffix().isEmpty() && vi->text().endsWith(suffix()) )
-	     vi->setCursorPosition( vi->text().length() - suffix().length() );
-    }
-    vi->setUpdatesEnabled( TRUE );
-    vi->tqrepaint( FALSE ); // immediate tqrepaint needed for some reason
-    edited = FALSE;
-
-    bool upEnabled = isEnabled() && ( wrapping() || value() < maxValue() );
-    bool downEnabled = isEnabled() && ( wrapping() || value() > minValue() );
-
-    d->controls->setUpEnabled( upEnabled );
-    d->controls->setDownEnabled( downEnabled );
-    vi->setEnabled( isEnabled() );
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    TQSpinBox calls this after the user has manually edited the
-    contents of the spin box (i.e. by typing in the embedded
-    TQLineEdit, rather than using the up/down buttons/keys).
-
-    The default implementation of this function interprets the new
-    text using mapTextToValue(). If mapTextToValue() is successful, it
-    changes the spin box's value; if not, the value is left unchanged.
-
-    \sa editor()
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::interpretText()
-{
-    bool ok = TRUE;
-    bool done = FALSE;
-    int newVal = 0;
-    if ( !specialValueText().isEmpty() ) {
-	TQString s = text().stripWhiteSpace();
-	TQString t = specialValueText().stripWhiteSpace();
-	if ( s == t ) {
-	    newVal = minValue();
-	    done = TRUE;
-	}
-    }
-    if ( !done )
-	newVal = mapTextToValue( &ok );
-    if ( ok )
-	setValue( newVal );
-    updateDisplay(); // sometimes redundant
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tqgeometry of the "up" button.
-*/
-
-TQRect TQSpinBox::upRect() const
-{
-    return d->controls->upRect();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tqgeometry of the "down" button.
-*/
-
-TQRect TQSpinBox::downRect() const
-{
-    return d->controls->downRect();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the embedded TQLineEdit.
-*/
-
-TQLineEdit* TQSpinBox::editor() const
-{
-    return vi;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This slot is called whenever the user edits the spin box's text.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::textChanged()
-{
-    edited = TRUE; // this flag is cleared in updateDisplay()
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to
-    display value \a v. The default implementation returns a string
-    containing \a v printed in the standard way. Reimplementations may
-    return anything. (See the example in the detailed description.)
-
-    Note that TQt does not call this function for specialValueText()
-    and that neither prefix() nor suffix() are included in the return
-    value.
-
-    If you reimplement this, you may also need to reimplement
-    mapTextToValue().
-
-    \sa updateDisplay(), mapTextToValue()
-*/
-
-TQString TQSpinBox::mapValueToText( int v )
-{
-    TQString s;
-    s.setNum( v );
-    return s;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is used by the spin box whenever it needs to
-    interpret text entered by the user as a value. The text is
-    available as text() and as cleanText(), and this function must
-    parse it if possible. If \a ok is not 0: if it parses the text
-    successfully, \a *ok is set to TRUE; otherwise \a *ok is set to
-    FALSE.
-
-    Subclasses that need to display spin box values in a non-numeric
-    way need to reimplement this function.
-
-    Note that TQt handles specialValueText() separately; this function
-    is only concerned with the other values.
-
-    The default implementation tries to interpret the text() as an
-    integer in the standard way and returns the integer value.
-
-    \sa interpretText(), mapValueToText()
-*/
-
-int TQSpinBox::mapTextToValue( bool* ok )
-{
-    TQString s = text();
-    int newVal = s.toInt( ok );
-    if ( !(*ok) && !( !prefix() && !suffix() ) ) {// Try removing any pre/suffix
-	s = cleanText();
-	newVal = s.toInt( ok );
-    }
-    return newVal;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the full text calculated from the current value, including
-    any prefix and suffix. If there is special value text and the
-    value is minValue() the specialValueText() is returned.
-*/
-
-TQString TQSpinBox::currentValueText()
-{
-    TQString s;
-    if ( (value() == minValue()) && !specialValueText().isEmpty() ) {
-	s = specialValueText();
-    } else {
-	s = prefix();
-	s.append( mapValueToText( value() ) );
-	s.append( suffix() );
-    }
-    return s;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    arrangeWidgets();
-    TQWidget::styleChange( old );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQSpinBox::ButtonSymbols
-
-    This enum type determines what the buttons in a spin box show.
-
-    \value UpDownArrows the buttons show little arrows in the classic
-    style.
-
-    \value PlusMinus the buttons show <b>+</b> and <b>-</b> symbols.
-
-    \sa TQSpinBox::buttonSymbols
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::buttonSymbols
-
-    \brief the current button symbol mode
-
-    The possible values can be either \c UpDownArrows or \c PlusMinus.
-    The default is \c UpDownArrows.
-
-    \sa ButtonSymbols
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::setButtonSymbols( ButtonSymbols newSymbols )
-{
-    if ( buttonSymbols() == newSymbols )
-	return;
-
-    switch ( newSymbols ) {
-    case UpDownArrows:
-	d->controls->setButtonSymbols( TQSpinWidget::UpDownArrows );
-	break;
-    case PlusMinus:
-	d->controls->setButtonSymbols( TQSpinWidget::PlusMinus );
-	break;
-    }
-    //    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-TQSpinBox::ButtonSymbols TQSpinBox::buttonSymbols() const
-{
-    switch( d->controls->buttonSymbols() ) {
-    case TQSpinWidget::UpDownArrows:
-	return UpDownArrows;
-    case TQSpinWidget::PlusMinus:
-	return PlusMinus;
-    }
-    return UpDownArrows;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::minValue
-
-    \brief the minimum value of the spin box
-
-    When setting this property, \l TQSpinBox::maxValue is adjusted, if
-    necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
-    \sa setRange() setSpecialValueText()
-*/
-
-int TQSpinBox::minValue() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::minValue();
-}
-
-void TQSpinBox::setMinValue( int minVal )
-{
-    TQRangeControl::setMinValue( minVal );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::maxValue
-    \brief the maximum value of the spin box
-
-    When setting this property, \l TQSpinBox::minValue is adjusted, if
-    necessary, to ensure that the range remains valid.
-
-    \sa setRange() setSpecialValueText()
-*/
-
-int TQSpinBox::maxValue() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::maxValue();
-}
-
-void TQSpinBox::setMaxValue( int maxVal )
-{
-    TQRangeControl::setMaxValue( maxVal );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSpinBox::lineStep
-    \brief the line step
-
-    When the user uses the arrows to change the spin box's value the
-    value will be incremented/decremented by the amount of the line
-    step.
-
-    The setLineStep() function calls the virtual stepChange() function
-    if the new line step is different from the previous setting.
-
-    \sa TQRangeControl::setSteps() setRange()
-*/
-
-int TQSpinBox::lineStep() const
-{
-    return TQRangeControl::lineStep();
-}
-
-void TQSpinBox::setLineStep( int i )
-{
-    setSteps( i, pageStep() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Selects all the text in the spin box's editor.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinBox::selectAll()
-{
-    int overhead = prefix().length() + suffix().length();
-    if ( !overhead || currentValueText() == specialValueText() ) {
-	vi->selectAll();
-    } else {
-	vi->setSelection( prefix().length(), vi->text().length() - overhead );
-    }
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 1013c11..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinbox.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,173 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQSpinBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 970101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQSPINBOX_H
-#define TQSPINBOX_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqrangecontrol.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SPINBOX
-
-class TQLineEdit;
-class TQValidator;
-class TQSpinBoxPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQSpinBox: public TQWidget, public TQRangeControl
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( ButtonSymbols )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString text READ text )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString prefix READ prefix WRITE setPrefix )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString suffix READ suffix WRITE setSuffix )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString cleanText READ cleanText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString specialValueText READ specialValueText WRITE setSpecialValueText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool wrapping READ wrapping WRITE setWrapping )
-    Q_PROPERTY( ButtonSymbols buttonSymbols READ buttonSymbols WRITE setButtonSymbols )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int maxValue READ maxValue WRITE setMaxValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int minValue READ minValue WRITE setMinValue )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int lineStep READ lineStep WRITE setLineStep )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int value READ value WRITE setValue )
-
-public:
-    TQSpinBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQSpinBox( int minValue, int maxValue, int step = 1,
-	      TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQSpinBox();
-
-    TQString		text() const;
-
-    virtual TQString	prefix() const;
-    virtual TQString	suffix() const;
-    virtual TQString	cleanText() const;
-
-    virtual void	setSpecialValueText( const TQString &text );
-    TQString		specialValueText() const;
-
-    virtual void	setWrapping( bool on );
-    bool		wrapping() const;
-
-    enum ButtonSymbols { UpDownArrows, PlusMinus };
-    virtual void	setButtonSymbols( ButtonSymbols );
-    ButtonSymbols	buttonSymbols() const;
-
-    virtual void	setValidator( const TQValidator* v );
-    const TQValidator * validator() const;
-
-    TQSize		tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize		tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    int	 minValue() const;
-    int	 maxValue() const;
-    void setMinValue( int );
-    void setMaxValue( int );
-    int	 lineStep() const;
-    void setLineStep( int );
-    int  value() const;
-
-    TQRect		upRect() const;
-    TQRect		downRect() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void	setValue( int value );
-    virtual void	setPrefix( const TQString &text );
-    virtual void	setSuffix( const TQString &text );
-    virtual void	stepUp();
-    virtual void	stepDown();
-    virtual void 	setEnabled( bool enabled );
-    virtual void 	selectAll();
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void		valueChanged( int value );
-    void		valueChanged( const TQString &valueText );
-
-protected:
-    virtual TQString	mapValueToText( int value );
-    virtual int		mapTextToValue( bool* ok );
-    TQString		currentValueText();
-
-    virtual void	updateDisplay();
-    virtual void	interpretText();
-
-    TQLineEdit*		editor() const;
-
-    virtual void	valueChange();
-    virtual void	rangeChange();
-
-    bool		eventFilter( TQObject* obj, TQEvent* ev );
-    void		resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* ev );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    void		wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent * );
-#endif
-    void		leaveEvent( TQEvent* );
-
-    void		styleChange( TQStyle& );
-
-protected Q_SLOTS:
-    void		textChanged();
-
-private:
-    void initSpinBox();
-    TQSpinBoxPrivate* d;
-    TQLineEdit* vi;
-    TQValidator* validate;
-    TQString pfix;
-    TQString sfix;
-    TQString specText;
-
-    uint wrap		: 1;
-    uint edited		: 1;
-
-    void arrangeWidgets();
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQSpinBox( const TQSpinBox& );
-    TQSpinBox& operator=( const TQSpinBox& );
-#endif
-
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_SPINBOX
-
-#endif // TQSPINBOX_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinwidget.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinwidget.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index b134180..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqspinwidget.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,465 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQSpinWidget class
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqrangecontrol.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SPINWIDGET
-
-#include "tqrect.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-
-class TQSpinWidgetPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQSpinWidgetPrivate()
-	: upEnabled( TRUE ),
-	  downEnabled( TRUE ),
-	  theButton( 0 ),
-	  buttonDown( 0 ),
-	  timerUp( 0 ),
-	  bsyms( TQSpinWidget::UpDownArrows ),
-	  ed ( 0 ) {}
-    uint upEnabled :1;
-    uint downEnabled :1;
-    uint theButton :2;
-    uint buttonDown :2;
-    uint timerUp : 1;
-    TQRect up;
-    TQRect down;
-    TQTimer auRepTimer;
-    TQSpinWidget::ButtonSymbols bsyms;
-    TQWidget *ed;
-    void startTimer( int msec ) { auRepTimer.start( msec, TRUE ); }
-    void startTimer( bool up, int msec ) { timerUp = up; startTimer( msec ); }
-    void stopTimer() { auRepTimer.stop(); }
-};
-
-/*!
-
-    \class TQSpinWidget qspinwidget.h
-    \brief The TQSpinWidget class is an internal range control related class.
-
-    \internal
-
-    Constructs an empty range control widget with parent \a parent
-    called \a name.
-
-*/
-
-TQSpinWidget::TQSpinWidget( TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name )
-{
-    d = new TQSpinWidgetPrivate();
-    connect( &d->auRepTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQT_SLOT( timerDone() ) );
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::StrongFocus );
-
-    arrange();
-    updateDisplay();
-}
-
-
-/*! Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-
-*/
-
-TQSpinWidget::~TQSpinWidget()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-/*! */
-TQWidget * TQSpinWidget::editWidget()
-{
-    return d->ed;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the editing widget to \a w.
-*/
-void TQSpinWidget::setEditWidget( TQWidget * w )
-{
-    if ( w ) {
-        if (w->parentWidget() != this)
-	    w->reparent( this, TQPoint( 0, 0 ) );
-	setFocusProxy( w );
-    }
-    d->ed = w;
-    arrange();
-    updateDisplay();
-}
-
-/*! \reimp
-
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	d->stopTimer();
-	d->buttonDown = 0;
-	d->theButton = 0;
-	tqrepaint( d->down.unite( d->up ), FALSE );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    uint oldButtonDown = d->buttonDown;
-
-    if ( d->down.contains( e->pos() ) && d->downEnabled )
-	d->buttonDown = 1;
-    else if ( d->up.contains( e->pos() ) && d->upEnabled )
-	d->buttonDown = 2;
-    else
-	d->buttonDown = 0;
-
-    d->theButton = d->buttonDown;
-    if ( oldButtonDown != d->buttonDown ) {
-	if ( !d->buttonDown ) {
-	    tqrepaint( d->down.unite( d->up ), FALSE );
-	} else if ( d->buttonDown & 1 ) {
-	    tqrepaint( d->down, FALSE );
-	    stepDown();
-	    d->startTimer( FALSE, 300 );
-	} else if ( d->buttonDown & 2 ) {
-	    tqrepaint( d->up, FALSE );
-	    stepUp();
-	    d->startTimer( TRUE, 300 );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::arrange()
-{
-    d->up = TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics( TQStyle::CC_SpinWidget, this,
-								TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetUp ), this );
-    d->down = TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics( TQStyle::CC_SpinWidget, this,
-								  TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetDown ), this );
-    if ( d->ed ) {
-    	TQRect r = TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics( TQStyle::CC_SpinWidget, this,
-								  TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetEditField ), this );
-	d->ed->setGeometry( r );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::stepUp()
-{
-    emit stepUpPressed();
-}
-
-void TQSpinWidget::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* )
-{
-    arrange();
-}
-
-/*!
-
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::stepDown()
-{
-    emit stepDownPressed();
-}
-
-
-void TQSpinWidget::timerDone()
-{
-    // we use a double timer to make it possible for users to do
-    // something with 0-timer on valueChanged.
-    TQTimer::singleShot( 1, this, TQT_SLOT( timerDoneEx() ) );
-}
-
-void TQSpinWidget::timerDoneEx()
-{
-    if ( !d->buttonDown )
-	return;
-    if ( d->timerUp )
-	stepUp();
-    else
-	stepDown();
-    d->startTimer( 100 );
-}
-
-
-void TQSpinWidget::windowActivationChange( bool oldActive )
-{
-    //was active, but lost focus
-    if ( oldActive && d->buttonDown ) {
-	d->stopTimer();
-	d->buttonDown = 0;
-	d->theButton = 0;
-    }
-    TQWidget::windowActivationChange( oldActive );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    The event is passed in \a e.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-
-    uint oldButtonDown = d->theButton;
-    d->theButton = 0;
-    if ( oldButtonDown != d->theButton ) {
-	if ( oldButtonDown & 1 )
-	    tqrepaint( d->down, FALSE );
-	else if ( oldButtonDown & 2 )
-	    tqrepaint( d->up, FALSE );
-    }
-    d->stopTimer();
-    d->buttonDown = 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    The event is passed in \a e.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !(e->state() & Qt::LeftButton ) )
-	return;
-
-    uint oldButtonDown = d->theButton;
-    if ( oldButtonDown & 1 && !d->down.contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-	d->stopTimer();
-	d->theButton = 0;
-	tqrepaint( d->down, FALSE );
-    } else if ( oldButtonDown & 2 && !d->up.contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-	d->stopTimer();
-	d->theButton = 0;
-	tqrepaint( d->up, FALSE );
-    } else if ( !oldButtonDown && d->up.contains( e->pos() ) && d->buttonDown & 2 ) {
-	d->startTimer( 500 );
-	d->theButton = 2;
-	tqrepaint( d->up, FALSE );
-    } else if ( !oldButtonDown && d->down.contains( e->pos() ) && d->buttonDown & 1 ) {
-	d->startTimer( 500 );
-	d->theButton = 1;
-	tqrepaint( d->down, FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    The event is passed in \a e.
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-void TQSpinWidget::wheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e )
-{
-    e->accept();
-    static float offset = 0;
-    static TQSpinWidget* offset_owner = 0;
-    if ( offset_owner != this ) {
-	offset_owner = this;
-	offset = 0;
-    }
-    offset += -e->delta()/120;
-    if ( TQABS( offset ) < 1 )
-	return;
-    int ioff = int(offset);
-    int i;
-    for( i=0; i < TQABS( ioff ); i++ )
-	offset > 0 ? stepDown() : stepUp();
-    offset -= ioff;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-
-*/
-void TQSpinWidget::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-{
-    TQPainter p( this );
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus() || (focusProxy() && focusProxy()->hasFocus()))
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-
-    TQStyle::SCFlags active;
-    if ( d->theButton & 1 )
-	active = TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetDown;
-    else if ( d->theButton & 2 )
-	active = TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetUp;
-    else
-	active = TQStyle::SC_None;
-
-    TQRect fr = TQStyle::tqvisualRect(
-	tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics( TQStyle::CC_SpinWidget, this,
-					TQStyle::SC_SpinWidgetFrame ), this );
-    tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl( TQStyle::CC_SpinWidget, &p, this,
-				fr, tqcolorGroup(),
-				flags,
-				(uint)TQStyle::SC_All,
-				active );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    The previous style is passed in \a old.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    arrange();
-    TQWidget::styleChange( old );
-}
-
-/*!
-*/
-
-TQRect TQSpinWidget::upRect() const
-{
-    return d->up;
-}
-
-/*!
-*/
-
-TQRect TQSpinWidget::downRect() const
-{
-    return d->down;
-}
-
-/*!
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::updateDisplay()
-{
-    if ( !isEnabled() ) {
-	d->upEnabled = FALSE;
-	d->downEnabled = FALSE;
-    }
-    if ( d->theButton & 1 && ( d->downEnabled ) == 0 ) {
-	d->theButton &= ~1;
-	d->buttonDown &= ~1;
-    }
-
-    if ( d->theButton & 2 && ( d->upEnabled ) == 0 ) {
-	d->theButton &= ~2;
-	d->buttonDown &= ~2;
-    }
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    The previous enabled state is passed in \a old.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::enableChanged( bool )
-{
-    d->upEnabled = isEnabled();
-    d->downEnabled = isEnabled();
-    updateDisplay();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets up-enabled to \a on.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::setUpEnabled( bool on )
-{
-    if ( (bool)d->upEnabled != on ) {
-	d->upEnabled = on;
-	updateDisplay();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-*/
-
-bool TQSpinWidget::isUpEnabled() const
-{
-    return d->upEnabled;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets down-enabled to \a on.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::setDownEnabled( bool on )
-{
-    if ( (bool)d->downEnabled != on ) {
-	d->downEnabled = on;
-	updateDisplay();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-*/
-
-bool TQSpinWidget::isDownEnabled() const
-{
-    return d->downEnabled;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the button symbol to \a bs.
-*/
-
-void TQSpinWidget::setButtonSymbols( ButtonSymbols bs )
-{
-    d->bsyms = bs;
-}
-
-/*!
-*/
-
-TQSpinWidget::ButtonSymbols TQSpinWidget::buttonSymbols() const
-{
-    return d->bsyms;
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplashscreen.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplashscreen.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 64da325..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplashscreen.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,271 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQSplashScreen class
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2005-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqsplashscreen.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SPLASHSCREEN
-
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-
-class TQSplashScreenPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQPixmap pixmap;
-    TQString currtqStatus;
-    TQColor currColor;
-    int currAlign;
-};
-
-/*!
-   \class TQSplashScreen tqsplashscreen.h
-   \brief The TQSplashScreen widget provides a splash screen that can
-   be shown during application startup.
-
-    \ingroup misc
-    \mainclass
-
-   A splash screen is a widget that is usually displayed when an
-   application is being started. Splash screens are often used for
-   applications that have long start up times (e.g. database or
-   networking applications that take time to establish connections) to
-   provide the user with feedback that the application is loading.
-
-   The splash screen appears centered on the screen. It may be useful to add
-   the \c WStyle_StaysOnTop if you desire to keep above all the windows in the
-   GUI.
-
-   Some X11 window managers do not support the "stays on top" flag. A
-   solution is to set up a timer that periodically calls raise() on
-   the splash screen to simulate the "stays on top" effect.
-
-   The most common usage is to show a splash screen before the main
-   widget is displayed on the screen. This is illustrated in the
-   following code snippet.
-
-   \code
-   int main( int argc, char **argv )
-   {
-       TQApplication app( argc, argv );
-       TQPixmap pixmap( "splash.png" );
-       TQSplashScreen *splash = new TQSplashScreen( pixmap );
-       splash->show();
-       TQMainWindow *mainWin = new TQMainWindow;
-       ...
-       app.setMainWidget( mainWin );
-       mainWin->show();
-       splash->finish( mainWin );
-       delete splash;
-       return app.exec();
-   }
-   \endcode
-
-   It is sometimes useful to update the splash screen with messages,
-   for example, announcing connections established or modules loaded
-   as the application starts up. TQSplashScreen supports this with the
-   message() function. If you wish to do your own drawing you can
-   get a pointer to the pixmap used in the splash screen with pixmap().
-   Alternatively, you can subclass TQSplashScreen and reimplement
-   drawContents().
-
-   The user can hide the splash screen by clicking on it with the
-   mouse. Since the splash screen is typically displayed before the
-   event loop has started running, it is necessary to periodically
-   call TQApplication::processEvents() to receive the mouse clicks.
-
-   \code
-   TQPixmap pixmap( "splash.png" );
-   TQSplashScreen *splash = new TQSplashScreen( pixmap );
-   splash->show();
-   ... // Loading some items
-   splash->message( "Loaded modules" );
-   tqApp->processEvents();
-   ... // Establishing connections
-   splash->message( "Established connections" );
-   tqApp->processEvents();
-   \endcode
-
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Construct a splash screen that will display the \a pixmap.
-
-    There should be no need to set the widget flags, \a f, except
-    perhaps \c WDestructiveClose or \c WStyle_StaysOnTop.
-*/
-TQSplashScreen::TQSplashScreen( const TQPixmap &pixmap, WFlags f )
-    : TQWidget( 0, 0, (WFlags)(WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_Splash | f) )
-{
-    d = new TQSplashScreenPrivate();
-    d->pixmap = pixmap;
-    setPixmap( d->pixmap );  // Does an implicit tqrepaint
-}
-
-/*!
-  Destructor.
-*/
-TQSplashScreen::~TQSplashScreen()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSplashScreen::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * )
-{
-    hide();
-}
-
-/*!
-    This overrides TQWidget::tqrepaint(). It differs from the standard
-    tqrepaint function in that it also calls TQApplication::flush() to
-    ensure the updates are displayed, even when there is no event loop
-    present.
-*/
-void TQSplashScreen::tqrepaint()
-{
-    drawContents();
-    TQWidget::tqrepaint();
-    TQApplication::flush();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQSplashScreen::messageChanged( const TQString &message )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the message on the splash screen
-    changes. \a message is the new message and is a null-string
-    when the message has been removed.
-
-    \sa message(), clear()
-*/
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Draws the \a message text onto the splash screen with color \a
-    color and aligns the text according to the flags in \a tqalignment.
-
-    \sa TQt::AlignmentFlags clear()
-*/
-void TQSplashScreen::message( const TQString &message, int tqalignment,
-			     const TQColor &color )
-{
-    d->currtqStatus = message;
-    d->currAlign = tqalignment;
-    d->currColor = color;
-    emit messageChanged( d->currtqStatus );
-    tqrepaint();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the message being displayed on the splash screen
-
-    \sa message()
- */
-void TQSplashScreen::clear()
-{
-    d->currtqStatus = TQString::null;
-    emit messageChanged( d->currtqStatus );
-    tqrepaint();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Makes the splash screen wait until the widget \a mainWin is displayed
-    before calling close() on itself.
-*/
-void TQSplashScreen::finish( TQWidget *mainWin )
-{
-    if ( mainWin ) {
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-	extern void qt_wait_for_window_manager( TQWidget *mainWin );
-	qt_wait_for_window_manager( mainWin );
-#endif
-    }
-    close();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the pixmap that will be used as the splash screen's image to
-    \a pixmap.
-*/
-void TQSplashScreen::setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap )
-{
-    d->pixmap = pixmap;
-    TQRect r(0, 0, d->pixmap.size().width(), d->pixmap.size().height());
-    resize( d->pixmap.size() );
-    move( TQApplication::desktop()->screenGeometry().center() - r.center() );
-    tqrepaint();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the pixmap that is used in the splash screen. The image
-    does not have any of the text drawn by message() calls.
-*/
-TQPixmap* TQSplashScreen::pixmap() const
-{
-    return &( d->pixmap );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \internal
-*/
-void TQSplashScreen::drawContents()
-{
-    TQPixmap textPix = d->pixmap;
-    TQPainter painter( &textPix, this );
-    drawContents( &painter );
-    setErasePixmap( textPix );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Draw the contents of the splash screen using painter \a painter.
-    The default implementation draws the message passed by message().
-    Reimplement this function if you want to do your own drawing on
-    the splash screen.
-*/
-void TQSplashScreen::drawContents( TQPainter *painter )
-{
-    painter->setPen( d->currColor );
-    TQRect r = rect();
-    r.setRect( r.x() + 5, r.y() + 5, r.width() - 10, r.height() - 10 );
-    painter->drawText( r, d->currAlign, d->currtqStatus );
-}
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_SPLASHSCREEN
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplashscreen.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplashscreen.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 3487b2a..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplashscreen.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQSplashScreen class
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2005-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQSPLASHSCREEN_H
-#define TQSPLASHSCREEN_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SPLASHSCREEN
-class TQSplashScreenPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQSplashScreen : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQSplashScreen( const TQPixmap &pixmap = TQPixmap(), WFlags f = 0 );
-    virtual ~TQSplashScreen();
-
-    void setPixmap( const TQPixmap &pixmap );
-    TQPixmap* pixmap() const;
-    void finish( TQWidget *w );
-    void tqrepaint();
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void message( const TQString &str, int flags = Qt::AlignLeft,
-		  const TQColor &color = Qt::black );
-    void clear();
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void messageChanged( const TQString &str );
-
-protected:
-    virtual void drawContents( TQPainter *painter );
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-
-private:
-    void drawContents();
-
-    TQSplashScreenPrivate *d;
-};
-#endif //TQT_NO_SPLASHSCREEN
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 18cf11c..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1366 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQSplitter class
-**
-**  Created : 980105
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqsplitter.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SPLITTER
-
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "../kernel/tqlayoutengine_p.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqmemarray.h"
-#include "tqobjectlist.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-
-const uint Default = TQT_TQSPLITTER_DEFAULT;
-
-static int mouseOffset;
-static int opaqueOldPos = -1; // this assumes that there's only one mouse
-
-static TQPoint toggle( TQWidget *w, TQPoint pos )
-{
-    TQSize minS = tqSmartMinSize( w );
-    return -pos - TQPoint( minS.width(), minS.height() );
-}
-
-static bool isCollapsed( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    return w->x() < 0 || w->y() < 0;
-}
-
-static TQPoint topLeft( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    if ( isCollapsed(w) ) {
-	return toggle( w, w->pos() );
-    } else {
-	return w->pos();
-    }
-}
-
-static TQPoint bottomRight( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    if ( isCollapsed(w) ) {
-	return toggle( w, w->pos() ) - TQPoint( 1, 1 );
-    } else {
-	return w->tqgeometry().bottomRight();
-    }
-}
-
-TQSplitterHandle::TQSplitterHandle( Qt::Orientation o, TQSplitter *parent,
-				  const char * name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name )
-{
-    s = parent;
-    setOrientation( o );
-}
-
-TQSize TQSplitterHandle::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    int hw = s->handleWidth();
-    return parentWidget()->tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents( TQStyle::CT_Splitter, s,
-						     TQSize(hw, hw) )
-				  .expandedTo( TQApplication::globalStrut() );
-}
-
-void TQSplitterHandle::setOrientation( Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    orient = o;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    setCursor( o == Qt::Horizontal ? Qt::SplitHCursor : Qt::SplitVCursor );
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQSplitterHandle::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !(e->state()&Qt::LeftButton) )
-	return;
-    TQCOORD pos = s->pick( parentWidget()->mapFromGlobal(e->globalPos()) )
-		 - mouseOffset;
-    if ( opaque() ) {
-	s->moveSplitter( pos, id() );
-    } else {
-	s->setRubberband( s->adjustPos(pos, id()) );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQSplitterHandle::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton )
-	mouseOffset = s->pick( e->pos() );
-}
-
-void TQSplitterHandle::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( !opaque() && e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	TQCOORD pos = s->pick( parentWidget()->mapFromGlobal(e->globalPos()) )
-		     - mouseOffset;
-	s->setRubberband( -1 );
-	s->moveSplitter( pos, id() );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQSplitterHandle::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-{
-    TQPainter p( this );
-    parentWidget()->tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_Splitter, &p, rect(),
-					   tqcolorGroup(),
-					   (TQStyle::SFlags)(orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ?
-					    TQStyle::Style_Horizontal : 0) );
-}
-
-TQCOORD TQSplitterLayoutStruct::getSizer( Qt::Orientation orient )
-{
-    if ( sizer == -1 ) {
-	TQSize s = wid->tqsizeHint();
-	if ( !s.isValid() || wid->testWState(WState_Resized) )
-	    s = wid->size();
-	sizer = ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) ? s.width() : s.height();
-    }
-    return sizer;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQSplitter
-    \brief The TQSplitter class implements a splitter widget.
-
-    \ingroup organizers
-    \mainclass
-
-    A splitter lets the user control the size of child widgets by
-    dragging the boundary between the tqchildren. Any number of widgets
-    may be controlled by a single splitter.
-
-    To show a TQListBox, a TQListView and a TQTextEdit side by side:
-    \code
-	TQSplitter *split = new TQSplitter( parent );
-	TQListBox *lb = new TQListBox( split );
-	TQListView *lv = new TQListView( split );
-	TQTextEdit *ed = new TQTextEdit( split );
-    \endcode
-
-    TQSplitter lays out its tqchildren horizontally (side by side); you
-    can use setOrientation(TQSplitter::Vertical) to lay out the
-    tqchildren vertically.
-
-    By default, all widgets can be as large or as small as the user
-    wishes, between the \l tqminimumSizeHint() (or \l tqminimumSize())
-    and \l tqmaximumSize() of the widgets. Use setResizeMode() to
-    specify that a widget should keep its size when the splitter is
-    resized, or set the stretch component of the \l sizePolicy.
-
-    Although TQSplitter normally resizes the tqchildren only at the end
-    of a resize operation, if you call setOpaqueResize(TRUE) the
-    widgets are resized as often as possible.
-
-    The initial distribution of size between the widgets is determined
-    by the initial size of each widget. You can also use setSizes() to
-    set the sizes of all the widgets. The function sizes() returns the
-    sizes set by the user.
-
-    If you hide() a child its space will be distributed among the
-    other tqchildren. It will be reinstated when you show() it again. It
-    is also possible to reorder the widgets within the splitter using
-    moveToFirst() and moveToLast().
-
-    <img src=qsplitter-m.png> <img src=qsplitter-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQTabBar
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a horizontal splitter with the \a parent and \a name
-    arguments being passed on to the TQFrame constructor.
-*/
-
-TQSplitter::TQSplitter( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WPaintUnclipped )
-{
-    orient = Qt::Horizontal;
-    init();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a splitter with orientation \a o with the \a parent and
-    \a name arguments being passed on to the TQFrame constructor.
-*/
-
-TQSplitter::TQSplitter( Qt::Orientation o, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, TQt::WPaintUnclipped )
-{
-    orient = o;
-    init();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the splitter and any tqchildren.
-*/
-
-TQSplitter::~TQSplitter()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-void TQSplitter::init()
-{
-    d = new TQSplitterPrivate;
-    d->list.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    TQSizePolicy sp( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Preferred );
-    if ( orient == Qt::Vertical )
-	sp.transpose();
-    tqsetSizePolicy( sp );
-    clearWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQSplitter::refresh()
-
-    Updates the splitter's state. You should not need to call this
-    function.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSplitter::orientation
-    \brief the orientation of the splitter
-
-    By default the orientation is horizontal (the widgets are side by
-    side). The possible orientations are \c Qt::Horizontal and
-    \c Qt::Vertical.
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::setOrientation( Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    if ( orient == o )
-	return;
-
-    if ( !testWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy ) ) {
-	TQSizePolicy sp = tqsizePolicy();
-	sp.transpose();
-	tqsetSizePolicy( sp );
-	clearWState( TQt::WState_OwnSizePolicy );
-    }
-
-    orient = o;
-
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.first();
-    while ( s ) {
-	if ( s->isHandle )
-	    ((TQSplitterHandle*)s->wid)->setOrientation( o );
-	s = d->list.next();
-    }
-    recalc( isVisible() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSplitter::tqchildrenCollapsible
-    \brief whether child widgets can be resized down to size 0 by the user
-
-    By default, tqchildren are collapsible. It is possible to enable
-    and disable the collapsing of individual tqchildren; see
-    setCollapsible().
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::setChildrenCollapsible( bool collapse )
-{
-    d->tqchildrenCollapsible = collapse;
-}
-
-bool TQSplitter::tqchildrenCollapsible() const
-{
-    return d->tqchildrenCollapsible;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets whether the child widget \a w is collapsible to \a collapse.
-
-    By default, tqchildren are collapsible, meaning that the user can
-    resize them down to size 0, even if they have a non-zero
-    tqminimumSize() or tqminimumSizeHint(). This behavior can be changed
-    on a per-widget basis by calling this function, or globally for
-    all the widgets in the splitter by setting the \l
-    tqchildrenCollapsible property.
-
-    \sa tqchildrenCollapsible
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::setCollapsible( TQWidget *w, bool collapse )
-{
-    findWidget( w )->collapsible = collapse ? 1 : 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQSplitter::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
-{
-    doResize();
-}
-
-TQSplitterLayoutStruct *TQSplitter::findWidget( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    processChildEvents();
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.first();
-    while ( s ) {
-	if ( s->wid == w )
-	    return s;
-	s = d->list.next();
-    }
-    return addWidget( w );
-}
-
-/*
-    Inserts the widget \a w at the end (or at the beginning if \a
-    prepend is TRUE) of the splitter's list of widgets.
-
-    It is the responsibility of the caller to make sure that \a w is
-    not already in the splitter and to call recalcId() if needed. (If
-    \a prepend is TRUE, then recalcId() is very probably needed.)
-*/
-
-TQSplitterLayoutStruct *TQSplitter::addWidget( TQWidget *w, bool prepend )
-{
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s;
-    TQSplitterHandle *newHandle = 0;
-    if ( d->list.count() > 0 ) {
-	s = new TQSplitterLayoutStruct;
-	s->resizeMode = KeepSize;
-	TQString tmp = "qt_splithandle_";
-	tmp += w->name();
-	newHandle = new TQSplitterHandle( orientation(), this, tmp );
-	s->wid = newHandle;
-	newHandle->setId( d->list.count() );
-	s->isHandle = TRUE;
-	s->sizer = pick( newHandle->tqsizeHint() );
-	if ( prepend )
-	    d->list.prepend( s );
-	else
-	    d->list.append( s );
-    }
-    s = new TQSplitterLayoutStruct;
-    s->resizeMode = DefaultResizeMode;
-    s->wid = w;
-    s->isHandle = FALSE;
-    if ( prepend )
-	d->list.prepend( s );
-    else
-	d->list.append( s );
-    if ( newHandle && isVisible() )
-	newHandle->show(); // will trigger sending of post events
-    return s;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Tells the splitter that the child widget described by \a c has
-    been inserted or removed.
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::childEvent( TQChildEvent *c )
-{
-    if ( c->type() == TQEvent::ChildInserted ) {
-	if ( !c->child()->isWidgetType() )
-	    return;
-
-	if ( ((TQWidget*)c->child())->testWFlags( TQt::WType_TopLevel ) )
-	    return;
-
-	TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.first();
-	while ( s ) {
-	    if ( s->wid == c->child() )
-		return;
-	    s = d->list.next();
-	}
-	addWidget( (TQWidget*)c->child() );
-	recalc( isVisible() );
-    } else if ( c->type() == TQEvent::ChildRemoved ) {
-	TQSplitterLayoutStruct *prev = 0;
-	if ( d->list.count() > 1 )
-	    prev = d->list.at( 1 );  // yes, this is correct
-	TQSplitterLayoutStruct *curr = d->list.first();
-	while ( curr ) {
-	    if ( curr->wid == c->child() ) {
-		d->list.removeRef( curr );
-		if ( prev && prev->isHandle ) {
-		    TQWidget *w = prev->wid;
-		    d->list.removeRef( prev );
-		    delete w; // will call childEvent()
-		}
-		recalcId();
-		doResize();
-		return;
-	    }
-	    prev = curr;
-	    curr = d->list.next();
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Displays a rubber band at position \a p. If \a p is negative, the
-    rubber band is removed.
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::setRubberband( int p )
-{
-    TQPainter paint( this );
-    paint.setPen( Qt::gray );
-    paint.setBrush( Qt::gray );
-    paint.setRasterOp( TQt::XorROP );
-    TQRect r = contentsRect();
-    const int rBord = 3; // customizable?
-    int hw = handleWidth();
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	if ( opaqueOldPos >= 0 )
-	    paint.drawRect( opaqueOldPos + hw / 2 - rBord, r.y(),
-			    2 * rBord, r.height() );
-	if ( p >= 0 )
-	    paint.drawRect( p + hw / 2 - rBord, r.y(), 2 * rBord, r.height() );
-    } else {
-	if ( opaqueOldPos >= 0 )
-	    paint.drawRect( r.x(), opaqueOldPos + hw / 2 - rBord,
-			    r.width(), 2 * rBord );
-	if ( p >= 0 )
-	    paint.drawRect( r.x(), p + hw / 2 - rBord, r.width(), 2 * rBord );
-    }
-    opaqueOldPos = p;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-bool TQSplitter::event( TQEvent *e )
-{
-    switch ( e->type() ) {
-    case TQEvent::Show:
-	if ( !d->firstShow )
-	    break;
-	d->firstShow = FALSE;
-	// fall through
-    case TQEvent::LayoutHint:
-	recalc( isVisible() );
-	break;
-    default:
-	;
-    }
-    return TQWidget::event( e );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
-
-  Draws the splitter handle in the rectangle described by \a x, \a y,
-  \a w, \a h using painter \a p.
-  \sa TQStyle::tqdrawPrimitive()
-*/
-
-// ### Remove this in 4.0
-
-void TQSplitter::drawSplitter( TQPainter *p,
-			      TQCOORD x, TQCOORD y, TQCOORD w, TQCOORD h )
-{
-    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive(TQStyle::PE_Splitter, p, TQRect(x, y, w, h), tqcolorGroup(),
-			  (TQStyle::SFlags)(orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ?
-			   TQStyle::Style_Horizontal : 0));
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the ID of the widget to the right of or below the widget
-    \a w, or 0 if there is no such widget (i.e. it is either not in
-    this TQSplitter or \a w is at the end).
-*/
-
-int TQSplitter::idAfter( TQWidget* w ) const
-{
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.first();
-    bool seen_w = FALSE;
-    while ( s ) {
-	if ( s->isHandle && seen_w )
-	    return d->list.at();
-	if ( !s->isHandle && s->wid == w )
-	    seen_w = TRUE;
-	s = d->list.next();
-    }
-    return 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Moves the left/top edge of the splitter handle with ID \a id as
-    close as possible to position \a p, which is the distance from the
-    left (or top) edge of the widget.
-
-    For Arabic, Hebrew and other right-to-left languages the tqlayout is
-    reversed.  \a p is then the distance from the right (or top) edge
-    of the widget.
-
-    \sa idAfter()
-*/
-void TQSplitter::moveSplitter( TQCOORD p, int id )
-{
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.at( id );
-    int farMin;
-    int min;
-    int max;
-    int farMax;
-
-    p = adjustPos( p, id, &farMin, &min, &max, &farMax );
-    int oldP = pick( s->wid->pos() );
-
-    if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() && orient == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	int q = p + s->wid->width();
-	doMove( FALSE, q, id - 1, -1, (q > oldP), (p > max) );
-	doMove( TRUE, q, id, -1, (q > oldP), (p < min) );
-    } else {
-	doMove( FALSE, p, id, +1, (p < oldP), (p > max) );
-	doMove( TRUE, p, id - 1, +1, (p < oldP), (p < min) );
-    }
-    storeSizes();
-}
-
-
-void TQSplitter::setGeo( TQWidget *w, int p, int s, bool splitterMoved )
-{
-    TQRect r;
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() && orient == Qt::Horizontal
-	     && !splitterMoved )
-	    p = contentsRect().width() - p - s;
-	r.setRect( p, contentsRect().y(), s, contentsRect().height() );
-    } else {
-	r.setRect( contentsRect().x(), p, contentsRect().width(), s );
-    }
-
-    /*
-      Hide the child widget, but without calling hide() so that the
-      splitter handle is still shown.
-    */
-    if ( !w->isHidden() && s <= 0 && pick(tqSmartMinSize(w)) > 0 )
-	r.moveTopLeft( toggle(w, r.topLeft()) );
-    w->setGeometry( r );
-}
-
-
-void TQSplitter::doMove( bool backwards, int pos, int id, int delta, bool upLeft,
-			bool mayCollapse )
-{
-    if ( id < 0 || id >= (int) d->list.count() )
-	return;
-
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.at( id );
-    TQWidget *w = s->wid;
-
-    int nextId = backwards ? id - delta : id + delta;
-
-    if ( w->isHidden() ) {
-	doMove( backwards, pos, nextId, delta, upLeft, TRUE );
-    } else {
-	if ( s->isHandle ) {
-	    int dd = s->getSizer( orient );
-	    int nextPos = backwards ? pos - dd : pos + dd;
-	    int left = backwards ? pos - dd : pos;
-	    setGeo( w, left, dd, TRUE );
-	    doMove( backwards, nextPos, nextId, delta, upLeft, mayCollapse );
-	} else {
-	    int dd = backwards ? pos - pick( topLeft(w) )
-			       : pick( bottomRight(w) ) - pos + 1;
-	    if ( dd > 0 || (!isCollapsed(w) && !mayCollapse) ) {
-		dd = TQMAX( pick(tqSmartMinSize(w)),
-			   TQMIN(dd, pick(w->tqmaximumSize())) );
-	    } else {
-		dd = 0;
-	    }
-	    setGeo( w, backwards ? pos - dd : pos, dd, TRUE );
-	    doMove( backwards, backwards ? pos - dd : pos + dd, nextId, delta,
-		    upLeft, TRUE );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-int TQSplitter::findWidgetJustBeforeOrJustAfter( int id, int delta, int &collapsibleSize )
-{
-    id += delta;
-    do {
-	TQWidget *w = d->list.at( id )->wid;
-	if ( !w->isHidden() ) {
-            if ( collapsible(d->list.at(id)) )
-                collapsibleSize = pick( tqSmartMinSize(w) );
-	    return id;
-	}
-	id += 2 * delta; // go to previous (or next) widget, skip the handle
-    } while ( id >= 0 && id < (int)d->list.count() );
-
-    return -1;
-}
-
-void TQSplitter::getRange( int id, int *farMin, int *min, int *max, int *farMax )
-{
-    int n = d->list.count();
-    if ( id <= 0 || id >= n - 1 )
-	return;
-
-    int collapsibleSizeBefore = 0;
-    int idJustBefore = findWidgetJustBeforeOrJustAfter( id, -1, collapsibleSizeBefore );
-
-    int collapsibleSizeAfter = 0;
-    int idJustAfter = findWidgetJustBeforeOrJustAfter( id, +1, collapsibleSizeAfter );
-
-    int minBefore = 0;
-    int minAfter = 0;
-    int maxBefore = 0;
-    int maxAfter = 0;
-    int i;
-
-    for ( i = 0; i < id; i++ )
-	addContribution( i, &minBefore, &maxBefore, i == idJustBefore );
-    for ( i = id; i < n; i++ )
-	addContribution( i, &minAfter, &maxAfter, i == idJustAfter );
-
-    TQRect r = contentsRect();
-    int farMinVal;
-    int minVal;
-    int maxVal;
-    int farMaxVal;
-
-    int smartMinBefore = TQMAX( minBefore, pick(r.size()) - maxAfter );
-    int smartMaxBefore = TQMIN( maxBefore, pick(r.size()) - minAfter );
-
-    if ( orient == Qt::Vertical || !TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	minVal = pick( r.topLeft() ) + smartMinBefore;
-	maxVal = pick( r.topLeft() ) + smartMaxBefore;
-
-	farMinVal = minVal;
-	if ( minBefore - collapsibleSizeBefore >= pick(r.size()) - maxAfter )
-	    farMinVal -= collapsibleSizeBefore;
-	farMaxVal = maxVal;
-	if ( pick(r.size()) - (minAfter - collapsibleSizeAfter) <= maxBefore )
-	    farMaxVal += collapsibleSizeAfter;
-    } else {
-	int hw = handleWidth();
-	minVal = r.width() - smartMaxBefore - hw;
-	maxVal = r.width() - smartMinBefore - hw;
-
-	farMinVal = minVal;
-	if ( pick(r.size()) - (minAfter - collapsibleSizeAfter) <= maxBefore )
-	    farMinVal -= collapsibleSizeAfter;
-	farMaxVal = maxVal;
-	if ( minBefore - collapsibleSizeBefore >= pick(r.size()) - maxAfter )
-	    farMaxVal += collapsibleSizeBefore;
-    }
-
-    if ( farMin )
-	*farMin = farMinVal;
-    if ( min )
-	*min = minVal;
-    if ( max )
-	*max = maxVal;
-    if ( farMax )
-	*farMax = farMaxVal;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the valid range of the splitter with ID \a id in \a *min
-    and \a *max if \a min and \a max are not 0.
-
-    \sa idAfter()
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::getRange( int id, int *min, int *max )
-{
-    getRange( id, min, 0, 0, max );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the closest legal position to \a pos of the widget with ID
-    \a id.
-
-    \sa idAfter()
-*/
-
-int TQSplitter::adjustPos( int pos, int id )
-{
-    int x, i, n, u;
-    return adjustPos( pos, id, &u, &n, &i, &x );
-}
-
-int TQSplitter::adjustPos( int pos, int id, int *farMin, int *min, int *max,
-			  int *farMax )
-{
-    const int Threshold = 40;
-
-    getRange( id, farMin, min, max, farMax );
-
-    if ( pos >= *min ) {
-	if ( pos <= *max ) {
-	    return pos;
-	} else {
-	    int delta = pos - *max;
-	    int width = *farMax - *max;
-
-	    if ( delta > width / 2 && delta >= TQMIN(Threshold, width) ) {
-		return *farMax;
-	    } else {
-		return *max;
-	    }
-	}
-    } else {
-	int delta = *min - pos;
-	int width = *min - *farMin;
-
-	if ( delta > width / 2 && delta >= TQMIN(Threshold, width) ) {
-	    return *farMin;
-	} else {
-	    return *min;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-bool TQSplitter::collapsible( TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s )
-{
-    if (pick(tqSmartMinSize(s->wid)) == 1)
-        return FALSE;
-    if ( s->collapsible != Default ) {
-	return (bool) s->collapsible;
-    } else {
-	return d->tqchildrenCollapsible;
-    }
-}
-
-void TQSplitter::doResize()
-{
-    TQRect r = contentsRect();
-    int n = d->list.count();
-    TQMemArray<TQLayoutStruct> a( n );
-
-    for ( int pass = 0; pass < 2; pass++ ) {
-	int numAutoWithStretch = 0;
-	int numAutoWithoutStretch = 0;
-
-	for ( int i = 0; i < n; i++ ) {
-	    a[i].init();
-	    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.at( i );
-	    if ( s->wid->isHidden() || isCollapsed(s->wid) ) {
-		a[i].tqmaximumSize = 0;
-	    } else if ( s->isHandle ) {
-		a[i].tqsizeHint = a[i].tqminimumSize = a[i].tqmaximumSize = s->sizer;
-		a[i].empty = FALSE;
-	    } else {
-		int mode = s->resizeMode;
-		int stretch = 1;
-
-		if ( mode == DefaultResizeMode ) {
-		    TQSizePolicy p = s->wid->tqsizePolicy();
-		    int sizePolicyStretch =
-			    pick( TQSize(p.horStretch(), p.verStretch()) );
-		    if ( sizePolicyStretch > 0 ) {
-			mode = Stretch;
-			stretch = sizePolicyStretch;
-			numAutoWithStretch++;
-		    } else {
-			/*
-			  Do things differently on the second pass,
-			  if there's one. A second pass is necessary
-			  if it was found out during the first pass
-			  that all DefaultResizeMode items are
-			  KeepSize items. In that case, we make them
-			  all Stretch items instead, for a more TQt
-			  3.0-compatible behavior.
-			*/
-			mode = ( pass == 0 ) ? KeepSize : Stretch;
-			numAutoWithoutStretch++;
-		    }
-		}
-
-		a[i].tqminimumSize = pick( tqSmartMinSize(s->wid) );
-		a[i].tqmaximumSize = pick( s->wid->tqmaximumSize() );
-		a[i].empty = FALSE;
-
-		if ( mode == Stretch ) {
-		    if ( s->getSizer(orient) > 1 )
-			stretch *= s->getSizer( orient );
-		    // TQMIN(): ad hoc work-around for tqlayout engine limitation
-		    a[i].stretch = TQMIN( stretch, 8192 );
-		    a[i].tqsizeHint = a[i].tqminimumSize;
-		} else if ( mode == KeepSize ) {
-		    a[i].tqsizeHint = s->getSizer( orient );
-		} else { // mode == FollowSizeHint
-		    a[i].tqsizeHint = pick( s->wid->tqsizeHint() );
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-
-	// a second pass would yield the same results
-	if ( numAutoWithStretch > 0 || numAutoWithoutStretch == 0 )
-	    break;
-    }
-
-    qGeomCalc( a, 0, n, pick( r.topLeft() ), pick( r.size() ), 0 );
-
-    for ( int i = 0; i < n; i++ ) {
-	TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.at(i);
-	setGeo( s->wid, a[i].pos, a[i].size, FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQSplitter::recalc( bool update )
-{
-    int fi = 2 * frameWidth();
-    int maxl = fi;
-    int minl = fi;
-    int maxt = TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX;
-    int mint = fi;
-    int n = d->list.count();
-    bool first = TRUE;
-
-    /*
-      Splitter handles before the first visible widget or right
-      before a hidden widget must be hidden.
-    */
-    for ( int i = 0; i < n; i++ ) {
-	TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.at( i );
-	if ( !s->isHandle ) {
-	    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *p = 0;
-	    if ( i > 0 )
-		p = d->list.at( i - 1 );
-
-	    // may trigger new recalc
-	    if ( p && p->isHandle )
-		p->wid->setHidden( first || s->wid->isHidden() );
-
-	    if ( !s->wid->isHidden() )
-		first = FALSE;
-	}
-    }
-
-    bool empty = TRUE;
-    for ( int j = 0; j < n; j++ ) {
-	TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.at( j );
-	if ( !s->wid->isHidden() ) {
-	    empty = FALSE;
-	    if ( s->isHandle ) {
-		minl += s->getSizer( orient );
-		maxl += s->getSizer( orient );
-	    } else {
-		TQSize minS = tqSmartMinSize( s->wid );
-		minl += pick( minS );
-		maxl += pick( s->wid->tqmaximumSize() );
-		mint = TQMAX( mint, trans(minS) );
-		int tm = trans( s->wid->tqmaximumSize() );
-		if ( tm > 0 )
-		    maxt = TQMIN( maxt, tm );
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    if ( empty ) {
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQSplitter*>(parentWidget()) ) {
-	    // nested splitters; be nice
-	    maxl = maxt = 0;
-	} else {
-	    // TQSplitter with no tqchildren yet
-	    maxl = TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX;
-	}
-    } else {
-	maxl = TQMIN( maxl, TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX );
-    }
-    if ( maxt < mint )
-	maxt = mint;
-
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	setMaximumSize( maxl, maxt );
-	setMinimumSize( minl, mint );
-    } else {
-	setMaximumSize( maxt, maxl );
-	setMinimumSize( mint, minl );
-    }
-    if ( update )
-	doResize();
-    else
-	d->firstShow = TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQSplitter::ResizeMode
-
-    This enum type describes how TQSplitter will resize each of its
-    child widgets.
-
-    \value Auto  The widget will be resized according to the stretch
-    factors set in its sizePolicy().
-
-    \value Stretch  The widget will be resized when the splitter
-    itself is resized.
-
-    \value KeepSize  TQSplitter will try to keep the widget's size
-    unchanged.
-
-    \value FollowSizeHint  TQSplitter will resize the widget when the
-    widget's size hint changes.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Sets resize mode of widget \a w to \a mode. (The default is \c
-    Auto.)
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::setResizeMode( TQWidget *w, ResizeMode mode )
-{
-    findWidget( w )->resizeMode = mode;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSplitter::opaqueResize
-    \brief whether resizing is opaque
-
-    Opaque resizing is off by default.
-*/
-
-bool TQSplitter::opaqueResize() const
-{
-    return d->opaque;
-}
-
-
-void TQSplitter::setOpaqueResize( bool on )
-{
-    d->opaque = on;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Moves widget \a w to the leftmost/top position.
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::moveToFirst( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    processChildEvents();
-    bool found = FALSE;
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.first();
-    while ( s ) {
-	if ( s->wid == w ) {
-	    found = TRUE;
-	    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *p = d->list.prev();
-	    if ( p ) { // not already at first place
-		d->list.take(); // take p
-		d->list.take(); // take s
-		d->list.prepend( p );
-		d->list.prepend( s );
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-	s = d->list.next();
-    }
-    if ( !found )
-	addWidget( w, TRUE );
-    recalcId();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Moves widget \a w to the rightmost/bottom position.
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::moveToLast( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    processChildEvents();
-    bool found = FALSE;
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.first();
-    while ( s ) {
-	if ( s->wid == w ) {
-	    found = TRUE;
-	    d->list.take(); // take s
-	    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *p = d->list.current();
-	    if ( p ) { // the splitter handle after s
-		d->list.take(); // take p
-		d->list.append( p );
-	    }
-	    d->list.append( s );
-	    break;
-	}
-	s = d->list.next();
-    }
-    if ( !found )
-	addWidget( w );
-    recalcId();
-}
-
-
-void TQSplitter::recalcId()
-{
-    int n = d->list.count();
-    for ( int i = 0; i < n; i++ ) {
-	TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.at( i );
-	if ( s->isHandle )
-	    ((TQSplitterHandle*)s->wid)->setId( i );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQSplitter::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    int l = 0;
-    int t = 0;
-    if ( !childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) {
-	TQObjectListIt it( childrenListObject() );
-	TQObject * o;
-
-	while( (o = it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    if ( o->isWidgetType() && !((TQWidget*)o)->isHidden() ) {
-		TQSize s = ((TQWidget*)o)->tqsizeHint();
-		if ( s.isValid() ) {
-		    l += pick( s );
-		    t = TQMAX( t, trans( s ) );
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    return orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? TQSize( l, t ) : TQSize( t, l );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQSplitter::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    int l = 0;
-    int t = 0;
-    if ( !childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) {
-	TQObjectListIt it( childrenListObject() );
-	TQObject * o;
-
-	while ( (o = it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    if ( o->isWidgetType() && !((TQWidget*)o)->isHidden() ) {
-		TQSize s = tqSmartMinSize( (TQWidget*)o );
-		if ( s.isValid() ) {
-		    l += pick( s );
-		    t = TQMAX( t, trans( s ) );
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    return orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ? TQSize( l, t ) : TQSize( t, l );
-}
-
-
-void TQSplitter::storeSizes()
-{
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.first();
-    while ( s ) {
-	if ( !s->isHandle )
-	    s->sizer = pick( s->wid->size() );
-	s = d->list.next();
-    }
-}
-
-
-void TQSplitter::addContribution( int id, int *min, int *max,
-				 bool mayCollapse )
-{
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.at( id );
-    if ( !s->wid->isHidden() ) {
-	if ( s->isHandle ) {
-	    *min += s->getSizer( orient );
-	    *max += s->getSizer( orient );
-	} else {
-	    if ( mayCollapse || !isCollapsed(s->wid) )
-		*min += pick( tqSmartMinSize(s->wid) );
-	    *max += pick( s->wid->tqmaximumSize() );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns a list of the size parameters of all the widgets in this
-    splitter.
-
-    If the splitter's orientation is horizontal, the list is a list of
-    widget widths; if the orientation is vertical, the list is a list
-    of widget heights.
-
-    Giving the values to another splitter's setSizes() function will
-    produce a splitter with the same tqlayout as this one.
-
-    Note that if you want to iterate over the list, you should iterate
-    over a copy, e.g.
-    \code
-    TQValueList<int> list = mySplitter.sizes();
-    TQValueList<int>::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    while( it != list.end() ) {
-	myProcessing( *it );
-	++it;
-    }
-    \endcode
-
-    \sa setSizes()
-*/
-
-TQValueList<int> TQSplitter::sizes() const
-{
-    if ( !testWState(TQt::WState_Polished) )
-	constPolish();
-
-    TQValueList<int> list;
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.first();
-    while ( s ) {
-	if ( !s->isHandle )
-	    list.append( isCollapsed(s->wid) ? 0 : pick(s->wid->size()));
-	s = d->list.next();
-    }
-    return list;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the size parameters to the values given in the \a list. If
-    the splitter is horizontal, the values set the widths of each
-    widget going from left to right. If the splitter is vertical, the
-    values set the heights of each widget going from top to bottom.
-    Extra values in the \a list are ignored.
-
-    If \a list contains too few values, the result is undefined but
-    the program will still be well-behaved.
-
-    Note that the values in \a list should be the height/width that
-    the widgets should be resized to.
-
-    \sa sizes()
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::setSizes( TQValueList<int> list )
-{
-    processChildEvents();
-    TQValueList<int>::Iterator it = list.begin();
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.first();
-    while ( s && it != list.end() ) {
-	if ( !s->isHandle ) {
-	    s->sizer = TQMAX( *it, 0 );
-	    int smartMinSize = pick( tqSmartMinSize(s->wid) );
-	    // Make sure that we reset the collapsed state.
-	    if ( s->sizer == 0 ) {
-		if ( collapsible(s) && smartMinSize > 0 ) {
-		    s->wid->move( -1, -1 );
-		} else {
-		    s->sizer = smartMinSize;
-		    s->wid->move( 0, 0 );
-		}
-	    } else {
-		if ( s->sizer < smartMinSize )
-		    s->sizer = smartMinSize;
-		s->wid->move( 0, 0 );
-	    }
-	    ++it;
-	}
-	s = d->list.next();
-    }
-    doResize();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQSplitter::handleWidth
-    \brief the width of the splitter handle
-*/
-
-int TQSplitter::handleWidth() const
-{
-    if ( d->handleWidth > 0 ) {
-	return d->handleWidth;
-    } else {
-	return tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_SplitterWidth, this );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQSplitter::setHandleWidth( int width )
-{
-    d->handleWidth = width;
-    updateHandles();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Processes all posted child events, ensuring that the internal state of
-    the splitter is kept consistent.
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::processChildEvents()
-{
-    TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( this, TQEvent::ChildInserted );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQSplitter::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    updateHandles();
-    TQFrame::styleChange( old );
-}
-
-void TQSplitter::updateHandles()
-{
-    int hw = handleWidth();
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = d->list.first();
-    while ( s ) {
-	if ( s->isHandle )
-	    s->sizer = hw;
-	s = d->list.next();
-    }
-    recalc( isVisible() );
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTSTREAM
-/*!
-    \relates TQSplitter
-
-    Writes the sizes and the hidden state of the widgets in the
-    splitter \a splitter to the text stream \a ts.
-
-    \sa operator>>(), sizes(), TQWidget::isHidden()
-*/
-
-TQTextStream& operator<<( TQTextStream& ts, const TQSplitter& splitter )
-{
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = splitter.d->list.first();
-    bool first = TRUE;
-    ts << "[";
-
-    while ( s != 0 ) {
-	if ( !s->isHandle ) {
-	    if ( !first )
-		ts << ",";
-
-	    if ( s->wid->isHidden() ) {
-		ts << "H";
-	    } else if ( isCollapsed(s->wid) ) {
-		ts << 0;
-	    } else {
-		ts << s->getSizer( splitter.orientation() );
-	    }
-	    first = FALSE;
-	}
-	s = splitter.d->list.next();
-    }
-    ts << "]" << endl;
-    return ts;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \relates TQSplitter
-
-    Reads the sizes and the hidden state of the widgets in the
-    splitter \a splitter from the text stream \a ts. The sizes must
-    have been previously written by the operator<<() function.
-
-    \sa operator<<(), setSizes(), TQWidget::hide()
-*/
-
-TQTextStream& operator>>( TQTextStream& ts, TQSplitter& splitter )
-{
-#undef SKIP_SPACES
-#define SKIP_SPACES() \
-    while ( line[i].isSpace() ) \
-	i++
-
-    splitter.processChildEvents();
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *s = splitter.d->list.first();
-    TQString line = ts.readLine();
-    int i = 0;
-
-    SKIP_SPACES();
-    if ( line[i] == '[' ) {
-	i++;
-	SKIP_SPACES();
-	while ( line[i] != ']' ) {
-	    while ( s != 0 && s->isHandle )
-		s = splitter.d->list.next();
-	    if ( s == 0 )
-		break;
-
-	    if ( line[i].upper() == 'H' ) {
-		s->wid->hide();
-		i++;
-	    } else {
-		s->wid->show();
-		int dim = 0;
-		while ( line[i].digitValue() >= 0 ) {
-		    dim *= 10;
-		    dim += line[i].digitValue();
-		    i++;
-		}
-		s->sizer = dim;
-		if ( dim == 0 )
-		    splitter.setGeo( s->wid, 0, 0, FALSE );
-	    }
-	    SKIP_SPACES();
-	    if ( line[i] == ',' ) {
-		i++;
-	    } else {
-		break;
-	    }
-	    SKIP_SPACES();
-	    s = splitter.d->list.next();
-	}
-    }
-    splitter.doResize();
-    return ts;
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 60c292e..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsplitter.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,226 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQSplitter class
-**
-**  Created : 980105
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQSPLITTER_H
-#define TQSPLITTER_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#include "tqvaluelist.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SPLITTER
-
-#define TQT_TQSPLITTER_DEFAULT 2
-
-class TQSplitterHandle;
-class TQSplitterPrivate;
-class TQSplitterLayoutStruct;
-class TQTextStream;
-
-class TQSplitterPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQSplitterPrivate()
-	: opaque( FALSE ), firstShow( TRUE ), tqchildrenCollapsible( TRUE ),
-	  handleWidth( 0 ) { }
-
-    TQPtrList<TQSplitterLayoutStruct> list;
-    bool opaque;
-    bool firstShow;
-    bool tqchildrenCollapsible;
-    int handleWidth;
-};
-
-class TQSplitterLayoutStruct : public TQt
-{
-public:
-    TQCOORD sizer;
-    uint isHandle;
-    uint collapsible;
-    uint resizeMode;
-    TQWidget *wid;
-
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct()
-	: sizer( -1 ), collapsible( TQT_TQSPLITTER_DEFAULT ) { }
-    TQCOORD getSizer( Qt::Orientation orient );
-};
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQSplitter : public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( Qt::Orientation orientation READ orientation WRITE setOrientation )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool opaqueResize READ opaqueResize WRITE setOpaqueResize )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int handleWidth READ handleWidth WRITE setHandleWidth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool tqchildrenCollapsible READ tqchildrenCollapsible WRITE setChildrenCollapsible )
-
-public:
-    // ### TQt 4.0: remove Auto from public API
-    enum ResizeMode { Stretch, KeepSize, FollowSizeHint, Auto };
-
-    TQSplitter( TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0 );
-    TQSplitter( Qt::Orientation, TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0 );
-    ~TQSplitter();
-
-    virtual void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation );
-    Qt::Orientation orientation() const { return orient; }
-
-    // ### TQt 4.0: make setChildrenCollapsible() and setCollapsible() virtual
-
-    void setChildrenCollapsible( bool );
-    bool tqchildrenCollapsible() const;
-
-    void setCollapsible( TQWidget *w, bool );
-    virtual void setResizeMode( TQWidget *w, ResizeMode );
-    virtual void setOpaqueResize( bool = TRUE );
-    bool opaqueResize() const;
-
-    void moveToFirst( TQWidget * );
-    void moveToLast( TQWidget * );
-
-    void refresh() { recalc( TRUE ); }
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    TQValueList<int> sizes() const;
-    void setSizes( TQValueList<int> );
-
-    int handleWidth() const;
-    void setHandleWidth( int );
-
-protected:
-    void childEvent( TQChildEvent * );
-
-    bool event( TQEvent * );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-
-    int idAfter( TQWidget* ) const;
-
-    void moveSplitter( TQCOORD pos, int id );
-    virtual void drawSplitter( TQPainter*, TQCOORD x, TQCOORD y,
-			       TQCOORD w, TQCOORD h );
-    void styleChange( TQStyle& );
-    int adjustPos( int, int );
-    virtual void setRubberband( int );
-    void getRange( int id, int *, int * );
-
-public: //private:
-    enum { DefaultResizeMode = 3 };
-
-    void init();
-    void recalc( bool update = FALSE );
-    void doResize();
-    void storeSizes();
-    void getRange( int id, int *, int *, int *, int * );
-    void addContribution( int, int *, int *, bool );
-    int adjustPos( int, int, int *, int *, int *, int * );
-    bool collapsible( TQSplitterLayoutStruct * );
-    void processChildEvents();
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *findWidget( TQWidget * );
-    TQSplitterLayoutStruct *addWidget( TQWidget *, bool prepend = FALSE );
-    void recalcId();
-    void doMove( bool backwards, int pos, int id, int delta, bool upLeft,
-		 bool mayCollapse );
-    void setGeo( TQWidget *w, int pos, int size, bool splitterMoved );
-    int findWidgetJustBeforeOrJustAfter( int id, int delta, int &collapsibleSize );
-    void updateHandles();
-
-    inline TQCOORD pick( const TQPoint &p ) const
-    { return orient == Qt::Horizontal ? p.x() : p.y(); }
-    inline TQCOORD pick( const TQSize &s ) const
-    { return orient == Qt::Horizontal ? s.width() : s.height(); }
-
-    inline TQCOORD trans( const TQPoint &p ) const
-    { return orient == Qt::Vertical ? p.x() : p.y(); }
-    inline TQCOORD trans( const TQSize &s ) const
-    { return orient == Qt::Vertical ? s.width() : s.height(); }
-
-    TQSplitterPrivate *d;
-
-    Qt::Orientation orient;
-    friend class TQSplitterHandle;
-    friend class TQTextStream;
-
-private:
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQSplitter( const TQSplitter & );
-    TQSplitter& operator=( const TQSplitter & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTSTREAM
-TQ_EXPORT TQTextStream& operator<<( TQTextStream&, const TQSplitter& );
-TQ_EXPORT TQTextStream& operator>>( TQTextStream&, TQSplitter& );
-#endif
-
-class TQSplitterHandle : public TQWidget
-{
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQSplitterHandle( Qt::Orientation o,
-		     TQSplitter *parent, const char* name=0 );
-    void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation o );
-    Qt::Orientation orientation() const { return orient; }
-
-    bool opaque() const { return s->opaqueResize(); }
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-
-    int id() const { return myId; } // d->list.at(id())->wid == this
-    void setId( int i ) { myId = i; }
-
-protected:
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-
-public: //private:
-    Qt::Orientation orient;
-    bool opaq;
-    int myId;
-
-    TQSplitter *s;
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_SPLITTER
-
-#endif // TQSPLITTER_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 2a424d4..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,526 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQStatusBar class
-**
-** Created : 980119
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqstatusbar.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STATUSBAR
-
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqsizegrip.h"
-
-/*!
-    \class TQStatusBar tqstatusbar.h
-    \brief The TQStatusBar class provides a horizontal bar suitable for
-    presenting status information.
-
-    \ingroup application
-    \ingroup helpsystem
-    \mainclass
-
-    Each status indicator falls into one of three categories:
-
-    \list
-    \i \e Temporary - briefly occupies most of the status bar. Used
-	to explain tool tip texts or menu entries, for example.
-    \i \e Normal - occupies part of the status bar and may be hidden
-	by temporary messages. Used to display the page and line
-	number in a word processor, for example.
-    \i \e Permanent - is never hidden. Used for important mode
-	indications, for example, some applications put a Caps Lock
-	indicator in the status bar.
-    \endlist
-
-    TQStatusBar lets you display all three types of indicators.
-
-    To display a \e temporary message, call message() (perhaps by
-    connecting a suitable signal to it). To remove a temporary
-    message, call clear(). There are two variants of message(): one
-    that displays the message until the next clear() or message() and
-    one that has a time limit:
-
-    \code
-	connect( loader, TQT_SIGNAL(progressMessage(const TQString&)),
-		 statusBar(), TQT_SLOT(message(const TQString&)) );
-
-	statusBar()->message("Loading...");  // Initial message
-	loader.loadStuff();                  // Emits progress messages
-	statusBar()->message("Done.", 2000); // Final message for 2 seconds
-    \endcode
-
-    \e Normal and \e Permanent messages are displayed by creating a
-    small widget and then adding it to the status bar with
-    addWidget(). Widgets like TQLabel, TQProgressBar or even TQToolButton
-    are useful for adding to status bars. removeWidget() is used to
-    remove widgets.
-
-    \code
-	statusBar()->addWidget(new MyReadWriteIndication(statusBar()));
-    \endcode
-
-    By default TQStatusBar provides a TQSizeGrip in the lower-right
-    corner. You can disable it with setSizeGripEnabled(FALSE);
-
-    <img src=qstatusbar-m.png> <img src=qstatusbar-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQToolBar TQMainWindow TQLabel
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: tqStatus Bar.\endlink
-*/
-
-
-class TQStatusBarPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQStatusBarPrivate() {}
-
-    struct SBItem {
-	SBItem( TQWidget* widget, int stretch, bool permanent )
-	    : s( stretch ), w( widget ), p( permanent ) {}
-	int s;
-	TQWidget * w;
-	bool p;
-    };
-
-    TQPtrList<SBItem> items;
-    TQString tempItem;
-
-    TQBoxLayout * box;
-    TQTimer * timer;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP
-    TQSizeGrip * resizer;
-#endif
-
-    int savedStrut;
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a status bar called \a name with parent \a parent and
-    with a size grip.
-
-    \sa setSizeGripEnabled()
-*/
-TQStatusBar::TQStatusBar( TQWidget * parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name )
-{
-    d = new TQStatusBarPrivate;
-    d->items.setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    d->box = 0;
-    d->timer = 0;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP
-    d->resizer = 0;
-    setSizeGripEnabled(TRUE); // causes reformat()
-#else
-    reformat();
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the status bar and frees any allocated resources and
-    child widgets.
-*/
-TQStatusBar::~TQStatusBar()
-{
-    delete d;
-    d = 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Adds \a widget to this status bar. \a widget is reparented if it
-    isn't already a child of the TQStatusBar.
-
-    \a widget is permanently visible if \a permanent is TRUE and may
-    be obscured by temporary messages if \a permanent is FALSE. The
-    default is FALSE.
-
-    If \a permanent is TRUE, \a widget is located at the far right of
-    the status bar. If \a permanent is FALSE (the default), \a widget
-    is located just to the left of the first permanent widget.
-
-    \a stretch is used to compute a suitable size for \a widget as the
-    status bar grows and shrinks. The default of 0 uses a minimum of
-    space.
-
-    This function may cause some flicker.
-
-    \sa removeWidget()
-*/
-
-void TQStatusBar::addWidget( TQWidget * widget, int stretch, bool permanent )
-{
-    if ( !widget ) {
-#if defined(TQT_CHECK_NULL)
-	qWarning( "TQStatusBar::addWidget(): Cannot add null widget" );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( widget->parentWidget() != this )
-	widget->reparent( this, TQPoint(0, 0), TRUE );
-
-    TQStatusBarPrivate::SBItem* item
-	= new TQStatusBarPrivate::SBItem( widget, stretch, permanent );
-
-    d->items.last();
-    while( !permanent && d->items.current() && d->items.current()->p )
-	d->items.prev();
-
-    d->items.insert( d->items.at() >= 0 ? d->items.at()+1 : 0, item );
-
-    if ( !d->tempItem.isEmpty() && !permanent )
-	widget->hide();
-
-    reformat();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes \a widget from the status bar.
-
-    This function may cause some flicker.
-
-    Note that \a widget is not deleted.
-
-    \sa addWidget()
-*/
-
-void TQStatusBar::removeWidget( TQWidget* widget )
-{
-    if ( !widget )
-	return;
-    bool found = FALSE;
-    TQStatusBarPrivate::SBItem* item = d->items.first();
-    while ( item && !found ) {
-	if ( item->w == widget ) {
-	    d->items.remove();
-	    found = TRUE;
-	}
-	item = d->items.next();
-    }
-
-    if ( found )
-	reformat();
-#if defined(TQT_DEBUG)
-    else
-	qDebug( "TQStatusBar::removeWidget(): Widget not found." );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQStatusBar::sizeGripEnabled
-    \brief whether the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the status bar is enabled
-
-    Enables or disables the TQSizeGrip in the bottom right of the
-    status bar. By default, the size grip is enabled.
-*/
-
-bool TQStatusBar::isSizeGripEnabled() const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP
-    return FALSE;
-#else
-    return !!d->resizer;
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQStatusBar::setSizeGripEnabled(bool enabled)
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP
-    if ( !enabled != !d->resizer ) {
-	if ( enabled ) {
-	    d->resizer = new TQSizeGrip( this, "TQStatusBar::resizer" );
-	} else {
-	    delete d->resizer;
-	    d->resizer = 0;
-	}
-	reformat();
-	if ( d->resizer && isVisible() )
-	    d->resizer->show();
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Changes the status bar's appearance to account for item changes.
-    Special subclasses may need this, but tqgeometry management will
-    usually take care of any necessary rearrangements.
-*/
-void TQStatusBar::reformat()
-{
-    if ( d->box )
-	delete d->box;
-
-    TQBoxLayout *vbox;
-    if ( isSizeGripEnabled() ) {
-	d->box = new TQHBoxLayout( this );
-	vbox = new TQVBoxLayout( d->box );
-    } else {
-	vbox = d->box = new TQVBoxLayout( this );
-    }
-    vbox->addSpacing( 3 );
-    TQBoxLayout* l = new TQHBoxLayout( vbox );
-    l->addSpacing( 3 );
-    l->setSpacing( 4 );
-
-    int maxH = fontMetrics().height();
-
-    TQStatusBarPrivate::SBItem* item = d->items.first();
-    while ( item && !item->p ) {
-	l->addWidget( item->w, item->s );
-	int itemH = TQMIN(item->w->tqsizeHint().height(),
-			 item->w->maximumHeight());
-	maxH = TQMAX( maxH, itemH );
-	item = d->items.next();
-    }
-
-    l->addStretch( 0 );
-
-    while ( item ) {
-	l->addWidget( item->w, item->s );
-	int itemH = TQMIN(item->w->tqsizeHint().height(),
-			 item->w->maximumHeight());
-	maxH = TQMAX( maxH, itemH );
-	item = d->items.next();
-    }
-    l->addSpacing( 4 );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP
-    if ( d->resizer ) {
-	maxH = TQMAX( maxH, d->resizer->tqsizeHint().height() );
-	d->box->addSpacing( 1 );
-	d->box->addWidget( d->resizer, 0, Qt::AlignBottom );
-    }
-#endif
-    l->addStrut( maxH );
-    d->savedStrut = maxH;
-    vbox->addSpacing( 2 );
-    d->box->activate();
-    tqrepaint();
-}
-
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Hides the normal status indicators and displays \a message until
-    clear() or another message() is called.
-
-    \sa clear()
-*/
-void TQStatusBar::message( const TQString &message )
-{
-    if ( d->tempItem == message )
-	return;
-    d->tempItem = message;
-    if ( d->timer ) {
-	delete d->timer;
-	d->timer = 0;
-    }
-    hideOrShow();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Hides the normal status indications and displays \a message for \a
-    ms milli-seconds or until clear() or another message() is called,
-    whichever occurs first.
-*/
-void TQStatusBar::message( const TQString &message, int ms )
-{
-    d->tempItem = message;
-
-    if ( !d->timer ) {
-	d->timer = new TQTimer( this );
-	connect( d->timer, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), this, TQT_SLOT(clear()) );
-    }
-    if ( ms > 0 ) {
-	d->timer->start( ms );
-    } else if ( d->timer ) {
-	delete d->timer;
-	d->timer = 0;
-    }
-
-    hideOrShow();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes any temporary message being shown.
-
-    \sa message()
-*/
-
-void TQStatusBar::clear()
-{
-    if ( d->tempItem.isEmpty() )
-	return;
-    if ( d->timer ) {
-	delete d->timer;
-	d->timer = 0;
-    }
-    d->tempItem = TQString::null;
-    hideOrShow();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQStatusBar::messageChanged( const TQString &message )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the temporary status messages
-    changes. \a message is the new temporary message, and is a
-    null-string when the message has been removed.
-
-    \sa message(), clear()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Ensures that the right widgets are visible. Used by message() and
-    clear().
-*/
-void TQStatusBar::hideOrShow()
-{
-    bool haveMessage = !d->tempItem.isEmpty();
-
-    TQStatusBarPrivate::SBItem* item = d->items.first();
-
-    while( item && !item->p ) {
-	if ( haveMessage )
-	    item->w->hide();
-	else
-	    item->w->show();
-	item = d->items.next();
-    }
-
-    emit messageChanged( d->tempItem );
-    tqrepaint();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Shows the temporary message, if appropriate.
-*/
-void TQStatusBar::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-{
-    bool haveMessage = !d->tempItem.isEmpty();
-
-    TQPainter p( this );
-    TQStatusBarPrivate::SBItem* item = d->items.first();
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP
-    int psx = ( d->resizer && d->resizer->isVisible() ) ? d->resizer->x() : width()-12;
-#else
-    int psx = width() - 12;
-#endif
-
-    while ( item ) {
-	if ( !haveMessage || item->p )
-	    if ( item->w->isVisible() ) {
-		if ( item->p && item->w->x()-1 < psx )
-		    psx = item->w->x()-1;
-		tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_StatusBarSection, &p,
-				       TQRect(item->w->x() - 1, item->w->y() - 1,
-					     item->w->width()+2, item->w->height()+2),
-				       tqcolorGroup(), TQStyle::Style_Default,
-				       TQStyleOption(item->w) );
-	    }
-	item = d->items.next();
-    }
-    if ( haveMessage ) {
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().foreground() );
-	p.drawText( 6, 0, psx, height(), TQt::AlignVCenter | TQt::SingleLine, d->tempItem );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQStatusBar::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * e )
-{
-    TQWidget::resizeEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-bool TQStatusBar::event( TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutHint ) {
-	// Calculate new strut height and call reformat() if it has changed
-	int maxH = fontMetrics().height();
-
-	TQStatusBarPrivate::SBItem* item = d->items.first();
-	while ( item ) {
-	    int itemH = TQMIN(item->w->tqsizeHint().height(),
-			    item->w->maximumHeight());
-	    maxH = TQMAX( maxH, itemH );
-	    item = d->items.next();
-	}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP
-	if ( d->resizer )
-	    maxH = TQMAX( maxH, d->resizer->tqsizeHint().height() );
-#endif
-
-	if ( maxH != d->savedStrut )
-	    reformat();
-	else
-	    update();
-    }
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ChildRemoved ) {
-	TQStatusBarPrivate::SBItem* item = d->items.first();
-	while ( item ) {
-	    if ( item->w == ( (TQChildEvent*)e )->child() )
-		d->items.removeRef( item );
-	    item = d->items.next();
-	}
-    }
-    return TQWidget::event( e );
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 73929cb..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqstatusbar.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQStatusBar class
-**
-** Created : 980316
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQSTATUSBAR_H
-#define TQSTATUSBAR_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_STATUSBAR
-
-
-class TQStatusBarPrivate;
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQStatusBar: public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool sizeGripEnabled READ isSizeGripEnabled WRITE setSizeGripEnabled )
-
-public:
-    TQStatusBar( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    virtual ~TQStatusBar();
-
-    virtual void addWidget( TQWidget *, int stretch = 0, bool = FALSE );
-    virtual void removeWidget( TQWidget * );
-
-    void setSizeGripEnabled(bool);
-    bool isSizeGripEnabled() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void message( const TQString &);
-    void message( const TQString &, int );
-    void clear();
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void messageChanged( const TQString &text );
-
-protected:
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-
-    void reformat();
-    void hideOrShow();
-    bool event( TQEvent *);
-
-private:
-    TQStatusBarPrivate * d;
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQStatusBar( const TQStatusBar & );
-    TQStatusBar& operator=( const TQStatusBar & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_STATUSBAR
-
-#endif // TQSTATUSBAR_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsyntaxhighlighter.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsyntaxhighlighter.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index b948045..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsyntaxhighlighter.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,221 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of the TQSyntaxHighlighter class
-**
-** Created : 990101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqsyntaxhighlighter.h"
-#include "private/tqsyntaxhighlighter_p.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SYNTAXHIGHLIGHTER
-#include "../kernel/tqrichtext_p.h"
-#include "tqtextedit.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-
-/*!
-    \class TQSyntaxHighlighter tqsyntaxhighlighter.h
-    \brief The TQSyntaxHighlighter class is a base class for
-    implementing TQTextEdit syntax highlighters.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \ingroup text
-
-    A syntax highligher automatically highlights parts of the text in
-    a TQTextEdit. Syntax highlighters are often used when the user is
-    entering text in a specific format (for example, source code) and
-    help the user to read the text and identify syntax errors.
-
-    To provide your own syntax highlighting for TQTextEdit, you must
-    subclass TQSyntaxHighlighter and reimplement highlightParagraph().
-
-    When you create an instance of your TQSyntaxHighlighter subclass,
-    pass it the TQTextEdit that you want the syntax highlighting to be
-    applied to. After this your highlightParagraph() function will be
-    called automatically whenever necessary. Use your
-    highlightParagraph() function to apply formatting (e.g. setting
-    the font and color) to the text that is passed to it.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs the TQSyntaxHighlighter and installs it on \a textEdit.
-
-    It is the caller's responsibility to delete the
-    TQSyntaxHighlighter when it is no longer needed.
-*/
-
-TQSyntaxHighlighter::TQSyntaxHighlighter( TQTextEdit *textEdit )
-    : para( 0 ), edit( textEdit ), d( new TQSyntaxHighlighterPrivate )
-{
-    textEdit->document()->setPreProcessor( new TQSyntaxHighlighterInternal( this ) );
-    textEdit->document()->tqinvalidate();
-    TQTimer::singleShot( 0, textEdit->viewport(), TQT_SLOT( update() ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destructor. Uninstalls this syntax highlighter from the textEdit()
-*/
-
-TQSyntaxHighlighter::~TQSyntaxHighlighter()
-{
-    delete d;
-    textEdit()->document()->setPreProcessor( 0 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQSyntaxHighlighter::highlightParagraph( const TQString &text, int endStateOfLastPara )
-
-    This function is called when necessary by the rich text engine,
-    i.e. on paragraphs which have changed.
-
-    In your reimplementation you should parse the paragraph's \a text
-    and call setFormat() as often as necessary to apply any font and
-    color changes that you require. Your function must return a value
-    which indicates the paragraph's end state: see below.
-
-    Some syntaxes can have constructs that span paragraphs. For
-    example, a C++ syntax highlighter should be able to cope with
-    \c{/}\c{*...*}\c{/} comments that span paragraphs. To deal
-    with these cases it is necessary to know the end state of the
-    previous paragraph (e.g. "in comment").
-
-    If your syntax does not have paragraph spanning constructs, simply
-    ignore the \a endStateOfLastPara parameter and always return 0.
-
-    Whenever highlightParagraph() is called it is passed a value for
-    \a endStateOfLastPara. For the very first paragraph this value is
-    always -2. For any other paragraph the value is the value returned
-    by the most recent highlightParagraph() call that applied to the
-    preceding paragraph.
-
-    The value you return is up to you. We recommend only returning 0
-    (to signify that this paragraph's syntax highlighting does not
-    affect the following paragraph), or a positive integer (to signify
-    that this paragraph has ended in the middle of a paragraph
-    spanning construct).
-
-    To find out which paragraph is highlighted, call
-    currentParagraph().
-
-    For example, if you're writing a simple C++ syntax highlighter,
-    you might designate 1 to signify "in comment". For a paragraph
-    that ended in the middle of a comment you'd return 1, and for
-    other paragraphs you'd return 0. In your parsing code if \a
-    endStateOfLastPara was 1, you would highlight the text as a C++
-    comment until you reached the closing \c{*}\c{/}.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    This function is applied to the syntax highlighter's current
-    paragraph (the text of which is passed to the highlightParagraph()
-    function).
-
-    The specified \a font and \a color are applied to the text from
-    position \a start for \a count characters. (If \a count is 0,
-    nothing is done.)
-*/
-
-void TQSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat( int start, int count, const TQFont &font, const TQColor &color )
-{
-    if ( !para || count <= 0 )
-	return;
-    TQTextFormat *f = 0;
-    f = para->document()->formatCollection()->format( font, color );
-    para->setFormat( start, count, f );
-    f->removeRef();
-}
-
-/*! \overload */
-
-void TQSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat( int start, int count, const TQColor &color )
-{
-    if ( !para || count <= 0 )
-	return;
-    TQTextFormat *f = 0;
-    TQFont fnt = textEdit()->TQWidget::font();
-    f = para->document()->formatCollection()->format( fnt, color );
-    para->setFormat( start, count, f );
-    f->removeRef();
-}
-
-/*! \overload */
-
-void TQSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat( int start, int count, const TQFont &font )
-{
-    if ( !para || count <= 0 )
-	return;
-    TQTextFormat *f = 0;
-    TQColor c = textEdit()->viewport()->paletteForegroundColor();
-    f = para->document()->formatCollection()->format( font, c );
-    para->setFormat( start, count, f );
-    f->removeRef();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQTextEdit *TQSyntaxHighlighter::textEdit() const
-
-    Returns the TQTextEdit on which this syntax highlighter is
-    installed
-*/
-
-/*!  Redoes the highlighting of the whole document.
-*/
-
-void TQSyntaxHighlighter::rehighlight()
-{
-    TQTextParagraph *s = edit->document()->firstParagraph();
-    while ( s ) {
-	s->tqinvalidate( 0 );
-	s->state = -1;
-	s->needPreProcess = TRUE;
-	s = s->next();
-    }
-    edit->repaintContents( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the id of the paragraph which is highlighted, or -1 of no
-    paragraph is currently highlighted.
-
-    Usually this function is called from within highlightParagraph().
-*/
-
-int TQSyntaxHighlighter::currentParagraph() const
-{
-    return d->currentParagraph;
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsyntaxhighlighter.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsyntaxhighlighter.h
deleted file mode 100644
index dcadd03..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsyntaxhighlighter.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of the TQSyntaxHighlighter class
-**
-** Created : 022407
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQSYNTAXHIGHLIGHTER_H
-#define TQSYNTAXHIGHLIGHTER_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqfont.h"
-#include "tqcolor.h"
-#include "tqstring.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-class TQTextEdit;
-class TQSyntaxHighlighterInternal;
-class TQSyntaxHighlighterPrivate;
-class TQTextParagraph;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQSyntaxHighlighter : public TQt
-{
-    friend class TQSyntaxHighlighterInternal;
-
-public:
-    TQSyntaxHighlighter( TQTextEdit *textEdit );
-    virtual ~TQSyntaxHighlighter();
-
-    virtual int highlightParagraph( const TQString &text, int endStateOfLastPara ) = 0;
-
-    void setFormat( int start, int count, const TQFont &font, const TQColor &color );
-    void setFormat( int start, int count, const TQColor &color );
-    void setFormat( int start, int count, const TQFont &font );
-    TQTextEdit *textEdit() const { return edit; }
-
-    void rehighlight();
-
-    int currentParagraph() const;
-
-private:
-    TQTextParagraph *para;
-    TQTextEdit *edit;
-    TQSyntaxHighlighterPrivate *d;
-
-};
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsyntaxhighlighter_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsyntaxhighlighter_p.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a1cc898..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqsyntaxhighlighter_p.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of the internal TQSyntaxHighlighterInternal class
-**
-** Created : 031111
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQSYNTAXHIGHLIGHTER_P_H
-#define TQSYNTAXHIGHLIGHTER_P_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SYNTAXHIGHLIGHTER
-#include "tqsyntaxhighlighter.h"
-#include "private/tqrichtext_p.h"
-
-class TQSyntaxHighlighterPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQSyntaxHighlighterPrivate() :
-	currentParagraph( -1 )
-	{}
-
-    int currentParagraph;
-};
-
-class TQSyntaxHighlighterInternal : public TQTextPreProcessor
-{
-public:
-    TQSyntaxHighlighterInternal( TQSyntaxHighlighter *h ) : highlighter( h ) {}
-    void process( TQTextDocument *doc, TQTextParagraph *p, int, bool tqinvalidate ) {
-	if ( p->prev() && p->prev()->endState() == -1 )
-	    process( doc, p->prev(), 0, FALSE );
-
-	highlighter->para = p;
-	TQString text = p->string()->toString();
-	int endState = p->prev() ? p->prev()->endState() : -2;
-	int oldEndState = p->endState();
-	highlighter->d->currentParagraph = p->paragId();
-	p->setEndState( highlighter->highlightParagraph( text, endState ) );
-	highlighter->d->currentParagraph = -1;
-	highlighter->para = 0;
-
-	p->setFirstPreProcess( FALSE );
-	TQTextParagraph *op = p;
-	p = p->next();
-	if ( (!!oldEndState || !!op->endState()) && oldEndState != op->endState() &&
-	     tqinvalidate && p && !p->firstPreProcess() && p->endState() != -1 ) {
-	    while ( p ) {
-		if ( p->endState() == -1 )
-		    return;
-		p->setEndState( -1 );
-		p = p->next();
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    TQTextFormat *format( int ) { return 0; }
-
-private:
-    TQSyntaxHighlighter *highlighter;
-
-    friend class TQTextEdit;
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_SYNTAXHIGHLIGHTER
-#endif // TQSYNTAXHIGHLIGHTER_P_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index bcbd41a..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1368 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQTab and TQTabBar classes
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqtabbar.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TABBAR
-#include "tqaccel.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqtoolbutton.h"
-#include "tqtooltip.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqiconset.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "../kernel/tqinternal_p.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MACX
-#include <tqmacstyle_mac.h>
-#endif
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQTab tqtabbar.h
-    \brief The TQTab class provides the structures in a TQTabBar.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-
-    This class is used for custom TQTabBar tab headings.
-
-    \sa TQTabBar
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty tab. All fields are set to empty.
-*/
-
-TQTab::TQTab()
-    : enabled( TRUE ),
-      id ( 0 ),
-      iconset( 0 ),
-      tb( 0 )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a tab with the text \a text.
-*/
-
-TQTab::TQTab( const TQString &text )
-    : label( text ),
-      enabled( TRUE ),
-      id( 0 ),
-      iconset( 0 ),
-      tb( 0 )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a tab with an \a icon and the text, \a text.
-*/
-
-TQTab::TQTab( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& text )
-    : label( text ),
-      enabled( TRUE ),
-      id( 0 ),
-      iconset( new TQIconSet(icon) ),
-      tb( 0 )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQString TQTab::text() const
-
-    Returns the text of the TQTab label.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQIconSet TQTab::iconSet() const
-
-    Return the TQIconSet of the TQTab.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTab::setRect( const TQRect &rect )
-
-    Set the TQTab TQRect to \a rect.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQRect TQTab::rect() const
-
-    Return the TQRect for the TQTab.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTab::setEnabled( bool enable )
-
-    If \a enable is TRUE enable the TQTab, otherwise disable it.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQTab::isEnabled() const
-
-    Returns TRUE if the TQTab is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTab::setIdentifier( int i )
-
-    Set the identifier for the TQTab to \a i. Each TQTab's identifier
-    within a TQTabBar must be unique.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQTab::identifier() const
-
-    Return the TQTab's identifier.
-*/
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the tab and frees up all allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQTab::~TQTab()
-{
-    delete iconset;
-    tb = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQTabBar tqtabbar.h
-    \brief The TQTabBar class provides a tab bar, e.g. for use in tabbed dialogs.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-
-    TQTabBar is straightforward to use; it draws the tabs using one of
-    the predefined \link TQTabBar::Shape tqshapes\endlink, and emits a
-    signal when a tab is selected. It can be subclassed to tailor the
-    look and feel. TQt also provides a ready-made \l{TQTabWidget} and a
-    \l{TQTabDialog}.
-
-    The choice of tab tqshape is a matter of taste, although tab dialogs
-    (for preferences and similar) invariably use \c RoundedAbove;
-    nobody uses \c TriangularAbove. Tab controls in windows other than
-    dialogs almost always use either \c RoundedBelow or \c
-    TriangularBelow. Many spreadsheets and other tab controls in which
-    all the pages are essentially similar use \c TriangularBelow,
-    whereas \c RoundedBelow is used mostly when the pages are
-    different (e.g. a multi-page tool palette).
-
-    The most important part of TQTabBar's API is the selected() signal.
-    This is emitted whenever the selected page changes (even at
-    startup, when the selected page changes from 'none'). There is
-    also a slot, setCurrentTab(), which can be used to select a page
-    programmatically.
-
-    TQTabBar creates automatic accelerator keys in the manner of
-    TQButton; e.g. if a tab's label is "\&Graphics", Alt+G becomes an
-    accelerator key for switching to that tab.
-
-    The following virtual functions may need to be reimplemented:
-    \list
-    \i paint() paints a single tab. paintEvent() calls paint() for
-    each tab so that any overlap will look right.
-    \i addTab() creates a new tab and adds it to the bar.
-    \i selectTab() decides which tab, if any, the user selects with the mouse.
-    \endlist
-
-    The index of the current tab is returned by currentTab(). The tab
-    with a particular index is returned by tabAt(), the tab with a
-    particular id is returned by tab(). The index of a tab is returned
-    by indexOf(). The current tab can be set by index or tab pointer
-    using one of the setCurrentTab() functions.
-
-    <img src=qtabbar-m.png> <img src=qtabbar-w.png>
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTabBar::Shape
-
-    This enum type lists the built-in tqshapes supported by TQTabBar:
-
-    \value RoundedAbove  the normal rounded look above the pages
-
-    \value RoundedBelow  the normal rounded look below the pages
-
-    \value TriangularAbove  triangular tabs above the pages (very
-    unusual; included for completeness)
-
-    \value TriangularBelow  triangular tabs similar to those used in
-    the Excel spreadsheet, for example
-*/
-
-class TQTabBarToolTip;
-
-struct TQTabPrivate {
-    int id;
-    int focus;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    TQAccel * a;
-#endif
-    TQTab *pressed;
-    TQTabBar::Shape s;
-    TQToolButton* rightB;
-    TQToolButton* leftB;
-    int btnWidth;
-    bool  scrolls;
-    TQTabBarToolTip * toolTips;
-};
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-/* \internal
-*/
-class TQTabBarToolTip : public TQToolTip
-{
-public:
-    TQTabBarToolTip( TQWidget * parent )
-	: TQToolTip( parent ) {}
-    virtual ~TQTabBarToolTip() {}
-
-    void add( TQTab * tab, const TQString & tip )
-    {
-	tabTips.replace( tab, tip );
-    }
-
-    void remove( TQTab * tab )
-    {
-	tabTips.erase( tab );
-    }
-
-    TQString tipForTab( TQTab * tab ) const
-    {
-	TQMapConstIterator<TQTab *, TQString> it;
-	it = tabTips.find( tab );
-	if ( it != tabTips.end() )
-	    return it.data();
-	else
-	    return TQString();
-    }
-
-protected:
-    void maybeTip( const TQPoint & p )
-    {
-	TQTabBar * tb = (TQTabBar *) parentWidget();
-	if ( !tb )
-	    return;
-
-	// check if the scroll buttons in the tab bar are visible -
-	// don't display any tips if the pointer is over one of them
-	TQRect rectL, rectR;
-	rectL.setRect( tb->d->leftB->x(), tb->d->leftB->y(),
-		       tb->d->leftB->width(), tb->d->leftB->height() );
-	rectR.setRect( tb->d->rightB->x(), tb->d->rightB->y(),
-		       tb->d->rightB->width(), tb->d->rightB->height() );
-	if ( tb->d->scrolls && (rectL.contains( p ) || rectR.contains( p )) )
-	     return;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-	// find and show the tool tip for the tab under the point p
-	TQMapIterator<TQTab *, TQString> it;
-	for ( it = tabTips.begin(); it != tabTips.end(); ++it ) {
-	    if ( it.key()->rect().contains( p ) )
-		tip( it.key()->rect(), it.data() );
-	}
-#endif
-    }
-
-private:
-    TQMap<TQTab *, TQString> tabTips;
-};
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTabBar::selected( int id )
-
-    TQTabBar emits this signal whenever any tab is selected, whether by
-    the program or by the user. The argument \a id is the id of the
-    tab as returned by addTab().
-
-    show() is guaranteed to emit this signal; you can display your
-    page in a slot connected to this signal.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTabBar::layoutChanged()
-
-    TQTabBar emits the signal whenever the tqlayout of the tab bar has
-    been recalculated, for example when the contents of a tab change.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a new, empty tab bar; the \a parent and \a name
-    arguments are passed on to the TQWidget constructor.
-*/
-
-TQTabBar::TQTabBar( TQWidget * parent, const char *name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WNoAutoErase | TQt::WNoMousePropagation)  )
-{
-    d = new TQTabPrivate;
-    d->pressed = 0;
-    d->id = 0;
-    d->focus = 0;
-    d->toolTips = 0;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    d->a = new TQAccel( this, "tab accelerators" );
-    connect( d->a, TQT_SIGNAL(activated(int)), this, TQT_SLOT(setCurrentTab(int)) );
-    connect( d->a, TQT_SIGNAL(activatedAmbiguously(int)), this, TQT_SLOT(setCurrentTab(int)) );
-#endif
-    d->s = RoundedAbove;
-    d->scrolls = FALSE;
-    d->leftB = new TQToolButton( TQt::LeftArrow, this, "qt_left_btn" );
-    connect( d->leftB, TQT_SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, TQT_SLOT( scrollTabs() ) );
-    d->leftB->hide();
-    d->rightB = new TQToolButton( TQt::RightArrow, this, "qt_right_btn" );
-    connect( d->rightB, TQT_SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, TQT_SLOT( scrollTabs() ) );
-    d->rightB->hide();
-    d->btnWidth = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_TabBarScrollButtonWidth, this);
-    l = new TQPtrList<TQTab>;
-    lstatic = new TQPtrList<TQTab>;
-    lstatic->setAutoDelete( TRUE );
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::TabFocus );
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Preferred, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the tab control, freeing memory used.
-*/
-
-TQTabBar::~TQTabBar()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    if ( d->toolTips )
-	delete d->toolTips;
-#endif
-    delete d;
-    d = 0;
-    delete l;
-    l = 0;
-    delete lstatic;
-    lstatic = 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Adds the tab, \a newTab, to the tab control.
-
-    Sets \a newTab's id to a new id and places the tab just to the
-    right of the existing tabs. If the tab's label contains an
-    ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as an
-    accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the label is "Bro\&wse" then
-    Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will move the focus to this
-    tab. Returns the id.
-
-    \sa insertTab()
-*/
-
-int TQTabBar::addTab( TQTab * newTab )
-{
-    return insertTab( newTab );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Inserts the tab, \a newTab, into the tab control.
-
-    If \a index is not specified, the tab is simply appended.
-    Otherwise it's inserted at the specified position.
-
-    Sets \a newTab's id to a new id. If the tab's label contains an
-    ampersand, the letter following the ampersand is used as an
-    accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the label is "Bro\&wse" then
-    Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will move the focus to this
-    tab. Returns the id.
-
-    \sa addTab()
-*/
-
-int TQTabBar::insertTab( TQTab * newTab, int index )
-{
-    newTab->id = d->id++;
-    if ( !tab( d->focus ) )
-	d->focus = newTab->id;
-
-    newTab->setTabBar( this );
-    l->insert( 0, newTab );
-    if ( index < 0 || index > int(lstatic->count()) )
-	lstatic->append( newTab );
-    else
-	lstatic->insert( index, newTab );
-
-    layoutTabs();
-    updateArrowButtons();
-    makeVisible( tab( currentTab() ) );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    int p = TQAccel::shortcutKey( newTab->label );
-    if ( p )
-	d->a->insertItem( p, newTab->id );
-#endif
-
-    return newTab->id;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes tab \a t from the tab control, and deletes the tab.
-*/
-void TQTabBar::removeTab( TQTab * t )
-{
-    //#### accelerator labels??
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    if ( d->toolTips )
-	d->toolTips->remove( t );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-    if ( d->a )
-	d->a->removeItem( t->id );
-#endif
-    bool updateFocus = t->id == d->focus;
-    // remove the TabBar Reference
-    if(d->pressed == t)
-	d->pressed = 0;
-    t->setTabBar( 0 );
-    l->remove( t );
-    lstatic->remove( t );
-    layoutTabs();
-    updateArrowButtons();
-    makeVisible( tab( currentTab() ) );
-    if ( updateFocus )
-	d->focus = currentTab();
-    update();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Enables tab \a id if \a enabled is TRUE or disables it if \a
-    enabled is FALSE. If \a id is currently selected,
-    setTabEnabled(FALSE) makes another tab selected.
-
-    setTabEnabled() updates the display if this causes a change in \a
-    id's status.
-
-    \sa update(), isTabEnabled()
-*/
-
-void TQTabBar::setTabEnabled( int id, bool enabled )
-{
-    TQTab * t;
-    for( t = l->first(); t; t = l->next() ) {
-	if ( t && t->id == id ) {
-	    if ( t->enabled != enabled ) {
-		t->enabled = enabled;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-		d->a->setItemEnabled( t->id, enabled );
-#endif
-		TQRect r( t->r );
-		if ( !enabled && id == currentTab() ) {
-		    TQPoint p1( t->r.center() ), p2;
-		    int m = 2147483647;
-		    int distance;
-		    // look for the closest enabled tab - measure the
-		    // distance between the centers of the two tabs
-		    for( TQTab * n = l->first(); n; n = l->next() ) {
-			if ( n->enabled ) {
-			    p2 = n->r.center();
-			    distance = (p2.x() - p1.x())*(p2.x() - p1.x()) +
-				       (p2.y() - p1.y())*(p2.y() - p1.y());
-			    if ( distance < m ) {
-				t = n;
-				m = distance;
-			    }
-			}
-		    }
-		    if ( t->enabled ) {
-			r = r.unite( t->r );
-			l->append( l->take( l->findRef( t ) ) );
-			emit selected( t->id );
-		    }
-		}
-		tqrepaint( r, FALSE );
-	    }
-	    return;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the tab with id \a id exists and is enabled;
-    otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setTabEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQTabBar::isTabEnabled( int id ) const
-{
-    TQTab * t = tab( id );
-    if ( t )
-	return t->enabled;
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQTabBar::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    TQSize sz(0, 0);
-    if ( TQTab * t = l->first() ) {
-	TQRect r( t->r );
-	while ( (t = l->next()) != 0 )
-	    r = r.unite( t->r );
-	sz = r.size();
-    }
-    return sz.expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut());
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQTabBar::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    if(tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_TabBar_PreferNoArrows, this ))
-	return tqsizeHint();
-    return TQSize( d->rightB->tqsizeHint().width() * 2 + 75, tqsizeHint().height() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Paints the tab \a t using painter \a p. If and only if \a selected
-    is TRUE, \a t is drawn currently selected.
-
-    This virtual function may be reimplemented to change the look of
-    TQTabBar. If you decide to reimplement it, you may also need to
-    reimplement tqsizeHint().
-*/
-
-void TQTabBar::paint( TQPainter * p, TQTab * t, bool selected ) const
-{
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-
-    if (isEnabled() && t->isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (tqtopLevelWidget() == tqApp->activeWindow())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Active;
-    if ( selected )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Selected;
-    else if(t == d->pressed)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Sunken;
-    //selection flags
-    if(t->rect().contains(mapFromGlobal(TQCursor::pos())))
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_MouseOver;
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl( TQStyle::CE_TabBarTab, p, this, t->rect(),
-			 tqcolorGroup(), flags, TQStyleOption(t) );
-
-    TQRect r( t->r );
-    p->setFont( font() );
-
-    int iw = 0;
-    int ih = 0;
-    if ( t->iconset != 0 ) {
-	iw = t->iconset->pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, TQIconSet::Normal ).width() + 4;
-	ih = t->iconset->pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, TQIconSet::Normal ).height();
-    }
-    TQFontMetrics fm = p->fontMetrics();
-    int fw = fm.width( t->label );
-    fw -= t->label.contains('&') * fm.width('&');
-    fw += t->label.contains("&&") * fm.width('&');
-    int w = iw + fw + 4;
-    int h = TQMAX(fm.height() + 4, ih );
-    int offset = 3;
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MAC
-    if (::tqqt_cast<TQMacStyle *>(&tqstyle()))
-        offset = 0;
-#endif
-    paintLabel( p, TQRect( r.left() + (r.width()-w)/2 - offset,
-			  r.top() + (r.height()-h)/2,
-			  w, h ), t, t->id == keyboardFocusTab() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Paints the label of tab \a t centered in rectangle \a br using
-    painter \a p. A focus indication is drawn if \a has_focus is TRUE.
-*/
-
-void TQTabBar::paintLabel( TQPainter* p, const TQRect& br,
-			  TQTab* t, bool has_focus ) const
-{
-    TQRect r = br;
-    bool selected = currentTab() == t->id;
-    if ( t->iconset) {
-	// the tab has an iconset, draw it in the right mode
-	TQIconSet::Mode mode = (t->enabled && isEnabled())
-	    ? TQIconSet::Normal : TQIconSet::Disabled;
-	if ( mode == TQIconSet::Normal && has_focus )
-	    mode = TQIconSet::Active;
-	TQPixmap pixmap = t->iconset->pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, mode );
-	int pixw = pixmap.width();
-	int pixh = pixmap.height();
-	r.setLeft( r.left() + pixw + 4 );
-	r.setRight( r.right() + 2 );
-
-	int xoff = 0, yoff = 0;
-	if(!selected) {
-	    xoff = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabShiftHorizontal, this);
-	    yoff = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabShiftVertical, this);
-	}
-	p->drawPixmap( br.left() + 2 + xoff, br.center().y()-pixh/2 + yoff, pixmap );
-    }
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-
-    if (isEnabled() && t->isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (has_focus)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if ( selected )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Selected;
-    else if(t == d->pressed)
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Sunken;
-    if(t->rect().contains(mapFromGlobal(TQCursor::pos())))
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_MouseOver;
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl( TQStyle::CE_TabBarLabel, p, this, r,
-			 t->isEnabled() ? tqcolorGroup(): tqpalette().disabled(),
-			 flags, TQStyleOption(t) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Repaints the tab row. All the painting is done by paint();
-    paintEvent() only decides which tabs need painting and in what
-    order. The event is passed in \a e.
-
-    \sa paint()
-*/
-
-void TQTabBar::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->rect().isNull() )
-	return;
-
-    TQSharedDoubleBuffer buffer( this, e->rect() );
-
-    TQTab * t;
-    t = l->first();
-    do {
-	TQTab * n = l->next();
-	if ( t && t->r.intersects( e->rect() ) )
-	    paint( buffer.painter(), t, n == 0 );
-	t = n;
-    } while ( t != 0 );
-
-    if ( d->scrolls && lstatic->first()->r.left() < 0 ) {
-	TQPointArray a;
-	int h = height();
-	if ( d->s == RoundedAbove ) {
-	    buffer.painter()->fillRect( 0, 3, 4, h-5,
-			tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Background ) );
-	    a.setPoints( 5,  0,2,  3,h/4, 0,h/2, 3,3*h/4, 0,h );
-	} else if ( d->s == RoundedBelow ) {
-	    buffer.painter()->fillRect( 0, 2, 4, h-5,
-			tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Background ) );
-	    a.setPoints( 5,  0,0,  3,h/4, 0,h/2, 3,3*h/4, 0,h-3 );
-	}
-
-	if ( !a.isEmpty() ) {
-	    buffer.painter()->setPen( tqcolorGroup().light() );
-	    buffer.painter()->drawPolyline( a );
-	    a.translate( 1, 0 );
-	    buffer.painter()->setPen( tqcolorGroup().midlight() );
-	    buffer.painter()->drawPolyline( a );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function is called by the mouse event handlers to
-    determine which tab is pressed. The default implementation returns
-    a pointer to the tab whose bounding rectangle contains \a p, if
-    exactly one tab's bounding rectangle contains \a p. Otherwise it
-    returns 0.
-
-    \sa mousePressEvent() mouseReleaseEvent()
-*/
-
-TQTab * TQTabBar::selectTab( const TQPoint & p ) const
-{
-    TQTab * selected = 0;
-    bool moreThanOne = FALSE;
-
-    TQPtrListIterator<TQTab> i( *l );
-    while( i.current() ) {
-	TQTab * t = i.current();
-	++i;
-
-	if ( t && t->r.contains( p ) ) {
-	    if ( selected )
-		moreThanOne = TRUE;
-	    else
-		selected = t;
-	}
-    }
-
-    return moreThanOne ? 0 : selected;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTabBar::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    TQTab *t = selectTab( e->pos() );
-    if ( t && t->enabled ) {
-	d->pressed = t;
-	if(e->type() == tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_TabBar_SelectMouseType, this ))
-	    setCurrentTab( t );
-	else
-	    tqrepaint(t->rect(), FALSE);
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTabBar::mouseMoveEvent ( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->state() != Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    if(tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_TabBar_SelectMouseType, this ) == TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease) {
-	TQTab *t = selectTab( e->pos() );
-	if(t != d->pressed) {
-	    if(d->pressed)
-		tqrepaint(d->pressed->rect(), FALSE);
-	    if((d->pressed = t))
-		tqrepaint(t->rect(), FALSE);
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTabBar::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	e->ignore();
-    if(d->pressed) {
-	TQTab *t = selectTab( e->pos() ) == d->pressed ? d->pressed : 0;
-	d->pressed = 0;
-	if(t && t->enabled && e->type() == tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_TabBar_SelectMouseType, this ))
-	    setCurrentTab( t );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTabBar::show()
-{
-    //  ensures that one tab is selected.
-    TQTab * t = l->last();
-    TQWidget::show();
-
-    if ( t )
-	emit selected( t->id );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTabBar::currentTab
-    \brief the id of the tab bar's visible tab
-
-    If no tab page is currently visible, the property's value is -1.
-    Even if the property's value is not -1, you cannot assume that the
-    user can see the relevant page, or that the tab is enabled. When
-    you need to display something the value of this property
-    represents the best page to display.
-
-    When this property is set to \e id, it will raise the tab with the
-    id \e id and emit the selected() signal.
-
-    \sa selected() isTabEnabled()
-*/
-
-int TQTabBar::currentTab() const
-{
-    const TQTab * t = l->getLast();
-
-    return t ? t->id : -1;
-}
-
-void TQTabBar::setCurrentTab( int id )
-{
-    setCurrentTab( tab( id ) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Raises \a tab and emits the selected() signal unless the tab was
-    already current.
-
-    \sa currentTab() selected()
-*/
-
-void TQTabBar::setCurrentTab( TQTab * tab )
-{
-    if ( tab && l ) {
-	if ( l->last() == tab )
-	    return;
-
-	TQRect r = l->last()->r;
-	if ( l->findRef( tab ) >= 0 )
-	    l->append( l->take() );
-
-	d->focus = tab->id;
-
-	setMicroFocusHint( tab->rect().x(), tab->rect().y(), tab->rect().width(), tab->rect().height(), FALSE );
-
-	if ( tab->r.intersects( r ) ) {
-	    tqrepaint( r.unite( tab->r ), FALSE );
-	} else {
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MACX
-            update();
-#else
-	    tqrepaint( r, FALSE );
-	    tqrepaint( tab->r, FALSE );
-#endif
-	}
-	makeVisible( tab );
-	emit selected( tab->id );
-
-#ifdef TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, indexOf(tab->id)+1, TQAccessible::Focus );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTabBar::keyboardFocusTab
-    \brief the id of the tab that has the keyboard focus
-
-    This property contains the id of the tab that has the keyboard
-    focus or -1 if the tab bar does not have the keyboard focus.
-*/
-
-int TQTabBar::keyboardFocusTab() const
-{
-    return hasFocus() ? d->focus : -1;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTabBar::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * e )
-{
-    //   The right and left arrow keys move a selector, the spacebar
-    //   makes the tab with the selector active.  All other keys are
-    //   ignored.
-
-    int old = d->focus;
-
-    bool reverse = TQApplication::reverseLayout();
-    if ( ( !reverse && e->key() == Qt::Key_Left ) || ( reverse && e->key() == Qt::Key_Right ) ) {
-	// left - skip past any disabled ones
-	if ( d->focus >= 0 ) {
-	    TQTab * t = lstatic->last();
-	    while ( t && t->id != d->focus )
-		t = lstatic->prev();
-	    do {
-		t = lstatic->prev();
-	    } while ( t && !t->enabled);
-	    if (t)
-		d->focus = t->id;
-	}
-	if ( d->focus < 0 )
-	    d->focus = old;
-    } else if ( ( !reverse && e->key() == Qt::Key_Right ) || ( reverse && e->key() == Qt::Key_Left ) ) {
-	TQTab * t = lstatic->first();
-	while ( t && t->id != d->focus )
-	    t = lstatic->next();
-	do {
-	    t = lstatic->next();
-	} while ( t && !t->enabled);
-
-	if (t)
-	    d->focus = t->id;
-	if ( d->focus >= d->id )
-	    d->focus = old;
-    } else {
-	// other keys - ignore
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    // if the focus moved, tqrepaint and signal
-    if ( old != d->focus ) {
-	setCurrentTab( d->focus );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tab with id \a id or 0 if there is no such tab.
-
-    \sa count()
-*/
-
-TQTab * TQTabBar::tab( int id ) const
-{
-    TQTab * t;
-    for( t = l->first(); t; t = l->next() )
-	if ( t && t->id == id )
-	    return t;
-    return 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tab at position \a index.
-
-    \sa indexOf()
-*/
-
-TQTab * TQTabBar::tabAt( int index ) const
-{
-    TQTab * t;
-    t = lstatic->at( index );
-    return t;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the position index of the tab with id \a id or -1 if no
-    tab has this \a id.
-
-    \sa tabAt()
-*/
-int TQTabBar::indexOf( int id ) const
-{
-    TQTab * t;
-    int idx = 0;
-    for( t = lstatic->first(); t; t = lstatic->next() ) {
-	if ( t && t->id == id )
-	    return idx;
-	idx++;
-    }
-    return -1;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTabBar::count
-    \brief the number of tabs in the tab bar
-
-    \sa tab()
-*/
-int TQTabBar::count() const
-{
-    return l->count();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    The list of TQTab objects in the tab bar.
-
-    This list is unlikely to be in the order that the TQTab elements
-    appear visually. One way of iterating over the tabs is like this:
-    \code
-    for ( uint i = 0; i < myTabBar->count(); ++i ) {
-	nextTab = myTabBar->tabAt( i );
-	// do something with nextTab
-    }
-    \endcode
-*/
-TQPtrList<TQTab> * TQTabBar::tabList()
-{
-    return l;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTabBar::tqshape
-    \brief the tqshape of the tabs in the tab bar
-
-    The value of this property is one of the following: \c
-    RoundedAbove (default), \c RoundedBelow, \c TriangularAbove or \c
-    TriangularBelow.
-
-    \sa Shape
-*/
-TQTabBar::Shape TQTabBar::tqshape() const
-{
-    return d ? d->s : RoundedAbove;
-}
-
-void TQTabBar::setShape( Shape s )
-{
-    if ( !d || d->s == s )
-	return;
-    //######### must recalculate heights
-    d->s = s;
-    update();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Lays out all existing tabs according to their label and their
-    iconset.
- */
-void TQTabBar::layoutTabs()
-{
-    if ( lstatic->isEmpty() )
-	return;
-
-    TQSize oldSh(0, 0);
-    if ( TQTab * t = l->first() ) {
-	TQRect r( t->r );
-	while ( (t = l->next()) != 0 )
-	    r = r.unite( t->r );
-	oldSh = r.size();
-    }
-
-    d->btnWidth = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_TabBarScrollButtonWidth, this);
-    int hframe, vframe, overlap;
-    hframe  = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabHSpace, this );
-    vframe  = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabVSpace, this );
-    overlap = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_TabBarTabOverlap, this );
-
-    TQFontMetrics fm = fontMetrics();
-    TQRect r;
-    TQTab *t;
-    bool reverse = TQApplication::reverseLayout();
-    if ( reverse )
-	t = lstatic->last();
-    else
-	t = lstatic->first();
-    int x = 0;
-    int offset = (t && d->scrolls) ? t->r.x() : 0;
-    while ( t ) {
-	int lw = fm.width( t->label );
-	lw -= t->label.contains('&') * fm.width('&');
-	lw += t->label.contains("&&") * fm.width('&');
-	int iw = 0;
-	int ih = 0;
-	if ( t->iconset != 0 ) {
-	    iw = t->iconset->pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, TQIconSet::Normal ).width() + 4;
-	    ih = t->iconset->pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, TQIconSet::Normal ).height();
-	}
-	int h = TQMAX( fm.height(), ih );
-	h = TQMAX( h, TQApplication::globalStrut().height() );
-
-	h += vframe;
-	t->r = TQRect(TQPoint(x, 0), tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_TabBarTab, this,
-	             TQSize( TQMAX( lw + hframe + iw, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() ), h ),
-		     TQStyleOption(t) ));
-	x += t->r.width() - overlap;
-	r = r.unite( t->r );
-	if ( reverse )
-	    t = lstatic->prev();
-	else
-	    t = lstatic->next();
-    }
-    x += overlap;
-    int w = (d->scrolls) ? d->leftB->x() : width();
-    if (x + offset < w)
-	offset = w - x;
-    if (offset > 0)
-	offset = 0;
-
-    for ( t = lstatic->first(); t; t = lstatic->next() ) {
-	t->r.moveBy( offset, 0 );
-	t->r.setHeight( r.height() );
-    }
-
-    if ( tqsizeHint() != oldSh )
-	updateGeometry();
-
-    emit layoutChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-bool TQTabBar::event( TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LanguageChange ) {
-	layoutTabs();
-	updateArrowButtons();
-	makeVisible( tab( currentTab() ));
-    }
-
-    return TQWidget::event( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTabBar::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    layoutTabs();
-    updateArrowButtons();
-    TQWidget::styleChange( old );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTabBar::focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent * )
-{
-    TQTab *t = tab( d->focus );
-    if ( t )
-	tqrepaint( t->r, FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTabBar::focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent * )
-{
-    TQTab *t = tab( d->focus );
-    if ( t )
-	tqrepaint( t->r, FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTabBar::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * )
-{
-    const int arrowWidth = TQMAX( d->btnWidth, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() );;
-    d->rightB->setGeometry( width() - arrowWidth, 0, arrowWidth, height() );
-    d->leftB->setGeometry( width() - 2*arrowWidth, 0, arrowWidth, height() );
-    layoutTabs();
-    updateArrowButtons();
-    makeVisible( tab( currentTab() ));
-}
-
-void TQTabBar::scrollTabs()
-{
-    TQTab* left = 0;
-    TQTab* right = 0;
-    for ( TQTab* t = lstatic->first(); t; t = lstatic->next() ) {
-	if ( t->r.left() < 0 && t->r.right() > 0 )
-	    left = t;
-	if ( t->r.left() < d->leftB->x()+2 )
-	    right = t;
-    }
-
-    if ( sender() == d->leftB )
-	makeVisible( left );
-    else  if ( sender() == d->rightB )
-	makeVisible( right );
-}
-
-void TQTabBar::makeVisible( TQTab* tab  )
-{
-    bool tooFarLeft = ( tab && tab->r.left() < 0 );
-    bool tooFarRight = ( tab && tab->r.right() >= d->leftB->x() );
-
-    if ( !d->scrolls || ( !tooFarLeft && ! tooFarRight ) )
-	return;
-
-    bool bs = tqsignalsBlocked();
-    blockSignals(TRUE);
-    layoutTabs();
-    blockSignals(bs);
-
-    int offset = 0;
-
-    if ( tooFarLeft ) {
-	offset = tab->r.left();
-	if (tab != lstatic->first())
-	    offset -= 8;
-    } else if ( tooFarRight ) {
-	offset = tab->r.right() - d->leftB->x() + 1;
-    }
-
-    for ( TQTab* t = lstatic->first(); t; t = lstatic->next() )
-	t->r.moveBy( -offset, 0 );
-
-    d->leftB->setEnabled( lstatic->first()->r.left() < 0);
-    d->rightB->setEnabled( lstatic->last()->r.right() >= d->leftB->x() );
-
-    // Make sure disabled buttons pop up again
-    if ( !d->leftB->isEnabled() && d->leftB->isDown() )
-	d->leftB->setDown( FALSE );
-    if ( !d->rightB->isEnabled() && d->rightB->isDown() )
-	d->rightB->setDown( FALSE );
-
-    update();
-    emit layoutChanged();
-}
-
-void TQTabBar::updateArrowButtons()
-{
-    if (lstatic->isEmpty()) {
-	d->scrolls = FALSE;
-    } else {
-	d->scrolls = (lstatic->last()->r.right() - lstatic->first()->r.left() > width());
-    }
-    if ( d->scrolls ) {
-	const int arrowWidth = TQMAX( d->btnWidth, TQApplication::globalStrut().width() );
-	if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	    d->rightB->setGeometry( arrowWidth, 0, arrowWidth, height() );
-	    d->leftB->setGeometry( 0, 0, arrowWidth, height() );
-	} else {
-	    d->rightB->setGeometry( width() - arrowWidth, 0, arrowWidth, height() );
-	    d->leftB->setGeometry( width() - 2*arrowWidth, 0, arrowWidth, height() );
-	}
-
-	d->leftB->setEnabled( lstatic->first()->r.left() < 0);
-	d->rightB->setEnabled( lstatic->last()->r.right() >= d->leftB->x() );
-	d->leftB->show();
-	d->rightB->show();
-    } else {
-	d->leftB->hide();
-	d->rightB->hide();
-	layoutTabs();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the tool tip for the tab at index position \a index.
-*/
-void TQTabBar::removeToolTip( int index )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    TQTab * tab = tabAt( index );
-    if ( !tab || !d->toolTips )
-	return;
-    d->toolTips->remove( tab );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the tool tip for the tab at index position \a index to \a
-    tip.
-*/
-void TQTabBar::setToolTip( int index, const TQString & tip )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    TQTab * tab = tabAt( index );
-    if ( !tab )
-	return;
-    if ( d->toolTips == 0 )
-	d->toolTips = new TQTabBarToolTip( this );
-    d->toolTips->add( tab, tip );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tool tip for the tab at index position \a index.
-*/
-TQString TQTabBar::toolTip( int index ) const
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    if ( d->toolTips )
-	return d->toolTips->tipForTab( tabAt( index ) );
-    else
-#endif
-	return TQString();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the text of the tab to \a text.
-*/
-void TQTab::setText( const TQString& text )
-{
-    label = text;
-    if ( tb ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-	tb->d->a->removeItem( id );
-	int p = TQAccel::shortcutKey( text );
-	if ( p )
-	    tb->d->a->insertItem( p, id );
-#endif
-	tb->layoutTabs();
-	tb->tqrepaint(FALSE);
-
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-	TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( tb, tb->indexOf(id)+1, TQAccessible::NameChanged );
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the tab's iconset to \a icon
-*/
-void TQTab::setIconSet( const TQIconSet &icon )
-{
-    iconset = new TQIconSet( icon );
-}
-
-// this allows us to handle accelerators that are in a TQTabBar.
-void TQTab::setTabBar( TQTabBar *newTb )
-{
-    tb = newTb;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-*/
-void TQTabBar::fontChange( const TQFont & oldFont )
-{
-    layoutTabs();
-    TQWidget::fontChange( oldFont );
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 021e13e..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabbar.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,187 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQTab and TQTabBar classes
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQTABBAR_H
-#define TQTABBAR_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TABBAR
-
-class TQTabBar;
-class TQIconSet;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQTab : public TQt
-{
-    friend class TQTabBar;
-    friend class TQTabWidget;
-
-public:
-    TQTab();
-    virtual ~TQTab();
-    TQTab( const TQString& text );
-    TQTab( const TQIconSet& icon, const TQString& text = TQString::null );
-
-    void setText( const TQString& text);
-    TQString text() const { return label; }
-    void setIconSet( const TQIconSet& icon );
-    TQIconSet* iconSet() const { return iconset; }
-    void setRect( const TQRect& rect ) { r = rect; }
-    TQRect rect() const { return r; }
-    void setEnabled( bool enable ) { enabled = enable; }
-    bool isEnabled() const { return enabled; }
-    void setIdentifier( int i ) { id = i; }
-    int identifier() const { return id; }
-
-private:
-    void setTabBar( TQTabBar *tb );
-    TQString label;
-    TQRect r; // the bounding rectangle of this (may overlap with others)
-    bool enabled;
-    int id;
-    TQIconSet* iconset; // optional iconset
-    TQTabBar *tb;
-};
-
-
-struct TQTabPrivate;
-//class *TQAccel;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQTabBar: public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( Shape )
-    Q_PROPERTY( Shape tqshape READ tqshape WRITE setShape )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int currentTab READ currentTab WRITE setCurrentTab )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int count READ count )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int keyboardFocusTab READ keyboardFocusTab )
-
-public:
-    TQTabBar( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQTabBar();
-
-    enum Shape { RoundedAbove, RoundedBelow,
-		 TriangularAbove, TriangularBelow };
-
-    Shape tqshape() const;
-    virtual void setShape( Shape );
-
-    void show();
-
-    virtual int addTab( TQTab * );
-    virtual int insertTab( TQTab *, int index = -1 );
-    virtual void removeTab( TQTab * );
-
-    virtual void setTabEnabled( int, bool );
-    bool isTabEnabled( int ) const;
-
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    int currentTab() const;
-    int keyboardFocusTab() const;
-
-    TQTab * tab( int ) const;
-    TQTab * tabAt( int ) const;
-    int indexOf( int ) const;
-    int count() const;
-
-    virtual void layoutTabs();
-    virtual TQTab * selectTab( const TQPoint & p ) const;
-
-    void 	removeToolTip( int index );
-    void     	setToolTip( int index, const TQString & tip );
-    TQString 	toolTip( int index ) const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setCurrentTab( int );
-    virtual void setCurrentTab( TQTab * );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void selected( int );
-    void layoutChanged();
-
-protected:
-    virtual void paint( TQPainter *, TQTab *, bool ) const; // ### not const
-    virtual void paintLabel( TQPainter*, const TQRect&, TQTab*, bool ) const;
-
-    void focusInEvent( TQFocusEvent *e );
-    void focusOutEvent( TQFocusEvent *e );
-
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-    void mousePressEvent ( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseMoveEvent ( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent ( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * );
-    void styleChange( TQStyle& );
-    void fontChange ( const TQFont & );
-
-    bool event( TQEvent *e );
-
-    TQPtrList<TQTab> * tabList();
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void scrollTabs();
-
-private:
-    TQPtrList<TQTab> * l;
-    TQPtrList<TQTab> * lstatic;
-    void makeVisible( TQTab* t = 0 );
-    void updateArrowButtons();
-    TQTabPrivate * d;
-
-    friend class TQTabBarToolTip;
-    friend class TQTab;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQTabBar( const TQTabBar & );
-    TQTabBar& operator=( const TQTabBar & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_TABBAR
-
-#endif // TQTABBAR_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index b4275db..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1097 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQTabWidget class
-**
-** Created : 990318
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqtabwidget.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TABWIDGET
-#include "tqobjectlist.h"
-#include "tqtabbar.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqwidgetstack.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqaccel.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqtoolbutton.h"
-
-#ifdef TQ_OS_MACX
-#include <tqmacstyle_mac.h>
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \class TQTabWidget tqtabwidget.h
-    \brief The TQTabWidget class provides a stack of tabbed widgets.
-
-    \ingroup organizers
-    \ingroup advanced
-    \mainclass
-
-    A tab widget provides a tab bar of tabs and a `page area' below
-    (or above, see \l{TabPosition}) the tabs. Each tab is associated
-    with a different widget (called a `page'). Only the current tab's
-    page is shown in the page area; all the other tabs' pages are
-    hidden. The user can show a different page by clicking on its tab
-    or by pressing its Alt+\e{letter} accelerator if it has one.
-
-    The normal way to use TQTabWidget is to do the following in the
-    constructor:
-    \list 1
-    \i Create a TQTabWidget.
-    \i Create a TQWidget for each of the pages in the tab dialog,
-    insert tqchildren into it, set up tqgeometry management for it and use
-    addTab() (or insertTab()) to set up a tab and keyboard accelerator
-    for it.
-    \i Connect to the Q_SIGNALS and Q_SLOTS.
-    \endlist
-
-    The position of the tabs is set with setTabPosition(), their tqshape
-    with setTabShape(), and their margin with setMargin().
-
-    If you don't call addTab() and the TQTabWidget is already visible,
-    then the page you have created will not be visible. Don't
-    confuse the object name you supply to the TQWidget constructor and
-    the tab label you supply to addTab(). addTab() takes a name which
-    indicates an accelerator and is meaningful and descriptive to the
-    user, whereas the widget name is used primarily for debugging.
-
-    The signal currentChanged() is emitted when the user selects a
-    page.
-
-    The current page is available as an index position with
-    currentPageIndex() or as a wiget pointer with currentPage(). You
-    can retrieve a pointer to a page with a given index using page(),
-    and can find the index position of a page with indexOf(). Use
-    setCurrentPage() to show a particular page by index, or showPage()
-    to show a page by widget pointer.
-
-    You can change a tab's label and iconset using changeTab() or
-    setTabLabel() and setTabIconSet(). A tab page can be removed with
-    removePage().
-
-    Each tab is either enabled or disabled at any given time (see
-    setTabEnabled()). If a tab is enabled, the tab text is drawn
-    normally and the user can select that tab. If it is disabled, the
-    tab is drawn in a different way and the user cannot select that
-    tab. Note that even if a tab is disabled, the page can still be
-    visible, for example if all of the tabs happen to be disabled.
-
-    Although tab widgets can be a very good way to split up a complex
-    dialog, it's also very easy to get into a mess. See TQTabDialog for
-    some design hints. An alternative is to use a TQWidgetStack for
-    which you provide some means of navigating between pages, for
-    example, a TQToolBar or a TQListBox.
-
-    Most of the functionality in TQTabWidget is provided by a TQTabBar
-    (at the top, providing the tabs) and a TQWidgetStack (most of the
-    area, organizing the individual pages).
-
-    <img src=qtabwidget-m.png> <img src=qtabwidget-w.png>
-
-    \sa TQTabDialog, TQToolBox
-*/
-
-/*!
-  \enum TQt::Corner
-  This enum type specifies a corner in a rectangle:
-  \value TopLeft top left corner
-  \value TopRight top right corner
-  \value BottomLeft bottom left corner
-  \value BottomRight bottom right corner
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTabWidget::TabPosition
-
-    This enum type defines where TQTabWidget draws the tab row:
-    \value Top  above the pages
-    \value Bottom  below the pages
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTabWidget::TabShape
-
-    This enum type defines the tqshape of the tabs:
-    \value Rounded  rounded look (normal)
-    \value Triangular  triangular look (very unusual, included for completeness)
-*/
-
-/* undocumented now
-  \obsolete
-
-  \fn void TQTabWidget::selected( const TQString &tabLabel );
-
-  This signal is emitted whenever a tab is selected (raised),
-  including during the first show().
-
-  \sa raise()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTabWidget::currentChanged( TQWidget* );
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the current page changes. The
-    parameter is the new current page.
-
-    \sa currentPage(), showPage(), tabLabel()
-*/
-
-class TQTabBarBase : public TQWidget
-{
-public:
-    TQTabBarBase( TQTabWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 )
-        : TQWidget( parent, name ) {};
-protected:
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-    {
-        TQObject * obj = parent();
-        if( obj ){
-            TQTabWidget * t = (TQTabWidget *) obj;
-            TQPainter p( this );
-	    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-
-	    if ( t->tabPosition() == TQTabWidget::Top )
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_Top;
-	    if ( t->tabPosition() == TQTabWidget::Bottom )
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_Bottom;
-	    if(parentWidget()->isEnabled())
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-
-	    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_TabBarBase, &p, rect(),
-				   tqcolorGroup(), flags );
-        }
-    }
-};
-
-class TQTabWidgetData
-{
-public:
-    TQTabWidgetData()
-        : tabs(0), tabBase(0), stack(0), dirty( TRUE ),
-          pos( TQTabWidget::Top ), tqshape( TQTabWidget::Rounded ),
-	  leftCornerWidget(0), rightCornerWidget(0) {};
-    ~TQTabWidgetData(){};
-    TQTabBar* tabs;
-    TQTabBarBase* tabBase;
-    TQWidgetStack* stack;
-    bool dirty;
-    TQTabWidget::TabPosition pos;
-    TQTabWidget::TabShape tqshape;
-    int tqalignment;
-    TQWidget* leftCornerWidget;
-    TQWidget* rightCornerWidget;
-};
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a tabbed widget called \a name with parent \a parent,
-    and widget flags \a f.
-*/
-TQTabWidget::TQTabWidget( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, f )
-{
-    d = new TQTabWidgetData;
-    d->stack = new TQWidgetStack( this, "tab pages" );
-    d->stack->installEventFilter( this );
-    d->tabBase = new TQTabBarBase( this, "tab base" );
-    d->tabBase->resize( 1, 1 );
-    setTabBar( new TQTabBar( this, "tab control" ) );
-
-    d->stack->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::TabWidgetPanel | TQFrame::Raised );
-#ifdef TQ_OS_TEMP
-    d->pos = Bottom;
-#endif
-
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Expanding ) );
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::TabFocus );
-    setFocusProxy( d->tabs );
-
-    installEventFilter( this );
-#ifdef TQ_OS_MACX
-    if (::tqqt_cast<TQMacStyle*>(&tqstyle()))
-        setMargin(10); // According to HIGuidelines at least.
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQTabWidget::~TQTabWidget()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Adds another tab and page to the tab view.
-
-    The new page is \a child; the tab's label is \a label. Note the
-    difference between the widget name (which you supply to widget
-    constructors and to setTabEnabled(), for example) and the tab
-    label. The name is internal to the program and invariant, whereas
-    the label is shown on-screen and may vary according to language
-    and other factors.
-
-    If the tab's \a label contains an ampersand, the letter following
-    the ampersand is used as an accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the
-    label is "Bro\&wse" then Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will
-    move the focus to this tab.
-
-    If you call addTab() after show() the screen will flicker and the
-    user may be confused.
-
-    Adding the same child twice will have undefined behavior.
-
-    \sa insertTab()
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::addTab( TQWidget *child, const TQString &label)
-{
-    insertTab( child, label );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Adds another tab and page to the tab view.
-
-    This function is the same as addTab(), but with an additional \a
-    iconset.
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::addTab( TQWidget *child, const TQIconSet& iconset, const TQString &label )
-{
-    insertTab( child, iconset, label );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    This is a low-level function for adding tabs. It is useful if you
-    are using setTabBar() to set a TQTabBar subclass with an overridden
-    TQTabBar::paint() function for a subclass of TQTab. The \a child is
-    the new page and \a tab is the tab to put the \a child on.
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::addTab( TQWidget *child, TQTab* tab )
-{
-    insertTab( child, tab );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Inserts another tab and page to the tab view.
-
-    The new page is \a child; the tab's label is \a label. Note the
-    difference between the widget name (which you supply to widget
-    constructors and to setTabEnabled(), for example) and the tab
-    label. The name is internal to the program and invariant, whereas
-    the label is shown on-screen and may vary according to language
-    and other factors.
-
-    If the tab's \a label contains an ampersand, the letter following
-    the ampersand is used as an accelerator for the tab, e.g. if the
-    label is "Bro\&wse" then Alt+W becomes an accelerator which will
-    move the focus to this tab.
-
-    If \a index is not specified, the tab is simply appended.
-    Otherwise it is inserted at the specified position.
-
-    If you call insertTab() after show(), the screen will flicker and
-    the user may be confused.
-
-    \sa addTab()
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::insertTab( TQWidget *child, const TQString &label, int index)
-{
-    TQTab * t = new TQTab();
-    TQ_CHECK_PTR( t );
-    t->label = label;
-    insertTab( child, t, index );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts another tab and page to the tab view.
-
-    This function is the same as insertTab(), but with an additional
-    \a iconset.
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::insertTab( TQWidget *child, const TQIconSet& iconset, const TQString &label, int index )
-{
-    TQTab * t = new TQTab();
-    TQ_CHECK_PTR( t );
-    t->label = label;
-    t->iconset = new TQIconSet( iconset );
-    insertTab( child, t, index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    This is a lower-level method for inserting tabs, similar to the
-    other insertTab() method. It is useful if you are using
-    setTabBar() to set a TQTabBar subclass with an overridden
-    TQTabBar::paint() function for a subclass of TQTab. The \a child is
-    the new page, \a tab is the tab to put the \a child on and \a
-    index is the position in the tab bar that this page should occupy.
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::insertTab( TQWidget *child, TQTab* tab, int index)
-{
-    tab->enabled = TRUE;
-    int id = d->tabs->insertTab( tab, index );
-    d->stack->addWidget( child, id );
-    if ( d->stack->frameStyle() != ( TQFrame::TabWidgetPanel | TQFrame::Raised ) )
-        d->stack->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::TabWidgetPanel | TQFrame::Raised );
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Defines a new \a label for page \a{w}'s tab.
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::changeTab( TQWidget *w, const TQString &label)
-{
-    int id = d->stack->id( w );
-    if ( id < 0 )
-        return;
-    TQTab* t = d->tabs->tab( id );
-    if ( !t )
-        return;
-    // this will update the accelerators
-    t->setText( label );
-
-    d->tabs->layoutTabs();
-    d->tabs->update();
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Defines a new \a iconset and a new \a label for page \a{w}'s tab.
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::changeTab( TQWidget *w, const TQIconSet& iconset, const TQString &label)
-{
-    int id = d->stack->id( w );
-    if ( id < 0 )
-        return;
-    TQTab* t = d->tabs->tab( id );
-    if ( !t )
-        return;
-    if ( t->iconset ) {
-        delete t->iconset;
-        t->iconset = 0;
-    }
-    // this will update the accelerators
-    t->iconset = new TQIconSet( iconset );
-    t->setText( label );
-
-    d->tabs->layoutTabs();
-    d->tabs->update();
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the page \a w is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setTabEnabled(), TQWidget::isEnabled()
-*/
-
-bool TQTabWidget::isTabEnabled( TQWidget* w ) const
-{
-    int id = d->stack->id( w );
-    if ( id >= 0 )
-        return w->isEnabled();
-    else
-        return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a enable is TRUE, page \a w is enabled; otherwise page \a w is
-    disabled. The page's tab is redrawn appropriately.
-
-    TQTabWidget uses TQWidget::setEnabled() internally, rather than
-    keeping a separate flag.
-
-    Note that even a disabled tab/page may be visible. If the page is
-    visible already, TQTabWidget will not hide it; if all the pages are
-    disabled, TQTabWidget will show one of them.
-
-    \sa isTabEnabled(), TQWidget::setEnabled()
-*/
-
-void TQTabWidget::setTabEnabled( TQWidget* w, bool enable)
-{
-    int id = d->stack->id( w );
-    if ( id >= 0 ) {
-        w->setEnabled( enable );
-        d->tabs->setTabEnabled( id, enable );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  Sets widget \a w to be the shown in the specified \a corner of the
-  tab widget.
-
-  Only the horizontal element of the \a corner will be used.
-
-  \sa cornerWidget(), setTabPosition()
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::setCornerWidget( TQWidget * w, TQt::Corner corner )
-{
-    if ( !w )
-	return;
-    if ( (uint)corner & 1 )
-	d->rightCornerWidget = w;
-    else
-	d->leftCornerWidget = w;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the widget shown in the \a corner of the tab widget or 0.
-*/
-TQWidget * TQTabWidget::cornerWidget( TQt::Corner corner ) const
-{
-    if ( (uint)corner & 1 )
-	return d->rightCornerWidget;
-    return d->leftCornerWidget;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Ensures that page \a w is shown. This is useful mainly for
-    accelerators.
-
-    \warning Used carelessly, this function can easily surprise or
-    confuse the user.
-
-    \sa TQTabBar::setCurrentTab()
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::showPage( TQWidget * w)
-{
-    int id = d->stack->id( w );
-    if ( id >= 0 ) {
-        d->stack->raiseWidget( w );
-        d->tabs->setCurrentTab( id );
-        // ### why overwrite the frame style?
-        if ( d->stack->frameStyle() != ( TQFrame::TabWidgetPanel |TQFrame::Raised ) )
-            d->stack->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::TabWidgetPanel | TQFrame::Raised );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes page \a w from this stack of widgets. Does not delete \a
-    w.
-
-    \sa addTab(), showPage(), TQWidgetStack::removeWidget()
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::removePage( TQWidget * w )
-{
-    int id = d->stack->id( w );
-    if ( id >= 0 ) {
-	int oldId = d->stack->id(currentPage());
-	bool fixCurrentTab = oldId == id;
-	//switches to the next enabled tab
-	d->tabs->setTabEnabled( id, FALSE );
-	//if no next enabled page we fix the current page
-	fixCurrentTab = fixCurrentTab && oldId == d->stack->id(currentPage());
-
-	d->stack->removeWidget( w );
-	d->tabs->removeTab( d->tabs->tab(id) );
-	if ( fixCurrentTab )
-	    showTab( d->tabs->currentTab() );
-	setUpLayout();
-
-	if ( d->tabs->count() == 0 )
-	    d->stack->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::NoFrame );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the label text for the tab on page \a w.
-*/
-
-TQString TQTabWidget::tabLabel( TQWidget * w ) const
-{
-    TQTab * t = d->tabs->tab( d->stack->id( w ) );
-    return t ? t->label : TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the tab label for page \a w to \a l
-*/
-
-void TQTabWidget::setTabLabel( TQWidget * w, const TQString &l )
-{
-    TQTab * t = d->tabs->tab( d->stack->id( w ) );
-    if ( t )
-        t->label = l;
-    d->tabs->layoutTabs();
-    d->tabs->update();
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the page currently being displayed by the tab
-    dialog. The tab dialog does its best to make sure that this value
-    is never 0 (but if you try hard enough, it can be).
-*/
-
-TQWidget * TQTabWidget::currentPage() const
-{
-    return page( currentPageIndex() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTabWidget::autoMask
-    \brief whether the tab widget is automatically masked
-
-    \sa TQWidget::setAutoMask()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTabWidget::currentPage
-    \brief the index position of the current tab page
-
-  \sa TQTabBar::currentTab()
-*/
-
-int TQTabWidget::currentPageIndex() const
-{
-    return d->tabs->indexOf( d->tabs->currentTab() );
-}
-
-void TQTabWidget::setCurrentPage( int index )
-{
-    d->tabs->setCurrentTab( d->tabs->tabAt( index ) );
-    showTab( d->tabs->currentTab() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the index position of page \a w, or -1 if the widget
-    cannot be found.
-*/
-int TQTabWidget::indexOf( TQWidget* w ) const
-{
-    return d->tabs->indexOf( d->stack->id( w ) );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    TQWidget::resizeEvent( e );
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Replaces the dialog's TQTabBar heading with the tab bar \a tb. Note
-    that this must be called \e before any tabs have been added, or
-    the behavior is undefined.
-
-    \sa tabBar()
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::setTabBar( TQTabBar* tb)
-{
-    if ( tb->parentWidget() != this )
-        tb->reparent( this, TQPoint(0,0), TRUE );
-    delete d->tabs;
-    d->tabs = tb;
-    setFocusProxy( d->tabs );
-    connect( d->tabs, TQT_SIGNAL(selected(int)),
-             this,    TQT_SLOT(showTab(int)) );
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the current TQTabBar.
-
-    \sa setTabBar()
-*/
-TQTabBar* TQTabWidget::tabBar() const
-{
-    return d->tabs;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Ensures that the selected tab's page is visible and appropriately
-    sized.
-*/
-
-void TQTabWidget::showTab( int i )
-{
-    if ( d->stack->widget( i ) ) {
-	d->stack->raiseWidget( i );
-	emit selected( d->tabs->tab( i )->label );
-	emit currentChanged( d->stack->widget( i ) );
-    }
-}
-
-/*
-    Set up the tqlayout.
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::setUpLayout( bool onlyCheck )
-{
-    if ( onlyCheck && !d->dirty )
-	return; // nothing to do
-
-    if ( !isVisible() ) {
-	d->dirty = TRUE;
-	return; // we'll do it later
-    }
-
-    TQSize t( 0, d->stack->frameWidth() );
-    if ( d->tabs->isVisibleTo(this) )
-	t = d->tabs->tqsizeHint();
-    int lcw = 0;
-    if ( d->leftCornerWidget && d->leftCornerWidget->isVisible()  ) {
-	TQSize sz = d->leftCornerWidget->tqsizeHint();
-	d->leftCornerWidget->resize(sz);
-	lcw = sz.width();
-	if ( t.height() > lcw )
-	    lcw = t.height();
-     }
-    int rcw = 0;
-    if ( d->rightCornerWidget && d->rightCornerWidget->isVisible() ) {
-	TQSize sz = d->rightCornerWidget->tqsizeHint();
-	d->rightCornerWidget->resize(sz);
-	rcw = sz.width();
-	if ( t.height() > rcw )
-	    rcw = t.height();
-    }
-    int tw = width() - lcw - rcw;
-    if ( t.width() > tw )
-	t.setWidth( tw );
-    int lw = d->stack->lineWidth();
-    bool reverse = TQApplication::reverseLayout();
-    int tabx, taby, stacky, exty, exth, overlap;
-
-    exth = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_TabBarBaseHeight, this );
-    overlap = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_TabBarBaseOverlap, this );
-
-    if ( d->pos == Bottom ) {
-	taby = height() - t.height() - lw;
-	stacky = 0;
-	exty = taby - (exth - overlap);
-    } else { // Top
-	taby = 0;
-	stacky = t.height()-lw + (exth - overlap);
-	exty = taby + t.height() - overlap;
-    }
-
-    int lhs = (TQMAX( 0, lw - 2 ) + lcw);
-    int tqalignment = tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_TabBar_Alignment, this );
-    if ( tqalignment == Qt::AlignHCenter  && t.width() < width() )
-        tabx = lhs + ((width()-(lcw+rcw))/2 - t.width()/2);
-    else if(reverse || tqalignment == Qt::AlignRight)
-        tabx = TQMIN( width() - t.width(), width() - t.width() - lw + 2 ) - lcw;
-    else
-        tabx = lhs;
-
-    d->tabs->setGeometry( tabx, taby, t.width(), t.height() );
-    d->tabBase->setGeometry( 0, exty, width(), exth );
-    if ( exth == 0 )
-	d->tabBase->hide();
-    else
-	d->tabBase->show();
-
-    d->stack->setGeometry( 0, stacky, width(), height() - (exth-overlap) -
-			   t.height()+TQMAX(0, lw-2));
-
-    d->dirty = FALSE;
-
-    // move cornerwidgets
-    if ( d->leftCornerWidget ) {
-	int y = ( t.height() / 2 ) - ( d->leftCornerWidget->height() / 2 );
-	int x = ( reverse ? width() - lcw + y : y );
-	d->leftCornerWidget->move( x, y + taby );
-    }
-    if ( d->rightCornerWidget ) {
-	int y = ( t.height() / 2 ) - ( d->rightCornerWidget->height() / 2 );
-	int x = ( reverse ? y : width() - rcw + y );
-	d->rightCornerWidget->move( x, y + taby );
-    }
-    if ( !onlyCheck )
-	update();
-    updateGeometry();
-    if ( autoMask() )
-	updateMask();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQTabWidget::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    TQSize lc(0, 0), rc(0, 0);
-
-    if (d->leftCornerWidget)
-	lc = d->leftCornerWidget->tqsizeHint();
-    if(d->rightCornerWidget)
-	rc = d->rightCornerWidget->tqsizeHint();
-    if ( !d->dirty ) {
-	TQTabWidget *that = (TQTabWidget*)this;
-	that->setUpLayout( TRUE );
-    }
-    TQSize s( d->stack->tqsizeHint() );
-    TQSize t( d->tabs->tqsizeHint() );
-    if(!tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_TabBar_PreferNoArrows, d->tabs))
-	t = t.boundedTo( TQSize(200,200) );
-    else
-        t = t.boundedTo( TQApplication::desktop()->size() );
-
-    TQSize sz( TQMAX( s.width(), t.width() + rc.width() + lc.width() ),
-	      s.height() + (TQMAX( rc.height(), TQMAX(lc.height(), t.height()))) + ( d->tabBase->isVisible() ? d->tabBase->height() : 0 ) );
-    return tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_TabWidget, this, sz).expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut());
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-
-    Returns a suitable minimum size for the tab widget.
-*/
-TQSize TQTabWidget::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    TQSize lc(0, 0), rc(0, 0);
-
-    if(d->leftCornerWidget)
-	lc = d->leftCornerWidget->tqminimumSizeHint();
-    if(d->rightCornerWidget)
-	rc = d->rightCornerWidget->tqminimumSizeHint();
-    if ( !d->dirty ) {
-	TQTabWidget *that = (TQTabWidget*)this;
-	that->setUpLayout( TRUE );
-    }
-    TQSize s( d->stack->tqminimumSizeHint() );
-    TQSize t( d->tabs->tqminimumSizeHint() );
-
-    TQSize sz( TQMAX( s.width(), t.width() + rc.width() + lc.width() ),
-	      s.height() + (TQMAX( rc.height(), TQMAX(lc.height(), t.height()))) + ( d->tabBase->isVisible() ? d->tabBase->height() : 0 ) );
-    return tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_TabWidget, this, sz).expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut());
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQTabWidget::showEvent( TQShowEvent * )
-{
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTabWidget::tabPosition
-    \brief the position of the tabs in this tab widget
-
-    Possible values for this property are \c TQTabWidget::Top and \c
-    TQTabWidget::Bottom.
-
-    \sa TabPosition
-*/
-TQTabWidget::TabPosition TQTabWidget::tabPosition() const
-{
-    return d->pos;
-}
-
-void TQTabWidget::setTabPosition( TabPosition pos)
-{
-    if (d->pos == pos)
-        return;
-    d->pos = pos;
-    if (d->tabs->tqshape() == TQTabBar::TriangularAbove || d->tabs->tqshape() == TQTabBar::TriangularBelow ) {
-        if ( pos == Bottom )
-            d->tabs->setShape( TQTabBar::TriangularBelow );
-        else
-            d->tabs->setShape( TQTabBar::TriangularAbove );
-    }
-    else {
-        if ( pos == Bottom )
-            d->tabs->setShape( TQTabBar::RoundedBelow );
-        else
-            d->tabs->setShape( TQTabBar::RoundedAbove );
-    }
-    d->tabs->layoutTabs();
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTabWidget::tabShape
-    \brief the tqshape of the tabs in this tab widget
-
-    Possible values for this property are \c TQTabWidget::Rounded
-    (default) or \c TQTabWidget::Triangular.
-
-    \sa TabShape
-*/
-
-TQTabWidget::TabShape TQTabWidget::tabShape() const
-{
-    return d->tqshape;
-}
-
-void TQTabWidget::setTabShape( TabShape s )
-{
-    if ( d->tqshape == s )
-        return;
-    d->tqshape = s;
-    if ( d->pos == Top ) {
-        if ( s == Rounded )
-            d->tabs->setShape( TQTabBar::RoundedAbove );
-        else
-            d->tabs->setShape( TQTabBar::TriangularAbove );
-    } else {
-        if ( s == Rounded )
-            d->tabs->setShape( TQTabBar::RoundedBelow );
-        else
-            d->tabs->setShape( TQTabBar::TriangularBelow );
-    }
-    d->tabs->layoutTabs();
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTabWidget::margin
-    \brief the margin in this tab widget
-
-    The margin is the distance between the innermost pixel of the
-    frame and the outermost pixel of the pages.
-*/
-int TQTabWidget::margin() const
-{
-    return d->stack->margin();
-}
-
-void TQTabWidget::setMargin( int w )
-{
-    d->stack->setMargin( w );
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQTabWidget::styleChange( TQStyle& old )
-{
-    TQWidget::styleChange( old );
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQTabWidget::updateMask()
-{
-    if ( !autoMask() )
-        return;
-
-    TQRect r;
-    TQRegion reg( r );
-    reg += TQRegion( d->tabs->tqgeometry() );
-    reg += TQRegion( d->stack->tqgeometry() );
-    setMask( reg );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-bool TQTabWidget::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e)
-{
-    if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) ) {
-	if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LanguageChange || e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutHint ) {
-	    d->dirty = TRUE;
-	    setUpLayout();
-	    updateGeometry();
-	} else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
-	    TQKeyEvent *ke = (TQKeyEvent*) e;
-	    if ( ( ke->key() == TQt::Key_Tab || ke->key() == TQt::Key_Backtab ) &&
-		 count() > 1 &&
-		 ke->state() & ControlButton ) {
-		int page = currentPageIndex();
-		if ( ke->key() == TQt::Key_Backtab || ke->state() & ShiftButton ) {
-		    page--;
-		    if ( page < 0 )
-			page = count() - 1;
-		} else {
-		    page++;
-		    if ( page >= count() )
-			page = 0;
-		}
-		setCurrentPage( page );
-		if ( !tqApp->tqfocusWidget() )
-		    d->tabs->setFocus();
-		return TRUE;
-	    }
-	}
-
-    } else if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->stack) ) {
-	if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ChildRemoved
-	     && ( (TQChildEvent*)e )->child()->isWidgetType() ) {
-	    removePage( (TQWidget*)  ( (TQChildEvent*)e )->child() );
-	    return TRUE;
-	} else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutHint ) {
-	    updateGeometry();
-	}
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tab page at index position \a index or 0 if the \a
-    index is out of range.
-*/
-TQWidget *TQTabWidget::page( int index ) const
-{
-    TQTab *t = d->tabs->tabAt(index);
-    if ( t )
-	return d->stack->widget( t->id );
-    // else
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the label of the tab at index position \a index or
-    TQString::null if the \a index is out of range.
-*/
-TQString TQTabWidget::label( int index ) const
-{
-    TQTab *t = d->tabs->tabAt( index );
-    if ( t )
- 	return t->label;
-    // else
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTabWidget::count
-    \brief the number of tabs in the tab bar
-*/
-int TQTabWidget::count() const
-{
-    return d->tabs->count();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the iconset of page \a w or a \link TQIconSet::TQIconSet()
-    null iconset\endlink if \a w is not a tab page or does not have an
-    iconset.
-*/
-TQIconSet TQTabWidget::tabIconSet( TQWidget * w ) const
-{
-    int id = d->stack->id( w );
-    if ( id < 0 )
-        return TQIconSet();
-    TQTab* t = d->tabs->tab( id );
-    if ( !t )
-        return TQIconSet();
-    if ( t->iconset )
-	return TQIconSet( *t->iconset );
-    else
-	return TQIconSet();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the iconset for page \a w to \a iconset.
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::setTabIconSet( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset )
-{
-    int id = d->stack->id( w );
-    if ( id < 0 )
-        return;
-    TQTab* t = d->tabs->tab( id );
-    if ( !t )
-        return;
-    if ( t->iconset )
-        delete t->iconset;
-    t->iconset = new TQIconSet( iconset );
-
-    d->tabs->layoutTabs();
-    d->tabs->update();
-    setUpLayout();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the tab tool tip for page \a w to \a tip.
-
-    \sa removeTabToolTip(), tabToolTip()
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::setTabToolTip( TQWidget * w, const TQString & tip )
-{
-    int index = d->tabs->indexOf( d->stack->id( w ) );
-    if ( index < 0 )
-        return;
-    d->tabs->setToolTip( index, tip );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tab tool tip for page \a w or TQString::null if no tool
-    tip has been set.
-
-    \sa setTabToolTip(), removeTabToolTip()
-*/
-TQString TQTabWidget::tabToolTip( TQWidget * w ) const
-{
-    int index = d->tabs->indexOf( d->stack->id( w ) );
-    if ( index < 0 )
-        return TQString();
-    return d->tabs->toolTip( index );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the tab tool tip for page \a w. If the page does not have
-    a tip, nothing happens.
-
-    \sa setTabToolTip(), tabToolTip()
-*/
-void TQTabWidget::removeTabToolTip( TQWidget * w )
-{
-    int index = d->tabs->indexOf( d->stack->id( w ) );
-    if ( index < 0 )
-        return;
-    d->tabs->removeToolTip( index );
-}
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 14e5a84..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtabwidget.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,163 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQTabWidget class
-**
-** Created : 990318
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQTABWIDGET_H
-#define TQTABWIDGET_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#include "tqiconset.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TABWIDGET
-
-class TQTabBar;
-class TQTabWidgetData;
-class TQTab;
-class TQWidgetStack;
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQTabWidget : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( TabPosition )
-    TQ_ENUMS( TabShape )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TabPosition tabPosition READ tabPosition WRITE setTabPosition )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TabShape tabShape READ tabShape WRITE setTabShape )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int margin READ margin WRITE setMargin )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int currentPage READ currentPageIndex WRITE setCurrentPage )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int count READ count )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool autoMask DESIGNABLE true SCRIPTABLE true )
-
-public:
-    TQTabWidget( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
-    ~TQTabWidget();
-
-    virtual void addTab( TQWidget *, const TQString & ); // ### make these inline in 4.0
-    virtual void addTab( TQWidget *child, const TQIconSet& iconset,
-			 const TQString &label );
-    virtual void addTab( TQWidget *, TQTab* );
-
-    virtual void insertTab( TQWidget *, const TQString &, int index = -1 );
-    virtual void insertTab( TQWidget *child, const TQIconSet& iconset,
-			    const TQString &label, int index = -1 );
-    virtual void insertTab( TQWidget *, TQTab*, int index = -1 );
-
-    void changeTab( TQWidget *, const TQString &);
-    void changeTab( TQWidget *child, const TQIconSet& iconset,
-		    const TQString &label );
-
-    bool isTabEnabled(  TQWidget * ) const;
-    void setTabEnabled( TQWidget *, bool );
-
-    void setCornerWidget( TQWidget * w, TQt::Corner corner = TQt::TopRight );
-    TQWidget * cornerWidget( TQt::Corner corner = TQt::TopRight ) const;
-
-    TQString tabLabel( TQWidget * ) const;
-    void setTabLabel( TQWidget *p, const TQString &l );
-
-    TQIconSet tabIconSet( TQWidget * w ) const;
-    void setTabIconSet( TQWidget * w, const TQIconSet & iconset );
-
-    void removeTabToolTip( TQWidget * w );
-    void setTabToolTip( TQWidget * w, const TQString & tip );
-    TQString tabToolTip( TQWidget * w ) const;
-
-    TQWidget * currentPage() const;
-    TQWidget *page( int ) const;
-    TQString label( int ) const;
-    int currentPageIndex() const;
-    int indexOf( TQWidget * ) const;
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    enum TabPosition { Top, Bottom };
-    TabPosition tabPosition() const;
-    void setTabPosition( TabPosition );
-
-    enum TabShape { Rounded, Triangular };
-    TabShape tabShape() const;
-    void setTabShape( TabShape s );
-
-    int margin() const;
-    void setMargin( int );
-
-    int count() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void setCurrentPage( int );
-    virtual void showPage( TQWidget * );
-    virtual void removePage( TQWidget * );
-
-protected:
-    void showEvent( TQShowEvent * );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-    void setTabBar( TQTabBar * );
-    TQTabBar* tabBar() const;
-    void styleChange( TQStyle& );
-    void updateMask();
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *, TQEvent * );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void currentChanged( TQWidget * );
-#ifndef TQ_TQDOC
-    void selected( const TQString& );
-#endif
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void showTab( int );
-
-private:
-    TQTabWidgetData *d;
-    void setUpLayout( bool = FALSE );
-    friend class TQTabDialog;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQTabWidget( const TQTabWidget & );
-    TQTabWidget& operator=( const TQTabWidget & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_TABWIDGET
-
-#endif // TQTABWIDGET_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index a022136..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,555 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of the TQTextBrowser class
-**
-** Created : 990101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqtextbrowser.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTBROWSER
-#include "../kernel/tqrichtext_p.h"
-
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-
-#include "tqvaluestack.h"
-#include "stdio.h"
-#include "tqfile.h"
-#include "tqtextstream.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqimage.h"
-#include "tqsimplerichtext.h"
-#include "tqdragobject.h"
-#include "tqurl.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-
-/*!
-    \class TQTextBrowser tqtextbrowser.h
-    \brief The TQTextBrowser class provides a rich text browser with hypertext navigation.
-
-    \ingroup advanced
-    \ingroup helpsystem
-    \ingroup text
-    \mainclass
-
-    This class extends TQTextEdit (in read-only mode), adding some
-    navigation functionality so that users can follow links in
-    hypertext documents. The contents of TQTextEdit is set with
-    setText(), but TQTextBrowser has an additional function,
-    setSource(), which makes it possible to set the text to a named
-    document. The name is looked up in the text view's mime source
-    factory. If a document name ends with an anchor (for example, "\c
-    #anchor"), the text browser automatically scrolls to that position
-    (using scrollToAnchor()). When the user clicks on a hyperlink, the
-    browser will call setSource() itself, with the link's \c href
-    value as argument. You can track the current source by connetion
-    to the sourceChanged() signal.
-
-    TQTextBrowser provides backward() and forward() Q_SLOTS which you can
-    use to implement Back and Forward buttons. The home() slot sets
-    the text to the very first document displayed. The linkClicked()
-    signal is emitted when the user clicks a link.
-
-    By using TQTextEdit::setMimeSourceFactory() you can provide your
-    own subclass of TQMimeSourceFactory. This makes it possible to
-    access data from anywhere, for example from a network or from a
-    database. See TQMimeSourceFactory::data() for details.
-
-    If you intend using the mime factory to read the data directly
-    from the file system, you may have to specify the encoding for the
-    file extension you are using. For example:
-    \code
-    mimeSourceFactory()->setExtensionType("qml", "text/utf8");
-    \endcode
-    This is to ensure that the factory is able to resolve the document
-    names.
-
-    TQTextBrowser interprets the tags it processes in accordance with
-    the default style sheet. Change the style sheet with
-    \l{setStyleSheet()}; see TQStyleSheet for details.
-
-    If you want to provide your users with editable rich text use
-    TQTextEdit. If you want a text browser without hypertext navigation
-    use TQTextEdit, and use TQTextEdit::setReadOnly() to disable
-    editing. If you just need to display a small piece of rich text
-    use TQSimpleRichText or TQLabel.
-
-    <img src=qtextbrowser-m.png> <img src=qtextbrowser-w.png>
-*/
-
-class TQTextBrowserData
-{
-public:
-    TQTextBrowserData():textOrSourceChanged(FALSE) {}
-
-    TQValueStack<TQString> stack;
-    TQValueStack<TQString> forwardStack;
-    TQString home;
-    TQString curmain;
-    TQString curmark;
-
-    /*flag necessary to give the linkClicked() signal some meaningful
-      semantics when somebody connected to it calls setText() or
-      setSource() */
-    bool textOrSourceChanged;
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty TQTextBrowser called \a name, with parent \a
-    parent.
-*/
-TQTextBrowser::TQTextBrowser(TQWidget *parent, const char *name)
-    : TQTextEdit( parent, name )
-{
-    setReadOnly( TRUE );
-    d = new TQTextBrowserData;
-
-    viewport()->setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQTextBrowser::~TQTextBrowser()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextBrowser::source
-    \brief the name of the displayed document.
-
-    This is a TQString::null if no document is displayed or if the
-    source is unknown.
-
-    Setting this property uses the mimeSourceFactory() to lookup the
-    named document. It also checks for optional anchors and scrolls
-    the document accordingly.
-
-    If the first tag in the document is \c{<qt type=detail>}, the
-    document is displayed as a popup rather than as new document in
-    the browser window itself. Otherwise, the document is displayed
-    normally in the text browser with the text set to the contents of
-    the named document with setText().
-
-    If you are using the filesystem access capabilities of the mime
-    source factory, you must ensure that the factory knows about the
-    encoding of specified files; otherwise no data will be available.
-    The default factory handles a couple of common file extensions
-    such as \c *.html and \c *.txt with reasonable defaults. See
-    TQMimeSourceFactory::data() for details.
-*/
-
-TQString TQTextBrowser::source() const
-{
-    if ( d->stack.isEmpty() )
-	return TQString::null;
-    else
-	return d->stack.top();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextBrowser::undoDepth
-    \brief This text browser's undo depth.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextBrowser::overwriteMode
-    \brief This text browser's overwrite mode.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextBrowser::modified
-    \brief Whether the contents have been modified.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextBrowser::readOnly
-    \brief Whether the contents are read only.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextBrowser::undoRedoEnabled
-    \brief Whether undo and redo are enabled.
-*/
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Reloads the current set source.
-*/
-
-void TQTextBrowser::reload()
-{
-    TQString s = d->curmain;
-    d->curmain = "";
-    setSource( s );
-}
-
-
-void TQTextBrowser::setSource(const TQString& name)
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    if ( isVisible() )
-	tqApp->setOverrideCursor( Qt::WaitCursor );
-#endif
-    d->textOrSourceChanged = TRUE;
-    TQString source = name;
-    TQString mark;
-    int hash = name.find('#');
-    if ( hash != -1) {
-	source = name.left( hash );
-	mark = name.mid( hash+1 );
-    }
-
-    if ( source.left(5) == "file:" )
-	source = source.mid(6);
-
-    TQString url = mimeSourceFactory()->makeAbsolute( source, context() );
-    TQString txt;
-    bool dosettext = FALSE;
-
-    if ( !source.isEmpty() && url != d->curmain ) {
-	const TQMimeSource* m =
-		    TQT_TQMIMESOURCE_CONST(mimeSourceFactory()->data( source, context() ));
-	if ( !m ){
-	    qWarning("TQTextBrowser: no mimesource for %s", source.latin1() );
-	}
-	else {
-	    if ( !TQTextDrag::decode( m, txt ) ) {
-		qWarning("TQTextBrowser: cannot decode %s", source.latin1() );
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( isVisible() ) {
-	    TQString firstTag = txt.left( txt.find( '>' ) + 1 );
-	    if ( firstTag.left( 3 ) == "<qt" && firstTag.contains( "type" ) && firstTag.contains( "detail" ) ) {
-		popupDetail( txt, TQCursor::pos() );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-		tqApp->restoreOverrideCursor();
-#endif
-		return;
-	    }
-	}
-
-	d->curmain = url;
-	dosettext = TRUE;
-    }
-
-    d->curmark = mark;
-
-    if ( !mark.isEmpty() ) {
-	url += "#";
-	url += mark;
-    }
-    if ( !d->home )
-	d->home = url;
-
-    if ( d->stack.isEmpty() || d->stack.top() != url)
-	d->stack.push( url );
-
-    int stackCount = (int)d->stack.count();
-    if ( d->stack.top() == url )
-	stackCount--;
-    emit backwardAvailable( stackCount > 0 );
-    stackCount = (int)d->forwardStack.count();
-    if ( d->forwardStack.isEmpty() || d->forwardStack.top() == url )
-	stackCount--;
-    emit forwardAvailable( stackCount > 0 );
-
-    if ( dosettext )
-	TQTextEdit::setText( txt, url );
-
-    if ( !mark.isEmpty() )
-	scrollToAnchor( mark );
-    else
-	setContentsPos( 0, 0 );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    if ( isVisible() )
-	tqApp->restoreOverrideCursor();
-#endif
-
-    emit sourceChanged( url );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextBrowser::backwardAvailable(bool available)
-
-    This signal is emitted when the availability of backward()
-    changes. \a available is FALSE when the user is at home();
-    otherwise it is TRUE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextBrowser::forwardAvailable(bool available)
-
-    This signal is emitted when the availability of forward() changes.
-    \a available is TRUE after the user navigates backward() and FALSE
-    when the user navigates or goes forward().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextBrowser::sourceChanged( const TQString& src)
-
-    This signal is emitted when the mime source has changed, \a src
-    being the new source.
-
-    Source changes happen both programmatically when calling
-    setSource(), forward(), backword() or home() or when the user
-    clicks on links or presses the equivalent key sequences.
-*/
-
-/*!  \fn void TQTextBrowser::highlighted (const TQString &link)
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user has selected but not
-    activated a link in the document. \a link is the value of the \c
-    href i.e. the name of the target document.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextBrowser::linkClicked( const TQString& link)
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user clicks a link. The \a link is
-    the value of the \c href i.e. the name of the target document.
-
-    The \a link will be the absolute location of the document, based
-    on the value of the anchor's href tag and the current context of
-    the document.
-
-    \sa anchorClicked(), context()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextBrowser::anchorClicked( const TQString& name, const TQString &link)
-
-    This signal is emitted when the user clicks an anchor. The \a link is
-    the value of the \c href i.e. the name of the target document.  The \a name
-    is the name of the anchor.
-
-    \sa linkClicked()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Changes the document displayed to the previous document in the
-    list of documents built by navigating links. Does nothing if there
-    is no previous document.
-
-    \sa forward(), backwardAvailable()
-*/
-void TQTextBrowser::backward()
-{
-    if ( d->stack.count() <= 1)
-	return;
-    d->forwardStack.push( d->stack.pop() );
-    setSource( d->stack.pop() );
-    emit forwardAvailable( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Changes the document displayed to the next document in the list of
-    documents built by navigating links. Does nothing if there is no
-    next document.
-
-    \sa backward(), forwardAvailable()
-*/
-void TQTextBrowser::forward()
-{
-    if ( d->forwardStack.isEmpty() )
-	return;
-    setSource( d->forwardStack.pop() );
-    emit forwardAvailable( !d->forwardStack.isEmpty() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Changes the document displayed to be the first document the
-    browser displayed.
-*/
-void TQTextBrowser::home()
-{
-    if (!d->home.isNull() )
-	setSource( d->home );
-}
-
-/*!
-    The event \a e is used to provide the following keyboard shortcuts:
-    \table
-    \header \i Keypress	    \i Action
-    \row \i Alt+Left Arrow  \i \l backward()
-    \row \i Alt+Right Arrow \i \l forward()
-    \row \i Alt+Up Arrow    \i \l home()
-    \endtable
-*/
-void TQTextBrowser::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->state() & TQt::AltButton ) {
-	switch (e->key()) {
-	case Qt::Key_Right:
-	    forward();
-	    return;
-	case Qt::Key_Left:
-	    backward();
-	    return;
-	case Qt::Key_Up:
-	    home();
-	    return;
-	}
-    }
-    TQTextEdit::keyPressEvent(e);
-}
-
-class TQTextDetailPopup : public TQWidget
-{
-public:
-    TQTextDetailPopup()
-	: TQWidget ( 0, "automatic TQText detail widget", (TQt::WidgetFlags)((TQt::WidgetFlags)WType_Popup | TQt::WDestructiveClose) )
-	{
-	}
-
-protected:
-
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent*)
-	{
-	close();
-	}
-};
-
-
-void TQTextBrowser::popupDetail( const TQString& contents, const TQPoint& pos )
-{
-
-    const int shadowWidth = 6;   // also used as '5' and '6' and even '8' below
-    const int vMargin = 8;
-    const int hMargin = 12;
-
-    TQWidget* popup = new TQTextDetailPopup;
-    popup->setBackgroundMode( TQt::NoBackground );
-
-    TQSimpleRichText* doc = new TQSimpleRichText( contents, popup->font() );
-    doc->adjustSize();
-    TQRect r( 0, 0, doc->width(), doc->height() );
-
-    int w = r.width() + 2*hMargin;
-    int h = r.height() + 2*vMargin;
-
-    popup->resize( w + shadowWidth, h + shadowWidth );
-
-    // okay, now to find a suitable location
-    //###### we need a global fancy popup positioning somewhere
-    popup->move(pos - popup->rect().center());
-    if (popup->tqgeometry().right() > TQApplication::desktop()->width())
-	popup->move( TQApplication::desktop()->width() - popup->width(),
-		     popup->y() );
-    if (popup->tqgeometry().bottom() > TQApplication::desktop()->height())
-	popup->move( popup->x(),
-		     TQApplication::desktop()->height() - popup->height() );
-    if ( popup->x() < 0 )
-	popup->move( 0, popup->y() );
-    if ( popup->y() < 0 )
-	popup->move( popup->x(), 0 );
-
-
-    popup->show();
-
-    // now for super-clever shadow stuff.  super-clever mostly in
-    // how many window system problems it skirts around.
-
-    TQPainter p( popup );
-    p.setPen( TQApplication::tqpalette().active().foreground() );
-    p.drawRect( 0, 0, w, h );
-    p.setPen( TQApplication::tqpalette().active().mid() );
-    p.setBrush( TQColor( 255, 255, 240 ) );
-    p.drawRect( 1, 1, w-2, h-2 );
-    p.setPen( Qt::black );
-
-    doc->draw( &p, hMargin, vMargin, r, popup->tqcolorGroup(), 0 );
-    delete doc;
-
-    p.drawPoint( w + 5, 6 );
-    p.drawLine( w + 3, 6,
-		w + 5, 8 );
-    p.drawLine( w + 1, 6,
-		w + 5, 10 );
-    int i;
-    for( i=7; i < h; i += 2 )
-	p.drawLine( w, i,
-		    w + 5, i + 5 );
-    for( i = w - i + h; i > 6; i -= 2 )
-	p.drawLine( i, h,
-		    i + 5, h + 5 );
-    for( ; i > 0 ; i -= 2 )
-	p.drawLine( 6, h + 6 - i,
-		    i + 5, h + 5 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextBrowser::setText( const TQString &txt )
-
-    \overload
-
-    Sets the text to \a txt.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextBrowser::setText( const TQString &txt, const TQString &context )
-{
-    d->textOrSourceChanged = TRUE;
-    d->curmark = "";
-    d->curmain = "";
-    TQTextEdit::setText( txt, context );
-}
-
-void TQTextBrowser::emitHighlighted( const TQString &s )
-{
-    emit highlighted( s );
-}
-
-void TQTextBrowser::emitLinkClicked( const TQString &s )
-{
-    d->textOrSourceChanged = FALSE;
-    emit linkClicked( s );
-    if ( !d->textOrSourceChanged )
-	setSource( s );
-}
-
-#endif  // TQT_NO_TEXTBROWSER
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b2319a4..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextbrowser.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of the TQTextBrowser class
-**
-** Created : 990101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQTEXTBROWSER_H
-#define TQTEXTBROWSER_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqcolor.h"
-#include "tqtextedit.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTBROWSER
-
-class TQTextBrowserData;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQTextBrowser : public TQTextEdit
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString source READ source WRITE setSource )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( int undoDepth DESIGNABLE false SCRIPTABLE false )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool overwriteMode DESIGNABLE false SCRIPTABLE false )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool modified SCRIPTABLE false)
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool readOnly DESIGNABLE false SCRIPTABLE false )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool undoRedoEnabled DESIGNABLE false SCRIPTABLE false )
-
-public:
-    TQTextBrowser( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQTextBrowser();
-
-    TQString source() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setSource(const TQString& name);
-    virtual void backward();
-    virtual void forward();
-    virtual void home();
-    virtual void reload();
-    void setText( const TQString &txt ) { setText( txt, TQString::null ); }
-    virtual void setText( const TQString &txt, const TQString &context );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void backwardAvailable( bool );
-    void forwardAvailable( bool );
-    void sourceChanged( const TQString& );
-    void highlighted( const TQString& );
-    void linkClicked( const TQString& );
-    void anchorClicked( const TQString&, const TQString& );
-
-protected:
-    void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * e);
-
-private:
-    void popupDetail( const TQString& contents, const TQPoint& pos );
-    bool linksEnabled() const { return TRUE; }
-    void emitHighlighted( const TQString &s );
-    void emitLinkClicked( const TQString &s );
-    TQTextBrowserData *d;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQTextBrowser( const TQTextBrowser & );
-    TQTextBrowser& operator=( const TQTextBrowser & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_TEXTBROWSER
-
-#endif // TQTEXTBROWSER_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index fe1dbbf..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7467 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of the TQTextEdit class
-**
-** Created : 990101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqtextedit.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTEDIT
-
-// Keep this position to avoid patch rejection
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IM
-#include "tqinputcontext.h"
-#endif
-
-#include "../kernel/tqrichtext_p.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqpen.h"
-#include "tqbrush.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqfont.h"
-#include "tqcolor.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqsize.h"
-#include "tqevent.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqlistbox.h"
-#include "tqvbox.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqclipboard.h"
-#include "tqcolordialog.h"
-#include "tqfontdialog.h"
-#include "tqstylesheet.h"
-#include "tqdragobject.h"
-#include "tqurl.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqregexp.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqptrstack.h"
-#include "tqmetaobject.h"
-#include "tqtextbrowser.h"
-#include <private/tqucom_p.h>
-#include "private/tqsyntaxhighlighter_p.h"
-#include <tqguardedptr.h>
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_ACCEL
-#include <tqkeysequence.h>
-#define ACCEL_KEY(k) "\t" + TQString(TQKeySequence( TQt::CTRL | TQt::Key_ ## k ))
-#else
-#define ACCEL_KEY(k) "\t" + TQString("Ctrl+" #k)
-#endif
-
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-#define LOGOFFSET(i) d->logOffset + i
-#endif
-
-struct TQUndoRedoInfoPrivate
-{
-    TQTextString text;
-};
-
-class TQTextEditPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQTextEditPrivate()
-	:preeditStart(-1),preeditLength(-1),ensureCursorVisibleInShowEvent(FALSE),
-	 tabChangesFocus(FALSE),
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-	 clipboard_mode( TQClipboard::Clipboard ),
-#endif
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-	 od(0), optimMode(FALSE),
-	 maxLogLines(-1),
-	 logOffset(0),
-#endif
-	 autoFormatting( (uint)TQTextEdit::AutoAll )
-    {
-	for ( int i=0; i<7; i++ )
-	    id[i] = 0;
-    }
-    int id[ 7 ];
-    int preeditStart;
-    int preeditLength;
-    bool composeMode() const { return ( preeditLength > 0 ); }
-
-    uint ensureCursorVisibleInShowEvent : 1;
-    uint tabChangesFocus : 1;
-    TQString scrollToAnchor; // used to deferr scrollToAnchor() until the show event when we are resized
-    TQString pressedName;
-    TQString onName;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    TQClipboard::Mode clipboard_mode;
-#endif
-    TQTimer *trippleClickTimer;
-    TQPoint trippleClickPoint;
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate * od;
-    bool optimMode : 1;
-    int maxLogLines;
-    int logOffset;
-#endif
-    uint autoFormatting;
-};
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIME
-class TQRichTextDrag : public TQTextDrag
-{
-public:
-    TQRichTextDrag( TQWidget *dragSource = 0, const char *name = 0 );
-
-    void setPlainText( const TQString &txt ) { setText( txt ); }
-    void setRichText( const TQString &txt ) { richTxt = txt; }
-
-    virtual TQByteArray tqencodedData( const char *mime ) const;
-    virtual const char* format( int i ) const;
-
-    static bool decode( TQMimeSource *e, TQString &str, const TQCString &mimetype,
-			const TQCString &subtype );
-    static bool canDecode( TQMimeSource* e );
-
-private:
-    TQString richTxt;
-
-};
-
-TQRichTextDrag::TQRichTextDrag( TQWidget *dragSource, const char *name )
-    : TQTextDrag( dragSource, name )
-{
-}
-
-TQByteArray TQRichTextDrag::tqencodedData( const char *mime ) const
-{
-    if ( qstrcmp( "application/x-qrichtext", mime ) == 0 ) {
-	return richTxt.utf8(); // #### perhaps we should use USC2 instead?
-    } else
-	return TQTextDrag::tqencodedData( mime );
-}
-
-bool TQRichTextDrag::decode( TQMimeSource *e, TQString &str, const TQCString &mimetype,
-			    const TQCString &subtype )
-{
-    if ( mimetype == "application/x-qrichtext" ) {
-	// do richtext decode
-	const char *mime;
-	int i;
-	for ( i = 0; ( mime = e->format( i ) ); ++i ) {
-	    if ( qstrcmp( "application/x-qrichtext", mime ) != 0 )
-		continue;
-	    str = TQString::fromUtf8( e->tqencodedData( mime ) );
-	    return TRUE;
-	}
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-
-    // do a regular text decode
-    TQCString subt = subtype;
-    return TQTextDrag::decode( e, str, subt );
-}
-
-bool TQRichTextDrag::canDecode( TQMimeSource* e )
-{
-    if ( e->provides( "application/x-qrichtext" ) )
-	return TRUE;
-    return TQTextDrag::canDecode( e );
-}
-
-const char* TQRichTextDrag::format( int i ) const
-{
-    if ( TQTextDrag::format( i ) )
-	return TQTextDrag::format( i );
-    if ( TQTextDrag::format( i-1 ) )
-	return "application/x-qrichtext";
-    return 0;
-}
-
-#endif
-
-static bool block_set_tqalignment = FALSE;
-
-/*!
-    \class TQTextEdit tqtextedit.h
-    \brief The TQTextEdit widget provides a powerful single-page rich text editor.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \ingroup text
-    \mainclass
-
-    \tableofcontents
-
-    \section1 Introduction and Concepts
-
-    TQTextEdit is an advanced WYSIWYG viewer/editor supporting rich
-    text formatting using HTML-style tags. It is optimized to handle
-    large documents and to respond quickly to user input.
-
-    TQTextEdit has four modes of operation:
-    \table
-    \header \i Mode \i Command \i Notes
-    \row \i Plain Text Editor \i setTextFormat(PlainText)
-	 \i Set text with setText(); text() returns plain text. Text
-	 attributes (e.g. colors) can be set, but plain text is always
-	 returned.
-    \row \i Rich Text Editor \i setTextFormat(RichText)
-	 \i Set text with setText(); text() returns rich text. Rich
-	 text editing is fairly limited. You can't set margins or
-	 insert images for example (although you can read and
-	 correctly display files that have margins set and that
-	 include images). This mode is mostly useful for editing small
-	 amounts of rich text. <sup>1.</sup>
-    \row \i Text Viewer \i setReadOnly(TRUE)
-         \i Set text with setText() or append() (which has no undo
-	 history so is faster and uses less memory); text() returns
-	 plain or rich text depending on the textFormat(). This mode
-	 can correctly display a large subset of HTML tags.
-    \row \i Log Viewer \i setTextFormat(LogText)
-	 \i Append text using append(). The widget is set to be read
-	 only and rich text support is disabled although a few HTML
-	 tags (for color, bold, italic and underline) may be used.
-	 (See \link #logtextmode LogText mode\endlink for details.)
-    \endtable
-
-    <sup>1.</sup><small>A more complete API that supports setting
-    margins, images, etc., is planned for a later TQt release.</small>
-
-    TQTextEdit can be used as a syntax highlighting editor when used in
-    conjunction with TQSyntaxHighlighter.
-
-    We recommend that you always call setTextFormat() to set the mode
-    you want to use. If you use \c AutoText then setText() and
-    append() will try to determine whether the text they are given is
-    plain text or rich text. If you use \c RichText then setText() and
-    append() will assume that the text they are given is rich text.
-    insert() simply inserts the text it is given.
-
-    TQTextEdit works on paragraphs and characters. A paragraph is a
-    formatted string which is word-wrapped to fit into the width of
-    the widget. By default when reading plain text, one newline
-    signify a paragraph. A document consists of zero or more
-    paragraphs, indexed from 0. Characters are indexed on a
-    per-paragraph basis, also indexed from 0. The words in the
-    paragraph are aligned in accordance with the paragraph's
-    tqalignment(). Paragraphs are separated by hard line breaks. Each
-    character within a paragraph has its own attributes, for example,
-    font and color.
-
-    The text edit documentation uses the following concepts:
-    \list
-    \i \e{current format} --
-    this is the format at the current cursor position, \e and it
-    is the format of the selected text if any.
-    \i \e{current paragraph} -- the paragraph which contains the
-    cursor.
-    \endlist
-
-    TQTextEdit can display images (using TQMimeSourceFactory), lists and
-    tables. If the text is too large to view within the text edit's
-    viewport, scrollbars will appear. The text edit can load both
-    plain text and HTML files (a subset of HTML 3.2 and 4). The
-    rendering style and the set of valid tags are defined by a
-    styleSheet(). Custom tags can be created and placed in a custom
-    style sheet. Change the style sheet with \l{setStyleSheet()}; see
-    TQStyleSheet for details. The images identified by image tags are
-    displayed if they can be interpreted using the text edit's
-    \l{TQMimeSourceFactory}; see setMimeSourceFactory().
-
-    If you want a text browser with more navigation use TQTextBrowser.
-    If you just need to display a small piece of rich text use TQLabel
-    or TQSimpleRichText.
-
-    If you create a new TQTextEdit, and want to allow the user to edit
-    rich text, call setTextFormat(TQt::RichText) to ensure that the
-    text is treated as rich text. (Rich text uses HTML tags to set
-    text formatting attributes. See TQStyleSheet for information on the
-    HTML tags that are supported.). If you don't call setTextFormat()
-    explicitly the text edit will guess from the text itself whether
-    it is rich text or plain text. This means that if the text looks
-    like HTML or XML it will probably be interpreted as rich text, so
-    you should call setTextFormat(TQt::PlainText) to preserve such
-    text.
-
-    Note that we do not intend to add a full-featured web browser
-    widget to TQt (because that would easily double TQt's size and only
-    a few applications would benefit from it). The rich
-    text support in TQt is designed to provide a fast, portable and
-    efficient way to add reasonable online help facilities to
-    applications, and to provide a basis for rich text editors.
-
-    \section1 Using TQTextEdit as a Display Widget
-
-    TQTextEdit can display a large HTML subset, including tables and
-    images.
-
-    The text is set or replaced using setText() which deletes any
-    existing text and replaces it with the text passed in the
-    setText() call. If you call setText() with legacy HTML (with
-    setTextFormat(RichText) in force), and then call text(), the text
-    that is returned may have different markup, but will render the
-    same. Text can be inserted with insert(), paste(), pasteSubType()
-    and append(). Text that is appended does not go into the undo
-    history; this makes append() faster and consumes less memory. Text
-    can also be cut(). The entire text is deleted with clear() and the
-    selected text is deleted with removeSelectedText(). Selected
-    (marked) text can also be deleted with del() (which will delete
-    the character to the right of the cursor if no text is selected).
-
-    Loading and saving text is achieved using setText() and text(),
-    for example:
-    \code
-    TQFile file( fileName ); // Read the text from a file
-    if ( file.open( IO_ReadOnly ) ) {
-	TQTextStream stream( &file );
-	textEdit->setText( stream.read() );
-    }
-
-    TQFile file( fileName ); // Write the text to a file
-    if ( file.open( IO_WriteOnly ) ) {
-	TQTextStream stream( &file );
-	stream << textEdit->text();
-	textEdit->setModified( FALSE );
-    }
-    \endcode
-
-    By default the text edit wraps words at whitespace to fit within
-    the text edit widget. The setWordWrap() function is used to
-    specify the kind of word wrap you want, or \c NoWrap if you don't
-    want any wrapping. Call setWordWrap() to set a fixed pixel width
-    \c FixedPixelWidth, or character column (e.g. 80 column) \c
-    FixedColumnWidth with the pixels or columns specified with
-    setWrapColumnOrWidth(). If you use word wrap to the widget's width
-    \c WidgetWidth, you can specify whether to break on whitespace or
-    anywhere with setWrapPolicy().
-
-    The background color is set differently than other widgets, using
-    setPaper(). You specify a brush style which could be a plain color
-    or a complex pixmap.
-
-    Hypertext links are automatically underlined; this can be changed
-    with setLinkUnderline(). The tab stop width is set with
-    setTabStopWidth().
-
-    The zoomIn() and zoomOut() functions can be used to resize the
-    text by increasing (decreasing for zoomOut()) the point size used.
-    Images are not affected by the zoom functions.
-
-    The lines() function returns the number of lines in the text and
-    paragraphs() returns the number of paragraphs. The number of lines
-    within a particular paragraph is returned by linesOfParagraph().
-    The length of the entire text in characters is returned by
-    length().
-
-    You can scroll to an anchor in the text, e.g.
-    \c{<a name="anchor">} with scrollToAnchor(). The find() function
-    can be used to find and select a given string within the text.
-
-    A read-only TQTextEdit provides the same functionality as the
-    (obsolete) TQTextView. (TQTextView is still supplied for
-    compatibility with old code.)
-
-    \section2 Read-only key bindings
-
-    When TQTextEdit is used read-only the key-bindings are limited to
-    navigation, and text may only be selected with the mouse:
-    \table
-    \header \i Keypresses \i Action
-    \row \i UpArrow	\i Move one line up
-    \row \i DownArrow	\i Move one line down
-    \row \i LeftArrow	\i Move one character left
-    \row \i RightArrow	\i Move one character right
-    \row \i PageUp	\i Move one (viewport) page up
-    \row \i PageDown	\i Move one (viewport) page down
-    \row \i Home	\i Move to the beginning of the text
-    \row \i End		\i Move to the end of the text
-    \row \i Shift+Wheel
-	 \i Scroll the page horizontally (the Wheel is the mouse wheel)
-    \row \i Ctrl+Wheel	\i Zoom the text
-    \endtable
-
-    The text edit may be able to provide some meta-information. For
-    example, the documentTitle() function will return the text from
-    within HTML \c{<title>} tags.
-
-    The text displayed in a text edit has a \e context. The context is
-    a path which the text edit's TQMimeSourceFactory uses to resolve
-    the locations of files and images. It is passed to the
-    mimeSourceFactory() when quering data. (See TQTextEdit() and
-    \l{context()}.)
-
-    \target logtextmode
-    \section2 Using TQTextEdit in LogText Mode
-
-    Setting the text format to \c LogText puts the widget in a special
-    mode which is optimized for very large texts. Editing, word wrap,
-    and rich text support are disabled in this mode (the widget is
-    explicitly made read-only). This allows the text to be stored in a
-    different, more memory efficient manner. However, a certain degree
-    of text formatting is supported through the use of formatting tags.
-    A tag is delimited by \c < and \c {>}. The characters \c {<}, \c >
-    and \c & are escaped by using \c {&lt;}, \c {&gt;} and \c {&amp;}.
-    A tag pair consists of a left and a right tag (or open/close tags).
-    Left-tags mark the starting point for formatting, while right-tags
-    mark the ending point. A right-tag always start with a \c / before
-    the tag keyword. For example \c <b> and \c </b> are a tag pair.
-    Tags can be nested, but they have to be closed in the same order as
-    they are opened. For example, \c <b><u></u></b> is valid, while \c
-    <b><u></b></u> will output an error message.
-
-    By using tags it is possible to change the color, bold, italic and
-    underline settings for a piece of text. A color can be specified
-    by using the HTML font tag \c {<font color=colorname>}. The color
-    name can be one of the color names from the X11 color database, or
-    a RGB hex value (e.g \c {#00ff00}). Example of valid color tags:
-    \c {<font color=red>}, \c {<font color="light blue">}, \c {<font
-    color="#223344">}. Bold, italic and underline settings can be
-    specified by the tags \c {<b>}, \c <i> and \c {<u>}. Note that a
-    tag does not necessarily have to be closed. A valid example:
-    \code
-    This is <font color=red>red</font> while <b>this</b> is <font color=blue>blue</font>.
-    <font color=green><font color=yellow>Yellow,</font> and <u>green</u>.
-    \endcode
-
-    Stylesheets can also be used in LogText mode. To create and use a
-    custom tag, you could do the following:
-    \code
-    TQTextEdit * log = new TQTextEdit( this );
-    log->setTextFormat( TQt::LogText );
-    TQStyleSheetItem * item = new TQStyleSheetItem( log->styleSheet(), "mytag" );
-    item->setColor( "red" );
-    item->setFontWeight( TQFont::Bold );
-    item->setFontUnderline( TRUE );
-    log->append( "This is a <mytag>custom tag</mytag>!" );
-    \endcode
-    Note that only the color, bold, underline and italic attributes of
-    a TQStyleSheetItem is used in LogText mode.
-
-    Note that you can use setMaxLogLines() to limit the number of
-    lines the widget can hold in LogText mode.
-
-    There are a few things that you need to be aware of when the
-    widget is in this mode:
-    \list
-    \i Functions that deal with rich text formatting and cursor
-    movement will not work or return anything valid.
-    \i Lines are equivalent to paragraphs.
-    \endlist
-
-    \section1 Using TQTextEdit as an Editor
-
-    All the information about using TQTextEdit as a display widget also
-    applies here.
-
-    The current format's attributes are set with setItalic(),
-    setBold(), setUnderline(), setFamily() (font family),
-    setPointSize(), setColor() and setCurrentFont(). The current
-    paragraph's tqalignment is set with tqsetAlignment().
-
-    Use setSelection() to select text. The setSelectionAttributes()
-    function is used to indicate how selected text should be
-    displayed. Use hasSelectedText() to find out if any text is
-    selected. The currently selected text's position is available
-    using getSelection() and the selected text itself is returned by
-    selectedText(). The selection can be copied to the clipboard with
-    copy(), or cut to the clipboard with cut(). It can be deleted with
-    removeSelectedText(). The entire text can be selected (or
-    unselected) using selectAll(). TQTextEdit supports multiple
-    selections. Most of the selection functions operate on the default
-    selection, selection 0. If the user presses a non-selecting key,
-    e.g. a cursor key without also holding down Shift, all selections
-    are cleared.
-
-    Set and get the position of the cursor with setCursorPosition()
-    and getCursorPosition() respectively. When the cursor is moved,
-    the Q_SIGNALS currentFontChanged(), currentColorChanged() and
-    currentAlignmentChanged() are emitted to reflect the font, color
-    and tqalignment at the new cursor position.
-
-    If the text changes, the textChanged() signal is emitted, and if
-    the user inserts a new line by pressing Return or Enter,
-    returnPressed() is emitted. The isModified() function will return
-    TRUE if the text has been modified.
-
-    TQTextEdit provides command-based undo and redo. To set the depth
-    of the command history use setUndoDepth() which defaults to 100
-    steps. To undo or redo the last operation call undo() or redo().
-    The Q_SIGNALS undoAvailable() and redoAvailable() indicate whether
-    the undo and redo operations can be executed.
-
-    The indent() function is used to reindent a paragraph. It is
-    useful for code editors, for example in \link designer-manual.book
-    TQt Designer\endlink's code editor \e{Ctrl+I} invokes the indent()
-    function.
-
-    \section2 Editing key bindings
-
-    The list of key-bindings which are implemented for editing:
-    \table
-    \header \i Keypresses \i Action
-    \row \i Backspace \i Delete the character to the left of the cursor
-    \row \i Delete \i Delete the character to the right of the cursor
-    \row \i Ctrl+A \i Move the cursor to the beginning of the line
-    \row \i Ctrl+B \i Move the cursor one character left
-    \row \i Ctrl+C \i Copy the marked text to the clipboard (also
-		      Ctrl+Insert under Windows)
-    \row \i Ctrl+D \i Delete the character to the right of the cursor
-    \row \i Ctrl+E \i Move the cursor to the end of the line
-    \row \i Ctrl+F \i Move the cursor one character right
-    \row \i Ctrl+H \i Delete the character to the left of the cursor
-    \row \i Ctrl+K \i Delete to end of line
-    \row \i Ctrl+N \i Move the cursor one line down
-    \row \i Ctrl+P \i Move the cursor one line up
-    \row \i Ctrl+V \i Paste the clipboard text into line edit
-		      (also Shift+Insert under Windows)
-    \row \i Ctrl+X \i Cut the marked text, copy to clipboard
-		      (also Shift+Delete under Windows)
-    \row \i Ctrl+Z \i Undo the last operation
-    \row \i Ctrl+Y \i Redo the last operation
-    \row \i LeftArrow	    \i Move the cursor one character left
-    \row \i Ctrl+LeftArrow  \i Move the cursor one word left
-    \row \i RightArrow	    \i Move the cursor one character right
-    \row \i Ctrl+RightArrow \i Move the cursor one word right
-    \row \i UpArrow	    \i Move the cursor one line up
-    \row \i Ctrl+UpArrow    \i Move the cursor one word up
-    \row \i DownArrow	    \i Move the cursor one line down
-    \row \i Ctrl+Down Arrow \i Move the cursor one word down
-    \row \i PageUp	    \i Move the cursor one page up
-    \row \i PageDown	    \i Move the cursor one page down
-    \row \i Home	    \i Move the cursor to the beginning of the line
-    \row \i Ctrl+Home	    \i Move the cursor to the beginning of the text
-    \row \i End		    \i Move the cursor to the end of the line
-    \row \i Ctrl+End	    \i Move the cursor to the end of the text
-    \row \i Shift+Wheel	    \i Scroll the page horizontally
-			    (the Wheel is the mouse wheel)
-    \row \i Ctrl+Wheel	    \i Zoom the text
-    \endtable
-
-    To select (mark) text hold down the Shift key whilst pressing one
-    of the movement keystrokes, for example, \e{Shift+Right Arrow}
-    will select the character to the right, and \e{Shift+Ctrl+Right
-    Arrow} will select the word to the right, etc.
-
-    By default the text edit widget operates in insert mode so all
-    text that the user enters is inserted into the text edit and any
-    text to the right of the cursor is moved out of the way. The mode
-    can be changed to overwrite, where new text overwrites any text to
-    the right of the cursor, using setOverwriteMode().
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTextEdit::AutoFormatting
-
-    \value AutoNone Do not perform any automatic formatting
-    \value AutoBulletList Only automatically format bulletted lists
-    \value AutoAll Apply all available autoformatting
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTextEdit::KeyboardAction
-
-    This enum is used by doKeyboardAction() to specify which action
-    should be executed:
-
-    \value ActionBackspace  Delete the character to the left of the
-    cursor.
-
-    \value ActionDelete  Delete the character to the right of the
-    cursor.
-
-    \value ActionReturn  Split the paragraph at the cursor position.
-
-    \value ActionKill If the cursor is not at the end of the
-    paragraph, delete the text from the cursor position until the end
-    of the paragraph. If the cursor is at the end of the paragraph,
-    delete the hard line break at the end of the paragraph: this will
-    cause this paragraph to be joined with the following paragraph.
-
-    \value ActionWordBackspace Delete the word to the left of the
-    cursor position.
-
-    \value ActionWordDelete Delete the word to the right of the
-    cursor position
-
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTextEdit::VerticalAlignment
-
-    This enum is used to set the vertical tqalignment of the text.
-
-    \value AlignNormal Normal tqalignment
-    \value AlignSuperScript Superscript
-    \value AlignSubScript Subscript
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTextEdit::TextInsertionFlags
-
-    \internal
-
-    \value RedoIndentation
-    \value CheckNewLines
-    \value RemoveSelected
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::copyAvailable(bool yes)
-
-    This signal is emitted when text is selected or de-selected in the
-    text edit.
-
-    When text is selected this signal will be emitted with \a yes set
-    to TRUE. If no text has been selected or if the selected text is
-    de-selected this signal is emitted with \a yes set to FALSE.
-
-    If \a yes is TRUE then copy() can be used to copy the selection to
-    the clipboard. If \a yes is FALSE then copy() does nothing.
-
-    \sa selectionChanged()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::textChanged()
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the text in the text edit changes.
-
-    \sa setText() append()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::selectionChanged()
-
-    This signal is emitted whenever the selection changes.
-
-    \sa setSelection() copyAvailable()
-*/
-
-/*!  \fn TQTextDocument *TQTextEdit::document() const
-
-    \internal
-
-  This function returns the TQTextDocument which is used by the text
-  edit.
-*/
-
-/*!  \fn void TQTextEdit::setDocument( TQTextDocument *doc )
-
-    \internal
-
-  This function sets the TQTextDocument which should be used by the text
-  edit to \a doc. This can be used, for example, if you want to
-  display a document using multiple views. You would create a
-  TQTextDocument and set it to the text edits which should display it.
-  You would need to connect to the textChanged() and
-  selectionChanged() Q_SIGNALS of all the text edits and update them all
-  accordingly (preferably with a slight delay for efficiency reasons).
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTextEdit::CursorAction
-
-    This enum is used by moveCursor() to specify in which direction
-    the cursor should be moved:
-
-    \value MoveBackward  Moves the cursor one character backward
-
-    \value MoveWordBackward Moves the cursor one word backward
-
-    \value MoveForward  Moves the cursor one character forward
-
-    \value MoveWordForward Moves the cursor one word forward
-
-    \value MoveUp  Moves the cursor up one line
-
-    \value MoveDown  Moves the cursor down one line
-
-    \value MoveLineStart  Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line
-
-    \value MoveLineEnd Moves the cursor to the end of the line
-
-    \value MoveHome  Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document
-
-    \value MoveEnd Moves the cursor to the end of the document
-
-    \value MovePgUp  Moves the cursor one viewport page up
-
-    \value MovePgDown  Moves the cursor one viewport page down
-*/
-
-/*!
-  \enum TQt::AnchorAttribute
-
-  An anchor has one or more of the following attributes:
-
-  \value AnchorName the name attribute of the anchor. This attribute is
-  used when scrolling to an anchor in the document.
-
-  \value AnchorHref the href attribute of the anchor. This attribute is
-  used when a link is clicked to determine what content to load.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::overwriteMode
-    \brief the text edit's overwrite mode
-
-    If FALSE (the default) characters entered by the user are inserted
-    with any characters to the right being moved out of the way. If
-    TRUE, the editor is in overwrite mode, i.e. characters entered by
-    the user overwrite any characters to the right of the cursor
-    position.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::setCurrentFont( const TQFont &f )
-
-    Sets the font of the current format to \a f.
-
-    If the widget is in \c LogText mode this function will do
-    nothing. Use setFont() instead.
-
-    \sa currentFont() setPointSize() setFamily()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::undoDepth
-    \brief the depth of the undo history
-
-    The maximum number of steps in the undo/redo history. The default
-    is 100.
-
-    \sa undo() redo()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::undoAvailable( bool yes )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the availability of undo changes. If
-    \a yes is TRUE, then undo() will work until undoAvailable( FALSE )
-    is next emitted.
-
-    \sa undo() undoDepth()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::modificationChanged( bool m )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the modification status of the
-    document has changed. If \a m is TRUE, the document was modified,
-    otherwise the modification state has been reset to unmodified.
-
-    \sa modified
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::redoAvailable( bool yes )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the availability of redo changes. If
-    \a yes is TRUE, then redo() will work until redoAvailable( FALSE )
-    is next emitted.
-
-    \sa redo() undoDepth()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::currentFontChanged( const TQFont &f )
-
-    This signal is emitted if the font of the current format has
-    changed.
-
-    The new font is \a f.
-
-    \sa setCurrentFont()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::currentColorChanged( const TQColor &c )
-
-    This signal is emitted if the color of the current format has
-    changed.
-
-    The new color is \a c.
-
-    \sa setColor()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::currentVerticalAlignmentChanged( VerticalAlignment a )
-
-    This signal is emitted if the vertical tqalignment of the current
-    format has changed.
-
-    The new vertical tqalignment is \a a.
-
-    \sa setVerticalAlignment()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::currentAlignmentChanged( int a )
-
-    This signal is emitted if the tqalignment of the current paragraph
-    has changed.
-
-    The new tqalignment is \a a.
-
-    \sa tqsetAlignment()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::cursorPositionChanged( TQTextCursor *c )
-
-    \internal
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::cursorPositionChanged( int para, int pos )
-
-    This signal is emitted if the position of the cursor has changed.
-    \a para contains the paragraph index and \a pos contains the
-    character position within the paragraph.
-
-    \sa setCursorPosition()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::clicked( int para, int pos )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the mouse is clicked on the paragraph
-    \a para at character position \a pos.
-
-    \sa doubleClicked()
-*/
-
-/*! \fn void TQTextEdit::doubleClicked( int para, int pos )
-
-  This signal is emitted when the mouse is double-clicked on the
-  paragraph \a para at character position \a pos.
-
-  \sa clicked()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQTextEdit::returnPressed()
-
-    This signal is emitted if the user pressed the Return or the Enter
-    key.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQTextCursor *TQTextEdit::textCursor() const
-
-    Returns the text edit's text cursor.
-
-    \warning TQTextCursor is not in the public API, but in special
-    circumstances you might wish to use it.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty TQTextEdit called \a name, with parent \a
-    parent.
-*/
-
-TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ),
-      doc( new TQTextDocument( 0 ) ), undoRedoInfo( doc )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a TQTextEdit called \a name, with parent \a parent. The
-    text edit will display the text \a text using context \a context.
-
-    The \a context is a path which the text edit's TQMimeSourceFactory
-    uses to resolve the locations of files and images. It is passed to
-    the mimeSourceFactory() when quering data.
-
-    For example if the text contains an image tag,
-    \c{<img src="image.png">}, and the context is "path/to/look/in", the
-    TQMimeSourceFactory will try to load the image from
-    "path/to/look/in/image.png". If the tag was
-    \c{<img src="/image.png">}, the context will not be used (because
-    TQMimeSourceFactory recognizes that we have used an absolute path)
-    and will try to load "/image.png". The context is applied in exactly
-    the same way to \e hrefs, for example,
-    \c{<a href="target.html">Target</a>}, would resolve to
-    "path/to/look/in/target.html".
-*/
-
-TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit( const TQString& text, const TQString& context,
-		      TQWidget *parent, const char *name)
-    : TQScrollView( parent, name, (WFlags)(TQt::WStaticContents | TQt::WNoAutoErase) ),
-      doc( new TQTextDocument( 0 ) ), undoRedoInfo( doc )
-{
-    init();
-    setText( text, context );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQTextEdit::~TQTextEdit()
-{
-    delete undoRedoInfo.d;
-    undoRedoInfo.d = 0;
-    delete cursor;
-    delete doc;
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	delete d->od;
-#endif
-    delete d;
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::init()
-{
-    d = new TQTextEditPrivate;
-    doc->formatCollection()->setPaintDevice( this );
-    undoEnabled = TRUE;
-    readonly = TRUE;
-    setReadOnly( FALSE );
-    setFrameStyle( LineEditPanel | Sunken );
-    connect( doc, TQT_SIGNAL( minimumWidthChanged(int) ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( documentWidthChanged(int) ) );
-
-    mousePressed = FALSE;
-    inDoubleClick = FALSE;
-    modified = FALSE;
-    onLink = TQString::null;
-    d->onName = TQString::null;
-    overWrite = FALSE;
-    wrapMode = WidgetWidth;
-    wrapWidth = -1;
-    wPolicy = AtWhiteSpace;
-    inDnD = FALSE;
-    doc->setFormatter( new TQTextFormatterBreakWords );
-    doc->formatCollection()->defaultFormat()->setFont( TQScrollView::font() );
-    doc->formatCollection()->defaultFormat()->setColor( tqcolorGroup().color( TQColorGroup::Text ) );
-    currentFormat = doc->formatCollection()->defaultFormat();
-    currentAlignment = TQt::AlignAuto;
-
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBase );
-    viewport()->setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBase );
-    viewport()->setAcceptDrops( TRUE );
-    resizeContents( 0, doc->lastParagraph() ?
-		    ( doc->lastParagraph()->paragId() + 1 ) * doc->formatCollection()->defaultFormat()->height() : 0 );
-
-    setKeyCompression( TRUE );
-    viewport()->setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-    cursor = new TQTextCursor( doc );
-
-    formatTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-    connect( formatTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( formatMore() ) );
-    lastFormatted = doc->firstParagraph();
-
-    scrollTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-    connect( scrollTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( autoScrollTimerDone() ) );
-
-    interval = 0;
-    changeIntervalTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-    connect( changeIntervalTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( doChangeInterval() ) );
-
-    cursorVisible = TRUE;
-    blinkTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-    connect( blinkTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( blinkCursor() ) );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    dragStartTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-    connect( dragStartTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( startDrag() ) );
-#endif
-
-    d->trippleClickTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-
-    formatMore();
-
-    blinkCursorVisible = FALSE;
-
-    viewport()->setFocusProxy( this );
-    viewport()->setFocusPolicy( Qt::WheelFocus );
-    setInputMethodEnabled( TRUE );
-    viewport()->installEventFilter( this );
-    connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(horizontalSliderReleased()), this, TQT_SLOT(sliderReleased()) );
-    connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(verticalSliderReleased()), this, TQT_SLOT(sliderReleased()) );
-    installEventFilter( this );
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::paintDocument( bool drawAll, TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    TQ_ASSERT( !d->optimMode );
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	return;
-#endif
-
-    bool drawCur = hasFocus() || viewport()->hasFocus();
-    if (( hasSelectedText() && !tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected ) ) ||
-	isReadOnly() || !cursorVisible || doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::IMSelectionText ))
-	drawCur = FALSE;
-    TQColorGroup g = tqcolorGroup();
-    const TQColorGroup::ColorRole backRole = TQPalette::backgroundRoleFromMode(backgroundMode());
-    if ( doc->paper() )
-	g.setBrush( backRole, *doc->paper() );
-
-    if ( contentsY() < doc->y() ) {
-	p->fillRect( contentsX(), contentsY(), visibleWidth(), doc->y(),
-		     g.brush( backRole ) );
-    }
-    if ( drawAll && doc->width() - contentsX() < cx + cw ) {
-	p->fillRect( doc->width() - contentsX(), cy, cx + cw - doc->width() + contentsX(), ch,
-		     g.brush( backRole ) );
-    }
-
-    p->setBrushOrigin( -contentsX(), -contentsY() );
-
-    lastFormatted = doc->draw( p, cx, cy, cw, ch, g, !drawAll, drawCur, cursor );
-
-    if ( lastFormatted == doc->lastParagraph() )
-	resizeContents( contentsWidth(), doc->height() );
-
-    if ( contentsHeight() < visibleHeight() && ( !doc->lastParagraph() || doc->lastParagraph()->isValid() ) && drawAll )
-	p->fillRect( 0, contentsHeight(), visibleWidth(),
-		     visibleHeight() - contentsHeight(), g.brush( backRole ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::drawContents( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	optimDrawContents( p, cx, cy, cw, ch );
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    paintDocument( TRUE, p, cx, cy, cw, ch );
-    int v;
-    p->setPen( foregroundColor() );
-    if ( document()->isPageBreakEnabled() &&  ( v = document()->flow()->pageSize() ) > 0 ) {
-	int l = int(cy / v) * v;
-	while ( l < cy + ch ) {
-	    p->drawLine( cx, l, cx + cw - 1, l );
-	    l += v;
-	}
-    }
-
-    // This invocation is required to follow dragging of active window
-    // by the showed candidate window.
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::drawContents( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    if ( horizontalScrollBar()->isVisible() &&
-	 verticalScrollBar()->isVisible() ) {
-	const TQRect verticalRect = verticalScrollBar()->tqgeometry();
-	const TQRect horizontalRect = horizontalScrollBar()->tqgeometry();
-
-	TQRect cornerRect;
-	cornerRect.setTop( verticalRect.bottom() );
-	cornerRect.setBottom( horizontalRect.bottom() );
-	cornerRect.setLeft( verticalRect.left() );
-	cornerRect.setRight( verticalRect.right() );
-
-	p->fillRect( cornerRect, tqcolorGroup().background() );
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::event( TQEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::AccelOverride && !isReadOnly() ) {
-	TQKeyEvent* ke = (TQKeyEvent*) e;
-	switch(ke->state()) {
-	case Qt::NoButton:
-	case TQt::Keypad:
-	case ShiftButton:
-	    if ( ke->key() < Key_Escape ) {
-		ke->accept();
-	    } else {
-		switch ( ke->key() ) {
-		case Qt::Key_Return:
-		case Qt::Key_Enter:
-		case Qt::Key_Delete:
-		case Qt::Key_Home:
-		case Qt::Key_End:
-		case Qt::Key_Backspace:
-		case Qt::Key_Left:
-		case Qt::Key_Right:
-		    ke->accept();
-		default:
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
-
-	case ControlButton:
-	case (int)ControlButton|(int)ShiftButton:
-	case (int)ControlButton|(int)TQt::Keypad:
-	case (int)ControlButton|(int)ShiftButton|(int)TQt::Keypad:
-	    switch ( ke->key() ) {
-	    case Qt::Key_Tab:
-	    case Qt::Key_Backtab:
-		ke->ignore();
-		break;
-// Those are too frequently used for application functionality
-/*	    case Qt::Key_A:
-	    case Qt::Key_B:
-	    case Qt::Key_D:
-	    case Qt::Key_E:
-	    case Qt::Key_F:
-	    case Qt::Key_H:
-	    case Qt::Key_I:
-	    case Qt::Key_K:
-	    case Qt::Key_N:
-	    case Qt::Key_P:
-	    case Qt::Key_T:
-*/
-	    case Qt::Key_C:
-	    case Qt::Key_V:
-	    case Qt::Key_X:
-	    case Qt::Key_Y:
-	    case Qt::Key_Z:
-	    case Qt::Key_Left:
-	    case Qt::Key_Right:
-	    case Qt::Key_Up:
-	    case Qt::Key_Down:
-	    case Qt::Key_Home:
-	    case Qt::Key_End:
-#if defined (TQ_WS_WIN)
-	    case Qt::Key_Insert:
-	    case Qt::Key_Delete:
-#endif
-		ke->accept();
-	    default:
-		break;
-	    }
-	    break;
-
-	default:
-	    switch ( ke->key() ) {
-#if defined (TQ_WS_WIN)
-	    case Qt::Key_Insert:
-		ke->accept();
-#endif
-	    default:
-		break;
-	    }
-	    break;
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::Show ) {
-	if (
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-	     !d->optimMode &&
-#endif
-	     d->ensureCursorVisibleInShowEvent  ) {
-	    ensureCursorVisible();
-	    d->ensureCursorVisibleInShowEvent = FALSE;
-	}
-	if ( !d->scrollToAnchor.isEmpty() ) {
-	    scrollToAnchor( d->scrollToAnchor );
-	    d->scrollToAnchor = TQString::null;
-	}
-    }
-    return TQWidget::event( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Processes the key event, \a e. By default key events are used to
-    provide keyboard navigation and text editing.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    changeIntervalTimer->stop();
-    interval = 10;
-    bool unknownKey = FALSE;
-    if ( isReadOnly() ) {
-	if ( !handleReadOnlyKeyEvent( e ) )
-	    TQScrollView::keyPressEvent( e );
-	changeIntervalTimer->start( 100, TRUE );
-	return;
-    }
-
-
-    bool selChanged = FALSE;
-    for ( int i = 1; i < doc->numSelections(); ++i ) // start with 1 as we don't want to remove the Standard-Selection
-	selChanged = doc->removeSelection( i ) || selChanged;
-
-    if ( selChanged ) {
-	cursor->paragraph()->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = TRUE;
-	repaintChanged();
-    }
-
-    bool clearUndoRedoInfo = TRUE;
-
-
-    switch ( e->key() ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Left:
-    case Qt::Key_Right: {
-	// a bit hacky, but can't change this without introducing new enum values for move and keeping the
-	// correct semantics and movement for BiDi and non BiDi text.
-	CursorAction a;
-	if ( cursor->paragraph()->string()->isRightToLeft() == (e->key() == Qt::Key_Right) )
-	    a = e->state() & ControlButton ? MoveWordBackward : MoveBackward;
-	else
-	    a = e->state() & ControlButton ? MoveWordForward : MoveForward;
-	moveCursor( a, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	break;
-    }
-    case Qt::Key_Up:
-	moveCursor( e->state() & ControlButton ? MovePgUp : MoveUp, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Down:
-	moveCursor( e->state() & ControlButton ? MovePgDown : MoveDown, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Home:
-	moveCursor( e->state() & ControlButton ? MoveHome : MoveLineStart, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_End:
-	moveCursor( e->state() & ControlButton ? MoveEnd : MoveLineEnd, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	break;
-    case TQt::Key_Prior:
-	moveCursor( MovePgUp, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	break;
-    case TQt::Key_Next:
-	moveCursor( MovePgDown, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Return: case Qt::Key_Enter:
-	if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, FALSE ) )
-	    removeSelectedText();
-	if ( textFormat() == TQt::RichText && ( e->state() & ControlButton ) ) {
-	    // Ctrl-Enter inserts a line break in rich text mode
-	    insert( TQString( TQChar( 0x2028) ), TRUE, FALSE );
-	} else {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-	    clearUndoRedoInfo = FALSE;
-	    doKeyboardAction( ActionReturn );
-	    emit returnPressed();
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Delete:
-#if defined (TQ_WS_WIN)
-	if ( e->state() & ShiftButton ) {
-	    cut();
-	    break;
-	} else
-#endif
-        if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, TRUE ) ) {
-	    removeSelectedText();
-	    break;
-	}
-	doKeyboardAction( e->state() & ControlButton ? ActionWordDelete
-			  : ActionDelete );
-	clearUndoRedoInfo = FALSE;
-
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Insert:
-	if ( e->state() & ShiftButton )
-	    paste();
-#if defined (TQ_WS_WIN)
-	else if ( e->state() & ControlButton )
-	    copy();
-#endif
-	else
-	    setOverwriteMode( !isOverwriteMode() );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Backspace:
-#if defined (TQ_WS_WIN)
-	if ( e->state() & AltButton ) {
-	    if (e->state() & ControlButton ) {
-		break;
-	    } else if ( e->state() & ShiftButton ) {
-		redo();
-		break;
-	    } else {
-		undo();
-		break;
-	    }
-	} else
-#endif
-	if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, TRUE ) ) {
-	    removeSelectedText();
-	    break;
-	}
-
-	doKeyboardAction( e->state() & ControlButton ? ActionWordBackspace
-			  : ActionBackspace );
-	clearUndoRedoInfo = FALSE;
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_F16: // Copy key on Sun keyboards
-	copy();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_F18:  // Paste key on Sun keyboards
-	paste();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_F20:  // Cut key on Sun keyboards
-	cut();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Direction_L:
-	if ( doc->textFormat() == TQt::PlainText ) {
-	    // change the whole doc
-	    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->firstParagraph();
-	    while ( p ) {
-		p->setDirection( TQChar::DirL );
-		p->tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignLeft );
-		p->tqinvalidate( 0 );
-		p = p->next();
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    if ( !cursor->paragraph() || cursor->paragraph()->direction() == TQChar::DirL )
-		return;
-	    cursor->paragraph()->setDirection( TQChar::DirL );
-	    if ( cursor->paragraph()->length() <= 1&&
-		 ( (cursor->paragraph()->tqalignment() & (TQt::AlignLeft | TQt::AlignRight) ) != 0 ) )
-		tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignLeft );
-	}
-	repaintChanged();
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Direction_R:
-	if ( doc->textFormat() == TQt::PlainText ) {
-	    // change the whole doc
-	    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->firstParagraph();
-	    while ( p ) {
-		p->setDirection( TQChar::DirR );
-		p->tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignRight );
-		p->tqinvalidate( 0 );
-		p = p->next();
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    if ( !cursor->paragraph() || cursor->paragraph()->direction() == TQChar::DirR )
-		return;
-	    cursor->paragraph()->setDirection( TQChar::DirR );
-	    if ( cursor->paragraph()->length() <= 1&&
-		 ( (cursor->paragraph()->tqalignment() & (TQt::AlignLeft | TQt::AlignRight) ) != 0 ) )
-		tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignRight );
-	}
-	repaintChanged();
-	break;
-    default: {
-	    if ( e->text().length() &&
-		( !( e->state() & ControlButton ) &&
-#ifndef TQ_OS_MACX
-		  !( e->state() & TQt::AltButton ) &&
-#endif
-		  !( e->state() & TQt::MetaButton ) ||
-		 ( ( (e->state()&ControlButton) | TQt::AltButton ) == (ControlButton|TQt::AltButton) ) ) &&
-		 ( !e->ascii() || e->ascii() >= 32 || e->text() == "\t" ) ) {
-		clearUndoRedoInfo = FALSE;
-		if ( e->key() == Qt::Key_Tab ) {
-		    if ( d->tabChangesFocus ) {
-			e->ignore();
-			break;
-		    }
-		    if ( textFormat() == TQt::RichText && cursor->index() == 0
-			 && ( cursor->paragraph()->isListItem() || cursor->paragraph()->listDepth() ) ) {
-			clearUndoRedo();
-			undoRedoInfo.type = UndoRedoInfo::Style;
-			undoRedoInfo.id = cursor->paragraph()->paragId();
-			undoRedoInfo.eid = undoRedoInfo.id;
-			undoRedoInfo.styleInformation = TQTextStyleCommand::readStyleInformation( doc, undoRedoInfo.id, undoRedoInfo.eid );
-			cursor->paragraph()->setListDepth( cursor->paragraph()->listDepth() +1 );
-			clearUndoRedo();
-			drawCursor( FALSE );
-			repaintChanged();
-			drawCursor( TRUE );
-			break;
-		    }
-		} else if ( e->key() == TQt::Key_BackTab ) {
-		    if ( d->tabChangesFocus ) {
-			e->ignore();
-			break;
-		    }
-		}
-
-		if ( ( autoFormatting() & AutoBulletList ) &&
-		     textFormat() == TQt::RichText && cursor->index() == 0
-		     && !cursor->paragraph()->isListItem()
-		     && ( e->text()[0] == '-' || e->text()[0] == '*' ) ) {
-			clearUndoRedo();
-			undoRedoInfo.type = UndoRedoInfo::Style;
-			undoRedoInfo.id = cursor->paragraph()->paragId();
-			undoRedoInfo.eid = undoRedoInfo.id;
-			undoRedoInfo.styleInformation = TQTextStyleCommand::readStyleInformation( doc, undoRedoInfo.id, undoRedoInfo.eid );
-			setParagType( TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem, TQStyleSheetItem::ListDisc );
-			clearUndoRedo();
-			drawCursor( FALSE );
-			repaintChanged();
-			drawCursor( TRUE );
-			break;
-		}
-		if (overWrite && !cursor->atParagEnd() && !doc->hasSelection(TQTextDocument::Standard)) {
-                    doKeyboardAction(ActionDelete);
-                    clearUndoRedoInfo = FALSE;
-                }
-		TQString t = e->text();
-#ifdef TQ_WS_X11
-		extern bool qt_hebrew_keyboard_hack;
-		if ( qt_hebrew_keyboard_hack ) {
-		    // the X11 keyboard tqlayout is broken and does not reverse
-		    // braces correctly. This is a hack to get halfway correct
-		    // behaviour
-		    TQTextParagraph *p = cursor->paragraph();
-		    if ( p && p->string() && p->string()->isRightToLeft() ) {
-			TQChar *c = (TQChar *)t.tqunicode();
-			int l = t.length();
-			while( l-- ) {
-			    if ( c->mirrored() )
-				*c = c->mirroredChar();
-			    c++;
-			}
-		    }
-		}
-#endif
-		insert( t, TRUE, FALSE );
-		break;
-	    } else if ( e->state() & ControlButton ) {
-		switch ( e->key() ) {
-		case Qt::Key_C: case Qt::Key_F16: // Copy key on Sun keyboards
-		    copy();
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_V:
-		    paste();
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_X:
-		    cut();
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_I: case Qt::Key_T: case Qt::Key_Tab:
-		    if ( !d->tabChangesFocus )
-			indent();
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_A:
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-		    moveCursor( MoveLineStart, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-#else
-		    selectAll( TRUE );
-#endif
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_B:
-		    moveCursor( MoveBackward, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_F:
-		    moveCursor( MoveForward, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_D:
-		    if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-			removeSelectedText();
-			break;
-		    }
-		    doKeyboardAction( ActionDelete );
-		    clearUndoRedoInfo = FALSE;
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_H:
-		    if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-			removeSelectedText();
-			break;
-		    }
-		    if ( !cursor->paragraph()->prev() &&
-			 cursor->atParagStart() )
-			break;
-
-		    doKeyboardAction( ActionBackspace );
-		    clearUndoRedoInfo = FALSE;
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_E:
-		    moveCursor( MoveLineEnd, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_N:
-		    moveCursor( MoveDown, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_P:
-		    moveCursor( MoveUp, e->state() & ShiftButton );
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_Z:
-		    if(e->state() & ShiftButton)
-			redo();
-		    else
-			undo();
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_Y:
-		    redo();
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_K:
-		    doKeyboardAction( ActionKill );
-		    break;
-#if defined(TQ_WS_WIN)
-		case Qt::Key_Insert:
-		    copy();
-		    break;
-		case Qt::Key_Delete:
-		    del();
-		    break;
-#endif
-		default:
-		    unknownKey = FALSE;
-		    break;
-		}
-	    } else {
-		unknownKey = TRUE;
-	    }
-        }
-    }
-
-    emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor );
-    emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor->paragraph()->paragId(), cursor->index() );
-    if ( clearUndoRedoInfo )
-	clearUndoRedo();
-    changeIntervalTimer->start( 100, TRUE );
-    if ( unknownKey )
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-/*!
-  This function is not intended as polymorphic usage. Just a shared code
-  fragment that calls TQWidget::sendMouseEventToInputContext() easily for this
-  class.
- */
-bool TQTextEdit::sendMouseEventToInputContext( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IM
-    if ( d->composeMode() ) {
-	TQTextCursor c( doc );
-	if ( c.place( e->pos(), doc->firstParagraph(), FALSE ) ) {
-	    int mousePos = c.index() - d->preeditStart;
-	    if ( cursor->globalY() == c.globalY() &&
-		 mousePos >= 0 && mousePos < d->preeditLength ) {
-		TQWidget::sendMouseEventToInputContext( mousePos, e->type(),
-						       e->button(), e->state() );
-	    }
-	} else if ( e->type() != TQEvent::MouseMove ) {
-	    // send button events on out of preedit
-	    TQWidget::sendMouseEventToInputContext( -1, e->type(),
-						   e->button(), e->state() );
-	}
-	return TRUE;
-    }
-#endif
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::imStartEvent( TQIMEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( hasSelectedText() )
-	removeSelectedText();
-    d->preeditStart = cursor->index();
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    undoRedoInfo.type = UndoRedoInfo::IME;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::imComposeEvent( TQIMEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::IMCompositionText );
-    doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::IMSelectionText );
-
-    if ( d->composeMode() && cursor->paragraph() )
-	cursor->paragraph()->remove( d->preeditStart, d->preeditLength );
-    cursor->setIndex( d->preeditStart );
-    d->preeditLength = e->text().length();
-
-    int sellen = e->selectionLength();
-    uint insertionFlags = CheckNewLines | RemoveSelected | AsIMCompositionText;
-    if ( sellen > 0 ) {
-      insertionFlags |= WithIMSelection;
-    }
-    insert( e->text(), insertionFlags );
-    // insert can trigger an imEnd event as it emits a textChanged signal, so better
-    // be careful
-    if(d->preeditStart != -1) {
-	cursor->setIndex( d->preeditStart + d->preeditLength );
-	TQTextCursor c = *cursor;
-	cursor->setIndex( d->preeditStart );
-	doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::IMCompositionText, *cursor );
-	doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::IMCompositionText, c );
-
-	cursor->setIndex( d->preeditStart + e->cursorPos() );
-
-	if ( sellen > 0 ) {
-	    cursor->setIndex( d->preeditStart + e->cursorPos() + sellen );
-	    c = *cursor;
-	    cursor->setIndex( d->preeditStart + e->cursorPos() );
-	    doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::IMSelectionText, *cursor );
-	    doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::IMSelectionText, c );
-#if 0
- 	    // Disabled for Asian input method that shows candidate
- 	    // window. This behavior is same as TQt/E 2.3.7 which supports
- 	    // Asian input methods. Asian input methods need start point
- 	    // of IM selection text to place candidate window as adjacent
- 	    // to the selection text.
-	    cursor->setIndex( d->preeditStart + d->preeditLength );
-#endif
-	}
-    }
-
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-    repaintChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::imEndEvent( TQIMEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::IMCompositionText );
-    doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::IMSelectionText );
-
-    if (undoRedoInfo.type == UndoRedoInfo::IME)
-        undoRedoInfo.type = UndoRedoInfo::Invalid;
-
-    if ( d->composeMode() && cursor->paragraph() )
-	cursor->paragraph()->remove( d->preeditStart, d->preeditLength );
-    if ( d->preeditStart >= 0 ) {
-        cursor->setIndex( d->preeditStart );
-	//TODO: TQt 4 we should use the new virtual insert function
-	insert( e->text(), FALSE );
-    }
-    d->preeditStart = d->preeditLength = -1;
-
-    repaintChanged();
-}
-
-
-static bool qtextedit_ignore_readonly = FALSE;
-
-/*!
-    Executes keyboard action \a action. This is normally called by a
-    key event handler.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::doKeyboardAction( KeyboardAction action )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() && !qtextedit_ignore_readonly )
-	return;
-
-    if ( cursor->nestedDepth() != 0 ) // #### for 3.0, disable editing of tables as this is not advanced enough
-	return;
-
-    lastFormatted = cursor->paragraph();
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    bool doUpdateCurrentFormat = TRUE;
-
-    switch ( action ) {
-    case ActionWordDelete:
-    case ActionDelete:
-	if ( action == ActionDelete && !cursor->atParagEnd() ) {
-	    if ( undoEnabled ) {
-		checkUndoRedoInfo( UndoRedoInfo::Delete );
-		if ( !undoRedoInfo.valid() ) {
-		    undoRedoInfo.id = cursor->paragraph()->paragId();
-		    undoRedoInfo.index = cursor->index();
-		    undoRedoInfo.d->text = TQString::null;
-		}
-		int idx = cursor->index();
-		do {
-		    undoRedoInfo.d->text.insert( undoRedoInfo.d->text.length(), cursor->paragraph()->at( idx++ ), TRUE );
-		} while ( !cursor->paragraph()->string()->validCursorPosition( idx ) );
-	    }
-	    cursor->remove();
-	} else {
-	    clearUndoRedo();
-	    doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Temp, *cursor );
-	    if ( action == ActionWordDelete && !cursor->atParagEnd() ) {
-		cursor->gotoNextWord();
-	    } else {
-		cursor->gotoNextLetter();
-	    }
-	    doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Temp, *cursor );
-	    removeSelectedText( TQTextDocument::Temp );
-	}
-	break;
-    case ActionWordBackspace:
-    case ActionBackspace:
-	if ( textFormat() == TQt::RichText
-	     && (cursor->paragraph()->isListItem()
-		 || cursor->paragraph()->listDepth() )
-	     && cursor->index() == 0 ) {
-	    if ( undoEnabled ) {
-		clearUndoRedo();
-		undoRedoInfo.type = UndoRedoInfo::Style;
-		undoRedoInfo.id = cursor->paragraph()->paragId();
-		undoRedoInfo.eid = undoRedoInfo.id;
-		undoRedoInfo.styleInformation = TQTextStyleCommand::readStyleInformation( doc, undoRedoInfo.id, undoRedoInfo.eid );
-	    }
-	    int ldepth = cursor->paragraph()->listDepth();
-	    if ( cursor->paragraph()->isListItem() && ldepth == 1 ) {
-		cursor->paragraph()->setListItem( FALSE );
-	    } else if ( TQMAX( ldepth, 1 ) == 1 ) {
-		cursor->paragraph()->setListItem( FALSE );
-		cursor->paragraph()->setListDepth( 0 );
-	    } else {
-		cursor->paragraph()->setListDepth( ldepth - 1 );
-	    }
-	    clearUndoRedo();
-	    lastFormatted = cursor->paragraph();
-	    repaintChanged();
-	    drawCursor( TRUE );
-	    return;
-	}
-
-	if ( action == ActionBackspace && !cursor->atParagStart() ) {
-	    if ( undoEnabled ) {
-		checkUndoRedoInfo( UndoRedoInfo::Delete );
-		if ( !undoRedoInfo.valid() ) {
-		    undoRedoInfo.id = cursor->paragraph()->paragId();
-		    undoRedoInfo.index = cursor->index();
-		    undoRedoInfo.d->text = TQString::null;
-		}
-		undoRedoInfo.d->text.insert( 0, cursor->paragraph()->at( cursor->index()-1 ), TRUE );
-		undoRedoInfo.index = cursor->index()-1;
-	    }
-	    cursor->removePreviousChar();
-	    lastFormatted = cursor->paragraph();
-	} else if ( cursor->paragraph()->prev()
-		    || (action == ActionWordBackspace
-			&& !cursor->atParagStart()) ) {
-	    clearUndoRedo();
-	    doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Temp, *cursor );
-	    if ( action == ActionWordBackspace && !cursor->atParagStart() ) {
-		cursor->gotoPreviousWord();
-	    } else {
-		cursor->gotoPreviousLetter();
-	    }
-	    doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Temp, *cursor );
-	    removeSelectedText( TQTextDocument::Temp );
-	}
-	break;
-    case ActionReturn:
-	if ( undoEnabled ) {
-	    checkUndoRedoInfo( UndoRedoInfo::Return );
-	    if ( !undoRedoInfo.valid() ) {
-		undoRedoInfo.id = cursor->paragraph()->paragId();
-		undoRedoInfo.index = cursor->index();
-		undoRedoInfo.d->text = TQString::null;
-	    }
-	    undoRedoInfo.d->text += "\n";
-	}
-	cursor->splitAndInsertEmptyParagraph();
-	if ( cursor->paragraph()->prev() ) {
-	    lastFormatted = cursor->paragraph()->prev();
-	    lastFormatted->tqinvalidate( 0 );
-	}
-	doUpdateCurrentFormat = FALSE;
-	break;
-    case ActionKill:
-	clearUndoRedo();
-	doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Temp, *cursor );
-	if ( cursor->atParagEnd() )
-	    cursor->gotoNextLetter();
-	else
-	    cursor->setIndex( cursor->paragraph()->length() - 1 );
-	doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Temp, *cursor );
-	removeSelectedText( TQTextDocument::Temp );
-	break;
-    }
-
-    formatMore();
-    repaintChanged();
-    ensureCursorVisible();
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-    if ( doUpdateCurrentFormat )
-	updateCurrentFormat();
-    setModified();
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::readFormats( TQTextCursor &c1, TQTextCursor &c2, TQTextString &text, bool fillStyles )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DATASTREAM
-    TQDataStream styleStream( undoRedoInfo.styleInformation, IO_WriteOnly );
-#endif
-    c2.restoreState();
-    c1.restoreState();
-    int lastIndex = text.length();
-    if ( c1.paragraph() == c2.paragraph() ) {
-	for ( int i = c1.index(); i < c2.index(); ++i )
-	    text.insert( lastIndex + i - c1.index(), c1.paragraph()->at( i ), TRUE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DATASTREAM
-	if ( fillStyles ) {
-	    styleStream << (int) 1;
-	    c1.paragraph()->writeStyleInformation( styleStream );
-	}
-#endif
-    } else {
-	int i;
-	for ( i = c1.index(); i < c1.paragraph()->length()-1; ++i )
-	    text.insert( lastIndex++, c1.paragraph()->at( i ), TRUE );
-	int num = 2; // start and end, being different
-	text += "\n"; lastIndex++;
-
-        if (c1.paragraph()->next() != c2.paragraph()) {
-            num += text.appendParagraphs(c1.paragraph()->next(), c2.paragraph());
-            lastIndex = text.length();
-        }
-
-	for ( i = 0; i < c2.index(); ++i )
-	    text.insert( i + lastIndex, c2.paragraph()->at( i ), TRUE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DATASTREAM
-	if ( fillStyles ) {
-	    styleStream << num;
-	    for ( TQTextParagraph *p = c1.paragraph(); --num >= 0; p = p->next() )
-		p->writeStyleInformation( styleStream );
-	}
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the selection \a selNum (by default 0). This does not
-    remove the selected text.
-
-    \sa removeSelectedText()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::removeSelection( int selNum )
-{
-    doc->removeSelection( selNum );
-    repaintChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Deletes the text of selection \a selNum (by default, the default
-    selection, 0). If there is no selected text nothing happens.
-
-    \sa selectedText removeSelection()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::removeSelectedText( int selNum )
-{
-    if(selNum != 0)
-        resetInputContext();
-
-    TQTextCursor c1 = doc->selectionStartCursor( selNum );
-    c1.restoreState();
-    TQTextCursor c2 = doc->selectionEndCursor( selNum );
-    c2.restoreState();
-
-    // ### no support for editing tables yet, plus security for broken selections
-    if ( c1.nestedDepth() || c2.nestedDepth() )
-	return;
-
-    for ( int i = 0; i < (int)doc->numSelections(); ++i ) {
-	if ( i == selNum )
-	    continue;
-	doc->removeSelection( i );
-    }
-
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    if ( undoEnabled ) {
-	checkUndoRedoInfo( UndoRedoInfo::RemoveSelected );
-	if ( !undoRedoInfo.valid() ) {
-	    doc->selectionStart( selNum, undoRedoInfo.id, undoRedoInfo.index );
-	    undoRedoInfo.d->text = TQString::null;
-	}
-	readFormats( c1, c2, undoRedoInfo.d->text, TRUE );
-    }
-
-    doc->removeSelectedText( selNum, cursor );
-    if ( cursor->isValid() ) {
-	lastFormatted = 0; // make sync a noop
-	ensureCursorVisible();
-	lastFormatted = cursor->paragraph();
-	formatMore();
-	repaintContents( FALSE );
-	ensureCursorVisible();
-	drawCursor( TRUE );
-	clearUndoRedo();
-#if defined(TQ_WS_WIN)
-	// there seems to be a problem with repainting or erasing the area
-	// of the scrollview which is not the contents on windows
-	if ( contentsHeight() < visibleHeight() )
-	    viewport()->tqrepaint( 0, contentsHeight(), visibleWidth(), visibleHeight() - contentsHeight(), TRUE );
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-	updateMicroFocusHint();
-    } else {
-	delete cursor;
-	cursor = new TQTextCursor( doc );
-	drawCursor( TRUE );
-	repaintContents( TRUE );
-    }
-    setModified();
-    emit textChanged();
-    emit selectionChanged();
-    emit copyAvailable( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Moves the text cursor according to \a action. This is normally
-    used by some key event handler. \a select specifies whether the
-    text between the current cursor position and the new position
-    should be selected.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::moveCursor( CursorAction action, bool select )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	return;
-#endif
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MACX
-    TQTextCursor c1 = *cursor;
-    TQTextCursor c2;
-#endif
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    if ( select ) {
-	if ( !doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) )
-	    doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, *cursor );
-	moveCursor( action );
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MACX
-	c2 = *cursor;
-	if (c1 == c2)
-	    if (action == MoveDown || action == MovePgDown)
-		moveCursor( MoveEnd );
-	    else if (action == MoveUp || action == MovePgUp)
-		moveCursor( MoveHome );
-#endif
-	if ( doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Standard, *cursor ) ) {
-	    cursor->paragraph()->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = TRUE;
-	    repaintChanged();
-	} else {
-	    drawCursor( TRUE );
-	}
-	ensureCursorVisible();
-	emit selectionChanged();
-	emit copyAvailable( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) );
-    } else {
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MACX
-	TQTextCursor cStart = doc->selectionStartCursor( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	TQTextCursor cEnd = doc->selectionEndCursor( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	bool redraw = doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	if (redraw && action == MoveDown)
-	    *cursor = cEnd;
-	else if (redraw && action == MoveUp)
-	    *cursor = cStart;
-	if (redraw && action == MoveForward)
-	    *cursor = cEnd;
-	else if (redraw && action == MoveBackward)
-	    *cursor = cStart;
-	else
-	    moveCursor( action );
-	c2 = *cursor;
-	if (c1 == c2)
-	    if (action == MoveDown)
-		moveCursor( MoveEnd );
-	    else if (action == MoveUp)
-		moveCursor( MoveHome );
-#else
-	bool redraw = doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	moveCursor( action );
-#endif
-	if ( !redraw ) {
-	    ensureCursorVisible();
-	    drawCursor( TRUE );
-	} else {
-	    cursor->paragraph()->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = TRUE;
-	    repaintChanged();
-	    ensureCursorVisible();
-	    drawCursor( TRUE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-	}
-	if ( redraw ) {
-	    emit copyAvailable( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) );
-	    emit selectionChanged();
-	}
-    }
-
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    updateCurrentFormat();
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::moveCursor( CursorAction action )
-{
-    resetInputContext();
-    switch ( action ) {
-    case MoveBackward:
-	cursor->gotoPreviousLetter();
-	break;
-    case MoveWordBackward:
-	cursor->gotoPreviousWord();
-	break;
-    case MoveForward:
-	cursor->gotoNextLetter();
-	break;
-    case MoveWordForward:
-	cursor->gotoNextWord();
-	break;
-    case MoveUp:
-	cursor->gotoUp();
-	break;
-    case MovePgUp:
-	cursor->gotoPageUp( visibleHeight() );
-	break;
-    case MoveDown:
-	cursor->gotoDown();
-	break;
-    case MovePgDown:
-	cursor->gotoPageDown( visibleHeight() );
-	break;
-    case MoveLineStart:
-	cursor->gotoLineStart();
-	break;
-    case MoveHome:
-	cursor->gotoHome();
-	break;
-    case MoveLineEnd:
-	cursor->gotoLineEnd();
-	break;
-    case MoveEnd:
-	ensureFormatted( doc->lastParagraph() );
-	cursor->gotoEnd();
-	break;
-    }
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-    updateCurrentFormat();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    TQScrollView::resizeEvent( e );
-    if ( doc->visibleWidth() == 0 )
-	doResize();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::viewportResizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    TQScrollView::viewportResizeEvent( e );
-    if ( e->oldSize().width() != e->size().width() ) {
-	bool stayAtBottom = e->oldSize().height() != e->size().height() &&
-	       contentsY() > 0 && contentsY() >= doc->height() - e->oldSize().height();
-	doResize();
-	if ( stayAtBottom )
-	    scrollToBottom();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Ensures that the cursor is visible by scrolling the text edit if
-    necessary.
-
-    \sa setCursorPosition()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::ensureCursorVisible()
-{
-    // Not visible or the user is draging the window, so don't position to caret yet
-    if ( !isUpdatesEnabled() || !isVisible() || isHorizontalSliderPressed() || isVerticalSliderPressed() ) {
-	d->ensureCursorVisibleInShowEvent = TRUE;
-	return;
-    }
-    sync();
-    TQTextStringChar *chr = cursor->paragraph()->at( cursor->index() );
-    int h = cursor->paragraph()->lineHeightOfChar( cursor->index() );
-    int x = cursor->paragraph()->rect().x() + chr->x + cursor->offsetX();
-    int y = 0; int dummy;
-    cursor->paragraph()->lineHeightOfChar( cursor->index(), &dummy, &y );
-    y += cursor->paragraph()->rect().y() + cursor->offsetY();
-    int w = 1;
-    ensureVisible( x, y + h / 2, w, h / 2 + 2 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::sliderReleased()
-{
-    if ( d->ensureCursorVisibleInShowEvent && isVisible() ) {
-	d->ensureCursorVisibleInShowEvent = FALSE;
-	ensureCursorVisible();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::drawCursor( bool visible )
-{
-    if ( !isUpdatesEnabled() ||
-	 !viewport()->isUpdatesEnabled() ||
-	 !cursor->paragraph() ||
-	 !cursor->paragraph()->isValid() ||
-	 ( !tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_BlinkCursorWhenTextSelected ) &&
-	   ( d->optimMode ? optimHasSelection() : doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, TRUE ))) ||
-	 ( visible && !hasFocus() && !viewport()->hasFocus() && !inDnD ) ||
-         doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::IMSelectionText ) ||
-	 isReadOnly() )
-	return;
-
-    // Asian users regard selection text as cursor on candidate
-    // selection phase of input method, so ordinary cursor should be
-    // invisible if IM selection text exists.
-    if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::IMSelectionText ) ) {
-        visible = FALSE;
-    }
-
-    TQPainter p( viewport() );
-    TQRect r( cursor->topParagraph()->rect() );
-    cursor->paragraph()->setChanged( TRUE );
-    p.translate( -contentsX() + cursor->totalOffsetX(), -contentsY() + cursor->totalOffsetY() );
-    TQPixmap *pix = 0;
-    TQColorGroup cg( tqcolorGroup() );
-    const TQColorGroup::ColorRole backRole = TQPalette::backgroundRoleFromMode(backgroundMode());
-    if ( cursor->paragraph()->background() )
-	cg.setBrush( backRole, *cursor->paragraph()->background() );
-    else if ( doc->paper() )
-	cg.setBrush( backRole, *doc->paper() );
-    p.setBrushOrigin( -contentsX(), -contentsY() );
-    cursor->paragraph()->document()->nextDoubleBuffered = TRUE;
-    if ( !cursor->nestedDepth() ) {
-	int h = cursor->paragraph()->lineHeightOfChar( cursor->index() );
-	int dist = 5;
-	if ( ( cursor->paragraph()->tqalignment() & TQt::AlignJustify ) == TQt::AlignJustify )
-	    dist = 50;
-	int x = r.x() - cursor->totalOffsetX() + cursor->x() - dist;
-	x = TQMAX( x, 0 );
-	p.setClipRect( TQRect( x - contentsX(),
-			      r.y() - cursor->totalOffsetY() + cursor->y() - contentsY(), 2 * dist, h ) );
-	doc->drawParagraph( &p, cursor->paragraph(), x,
-			r.y() - cursor->totalOffsetY() + cursor->y(), 2 * dist, h, pix, cg, visible, cursor );
-    } else {
-	doc->drawParagraph( &p, cursor->paragraph(), r.x() - cursor->totalOffsetX(),
-			r.y() - cursor->totalOffsetY(), r.width(), r.height(),
-			pix, cg, visible, cursor );
-    }
-    cursorVisible = visible;
-}
-
-enum {
-    IdUndo = 0,
-    IdRedo = 1,
-    IdCut = 2,
-    IdCopy = 3,
-    IdPaste = 4,
-    IdClear = 5,
-    IdSelectAll = 6
-};
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-void TQTextEdit::contentsWheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() ) {
-	if ( e->state() & ControlButton ) {
-	    if ( e->delta() > 0 )
-		zoomOut();
-	    else if ( e->delta() < 0 )
-		zoomIn();
-	    return;
-	}
-    }
-    TQScrollView::contentsWheelEvent( e );
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::contentsMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	optimMousePressEvent( e );
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-
-    if ( sendMouseEventToInputContext( e ) )
-	return;
-
-    if ( d->trippleClickTimer->isActive() &&
-	 ( e->globalPos() - d->trippleClickPoint ).manhattanLength() <
-	 TQApplication::startDragDistance() ) {
-	TQTextCursor c1 = *cursor;
-	TQTextCursor c2 = *cursor;
-	c1.gotoLineStart();
-	c2.gotoLineEnd();
-	doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, c1 );
-	doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Standard, c2 );
-	*cursor = c2;
-	repaintChanged();
-	mousePressed = TRUE;
-	return;
-    }
-
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    TQTextCursor oldCursor = *cursor;
-    TQTextCursor c = *cursor;
-    mousePos = e->pos();
-    mightStartDrag = FALSE;
-    pressedLink = TQString::null;
-    d->pressedName = TQString::null;
-
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	mousePressed = TRUE;
-	drawCursor( FALSE );
-	placeCursor( e->pos() );
-	ensureCursorVisible();
-
-	if ( isReadOnly() && linksEnabled() ) {
-	    TQTextCursor c = *cursor;
-	    placeCursor( e->pos(), &c, TRUE );
-	    if ( c.paragraph() && c.paragraph()->at( c.index() ) &&
-		 c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->isAnchor() ) {
-		pressedLink = c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->anchorHref();
-		d->pressedName = c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->anchorName();
-	    }
-	}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-	if ( doc->inSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, e->pos() ) ) {
-	    mightStartDrag = TRUE;
-	    drawCursor( TRUE );
-	    dragStartTimer->start( TQApplication::startDragTime(), TRUE );
-	    dragStartPos = e->pos();
-	    return;
-	}
-#endif
-
-	bool redraw = FALSE;
-	if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-	    if ( !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) ) {
-		redraw = doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-		doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, *cursor );
-	    } else {
-		redraw = doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Standard, *cursor ) || redraw;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    if ( isReadOnly() || !( e->state() & ShiftButton ) ) {
-		doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, *cursor );
-	    } else {
-		doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, c );
-		redraw = doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Standard, *cursor ) || redraw;
-	    }
-	}
-
-	for ( int i = 1; i < doc->numSelections(); ++i ) // start with 1 as we don't want to remove the Standard-Selection
-	    redraw = doc->removeSelection( i ) || redraw;
-
-	if ( !redraw ) {
-	    drawCursor( TRUE );
-	} else {
-	    repaintChanged();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-	}
-    } else if ( e->button() == Qt::MidButton ) {
-	bool redraw = doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	if ( !redraw ) {
-	    drawCursor( TRUE );
-	} else {
-	    repaintChanged();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( *cursor != oldCursor )
-	updateCurrentFormat();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	optimMouseMoveEvent( e );
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    if ( sendMouseEventToInputContext( e ) ) {
-	// don't return from here to avoid cursor vanishing
-    } else if ( mousePressed ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-	if ( mightStartDrag ) {
-	    dragStartTimer->stop();
-	    if ( ( e->pos() - dragStartPos ).manhattanLength() > TQApplication::startDragDistance() ) {
-		TQGuardedPtr<TQTextEdit> guard( this );
-		startDrag();
-		if (guard.isNull()) // we got deleted during the dnd
-                    return;
-	    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    if ( !isReadOnly() )
-		viewport()->setCursor( Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-	    return;
-	}
-#endif
-	mousePos = e->pos();
-	handleMouseMove( mousePos );
-	oldMousePos = mousePos;
-    }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    if ( !isReadOnly() && !mousePressed ) {
-	if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) && doc->inSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, e->pos() ) )
-	    viewport()->setCursor( Qt::ArrowCursor );
-	else
-	    viewport()->setCursor( Qt::IBeamCursor );
-    }
-#endif
-    updateCursor( e->pos() );
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::copyToClipboard()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    if (TQApplication::tqclipboard()->supportsSelection()) {
-	d->clipboard_mode = TQClipboard::Selection;
-
-	// don't listen to selection changes
-	disconnect( TQApplication::tqclipboard(), TQT_SIGNAL(selectionChanged()), this, 0);
-	copy();
-	// listen to selection changes
-	connect( TQApplication::tqclipboard(), TQT_SIGNAL(selectionChanged()),
-		 this, TQT_SLOT(clipboardChanged()) );
-
-	d->clipboard_mode = TQClipboard::Clipboard;
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::contentsMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( !inDoubleClick && !d->composeMode() ) { // could be the release of a dblclick
-	int para = 0;
-	int index = charAt( e->pos(), &para );
-	emit clicked( para, index );
-    }
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	optimMouseReleaseEvent( e );
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    if ( sendMouseEventToInputContext( e ) )
-	return;
-    TQTextCursor oldCursor = *cursor;
-    if ( scrollTimer->isActive() )
-	scrollTimer->stop();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    if ( dragStartTimer->isActive() )
-	dragStartTimer->stop();
-    if ( mightStartDrag ) {
-	selectAll( FALSE );
-	mousePressed = FALSE;
-    }
-#endif
-    bool mouseWasPressed = mousePressed;
-    if ( mousePressed ) {
-	mousePressed = FALSE;
-	copyToClipboard();
-    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    else if ( e->button() == Qt::MidButton && !isReadOnly() ) {
-        // only do middle-click pasting on systems that have selections (ie. X11)
-        if (TQApplication::tqclipboard()->supportsSelection()) {
-            drawCursor( FALSE );
-            placeCursor( e->pos() );
-            ensureCursorVisible();
-            doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, oldCursor );
-            bool redraw = FALSE;
-            if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-                redraw = doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-                doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, *cursor );
-            } else {
-                doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, *cursor );
-            }
-            // start with 1 as we don't want to remove the Standard-Selection
-            for ( int i = 1; i < doc->numSelections(); ++i )
-                redraw = doc->removeSelection( i ) || redraw;
-            if ( !redraw ) {
-                drawCursor( TRUE );
-            } else {
-                repaintChanged();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-                viewport()->setCursor( Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-            }
-	    d->clipboard_mode = TQClipboard::Selection;
-            paste();
-	    d->clipboard_mode = TQClipboard::Clipboard;
-        }
-    }
-#endif
-    emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor );
-    emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor->paragraph()->paragId(), cursor->index() );
-    if ( oldCursor != *cursor )
-	updateCurrentFormat();
-    inDoubleClick = FALSE;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_NETWORKPROTOCOL
-    if ( (   (!onLink.isEmpty() && onLink == pressedLink)
-	  || (!d->onName.isEmpty() && d->onName == d->pressedName))
-	 && linksEnabled() && mouseWasPressed ) {
-	if (!onLink.isEmpty()) {
-	    TQUrl u( doc->context(), onLink, TRUE );
-	    emitLinkClicked( u.toString( FALSE, FALSE ) );
-	}
-	if (::tqqt_cast<TQTextBrowser*>(this)) { // change for 4.0
-	    TQConnectionList *clist = tqreceivers(
-			"anchorClicked(const TQString&,const TQString&)");
-	    if (!tqsignalsBlocked() && clist) {
-		TQUObject o[3];
-		static_TQUType_TQString.set(o+1, d->onName);
-		static_TQUType_TQString.set(o+2, onLink);
-		activate_signal( clist, o);
-	    }
-	}
-
-	// emitting linkClicked() may result in that the cursor winds
-	// up hovering over a different valid link - check this and
-	// set the appropriate cursor tqshape
-	updateCursor( e->pos() );
-    }
-#endif
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    if ( !doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, TRUE ) )
-	doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-
-    emit copyAvailable( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) );
-    emit selectionChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton && !d->composeMode() ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    int para = 0;
-    int index = charAt( e->pos(), &para );
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	TQString str = d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(para) ];
-	int startIdx = index, endIdx = index, i;
-	if ( !str[ index ].isSpace() ) {
-	    i = startIdx;
-	    // find start of word
-	    while ( i >= 0 && !str[ i ].isSpace() ) {
-		startIdx = i--;
-	    }
-	    i = endIdx;
-	    // find end of word..
-	    while ( (uint) i < str.length() && !str[ i ].isSpace() ) {
-		endIdx = ++i;
-	    }
-	    // ..and start of next
-	    while ( (uint) i < str.length() && str[ i ].isSpace() ) {
-		endIdx = ++i;
-	    }
-	    optimSetSelection( para, startIdx, para, endIdx );
-	    repaintContents( FALSE );
-	}
-    } else
-#endif
-    {
-	if ( sendMouseEventToInputContext( e ) )
-	    return;
-
-	TQTextCursor c1 = *cursor;
-	TQTextCursor c2 = *cursor;
-#if defined(TQ_OS_MAC)
-	TQTextParagraph *para = cursor->paragraph();
-	if ( cursor->isValid() ) {
-	    if ( para->at( cursor->index() )->c.isLetterOrNumber() ) {
-		while ( c1.index() > 0 &&
-			c1.paragraph()->at( c1.index()-1 )->c.isLetterOrNumber() )
-		    c1.gotoPreviousLetter();
-		while ( c2.paragraph()->at( c2.index() )->c.isLetterOrNumber() &&
-			!c2.atParagEnd() )
-		    c2.gotoNextLetter();
-	    } else if ( para->at( cursor->index() )->c.isSpace() ) {
-		while ( c1.index() > 0 &&
-			c1.paragraph()->at( c1.index()-1 )->c.isSpace() )
-		    c1.gotoPreviousLetter();
-		while ( c2.paragraph()->at( c2.index() )->c.isSpace() &&
-			!c2.atParagEnd() )
-		    c2.gotoNextLetter();
-	    } else if ( !c2.atParagEnd() ) {
-		c2.gotoNextLetter();
-	    }
-	}
-#else
-	if ( cursor->index() > 0 && !cursor->paragraph()->at( cursor->index()-1 )->c.isSpace() )
-	    c1.gotoPreviousWord();
-	if ( !cursor->paragraph()->at( cursor->index() )->c.isSpace() && !cursor->atParagEnd() )
-	    c2.gotoNextWord();
-#endif
-	doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, c1 );
-	doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Standard, c2 );
-
-	*cursor = c2;
-
-	repaintChanged();
-
-	d->trippleClickTimer->start( tqApp->doubleClickInterval(), TRUE );
-	d->trippleClickPoint = e->globalPos();
-    }
-    inDoubleClick = TRUE;
-    mousePressed = TRUE;
-    emit doubleClicked( para, index );
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::contentsDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() || !TQTextDrag::canDecode( e ) ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    e->acceptAction();
-    inDnD = TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::contentsDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() || !TQTextDrag::canDecode( e ) ) {
-	e->ignore();
-	return;
-    }
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    placeCursor( e->pos(),  cursor );
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    e->acceptAction();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent * )
-{
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    inDnD = FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() )
-	return;
-    inDnD = FALSE;
-    e->acceptAction();
-    bool intern = FALSE;
-    if ( TQRichTextDrag::canDecode( e ) ) {
-	bool hasSel = doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	bool internalDrag = e->source() == this || e->source() == viewport();
-	int dropId, dropIndex;
-	TQTextCursor insertCursor = *cursor;
-	dropId = cursor->paragraph()->paragId();
-	dropIndex = cursor->index();
-	if ( hasSel && internalDrag ) {
-	    TQTextCursor c1, c2;
-	    int selStartId, selStartIndex;
-	    int selEndId, selEndIndex;
-	    c1 = doc->selectionStartCursor( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	    c1.restoreState();
-	    c2 = doc->selectionEndCursor( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	    c2.restoreState();
-	    selStartId = c1.paragraph()->paragId();
-	    selStartIndex = c1.index();
-	    selEndId = c2.paragraph()->paragId();
-	    selEndIndex = c2.index();
-	    if ( ( ( dropId > selStartId ) ||
-		   ( dropId == selStartId && dropIndex > selStartIndex ) ) &&
-		 ( ( dropId < selEndId ) ||
-		   ( dropId == selEndId && dropIndex <= selEndIndex ) ) )
-		insertCursor = c1;
-	    if ( dropId == selEndId && dropIndex > selEndIndex ) {
-		insertCursor = c1;
-		if ( selStartId == selEndId ) {
-		    insertCursor.setIndex( dropIndex -
-					   ( selEndIndex - selStartIndex ) );
-		} else {
-		    insertCursor.setIndex( dropIndex - selEndIndex +
-					   selStartIndex );
-		}
-	    }
-	 }
-
-	if ( internalDrag && e->action() == TQDropEvent::Move ) {
-	    removeSelectedText();
-	    intern = TRUE;
-	    doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	} else {
-	    doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-	}
-	drawCursor( FALSE );
-	cursor->setParagraph( insertCursor.paragraph() );
-	cursor->setIndex( insertCursor.index() );
-	drawCursor( TRUE );
-	if ( !cursor->nestedDepth() ) {
-	    TQString subType = "plain";
-	    if ( textFormat() != TQt::PlainText ) {
-		if ( e->provides( "application/x-qrichtext" ) )
-		    subType = "x-qrichtext";
-	    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-	    pasteSubType( subType.latin1(), e );
-#endif
-	    // emit appropriate Q_SIGNALS.
-	    emit selectionChanged();
-	    emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor );
-	    emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor->paragraph()->paragId(), cursor->index() );
-	} else {
-	    if ( intern )
-		undo();
-	    e->ignore();
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::contentsContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e )
-{
-    e->accept();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IM
-    if ( d->composeMode() )
-	return;
-#endif
-
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    mousePressed = FALSE;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQTextEdit> that = this;
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQPopupMenu> popup = createPopupMenu( e->pos() );
-    if ( !popup )
-	popup = createPopupMenu();
-    if ( !popup )
-	return;
-
-    int r = popup->exec( e->globalPos() );
-    delete popup;
-    if (!that)
-        return;
-
-    if ( r == d->id[ IdClear ] )
-	clear();
-    else if ( r == d->id[ IdSelectAll ] ) {
-	selectAll();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-        // if the clipboard support selections, put the newly selected text into
-        // the clipboard
-	if (TQApplication::tqclipboard()->supportsSelection()) {
-	    d->clipboard_mode = TQClipboard::Selection;
-
-            // don't listen to selection changes
-            disconnect( TQApplication::tqclipboard(), TQT_SIGNAL(selectionChanged()), this, 0);
-	    copy();
-            // listen to selection changes
-            connect( TQApplication::tqclipboard(), TQT_SIGNAL(selectionChanged()),
-                     this, TQT_SLOT(clipboardChanged()) );
-
-	    d->clipboard_mode = TQClipboard::Clipboard;
-	}
-#endif
-    } else if ( r == d->id[ IdUndo ] )
-	undo();
-    else if ( r == d->id[ IdRedo ] )
-	redo();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    else if ( r == d->id[ IdCut ] )
-	cut();
-    else if ( r == d->id[ IdCopy ] )
-	copy();
-    else if ( r == d->id[ IdPaste ] )
-	paste();
-#endif
-#endif
-}
-
-
-void TQTextEdit::autoScrollTimerDone()
-{
-    if ( mousePressed )
-	handleMouseMove(  viewportToContents( viewport()->mapFromGlobal( TQCursor::pos() )  ) );
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::handleMouseMove( const TQPoint& pos )
-{
-    if ( !mousePressed )
-	return;
-
-    if ( !(scrollTimer->isActive() && pos.y() < contentsY()) || pos.y() > contentsY() + visibleHeight() )
-	scrollTimer->start( 100, FALSE );
-    else if ( scrollTimer->isActive() && pos.y() >= contentsY() && pos.y() <= contentsY() + visibleHeight() )
-	scrollTimer->stop();
-
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    TQTextCursor oldCursor = *cursor;
-
-    placeCursor( pos );
-
-    if ( inDoubleClick ) {
-	TQTextCursor cl = *cursor;
-	cl.gotoPreviousWord();
-	TQTextCursor cr = *cursor;
-	cr.gotoNextWord();
-
-	int diff = TQABS( oldCursor.paragraph()->at( oldCursor.index() )->x - mousePos.x() );
-	int ldiff = TQABS( cl.paragraph()->at( cl.index() )->x - mousePos.x() );
-	int rdiff = TQABS( cr.paragraph()->at( cr.index() )->x - mousePos.x() );
-
-
-	if ( cursor->paragraph()->lineStartOfChar( cursor->index() ) !=
-	     oldCursor.paragraph()->lineStartOfChar( oldCursor.index() ) )
-	    diff = 0xFFFFFF;
-
-	if ( rdiff < diff && rdiff < ldiff )
-	    *cursor = cr;
-	else if ( ldiff < diff && ldiff < rdiff )
-	    *cursor = cl;
-	else
-	    *cursor = oldCursor;
-
-    }
-    ensureCursorVisible();
-
-    bool redraw = FALSE;
-    if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-	redraw = doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Standard, *cursor ) || redraw;
-    }
-
-    if ( !redraw ) {
-	drawCursor( TRUE );
-    } else {
-	repaintChanged();
-	drawCursor( TRUE );
-    }
-
-    if ( currentFormat && currentFormat->key() != cursor->paragraph()->at( cursor->index() )->format()->key() ) {
-	currentFormat->removeRef();
-	currentFormat = doc->formatCollection()->format( cursor->paragraph()->at( cursor->index() )->format() );
-	if ( currentFormat->isMisspelled() ) {
-	    currentFormat->removeRef();
-	    currentFormat = doc->formatCollection()->format( currentFormat->font(), currentFormat->color() );
-	}
-	emit currentFontChanged( currentFormat->font() );
-	emit currentColorChanged( currentFormat->color() );
-	emit currentVerticalAlignmentChanged( (VerticalAlignment)currentFormat->vAlign() );
-    }
-
-    if ( currentAlignment != cursor->paragraph()->tqalignment() ) {
-	currentAlignment = cursor->paragraph()->tqalignment();
-	block_set_tqalignment = TRUE;
-	emit currentAlignmentChanged( currentAlignment );
-	block_set_tqalignment = FALSE;
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-
-void TQTextEdit::placeCursor( const TQPoint &pos, TQTextCursor *c, bool link )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	return;
-#endif
-    if ( !c )
-	c = cursor;
-
-    resetInputContext();
-    c->restoreState();
-    TQTextParagraph *s = doc->firstParagraph();
-    c->place( pos, s, link );
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-}
-
-
-void TQTextEdit::updateMicroFocusHint()
-{
-    TQTextCursor c( *cursor );
-#if 0
-     // Disabled for Asian input method that shows candidate
-     // window. This behavior is same as TQt/E 2.3.7 which supports
-     // Asian input methods. Asian input methods need start point of IM
-     // selection text to place candidate window as adjacent to the
-     // selection text.    
-    if ( d->preeditStart != -1 ) {
-	c.setIndex( d->preeditStart );
-        if(doc->hasSelection(TQTextDocument::IMSelectionText)) {
-            int para, index;
-            doc->selectionStart(TQTextDocument::IMSelectionText, para, index);
-            c.setIndex(index);
-        }
-    }
-#endif
-    
-    if ( hasFocus() || viewport()->hasFocus() ) {
-	int h = c.paragraph()->lineHeightOfChar( cursor->index() );
-	if ( !readonly ) {
-	    TQFont f = c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->format()->font();
-	    setMicroFocusHint( c.x() - contentsX() + frameWidth(),
-			       c.y() + cursor->paragraph()->rect().y() - contentsY() + frameWidth(), 0, h, TRUE, &f );
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-
-void TQTextEdit::formatMore()
-{
-    if ( !lastFormatted )
-	return;
-
-    int bottom = contentsHeight();
-    int lastTop = -1;
-    int lastBottom = -1;
-    int to = 20;
-    bool firstVisible = FALSE;
-    TQRect cr( contentsX(), contentsY(), visibleWidth(), visibleHeight() );
-    for ( int i = 0; lastFormatted &&
-	  ( i < to || ( firstVisible && lastTop < contentsY()+height() ) );
-	  i++ ) {
-	lastFormatted->format();
-	lastTop = lastFormatted->rect().top();
-	lastBottom = lastFormatted->rect().bottom();
-	if ( i == 0 )
-	    firstVisible = lastBottom < cr.bottom();
-	bottom = TQMAX( bottom, lastBottom );
-	lastFormatted = lastFormatted->next();
-    }
-
-    if ( bottom > contentsHeight() ) {
-	resizeContents( contentsWidth(), TQMAX( doc->height(), bottom ) );
-    } else if ( !lastFormatted && lastBottom < contentsHeight() ) {
-	resizeContents( contentsWidth(), TQMAX( doc->height(), lastBottom ) );
-	if ( contentsHeight() < visibleHeight() )
-	    updateContents( 0, contentsHeight(), visibleWidth(),
-			    visibleHeight() - contentsHeight() );
-    }
-
-    if ( lastFormatted )
-	formatTimer->start( interval, TRUE );
-    else
-	interval = TQMAX( 0, interval );
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::doResize()
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( !d->optimMode )
-#endif
-    {
-	if ( wrapMode == FixedPixelWidth )
-	    return;
-	doc->setMinimumWidth( -1 );
-	resizeContents( 0, 0 );
-	doc->setWidth( visibleWidth() );
-	doc->tqinvalidate();
-	lastFormatted = doc->firstParagraph();
-	interval = 0;
-	formatMore();
-    }
-    repaintContents( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-
-void TQTextEdit::doChangeInterval()
-{
-    interval = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( !d->optimMode && (TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) || TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(viewport())) ) {
-#else
-    if ( o == this || o == viewport() ) {
-#endif
-	if ( e->type() == TQEvent::FocusIn ) {
-	    if ( TQApplication::cursorFlashTime() > 0 )
-		blinkTimer->start( TQApplication::cursorFlashTime() / 2 );
-	    drawCursor( TRUE );
-	    updateMicroFocusHint();
-	} else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut ) {
-	    blinkTimer->stop();
-	    drawCursor( FALSE );
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this) && e->type() == TQEvent::PaletteChange ) {
-	TQColor old( viewport()->tqcolorGroup().color( TQColorGroup::Text ) );
-	if ( old != tqcolorGroup().color( TQColorGroup::Text ) ) {
-	    TQColor c( tqcolorGroup().color( TQColorGroup::Text ) );
-	    doc->setMinimumWidth( -1 );
-	    doc->setDefaultFormat( doc->formatCollection()->defaultFormat()->font(), c );
-	    lastFormatted = doc->firstParagraph();
-	    formatMore();
-	    repaintChanged();
-	}
-    }
-
-    return TQScrollView::eventFilter( o, e );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \obsolete
- */
-void TQTextEdit::insert( const TQString &text, bool indent,
-			bool checkNewLine, bool removeSelected )
-{
-    uint f = 0;
-    if ( indent )
-	f |= RedoIndentation;
-    if ( checkNewLine )
-	f |= CheckNewLines;
-    if ( removeSelected )
-	f |= RemoveSelected;
-    insert( text, f );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inserts \a text at the current cursor position.
-
-    The \a insertionFlags define how the text is inserted. If \c
-    RedoIndentation is set, the paragraph is re-indented. If \c
-    CheckNewLines is set, newline characters in \a text result in hard
-    line breaks (i.e. new paragraphs). If \c checkNewLine is not set,
-    the behaviour of the editor is undefined if the \a text contains
-    newlines. (It is not possible to change TQTextEdit's newline handling
-    behavior, but you can use TQString::replace() to preprocess text
-    before inserting it.) If \c RemoveSelected is set, any selected
-    text (in selection 0) is removed before the text is inserted.
-
-    The default flags are \c CheckNewLines | \c RemoveSelected.
-
-    If the widget is in \c LogText mode this function will do nothing.
-
-    \sa paste() pasteSubType()
-*/
-
-
-void TQTextEdit::insert( const TQString &text, uint insertionFlags )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	return;
-#endif
-
-    if ( cursor->nestedDepth() != 0 ) // #### for 3.0, disable editing of tables as this is not advanced enough
-	return;
-
-    bool indent = insertionFlags & RedoIndentation;
-    bool checkNewLine = insertionFlags & CheckNewLines;
-    bool removeSelected = insertionFlags & RemoveSelected;
-    bool imComposition = insertionFlags & AsIMCompositionText;
-    bool imSelection = insertionFlags & WithIMSelection;
-    TQString txt( text );
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    if ( !isReadOnly() && doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) && removeSelected )
-	removeSelectedText();
-    TQTextCursor c2 = *cursor;
-    int oldLen = 0;
-
-    if ( undoEnabled && !isReadOnly() && undoRedoInfo.type != UndoRedoInfo::IME ) {
-	checkUndoRedoInfo( UndoRedoInfo::Insert );
-
-        if (undoRedoInfo.valid() && undoRedoInfo.index + undoRedoInfo.d->text.length() != cursor->index()) {
-            clearUndoRedo();
-            undoRedoInfo.type = UndoRedoInfo::Insert;
-        }
-
-	if ( !undoRedoInfo.valid() ) {
-	    undoRedoInfo.id = cursor->paragraph()->paragId();
-	    undoRedoInfo.index = cursor->index();
-	    undoRedoInfo.d->text = TQString::null;
-	}
-	oldLen = undoRedoInfo.d->text.length();
-    }
-
-    lastFormatted = checkNewLine && cursor->paragraph()->prev() ?
-		    cursor->paragraph()->prev() : cursor->paragraph();
-    TQTextCursor oldCursor = *cursor;
-    cursor->insert( txt, checkNewLine );
-    if ( doc->useFormatCollection() && !doc->preProcessor() ) {
-	doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Temp, oldCursor );
-	doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Temp, *cursor );
-	doc->setFormat( TQTextDocument::Temp, currentFormat, TQTextFormat::Format );
-	doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Temp );
-    }
-
-    if ( indent && ( txt == "{" || txt == "}" || txt == ":" || txt == "#" ) )
-	cursor->indent();
-    formatMore();
-    repaintChanged();
-    ensureCursorVisible();
-    // Asian users regard selection text as cursor on candidate
-    // selection phase of input method, so ordinary cursor should be
-    // invisible if IM selection text exists.
-    drawCursor( !imSelection );
-
-    if ( undoEnabled && !isReadOnly() && undoRedoInfo.type != UndoRedoInfo::IME ) {
-	undoRedoInfo.d->text += txt;
-	if ( !doc->preProcessor() ) {
-	    for ( int i = 0; i < (int)txt.length(); ++i ) {
-		if ( txt[ i ] != '\n' && c2.paragraph()->at( c2.index() )->format() ) {
-		    c2.paragraph()->at( c2.index() )->format()->addRef();
-		    undoRedoInfo.d->text.
-			setFormat( oldLen + i,
-				   c2.paragraph()->at( c2.index() )->format(), TRUE );
-		}
-		c2.gotoNextLetter();
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( !removeSelected ) {
-	doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, oldCursor );
-	doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Standard, *cursor );
-	repaintChanged();
-    }
-    // updateMicroFocusHint() should not be invoked here when this
-    // function is invoked from imComposeEvent() because cursor
-    // postion is incorrect yet. imComposeEvent() invokes
-    // updateMicroFocusHint() later.
-    if ( !imComposition ) {
-      updateMicroFocusHint();
-    }
-    setModified();
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inserts \a text in the paragraph \a para at position \a index.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::insertAt( const TQString &text, int para, int index )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	optimInsert( text, para, index );
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    resetInputContext();
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return;
-    removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-    TQTextCursor tmp = *cursor;
-    cursor->setParagraph( p );
-    cursor->setIndex( index );
-    insert( text, FALSE, TRUE, FALSE );
-    *cursor = tmp;
-    removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Inserts \a text as a new paragraph at position \a para. If \a para
-    is -1, the text is appended. Use append() if the append operation
-    is performance critical.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::insertParagraph( const TQString &text, int para )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	optimInsert( text + "\n", para, 0 );
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    resetInputContext();
-    for ( int i = 0; i < (int)doc->numSelections(); ++i )
-	doc->removeSelection( i );
-
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-
-    bool append = !p;
-    if ( !p )
-	p = doc->lastParagraph();
-
-    TQTextCursor old = *cursor;
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-
-    cursor->setParagraph( p );
-    cursor->setIndex( 0 );
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    qtextedit_ignore_readonly = TRUE;
-    if ( append && cursor->paragraph()->length() > 1 ) {
-	cursor->setIndex( cursor->paragraph()->length() - 1 );
-	doKeyboardAction( ActionReturn );
-    }
-    insert( text, FALSE, TRUE, TRUE );
-    doKeyboardAction( ActionReturn );
-    qtextedit_ignore_readonly = FALSE;
-
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    *cursor = old;
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-
-    repaintChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the paragraph \a para.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::removeParagraph( int para )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	return;
-#endif
-    resetInputContext();
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return;
-
-    for ( int i = 0; i < doc->numSelections(); ++i )
-	doc->removeSelection( i );
-
-    TQTextCursor start( doc );
-    TQTextCursor end( doc );
-    start.setParagraph( p );
-    start.setIndex( 0 );
-    end.setParagraph( p );
-    end.setIndex( p->length() - 1 );
-
-    if ( !(p == doc->firstParagraph() && p == doc->lastParagraph()) ) {
-	if ( p->next() ) {
-	    end.setParagraph( p->next() );
-	    end.setIndex( 0 );
-	} else if ( p->prev() ) {
-	    start.setParagraph( p->prev() );
-	    start.setIndex( p->prev()->length() - 1 );
-	}
-    }
-
-    doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Temp, start );
-    doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Temp, end );
-    removeSelectedText( TQTextDocument::Temp );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Undoes the last operation.
-
-    If there is no operation to undo, i.e. there is no undo step in
-    the undo/redo history, nothing happens.
-
-    \sa undoAvailable() redo() undoDepth()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::undo()
-{
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    if ( isReadOnly() || !doc->commands()->isUndoAvailable() || !undoEnabled )
-	return;
-
-    resetInputContext();
-    for ( int i = 0; i < (int)doc->numSelections(); ++i )
-	doc->removeSelection( i );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    TQTextCursor *c = doc->undo( cursor );
-    if ( !c ) {
-	drawCursor( TRUE );
-	return;
-    }
-    lastFormatted = 0;
-    repaintChanged();
-    ensureCursorVisible();
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-    setModified();
-    // ### If we get back to a completely blank textedit, it
-    // is possible that cursor is invalid and further actions
-    // might not fix the problem, so reset the cursor here.
-    // This is copied from removeSeletedText(), it might be
-    // okay to just call that.
-    if ( !cursor->isValid() ) {
-	delete cursor;
-	cursor = new TQTextCursor( doc );
-	drawCursor( TRUE );
-	repaintContents( TRUE );
-    }
-    emit undoAvailable( isUndoAvailable() );
-    emit redoAvailable( isRedoAvailable() );
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Redoes the last operation.
-
-    If there is no operation to redo, i.e. there is no redo step in
-    the undo/redo history, nothing happens.
-
-    \sa redoAvailable() undo() undoDepth()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::redo()
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() || !doc->commands()->isRedoAvailable() || !undoEnabled )
-	return;
-
-    resetInputContext();
-    for ( int i = 0; i < (int)doc->numSelections(); ++i )
-	doc->removeSelection( i );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    TQTextCursor *c = doc->redo( cursor );
-    if ( !c ) {
-	drawCursor( TRUE );
-	return;
-    }
-    lastFormatted = 0;
-    ensureCursorVisible();
-    repaintChanged();
-    ensureCursorVisible();
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-    setModified();
-    emit undoAvailable( isUndoAvailable() );
-    emit redoAvailable( isRedoAvailable() );
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Pastes the text from the clipboard into the text edit at the
-    current cursor position. Only plain text is pasted.
-
-    If there is no text in the clipboard nothing happens.
-
-    \sa pasteSubType() cut() TQTextEdit::copy()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::paste()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIMECLIPBOARD
-    if ( isReadOnly() )
-	return;
-    TQString subType = "plain";
-    if ( textFormat() != TQt::PlainText ) {
-	TQMimeSource *m = TQApplication::tqclipboard()->data( d->clipboard_mode );
-	if ( !m )
-	    return;
-	if ( m->provides( "application/x-qrichtext" ) )
-	    subType = "x-qrichtext";
-    }
-
-    pasteSubType( subType.latin1() );
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::checkUndoRedoInfo( UndoRedoInfo::Type t )
-{
-    if ( undoRedoInfo.valid() && t != undoRedoInfo.type ) {
-	clearUndoRedo();
-    }
-    undoRedoInfo.type = t;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Repaints any paragraphs that have changed.
-
-    Although used extensively internally you shouldn't need to call
-    this yourself.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::repaintChanged()
-{
-    if ( !isUpdatesEnabled() || !viewport()->isUpdatesEnabled() )
-	return;
-
-    TQPainter p( viewport() );
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	optimDrawContents( &p, contentsX(), contentsY(), visibleWidth(), visibleHeight() );
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    p.translate( -contentsX(), -contentsY() );
-    paintDocument( FALSE, &p, contentsX(), contentsY(), visibleWidth(), visibleHeight() );
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIME
-TQTextDrag *TQTextEdit::dragObject( TQWidget *parent ) const
-{
-    if ( !doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ||
-	 doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Standard ).isEmpty() )
-	return 0;
-    if ( textFormat() != TQt::RichText )
-	return new TQTextDrag( doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Standard ), parent );
-    TQRichTextDrag *drag = new TQRichTextDrag( parent );
-    drag->setPlainText( doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Standard ) );
-    drag->setRichText( doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Standard, TRUE ) );
-    return drag;
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    Copies the selected text (from selection 0) to the clipboard and
-    deletes it from the text edit.
-
-    If there is no selected text (in selection 0) nothing happens.
-
-    \sa TQTextEdit::copy() paste() pasteSubType()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::cut()
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() )
-	return;
-    resetInputContext();
-    normalCopy();
-    removeSelectedText();
-    updateMicroFocusHint();
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::normalCopy()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIME
-    TQTextDrag *drag = dragObject();
-    if ( !drag )
-	return;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIMECLIPBOARD
-    TQApplication::tqclipboard()->setData( drag, d->clipboard_mode );
-#endif // TQT_NO_MIMECLIPBOARD
-#endif // TQT_NO_MIME
-}
-
-/*!
-    Copies any selected text (from selection 0) to the clipboard.
-
-    \sa hasSelectedText() copyAvailable()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::copy()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-# ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode && optimHasSelection() )
-	TQApplication::tqclipboard()->setText( optimSelectedText(), d->clipboard_mode );
-    else
-	normalCopy();
-# else
-    normalCopy();
-# endif
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-    Re-indents the current paragraph.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::indent()
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() )
-	return;
-
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    if ( !doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) )
-	cursor->indent();
-    else
-	doc->indentSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-    repaintChanged();
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    setModified();
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Reimplemented to allow tabbing through links. If \a n is TRUE the
-    tab moves the focus to the next child; if \a n is FALSE the tab
-    moves the focus to the previous child. Returns TRUE if the focus
-    was moved; otherwise returns FALSE.
- */
-
-bool TQTextEdit::focusNextPrevChild( bool n )
-{
-    if ( !isReadOnly() || !linksEnabled() )
-	return FALSE;
-    bool b = doc->focusNextPrevChild( n );
-    repaintChanged();
-    if ( b ) {
-        TQTextParagraph *p = doc->focusIndicator.parag;
-        int start = doc->focusIndicator.start;
-        int len = doc->focusIndicator.len;
-
-        int y = p->rect().y();
-        while ( p
-                && len == 0
-                && p->at( start )->isCustom()
-                && p->at( start )->customItem()->isNested() ) {
-
-            TQTextTable *t = (TQTextTable*)p->at( start )->customItem();
-            TQPtrList<TQTextTableCell> cells = t->tqtableCells();
-            TQTextTableCell *c;
-            for ( c = cells.first(); c; c = cells.next() ) {
-                TQTextDocument *cellDoc = c->richText();
-                if ( cellDoc->hasFocusParagraph() ) {
-                    y += c->tqgeometry().y() + c->verticalAlignmentOffset();
-
-                    p = cellDoc->focusIndicator.parag;
-                    start = cellDoc->focusIndicator.start;
-                    len = cellDoc->focusIndicator.len;
-                    if ( p )
-                        y += p->rect().y();
-
-                    break;
-                }
-            }
-        }
-        setContentsPos( contentsX(), TQMIN( y, contentsHeight() - visibleHeight() ) );
-    }
-    return b;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-  This functions sets the current format to \a f. Only the fields of \a
-  f which are specified by the \a flags are used.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setFormat( TQTextFormat *f, int flags )
-{
-    if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-	drawCursor( FALSE );
-	TQTextCursor c1 = doc->selectionStartCursor( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	c1.restoreState();
-	TQTextCursor c2 = doc->selectionEndCursor( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	c2.restoreState();
-	if ( undoEnabled ) {
-	    clearUndoRedo();
-	    undoRedoInfo.type = UndoRedoInfo::Format;
-	    undoRedoInfo.id = c1.paragraph()->paragId();
-	    undoRedoInfo.index = c1.index();
-	    undoRedoInfo.eid = c2.paragraph()->paragId();
-	    undoRedoInfo.eindex = c2.index();
-	    readFormats( c1, c2, undoRedoInfo.d->text );
-	    undoRedoInfo.format = f;
-	    undoRedoInfo.flags = flags;
-	    clearUndoRedo();
-	}
-	doc->setFormat( TQTextDocument::Standard, f, flags );
-	repaintChanged();
-	formatMore();
-	drawCursor( TRUE );
-	setModified();
-	emit textChanged();
-    }
-    if ( currentFormat && currentFormat->key() != f->key() ) {
-	currentFormat->removeRef();
-	currentFormat = doc->formatCollection()->format( f );
-	if ( currentFormat->isMisspelled() ) {
-	    currentFormat->removeRef();
-	    currentFormat = doc->formatCollection()->format( currentFormat->font(),
-							     currentFormat->color() );
-	}
-	emit currentFontChanged( currentFormat->font() );
-	emit currentColorChanged( currentFormat->color() );
-	emit currentVerticalAlignmentChanged( (VerticalAlignment)currentFormat->vAlign() );
-	if ( cursor->index() == cursor->paragraph()->length() - 1 ) {
-	    currentFormat->addRef();
-	    cursor->paragraph()->string()->setFormat( cursor->index(), currentFormat, TRUE );
-	    if ( cursor->paragraph()->length() == 1 ) {
-		cursor->paragraph()->tqinvalidate( 0 );
-		cursor->paragraph()->format();
-		repaintChanged();
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setPalette( const TQPalette &p )
-{
-    TQScrollView::setPalette( p );
-    if ( textFormat() == TQt::PlainText ) {
-	TQTextFormat *f = doc->formatCollection()->defaultFormat();
-	f->setColor( tqcolorGroup().text() );
-	updateContents();
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-  \warning In TQt 3.1 we will provide a cleaer API for the
-  functionality which is provided by this function and in TQt 4.0 this
-  function will go away.
-
-  Sets the paragraph style of the current paragraph
-  to \a dm. If \a dm is TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem, the
-  type of the list item is set to \a listStyle.
-
-  \sa tqsetAlignment()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setParagType( TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayMode dm,
-			      TQStyleSheetItem::ListStyle listStyle )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() )
-	return;
-
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    TQTextParagraph *start = cursor->paragraph();
-    TQTextParagraph *end = start;
-    if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-	start = doc->selectionStartCursor( TQTextDocument::Standard ).topParagraph();
-	end = doc->selectionEndCursor( TQTextDocument::Standard ).topParagraph();
-	if ( end->paragId() < start->paragId() )
-	    return; // do not trust our selections
-    }
-
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    undoRedoInfo.type = UndoRedoInfo::Style;
-    undoRedoInfo.id = start->paragId();
-    undoRedoInfo.eid = end->paragId();
-    undoRedoInfo.styleInformation = TQTextStyleCommand::readStyleInformation( doc, undoRedoInfo.id, undoRedoInfo.eid );
-
-    while ( start != end->next() ) {
-	start->setListStyle( listStyle );
-	if ( dm == TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem ) {
-	    start->setListItem( TRUE );
-	    if( start->listDepth() == 0 )
-		start->setListDepth( 1 );
-	} else if ( start->isListItem() ) {
-	    start->setListItem( FALSE );
-	    start->setListDepth( TQMAX( start->listDepth()-1, 0 ) );
-	}
-	start = start->next();
-    }
-
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    repaintChanged();
-    formatMore();
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    setModified();
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the tqalignment of the current paragraph to \a a. Valid
-    alignments are \c TQt::AlignLeft, \c TQt::AlignRight,
-    \c TQt::AlignJustify and \c TQt::AlignCenter (which centers
-    horizontally).
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::tqsetAlignment( int a )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() || block_set_tqalignment )
-	return;
-
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    TQTextParagraph *start = cursor->paragraph();
-    TQTextParagraph *end = start;
-    if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-	start = doc->selectionStartCursor( TQTextDocument::Standard ).topParagraph();
-	end = doc->selectionEndCursor( TQTextDocument::Standard ).topParagraph();
-	if ( end->paragId() < start->paragId() )
-	    return; // do not trust our selections
-    }
-
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    undoRedoInfo.type = UndoRedoInfo::Style;
-    undoRedoInfo.id = start->paragId();
-    undoRedoInfo.eid = end->paragId();
-    undoRedoInfo.styleInformation = TQTextStyleCommand::readStyleInformation( doc, undoRedoInfo.id, undoRedoInfo.eid );
-
-    while ( start != end->next() ) {
-	start->tqsetAlignment( a );
-	start = start->next();
-    }
-
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    repaintChanged();
-    formatMore();
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    if ( currentAlignment != a ) {
-	currentAlignment = a;
-	emit currentAlignmentChanged( currentAlignment );
-    }
-    setModified();
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::updateCurrentFormat()
-{
-    int i = cursor->index();
-    if ( i > 0 )
-	--i;
-    if ( doc->useFormatCollection() &&
-	 ( !currentFormat || currentFormat->key() != cursor->paragraph()->at( i )->format()->key() ) ) {
-	if ( currentFormat )
-	    currentFormat->removeRef();
-	currentFormat = doc->formatCollection()->format( cursor->paragraph()->at( i )->format() );
-	if ( currentFormat->isMisspelled() ) {
-	    currentFormat->removeRef();
-	    currentFormat = doc->formatCollection()->format( currentFormat->font(), currentFormat->color() );
-	}
-	emit currentFontChanged( currentFormat->font() );
-	emit currentColorChanged( currentFormat->color() );
-	emit currentVerticalAlignmentChanged( (VerticalAlignment)currentFormat->vAlign() );
-    }
-
-    if ( currentAlignment != cursor->paragraph()->tqalignment() ) {
-	currentAlignment = cursor->paragraph()->tqalignment();
-	block_set_tqalignment = TRUE;
-	emit currentAlignmentChanged( currentAlignment );
-	block_set_tqalignment = FALSE;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a b is TRUE sets the current format to italic; otherwise sets
-    the current format to non-italic.
-
-    \sa italic()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setItalic( bool b )
-{
-    TQTextFormat f( *currentFormat );
-    f.setItalic( b );
-    TQTextFormat *f2 = doc->formatCollection()->format( &f );
-    setFormat(f2, TQTextFormat::Italic );
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a b is TRUE sets the current format to bold; otherwise sets
-    the current format to non-bold.
-
-    \sa bold()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setBold( bool b )
-{
-    TQTextFormat f( *currentFormat );
-    f.setBold( b );
-    TQTextFormat *f2 = doc->formatCollection()->format( &f );
-    setFormat( f2, TQTextFormat::Bold );
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a b is TRUE sets the current format to underline; otherwise
-    sets the current format to non-underline.
-
-    \sa underline()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setUnderline( bool b )
-{
-    TQTextFormat f( *currentFormat );
-    f.setUnderline( b );
-    TQTextFormat *f2 = doc->formatCollection()->format( &f );
-    setFormat( f2, TQTextFormat::Underline );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the font family of the current format to \a fontFamily.
-
-    \sa family() setCurrentFont()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setFamily( const TQString &fontFamily )
-{
-    TQTextFormat f( *currentFormat );
-    f.setFamily( fontFamily );
-    TQTextFormat *f2 = doc->formatCollection()->format( &f );
-    setFormat( f2, TQTextFormat::Family );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the point size of the current format to \a s.
-
-    Note that if \a s is zero or negative, the behaviour of this
-    function is not defined.
-
-    \sa pointSize() setCurrentFont() setFamily()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setPointSize( int s )
-{
-    TQTextFormat f( *currentFormat );
-    f.setPointSize( s );
-    TQTextFormat *f2 = doc->formatCollection()->format( &f );
-    setFormat( f2, TQTextFormat::Size );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the color of the current format, i.e. of the text, to \a c.
-
-    \sa color() setPaper()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setColor( const TQColor &c )
-{
-    TQTextFormat f( *currentFormat );
-    f.setColor( c );
-    TQTextFormat *f2 = doc->formatCollection()->format( &f );
-    setFormat( f2, TQTextFormat::Color );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the vertical tqalignment of the current format, i.e. of the
-    text, to \a a.
-
-    \sa color() setPaper()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setVerticalAlignment( VerticalAlignment a )
-{
-    TQTextFormat f( *currentFormat );
-    f.setVAlign( (TQTextFormat::VerticalAlignment)a );
-    TQTextFormat *f2 = doc->formatCollection()->format( &f );
-    setFormat( f2, TQTextFormat::VAlign );
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::setFontInternal( const TQFont &f_ )
-{
-    TQTextFormat f( *currentFormat );
-    f.setFont( f_ );
-    TQTextFormat *f2 = doc->formatCollection()->format( &f );
-    setFormat( f2, TQTextFormat::Font );
-}
-
-
-TQString TQTextEdit::text() const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	return optimText();
-#endif
-
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->firstParagraph();
-    if ( !p || (!p->next() && p->length() <= 1) )
-	return TQString::tqfromLatin1("");
-
-    if ( isReadOnly() )
-	return doc->originalText();
-    return doc->text();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Returns the text of paragraph \a para.
-
-    If textFormat() is \c RichText the text will contain HTML
-    formatting tags.
-*/
-
-TQString TQTextEdit::text( int para ) const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode && (d->od->numLines >= para) ) {
-	TQString paraStr = d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(para) ];
-	if ( paraStr.isEmpty() )
-	    paraStr = "\n";
-	return paraStr;
-    } else
-#endif
-    return doc->text( para );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Changes the text of the text edit to the string \a text and the
-    context to \a context. Any previous text is removed.
-
-    \a text may be interpreted either as plain text or as rich text,
-    depending on the textFormat(). The default setting is \c AutoText,
-    i.e. the text edit auto-detects the format from \a text.
-
-    For rich text the rendering style and available tags are defined
-    by a styleSheet(); see TQStyleSheet for details.
-
-    The optional \a context is a path which the text edit's
-    TQMimeSourceFactory uses to resolve the locations of files and
-    images. (See \l{TQTextEdit::TQTextEdit()}.) It is passed to the text
-    edit's TQMimeSourceFactory when quering data.
-
-    Note that the undo/redo history is cleared by this function.
-
-    \sa text(), setTextFormat()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setText( const TQString &text, const TQString &context )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	optimSetText( text );
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    resetInputContext();
-    if ( !isModified() && isReadOnly() &&
-	 this->context() == context && this->text() == text )
-	return;
-
-    emit undoAvailable( FALSE );
-    emit redoAvailable( FALSE );
-    undoRedoInfo.clear();
-    doc->commands()->clear();
-
-    lastFormatted = 0;
-    int oldCursorPos = cursor->index();
-    int oldCursorPar = cursor->paragraph()->paragId();
-    cursor->restoreState();
-    delete cursor;
-    doc->setText( text, context );
-
-    if ( wrapMode == FixedPixelWidth ) {
-	resizeContents( wrapWidth, 0 );
-	doc->setWidth( wrapWidth );
-	doc->setMinimumWidth( wrapWidth );
-    } else {
-	doc->setMinimumWidth( -1 );
-	resizeContents( 0, 0 );
-    }
-
-    lastFormatted = doc->firstParagraph();
-    cursor = new TQTextCursor( doc );
-    updateContents();
-
-    if ( isModified() )
-	setModified( FALSE );
-    emit textChanged();
-    if ( cursor->index() != oldCursorPos || cursor->paragraph()->paragId() != oldCursorPar ) {
-	emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor );
-	emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor->paragraph()->paragId(), cursor->index() );
-    }
-    formatMore();
-    updateCurrentFormat();
-    d->scrollToAnchor = TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::text
-    \brief the text edit's text
-
-    There is no default text.
-
-    On setting, any previous text is deleted.
-
-    The text may be interpreted either as plain text or as rich text,
-    depending on the textFormat(). The default setting is \c AutoText,
-    i.e. the text edit auto-detects the format of the text.
-
-    For richtext, calling text() on an editable TQTextEdit will cause
-    the text to be regenerated from the textedit. This may mean that
-    the TQString returned may not be exactly the same as the one that
-    was set.
-
-    \sa textFormat
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::readOnly
-    \brief whether the text edit is read-only
-
-    In a read-only text edit the user can only navigate through the
-    text and select text; modifying the text is not possible.
-
-    This property's default is FALSE.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Finds the next occurrence of the string, \a expr. Returns TRUE if
-    \a expr was found; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    If \a para and \a index are both 0 the search begins from the
-    current cursor position. If \a para and \a index are both not 0,
-    the search begins from the \a *index character position in the
-    \a *para paragraph.
-
-    If \a cs is TRUE the search is case sensitive, otherwise it is
-    case insensitive. If \a wo is TRUE the search looks for whole word
-    matches only; otherwise it searches for any matching text. If \a
-    forward is TRUE (the default) the search works forward from the
-    starting position to the end of the text, otherwise it works
-    backwards to the beginning of the text.
-
-    If \a expr is found the function returns TRUE. If \a index and \a
-    para are not 0, the number of the paragraph in which the first
-    character of the match was found is put into \a *para, and the
-    index position of that character within the paragraph is put into
-    \a *index.
-
-    If \a expr is not found the function returns FALSE. If \a index
-    and \a para are not 0 and \a expr is not found, \a *index
-    and \a *para are undefined.
-
-    Please note that this function will make the next occurrence of
-    the string (if found) the current selection, and will thus
-    modify the cursor position.
-
-    Using the \a para and \a index parameters will not work correctly
-    in case the document contains tables.
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::find( const TQString &expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward,
-		      int *para, int *index )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	return optimFind( expr, cs, wo, forward, para, index );
-#endif
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-    TQTextCursor findcur = *cursor;
-    if ( para && index ) {
-	if ( doc->paragAt( *para ) )
-	    findcur.gotoPosition( doc->paragAt(*para), *index );
-	else
-	    findcur.gotoEnd();
-    } else if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ){
-	// maks sure we do not find the same selection again
-	if ( forward )
-	    findcur.gotoNextLetter();
-	else
-	    findcur.gotoPreviousLetter();
-    } else if (!forward && findcur.index() == 0 && findcur.paragraph() == findcur.topParagraph()) {
-	findcur.gotoEnd();
-    }
-    removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-    bool found = doc->find( findcur, expr, cs, wo, forward );
-    if ( found ) {
-	if ( para )
-	    *para = findcur.paragraph()->paragId();
-	if ( index )
-	    *index = findcur.index();
-	*cursor = findcur;
-	repaintChanged();
-	ensureCursorVisible();
-    }
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    if (found) {
-	emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor );
-	emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor->paragraph()->paragId(), cursor->index() );
-    }
-    return found;
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::blinkCursor()
-{
-    if ( !cursorVisible )
-	return;
-    bool cv = cursorVisible;
-    blinkCursorVisible = !blinkCursorVisible;
-    drawCursor( blinkCursorVisible );
-    cursorVisible = cv;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the cursor to position \a index in paragraph \a para.
-
-    \sa getCursorPosition()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setCursorPosition( int para, int index )
-{
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return;
-
-    resetInputContext();
-    if ( index > p->length() - 1 )
-	index = p->length() - 1;
-
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    cursor->setParagraph( p );
-    cursor->setIndex( index );
-    ensureCursorVisible();
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-    updateCurrentFormat();
-    emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor );
-    emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor->paragraph()->paragId(), cursor->index() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    This function sets the \a *para and \a *index parameters to the
-    current cursor position. \a para and \a index must not be 0.
-
-    \sa setCursorPosition()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::getCursorPosition( int *para, int *index ) const
-{
-    if ( !para || !index )
-	return;
-    *para = cursor->paragraph()->paragId();
-    *index = cursor->index();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets a selection which starts at position \a indexFrom in
-    paragraph \a paraFrom and ends at position \a indexTo in paragraph
-    \a paraTo.
-
-    Any existing selections which have a different id (\a selNum) are
-    left alone, but if an existing selection has the same id as \a
-    selNum it is removed and replaced by this selection.
-
-    Uses the selection settings of selection \a selNum. If \a selNum
-    is 0, this is the default selection.
-
-    The cursor is moved to the end of the selection if \a selNum is 0,
-    otherwise the cursor position remains unchanged.
-
-    \sa getSelection() selectedText
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setSelection( int paraFrom, int indexFrom,
-			      int paraTo, int indexTo, int selNum )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if (d->optimMode) {
-	optimSetSelection(paraFrom, indexFrom, paraTo, indexTo);
-	repaintContents(FALSE);
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    resetInputContext();
-    if ( doc->hasSelection( selNum ) ) {
-	doc->removeSelection( selNum );
-	repaintChanged();
-    }
-    if ( selNum > doc->numSelections() - 1 )
-	doc->addSelection( selNum );
-    TQTextParagraph *p1 = doc->paragAt( paraFrom );
-    if ( !p1 )
-	return;
-    TQTextParagraph *p2 = doc->paragAt( paraTo );
-    if ( !p2 )
-	return;
-
-    if ( indexFrom > p1->length() - 1 )
-	indexFrom = p1->length() - 1;
-    if ( indexTo > p2->length() - 1 )
-	indexTo = p2->length() - 1;
-
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    TQTextCursor c = *cursor;
-    TQTextCursor oldCursor = *cursor;
-    c.setParagraph( p1 );
-    c.setIndex( indexFrom );
-    cursor->setParagraph( p2 );
-    cursor->setIndex( indexTo );
-    doc->setSelectionStart( selNum, c );
-    doc->setSelectionEnd( selNum, *cursor );
-    repaintChanged();
-    ensureCursorVisible();
-    if ( selNum != TQTextDocument::Standard )
-	*cursor = oldCursor;
-    drawCursor( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    If there is a selection, \a *paraFrom is set to the number of the
-    paragraph in which the selection begins and \a *paraTo is set to
-    the number of the paragraph in which the selection ends. (They
-    could be the same.) \a *indexFrom is set to the index at which the
-    selection begins within \a *paraFrom, and \a *indexTo is set to
-    the index at which the selection ends within \a *paraTo.
-
-    If there is no selection, \a *paraFrom, \a *indexFrom, \a *paraTo
-    and \a *indexTo are all set to -1.
-
-    If \a paraFrom, \a indexFrom, \a paraTo or \a indexTo is 0 this
-    function does nothing.
-
-    The \a selNum is the number of the selection (multiple selections
-    are supported). It defaults to 0 (the default selection).
-
-    \sa setSelection() selectedText
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::getSelection( int *paraFrom, int *indexFrom,
-			      int *paraTo, int *indexTo, int selNum ) const
-{
-    if ( !paraFrom || !paraTo || !indexFrom || !indexTo )
-	return;
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if (d->optimMode) {
-	*paraFrom = d->od->selStart.line;
-	*paraTo = d->od->selEnd.line;
-	*indexFrom = d->od->selStart.index;
-	*indexTo = d->od->selEnd.index;
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    if ( !doc->hasSelection( selNum ) ) {
-	*paraFrom = -1;
-	*indexFrom = -1;
-	*paraTo = -1;
-	*indexTo = -1;
-	return;
-    }
-
-    doc->selectionStart( selNum, *paraFrom, *indexFrom );
-    doc->selectionEnd( selNum, *paraTo, *indexTo );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::textFormat
-    \brief the text format: rich text, plain text, log text or auto text.
-
-    The text format is one of the following:
-    \list
-    \i PlainText - all characters, except newlines, are displayed
-    verbatim, including spaces. Whenever a newline appears in the text
-    the text edit inserts a hard line break and begins a new
-    paragraph.
-    \i RichText - rich text rendering. The available styles are
-    defined in the default stylesheet TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet().
-    \i LogText -  optimized mode for very large texts. Supports a very
-    limited set of formatting tags (color, bold, underline and italic
-    settings).
-    \i AutoText - this is the default. The text edit autodetects which
-    rendering style is best, \c PlainText or \c RichText. This is done
-    by using the TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText() function.
-    \endlist
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setTextFormat( TQt::TextFormat format )
-{
-    doc->setTextFormat( format );
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    checkOptimMode();
-#endif
-}
-
-TQt::TextFormat TQTextEdit::textFormat() const
-{
-    return doc->textFormat();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the number of paragraphs in the text; an empty textedit is always
-    considered to have one paragraph, so 1 is returned in this case.
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::paragraphs() const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	return d->od->numLines;
-    }
-#endif
-    return doc->lastParagraph()->paragId() + 1;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the number of lines in paragraph \a para, or -1 if there
-    is no paragraph with index \a para.
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::linesOfParagraph( int para ) const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	if ( d->od->numLines >= para )
-	    return 1;
-	else
-	    return -1;
-    }
-#endif
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return -1;
-    return p->lines();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the length of the paragraph \a para (i.e. the number of
-    characters), or -1 if there is no paragraph with index \a para.
-
-    This function ignores newlines.
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::paragraphLength( int para ) const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	if ( d->od->numLines >= para ) {
-	    if ( d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(para) ].isEmpty() ) // CR
-		return 1;
-	    else
-		return d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(para) ].length();
-	}
-	return -1;
-    }
-#endif
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return -1;
-    return p->length() - 1;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the number of lines in the text edit; this could be 0.
-
-    \warning This function may be slow. Lines change all the time
-    during word wrapping, so this function has to iterate over all the
-    paragraphs and get the number of lines from each one individually.
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::lines() const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	return d->od->numLines;
-    }
-#endif
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->firstParagraph();
-    int l = 0;
-    while ( p ) {
-	l += p->lines();
-	p = p->next();
-    }
-
-    return l;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the line number of the line in paragraph \a para in which
-    the character at position \a index appears. The \a index position is
-    relative to the beginning of the paragraph. If there is no such
-    paragraph or no such character at the \a index position (e.g. the
-    index is out of range) -1 is returned.
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::lineOfChar( int para, int index )
-{
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return -1;
-
-    int idx, line;
-    TQTextStringChar *c = p->lineStartOfChar( index, &idx, &line );
-    if ( !c )
-	return -1;
-
-    return line;
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::setModified( bool m )
-{
-    bool oldModified = modified;
-    modified = m;
-    if ( modified && doc->oTextValid )
-	doc->invalidateOriginalText();
-    if ( oldModified != modified )
-	emit modificationChanged( modified );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::modified
-    \brief whether the document has been modified by the user
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::isModified() const
-{
-    return modified;
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::setModified()
-{
-    if ( !isModified() )
-	setModified( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the current format is italic; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setItalic()
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::italic() const
-{
-    return currentFormat->font().italic();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the current format is bold; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa setBold()
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::bold() const
-{
-    return currentFormat->font().bold();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the current format is underlined; otherwise returns
-    FALSE.
-
-    \sa setUnderline()
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::underline() const
-{
-    return currentFormat->font().underline();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the font family of the current format.
-
-    \sa setFamily() setCurrentFont() setPointSize()
-*/
-
-TQString TQTextEdit::family() const
-{
-    return currentFormat->font().family();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the point size of the font of the current format.
-
-    \sa setFamily() setCurrentFont() setPointSize()
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::pointSize() const
-{
-    return currentFormat->font().pointSize();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the color of the current format.
-
-    \sa setColor() setPaper()
-*/
-
-TQColor TQTextEdit::color() const
-{
-    return currentFormat->color();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \obsolete
-
-    Returns TQScrollView::font()
-
-    \warning In previous versions this function returned the font of
-    the current format. This lead to confusion. Please use
-    currentFont() instead.
-*/
-
-TQFont TQTextEdit::font() const
-{
-    return TQScrollView::font();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the font of the current format.
-
-    \sa setCurrentFont() setFamily() setPointSize()
-*/
-
-TQFont TQTextEdit::currentFont() const
-{
-    return currentFormat->font();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tqalignment of the current paragraph.
-
-    \sa tqsetAlignment()
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::tqalignment() const
-{
-    return currentAlignment;
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::startDrag()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    mousePressed = FALSE;
-    inDoubleClick = FALSE;
-    TQDragObject *drag = dragObject( viewport() );
-    if ( !drag )
-	return;
-    if ( isReadOnly() ) {
-	drag->dragCopy();
-    } else {
-	if ( drag->drag() && TQDragObject::target() != this && TQDragObject::target() != viewport() )
-	    removeSelectedText();
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a select is TRUE (the default), all the text is selected as
-    selection 0. If \a select is FALSE any selected text is
-    unselected, i.e. the default selection (selection 0) is cleared.
-
-    \sa selectedText
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::selectAll( bool select )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	if ( select )
-	    optimSelectAll();
-	else
-	    optimRemoveSelection();
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    if ( !select )
-	doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-    else
-	doc->selectAll( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-    repaintChanged();
-    emit copyAvailable( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) );
-    emit selectionChanged();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::UndoRedoInfo::clear()
-{
-    if ( valid() ) {
-	if ( type == Insert || type == Return )
-	    doc->addCommand( new TQTextInsertCommand( doc, id, index, d->text.rawData(), styleInformation ) );
-	else if ( type == Format )
-	    doc->addCommand( new TQTextFormatCommand( doc, id, index, eid, eindex, d->text.rawData(), format, flags ) );
-	else if ( type == Style )
-	    doc->addCommand( new TQTextStyleCommand( doc, id, eid, styleInformation ) );
-	else if ( type != Invalid ) {
-	    doc->addCommand( new TQTextDeleteCommand( doc, id, index, d->text.rawData(), styleInformation ) );
-	}
-    }
-    type = Invalid;
-    d->text = TQString::null;
-    id = -1;
-    index = -1;
-    styleInformation = TQByteArray();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    If there is some selected text (in selection 0) it is deleted. If
-    there is no selected text (in selection 0) the character to the
-    right of the text cursor is deleted.
-
-    \sa removeSelectedText() cut()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::del()
-{
-    if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-	removeSelectedText();
-	return;
-    }
-
-    doKeyboardAction( ActionDelete );
-}
-
-
-TQTextEdit::UndoRedoInfo::UndoRedoInfo( TQTextDocument *dc )
-    : type( Invalid ), doc( dc )
-{
-    d = new TQUndoRedoInfoPrivate;
-    d->text = TQString::null;
-    id = -1;
-    index = -1;
-}
-
-TQTextEdit::UndoRedoInfo::~UndoRedoInfo()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-bool TQTextEdit::UndoRedoInfo::valid() const
-{
-    return id >= 0 &&  type != Invalid;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-  Resets the current format to the default format.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::resetFormat()
-{
-    tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignAuto );
-    setParagType( TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayBlock, TQStyleSheetItem::ListDisc );
-    setFormat( doc->formatCollection()->defaultFormat(), TQTextFormat::Format );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the TQStyleSheet which is being used by this text edit.
-
-    \sa setStyleSheet()
-*/
-
-TQStyleSheet* TQTextEdit::styleSheet() const
-{
-    return doc->styleSheet();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the stylesheet to use with this text edit to \a styleSheet.
-    Changes will only take effect for new text added with setText() or
-    append().
-
-    \sa styleSheet()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setStyleSheet( TQStyleSheet* styleSheet )
-{
-    doc->setStyleSheet( styleSheet );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::paper
-    \brief the background (paper) brush.
-
-    The brush that is currently used to draw the background of the
-    text edit. The initial setting is an empty brush.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setPaper( const TQBrush& pap )
-{
-    doc->setPaper( new TQBrush( pap ) );
-
-    if ( pap.pixmap() ) {
-        viewport()->setBackgroundPixmap( *pap.pixmap() );
-    } else {
-        setPaletteBackgroundColor( pap.color() );
-        viewport()->setPaletteBackgroundColor( pap.color() );
-    }
-
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    // force a tqrepaint of the entire viewport - using updateContents()
-    // would clip the coords to the content size
-    if (d->optimMode)
-	repaintContents(contentsX(), contentsY(), viewport()->width(), viewport()->height());
-    else
-#endif
-	updateContents();
-}
-
-TQBrush TQTextEdit::paper() const
-{
-    if ( doc->paper() )
-	return *doc->paper();
-    return TQBrush( tqcolorGroup().base() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::linkUnderline
-    \brief whether hypertext links will be underlined
-
-    If TRUE (the default) hypertext links will be displayed
-    underlined. If FALSE links will not be displayed underlined.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setLinkUnderline( bool b )
-{
-    if ( doc->underlineLinks() == b )
-	return;
-    doc->setUnderlineLinks( b );
-    repaintChanged();
-}
-
-bool TQTextEdit::linkUnderline() const
-{
-    return doc->underlineLinks();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the text edit's mimesource factory to \a factory. See
-    TQMimeSourceFactory for further details.
-
-    \sa mimeSourceFactory()
- */
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIME
-void TQTextEdit::setMimeSourceFactory( TQMimeSourceFactory* factory )
-{
-    doc->setMimeSourceFactory( factory );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the TQMimeSourceFactory which is being used by this text
-    edit.
-
-    \sa setMimeSourceFactory()
-*/
-
-TQMimeSourceFactory* TQTextEdit::mimeSourceFactory() const
-{
-    return doc->mimeSourceFactory();
-}
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    Returns how many pixels high the text edit needs to be to display
-    all the text if the text edit is \a w pixels wide.
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::heightForWidth( int w ) const
-{
-    int oldw = doc->width();
-    doc->doLayout( 0, w );
-    int h = doc->height();
-    doc->setWidth( oldw );
-    doc->tqinvalidate();
-    ( (TQTextEdit*)this )->formatMore();
-    return h;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Appends a new paragraph with \a text to the end of the text edit. Note that
-    the undo/redo history is cleared by this function, and no undo
-    history is kept for appends which makes them faster than
-    insert()s. If you want to append text which is added to the
-    undo/redo history as well, use insertParagraph().
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::append( const TQString &text )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	optimAppend( text );
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    // flush and clear the undo/redo stack if necessary
-    undoRedoInfo.clear();
-    doc->commands()->clear();
-
-    doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-    TQt::TextFormat f = doc->textFormat();
-    if ( f == TQt::AutoText ) {
-	if ( TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText( text ) )
-	    f = TQt::RichText;
-	else
-	    f = TQt::PlainText;
-    }
-
-    drawCursor( FALSE );
-    TQTextCursor oldc( *cursor );
-    ensureFormatted( doc->lastParagraph() );
-    bool atBottom = contentsY() >= contentsHeight() - visibleHeight();
-    cursor->gotoEnd();
-    if ( cursor->index() > 0 )
-	cursor->splitAndInsertEmptyParagraph();
-    TQTextCursor oldCursor2 = *cursor;
-
-    if ( f == TQt::PlainText ) {
-	cursor->insert( text, TRUE );
-	if ( doc->useFormatCollection() && !doc->preProcessor() &&
-	     currentFormat != cursor->paragraph()->at( cursor->index() )->format() ) {
-	    doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Temp, oldCursor2 );
-	    doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Temp, *cursor );
-	    doc->setFormat( TQTextDocument::Temp, currentFormat, TQTextFormat::Format );
-	    doc->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Temp );
-	}
-    } else {
-	cursor->paragraph()->setListItem( FALSE );
-	cursor->paragraph()->setListDepth( 0 );
-	if ( cursor->paragraph()->prev() )
-	    cursor->paragraph()->prev()->tqinvalidate(0); // vertical margins might have to change
-	doc->setRichTextInternal( text );
-    }
-    formatMore();
-    repaintChanged();
-    if ( atBottom )
-        scrollToBottom();
-    *cursor = oldc;
-    if ( !isReadOnly() )
-	cursorVisible = TRUE;
-    setModified();
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::hasSelectedText
-    \brief whether some text is selected in selection 0
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::hasSelectedText() const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	return optimHasSelection();
-    else
-#endif
-	return doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::selectedText
-    \brief The selected text (from selection 0) or an empty string if
-    there is no currently selected text (in selection 0).
-
-    The text is always returned as \c PlainText if the textFormat() is
-    \c PlainText or \c AutoText, otherwise it is returned as HTML.
-
-    \sa hasSelectedText
-*/
-
-TQString TQTextEdit::selectedText() const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	return optimSelectedText();
-    else
-#endif
-	return doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Standard, textFormat() == TQt::RichText );
-}
-
-bool TQTextEdit::handleReadOnlyKeyEvent( TQKeyEvent *e )
-{
-    switch( e->key() ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Down:
-	setContentsPos( contentsX(), contentsY() + 10 );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Up:
-	setContentsPos( contentsX(), contentsY() - 10 );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Left:
-	setContentsPos( contentsX() - 10, contentsY() );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Right:
-	setContentsPos( contentsX() + 10, contentsY() );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_PageUp:
-	setContentsPos( contentsX(), contentsY() - visibleHeight() );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_PageDown:
-	setContentsPos( contentsX(), contentsY() + visibleHeight() );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Home:
-	setContentsPos( contentsX(), 0 );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_End:
-	setContentsPos( contentsX(), contentsHeight() - visibleHeight() );
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_F16: // Copy key on Sun keyboards
-	copy();
-	break;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_NETWORKPROTOCOL
-    case Qt::Key_Return:
-    case Qt::Key_Enter:
-    case Qt::Key_Space: {
-	if (!doc->focusIndicator.href.isEmpty()
-		|| !doc->focusIndicator.name.isEmpty()) {
-	    if (!doc->focusIndicator.href.isEmpty()) {
-		TQUrl u( doc->context(), doc->focusIndicator.href, TRUE );
-		emitLinkClicked( u.toString( FALSE, FALSE ) );
-	    }
-	    if (!doc->focusIndicator.name.isEmpty()) {
-		if (::tqqt_cast<TQTextBrowser*>(this)) { // change for 4.0
-		    TQConnectionList *clist = tqreceivers(
-			    "anchorClicked(const TQString&,const TQString&)");
-		    if (!tqsignalsBlocked() && clist) {
-			TQUObject o[3];
-			static_TQUType_TQString.set(o+1,
-				doc->focusIndicator.name);
-			static_TQUType_TQString.set(o+2,
-				doc->focusIndicator.href);
-			activate_signal( clist, o);
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-	}
-    } break;
-#endif
-    default:
-	if ( e->state() & ControlButton ) {
-	    switch ( e->key() ) {
-	    case Qt::Key_C: case Qt::Key_F16: // Copy key on Sun keyboards
-		copy();
-		break;
-#ifdef TQ_WS_WIN
-	    case Qt::Key_Insert:
-		copy();
-		break;
-	    case Qt::Key_A:
-		selectAll();
-		break;
-#endif
-	    }
-
-	}
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the context of the text edit. The context is a path which
-    the text edit's TQMimeSourceFactory uses to resolve the locations
-    of files and images.
-
-    \sa text
-*/
-
-TQString TQTextEdit::context() const
-{
-    return doc->context();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::documentTitle
-    \brief the title of the document parsed from the text.
-
-    For \c PlainText the title will be an empty string. For \c
-    RichText the title will be the text between the \c{<title>} tags,
-    if present, otherwise an empty string.
-*/
-
-TQString TQTextEdit::documentTitle() const
-{
-    return doc->attributes()[ "title" ];
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::makeParagVisible( TQTextParagraph *p )
-{
-    setContentsPos( contentsX(), TQMIN( p->rect().y(), contentsHeight() - visibleHeight() ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Scrolls the text edit to make the text at the anchor called \a
-    name visible, if it can be found in the document. If the anchor
-    isn't found no scrolling will occur. An anchor is defined using
-    the HTML anchor tag, e.g. \c{<a name="target">}.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::scrollToAnchor( const TQString& name )
-{
-    if ( !isVisible() ) {
-	d->scrollToAnchor = name;
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( name.isEmpty() )
-	return;
-    sync();
-    TQTextCursor cursor( doc );
-    TQTextParagraph* last = doc->lastParagraph();
-    for (;;) {
-	TQTextStringChar* c = cursor.paragraph()->at( cursor.index() );
-	if( c->isAnchor() ) {
-	    TQString a = c->anchorName();
-	    if ( a == name ||
-		 (a.contains( '#' ) && TQStringList::split( '#', a ).contains( name ) ) ) {
-		setContentsPos( contentsX(), TQMIN( cursor.paragraph()->rect().top() + cursor.totalOffsetY(), contentsHeight() - visibleHeight() ) );
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( cursor.paragraph() == last && cursor.atParagEnd()  )
-	    break;
-	cursor.gotoNextLetter();
-    }
-}
-
-#if (TQT_VERSION-0 >= 0x040000)
-#error "function anchorAt(const TQPoint& pos) should be merged into function anchorAt(const TQPoint& pos, AnchorAttribute attr)"
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    If there is an anchor at position \a pos (in contents
-    coordinates), its \c href is returned, otherwise TQString::null is
-    returned.
-*/
-
-TQString TQTextEdit::anchorAt( const TQPoint& pos )
-{
-    return anchorAt(pos, Qt::AnchorHref);
-}
-
-/*!
-    If there is an anchor at position \a pos (in contents
-    coordinates), the text for attribute \a attr is returned,
-    otherwise TQString::null is returned.
-*/
-
-TQString TQTextEdit::anchorAt( const TQPoint& pos, Qt::AnchorAttribute attr )
-{
-    TQTextCursor c( doc );
-    placeCursor( pos, &c );
-    switch(attr) {
-	case Qt::AnchorName:
-	    return c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->anchorName();
-	case Qt::AnchorHref:
-	    return c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->anchorHref();
-    }
-    // incase the compiler is really dumb about determining if a function
-    // returns something :)
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::documentWidthChanged( int w )
-{
-    resizeContents( TQMAX( visibleWidth(), w), contentsHeight() );
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  This function does nothing
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::updateStyles()
-{
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::setDocument( TQTextDocument *dc )
-{
-    if ( dc == 0 ) {
-        qWarning( "Q3TextEdit::setDocument() called with null Q3TextDocument pointer" );
-        return;
-    }
-    if ( dc == doc )
-	return;
-    resetInputContext();
-    doc = dc;
-    delete cursor;
-    cursor = new TQTextCursor( doc );
-    clearUndoRedo();
-    undoRedoInfo.doc = doc;
-    lastFormatted = 0;
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-
-/*!
-    Pastes the text with format \a subtype from the clipboard into the
-    text edit at the current cursor position. The \a subtype can be
-    "plain" or "html".
-
-    If there is no text with format \a subtype in the clipboard
-    nothing happens.
-
-    \sa paste() cut() TQTextEdit::copy()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::pasteSubType( const TQCString &subtype )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIMECLIPBOARD
-    TQMimeSource *m = TQApplication::tqclipboard()->data( d->clipboard_mode );
-    pasteSubType( subtype, m );
-#endif
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-
-void TQTextEdit::pasteSubType( const TQCString& subtype, TQMimeSource *m )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIME
-    TQCString st = subtype;
-    if ( subtype != "x-qrichtext" )
-	st.prepend( "text/" );
-    else
-	st.prepend( "application/" );
-    if ( !m )
-	return;
-    if ( doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) )
-	removeSelectedText();
-    if ( !TQRichTextDrag::canDecode( m ) )
-	return;
-    TQString t;
-    if ( !TQRichTextDrag::decode( m, t, st.data(), subtype ) )
-	return;
-    if ( st == "application/x-qrichtext" ) {
-	int start;
-	if ( (start = t.find( "<!--StartFragment-->" )) != -1 ) {
-	    start += 20;
-	    int end = t.find( "<!--EndFragment-->" );
-	    TQTextCursor oldC = *cursor;
-
-	    // during the setRichTextInternal() call the cursors
-	    // paragraph might get joined with the provious one, so
-	    // the cursors one would get deleted and oldC.paragraph()
-	    // would be a dnagling pointer. To avoid that try to go
-	    // one letter back and later go one forward again.
-	    oldC.gotoPreviousLetter();
-	    bool couldGoBack = oldC != *cursor;
-	    // first para might get deleted, so remember to reset it
-	    bool wasAtFirst = oldC.paragraph() == doc->firstParagraph();
-
-	    if ( start < end )
-		t = t.mid( start, end - start );
-	    else
-		t = t.mid( start );
-	    lastFormatted = cursor->paragraph();
-	    if ( lastFormatted->prev() )
-		lastFormatted = lastFormatted->prev();
-	    doc->setRichTextInternal( t, cursor );
-
-	    // the first para might have been deleted in
-	    // setRichTextInternal(). To be sure, reset it if
-	    // necessary.
-	    if ( wasAtFirst ) {
-		int index = oldC.index();
-		oldC.setParagraph( doc->firstParagraph() );
-		oldC.setIndex( index );
-	    }
-
-	    // if we went back one letter before (see last comment),
-	    // go one forward to point to the right position
-	    if ( couldGoBack )
-		oldC.gotoNextLetter();
-
-	    if ( undoEnabled && !isReadOnly() ) {
-		doc->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Temp, oldC );
-		doc->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Temp, *cursor );
-
-		checkUndoRedoInfo( UndoRedoInfo::Insert );
-		if ( !undoRedoInfo.valid() ) {
-		    undoRedoInfo.id = oldC.paragraph()->paragId();
-		    undoRedoInfo.index = oldC.index();
-		    undoRedoInfo.d->text = TQString::null;
-		}
-		int oldLen = undoRedoInfo.d->text.length();
-		if ( !doc->preProcessor() ) {
-		    TQString txt = doc->selectedText( TQTextDocument::Temp );
-		    undoRedoInfo.d->text += txt;
-		    for ( int i = 0; i < (int)txt.length(); ++i ) {
-			if ( txt[ i ] != '\n' && oldC.paragraph()->at( oldC.index() )->format() ) {
-			    oldC.paragraph()->at( oldC.index() )->format()->addRef();
-			    undoRedoInfo.d->text.
-				setFormat( oldLen + i, oldC.paragraph()->at( oldC.index() )->format(), TRUE );
-			}
-			oldC.gotoNextLetter();
-		    }
-		}
-		undoRedoInfo.clear();
-		removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Temp );
-	    }
-
-	    formatMore();
-	    setModified();
-	    emit textChanged();
-	    repaintChanged();
-	    ensureCursorVisible();
-	    return;
-	}
-    } else {
-#if defined(TQ_OS_WIN32)
-	// Need to convert CRLF to LF
-	t.replace( "\r\n", "\n" );
-#elif defined(TQ_OS_MAC)
-	//need to convert CR to LF
-	t.replace( '\r', '\n' );
-#endif
-	TQChar *uc = (TQChar *)t.tqunicode();
-	for ( int i=0; (uint) i<t.length(); i++ ) {
-	    if ( uc[ i ] < TQChar(' ') && uc[ i ] != '\n' && uc[ i ] != '\t' )
-		uc[ i ] = ' ';
-	}
-	if ( !t.isEmpty() )
-	    insert( t, FALSE, TRUE );
-    }
-#endif //TQT_NO_MIME
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIMECLIPBOARD
-/*!
-    Prompts the user to choose a type from a list of text types
-    available, then copies text from the clipboard (if there is any)
-    into the text edit at the current text cursor position. Any
-    selected text (in selection 0) is first deleted.
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::pasteSpecial( const TQPoint& pt )
-{
-    TQCString st = pickSpecial( TQApplication::tqclipboard()->data( d->clipboard_mode ),
-			       TRUE, pt );
-    if ( !st.isEmpty() )
-	pasteSubType( st );
-}
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIME
-TQCString TQTextEdit::pickSpecial( TQMimeSource* ms, bool always_ask, const TQPoint& pt )
-{
-    if ( ms )  {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-	TQPopupMenu popup( this, "qt_pickspecial_menu" );
-	TQString fmt;
-	int n = 0;
-	TQDict<void> done;
-	for (int i = 0; !( fmt = ms->format( i ) ).isNull(); i++) {
-	    int semi = fmt.find( ";" );
-	    if ( semi >= 0 )
-		fmt = fmt.left( semi );
-	    if ( fmt.left( 5 ) == "text/" ) {
-		fmt = fmt.mid( 5 );
-		if ( !done.find( fmt ) ) {
-		    done.insert( fmt,(void*)1 );
-		    popup.insertItem( fmt, i );
-		    n++;
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( n ) {
-	    int i = n ==1 && !always_ask ? popup.idAt( 0 ) : popup.exec( pt );
-	    if ( i >= 0 )
-		return popup.text(i).latin1();
-	}
-#else
-	TQString fmt;
-	for (int i = 0; !( fmt = ms->format( i ) ).isNull(); i++) {
-	    int semi = fmt.find( ";" );
-	    if ( semi >= 0 )
-		fmt = fmt.left( semi );
-	    if ( fmt.left( 5 ) == "text/" ) {
-		fmt = fmt.mid( 5 );
-		return fmt.latin1();
-	    }
-	}
-#endif
-    }
-    return TQCString();
-}
-#endif // TQT_NO_MIME
-#endif // TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTextEdit::WordWrap
-
-    This enum defines the TQTextEdit's word wrap modes.
-
-    \value NoWrap Do not wrap the text.
-
-    \value WidgetWidth Wrap the text at the current width of the
-    widget (this is the default). Wrapping is at whitespace by
-    default; this can be changed with setWrapPolicy().
-
-    \value FixedPixelWidth Wrap the text at a fixed number of pixels
-    from the widget's left side. The number of pixels is set with
-    wrapColumnOrWidth().
-
-    \value FixedColumnWidth Wrap the text at a fixed number of
-    character columns from the widget's left side. The number of
-    characters is set with wrapColumnOrWidth(). This is useful if you
-    need formatted text that can also be displayed gracefully on
-    tqdevices with monospaced fonts, for example a standard VT100
-    terminal, where you might set wrapColumnOrWidth() to 80.
-
-    \sa setWordWrap() wordWrap()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::wordWrap
-    \brief the word wrap mode
-
-    The default mode is \c WidgetWidth which causes words to be
-    wrapped at the right edge of the text edit. Wrapping occurs at
-    whitespace, keeping whole words intact. If you want wrapping to
-    occur within words use setWrapPolicy(). If you set a wrap mode of
-    \c FixedPixelWidth or \c FixedColumnWidth you should also call
-    setWrapColumnOrWidth() with the width you want.
-
-    \sa WordWrap, wrapColumnOrWidth, wrapPolicy,
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setWordWrap( WordWrap mode )
-{
-    if ( wrapMode == mode )
-	return;
-    wrapMode = mode;
-    switch ( mode ) {
-    case NoWrap:
-	document()->formatter()->setWrapEnabled( FALSE );
-	document()->formatter()->setWrapAtColumn( -1 );
-	doc->setWidth( visibleWidth() );
-	doc->setMinimumWidth( -1 );
-	doc->tqinvalidate();
-	updateContents();
-	lastFormatted = doc->firstParagraph();
-	interval = 0;
-	formatMore();
-	break;
-    case WidgetWidth:
-	document()->formatter()->setWrapEnabled( TRUE );
-	document()->formatter()->setWrapAtColumn( -1 );
-	doResize();
-	break;
-    case FixedPixelWidth:
-	document()->formatter()->setWrapEnabled( TRUE );
-	document()->formatter()->setWrapAtColumn( -1 );
-	if ( wrapWidth < 0 )
-	    wrapWidth = 200;
-	setWrapColumnOrWidth( wrapWidth );
-	break;
-    case FixedColumnWidth:
-	if ( wrapWidth < 0 )
-	    wrapWidth = 80;
-	document()->formatter()->setWrapEnabled( TRUE );
-	document()->formatter()->setWrapAtColumn( wrapWidth );
-	setWrapColumnOrWidth( wrapWidth );
-	break;
-    }
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    checkOptimMode();
-#endif
-}
-
-TQTextEdit::WordWrap TQTextEdit::wordWrap() const
-{
-    return wrapMode;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::wrapColumnOrWidth
-    \brief the position (in pixels or columns depending on the wrap mode) where text will be wrapped
-
-    If the wrap mode is \c FixedPixelWidth, the value is the number of
-    pixels from the left edge of the text edit at which text should be
-    wrapped. If the wrap mode is \c FixedColumnWidth, the value is the
-    column number (in character columns) from the left edge of the
-    text edit at which text should be wrapped.
-
-    \sa wordWrap
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::setWrapColumnOrWidth( int value )
-{
-    wrapWidth = value;
-    if ( wrapMode == FixedColumnWidth ) {
-	document()->formatter()->setWrapAtColumn( wrapWidth );
-	resizeContents( 0, 0 );
-	doc->setWidth( visibleWidth() );
-	doc->setMinimumWidth( -1 );
-    } else if (wrapMode == FixedPixelWidth ) {
-	document()->formatter()->setWrapAtColumn( -1 );
-	resizeContents( wrapWidth, 0 );
-	doc->setWidth( wrapWidth );
-	doc->setMinimumWidth( wrapWidth );
-    } else {
-	return;
-    }
-    doc->tqinvalidate();
-    updateContents();
-    lastFormatted = doc->firstParagraph();
-    interval = 0;
-    formatMore();
-}
-
-int TQTextEdit::wrapColumnOrWidth() const
-{
-    if ( wrapMode == WidgetWidth )
-	return visibleWidth();
-    return wrapWidth;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQTextEdit::WrapPolicy
-
-    This enum defines where text can be wrapped in word wrap mode.
-
-    \value AtWhiteSpace Don't use this deprecated value (it is a
-    synonym for \c AtWordBoundary which you should use instead).
-    \value Anywhere  Break anywhere, including within words.
-    \value AtWordBoundary Break lines at word boundaries, e.g. spaces or
-    newlines
-    \value AtWordOrDocumentBoundary Break lines at whitespace, e.g.
-    spaces or newlines if possible. Break it anywhere otherwise.
-
-    \sa setWrapPolicy()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::wrapPolicy
-    \brief the word wrap policy, at whitespace or anywhere
-
-    Defines where text can be wrapped when word wrap mode is not \c
-    NoWrap. The choices are \c AtWordBoundary (the default), \c
-    Anywhere and \c AtWordOrDocumentBoundary
-
-    \sa wordWrap
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setWrapPolicy( WrapPolicy policy )
-{
-    if ( wPolicy == policy )
-	return;
-    wPolicy = policy;
-    TQTextFormatter *formatter;
-    if ( policy == AtWordBoundary || policy == AtWordOrDocumentBoundary ) {
-	formatter = new TQTextFormatterBreakWords;
-	formatter->setAllowBreakInWords( policy == AtWordOrDocumentBoundary );
-    } else {
-	formatter = new TQTextFormatterBreakInWords;
-    }
-    formatter->setWrapAtColumn( document()->formatter()->wrapAtColumn() );
-    formatter->setWrapEnabled( document()->formatter()->isWrapEnabled( 0 ) );
-    document()->setFormatter( formatter );
-    doc->tqinvalidate();
-    updateContents();
-    lastFormatted = doc->firstParagraph();
-    interval = 0;
-    formatMore();
-}
-
-TQTextEdit::WrapPolicy TQTextEdit::wrapPolicy() const
-{
-    return wPolicy;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Deletes all the text in the text edit.
-
-    \sa cut() removeSelectedText() setText()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::clear()
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	optimSetText("");
-    } else
-#endif
-    {
-	// make clear undoable
-	doc->selectAll( TQTextDocument::Temp );
-	removeSelectedText( TQTextDocument::Temp );
-	setContentsPos( 0, 0 );
-	if ( cursor->isValid() )
-	    cursor->restoreState();
-	doc->clear( TRUE );
-	delete cursor;
-	cursor = new TQTextCursor( doc );
-	lastFormatted = 0;
-    }
-    updateContents();
-
-    emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor );
-    emit cursorPositionChanged( cursor->paragraph()->paragId(), cursor->index() );
-}
-
-int TQTextEdit::undoDepth() const
-{
-    return document()->undoDepth();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::length
-    \brief the number of characters in the text
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::length() const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	return d->od->len;
-    else
-#endif
-	return document()->length();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::tabStopWidth
-    \brief the tab stop width in pixels
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::tabStopWidth() const
-{
-    return document()->tabStopWidth();
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::setUndoDepth( int d )
-{
-    document()->setUndoDepth( d );
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::setTabStopWidth( int ts )
-{
-    document()->setTabStops( ts );
-    doc->tqinvalidate();
-    lastFormatted = doc->firstParagraph();
-    interval = 0;
-    formatMore();
-    updateContents();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQTextEdit::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    // cf. TQScrollView::tqsizeHint()
-    constPolish();
-    int f = 2 * frameWidth();
-    int h = fontMetrics().height();
-    TQSize sz( f, f );
-    return sz.expandedTo( TQSize(12 * h, 8 * h) );
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::clearUndoRedo()
-{
-    if ( !undoEnabled )
-	return;
-    undoRedoInfo.clear();
-    emit undoAvailable( doc->commands()->isUndoAvailable() );
-    emit redoAvailable( doc->commands()->isRedoAvailable() );
-}
-
-/*!  \internal
-  \warning In TQt 3.1 we will provide a cleaer API for the
-  functionality which is provided by this function and in TQt 4.0 this
-  function will go away.
-
-  This function gets the format of the character at position \a
-  index in paragraph \a para. Sets \a font to the character's font, \a
-  color to the character's color and \a verticalAlignment to the
-  character's vertical tqalignment.
-
-  Returns FALSE if \a para or \a index is out of range otherwise
-  returns TRUE.
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::getFormat( int para, int index, TQFont *font, TQColor *color, VerticalAlignment *verticalAlignment )
-{
-    if ( !font || !color )
-	return FALSE;
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return FALSE;
-    if ( index < 0 || index >= p->length() )
-	return FALSE;
-    *font = p->at( index )->format()->font();
-    *color = p->at( index )->format()->color();
-    *verticalAlignment = (VerticalAlignment)p->at( index )->format()->vAlign();
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-/*!  \internal
-  \warning In TQt 3.1 we will provide a cleaer API for the
-  functionality which is provided by this function and in TQt 4.0 this
-  function will go away.
-
-  This function gets the format of the paragraph \a para. Sets \a
-  font to the paragraphs's font, \a color to the paragraph's color, \a
-  verticalAlignment to the paragraph's vertical tqalignment, \a
-  tqalignment to the paragraph's tqalignment, \a displayMode to the
-  paragraph's display mode, \a listStyle to the paragraph's list style
-  (if the display mode is TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem) and \a
-  listDepth to the depth of the list (if the display mode is
-  TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem).
-
-  Returns FALSE if \a para is out of range otherwise returns TRUE.
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::getParagraphFormat( int para, TQFont *font, TQColor *color,
-				    VerticalAlignment *verticalAlignment, int *tqalignment,
-				    TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayMode *displayMode,
-				    TQStyleSheetItem::ListStyle *listStyle,
-				    int *listDepth )
-{
-    if ( !font || !color || !tqalignment || !displayMode || !listStyle )
-	return FALSE;
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return FALSE;
-    *font = p->at(0)->format()->font();
-    *color = p->at(0)->format()->color();
-    *verticalAlignment = (VerticalAlignment)p->at(0)->format()->vAlign();
-    *tqalignment = p->tqalignment();
-    *displayMode = p->isListItem() ? TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayListItem : TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayBlock;
-    *listStyle = p->listStyle();
-    *listDepth = p->listDepth();
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    This function is called to create a right mouse button popup menu
-    at the document position \a pos. If you want to create a custom
-    popup menu, reimplement this function and return the created popup
-    menu. Ownership of the popup menu is transferred to the caller.
-
-    \warning The TQPopupMenu ID values 0-7 are reserved, and they map to the
-    standard operations. When inserting items into your custom popup menu, be
-    sure to specify ID values larger than 7.
-*/
-
-TQPopupMenu *TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu( const TQPoint& pos )
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED( pos )
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    TQPopupMenu *popup = new TQPopupMenu( this, "qt_edit_menu" );
-    if ( !isReadOnly() ) {
-	d->id[ IdUndo ] = popup->insertItem( tr( "&Undo" ) + ACCEL_KEY( Z ) );
-	d->id[ IdRedo ] = popup->insertItem( tr( "&Redo" ) + ACCEL_KEY( Y ) );
-	popup->insertSeparator();
-    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    if ( !isReadOnly() )
-	d->id[ IdCut ] = popup->insertItem( tr( "Cu&t" ) + ACCEL_KEY( X ) );
-    d->id[ IdCopy ] = popup->insertItem( tr( "&Copy" ) + ACCEL_KEY( C ) );
-    if ( !isReadOnly() )
-	d->id[ IdPaste ] = popup->insertItem( tr( "&Paste" ) + ACCEL_KEY( V ) );
-#endif
-    if ( !isReadOnly() ) {
-	d->id[ IdClear ] = popup->insertItem( tr( "Clear" ) );
-	popup->insertSeparator();
-    }
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-    d->id[ IdSelectAll ] = popup->insertItem( tr( "Select All" ) );
-#else
-    d->id[ IdSelectAll ] = popup->insertItem( tr( "Select All" ) + ACCEL_KEY( A ) );
-#endif
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IM
-    TQInputContext *qic = getInputContext();
-    if ( qic )
-	qic->addMenusTo( popup );
-#endif
-    
-    popup->setItemEnabled( d->id[ IdUndo ], !isReadOnly() && doc->commands()->isUndoAvailable() );
-    popup->setItemEnabled( d->id[ IdRedo ], !isReadOnly() && doc->commands()->isRedoAvailable() );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    popup->setItemEnabled( d->id[ IdCut ], !isReadOnly() && doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, TRUE ) );
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    popup->setItemEnabled( d->id[ IdCopy ], d->optimMode ? optimHasSelection() : doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, TRUE ) );
-#else
-    popup->setItemEnabled( d->id[ IdCopy ], doc->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard, TRUE ) );
-#endif
-    popup->setItemEnabled( d->id[ IdPaste ], !isReadOnly() && !TQApplication::tqclipboard()->text( d->clipboard_mode ).isEmpty() );
-#endif
-    const bool isEmptyDocument = (length() == 0);
-    popup->setItemEnabled( d->id[ IdClear ], !isReadOnly() && !isEmptyDocument );
-    popup->setItemEnabled( d->id[ IdSelectAll ], !isEmptyDocument );
-    return popup;
-#else
-    return 0;
-#endif
-}
-
-/*! \overload
-    \obsolete
-    This function is called to create a right mouse button popup menu.
-    If you want to create a custom popup menu, reimplement this function
-    and return the created popup menu. Ownership of the popup menu is
-    transferred to the caller.
-
-    This function is only called if createPopupMenu( const TQPoint & )
-    returns 0.
-*/
-
-TQPopupMenu *TQTextEdit::createPopupMenu()
-{
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setFont( const TQFont &f )
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	TQScrollView::setFont( f );
-	doc->setDefaultFormat( f, doc->formatCollection()->defaultFormat()->color() );
-	// recalculate the max string width
-	TQFontMetrics fm(f);
-	int i, sw;
-	d->od->maxLineWidth = 0;
-	for ( i = 0; i < d->od->numLines; i++ ) {
-	    sw = fm.width(d->od->lines[LOGOFFSET(i)]);
-	    if (d->od->maxLineWidth < sw)
-		d->od->maxLineWidth = sw;
-	}
-	resizeContents(d->od->maxLineWidth + 4, d->od->numLines * fm.lineSpacing() + 1);
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-    TQScrollView::setFont( f );
-    doc->setMinimumWidth( -1 );
-    doc->setDefaultFormat( f, doc->formatCollection()->defaultFormat()->color() );
-    lastFormatted = doc->firstParagraph();
-    formatMore();
-    repaintChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQTextEdit::zoomIn()
-
-    \overload
-
-    Zooms in on the text by making the base font size one point
-    larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This
-    does not change the size of any images.
-
-    \sa zoomOut()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQTextEdit::zoomOut()
-
-    \overload
-
-    Zooms out on the text by making the base font size one point
-    smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This
-    does not change the size of any images.
-
-    \sa zoomIn()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Zooms in on the text by making the base font size \a range
-    points larger and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size.
-    This does not change the size of any images.
-
-    \sa zoomOut()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::zoomIn( int range )
-{
-    TQFont f( TQScrollView::font() );
-    f.setPointSize( TQFontInfo(f).pointSize() + range );
-    setFont( f );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Zooms out on the text by making the base font size \a range points
-    smaller and recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This
-    does not change the size of any images.
-
-    \sa zoomIn()
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::zoomOut( int range )
-{
-    TQFont f( TQScrollView::font() );
-    f.setPointSize( TQMAX( 1, TQFontInfo(f).pointSize() - range ) );
-    setFont( f );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Zooms the text by making the base font size \a size points and
-    recalculating all font sizes to be the new size. This does not
-    change the size of any images.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::zoomTo( int size )
-{
-    TQFont f( TQScrollView::font() );
-    f.setPointSize( size );
-    setFont( f );
-}
-
-/*!
-   TQTextEdit is optimized for large amounts text. One of its
-   optimizations is to format only the visible text, formatting the rest
-   on demand, e.g. as the user scrolls, so you don't usually need to
-   call this function.
-
-    In some situations you may want to force the whole text
-    to be formatted. For example, if after calling setText(), you wanted
-    to know the height of the document (using contentsHeight()), you
-    would call this function first.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::sync()
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	TQFontMetrics fm( TQScrollView::font() );
-	resizeContents( d->od->maxLineWidth + 4, d->od->numLines * fm.lineSpacing() + 1 );
-    } else
-#endif
-    {
-	while ( lastFormatted ) {
-	    lastFormatted->format();
-	    lastFormatted = lastFormatted->next();
-	}
-	resizeContents( contentsWidth(), doc->height() );
-    }
-    updateScrollBars();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setEnabled( bool b )
-{
-    TQScrollView::setEnabled( b );
-    if ( textFormat() == TQt::PlainText ) {
-	TQTextFormat *f = doc->formatCollection()->defaultFormat();
-	f->setColor( tqcolorGroup().text() );
-	updateContents();
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the background color of selection number \a selNum to \a back
-    and specifies whether the text of this selection should be
-    inverted with \a invertText.
-
-    This only works for \a selNum > 0. The default selection (\a
-    selNum == 0) gets its attributes from the text edit's
-    tqcolorGroup().
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setSelectionAttributes( int selNum, const TQColor &back, bool invertText )
-{
-    if ( selNum < 1 )
-	return;
-    if ( selNum > doc->numSelections() )
-	doc->addSelection( selNum );
-    doc->setSelectionColor( selNum, back );
-    doc->setInvertSelectionText( selNum, invertText );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::windowActivationChange( bool oldActive )
-{
-    if ( oldActive && scrollTimer )
-	scrollTimer->stop();
-    if ( tqpalette().active() != tqpalette().inactive() )
-	updateContents();
-    TQScrollView::windowActivationChange( oldActive );
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::setReadOnly( bool b )
-{
-    if ( (bool) readonly == b )
-	return;
-    readonly = b;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    if ( readonly )
-	viewport()->setCursor( Qt::ArrowCursor );
-    else
-	viewport()->setCursor( Qt::IBeamCursor );
-    setInputMethodEnabled( !readonly );
-#endif
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    checkOptimMode();
-#endif
-}
-
-/*!
-    Scrolls to the bottom of the document and does formatting if
-    required.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::scrollToBottom()
-{
-    sync();
-    setContentsPos( contentsX(), contentsHeight() - visibleHeight() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the rectangle of the paragraph \a para in contents
-    coordinates, or an invalid rectangle if \a para is out of range.
-*/
-
-TQRect TQTextEdit::paragraphRect( int para ) const
-{
-    TQTextEdit *that = (TQTextEdit *)this;
-    that->sync();
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return TQRect( -1, -1, -1, -1 );
-    return p->rect();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the paragraph which is at position \a pos (in contents
-    coordinates).
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::paragraphAt( const TQPoint &pos ) const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	TQFontMetrics fm( TQScrollView::font() );
-	int parag = pos.y() / fm.lineSpacing();
-	if ( parag <= d->od->numLines )
-	    return parag;
-	else
-	    return 0;
-    }
-#endif
-    TQTextCursor c( doc );
-    c.place( pos, doc->firstParagraph() );
-    if ( c.paragraph() )
-	return c.paragraph()->paragId();
-    return -1; // should never happen..
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the index of the character (relative to its paragraph) at
-    position \a pos (in contents coordinates). If \a para is not 0,
-    \a *para is set to the character's paragraph.
-*/
-
-int TQTextEdit::charAt( const TQPoint &pos, int *para ) const
-{
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	int par = paragraphAt( pos );
-	if ( para )
-	    *para = par;
-	return optimCharIndex( d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(par) ], pos.x() );
-    }
-#endif
-    TQTextCursor c( doc );
-    c.place( pos, doc->firstParagraph() );
-    if ( c.paragraph() ) {
-	if ( para )
-	    *para = c.paragraph()->paragId();
-	return c.index();
-    }
-    return -1; // should never happen..
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the background color of the paragraph \a para to \a bg.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setParagraphBackgroundColor( int para, const TQColor &bg )
-{
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return;
-    p->setBackgroundColor( bg );
-    repaintChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Clears the background color of the paragraph \a para, so that the
-    default color is used again.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::clearParagraphBackground( int para )
-{
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return;
-    p->clearBackgroundColor();
-    repaintChanged();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the background color of the paragraph \a para or an
-    invalid color if \a para is out of range or the paragraph has no
-    background set
-*/
-
-TQColor TQTextEdit::paragraphBackgroundColor( int para ) const
-{
-    TQTextParagraph *p = doc->paragAt( para );
-    if ( !p )
-	return TQColor();
-    TQColor *c = TQT_TQCOLOR(p->backgroundColor());
-    if ( c )
-	return *c;
-    return TQColor();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::undoRedoEnabled
-    \brief whether undo/redo is enabled
-
-    When changing this property, the undo/redo history is cleared.
-
-    The default is TRUE.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setUndoRedoEnabled( bool b )
-{
-    undoRedoInfo.clear();
-    doc->commands()->clear();
-
-    undoEnabled = b;
-}
-
-bool TQTextEdit::isUndoRedoEnabled() const
-{
-    return undoEnabled;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if undo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::isUndoAvailable() const
-{
-    return undoEnabled && (doc->commands()->isUndoAvailable() || undoRedoInfo.valid());
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if redo is available; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQTextEdit::isRedoAvailable() const
-{
-    return undoEnabled && doc->commands()->isRedoAvailable();
-}
-
-void TQTextEdit::ensureFormatted( TQTextParagraph *p )
-{
-    while ( !p->isValid() ) {
-	if ( !lastFormatted )
-	    return;
-	formatMore();
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::updateCursor( const TQPoint & pos )
-{
-    if ( isReadOnly() && linksEnabled() ) {
-	TQTextCursor c = *cursor;
-	placeCursor( pos, &c, TRUE );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_NETWORKPROTOCOL
-	bool insideParagRect = TRUE;
-	if (c.paragraph() == doc->lastParagraph()
-	    && c.paragraph()->rect().y() + c.paragraph()->rect().height() < pos.y())
-	    insideParagRect = FALSE;
-	if (insideParagRect && c.paragraph() && c.paragraph()->at( c.index() ) &&
-	    c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->isAnchor()) {
-	    if (!c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->anchorHref().isEmpty()
-		    && c.index() < c.paragraph()->length() - 1 )
-		onLink = c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->anchorHref();
-	    else
-		onLink = TQString::null;
-
-	    if (!c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->anchorName().isEmpty()
-		    && c.index() < c.paragraph()->length() - 1 )
-		d->onName = c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->anchorName();
-	    else
-		d->onName = TQString::null;
-
-	    if (!c.paragraph()->at( c.index() )->anchorHref().isEmpty() ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-		viewport()->setCursor( onLink.isEmpty() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::PointingHandCursor );
-#endif
-		TQUrl u( doc->context(), onLink, TRUE );
-		emitHighlighted( u.toString( FALSE, FALSE ) );
-	    }
-	} else {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    viewport()->setCursor( isReadOnly() ? Qt::ArrowCursor : Qt::IBeamCursor );
-#endif
-	    onLink = TQString::null;
-	    emitHighlighted( TQString::null );
-	}
-#endif
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-  Places the cursor \a c at the character which is closest to position
-  \a pos (in contents coordinates). If \a c is 0, the default text
-  cursor is used.
-
-  \sa setCursorPosition()
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::placeCursor( const TQPoint &pos, TQTextCursor *c )
-{
-    placeCursor( pos, c, FALSE );
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::clipboardChanged()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    // don't listen to selection changes
-    disconnect( TQApplication::tqclipboard(), TQT_SIGNAL(selectionChanged()), this, 0);
-#endif
-    selectAll(FALSE);
-}
-
-/*! \property TQTextEdit::tabChangesFocus
-  \brief whether TAB changes focus or is accepted as input
-
-  In some occasions text edits should not allow the user to input
-  tabulators or change indentation using the TAB key, as this breaks
-  the focus chain. The default is FALSE.
-
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setTabChangesFocus( bool b )
-{
-    d->tabChangesFocus = b;
-}
-
-bool TQTextEdit::tabChangesFocus() const
-{
-    return d->tabChangesFocus;
-}
-
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-/* Implementation of optimized LogText mode follows */
-
-static void tqSwap( int * a, int * b )
-{
-    if ( !a || !b )
-	return;
-    int tmp = *a;
-    *a = *b;
-    *b = tmp;
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-bool TQTextEdit::checkOptimMode()
-{
-    bool oldMode = d->optimMode;
-    if ( textFormat() == Qt::LogText ) {
-	setReadOnly( TRUE );
-	d->optimMode = TRUE;
-    } else {
-	d->optimMode = FALSE;
-    }
-
-    // when changing mode - try to keep selections and text
-    if ( oldMode != d->optimMode ) {
-	if ( d->optimMode ) {
-	    d->od = new TQTextEditOptimPrivate;
-	    connect( scrollTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQT_SLOT( optimDoAutoScroll() ) );
-	    disconnect( doc, TQT_SIGNAL( minimumWidthChanged(int) ), this, TQT_SLOT( documentWidthChanged(int) ) );
-	    disconnect( scrollTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQT_SLOT( autoScrollTimerDone() ) );
-	    disconnect( formatTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQT_SLOT( formatMore() ) );
-	    optimSetText( doc->originalText() );
-	    doc->clear(TRUE);
-	    delete cursor;
-	    cursor = new TQTextCursor( doc );
-	} else {
-	    disconnect( scrollTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQT_SLOT( optimDoAutoScroll() ) );
-	    connect( doc, TQT_SIGNAL( minimumWidthChanged(int) ), this, TQT_SLOT( documentWidthChanged(int) ) );
-	    connect( scrollTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQT_SLOT( autoScrollTimerDone() ) );
-	    connect( formatTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQT_SLOT( formatMore() ) );
-	    setText( optimText() );
-	    delete d->od;
-	    d->od = 0;
-	}
-    }
-    return d->optimMode;
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-TQString TQTextEdit::optimText() const
-{
-    TQString str, tmp;
-
-    if ( d->od->len == 0 )
-	return str;
-
-    // concatenate all strings
-    int i;
-    int offset;
-    TQMapConstIterator<int,TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *> it;
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * ftag = 0;
-    for ( i = 0; i < d->od->numLines; i++ ) {
-	if ( d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(i) ].isEmpty() ) { // CR lines are empty
-	    str += "\n";
-	} else {
-	    tmp = d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(i) ] + "\n";
-	    // inject the tags for this line
-	    if ( (it = d->od->tagIndex.find( LOGOFFSET(i) )) != d->od->tagIndex.end() )
-		ftag = it.data();
-	    offset = 0;
-	    while ( ftag && ftag->line == i ) {
-		tmp.insert( ftag->index + offset, "<" + ftag->tag + ">" );
-		offset += ftag->tag.length() + 2; // 2 -> the '<' and '>' chars
-		ftag = ftag->next;
-	    }
-	    str += tmp;
-	}
-    }
-    return str;
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::optimSetText( const TQString &str )
-{
-    optimRemoveSelection();
-// this is just too slow - but may have to go in due to compatibility reasons
-//     if ( str == optimText() )
-//	return;
-    d->od->numLines = 0;
-    d->od->lines.clear();
-    d->od->maxLineWidth = 0;
-    d->od->len = 0;
-    d->od->clearTags();
-    TQFontMetrics fm( TQScrollView::font() );
-    if ( !(str.isEmpty() || str.isNull() || d->maxLogLines == 0) ) {
-	TQStringList strl = TQStringList::split( '\n', str, TRUE );
-	int lWidth = 0;
-	for ( TQStringList::Iterator it = strl.begin(); it != strl.end(); ++it ) {
-	    optimParseTags( &*it );
-	    optimCheckLimit( *it );
-	    lWidth = fm.width( *it );
-	    if ( lWidth > d->od->maxLineWidth )
-		d->od->maxLineWidth = lWidth;
-	}
-    }
-    resizeContents( d->od->maxLineWidth + 4, d->od->numLines * fm.lineSpacing() + 1 );
-    repaintContents();
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  Append \a tag to the tag list.
-*/
-TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * TQTextEdit::optimAppendTag( int index, const TQString & tag )
-{
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * t = new TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag, * tmp;
-
-    if ( d->od->tags == 0 )
-	d->od->tags = t;
-    t->bold = t->italic = t->underline = FALSE;
-    t->line  = d->od->numLines;
-    t->index = index;
-    t->tag   = tag;
-    t->leftTag = 0;
-    t->parent  = 0;
-    t->prev = d->od->lastTag;
-    if ( d->od->lastTag )
-	d->od->lastTag->next = t;
-    t->next = 0;
-    d->od->lastTag = t;
-    tmp = d->od->tagIndex[ LOGOFFSET(t->line) ];
-    if ( !tmp || (tmp && tmp->index > t->index) ) {
-	d->od->tagIndex.replace( LOGOFFSET(t->line), t );
-    }
-    return t;
-}
-
- /*! \internal
-
-   Insert \a tag in the tag - according to line and index numbers
-*/
-
-TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *TQTextEdit::optimInsertTag(int line, int index, const TQString &tag)
-{
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *t = new TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag, *tmp;
-
-    if (d->od->tags == 0)
-	d->od->tags = t;
-    t->bold = t->italic = t->underline = FALSE;
-    t->line  = line;
-    t->index = index;
-    t->tag   = tag;
-    t->leftTag = 0;
-    t->parent  = 0;
-    t->next = 0;
-    t->prev = 0;
-
-    // find insertion pt. in tag struct.
-    TQMap<int,TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *>::ConstIterator it;
-    if ((it = d->od->tagIndex.find(LOGOFFSET(line))) != d->od->tagIndex.end()) {
-	tmp = *it;
-	if (tmp->index >= index) { // the exisiting tag may be placed AFTER the one we want to insert
-	    tmp = tmp->prev;
-	} else {
-	    while (tmp && tmp->next && tmp->next->line == line && tmp->next->index <= index)
-		tmp = tmp->next;
-	}
-    } else {
-	tmp = d->od->tags;
-	while (tmp && tmp->next && tmp->next->line < line)
-	    tmp = tmp->next;
-	if (tmp == d->od->tags)
-	    tmp = 0;
-    }
-
-    t->prev = tmp;
-    t->next = tmp ? tmp->next : 0;
-    if (t->next)
-	t->next->prev = t;
-    if (tmp)
-	tmp->next = t;
-
-    tmp = d->od->tagIndex[LOGOFFSET(t->line)];
-    if (!tmp || (tmp && tmp->index >= t->index)) {
-	d->od->tagIndex.replace(LOGOFFSET(t->line), t);
-    }
-    return t;
-}
-
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  Find tags in \a line, remove them from \a line and put them in a
-  structure.
-
-  A tag is delimited by '<' and '>'. The characters '<', '>' and '&'
-  are escaped by using '&lt;', '&gt;' and '&amp;'. Left-tags marks
-  the starting point for formatting, while right-tags mark the ending
-  point. A right-tag is the same as a left-tag, but with a '/'
-  appearing before the tag keyword.  E.g a valid left-tag: <b>, and
-  a valid right-tag: </b>.  Tags can be nested, but they have to be
-  closed in the same order as they are opened. E.g:
-  <font color=red><font color=blue>blue</font>red</font> - is valid, while:
-  <font color=red><b>bold red</font> just bold</b> - is invalid since the font tag is
-  closed before the bold tag. Note that a tag does not have to be
-  closed: '<font color=blue>Lots of text - and then some..'  is perfectly valid for
-  setting all text appearing after the tag to blue.  A tag can be used
-  to change the color of a piece of text, or set one of the following
-  formatting attributes: bold, italic and underline.  These attributes
-  are set using the <b>, <i> and <u> tags.  Example of valid tags:
-  <font color=red>, </font>, <b>, <u>, <i>, </i>.
-  Example of valid text:
-  This is some <font color=red>red text</font>, while this is some <font color=green>green
-  text</font>. <font color=blue><font color=yellow>This is yellow</font>, while this is
-  blue.</font>
-
-  Note that only the color attribute of the HTML font tag is supported.
-
-  Limitations:
-  1. A tag cannot span several lines.
-  2. Very limited error checking - mismatching left/right-tags is the
-  only thing that is detected.
-
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::optimParseTags( TQString * line, int lineNo, int indexOffset )
-{
-    int len = line->length();
-    int i, startIndex = -1, endIndex = -1, escIndex = -1;
-    int state = 0; // 0 = outside tag, 1 = inside tag
-    bool tagOpen, tagClose;
-    int bold = 0, italic = 0, underline = 0;
-    TQString tagStr;
-    TQPtrStack<TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag> tagStack;
-
-    for ( i = 0; i < len; i++ ) {
-	tagOpen = (*line)[i] == '<';
-	tagClose = (*line)[i] == '>';
-
-	// handle '&lt;' and '&gt;' and '&amp;'
-	if ( (*line)[i] == '&' ) {
-	    escIndex = i;
-	    continue;
-	} else if ( escIndex != -1 && (*line)[i] == ';' ) {
-	    TQString esc = line->mid( escIndex, i - escIndex + 1 );
-	    TQString c;
-	    if ( esc == "&lt;" )
-		c = '<';
-	    else if ( esc == "&gt;" )
-		c = '>';
-	    else if ( esc == "&amp;" )
-		c = '&';
-	    line->replace( escIndex, i - escIndex + 1, c );
-	    len = line->length();
-	    i -= i-escIndex;
-	    escIndex = -1;
-	    continue;
-	}
-
-	if ( state == 0 && tagOpen ) {
-	    state = 1;
-	    startIndex = i;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	if ( state == 1 && tagClose ) {
-	    state = 0;
-	    endIndex = i;
-	    if ( !tagStr.isEmpty() ) {
-		TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * tag, * cur, * tmp;
-		bool format = TRUE;
-
-		if ( tagStr == "b" )
-		    bold++;
-		else if ( tagStr == "/b" )
-		    bold--;
-		else if ( tagStr == "i" )
-		    italic++;
-		else if ( tagStr == "/i" )
-		    italic--;
-		else if ( tagStr == "u" )
-		    underline++;
-		else if ( tagStr == "/u" )
-		    underline--;
-		else
-		    format = FALSE;
-		if ( lineNo > -1 )
-		    tag = optimInsertTag( lineNo, startIndex + indexOffset, tagStr );
-		else
-		    tag = optimAppendTag( startIndex, tagStr );
-		// everything that is not a b, u or i tag is considered
-		// to be a color tag.
-		tag->type = format ? TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Format
-			    : TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Color;
-		if ( tagStr[0] == '/' ) {
-		    // this is a right-tag - search for the left-tag
-		    // and possible parent tag
-		    cur = tag->prev;
-		    if ( !cur ) {
-#ifdef TQT_CHECK_RANGE
-			qWarning( "TQTextEdit::optimParseTags: no left-tag for '<%s>' in line %d.", tag->tag.ascii(), tag->line + 1 );
-#endif
-			return; // something is wrong - give up
-		    }
-		    while ( cur ) {
-			if ( cur->leftTag ) { // push right-tags encountered
-			    tagStack.push( cur );
-			} else {
-			    tmp = tagStack.pop();
-			    if ( !tmp ) {
-				if ( (("/" + cur->tag) == tag->tag) ||
-				     (tag->tag == "/font" && cur->tag.left(4) == "font") ) {
-				    // set up the left and parent of this tag
-				    tag->leftTag = cur;
-				    tmp = cur->prev;
-				    if ( tmp && tmp->parent ) {
-					tag->parent = tmp->parent;
-				    } else if ( tmp && !tmp->leftTag ) {
-					tag->parent = tmp;
-				    }
-				    break;
-				} else if ( !cur->leftTag ) {
-#ifdef TQT_CHECK_RANGE
-				    qWarning( "TQTextEdit::optimParseTags: mismatching %s-tag for '<%s>' in line %d.", cur->tag[0] == '/' ? "left" : "right", cur->tag.ascii(), cur->line + 1 );
-#endif
-				    return; // something is amiss - give up
-				}
-			    }
-			}
-			cur = cur->prev;
-		    }
-		} else {
-		    tag->bold = bold > 0;
-		    tag->italic = italic > 0;
-		    tag->underline = underline > 0;
-		    tmp = tag->prev;
-		    while ( tmp && tmp->leftTag ) {
-			tmp = tmp->leftTag->parent;
-		    }
-		    if ( tmp ) {
-			tag->bold |= tmp->bold;
-			tag->italic |= tmp->italic;
-			tag->underline |= tmp->underline;
-		    }
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ( startIndex != -1 ) {
-		int l = (endIndex == -1) ?
-			line->length() - startIndex : endIndex - startIndex;
-		line->remove( startIndex, l+1 );
-		len = line->length();
-		i -= l+1;
-	    }
-	    tagStr = "";
-	    continue;
-	}
-
-	if ( state == 1 ) {
-	    tagStr += (*line)[i];
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-// calculate the width of a string in pixels inc. tabs
-static int qStrWidth(const TQString& str, int tabWidth, const TQFontMetrics& fm)
-{
-    int tabs = str.contains('\t');
-
-    if (!tabs)
-	return fm.width(str);
-
-    int newIdx = 0;
-    int lastIdx = 0;
-    int strWidth = 0;
-    int tn;
-    for (tn = 1; tn <= tabs; ++tn) {
-	newIdx = str.find('\t', newIdx);
-	strWidth += fm.width(str.mid(lastIdx, newIdx - lastIdx));
-	if (strWidth >= tn * tabWidth) {
-	    int u = tn;
-	    while (strWidth >= u * tabWidth)
-		++u;
-	    strWidth = u * tabWidth;
-	} else {
-	    strWidth = tn * tabWidth;
-	}
-	lastIdx = ++newIdx;
-    }
-    if ((int)str.length() > newIdx)
-	strWidth += fm.width(str.mid(newIdx));
-    return strWidth;
-}
-
-bool TQTextEdit::optimHasBoldMetrics(int line)
-{
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *t;
-    TQMapConstIterator<int,TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *> it;
-    if ((it = d->od->tagIndex.find(line)) != d->od->tagIndex.end()) {
-	t = *it;
-	while (t && t->line == line) {
-	    if (t->bold)
-		return TRUE;
-	    t = t->next;
-	}
-    } else if ((t = optimPreviousLeftTag(line)) && t->bold) {
-	return TRUE;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  Append \a str to the current text buffer. Parses each line to find
-  formatting tags.
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::optimAppend( const TQString &str )
-{
-    if ( str.isEmpty() || str.isNull() || d->maxLogLines == 0 )
-	return;
-
-    TQStringList strl = TQStringList::split( '\n', str, TRUE );
-    TQStringList::Iterator it = strl.begin();
-
-    TQFontMetrics fm(TQScrollView::font());
-    int lWidth = 0;
-
-    for ( ; it != strl.end(); ++it ) {
-	optimParseTags( &*it );
-	optimCheckLimit( *it );
-	if (optimHasBoldMetrics(d->od->numLines-1)) {
-	    TQFont fnt = TQScrollView::font();
-	    fnt.setBold(TRUE);
-	    fm = TQFontMetrics(fnt);
-	}
-	lWidth = qStrWidth(*it, tabStopWidth(), fm) + 4;
-	if ( lWidth > d->od->maxLineWidth )
-	    d->od->maxLineWidth = lWidth;
-    }
-    bool scrollToEnd = contentsY() >= contentsHeight() - visibleHeight();
-    resizeContents( d->od->maxLineWidth + 4, d->od->numLines * fm.lineSpacing() + 1 );
-    if ( scrollToEnd ) {
-	updateScrollBars();
-	ensureVisible( contentsX(), contentsHeight(), 0, 0 );
-    }
-    // when a max log size is set, the text may not be redrawn because
-    // the size of the viewport may not have changed
-    if ( d->maxLogLines > -1 )
-	viewport()->update();
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-
-static void qStripTags(TQString *line)
-{
-    int len = line->length();
-    int i, startIndex = -1, endIndex = -1, escIndex = -1;
-    int state = 0; // 0 = outside tag, 1 = inside tag
-    bool tagOpen, tagClose;
-
-    for ( i = 0; i < len; i++ ) {
-	tagOpen = (*line)[i] == '<';
-	tagClose = (*line)[i] == '>';
-
-	// handle '&lt;' and '&gt;' and '&amp;'
-	if ( (*line)[i] == '&' ) {
-	    escIndex = i;
-	    continue;
-	} else if ( escIndex != -1 && (*line)[i] == ';' ) {
-	    TQString esc = line->mid( escIndex, i - escIndex + 1 );
-	    TQString c;
-	    if ( esc == "&lt;" )
-		c = '<';
-	    else if ( esc == "&gt;" )
-		c = '>';
-	    else if ( esc == "&amp;" )
-		c = '&';
-	    line->replace( escIndex, i - escIndex + 1, c );
-	    len = line->length();
-	    i -= i-escIndex;
-	    escIndex = -1;
-	    continue;
-	}
-
-	if ( state == 0 && tagOpen ) {
-	    state = 1;
-	    startIndex = i;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	if ( state == 1 && tagClose ) {
-	    state = 0;
-	    endIndex = i;
-	    if ( startIndex != -1 ) {
-		int l = (endIndex == -1) ?
-			line->length() - startIndex : endIndex - startIndex;
-		line->remove( startIndex, l+1 );
-		len = line->length();
-		i -= l+1;
-	    }
-	    continue;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-
-    Inserts the text into \a line at index \a index.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::optimInsert(const TQString& text, int line, int index)
-{
-    if (text.isEmpty() || d->maxLogLines == 0)
-	return;
-    if (line < 0)
-	line = 0;
-    if (line > d->od->numLines-1)
-	line = d->od->numLines-1;
-    if (index < 0)
-	index = 0;
-    if (index > (int) d->od->lines[line].length())
-	index = d->od->lines[line].length();
-
-    TQStringList strl = TQStringList::split('\n', text, TRUE);
-    int numNewLines = (int)strl.count() - 1;
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *tag = 0;
-    TQMap<int,TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *>::ConstIterator ii;
-    int x;
-
-    if (numNewLines == 0) {
-	// Case 1. Fast single line case - just inject it!
-	TQString stripped = text;
-	qStripTags( &stripped );
-	d->od->lines[LOGOFFSET(line)].insert(index, stripped);
-	// move the tag indices following the insertion pt.
-	if ((ii = d->od->tagIndex.find(LOGOFFSET(line))) != d->od->tagIndex.end()) {
-	    tag = *ii;
-	    while (tag && (LOGOFFSET(tag->line) == line && tag->index < index))
-		tag = tag->next;
-	    while (tag && (LOGOFFSET(tag->line) == line)) {
-		tag->index += stripped.length();
-		tag = tag->next;
-	    }
-	}
-	stripped = text;
-	optimParseTags(&stripped, line, index);
-    } else if (numNewLines > 0) {
-        // Case 2. We have at least 1 newline char - split at
-        // insertion pt. and make room for new lines - complex and slow!
-	TQString left = d->od->lines[LOGOFFSET(line)].left(index);
-	TQString right = d->od->lines[LOGOFFSET(line)].mid(index);
-
-	// rearrange lines for insertion
-	for (x = d->od->numLines - 1; x > line; x--)
-	    d->od->lines[x + numNewLines] = d->od->lines[x];
-	d->od->numLines += numNewLines;
-
-	// fix the tag index and the tag line/index numbers - this
-	// might take a while..
-	for (x = line; x < d->od->numLines; x++) {
-	    if ((ii = d->od->tagIndex.find(LOGOFFSET(line))) != d->od->tagIndex.end()) {
-		tag = ii.data();
-		if (LOGOFFSET(tag->line) == line)
-		    while (tag && (LOGOFFSET(tag->line) == line && tag->index < index))
-			tag = tag->next;
-	    }
-	}
-
-	// relabel affected tags with new line numbers and new index
-	// positions
-	while (tag) {
-	    if (LOGOFFSET(tag->line) == line)
-		tag->index -= index;
-	    tag->line += numNewLines;
-	    tag = tag->next;
-	}
-
-	// generate a new tag index
-	d->od->tagIndex.clear();
-	tag = d->od->tags;
-	while (tag) {
-	    if (!((ii = d->od->tagIndex.find(LOGOFFSET(tag->line))) != d->od->tagIndex.end()))
-		d->od->tagIndex[LOGOFFSET(tag->line)] = tag;
-	    tag = tag->next;
-	}
-
-	// update the tag indices on the spliced line - needs to be done before new tags are added
-	TQString stripped = strl[strl.count() - 1];
-	qStripTags(&stripped);
-	if ((ii = d->od->tagIndex.find(LOGOFFSET(line + numNewLines))) != d->od->tagIndex.end()) {
-	    tag = *ii;
-	    while (tag && (LOGOFFSET(tag->line) == line + numNewLines)) {
-		tag->index += stripped.length();
-		tag = tag->next;
-	    }
-	}
-
-	// inject the new lines
-	TQStringList::Iterator it = strl.begin();
-	x = line;
-	int idx;
-	for (; it != strl.end(); ++it) {
-	    stripped = *it;
-	    qStripTags(&stripped);
-	    if (x == line) {
-		stripped = left + stripped;
-		idx = index;
-	    } else {
-		idx = 0;
-	    }
-	    d->od->lines[LOGOFFSET(x)] = stripped;
-	    optimParseTags(&*it, x++, idx);
-	}
-	d->od->lines[LOGOFFSET(x - 1)] += right;
-    }
-    // recalculate the pixel width of the longest injected line -
-    TQFontMetrics fm(TQScrollView::font());
-    int lWidth = 0;
-
-    for (x = line; x < line + numNewLines; x++) {
-	if (optimHasBoldMetrics(x)) {
-	    TQFont fnt = TQScrollView::font();
-	    fnt.setBold(TRUE);
-	    fm = TQFontMetrics(fnt);
-	}
-	lWidth = fm.width(d->od->lines[x]) + 4;
-	if (lWidth > d->od->maxLineWidth)
-	    d->od->maxLineWidth = lWidth;
-    }
-    resizeContents(d->od->maxLineWidth + 4, d->od->numLines * fm.lineSpacing() + 1);
-    repaintContents();
-    emit textChanged();
-}
-
-
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  Returns the first open left-tag appearing before line \a line.
- */
-TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * TQTextEdit::optimPreviousLeftTag( int line )
-{
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * ftag = 0;
-    TQMapConstIterator<int,TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *> it;
-    if ( (it = d->od->tagIndex.find( LOGOFFSET(line) )) != d->od->tagIndex.end() )
-	ftag = it.data();
-    if ( !ftag ) {
-	// start searching for an open tag
-	ftag = d->od->tags;
-	while ( ftag ) {
-	    if ( ftag->line > line || ftag->next == 0 ) {
-		if ( ftag->line > line )
-		    ftag = ftag->prev;
-		break;
-	    }
-	    ftag = ftag->next;
-	}
-    } else {
-	ftag = ftag->prev;
-    }
-
-    if ( ftag ) {
-	if ( ftag && ftag->parent ) // use the open parent tag
-	    ftag = ftag->parent;
-	else if ( ftag && ftag->leftTag ) // this is a right-tag with no parent
-	    ftag = 0;
-    }
-    return ftag;
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  Set the format for the string starting at index \a start and ending
-  at \a end according to \a tag. If \a tag is a Format tag, find the
-  first open color tag appearing before \a tag and use that tag to
-  color the string.
-*/
-void TQTextEdit::optimSetTextFormat( TQTextDocument * td, TQTextCursor * cur,
-				    TQTextFormat * f, int start, int end,
-				    TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * tag )
-{
-    int formatFlags = TQTextFormat::Bold | TQTextFormat::Italic |
-		      TQTextFormat::Underline;
-    cur->setIndex( start );
-    td->setSelectionStart( 0, *cur );
-    cur->setIndex( end );
-    td->setSelectionEnd( 0, *cur );
-    TQStyleSheetItem * ssItem = styleSheet()->item( tag->tag );
-    if ( !ssItem || tag->type == TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Format ) {
-	f->setBold( tag->bold );
-	f->setItalic( tag->italic );
-	f->setUnderline( tag->underline );
-	if ( tag->type == TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Format ) {
-	    // check to see if there are any open color tags prior to
-	    // this format tag
-	    tag = tag->prev;
-	    while ( tag && (tag->type == TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Format ||
-			    tag->leftTag) ) {
-		tag = tag->leftTag ? tag->parent : tag->prev;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( tag ) {
-	    TQString col = tag->tag.simplifyWhiteSpace();
-	    if ( col.left( 10 ) == "font color" ) {
-		int i = col.find( '=', 10 );
-		col = TQT_TQSTRING(col.mid( i + 1 )).simplifyWhiteSpace();
-		if ( col[0] == '\"' )
-		    col = col.mid( 1, col.length() - 2 );
-	    }
-	    TQColor color = TQColor( col );
-	    if ( color.isValid() ) {
-		formatFlags |= TQTextFormat::Color;
-		f->setColor( color );
-	    }
-	}
-    } else { // use the stylesheet tag definition
-	if ( ssItem->color().isValid() ) {
-	    formatFlags |= TQTextFormat::Color;
-	    f->setColor( ssItem->color() );
-	}
-	f->setBold( ssItem->fontWeight() == TQFont::Bold );
-	f->setItalic( ssItem->fontItalic() );
-	f->setUnderline( ssItem->fontUnderline() );
-    }
-    td->setFormat( 0, f, formatFlags );
-    td->removeSelection( 0 );
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::optimDrawContents( TQPainter * p, int clipx, int clipy,
-				   int clipw, int cliph )
-{
-    TQFontMetrics fm( TQScrollView::font() );
-    int startLine = clipy / fm.lineSpacing();
-
-    // we always have to fetch at least two lines for drawing because the
-    // painter may be translated so that parts of two lines cover the area
-    // of a single line
-    int nLines = (cliph / fm.lineSpacing()) + 2;
-    int endLine = startLine + nLines;
-
-    if ( startLine >= d->od->numLines )
-	return;
-    if ( (startLine + nLines) > d->od->numLines )
-	nLines = d->od->numLines - startLine;
-
-    int i = 0;
-    TQString str;
-    for ( i = startLine; i < (startLine + nLines); i++ )
-	str.append( d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(i) ] + "\n" );
-
-    TQTextDocument * td = new TQTextDocument( 0 );
-    td->setDefaultFormat( TQScrollView::font(), TQColor() );
-    td->setPlainText( str );
-    td->setFormatter( new TQTextFormatterBreakWords ); // deleted by TQTextDoc
-    td->formatter()->setWrapEnabled( FALSE );
-    td->setTabStops(doc->tabStopWidth());
-
-    // get the current text color from the current format
-    td->selectAll( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-    TQTextFormat f;
-    f.setColor( tqcolorGroup().text() );
-    f.setFont( TQScrollView::font() );
-    td->setFormat( TQTextDocument::Standard, &f,
-		   TQTextFormat::Color | TQTextFormat::Font );
-    td->removeSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-
-    // add tag formatting
-    if ( d->od->tags ) {
-	int i = startLine;
-	TQMapConstIterator<int,TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *> it;
-	TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * tag = 0, * tmp = 0;
-	TQTextCursor cur( td );
-	// Step 1 - find previous left-tag
-	tmp = optimPreviousLeftTag( i );
-	for ( ; i < startLine + nLines; i++ ) {
-	    if ( (it = d->od->tagIndex.find( LOGOFFSET(i) )) != d->od->tagIndex.end() )
-		tag = it.data();
-	    // Step 2 - iterate over tags on the current line
-	    int lastIndex = 0;
-	    while ( tag && tag->line == i ) {
-		tmp = 0;
-		if ( tag->prev && !tag->prev->leftTag ) {
-		    tmp = tag->prev;
-		} else if ( tag->prev && tag->prev->parent ) {
-		    tmp = tag->prev->parent;
-		}
-		if ( (tag->index - lastIndex) > 0 && tmp ) {
-		    optimSetTextFormat( td, &cur, &f, lastIndex, tag->index, tmp );
-		}
-		lastIndex = tag->index;
-		tmp = tag;
-		tag = tag->next;
-	    }
-	    // Step 3 - color last part of the line - if necessary
-	    if ( tmp && tmp->parent )
-		tmp = tmp->parent;
-	    if ( (cur.paragraph()->length()-1 - lastIndex) > 0 && tmp && !tmp->leftTag ) {
-		optimSetTextFormat( td, &cur, &f, lastIndex,
-				    cur.paragraph()->length() - 1, tmp );
-	    }
-	    cur.setParagraph( cur.paragraph()->next() );
-	}
-        // useful debug info
-	//
-//	tag = d->od->tags;
-//	qWarning("###");
-//	while ( tag ) {
-//	    qWarning( "Tag: %p, parent: %09p, leftTag: %09p, Name: %-15s, ParentName: %s, %d%d%d", tag,
-//		       tag->parent, tag->leftTag, tag->tag.latin1(), tag->parent ? tag->parent->tag.latin1():"<none>",
-//		      tag->bold, tag->italic, tag->underline );
-//	    tag = tag->next;
-//	}
-    }
-
-    // if there is a selection, make sure that the selection in the
-    // part we need to redraw is set correctly
-    if ( optimHasSelection() ) {
-	TQTextCursor c1( td );
-	TQTextCursor c2( td );
-	int selStart = d->od->selStart.line;
-	int idxStart = d->od->selStart.index;
-	int selEnd = d->od->selEnd.line;
-	int idxEnd = d->od->selEnd.index;
-	if ( selEnd < selStart ) {
-	    tqSwap( &selStart, &selEnd );
-	    tqSwap( &idxStart, &idxEnd );
-	}
-	if ( selEnd > d->od->numLines-1 ) {
-	    selEnd = d->od->numLines-1;
-	}
-	if ( startLine <= selStart && endLine >= selEnd ) {
-	    // case 1: area to paint covers entire selection
-	    int paragS = selStart - startLine;
-	    int paragE = paragS + (selEnd - selStart);
-	    TQTextParagraph * parag = td->paragAt( paragS );
-	    if ( parag ) {
-		c1.setParagraph( parag );
-		if ( td->text( paragS ).length() >= (uint) idxStart )
-		    c1.setIndex( idxStart );
-	    }
-	    parag = td->paragAt( paragE );
-	    if ( parag ) {
-		c2.setParagraph( parag );
-		if ( td->text( paragE ).length() >= (uint) idxEnd )
-		    c2.setIndex( idxEnd );
-	    }
-	} else if ( startLine > selStart && endLine < selEnd ) {
-	    // case 2: area to paint is all part of the selection
-	    td->selectAll( TQTextDocument::Standard );
-	} else if ( startLine > selStart && endLine >= selEnd &&
-		    startLine <= selEnd ) {
-	    // case 3: area to paint starts inside a selection, ends past it
-	    c1.setParagraph( td->firstParagraph() );
-	    c1.setIndex( 0 );
-	    int paragE = selEnd - startLine;
-	    TQTextParagraph * parag = td->paragAt( paragE );
-	    if ( parag ) {
-		c2.setParagraph( parag );
-		if ( td->text( paragE ).length() >= (uint) idxEnd )
-		    c2.setIndex( idxEnd );
-	    }
-	} else if ( startLine <= selStart && endLine < selEnd &&
-		    endLine > selStart ) {
-	    // case 4: area to paint starts before a selection, ends inside it
-	    int paragS = selStart - startLine;
-	    TQTextParagraph * parag = td->paragAt( paragS );
-	    if ( parag ) {
-		c1.setParagraph( parag );
-		c1.setIndex( idxStart );
-	    }
-	    c2.setParagraph( td->lastParagraph() );
-	    c2.setIndex( td->lastParagraph()->string()->toString().length() - 1 );
-
-	}
-	// previously selected?
-	if ( !td->hasSelection( TQTextDocument::Standard ) ) {
-	    td->setSelectionStart( TQTextDocument::Standard, c1 );
-	    td->setSelectionEnd( TQTextDocument::Standard, c2 );
-	}
-    }
-    td->doLayout( p, contentsWidth() );
-
-    // have to align the painter so that partly visible lines are
-    // drawn at the correct position within the area that needs to be
-    // painted
-    int offset = clipy % fm.lineSpacing() + 2;
-    TQRect r( clipx, 0, clipw, cliph + offset );
-    p->translate( 0, clipy - offset );
-    td->draw( p, r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height(), tqcolorGroup() );
-    p->translate( 0, -(clipy - offset) );
-    delete td;
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::optimMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-
-    TQFontMetrics fm( TQScrollView::font() );
-    mousePressed = TRUE;
-    mousePos = e->pos();
-    d->od->selStart.line = e->y() / fm.lineSpacing();
-    if ( d->od->selStart.line > d->od->numLines-1 ) {
-	d->od->selStart.line = d->od->numLines-1;
-	d->od->selStart.index = d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(d->od->numLines-1) ].length();
-    } else {
-	TQString str = d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(d->od->selStart.line) ];
-	d->od->selStart.index = optimCharIndex( str, mousePos.x() );
-    }
-    d->od->selEnd.line = d->od->selStart.line;
-    d->od->selEnd.index = d->od->selStart.index;
-    oldMousePos = e->pos();
-    repaintContents( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::optimMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-
-    if ( scrollTimer->isActive() )
-	scrollTimer->stop();
-    if ( !inDoubleClick ) {
-	TQFontMetrics fm( TQScrollView::font() );
-	d->od->selEnd.line = e->y() / fm.lineSpacing();
-	if ( d->od->selEnd.line > d->od->numLines-1 ) {
-	    d->od->selEnd.line = d->od->numLines-1;
-	}
-	TQString str = d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(d->od->selEnd.line) ];
-	mousePos = e->pos();
-	d->od->selEnd.index = optimCharIndex( str, mousePos.x() );
-	if ( d->od->selEnd.line < d->od->selStart.line ) {
-	    tqSwap( &d->od->selStart.line, &d->od->selEnd.line );
-	    tqSwap( &d->od->selStart.index, &d->od->selEnd.index );
-	} else if ( d->od->selStart.line == d->od->selEnd.line &&
-		    d->od->selStart.index > d->od->selEnd.index ) {
-	    tqSwap( &d->od->selStart.index, &d->od->selEnd.index );
-	}
-	oldMousePos = e->pos();
-	repaintContents( FALSE );
-    }
-    if ( mousePressed ) {
-	mousePressed = FALSE;
-	copyToClipboard();
-    }
-
-    inDoubleClick = FALSE;
-    emit copyAvailable( optimHasSelection() );
-    emit selectionChanged();
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::optimMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * e )
-{
-    mousePos = e->pos();
-    optimDoAutoScroll();
-    oldMousePos = mousePos;
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::optimDoAutoScroll()
-{
-    if ( !mousePressed )
-	return;
-
-    TQFontMetrics fm( TQScrollView::font() );
-    TQPoint pos( mapFromGlobal( TQCursor::pos() ) );
-    bool doScroll = FALSE;
-    int xx = contentsX() + pos.x();
-    int yy = contentsY() + pos.y();
-
-    // find out how much we have to scroll in either dir.
-    if ( pos.x() < 0 || pos.x() > viewport()->width() ||
-	 pos.y() < 0 || pos.y() > viewport()->height() ) {
-	int my = yy;
-	if ( pos.x() < 0 )
-	    xx = contentsX() - fm.width( 'w');
-	else if ( pos.x() > viewport()->width() )
-	    xx = contentsX() + viewport()->width() + fm.width('w');
-
-	if ( pos.y() < 0 ) {
-	    my = contentsY() - 1;
-	    yy = (my / fm.lineSpacing()) * fm.lineSpacing() + 1;
-	} else if ( pos.y() > viewport()->height() ) {
-	    my = contentsY() + viewport()->height() + 1;
-	    yy = (my / fm.lineSpacing() + 1) * fm.lineSpacing() - 1;
-	}
-	d->od->selEnd.line = my / fm.lineSpacing();
-	mousePos.setX( xx );
-	mousePos.setY( my );
-	doScroll = TRUE;
-    } else {
-	d->od->selEnd.line = mousePos.y() / fm.lineSpacing();
-    }
-
-    if ( d->od->selEnd.line < 0 ) {
-	d->od->selEnd.line = 0;
-    } else if ( d->od->selEnd.line > d->od->numLines-1 ) {
-	d->od->selEnd.line = d->od->numLines-1;
-    }
-
-    TQString str = d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(d->od->selEnd.line) ];
-    d->od->selEnd.index = optimCharIndex( str, mousePos.x() );
-
-    // have to have a valid index before generating a paint event
-    if ( doScroll )
-	ensureVisible( xx, yy, 1, 1 );
-
-    // if the text document is smaller than the heigth of the viewport
-    // - redraw the whole thing otherwise calculate the rect that
-    // needs drawing.
-    if ( d->od->numLines * fm.lineSpacing() < viewport()->height() ) {
-	repaintContents( contentsX(), contentsY(), width(), height(), FALSE );
-    } else {
-	int h = TQABS(mousePos.y() - oldMousePos.y()) + fm.lineSpacing() * 2;
-	int y;
-	if ( oldMousePos.y() < mousePos.y() ) {
-	    y = oldMousePos.y() - fm.lineSpacing();
-	} else {
-	    // expand paint area for a fully selected line
-	    h += fm.lineSpacing();
-	    y = mousePos.y() - fm.lineSpacing()*2;
-	}
-	if ( y < 0 )
-	    y = 0;
-	repaintContents( contentsX(), y, width(), h, FALSE );
-    }
-
-    if ( (!scrollTimer->isActive() && pos.y() < 0) || pos.y() > height() )
-	scrollTimer->start( 100, FALSE );
-    else if ( scrollTimer->isActive() && pos.y() >= 0 && pos.y() <= height() )
-	scrollTimer->stop();
-}
-
-/*! \internal
-
-  Returns the index of the character in the string \a str that is
-  currently under the mouse pointer.
-*/
-int TQTextEdit::optimCharIndex( const TQString &str, int mx ) const
-{
-    TQFontMetrics fm(TQScrollView::font());
-    uint i = 0;
-    int dd, dist = 10000000;
-    int curpos = 0;
-    int strWidth;
-    mx = mx - 4; // ### get the real margin from somewhere
-
-    if (!str.contains('\t') && mx > fm.width(str))
-	return str.length();
-
-    while (i < str.length()) {
-	strWidth = qStrWidth(str.left(i), tabStopWidth(), fm);
-	dd = strWidth - mx;
-	if (TQABS(dd) <= dist) {
-	    dist = TQABS(dd);
-	    if (mx >= strWidth)
-		curpos = i;
-	}
-	++i;
-    }
-    return curpos;
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::optimSelectAll()
-{
-    d->od->selStart.line = d->od->selStart.index = 0;
-    d->od->selEnd.line = d->od->numLines - 1;
-    d->od->selEnd.index = d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(d->od->selEnd.line) ].length();
-
-    repaintContents( FALSE );
-    emit copyAvailable( optimHasSelection() );
-    emit selectionChanged();
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::optimRemoveSelection()
-{
-    d->od->selStart.line = d->od->selEnd.line = -1;
-    d->od->selStart.index = d->od->selEnd.index = -1;
-    repaintContents( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-void TQTextEdit::optimSetSelection( int startLine, int startIdx,
-				       int endLine, int endIdx )
-{
-    d->od->selStart.line = startLine;
-    d->od->selEnd.line = endLine;
-    d->od->selStart.index = startIdx;
-    d->od->selEnd.index = endIdx;
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-bool TQTextEdit::optimHasSelection() const
-{
-    if ( d->od->selStart.line != d->od->selEnd.line ||
-	 d->od->selStart.index != d->od->selEnd.index )
-	return TRUE;
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-TQString TQTextEdit::optimSelectedText() const
-{
-    TQString str;
-
-    if ( !optimHasSelection() )
-	return str;
-
-    // concatenate all strings
-    if ( d->od->selStart.line == d->od->selEnd.line ) {
-	str = d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(d->od->selEnd.line) ].mid( d->od->selStart.index,
-			   d->od->selEnd.index - d->od->selStart.index );
-    } else {
-	int i = d->od->selStart.line;
-	str = d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(i) ].right( d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(i) ].length() -
-				  d->od->selStart.index ) + "\n";
-	i++;
-	for ( ; i < d->od->selEnd.line; i++ ) {
-	    if ( d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(i) ].isEmpty() ) // CR lines are empty
-		str += "\n";
-	    else
-		str += d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(i) ] + "\n";
-	}
-	str += d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(d->od->selEnd.line) ].left( d->od->selEnd.index );
-    }
-    return str;
-}
-
-/*! \internal */
-bool TQTextEdit::optimFind( const TQString & expr, bool cs, bool /*wo*/,
-			       bool fw, int * para, int * index )
-{
-    bool found = FALSE;
-    int parag = para ? *para : d->od->search.line,
-	  idx = index ? *index : d->od->search.index, i;
-
-    if ( d->od->len == 0 )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    for ( i = parag; fw ? i < d->od->numLines : i >= 0; fw ? i++ : i-- ) {
-	idx = fw ? d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(i) ].find( expr, idx, cs ) :
-	      d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(i) ].findRev( expr, idx, cs );
-	if ( idx != -1 ) {
-	    found = TRUE;
-	    break;
-	} else if ( fw )
-	    idx = 0;
-    }
-
-    if ( found ) {
-	if ( index )
-	    *index = idx;
-	if ( para )
-	    *para = i;
-	d->od->search.index = idx + 1;
-	d->od->search.line = i;
-	optimSetSelection( i, idx, i, idx + expr.length() );
-	TQFontMetrics fm( TQScrollView::font() );
-	int h = fm.lineSpacing();
-	int x = fm.width( d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(i) ].left( idx + expr.length()) ) + 4;
-	ensureVisible( x, i * h + h / 2, 1, h / 2 + 2 );
-	repaintContents(); // could possibly be optimized
-    }
-    return found;
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQTextEdit::polish()
-{
-    // this will ensure that the last line is visible if text have
-    // been added to the widget before it is shown
-    if ( d->optimMode )
-	scrollToBottom();
-    TQWidget::polish();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the maximum number of lines a TQTextEdit can hold in \c
-    LogText mode to \a limit. If \a limit is -1 (the default), this
-    signifies an unlimited number of lines.
-
-    \warning Never use formatting tags that span more than one line
-    when the maximum log lines is set. When lines are removed from the
-    top of the buffer it could result in an unbalanced tag pair, i.e.
-    the left formatting tag is removed before the right one.
- */
-void TQTextEdit::setMaxLogLines( int limit )
-{
-    d->maxLogLines = limit;
-    if ( d->maxLogLines < -1 )
-	d->maxLogLines = -1;
-    if ( d->maxLogLines == -1 )
-	d->logOffset = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the maximum number of lines TQTextEdit can hold in \c
-    LogText mode. By default the number of lines is unlimited, which
-    is signified by a value of -1.
- */
-int TQTextEdit::maxLogLines()
-{
-    return d->maxLogLines;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Check if the number of lines in the buffer is limited, and uphold
-    that limit when appending new lines.
- */
-void TQTextEdit::optimCheckLimit( const TQString& str )
-{
-    if ( d->maxLogLines > -1 && d->maxLogLines <= d->od->numLines ) {
-	// NB! Removing the top line in the buffer will potentially
-	// destroy the structure holding the formatting tags - if line
-	// spanning tags are used.
-	TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *t = d->od->tags, *tmp, *itr;
-	TQPtrList<TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag> lst;
-	while ( t ) {
-	    t->line -= 1;
-	    // unhook the ptr from the tag structure
-	    if ( ((uint) LOGOFFSET(t->line) < (uint) d->logOffset &&
-		  (uint) LOGOFFSET(t->line) < (uint) LOGOFFSET(d->od->numLines) &&
-		  (uint) LOGOFFSET(d->od->numLines) > (uint) d->logOffset) )
-	    {
-		if ( t->prev )
-		    t->prev->next = t->next;
-		if ( t->next )
-		    t->next->prev = t->prev;
-		if ( d->od->tags == t )
-		    d->od->tags = t->next;
-		if ( d->od->lastTag == t ) {
-		    if ( t->prev )
-			d->od->lastTag = t->prev;
-		    else
-			d->od->lastTag = d->od->tags;
-		}
-		tmp = t;
-		t = t->next;
-		lst.append( tmp );
-		delete tmp;
-	    } else {
-		t = t->next;
-	    }
-	}
-	// Remove all references to the ptrs we just deleted
-	itr = d->od->tags;
-	while ( itr ){
-	    for ( tmp = lst.first(); tmp; tmp = lst.next() ) {
-		if ( itr->parent == tmp )
-		    itr->parent = 0;
-		if ( itr->leftTag == tmp )
-		    itr->leftTag = 0;
-	    }
-	    itr = itr->next;
-	}
-	// ...in the tag index as well
-	TQMapIterator<int, TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag *> idx;
-	if ( (idx = d->od->tagIndex.find( d->logOffset )) != d->od->tagIndex.end() )
-	    d->od->tagIndex.remove( idx );
-
-	TQMapIterator<int,TQString> it;
-	if ( (it = d->od->lines.find( d->logOffset )) != d->od->lines.end() ) {
-	    d->od->len -= (*it).length();
-	    d->od->lines.remove( it );
-	    d->od->numLines--;
-	    d->logOffset = LOGOFFSET(1);
-	}
-    }
-    d->od->len += str.length();
-    d->od->lines[ LOGOFFSET(d->od->numLines++) ] = str;
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextEdit::autoFormatting
-    \brief the enabled set of auto formatting features
-
-    The value can be any combination of the values in the \c
-    AutoFormatting enum.  The default is \c AutoAll. Choose \c AutoNone
-    to disable all automatic formatting.
-
-    Currently, the only automatic formatting feature provided is \c
-    AutoBulletList; future versions of TQt may offer more.
-*/
-
-void TQTextEdit::setAutoFormatting( uint features )
-{
-    d->autoFormatting = features;
-}
-
-uint TQTextEdit::autoFormatting() const
-{
-    return d->autoFormatting;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the TQSyntaxHighlighter set on this TQTextEdit. 0 is
-    returned if no syntax highlighter is set.
- */
-TQSyntaxHighlighter * TQTextEdit::syntaxHighlighter() const
-{
-    if (document()->preProcessor())
-	return ((TQSyntaxHighlighterInternal *) document()->preProcessor())->highlighter;
-    else
-	return 0;
-}
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_TEXTEDIT
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 26d5f4f..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextedit.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,620 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of the TQTextEdit class
-**
-** Created : 990101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQTEXTEDIT_H
-#define TQTEXTEDIT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqscrollview.h"
-#include "tqstylesheet.h"
-#include "tqptrvector.h"
-#include "tqvaluelist.h"
-#include "tqptrlist.h"
-#include "tqdragobject.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTEDIT
-// uncomment below to enable optimization mode - also uncomment the
-// optimDoAutoScroll() private slot since tqmoc ignores #ifdefs..
-#define TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-
-class TQPainter;
-class TQTextDocument;
-class TQTextCursor;
-class TQKeyEvent;
-class TQResizeEvent;
-class TQMouseEvent;
-class TQTimer;
-class TQTextString;
-class TQTextCommand;
-class TQTextParagraph;
-class TQTextFormat;
-class TQFont;
-class TQColor;
-class TQTextEdit;
-class TQTextBrowser;
-class TQTextString;
-struct TQUndoRedoInfoPrivate;
-class TQPopupMenu;
-class TQTextEditPrivate;
-class TQSyntaxHighlighter;
-
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-class TQTextEditOptimPrivate
-{
-public:
-    // Note: no left-tag has any value for leftTag or parent, and
-    // no right-tag has any formatting flags set.
-    enum TagType { Color = 0, Format = 1 };
-    struct Tag {
-	TagType type:2;
-	bool bold:1;
-	bool italic:1;
-	bool underline:1;
-	int line;
-	int index;
-	Tag * leftTag; // ptr to left-tag in a left-right tag pair
-	Tag * parent;  // ptr to parent left-tag in a nested tag
-	Tag * prev;
-	Tag * next;
-	TQString tag;
-    };
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate()
-    {
-	len = numLines = maxLineWidth = 0;
-	selStart.line = selStart.index = -1;
-	selEnd.line = selEnd.index = -1;
-	search.line = search.index = 0;
-	tags = lastTag = 0;
-    }
-    void clearTags()
-    {
-	Tag * itr = tags;
-	while ( tags ) {
-	    itr  = tags;
-	    tags = tags->next;
-	    delete itr;
-	}
-	tags = lastTag = 0;
-	tagIndex.clear();
-    }
-    ~TQTextEditOptimPrivate()
-    {
-	clearTags();
-    }
-    int len;
-    int numLines;
-    int maxLineWidth;
-    struct Selection {
-	int line;
-	int index;
-    };
-    Selection selStart, selEnd, search;
-    Tag * tags, * lastTag;
-    TQMap<int, TQString> lines;
-    TQMap<int, Tag *> tagIndex;
-};
-#endif
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQTextEdit : public TQScrollView
-{
-    friend class TQTextBrowser;
-    friend class TQSyntaxHighlighter;
-
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_ENUMS( WordWrap WrapPolicy )
-    Q_ENUMS( AutoFormatting )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TextFormat textFormat READ textFormat WRITE setTextFormat )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString text READ text WRITE setText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQBrush paper READ paper WRITE setPaper )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool linkUnderline READ linkUnderline WRITE setLinkUnderline )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString documentTitle READ documentTitle )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int length READ length )
-    Q_PROPERTY( WordWrap wordWrap READ wordWrap WRITE setWordWrap )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int wrapColumnOrWidth READ wrapColumnOrWidth WRITE setWrapColumnOrWidth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( WrapPolicy wrapPolicy READ wrapPolicy WRITE setWrapPolicy )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool hasSelectedText READ hasSelectedText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString selectedText READ selectedText )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int undoDepth READ undoDepth WRITE setUndoDepth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool overwriteMode READ isOverwriteMode WRITE setOverwriteMode )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool modified READ isModified WRITE setModified DESIGNABLE false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool readOnly READ isReadOnly WRITE setReadOnly )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool undoRedoEnabled READ isUndoRedoEnabled WRITE setUndoRedoEnabled )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int tabStopWidth READ tabStopWidth WRITE setTabStopWidth )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool tabChangesFocus READ tabChangesFocus WRITE setTabChangesFocus )
-    Q_PROPERTY( AutoFormatting autoFormatting READ autoFormattingProp WRITE setAutoFormattingProp )
-
-public:
-    enum WordWrap {
-	NoWrap,
-	WidgetWidth,
-	FixedPixelWidth,
-	FixedColumnWidth
-    };
-
-    enum WrapPolicy {
-	AtWordBoundary,
-	AtWhiteSpace = AtWordBoundary, // AtWhiteSpace is deprecated
-	Anywhere,
-	AtWordOrDocumentBoundary
-    };
-
-    enum AutoFormatting {
-	AutoNone = 0,
-	AutoBulletList = 0x00000001,
-	AutoAll = 0xffffffff
-    };
-
-    enum KeyboardAction {
-	ActionBackspace,
-	ActionDelete,
-	ActionReturn,
-	ActionKill,
-	ActionWordBackspace,
-	ActionWordDelete
-    };
-
-    enum CursorAction {
-	MoveBackward,
-	MoveForward,
-	MoveWordBackward,
-	MoveWordForward,
-	MoveUp,
-	MoveDown,
-	MoveLineStart,
-	MoveLineEnd,
-	MoveHome,
-	MoveEnd,
-	MovePgUp,
-	MovePgDown
-    };
-
-    enum VerticalAlignment {
-	AlignNormal,
-	AlignSuperScript,
-	AlignSubScript
-    };
-
-    enum TextInsertionFlags {
-	RedoIndentation = 0x0001,
-	CheckNewLines = 0x0002,
-	RemoveSelected = 0x0004,
-	AsIMCompositionText = 0x0008,  // internal use
-	WithIMSelection = 0x0010       // internal use
-    };
-
-    TQTextEdit( const TQString& text, const TQString& context = TQString::null,
-	       TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0);
-    TQTextEdit( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    virtual ~TQTextEdit();
-    void setPalette( const TQPalette & );
-
-    TQString text() const;
-    TQString text( int para ) const;
-    TQt::TextFormat textFormat() const;
-    TQString context() const;
-    TQString documentTitle() const;
-
-    void getSelection( int *paraFrom, int *indexFrom,
-		    int *paraTo, int *indexTo, int selNum = 0 ) const;
-    virtual bool find( const TQString &expr, bool cs, bool wo, bool forward = TRUE,
-		       int *para = 0, int *index = 0 );
-
-    int paragraphs() const;
-    int lines() const;
-    int linesOfParagraph( int para ) const;
-    int lineOfChar( int para, int chr );
-    int length() const;
-    TQRect paragraphRect( int para ) const;
-    int paragraphAt( const TQPoint &pos ) const;
-    int charAt( const TQPoint &pos, int *para ) const;
-    int paragraphLength( int para ) const;
-
-    TQStyleSheet* styleSheet() const;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIME
-    TQMimeSourceFactory* mimeSourceFactory() const;
-#endif
-    TQBrush paper() const;
-    bool linkUnderline() const;
-
-    int heightForWidth( int w ) const;
-
-    bool hasSelectedText() const;
-    TQString selectedText() const;
-    bool isUndoAvailable() const;
-    bool isRedoAvailable() const;
-
-    WordWrap wordWrap() const;
-    int wrapColumnOrWidth() const;
-    WrapPolicy wrapPolicy() const;
-
-    int tabStopWidth() const;
-
-    TQString anchorAt( const TQPoint& pos );
-    TQString anchorAt( const TQPoint& pos, Qt::AnchorAttribute a );
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-
-    bool isReadOnly() const { return readonly; }
-
-    void getCursorPosition( int *parag, int *index ) const;
-
-    bool isModified() const;
-    bool italic() const;
-    bool bold() const;
-    bool underline() const;
-    TQString family() const;
-    int pointSize() const;
-    TQColor color() const;
-    TQFont font() const;
-    TQFont currentFont() const;
-    int tqalignment() const;
-    int undoDepth() const;
-
-    // do not use, will go away
-    virtual bool getFormat( int para, int index, TQFont *font, TQColor *color, VerticalAlignment *verticalAlignment );
-    // do not use, will go away
-    virtual bool getParagraphFormat( int para, TQFont *font, TQColor *color,
-				     VerticalAlignment *verticalAlignment, int *tqalignment,
-				     TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayMode *displayMode,
-				     TQStyleSheetItem::ListStyle *listStyle,
-				     int *listDepth );
-
-
-    bool isOverwriteMode() const { return overWrite; }
-    TQColor paragraphBackgroundColor( int para ) const;
-
-    bool isUndoRedoEnabled() const;
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e );
-    bool tabChangesFocus() const;
-
-    void setAutoFormatting( uint features );
-    uint autoFormatting() const;
-    inline void setAutoFormattingProp( AutoFormatting features ) { setAutoFormatting((uint)features); }
-    inline AutoFormatting autoFormattingProp() const { return (AutoFormatting)autoFormatting(); }
-    TQSyntaxHighlighter *syntaxHighlighter() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void setEnabled( bool );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIME
-    virtual void setMimeSourceFactory( TQMimeSourceFactory* factory );
-#endif
-    virtual void setStyleSheet( TQStyleSheet* styleSheet );
-    virtual void scrollToAnchor( const TQString& name );
-    virtual void setPaper( const TQBrush& pap );
-    virtual void setLinkUnderline( bool );
-
-    virtual void setWordWrap( WordWrap mode );
-    virtual void setWrapColumnOrWidth( int );
-    virtual void setWrapPolicy( WrapPolicy policy );
-
-    virtual void copy();
-    virtual void append( const TQString& text );
-
-    void setText( const TQString &txt ) { setText( txt, TQString::null ); }
-    virtual void setText( const TQString &txt, const TQString &context );
-    virtual void setTextFormat( TQt::TextFormat f );
-
-    virtual void selectAll( bool select = TRUE );
-    virtual void setTabStopWidth( int ts );
-    virtual void zoomIn( int range );
-    virtual void zoomIn() { zoomIn( 1 ); }
-    virtual void zoomOut( int range );
-    virtual void zoomOut() { zoomOut( 1 ); }
-    virtual void zoomTo( int size );
-
-    virtual void sync();
-    virtual void setReadOnly( bool b );
-
-    virtual void undo();
-    virtual void redo();
-    virtual void cut();
-    virtual void paste();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    virtual void pasteSubType( const TQCString &subtype );
-#endif
-    virtual void clear();
-    virtual void del();
-    virtual void indent();
-    virtual void setItalic( bool b );
-    virtual void setBold( bool b );
-    virtual void setUnderline( bool b );
-    virtual void setFamily( const TQString &f );
-    virtual void setPointSize( int s );
-    virtual void setColor( const TQColor &c );
-    virtual void setFont( const TQFont &f );
-    virtual void setVerticalAlignment( VerticalAlignment a );
-    virtual void tqsetAlignment( int a );
-
-    // do not use, will go away
-    virtual void setParagType( TQStyleSheetItem::DisplayMode dm, TQStyleSheetItem::ListStyle listStyle );
-
-    virtual void setCursorPosition( int parag, int index );
-    virtual void setSelection( int parag_from, int index_from, int parag_to, int index_to, int selNum = 0 );
-    virtual void setSelectionAttributes( int selNum, const TQColor &back, bool invertText );
-    virtual void setModified( bool m );
-    virtual void resetFormat();
-    virtual void setUndoDepth( int d );
-    virtual void setFormat( TQTextFormat *f, int flags );
-    virtual void ensureCursorVisible();
-    virtual void placeCursor( const TQPoint &pos, TQTextCursor *c = 0 );
-    virtual void moveCursor( CursorAction action, bool select );
-    virtual void doKeyboardAction( KeyboardAction action );
-    virtual void removeSelectedText( int selNum = 0 );
-    virtual void removeSelection( int selNum = 0 );
-    virtual void setCurrentFont( const TQFont &f );
-    virtual void setOverwriteMode( bool b ) { overWrite = b; }
-
-    virtual void scrollToBottom();
-
-    void insert( const TQString &text, uint insertionFlags = CheckNewLines | RemoveSelected ); // ## virtual in 4.0
-
-    // obsolete
-    virtual void insert( const TQString &text, bool, bool = TRUE, bool = TRUE );
-
-    virtual void insertAt( const TQString &text, int para, int index );
-    virtual void removeParagraph( int para );
-    virtual void insertParagraph( const TQString &text, int para );
-
-    virtual void setParagraphBackgroundColor( int para, const TQColor &bg );
-    virtual void clearParagraphBackground( int para );
-
-    virtual void setUndoRedoEnabled( bool b );
-    void setTabChangesFocus( bool b ); // ### make virtual in 4.0
-
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    void polish();
-    void setMaxLogLines( int numLines );
-    int maxLogLines();
-#endif
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void textChanged();
-    void selectionChanged();
-    void copyAvailable( bool );
-    void undoAvailable( bool yes );
-    void redoAvailable( bool yes );
-    void currentFontChanged( const TQFont &f );
-    void currentColorChanged( const TQColor &c );
-    void currentAlignmentChanged( int a );
-    void currentVerticalAlignmentChanged( VerticalAlignment a );
-    void cursorPositionChanged( TQTextCursor *c );
-    void cursorPositionChanged( int para, int pos );
-    void returnPressed();
-    void modificationChanged( bool m );
-    void clicked( int parag, int index );
-    void doubleClicked( int parag, int index );
-
-protected:
-    void repaintChanged();
-    void updateStyles();
-    void drawContents( TQPainter *p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch );
-    bool event( TQEvent *e );
-    void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e );
-    void viewportResizeEvent( TQResizeEvent* );
-    void contentsMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void contentsMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void contentsMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void contentsMouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHEELEVENT
-    void contentsWheelEvent( TQWheelEvent *e );
-#endif
-    void imStartEvent( TQIMEvent * );
-    void imComposeEvent( TQIMEvent * );
-    void imEndEvent( TQIMEvent * );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
-    void contentsDragEnterEvent( TQDragEnterEvent *e );
-    void contentsDragMoveEvent( TQDragMoveEvent *e );
-    void contentsDragLeaveEvent( TQDragLeaveEvent *e );
-    void contentsDropEvent( TQDropEvent *e );
-#endif
-    void contentsContextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e );
-    bool sendMouseEventToInputContext( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    bool focusNextPrevChild( bool next );
-    TQTextDocument *document() const;
-    TQTextCursor *textCursor() const;
-    void setDocument( TQTextDocument *doc );
-    virtual TQPopupMenu *createPopupMenu( const TQPoint& pos );
-    virtual TQPopupMenu *createPopupMenu();
-    void drawCursor( bool visible );
-
-    void windowActivationChange( bool );
-
-protected Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void doChangeInterval();
-    void sliderReleased(); // ### make virtual in 4.0
-#if (TQT_VERSION >= 0x040000)
-#error "Some functions need to be changed to virtual for TQt 4.0"
-#endif
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void formatMore();
-    void doResize();
-    void autoScrollTimerDone();
-    void blinkCursor();
-    void setModified();
-    void startDrag();
-    void documentWidthChanged( int w );
-    void clipboardChanged();
-
-private:
-    struct TQ_EXPORT UndoRedoInfo {
-	enum Type { Invalid, Insert, Delete, Backspace, Return, RemoveSelected, Format, Style, IME };
-
-	UndoRedoInfo( TQTextDocument *dc );
-	~UndoRedoInfo();
-	void clear();
-	bool valid() const;
-
-	TQUndoRedoInfoPrivate *d;
-	int id;
-	int index;
-	int eid;
-	int eindex;
-	TQTextFormat *format;
-	int flags;
-	Type type;
-	TQTextDocument *doc;
-	TQByteArray styleInformation;
-    };
-
-private:
-    void updateCursor( const TQPoint & pos );
-    void handleMouseMove( const TQPoint& pos );
-    void drawContents( TQPainter * );
-    virtual bool linksEnabled() const { return FALSE; }
-    void init();
-    void checkUndoRedoInfo( UndoRedoInfo::Type t );
-    void updateCurrentFormat();
-    bool handleReadOnlyKeyEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-    void makeParagVisible( TQTextParagraph *p );
-    void normalCopy();
-    void copyToClipboard();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIME
-    TQCString pickSpecial(TQMimeSource* ms, bool always_ask, const TQPoint&);
-    TQTextDrag *dragObject( TQWidget *parent = 0 ) const;
-#endif
-#ifndef TQT_NO_MIMECLIPBOARD
-    void pasteSpecial(const TQPoint&);
-#endif
-    void setFontInternal( const TQFont &f );
-
-    virtual void emitHighlighted( const TQString & ) {}
-    virtual void emitLinkClicked( const TQString & ) {}
-
-    void readFormats( TQTextCursor &c1, TQTextCursor &c2, TQTextString &text, bool fillStyles = FALSE );
-    void clearUndoRedo();
-    void paintDocument( bool drawAll, TQPainter *p, int cx = -1, int cy = -1, int cw = -1, int ch = -1 );
-    void moveCursor( CursorAction action );
-    void ensureFormatted( TQTextParagraph *p );
-    void placeCursor( const TQPoint &pos, TQTextCursor *c, bool link );
-    void updateMicroFocusHint();
-
-#ifdef TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-    bool checkOptimMode();
-    TQString optimText() const;
-    void optimSetText( const TQString &str );
-    void optimAppend( const TQString &str );
-    void optimInsert( const TQString &str, int line, int index );
-    void optimDrawContents( TQPainter * p, int cx, int cy, int cw, int ch );
-    void optimMousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * e );
-    void optimMouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * e );
-    void optimMouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * e );
-    int  optimCharIndex( const TQString &str, int mx ) const;
-    void optimSelectAll();
-    void optimRemoveSelection();
-    void optimSetSelection( int startLine, int startIdx, int endLine,
-			    int endIdx );
-    bool optimHasSelection() const;
-    TQString optimSelectedText() const;
-    bool optimFind( const TQString & str, bool, bool, bool, int *, int * );
-    void optimParseTags( TQString * str, int lineNo = -1, int indexOffset = 0 );
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * optimPreviousLeftTag( int line );
-    void optimSetTextFormat( TQTextDocument *, TQTextCursor *, TQTextFormat * f,
-			     int, int, TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * t );
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * optimAppendTag( int index, const TQString & tag );
-    TQTextEditOptimPrivate::Tag * optimInsertTag( int line, int index, const TQString & tag );
-    void optimCheckLimit( const TQString& str );
-    bool optimHasBoldMetrics( int line );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void optimDoAutoScroll();
-#endif // TQT_TEXTEDIT_OPTIMIZATION
-
-private:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CLIPBOARD
-    void pasteSubType( const TQCString &subtype, TQMimeSource *m );
-#endif
-
-private:
-    TQTextDocument *doc;
-    TQTextCursor *cursor;
-    TQTimer *formatTimer, *scrollTimer, *changeIntervalTimer, *blinkTimer, *dragStartTimer;
-    TQTextParagraph *lastFormatted;
-    int interval;
-    UndoRedoInfo undoRedoInfo;
-    TQTextFormat *currentFormat;
-    int currentAlignment;
-    TQPoint oldMousePos, mousePos;
-    TQPoint dragStartPos;
-    TQString onLink;
-    WordWrap wrapMode;
-    WrapPolicy wPolicy;
-    int wrapWidth;
-    TQString pressedLink;
-    TQTextEditPrivate *d;
-    bool inDoubleClick : 1;
-    bool mousePressed : 1;
-    bool cursorVisible : 1;
-    bool blinkCursorVisible : 1;
-    bool readOnly : 1;
-    bool modified : 1;
-    bool mightStartDrag : 1;
-    bool inDnD : 1;
-    bool readonly : 1;
-    bool undoEnabled : 1;
-    bool overWrite : 1;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQTextEdit( const TQTextEdit & );
-    TQTextEdit &operator=( const TQTextEdit & );
-#endif
-};
-
-inline TQTextDocument *TQTextEdit::document() const
-{
-    return doc;
-}
-
-inline TQTextCursor *TQTextEdit::textCursor() const
-{
-    return cursor;
-}
-
-inline void TQTextEdit::setCurrentFont( const TQFont &f )
-{
-    TQTextEdit::setFontInternal( f );
-}
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_TEXTEDIT
-#endif //TQTEXTVIEW_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index a262dfb..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of the TQTextView class
-**
-** Created : 990101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqtextview.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTVIEW
-
-/*! \class TQTextView
-    \brief The TQTextView class provides a rich-text viewer.
-
-  \obsolete
-
-  This class wraps a read-only \l TQTextEdit.
-  Use a \l TQTextEdit instead, and call setReadOnly(TRUE)
-  to disable editing.
-*/
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-TQTextView::TQTextView( const TQString& text, const TQString& context,
-		      TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQTextEdit( text, context, parent, name )
-{
-    setReadOnly( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-TQTextView::TQTextView( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQTextEdit( parent, name )
-{
-    setReadOnly( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-TQTextView::~TQTextView()
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextView::undoDepth
-    \brief the number of undoable steps
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextView::overwriteMode
-    \brief whether new text overwrites or pushes aside existing text
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextView::modified
-    \brief Whether the text view's contents have been modified.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextView::readOnly
-    \brief Whether the text view's contents are read only.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQTextView::undoRedoEnabled
-    \brief Whether undo and redo are enabled.
-*/
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.h
deleted file mode 100644
index f8a4a89..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtextview.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of the TQTextView class
-**
-** Created : 990101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQTEXTVIEW_H
-#define TQTEXTVIEW_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqtextedit.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TEXTVIEW
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQTextView : public TQTextEdit
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( int undoDepth DESIGNABLE false SCRIPTABLE false )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool overwriteMode DESIGNABLE false SCRIPTABLE false )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool modified SCRIPTABLE false)
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool readOnly DESIGNABLE false SCRIPTABLE false )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool undoRedoEnabled DESIGNABLE false SCRIPTABLE false )
-
-public:
-    TQTextView( const TQString& text, const TQString& context = TQString::null,
-	       TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0);
-    TQTextView( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-
-    virtual ~TQTextView();
-
-private:
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY) // Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-    TQTextView( const TQTextView & );
-    TQTextView &operator=( const TQTextView & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_TEXTVIEW
-#endif //TQTEXTVIEW_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index bb5e052..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,671 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of some TQt private functions.
-**
-** Created : 001101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2000-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqplatformdefs.h"
-
-#include "tqtitlebar_p.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TITLEBAR
-
-#include <tqcursor.h>
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqdatetime.h"
-#include "private/tqapplication_p.h"
-#include "tqtooltip.h"
-#include "tqimage.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "private/tqinternal_p.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WORKSPACE
-#include "tqworkspace.h"
-#endif
-#if defined(TQ_WS_WIN)
-#include "tqt_windows.h"
-#endif
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-class TQTitleBarTip : public TQToolTip
-{
-public:
-    TQTitleBarTip( TQWidget * parent ) : TQToolTip( parent ) { }
-
-    void maybeTip( const TQPoint &pos )
-    {
-	if ( !::tqqt_cast<TQTitleBar*>(parentWidget()) )
-	    return;
-	TQTitleBar *t = (TQTitleBar *)parentWidget();
-
-	TQString tipstring;
-	TQStyle::SubControl ctrl = t->tqstyle().querySubControl(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, t, pos);
-	TQSize controlSize = t->tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, t, ctrl).size();
-
-	TQWidget *window = t->window();
-	if ( window ) {
-	    switch(ctrl) {
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu:
-		if ( t->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_SysMenu ) )
-		    tipstring = TQTitleBar::tr( "System Menu" );
-		break;
-
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarShadeButton:
-		if ( t->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) && t->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_MinMax ) )
-		    tipstring = TQTitleBar::tr( "Shade" );
-		break;
-
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton:
-		if ( t->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) && t->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_MinMax ) )
-		    tipstring = TQTitleBar::tr( "Unshade" );
-		break;
-
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarNormalButton:
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMinButton:
-		if ( !t->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) && t->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Minimize ) ) {
-		    if( window->isMinimized() )
-			tipstring = TQTitleBar::tr( "Normalize" );
-		    else
-			tipstring = TQTitleBar::tr( "Minimize" );
-		}
-		break;
-
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMaxButton:
-		if ( !t->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) && t->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Maximize ) )
-		    tipstring = TQTitleBar::tr( "Maximize" );
-		break;
-
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarCloseButton:
-		if ( t->testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_SysMenu ) )
-		    tipstring = TQTitleBar::tr( "Close" );
-		break;
-
-	    default:
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-	if ( tipstring.isEmpty() ) {
-	    if ( t->visibleText() != t->caption() )
-		tipstring = t->caption();
-	}
-#endif
-	if(!tipstring.isEmpty())
-	    tip( TQRect(pos, controlSize), tipstring );
-    }
-};
-#endif
-
-class TQTitleBarPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQTitleBarPrivate()
-	: toolTip( 0 ), act( 0 ), window( 0 ), movable( 1 ), pressed( 0 ), autoraise(0)
-    {
-    }
-
-    TQStyle::SCFlags buttonDown;
-    TQPoint moveOffset;
-    TQToolTip *toolTip;
-    bool act		    :1;
-    TQWidget* window;
-    bool movable            :1;
-    bool pressed            :1;
-    bool autoraise          :1;
-    TQString cuttext;
-#ifdef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-    TQString cap;
-#endif
-};
-
-TQTitleBar::TQTitleBar(TQWidget* w, TQWidget* parent, const char* name)
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, (WFlags)(WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder | TQt::WNoAutoErase) )
-{
-    d = new TQTitleBarPrivate();
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    d->toolTip = new TQTitleBarTip( this );
-#endif
-    d->window = w;
-    d->buttonDown = TQStyle::SC_None;
-    d->act = 0;
-    if ( w ) {
-	setWFlags( ((TQTitleBar*)w)->getWFlags() | TQt::WNoAutoErase );
-	if ( w->tqminimumSize() == w->tqmaximumSize() )
-	    clearWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Maximize );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-    	setCaption( w->caption() );
-#endif
-    } else {
-	setWFlags( (WFlags)(WStyle_Customize | TQt::WNoAutoErase) );
-    }
-
-    readColors();
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Expanding, TQSizePolicy::Fixed ) );
-    setMouseTracking(TRUE);
-}
-
-TQTitleBar::~TQTitleBar()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    delete d->toolTip;
-#endif
-
-    delete d;
-    d = 0;
-}
-
-#ifdef TQ_WS_WIN
-extern TQRgb qt_colorref2qrgb(COLORREF col);
-#endif
-
-void TQTitleBar::readColors()
-{
-    TQPalette pal = palette();
-
-    bool colorsInitialized = FALSE;
-
-#ifdef TQ_WS_WIN // ask system properties on windows
-#ifndef SPI_GETGRADIENTCAPTIONS
-#define SPI_GETGRADIENTCAPTIONS 0x1008
-#endif
-#ifndef COLOR_GRADIENTACTIVECAPTION
-#define COLOR_GRADIENTACTIVECAPTION 27
-#endif
-#ifndef COLOR_GRADIENTINACTIVECAPTION
-#define COLOR_GRADIENTINACTIVECAPTION 28
-#endif
-    if ( TQApplication::desktopSettingsAware() ) {
-	pal.setColor( TQPalette::Active, TQColorGroup::Highlight, qt_colorref2qrgb(GetSysColor(COLOR_ACTIVECAPTION)) );
-	pal.setColor( TQPalette::Inactive, TQColorGroup::Highlight, qt_colorref2qrgb(GetSysColor(COLOR_INACTIVECAPTION)) );
-	pal.setColor( TQPalette::Active, TQColorGroup::HighlightedText, qt_colorref2qrgb(GetSysColor(COLOR_CAPTIONTEXT)) );
-	pal.setColor( TQPalette::Inactive, TQColorGroup::HighlightedText, qt_colorref2qrgb(GetSysColor(COLOR_INACTIVECAPTIONTEXT)) );
-	if ( qt_winver != TQt::WV_95 && qt_winver != WV_NT ) {
-	    colorsInitialized = TRUE;
-	    BOOL gradient;
-	    TQT_WA( {
-		SystemParametersInfo( SPI_GETGRADIENTCAPTIONS, 0, &gradient, 0 );
-	    } , {
-		SystemParametersInfoA( SPI_GETGRADIENTCAPTIONS, 0, &gradient, 0 );
-	    } );
-	    if ( gradient ) {
-		pal.setColor( TQPalette::Active, TQColorGroup::Base, qt_colorref2qrgb(GetSysColor(COLOR_GRADIENTACTIVECAPTION)) );
-		pal.setColor( TQPalette::Inactive, TQColorGroup::Base, qt_colorref2qrgb(GetSysColor(COLOR_GRADIENTINACTIVECAPTION)) );
-	    } else {
-		pal.setColor( TQPalette::Active, TQColorGroup::Base, tqpalette().active().highlight() );
-		pal.setColor( TQPalette::Inactive, TQColorGroup::Base, tqpalette().inactive().highlight() );
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-#endif // TQ_WS_WIN
-    if ( !colorsInitialized ) {
-	pal.setColor( TQPalette::Active, TQColorGroup::Highlight, tqpalette().active().highlight() );
-	pal.setColor( TQPalette::Active, TQColorGroup::Base, tqpalette().active().highlight() );
-	pal.setColor( TQPalette::Inactive, TQColorGroup::Highlight, tqpalette().inactive().dark() );
-	pal.setColor( TQPalette::Inactive, TQColorGroup::Base, tqpalette().inactive().dark() );
-	pal.setColor( TQPalette::Inactive, TQColorGroup::HighlightedText, tqpalette().inactive().background() );
-    }
-
-    setPalette( pal );
-    setActive( d->act );
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * e)
-{
-    if ( !d->act )
-	emit doActivate();
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	d->pressed = TRUE;
-	TQStyle::SCFlags ctrl = tqstyle().querySubControl(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, this, e->pos());
-	switch (ctrl) {
-	case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu:
-	    if ( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_SysMenu ) && !testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) ) {
-		d->buttonDown = TQStyle::SC_None;
-		static TQTime* t = 0;
-		static TQTitleBar* tc = 0;
-		if ( !t )
-		    t = new TQTime;
-		if ( tc != this || t->elapsed() > TQApplication::doubleClickInterval() ) {
-		    emit showOperationMenu();
-		    t->start();
-		    tc = this;
-		} else {
-		    tc = 0;
-		    emit doClose();
-		    return;
-		}
-	    }
-	    break;
-
-	case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarShadeButton:
-	case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton:
-	    if ( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_MinMax ) && testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) )
-		d->buttonDown = ctrl;
-	    break;
-
-	case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarNormalButton:
-	    if( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Minimize ) && !testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) )
-		d->buttonDown = ctrl;
-	    break;
-
-	case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMinButton:
-	    if( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Minimize ) && !testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) )
-		d->buttonDown = ctrl;
-	    break;
-
-	case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMaxButton:
-	    if ( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Maximize ) && !testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) )
-		d->buttonDown = ctrl;
-	    break;
-
-	case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarCloseButton:
-	    if ( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_SysMenu ) )
-		d->buttonDown = ctrl;
-	    break;
-
-	case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarLabel:
-	    d->buttonDown = ctrl;
-	    d->moveOffset = mapToParent( e->pos() );
-	    break;
-
-	default:
-	    break;
-	}
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    } else {
-	d->pressed = FALSE;
-    }
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent *e )
-{
-    TQStyle::SCFlags ctrl = tqstyle().querySubControl(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, this, e->pos());
-    if( ctrl == TQStyle::SC_TitleBarLabel || ctrl == TQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu )
-	emit popupOperationMenu(e->globalPos());
-    else
-	e->ignore();
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * e)
-{
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton && d->pressed) {
-	TQStyle::SCFlags ctrl = tqstyle().querySubControl(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, this, e->pos());
-
-	if (ctrl == d->buttonDown) {
-	    switch(ctrl) {
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarShadeButton:
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton:
-		if( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_MinMax ) && testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) )
-		    emit doShade();
-		break;
-
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarNormalButton:
-		if( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_MinMax ) && !testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) )
-		    emit doNormal();
-		break;
-
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMinButton:
-		if( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Minimize ) && !testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) )
-		    emit doMinimize();
-		break;
-
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMaxButton:
-		if( d->window && testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Maximize ) && !testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) ) {
-		    if(d->window->isMaximized())
-			emit doNormal();
-		    else
-			emit doMaximize();
-		}
-		break;
-
-	    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarCloseButton:
-		if( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_SysMenu ) ) {
-		    d->buttonDown = TQStyle::SC_None;
-		    tqrepaint(FALSE);
-		    emit doClose();
-		    return;
-		}
-		break;
-
-	    default:
-		break;
-	    }
-	}
-	d->buttonDown = TQStyle::SC_None;
-	tqrepaint(FALSE);
-	d->pressed = FALSE;
-    }
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * e)
-{
-    switch (d->buttonDown) {
-    case TQStyle::SC_None:
-	if(autoRaise())
-	    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-	break;
-    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu:
-	break;
-    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarShadeButton:
-    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton:
-    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarNormalButton:
-    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMinButton:
-    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMaxButton:
-    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarCloseButton:
-	{
-	    TQStyle::SCFlags last_ctrl = d->buttonDown;
-	    d->buttonDown = tqstyle().querySubControl(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, this, e->pos());
-	    if( d->buttonDown != last_ctrl)
-		d->buttonDown = TQStyle::SC_None;
-	    tqrepaint(FALSE);
-	    d->buttonDown = last_ctrl;
-	}
-	break;
-
-    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarLabel:
-	if ( d->buttonDown == TQStyle::SC_TitleBarLabel && d->movable && d->pressed ) {
-	    if ( (d->moveOffset - mapToParent( e->pos() ) ).manhattanLength() >= 4 ) {
-		TQPoint p = mapFromGlobal(e->globalPos());
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WORKSPACE
-		if(d->window && d->window->parentWidget()->inherits("TQWorkspaceChild")) {
-		    TQWorkspace *workspace = ::tqqt_cast<TQWorkspace*>(d->window->parentWidget()->parentWidget());
-		    if(workspace) {
-			p = workspace->mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() );
-			if ( !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(workspace->rect()).contains(p) ) {
-			    if ( p.x() < 0 )
-				p.rx() = 0;
-			    if ( p.y() < 0 )
-				p.ry() = 0;
-			    if ( p.x() > workspace->width() )
-				p.rx() = workspace->width();
-			    if ( p.y() > workspace->height() )
-				p.ry() = workspace->height();
-			}
-		    }
-		}
-#endif
-		TQPoint pp = p - d->moveOffset;
-		if (!parentWidget()->isMaximized())
-		    parentWidget()->move( pp );
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    TQStyle::SCFlags last_ctrl = d->buttonDown;
-	    d->buttonDown = TQStyle::SC_None;
-	    if( d->buttonDown != last_ctrl)
-		tqrepaint(FALSE);
-	}
-	break;
-    }
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *r)
-{
-    TQWidget::resizeEvent(r);
-    cutText();
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::paintEvent(TQPaintEvent *)
-{
-    TQStyle::SCFlags ctrls = TQStyle::SC_TitleBarLabel;
-    if ( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_SysMenu) ) {
-	if ( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Tool ) ) {
-	    ctrls |= TQStyle::SC_TitleBarCloseButton;
-	    if ( d->window && testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_MinMax ) ) {
-		if ( d->window->isMinimized() )
-		    ctrls |= TQStyle::SC_TitleBarUnshadeButton;
-		else
-		    ctrls |= TQStyle::SC_TitleBarShadeButton;
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    ctrls |= TQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu | TQStyle::SC_TitleBarCloseButton;
-	    if ( d->window && testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Minimize ) ) {
-		if( d->window && d->window->isMinimized() )
-		    ctrls |= TQStyle::SC_TitleBarNormalButton;
-		else
-		    ctrls |= TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMinButton;
-	    }
-	    if ( d->window && testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_Maximize ) && !d->window->isMaximized() )
-		ctrls |= TQStyle::SC_TitleBarMaxButton;
-	}
-    }
-
-    TQStyle::SCFlags under_mouse = TQStyle::SC_None;
-    if( autoRaise() && hasMouse() ) {
-	TQPoint p(mapFromGlobal(TQCursor::pos()));
-	under_mouse = tqstyle().querySubControl(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, this, p);
-	ctrls ^= under_mouse;
-    }
-
-    TQSharedDoubleBuffer buffer( this, rect() );
-    tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, buffer.painter(), this, rect(),
-			       tqcolorGroup(),
-			       isEnabled() ? TQStyle::Style_Enabled :
-			       TQStyle::Style_Default, ctrls, d->buttonDown);
-    if(under_mouse != TQStyle::SC_None)
-	tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, buffer.painter(), this, rect(),
-				   tqcolorGroup(),
-				   (TQStyle::Style_MouseOver |
-				   (isEnabled() ? TQStyle::Style_Enabled : (QStyle::StateFlag)0)),
-				   under_mouse, d->buttonDown);
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    if ( e->button() != Qt::LeftButton )
-	return;
-
-    switch(tqstyle().querySubControl(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, this, e->pos())) {
-    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarLabel:
-	emit doubleClicked();
-	break;
-
-    case TQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu:
-	if ( testWFlags( TQt::WStyle_SysMenu ) )
-	    emit doClose();
-	break;
-
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-}
-
-#ifdef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-// We provide one, since titlebar is useless otherwise.
-TQString TQTitleBar::caption() const
-{
-    return d->cap;
-}
-#endif
-
-void TQTitleBar::cutText()
-{
-    TQFontMetrics fm( font() );
-
-    int maxw = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, this,
-					      TQStyle::SC_TitleBarLabel).width();
-    if ( !d->window )
-	maxw = width() - 20;
-    const TQString txt = caption();
-    d->cuttext = txt;
-    if ( fm.width( txt + "m" ) > maxw ) {
-	int i = txt.length();
-	int dotlength = fm.width( "..." );
-	while ( i>0 && fm.width(txt.left( i )) + dotlength > maxw )
-	    i--;
-	if(i != (int)txt.length())
-	    d->cuttext = txt.left( i ) + "...";
-    }
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::setCaption( const TQString& title )
-{
-    if( caption() == title)
-	return;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-    TQWidget::setCaption( title );
-#else
-    d->cap = title;
-#endif
-    cutText();
-
-    update();
-}
-
-
-void TQTitleBar::setIcon( const TQPixmap& icon )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-#ifndef TQT_NO_IMAGE_SMOOTHSCALE
-    TQRect menur = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, this,
-						  TQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu);
-
-    TQPixmap theIcon;
-    if (icon.width() > menur.width()) {
-	// try to keep something close to the same aspect
-	int aspect = (icon.height() * 100) / icon.width();
-	int newh = (aspect * menur.width()) / 100;
-	theIcon.convertFromImage( TQT_TQIMAGE_OBJECT(icon.convertToImage()).smoothScale(menur.width(),
-								   newh) );
-    } else if (icon.height() > menur.height()) {
-	// try to keep something close to the same aspect
-	int aspect = (icon.width() * 100) / icon.height();
-	int neww = (aspect * menur.height()) / 100;
-	theIcon.convertFromImage( TQT_TQIMAGE_OBJECT(icon.convertToImage()).smoothScale(neww,
-								   menur.height()) );
-    } else
-	theIcon = icon;
-
-    TQWidget::setIcon( theIcon );
-#else
-    TQWidget::setIcon( icon );
-#endif
-
-    update();
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::leaveEvent( TQEvent * )
-{
-    if(autoRaise() && !d->pressed)
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::enterEvent( TQEvent * )
-{
-    if(autoRaise() && !d->pressed)
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    TQEvent e( TQEvent::Leave );
-    TQApplication::sendEvent( parentWidget(), &e );
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::setActive( bool active )
-{
-    if ( d->act == active )
-	return ;
-
-    d->act = active;
-    update();
-}
-
-bool TQTitleBar::isActive() const
-{
-    return d->act;
-}
-
-bool TQTitleBar::usesActiveColor() const
-{
-    return ( isActive() && isActiveWindow() ) ||
-	   ( !window() && tqtopLevelWidget()->isActiveWindow() );
-}
-
-TQString TQTitleBar::visibleText() const
-{
-    return d->cuttext;
-}
-
-TQWidget *TQTitleBar::window() const
-{
-    return d->window;
-}
-
-bool TQTitleBar::event( TQEvent* e )
-{
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ApplicationPaletteChange ) {
-	readColors();
-	return TRUE;
-    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::WindowActivate ) {
-	setActive( d->act );
-    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::WindowDeactivate ) {
-	bool wasActive = d->act;
-	setActive( FALSE );
-	d->act = wasActive;
-    }
-
-    return TQWidget::event( e );
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::setMovable(bool b)
-{
-    d->movable = b;
-}
-
-bool TQTitleBar::isMovable() const
-{
-    return d->movable;
-}
-
-void TQTitleBar::setAutoRaise(bool b)
-{
-    d->autoraise = b;
-}
-
-bool TQTitleBar::autoRaise() const
-{
-    return d->autoraise;
-}
-
-TQSize TQTitleBar::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-    TQRect menur = tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_TitleBar, this,
-						 TQStyle::SC_TitleBarSysMenu);
-    return TQSize( menur.width(), tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_TitleBarHeight, this ) );
-}
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_TITLEBAR
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar_p.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e10ed1..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtitlebar_p.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of some TQt private functions.
-**
-** Created : 000101
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2000-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQTITLEBAR_P_H
-#define TQTITLEBAR_P_H
-
-
-//
-//  W A R N I N G
-//  -------------
-//
-// This file is not part of the TQt API.  It exists for the convenience
-// of qworkspace.cpp and qdockwindow.cpp.  This header file may change
-// from version to version without notice, or even be removed.
-//
-// We mean it.
-//
-//
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqbutton.h"
-#include "tqlabel.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#if !defined(TQT_NO_TITLEBAR)
-
-class TQToolTip;
-class TQTitleBarPrivate;
-class TQPixmap;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQTitleBar : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool autoRaise READ autoRaise WRITE setAutoRaise )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool movable READ isMovable WRITE setMovable )
-
-public:
-    TQTitleBar (TQWidget* w, TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0);
-    ~TQTitleBar();
-
-    bool isActive() const;
-    bool usesActiveColor() const;
-    virtual TQString visibleText() const;
-
-    bool isMovable() const;
-    void setMovable(bool);
-
-    bool autoRaise() const;
-    void setAutoRaise(bool);
-
-    TQWidget *window() const;
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-
-#ifdef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-    // We provide one, since titlebar is useless otherwise.
-    TQString caption() const;
-#endif
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void setActive( bool );
-    void setCaption( const TQString& title );
-    void setIcon( const TQPixmap& icon );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void doActivate();
-    void doNormal();
-    void doClose();
-    void doMaximize();
-    void doMinimize();
-    void doShade();
-    void showOperationMenu();
-    void popupOperationMenu( const TQPoint& );
-    void doubleClicked();
-
-protected:
-    bool event( TQEvent *);
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *);
-    void contextMenuEvent( TQContextMenuEvent * );
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseDoubleClickEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void enterEvent( TQEvent *e );
-    void leaveEvent( TQEvent *e );
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent *p );
-
-    virtual void cutText();
-
-private:
-    void readColors();
-
-    TQTitleBarPrivate *d;
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY) // Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-    TQTitleBar( const TQTitleBar & );
-    TQTitleBar &operator=( const TQTitleBar & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif
-#endif //TQTITLEBAR_P_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 771a332..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,818 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQToolBar class
-**
-** Created : 980315
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqtoolbar.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-
-#include "tqmainwindow.h"
-#include "tqtooltip.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#include "tqobjectlist.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqtoolbutton.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqcombobox.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqwidgetlist.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-
-static const char * const arrow_v_xpm[] = {
-    "7 9 3 1",
-    "	    c None",
-    ".	    c #000000",
-    "+	    c none",
-    ".+++++.",
-    "..+++..",
-    "+..+..+",
-    "++...++",
-    ".++.++.",
-    "..+++..",
-    "+..+..+",
-    "++...++",
-    "+++.+++"};
-
-static const char * const arrow_h_xpm[] = {
-    "9 7 3 1",
-    "	    c None",
-    ".	    c #000000",
-    "+	    c none",
-    "..++..+++",
-    "+..++..++",
-    "++..++..+",
-    "+++..++..",
-    "++..++..+",
-    "+..++..++",
-    "..++..+++"};
-
-class TQToolBarExtensionWidget;
-
-class TQToolBarPrivate
-{
-public:
-    TQToolBarPrivate() : moving( FALSE ) {
-    }
-
-    bool moving;
-    TQToolBarExtensionWidget *extension;
-    TQPopupMenu *extensionPopup;
-};
-
-
-class TQToolBarSeparator : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQToolBarSeparator( Qt::Orientation, TQToolBar *parent, const char* name=0 );
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    Qt::Orientation orientation() const { return orient; }
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation );
-protected:
-    void styleChange( TQStyle& );
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * );
-
-private:
-    Qt::Orientation orient;
-};
-
-class TQToolBarExtensionWidget : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-
-public:
-    TQToolBarExtensionWidget( TQWidget *w );
-    void setOrientation( Qt::Orientation o );
-    TQToolButton *button() const { return tb; }
-
-protected:
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e ) {
-	TQWidget::resizeEvent( e );
-	layOut();
-    }
-
-private:
-    void layOut();
-    TQToolButton *tb;
-    Qt::Orientation orient;
-
-};
-
-TQToolBarExtensionWidget::TQToolBarExtensionWidget( TQWidget *w )
-    : TQWidget( w, "qt_dockwidget_internal" )
-{
-    tb = new TQToolButton( this, "qt_toolbar_ext_button" );
-    tb->setAutoRaise( TRUE );
-    setOrientation( Qt::Horizontal );
-}
-
-void TQToolBarExtensionWidget::setOrientation( Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    orient = o;
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	tb->setPixmap( TQPixmap( (const char **)arrow_h_xpm ) );
-    else
-	tb->setPixmap( TQPixmap( (const char **)arrow_v_xpm ) );
-    layOut();
-}
-
-void TQToolBarExtensionWidget::layOut()
-{
-    tb->setGeometry( 2, 2, width() - 4, height() - 4 );
-}
-
-TQToolBarSeparator::TQToolBarSeparator(Qt::Orientation o , TQToolBar *parent,
-				     const char* name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name )
-{
-    connect( parent, TQT_SIGNAL(orientationChanged(Qt::Orientation)),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT(setOrientation(Qt::Orientation)) );
-    setOrientation( o );
-    setBackgroundMode( parent->backgroundMode() );
-    setBackgroundOrigin( ParentOrigin );
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Minimum ) );
-}
-
-
-
-void TQToolBarSeparator::setOrientation( Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    orient = o;
-}
-
-void TQToolBarSeparator::styleChange( TQStyle& )
-{
-    setOrientation( orient );
-}
-
-TQSize TQToolBarSeparator::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    int extent = tqstyle().tqpixelMetric( TQStyle::PM_DockWindowSeparatorExtent,
-				      this );
-    if ( orient == Qt::Horizontal )
-	return TQSize( extent, 0 );
-    else
-	return TQSize( 0, extent );
-}
-
-void TQToolBarSeparator::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent * )
-{
-    TQPainter p( this );
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Horizontal;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_DockWindowSeparator, &p, rect(),
-			   tqcolorGroup(), flags );
-}
-
-#include "tqtoolbar.tqmoc"
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQToolBar tqtoolbar.h
-    \brief The TQToolBar class provides a movable panel containing
-    widgets such as tool buttons.
-
-    \ingroup application
-    \mainclass
-
-    A toolbar is a panel that contains a set of controls, usually
-    represented by small icons. It's purpose is to provide quick
-    access to frequently used commands or options. Within a
-    TQMainWindow the user can drag toolbars within and between the
-    \link TQDockArea dock areas\endlink. Toolbars can also be dragged
-    out of any dock area to float freely as top-level windows.
-
-    TQToolBar is a specialization of TQDockWindow, and so provides all
-    the functionality of a TQDockWindow.
-
-    To use TQToolBar you simply create a TQToolBar as a child of a
-    TQMainWindow, create a number of TQToolButton widgets (or other
-    widgets) in left to right (or top to bottom) order and call
-    addSeparator() when you want a separator. When a toolbar is
-    floated the caption used is the label given in the constructor
-    call. This can be changed with setLabel().
-
-    \quotefile action/application.cpp
-    \skipto new TQToolBar
-    \printuntil fileSaveAction
-
-    This extract from the \l application/application.cpp example shows
-    the creation of a new toolbar as a child of a TQMainWindow and
-    adding two TQActions.
-
-    You may use most widgets within a toolbar, with TQToolButton and
-    TQComboBox being the most common.
-
-    If you create a new widget on an already visible TQToolBar, this
-    widget will automatically become visible without needing a show()
-    call. (This differs from every other TQt widget container. We
-    recommend calling show() anyway since we hope to fix this anomaly
-    in a future release.)
-
-    TQToolBars, like TQDockWindows, are located in \l{TQDockArea}s or
-    float as top-level windows. TQMainWindow provides four TQDockAreas
-    (top, left, right and bottom). When you create a new toolbar (as
-    in the example above) as a child of a TQMainWindow the toolbar will
-    be added to the top dock area. You can move it to another dock
-    area (or float it) by calling TQMainWindow::moveDockWindow(). TQDock
-    areas lay out their windows in \link tqdockarea.html#lines
-    Lines\endlink.
-
-    If the main window is resized so that the area occupied by the
-    toolbar is too small to show all its widgets a little arrow button
-    (which looks like a right-pointing chevron, '&#187;') will appear
-    at the right or bottom of the toolbar depending on its
-    orientation. Clicking this button pops up a menu that shows the
-    'overflowing' items. TQToolButtons are represented in the menu using
-    their textLabel property, other TQButton subclasses are represented
-    using their text property, and TQComboBoxes are represented as submenus,
-    with the caption text being used in the submenu item.
-
-    Usually a toolbar will get precisely the space it needs. However,
-    with setHorizontalStretchable(), setVerticalStretchable() or
-    setStretchableWidget() you can tell the main window to expand the
-    toolbar to fill all available space in the specified orientation.
-
-    The toolbar arranges its buttons either horizontally or vertically
-    (see orientation() for details). Generally, TQDockArea will set the
-    orientation correctly for you, but you can set it yourself with
-    setOrientation() and track any changes by connecting to the
-    orientationChanged() signal.
-
-    You can use the clear() method to remove all items from a toolbar.
-
-    \img qdockwindow.png Toolbar (dock window)
-    \caption A floating TQToolbar (dock window)
-
-    \sa TQToolButton TQMainWindow \link http://www.iarchitect.com/visual.htm Parts of Isys on Visual Design\endlink \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Tool Bar\endlink.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQToolBar::TQToolBar( const TQString &label,
-	      TQMainWindow *, ToolBarDock = Top,
-	      bool newLine = FALSE, const char * name = 0 );
-    \obsolete
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty toolbar.
-
-    The toolbar is called \a name and is a child of \a parent and is
-    managed by \a parent. It is initially located in dock area \a dock
-    and is labeled \a label. If \a newLine is TRUE the toolbar will be
-    placed on a new line in the dock area.
-*/
-
-TQToolBar::TQToolBar( const TQString &label,
-		    TQMainWindow * parent, TQt::ToolBarDock dock,
-		    bool newLine, const char * name )
-    : TQDockWindow( InDock, parent, name, 0, TRUE )
-{
-    mw = parent;
-    init();
-
-    if ( parent )
-	parent->addToolBar( this, label, dock, newLine );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty horizontal toolbar.
-
-    The toolbar is called \a name and is a child of \a parent and is
-    managed by \a mainWindow. The \a label and \a newLine parameters
-    are passed straight to TQMainWindow::addDockWindow(). \a name and
-    the widget flags \a f are passed on to the TQDockWindow constructor.
-
-    Use this constructor if you want to create torn-off (undocked,
-    floating) toolbars or toolbars in the \link TQStatusBar status
-    bar\endlink.
-*/
-
-TQToolBar::TQToolBar( const TQString &label, TQMainWindow * mainWindow,
-		    TQWidget * parent, bool newLine, const char * name,
-		    WFlags f )
-    : TQDockWindow( InDock, parent, name, f, TRUE )
-{
-    mw = mainWindow;
-    init();
-
-    clearWFlags( (WFlags)(TQt::WType_Dialog | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder) );
-    reparent( parent, TQPoint( 0, 0 ), FALSE );
-
-    if ( mainWindow )
-	mainWindow->addToolBar( this, label, TQt::DockUnmanaged, newLine );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Constructs an empty toolbar called \a name, with parent \a parent,
-    in its \a parent's top dock area, without any label and without
-    requiring a newline.
-*/
-
-TQToolBar::TQToolBar( TQMainWindow * parent, const char * name )
-    : TQDockWindow( InDock, parent, name, 0, TRUE )
-{
-    mw = parent;
-    init();
-
-    if ( parent )
-	parent->addToolBar( this, TQString(), TQt::DockTop );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-
-  Common initialization code. Requires that \c mw and \c o are set.
-  Does not call TQMainWindow::addDockWindow().
-*/
-void TQToolBar::init()
-{
-    d = new TQToolBarPrivate;
-    d->extension = 0;
-    d->extensionPopup = 0;
-    sw = 0;
-
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteButton);
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::NoFocus );
-    setFrameStyle( TQFrame::ToolBarPanel | TQFrame::Raised);
-    boxLayout()->setSpacing(tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_ToolBarItemSpacing));
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQToolBar::~TQToolBar()
-{
-    delete d;
-    d = 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQToolBar::setOrientation( Qt::Orientation o )
-{
-    TQDockWindow::setOrientation( o );
-    if (d->extension)
-	d->extension->setOrientation( o );
-    TQObjectList *childs = queryList( "TQToolBarSeparator" );
-    if ( childs ) {
-        TQObject *ob = 0;
-	for ( ob = childs->first(); ob; ob = childs->next() ) {
-	    TQToolBarSeparator* w = (TQToolBarSeparator*)ob;
-	    w->setOrientation( o );
-        }
-    }
-    delete childs;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Adds a separator to the right/bottom of the toolbar.
-*/
-
-void TQToolBar::addSeparator()
-{
-    (void) new TQToolBarSeparator( orientation(), this, "toolbar separator" );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQToolBar::styleChange( TQStyle& )
-{
-    TQObjectList *childs = queryList( "TQWidget" );
-    if ( childs ) {
-        TQObject *ob = 0;
-	for ( ob = childs->first(); ob; ob = childs->next() ) {
-	    TQWidget *w = (TQWidget*)ob;
-            if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQToolButton*>(w) || ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBarSeparator*>(w) )
-                w->setStyle( &tqstyle() );
-        }
-    }
-    delete childs;
-    boxLayout()->setSpacing(tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_ToolBarItemSpacing));
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp.
-*/
-
-void TQToolBar::show()
-{
-    TQDockWindow::show();
-    if ( mw )
-	mw->triggerLayout( FALSE );
-    checkForExtension( size() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQToolBar::hide()
-{
-    TQDockWindow::hide();
-    if ( mw )
-	mw->triggerLayout( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns a pointer to the TQMainWindow which manages this toolbar.
-*/
-
-TQMainWindow * TQToolBar::mainWindow() const
-{
-    return mw;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the widget \a w to be expanded if this toolbar is requested
-    to stretch.
-
-    The request to stretch might occur because TQMainWindow
-    right-justifies the dock area the toolbar is in, or because this
-    toolbar's isVerticalStretchable() or isHorizontalStretchable() is
-    set to TRUE.
-
-    If you call this function and the toolbar is not yet stretchable,
-    setStretchable() is called.
-
-    \sa TQMainWindow::setRightJustification(), setVerticalStretchable(),
-    setHorizontalStretchable()
-*/
-
-void TQToolBar::setStretchableWidget( TQWidget * w )
-{
-    sw = w;
-    boxLayout()->setStretchFactor( w, 1 );
-
-    if ( !isHorizontalStretchable() && !isVerticalStretchable() ) {
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	    setHorizontalStretchable( TRUE );
-	else
-	    setVerticalStretchable( TRUE );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-bool TQToolBar::event( TQEvent * e )
-{
-    bool r =  TQDockWindow::event( e );
-    // After the event filters have dealt with it, do our stuff.
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::ChildInserted ) {
-	TQObject * child = TQT_TQOBJECT(((TQChildEvent*)e)->child());
-	if ( child && child->isWidgetType() && !(TQT_TQWIDGET(child)->isTopLevel())
-	     && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(child->parent()) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(this)
-	     && tqstrcmp("qt_dockwidget_internal", child->name()) != 0 ) {
-	    boxLayout()->addWidget( (TQWidget*)child );
-	    if ( isVisible() ) {
-		if ( TQT_TQWIDGET(child)->testWState( TQt::WState_CreatedHidden ) )
-		    TQT_TQWIDGET(child)->show();
-		checkForExtension( size() );
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( child && child->isWidgetType() && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(child) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(sw) )
-	    boxLayout()->setStretchFactor( TQT_TQWIDGET(child), 1 );
-    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::Show ) {
-	tqlayout()->activate();
-    } else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutHint && place() == OutsideDock ) {
-	adjustSize();
-    }
-    return r;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolBar::label
-    \brief the toolbar's label.
-
-    If the toolbar is floated the label becomes the toolbar window's
-    caption. There is no default label text.
-*/
-
-void TQToolBar::setLabel( const TQString & label )
-{
-    l = label;
-    setCaption( l );
-}
-
-TQString TQToolBar::label() const
-{
-    return l;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Deletes all the toolbar's child widgets.
-*/
-
-void TQToolBar::clear()
-{
-    if ( childrenListObject().isEmpty() )
-	return;
-    TQObjectListIt it( childrenListObject() );
-    TQObject * obj;
-    while( (obj=it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( obj->isWidgetType() &&
-	     qstrcmp( "qt_dockwidget_internal", obj->name() ) != 0 )
-	    delete obj;
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQToolBar::tqminimumSize() const
-{
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	return TQSize( 0, TQDockWindow::tqminimumSize().height() );
-    return TQSize( TQDockWindow::tqminimumSize().width(), 0 );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQToolBar::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	return TQSize( 0, TQDockWindow::tqminimumSizeHint().height() );
-    return TQSize( TQDockWindow::tqminimumSizeHint().width(), 0 );
-}
-
-void TQToolBar::createPopup()
-{
-    if (!d->extensionPopup) {
-	d->extensionPopup = new TQPopupMenu( this, "qt_dockwidget_internal" );
-	connect( d->extensionPopup, TQT_SIGNAL( aboutToShow() ), this, TQT_SLOT( createPopup() ) );
-    }
-
-    if (!d->extension) {
-	d->extension = new TQToolBarExtensionWidget( this );
-	d->extension->setOrientation(orientation());
-	d->extension->button()->setPopup( d->extensionPopup );
-	d->extension->button()->setPopupDelay( -1 );
-    }
-
-    d->extensionPopup->clear();
-    // clear doesn't delete submenus, so do this explicitly
-    TQObjectList *childlist = d->extensionPopup->queryList( "TQPopupMenu", 0, FALSE, TRUE );
-    childlist->setAutoDelete(TRUE);
-    delete childlist;
-
-    childlist = queryList( "TQWidget", 0, FALSE, TRUE );
-    TQObjectListIt it( *childlist );
-    bool hide = FALSE;
-    bool doHide = FALSE;
-    int id;
-    while ( it.current() ) {
-        int j = 2;
-        if ( !it.current()->isWidgetType() || TQT_BASE_OBJECT(it.current()) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->extension->button()) ||
-	    qstrcmp( "qt_dockwidget_internal", it.current()->name() ) == 0 ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    continue;
-	}
-	TQWidget *w = (TQWidget*)it.current();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMBOBOX
-	if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQComboBox*>(w) )
-	    j = 1;
-#endif
-	hide = FALSE;
-	TQPoint p = w->parentWidget()->mapTo( this, w->tqgeometry().bottomRight() );
-	if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal ) {
-	    if ( p.x() > ( doHide ? width() - d->extension->width() / j : width() ) )
-	        hide = TRUE;
-	} else {
-	    if ( p.y() > ( doHide ? height()- d->extension->height() / j : height() ) )
-	        hide = TRUE;
-	}
-	if ( hide && w->isVisible() ) {
-	    doHide = TRUE;
-	    if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQToolButton*>(w) ) {
-		TQToolButton *b = (TQToolButton*)w;
-	        TQString s = b->textLabel();
-	        if ( s.isEmpty() )
-		    s = b->text();
-	        if ( b->popup() && b->popupDelay() <= 0 )
-		    id = d->extensionPopup->insertItem( b->iconSet(), s, b->popup() );
-		else
-		    id = d->extensionPopup->insertItem( b->iconSet(), s, TQT_TQOBJECT(b), TQT_SLOT( emulateClick() ) ) ;
-	        if ( b->isToggleButton() )
-		    d->extensionPopup->setItemChecked( id, b->isOn() );
-		if ( !b->isEnabled() )
-		    d->extensionPopup->setItemEnabled( id, FALSE );
-	    } else if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQButton*>(w) ) {
-		TQButton *b = (TQButton*)w;
-		TQString s = b->text();
-		if ( s.isEmpty() )
-		    s = "";
-		if ( b->pixmap() )
-		    id = d->extensionPopup->insertItem( *b->pixmap(), s, TQT_TQOBJECT(b), TQT_SLOT( emulateClick() ) );
-		else
-		    id = d->extensionPopup->insertItem( s, TQT_TQOBJECT(b), TQT_SLOT( emulateClick() ) );
-		if ( b->isToggleButton() )
-		    d->extensionPopup->setItemChecked( id, b->isOn() );
-		if ( !b->isEnabled() )
-		    d->extensionPopup->setItemEnabled( id, FALSE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMBOBOX
-	    } else if ( ::tqqt_cast<TQComboBox*>(w) ) {
-		TQComboBox *c = (TQComboBox*)w;
-		if ( c->count() != 0 ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGET_TOPEXTRA
-		    TQString s = c->caption();
-#else
-		    TQString s;
-#endif
-		    if ( s.isEmpty() )
-		        s = c->currentText();
-		    uint maxItems = 0;
-		    TQPopupMenu *cp = new TQPopupMenu(d->extensionPopup);
-                    cp->setEnabled(c->isEnabled());
-		    d->extensionPopup->insertItem( s, cp );
-		    connect( cp, TQT_SIGNAL( activated(int) ), c, TQT_SLOT( internalActivate(int) ) );
-		    for ( int i = 0; i < c->count(); ++i ) {
-		        TQString tmp = c->text( i );
-			cp->insertItem( tmp, i );
-		        if ( c->currentText() == tmp )
-			    cp->setItemChecked( i, TRUE );
-			if ( !maxItems ) {
-			    if ( cp->count() == 10 ) {
-			        int h = cp->tqsizeHint().height();
-			        maxItems = TQApplication::desktop()->height() * 10 / h;
-			    }
-			} else if ( cp->count() >= maxItems - 1 ) {
-			    TQPopupMenu* sp = new TQPopupMenu(d->extensionPopup);
-			    cp->insertItem( tr( "More..." ), sp );
-			    cp = sp;
-			    connect( cp, TQT_SIGNAL( activated(int) ), c, TQT_SLOT( internalActivate(int) ) );
-			}
-		    }
-		}
-#endif //TQT_NO_COMBOBOX
-	    }
-	}
-        ++it;
-    }
-    delete childlist;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQToolBar::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e )
-{
-    checkForExtension( e->size() );
-}
-
-void TQToolBar::checkForExtension( const TQSize &sz )
-{
-    if (!isVisible())
-	return;
-
-    bool tooSmall;
-    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	tooSmall = sz.width() < tqsizeHint().width();
-    else
-	tooSmall = sz.height() < tqsizeHint().height();
-
-    if ( tooSmall ) {
-	createPopup();
-	if ( d->extensionPopup->count() ) {
-	    if ( orientation() == Qt::Horizontal )
-	        d->extension->setGeometry( width() - 20, 1, 20, height() - 2 );
-	    else
-	        d->extension->setGeometry( 1, height() - 20, width() - 2, 20 );
-	    d->extension->show();
-	    d->extension->raise();
-	} else {
-	    delete d->extension;
-	    d->extension = 0;
-	    delete d->extensionPopup;
-	    d->extensionPopup = 0;
-	}
-    } else {
-	delete d->extension;
-	d->extension = 0;
-	delete d->extensionPopup;
-	d->extensionPopup = 0;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQToolBar::setMinimumSize( int, int )
-{
-}
-
-/* from chaunsee:
-
-1.  Tool Bars should contain only high-frequency functions.  Avoid putting
-things like About and Exit on a tool bar unless they are frequent functions.
-
-2.  All tool bar buttons must have some keyboard access method (it can be a
-menu or shortcut key or a function in a dialog box that can be accessed
-through the keyboard).
-
-3.  Make tool bar functions as efficient as possible (the common example is to
-Print in Microsoft applications, it doesn't bring up the Print dialog box, it
-prints immediately to the default printer).
-
-4.  Avoid turning tool bars into graphical menu bars.  To me, a tool bar should
-be efficient. Once you make almost all the items in a tool bar into graphical
-pull-down menus, you start to lose efficiency.
-
-5.  Make sure that adjacent icons are distinctive. There are some tool bars
-where you see a group of 4-5 icons that represent related functions, but they
-are so similar that you can't differentiate among them.	 These tool bars are
-often a poor attempt at a "common visual language".
-
-6.  Use any de facto standard icons of your platform (for windows use the
-cut, copy and paste icons provided in dev kits rather than designing your
-own).
-
-7.  Avoid putting a highly destructive tool bar button (delete database) by a
-safe, high-frequency button (Find) -- this will yield 1-0ff errors).
-
-8.  Tooltips in many Microsoft products simply reiterate the menu text even
-when that is not explanatory.  Consider making your tooltips slightly more
-verbose and explanatory than the corresponding menu item.
-
-9.  Keep the tool bar as stable as possible when you click on different
-objects. Consider disabling tool bar buttons if they are used in most, but not
-all contexts.
-
-10.  If you have multiple tool bars (like the Microsoft MMC snap-ins have),
-put the most stable tool bar to at the left with less stable ones to the
-right. This arrangement (stable to less stable) makes the tool bar somewhat
-more predictable.
-
-11.  Keep a single tool bar to fewer than 20 items divided into 4-7 groups of
-items.
-*/
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.h
deleted file mode 100644
index a741eb0..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbar.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQToolBar class
-**
-** Created : 980306
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQTOOLBAR_H
-#define TQTOOLBAR_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqdockwindow.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-
-class TQMainWindow;
-class TQButton;
-class TQBoxLayout;
-class TQToolBarPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQToolBar: public TQDockWindow
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString label READ label WRITE setLabel )
-
-public:
-    TQToolBar( const TQString &label,
-	      TQMainWindow *, TQt::ToolBarDock = TQt::DockTop,
-	      bool newLine = FALSE, const char* name=0 );
-    TQToolBar( const TQString &label, TQMainWindow *, TQWidget *,
-	      bool newLine = FALSE, const char* name=0, WFlags f = 0 );
-    TQToolBar( TQMainWindow* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQToolBar();
-
-    void addSeparator();
-
-    virtual void show();
-    virtual void hide();
-
-    TQMainWindow * mainWindow() const;
-
-    virtual void setStretchableWidget( TQWidget * );
-
-    virtual bool event( TQEvent * e );
-
-    virtual void setLabel( const TQString & );
-    TQString label() const;
-
-    virtual void clear();
-
-    virtual TQSize tqminimumSize() const;
-    virtual TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-    void setOrientation( Orientation o );
-    void setMinimumSize( int minw, int minh );
-
-protected:
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent *e );
-    void styleChange( TQStyle & );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void createPopup();
-
-private:
-    void init();
-    void checkForExtension( const TQSize &sz );
-    TQToolBarPrivate * d;
-    TQMainWindow * mw;
-    TQWidget * sw;
-    TQString l;
-
-    friend class TQMainWindow;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQToolBar( const TQToolBar & );
-    TQToolBar& operator=( const TQToolBar & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-
-#endif // TQTOOLBAR_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index aa38123..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,663 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQToolBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 961105
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqtoolbox.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBOX
-
-#include <tqbutton.h>
-#include <tqlayout.h>
-#include <tqscrollview.h>
-#include <tqpainter.h>
-#include <tqstyle.h>
-#include <tqobjectlist.h>
-#include <tqapplication.h>
-#include <tqwidgetlist.h>
-#include <tqlayout.h>
-#include <tqvaluelist.h>
-#include <tqtooltip.h>
-#include <tqeventloop.h>
-#include <tqdatetime.h>
-
-class TQToolBoxPrivate
-{
-public:
-    struct Page
-    {
-	TQToolBoxButton *button;
-	TQScrollView *sv;
-	TQWidget *widget;
-	TQString toolTip;
-
-	inline void setTextLabel( const TQString &text ) { button->setTextLabel(text); }
-	inline void setIconSet( const TQIconSet &is ) { button->setIconSet(is); }
-	inline void setToolTip( const TQString &tip )
-	{
-	    toolTip = tip;
-	    TQToolTip::remove( button );
-	    if ( !tip.isNull() )
-		TQToolTip::add( button, tip );
-	}
-
-	inline bool operator==(const Page& other) const
-	{
-	    return widget == other.widget;
-	}
-    };
-    typedef TQValueList<Page> PageList;
-
-    inline TQToolBoxPrivate()
-	: currentPage( 0 )
-    {
-    }
-
-    Page *page( TQWidget *widget );
-    Page *page( int index );
-
-    void updateTabs();
-
-    PageList pageList;
-    TQVBoxLayout *tqlayout;
-    Page *currentPage;
-};
-
-TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *TQToolBoxPrivate::page( TQWidget *widget )
-{
-    if ( !widget )
-	return 0;
-
-    for ( PageList::ConstIterator i = pageList.constBegin(); i != pageList.constEnd(); ++i )
-	if ( (*i).widget == widget )
-	    return (Page*) &(*i);
-    return 0;
-}
-
-TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *TQToolBoxPrivate::page( int index )
-{
-    if (index >= 0 && index < (int)pageList.size() )
-	return &*pageList.at(index);
-    return 0;
-}
-
-void TQToolBoxPrivate::updateTabs()
-{
-    TQToolBoxButton *lastButton = currentPage ? currentPage->button : 0;
-    bool after = FALSE;
-    for ( PageList::ConstIterator i = pageList.constBegin(); i != pageList.constEnd(); ++i ) {
-	if (after) {
-	    (*i).button->setEraseColor((*i).widget->eraseColor());
-	    (*i).button->update();
-	} else if ( (*i).button->backgroundMode() != TQt::PaletteBackground ) {
-	    (*i).button->setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteBackground );
-	    (*i).button->update();
-	}
-	after = (*i).button == lastButton;
-    }
-}
-
-TQSize TQToolBoxButton::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    TQSize iconSize(8, 8);
-    if ( !icon.isNull() )
-	iconSize += icon.pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, TQIconSet::Normal ).size() + TQSize( 2, 0 );
-    TQSize textSize = fontMetrics().size( TQt::ShowPrefix, label ) + TQSize(0, 8);
-
-    TQSize total(iconSize.width() + textSize.width(), TQMAX(iconSize.height(), textSize.height()));
-    return total.expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut());
-}
-
-TQSize TQToolBoxButton::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    if ( icon.isNull() )
-	return TQSize();
-    return TQSize(8, 8) + icon.pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, TQIconSet::Normal ).size();
-}
-
-void TQToolBoxButton::drawButton( TQPainter *p )
-{
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    const TQColorGroup &cg = tqcolorGroup();
-
-    if ( isEnabled() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if ( selected )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Selected;
-    if ( hasFocus() )
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if (isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl( TQStyle::CE_ToolBoxTab, p, parentWidget(), rect(), cg, flags );
-
-    TQPixmap pm = icon.pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, isEnabled() ? TQIconSet::Normal : TQIconSet::Disabled );
-
-    TQRect cr = tqstyle().subRect( TQStyle::SR_ToolBoxTabContents, this );
-    TQRect tr, ir;
-    int ih = 0;
-    if ( pm.isNull() ) {
-	tr = cr;
-	tr.addCoords( 4, 0, -8, 0 );
-    } else {
-	int iw = pm.width() + 4;
-	ih = pm.height();
-	ir = TQRect( cr.left() + 4, cr.top(), iw + 2, ih );
-	tr = TQRect( ir.right(), cr.top(), cr.width() - ir.right() - 4, cr.height() );
-    }
-
-    if ( selected && tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold ) ) {
-	TQFont f( p->font() );
-	f.setBold( TRUE );
-	p->setFont( f );
-    }
-
-    TQString txt;
-    if ( p->fontMetrics().width(label) < tr.width() ) {
-	txt = label;
-    } else {
-	txt = label.left( 1 );
-	int ew = p->fontMetrics().width( "..." );
-	int i = 1;
-	while ( p->fontMetrics().width( txt ) + ew +
-		p->fontMetrics().width( label[i] )  < tr.width() )
-	    txt += label[i++];
-	txt += "...";
-    }
-
-    if ( ih )
-	p->drawPixmap( ir.left(), (height() - ih) / 2, pm );
-
-    TQToolBox *tb = (TQToolBox*)parentWidget();
-
-    const QColor* fill = 0;
-    if ( selected &&
-	 tqstyle().tqstyleHint( TQStyle::SH_ToolBox_SelectedPageTitleBold ) &&
-	 tb->backgroundMode() != TQt::NoBackground )
-	fill = &cg.color( TQPalette::foregroundRoleFromMode( tb->backgroundMode() ) );
-
-    int tqalignment = TQt::AlignLeft | TQt::AlignVCenter | TQt::ShowPrefix;
-    if (!tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_UnderlineAccelerator, this))
-	tqalignment |= TQt::NoAccel;
-    tqstyle().drawItem( p, tr, tqalignment, cg,
-		      isEnabled(), 0, txt, -1, TQT_TQCOLOR_CONST(fill) );
-
-    if ( !txt.isEmpty() && hasFocus() )
-	tqstyle().tqdrawPrimitive( TQStyle::PE_FocusRect, p, tr, cg );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQToolBox
-
-    \brief The TQToolBox class provides a column of tabbed widget
-    items.
-
-    \mainclass
-    \ingroup advanced
-
-    A toolbox is a widget that displays a column of tabs one above the
-    other, with the current item displayed below the current tab.
-    Every tab has an index position within the column of tabs. A tab's
-    item is a TQWidget.
-
-    Each item has an itemLabel(), an optional icon, itemIconSet(), an
-    optional itemToolTip(), and a \link item() widget\endlink. The
-    item's attributes can be changed with setItemLabel(),
-    setItemIconSet() and setItemToolTip().
-
-    Items are added using addItem(), or inserted at particular
-    positions using insertItem(). The total number of items is given
-    by count(). Items can be deleted with delete, or removed from the
-    toolbox with removeItem(). Combining removeItem() and insertItem()
-    allows to move items to different positions.
-
-    The current item widget is returned by currentItem() and set with
-    setCurrentItem(). If you prefer you can work in terms of indexes
-    using currentIndex(), setCurrentIndex(), indexOf() and item().
-
-    The currentChanged() signal is emitted when the current item is
-    changed.
-
-    \sa TQTabWidget
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQToolBox::currentChanged( int index )
-
-    This signal is emitted when the current item changed. The new
-    current item's index is passed in \a index, or -1 if there is no
-    current item.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a toolbox called \a name with parent \a parent and flags \a f.
-*/
-
-TQToolBox::TQToolBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    :  TQFrame( parent, name, f )
-{
-    d = new TQToolBoxPrivate;
-    d->tqlayout = new TQVBoxLayout( this );
-    TQWidget::setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteButton );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-TQToolBox::~TQToolBox()
-{
-    delete d;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQToolBox::addItem( TQWidget *w, const TQString &label )
-    \overload
-
-    Adds the widget \a w in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The
-    new tab's label is set to \a label. Returns the new tab's index.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQToolBox::addItem( TQWidget *item, const TQIconSet &iconSet,const TQString &label )
-    Adds the widget \a item in a new tab at bottom of the toolbox. The
-    new tab's label is set to \a label, and the \a iconSet is
-    displayed to the left of the \a label.  Returns the new tab's index.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn int TQToolBox::insertItem( int index, TQWidget *item, const TQString &label )
-    \overload
-
-    Inserts the widget \a item at position \a index, or at the bottom
-    of the toolbox if \a index is out of range. The new item's label is
-    set to \a label. Returns the new item's index.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Inserts the widget \a item at position \a index, or at the bottom
-    of the toolbox if \a index is out of range. The new item's label
-    is set to \a label, and the \a iconSet is displayed to the left of
-    the \a label. Returns the new item's index.
-*/
-
-int TQToolBox::insertItem( int index, TQWidget *item, const TQIconSet &iconSet,
-			   const TQString &label )
-{
-    if ( !item )
-	return -1;
-
-    connect(item, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed(TQObject*)), this, TQT_SLOT(itemDestroyed(TQObject*)));
-
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page c;
-    c.widget = item;
-    c.button = new TQToolBoxButton( this, label.latin1() );
-    connect( c.button, TQT_SIGNAL( clicked() ), this, TQT_SLOT( buttonClicked() ) );
-
-    c.sv = new TQScrollView( this );
-    c.sv->hide();
-    c.sv->setResizePolicy( TQScrollView::AutoOneFit );
-    c.sv->addChild( item );
-    c.sv->setFrameStyle( TQFrame::NoFrame );
-
-    c.setTextLabel( label );
-    c.setIconSet( iconSet );
-
-    if ( index < 0 || index >= (int)d->pageList.count() ) {
-	index = (int)d->pageList.count();
-	d->pageList.append( c );
-	d->tqlayout->addWidget( c.button );
-	d->tqlayout->addWidget( c.sv );
-	if ( index == 0 )
-	    setCurrentIndex( index );
-    } else {
-	d->pageList.insert( d->pageList.at(index), c );
-	retqlayout();
-	if (d->currentPage) {
-	    TQWidget *current = d->currentPage->widget;
-	    int oldindex = indexOf(current);
-	    if ( index <= oldindex ) {
-		d->currentPage = 0; // trigger change
-		setCurrentIndex(oldindex);
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    c.button->show();
-
-    d->updateTabs();
-    itemInserted(index);
-    return index;
-}
-
-void TQToolBox::buttonClicked()
-{
-    TQToolBoxButton *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBoxButton*>(sender());
-    TQWidget* item = 0;
-    for ( TQToolBoxPrivate::PageList::ConstIterator i = d->pageList.constBegin(); i != d->pageList.constEnd(); ++i )
-	if ( (*i).button == tb ) {
-	    item = (*i).widget;
-	    break;
-	}
-
-    setCurrentItem( item );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolBox::count
-    \brief The number of items contained in the toolbox.
-*/
-
-int TQToolBox::count() const
-{
-    return (int)d->pageList.count();
-}
-
-void TQToolBox::setCurrentIndex( int index )
-{
-    setCurrentItem( item( index ) );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the current item to be \a item.
-*/
-
-void TQToolBox::setCurrentItem( TQWidget *item )
-{
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page( item );
-    if ( !c || d->currentPage == c )
-	return;
-
-    c->button->setSelected( TRUE );
-    if ( d->currentPage ) {
-	d->currentPage->sv->hide();
-	d->currentPage->button->setSelected(FALSE);
-    }
-    d->currentPage = c;
-    d->currentPage->sv->show();
-    d->updateTabs();
-    emit currentChanged( indexOf(item) );
-}
-
-void TQToolBox::retqlayout()
-{
-    delete d->tqlayout;
-    d->tqlayout = new TQVBoxLayout( this );
-    for ( TQToolBoxPrivate::PageList::ConstIterator i = d->pageList.constBegin(); i != d->pageList.constEnd(); ++i ) {
-	d->tqlayout->addWidget( (*i).button );
-	d->tqlayout->addWidget( (*i).sv );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQToolBox::itemDestroyed(TQObject *object)
-{
-    // no verification - vtbl corrupted already
-    TQWidget *page = (TQWidget*)object;
-
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page(page);
-    if ( !page || !c )
-	return;
-
-    d->tqlayout->remove( c->sv );
-    d->tqlayout->remove( c->button );
-    c->sv->deleteLater(); // page might still be a child of sv
-    delete c->button;
-
-    bool removeCurrent = c == d->currentPage;
-    d->pageList.remove( *c );
-
-    if ( !d->pageList.count() ) {
-	d->currentPage = 0;
-	emit currentChanged(-1);
-    } else if ( removeCurrent ) {
-	d->currentPage = 0;
-	setCurrentIndex(0);
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Removes the widget \a item from the toolbox. Note that the widget
-    is \e not deleted. Returns the removed widget's index, or -1 if
-    the widget was not in this tool box.
-*/
-
-int TQToolBox::removeItem( TQWidget *item )
-{
-    int index = indexOf(item);
-    if (index >= 0) {
-	disconnect(item, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed(TQObject*)), this, TQT_SLOT(itemDestroyed(TQObject*)));
-	item->reparent( this, TQPoint(0,0) );
-	// destroy internal data
-	itemDestroyed(TQT_TQOBJECT(item));
-    }
-    itemRemoved(index);
-    return index;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the toolbox's current item, or 0 if the toolbox is empty.
-*/
-
-TQWidget *TQToolBox::currentItem() const
-{
-    return d->currentPage ? d->currentPage->widget : 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolBox::currentIndex
-    \brief the index of the current item, or -1 if the toolbox is empty.
-    \sa currentItem(), indexOf(), item()
-*/
-
-
-int TQToolBox::currentIndex() const
-{
-    return d->currentPage ? indexOf( d->currentPage->widget ) : -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the item at position \a index, or 0 if there is no such
-    item.
-*/
-
-TQWidget *TQToolBox::item( int index ) const
-{
-    if ( index < 0 || index >= (int) d->pageList.size() )
-	return 0;
-    return (*d->pageList.at( index )).widget;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the index of item \a item, or -1 if the item does not
-    exist.
-*/
-
-int TQToolBox::indexOf( TQWidget *item ) const
-{
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page(item);
-    return c ? d->pageList.findIndex( *c ) : -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a enabled is TRUE then the item at position \a index is enabled; otherwise item
-    \a index is disabled.
-*/
-
-void TQToolBox::setItemEnabled( int index, bool enabled )
-{
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page( index );
-    if ( !c )
-	return;
-
-    c->button->setEnabled( enabled );
-    if ( !enabled && c == d->currentPage ) {
-	int curIndexUp = index;
-	int curIndexDown = curIndexUp;
-	const int count = (int)d->pageList.count();
-	while ( curIndexUp > 0 || curIndexDown < count-1 ) {
-	    if ( curIndexDown < count-1 ) {
-		if (d->page(++curIndexDown)->button->isEnabled()) {
-		    index = curIndexDown;
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
-	    if ( curIndexUp > 0 ) {
-		if (d->page(--curIndexUp)->button->isEnabled()) {
-		    index = curIndexUp;
-		    break;
-		}
-	    }
-	}
-	setCurrentIndex(index);
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the label of the item at position \a index to \a label.
-*/
-
-void TQToolBox::setItemLabel( int index, const TQString &label )
-{
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page( index );
-    if ( c )
-	c->setTextLabel( label );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the icon of the item at position \a index to \a iconSet.
-*/
-
-void TQToolBox::setItemIconSet( int index, const TQIconSet &iconSet )
-{
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page( index );
-    if ( c )
-	c->setIconSet( iconSet );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the tooltip of the item at position \a index to \a toolTip.
-*/
-
-void TQToolBox::setItemToolTip( int index, const TQString &toolTip )
-{
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page( index );
-    if ( c )
-	c->setToolTip( toolTip );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the item at position \a index is enabled; otherwise returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQToolBox::isItemEnabled( int index ) const
-{
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page( index );
-    return c && c->button->isEnabled();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the label of the item at position \a index, or a null string if
-    \a index is out of range.
-*/
-
-TQString TQToolBox::itemLabel( int index ) const
-{
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page( index );
-    return ( c ? c->button->textLabel() : TQString::null );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the icon of the item at position \a index, or a null
-    icon if \a index is out of range.
-*/
-
-TQIconSet TQToolBox::itemIconSet( int index ) const
-{
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page( index );
-    return ( c ? c->button->iconSet() : TQIconSet() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tooltip of the item at position \a index, or a null
-    string if \a index is out of range.
-*/
-
-TQString TQToolBox::itemToolTip( int index ) const
-{
-    TQToolBoxPrivate::Page *c = d->page( index );
-    return ( c ? c->toolTip : TQString::null );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQToolBox::showEvent( TQShowEvent *e )
-{
-    TQWidget::showEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQToolBox::frameChanged()
-{
-    d->tqlayout->setMargin( frameWidth() );
-    TQFrame::frameChanged();
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-void TQToolBox::styleChange(TQStyle &style)
-{
-    d->updateTabs();
-    TQFrame::styleChange(style);
-}
-
-/*!
-  This virtual handler is called after a new item was added or
-  inserted at position \a index.
- */
-void TQToolBox::itemInserted( int index )
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED(index)
-}
-
-/*!
-  This virtual handler is called after an item was removed from
-  position \a index.
- */
-void TQToolBox::itemRemoved( int index )
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED(index)
-}
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_TOOLBOX
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 973f81c..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbox.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,161 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQToolBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 961105
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQTOOLBOX_H
-#define TQTOOLBOX_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include <tqframe.h>
-#include <tqiconset.h>
-#include <tqbutton.h>
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBOX
-
-class TQToolBoxPrivate;
-class TQWidgetList;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQToolBox : public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( int currentIndex READ currentIndex WRITE setCurrentIndex )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int count READ count )
-
-public:
-    TQToolBox( TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0, WFlags f = 0 );
-    ~TQToolBox();
-
-    int addItem( TQWidget *item, const TQString &label );
-    int addItem( TQWidget *item, const TQIconSet &iconSet, const TQString &label );
-    int insertItem( int index, TQWidget *item, const TQString &label );
-    int insertItem( int index, TQWidget *item, const TQIconSet &iconSet, const TQString &label );
-
-    int removeItem( TQWidget *item );
-
-    void setItemEnabled( int index, bool enabled );
-    bool isItemEnabled( int index ) const;
-
-    void setItemLabel( int index, const TQString &label );
-    TQString itemLabel( int index ) const;
-
-    void setItemIconSet( int index, const TQIconSet &iconSet );
-    TQIconSet itemIconSet( int index ) const;
-
-    void setItemToolTip( int index, const TQString &toolTip );
-    TQString itemToolTip( int index ) const;
-
-    TQWidget *currentItem() const;
-    void setCurrentItem( TQWidget *item );
-
-    int currentIndex() const;
-    TQWidget *item( int index ) const;
-    int indexOf( TQWidget *item ) const;
-    int count() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void setCurrentIndex( int index );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void currentChanged( int index );
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void buttonClicked();
-    void itemDestroyed(TQObject*);
-
-protected:
-    virtual void itemInserted( int index );
-    virtual void itemRemoved( int index );
-    void showEvent( TQShowEvent *e );
-    void frameChanged();
-    void styleChange(TQStyle&);
-
-private:
-    void retqlayout();
-
-private:
-    TQToolBoxPrivate *d;
-
-};
-
-
-inline int TQToolBox::addItem( TQWidget *item, const TQString &label )
-{ return insertItem( -1, item, TQIconSet(), label ); }
-inline int TQToolBox::addItem( TQWidget *item, const TQIconSet &iconSet,
-			      const TQString &label )
-{ return insertItem( -1, item, iconSet, label ); }
-inline int TQToolBox::insertItem( int index, TQWidget *item, const TQString &label )
-{ return insertItem( index, item, TQIconSet(), label ); }
-
-// Private-ish
-
-class TQToolBoxButton : public TQButton
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQToolBoxButton( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-	: TQButton( parent, name ), selected( FALSE )
-    {
-	setBackgroundMode(TQt::PaletteBackground);
-	tqsetSizePolicy(TQSizePolicy::Preferred, TQSizePolicy::Minimum);
-	setFocusPolicy(Qt::NoFocus);
-    }
-
-    inline void setSelected( bool b ) { selected = b; update(); }
-    inline void setTextLabel( const TQString &text ) { label = text; update(); }
-    inline TQString textLabel() const { return label; }
-    inline void setIconSet( const TQIconSet &is ) { icon = is; update(); }
-    inline TQIconSet iconSet() const { return icon; }
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-protected:
-    void drawButton( TQPainter * );
-
-private:
-    bool selected;
-    TQString label;
-    TQIconSet icon;
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_TOOLBOX
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 9f392ca..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1041 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQToolButton class
-**
-** Created : 980320
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#undef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-#include "tqtoolbutton.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBUTTON
-
-#include "tqdrawutil.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqwmatrix.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqstyle.h"
-#include "tqmainwindow.h"
-#include "tqtooltip.h"
-#include "tqtoolbar.h"
-#include "tqimage.h"
-#include "tqiconset.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqpopupmenu.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-
-class TQToolButtonPrivate
-{
-    // ### add tool tip magic here
-public:
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQPopupMenu> popup;
-    TQTimer* popupTimer;
-    int delay;
-#endif
-    TQt::ArrowType arrow;
-    uint instantPopup	    : 1;
-    uint autoraise	    : 1;
-    uint repeat		    : 1;
-    uint discardNextMouseEvent : 1;
-    TQToolButton::TextPosition textPos;
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQToolButton tqtoolbutton.h
-    \brief The TQToolButton class provides a quick-access button to
-    commands or options, usually used inside a TQToolBar.
-
-    \ingroup basic
-    \mainclass
-
-    A tool button is a special button that provides quick-access to
-    specific commands or options. As opposed to a normal command
-    button, a tool button usually doesn't show a text label, but shows
-    an icon instead. Its classic usage is to select tools, for example
-    the "pen" tool in a drawing program. This would be implemented
-    with a TQToolButton as toggle button (see setToggleButton() ).
-
-    TQToolButton supports auto-raising. In auto-raise mode, the button
-    draws a 3D frame only when the mouse points at it. The feature is
-    automatically turned on when a button is used inside a TQToolBar.
-    Change it with setAutoRaise().
-
-    A tool button's icon is set as TQIconSet. This makes it possible to
-    specify different pixmaps for the disabled and active state. The
-    disabled pixmap is used when the button's functionality is not
-    available. The active pixmap is displayed when the button is
-    auto-raised because the mouse pointer is hovering over it.
-
-    The button's look and dimension is adjustable with
-    setUsesBigPixmap() and setUsesTextLabel(). When used inside a
-    TQToolBar in a TQMainWindow, the button automatically adjusts to
-    TQMainWindow's settings (see TQMainWindow::setUsesTextLabel() and
-    TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps()). The pixmap set on a TQToolButton
-    will be set to 22x22 if it is bigger than this size. If
-    usesBigPixmap() is TRUE, then the pixmap will be set to 32x32.
-
-    A tool button can offer additional choices in a popup menu. The
-    feature is sometimes used with the "Back" button in a web browser.
-    After pressing and holding the button down for a while, a menu
-    pops up showing a list of possible pages to jump to. With
-    TQToolButton you can set a popup menu using setPopup(). The default
-    delay is 600ms; you can adjust it with setPopupDelay().
-
-    \img qdockwindow.png Toolbar with Toolbuttons \caption A floating
-    TQToolbar with TQToolbuttons
-
-    \sa TQPushButton TQToolBar TQMainWindow \link guibooks.html#fowler
-    GUI Design Handbook: Push Button\endlink
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQToolButton::TextPosition
-
-    The position of the tool button's textLabel in relation to the
-    tool button's icon.
-
-    \value BesideIcon The text appears beside the icon.
-    \value BelowIcon The text appears below the icon.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty tool button called \a name, with parent \a
-    parent.
-*/
-
-TQToolButton::TQToolButton( TQWidget * parent, const char *name )
-    : TQButton( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    TQToolBar* tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(parent);
-    if ( tb ) {
-	setAutoRaise( TRUE );
-	if ( tb->mainWindow() ) {
-	    connect( tb->mainWindow(), TQT_SIGNAL(pixmapSizeChanged(bool)),
-	             this, TQT_SLOT(setUsesBigPixmap(bool)) );
-	    setUsesBigPixmap( tb->mainWindow()->usesBigPixmaps() );
-	    connect( tb->mainWindow(), TQT_SIGNAL(usesTextLabelChanged(bool)),
-	             this, TQT_SLOT(setUsesTextLabel(bool)) );
-	    setUsesTextLabel( tb->mainWindow()->usesTextLabel() );
-	} else {
-	    setUsesBigPixmap( FALSE );
-	}
-    } else
-#endif
-    {
-	setUsesBigPixmap( FALSE );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a tool button as an arrow button. The \c ArrowType \a
-    type defines the arrow direction. Possible values are \c
-    LeftArrow, \c RightArrow, \c UpArrow and \c DownArrow.
-
-    An arrow button has auto-repeat turned on by default.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are sent to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-TQToolButton::TQToolButton( TQt::ArrowType type, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQButton( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-    setUsesBigPixmap( FALSE );
-    setAutoRepeat( TRUE );
-    d->arrow = type;
-    hasArrow = TRUE;
-}
-
-
-/*  Set-up code common to all the constructors */
-
-void TQToolButton::init()
-{
-    d = new TQToolButtonPrivate;
-    d->textPos = Under;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    d->delay = 600;
-    d->popup = 0;
-    d->popupTimer = 0;
-#endif
-    d->autoraise = FALSE;
-    d->arrow = TQt::LeftArrow;
-    d->instantPopup = FALSE;
-    d->discardNextMouseEvent = FALSE;
-    bpID = bp.serialNumber();
-    spID = sp.serialNumber();
-
-    utl = FALSE;
-    ubp = TRUE;
-    hasArrow = FALSE;
-
-    s = 0;
-
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::NoFocus );
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::PaletteButton);
-    tqsetSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy( TQSizePolicy::Minimum, TQSizePolicy::Minimum ) );
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a tool button called \a name, that is a child of \a
-    parent (which must be a TQToolBar).
-
-    The tool button will display \a iconSet, with its text label and
-    tool tip set to \a textLabel and its status bar message set to \a
-    grouptext. It will be connected to the \a slot in object \a
-    receiver.
-*/
-
-TQToolButton::TQToolButton( const TQIconSet& iconSet, const TQString &textLabel,
-			  const TQString& grouptext,
-			  TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME * receiver, const char *slot,
-			  TQToolBar * parent, const char *name )
-    : TQButton( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-    setAutoRaise( TRUE );
-    setIconSet( iconSet );
-    setTextLabel( textLabel );
-    if ( receiver && slot )
-	connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL(clicked()), receiver, slot );
-    if ( parent->mainWindow() ) {
-	connect( parent->mainWindow(), TQT_SIGNAL(pixmapSizeChanged(bool)),
-		 this, TQT_SLOT(setUsesBigPixmap(bool)) );
-	setUsesBigPixmap( parent->mainWindow()->usesBigPixmaps() );
-	connect( parent->mainWindow(), TQT_SIGNAL(usesTextLabelChanged(bool)),
-		 this, TQT_SLOT(setUsesTextLabel(bool)) );
-	setUsesTextLabel( parent->mainWindow()->usesTextLabel() );
-    } else {
-	setUsesBigPixmap( FALSE );
-    }
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    if ( !textLabel.isEmpty() ) {
-	if ( !grouptext.isEmpty() && parent->mainWindow() )
-	    TQToolTip::add( this, textLabel,
-			   parent->mainWindow()->toolTipGroup(), grouptext );
-	else
-	    TQToolTip::add( this, textLabel );
-    } else if ( !grouptext.isEmpty() && parent->mainWindow() )
-	TQToolTip::add( this, TQString::null,
-		parent->mainWindow()->toolTipGroup(), grouptext );
-#endif
-}
-
-#endif
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQToolButton::~TQToolButton()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    d->popupTimer = 0;
-    d->popup = 0;
-#endif
-    delete d;
-    delete s;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolButton::backgroundMode
-    \brief the toolbutton's background mode
-
-    Get this property with backgroundMode().
-
-    \sa TQWidget::setBackgroundMode()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolButton::toggleButton
-    \brief whether this tool button is a toggle button.
-
-    Toggle buttons have an on/off state similar to \link TQCheckBox
-    check boxes. \endlink A tool button is not a toggle button by
-    default.
-
-    \sa setOn(), toggle()
-*/
-
-void TQToolButton::setToggleButton( bool enable )
-{
-    TQButton::setToggleButton( enable );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQToolButton::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-
-    int w = 0, h = 0;
-
-    if ( iconSet().isNull() && !text().isNull() && !usesTextLabel() ) {
-     	w = fontMetrics().width( text() );
-     	h = fontMetrics().height(); // boundingRect()?
-    } else if ( usesBigPixmap() ) {
-     	TQPixmap pm = iconSet().pixmap( TQIconSet::Large, TQIconSet::Normal );
-     	w = pm.width();
-     	h = pm.height();
-	TQSize iconSize = TQIconSet::iconSize( TQIconSet::Large );
-	if ( w < iconSize.width() )
-     	    w = iconSize.width();
-     	if ( h < iconSize.height() )
-     	    h = iconSize.height();
-    } else if ( !iconSet().isNull() ) {
-	// ### in 3.1, use TQIconSet::iconSize( TQIconSet::Small );
-     	TQPixmap pm = iconSet().pixmap( TQIconSet::Small, TQIconSet::Normal );
-     	w = pm.width();
-     	h = pm.height();
-	if ( w < 16 )
-	    w = 16;
-	if ( h < 16 )
-	    h = 16;
-    }
-
-    if ( usesTextLabel() ) {
-	TQSize textSize = fontMetrics().size( TQt::ShowPrefix, textLabel() );
-	textSize.setWidth( textSize.width() + fontMetrics().width(' ')*2 );
-	if ( d->textPos == Under ) {
-	    h += 4 + textSize.height();
-	    if ( textSize.width() > w )
-		w = textSize.width();
-	} else { // Right
-	    w += 4 + textSize.width();
-	    if ( textSize.height() > h )
-		h = textSize.height();
-	}
-    }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    if ( popup() && ! popupDelay() )
-     	w += tqstyle().tqpixelMetric(TQStyle::PM_MenuButtonIndicator, this);
-#endif
-    return (tqstyle().tqsizeFromContents(TQStyle::CT_ToolButton, this, TQSize(w, h)).
-	    expandedTo(TQApplication::globalStrut()));
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-TQSize TQToolButton::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    return tqsizeHint();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolButton::usesBigPixmap
-    \brief whether this toolbutton uses big pixmaps.
-
-    TQToolButton automatically connects this property to the relevant
-    signal in the TQMainWindow in which it resides. We strongly
-    recommend that you use TQMainWindow::setUsesBigPixmaps() instead.
-
-    This property's default is TRUE.
-
-    \warning If you set some buttons (in a TQMainWindow) to have big
-    pixmaps and others to have small pixmaps, TQMainWindow may not get
-    the tqgeometry right.
-*/
-
-void TQToolButton::setUsesBigPixmap( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( (bool)ubp == enable )
-	return;
-
-    ubp = enable;
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	update();
-	updateGeometry();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolButton::usesTextLabel
-    \brief whether the toolbutton displays a text label below the button pixmap.
-
-    The default is FALSE.
-
-    TQToolButton automatically connects this slot to the relevant
-    signal in the TQMainWindow in which is resides.
-*/
-
-void TQToolButton::setUsesTextLabel( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( (bool)utl == enable )
-	return;
-
-    utl = enable;
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	update();
-	updateGeometry();
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolButton::on
-    \brief whether this tool button is on.
-
-    This property has no effect on \link isToggleButton() non-toggling
-    buttons. \endlink The default is FALSE (i.e. off).
-
-    \sa isToggleButton() toggle()
-*/
-
-void TQToolButton::setOn( bool enable )
-{
-    if ( !isToggleButton() )
-	return;
-    TQButton::setOn( enable );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Toggles the state of this tool button.
-
-    This function has no effect on \link isToggleButton() non-toggling
-    buttons. \endlink
-
-    \sa isToggleButton() toggled()
-*/
-
-void TQToolButton::toggle()
-{
-    if ( !isToggleButton() )
-	return;
-    TQButton::setOn( !isOn() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQToolButton::drawButton( TQPainter * p )
-{
-    TQStyle::SCFlags controls = TQStyle::SC_ToolButton;
-    TQStyle::SCFlags active = TQStyle::SC_None;
-
-    TQt::ArrowType arrowtype = d->arrow;
-
-    if (isDown())
-	active |= TQStyle::SC_ToolButton;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    if (d->popup && !d->delay) {
-	controls |= TQStyle::SC_ToolButtonMenu;
-	if (d->instantPopup || isDown())
-	    active |= TQStyle::SC_ToolButtonMenu;
-    }
-#endif
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if (isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-    if (isOn())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_On;
-    if (autoRaise()) {
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_AutoRaise;
-	if (uses3D()) {
-	    flags |= TQStyle::Style_MouseOver;
-	    if (! isOn() && ! isDown())
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_Raised;
-	}
-    } else if (! isOn() && ! isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Raised;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawComplexControl(TQStyle::CC_ToolButton, p, this, rect(), tqcolorGroup(),
-			       flags, controls, active,
-				hasArrow ? TQStyleOption(arrowtype) :
-				    TQStyleOption());
-    drawButtonLabel(p);
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQToolButton::drawButtonLabel(TQPainter *p)
-{
-    TQRect r =
-	TQStyle::tqvisualRect(tqstyle().subRect(TQStyle::SR_ToolButtonContents, this), this);
-
-    TQt::ArrowType arrowtype = d->arrow;
-
-    TQStyle::SFlags flags = TQStyle::Style_Default;
-    if (isEnabled())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Enabled;
-    if (hasFocus())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_HasFocus;
-    if (isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Down;
-    if (isOn())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_On;
-    if (autoRaise()) {
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_AutoRaise;
-	if (uses3D()) {
-	    flags |= TQStyle::Style_MouseOver;
-	    if (! isOn() && ! isDown())
-		flags |= TQStyle::Style_Raised;
-	}
-    } else if (! isOn() && ! isDown())
-	flags |= TQStyle::Style_Raised;
-
-    tqstyle().tqdrawControl(TQStyle::CE_ToolButtonLabel, p, this, r,
-			tqcolorGroup(), flags,
-			hasArrow ? TQStyleOption(arrowtype) :
-			    TQStyleOption());
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQToolButton::enterEvent( TQEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( autoRaise() && isEnabled() )
-	tqrepaint(FALSE);
-
-    TQButton::enterEvent( e );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQToolButton::leaveEvent( TQEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( autoRaise() && isEnabled() )
-	tqrepaint(FALSE);
-
-    TQButton::leaveEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
- */
-void TQToolButton::moveEvent( TQMoveEvent * )
-{
-    //   Reimplemented to handle pseudo transparency in case the toolbars
-    //   has a fancy pixmap background.
-    if ( parentWidget() && parentWidget()->backgroundPixmap() &&
-	 autoRaise() && !uses3D() )
-	tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQToolButton::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    TQRect popupr =
-	TQStyle::tqvisualRect( tqstyle().querySubControlMetrics(TQStyle::CC_ToolButton, this,
-				       TQStyle::SC_ToolButtonMenu), this );
-    d->instantPopup = (popupr.isValid() && popupr.contains(e->pos()));
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    if ( d->discardNextMouseEvent ) {
-	d->discardNextMouseEvent = FALSE;
-	d->instantPopup = FALSE;
-	d->popup->removeEventFilter( this );
-	return;
-    }
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton && d->delay <= 0 && d->popup && d->instantPopup && !d->popup->isVisible() ) {
-	openPopup();
-	return;
-    }
-#endif
-
-    d->instantPopup = FALSE;
-    TQButton::mousePressEvent( e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-bool TQToolButton::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) != TQT_BASE_OBJECT(d->popup) )
-	return TQButton::eventFilter( o, e );
-    switch ( e->type() ) {
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress:
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick:
-	{
-	    TQMouseEvent *me = (TQMouseEvent*)e;
-	    TQPoint p = me->globalPos();
-	    if ( TQApplication::widgetAt( p, TRUE ) == this )
-		d->discardNextMouseEvent = TRUE;
-	}
-	break;
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-#endif
-    return TQButton::eventFilter( o, e );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if this button should be drawn using raised edges;
-    otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa drawButton()
-*/
-
-bool TQToolButton::uses3D() const
-{
-    return tqstyle().tqstyleHint(TQStyle::SH_ToolButton_Uses3D)
-	&& (!autoRaise() || ( hasMouse() && isEnabled() )
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-	    || ( d->popup && d->popup->isVisible() && d->delay <= 0 ) || d->instantPopup
-#endif
-	    );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolButton::textLabel
-    \brief the label of this button.
-
-    Setting this property automatically sets the text as a tool tip
-    too. There is no default text.
-*/
-
-void TQToolButton::setTextLabel( const TQString &newLabel )
-{
-    setTextLabel( newLabel, TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Sets the label of this button to \a newLabel and automatically
-    sets it as a tool tip if \a tipToo is TRUE.
-*/
-
-void TQToolButton::setTextLabel( const TQString &newLabel , bool tipToo )
-{
-    if ( tl == newLabel )
-	return;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-    if ( tipToo ) {
-        TQToolTip::remove( this );
-        TQToolTip::add( this, newLabel );
-    }
-#endif
-
-    tl = newLabel;
-    if ( usesTextLabel() && isVisible() ) {
-	update();
-	updateGeometry();
-    }
-
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-
-TQIconSet TQToolButton::onIconSet() const
-{
-    return iconSet();
-}
-
-TQIconSet TQToolButton::offIconSet( ) const
-{
-    return iconSet();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-  \property TQToolButton::onIconSet
-  \brief the icon set that is used when the button is in an "on" state
-
-  \obsolete
-
-  Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons. There is
-  now an \l TQToolButton::iconSet property that replaces both \l
-  TQToolButton::onIconSet and \l TQToolButton::offIconSet.
-
-  For ease of porting, this property is a synonym for \l
-  TQToolButton::iconSet. You probably want to go over your application
-  code and use the TQIconSet On/Off mechanism.
-
-  \sa iconSet TQIconSet::State
-*/
-void TQToolButton::setOnIconSet( const TQIconSet& set )
-{
-    setIconSet( set );
-    /*
-      ### Get rid of all qWarning in this file in 4.0.
-      Also consider inlining the obsolete functions then.
-    */
-    qWarning( "TQToolButton::setOnIconSet(): This function is not supported"
-	      " anymore" );
-}
-
-/*!
-  \property TQToolButton::offIconSet
-  \brief the icon set that is used when the button is in an "off" state
-
-  \obsolete
-
-  Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons. There is
-  now an \l TQToolButton::iconSet property that replaces both \l
-  TQToolButton::onIconSet and \l TQToolButton::offIconSet.
-
-  For ease of porting, this property is a synonym for \l
-  TQToolButton::iconSet. You probably want to go over your application
-  code and use the TQIconSet On/Off mechanism.
-
-  \sa iconSet TQIconSet::State
-*/
-void TQToolButton::setOffIconSet( const TQIconSet& set )
-{
-    setIconSet( set );
-}
-
-#endif
-
-/*! \property TQToolButton::pixmap
-    \brief the pixmap of the button
-
-    The pixmap property has no meaning for tool buttons. Use the
-    iconSet property instead.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolButton::iconSet
-    \brief the icon set providing the icon shown on the button
-
-    Setting this property sets \l TQToolButton::pixmap to a null
-    pixmap. There is no default iconset.
-
-    \sa pixmap(), setToggleButton(), isOn()
-*/
-void TQToolButton::setIconSet( const TQIconSet & set )
-{
-    if ( s )
-	delete s;
-    setPixmap( TQPixmap() );
-    s = new TQIconSet( set );
-    if ( isVisible() )
-	update();
-}
-
-/*! \overload
-    \obsolete
-
-  Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons.
-
-  For ease of porting, this function ignores the \a on parameter and
-  sets the \l iconSet property. If you relied on the \a on parameter,
-  you probably want to update your code to use the TQIconSet On/Off
-  mechanism.
-
-  \sa iconSet TQIconSet::State
-*/
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-
-void TQToolButton::setIconSet( const TQIconSet & set, bool /* on */ )
-{
-    setIconSet( set );
-    qWarning( "TQToolButton::setIconSet(): 'on' parameter ignored" );
-}
-
-#endif
-
-TQIconSet TQToolButton::iconSet() const
-{
-    TQToolButton *that = (TQToolButton *) this;
-
-    if ( pixmap() && !pixmap()->isNull() &&
-	 (!that->s || (that->s->pixmap().serialNumber() !=
-	 pixmap()->serialNumber())) ) {
-	if ( that->s )
-	    delete that->s;
-	that->s = new TQIconSet( *pixmap() );
-    }
-    if ( that->s )
-	return *that->s;
-    /*
-      In 2.x, we used to return a temporary nonnull TQIconSet. If you
-      revert to the old behavior, you will break calls to
-      TQIconSet::isNull() in this file.
-    */
-    return TQIconSet();
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-/*! \overload
-    \obsolete
-
-  Since TQt 3.0, TQIconSet contains both the On and Off icons.
-
-  For ease of porting, this function ignores the \a on parameter and
-  returns the \l iconSet property. If you relied on the \a on
-  parameter, you probably want to update your code to use the TQIconSet
-  On/Off mechanism.
-*/
-TQIconSet TQToolButton::iconSet( bool /* on */ ) const
-{
-    return iconSet();
-}
-
-#endif
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-/*!
-    Associates the popup menu \a popup with this tool button.
-
-    The popup will be shown each time the tool button has been pressed
-    down for a certain amount of time. A typical application example
-    is the "back" button in some web browsers's tool bars. If the user
-    clicks it, the browser simply browses back to the previous page.
-    If the user presses and holds the button down for a while, the
-    tool button shows a menu containing the current history list.
-
-    Ownership of the popup menu is not transferred to the tool button.
-
-    \sa popup()
-*/
-void TQToolButton::setPopup( TQPopupMenu* popup )
-{
-    if ( popup && !d->popupTimer ) {
-	connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL( pressed() ), this, TQT_SLOT( popupPressed() ) );
-	d->popupTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-	connect( d->popupTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ), this, TQT_SLOT( popupTimerDone() ) );
-    }
-    d->popup = popup;
-
-    update();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the associated popup menu, or 0 if no popup menu has been
-    defined.
-
-    \sa setPopup()
-*/
-TQPopupMenu* TQToolButton::popup() const
-{
-    return d->popup;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Opens (pops up) the associated popup menu. If there is no such
-    menu, this function does nothing. This function does not return
-    until the popup menu has been closed by the user.
-*/
-void TQToolButton::openPopup()
-{
-    if ( !d->popup )
-	return;
-
-    d->instantPopup = TRUE;
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-    if ( d->popupTimer )
-	d->popupTimer->stop();
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQToolButton> that = this;
-    popupTimerDone();
-    if ( !that )
-	return;
-    d->instantPopup = FALSE;
-    tqrepaint( FALSE );
-}
-
-void TQToolButton::popupPressed()
-{
-    if ( d->popupTimer && d->delay > 0 )
-	d->popupTimer->start( d->delay, TRUE );
-}
-
-void TQToolButton::popupTimerDone()
-{
-    if ( (!isDown() && d->delay > 0 ) || !d->popup )
-	return;
-
-    d->popup->installEventFilter( this );
-    d->repeat = autoRepeat();
-    setAutoRepeat( FALSE );
-    bool horizontal = TRUE;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    TQToolBar *tb = ::tqqt_cast<TQToolBar*>(parentWidget());
-    if ( tb && tb->orientation() == Qt::Vertical )
-	horizontal = FALSE;
-#endif
-    TQPoint p;
-    TQRect screen = tqApp->desktop()->availableGeometry( this );
-    if ( horizontal ) {
-	if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	    if ( mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, rect().bottom() ) ).y() + d->popup->tqsizeHint().height() <= screen.height() ) {
-		p = mapToGlobal( rect().bottomRight() );
-	    } else {
-		p = mapToGlobal( rect().topRight() - TQPoint( 0, d->popup->tqsizeHint().height() ) );
-	    }
-	    p.rx() -= d->popup->tqsizeHint().width();
-	} else {
-	    if ( mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0, rect().bottom() ) ).y() + d->popup->tqsizeHint().height() <= screen.height() ) {
-		p = mapToGlobal( rect().bottomLeft() );
-	    } else {
-		p = mapToGlobal( rect().topLeft() - TQPoint( 0, d->popup->tqsizeHint().height() ) );
-	    }
-	}
-    } else {
-	if ( TQApplication::reverseLayout() ) {
-	    if ( mapToGlobal( TQPoint( rect().left(), 0 ) ).x() - d->popup->tqsizeHint().width() <= screen.x() ) {
-		p = mapToGlobal( rect().topRight() );
-	    } else {
-		p = mapToGlobal( rect().topLeft() );
-		p.rx() -= d->popup->tqsizeHint().width();
-	    }
-	} else {
-	    if ( mapToGlobal( TQPoint( rect().right(), 0 ) ).x() + d->popup->tqsizeHint().width() <= screen.width() ) {
-		p = mapToGlobal( rect().topRight() );
-	    } else {
-		p = mapToGlobal( rect().topLeft() - TQPoint( d->popup->tqsizeHint().width(), 0 ) );
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQToolButton> that = this;
-    d->popup->exec( p, -1 );
-    if ( !that )
-	return;
-
-    setDown( FALSE );
-    if ( d->repeat )
-	setAutoRepeat( TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolButton::popupDelay
-    \brief the time delay between pressing the button and the appearance of the associated popup menu in milliseconds.
-
-    Usually this is around half a second. A value of 0 draws the down
-    arrow button to the side of the button which can be used to open
-    up the popup menu.
-
-    \sa setPopup()
-*/
-void TQToolButton::setPopupDelay( int delay )
-{
-    d->delay = delay;
-
-    update();
-}
-
-int TQToolButton::popupDelay() const
-{
-    return d->delay;
-}
-#endif
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolButton::autoRaise
-    \brief whether auto-raising is enabled or not.
-
-    The default is disabled (i.e. FALSE).
-*/
-void TQToolButton::setAutoRaise( bool enable )
-{
-    d->autoraise = enable;
-
-    update();
-}
-
-bool TQToolButton::autoRaise() const
-{
-    return d->autoraise;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolButton::textPosition
-    \brief the position of the text label of this button.
-*/
-
-TQToolButton::TextPosition TQToolButton::textPosition() const
-{
-    return d->textPos;
-}
-
-void TQToolButton::setTextPosition( TextPosition pos )
-{
-    d->textPos = pos;
-    updateGeometry();
-    update();
-}
-
-/*! \reimp */
-
-void TQToolButton::setText( const TQString &txt )
-{
-    TQButton::setText( txt );
-    if ( !text().isEmpty() ) {
-	delete s;
-	s = 0;
-    }
-}
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PALETTE
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQToolButton::paletteChange( const TQPalette & )
-{
-    if ( s )
-	s->clearGenerated();
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d8c015..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtoolbutton.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQToolButton class
-**
-** Created : 979899
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQTOOLBUTTON_H
-#define TQTOOLBUTTON_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqbutton.h"
-#include "tqstring.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqiconset.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBUTTON
-
-class TQToolButtonPrivate;
-class TQToolBar;
-class TQPopupMenu;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQToolButton : public TQButton
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    TQ_ENUMS( TextPosition )
-
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQIconSet iconSet READ iconSet WRITE setIconSet )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQIconSet onIconSet READ onIconSet WRITE setOnIconSet DESIGNABLE false STORED false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQIconSet offIconSet READ offIconSet WRITE setOffIconSet DESIGNABLE false STORED false )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool usesBigPixmap READ usesBigPixmap WRITE setUsesBigPixmap )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool usesTextLabel READ usesTextLabel WRITE setUsesTextLabel )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TQString textLabel READ textLabel WRITE setTextLabel )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int popupDelay READ popupDelay WRITE setPopupDelay )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool autoRaise READ autoRaise WRITE setAutoRaise )
-    Q_PROPERTY( TextPosition textPosition READ textPosition WRITE setTextPosition )
-
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool toggleButton WRITE setToggleButton )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( bool on WRITE setOn )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( TQPixmap pixmap DESIGNABLE false STORED false )
-    TQ_OVERRIDE( BackgroundMode backgroundMode DESIGNABLE true)
-
-public:
-    enum TextPosition {
-	BesideIcon,
-	BelowIcon,
-	Right = BesideIcon, // obsolete
-	Under = BelowIcon // obsolete
-    };
-    TQToolButton( TQWidget * parent, const char* name=0 );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLBAR
-    TQToolButton( const TQIconSet& s, const TQString &textLabel,
-		 const TQString& grouptext,
-		 TQT_BASE_OBJECT_NAME * receiver, const char* slot,
-		 TQToolBar * parent, const char* name=0 );
-#endif
-    TQToolButton( TQt::ArrowType type, TQWidget *parent, const char* name=0 );
-    ~TQToolButton();
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    void setOnIconSet( const TQIconSet& );
-    void setOffIconSet( const TQIconSet& );
-    void setIconSet( const TQIconSet &, bool on );
-    TQIconSet onIconSet() const;
-    TQIconSet offIconSet( ) const;
-    TQIconSet iconSet( bool on ) const;
-#endif
-    virtual void setIconSet( const TQIconSet & );
-    TQIconSet iconSet() const;
-
-    bool usesBigPixmap() const { return ubp; }
-    bool usesTextLabel() const { return utl; }
-    TQString textLabel() const { return tl; }
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_POPUPMENU
-    void setPopup( TQPopupMenu* popup );
-    TQPopupMenu* popup() const;
-
-    void setPopupDelay( int delay );
-    int popupDelay() const;
-
-    void openPopup();
-#endif
-
-    void setAutoRaise( bool enable );
-    bool autoRaise() const;
-    TextPosition textPosition() const;
-
-    void setText( const TQString &txt );
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    virtual void setUsesBigPixmap( bool enable );
-    virtual void setUsesTextLabel( bool enable );
-    virtual void setTextLabel( const TQString &, bool );
-
-    virtual void setToggleButton( bool enable );
-
-    virtual void setOn( bool enable );
-    void toggle();
-    void setTextLabel( const TQString & );
-    void setTextPosition( TextPosition pos );
-
-protected:
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent * );
-    void drawButton( TQPainter * );
-    void drawButtonLabel(TQPainter *);
-
-    void enterEvent( TQEvent * );
-    void leaveEvent( TQEvent * );
-    void moveEvent( TQMoveEvent * );
-
-    // ### Make virtual in 4.0, maybe act like TQPushButton with
-    // regards to setFlat() instead?  Andy
-    bool uses3D() const;
-#if (TQT_VERSION >= 0x040000)
-#error "Some functions need to be changed to virtual for TQt 4.0"
-#endif
-
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_PALETTE
-    void paletteChange( const TQPalette & );
-#endif
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void popupTimerDone();
-    void popupPressed();
-
-private:
-    void init();
-
-    TQPixmap bp;
-    int bpID;
-    TQPixmap sp;
-    int spID;
-
-    TQString tl;
-
-    TQToolButtonPrivate *d;
-    TQIconSet *s;
-
-    uint utl : 1;
-    uint ubp : 1;
-    uint hasArrow : 1;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQToolButton( const TQToolButton & );
-    TQToolButton& operator=( const TQToolButton & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_TOOLBUTTON
-
-#endif // TQTOOLBUTTON_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 5213e58..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1273 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Tool Tips (or Balloon Help) for any widget or rectangle
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqtooltip.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-#include "tqlabel.h"
-#include "tqptrdict.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqguardedptr.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqeffects_p.h"
-
-static bool globally_enabled = TRUE;
-
-// Magic value meaning an entire widget - if someone tries to insert a
-// tool tip on this part of a widget it will be interpreted as the
-// entire widget.
-
-static inline TQRect entireWidget()
-{
-    return TQRect( -TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX, -TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX,
-		  2*TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX, 2*TQWIDGETSIZE_MAX );
-}
-
-// Internal class - don't touch
-
-class TQTipLabel : public TQLabel
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQTipLabel( TQWidget* parent, const TQString& text) : TQLabel( parent, "toolTipTip",
-	     (WFlags)(TQt::WStyle_StaysOnTop | WStyle_Customize | TQt::WStyle_NoBorder | TQt::WStyle_Tool | WX11BypassWM) )
-    {
-	setMargin(1);
-	setAutoMask( FALSE );
-	setFrameStyle( TQFrame::Plain | TQFrame::Box );
-	setLineWidth( 1 );
-	tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignAuto | TQt::AlignTop );
-	setIndent(0);
-	polish();
-	setText(text);
-	adjustSize();
-        x11SetWindowType( X11WindowTypeTooltip );
-    }
-    void setWidth( int w ) { resize( sizeForWidth( w ) ); }
-};
-
-// Internal class - don't touch
-
-class TQTipManager : public TQObject
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQTipManager();
-   ~TQTipManager();
-
-    struct Tip
-    {
-	TQRect		rect;
-	TQString		text;
-	TQString	        groupText;
-	TQToolTipGroup  *group;
-	TQToolTip       *tip;
-	bool	        autoDelete;
-	TQRect 		tqgeometry;
-	Tip	       *next;
-    };
-
-    bool    eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e );
-    void    add( const TQRect &gm, TQWidget *, const TQRect &, const TQString& ,
-		 TQToolTipGroup *, const TQString& , TQToolTip *, bool );
-    void    add( TQWidget *, const TQRect &, const TQString& ,
-		 TQToolTipGroup *, const TQString& , TQToolTip *, bool );
-    void    remove( TQWidget *, const TQRect &, bool delayhide = FALSE );
-    void    remove( TQWidget * );
-
-    void    removeFromGroup( TQToolTipGroup * );
-
-    void    hideTipAndSleep();
-
-    TQString find( TQWidget *, const TQPoint& );
-    void setWakeUpDelay(int);
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void    hideTip();
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void    labelDestroyed();
-    void    clientWidgetDestroyed();
-    void    showTip();
-    void    allowAnimation();
-
-private:
-    TQTimer  wakeUp;
-    int wakeUpDelay;
-    TQTimer  fallAsleep;
-
-    TQPtrDict<Tip> *tips;
-    TQTipLabel *label;
-    TQPoint pos;
-    TQGuardedPtr<TQWidget> widget;
-    Tip *currentTip;
-    Tip *previousTip;
-    bool preventAnimation;
-    bool isApplicationFilter;
-    TQTimer *removeTimer;
-};
-
-
-// We have a global, internal TQTipManager object
-
-static TQTipManager *tipManager	  = 0;
-
-static void initTipManager()
-{
-    if ( !tipManager ) {
-	tipManager = new TQTipManager;
-	TQ_CHECK_PTR( tipManager );
-    }
-}
-
-
-TQTipManager::TQTipManager()
-    : TQObject( tqApp, "toolTipManager" )
-{
-    wakeUpDelay = 700;
-    tips = new TQPtrDict<TQTipManager::Tip>( 313 );
-    currentTip = 0;
-    previousTip = 0;
-    label = 0;
-    preventAnimation = FALSE;
-    isApplicationFilter = FALSE;
-    connect( &wakeUp, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), TQT_SLOT(showTip()) );
-    connect( &fallAsleep, TQT_SIGNAL(timeout()), TQT_SLOT(hideTip()) );
-    removeTimer = new TQTimer( this );
-}
-
-
-TQTipManager::~TQTipManager()
-{
-    if ( isApplicationFilter && !tqApp->closingDown() ) {
-	tqApp->setGlobalMouseTracking( FALSE );
-	tqApp->removeEventFilter( tipManager );
-    }
-
-    delete label;
-    label = 0;
-
-    if ( tips ) {
-	TQPtrDictIterator<TQTipManager::Tip> i( *tips );
-	TQTipManager::Tip *t, *n;
-	void *k;
-	while( (t = i.current()) != 0 ) {
-	    k = i.currentKey();
-	    ++i;
-	    tips->take( k );
-	    while ( t ) {
-		n = t->next;
-		delete t;
-		t = n;
-	    }
-	}
-	delete tips;
-    }
-
-    tipManager = 0;
-}
-
-void TQTipManager::add( const TQRect &gm, TQWidget *w,
-		       const TQRect &r, const TQString &s,
-		       TQToolTipGroup *g, const TQString& gs,
-		       TQToolTip *tt, bool a )
-{
-    remove( w, r, TRUE );
-    TQTipManager::Tip *h = (*tips)[ w ];
-    TQTipManager::Tip *t = new TQTipManager::Tip;
-    t->next = h;
-    t->tip = tt;
-    t->autoDelete = a;
-    t->text = s;
-    t->rect = r;
-    t->groupText = gs;
-    t->group = g;
-    t->tqgeometry = gm;
-
-    if ( h ) {
-	tips->take( w );
-	if ( h != currentTip && h->autoDelete ) {
-	    t->next = h->next;
-	    delete h;
-	}
-    } else
-	connect( w, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(clientWidgetDestroyed()) );
-
-    tips->insert( w, t );
-
-    if ( a && t->rect.contains( pos ) && (!g || g->enabled()) ) {
-	removeTimer->stop();
-	showTip();
-    }
-
-    if ( !isApplicationFilter && tqApp ) {
-	isApplicationFilter = TRUE;
-	tqApp->installEventFilter( tipManager );
-	tqApp->setGlobalMouseTracking( TRUE );
-    }
-
-    if ( t->group ) {
-	disconnect( removeTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-		 t->group, TQT_SIGNAL( removeTip() ) );
-	connect( removeTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-		 t->group, TQT_SIGNAL( removeTip() ) );
-    }
-}
-
-void TQTipManager::add( TQWidget *w, const TQRect &r, const TQString &s,
-		       TQToolTipGroup *g, const TQString& gs,
-		       TQToolTip *tt, bool a )
-{
-    add( TQRect( -1, -1, -1, -1 ), w, r, s, g, gs, tt, a );
-}
-
-
-void TQTipManager::remove( TQWidget *w, const TQRect & r, bool delayhide )
-{
-    TQTipManager::Tip *t = (*tips)[ w ];
-    if ( t == 0 )
-	return;
-
-    if ( t == currentTip ) {
-	if (!delayhide)
-	    hideTip();
-	else
-	    currentTip->autoDelete = TRUE;
-    }
-
-    if ( t == previousTip )
-	previousTip = 0;
-
-    if ( ( currentTip != t || !delayhide ) && t->rect == r ) {
-	tips->take( w );
-	if ( t->next )
-	    tips->insert( w, t->next );
-	delete t;
-    } else {
-	while(  t->next && t->next->rect != r && ( currentTip != t->next || !delayhide ))
-	    t = t->next;
-	if ( t->next ) {
-	    TQTipManager::Tip *d = t->next;
-	    t->next = t->next->next;
-	    delete d;
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( (*tips)[ w ] == 0 )
-	disconnect( w, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(clientWidgetDestroyed()) );
-#if 0 // not needed, leads sometimes to crashes
-    if ( tips->isEmpty() ) {
-	// the manager will be recreated if needed
-	delete tipManager;
-	tipManager = 0;
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-
-/*
-  The label was destroyed in the program cleanup phase.
-*/
-
-void TQTipManager::labelDestroyed()
-{
-    label = 0;
-}
-
-
-/*
-  Remove sender() from the tool tip data structures.
-*/
-
-void TQTipManager::clientWidgetDestroyed()
-{
-    const TQObject *s = TQT_TQOBJECT(sender());
-    if ( s )
-	remove( (TQWidget*) s );
-}
-
-
-void TQTipManager::remove( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    TQTipManager::Tip *t = (*tips)[ w ];
-    if ( t == 0 )
-	return;
-
-    tips->take( w );
-    TQTipManager::Tip * d;
-    while ( t ) {
-	if ( t == currentTip )
-	    hideTip();
-	d = t->next;
-	delete t;
-	t = d;
-    }
-
-    disconnect( w, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(clientWidgetDestroyed()) );
-#if 0
-    if ( tips->isEmpty() ) {
-	delete tipManager;
-	tipManager = 0;
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-
-void TQTipManager::removeFromGroup( TQToolTipGroup *g )
-{
-    TQPtrDictIterator<TQTipManager::Tip> i( *tips );
-    TQTipManager::Tip *t;
-    while( (t = i.current()) != 0 ) {
-	++i;
-	while ( t ) {
-	    if ( t->group == g ) {
-		if ( t->group )
-		    disconnect( removeTimer, TQT_SIGNAL( timeout() ),
-				t->group, TQT_SIGNAL( removeTip() ) );
-		t->group = 0;
-	    }
-	    t = t->next;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-
-
-bool TQTipManager::eventFilter( TQObject *obj, TQEvent *e )
-{
-    // avoid dumping core in case of application madness, and return
-    // quickly for some common but irrelevant events
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::WindowDeactivate &&
-	tqApp && !tqApp->activeWindow() &&
-	label && label->isVisible() )
-	hideTipAndSleep();
-
-    if ( !tqApp
-	 || !obj || !obj->isWidgetType() // isWidgetType() catches most stuff
-	 || e->type() == TQEvent::Paint
-	 || e->type() == TQEvent::Timer
-	 || e->type() == TQEvent::SockAct
-	 || !tips )
-	return FALSE;
-    TQWidget *w = (TQWidget *)obj;
-
-    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::FocusOut || e->type() == TQEvent::FocusIn ) {
-	// user moved focus somewhere - hide the tip and sleep
-	if ( ((TQFocusEvent*)e)->reason() != TQFocusEvent::Popup )
-	    hideTipAndSleep();
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-
-    TQTipManager::Tip *t = 0;
-    while( w && !t ) {
-	t = (*tips)[ w ];
-	if ( !t )
-	    w = w->isTopLevel() ? 0 : w->parentWidget();
-    }
-    if ( !w )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    if ( !t && e->type() != TQEvent::MouseMove) {
-	if ( ( e->type() >= TQEvent::MouseButtonPress &&
-	       e->type() <= TQEvent::FocusOut) || e->type() == TQEvent::Leave )
-	    hideTip();
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-
-    // with that out of the way, let's get down to action
-
-    switch( e->type() ) {
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress:
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease:
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick:
-    case TQEvent::KeyPress:
-    case TQEvent::KeyRelease:
-	// input - turn off tool tip mode
-	hideTipAndSleep();
-	break;
-    case TQEvent::MouseMove:
-	{
-	    TQMouseEvent * m = (TQMouseEvent *)e;
-	    TQPoint mousePos = w->mapFromGlobal( m->globalPos() );
-
-	    if ( currentTip && !currentTip->rect.contains( mousePos ) ) {
-		hideTip();
-		if ( m->state() == 0 )
-		    return FALSE;
-	    }
-
-	    wakeUp.stop();
-	    if ( m->state() == 0 &&
-		    mousePos.x() >= 0 && mousePos.x() < w->width() &&
-		    mousePos.y() >= 0 && mousePos.y() < w->height() ) {
-		if ( label && label->isVisible() ) {
-		    return FALSE;
-		} else {
-		    if ( fallAsleep.isActive() ) {
-			wakeUp.start( 1, TRUE );
-		    } else {
-			previousTip = 0;
-			wakeUp.start( wakeUpDelay, TRUE );
-		    }
-		    if ( t->group && t->group->ena &&
-			 !t->group->del && !t->groupText.isEmpty() ) {
-			removeTimer->stop();
-			emit t->group->showTip( t->groupText );
-			currentTip = t;
-		    }
-		}
-		widget = w;
-		pos = mousePos;
-		return FALSE;
-	    } else {
-		hideTip();
-	    }
-	}
-	break;
-    case TQEvent::Leave:
-    case TQEvent::Hide:
-    case TQEvent::Destroy:
-	if ( w == widget )
-	    hideTip();
-	break;
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-
-
-void TQTipManager::showTip()
-{
-    if ( !widget || !globally_enabled
-#ifndef TQ_WS_X11
-	 || !widget->isActiveWindow()
-#endif
-	)
-	return;
-
-    TQTipManager::Tip *t = (*tips)[ widget ];
-    while ( t && !t->rect.contains( pos ) )
-	t = t->next;
-    if ( t == 0 )
-	return;
-
-    if ( t == currentTip && label && label->isVisible() )
-	return; // nothing to do
-
-    if ( t->tip ) {
-	t->tip->maybeTip( pos );
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( t->group && !t->group->ena )
-	return;
-
-    int scr;
-    if ( TQApplication::desktop()->isVirtualDesktop() )
-	scr = TQApplication::desktop()->screenNumber( widget->mapToGlobal( pos ) );
-    else
-	scr = TQApplication::desktop()->screenNumber( widget );
-
-    if ( label
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-	 && label->x11Screen() == widget->x11Screen()
-#endif
-	 ) {
-	// the next two lines are a workaround for TQLabel being too intelligent.
-	// TQLabel turns on the wordbreak flag once it gets a richtext. The two lines below
-	// ensure we get correct textflags when switching back and forth between a richtext and
-	// non richtext tooltip
-	label->setText( "" );
-	label->tqsetAlignment( TQt::AlignAuto | TQt::AlignTop );
-	label->setText( t->text );
-	label->adjustSize();
-	if ( t->tqgeometry != TQRect( -1, -1, -1, -1 ) )
-	    label->resize( t->tqgeometry.size() );
-    } else {
-	delete label;
-	label = new TQTipLabel( TQT_TQWIDGET(TQApplication::desktop()->screen( scr )), t->text);
-	if ( t->tqgeometry != TQRect( -1, -1, -1, -1 ) )
-	    label->resize( t->tqgeometry.size() );
-	TQ_CHECK_PTR( label );
-	connect( label, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), TQT_SLOT(labelDestroyed()) );
-    }
-    // the above deletion and creation of a TQTipLabel causes events to be sent. We had reports that the widget
-    // pointer was 0 after this. This is in principle possible if the wrong kind of events get sent through our event
-    // filter in this time. So better be safe and check widget once again here.
-    if (!widget)
-	return;
-
-#ifdef TQ_WS_X11
-    label->x11SetWindowTransient( widget->tqtopLevelWidget());
-#endif
-
-#ifdef TQ_WS_MAC
-    TQRect screen = TQApplication::desktop()->availableGeometry( scr );
-#else
-    TQRect screen = TQApplication::desktop()->screenGeometry( scr );
-#endif
-    TQPoint p;
-    if ( t->tqgeometry == TQRect( -1, -1, -1, -1 ) ) {
-	p = widget->mapToGlobal( pos ) +
-#ifdef TQ_WS_WIN
-	    TQPoint( 2, 24 );
-#else
-	    TQPoint( 2, 16 );
-#endif
-	if ( p.x() + label->width() > screen.x() + screen.width() )
-	    p.rx() -= 4 + label->width();
-	if ( p.y() + label->height() > screen.y() + screen.height() )
-	    p.ry() -= 24 + label->height();
-    } else {
-	p = widget->mapToGlobal( t->tqgeometry.topLeft() );
-	label->tqsetAlignment( TQt::WordBreak | TQt::AlignCenter );
-	label->setWidth( t->tqgeometry.width() - 4 );
-    }
-    if ( p.y() < screen.y() )
-	p.setY( screen.y() );
-    if ( p.x() + label->width() > screen.x() + screen.width() )
-	p.setX( screen.x() + screen.width() - label->width() );
-    if ( p.x() < screen.x() )
-	p.setX( screen.x() );
-    if ( p.y() + label->height() > screen.y() + screen.height() )
-	p.setY( screen.y() + screen.height() - label->height() );
-    if ( label->text().length() ) {
-	label->move( p );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_EFFECTS
-	if ( TQApplication::isEffectEnabled( Qt::UI_AnimateTooltip ) == FALSE ||
-	     previousTip || preventAnimation )
-	    label->show();
-	else if ( TQApplication::isEffectEnabled( Qt::UI_FadeTooltip ) )
-	    qFadeEffect( label );
-	else
-	    qScrollEffect( label );
-#else
-	label->show();
-#endif
-
-	label->raise();
-	fallAsleep.start( 10000, TRUE );
-    }
-
-    if ( t->group && t->group->del && !t->groupText.isEmpty() ) {
-	removeTimer->stop();
-	emit t->group->showTip( t->groupText );
-    }
-
-    currentTip = t;
-    previousTip = 0;
-}
-
-
-void TQTipManager::hideTip()
-{
-    TQTimer::singleShot( 250, this, TQT_SLOT(allowAnimation()) );
-    preventAnimation = TRUE;
-
-    if ( label && label->isVisible() ) {
-	label->hide();
-	fallAsleep.start( 2000, TRUE );
-	wakeUp.stop();
-	if ( currentTip && currentTip->group )
-	    removeTimer->start( 100, TRUE );
-    } else if ( wakeUp.isActive() ) {
-	wakeUp.stop();
-	if ( currentTip && currentTip->group &&
-	     !currentTip->group->del && !currentTip->groupText.isEmpty() )
-	    removeTimer->start( 100, TRUE );
-    } else if ( currentTip && currentTip->group ) {
-	removeTimer->start( 100, TRUE );
-    }
-
-    previousTip = currentTip;
-    currentTip = 0;
-    if ( previousTip && previousTip->autoDelete )
-	remove( widget, previousTip->rect );
-    widget = 0;
-}
-
-void  TQTipManager::hideTipAndSleep()
-{
-    hideTip();
-    fallAsleep.stop();
-}
-
-
-void TQTipManager::allowAnimation()
-{
-    preventAnimation = FALSE;
-}
-
-TQString TQTipManager::find( TQWidget *w, const TQPoint& pos )
-{
-    Tip *t = (*tips)[ w ];
-    while ( t && !t->rect.contains( pos ) )
-	t = t->next;
-
-    return t ? t->text : TQString::null;
-}
-
-void TQTipManager::setWakeUpDelay ( int i )
-{
-    wakeUpDelay = i;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \class TQToolTip tqtooltip.h
-    \brief The TQToolTip class provides tool tips (balloon help) for
-    any widget or rectangular part of a widget.
-
-    \ingroup helpsystem
-    \mainclass
-
-    The tip is a short, single line of text reminding the user of the
-    widget's or rectangle's function. It is drawn immediately below
-    the region in a distinctive black-on-yellow combination.
-
-    The tip can be any Rich-Text formatted string.
-
-    TQToolTipGroup provides a way for tool tips to display another text
-    elsewhere (most often in a \link TQStatusBar status bar\endlink).
-
-    At any point in time, TQToolTip is either dormant or active. In
-    dormant mode the tips are not shown and in active mode they are.
-    The mode is global, not particular to any one widget.
-
-    TQToolTip switches from dormant to active mode when the user hovers
-    the mouse on a tip-equipped region for a second or so and remains
-    active until the user either clicks a mouse button, presses a key,
-    lets the mouse hover for five seconds or moves the mouse outside
-    \e all tip-equipped regions for at least a second.
-
-    The TQToolTip class can be used in three different ways:
-    \list 1
-    \i Adding a tip to an entire widget.
-    \i Adding a tip to a fixed rectangle within a widget.
-    \i Adding a tip to a dynamic rectangle within a widget.
-    \endlist
-
-    To add a tip to a widget, call the \e static function
-    TQToolTip::add() with the widget and tip as arguments:
-
-    \code
-	TQToolTip::add( quitButton, "Leave the application" );
-    \endcode
-
-    This is the simplest and most common use of TQToolTip. The tip
-    will be deleted automatically when \e quitButton is deleted, but
-    you can remove it yourself, too:
-
-    \code
-	TQToolTip::remove( quitButton );
-    \endcode
-
-    You can also display another text (typically in a \link TQStatusBar
-    status bar),\endlink courtesy of \l{TQToolTipGroup}. This example
-    assumes that \e grp is a \c{TQToolTipGroup *} and is already
-    connected to the appropriate status bar:
-
-    \code
-	TQToolTip::add( quitButton, "Leave the application", grp,
-		       "Leave the application, prompting to save if necessary" );
-	TQToolTip::add( closeButton, "Close this window", grp,
-		       "Close this window, prompting to save if necessary" );
-    \endcode
-
-    To add a tip to a fixed rectangle within a widget, call the static
-    function TQToolTip::add() with the widget, rectangle and tip as
-    arguments. (See the \c tooltip/tooltip.cpp example.) Again, you
-    can supply a \c{TQToolTipGroup *} and another text if you want.
-
-    Both of these are one-liners and cover the majority of cases. The
-    third and most general way to use TQToolTip requires you to
-    reimplement a pure virtual function to decide whether to pop up a
-    tool tip. The \c tooltip/tooltip.cpp example demonstrates this
-    too. This mode can be used to implement tips for text that can
-    move as the user scrolls, for example.
-
-    To use TQToolTip like this, you must subclass TQToolTip and
-    reimplement maybeTip(). TQToolTip calls maybeTip() when a tip
-    should pop up, and maybeTip() decides whether to show a tip.
-
-    Tool tips can be globally disabled using
-    TQToolTip::setGloballyEnabled() or disabled in groups with
-    TQToolTipGroup::setEnabled().
-
-    You can retrieve the text of a tooltip for a given position within
-    a widget using textFor().
-
-    The global tooltip font and palette can be set with the static
-    setFont() and setPalette() functions respectively.
-
-    \sa TQStatusBar TQWhatsThis TQToolTipGroup
-    \link guibooks.html#fowler GUI Design Handbook: Tool Tip\endlink
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the font common to all tool tips.
-
-    \sa setFont()
-*/
-
-TQFont TQToolTip::font()
-{
-    TQTipLabel l(0,"");
-    return TQApplication::font( &l );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the font for all tool tips to \a font.
-
-    \sa font()
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::setFont( const TQFont &font )
-{
-    TQApplication::tqsetFont( font, TRUE, "TQTipLabel" );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the palette common to all tool tips.
-
-    \sa setPalette()
-*/
-
-TQPalette TQToolTip::palette()
-{
-    TQTipLabel l(0,"");
-    return TQApplication::palette( &l );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the palette for all tool tips to \a palette.
-
-    \sa palette()
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::setPalette( const TQPalette &palette )
-{
-    TQApplication::tqsetPalette( palette, TRUE, "TQTipLabel" );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a tool tip object. This is only necessary if you need
-    tool tips on regions that can move within the widget (most often
-    because the widget's contents can scroll).
-
-    \a widget is the widget you want to add dynamic tool tips to and
-    \a group (optional) is the tool tip group they should belong to.
-
-    \warning TQToolTip is not a subclass of TQObject, so the instance of
-    TQToolTip is not deleted when \a widget is deleted.
-
-    \warning If you delete the tool tip before you have deleted
-    \a widget then you need to make sure you call remove() yourself from
-    \a widget in your reimplemented TQToolTip destructor.
-
-    \code
-	MyToolTip::~MyToolTip()
-	{
-	    remove( widget );
-	}
-    \endcode
-
-    \sa maybeTip().
-*/
-
-TQToolTip::TQToolTip( TQWidget * widget, TQToolTipGroup * group )
-{
-    p = widget;
-    g = group;
-    initTipManager();
-    tipManager->add( p, entireWidget(),
-		     TQString::null, g, TQString::null, this, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Adds a tool tip to \a widget. \a text is the text to be shown in
-    the tool tip.
-
-    This is the most common entry point to the TQToolTip class; it is
-    suitable for adding tool tips to buttons, checkboxes, comboboxes
-    and so on.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::add( TQWidget *widget, const TQString &text )
-{
-    initTipManager();
-    tipManager->add( widget, entireWidget(),
-		     text, 0, TQString::null, 0, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Adds a tool tip to \a widget and to tool tip group \a group.
-
-    \a text is the text shown in the tool tip and \a longText is the
-    text emitted from \a group.
-
-    Normally, \a longText is shown in a \link TQStatusBar status
-    bar\endlink or similar.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::add( TQWidget *widget, const TQString &text,
-		    TQToolTipGroup *group, const TQString& longText )
-{
-    initTipManager();
-    tipManager->add( widget, entireWidget(), text, group, longText, 0, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes the tool tip from \a widget.
-
-    If there is more than one tool tip on \a widget, only the one
-    covering the entire widget is removed.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::remove( TQWidget * widget )
-{
-    if ( tipManager )
-	tipManager->remove( widget, entireWidget() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Adds a tool tip to a fixed rectangle, \a rect, within \a widget.
-    \a text is the text shown in the tool tip.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::add( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect, const TQString &text )
-{
-    initTipManager();
-    tipManager->add( widget, rect, text, 0, TQString::null, 0, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Adds a tool tip to an entire \a widget and to tool tip group \a
-    group. The tooltip will disappear when the mouse leaves the \a
-    rect.
-
-    \a text is the text shown in the tool tip and \a groupText is the
-    text emitted from \a group.
-
-    Normally, \a groupText is shown in a \link TQStatusBar status
-    bar\endlink or similar.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::add( TQWidget *widget, const TQRect &rect,
-		    const TQString& text,
-		    TQToolTipGroup *group, const TQString& groupText )
-{
-    initTipManager();
-    tipManager->add( widget, rect, text, group, groupText, 0, FALSE );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Removes any tool tip for \a rect from \a widget.
-
-    If there is more than one tool tip on \a widget, only the one
-    covering rectangle \a rect is removed.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::remove( TQWidget * widget, const TQRect & rect )
-{
-    if ( tipManager )
-	tipManager->remove( widget, rect );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the tool tip text for \a widget at position \a pos, or
-    TQString::null if there is no tool tip for the given widget and
-    position.
-*/
-
-TQString TQToolTip::textFor( TQWidget *widget, const TQPoint& pos )
-{
-    if ( tipManager )
-	return tipManager->find( widget, pos );
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Hides any tip that is currently being shown.
-
-    Normally, there is no need to call this function; TQToolTip takes
-    care of showing and hiding the tips as the user moves the mouse.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::hide()
-{
-    if ( tipManager )
-	tipManager->hideTipAndSleep();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn virtual void TQToolTip::maybeTip( const TQPoint & p);
-
-    This pure virtual function is half of the most versatile interface
-    TQToolTip offers.
-
-    It is called when there is a possibility that a tool tip should be
-    shown and must decide whether there is a tool tip for the point \a
-    p in the widget that this TQToolTip object relates to. If so,
-    maybeTip() must call tip() with the rectangle the tip applies to,
-    the tip's text and optionally the TQToolTipGroup details and the
-    tqgeometry in screen coordinates.
-
-    \a p is given in that widget's local coordinates. Most maybeTip()
-    implementations will be of the form:
-
-    \code
-	if ( <something> ) {
-	    tip( <something>, <something> );
-	}
-    \endcode
-
-    The first argument to tip() (a rectangle) must encompass \a p,
-    i.e. the tip must apply to the current mouse position; otherwise
-    TQToolTip's operation is undefined.
-
-    Note that the tip will disappear once the mouse moves outside the
-    rectangle you give to tip(), and will not reappear if the mouse
-    moves back in: maybeTip() is called again instead.
-
-    \sa tip()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Immediately pops up a tip saying \a text and removes the tip once
-    the cursor moves out of rectangle \a rect (which is given in the
-    coordinate system of the widget this TQToolTip relates to).
-
-    The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
-    maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::tip( const TQRect & rect, const TQString &text )
-{
-    initTipManager();
-    tipManager->add( parentWidget(), rect, text, 0, TQString::null, 0, TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Immediately pops up a tip saying \a text and removes that tip once
-    the cursor moves out of rectangle \a rect (which is given in the
-    coordinate system of the widget this TQToolTip relates to). \a
-    groupText is the text emitted from the group.
-
-    The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
-    maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::tip( const TQRect & rect, const TQString &text,
-		    const TQString& groupText )
-{
-    initTipManager();
-    tipManager->add( parentWidget(), rect, text, group(), groupText, 0, TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Immediately pops up a tip within the rectangle \a tqgeometry, saying
-    \a text and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle
-    \a rect. Both rectangles are given in the coordinate system of the
-    widget this TQToolTip relates to.
-
-    The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
-    maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
-
-    If the tip does not fit inside \a tqgeometry, the tip expands.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::tip( const TQRect &rect, const TQString &text, const TQRect &tqgeometry )
-{
-    initTipManager();
-    tipManager->add( tqgeometry, parentWidget(), rect, text, 0, TQString::null, 0, TRUE );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Immediately pops up a tip within the rectangle \a tqgeometry, saying
-    \a text and removes the tip once the cursor moves out of rectangle
-    \a rect. \a groupText is the text emitted from the group. Both
-    rectangles are given in the coordinate system of the widget this
-    TQToolTip relates to.
-
-    The tip will not reappear if the cursor moves back; your
-    maybeTip() must reinstate it each time.
-
-    If the tip does not fit inside \a tqgeometry, the tip expands.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::tip( const TQRect &rect, const TQString &text, const TQString& groupText, const TQRect &tqgeometry )
-{
-    initTipManager();
-    tipManager->add( tqgeometry, parentWidget(), rect, text, group(), groupText, 0, TRUE );
-}
-
-
-
-/*!
-    Immediately removes all tool tips for this tooltip's parent
-    widget.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::clear()
-{
-    if ( tipManager )
-	tipManager->remove( parentWidget() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQWidget * TQToolTip::parentWidget() const
-
-    Returns the widget this TQToolTip applies to.
-
-    The tool tip is destroyed automatically when the parent widget is
-    destroyed.
-
-    \sa group()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQToolTipGroup * TQToolTip::group() const
-
-    Returns the tool tip group this TQToolTip is a member of or 0 if it
-    isn't a member of any group.
-
-    The tool tip group is the object responsible for maintaining
-    contact between tool tips and a \link TQStatusBar status
-    bar\endlink or something else which can show the longer help text.
-
-    \sa parentWidget(), TQToolTipGroup
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQToolTipGroup tqtooltip.h
-    \brief The TQToolTipGroup class collects tool tips into related groups.
-
-    \ingroup helpsystem
-
-    Tool tips can display \e two texts: one in the tip and
-    (optionally) one that is typically in a \link TQStatusBar status
-    bar\endlink. TQToolTipGroup provides a way to link tool tips to
-    this status bar.
-
-    TQToolTipGroup has practically no API; it is only used as an
-    argument to TQToolTip's member functions, for example like this:
-
-    \code
-	TQToolTipGroup * grp = new TQToolTipGroup( this, "tool tip relay" );
-	connect( grp, TQT_SIGNAL(showTip(const TQString&)),
-		 myLabel, TQT_SLOT(setText(const TQString&)) );
-	connect( grp, TQT_SIGNAL(removeTip()),
-		 myLabel, TQT_SLOT(clear()) );
-	TQToolTip::add( giraffeButton, "feed giraffe",
-		       grp, "Give the giraffe a meal" );
-	TQToolTip::add( gorillaButton, "feed gorilla",
-		       grp, "Give the gorilla a meal" );
-    \endcode
-
-    This example makes the object myLabel (which you must supply)
-    display (one assumes, though you can make myLabel do anything, of
-    course) the strings "Give the giraffe a meal" and "Give the
-    gorilla a meal" while the relevant tool tips are being displayed.
-
-    Deleting a tool tip group removes the tool tips in it.
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQToolTipGroup::showTip (const TQString &longText)
-
-    This signal is emitted when one of the tool tips in the group is
-    displayed. \a longText is the extra text for the displayed tool
-    tip.
-
-    \sa removeTip()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQToolTipGroup::removeTip ()
-
-    This signal is emitted when a tool tip in this group is hidden.
-    See the TQToolTipGroup documentation for an example of use.
-
-    \sa showTip()
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a tool tip group called \a name, with parent \a parent.
-*/
-
-TQToolTipGroup::TQToolTipGroup( TQObject *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQObject( parent, name )
-{
-    del = TRUE;
-    ena = TRUE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys this tool tip group and all tool tips in it.
-*/
-
-TQToolTipGroup::~TQToolTipGroup()
-{
-    if ( tipManager )
-	tipManager->removeFromGroup( this );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQToolTipGroup::delay
-    \brief whether the display of the group text is delayed.
-
-    If set to TRUE (the default), the group text is displayed at the
-    same time as the tool tip. Otherwise, the group text is displayed
-    immediately when the cursor enters the widget.
-*/
-
-bool TQToolTipGroup::delay() const
-{
-    return del;
-}
-
-void TQToolTipGroup::setDelay( bool enable )
-{
-#if 0
-    if ( enable && !del ) {
-	// maybe we should show the text at once?
-    }
-#endif
-    del = enable;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn static void TQToolTip::setEnabled( bool enable )
-
-    \obsolete
-*/
-/*!
-    \fn static bool TQToolTip::enabled()
-
-    \obsolete
-*/
-/*!
-    \property TQToolTipGroup::enabled
-    \brief whether tool tips in the group are enabled.
-
-    This property's default is TRUE.
-*/
-
-void TQToolTipGroup::setEnabled( bool enable )
-{
-    ena = enable;
-}
-
-bool TQToolTipGroup::enabled() const
-{
-    return (bool)ena;
-}
-
-/*!
-    If \a enable is TRUE sets all tool tips to be enabled (shown when
-    needed); if \a enable is FALSE sets all tool tips to be disabled
-    (never shown).
-
-    By default, tool tips are enabled. Note that this function affects
-    all tool tips in the entire application.
-
-    \sa TQToolTipGroup::setEnabled()
-*/
-
-void TQToolTip::setGloballyEnabled( bool enable )
-{
-    globally_enabled = enable;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns whether tool tips are enabled globally.
-
-    \sa setGloballyEnabled()
-*/
-bool TQToolTip::isGloballyEnabled()
-{
-    return globally_enabled;
-}
-
-/*!
-  Sets the wakeup delay for all tooltips to \a i
-  milliseconds.
-*/
-void TQToolTip::setWakeUpDelay ( int i )
-{
-    initTipManager();
-    tipManager->setWakeUpDelay(i);
-}
-
-
-#include "tqtooltip.tqmoc"
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.h
deleted file mode 100644
index c5c13f8..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqtooltip.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of Tool Tips (or Balloon Help) for any widget or rectangle
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQTOOLTIP_H
-#define TQTOOLTIP_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-
-#if __GNUC__  - 0 > 3
-#pragma GCC system_header
-#endif
-
-class TQTipManager;
-class TQIconViewToolTip;
-class TQListViewToolTip;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQToolTipGroup: public TQObject
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool delay READ delay WRITE setDelay )
-    Q_PROPERTY( bool enabled READ enabled WRITE setEnabled )
-
-public:
-    TQToolTipGroup( TQObject *parent, const char *name = 0 );
-   ~TQToolTipGroup();
-
-    bool delay() const;
-    bool enabled() const;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void setDelay( bool );
-    void setEnabled( bool );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void showTip( const TQString &);
-    void removeTip();
-
-private:
-    uint del:1;
-    uint ena:1;
-
-    friend class TQTipManager;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQToolTipGroup( const TQToolTipGroup & );
-    TQToolTipGroup& operator=( const TQToolTipGroup & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQToolTip: public TQt
-{
-public:
-    TQToolTip( TQWidget *, TQToolTipGroup * = 0 );
-    //### add virtual d'tor for 4.0
-
-    static void add( TQWidget *, const TQString &);
-    static void add( TQWidget *, const TQString &,
-		     TQToolTipGroup *, const TQString& );
-    static void remove( TQWidget * );
-
-    static void add( TQWidget *, const TQRect &, const TQString &);
-    static void add( TQWidget *, const TQRect &, const TQString &,
-		     TQToolTipGroup *, const TQString& );
-    static void remove( TQWidget *, const TQRect & );
-
-    static TQString textFor( TQWidget *, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint() );
-
-    static void hide();
-
-    static TQFont    font();
-    static void	    setFont( const TQFont & );
-    static TQPalette palette();
-    static void	    setPalette( const TQPalette & );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_COMPAT
-    static void	    setEnabled( bool enable ) { setGloballyEnabled( enable ); }
-    static bool	    enabled() { return isGloballyEnabled(); }
-#endif
-    static void	    setGloballyEnabled( bool );
-    static bool	    isGloballyEnabled();
-    static void	    setWakeUpDelay(int);
-
-protected:
-    virtual void maybeTip( const TQPoint & ) = 0;
-    void    tip( const TQRect &, const TQString &);
-    void    tip( const TQRect &, const TQString& , const TQString &);
-    void    tip( const TQRect &, const TQString &, const TQRect & );
-    void    tip( const TQRect &, const TQString&, const TQString &, const TQRect &);
-
-    void    clear();
-
-public:
-    TQWidget	  *parentWidget() const { return p; }
-    TQToolTipGroup *group()	  const { return g; }
-
-private:
-    TQWidget	    *p;
-    TQToolTipGroup   *g;
-    static TQFont    *ttFont;
-    static TQPalette *ttPalette;
-
-    friend class TQTipManager;
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_TOOLTIP
-
-#endif // TQTOOLTIP_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 18fffc7..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,672 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of validator classes
-**
-** Created : 970610
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqvalidator.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VALIDATOR
-
-#include <limits.h>
-#include <math.h>
-
-/*!
-    \class TQValidator
-    \brief The TQValidator class provides validation of input text.
-
-    \ingroup misc
-    \mainclass
-
-    The class itself is abstract. Two subclasses, \l TQIntValidator and
-    \l TQDoubleValidator, provide basic numeric-range checking, and \l
-    TQRegExpValidator provides general checking using a custom regular
-    expression.
-
-    If the built-in validators aren't sufficient, you can subclass
-    TQValidator. The class has two virtual functions: validate() and
-    fixup().
-
-    \l validate() must be implemented by every subclass. It returns
-    \c Invalid, \c Intermediate or \c Acceptable depending on whether
-    its argument is valid (for the subclass's definition of valid).
-
-    These three states require some explanation. An \c Invalid string
-    is \e clearly invalid. \c Intermediate is less obvious: the
-    concept of validity is slippery when the string is incomplete
-    (still being edited). TQValidator defines \c Intermediate as the
-    property of a string that is neither clearly invalid nor
-    acceptable as a final result. \c Acceptable means that the string
-    is acceptable as a final result. One might say that any string
-    that is a plausible intermediate state during entry of an \c
-    Acceptable string is \c Intermediate.
-
-    Here are some examples:
-
-    \list
-
-    \i For a line edit that accepts integers from 0 to 999 inclusive,
-    42 and 123 are \c Acceptable, the empty string and 1114 are \c
-    Intermediate and asdf is \c Invalid.
-
-    \i For an editable combobox that accepts URLs, any well-formed URL
-    is \c Acceptable, "http://www.trolltech.com/," is \c Intermediate
-    (it might be a cut and paste operation that accidentally took in a
-    comma at the end), the empty string is \c Intermediate (the user
-    might select and delete all of the text in preparation for entering
-    a new URL), and "http:///./" is \c Invalid.
-
-    \i For a spin box that accepts lengths, "11cm" and "1in" are \c
-    Acceptable, "11" and the empty string are \c Intermediate and
-    "http://www.trolltech.com" and "hour" are \c Invalid.
-
-    \endlist
-
-    \l fixup() is provided for validators that can repair some user
-    errors. The default implementation does nothing. TQLineEdit, for
-    example, will call fixup() if the user presses Enter (or Return)
-    and the content is not currently valid. This allows the fixup()
-    function the opportunity of performing some magic to make an \c
-    Invalid string \c Acceptable.
-
-    TQValidator is typically used with TQLineEdit, TQSpinBox and
-    TQComboBox.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \enum TQValidator::State
-
-    This enum type defines the states in which a validated string can
-    exist.
-
-    \value Invalid  the string is \e clearly invalid.
-
-    \value Intermediate  the string is a plausible intermediate value
-    during editing.
-
-    \value Acceptable  the string is acceptable as a final result,
-    i.e. it is valid.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets up the validator. The \a parent and \a name parameters are
-    passed on to the TQObject constructor.
-*/
-
-TQValidator::TQValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name )
-    : TQObject( parent, name )
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the validator, freeing any storage and other resources
-    used.
-*/
-
-TQValidator::~TQValidator()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQValidator::State TQValidator::validate( TQString& input, int& pos ) const
-
-    This pure virtual function returns \c Invalid if \a input is
-    invalid according to this validator's rules, \c Intermediate if it
-    is likely that a little more editing will make the input
-    acceptable (e.g. the user types '4' into a widget which accepts
-    integers between 10 and 99) and \c Acceptable if the input is
-    valid.
-
-    The function can change \a input and \a pos (the cursor position)
-    if it wants to.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQValidator::fixup( TQString & input ) const
-
-    This function attempts to change \a input to be valid according to
-    this validator's rules. It need not result in a valid string:
-    callers of this function must re-test afterwards; the default does
-    nothing.
-
-    Reimplementations of this function can change \a input even if
-    they do not produce a valid string. For example, an ISBN validator
-    might want to delete every character except digits and "-", even
-    if the result is still not a valid ISBN; a surname validator might
-    want to remove whitespace from the start and end of the string,
-    even if the resulting string is not in the list of accepted
-    surnames.
-*/
-
-void TQValidator::fixup( TQString & ) const
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQIntValidator
-    \brief The TQIntValidator class provides a validator which ensures
-    that a string contains a valid integer within a specified range.
-
-    \ingroup misc
-
-    Example of use:
-
-    \code
-    TQValidator* validator = new TQIntValidator( 100, 999, this );
-    TQLineEdit* edit = new TQLineEdit( this );
-
-    // the edit lineedit will only accept integers between 100 and 999
-    edit->setValidator( validator );
-    \endcode
-
-    Below we present some examples of validators. In practice they would
-    normally be associated with a widget as in the example above.
-
-    \code
-    TQString str;
-    int pos = 0;
-    TQIntValidator v( 100, 999, this );
-
-    str = "1";
-    v.validate( str, pos );     // returns Intermediate
-    str = "12";
-    v.validate( str, pos );     // returns Intermediate
-
-    str = "123";
-    v.validate( str, pos );     // returns Acceptable
-    str = "678";
-    v.validate( str, pos );     // returns Acceptable
-
-    str = "1234";
-    v.validate( str, pos );     // returns Invalid
-    str = "-123";
-    v.validate( str, pos );     // returns Invalid
-    str = "abc";
-    v.validate( str, pos );     // returns Invalid
-    str = "12cm";
-    v.validate( str, pos );     // returns Invalid
-    \endcode
-
-    The minimum and maximum values are set in one call with setRange()
-    or individually with setBottom() and setTop().
-
-    \sa TQDoubleValidator TQRegExpValidator
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a validator called \a name with parent \a parent, that
-    accepts all integers.
-*/
-
-TQIntValidator::TQIntValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name )
-    : TQValidator( parent, name )
-{
-    b = INT_MIN;
-    t = INT_MAX;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a validator called \a name with parent \a parent, that
-    accepts integers from \a minimum to \a maximum inclusive.
-*/
-
-TQIntValidator::TQIntValidator( int minimum, int maximum,
-			      TQObject * parent, const char* name )
-    : TQValidator( parent, name )
-{
-    b = minimum;
-    t = maximum;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the validator, freeing any resources allocated.
-*/
-
-TQIntValidator::~TQIntValidator()
-{
-    // nothing
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns \c Acceptable if the \a input is an integer within the
-    valid range, \c Intermediate if the \a input is an integer outside
-    the valid range and \c Invalid if the \a input is not an integer.
-
-    Note: If the valid range consists of just positive integers (e.g. 32 - 100)
-    and \a input is a negative integer then Invalid is returned.
-
-    \code
-    int pos = 0;
-    s = "abc";
-    v.validate( s, pos ); // returns Invalid
-
-    s = "5";
-    v.validate( s, pos ); // returns Intermediate
-
-    s = "50";
-    v.validate( s, pos ); // returns Valid
-    \endcode
-*/
-
-TQValidator::State TQIntValidator::validate( TQString & input, int & ) const
-{
-    TQString stripped = input.stripWhiteSpace();
-    if ( stripped.isEmpty() || (b < 0 && stripped == "-") )
-	return Intermediate;
-    bool ok;
-    long entered = input.toLong( &ok );
-    if ( !ok || (entered < 0 && b >= 0) ) {
-	return Invalid;
-    } else if ( entered >= b && entered <= t ) {
-	return Acceptable;
-    } else {
-	if ( entered >= 0 )
-	    return ( entered > t ) ? Invalid : Intermediate;
-	else
-	    return ( entered < b ) ? Invalid : Intermediate;
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the range of the validator to only accept integers between \a
-    bottom and \a top inclusive.
-*/
-
-void TQIntValidator::setRange( int bottom, int top )
-{
-    b = bottom;
-    t = top;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQIntValidator::bottom
-    \brief the validator's lowest acceptable value
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-void TQIntValidator::setBottom( int bottom )
-{
-    setRange( bottom, top() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQIntValidator::top
-    \brief the validator's highest acceptable value
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-void TQIntValidator::setTop( int top )
-{
-    setRange( bottom(), top );
-}
-
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP
-
-/*!
-    \class TQDoubleValidator
-
-    \brief The TQDoubleValidator class provides range checking of
-    floating-point numbers.
-
-    \ingroup misc
-
-    TQDoubleValidator provides an upper bound, a lower bound and a
-    limit on the number of digits after the decimal point. It does not
-    provide a fixup() function.
-
-    You can set the acceptable range in one call with setRange(), or
-    with setBottom() and setTop(). Set the number of decimal places
-    with setDecimals(). The validate() function returns the validation
-    state.
-
-    \sa TQIntValidator TQRegExpValidator
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a validator object with parent \a parent, called \a
-    name, which accepts any double.
-*/
-
-TQDoubleValidator::TQDoubleValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name )
-    : TQValidator( parent, name )
-{
-    b = -HUGE_VAL;
-    t = HUGE_VAL;
-    d = 1000;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a validator object with parent \a parent, called \a
-    name. This validator will accept doubles from \a bottom to \a top
-    inclusive, with up to \a decimals digits after the decimal point.
-*/
-
-TQDoubleValidator::TQDoubleValidator( double bottom, double top, int decimals,
-				    TQObject * parent, const char* name )
-    : TQValidator( parent, name )
-{
-    b = bottom;
-    t = top;
-    d = decimals;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the validator, freeing any resources used.
-*/
-
-TQDoubleValidator::~TQDoubleValidator()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns \c Acceptable if the string \a input contains a double
-    that is within the valid range and is in the correct format.
-
-    Returns \c Intermediate if \a input contains a double that is
-    outside the range or is in the wrong format, e.g. with too many
-    digits after the decimal point or is empty.
-
-    Returns \c Invalid if the \a input is not a double.
-
-    Note: If the valid range consists of just positive doubles (e.g. 0.0 - 100.0)
-    and \a input is a negative double then Invalid is returned.
-*/
-
-TQValidator::State TQDoubleValidator::validate( TQString & input, int & ) const
-{
-    TQRegExp empty( TQString::tqfromLatin1(" *-?\\.? *") );
-    if ( b >= 0 &&
-	 input.stripWhiteSpace().startsWith(TQString::tqfromLatin1("-")) )
-	return Invalid;
-    if ( empty.exactMatch(input) )
-	return Intermediate;
-    bool ok = TRUE;
-    double entered = input.toDouble( &ok );
-    int nume = input.contains( 'e', FALSE );
-    if ( !ok ) {
-	// explicit exponent regexp
-	TQRegExp expexpexp( TQString::tqfromLatin1("[Ee][+-]?\\d*$") );
-	int eeePos = expexpexp.search( input );
-	if ( eeePos > 0 && nume == 1 ) {
-	    TQString mantissa = input.left( eeePos );
-	    entered = mantissa.toDouble( &ok );
-	    if ( !ok )
-		return Invalid;
-	} else if ( eeePos == 0 ) {
-	    return Intermediate;
-	} else {
-	    return Invalid;
-	}
-    }
-
-    int i = input.find( '.' );
-    if ( i >= 0 && nume == 0 ) {
-	// has decimal point (but no E), now count digits after that
-	i++;
-	int j = i;
-	while( input[j].isDigit() )
-	    j++;
-	if ( j - i > d )
-	    return Intermediate;
-    }
-
-    if ( entered < b || entered > t )
-	return Intermediate;
-    else
-	return Acceptable;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Sets the validator to accept doubles from \a minimum to \a maximum
-    inclusive, with at most \a decimals digits after the decimal
-    point.
-*/
-
-void TQDoubleValidator::setRange( double minimum, double maximum, int decimals )
-{
-    b = minimum;
-    t = maximum;
-    d = decimals;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDoubleValidator::bottom
-    \brief the validator's minimum acceptable value
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-
-void TQDoubleValidator::setBottom( double bottom )
-{
-    setRange( bottom, top(), decimals() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDoubleValidator::top
-    \brief the validator's maximum acceptable value
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-
-void TQDoubleValidator::setTop( double top )
-{
-    setRange( bottom(), top, decimals() );
-}
-
-/*!
-    \property TQDoubleValidator::decimals
-    \brief the validator's maximum number of digits after the decimal point
-
-    \sa setRange()
-*/
-
-void TQDoubleValidator::setDecimals( int decimals )
-{
-    setRange( bottom(), top(), decimals );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQRegExpValidator
-    \brief The TQRegExpValidator class is used to check a string
-    against a regular expression.
-
-    \ingroup misc
-
-    TQRegExpValidator contains a regular expression, "regexp", used to
-    determine whether an input string is \c Acceptable, \c
-    Intermediate or \c Invalid.
-
-    The regexp is treated as if it begins with the start of string
-    assertion, <b>^</b>, and ends with the end of string assertion
-    <b>$</b> so the match is against the entire input string, or from
-    the given position if a start position greater than zero is given.
-
-    For a brief introduction to TQt's regexp engine see \l TQRegExp.
-
-    Example of use:
-    \code
-    // regexp: optional '-' followed by between 1 and 3 digits
-    TQRegExp rx( "-?\\d{1,3}" );
-    TQValidator* validator = new TQRegExpValidator( rx, this );
-
-    TQLineEdit* edit = new TQLineEdit( this );
-    edit->setValidator( validator );
-    \endcode
-
-    Below we present some examples of validators. In practice they would
-    normally be associated with a widget as in the example above.
-
-    \code
-    // integers 1 to 9999
-    TQRegExp rx( "[1-9]\\d{0,3}" );
-    // the validator treats the regexp as "^[1-9]\\d{0,3}$"
-    TQRegExpValidator v( rx, 0 );
-    TQString s;
-    int pos = 0;
-
-    s = "0";     v.validate( s, pos );    // returns Invalid
-    s = "12345"; v.validate( s, pos );    // returns Invalid
-    s = "1";     v.validate( s, pos );    // returns Acceptable
-
-    rx.setPattern( "\\S+" );            // one or more non-whitespace characters
-    v.setRegExp( rx );
-    s = "myfile.txt";  v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Acceptable
-    s = "my file.txt"; v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Invalid
-
-    // A, B or C followed by exactly five digits followed by W, X, Y or Z
-    rx.setPattern( "[A-C]\\d{5}[W-Z]" );
-    v.setRegExp( rx );
-    s = "a12345Z"; v.validate( s, pos );	// Returns Invalid
-    s = "A12345Z"; v.validate( s, pos );	// Returns Acceptable
-    s = "B12";     v.validate( s, pos );	// Returns Intermediate
-
-    // match most 'readme' files
-    rx.setPattern( "read\\S?me(\.(txt|asc|1st))?" );
-    rx.setCaseSensitive( FALSE );
-    v.setRegExp( rx );
-    s = "readme";      v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Acceptable
-    s = "README.1ST";  v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Acceptable
-    s = "read me.txt"; v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Invalid
-    s = "readm";       v.validate( s, pos ); // Returns Intermediate
-    \endcode
-
-    \sa TQRegExp TQIntValidator TQDoubleValidator
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a validator that accepts any string (including an empty
-    one) as valid. The object's parent is \a parent and its name is \a
-    name.
-*/
-
-TQRegExpValidator::TQRegExpValidator( TQObject *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQValidator( parent, name ), r( TQString::tqfromLatin1(".*") )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a validator which accepts all strings that match the
-    regular expression \a rx. The object's parent is \a parent and its
-    name is \a name.
-
-    The match is made against the entire string, e.g. if the regexp is
-    <b>[A-Fa-f0-9]+</b> it will be treated as <b>^[A-Fa-f0-9]+$</b>.
-*/
-
-TQRegExpValidator::TQRegExpValidator( const TQRegExp& rx, TQObject *parent,
-				    const char *name )
-    : TQValidator( parent, name ), r( rx )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the validator, freeing any resources allocated.
-*/
-
-TQRegExpValidator::~TQRegExpValidator()
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns \c Acceptable if \a input is matched by the regular
-    expression for this validator, \c Intermediate if it has matched
-    partially (i.e. could be a valid match if additional valid
-    characters are added), and \c Invalid if \a input is not matched.
-
-    The \a pos parameter is set to the length of the \a input parameter.
-
-    For example, if the regular expression is <b>\\w\\d\\d</b> (that
-    is, word-character, digit, digit) then "A57" is \c Acceptable,
-    "E5" is \c Intermediate and "+9" is \c Invalid.
-
-    \sa TQRegExp::match() TQRegExp::search()
-*/
-
-TQValidator::State TQRegExpValidator::validate( TQString& input, int& pos ) const
-{
-    if ( r.exactMatch(input) ) {
-	return Acceptable;
-    } else {
-	if ( ((TQRegExp&) r).matchedLength() == (int) input.length() ) {
-	    return Intermediate;
-	} else {
-	    pos = input.length();
-	    return Invalid;
-	}
-    }
-}
-
-/*!
-    Sets the regular expression used for validation to \a rx.
-
-    \sa regExp()
-*/
-
-void TQRegExpValidator::setRegExp( const TQRegExp& rx )
-{
-    r = rx;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn const TQRegExp& TQRegExpValidator::regExp() const
-
-    Returns the regular expression used for validation.
-
-    \sa setRegExp()
-*/
-
-#endif
-
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e18f6b..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvalidator.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,173 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of validator classes
-**
-** Created : 970610
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQVALIDATOR_H
-#define TQVALIDATOR_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqobject.h"
-#include "tqstring.h" // char*->TQString conversion
-#include "tqregexp.h" // TQString->TQRegExp conversion
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VALIDATOR
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQValidator : public TQObject
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name = 0 );
-    ~TQValidator();
-
-    enum State { Invalid, Intermediate, Valid=Intermediate, Acceptable };
-
-    virtual State validate( TQString &, int & ) const = 0;
-    virtual void fixup( TQString & ) const;
-
-private:
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQValidator( const TQValidator & );
-    TQValidator& operator=( const TQValidator & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQIntValidator : public TQValidator
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( int bottom READ bottom WRITE setBottom )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int top READ top WRITE setTop )
-
-public:
-    TQIntValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name = 0 );
-    TQIntValidator( int bottom, int top,
-		   TQObject * parent, const char *name = 0 );
-    ~TQIntValidator();
-
-    TQValidator::State validate( TQString &, int & ) const;
-
-    void setBottom( int );
-    void setTop( int );
-    virtual void setRange( int bottom, int top );
-
-    int bottom() const { return b; }
-    int top() const { return t; }
-
-private:
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQIntValidator( const TQIntValidator & );
-    TQIntValidator& operator=( const TQIntValidator & );
-#endif
-
-    int b, t;
-};
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_REGEXP
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQDoubleValidator : public TQValidator
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    Q_PROPERTY( double bottom READ bottom WRITE setBottom )
-    Q_PROPERTY( double top READ top WRITE setTop )
-    Q_PROPERTY( int decimals READ decimals WRITE setDecimals )
-
-public:
-    TQDoubleValidator( TQObject * parent, const char *name = 0 );
-    TQDoubleValidator( double bottom, double top, int decimals,
-		      TQObject * parent, const char *name = 0 );
-    ~TQDoubleValidator();
-
-    TQValidator::State validate( TQString &, int & ) const;
-
-    virtual void setRange( double bottom, double top, int decimals = 0 );
-    void setBottom( double );
-    void setTop( double );
-    void setDecimals( int );
-
-    double bottom() const { return b; }
-    double top() const { return t; }
-    int decimals() const { return d; }
-
-private:
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQDoubleValidator( const TQDoubleValidator & );
-    TQDoubleValidator& operator=( const TQDoubleValidator & );
-#endif
-
-    double b, t;
-    int d;
-};
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQRegExpValidator : public TQValidator
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-    // Q_PROPERTY( TQRegExp regExp READ regExp WRITE setRegExp )
-
-public:
-    TQRegExpValidator( TQObject *parent, const char *name = 0 );
-    TQRegExpValidator( const TQRegExp& rx, TQObject *parent,
-		      const char *name = 0 );
-    ~TQRegExpValidator();
-
-    virtual TQValidator::State validate( TQString& input, int& pos ) const;
-
-    void setRegExp( const TQRegExp& rx );
-    const TQRegExp& regExp() const { return r; }
-
-private:
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQRegExpValidator( const TQRegExpValidator& );
-    TQRegExpValidator& operator=( const TQRegExpValidator& );
-#endif
-
-    TQRegExp r;
-};
-#endif // TQT_NO_REGEXP
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_VALIDATOR
-
-#endif // TQVALIDATOR_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 11e273f..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of vertical box tqlayout widget class
-**
-** Created : 990124
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-
-#include "tqvbox.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VBOX
-
-/*!
-    \class TQVBox tqvbox.h
-    \brief The TQVBox widget provides vertical tqgeometry management of
-    its child widgets.
-
-    \ingroup geomanagement
-    \ingroup appearance
-    \ingroup organizers
-
-    All its child widgets will be placed vertically and sized
-    according to their tqsizeHint()s.
-
-    \img qvbox-m.png TQVBox
-
-    \sa TQHBox
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a vbox widget called \a name with parent \a parent and
-    widget flags \a f.
- */
-TQVBox::TQVBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    :TQHBox( FALSE, parent, name, f )
-{
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d0ab7d..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbox.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of vertical box tqlayout widget class
-**
-** Created : 990124
-**
-** Copyright (C) 1999-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQVBOX_H
-#define TQVBOX_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqhbox.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VBOX
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQVBox : public TQHBox
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQVBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0 );
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQVBox( const TQVBox & );
-    TQVBox& operator=( const TQVBox & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_VBOX
-
-#endif // TQVBOX_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 01a807b..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQVButtonGroup class
-**
-** Created : 990602
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqvbuttongroup.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VBUTTONGROUP
-
-/*!
-  \class TQVButtonGroup tqvbuttongroup.h
-  \brief The TQVButtonGroup widget organizes TQButton widgets in a
-  vertical column.
-
-  \ingroup geomanagement
-  \ingroup organizers
-  \ingroup appearance
-
-  TQVButtonGroup is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on top
-  of TQButtonGroup. Think of it as a TQVBox that offers a frame with a
-  title and is specifically designed for buttons.
-
-  \img qbuttongroup-v.png TQButtonGroup
-
-  \sa TQHButtonGroup
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a vertical button group with no title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-TQVButtonGroup::TQVButtonGroup( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Horizontal /* sic! */, parent, name )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a vertical button group with the title \a title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQVButtonGroup::TQVButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent,
-			    const char *name )
-    : TQButtonGroup( 1, Qt::Horizontal /* sic! */, title, parent, name )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the vertical button group, deleting its child widgets.
-*/
-TQVButtonGroup::~TQVButtonGroup()
-{
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 99cd8b0..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvbuttongroup.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQVButtonGroup class
-**
-** Created : 990602
-**
-** Copyright (C) 1999-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQVBUTTONGROUP_H
-#define TQVBUTTONGROUP_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqbuttongroup.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VBUTTONGROUP
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQVButtonGroup : public TQButtonGroup
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQVButtonGroup( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQVButtonGroup( const TQString &title, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-
-    ~TQVButtonGroup();
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQVButtonGroup( const TQVButtonGroup & );
-    TQVButtonGroup &operator=( const TQVButtonGroup & );
-#endif
-};
-
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_VBUTTONGROUP
-
-#endif // TQVBUTTONGROUP_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c50c3a..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQVGroupBox class
-**
-** Created : 990602
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqvgroupbox.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VGROUPBOX
-
-/*!
-  \class TQVGroupBox tqvgroupbox.h
-  \brief The TQVGroupBox widget organizes a group of widgets in a
-  vertical column.
-
-  \ingroup geomanagement
-  \ingroup appearance
-  \ingroup organizers
-
-  TQVGroupBox is a convenience class that offers a thin layer on top of
-  TQGroupBox. Think of it as a TQVBox that offers a frame with a title.
-
-  \img qgroupboxes.png Group Boxes
-
-  \sa TQHGroupBox
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a vertical group box with no title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-TQVGroupBox::TQVGroupBox( TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-    : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Horizontal, parent, name )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a vertical group box with the title \a title.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed on to the TQWidget
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQVGroupBox::TQVGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget *parent,
-			    const char *name )
-    : TQGroupBox( 1, Qt::Horizontal, title, parent, name )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the vertical group box, deleting its child widgets.
-*/
-TQVGroupBox::~TQVGroupBox()
-{
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.h
deleted file mode 100644
index be82c4a..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqvgroupbox.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-/**********************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQVGroupBox widget class
-**
-** Created : 990602
-**
-** Copyright (C) 1999-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQVGROUPBOX_H
-#define TQVGROUPBOX_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqgroupbox.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_VGROUPBOX
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQVGroupBox : public TQGroupBox
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQVGroupBox( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQVGroupBox( const TQString &title, TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-
-    ~TQVGroupBox();
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQVGroupBox( const TQVGroupBox & );
-    TQVGroupBox &operator=( const TQVGroupBox & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_VGROUPBOX
-
-#endif // TQVGROUPBOX_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index a3275b2..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1004 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQWhatsThis class
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqwhatsthis.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqpaintdevicemetrics.h"
-#include "tqpixmap.h"
-#include "tqpainter.h"
-#include "tqtimer.h"
-#include "tqptrdict.h"
-#include "tqtoolbutton.h"
-#include "tqshared.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqbitmap.h"
-#include "tqtooltip.h"
-#include "tqsimplerichtext.h"
-#include "tqstylesheet.h"
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-#include "tqaccessible.h"
-#endif
-#if defined(TQ_WS_WIN)
-#include "tqt_windows.h"
-#ifndef SPI_GETDROPSHADOW
-#define SPI_GETDROPSHADOW                   0x1024
-#endif
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \class TQWhatsThis tqwhatsthis.h
-    \brief The TQWhatsThis class provides a simple description of any
-    widget, i.e. answering the question "What's this?".
-
-    \ingroup helpsystem
-    \mainclass
-
-    "What's this?" help is part of an application's online help system
-    that provides users with information about functionality, usage,
-    background etc., in various levels of detail from short tool tips
-    to full text browsing help windows.
-
-    TQWhatsThis provides a single window with an explanatory text that
-    pops up when the user asks "What's this?". The default way to do
-    this is to focus the relevant widget and press Shift+F1. The help
-    text appears immediately; it goes away as soon as the user does
-    something else.
-
-    (Note that if there is an accelerator for Shift+F1, this mechanism
-    will not work.)
-
-    To add "What's this?" text to a widget you simply call
-    TQWhatsThis::add() for the widget. For example, to assign text to a
-    menu item, call TQMenuData::setWhatsThis(); for a global
-    accelerator key, call TQAccel::setWhatsThis() and If you're using
-    actions, use TQAction::setWhatsThis().
-
-    The text can be either rich text or plain text. If you specify a
-    rich text formatted string, it will be rendered using the default
-    stylesheet. This makes it possible to embed images. See
-    TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet() for details.
-
-    \quotefile action/application.cpp
-    \skipto fileOpenText
-    \printuntil setWhatsThis
-
-    An alternative way to enter "What's this?" mode is to use the
-    ready-made tool bar tool button from
-    TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton(). By invoking this context help
-    button (in the picture below the first one from the right) the
-    user switches into "What's this?" mode. If they now click on a
-    widget the appropriate help text is shown. The mode is left when
-    help is given or when the user presses Esc.
-
-    \img whatsthis.png
-
-    If you are using TQMainWindow you can also use the
-    TQMainWindow::whatsThis() slot to invoke the mode from a menu item.
-
-    For more control you can create a dedicated TQWhatsThis object for
-    a special widget. By subclassing and reimplementing
-    TQWhatsThis::text() it is possible to have different help texts,
-    depending on the position of the mouse click. By reimplementing
-    TQWhatsThis::clicked() it is possible to have hyperlinks inside the
-    help texts.
-
-    If you wish to control the "What's this?" behavior of a widget
-    manually see TQWidget::customWhatsThis().
-
-    The What's This object can be removed using TQWhatsThis::remove(),
-    although this is rarely necessary because it is automatically
-    removed when the widget is destroyed.
-
-    \sa TQToolTip
-*/
-
-// a special button
-class TQWhatsThisButton: public TQToolButton
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-
-public:
-    TQWhatsThisButton( TQWidget * parent, const char * name );
-    ~TQWhatsThisButton();
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void mouseReleased();
-
-};
-
-
-class TQWhatsThat : public TQWidget
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQWhatsThat( TQWidget* w, const TQString& txt, TQWidget* parent, const char* name );
-    ~TQWhatsThat() ;
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void hide();
-    inline void widgetDestroyed() { widget = 0; }
-
-protected:
-    void mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-    void mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent* );
-    void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* );
-    void paintEvent( TQPaintEvent* );
-
-private:
-    TQString text;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    TQSimpleRichText* doc;
-#endif
-    TQString anchor;
-    bool pressed;
-    TQWidget* widget;
-};
-
-
-class TQWhatsThisPrivate: public TQObject
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-
-    // an item for storing texts
-    struct WhatsThisItem: public TQShared
-    {
-	WhatsThisItem(): TQShared() { whatsthis = 0; }
-	~WhatsThisItem();
-	TQString s;
-	TQWhatsThis* whatsthis;
-    };
-
-    // the (these days pretty small) state machine
-    enum State { Inactive, Waiting };
-
-    TQWhatsThisPrivate();
-    ~TQWhatsThisPrivate();
-
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *, TQEvent * );
-
-    WhatsThisItem* newItem( TQWidget * widget );
-    void add( TQWidget * widget, TQWhatsThis* special );
-    void add( TQWidget * widget, const TQString& text );
-
-    // say it.
-    void say( TQWidget *, const TQString&, const TQPoint&  );
-
-    // setup and teardown
-    static void setUpWhatsThis();
-
-    void enterWhatsThisMode();
-    void leaveWhatsThisMode();
-
-    // variables
-    TQWhatsThat * whatsThat;
-    TQPtrDict<WhatsThisItem> * dict;
-    TQPtrDict<TQWidget> * tlw;
-    TQPtrDict<TQWhatsThisButton> * buttons;
-    State state;
-
-private Q_SLOTS:
-    void cleanupWidget()
-    {
-	const TQObject* o = TQT_TQOBJECT(sender());
-	if ( o->isWidgetType() ) // sanity
-	    TQWhatsThis::remove((TQWidget*)o);
-    }
-
-};
-
-// static, but static the less-typing way
-static TQWhatsThisPrivate * wt = 0;
-
-// shadowWidth not const, for XP drop-shadow-fu turns it to 0
-static int shadowWidth = 6;   // also used as '5' and '6' and even '8' below
-const int vMargin = 8;
-const int hMargin = 12;
-
-// Lets TQPopupMenu destroy the TQWhatsThat.
-void qWhatsThisBDH()
-{
-    if ( wt && wt->whatsThat )
-	wt->whatsThat->hide();
-}
-
-
-TQWhatsThat::TQWhatsThat( TQWidget* w, const TQString& txt, TQWidget* parent, const char* name )
-    : TQWidget( parent, name, WType_Popup ), text( txt ), pressed( FALSE ), widget( w )
-{
-
-    setBackgroundMode( TQt::NoBackground );
-    setPalette( TQToolTip::palette() );
-    setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    setCursor( Qt::ArrowCursor );
-#endif
-
-    if ( widget )
-	connect( widget, TQT_SIGNAL( destroyed() ), this, TQT_SLOT( widgetDestroyed() ) );
-
-
-    TQRect r;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    doc = 0;
-    if ( TQStyleSheet::mightBeRichText( text ) ) {
-	TQFont f = TQApplication::font( this );
-	doc = new TQSimpleRichText( text, f );
-	doc->adjustSize();
-	r.setRect( 0, 0, doc->width(), doc->height() );
-    }
-    else
-#endif
-    {
-	int sw = TQApplication::desktop()->width() / 3;
-	if ( sw < 200 )
-	    sw = 200;
-	else if ( sw > 300 )
-	    sw = 300;
-
-	r = fontMetrics().boundingRect( 0, 0, sw, 1000,
-					TQt::AlignAuto + TQt::AlignTop + TQt::WordBreak + TQt::ExpandTabs,
-					text );
-    }
-#if defined(TQ_WS_WIN)
-    if ( (qWinVersion()&WV_NT_based) > WV_2000 ) {
-	BOOL shadow;
-	SystemParametersInfo( SPI_GETDROPSHADOW, 0, &shadow, 0 );
-	shadowWidth = shadow ? 0 : 6;
-    }
-#endif
-    resize( r.width() + 2*hMargin + shadowWidth, r.height() + 2*vMargin + shadowWidth );
-}
-
-TQWhatsThat::~TQWhatsThat()
-{
-    if ( wt && wt->whatsThat == this )
-	wt->whatsThat = 0;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    if ( doc )
-	delete doc;
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQWhatsThat::hide()
-{
-    TQWidget::hide();
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ContextHelpEnd );
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQWhatsThat::mousePressEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    pressed = TRUE;
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton && TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-	if ( doc )
-	    anchor = doc->anchorAt( e->pos() -  TQPoint( hMargin, vMargin) );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-    hide();
-}
-
-void TQWhatsThat::mouseReleaseEvent( TQMouseEvent* e )
-{
-    if ( !pressed )
-	return;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton && doc && TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(rect()).contains( e->pos() ) ) {
-	TQString a = doc->anchorAt( e->pos() -  TQPoint( hMargin, vMargin ) );
-	TQString href;
-	if ( anchor == a )
-	    href = a;
-	anchor = TQString::null;
-	if ( widget && wt && wt->dict ) {
-	    TQWhatsThisPrivate::WhatsThisItem * i = wt->dict->find( widget );
-	    if ( i  && i->whatsthis && !i->whatsthis->clicked( href ) )
-		return;
-	}
-    }
-#endif
-    hide();
-}
-
-void TQWhatsThat::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent* e)
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    if ( !doc )
-	return;
-    TQString a = doc->anchorAt( e->pos() -  TQPoint( hMargin, vMargin ) );
-    if ( !a.isEmpty() )
-	setCursor( Qt::PointingHandCursor );
-    else
-	setCursor( Qt::ArrowCursor );
-#endif
-#endif
-}
-
-
-void TQWhatsThat::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent* )
-{
-    hide();
-}
-
-
-
-void TQWhatsThat::paintEvent( TQPaintEvent* )
-{
-    bool drawShadow = TRUE;
-#if defined(TQ_WS_WIN)
-    if ( (qWinVersion()&WV_NT_based) > WV_2000 ) {
-	BOOL shadow;
-	SystemParametersInfo( SPI_GETDROPSHADOW, 0, &shadow, 0 );
-	drawShadow = !shadow;
-    }
-#elif defined(TQ_WS_MACX)
-    drawShadow = FALSE; //never draw it on OS X we get it for free
-#endif
-
-    TQRect r = rect();
-    if ( drawShadow )
-	r.addCoords( 0, 0, -shadowWidth, -shadowWidth );
-    TQPainter p( this);
-    p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().foreground() );
-    p.drawRect( r );
-    p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().mid() );
-    p.setBrush( tqcolorGroup().brush( TQColorGroup::Background ) );
-    int w = r.width();
-    int h = r.height();
-    p.drawRect( 1, 1, w-2, h-2 );
-    if ( drawShadow ) {
-	p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().shadow() );
-	p.drawPoint( w + 5, 6 );
-	p.drawLine( w + 3, 6, w + 5, 8 );
-	p.drawLine( w + 1, 6, w + 5, 10 );
-	int i;
-	for( i=7; i < h; i += 2 )
-	    p.drawLine( w, i, w + 5, i + 5 );
-	for( i = w - i + h; i > 6; i -= 2 )
-	    p.drawLine( i, h, i + 5, h + 5 );
-	for( ; i > 0 ; i -= 2 )
-	    p.drawLine( 6, h + 6 - i, i + 5, h + 5 );
-    }
-    p.setPen( tqcolorGroup().foreground() );
-    r.addCoords( hMargin, vMargin, -hMargin, -vMargin );
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RICHTEXT
-    if ( doc ) {
-	doc->draw( &p, r.x(), r.y(), r, tqcolorGroup(), 0 );
-    }
-    else
-#endif
-    {
-	p.drawText( r, TQt::AlignAuto + TQt::AlignTop + TQt::WordBreak + TQt::ExpandTabs, text );
-    }
-}
-
-// the item
-TQWhatsThisPrivate::WhatsThisItem::~WhatsThisItem()
-{
-    if ( count )
-	qFatal( "TQWhatsThis: Internal error (%d)", count );
-    delete whatsthis;
-}
-
-
-static const char * const button_image[] = {
-"16 16 3 1",
-" 	c None",
-"o	c #000000",
-"a	c #000080",
-"o        aaaaa  ",
-"oo      aaa aaa ",
-"ooo    aaa   aaa",
-"oooo   aa     aa",
-"ooooo  aa     aa",
-"oooooo  a    aaa",
-"ooooooo     aaa ",
-"oooooooo   aaa  ",
-"ooooooooo aaa   ",
-"ooooo     aaa   ",
-"oo ooo          ",
-"o  ooo    aaa   ",
-"    ooo   aaa   ",
-"    ooo         ",
-"     ooo        ",
-"     ooo        "};
-
-// the button class
-TQWhatsThisButton::TQWhatsThisButton( TQWidget * parent, const char * name )
-    : TQToolButton( parent, name )
-{
-    TQPixmap p( (const char**)button_image );
-    setPixmap( p );
-    setToggleButton( TRUE );
-    setAutoRaise( TRUE );
-    setFocusPolicy( Qt::NoFocus );
-    setTextLabel( tr( "What's this?" ) );
-    wt->buttons->insert( (void *)this, this );
-    connect( this, TQT_SIGNAL( released() ),
-	     this, TQT_SLOT( mouseReleased() ) );
-}
-
-
-TQWhatsThisButton::~TQWhatsThisButton()
-{
-    if ( wt && wt->buttons )
-	wt->buttons->take( (void *)this );
-}
-
-
-void TQWhatsThisButton::mouseReleased()
-{
-    if ( wt->state == TQWhatsThisPrivate::Inactive && isOn() ) {
-	TQWhatsThisPrivate::setUpWhatsThis();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( Qt::WhatsThisCursor, FALSE );
-#endif
-	wt->state = TQWhatsThisPrivate::Waiting;
-	tqApp->installEventFilter( wt );
-    }
-}
-
-static void qWhatsThisPrivateCleanup()
-{
-    if( wt ) {
-	delete wt;
-	wt = 0;
-    }
-}
-
-// the what's this manager class
-TQWhatsThisPrivate::TQWhatsThisPrivate()
-    : TQObject( 0, "global what's this object" )
-{
-    whatsThat = 0;
-    dict = new TQPtrDict<TQWhatsThisPrivate::WhatsThisItem>;
-    tlw = new TQPtrDict<TQWidget>;
-    wt = this;
-    buttons = new TQPtrDict<TQWhatsThisButton>;
-    state = Inactive;
-}
-
-TQWhatsThisPrivate::~TQWhatsThisPrivate()
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    if ( state == Waiting && tqApp )
-	TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();
-#endif
-    // the two straight-and-simple dicts
-    delete tlw;
-    delete buttons;
-
-    // then delete the complex one.
-    TQPtrDictIterator<WhatsThisItem> it( *dict );
-    WhatsThisItem * i;
-    TQWidget * w;
-    while( (i=it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	w = (TQWidget *)it.currentKey();
-	++it;
-	dict->take( w );
-	if ( i->deref() )
-	    delete i;
-    }
-    delete dict;
-    if ( whatsThat && !whatsThat->parentWidget() ) {
-	delete whatsThat;
-    }
-    // and finally lose wt
-    wt = 0;
-}
-
-bool TQWhatsThisPrivate::eventFilter( TQObject * o, TQEvent * e )
-{
-    switch( state ) {
-    case Waiting:
-	if ( e->type() == TQEvent::MouseButtonPress && o->isWidgetType() ) {
-	    TQWidget * w = (TQWidget *) o;
-	    if ( ( (TQMouseEvent*)e)->button() == Qt::RightButton )
-		return FALSE; // ignore RMB
-	    if ( w->customWhatsThis() )
-		return FALSE;
-	    TQWhatsThisPrivate::WhatsThisItem * i = 0;
-	    TQMouseEvent* me = (TQMouseEvent*) e;
-	    TQPoint p = me->pos();
-	    while( w && !i ) {
-		i = dict->find( w );
-		if ( !i ) {
-		    p += w->pos();
-		    w = w->parentWidget( TRUE );
-		}
-	    }
-	    leaveWhatsThisMode();
-	    if (!i ) {
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-		TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ContextHelpEnd );
-#endif
-		return TRUE;
-	    }
-	    if ( i->whatsthis )
-		say( w, i->whatsthis->text( p ), me->globalPos() );
-	    else
-		say( w, i->s, me->globalPos() );
-	    return TRUE;
-	} else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease ) {
-	    if ( ( (TQMouseEvent*)e)->button() == Qt::RightButton )
-		return FALSE; // ignore RMB
-	    return !o->isWidgetType() || !((TQWidget*)o)->customWhatsThis();
-	} else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::MouseMove ) {
-	    return !o->isWidgetType() || !((TQWidget*)o)->customWhatsThis();
-	} else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::KeyPress ) {
-	    TQKeyEvent* kev = (TQKeyEvent*)e;
-
-	    if ( kev->key() == Key_Escape ) {
-		leaveWhatsThisMode();
-		return TRUE;
-	    } else if ( o->isWidgetType() && ((TQWidget*)o)->customWhatsThis() ) {
-		return FALSE;
-	    } else if ( kev->key() == TQt::Key_Menu ||
-			( kev->key() == TQt::Key_F10 &&
-			  kev->state() == ShiftButton ) ) {
-		// we don't react to these keys, they are used for context menus
-		return FALSE;
-	    } else if ( kev->state() == kev->stateAfter() &&
-			kev->key() != TQt::Key_Meta ) {  // not a modifier key
-		leaveWhatsThisMode();
-	    }
-	} else if ( e->type() == TQEvent::MouseButtonDblClick ) {
-	    return TRUE;
-	}
-	break;
-    case Inactive:
- 	if ( e->type() == TQEvent::Accel &&
-	     ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->key() == TQt::Key_F1 &&
- 	     o->isWidgetType() &&
-	     ((TQKeyEvent *)e)->state() == ShiftButton ) {
- 	    TQWidget * w = ((TQWidget *)o)->tqfocusWidget();
-	    if ( !w )
-		break;
-	    TQString s = TQWhatsThis::textFor( w, TQPoint(0,0), TRUE );
- 	    if ( !s.isNull() ) {
-		say ( w, s, w->mapToGlobal( w->rect().center() ) );
-		((TQKeyEvent *)e)->accept();
-		return TRUE;
- 	    }
- 	}
-	break;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-
-
-void TQWhatsThisPrivate::setUpWhatsThis()
-{
-    if ( !wt ) {
-	wt = new TQWhatsThisPrivate();
-
-	// It is necessary to use a post routine, because
-	// the destructor deletes pixmaps and other stuff that
-	// needs a working X connection under X11.
-	qAddPostRoutine( qWhatsThisPrivateCleanup );
-    }
-}
-
-
-void TQWhatsThisPrivate::enterWhatsThisMode()
-{
-#if defined(TQT_ACCESSIBILITY_SUPPORT)
-    TQAccessible::updateAccessibility( this, 0, TQAccessible::ContextHelpStart );
-#endif
-}
-
-
-void TQWhatsThisPrivate::leaveWhatsThisMode()
-{
-    if ( state == Waiting ) {
-	TQPtrDictIterator<TQWhatsThisButton> it( *(wt->buttons) );
-	TQWhatsThisButton * b;
-	while( (b=it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    b->setOn( FALSE );
-	}
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	TQApplication::restoreOverrideCursor();
-#endif
-	state = Inactive;
-	tqApp->removeEventFilter( this );
-    }
-}
-
-
-
-void TQWhatsThisPrivate::say( TQWidget * widget, const TQString &text, const TQPoint& ppos)
-{
-    if ( text.isEmpty() )
-	return;
-    // make a fresh widget, and set it up
-    delete whatsThat;
-    whatsThat = new TQWhatsThat(
-			       widget, text,
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-			       TQT_TQWIDGET(TQApplication::desktop()->screen( widget ?
-								widget->x11Screen() :
-								TQCursor::x11Screen()) ),
-#else
-			       0,
-#endif
-			       "automatic what's this? widget" );
-
-
-    // okay, now to find a suitable location
-
-    int scr = ( widget ?
-		TQApplication::desktop()->screenNumber( widget ) :
-#if defined(TQ_WS_X11)
-		TQCursor::x11Screen()
-#else
-		TQApplication::desktop()->screenNumber( ppos )
-#endif // TQ_WS_X11
-		);
-    TQRect screen = TQApplication::desktop()->screenGeometry( scr );
-
-    int x;
-    int w = whatsThat->width();
-    int h = whatsThat->height();
-    int sx = screen.x();
-    int sy = screen.y();
-
-    // first try locating the widget immediately above/below,
-    // with nice tqalignment if possible.
-    TQPoint pos;
-    if ( widget )
-	pos = widget->mapToGlobal( TQPoint( 0,0 ) );
-
-    if ( widget && w > widget->width() + 16 )
-	x = pos.x() + widget->width()/2 - w/2;
-    else
-	x = ppos.x() - w/2;
-
-	// squeeze it in if that would result in part of what's this
-	// being only partially visible
-    if ( x + w  + shadowWidth > sx+screen.width() )
-	x = (widget? (TQMIN(screen.width(),
-			   pos.x() + widget->width())
-		      ) : screen.width() )
-	    - w;
-
-    if ( x < sx )
-	x = sx;
-
-    int y;
-    if ( widget && h > widget->height() + 16 ) {
-	y = pos.y() + widget->height() + 2; // below, two pixels spacing
-	// what's this is above or below, wherever there's most space
-	if ( y + h + 10 > sy+screen.height() )
-	    y = pos.y() + 2 - shadowWidth - h; // above, overlap
-    }
-    y = ppos.y() + 2;
-
-	// squeeze it in if that would result in part of what's this
-	// being only partially visible
-    if ( y + h + shadowWidth > sy+screen.height() )
-	y = ( widget ? (TQMIN(screen.height(),
-			     pos.y() + widget->height())
-			) : screen.height() )
-	    - h;
-    if ( y < sy )
-	y = sy;
-
-    whatsThat->move( x, y );
-    whatsThat->show();
-}
-
-TQWhatsThisPrivate::WhatsThisItem* TQWhatsThisPrivate::newItem( TQWidget * widget )
-{
-    WhatsThisItem * i = dict->find( (void *)widget );
-    if ( i )
-	TQWhatsThis::remove( widget );
-    i = new WhatsThisItem;
-    dict->insert( (void *)widget, i );
-    TQWidget * t = widget->tqtopLevelWidget();
-    if ( !tlw->find( (void *)t ) ) {
-	tlw->insert( (void *)t, t );
-	t->installEventFilter( this );
-    }
-    connect( widget, TQT_SIGNAL(destroyed()), this, TQT_SLOT(cleanupWidget()) );
-    return i;
-}
-
-void TQWhatsThisPrivate::add( TQWidget * widget, TQWhatsThis* special )
-{
-    newItem( widget )->whatsthis = special;
-}
-
-void TQWhatsThisPrivate::add( TQWidget * widget, const TQString &text )
-{
-    newItem( widget )->s = text;
-}
-
-
-// and finally the What's This class itself
-
-/*!
-    Adds \a text as "What's this" help for \a widget. If the text is
-    rich text formatted (i.e. it contains markup) it will be rendered
-    with the default stylesheet TQStyleSheet::defaultSheet().
-
-    The text is destroyed if the widget is later destroyed, so it need
-    not be explicitly removed.
-
-    \sa remove()
-*/
-void TQWhatsThis::add( TQWidget * widget, const TQString &text )
-{
-    if ( text.isEmpty() )
-	return; // pointless
-    TQWhatsThisPrivate::setUpWhatsThis();
-    wt->add(widget,text);
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes the "What's this?" help associated with the \a widget.
-    This happens automatically if the widget is destroyed.
-
-    \sa add()
-*/
-void TQWhatsThis::remove( TQWidget * widget )
-{
-    TQWhatsThisPrivate::setUpWhatsThis();
-    TQWhatsThisPrivate::WhatsThisItem * i = wt->dict->find( (void *)widget );
-    if ( !i )
-	return;
-
-    wt->dict->take( (void *)widget );
-
-    i->deref();
-    if ( !i->count )
-	delete i;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the what's this text for widget \a w or TQString::null if
-    there is no "What's this?" help for the widget. \a pos contains
-    the mouse position; this is useful, for example, if you've
-    subclassed to make the text that is displayed position dependent.
-
-    If \a includeParents is TRUE, parent widgets are taken into
-    consideration as well when looking for what's this help text.
-
-    \sa add()
-*/
-TQString TQWhatsThis::textFor( TQWidget * w, const TQPoint& pos, bool includeParents )
-{
-    TQWhatsThisPrivate::setUpWhatsThis();
-    TQWhatsThisPrivate::WhatsThisItem * i = 0;
-    TQPoint p = pos;
-    while( w && !i ) {
-	i = wt->dict->find( w );
-	if ( !includeParents )
-	    break;
-	if ( !i ) {
-	    p += w->pos();
-	    w = w->parentWidget( TRUE );
-	}
-    }
-    if (!i)
-	return TQString::null;
-    if ( i->whatsthis )
-	return i->whatsthis->text( p );
-    return i->s;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Creates a TQToolButton preconfigured to enter "What's this?" mode
-    when clicked. You will often use this with a tool bar as \a
-    parent:
-    \code
-	(void) TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton( my_help_tool_bar );
-    \endcode
-*/
-TQToolButton * TQWhatsThis::whatsThisButton( TQWidget * parent )
-{
-    TQWhatsThisPrivate::setUpWhatsThis();
-    return new TQWhatsThisButton( parent,
-				 "automatic what's this? button" );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a dynamic "What's this?" object for \a widget. The
-    object is deleted when the \a widget is destroyed.
-
-    When the widget is queried by the user the text() function of this
-    TQWhatsThis will be called to provide the appropriate text, rather
-    than using the text assigned by add().
-*/
-TQWhatsThis::TQWhatsThis( TQWidget * widget)
-{
-    TQWhatsThisPrivate::setUpWhatsThis();
-    wt->add(widget,this);
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-*/
-TQWhatsThis::~TQWhatsThis()
-{
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    This virtual function returns the text for position \e p in the
-    widget that this "What's this?" object documents. If there is no
-    "What's this?" text for the position, TQString::null is returned.
-
-    The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-*/
-TQString TQWhatsThis::text( const TQPoint & )
-{
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn bool TQWhatsThis::clicked( const TQString& href )
-
-    This virtual function is called when the user clicks inside the
-    "What's this?" window. \a href is the link the user clicked on, or
-    TQString::null if there was no link.
-
-    If the function returns TRUE (the default), the "What's this?"
-    window is closed, otherwise it remains visible.
-
-    The default implementation ignores \a href and returns TRUE.
-*/
-bool TQWhatsThis::clicked( const TQString& )
-{
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Enters "What's this?" mode and returns immediately.
-
-    TQt will install a special cursor and take over mouse input until
-    the user clicks somewhere. It then shows any help available and
-    ends "What's this?" mode. Finally, TQt removes the special cursor
-    and help window and then restores ordinary event processing, at
-    which point the left mouse button is no longer pressed.
-
-    The user can also use the Esc key to leave "What's this?" mode.
-
-    \sa inWhatsThisMode(), leaveWhatsThisMode()
-*/
-
-void TQWhatsThis::enterWhatsThisMode()
-{
-    TQWhatsThisPrivate::setUpWhatsThis();
-    if ( wt->state == TQWhatsThisPrivate::Inactive ) {
-	wt->enterWhatsThisMode();
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	TQApplication::setOverrideCursor( Qt::WhatsThisCursor, FALSE );
-#endif
-	wt->state = TQWhatsThisPrivate::Waiting;
-	tqApp->installEventFilter( wt );
-    }
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the application is in "What's this?" mode;
-    otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    \sa enterWhatsThisMode(), leaveWhatsThisMode()
-*/
-bool TQWhatsThis::inWhatsThisMode()
-{
-    if (!wt)
-	return FALSE;
-    return wt->state == TQWhatsThisPrivate::Waiting;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Leaves "What's this?" question mode.
-
-    This function is used internally by widgets that support
-    TQWidget::customWhatsThis(); applications do not usually call it.
-    An example of such a widget is TQPopupMenu: menus still work
-    normally in "What's this?" mode but also provide help texts for
-    individual menu items.
-
-    If \a text is not TQString::null, a "What's this?" help window is
-    displayed at the global screen position \a pos. If widget \a w is
-    not 0 and has its own dedicated TQWhatsThis object, this object
-    will receive clicked() messages when the user clicks on hyperlinks
-    inside the help text.
-
-    \sa inWhatsThisMode(), enterWhatsThisMode(), TQWhatsThis::clicked()
-*/
-void TQWhatsThis::leaveWhatsThisMode( const TQString& text, const TQPoint& pos, TQWidget* w )
-{
-    if ( !inWhatsThisMode() )
-	return;
-
-    wt->leaveWhatsThisMode();
-    if ( !text.isNull() )
-	wt->say( w, text, pos );
-}
-
-/*!
-    Display \a text in a help window at the global screen position \a
-    pos.
-
-    If widget \a w is not 0 and has its own dedicated TQWhatsThis
-    object, this object will receive clicked() messages when the user
-    clicks on hyperlinks inside the help text.
-
-    \sa TQWhatsThis::clicked()
-*/
-void TQWhatsThis::display( const TQString& text, const TQPoint& pos, TQWidget* w )
-{
-    if ( inWhatsThisMode() ) {
-	leaveWhatsThisMode( text, pos, w );
-	return;
-    }
-    TQWhatsThisPrivate::setUpWhatsThis();
-    wt->say( w, text, pos );
-}
-
-/*!
-  Sets the font for all "What's this?" helps to \a font.
-*/
-void TQWhatsThis::setFont( const TQFont &font )
-{
-    TQApplication::tqsetFont( font, TRUE, "TQWhatsThat" );
-}
-
-#include "tqwhatsthis.tqmoc"
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.h
deleted file mode 100644
index dbc1259..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwhatsthis.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQWhatsThis class
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQWHATSTHIS_H
-#define TQWHATSTHIS_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqobject.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-
-class TQToolButton;
-class TQPopupMenu;
-class TQStyleSheet;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQWhatsThis: public TQt
-{
-public:
-    TQWhatsThis( TQWidget *);
-    virtual ~TQWhatsThis();
-
-    virtual TQString text( const TQPoint & );
-    virtual bool clicked( const TQString& href );
-
-    // the common static functions
-    static void setFont( const TQFont &font );    
-    
-    static void add( TQWidget *, const TQString &);
-    static void remove( TQWidget * );
-    static TQString textFor( TQWidget *, const TQPoint & pos = TQPoint(), bool includeParents = FALSE );
-
-    static TQToolButton * whatsThisButton( TQWidget * parent );
-
-    static void enterWhatsThisMode();
-    static bool inWhatsThisMode();
-    static void leaveWhatsThisMode( const TQString& = TQString::null, const TQPoint& pos = TQCursor::pos(), TQWidget* w = 0 );
-
-    static void display( const TQString& text, const TQPoint& pos = TQCursor::pos(), TQWidget* w = 0 );
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_WHATSTHIS
-
-#endif // TQWHATSTHIS_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetinterface_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetinterface_p.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 008fb3e..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetinterface_p.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,143 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** ...
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2000-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQWIDGETINTERFACE_P_H
-#define TQWIDGETINTERFACE_P_H
-
-//
-//  W A R N I N G
-//  -------------
-//
-// This file is not part of the TQt API.  It exists for the convenience
-// of a number of TQt sources files.  This header file may change from
-// version to version without notice, or even be removed.
-//
-// We mean it.
-//
-//
-
-#include <private/tqcom_p.h>
-#include "tqiconset.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGETPLUGIN
-
-class TQWidget;
-
-// {55184143-f18f-42c0-a8eb-71c01516019a}
-#ifndef IID_TQWidgetFactory
-#define IID_TQWidgetFactory TQUuid( 0x55184143, 0xf18f, 0x42c0, 0xa8, 0xeb, 0x71, 0xc0, 0x15, 0x16, 0x1, 0x9a )
-#endif
-
-/*! To add custom widgets to the TQt Designer, implement that interface
-  in your custom widget plugin.
-
-  You also have to implement the function featureList() (\sa
-  TQFeatureListInterface) and return there all widgets (names of it)
-  which this interface provides.
-*/
-
-struct TQWidgetFactoryInterface : public TQFeatureListInterface
-{
-public:
-
-    /*! In the implementation create and return the widget \a widget
-      here, use \a parent and \a name when creating the widget */
-    virtual TQWidget* create( const TQString &widget, TQWidget* parent = 0, const char* name = 0 ) = 0;
-
-    /*! In the implementation return the name of the group of the
-      widget \a widget */
-    virtual TQString group( const TQString &widget ) const = 0;
-
-    /*! In the implementation return the iconset, which should be used
-      in the TQt Designer menubar and toolbar to represent the widget
-      \a widget */
-    virtual TQIconSet iconSet( const TQString &widget ) const = 0;
-
-    /*! In the implementation return the include file which is needed
-      for the widget \a widget in the generated code which uic
-      generates. */
-    virtual TQString includeFile( const TQString &widget ) const = 0;
-
-    /*! In the implementation return the text which should be
-      displayed as tooltip for the widget \a widget */
-    virtual TQString toolTip( const TQString &widget ) const = 0;
-
-    /*! In the implementation return the text which should be used for
-      what's this help for the widget \a widget. */
-    virtual TQString whatsThis( const TQString &widget ) const = 0;
-
-    /*! In the implementation return TRUE here, of the \a widget
-      should be able to contain other widget in the TQt Designer, else
-      FALSE. */
-    virtual bool isContainer( const TQString &widget ) const = 0;
-};
-
-#ifdef TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-// {15976628-e3c3-47f4-b525-d124a3caf30e}
-#ifndef IID_TQWidgetContainer
-#define IID_TQWidgetContainer TQUuid( 0x15976628, 0xe3c3, 0x47f4, 0xb5, 0x25, 0xd1, 0x24, 0xa3, 0xca, 0xf3, 0x0e )
-#endif
-
-struct TQWidgetContainerInterfacePrivate : public TQUnknownInterface
-{
-public:
-    virtual TQWidget *containerOfWidget( const TQString &f, TQWidget *container ) const = 0;
-    virtual bool isPassiveInteractor( const TQString &f, TQWidget *container ) const = 0;
-
-    virtual bool supportsPages( const TQString &f ) const = 0;
-
-    virtual TQWidget *addPage( const TQString &f, TQWidget *container,
-			      const TQString &name, int index ) const = 0;
-    virtual void insertPage( const TQString &f, TQWidget *container,
-			     const TQString &name, int index, TQWidget *page ) const = 0;
-    virtual void removePage( const TQString &f, TQWidget *container, int index ) const = 0;
-    virtual void movePage( const TQString &f, TQWidget *container, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) const = 0;
-    virtual int count( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const = 0;
-    virtual int currentIndex( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const = 0;
-    virtual TQString pageLabel( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const = 0;
-    virtual TQWidget *page( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const = 0;
-    virtual void renamePage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container,
-			     int index, const TQString &newName ) const = 0;
-    virtual TQWidgetList pages( const TQString &f, TQWidget *container ) const = 0;
-    virtual TQString createCode( const TQString &f, const TQString &container,
-				const TQString &page, const TQString &pageName ) const = 0;
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-#endif // TQT_NO_WIDGETPLUGIN
-#endif // TQWIDGETINTERFACE_P_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 57eed86..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,729 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQWidgetPlugin class
-**
-** Created : 010920
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2001-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqwidgetplugin.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGETPLUGIN
-#include "tqwidgetinterface_p.h"
-#include "tqobjectcleanuphandler.h"
-#include "tqwidget.h"
-#ifdef TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-#include "tqwidgetlist.h"
-#endif
-
-/*!
-    \class TQWidgetPlugin tqwidgetplugin.h
-    \brief The TQWidgetPlugin class provides an abstract base for custom TQWidget plugins.
-
-    \ingroup plugins
-
-    The widget plugin is a simple plugin interface that makes it easy
-    to create custom widgets that can be included in forms using \link
-    designer-manual.book TQt Designer\endlink and used by applications.
-
-    Writing a widget plugin is achieved by subclassing this base
-    class, reimplementing the pure virtual functions keys(), create(),
-    group(), iconSet(), includeFile(), toolTip(), whatsThis() and
-    isContainer(), and exporting the class with the \c TQ_EXPORT_PLUGIN
-    macro.
-
-    See the \link designer-manual.book TQt Designer manual's\endlink,
-    'Creating Custom Widgets' section in the 'Creating Custom Widgets'
-    chapter, for a complete example of a TQWidgetPlugin.
-
-    See also the \link plugins-howto.html Plugins
-    documentation\endlink and the \l{TQWidgetFactory} class that is
-    supplied with \link designer-manual.book TQt Designer\endlink.
-*/
-
-class TQWidgetPluginPrivate : public TQWidgetFactoryInterface,
-#ifdef TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-			     public TQWidgetContainerInterfacePrivate,
-#endif
-			     private TQLibraryInterface
-{
-public:
-    TQWidgetPluginPrivate( TQWidgetPlugin *p )
-	: plugin( p )
-    {
-    }
-
-    virtual ~TQWidgetPluginPrivate();
-
-    TQRESULT queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, TQUnknownInterface **iface );
-    TQ_REFCOUNT;
-
-    TQStringList featureList() const;
-    TQWidget *create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent, const char *name );
-    TQString group( const TQString &widget ) const;
-    TQIconSet iconSet( const TQString &widget ) const;
-    TQString includeFile( const TQString &widget ) const;
-    TQString toolTip( const TQString &widget ) const;
-    TQString whatsThis( const TQString &widget ) const;
-    bool isContainer( const TQString &widget ) const;
-#ifdef TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-    TQWidget* containerOfWidget( const TQString &key, TQWidget *widget ) const;
-    bool isPassiveInteractor( const TQString &key, TQWidget *widget ) const;
-    bool supportsPages( const TQString &key ) const;
-    TQWidget *addPage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, const TQString &name, int index ) const;
-    void insertPage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container,
-		     const TQString &name, int index, TQWidget *page ) const;
-    void Page( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container,
-	       const TQString &name, int index, TQWidget *page ) const;
-    void removePage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const;
-    void movePage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) const;
-    int count( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const;
-    int currentIndex( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const;
-    TQString pageLabel( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const;
-    TQWidget *page( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const;
-    void renamePage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index, const TQString &newName ) const;
-    TQWidgetList pages( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const;
-    TQString createCode( const TQString &key, const TQString &container,
-			const TQString &page, const TQString &pageName ) const;
-#endif // TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-    bool init();
-    void cleanup();
-    bool canUnload() const;
-
-private:
-    TQWidgetPlugin *plugin;
-    TQObjectCleanupHandler widgets;
-};
-
-TQRESULT TQWidgetPluginPrivate::queryInterface( const TQUuid &iid, TQUnknownInterface **iface )
-{
-    *iface = 0;
-
-    if ( iid == IID_TQUnknown )
-	*iface = (TQWidgetFactoryInterface*)this;
-    else if ( iid == IID_TQFeatureList )
-	*iface = (TQFeatureListInterface*)this;
-    else if ( iid == IID_TQWidgetFactory )
-	*iface = (TQWidgetFactoryInterface*)this;
-    else if ( iid == IID_TQLibrary )
-	*iface = (TQLibraryInterface*)this;
-#ifdef TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-    else if ( iid == IID_TQWidgetContainer )
-	*iface = (TQWidgetContainerInterfacePrivate*)this;
-#endif
-    else
-	return TQE_NOINTERFACE;
-
-    (*iface)->addRef();
-    return TQS_OK;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQStringList TQWidgetPlugin::keys() const
-
-    Returns the list of widget keys this plugin supports.
-
-    These keys must be the class names of the custom widgets that are
-    implemented in the plugin.
-
-    \sa create()
-*/
-
-/*!
-    \fn TQWidget *TQWidgetPlugin::create( const TQString &, TQWidget *, const char * )
-
-    Creates and returns a TQWidget object for the widget key \a key.
-    The widget key is the class name of the required widget. The \a
-    name and \a parent arguments are passed to the custom widget's
-    constructor.
-
-    \sa keys()
-*/
-
-TQWidgetPluginPrivate::~TQWidgetPluginPrivate()
-{
-    delete plugin;
-}
-
-TQStringList TQWidgetPluginPrivate::featureList() const
-{
-    return plugin->keys();
-}
-
-TQWidget *TQWidgetPluginPrivate::create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent, const char *name )
-{
-    TQWidget *w = plugin->create( key, parent, name );
-    widgets.add( TQT_TQOBJECT(w) );
-    return w;
-}
-
-TQString TQWidgetPluginPrivate::group( const TQString &widget ) const
-{
-    return plugin->group( widget );
-}
-
-TQIconSet TQWidgetPluginPrivate::iconSet( const TQString &widget ) const
-{
-    return plugin->iconSet( widget );
-}
-
-TQString TQWidgetPluginPrivate::includeFile( const TQString &widget ) const
-{
-    return plugin->includeFile( widget );
-}
-
-TQString TQWidgetPluginPrivate::toolTip( const TQString &widget ) const
-{
-    return plugin->toolTip( widget );
-}
-
-TQString TQWidgetPluginPrivate::whatsThis( const TQString &widget ) const
-{
-    return plugin->whatsThis( widget );
-}
-
-bool TQWidgetPluginPrivate::isContainer( const TQString &widget ) const
-{
-    return plugin->isContainer( widget );
-}
-
-bool TQWidgetPluginPrivate::init()
-{
-    return TRUE;
-}
-
-void TQWidgetPluginPrivate::cleanup()
-{
-    widgets.clear();
-}
-
-bool TQWidgetPluginPrivate::canUnload() const
-{
-    return widgets.isEmpty();
-}
-
-#ifdef TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-TQWidget* TQWidgetPluginPrivate::containerOfWidget( const TQString &key, TQWidget *widget ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	return p->containerOfWidget( key, widget );
-    return widget;
-}
-
-int TQWidgetPluginPrivate::count( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	return p->count( key, container );
-    return 0;
-}
-
-int TQWidgetPluginPrivate::currentIndex( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	return p->currentIndex( key, container );
-    return -1;
-}
-
-TQString TQWidgetPluginPrivate::pageLabel( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	return p->pageLabel( key, container, index );
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-TQWidget *TQWidgetPluginPrivate::page( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	return p->page( key, container, index );
-    return 0;
-}
-
-bool TQWidgetPluginPrivate::isPassiveInteractor( const TQString &key, TQWidget *widget ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	return p->isPassiveInteractor( key, widget );
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-bool TQWidgetPluginPrivate::supportsPages( const TQString &key ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	return p->supportsPages( key );
-    return 0;
-}
-
-TQWidget *TQWidgetPluginPrivate::addPage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container,
-				    const TQString &name, int index ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	return p->addPage( key, container, name, index );
-    return 0;
-}
-
-void TQWidgetPluginPrivate::insertPage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container,
-				       const TQString &name, int index, TQWidget *page ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	p->insertPage( key, container, name, index, page );
-}
-
-void TQWidgetPluginPrivate::removePage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	p->removePage( key, container, index );
-}
-
-void TQWidgetPluginPrivate::movePage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container,
-				     int fromIndex, int toIndex ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	p->movePage( key, container, fromIndex, toIndex );
-}
-
-void TQWidgetPluginPrivate::renamePage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container,
-				      int index, const TQString &newName ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	p->renamePage( key, container, index, newName );
-}
-
-TQWidgetList TQWidgetPluginPrivate::pages( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	return p->pages( key, container );
-    return TQWidgetList();
-}
-
-TQString TQWidgetPluginPrivate::createCode( const TQString &key, const TQString &container,
-					  const TQString &page, const TQString &pageName ) const
-{
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin *p = (TQWidgetContainerPlugin*)plugin->tqqt_cast( "TQWidgetContainerPlugin" );
-    if ( p )
-	return p->createCode( key, container, page, pageName );
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-#endif // TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a widget plugin. This is invoked automatically by the
-    \c TQ_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
-*/
-TQWidgetPlugin::TQWidgetPlugin()
-    : TQGPlugin( (TQWidgetFactoryInterface*)(d = new TQWidgetPluginPrivate( this )) )
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the widget plugin.
-
-    You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
-    automatically when it is no longer used.
-*/
-TQWidgetPlugin::~TQWidgetPlugin()
-{
-    // don't delete d, as this is deleted by d
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the group (toolbar name) that the custom widget of class
-    \a key should be part of when \e{TQt Designer} loads it.
-
-    The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-*/
-TQString TQWidgetPlugin::group( const TQString & ) const
-{
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the iconset that \e{TQt Designer} should use to represent
-    the custom widget of class \a key in the toolbar.
-
-    The default implementation returns an null iconset.
-*/
-TQIconSet TQWidgetPlugin::iconSet( const TQString & ) const
-{
-    return TQIconSet();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the name of the include file that \e{TQt Designer} and \c
-    uic should use to include the custom widget of class \a key in
-    generated code.
-
-    The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-*/
-TQString TQWidgetPlugin::includeFile( const TQString & ) const
-{
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the text of the tooltip that \e{TQt Designer} should use
-    for the custom widget of class \a key's toolbar button.
-
-    The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-*/
-TQString TQWidgetPlugin::toolTip( const TQString & ) const
-{
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns the text of the whatsThis text that \e{TQt Designer} should
-    use when the user requests whatsThis help for the custom widget of
-    class \a key.
-
-    The default implementation returns TQString::null.
-*/
-TQString TQWidgetPlugin::whatsThis( const TQString & ) const
-{
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Returns TRUE if the custom widget of class \a key can contain
-    other widgets, e.g. like TQFrame; otherwise returns FALSE.
-
-    The default implementation returns FALSE.
-*/
-bool TQWidgetPlugin::isContainer( const TQString & ) const
-{
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-#ifdef TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-
-/*!
-    \class TQWidgetContainerPlugin tqwidgetplugin.h
-    \brief The TQWidgetContainerPlugin class provides an abstract base
-    for complex custom container TQWidget plugins.
-
-    \internal
-
-    \ingroup plugins
-
-    The widget container plugin is a subclass of TQWidgetPlugin and
-    extends the interface with functions necessary for supporting
-    complex container widgets via plugins. These container widgets are
-    widgets that have one or multiple sub widgets which act as the
-    widget's containers. If the widget has multiple container
-    subwidgets, they are referred to as "pages", and only one can be
-    active at a time. Examples of complex container widgets include:
-    TQTabWidget, TQWidgetStack and TQToolBox.
-
-    Writing a complex container widget plugin is achieved by
-    subclassing this base class. First by reimplementing
-    TQWidgetPlugin's pure virtual functions keys(), create(), group(),
-    iconSet(), includeFile(), toolTip(), whatsThis() and
-    isContainer(), and exporting the class with the \c TQ_EXPORT_PLUGIN
-    macro. In addition containerOfWidget(), isPassiveInteractor() and
-    supportsPages() must be reimplemented. If the widget
-    supportsPages(), count(), currentIndex(), pageLabel(), page(),
-    pages() and createCode() must be implemented. If the widget
-    supportsPages() and you want to allow the containers pages to be
-    modified, you must also reimplement addPage(), insertPage(),
-    removePage(), movePage() and renamePage().
-
-    \sa TQWidgetPlugin
-*/
-
-/*!
-    Constructs a complex container widget plugin. This is invoked
-    automatically by the \c TQ_EXPORT_PLUGIN macro.
-*/
-
-TQWidgetContainerPlugin::TQWidgetContainerPlugin()
-    : TQWidgetPlugin()
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the complex container widget plugin.
-
-    You never have to call this explicitly. TQt destroys a plugin
-    automatically when it is no longer used.
-*/
-
-TQWidgetContainerPlugin::~TQWidgetContainerPlugin()
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    Returns the current \a container's custom widget. If the custom
-    widget is a tab widget, this function takes the \a container as
-    input and returns the widget's current page.
-
-    The default implementation returns \a container.
-*/
-
-TQWidget* TQWidgetContainerPlugin::containerOfWidget( const TQString &,
-						    TQWidget *container ) const
-{
-    return container;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    Returns the \a container custom widget's number of pages. If the
-    custom widget is a tab widget, this function returns the number of
-    tabs.
-
-    The default implementation returns 0.
-*/
-
-int TQWidgetContainerPlugin::count( const TQString &, TQWidget * ) const
-{
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    Returns the \a container custom widget's current page index. If
-    the custom widget is a tab widget, this function returns the
-    current tab's index.
-
-    The default implementation returns -1.
-*/
-
-int TQWidgetContainerPlugin::currentIndex( const TQString &, TQWidget * ) const
-{
-    return -1;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    Returns the \a container custom widget's label at position \a
-    index. If the custom widget is a tab widget, this function returns
-    the current tab's label.
-
-    The default implementation returns a null string.
-*/
-
-TQString TQWidgetContainerPlugin::pageLabel( const TQString &, TQWidget *, int ) const
-{
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    Returns the \a container custom widget's page at position \a
-    index. If the custom widget is a tab widget, this function returns
-    the tab at index position \e index.
-
-
-    The default implementation returns 0.
-*/
-
-TQWidget *TQWidgetContainerPlugin::page( const TQString &, TQWidget *, int ) const
-{
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    Returns TRUE if the \a container custom widget is a passive
-    interactor for class \e key; otherwise returns FALSE. The \a
-    container is a child widget of the actual custom widget.
-
-    Usually, when a custom widget is used in \e{TQt Designer}'s design
-    mode, no widget receives any mouse or key events, since \e{TQt
-    Designer} filters and processes them itself. If one or more
-    widgets of a custom widget still need to receive such events, for
-    example, because the widget needs to change pages, this function
-    must return TRUE for the widget. In such cases \e{TQt Designer}
-    will not filter out key and mouse events destined for the widget.
-
-    If the custom widget is a tab widget, the tab bar is the passive
-    interactor, since that's what the user will use to change pages.
-
-    The default implementation returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQWidgetContainerPlugin::isPassiveInteractor( const TQString &,
-						 TQWidget *container ) const
-{
-    TQ_UNUSED( container )
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    Returns TRUE if the widget supports pages; otherwise returns
-    FALSE. If the custom widget is a tab widget this function should
-    return TRUE.
-
-    The default implementation returns FALSE.
-*/
-
-bool TQWidgetContainerPlugin::supportsPages( const TQString & ) const
-{
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    This function is called when a new page with the given \a name
-    should be added to the \a container custom widget at position \a
-    index.
-
-    The default implementation does nothing.
-*/
-
-TQWidget* TQWidgetContainerPlugin::addPage( const TQString &, TQWidget *,
-					  const TQString &, int ) const
-{
-    return 0;
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    This function is called when a new page, \a page, with the given
-    \a name should be added to the \a container custom widget at
-    position \a index.
-
-    The default implementation does nothing.
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetContainerPlugin::insertPage( const TQString &, TQWidget *,
-					 const TQString &, int, TQWidget * ) const
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    This function is called when the page at position \a index should
-    be removed from the \a container custom widget.
-
-    The default implementation does nothing.
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetContainerPlugin::removePage( const TQString &, TQWidget *, int ) const
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    This function is called when the page at position \a fromIndex should
-    be moved to position \a toIndex in the \a container custom widget.
-
-    The default implementation does nothing.
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetContainerPlugin::movePage( const TQString &, TQWidget *, int, int ) const
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    This function is called when the page at position \a index should
-    be renamed (have its label changed) to \a newName in the \a
-    container custom widget.
-
-    The default implementation does nothing.
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetContainerPlugin::renamePage( const TQString &, TQWidget *,
-					 int, const TQString & ) const
-{
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    This function should return a list of the \a container custom
-    widget's pages.
-*/
-
-TQWidgetList TQWidgetContainerPlugin::pages( const TQString &, TQWidget * ) const
-{
-    return TQWidgetList();
-}
-
-/*!
-    Operates on the plugin's \a key class.
-
-    This function is called from \e{TQt Designer}'s User Interface
-    Compiler \c uic, when generating C++ code for inserting a page in
-    the \a container custom widget. The name of the page widget which
-    should be inserted at the end of the container is \a page, and the
-    label of the page should be \a pageName.
-
-    If the custom widget was a TQTabWidget, the implementation of this
-    function should return:
-
-    \code
-    return widget + "->addTab( " + page + ", \"" + pageName + "\" )";
-    \endcode
-
-    Warning: If the code returned by this function contains invalid
-    C++ syntax, the generated \c uic code will not compile.
-*/
-
-TQString TQWidgetContainerPlugin::createCode( const TQString &, const TQString &,
-					    const TQString &, const TQString & ) const
-{
-    return TQString::null;
-}
-
-#endif // TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_WIDGETPLUGIN
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.h
deleted file mode 100644
index b879396..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetplugin.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQWidgetPlugin class
-**
-** Created : 010920
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2001-2008 Trolltech ASA.  All rights reserved.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQWIDGETPLUGIN_H
-#define TQWIDGETPLUGIN_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqgplugin.h"
-#include "tqstringlist.h"
-#include "tqiconset.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGETPLUGIN
-
-#ifdef TQ_WS_WIN
-#ifdef TQT_PLUGIN
-#define TQT_WIDGET_PLUGIN_EXPORT __declspec(dllexport)
-#else
-#define TQT_WIDGET_PLUGIN_EXPORT __declspec(dllimport)
-#endif
-#else
-#define TQT_WIDGET_PLUGIN_EXPORT
-#endif
-
-class TQWidgetPluginPrivate;
-class TQWidget;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQWidgetPlugin : public TQGPlugin
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQWidgetPlugin();
-    ~TQWidgetPlugin();
-
-    virtual TQStringList keys() const = 0;
-    virtual TQWidget *create( const TQString &key, TQWidget *parent = 0, const char *name = 0 ) = 0;
-
-    virtual TQString group( const TQString &key ) const;
-    virtual TQIconSet iconSet( const TQString &key ) const;
-    virtual TQString includeFile( const TQString &key ) const;
-    virtual TQString toolTip( const TQString &key ) const;
-    virtual TQString whatsThis( const TQString &key ) const;
-    virtual bool isContainer( const TQString &key ) const;
-
-private:
-    TQWidgetPluginPrivate *d;
-};
-
-#ifdef TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-
-class TQWidgetContainerPluginPrivate;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQWidgetContainerPlugin : public TQWidgetPlugin
-{
-
-public:
-    TQWidgetContainerPlugin();
-    ~TQWidgetContainerPlugin();
-
-    virtual TQWidget* containerOfWidget( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const;
-    virtual bool isPassiveInteractor( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const;
-
-    virtual bool supportsPages( const TQString &key ) const;
-
-    virtual TQWidget *addPage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container,
-			      const TQString &name, int index ) const;
-    virtual void insertPage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container,
-			     const TQString &name, int index, TQWidget *page ) const;
-    virtual void removePage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const;
-    virtual void movePage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int fromIndex, int toIndex ) const;
-    virtual int count( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const;
-    virtual int currentIndex( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const;
-    virtual TQString pageLabel( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const;
-    virtual TQWidget *page( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container, int index ) const;
-    virtual void renamePage( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container,
-			     int index, const TQString &newName ) const;
-    virtual TQWidgetList pages( const TQString &key, TQWidget *container ) const;
-    virtual TQString createCode( const TQString &key, const TQString &container,
-				const TQString &page, const TQString &pageName ) const;
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_CONTAINER_CUSTOM_WIDGETS
-#endif // TQT_NO_WIDGETPLUGIN
-#endif // TQWIDGETPLUGIN_H
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index beaf51f..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,516 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of the TQWidgetResizeHandler class
-**
-** Created : 001010
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the workspace module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqwidgetresizehandler_p.h"
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RESIZEHANDLER
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-#include "tqcursor.h"
-#include "tqsizegrip.h"
-#if defined(TQ_WS_WIN)
-#include "tqt_windows.h"
-#endif
-
-#define RANGE 4
-
-static bool resizeHorizontalDirectionFixed = FALSE;
-static bool resizeVerticalDirectionFixed = FALSE;
-
-TQWidgetResizeHandler::TQWidgetResizeHandler( TQWidget *parent, TQWidget *cw, const char *name )
-    : TQObject( parent, name ), widget( parent ), childWidget( cw ? cw : parent ),
-      extrahei( 0 ), buttonDown( FALSE ), moveResizeMode( FALSE ), sizeprotect( TRUE ), moving( TRUE )
-{
-    mode = Nowhere;
-    widget->setMouseTracking( TRUE );
-    TQFrame *frame = ::tqqt_cast<TQFrame*>(widget);
-    range = frame ? frame->frameWidth() : RANGE;
-    range = TQMAX( RANGE, range );
-    activeForMove = activeForResize = TRUE;
-    tqApp->installEventFilter( this );
-}
-
-void TQWidgetResizeHandler::setActive( Action ac, bool b )
-{
-    if ( ac & Move )
-	activeForMove = b;
-    if ( ac & Resize )
-	activeForResize = b;
-
-    if ( !isActive() )
-	setMouseCursor( Nowhere );
-}
-
-bool TQWidgetResizeHandler::isActive( Action ac ) const
-{
-    bool b = FALSE;
-    if ( ac & Move ) b = activeForMove;
-    if ( ac & Resize ) b |= activeForResize;
-
-    return b;
-}
-
-static TQWidget *childOf( TQWidget *w, TQWidget *child )
-{
-    while ( child ) {
-	if ( child == w )
-	    return child;
-	if ( child->isTopLevel() )
-	    break;
-	child = child->parentWidget();
-    }
-    return 0;
-}
-
-bool TQWidgetResizeHandler::eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *ee )
-{
-    if ( !isActive() || !o->isWidgetType() || !ee->spontaneous())
-	return FALSE;
-
-    if ( ee->type() != TQEvent::MouseButtonPress &&
-	 ee->type() != TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease &&
-	 ee->type() != TQEvent::MouseMove &&
-	 ee->type() != TQEvent::KeyPress &&
-	 ee->type() != (QEvent::Type)TQEvent::AccelOverride )
-	return FALSE;
-
-    TQWidget *w = childOf( widget, (TQWidget*)o );
-    if ( !w
-#ifndef TQT_NO_SIZEGRIP
-	 || ::tqqt_cast<TQSizeGrip*>(o)
-#endif
-	 || tqApp->activePopupWidget() ) {
-	if ( buttonDown && ee->type() == TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease )
-	    buttonDown = FALSE;
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-
-    TQMouseEvent *e = (TQMouseEvent*)ee;
-    switch ( e->type() ) {
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonPress: {
-	if ( w->isMaximized() )
-	    break;
-	if ( !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(widget->rect()).contains( widget->mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() ) ) )
-	    return FALSE;
-	if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	    emit activate();
-	    bool me = isMovingEnabled();
-	    setMovingEnabled( me && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(widget) );
-	    mouseMoveEvent( e );
-	    setMovingEnabled( me );
-	    buttonDown = TRUE;
-	    moveOffset = widget->mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() );
-	    invertedMoveOffset = widget->rect().bottomRight() - moveOffset;
-	}
-    } break;
-    case TQEvent::MouseButtonRelease:
-	if ( w->isMaximized() )
-	    break;
-	if ( e->button() == Qt::LeftButton ) {
-	    moveResizeMode = FALSE;
-	    buttonDown = FALSE;
-	    widget->releaseMouse();
-	    widget->releaseKeyboard();
-	}
-	break;
-    case TQEvent::MouseMove: {
-	if ( w->isMaximized() )
-	    break;
-	bool me = isMovingEnabled();
-	setMovingEnabled( me && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(widget) );
-	mouseMoveEvent( e );
-	setMovingEnabled( me );
-	if ( buttonDown && mode != Center )
-	    return TRUE;
-    } break;
-    case TQEvent::KeyPress:
-	keyPressEvent( (TQKeyEvent*)e );
-	break;
-    case TQEvent::AccelOverride:
-	if ( buttonDown ) {
-	    ((TQKeyEvent*)ee)->accept();
-	    return TRUE;
-	}
-	break;
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-void TQWidgetResizeHandler::mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e )
-{
-    TQPoint pos = widget->mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() );
-    if ( !moveResizeMode && ( !buttonDown || ( e->state() & Qt::LeftButton ) == 0 ) ) {
-	if ( pos.y() <= range && pos.x() <= range)
-	    mode = TopLeft;
-	else if ( pos.y() >= widget->height()-range && pos.x() >= widget->width()-range)
-	    mode = BottomRight;
-	else if ( pos.y() >= widget->height()-range && pos.x() <= range)
-	    mode = BottomLeft;
-	else if ( pos.y() <= range && pos.x() >= widget->width()-range)
-	    mode = TopRight;
-	else if ( pos.y() <= range )
-	    mode = Top;
-	else if ( pos.y() >= widget->height()-range )
-	    mode = Bottom;
-	else if ( pos.x() <= range )
-	    mode = Left;
-	else if (  pos.x() >= widget->width()-range )
-	    mode = Right;
-	else
-	    mode = Center;
-
-	if ( widget->isMinimized() || !isActive(Resize) )
-	    mode = Center;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	setMouseCursor( mode );
-#endif
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if ( buttonDown && !isMovingEnabled() && mode == Center && !moveResizeMode )
-	return;
-
-    if ( widget->testWState( TQt::WState_ConfigPending ) )
- 	return;
-
-    TQPoint globalPos = widget->parentWidget( TRUE ) ?
-		       widget->parentWidget( TRUE )->mapFromGlobal( e->globalPos() ) : e->globalPos();
-    if ( widget->parentWidget( TRUE ) && !TQT_TQRECT_OBJECT(widget->parentWidget( TRUE )->rect()).contains( globalPos ) ) {
-	if ( globalPos.x() < 0 )
-	    globalPos.rx() = 0;
-	if ( globalPos.y() < 0 )
-	    globalPos.ry() = 0;
-	if ( sizeprotect && globalPos.x() > widget->parentWidget()->width() )
-	    globalPos.rx() = widget->parentWidget()->width();
-	if ( sizeprotect && globalPos.y() > widget->parentWidget()->height() )
-	    globalPos.ry() = widget->parentWidget()->height();
-    }
-
-    TQPoint p = globalPos + invertedMoveOffset;
-    TQPoint pp = globalPos - moveOffset;
-
-    int fw = 0;
-    int mw = TQMAX( childWidget->tqminimumSizeHint().width(),
-		   childWidget->minimumWidth() );
-    int mh = TQMAX( childWidget->tqminimumSizeHint().height(),
-		   childWidget->minimumHeight() );
-    if ( childWidget != widget ) {
-	TQFrame *frame = ::tqqt_cast<TQFrame*>(widget);
-	if ( frame )
-	    fw = frame->frameWidth();
-	mw += 2 * fw;
-	mh += 2 * fw + extrahei;
-    }
-
-    TQSize mpsize( widget->tqgeometry().right() - pp.x() + 1,
-		  widget->tqgeometry().bottom() - pp.y() + 1 );
-    mpsize = mpsize.expandedTo( widget->tqminimumSize() ).expandedTo( TQSize(mw, mh) );
-    TQPoint mp( widget->tqgeometry().right() - mpsize.width() + 1,
-	       widget->tqgeometry().bottom() - mpsize.height() + 1 );
-
-    TQRect geom = widget->tqgeometry();
-
-    switch ( mode ) {
-    case TopLeft:
-	geom = TQRect( mp, widget->tqgeometry().bottomRight() ) ;
-	break;
-    case BottomRight:
-	geom = TQRect( widget->tqgeometry().topLeft(), p ) ;
-	break;
-    case BottomLeft:
-	geom = TQRect( TQPoint(mp.x(), widget->tqgeometry().y() ), TQPoint( widget->tqgeometry().right(), p.y()) ) ;
-	break;
-    case TopRight:
-	geom = TQRect( TQPoint( widget->tqgeometry().x(), mp.y() ), TQPoint( p.x(), widget->tqgeometry().bottom()) ) ;
-	break;
-    case Top:
-	geom = TQRect( TQPoint( widget->tqgeometry().left(), mp.y() ), widget->tqgeometry().bottomRight() ) ;
-	break;
-    case Bottom:
-	geom = TQRect( widget->tqgeometry().topLeft(), TQPoint( widget->tqgeometry().right(), p.y() ) ) ;
-	break;
-    case Left:
-	geom = TQRect( TQPoint( mp.x(), widget->tqgeometry().top() ), widget->tqgeometry().bottomRight() ) ;
-	break;
-    case Right:
-	geom = TQRect( widget->tqgeometry().topLeft(), TQPoint( p.x(), widget->tqgeometry().bottom() ) ) ;
-	break;
-    case Center:
-	if ( isMovingEnabled() || moveResizeMode )
-	    geom.moveTopLeft( pp );
-	break;
-    default:
-	break;
-    }
-
-    TQSize maxsize( childWidget->tqmaximumSize() );
-    if ( childWidget != widget )
-	maxsize += TQSize( 2 * fw, 2 * fw + extrahei );
-
-    geom = TQRect( geom.topLeft(),
-		  geom.size().expandedTo( widget->tqminimumSize() )
-			     .expandedTo( TQSize(mw, mh) )
-			     .boundedTo( maxsize ) );
-
-    if ( geom != widget->tqgeometry() &&
-	( widget->isTopLevel() || widget->parentWidget()->rect().intersects( geom ) ) ) {
-	if ( widget->isMinimized() )
-	    widget->move( geom.topLeft() );
-	else
-	    widget->setGeometry( geom );
-    }
-
-#if defined(TQ_WS_WIN)
-    MSG msg;
-    TQT_WA( {
-	while(PeekMessageW( &msg, widget->winId(), WM_MOUSEMOVE, WM_MOUSEMOVE, PM_REMOVE ))
-	    ;
-    } , {
-	while(PeekMessageA( &msg, widget->winId(), WM_MOUSEMOVE, WM_MOUSEMOVE, PM_REMOVE ))
-	    ;
-    } );
-#endif
-
-    TQApplication::syncX();
-}
-
-void TQWidgetResizeHandler::setMouseCursor( MousePosition m )
-{
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    switch ( m ) {
-    case TopLeft:
-    case BottomRight:
-	widget->setCursor( Qt::SizeFDiagCursor );
-	break;
-    case BottomLeft:
-    case TopRight:
-	widget->setCursor( Qt::SizeBDiagCursor );
-	break;
-    case Top:
-    case Bottom:
-	widget->setCursor( Qt::SizeVerCursor );
-	break;
-    case Left:
-    case Right:
-	widget->setCursor( Qt::SizeHorCursor );
-	break;
-    default:
-	widget->setCursor( Qt::ArrowCursor );
-	break;
-    }
-#endif
-}
-
-void TQWidgetResizeHandler::keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent * e )
-{
-    if ( !isMove() && !isResize() )
-	return;
-    bool is_control = e->state() & ControlButton;
-    int delta = is_control?1:8;
-    TQPoint pos = TQCursor::pos();
-    switch ( e->key() ) {
-    case Qt::Key_Left:
-	pos.rx() -= delta;
-	if ( pos.x() <= TQT_TQWIDGET(TQApplication::desktop())->tqgeometry().left() ) {
-	    if ( mode == TopLeft || mode == BottomLeft ) {
-		moveOffset.rx() += delta;
-		invertedMoveOffset.rx() += delta;
-	    } else {
-		moveOffset.rx() -= delta;
-		invertedMoveOffset.rx() -= delta;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( isResize() && !resizeHorizontalDirectionFixed ) {
-	    resizeHorizontalDirectionFixed = TRUE;
-	    if ( mode == BottomRight )
-		mode = BottomLeft;
-	    else if ( mode == TopRight )
-		mode = TopLeft;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    setMouseCursor( mode );
-	    widget->grabMouse( widget->cursor() );
-#else
-	    widget->grabMouse();
-#endif
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Right:
-	pos.rx() += delta;
-	if ( pos.x() >= TQT_TQWIDGET(TQApplication::desktop())->tqgeometry().right() ) {
-	    if ( mode == TopRight || mode == BottomRight ) {
-		moveOffset.rx() += delta;
-		invertedMoveOffset.rx() += delta;
-	    } else {
-		moveOffset.rx() -= delta;
-		invertedMoveOffset.rx() -= delta;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( isResize() && !resizeHorizontalDirectionFixed ) {
-	    resizeHorizontalDirectionFixed = TRUE;
-	    if ( mode == BottomLeft )
-		mode = BottomRight;
-	    else if ( mode == TopLeft )
-		mode = TopRight;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    setMouseCursor( mode );
-	    widget->grabMouse( widget->cursor() );
-#else
-	    widget->grabMouse();
-#endif
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Up:
-	pos.ry() -= delta;
-	if ( pos.y() <= TQT_TQWIDGET(TQApplication::desktop())->tqgeometry().top() ) {
-	    if ( mode == TopLeft || mode == TopRight ) {
-		moveOffset.ry() += delta;
-		invertedMoveOffset.ry() += delta;
-	    } else {
-		moveOffset.ry() -= delta;
-		invertedMoveOffset.ry() -= delta;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( isResize() && !resizeVerticalDirectionFixed ) {
-	    resizeVerticalDirectionFixed = TRUE;
-	    if ( mode == BottomLeft )
-		mode = TopLeft;
-	    else if ( mode == BottomRight )
-		mode = TopRight;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    setMouseCursor( mode );
-	    widget->grabMouse( widget->cursor() );
-#else
-	    widget->grabMouse();
-#endif
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Down:
-	pos.ry() += delta;
-	if ( pos.y() >= TQT_TQWIDGET(TQApplication::desktop())->tqgeometry().bottom() ) {
-	    if ( mode == BottomLeft || mode == BottomRight ) {
-		moveOffset.ry() += delta;
-		invertedMoveOffset.ry() += delta;
-	    } else {
-		moveOffset.ry() -= delta;
-		invertedMoveOffset.ry() -= delta;
-	    }
-	}
-	if ( isResize() && !resizeVerticalDirectionFixed ) {
-	    resizeVerticalDirectionFixed = TRUE;
-	    if ( mode == TopLeft )
-		mode = BottomLeft;
-	    else if ( mode == TopRight )
-		mode = BottomRight;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-	    setMouseCursor( mode );
-	    widget->grabMouse( widget->cursor() );
-#else
-	    widget->grabMouse();
-#endif
-	}
-	break;
-    case Qt::Key_Space:
-    case Qt::Key_Return:
-    case Qt::Key_Enter:
-    case Key_Escape:
-	moveResizeMode = FALSE;
-	widget->releaseMouse();
-	widget->releaseKeyboard();
-	buttonDown = FALSE;
-	break;
-    default:
-	return;
-    }
-    TQCursor::setPos( pos );
-}
-
-
-void TQWidgetResizeHandler::doResize()
-{
-    if ( !activeForResize )
-	return;
-
-    moveResizeMode = TRUE;
-    buttonDown = TRUE;
-    moveOffset = widget->mapFromGlobal( TQCursor::pos() );
-    if ( moveOffset.x() < widget->width()/2) {
-	if ( moveOffset.y() < widget->height()/2)
-	    mode = TopLeft;
-	else
-	    mode = BottomLeft;
-    } else {
-	if ( moveOffset.y() < widget->height()/2)
-	    mode = TopRight;
-	else
-	    mode = BottomRight;
-    }
-    invertedMoveOffset = widget->rect().bottomRight() - moveOffset;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    setMouseCursor( mode );
-    widget->grabMouse( widget->cursor()  );
-#else
-    widget->grabMouse();
-#endif
-    widget->grabKeyboard();
-    resizeHorizontalDirectionFixed = FALSE;
-    resizeVerticalDirectionFixed = FALSE;
-}
-
-void TQWidgetResizeHandler::doMove()
-{
-    if ( !activeForMove )
-	return;
-
-    mode = Center;
-    moveResizeMode = TRUE;
-    buttonDown = TRUE;
-    moveOffset = widget->mapFromGlobal( TQCursor::pos() );
-    invertedMoveOffset = widget->rect().bottomRight() - moveOffset;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_CURSOR
-    widget->grabMouse( SizeAllCursor );
-#else
-    widget->grabMouse();
-#endif
-    widget->grabKeyboard();
-}
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_RESIZEHANDLER
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler_p.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler_p.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 472f3e3..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetresizehandler_p.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,138 +0,0 @@
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of the TQWidgetResizeHandler class
-**
-** Created : 001010
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the workspace module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQWIDGETRESIZEHANDLER_P_H
-#define TQWIDGETRESIZEHANDLER_P_H
-
-//
-//  W A R N I N G
-//  -------------
-//
-// This file is not part of the TQt API.  This header file may
-// change from version to version without notice, or even be
-// removed.
-//
-// We mean it.
-//
-//
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqobject.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-#ifndef TQT_NO_RESIZEHANDLER
-class TQMouseEvent;
-class TQKeyEvent;
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQWidgetResizeHandler : public TQObject
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-
-public:
-    enum Action {
-	Move	= 0x01,
-	Resize	= 0x02,
-	Any	= Move|Resize
-    };
-
-    TQWidgetResizeHandler( TQWidget *parent, TQWidget *cw = 0, const char *name = 0 );
-    void setActive( bool b ) { setActive( Any, b ); }
-    void setActive( Action ac, bool b );
-    bool isActive() const { return isActive( Any ); }
-    bool isActive( Action ac ) const;
-    void setMovingEnabled( bool b ) { moving = b; }
-    bool isMovingEnabled() const { return moving; }
-
-    bool isButtonDown() const { return buttonDown; }
-
-    void setExtraHeight( int h ) { extrahei = h; }
-    void setSizeProtection( bool b ) { sizeprotect = b; }
-
-    void doResize();
-    void doMove();
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void activate();
-
-protected:
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent *e );
-    void mouseMoveEvent( TQMouseEvent *e );
-    void keyPressEvent( TQKeyEvent *e );
-
-private:
-    enum MousePosition {
-	Nowhere,
-	TopLeft, BottomRight, BottomLeft, TopRight,
-	Top, Bottom, Left, Right,
-	Center
-    };
-
-    TQWidget *widget;
-    TQWidget *childWidget;
-    TQPoint moveOffset;
-    TQPoint invertedMoveOffset;
-    MousePosition mode;
-    int extrahei;
-    int range;
-    uint buttonDown	    :1;
-    uint moveResizeMode	    :1;
-    uint activeForResize    :1;
-    uint sizeprotect	    :1;
-    uint moving		    :1;
-    uint activeForMove	    :1;
-
-    void setMouseCursor( MousePosition m );
-    bool isMove() const {
-	return moveResizeMode && mode == Center;
-    }
-    bool isResize() const {
-	return moveResizeMode && !isMove();
-    }
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQWidgetResizeHandler( const TQWidgetResizeHandler & );
-    TQWidgetResizeHandler& operator=( const TQWidgetResizeHandler & );
-#endif
-
-};
-
-#endif //TQT_NO_RESIZEHANDLER
-#endif
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.cpp b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 93be95f..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1183 +0,0 @@
-#include "tqtglobaldefines.h"
-
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
-** All rights reserved.
-** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
-**
-** This file is part of the Qt3Support module of the Qt Toolkit.
-**
-** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
-** Commercial Usage
-** Licensees holding valid Qt Commercial licenses may use this file in
-** accordance with the Qt Commercial License Agreement provided with the
-** Software or, alternatively, in accordance with the terms contained in
-** a written agreement between you and Nokia.
-**
-** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
-** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
-** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
-** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
-** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
-** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
-** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
-**
-** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain additional
-** rights.  These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL Exception
-** version 1.1, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this package.
-**
-** GNU General Public License Usage
-** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
-** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
-** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
-** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
-** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
-** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
-**
-** If you have questions regarding the use of this file, please contact
-** Nokia at qt-info@nokia.com.
-** $QT_END_LICENSE$
-**
-****************************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqwidgetstack.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "private/tqlayoutengine_p.h"
-#include "Qt/qapplication.h"
-#include "Qt/qpainter.h"
-
-QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE
-
-using namespace Qt;
-
-class TQWidgetStackPrivate {
-public:
-    class Invisible: public TQWidget
-    {
-    public:
-	    Invisible(TQWidgetStack * parent): TQWidget(parent, "qt_invisible_widgetstack")
-	    {
-                setBackgroundMode(TQt::NoBackground);
-	    }
-	    const char * className() const
-	    {
-	        return "TQWidgetStackPrivate::Invisible";
-	    }
-    protected:
-            void paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)
-            {
-                QPainter(this).eraseRect(rect());
-            }
-    };
-
-    int nextNegativeID;
-    int nextPositiveID;
-};
-
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQWidgetStack
-    \brief The TQWidgetStack class provides a stack of widgets of which
-    only the top widget is user-visible.
-
-    \compat
-
-    The application programmer can move any widget to the top of the
-    stack at any time using raiseWidget(), and add or remove widgets
-    using addWidget() and removeWidget(). It is not sufficient to pass
-    the widget stack as parent to a widget which should be inserted into
-    the widgetstack.
-
-    visibleWidget() is the \e get equivalent of raiseWidget(); it
-    returns a pointer to the widget that is currently at the top of
-    the stack.
-
-    TQWidgetStack also provides the ability to manipulate widgets
-    through application-specified integer IDs. You can also translate
-    from widget pointers to IDs using id() and from IDs to widget
-    pointers using widget(). These numeric IDs are unique (per
-    TQWidgetStack, not globally), but TQWidgetStack does not attach any
-    additional meaning to them.
-
-    The default widget stack is frameless, but you can use the usual
-    TQFrame functions (such as setFrameStyle()) to add a frame.
-
-    TQWidgetStack provides a signal, aboutToShow(), which is emitted
-    just before a managed widget is shown.
-
-    \sa TQTabDialog QTabWidget QTabBar TQFrame
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-  Constructs an empty widget stack.
-
-  The \a parent, \a name and \a f arguments are passed to the TQFrame
-  constructor.
-*/
-TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack(TQWidget * parent, const char *name, WFlags f)
-    : TQFrame(parent, name, f) //## merge constructors in 4.0
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-void TQWidgetStack::init()
-{
-   d = new TQWidgetStackPrivate();
-   d->nextNegativeID = -2;
-   d->nextPositiveID = 0;
-   dict = new TQIntDict<TQWidget>;
-   focusWidgets = 0;
-   topWidget = 0;
-   invisible = 0;
-   invisible = new TQWidgetStackPrivate::Invisible(this);
-   invisible->hide();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQWidgetStack::~TQWidgetStack()
-{
-    delete focusWidgets;
-    delete d;
-    delete dict;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Adds widget \a w to this stack of widgets, with ID \a id.
-
-    If you pass an id \>= 0 this ID is used. If you pass an \a id of
-    -1 (the default), the widgets will be numbered automatically. If
-    you pass -2 a unique negative integer will be generated. No widget
-    has an ID of -1. Returns the ID or -1 on failure (e.g. \a w is 0).
-
-    If you pass an id that is already used, then a unique negative
-    integer will be generated to prevent two widgets having the same
-    id.
-
-    If \a w already exists in the stack the widget will be removed first.
-
-    If \a w is not a child of this TQWidgetStack moves it using
-    reparent().
-*/
-
-int TQWidgetStack::addWidget(TQWidget * w, int id)
-{
-    if (!w || w == invisible || invisible == 0)
-        return -1;
-
-    // prevent duplicates
-    removeWidget(w);
-
-    if (id >= 0 && dict->find(id))
-        id = -2;
-    if (id < -1)
-        id = d->nextNegativeID--;
-    else if (id == -1)
-        id = d->nextPositiveID++;
-    else
-        d->nextPositiveID = qMax(d->nextPositiveID, id + 1);
-        // use id >= 0 as-is
-
-    dict->insert(id, w);
-
-    // preserve existing focus
-    TQWidget * f = TQT_TQWIDGET(w->focusWidget());
-    while(f && f != w)
-        f = TQT_TQWIDGET(f->parentWidget());
-    if (f) {
-        if (!focusWidgets)
-            focusWidgets = new TQPtrDict<TQWidget>(17);
-        focusWidgets->replace(w, TQT_TQWIDGET(w->focusWidget()));
-    }
-
-    w->hide();
-    if (w->QWidget::parent() != this)
-        w->reparent(this, contentsRect().topLeft(), false);
-    w->setGeometry(contentsRect());
-    updateGeometry();
-    return id;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes widget \a w from this stack of widgets. Does not delete \a
-    w. If \a w is the currently visible widget, no other widget is
-    substituted.
-
-    \sa visibleWidget() raiseWidget()
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::removeWidget(TQWidget * w)
-{
-    int i;
-    if (!w || (i = id(w)) == -1)
-        return ;
-
-    dict->take(i);
-    if (w == topWidget)
-        topWidget = 0;
-    if (dict->isEmpty())
-        invisible->hide(); // let background shine through again
-    updateGeometry();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Raises the widget with ID \a id to the top of the widget stack.
-
-    \sa visibleWidget()
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget(int id)
-{
-    if (id == -1)
-        return;
-    TQWidget * w = dict->find(id);
-    if (w)
-        raiseWidget(w);
-}
-
-static bool isChildOf(TQWidget* child, TQWidget *parent)
-{
-    if (!child)
-        return false;
-    for (int i = 0; i < parent->childrenListObject().count(); ++i) {
-        TQObject *obj = parent->childrenListObject().at(i);
-        if (!obj->isWidgetType())
-            continue;
-        TQWidget *widget = TQT_TQWIDGET((QWidget*)obj);
-        if (!widget->isWindow())
-            continue;
-        if (widget == child || isChildOf(child, widget))
-            return true;
-    }
-    return false;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Raises widget \a w to the top of the widget stack.
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget(TQWidget *w)
-{
-    if (!w || w == invisible || w->QWidget::parent() != this || w == topWidget)
-        return;
-
-    if (id(w) == -1)
-        addWidget(w);
-    if (!isVisible()) {
-        topWidget = w;
-        return;
-    }
-
-    if (w->maximumSize().width() < invisible->width()
-        || w->maximumSize().height() < invisible->height())
-        invisible->setBackgroundMode(backgroundMode());
-    else if (invisible->backgroundMode() != TQt::NoBackground)
-        invisible->setBackgroundMode(TQt::NoBackground);
-
-    if (invisible->isHidden()) {
-        invisible->setGeometry(contentsRect());
-        invisible->lower();
-        invisible->show();
-        QApplication::sendPostedEvents(invisible, QEvent::ShowWindowRequest);
-    }
-
-    // try to move focus onto the incoming widget if focus
-    // was somewhere on the outgoing widget.
-    if (topWidget) {
-        TQWidget * fw = TQT_TQWIDGET(window()->focusWidget());
-        if (topWidget->isAncestorOf(fw)) { // focus was on old page
-            // look for the best focus widget we can find
-            TQWidget *p = TQT_TQWIDGET(w->focusWidget());
-            if (!p) {
-                // second best == first child widget in the focus chain
-                TQWidget *i = fw;
-                while ((i = TQT_TQWIDGET(i->nextInFocusChain())) != fw) {
-                    if (((i->focusPolicy() & Qt::TabFocus) == Qt::TabFocus)
-                        && !i->focusProxy() && i->isVisibleTo(w) && i->isEnabled()
-                        && w->isAncestorOf(i)) {
-                        p = i;
-                        break;
-                    }
-                }
-            }
-            if (p)
-                p->setFocus();
-        } else {
-            // the focus wasn't on the old page, so we have to ensure focus doesn't go to
-            // the widget in the page that last had focus when we show the page again.
-            TQWidget *oldfw = TQT_TQWIDGET(topWidget->focusWidget());
-            if (oldfw)
-                oldfw->clearFocus();
-        }
-    }
-
-    if (isVisible()) {
-        emit aboutToShow(w);
-        int i = id(w);
-        if (i != -1)
-            emit aboutToShow(i);
-    }
-
-    topWidget = w;
-
-    for (int i = 0; i < childrenListObject().count(); ++i) {
-        TQObject * o = childrenListObject().at(i);
-        if (o->isWidgetType() && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) != TQT_BASE_OBJECT(w) && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) != TQT_BASE_OBJECT(invisible))
-            TQT_TQWIDGET((QWidget*)o)->hide();
-    }
-
-    w->setGeometry(invisible->geometry());
-    w->show();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::frameChanged()
-{
-    TQFrame::frameChanged();
-    setChildGeometries();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \internal
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::setFrameRect(const QRect & r)
-{
-    // ### this function used to be virtual in QFrame in Qt 3; it is no longer virtual in Qt 4
-    TQFrame::setFrameRect(r);
-    setChildGeometries();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Fixes up the children's geometries.
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::setChildGeometries()
-{
-    invisible->setGeometry(contentsRect());
-    if (topWidget)
-        topWidget->setGeometry(invisible->geometry());
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQWidgetStack::setVisible(bool visible)
-{
-    if (visible) {
-        //  Reimplemented in order to set the children's geometries
-        //  appropriately and to pick the first widget as d->topWidget if no
-        //  topwidget was defined
-        if (!isVisible() && !childrenListObject().isEmpty()) {
-            for (int i = 0; i < childrenListObject().count(); ++i) {
-                TQObject * o = childrenListObject().at(i);
-                if (o->isWidgetType()) {
-                    if (!topWidget && TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) != TQT_BASE_OBJECT(invisible))
-                        topWidget = TQT_TQWIDGET((QWidget*)o);
-                    if (TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(topWidget))
-                        TQT_TQWIDGET((QWidget*)o)->show();
-                    else
-                        TQT_TQWIDGET((QWidget*)o)->hide();
-                }
-            }
-            setChildGeometries();
-        }
-    }
-    TQFrame::setVisible(visible);
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the widget with ID \a id. Returns 0 if this widget stack
-    does not manage a widget with ID \a id.
-
-    \sa id() addWidget()
-*/
-
-TQWidget * TQWidgetStack::widget(int id) const
-{
-    return id != -1 ? dict->find(id) : 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the ID of the \a widget. Returns -1 if \a widget is 0 or
-    is not being managed by this widget stack.
-
-    \sa widget() addWidget()
-*/
-
-int TQWidgetStack::id(TQWidget * widget) const
-{
-    if (!widget)
-        return -1;
-
-    TQIntDictIterator<TQWidget> it(*dict);
-    while (it.current() && it.current() != widget)
-        ++it;
-    return it.current() == widget ? it.currentKey() : -1;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the currently visible widget (the one at the top of the
-    stack), or 0 if nothing is currently being shown.
-
-    \sa aboutToShow() id() raiseWidget()
-*/
-
-TQWidget * TQWidgetStack::visibleWidget() const
-{
-    return topWidget;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQWidgetStack::aboutToShow(int id)
-
-    This signal is emitted just before a managed widget is shown if
-    that managed widget has an ID != -1. The \a id parameter is the numeric
-    ID of the widget.
-
-    If you call visibleWidget() in a slot connected to aboutToShow(),
-    the widget it returns is the one that is currently visible, not
-    the one that is about to be shown.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQWidgetStack::aboutToShow(QWidget *widget)
-
-    \overload
-
-    This signal is emitted just before a managed widget is shown. The
-    argument is a pointer to the \a widget.
-
-    If you call visibleWidget() in a slot connected to aboutToShow(),
-    the widget returned is the one that is currently visible, not the
-    one that is about to be shown.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::resizeEvent(TQResizeEvent * e)
-{
-    TQFrame::resizeEvent(e);
-    setChildGeometries();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQWidgetStack::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-
-    TQSize size(0, 0);
-
-    TQIntDictIterator<TQWidget> it(*dict);
-    TQWidget *w;
-
-    while ((w = it.current()) != 0) {
-        ++it;
-        TQSize sh = w->tqsizeHint();
-        if (w->tqsizePolicy().horData() == QSizePolicy::Ignored)
-            sh.rwidth() = 0;
-        if (w->tqsizePolicy().verData() == QSizePolicy::Ignored)
-            sh.rheight() = 0;
-#ifndef QT_NO_LAYOUT
-        size = size.expandedTo(sh).expandedTo(tqSmartMinSize(w));
-#endif
-    }
-    if (size.isNull())
-        size = TQSize(128, 64);
-    size += TQSize(2*frameWidth(), 2*frameWidth());
-    return size;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQWidgetStack::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-
-    TQSize size(0, 0);
-
-    TQIntDictIterator<TQWidget> it(*dict);
-    TQWidget *w;
-
-    while ((w = it.current()) != 0) {
-        ++it;
-        TQSize sh = w->tqminimumSizeHint();
-        if (w->tqsizePolicy().horData() == QSizePolicy::Ignored)
-            sh.rwidth() = 0;
-        if (w->tqsizePolicy().verData() == QSizePolicy::Ignored)
-            sh.rheight() = 0;
-#ifndef QT_NO_LAYOUT
-        size = size.expandedTo(sh).expandedTo(w->minimumSize());
-#endif
-    }
-    if (size.isNull())
-        size = TQSize(64, 32);
-    size += TQSize(2*frameWidth(), 2*frameWidth());
-    return size;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQWidgetStack::childEvent(TQChildEvent *e)
-{
-    if (e->child()->isWidgetType() && e->removed())
-        removeWidget((TQWidget *) e->child());
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-bool TQWidgetStack::event(TQEvent* e)
-{
-    if (e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutRequest || e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutHint )
-        updateGeometry(); // propgate layout hints to parent
-    return TQFrame::event(e);
-}
-
-QT_END_NAMESPACE
-
-#else // USE_QT4
-
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Implementation of TQWidgetStack class
-**
-** Created : 980128
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#include "tqwidgetstack.h"
-#include "tqlayout.h"
-#include "../kernel/tqlayoutengine_p.h"
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGETSTACK
-
-#include "tqobjectlist.h"
-#include "tqfocusdata.h"
-#include "tqbutton.h"
-#include "tqbuttongroup.h"
-
-#include "tqapplication.h"
-
-class TQWidgetStackPrivate {
-public:
-    class Invisible: public TQWidget
-    {
-    public:
-	Invisible( TQWidgetStack * parent ): TQWidget( parent, "qt_invisible_widgetstack" )
-	{
-	    setBackgroundMode( TQt::NoBackground );
-	}
-	const char * className() const
-	{
-	    return "TQWidgetStackPrivate::Invisible";
-	}
-    };
-};
-
-
-#if (TQT_VERSION-0 >= 0x040000)
-#if defined(TQ_CC_GNU)
-#warning "Remove TQWidgetStackEventFilter"
-#endif
-#endif
-class TQWidgetStackEventFilter : public TQObject
-{
-    /* For binary compatibility, since we cannot implement virtual
-       functions and rely on them being called. This is what we should
-       have
-
-	bool TQWidgetStack::event( TQEvent* e )
-	{
-	    if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutHint )
-		updateGeometry(); // propgate tqlayout hints to parent
-	    return TQFrame::event( e );
-	}
-    */
-public:
-
-    TQWidgetStackEventFilter( TQObject *parent = 0, const char * name = 0 )
-	: TQObject( parent, name ) {}
-    bool eventFilter( TQObject *o, TQEvent * e ) {
-	if ( e->type() == TQEvent::LayoutHint && o->isWidgetType() )
-	    ((TQWidget*)o)->updateGeometry();
-	return FALSE;
-    }
-};
-
-
-/*!
-    \class TQWidgetStack
-    \brief The TQWidgetStack class provides a stack of widgets of which
-    only the top widget is user-visible.
-
-    \ingroup organizers
-    \mainclass
-
-    The application programmer can move any widget to the top of the
-    stack at any time using raiseWidget(), and add or remove widgets
-    using addWidget() and removeWidget(). It is not sufficient to pass
-    the widget stack as parent to a widget which should be inserted into
-    the widgetstack.
-
-    visibleWidget() is the \e get equivalent of raiseWidget(); it
-    returns a pointer to the widget that is currently at the top of
-    the stack.
-
-    TQWidgetStack also provides the ability to manipulate widgets
-    through application-specified integer IDs. You can also translate
-    from widget pointers to IDs using id() and from IDs to widget
-    pointers using widget(). These numeric IDs are unique (per
-    TQWidgetStack, not globally), but TQWidgetStack does not attach any
-    additional meaning to them.
-
-    The default widget stack is frameless, but you can use the usual
-    TQFrame functions (such as setFrameStyle()) to add a frame.
-
-    TQWidgetStack provides a signal, aboutToShow(), which is emitted
-    just before a managed widget is shown.
-
-    \sa TQTabDialog TQTabBar TQFrame
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    Constructs an empty widget stack.
-
-    The \a parent and \a name arguments are passed to the TQFrame
-    constructor.
-*/
-
-TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack( TQWidget * parent, const char *name )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name )
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-/*!
-  Constructs an empty widget stack.
-
-  The \a parent, \a name and \a f arguments are passed to the TQFrame
-  constructor.
-*/
-TQWidgetStack::TQWidgetStack( TQWidget * parent, const char *name, WFlags f )
-    : TQFrame( parent, name, f ) //## merge constructors in 4.0
-{
-    init();
-}
-
-void TQWidgetStack::init()
-{
-   d = 0;
-   TQWidgetStackEventFilter *ef = new TQWidgetStackEventFilter( TQT_TQOBJECT(this) );
-   installEventFilter( ef );
-   dict = new TQIntDict<TQWidget>;
-   tqfocusWidgets = 0;
-   topWidget = 0;
-   invisible = new TQWidgetStackPrivate::Invisible( this );
-   invisible->hide();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Destroys the object and frees any allocated resources.
-*/
-
-TQWidgetStack::~TQWidgetStack()
-{
-    delete tqfocusWidgets;
-    delete d;
-    delete dict;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Adds widget \a w to this stack of widgets, with ID \a id.
-
-    If you pass an id \>= 0 this ID is used. If you pass an \a id of
-    -1 (the default), the widgets will be numbered automatically. If
-    you pass -2 a unique negative integer will be generated. No widget
-    has an ID of -1. Returns the ID or -1 on failure (e.g. \a w is 0).
-
-    If you pass an id that is already used, then a unique negative
-    integer will be generated to prevent two widgets having the same
-    id.
-
-    If \a w already exists in the stack the widget will be removed first.
-
-    If \a w is not a child of this TQWidgetStack moves it using
-    reparent().
-*/
-
-int TQWidgetStack::addWidget( TQWidget * w, int id )
-{
-    static int nseq_no = -2;
-    static int pseq_no = 0;
-
-    if ( !w || w == invisible )
-	return -1;
-
-    // prevent duplicates
-    removeWidget( w );
-
-    if ( id >= 0 && dict->find( id ) )
-	id = -2;
-    if ( id < -1 )
-	id = nseq_no--;
-    else if ( id == -1 )
-	id = pseq_no++;
-    else
-	pseq_no = TQMAX(pseq_no, id + 1);
-	// use id >= 0 as-is
-
-    dict->insert( id, w );
-
-    // preserve existing focus
-    TQWidget * f = w->tqfocusWidget();
-    while( f && f != w )
-	f = f->parentWidget();
-    if ( f ) {
-	if ( !tqfocusWidgets )
-	    tqfocusWidgets = new TQPtrDict<TQWidget>( 17 );
-	tqfocusWidgets->replace( w, w->tqfocusWidget() );
-    }
-
-    w->hide();
-    if ( w->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) )
-	w->reparent( this, contentsRect().topLeft(), FALSE );
-    w->setGeometry( contentsRect() );
-    updateGeometry();
-    return id;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Removes widget \a w from this stack of widgets. Does not delete \a
-    w. If \a w is the currently visible widget, no other widget is
-    substituted.
-
-    \sa visibleWidget() raiseWidget()
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::removeWidget( TQWidget * w )
-{
-    if ( !w )
-	return;
-    int i = id( w );
-    if ( i != -1 )
-	dict->take( i );
-
-    if ( w == topWidget )
-	topWidget = 0;
-    if ( dict->isEmpty() )
-	invisible->hide(); // let background shine through again
-    updateGeometry();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Raises the widget with ID \a id to the top of the widget stack.
-
-    \sa visibleWidget()
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget( int id )
-{
-    if ( id == -1 )
-	return;
-    TQWidget * w = dict->find( id );
-    if ( w )
-	raiseWidget( w );
-}
-
-static bool isChildOf( TQWidget* child, TQWidget *parent )
-{
-    if ( !child || !parent->childrenListObject().isEmpty() )
-	return FALSE;
-    TQObjectListIt it(parent->childrenListObject());
-    TQObject *obj;
-    while ( (obj = it.current()) ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( !obj->isWidgetType() || ((TQWidget *)obj)->isTopLevel() )
-	    continue;
-	TQWidget *widget = (TQWidget *)obj;
-	if ( widget == child || isChildOf( child, widget ) )
-	    return TRUE;
-    }
-    return FALSE;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \overload
-
-    Raises widget \a w to the top of the widget stack.
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::raiseWidget( TQWidget *w )
-{
-    if ( !w || w == invisible || w->parent() != TQT_TQOBJECT(this) || w == topWidget )
-	return;
-
-    if ( id(w) == -1 )
-	addWidget( w );
-    if ( !isVisible() ) {
-	topWidget = w;
-	return;
-    }
-
-    if (w->tqmaximumSize().width() < invisible->width()
-        || w->tqmaximumSize().height() < invisible->height())
-        invisible->setBackgroundMode(backgroundMode());
-    else if (invisible->backgroundMode() != TQt::NoBackground)
-        invisible->setBackgroundMode(TQt::NoBackground);
-
-    if ( invisible->isHidden() ) {
-	invisible->setGeometry( contentsRect() );
-	invisible->lower();
-	invisible->show();
-	TQApplication::sendPostedEvents( invisible, TQEvent::ShowWindowRequest );
-    }
-
-    // try to move focus onto the incoming widget if focus
-    // was somewhere on the outgoing widget.
-    if ( topWidget ) {
-	TQWidget * fw = tqfocusWidget();
-	TQWidget* p = fw;
-	while ( p && p != topWidget )
-	    p = p->parentWidget();
-	if ( p == topWidget ) { // focus was on old page
-	    if ( !tqfocusWidgets )
-		tqfocusWidgets = new TQPtrDict<TQWidget>( 17 );
-	    tqfocusWidgets->replace( topWidget, fw );
-	    fw->clearFocus();
-	    // look for the best focus widget we can find
-	    // best == what we had (which may be deleted)
-	    fw = tqfocusWidgets->take( w );
-	    if ( isChildOf( fw, w ) ) {
-		fw->setFocus();
-	    } else {
-		// second best == first child widget in the focus chain
-		TQFocusData *f = focusData();
-		TQWidget* home = f->home();
-		TQWidget *i = home;
-		do {
-		    if ( ( ( i->focusPolicy() & Qt::TabFocus ) == Qt::TabFocus )
-			 && !i->focusProxy() && i->isVisibleTo(w) && i->isEnabled() ) {
-			p = i;
-			while ( p && p != w )
-			    p = p->parentWidget();
-			if ( p == w ) {
-			    i->setFocus();
-			    break;
-			}
-		    }
-		    i = f->next();
-		} while( i != home );
-	    }
-	}
-    }
-
-    if ( isVisible() ) {
-	emit aboutToShow( w );
-	int i = id( w );
-	if ( i != -1 )
-	    emit aboutToShow( i );
-    }
-
-    topWidget = w;
-
-    TQObjectListIt it( childrenListObject() );
-    TQObject * o;
-
-    while( (o=it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	if ( o->isWidgetType() && o != TQT_TQOBJECT(w) && o != TQT_TQOBJECT(invisible) )
-	    ((TQWidget *)o)->hide();
-    }
-
-    w->setGeometry( invisible->tqgeometry() );
-    w->show();
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::frameChanged()
-{
-    TQFrame::frameChanged();
-    setChildGeometries();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::setFrameRect( const TQRect & r )
-{
-    TQFrame::setFrameRect( r );
-    setChildGeometries();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Fixes up the tqchildren's geometries.
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::setChildGeometries()
-{
-    invisible->setGeometry( contentsRect() );
-    if ( topWidget )
-	topWidget->setGeometry( invisible->tqgeometry() );
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQWidgetStack::show()
-{
-    //  Reimplemented in order to set the tqchildren's geometries
-    //  appropriately and to pick the first widget as topWidget if no
-    //  topwidget was defined
-    if ( !isVisible() && !childrenListObject().isEmpty() ) {
-	TQObjectListIt it( childrenListObject() );
-	TQObject * o;
-
-	while( (o=it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	    ++it;
-	    if ( o->isWidgetType() ) {
-		if ( !topWidget && o != TQT_TQOBJECT(invisible) )
-		    topWidget = (TQWidget*)o;
-		if ( TQT_BASE_OBJECT(o) == TQT_BASE_OBJECT(topWidget) )
-		    ((TQWidget *)o)->show();
-		else
-		    ((TQWidget *)o)->hide();
-	    }
-	}
-	setChildGeometries();
-    }
-    TQFrame::show();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the widget with ID \a id. Returns 0 if this widget stack
-    does not manage a widget with ID \a id.
-
-    \sa id() addWidget()
-*/
-
-TQWidget * TQWidgetStack::widget( int id ) const
-{
-    return id != -1 ? dict->find( id ) : 0;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the ID of the \a widget. Returns -1 if \a widget is 0 or
-    is not being managed by this widget stack.
-
-    \sa widget() addWidget()
-*/
-
-int TQWidgetStack::id( TQWidget * widget ) const
-{
-    if ( !widget )
-	return -1;
-
-    TQIntDictIterator<TQWidget> it( *dict );
-    while ( it.current() && it.current() != widget )
-	++it;
-    return it.current() == widget ? it.currentKey() : -1;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    Returns the currently visible widget (the one at the top of the
-    stack), or 0 if nothing is currently being shown.
-
-    \sa aboutToShow() id() raiseWidget()
-*/
-
-TQWidget * TQWidgetStack::visibleWidget() const
-{
-    return topWidget;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQWidgetStack::aboutToShow( int )
-
-    This signal is emitted just before a managed widget is shown if
-    that managed widget has an ID != -1. The argument is the numeric
-    ID of the widget.
-
-    If you call visibleWidget() in a slot connected to aboutToShow(),
-    the widget it returns is the one that is currently visible, not
-    the one that is about to be shown.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \fn void TQWidgetStack::aboutToShow( TQWidget * )
-
-    \overload
-
-    This signal is emitted just before a managed widget is shown. The
-    argument is a pointer to the widget.
-
-    If you call visibleWidget() in a slot connected to aboutToShow(),
-    the widget returned is the one that is currently visible, not the
-    one that is about to be shown.
-*/
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-void TQWidgetStack::resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * e )
-{
-    TQFrame::resizeEvent( e );
-    setChildGeometries();
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-
-TQSize TQWidgetStack::tqsizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-
-    TQSize size( 0, 0 );
-
-    TQIntDictIterator<TQWidget> it( *dict );
-    TQWidget *w;
-
-    while ( (w = it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	TQSize sh = w->tqsizeHint();
-	if ( w->tqsizePolicy().horData() == TQSizePolicy::Ignored )
-	    sh.rwidth() = 0;
-	if ( w->tqsizePolicy().verData() == TQSizePolicy::Ignored )
-	    sh.rheight() = 0;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LAYOUT
-	size = size.expandedTo( sh ).expandedTo( tqSmartMinSize(w) );
-#endif
-    }
-    if ( size.isNull() )
-	size = TQSize( 128, 64 );
-    size += TQSize( 2*frameWidth(), 2*frameWidth() );
-    return size;
-}
-
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-TQSize TQWidgetStack::tqminimumSizeHint() const
-{
-    constPolish();
-
-    TQSize size( 0, 0 );
-
-    TQIntDictIterator<TQWidget> it( *dict );
-    TQWidget *w;
-
-    while ( (w = it.current()) != 0 ) {
-	++it;
-	TQSize sh = w->tqminimumSizeHint();
-	if ( w->tqsizePolicy().horData() == TQSizePolicy::Ignored )
-	    sh.rwidth() = 0;
-	if ( w->tqsizePolicy().verData() == TQSizePolicy::Ignored )
-	    sh.rheight() = 0;
-#ifndef TQT_NO_LAYOUT
-	size = size.expandedTo( sh ).expandedTo( w->tqminimumSize() );
-#endif
-    }
-    if ( size.isNull() )
-	size = TQSize( 64, 32 );
-    size += TQSize( 2*frameWidth(), 2*frameWidth() );
-    return size;
-}
-
-/*!
-    \reimp
-*/
-void TQWidgetStack::childEvent( TQChildEvent * e)
-{
-    if ( e->child()->isWidgetType() && e->removed() )
-	removeWidget( (TQWidget*) e->child() );
-}
-#endif
-
-#endif // USE_QT4
diff --git a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.h b/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.h
deleted file mode 100644
index ce0347f..0000000
--- a/tqtinterface/qt4/src/widgets/tqwidgetstack.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,235 +0,0 @@
-#include "tqtglobaldefines.h"
-
-#ifdef USE_QT4
-
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
-** All rights reserved.
-** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
-**
-** This file is part of the Qt3Support module of the Qt Toolkit.
-**
-** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
-** Commercial Usage
-** Licensees holding valid Qt Commercial licenses may use this file in
-** accordance with the Qt Commercial License Agreement provided with the
-** Software or, alternatively, in accordance with the terms contained in
-** a written agreement between you and Nokia.
-**
-** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
-** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
-** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
-** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
-** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
-** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
-** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
-**
-** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain additional
-** rights.  These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL Exception
-** version 1.1, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this package.
-**
-** GNU General Public License Usage
-** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
-** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
-** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
-** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
-** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
-** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
-**
-** If you have questions regarding the use of this file, please contact
-** Nokia at qt-info@nokia.com.
-** $QT_END_LICENSE$
-**
-****************************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQWIDGETSTACK_H
-#define TQWIDGETSTACK_H
-
-#include <tqframe.h>
-#include <tqintdict.h>
-#include <tqptrdict.h>
-
-QT_BEGIN_HEADER
-
-QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE
-
-QT_MODULE(Qt3SupportLight)
-
-class TQWidgetStackPrivate;
-
-
-class Q_COMPAT_EXPORT TQWidgetStack: public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQWidgetStack(TQWidget* parent, const char* name=0, WFlags f=0);
-
-    ~TQWidgetStack();
-
-    int addWidget(TQWidget *, int = -1);
-    void removeWidget(TQWidget *);
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-    void setVisible(bool visible);
-
-    TQWidget * widget(int) const;
-    int id(TQWidget *) const;
-
-    TQWidget * visibleWidget() const;
-
-    void setFrameRect(const QRect &);
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void aboutToShow(int);
-    void aboutToShow(TQWidget *);
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void raiseWidget(int);
-    void raiseWidget(TQWidget *);
-
-protected:
-    void frameChanged();
-    void resizeEvent(TQResizeEvent *);
-    bool event(TQEvent* e);
-
-    virtual void setChildGeometries();
-    void childEvent(TQChildEvent *);
-
-private:
-    void init();
-
-    TQWidgetStackPrivate * d;
-    TQIntDict<TQWidget> * dict;
-    TQPtrDict<TQWidget> * focusWidgets;
-    TQWidget * topWidget;
-    TQWidget * invisible;
-
-    Q_DISABLE_COPY(TQWidgetStack)
-};
-
-QT_END_NAMESPACE
-
-QT_END_HEADER
-
-#endif // TQWIDGETSTACK_H
-
-#else // USE_QT4
-
-/****************************************************************************
-**
-** Definition of TQWidgetStack class
-**
-** Created : 980306
-**
-** Copyright (C) 2010 Timothy Pearson and (C) 1992-2008 Trolltech ASA.
-**
-** This file is part of the widgets module of the TQt GUI Toolkit.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the GNU General
-** Public License versions 2.0 or 3.0 as published by the Free
-** Software Foundation and appearing in the files LICENSE.GPL2
-** and LICENSE.GPL3 included in the packaging of this file.
-** Alternatively you may (at your option) use any later version
-** of the GNU General Public License if such license has been
-** publicly approved by Trolltech ASA (or its successors, if any)
-** and the KDE Free TQt Foundation.
-**
-** Please review the following information to ensure GNU General
-** Public Licensing requirements will be met:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/opensource/.
-** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
-** review the following information:
-** http://trolltech.com/products/qt/licenses/licensing/licensingoverview
-** or contact the sales department at sales@trolltech.com.
-**
-** This file may be used under the terms of the Q Public License as
-** defined by Trolltech ASA and appearing in the file LICENSE.TQPL
-** included in the packaging of this file.  Licensees holding valid TQt
-** Commercial licenses may use this file in accordance with the TQt
-** Commercial License Agreement provided with the Software.
-**
-** This file is provided "AS IS" with NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
-** INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
-** A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Trolltech reserves all rights not granted
-** herein.
-**
-**********************************************************************/
-
-#ifndef TQWIDGETSTACK_H
-#define TQWIDGETSTACK_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_H
-#include "tqframe.h"
-#include "tqintdict.h"
-#include "tqptrdict.h"
-#endif // TQT_H
-
-#ifndef TQT_NO_WIDGETSTACK
-
-
-class TQWidgetStackPrivate;
-
-
-class TQ_EXPORT TQWidgetStack: public TQFrame
-{
-    Q_OBJECT
-    TQ_OBJECT
-public:
-    TQWidgetStack( TQWidget* parent=0, const char* name=0 );
-    TQWidgetStack( TQWidget* parent, const char* name, WFlags f);
-
-    ~TQWidgetStack();
-
-    int addWidget( TQWidget *, int = -1 );
-    void removeWidget( TQWidget * );
-
-    TQSize tqsizeHint() const;
-    TQSize tqminimumSizeHint() const;
-    void show();
-
-    TQWidget * widget( int ) const;
-    int id( TQWidget * ) const;
-
-    TQWidget * visibleWidget() const;
-
-    void setFrameRect( const TQRect & );
-
-Q_SIGNALS:
-    void aboutToShow( int );
-    void aboutToShow( TQWidget * );
-
-public Q_SLOTS:
-    void raiseWidget( int );
-    void raiseWidget( TQWidget * );
-
-protected:
-    void frameChanged();
-    void resizeEvent( TQResizeEvent * );
-
-    virtual void setChildGeometries();
-    void childEvent( TQChildEvent * );
-
-private:
-    void init();
-
-    TQWidgetStackPrivate * d;
-    TQIntDict<TQWidget> * dict;
-    TQPtrDict<TQWidget> * tqfocusWidgets;
-    TQWidget * topWidget;
-    TQWidget * invisible;
-
-private:	// Disabled copy constructor and operator=
-#if defined(TQ_DISABLE_COPY)
-    TQWidgetStack( const TQWidgetStack & );
-    TQWidgetStack& operator=( const TQWidgetStack & );
-#endif
-};
-
-#endif // TQT_NO_WIDGETSTACK
-
-#endif // TQWIDGETSTACK_H
-
-#endif // USE_QT4